Nissan - Titan - Workshop Manual - 2005 - 2005

B ENGINE A ACC SECTION ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM C D E CONTENTS ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM ...................... 2 Removal and Installation .......................................... 2 ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY ........................................................... 2 NON-ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY ........................................................... 3 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ........ 5 Accelerator Control ................................................... 5 ACCELERATOR PEDAL STROKE AND TRAVEL ................................................................. 5 F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 ACC-1 2005 Titan ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM Removal and Installation PFP:18005 EBS00L3P ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY Adjustable Accelerator Pedal LBIA0379E 1. Adjustable accelerator pedal assem- 2. bly 4. Adjustable brake pedal cable (part of the accelerator pedal assembly) Adjustable accelerator pedal bracket (part of the accelerator pedal assembly) 3. Adjustable pedal electric motor (part of the accelerator pedal assembly) CAUTION: ● Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism. ● Before removal and installation, the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the frontmost position. This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals. ● Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. ● Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. ● Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. ● Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Removal 1. 2. 3. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the frontmost position. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable brake pedal. ● Unlock, then pull the adjustable brake pedal cable to disconnect it from the adjustable brake pedal. Revision: October 2004 ACC-2 2005 Titan ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor memory electrical connector, if equipped. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. Remove the two upper and one lower accelerator pedal nuts. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly. A ACC C LBIA0380E D Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Inspection After Installation ● E Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified ranges. Adjustable accelerator pedal – total pedal applied stroke Adjustable accelerator pedal – total pedal adjustment travel ● ● : 48.3 mm (1.90 in) : 73.2 mm (2.88 in) F Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original released position. Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to EC-588, "DTC P2138 APP SENSOR" . CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected, perform ″Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning″. Refer to EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . G H I NON-ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY Non-Adjustable Accelerator Pedal J K L M LBIA0404E Revision: October 2004 ACC-3 2005 Titan ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM 1. Non-adjustable accelerator pedal A/T cable attachment bracket (part of the accelerator pedal assembly) 2. Non-adjustable accelerator pedal position sensor (part of the accelerator pedal assembly) 3. Non-adjustable accelerator pedal assembly CAUTION: ● Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly. ● Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket. ● Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling. ● Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water. Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. Remove the two upper and one lower accelerator pedal nuts. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Inspection After Installation ● Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified range. Non-adjustable accelerator pedal – total pedal applied stroke ● ● : 48 mm (1.89 in) Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original released position. Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to EC-588, "DTC P2138 APP SENSOR" . CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected, perform ″Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning″. Refer to EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Revision: October 2004 ACC-4 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Accelerator Control PFP:00030 A EBS00L3Q ACCELERATOR PEDAL STROKE AND TRAVEL Unit: mm (in) Non-adjustable accelerator pedal - total pedal applied stroke 48 (1.89) Adjustable accelerator pedal - total pedal applied stroke 48.3 (1.90) Adjustable accelerator pedal - total pedal adjustment travel 73.2 (2.88) ACC C D E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 ACC-5 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Revision: October 2004 ACC-6 2005 Titan K ELECTRICAL A B SECTION AUTO CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM C D E CONTENTS F ASCD AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)..... 2 Description ............................................................... 2 G H I J ACS L M Revision: October 2004 ACS-1 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) [ASCD] AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) Description PFP:18930 EKS00AR3 Regarding the information for ASCD system, refer to EC-29, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" . Revision: October 2004 ACS-2 2005 Titan I BODY A B SECTION ADJUSTABLE PEDAL C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2 Trouble Diagnosis Precaution .................................. 2 ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM ................................ 3 Automatic Drive Positioner Interlocking Adjustable Pedal ........................................................................ 3 Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model)..... 4 Removal and Installation .......................................... 6 F G H AP J K L M Revision: October 2004 AP-1 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EIS004GT The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Trouble Diagnosis Precaution EIS004GU When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams". ● PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT". When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-11, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES". ● GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident". Check for any service bulletins before servicing the vehicle. Revision: October 2004 AP-2 2005 Titan ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM Automatic Drive Positioner Interlocking Adjustable Pedal PFP:98800 A EIS004GV Refer to SE-11, "AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER" . B C D E F G H AP J K L M Revision: October 2004 AP-3 2005 Titan ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM Adjustable Pedal (Only Manual Operation Model) EIS004GW WIRING DIAGRAM — PEDAL — WIWA0721E Revision: October 2004 AP-4 2005 Titan ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM A B C D E F G H AP J K L M WIWA0722E Revision: October 2004 AP-5 2005 Titan ADJUSTABLE PEDAL SYSTEM Removal and Installation EIS004GY Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" and BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" . Revision: October 2004 AP-6 2005 Titan C TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE A B SECTION AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION AT D E CONTENTS INDEX FOR DTC ........................................................ 5 Alphabetical Index .................................................... 5 DTC No. Index ......................................................... 6 PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 7 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 7 PrecautionsforOnBoardDiagnostic(OBD)System of A/T and Engine .................................................... 7 Precautions .............................................................. 8 Service Notice or Precautions .................................. 9 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 9 PREPARATION ......................................................... 10 Special Service Tools ............................................. 10 Commercial Service Tools .......................................11 A/T FLUID ................................................................. 12 Changing A/T Fluid ................................................ 12 Checking A/T Fluid ................................................. 12 A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning ...................................... 12 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM .......................................... 15 Cross-Sectional View (2WD models) ..................... 15 Cross-Sectional View (4WD models) ..................... 16 Shift Mechanism ..................................................... 17 TCM Function ......................................................... 30 CAN Communication .............................................. 32 Input/Output Signal of TCM .................................... 32 Line Pressure Control ............................................ 33 Shift Control ........................................................... 34 Lock-Up Control ..................................................... 35 Engine Brake Control ............................................. 37 Control Valve .......................................................... 37 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ............ 39 Introduction ............................................................ 39 OBD-II Function for A/T System ............................. 39 One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II ............ 39 OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ................. 39 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ........................... 42 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 43 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................ 43 Fail-Safe ................................................................. 43 Revision: October 2004 How To Perform Trouble Diagnosis For Quick and Accurate Repair ...................................................... 45 A/T Electrical Parts Location .................................. 50 Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 51 Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis .................... 52 Check Before Engine is Started .............................. 56 Check at Idle ........................................................... 56 Cruise Test - Part 1 ................................................. 57 Cruise Test - Part 2 ................................................. 59 Cruise Test - Part 3 ................................................. 60 Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears ...................... 62 Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Complete Lock-up .................................................. 62 Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Slip Lock-up ............................................................ 62 Symptom Chart ....................................................... 63 TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values ........... 84 CONSULT-II FUNCTION (A/T) ............................... 85 DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE .............. 97 Description .............................................................. 97 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................... 97 Possible Cause ....................................................... 97 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................. 97 Wiring Diagram — AT — CAN ................................ 98 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................. 99 DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................... 100 Description ............................................................ 100 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 100 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 100 Possible Cause ..................................................... 100 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 100 Wiring Diagram — AT — STSIG .......................... 101 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 102 DTC P0700 TCM ..................................................... 104 Description ............................................................ 104 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 104 Possible Cause ..................................................... 104 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 104 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 104 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH. 105 AT-1 2005 Titan F G H I J K L M Description ............................................................ 105 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 105 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 105 Possible Cause ..................................................... 105 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 105 Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW ....................... 106 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 107 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) ............................................... 109 Description ............................................................ 109 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 109 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 109 Possible Cause ..................................................... 109 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 109 Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T ..........................111 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 112 DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL ................... 114 Description ............................................................ 114 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 114 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 114 Possible Cause ..................................................... 114 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 114 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 114 DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE ................................................. 116 Description ............................................................ 116 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 116 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 116 Possible Cause ..................................................... 116 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 116 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 117 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP). 118 Description ............................................................ 118 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 118 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 118 Possible Cause ..................................................... 118 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 118 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 119 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE. 120 Description ............................................................ 120 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 120 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 120 Possible Cause ..................................................... 120 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 120 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 121 DTC P1702 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (RAM) ...................................................................... 122 Description ............................................................ 122 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 122 Possible Cause ..................................................... 122 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 122 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 122 DTC P1703 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (ROM) ...................................................................... 123 Description ............................................................ 123 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 123 Possible Cause ..................................................... 123 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 123 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 123 Revision: October 2004 DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR ........ 124 Description ............................................................ 124 CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 124 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 124 Possible Cause ..................................................... 124 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 124 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 125 DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT .................................................................. 127 Description ............................................................ 127 CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 127 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 127 Possible Cause ..................................................... 127 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 127 Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS ............................... 128 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 129 Component Inspection .......................................... 131 DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR .... 132 Description ............................................................ 132 CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 132 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 132 Possible Cause ..................................................... 132 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 132 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 133 DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR ....... 134 Description ............................................................ 134 CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 134 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 134 Possible Cause ..................................................... 134 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 134 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 135 DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK ................................. 136 Description ............................................................ 136 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 136 Possible Cause ..................................................... 136 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 136 Judgement of A/T Interlock ................................... 136 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 137 DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING ............... 139 Description ............................................................ 139 CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 139 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 139 Possible Cause ..................................................... 139 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 139 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 140 DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE . 141 Description ............................................................ 141 CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 141 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 141 Possible Cause ..................................................... 141 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 141 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 142 DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION .............................................................. 143 Description ............................................................ 143 CONSULT-II Reference Value ............................... 143 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 143 Possible Cause ..................................................... 143 AT-2 2005 Titan DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 143 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 144 DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE . 145 Description ........................................................... 145 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 145 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 145 Possible Cause .................................................... 145 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 145 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 146 DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION .............................................................. 147 Description ........................................................... 147 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 147 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 147 Possible Cause .................................................... 147 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 147 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 148 DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE. 149 Description ........................................................... 149 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 149 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 149 Possible Cause .................................................... 149 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 149 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 150 DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION .............................................................. 151 Description ........................................................... 151 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 151 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 151 Possible Cause .................................................... 151 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 151 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 152 DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE ................................................. 153 Description ........................................................... 153 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 153 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 153 Possible Cause .................................................... 153 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 153 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 154 DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION ............................. 155 Description ........................................................... 155 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 155 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 155 Possible Cause .................................................... 155 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 155 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 156 DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE ..................................................................... 157 Description ........................................................... 157 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 157 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 157 Possible Cause .................................................... 157 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 157 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 158 DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION ................................................. 159 Description ........................................................... 159 Revision: October 2004 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 159 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 159 Possible Cause ..................................................... 159 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 159 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 160 DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH .................. 161 Description ............................................................ 161 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode . 161 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 161 Possible Cause ..................................................... 161 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 161 Wiring Diagram — AT — MMSW ......................... 162 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 163 Component Inspection .......................................... 164 Position Indicator Lamp ........................................ 164 DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1 ............... 166 Description ............................................................ 166 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 166 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 166 Possible Cause ..................................................... 166 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 166 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 167 DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3 ............... 168 Description ............................................................ 168 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 168 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 168 Possible Cause ..................................................... 168 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 168 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 169 DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5 ............... 170 Description ............................................................ 170 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 170 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 170 Possible Cause ..................................................... 170 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 170 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 171 DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6 ............... 172 Description ............................................................ 172 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 172 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 172 Possible Cause ..................................................... 172 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 172 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 173 MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT. 174 Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN ............................ 174 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 175 TOW MODE SWITCH ............................................. 178 Description ............................................................ 178 Wiring Diagram — AT — TMSW .......................... 179 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 180 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION AND WIDE OPEN THROTTLE POSITION CIRCUIT ............................ 181 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 181 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 181 BRAKE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ...................................... 182 CONSULT-II Reference Value .............................. 182 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 182 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS ............ 183 AT-3 2005 Titan A B AT D E F G H I J K L M Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC ...................... 183 AT CHECK Indicator Lamp does not come on ..... 186 Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position . 186 In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed ...... 187 In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves .............................. 188 Large Shock (“N” to “D” Position) ......................... 189 Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position. 192 Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position . 195 Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ..................... 197 A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 ................................ 200 A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 ................................ 202 A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 ................................ 204 A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D5 ................................ 207 A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up ............................ 209 A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition .................. 211 Lock-up Is Not Released ...................................... 213 Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle ................ 214 CannotBeChangedtoManualMode(ColumnShift) . 215 A/T Does Not Shift: 5th gear → 4th gear (Floor Shift Models) ................................................................. 215 A/T Does Not Shift: 5th gear → 4th gear (Column Shift Models) ......................................................... 218 A/T Does Not Shift: 4th gear → 3rd gear (Floor Shift Models) ................................................................. 220 A/T Does Not Shift: 4th gear → 3rd gear (Column Shift Models) ......................................................... 222 A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd gear → 2nd gear (Floor Shift Models) ................................................................. 224 A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd gear → 2nd gear (Column Shift Models) ......................................................... 226 A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd gear → 1st gear (Floor Shift Models) ................................................................. 228 A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd gear → 1st gear (Column Shift Models) ......................................................... 231 Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake .... 233 SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM .................................... 236 Control Device Removal and Installation .............. 236 Adjustment of A/T Position ................................... 238 Checking of A/T Position ...................................... 238 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM ..................................... 239 Description ............................................................ 239 Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location ......... 239 Wiring Diagram — A/T — SHIFT .......................... 241 Shift Lock Control Unit Reference Values ............. 243 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ............................... 244 Component Inspection .......................................... 246 Revision: October 2004 KEY INTERLOCK CABLE ...................................... 248 Components .......................................................... 248 Removal ................................................................ 248 Installation ............................................................. 249 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE .......................................... 250 Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 ................................................................ 250 Rear Oil Seal ......................................................... 262 AIR BREATHER HOSE ........................................... 263 Removal and Installation ....................................... 263 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY ................................. 265 Removal and Installation (4x2) ............................. 265 Removal and Installation (4x4) ............................. 268 OVERHAUL ............................................................. 271 Components .......................................................... 271 Oil Channel ........................................................... 279 Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings .......................... 281 DISASSEMBLY ....................................................... 283 Disassembly .......................................................... 283 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS ...................... 300 Oil Pump ............................................................... 300 Front Sun Gear, 3rd One-Way Clutch ................... 302 Front Carrier, Input Clutch, Rear Internal Gear ..... 305 Mid Sun Gear, Rear Sun Gear, High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub .............................................. 310 High and Low Reverse Clutch .............................. 315 Direct Clutch ......................................................... 317 ASSEMBLY ............................................................. 319 Assembly (1) ......................................................... 319 Adjustment ............................................................ 332 Assembly (2) ......................................................... 334 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 341 General Specifications .......................................... 341 Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears ..................... 341 Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Complete Lock-up ................................................. 342 Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Slip Lock-up .......................................................... 342 Stall Speed ............................................................ 342 Line Pressure ........................................................ 342 A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor .............................. 342 Turbine Revolution Sensor .................................... 342 Vehicle Speed Sensor A/T (Revolution Sensor) ... 342 Reverse brake ....................................................... 343 Total End Play ....................................................... 343 AT-4 2005 Titan INDEX FOR DTC INDEX FOR DTC Alphabetical Index PFP:00024 A ECS00AVO NOTE: If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to AT-97 . B DTC Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) OBD-II Except OBD-II Reference page CONSULT-II GST (*1) CONSULT-II only “A/T” A/T 1ST E/BRAKING — P1731 AT-139 ATF PRES SW 1/CIRC — P1841 AT-166 ATF PRES SW 3/CIRC — P1843 AT-168 ATF PRES SW 5/CIRC — P1845 AT-170 ATF PRES SW 6/CIRC — P1846 AT-172 A/T INTERLOCK P1730 P1730 AT-136 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 P0744 AT-118 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 P1710 AT-127 CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 U1000 AT-97 D/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1762 P1762 AT-149 P1764 (*2 ) P1764 AT-151 — P0725 AT-114 FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1757 P1757 AT-145 FR/B SOLENOID FNCT P1759 P1759 AT-147 HLR/C SOL/CIRC P1767 P1767 AT-153 HLR/C SOL FNCTN P1769 (*2 ) P1769 AT-155 I/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1752 P1752 AT-141 P1754 (*2 ) P1754 AT-143 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 P0745 AT-120 LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1772 P1772 AT-157 LC/B SOLENOID FNCT P1774 P1774 AT-159 MANU MODE SW/CIR — P1815 AT-161 D/C SOLENOID FNCTN ENGINE SPEED SIG I/C SOLENOID FNCTN PNP SW/CIRC P0705 P0705 AT-105 STARTER RELAY/CIRC — P0615 AT-100 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 P0740 AT-116 TCM P0700 P0700 AT-104 TCM·RAM — P1702 AT-122 TCM·ROM — P1703 AT-123 TP SEN/CIRC A/T — P1705 AT-124 P1716 P1716 AT-132 TURBINE REV S/CIRC VEH SPD SE/CIR·MTR — P1721 AT-134 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT P0720 P0720 AT-109 *1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012. *2: These malfunctions cannot be displayed MIL if another malfunction is assigned to MIL. Revision: October 2004 AT-5 2005 Titan AT D E F G H I J K L M INDEX FOR DTC DTC No. Index ECS00AVP NOTE: If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to AT-97 . DTC OBD-II Except OBD-II Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II GST (*1) CONSULT-II only “A/T” — P0615 STARTER RELAY/CIRC AT-100 P0700 P0700 TCM AT-104 P0705 P0705 PNP SW/CIRC AT-105 P0710 P1710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC AT-127 P0720 P0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT AT-109 Reference page — P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG AT-114 P0740 P0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC AT-116 P0744 P0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN AT-118 P0745 P0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC AT-120 — P1702 TCM·RAM AT-122 — P1703 TCM·ROM AT-123 — P1705 TP SEN/CIRC A/T AT-124 P1716 P1716 TURBINE REV S/CIRC AT-132 — P1721 VEH SPD SE/CIR·MTR AT-134 P1730 P1730 A/T INTERLOCK AT-136 — P1731 A/T 1ST E/BRAKING AT-139 P1752 P1752 I/C SOLENOID/CIRC AT-141 P1754 (*2 ) P1754 I/C SOLENOID FNCTN AT-143 P1757 P1757 FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC AT-145 P1759 (*2 ) P1759 FR/B SOLENOID FNCT AT-147 P1762 P1762 D/C SOLENOID/CIRC AT-149 P1764 (*2 ) P1764 D/C SOLENOID FNCTN AT-151 P1767 P1767 HLR/C SOL/CIRC AT-153 P1769 P1769 HLR/C SOL FNCTN AT-155 P1772 P1772 LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC AT-157 P1774 P1774 LC/B SOLENOID FNCT AT-159 — P1815 MANU MODE SW/CIR AT-161 — P1841 ATF PRES SW 1/CIRC AT-166 — P1843 ATF PRES SW 3/CIRC AT-168 — P1845 ATF PRES SW 5/CIRC AT-170 — P1846 ATF PRES SW 6/CIRC AT-172 U1000 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT AT-97 *1: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012. *2: These malfunctions cannot be displayed MIL if another malfunction is assigned to MIL. Revision: October 2004 AT-6 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A ECS00CLV The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along B with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front AT air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. D WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. E ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. F ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. G Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of A/T and Engine ECS00AVR The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration. CAUTION: ● Be sure to turn the ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect the negative battery cable before any repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. Will cause the MIL to light up. ● Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will cause the MIL to light up due to an open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease, dirt, bent terminals, etc.) ● Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. Interference of the harness with a bracket, etc. May cause the MIL to light up due to a short circuit. ● Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube may cause the MIL to light up due to a malfunction of the EGR system or fuel injection system, etc. ● Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the TCM and ECM before returning the vehicle to the customer. H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 AT-7 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS Precautions ECS00AVS NOTE: If any malfunctions occur in the RE5R05A model transmission, replace the entire transmission assembly. ● Before connecting or disconnecting the TCM harness connector, turn ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect negative battery cable. Because battery voltage is applied to TCM even if ignition switch is turned “OFF”. SEF289H ● After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform “DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. If the repair is completed the DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. SEF217U ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Always use the specified brand of ATF. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . Use paper rags not cloth rags during work. After replacing the ATF, dispose of the waste oil using the methods prescribed by law, ordinance, etc. Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the transmission. It is important to prevent the internal parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter. Disassembly should be done in a clean work area. Use lint-free cloth or towels for wiping parts clean. Common shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere with the operation of the transmission. Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly. All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or reassembly. Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the transmission is disassembled. It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they are indicated. The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced. Place disassembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper assembly. Care will also prevent springs and small parts from becoming scattered or lost. Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along bores in valve body under their own weight. Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings and seals, or hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Do not use grease. Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling. Clean or replace ATF cooler if excessive foreign material is found in oil pan or clogging strainer. Refer to AT-12, "A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning" . After overhaul, refill the transmission with new ATF. When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the fluid is drained. Old A/T fluid will remain in torque converter and ATF cooling system. Always follow the procedures under “Changing A/T Fluid” in the AT section when changing A/T fluid. Refer to MA-23, "Changing A/T Fluid" , MA-21, "Checking A/T Fluid" . Revision: October 2004 AT-8 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS Service Notice or Precautions ECS00AVT A ATF COOLER SERVICE ● If A/T fluid contains fictional material (clutches, bands, etc.), or if an A/T is repaired, overhauled, or replaced, inspect and clean the A/T fluid cooler mounted in the radiator or replace the radiator. Flush cooler lines with cleaning solvent and compressed air after repair. For A/T fluid cooler cleaning procedure, refer to AT-12, "A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning" . For radiator replacement, refer to CO-12, "REMOVAL" . B CHECKING AND CHANGING A/T FLUID AT Increase ATF oil temperature to 80°C (176°F) first, then check and adjust oil level at 65°C (149°F). NOTE: The A/T has both water cooling and air cooling systems. The air cooling system has a bypass valve. When ATF oil temperature is at or below 50°C (122°F), it does not flow through the air cooled system. If A/ D T oil level is adjusted without flow throughout the entire system, the level will be 10mm lower than required. Therefore, all piping should be filled with oil when adjusting level. E OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSIS ● A/T self-diagnosis is performed by the TCM in combination with the ECM. Refer to the table on AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" for the indicator used to display each self-diagnostic result. ● The self-diagnostic results indicated by the MIL are automatically stored in both the ECM and TCM memories. Always perform the procedure on AT-40, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" to complete the repair and avoid unnecessary blinking of the MIL. For details of OBD-II, refer to AT-39, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM" . ● Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use the new style slidelocking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-69, "HARNESS CONNECTOR" . ● Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis F G H ECS00AVU I When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams". ● PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" for power distribution circuit. When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-9, "How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses". ● GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident". J K L M Revision: October 2004 AT-9 2005 Titan PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 ECS00AVV The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number Description (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name ST2505S001 (J-34301-C) Oil pressure gauge set 1 ST25051001 ( — ) Oil pressure gauge 2 ST25052000 ( — ) Hose 3 ST25053000 ( — ) Joint pipe 4 ST25054000 ( — ) Adapter 5 ST25055000 ( — ) Adapter Measuring line pressure ZZA0600D KV31103600 (J-45674) Joint pipe adapter (With ST25054000) Measuring line pressure ZZA1227D ST33400001 (J-26082) Drift a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia b: 47 mm (1.85 in) dia ● Installing rear oil seal (2WD models) ● Installing oil pump housing oil seal NT086 KV31102400 (J-34285 and J-34285-87) Clutch spring compressor a: 320 mm (12.60 in) b: 174 mm (6.85 in) Installing reverse brake return spring retainer NT423 Revision: October 2004 AT-10 2005 Titan PREPARATION Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description ST25850000 (J-25721-A) Sliding hammer a: 179 mm (7.05 in) b: 70 mm (2.76 in) c: 40 mm (1.57 in) d: M12X1.75P Remove oil pump assembly A B AT NT422 — (J-47002) Transmission jack adapter kit 1. — (J-47002-2) Center bracket 2. — (J-47002-3) Adapter plate 3. — (J-47002-4) Adapter block Assist in removal of transmission and transfer case as one assembly using only one transmission jack. D E F WCIA0499E G Commercial Service Tools ECS00AVW Tool name Description Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts H I J PBIC0190E Drift a: 22 mm (0.87 in) Installing manual shaft seal K L NT083 Drift a: 64 mm (2.52 in) Installing rear oil seal (4WD models) M NT083 Revision: October 2004 AT-11 2005 Titan A/T FLUID A/T FLUID Changing A/T Fluid PFP:KLE40 ECS00CCU Refer to MA-23, "Changing A/T Fluid" . Checking A/T Fluid ECS00CCV Refer to MA-21, "Checking A/T Fluid" . A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning ECS00AVZ Whenever an automatic transmission is repaired, overhauled, or replaced, the A/T fluid cooler mounted in the radiator must be inspected and cleaned. Metal debris and friction material, if present, can become trapped in the A/T fluid cooler. This debris can contaminate the newly serviced A/T or, in severe cases, can block or restrict the flow of A/T fluid. In either case, malfunction of the newly serviced A/T may result. Debris, if present, may build up as A/T fluid enters the cooler inlet. It will be necessary to back flush the cooler through the cooler outlet in order to flush out any built up debris. A/T FLUID COOLER CLEANING PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. 4. Position an oil pan under the automatic transmission's inlet and outlet cooler hoses. Identify the inlet and outlet fluid cooler hoses. Disconnect the fluid cooler inlet and outlet rubber hoses from the steel cooler tubes or bypass valve. NOTE: Replace the cooler hoses if rubber material from the hose remains on the tube fitting. Allow any A/T fluid that remains in the cooler hoses to drain into the oil pan. SCIA3830E 5. 6. 7. 8. Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of Transmission Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the cooler outlet hose. CAUTION: ● Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying the Transmission Cooler Cleaner. ● Spray cooler cleaner only with adequate ventilation. ● Avoid contact with eyes and skin. ● Do not breath vapors or spray mist. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler outlet hose until fluid flows out of the cooler inlet hose for 5 seconds. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and of the cooler outlet hose. SCIA3831E SCIA3832E Revision: October 2004 AT-12 2005 Titan A/T FLUID 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (70 - 130 psi) through the cooler outlet hose for 10 seconds to force out any remaining fluid. Repeat steps 5 through 9 three additional times. Position an oil pan under the banjo bolts that connect the fluid cooler steel lines to the transmission. Remove the banjo bolts. Flush each steel line from the cooler side back toward the transmission by spraying Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream for 5 seconds. 14. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (70 - 130 psi) through each steel line from the cooler side back toward the transmission for 10 seconds to force out any remaining fluid. 15. Ensure all debris is removed from the steel cooler lines. 16. Ensure all debris is removed from the banjo bolts and fittings. 17. Perform A/T fluid cooler inspection procedure. Refer to AT-14, "A/T FLUID COOLER INSPECTION PROCEDURE" . A B AT D E A/T FLUID COOLER DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE NOTE: Insufficient cleaning of the cooler inlet hose exterior may lead to inaccurate debris identification. 1. Position an oil pan under the automatic transmission's inlet and outlet cooler hoses. 2. Clean the exterior and tip of the cooler inlet hose. 3. Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of Transmission Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM006) into the cooler outlet hose. CAUTION: ● Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying the Transmission Cooler Cleaner. ● Spray cooler cleaner only with adequate ventilation. ● Avoid contact with eyes and skin. ● Do not breath vapors or spray mist. 4. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous stream into the cooler outlet hose until fluid flows out of the cooler inlet hose for 5 seconds. 5. Tie a common white, basket-type coffee filter to the end of the cooler inlet hose. F G H I J SCIA3831E K L M SCIA3833E 6. 7. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and end of cooler outlet hose. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (70 - 130 psi) through the cooler outlet hose to force any remaining A/T fluid into the coffee filter. 9. Remove the coffee filter from the end of the cooler inlet hose. 10. Perform A/T fluid cooler inspection procedure. AT-14, "A/T FLUID COOLER INSPECTION PROCEDURE" . 8. SCIA3834E Revision: October 2004 AT-13 2005 Titan A/T FLUID A/T FLUID COOLER INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. a. Inspect the coffee filter for debris. If small metal debris less than 1mm (0.040 in) in size or metal powder is found in the coffee filter, this is normal. If normal debris is found, the A/T fluid cooler/radiator can be re-used and the procedure is ended. SCIA2967E b. If one or more pieces of debris are found that are over 1mm (0.040 in) in size and/or peeled clutch facing material is found in the coffee filter, the fluid cooler is not serviceable. The A/T fluid cooler/radiator must be replaced and the inspection procedure is ended.Refer to CO-12, "RADIATOR" . SCIA5257E A/T FLUID COOLER FINAL INSPECTION After performing all procedures, ensure that all remaining oil is cleaned from all components. Revision: October 2004 AT-14 2005 Titan A/T CONTROL SYSTEM A/T CONTROL SYSTEM Cross-Sectional View (2WD models) PFP:31036 A ECS00AW0 B AT D E F G H I SCIA5267E 1. Front planetary gear 2. Mid planetary gear 3. Rear planetary gear 4. Direct clutch 5. High & low reverse clutch 6. Reverse brake 7. Drum support Low coast brake 8. Forward brake 9. 10. Input shaft 11. Torque converter 12. Oil pump 13. Front brake 14. 3rd one-way clutch 15. Input clutch 16. 1st one-way clutch 17. Control valve with TCM 18. Forward one-way clutch 19. Rear extension 20. J K L Output shaft M Revision: October 2004 AT-15 2005 Titan A/T CONTROL SYSTEM Cross-Sectional View (4WD models) ECS00AW1 SCIA5268E 1. Front planetary gear 2. Mid planetary gear 3. Rear planetary gear 4. Direct clutch 5. High & low reverse clutch 6. Reverse brake 7. Drum support Low coast brake 8. Forward brake 9. 10. Input shaft 11. Torque converter 12. Oil pump 13. Front brake 14. 3rd one-way clutch 15. Input clutch 16. 1st one-way clutch 17. Control valve with TCM 18. Forward one-way clutch 19. Adapter case 20. Revision: October 2004 Output shaft AT-16 2005 Titan A/T CONTROL SYSTEM Shift Mechanism ECS00AW2 The automatic transmission uses compact dual planetary gear systems to improve power-transmission efficiency, simplify construction and reduce weight. It also employs an optimum shift control and super wide gear ratios. They improve starting performance and acceleration during medium and high-speed operation. A B CONSTRUCTION AT D E F G H PCIA0002J 1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch 4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake 7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft 10. 3rd one-way clutch Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier 16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier 19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft 22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl I J 13. K FUNCTION OF CLUTCH AND BRAKE Name of the Part L Abbreviation Function Front brake (1) FR/B Input clutch (2) I/C Connects the input shaft (12), the front internal gear (14) and the mid internal gear (13). Direct clutch (3) D/C Connects the rear carrier (15) and the rear sun gear (16). High and low reverse clutch (4) HLR/C Fastens the front sun gear (11). Connects the mid sun gear (17) and the rear sun gear (16). Reverse brake (5) R/B Fastens the rear carrier (15). Forward brake (6) F/B Fastens the mid sun gear (17). LC/B Fastens the mid sun gear (17). Low coast brake (7) 1st one-way clutch (8) Forward one-way clutch (9) 3rd one-way clutch (10) Revision: October 2004 1st/O.C Allows the rear sun gear (16) to turn freely forward relative to the mid sun gear (17) but fastens it for reverse rotation. F/O.C Allows the mid sun gear (17) to turn freely in the forward direction but fastens it for reverse rotation. 3rd/O.C Allows the front sun gear (11) to turn freely in the forward direction but fastens it for reverse rotation. AT-17 2005 Titan M A/T CONTROL SYSTEM CLUTCH AND BAND CHART (FLOOR SHIFT MODELS) Shift position I/C HLR/C D/C R/B FR/B LC/B Fwd/B 1st OWC Fwd OWC 3rd OWC Remarks P PARK POSITION R REVERSE POSITION N NEUTRAL POSITION 1st 2nd D Automatic shift 1⇔2⇔3⇔4⇔5 3rd 4th 5th 1st 2nd Automatic shift 1⇔2⇔3⇔4 4 3rd 4th 1st 2nd Automatic shift 1⇔2⇔3⇐4 3 3rd 4th 1st 2nd Automatic shift 1⇔2⇐3⇐4 2 3rd 4th 1st Locks (held stationary in 1st gear) 1⇐2⇐3⇐4 2nd 1 3rd 4th ● —Operates ● —Operates during “progressive” acceleration. ● —Operates and effects power transmission while coasting. ● —Line pressure is applied but does not affect power transmission. ● ● —Operates under conditions shown in HLR/C Operating Condition —Operates under conditions shown in LC/B Operating Condition. Delay control is applied during D (4,3,2,1) ÞN shift. Revision: October 2004 AT-18 2005 Titan A/T CONTROL SYSTEM A B AT SCIA5642E D E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 AT-19 2005 Titan A/T CONTROL SYSTEM CLUTCH AND BAND CHART (COLUMN SHIFT MODELS) Shift position I/C HLR/C D/C R/B FR/B LC/B Fwd/B 1st OWC Fwd OWC 3rd OWC Remarks P PARK POSITION R REVERSE POSITION N NEUTRAL POSITION 1st 2nd D Automatic shift 1⇔2⇔3⇔4⇔5 3rd 4th 5th 1st 2nd M5 Automatic shift 1⇔2⇔3⇔4⇔5 3rd 4th 5th 1st 2nd Automatic shift 1⇔2⇔3⇔4 M4 3rd 4th 1st M3 Automatic shift 1⇔2⇔3 2nd 3rd 1st Automatic shift 1⇔2 M2 2nd Locks (held stationary in 1st gear) 1st M1 2nd ● —Operates ● —Operates during “progressive” acceleration. ● —Operates and effects power transmission while coasting. ● —Line pressure is applied but does not affect power transmission. ● ● —Operates under conditions shown in HLR/C Operating Condition —Operates under conditions shown in LC/B Operating Condition. Delay control is applied during D (4,3,2,1) ÞN shift. Revision: October 2004 AT-20 2005 Titan A/T CONTROL SYSTEM A B AT SCIA5642E D POWER TRANSMISSION “N” position Since both the forward brake and the reverse brake are released, torque from the input shaft drive is not transmitted to the output shaft. E “P” position ● ● The same as for the “N” position, both the forward brake and the reverse brake are released, so torque from the input shaft drive is not transmitted to the output shaft. The parking pawl linked with the select lever meshes with the parking gear and fastens the output shaft mechanically. F G H I J K L PCIA0003J 1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch 4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake 7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch 10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft 13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier 16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier 19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft 22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl Revision: October 2004 AT-21 2005 Titan M A/T CONTROL SYSTEM “D”, “M5”, “M4”, “M3”, “M2” positions (column shift), “D”, “4”, “3”, “2” positions (floor shift) 1st Gear ● ● ● ● The forward brake and the forward one-way clutch regulate reverse rotation of the mid sun gear. The 1st one-way clutch regulates reverse rotation of the rear sun gear. The 3rd one-way clutch regulates reverse rotation of the front sun gear. During deceleration, the mid sun gear turns forward, so the forward one-way clutch idles and the engine brake is not activated. SCIA1512E 1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch 4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake 7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch 10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft 13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier 16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier 19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft 22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl Revision: October 2004 AT-22 2005 Titan A/T CONTROL SYSTEM “M1” position (column shift), “1 ” position (floor shift) 1st Gear ● ● ● ● ● The front brake fastens the front sun gear. The forward brake and the forward one-way clutch regulate reverse rotation of the mid sun gear. High and low reverse clutch connects the rear sun gear and the mid sun gear. The low coast brake fastens the mid sun gear. During deceleration, the low coast brake regulates forward rotation of the mid sun gear and the engine brake functions. A B AT D E F G H I J K SCIA1513E 1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch 4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake 7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch 10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft 13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier 16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier 19. Mid carrier Rear internal gear L M 21. Output shaft 20. 22. Parking gear Revision: October 2004 23. Parking pawl AT-23 2005 Titan A/T CONTROL SYSTEM “D”, “M5”, “M4”, “M3” positions (column shift), “D”, “4”, “3” positions (floor shift) 2nd Gear ● ● ● ● The forward brake and the forward one-way clutch regulate reverse rotation of the mid sun gear. The 3rd one-way clutch regulates reverse rotation of the front sun gear. The direct clutch is coupled and the rear carrier and rear sun gear are connected. During deceleration, the mid sun gear turns forward, so the forward one-way clutch idles and engine brake is not activated. SCIA1514E 1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch 4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake 7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch 10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 12. Input shaft Rear carrier 15. 16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier 19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft 22. Parking gear 23. Revision: October 2004 Parking pawl AT-24 2005 Titan A/T CONTROL SYSTEM “M2”, “M1” positions (column shift), “2”, “1” positions (floor shift) 2nd Gear ● ● ● ● ● The front brake fastens the front sun gear. The forward brake and the forward one-way clutch regulate reverse rotation of the mid sun gear. The direct clutch is coupled, and the rear carrier and rear sun gear are connected. The low coast brake fastens the mid sun gear. During deceleration, the low coast brake regulates forward rotation of the mid sun gear and the engine brake functions. A B AT D E F G H I J K SCIA1515E 1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch 4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake 7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch 10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft 13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier 16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier 19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft 22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl Revision: October 2004 AT-25 L M 2005 Titan A/T CONTROL SYSTEM “D”, “M5”, “M4”, “M3” positions (column shift), “D”, “4”, “3” positions (floor shift) 3rd Gear ● ● ● The front brake fastens the front sun gear. The direct clutch is coupled, and the rear carrier and rear sun gear are connected. The high and low reverse clutch is coupled and the mid sun gear and rear sun gear are connected. SCIA1516E 1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch 4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake 7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch 10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft 13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier 16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier 19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft 22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl Revision: October 2004 AT-26 2005 Titan A/T CONTROL SYSTEM “D”, “M5”, “M4” positions (column shift), “D”, “4” positions (floor shift) 4th Gear ● ● ● ● The direct clutch is coupled, and the rear carrier and rear sun gear are connected. The high and low reverse clutch is coupled and the mid sun gear and rear sun gear are connected. The input clutch is coupled and the front internal gear and mid internal gear are connected. The drive power is conveyed to the front internal gear, mid internal gear, and rear carrier and the three planetary gears rotate forward as one unit. A B AT D E F G H I J SCIA1517E 1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. 4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake 7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch 10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft 13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier 16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier 19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft 22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl Revision: October 2004 AT-27 K Direct clutch L M 2005 Titan A/T CONTROL SYSTEM “D”, “M5” positions (column shift), “D” position (floor shift) 5th Gear ● ● ● The front brake fastens the front sun gear. The input clutch is coupled and the front internal gear and mid internal gear are connected. The high and low reverse clutch is coupled and the mid sun gear and rear sun gear are connected. SCIA4984E 1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. Direct clutch 4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Forward brake 7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch 10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft 13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier 16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier 19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft 22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl Revision: October 2004 AT-28 2005 Titan A/T CONTROL SYSTEM “R” position ● ● ● The front brake fastens the front sun gear. The high and low reverse clutch is coupled, and the mid sun gear and rear sun gear are connected. The reverse brake fastens the rear carrier. A B AT D E F G H I J SCIA1519E 1. Front brake 2. Input clutch 3. 4. High and low reverse clutch 5. Reverse brake 6. Direct clutch Forward brake 7. Low coast brake 8. 1st one-way clutch 9. Forward one-way clutch 10. 3rd one-way clutch 11. Front sun gear 12. Input shaft 13. Mid internal gear 14. Front internal gear 15. Rear carrier 16. Rear sun gear 17. Mid sun gear 18. Front carrier 19. Mid carrier 20. Rear internal gear 21. Output shaft 22. Parking gear 23. Parking pawl Revision: October 2004 AT-29 K L M 2005 Titan A/T CONTROL SYSTEM TCM Function ECS00AW3 The function of the TCM is to: ● Receive input signals sent from various switches and sensors. ● Determine required line pressure, shifting point, lock-up operation, and engine brake operation. ● Send required output signals to the respective solenoids. CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE (FLOOR SHIFT) The automatic transmission senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors or signals. It always controls the optimum shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks. SENSORS (or SIGNALS) TCM ACTUATORS PNP switch Accelerator pedal position sensor Closed throttle position signal Wide open throttle position signal Engine speed signal A/T fluid temperature sensor Revolution sensor Vehicle speed signal Stop lamp switch signal Turbine revolution sensor 1st position switch signal 4th position switch signal ATF pressure switch Tow mode switch signal Shift control Line pressure control Lock-up control Engine brake control Timing control Fail-safe control Self-diagnosis CONSULT-II communication line Duet-EA control CAN system Input clutch solenoid valve Direct clutch solenoid valve Front brake solenoid valve High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve Low coast brake solenoid valve Torque converter clutch solenoid valve Line pressure solenoid valve A/T CHECK indicator lamp Starter relay Back-up lamp relay Þ Þ CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM SCIA5624E Revision: October 2004 AT-30 2005 Titan A/T CONTROL SYSTEM CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE (COLUMN SHIFT) The automatic transmission senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors or signals. It always controls the optimum shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks. SENSORS (or SIGNALS) PNP switch Accelerator pedal position sensor Closed throttle position signal Wide open throttle position signal Engine speed signal A/T fluid temperature sensor Revolution sensor Vehicle speed signal Stop lamp switch signal Turbine revolution sensor Manual mode switch Tow mode switch signal Þ TCM ACTUATORS Shift control Line pressure control Lock-up control Engine brake control Timing control Fail-safe control Self-diagnosis CONSULT-II communication line Duet-EA control CAN system Input clutch solenoid valve Direct clutch solenoid valve Front brake solenoid valve High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve Low coast brake solenoid valve Torque converter clutch solenoid valve Line pressure solenoid valve A/T CHECK indicator lamp Starter relay Back-up lamp relay Þ A B AT D E CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM F G H I J K L M SCIA5625E Revision: October 2004 AT-31 2005 Titan A/T CONTROL SYSTEM CAN Communication ECS00AW4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. For details, refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Input/Output Signal of TCM Line pressure control Vehicle speed control Shift control Lock-up control Engine brake control Fail-safe function (*3) Self-diagnostics function Accelerator pedal position signal (*4) X X X X X X X Vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sensor) X X X X X X Vehicle speed sensor MTR(*1) (*4) X X X X Closed throttle position signal(*4) (*2) X (*2) X Wide open throttle position signal(*4) (*2) X (*2) X Turbine revolution sensor 1 X X X X X Turbine revolution sensor 2 (for 4th speed only) X X X X X Control item Input ECS00AW5 X Engine speed signals(*4) (*2) X X (*2) X X X X PNP switch X X X X X X X A/T fluid temperature sensors 1, 2 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Operation signal(*4) ASCD Overdrive cancel X signal(*4) TCM power supply voltage signal Output X X X Direct clutch solenoid (ATF pressure switch 5) X X X X Input clutch solenoid (ATF pressure switch 3) X X X X High & low reverse clutch solenoid (ATF pressure switch 6) X X X X Front brake solenoid (ATF pressure switch 1) X X X X Low coast brake solenoid (ATF pressure switch 2) X X X X X X X X X X X X Line pressure solenoid X X TCC solenoid X X X Self-diagnostics table(*4) X Starter relay X X *1: Spare for vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) *2: Spare for accelerator pedal position signal *3: If these input and output signals are different, the TCM triggers the fail-safe function. *4: CAN communications Revision: October 2004 AT-32 2005 Titan A/T CONTROL SYSTEM Line Pressure Control ● ● ECS00AW6 When an input torque signal equivalent to the engine drive force is sent from the ECM to the TCM, the TCM controls the line pressure solenoid. This line pressure solenoid controls the pressure regulator valve as the signal pressure and adjusts the pressure of the operating oil discharged from the oil pump to the line pressure most appropriate to the driving state. A B AT D E PCIA0007E LINE PRESSURE CONTROL IS BASED ON THE TCM LINE PRESSURE CHARACTERISTIC PATTERN ● ● The TCM has stored in memory a number of patterns for the optimum line pressure characteristic for the driving state. In order to obtain the most appropriate line pressure characteristic to meet the current driving state, the TCM controls the line pressure solenoid current valve and thus controls the line pressure. F G H Normal control Each clutch is adjusted to the necessary pressure to match the engine drive force. I J K PCIA0008E L Back-up control (Engine brake) When the select operation is performed during driving and the transmission is shifted down, the line pressure is set according to the vehicle speed. M PCIA0009E Revision: October 2004 AT-33 2005 Titan A/T CONTROL SYSTEM During shift change The necessary and adequate line pressure for shift change is set. For this reason, line pressure pattern setting corresponds to input torque and gearshift selection. Also, line pressure characteristic is set according to engine speed, during engine brake operation. PCIA0010E At low fluid temperature When the A/T fluid temperature drops below the prescribed temperature, in order to speed up the action of each friction element, the line pressure is set higher than the normal line pressure characteristic. PCIA0011E Shift Control ECS00AW7 The clutch pressure control solenoid is controlled by the signals from the switches and sensors. Thus, the clutch pressure is adjusted to be appropriate to the engine load state and vehicle driving state. It becomes possible to finely control the clutch hydraulic pressure with high precision and a smoother shift change characteristic is attained. PCIA0012E SHIFT CHANGE The clutch is controlled with the optimum timing and oil pressure by the engine speed, engine torque information, etc. Revision: October 2004 AT-34 2005 Titan A/T CONTROL SYSTEM Shift change system diagram A B AT D E F PCIA0013E *1: Full phase real-time feedback control monitors movement of gear ratio at gear change, and controls oil pressure at real-time to achieve the best gear ratio. Lock-Up Control ECS00AW8 G H The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is engaged to eliminate torque converter slip to increase power transmission efficiency. The torque converter clutch control valve operation is controlled by the torque converter clutch solenoid valve, which is controlled by a signal from TCM, and the torque converter clutch control valve engages or releases the torque converter clutch piston. I Lock-up Operation Condition Table J Select lever D position M5 position M4 or 4 position M3 or 3 position M2 or 2 position Gear position 5 4 5 4 3 2 Lock-up × – × × × × Slip lock-up × × – – – – K L TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH CONTROL VALVE CONTROL Lock-up control system diagram M PCIA0014E Lock-up released ● In the lock-up released state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the unlocked state by the torque converter clutch solenoid and the lock-up apply pressure is drained. In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is not coupled. Revision: October 2004 AT-35 2005 Titan A/T CONTROL SYSTEM Lock-up applied ● In the lock-up applied state, the torque converter clutch control valve is set into the locked state by the torque converter clutch solenoid and lock-up apply pressure is generated. In this way, the torque converter clutch piston is pressed and coupled. SMOOTH LOCK-UP CONTROL When shifting from the lock-up released state to the lock-up applied state, the current output to the torque converter clutch solenoid is controlled with the TCM. In this way, when shifting to the lock-up applied state, the torque converter clutch is temporarily set to the half-clutched state to reduce the shock. Half-clutched state ● The current output from the TCM to the torque converter clutch solenoid is varied to gradually increase the torque converter clutch solenoid pressure. In this way, the lock-up apply pressure gradually rises and while the torque converter clutch piston is put into half-clutched status, the torque converter clutch piston operating pressure is increased and the coupling is completed smoothly. Slip lock-up control ● In the slip region, the torque converter clutch solenoid current is controlled with the TCM to put it into the half-clutched state. This absorbs the engine torque fluctuation and lock-up operates from low speed. This raises the fuel efficiency for 4th and 5th gears at both low speed and when the accelerator has a low degree of opening. Revision: October 2004 AT-36 2005 Titan A/T CONTROL SYSTEM Engine Brake Control ● ECS00AW9 The forward one-way clutch transmits the drive force from the engine to the rear wheels. But the reverse drive from the rear wheels is not transmitted to the engine because the one-way clutch is idling. Therefore, the low coast brake solenoid is operated to prevent the forward one-way clutch from idling and the engine brake is operated in the same manner as conventionally. A B AT D E F G SCIA1520E ● The operation of the low coast brake solenoid switches the low coast brake switching valve and controls the coupling and releasing of the low coast brake. The low coast brake reducing valve controls the low coast brake coupling force. Control Valve H I ECS00AWA FUNCTION OF CONTROL VALVE Name Torque converter regulator valve J Function In order to prevent the pressure supplied to the torque converter from being excessive, the line pressure is adjusted to the optimum pressure (torque converter operating pressure). Pressure regulator valve Pressure regulator plug Pressure regulator sleeve Adjusts the oil discharged from the oil pump to the optimum pressure (line pressure) for the driving state. Front brake control valve When the front brake is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure (front brake pressure) and supplies it to the front brake. (In 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 5th gears, adjusts the clutch pressure.) Accumulator control valve Adjusts the pressure (accumulator control pressure) acting on the accumulator piston and low coast reducing valve to the pressure appropriate to the driving state. Pilot valve A Adjusts the line pressure and produces the constant pressure (pilot pressure) required for line pressure control, shift change control, and lock-up control. Pilot valve B Adjusts the line pressure and produces the constant pressure (pilot pressure) required for shift change control. Low coast brake switching valve During engine braking, supplies the line pressure to the low coast brake reducing valve. Low coast brake reducing valve When the low coast brake is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure (low coast brake pressure) and supplies it to the low coast brake. N-R accumulator Produces the stabilizing pressure for when N-R is selected. Direct clutch piston switching valve Operates in 4th gear and switches the direct clutch coupling capacity. High and low reverse clutch control valve When the high and low reverse clutch is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure (high and low reverse clutch pressure) and supplies it to the high and low reverse clutch. (In 1st, 3rd, 4th and 5th gears, adjusts the clutch pressure.) Revision: October 2004 AT-37 2005 Titan K L M A/T CONTROL SYSTEM Name Function Input clutch control valve When the input clutch is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure (input clutch pressure) and supplies it to the input clutch. (In 4th and 5th gears, adjusts the clutch pressure.) Direct clutch control valve When the direct clutch is coupled, adjusts the line pressure to the optimum pressure (direct clutch pressure) and supplies it to the direct clutch. (In 2nd, 3rd, and 4th gears, adjusts the clutch pressure.) TCC control valve TCC control plug TCC control sleeve Switches the lock-up to operating or released. Also, by performing the lock-up operation transiently, lock-up smoothly. Torque converter lubrication valve Operates during lock-up to switch the torque converter, cooling, and lubrication system oil path. Cool bypass valve Allows excess oil to bypass cooler circuit without being fed into it. Line pressure relief valve Discharges excess oil from line pressure circuit. N-D accumulator Produces the stabilizing pressure for when N-D is selected. Manual valve Sends line pressure to each circuit according to the select position. The circuits to which the line pressure is not sent drain. FUNCTION OF PRESSURE SWITCH Name Function Pressure switch 1 (FR/B) Detects any malfunction in the front brake hydraulic pressure. When it detects any malfunction, it puts the system into fail-safe mode. Pressure switch 2 (LC/B) Detects any malfunction in the low coast brake hydraulic pressure. When it detects any malfunction, it puts the system into fail-safe mode. Pressure switch 3 (I/C) Detects any malfunction in the input clutch hydraulic pressure. When it detects any malfunction, it puts the system into fail-safe mode. Pressure switch 5 (D/C) Detects any malfunction in the direct clutch hydraulic pressure. When it detects any malfunction, it puts the system into fail-safe mode. Pressure switch 6 (HLR/C) Detects any malfunction in the high and low reverse clutch hydraulic pressure. When it detects any malfunction, it puts the system into fail-safe mode. Revision: October 2004 AT-38 2005 Titan ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM Introduction PFP:00028 A ECS00AWB The A/T system has two self-diagnostic systems. The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD-II) performed by the TCM in combination B with the ECM. The malfunction is indicated by the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) and is stored as a DTC in the ECM memory but not the TCM memory. The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis indicated by the A/T CHECK indicator lamp. The malfunction is stored in the TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with OBD-II self-diagnostic items. For detail, AT refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . OBD-II Function for A/T System ECS00AWC The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (OBD-II) functions for the A/T system. One function is to receive a signal from the TCM used with OBD-related parts of the A/T system. The signal is sent to the ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding OBD-related part. The other function is to indicate a diagnostic result by means of the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) on the instrument panel. Sensors, switches and solenoid valves are used as sensing elements. The MIL automatically illuminates in One or Two Trip Detection Logic when a malfunction is sensed in relation to A/T system parts. One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II D E F ECS00AWD ONE TRIP DETECTION LOGIC If a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, the MIL will illuminate and the malfunction will be stored in the ECM memory as a DTC. The TCM is not provided with such a memory function. G TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC H When a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, it is stored in the ECM memory as a 1st trip DTC (diagnostic trouble code) or 1st trip freeze frame data. At this point, the MIL will not illuminate. — 1st Trip If the same malfunction as that experienced during the first test drive is sensed during the second test drive, the MIL will illuminate. — 2nd Trip The “Trip” in the “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed during vehicle operation. I OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) J ECS00AWE HOW TO READ DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods. ( with CONSULT-II or GST) CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0705, P0720 etc. These DTC are prescribed by SAE J2012. (CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.) ● 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. ● Output of the diagnostic trouble code indicates that the indicated circuit has a malfunction. However, in case of the Mode II and GST, they do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring or occurred in the past and returned to normal. CONSULT-II can identify them as shown below, therefore, CONSULT-II (if available) is recommended. A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown on the next page. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC. SAT014K Revision: October 2004 AT-39 2005 Titan K L M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”. SAT015K If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “1t”. SAT016K Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data The ECM has a memory function, which stores the driving condition such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed and vehicle speed at the moment the ECM detects a malfunction. Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data, and the data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II or GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For detail, refer to AT-39, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM" . Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data of freeze frame data) can be stored in the ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the following priorities to update the data. Priority 1 Items Freeze frame data 2 3 Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306 Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items) 1st trip freeze frame data Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTC) are cleared when the ECM memory is erased. HOW TO ERASE DTC The diagnostic trouble code can be erased by CONSULT-II, GST or ECM DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE as described following. ● If the battery cable is disconnected, the diagnostic trouble code will be lost within 24 hours. ● When you erase the DTC, using CONSULT-II or GST is easier and quicker than switching the mode selector on the ECM. The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared from the ECM memory when erasing DTC related to OBD-II. For details, refer to EC-49, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information" . ● Diagnostic trouble codes (DTC) ● 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes (1st trip DTC) ● Freeze frame data Revision: October 2004 AT-40 2005 Titan ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ● ● ● 1st trip freeze frame data System readiness test (SRT) codes Test values A HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH CONSULT-II) ● 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. B If a DTC is displayed for both ECM and TCM, it is necessary to be erased for both ECM and TCM. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again. AT Turn CONSULT-II “ON” and touch “A/T”. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. D Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.) Then touch “BACK” twice. Touch “ENGINE”. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. E Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.) F G H I J K L M SCIA5334E HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST) 1. 2. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again. Select Mode 4 with Generic Scan Tool (GST). For details refer to EC-136, "Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function" . HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS) 1. 2. Disconnect battery for 24 hours. Reconnect battery. Revision: October 2004 AT-41 2005 Titan ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ECS00AWF DESCRIPTION The MIL is located on the instrument panel. 1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned “ON” without the engine running. This is a bulb check. ● If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-30, "WARNING LAMPS" . 2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off. If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an engine system malfunction. SEF217U Revision: October 2004 AT-42 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS DTC Inspection Priority Chart PFP:00004 A ECS00AWG If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority chart. B NOTE: If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to AT-97 . AT Priority Detected items (DTC) 1 U1000 CAN communication line 2 Except above D Fail-Safe ECS00AWH The TCM has an electrical fail-safe mode. This mode makes it possible to operate even if there is an error in a main electronic control input/output signal circuit. In fail-safe mode the transmission is fixed in 2nd, 4th, or 5th (depending on the breakdown position), so the customer should feel “slipping” or “poor acceleration”. Even when the electronic circuits are normal, under special conditions (for example, when slamming on the brake with the wheels spinning drastically and stopping the tire rotation), the transmission can go into fail-safe mode. If this happens, switch “OFF” the ignition switch for 10 seconds, then switch it “ON” again to return to the normal shift pattern. Therefore, the customer's vehicle has returned to normal, so handle according to the “diagnostics flow” (Refer to AT-46, "WORK FLOW" ). FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION If any malfunction occurs in a sensor or solenoid, this function controls the A/T to mark driving possible. E F G H Vehicle Speed Sensor ● Signals are input from two systems - from vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sensor) installed on the transmission and from combination meter so normal driving is possible even if there is a malfunction in one of the systems. And if vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sensor) has unusual cases, 5th gear and manual mode are prohibited. I J Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor ● If there is a malfunction in one of the systems, the accelerator opening angle is controlled by ECM according to a pre-determined accelerator angle to make driving possible. And if there are malfunctions in tow systems, the engine speed is fixed by ECM to a pre-determined engine speed to make driving possible. K Throttle Position Sensor ● If there is a malfunction in one of the systems, the accelerator opening angle is controlled by ECM according to a pre-determined accelerator angle to make driving possible. And if there are malfunctions in tow systems, the accelerator opening angle is controlled by the idle signal sent from the ECM which is based on input indicating either idle condition or off-idle condition (pre-determined accelerator opening) in order to make driving possible. PNP Switch ● In the unlikely event that a malfunction signal enters the TCM, the position indicator is switched “OFF”, the starter relay is switched “OFF” (starter starting is disabled), the back-up lamp relay switched “OFF” (backup lamp is OFF) and the position is fixed to the “D” range to make driving possible. Starter Relay ● The starter relay is switched “OFF”. (Starter starting is disabled.) Revision: October 2004 AT-43 2005 Titan L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A/T Interlock ● ● If there is an A/T interlock judgment malfunction, the transmission is fixed in 2nd gear to make driving possible. NOTE: When the vehicle is driven fixed in 2nd gear, a turbine revolution sensor malfunction is displayed, but this is not a turbine revolution sensor malfunction. When the coupling pattern below is detected, the fail-safe action corresponding to the pattern is performed. A/T INTERLOCK COUPLING PATTERN TABLE ●: NG X: OK ATF pressure switch output Gear position A/T interlock coupling pattern SW3 (I/C) SW6 (HLR/ C) SW5 (D/C) SW1 (FR/B) SW2 (LC/B) 3rd – X X – ● 4th – X X – 5th X X – X Fail-safe function Clutch pressure output pattern after fail-safe function I/C HLR/C D/C FR/B LC/B L/U Held in 2nd gear OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ● Held in 2nd gear OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ● Held in 2nd gear OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF A/T 1st Engine Braking ● When there is an A/T first gear engine brake judgment malfunction, the low coast brake solenoid is switched “OFF” to avoid the engine brake operation. Line Pressure Solenoid ● The solenoid is switched “OFF” and the line pressure is set to the maximum hydraulic pressure to make driving possible. Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid ● The solenoid is switched “OFF” to release the lock-up. Low Coast Brake Solenoid ● When a (electrical or functional) malfunction occurs, in order to make driving possible, the engine brake is not applied in 1st and 2nd gear. Input Clutch Solenoid ● If a (electrical or functional) malfunction occurs with the solenoid either “ON” or “OFF”, the transmission is held in 4th gear to make driving possible. Direct Clutch Solenoid ● If a (electrical or functional) malfunction occurs with the solenoid either “ON” or “OFF”, the transmission is held in 4th gear to make driving possible. Front Brake Clutch Solenoid ● If a (electrical or functional) malfunction occurs with the solenoid “ON”, in order to make driving possible, the A/T is held in 5th gear; if the solenoid is OFF, 4th gear. High & Low Reverse Clutch Solenoid ● If a (electrical or functional) malfunction occurs with the solenoid either “ON” or “OFF”, the transmission is held in 4th gear to make driving possible. Turbine Revolution Sensor 1 or 2 ● The control is the same as if there were no turbine revolution sensors, 5th gear and manual mode are prohibited. Revision: October 2004 AT-44 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS How To Perform Trouble Diagnosis For Quick and Accurate Repair ECS00AWI A INTRODUCTION The TCM receives a signal from the vehicle speed sensor, accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor) or PNP switch and provides shift control or lock-up control via A/T solenoid valves. The TCM also communicates with the ECM by means of a signal B sent from sensing elements used with the OBD-related parts of the A/T system for malfunction-diagnostic purposes. The TCM is capable of diagnosing malfunctioning parts while the ECM can store malAT functions in its memory. Input and output signals must always be correct and stable in the operation of the A/T system. The A/T system must be in good operD ating condition and be free of valve seizure, solenoid valve malfunction, etc. SAT631IB It is much more difficult to diagnose a error that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent errors are caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case, careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts. A visual check only may not find the cause of the errors. A road test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should be performed. Follow the AT-46, "WORK FLOW" . E F G H SAT632I I Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The customer can supply good information about such errors, especially intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic Worksheet” as shown on the example (Refer to AT-47 ) should be used. Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” errors first. This will help troubleshoot driveability errors on an electronically controlled engine vehicle. Also check related Service bulletins. J K L SEF234G M Revision: October 2004 AT-45 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WORK FLOW A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate. In general, each customer feels differently about a malfunction. It is important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a customer complaint. Make good use of the two sheets provided, “Information From Customer” (Refer to AT-47 ) and “Diagnostic Worksheet” (Refer to AT-47 ), to perform the best troubleshooting possible. Work Flow Chart WCIA0251E *1. AT-47 *2. AT-47 *3. AT-43 *4. AT-52 *5. AT-52, AT-53 *6. AT-55 *7. AT-85 *8. AT-39 *9. AT-97 *10. AT-178 *11. AT-183 *12. AT-233 *13. AT-63 *14. AT-40 *15. AT-97, AT-172 *16. EC-49 Revision: October 2004 AT-46 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET Information From Customer A KEY POINTS ● WHAT..... Vehicle & A/T model ● WHEN..... Date, Frequencies ● WHERE..... Road conditions ● HOW..... Operating conditions, Symptoms Customer name MR/MS B AT Model & Year VIN Trans. Model Engine Mileage Malfunction Date Manuf. Date In Service Date Frequency ❏ Continuous Symptoms ❏ Vehicle does not move. ❏ No up-shift ❏ Intermittent ( times a day) ❏ Particular position) (❏ Any position (❏ 1st → 2nd ❏ No down-shift D ❏ 2nd → 3rd E ❏ 3rd → 4th ❏ 4th → 5th) (❏ 5th → 4th ❏ 4th → 3rd ❏ 3rd → 2nd ❏ 2nd → 1st) F ❏ Lock-up malfunction ❏ Shift point too high or too low. ❏ Shift shock or slip (❏ N → D ❏ Lock-up ❏ Any drive position) G ❏ Noise or vibration ❏ No kick down H ❏ No pattern select ❏ Others ( Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) ) ❏ Continuously lit I ❏ Not lit Diagnostic Worksheet Chart 1 ❏ Read the item on cautions concerning fail-safe and understand the customer's complaint. AT-43 J ❏ ATF inspection 2 ❏ Leak (Repair leak location.) ❏ State ❏ Amount AT-52 K ❏ Stall test and line pressure test L ❏ Stall test ❏ Torque converter one-way clutch ❏ Front brake ❏ High and low reverse clutch ❏ Low coast brake ❏ Forward brake ❏ Reverse brake ❏ Forward one-way clutch 3 ❏ 1st one-way clutch ❏ 3rd one-way clutch ❏ Engine ❏ Line pressure low ❏ Except for input clutch and direct clutch, clutches and brakes OK AT-52, AT53 ❏ Line pressure inspection - Suspected part: Revision: October 2004 AT-47 2005 Titan M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ❏ Perform all road tests and enter checks in required inspection items. AT-55 Check before engine is started ❏ The AT CHECK Indicator Lamp does come on. AT-186 . ❏ Perform self-diagnostics Enter checks for detected items. AT-56 ❏ AT-109, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" . ❏ AT-134, "DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" . ❏ AT-149, "DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" . ❏ AT-116, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" . ❏ AT-120, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" . ❏ AT-141, "DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" . ❏ AT-145, "DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE" . ❏ AT-157, "DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE" . ❏ AT-153, "DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" . ❏ AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" . ❏ AT-127, "DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" . ❏ AT-132, "DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR" . ❏ AT-136, "DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK" . ❏ AT-139, "DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING" . ❏ AT-100, "DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT" . ❏ AT-124, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" . ❏ AT-114, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" . ❏ AT-97, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . ❏ Battery ❏ Other 4-1. 4 Idle inspection 4-2. ❏ AT-186, "Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position" . ❏ AT-187, "In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed" . ❏ AT-188, "In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves" . ❏ AT-189, "Large Shock (“N” to “D” Position)" . ❏ AT-192, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position" . ❏ AT-195, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position" . AT-56 Driving tests Part 1 4-3. ❏ AT-197, "Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" . ❏ AT-200, "A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2" . ❏ AT-202, "A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3" . ❏ AT-204, "A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4" . ❏ AT-207, "A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D5" . ❏ AT-209, "A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up" ❏ AT-211, "A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition" . ❏ AT-213, "Lock-up Is Not Released" . ❏ AT-214, "Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle" . Revision: October 2004 AT-48 AT-57 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Part 2 ❏ AT-197, "Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" . ❏ AT-200, "A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2" . ❏ AT-202, "A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3" . ❏ AT-204, "A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4" . A AT-59 B Part 3 Column shift models Floor shift models 4 4-3 ❏ AT-215, "Cannot Be Changed to Manual Mode (Column Shift)" . ❏ AT-215, "A/T Does Not Shift: 5th gear → 4th gear (Floor Shift Models)" . ❏ AT-220, "A/T Does Not Shift: 4th gear → 3rd gear (Floor Shift Models)" . ❏ AT-224, "A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd gear → 2nd gear (Floor Shift Models)" . ❏ AT-228, "A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd gear → 1st gear (Floor Shift Models)" . ❏ AT-233, "Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake" . ❏ Perform self-diagnostics Enter checks for detected items. AT AT-60 ❏ AT-215, "A/T Does Not Shift: 5th gear → 4th gear (Floor Shift Models)" . ❏ AT-220, "A/T Does Not Shift: 4th gear → 3rd gear (Floor Shift Models)" . ❏ AT-224, "A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd gear → 2nd gear (Floor Shift Models)" . ❏ AT-228, "A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd gear → 1st gear (Floor Shift Models)" . ❏ AT-233, "Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake" . ❏ Perform self-diagnostics Enter checks for detected items. E F ❏ AT-109, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" . ❏ AT-134, "DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" . ❏ AT-149, "DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" . ❏ AT-116, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" . ❏ AT-120, "DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE" . ❏ AT-141, "DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" . ❏ AT-145, "DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE" . ❏ AT-157, "DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE" . ❏ AT-153, "DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" . ❏ AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" . ❏ AT-127, "DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" . ❏ AT-132, "DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR" . ❏ AT-136, "DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK" . ❏ AT-139, "DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING" . ❏ AT-100, "DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT" . ❏ AT-124, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" . ❏ AT-114, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" . ❏ AT-97, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . ❏ Battery ❏ Other G H I J K 5 ❏ Inspect each system for items found to be NG in the self-diagnostics and repair or replace the malfunction parts. 6 ❏ Perform all road tests and enter the checks again for the required items. AT-55 7 ❏ For any remaining NG items, perform the “diagnostics procedure” and repair or replace the malfunction parts. See the chart for diagnostics by symptoms. (This chart also contains other symptoms and inspection procedures.) AT-63 8 ❏ Erase the results of the self-diagnostics from the TCM. Revision: October 2004 AT-49 D L AT-40 2005 Titan M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A/T Electrical Parts Location ECS00AWJ WCIA0500E Revision: October 2004 AT-50 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Circuit Diagram ECS00AWK A B AT D E F G H I J K L M BCWA0330E Revision: October 2004 AT-51 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis ECS00AWM A/T FLUID CHECK Fluid Leakage and Fluid Level Check Inspect for fluid leakage and check the fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" . ● Fluid Condition Check Inspect the fluid condition. Fluid condition Conceivable Cause Required Operation Varnished (viscous varnish state) Clutch, brake scorched Replace the ATF and check the A/T main unit and the vehicle for malfunctions (wire harnesses, cooler pipes, etc.) Milky white or cloudy Water in the fluid Replace the ATF and check for places where water is getting in. Large amount of metal powder mixed in Unusual wear of sliding parts within A/T Replace the ATF and check for improper operation of the A/T. SAT638A STALL TEST Stall Test Procedure 1. 2. Inspect the amount of engine oil. Replenish the engine oil if necessary. Drive for about 10 minutes to warm up the vehicle so that the A/ T fluid temperature is 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F). Inspect the amount of ATF. Replenish if necessary. SAT647B 3. Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn. SCIA1224E 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Engine start, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in “D” position. While holding down the foot brake, gradually press down the accelerator pedal. Quickly read off the stall speed, then quickly remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. CAUTION: Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds during this test. Move the selector lever to the “N” position. Cool down the ATF. Revision: October 2004 AT-52 SAT514G 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS CAUTION: Run the engine at idle for at least one minute. Stall speed: A 2,500 - 2,800 rpm Judgement of Stall Test B Selector lever position D H Expected problem location R O Stall rotation ● Forward brake ● Forward one-way clutch ● 1st one-way clutch ● 3rd one-way clutch AT D O H ● Reverse clutch L L ● Engine and torque converter one-way clutch H H ● Line pressure low E O: Stall speed within standard value position H: Stall speed higher than standard value L: Stall speed lower than standard value F Stall test standard value position G Does not shift-up D, M position 1 → 2 Slipping in 2nd, 3rd, 4th gears Direct clutch slippage Does not shift-up D, M position 2 → 3 Slipping in 3rd, 4th, 5th gears High and low reverse clutch slippage Does not shift-up D, M position 3 → 4 Slipping in 4th, 5th gears Input clutch slippage Does not shift-up D, M position 4 → 5 Slipping in 5th gear Front brake slippage H LINE PRESSURE TEST Line Pressure Test Port I J K L SCIA2187E Line Pressure Test Procedure 1. 2. M Inspect the amount of engine oil and replenish if necessary. Drive the car for about 10 minutes to warm it up so that the ATF reaches in range of 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F), then inspect the amount of ATF and replenish if necessary. NOTE: The automatic fluid temperature rises in range of 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F) during 10 minutes of driving. Revision: October 2004 AT-53 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 3. After warming up remove the oil pressure detection plug and install the oil pressure gauge [ST2505S001(J-34301-C)]. CAUTION: When using the oil pressure gauge, be sure to use the Oring attached to the oil pressure detection plug. SCIA5309E 4. Securely engage the parking brake so that the tires do not turn. SCIA1224E 5. 6. Start the engine, then measure the line pressure at both idle and the stall speed. CAUTION: ● Keep the brake pedal pressed all the way down during measurement. ● When measuring the line pressure at the stall speed, refer to AT-52, "STALL TEST" . After the measurements are complete, install the oil pressure detection plug and tighten to the regulation torque below. : 7.3 N·m (0.74 kg-m, 65 in-lb) SAT493G CAUTION: Do not reuse the O-ring. Line Pressure Line pressure [kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)] Engine speed R position D, M position At idle speed 392 - 441 (4.0 - 4.5, 57 - 64) 373 - 422 (3.8 - 4.3, 54 - 61) At stall speed 1,700 - 1,890 (17.3 - 19.3, 247 - 274) 1,310 - 1,500 (13.3 - 15.3, 190 - 218) Revision: October 2004 AT-54 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Judgement of Line Pressure Test Judgement A Possible cause Possible causes include malfunctions in the pressure supply system and low oil pump output. For example Low for all positions (P, R, N, D, M) Idle speed Only low for a specific position B ● Oil pump wear ● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking or spring fatigue ● Oil strainer Þ oil pump Þ pressure regulator valve passage oil leak ● Engine idle speed too low AT Possible causes include an oil pressure leak in a passage or device related to the position after the pressure is distributed by the manual valve. Possible causes include a sensor malfunction or malfunction in the line pressure adjustment function. For example High ● Accelerator pedal position signal malfunction ● ATF temperature sensor malfunction ● Line pressure solenoid malfunction (sticking in “OFF” state, filter clog, cut line) ● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking D E F Possible causes include a sensor malfunction or malfunction in the pressure adjustment function. For example Oil pressure does not rise higher than the oil pressure for idle. Stall speed The pressure rises, but does not enter the standard position. Only low for a specific position ● Accelerator pedal position signal malfunction ● TCM breakdown ● Line pressure solenoid malfunction (shorting, sticking in“ ON” state) ● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking ● Pilot valve sticking or pilot filter clogged G H Possible causes include malfunctions in the pressure supply system and malfunction in the pressure adjustment function. For example ● Accelerator pedal position signal malfunction ● Line pressure solenoid malfunction (sticking, filter clog) ● Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking ● Pilot valve sticking or pilot filter clogged J Possible causes include an oil pressure leak in a passage or device related to the position after the pressure is distributed by the manual valve. ROAD TEST Description ● ● 1. 2. 3. ● ● K L The road test inspects overall performance of the A/T and analyzes possible malfunction causes. The road test is carried out in the following three stages. Check before engine is started. Refer to AT-56 . Check at idle. Refer to AT-56 . Cruise test ● Inspect all the items from Part 1 to Part 3. Refer to AT-57 , AT-59 , AT-60 . Before beginning the road test, check the test procedure and inspection items. Test all inspection items until the symptom is uncovered. Diagnose NG items when all road tests are complete. Revision: October 2004 I AT-55 2005 Titan M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Check Before Engine is Started ECS00AWN 1. CHECK AT CHECK INDICATOR LAMP 1. Park vehicle on level surface. 2. Move selector lever to “P” position. 3. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.) Does AT CHECK indicator lamp light up for about 2 seconds? YES >> 1. Turn ignition switch to "OFF" position. 2. Carry out the self-diagnostics and record all NG items on the diagnostic worksheet. Refer to AT87, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE" . 3. Go to AT-56, "Check at Idle" . NO >> Stop the road test and go to AT-186, "AT CHECK Indicator Lamp does not come on" . Check at Idle ECS00AWO 1. CHECK STARTING THE ENGINE 1. Park vehicle on level surface. 2. Move selector lever to “P” or “N” position. 3. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. 4. Turn ignition switch to “START” position. Does the engine start? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Stop the road test and go to AT-186, "Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position" . 2. CHECK STARTING THE ENGINE 1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. 2. Move selector lever in “D” or “R” position. 3. Turn ignition switch to “START” position. Does the engine start in either position? YES >> Stop the road test and go to AT-186, "Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position" . NO >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK “P” POSITION FUNCTIONS 1. Move selector lever to “P” position. 2. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. 3. Release the parking brake. 4. Push the vehicle forward or backward. 5. Engage the parking brake. When you push the vehicle with disengaging the parking brake, does it move? YES >> Enter a check mark at "In "N" Position Vehicle Moves When Pushed" on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. NO >> GO TO 4. Revision: October 2004 AT-56 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 4. CHECK “N” POSITION FUNCTIONS A 1. Start the engine. 2. Move selector lever to “N” position. B 3. Release the parking brake. Does vehicle move forward or backward? YES >> Enter a check mark at "In "P" Position Vehicle Moves" on the diagnostics worksheet, then conAT tinue the road test. NO >> GO TO 5. 5. CHECK SHIFT SHOCK D 1. Engage the brake. 2. Move selector lever to “D” position. When the transmission is shifted from “N” to “D”, is there an excessive shock? YES >> Enter a check mark at "Large Shock ("N" to "D” Position)" on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. NO >> GO TO 6. 6. CHECK “R” POSITION FUNCTIONS 7. CHECK “D” POSITION FUNCTIONS Cruise Test - Part 1 I K L ECS00AWP 1. CHECK STARTING OUT FROM D1 M Drive the vehicle for about 10 minutes to warm up the engine oil and ATF. Appropriate temperature for the ATF: 50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F) Park the vehicle on a level surface. Move selector lever to “P” position. Start the engine. Move selector lever to “D” position. Press the accelerator pedal about half way down to accelerate the vehicle. With CONSULT-II Read off the gear positions. Starts from D1? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle Cannot be Started From D1” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. Revision: October 2004 H J Inspect whether the vehicle creeps forward when the transmission is put into the “D” position. Does the vehicle move forward in the “D” positions? YES >> Go to AT-57, "Cruise Test - Part 1" , AT-59, "Cruise Test - Part 2" , and AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 3" . NO >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In "D" Position” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. F G 1. Engage the brake. 2. Move selector lever to “R” position. 3. Release the brake for 4 to 5 seconds. Does the vehicle creep backward? YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In "R" Position” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. 1. E AT-57 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 2. CHECK SHIFT-UP D1 → D2 Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D1 → D2) at the appropriate speed. ● Refer to AT-62, "Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears" . With CONSULT-II Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed. Does the A/T shift-up D1 → D2 at the correct speed? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Enter a check mark at “A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. 3. CHECK SHIFT-UP D2 → D3 Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D2 → D3) at the appropriate speed. ● Refer to AT-62, "Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears" . With CONSULT-II Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed. Does the A/T shift-up D2 → D3 at the correct speed? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Enter a check mark at “A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. 4. CHECK SHIFT-UP D3 → D4 Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D3 → D4) at the appropriate speed. ● Refer to AT-62, "Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears" . With CONSULT-II Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed. Does the A/T shift-up D3 → D4 at the correct speed? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Enter a check mark at “A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. 5. CHECK SHIFT-UP D4 → D5 Press down the accelerator pedal about half way and inspect if the vehicle shifts up (D4 → D5) at the appropriate speed. ● Refer to AT-62, "Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears" . With CONSULT-II Read the gear position, throttle degree of opening, and vehicle speed. Does the A/T shift-up D4 → D5 at the correct speed? YES >> GO TO 6. NO >> Enter a check mark at “A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D5” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. Revision: October 2004 AT-58 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 6. CHECK LOCK-UP A When releasing accelerator pedal from D5, check lock-up from D5 to L/U. ● Refer to AT-62, "Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears" . B With CONSULT-II Select “TCC SOLENOID 0.00A” with the “MAIN SIGNAL” mode for A/T. Does it lock-up? AT YES >> GO TO 7. NO >> Enter a check mark at “A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. D CHECK LOCK-UP HOLD 7. E Does it maintain lock-up status? YES >> GO TO 8. NO >> Enter a check mark at “A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. 8. CHECK LOCK-UP RELEASE F G Check lock-up cancellation by depressing brake pedal lightly to decelerate. With CONSULT-II Select “TCC SOLENOID 0.00A” with the “MAIN SIGNAL” mode for A/T. Does lock-up cancel? YES >> GO TO 9. NO >> Enter a check mark at “Lock-up Is Not Released” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. 9. CHECK SHIFT-DOWN D5 → D4 H I J Decelerate by pressing lightly on the brake pedal. With CONSULT-II Read the gear position and engine speed. When the A/T shift-down D5 → D4, does the engine speed drop smoothly back to idle? YES >> 1. Stop the vehicle. 2. Go to Cruise test - Part 2 (Refer to AT-59 ). NO >> Enter a check mark at “Engine Speed Does Not Return to Idle” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. Go to Cruise test - Part 2 (Refer to AT-59 ). Cruise Test - Part 2 ECS00AWQ 1. CHECK STARTING FROM D1 1. 2. Move selector lever the “D” position. Accelerate at half throttle. With CONSULT-II Read the gear position. Does it start from D1? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. Revision: October 2004 AT-59 2005 Titan K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 2. CHECK SHIFT-UP D1 → D2 Press the accelerator pedal down all the way and inspect whether or not the transmission shifts up (D1 → D2) at the correct speed. ● Refer to AT-62, "Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears" . With CONSULT-II Read the gear position, throttle position and vehicle speed. Does the A/T shift-up D1 → D2 at the correct speed? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle Does Not Shift: D1 → D2” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. 3. CHECK SHIFT-UP D2 → D3 Press the accelerator pedal down all the way and inspect whether or not the transmission shifts up (D2 → D3) at the correct speed. ● Refer to AT-62, "Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears" . With CONSULT-II Read the gear position, throttle position and vehicle speed. Does the A/T shift-up D2 → D3 at the correct speed? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle Does Not Shift: D2 → D3” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. 4. CHECK SHIFT-UP D3 → D4 AND ENGINE BRAKE When the transmission changes speed D3 → D4, return the accelerator pedal. Does the A/T shift-up D3 → D4 and apply the engine brake? YES >> 1. Stop the vehicle. 2. See AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 3" . NO >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle Does Not Shift: D3 → D4” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. Cruise Test - Part 3 ECS00AWR 1. IDENTIFY SHIFTER LOCATION Identify the shifter location. Is the shifter located on the steering column? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> GO TO 4. 2. MANUAL MODE FUNCTION Move to manual mode from D position. Does it switch to manual mode? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Continue road test and add check mark to “Cannot Be Changed to Manual Mode (Column Shift)” on diagnostics worksheet. Revision: October 2004 AT-60 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 3. CHECK SHIFT-DOWN A During manual mode driving, move gear selector from M5 → M4 → M3 → M2 → M1. With CONSULT-II B Read the gear position. Is downshifting correctly performed? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not shift” at the corresponding position (5th → 4th, 4th → 3rd, AT 3rd → 2nd, 2nd → 1st) on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. 4. CHECK SHIFT-DOWN D During D5 driving, move gear selector from D → 4 → 3 → 2 → 1. With CONSULT-II Read the gear position. Is downshifting correctly performed? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle does not shift” at the corresponding position (5th → 4th, 4th → 3rd, 3rd → 2nd, 2nd → 1st) on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue the road test. E F 5. CHECK ENGINE BRAKE G Does engine braking effectively reduce speed in M1 position (column shift) or 11 position (floor shift)? YES >> 1. Stop the vehicle. 2. Carry out the self-diagnostics. Refer to AT-87, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE" . NO >> Enter a check mark at “Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake” on the diagnostics worksheet, then continue trouble diagnosis. H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 AT-61 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears ECS00AWS NORMAL MODE Final gear ratio Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) Throttle position D1 →D2 D2 →D3 D3 →D4 D4 →D5 D5 →D4 D4 →D3 D3 →D2 D2 →D1 Full throttle 70 - 74 (44 - 46) 112 - 120 (70 - 75) 176 - 186 (110 - 116) 249 - 259 (155 - 161) 245 - 255 (152 - 159) 166 - 176 (103 - 110) 100 - 108 (62 - 67) 43 - 47 (27 - 30) Half throttle 46 - 50 (29 - 31) 74 - 82 (46 - 51) 103 - 113 (64 - 71) 135 - 145 (84 - 90) 109 - 119 (68 - 74) 69 - 79 (43 - 49) 44 - 52 (28 - 33) 11 - 15 (7 - 10) Full throttle 61 - 65 (38 - 41) 97 - 105 (61 - 66) 153 - 163 (95 - 102) 236 - 246 (147 - 153) 232 - 242 (144 - 151) 143 - 153 (89 - 95) 87 - 95 (54 - 59) 43 - 47 (27 - 30) Half throttle 41 - 45 (26 - 28) 66 - 74 (41 - 46) 89 - 99 (56 - 62) 117 - 127 (73 - 79) 95 - 105 (59 - 66) 59 - 69 (37 - 43) 38 - 46 (24 - 29) 11 - 15 (7 - 10) 2.937 3.357 ● At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening. TOW MODE Final gear ratio Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) Throttle position D1 →D2 D2 →D3 D3 →D4 D4 →D5 D5 →D4 D4 →D3 D3 →D2 D2 →D1 Full throttle 70 - 74 (44 - 46) 112 - 120 (70 - 75) 176 - 186 (110 - 116) 249 - 259 (155 - 161) 245 - 255 (152 - 159) 166 - 176 (103 - 110) 100 - 108 (62 - 67) 43 - 47 (27 - 30) Half throttle 50 - 54 (31 - 34) 81 - 89 (50 - 55) 113 - 123 (70 - 76) 135 - 145 (84 - 90) 109 - 119 (68 - 74) 69 - 79 (43 - 49) 44 - 52 (28 - 33) 11 - 15 (7 - 10) Full throttle 61 - 65 (38 - 41) 97 - 105 (61 - 66) 153 - 163 (95 - 102) 236 - 246 (147 - 153) 232 - 242 (144 - 151) 143 - 153 (89 - 95) 87 - 95 (54 - 59) 43 - 47 (27 - 30) Half throttle 46 - 50 (28 - 31) 72 - 80 (45 - 50) 98 - 108 (61 - 67) 117 - 127 (73 - 79) 95 - 105 (59 - 66) 59 - 69 (37 - 43) 38 - 46 (24 - 29) 11 - 15 (7 - 10) 2.937 3.357 ● At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening. Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Complete Lock-up Final gear ratio Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) Throttle position Closed throttle 2.937 Half throttle Closed throttle 3.357 ECS00AWT Half throttle Lock-up “ON” Lock-up “OFF” 74 - 82 (46 - 51) 71 - 79 (45 - 49) 188 - 196 (117 - 122) 136 - 144 (85 - 90) 65 - 73 (41 - 46) 62 - 70 (39 - 44) 168 - 176 (105 - 110) 118 - 126 (74 - 79) ● At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8 condition. ● At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening. Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Slip Lock-up Final gear ratio Throttle position 2.937 Closed throttle 3.357 ● ECS00AWU Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) Closed throttle Gear position Slip lock-up “ON” Slip lock-up “OFF” 4th 52 - 60 (33 - 38) 49 - 57 (31 - 36) 5th 52 - 60 (33 - 38) 49 - 57 (31 - 36) 4th 46 - 54 (29 - 34) 43 - 51 (27 - 32) 5th 46 - 54 (29 - 34) 43 - 51 (27 - 32) At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8 condition. Revision: October 2004 AT-62 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Symptom Chart ECS00AWV The diagnostics item numbers show the sequence for inspection. Inspect in order from item 1. Overhaul and inspect inside the A/T only if A/T fluid condition is NG. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition Check" . ● ● No. Items Symptom Large shock. (“N” →“ D” position) Refer to AT-189, "Large Shock (“N” to “D” Position)" . 1 Condition 2 Shock is too large when changing D1 → D2 , 11 → 22 or M1 → M2 . ON vehicle OFF vehicle 3 Shock is too large when changing D2 → D3 , 22 → 33 or M2 → M3 . EC-76 2. Engine speed signal AT-114 3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-124 4. Control cable adjustment AT-238 5. ATF temperature sensor AT-127 6. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-166, AT-145 7. CAN communication line AT-97 8. Fluid level and state AT-52 9. Line pressure test AT-53 10. Control valve with TCM AT-250 ON vehicle AT-283 1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-124 2. Control cable adjustment AT-238 3. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-170, AT-149 OFF vehicle Revision: October 2004 AT-114 6. Turbine revolution sensor AT-132 7. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-109, AT-134 8. Fluid level and state AT-52 9. Control valve with TCM AT-250 10. Direct clutch AT-317 1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-124 2. Control cable adjustment AT-238 3. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve AT-172, AT-153 4. CAN communication line AT-97 5. Engine speed signal AT-114 6. Turbine revolution sensor AT-132 7. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-109, AT-134 AT-52 9. Control valve with TCM AT-250 10. High and low reverse clutch AT-315 AT-63 D E F H I AT-97 5. Engine speed signal 8. Fluid level and state AT G 11. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16 .) 4. CAN communication line B Reference page 1. Engine idle speed ON vehicle OFF vehicle Shift Shock Diagnostic Item A 2005 Titan J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS No. Items Symptom Shock is too large when changing D3 → D4 , 33 → 44 or M3 → M4 . 4 Condition ON vehicle OFF vehicle Diagnostic Item 1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-124 2. Control cable adjustment AT-238 3. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve AT-168, AT-141 4. CAN communication line AT-97 5. Engine speed signal AT-114 6. Turbine revolution sensor AT-132 7. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-109, AT-134 8. Fluid level and state AT-52 9. Control valve with TCM AT-250 10. Input clutch AT-305 1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-124 2. Control cable adjustment AT-238 3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-166, AT-145 4. CAN communication line 5 Shift Shock Shock is too large when changing D4 → D5 , 44 → D5 or M4 → M5 . ON vehicle OFF vehicle ON vehicle 6 Shock is too large for downshift when accelerator pedal is pressed. OFF vehicle Revision: October 2004 Reference page AT-97 5. Engine speed signal AT-114 6. Turbine revolution sensor AT-132 7. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-109, AT-134 8. Fluid level and state AT-52 9. Control valve with TCM AT-250 10. Front brake (brake band) AT-271 11. Input clutch AT-305 1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-124 2. Control cable adjustment AT-238 3. CAN communication line AT-97 4. Engine speed signal AT-114 5. Turbine revolution sensor AT-132 6. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-109, AT-134 7. Fluid level and state AT-52 8. Control valve with TCM AT-250 9. Front brake (brake band) AT-271 10. Input clutch AT-305 11. High and low reverse clutch AT-315 12. Direct clutch AT-317 AT-64 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS No. Items Symptom Condition ON vehicle Shock is too large for upshift when accelerator pedal is released. 7 OFF vehicle Shift Shock 8 Shock is too large for lock-up. ON vehicle OFF vehicle ON vehicle 9 Shock is too large during engine brake. OFF vehicle Revision: October 2004 Diagnostic Item Reference page 1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-124 2. Control cable adjustment AT-238 3. Engine speed signal AT-114 4. CAN communication line AT-97 5. Turbine revolution sensor AT-132 6. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-109, AT-134 7. Fluid level and state AT-52 8. Control valve with TCM AT-250 9. Front brake (brake band) AT-271 10. Input clutch AT-305 11. High and low reverse clutch AT-315 12. Direct clutch AT-317 1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-124 2. Control cable adjustment AT-238 3. Engine speed signal AT-114 4. CAN communication line AT-97 5. Turbine revolution sensor AT-132 6. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-109, AT-134 7. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-116 8. Fluid level and state AT-52 9. Control valve with TCM AT-250 10. Torque converter AT-283 1. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-124 2. Control cable adjustment AT-238 3. CAN communication line AT-97 4. Fluid level and state AT-52 5. Control valve with TCM AT-250 6. Front brake (brake band) AT-271 7. Input clutch AT-305 8. High and low reverse clutch AT-315 9. Direct clutch AT-317 AT-65 2005 Titan A B AT D E F G H I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS No. Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level and state Gear does not change from D1 → D2 . Refer to AT-200, "A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2" . 10 ON vehicle OFF vehicle Gear does not change from D2 → D3 . Refer to AT-202, "A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3" . 11 ON vehicle OFF vehicle 12 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR 3. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-170, AT-149 4. Line pressure test AT-53 5. CAN communication line AT-97 6. Control valve with TCM AT-250 7. Direct clutch AT-317 1. Fluid level and state AT-52 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-109, AT-134 3. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve AT-172, AT-153 4. Line pressure test AT-53 5. CAN communication line AT-97 6. Control valve with TCM AT-250 7. High and low reverse clutch AT-315 1. Fluid level and state AT-52 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-109, AT-134 3. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve AT-168, AT-141 4. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-166, AT-145 ON vehicle OFF vehicle 13 Gear does not change from D4 → D5 . Refer to AT-207, "A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D5" . ON vehicle OFF vehicle Revision: October 2004 AT-52 AT-109, AT-134 No Up Shift Gear does not change from D3 → D4 . Refer to AT-204, "A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4" . Reference page 5. Line pressure test AT-53 6. CAN communication line AT-97 7. Control valve with TCM AT-250 8. Input clutch AT-305 1. Fluid level and state AT-52 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-109, AT-134 3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-166, AT-145 4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-170, AT-149 5. Turbine revolution sensor AT-132 6. Line pressure test AT-53 7. CAN communication line AT-97 8. Control valve with TCM AT-250 9. Front brake (brake band) AT-283 10. Input clutch AT-305 AT-66 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS No. Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level and state In D, 4 or M range, does not downshift to 4th gear. Refer to AT-215, "A/T Does Not Shift: 5th gear → 4th gear (Floor Shift Models)" . 14 15 No Down Shift In D, 3 or M range, does not downshift to 3rd gear. Refer to AT-220, "A/T Does Not Shift: 4th gear → 3rd gear (Floor Shift Models)" . OFF vehicle 16 In D, 2 or M range, does not downshift to 2nd gear. Refer to AT-224, "A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd gear → 2nd gear (Floor Shift Models)" . ON vehicle OFF vehicle 17 In D, 1 or M range, does not downshift to 1st gear. Refer to AT-228, "A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd gear → 1st gear (Floor Shift Models)" . ON vehicle OFF vehicle Revision: October 2004 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR 3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-166, AT-145 4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-170, AT-149 5. CAN communication line AT-97 6. Line pressure test AT-53 7. Control valve with TCM AT-250 8. Front brake (brake band) AT-283 9. Input clutch AT-305 1. Fluid level and state AT-52 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-109, AT-134 3. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve AT-168, AT-141 4. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-166, AT-145 ON vehicle A AT-52 AT-109, AT-134 ON vehicle OFF vehicle Reference page 5. CAN communication line AT-97 6. Line pressure test AT-53 7. Control valve with TCM AT-250 8. Input clutch AT-305 1. Fluid level and state AT-52 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-109, AT-134 3. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve AT-172, AT-153 4. CAN communication line AT-97 5. Line pressure test AT-53 6. Control valve with TCM AT-250 7. High and low reverse clutch AT-315 1. Fluid level and state AT-52 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-109, AT-134 3. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-170, AT-149 4. CAN communication line AT-97 5. Line pressure test AT-53 6. Control valve with TCM AT-250 7. Direct clutch AT-317 AT-67 2005 Titan B AT D E F G H I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS No. Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level and state ON vehicle When D or M position, remains in 1st gear. 18 OFF vehicle Slips/Will Not engage 19 When D or M position, remains in 2nd gear. OFF vehicle Revision: October 2004 AT-52 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-109, AT-134 3. Direct clutch solenoid valve AT-149 4. Line pressure test AT-53 5. CAN communication line AT-97 6. Control valve with TCM AT-250 7. 3rd one-way clutch AT-302 8. 1st one-way clutch AT-310 9. Gear system AT-271 10. Reverse brake AT-283 11. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16 .) AT-283 12. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16 .) AT-283 1. Fluid level and state AT-52 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR ON vehicle Reference page AT-109 , AT-134 3. Low coast brake solenoid valve AT-157 4. Line pressure test AT-53 5. CAN communication line AT-97 6. Control valve with TCM AT-250 7. 3rd one-way clutch AT-302 8. Gear system AT-271 9. Direct clutch AT-317 10. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16 .) AT-283 AT-68 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS No. Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level and state 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR ON vehicle When D or M position, remains in 3rd gear. 20 OFF vehicle Slips/Will Not engage ON vehicle 21 When D or M position, remains in 4th gear. OFF vehicle Reference page A AT-52 AT-109, AT-134 B 3. Line pressure test AT-53 4. CAN communication line AT-97 5. Control valve with TCM AT-250 6. 3rd one-way clutch AT-302 7. Gear system AT-271 8. High and low reverse clutch AT-315 9. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16 .) AT-283 E 10. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16 .) AT-283 F 1. Fluid level and state AT-52 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-109, AT-134 3. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve AT-168, AT-141 4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-170,AT149 5. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve AT-172, AT-153 6. Low coast brake solenoid valve AT-157 7. Front brake solenoid valve AT-145 8. Line pressure test AT-53 9. CAN communication line AT-97 10. Control valve with TCM AT-250 11. Input clutch AT-305 12. Gear system AT-271 13. High and low reverse clutch AT-315 14. Direct clutch AT-317 AT D G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 AT-69 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS No. Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level and state ON vehicle When D or M position, remains in 5th gear. 22 OFF vehicle ON vehicle Slips/Will Not Engage 23 Vehicle cannot be started from D1 . Refer to AT-197, "Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" . OFF vehicle 24 Does not lock-up. Refer to AT-209, "A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up" . ON vehicle OFF vehicle Revision: October 2004 Reference page AT-52 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-109, AT-134 3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-166, AT-145 4. Line pressure test AT-53 5. CAN communication line AT-97 6. Control valve with TCM AT-250 7. Front brake (brake band) AT-283 8. Input clutch AT-305 9. Gear system AT-271 10. High and low reverse clutch AT-315 1. Fluid level and state AT-52 2. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-124 3. Line pressure test AT-53 4. CAN communication line AT-97 5. Control valve with TCM AT-250 6. Torque converter AT-283 7. Oil pump assembly AT-300 8. 3rd one-way clutch AT-302 9. 1st one-way clutch AT-310 10. Gear system AT-271 11. Reverse brake AT-283 12. Forward one-way clutch (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16 .) AT-283 13. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16 .) AT-283 1. Fluid level and state AT-52 2. Line pressure test AT-53 3. Engine speed signal AT-114 4. Turbine revolution sensor AT-132 5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-116 6. CAN communication line AT-97 7. Control valve with TCM AT-250 8. Torque converter AT-283 9. Oil pump assembly AT-300 AT-70 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS No. Items Symptom Does not hold lock-up condition. Refer to AT-211, "A/T Does Not Hold Lockup Condition" . 25 Condition ON vehicle OFF vehicle Lock-up is not released. Refer to AT-213, "Lock-up Is Not Released" . 26 Slips/Will Not engage ON vehicle OFF vehicle ON vehicle 27 No shock at all or the clutch slips when vehicle changes speed D1 → D2 , 11 → 22 or M1 → M2 . OFF vehicle Revision: October 2004 Diagnostic Item Reference page 1. Fluid level and state AT-52 2. Line pressure test AT-53 3. Engine speed signal AT-114 4. Turbine revolution sensor AT-132 5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-116 6. CAN communication line AT-97 7. Control valve with TCM AT-250 8. Torque converter AT-283 9. Oil pump assembly AT-300 1. Fluid level and state AT-52 2. Line pressure test AT-53 3. Engine speed signal AT-114 4. Turbine revolution sensor AT-132 5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-116 6. CAN communication line AT-97 7. Control valve with TCM AT-250 8. Torque converter AT-283 9. Oil pump assembly AT-300 1. Fluid level and state AT-52 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-109, AT-134 3. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-170, AT-149 4. CAN communication line AT-97 5. Line pressure test AT-53 6. Control valve with TCM AT-250 7. Torque converter AT-283 8. Oil pump assembly AT-300 9. 3rd one-way clutch AT-302 10. Gear system AT-271 11. Direct clutch AT-317 12. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16 .) AT-283 AT-71 2005 Titan A B AT D E F G H I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS No. Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level and state ON vehicle No shock at all or the clutch slips when vehicle changes speed D2 → D3 , 22 → 33 or M2 → M3 . 28 OFF vehicle Slips/Will Not engage 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR 3. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve AT-172, AT-153 4. CAN communication line AT-97 5. Line pressure test AT-53 6. Control valve with TCM AT-250 7. Torque converter AT-283 8. Oil pump assembly AT-300 9. 3rd one-way clutch AT-302 10. Gear system AT-271 11. High and low reverse clutch AT-315 12. Forward one- way clutch (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16 .) AT-283 13. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16 .) AT-283 OFF vehicle Revision: October 2004 AT-52 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-109, AT-134 3. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve AT-168, AT-141 4. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-166, AT-145 ON vehicle 29 AT-52 AT-109, AT-134 1. Fluid level and state No shock at all or the clutch slips when vehicle changes speed D3 → D4 , 33 → 44 or M3 → M4 . Reference page 5. CAN communication line AT-97 6. Line pressure test AT-53 7. Control valve with TCM AT-250 8. Torque converter AT-283 9. Oil pump assembly AT-300 10. Input clutch AT-305 11. Gear system AT-271 12. High and low reverse clutch AT-315 13. Direct clutch AT-317 AT-72 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS No. Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level and state 30 OFF vehicle Slips/Will Not engage 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR 3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-166, AT-145 4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-170, AT-149 5. CAN communication line AT-97 6. Line pressure test AT-53 7. Control valve with TCM AT-250 8. Torque converter AT-283 9. Oil pump assembly AT-300 10. Front brake (brake band) AT-283 11. Input clutch AT-305 12. Gear system AT-271 13. High and low reverse clutch AT-315 1. Fluid level and state AT-52 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-109, AT-134 3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-166, AT-145 4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-170, AT-149 ON vehicle 31 When you press the accelerator pedal and shift speed D5 → D4 , D5 → 44 or M5 →M4 the engine idles or the transmission slips. OFF vehicle A AT-52 AT-109, AT-134 ON vehicle No shock at all or the clutch slips when vehicle changes speed D4 → D5 , 44 → D5 or M4 → M5 . Reference page 5. CAN communication line AT-97 6. Line pressure test AT-53 7. Control valve with TCM AT-250 8. Torque converter AT-283 9. Oil pump assembly AT-300 10. Input clutch AT-305 11. Gear system AT-271 12. High and low reverse clutch AT-315 13. Direct clutch AT-317 B AT D E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 AT-73 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS No. Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level and state 32 OFF vehicle Slips/Will Not engage 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR 3. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve AT-168, AT-141 4. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-166, AT-145 5. CAN communication line AT-97 6. Line pressure test AT-53 7. Control valve with TCM AT-250 8. Torque converter AT-283 9. Oil pump assembly AT-300 10. 3rd one-way clutch AT-302 11. Gear system AT-271 12. High and low reverse clutch AT-315 13. Forward one- way clutch (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16 .) AT-283 14. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16 .) AT-283 1. Fluid level and state AT-52 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-109, AT-134 3. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve AT-172, AT-153 4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-170, AT-149 ON vehicle 33 When you press the accelerator pedal and shift speed D3 → D2 , 33 → 22 or M3 →M2 the engine idles or the transmission slips. OFF vehicle Revision: October 2004 AT-52 AT-109, AT-134 ON vehicle When you press the accelerator pedal and shift speed D4 → D3 , 44 → 33 or M4 →M3 the engine idles or the transmission slips. Reference page 5. CAN communication line AT-97 6. Line pressure test AT-53 7. Control valve with TCM AT-250 8. Torque converter AT-283 9. Oil pump assembly AT-300 10. 3rd one-way clutch AT-302 11. Gear system AT-271 12. Direct clutch AT-317 13. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16 .) AT-283 AT-74 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS No. Items Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level and state ON vehicle When you press the accelerator pedal and shift speed D2 → D1 , 22 → 11 or M2 →M1 the engine idles or the transmission slips. 34 OFF vehicle Slips/Will Not Engage ON vehicle 35 With selector lever in D position, acceleration is extremely poor. OFF vehicle Revision: October 2004 Reference page AT-52 2. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-109, AT-134 3. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-170, AT-149 4. CAN communication line AT-97 5. Line pressure test AT-53 6. Control valve with TCM AT-250 7. Torque converter AT-283 8. Oil pump assembly AT-300 9. 3rd one-way clutch AT-302 10. 1st one-way clutch AT-310 11. Gear system AT-271 12. Reverse brake AT-283 13. Forward one- way clutch (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16 .) AT-283 14. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16 .) AT-283 1. Fluid level and state AT-52 2. Line pressure test AT-53 3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-124 4. CAN communication line AT-97 5. PNP switch AT-105 6. Control cable adjustment AT-238 7. Control valve with TCM AT-250 8. Torque converter AT-283 9. Oil pump assembly AT-300 10. 1st one-way clutch AT-310 11. Gear system AT-271 12. Reverse brake AT-283 B AT D E F G H I J K L M 13. Forward one- way clutch (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16 .) AT-283 14. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16 .) AT-283 AT-75 A 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS No. Items Symptom Condition ON vehicle With selector lever in R position, acceleration is extremely poor. 36 OFF vehicle ON vehicle 37 Slips/Will Not Engage While starting off by accelerating in 1st, engine races or slippage occurs. OFF vehicle ON vehicle Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level and state AT-52 2. Line pressure test AT-53 3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-124 4. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve AT-172, AT-153 5. CAN communication line AT-97 6. PNP switch AT-105 7. Control cable adjustment AT-238 8. Control valve with TCM AT-250 9. Gear system AT-271 10. Output shaft AT-283 11. Reverse brake AT-283 1. Fluid level and state AT-52 2. Line pressure test AT-53 3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-124 4. CAN communication line AT-97 5. Control valve with TCM AT-250 6. Torque converter AT-283 7. Oil pump assembly AT-300 8. 3rd one-way clutch AT-302 9. 1st one-way clutch AT-310 10. Gear system AT-271 11. Reverse brake AT-283 12. Forward one- way clutch (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16 .) AT-283 13. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16 .) AT-283 1. Fluid level and state AT-52 2. Line pressure test AT-53 3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-124 4. CAN communication line AT-97 5. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve 38 While accelerating in 2nd, engine races or slippage occurs. OFF vehicle Revision: October 2004 Reference page AT-170, AT-149 6. Control valve with TCM AT-250 7. Torque converter AT-283 8. Oil pump assembly AT-300 9. 3rd one-way clutch AT-302 10. Gear system AT-271 11. Direct clutch AT-317 12. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16 .) AT-283 AT-76 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS No. Items Symptom Condition ON vehicle Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level and state AT-52 2. Line pressure test AT-53 3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-124 4. CAN communication line AT-97 5. ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve While accelerating in 3rd, engine races or slippage occurs. 39 OFF vehicle Slips/Will Not Engage ON vehicle 40 While accelerating in 4th, engine races or slippage occurs. OFF vehicle Reference page AT-172, AT-153 6. Control valve with TCM AT-250 7. Torque converter AT-283 8. Oil pump assembly AT-300 9. 3rd one-way clutch AT-302 10. Gear system AT-271 11. High and low reverse clutch AT-315 12. Forward one- way clutch (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16 .) AT-283 13. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16 .) AT-283 1. Fluid level and state AT-52 2. Line pressure test AT-53 3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-124 4. CAN communication line A B AT D E F AT-97 5. ATF pressure switch 3 and input clutch solenoid valve AT-168, AT-141 6. Control valve with TCM AT-250 7. Torque converter AT-283 8. Oil pump assembly AT-300 9. Input clutch AT-305 10. Gear system AT-271 11. High and low reverse clutch AT-315 12. Direct clutch AT-317 G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 AT-77 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS No. Items Symptom Condition ON vehicle Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level and state AT-52 2. Line pressure test AT-53 3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-124 4. CAN communication line AT-97 5. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve While accelerating in 5th, engine races or slippage occurs. 41 OFF vehicle ON vehicle 42 Slips at lock-up. Slips/Will Not Engage OFF vehicle 43 OFF vehicle Revision: October 2004 AT-166, AT-145 6. Control valve with TCM AT-250 7. Torque converter AT-283 8. Oil pump assembly AT-300 9. Front brake (brake band) AT-283 10. Input clutch AT-305 11. Gear system AT-271 12. High and low reverse clutch AT-315 1. Fluid level and state AT-52 2. Line pressure test AT-53 3. Engine speed signal AT-114 4. Turbine revolution sensor AT-132 5. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-116 6. CAN communication line AT-97 7. Control valve with TCM AT-250 8. Torque converter AT-283 9. Oil pump assembly AT-300 1. Fluid level and state AT-52 2. Line pressure test AT-53 3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-124 4. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-170, AT-149 5. PNP switch AT-105 6. CAN communication line AT-97 7. Control cable adjustment AT-238 8. Control valve with TCM AT-250 9. Torque converter AT-283 10. Oil pump assembly AT-300 11. 1st one-way clutch AT-310 12. Gear system AT-271 13. Reverse brake AT-283 14. Direct clutch AT-317 15. Forward one- way clutch (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16 .) AT-283 16. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16 .) AT-283 ON vehicle No creep at all. Refer to AT-192, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position" , AT-195, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position" Reference page AT-78 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS No. Items Symptom Condition ON vehicle Vehicle cannot run in all positions. 44 OFF vehicle ON vehicle 45 Slips/Will Not Engage With selector lever in D position, driving is not possible. OFF vehicle ON vehicle With selector lever in R position, driving is not possible. 46 OFF vehicle 47 Others Shift point is high in D position. Revision: October 2004 ON vehicle Diagnostic Item Reference page 1. Fluid level and state AT-52 2. Line pressure test AT-53 3. PNP switch AT-105 4. Control cable adjustment AT-238 5. Control valve with TCM AT-250 6. Oil pump assembly AT-300 7. Gear system AT-271 8. Output shaft AT-283 1. Fluid level and state AT-52 2. Line pressure test AT-53 3. PNP switch AT-105 4. Control cable adjustment AT-238 5. Control valve with TCM AT-250 6. Torque converter AT-283 7. Oil pump assembly AT-300 8. 1st one-way clutch AT-310 9. Gear system AT-271 10. Reverse brake AT-283 11. Forward one- way clutch (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16 .) AT-283 12. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16 .) AT-283 1. Fluid level and state AT-52 2. Line pressure test AT-53 3. PNP switch AT-105 4. Control cable adjustment AT-238 5. Control valve with TCM AT-250 6. Gear system AT-271 7. Output shaft AT-283 B AT D E F G H I J 8. Reverse brake AT-283 1. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-109, AT-134 2. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-124 3. CAN communication line AT-97 4. ATF temperature sensor AT-127 5. Control valve with TCM AT-250 AT-79 A 2005 Titan K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS No. Items Symptom Shift point is low in D position. 48 Judder occurs during lock-up. 49 ON vehicle ON vehicle Strange noise in “R” position. Others OFF vehicle ON vehicle 51 Strange noise in “N” position. OFF vehicle ON vehicle 52 Strange noise in “D” position. OFF vehicle Revision: October 2004 Reference page 1. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-109, AT-134 2. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-124 3. CAN communication line AT-97 4. Control valve with TCM AT-250 1. Fluid level and state AT-52 2. Engine speed signal AT-114 3. Turbine revolution sensor AT-132 4. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-109, AT-134 5. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-124 6. CAN communication line AT-97 ON vehicle OFF vehicle 50 Diagnostic Item Condition 7. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-116 8. Control valve with TCM AT-250 9. Torque converter AT-283 1. Fluid level and state AT-52 2. Engine speed signal AT-114 3. CAN communication line AT-97 4. Control valve with TCM AT-250 5. Torque converter AT-283 6. Oil pump assembly AT-300 7. Gear system AT-271 8. High and low reverse clutch AT-315 9. Reverse brake AT-283 1. Fluid level and state AT-52 2. Engine speed signal AT-114 3. CAN communication line AT-97 4. Control valve with TCM AT-250 5. Torque converter AT-283 6. Oil pump assembly AT-300 7. Gear system AT-271 1. Fluid level and state AT-52 2. Engine speed signal AT-114 3. CAN communication line AT-97 4. Control valve with TCM AT-250 5. Torque converter AT-283 6. Oil pump assembly AT-300 7. Gear system AT-271 8. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16 .) AT-283 AT-80 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS No. Items Symptom Vehicle dose not decelerate by engine brake. Refer to AT-233, "Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake" . 53 Condition ON vehicle OFF vehicle ON vehicle 54 Others Engine brake does not operate in “2” position. OFF vehicle ON vehicle 55 Engine brake does not operate in “1” position. OFF vehicle Diagnostic Item Reference page 1. PNP switch AT-105 2. Fluid level and state AT-52 3. Control cable adjustment AT-238 4. 1st position switch AT-233 5. ATF pressure switch 5 AT-170 6. CAN communication line AT-97 7. Control valve with TCM AT-250 8. Input clutch AT-305 9. High and low reverse clutch AT-315 10. Direct clutch AT-317 1. PNP switch AT-105 2. Fluid level and state AT-52 3. Control cable adjustment AT-238 5. ATF pressure switch 6 AT-172 6. CAN communication line AT-97 7. Control valve with TCM AT-250 8. Front brake (brake band) AT-283 9. Input clutch AT-305 10. High and low reverse clutch AT-315 1. PNP switch AT-105 2. Fluid level and state AT-52 3. Control cable adjustment AT-238 4. 1st position switch AT-233 5. ATF pressure switch 5 AT-170 6. CAN communication line AT-97 7. Control valve with TCM AT-250 8. Input clutch AT-305 9. High and low reverse clutch AT-315 10. Direct clutch AT-317 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 AT-81 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS No. Items Symptom Condition ON vehicle 56 Maximum speed low. OFF vehicle Others 57 Extremely large creep. ON vehicle OFF vehicle 58 59 With selector lever in P position, vehicle does not enter parking condition or, with selector lever in another position, parking condition is not cancelled. Refer to AT-187, "In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed" . Vehicle runs with transmission in “ P” position. ON vehicle OFF vehicle ON vehicle OFF vehicle Revision: October 2004 Diagnostic Item Reference page 1. Fluid level and state AT-52 2. Line pressure test AT-53 3. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-124 4. CAN communication line AT-97 5. Direct clutch solenoid valve AT-149 6. Control valve with TCM AT-250 7. Torque converter AT-283 8. Oil pump assembly AT-300 9. Input clutch AT-305 10. Gear system AT-271 11. High and low reverse clutch AT-315 12. Direct clutch AT-317 13. Forward one- way clutch (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16 .) AT-283 14 Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16 .) AT-283 1. Engine idle speed EC-76 2. CAN communication line AT-97 3. ATF pressure switch 5 AT-170 4. Torque converter AT-283 1. PNP switch AT-105 2. Control cable adjustment AT-238 3. Parking pawl components AT-271 1. PNP switch AT-105 2. Fluid level and state AT-52 3. Control cable adjustment AT-238 4. Control valve with TCM AT-250 5. Parking pawl components AT-271 6. Gear system AT-271 AT-82 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS No. Items Symptom Condition ON vehicle Vehicle runs with transmission in “N” position. Refer to AT-188, "In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves" . 60 Engine does not start in “N” or “P” position. Refer to AT-186, "Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position" . 61 OFF vehicle ON vehicle Diagnostic Item 1. PNP switch AT-105 2. Fluid level and state AT-52 3. Control cable adjustment AT-238 4. Control valve with TCM AT-250 5. Input clutch AT-305 6. Gear system AT-271 7. Direct clutch AT-317 8. Reverse brake AT-283 9. Forward one- way clutch (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16 .) AT-283 10. Forward brake (Parts behind drum support is impossible to perform inspection by disassembly. Refer to AT-15 , AT-16 .) AT-283 62 ON vehicle ON vehicle 63 Engine stall. OFF vehicle 64 Engine stalls when select lever shifted “N” → “D”, “R”. ON vehicle OFF vehicle Revision: October 2004 PG-4, SC10 2. Control cable adjustment AT-238 3. PNP switch AT-105 1. Ignition switch and starter PG-4, SC10 2. Control cable adjustment AT-238 3. PNP switch AT-105 1. Fluid level and state AT-52 2. Engine speed signal AT-114 3. Turbine revolution sensor AT-132 4. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-116 5. CAN communication line AT-97 6. Control valve with TCM AT-250 7. Torque converter AT-283 1. Fluid level and state AT-52 2. Engine speed signal AT-114 3. Turbine revolution sensor AT-132 4. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-116 5. CAN communication line AT-97 6. Control valve with TCM AT-250 7. Torque converter AT-283 AT-83 A B AT D E F 1. Ignition switch and starter Others Engine starts in positions other than “N” or “P”. Reference page 2005 Titan G H I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS No. Items Symptom Condition Reference page Diagnostic Item 1. Fluid level and state 65 Engine speed does not return to idle. Refer to AT-214, "Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle" . Others ON vehicle OFF vehicle AT-52 2. ATF pressure switch 5 and direct clutch solenoid valve AT-170, AT-149 3. ATF pressure switch 1 and front brake solenoid valve AT-166, AT-145 4. Accelerator pedal position sensor AT-124 5. Vehicle speed sensor A/T and vehicle speed sensor MTR AT-109, AT-134 6. CAN communication line AT-97 7. Control valve with TCM AT-250 8. Front brake (brake band) AT-283 9. Direct clutch AT-317 TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values ECS00AWW A/T ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT SCIA1658E TCM INSPECTION TABLE Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground. Terminal Wire Item Condition No. color Data (Approx.) 1 P Power supply (Memory back-up) Always Battery voltage 2 P Power supply (Memory back-up) Always Battery voltage 3 L CAN-H 4 V K-line (CONSULTII signal) 5 B Ground 6 7 8 BR *1 Y/R *2 R P – – The terminal is connected to the data link connector for CONSULT-II. Always – 0V – Battery voltage – 0V Selector lever in “R” position. 0V Selector lever in other positions. Battery voltage Power supply Back-up lamp relay CAN-L Revision: October 2004 – AT-84 – 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Terminal No. Wire color 9 B/R 10 B Item Condition Starter relay Data (Approx.) Selector lever in “N”,“ P” positions. Battery voltage Selector lever in other positions. 0V Ground Always A B 0V *1: Column shift *2: Floor shift AT CONSULT-II FUNCTION (A/T) ECS00CBV CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. D FUNCTION TCM diagnostic mode Description E WORK SUPPORT Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the TCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the TCM and received data is displayed. SELF-DIAG RESULTS Displays TCM self-diagnosis results. DATA MONITOR Displays TCM input/output data in real time. F CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. ACTIVE TEST Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. FUNCTION TEST Conducted by CONSULT-II instead of a technician to determine whether each system is “OK” or “NG”. ECU PART NUMBER TCM part number can be read. G CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE I NOTICE: 1. The CONSULT-II electrically displays shift timing and lock-up timing (that is, operation timing of each solenoid). Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the CONSULT-II display. If the difference is noticeable, mechanical parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunctioning. Check mechanical parts using applicable diagnostic procedures. 2. Shift schedule (which implies gear position) displayed on CONSULT-II and that indicated in Service Manual may differ slightly. This occurs because of the following reasons: – Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance, – Shift schedule indicated in Service Manual refers to the point where shifts start, and – Gear position displayed on CONSULT-II indicates the point where shifts are completed. 3. Display of solenoid valves on CONSULT-II changes at the start of shifting, while gear position is displayed upon completion of shifting (which is computed by TCM). Item name Condition ATF TEMP SE 1 ATF TEMP SE 2 TCC SOLENOID SLCT LVR POSI Revision: October 2004 H Display value (Approx.) 2.2 - 1.8 - 0.6 V 0°C (32° F) - 20°C (68°F) - 80°C (176°F) 2.2 - 1.7 - 0.45 V When perform slip lock-up 0.2 - 0.4 A When perform lock-up 0.4 - 0.6 A Selector lever in “N”,“P” position. N/P Selector lever in “R” position. R Selector lever in “D” position. D Selector lever in “4” position. 4 Selector lever in “3” position. 3 Selector lever in “2” position. 2 Selector lever in “1” position. 1 AT-85 2005 Titan J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Item name Condition Display value (Approx.) VHCL/S SE·A/T During driving Approximately matches the speedometer reading. ENGINE SPEED Engine running Closely matches the tachometer reading. LINE PRES SOL During driving 0.2 - 0.6 A TURBINE REV During driving (lock-up ON) Approximately matches the engine speed. VHCL/S SE·MTR During driving Approximately matches the speedometer reading. Front brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 ON Front brake disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 OFF Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 ON Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 OFF Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 ON Input clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 OFF Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 ON Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 OFF High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT20 ON High and low reverse clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 OFF Input clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 0.6 - 0.8 A Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 0 - 0.05 A Front brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 0.6 - 0.8 A Front brake disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 0 - 0.05 A Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 0.6 - 0.8 A Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 0 - 0.05 A High and low reverse clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 0.6 - 0.8 A High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT20 0 - 0.05 A Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 ON Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 OFF Selector lever in “N”,“P” position. ON ATF PRES SW 1 ATF PRES SW 2 ATF PRES SW 3 ATF PRES SW 5 ATF PRES SW 6 I/C SOLENOID FR/B SOLENOID D/C SOLENOID HLR/C SOL ON OFF SOL STARTER RELAY ACCELE POSI THROTTLE POSI CLSD THL POS W/O THL POS BRAKE SW Revision: October 2004 Selector lever in other position. OFF Released accelerator pedal. 0.0/8 Fully depressed accelerator pedal. 8/8 Released accelerator pedal. 0.0/8 Fully depressed accelerator pedal. 8/8 Released accelerator pedal. ON Fully depressed accelerator pedal. OFF Fully depressed accelerator pedal. ON Released accelerator pedal. OFF Depressed brake pedal. ON Released brake pedal. OFF AT-86 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE A CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication. B ● For details, refer to the separate “CONSULT-II Operations Manual”. 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. AT 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector, which is located in instrument lower panel on driver side. D BDIA0013E 3. 4. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. E F G H BCIA0029E 5. 6. Touch “A/T”. If “A/T” or “ENGINE” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service procedure. I J K L BCIA0030E SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE Operation Procedure After performing “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II)” (Refer to AT-87 ), place check marks for results on the AT-47, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" . Reference pages are provided following the items. 1. Perform “CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE”. Refer to AT-87, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE" . Revision: October 2004 AT-87 2005 Titan M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 2. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. Display shows malfunction experienced since the last erasing operation. BCIA0031E Display Items List X: Applicable, —: Not applicable Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) CAN COMM CIRCUIT Malfunction is detected when... TCM selfdiagnosis OBD-II (DTC) “A/T” with CONSULT-II MIL indicator lamp*1, “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II or GST ● When a malfunction is detected in CAN communications U1000 U1000 ● If this signal is ON other than in P or N position, this is judged to be a malfunction. (And if it is OFF in P or N position, this too is judged to be a malfunction.) P0615 — ● TCM is malfunctioning P0700 P0700 ● PNP switch 1-4 signals input with impossible pattern ● P position is detected from N position without any other position being detected in between. P0705 P0705 ● Signal from vehicle speed sensor A/T (Revolution sensor) not input due to cut line or the like ● Unexpected signal input during running P0720 P0720 ● After ignition switch is turned ON, unexpected signal input from vehicle speed sensor MTR before the vehicle starts moving ● TCM does not receive the CAN communication signal from the ECM. P0725 — ● Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to cut line, short, or the like P0740 P0740 ● A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good. ● TCM detects as irregular by comparing difference value with slip rotation. P0744 P0744*2 ● Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to cut line, short, or the like TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. P0745 P0745 ● TCM·RAM ● TCM memory (RAM) is malfunctioning. P1702 — TCM·ROM ● TCM memory (ROM) is malfunctioning. P1703 — ● TCM does not receive the proper accelerator pedal position signals (input by CAN communication) from ECM. P1705 — ● During running, the ATF temperature sensor signal voltage is excessively high or low P1710 P0710 ● TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor. TCM detects an irregularity only at position of 4th gear for turbine revolution sensor 2. P1716 P1716 ● STARTER RELAY/CIRC TCM PNP SW/CIRC VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT (Revolution sensor) ENGINE SPEED SIG TCC SOLENOID/CIRC A/T TCC S/V FNCTN L/PRESS SOL/CIRC TP SEN/CIRC A/T ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC TURBINE REV S/CIRC Revision: October 2004 AT-88 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) Malfunction is detected when... ● VEH SPD SE/CIR·MTR OBD-II (DTC) “A/T” with CONSULT-II MIL indicator lamp*1, “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II or GST P1721 — ● Unexpected signal input during running ● Except during shift change, the gear position and ATF pressure switch states are monitored and comparative judgement made. P1730 P1730 Each ATF pressure switch and solenoid current is monitored and if a pattern is detected having engine braking 1st gear other than in the “M1” or “1” position, a malfunction is detected. P1731 — A/T INTERLOCK ● A/T 1ST E/BRAKING ● Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to functional malfunction, cut line, short, or the like ● TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. ● TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 3 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) ● TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 3 is irregular during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) ● Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to functional malfunction, cut line, short, or the like ● TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. ● TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 1 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) I/C SOLENOID/CIRC I/C SOLENOID FNCTN FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC FR/B SOLENOID FNCT ● Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to cut line, short, or the like ● TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. ● TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 5 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) ● TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 5 is irregular during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) ● Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to functional malfunction, cut line, short, or the like ● TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. D/C SOLENOID FNCTN HLR/C SOL/CIRC AT-89 A B AT D E F P1752 P1752 G P1754 P1754*2 H I P1757 P1757 J K P1759 P1759*2 TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 1 is irregular during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) ● D/C SOLENOID/CIRC Revision: October 2004 Signal (CAN communication) from vehicle speed sensor MTR not input due to cut line or the like TCM selfdiagnosis L P1762 P1762 P1764 P1764*2 P1767 P1767 2005 Titan M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) Malfunction is detected when... LC/B SOLENOID FNCT MANU MODE SW/CIRC “A/T” with CONSULT-II MIL indicator lamp*1, “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II or GST P1769 P1769*2 P1772 P1772 P1774 P1774*2 TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 6 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) ● TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 6 is irregular during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) ● Normal voltage not applied to solenoid due to functional malfunction, cut line, short, or the like ● TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. ● Condition of ATF pressure switch 2 is different from monitor value, and relation between gear position and actual gear ratio is irregular. ● When an impossible pattern of switch signals is detected, a malfunction is detected. P1815 — ● TCM detects that actual gear ratio is normal, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 1 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) P1841 — TCM detects that actual gear ratio is normal, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 3 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) P1843 — TCM detects that actual gear ratio is normal, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 5 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) P1845 — TCM detects that actual gear ratio is normal, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 6 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) P1846 — X X ATF PRES SW 1/CIRC ● ATF PRES SW 3/CIRC ● ATF PRES SW 5/CIRC ● ATF PRES SW 6/CIRC NO DTC IS DETECTED FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED OBD-II (DTC) ● HLR/C SOL FNCTN LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC TCM selfdiagnosis ● No NG item has been detected. *1: Refer to AT-42, "Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)" . *2: These malfunctions cannot be displayed MIL if another malfunction is assigned to MIL. How to Erase Self-diagnostic Results 1. 2. Perform “CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE”. Refer to AT87, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE" . Touch “SELF-DAIG RESULTS”. BCIA0031E Revision: October 2004 AT-90 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 3. Touch “ERASE”. (The self-diagnostic results will be erased.) A B AT PCIA0061E D DATA MONITOR MODE Operation Procedure 1. 2. Perform “CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE”. Refer to AT-87, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE" . Touch “DATA MONITOR”. NOTE: When malfunction is detected, CONSULT-II performs “REAL-TIME DIAGNOSIS”. Also, any malfunction detected while in this mode will be displayed at real time. E F G H I BCIA0031E Display Items List X: Standard, —: Not applicable J Monitor Item Selection ECU INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU VHCL/S SE·A/T (km/h) X X X VHCL/S SE·MTR (km/h) X — X ACCELE POSI (0.0/8) X — X Accelerator pedal position signal Degree of opening for accelerator recognized by the TCM For fail-safe operation, the specific value used for control is displayed. Monitored item (Unit) Remarks K Revolution sensor L THROTTLE POSI (0.0/8) X X X CLSD THL POS (ON-OFF display) X — X W/O THL POS (ON-OFF display) X — X BRAKE SW (ON-OFF display) X — X Stop lamp switch GEAR — X X Gear position recognized by the TCM updated after gear-shifting ENGINE SPEED (rpm) X X X TURBINE REV (rpm) X X X OUTPUT REV (rpm) X X X GEAR RATIO — X X TC SLIP SPEED (rpm) — X X F SUN GW REV (rpm) — — X Revision: October 2004 AT-91 Signal input with CAN communications Difference between engine speed and torque converter input shaft speed 2005 Titan M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Monitor Item Selection ECU INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU F CARR GR REV (rpm) — — X ATF TEMP SE 1 (V) X — X ATF TEMP SE 2 (V) X — X ATF TEMP 1 (°C) — X X ATF TEMP 2 (°C) — X X BATTERY VOLT (V) X — X ATF PRES SW 1 (ON-OFF display) X X X (for FR/B solenoid) ATF PRES SW 2 (ON-OFF display) X X X (for LC/B solenoid) ATF PRES SW 3 (ON-OFF display) X X X (for I/C solenoid) ATF PRES SW 5 (ON-OFF display) X X X (for D/C solenoid) ATF PRES SW 6 (ON-OFF display) X X X (for HLR/C solenoid) PNP SW 1 (ON-OFF display) X — X PNP SW 2 (ON-OFF display) X — X PNP SW 3 (ON-OFF display) X — X PNP SW 4 (ON-OFF display) X — X 1 POSITION SW (ON-OFF display) X — X Monitored item (Unit) Remarks SLCTLVR POSI — X X Selector lever position is recognized by the TCM. For fail-safe operation, the specific value used for control is displayed. OD CONT SW (ON-OFF display) X — X 4th position switch POWER SHIFT SW (ON-OFF display) X — X Not mounted but displayed. HOLD SW (ON-OFF display) X — X MANU MODE SW (ON-OFF display) X — X NON M-MODE SW (ON-OFF display) X — X UP SW LEVER (ON-OFF display) X — X DOWN SW LEVER (ON-OFF display) X — X SFT UP ST SW (ON-OFF display) — — X SFT DWN ST SW (ON-OFF display) — — X ASCD·OD CUT (ON-OFF display) — — X ASCD·CRUISE (ON-OFF display) — — X ABS SIGNAL (ON-OFF display) — — X ACC OD CUT (ON-OFF display) — — X ACC SIGNAL (ON-OFF display) — — X TCS GR/P KEEP (ON-OFF display) — — X TCS SIGNAL 2 (ON-OFF display) — — X TCS SIGNAL 1 (ON-OFF display) — — X TCC SOLENOID (A) — X X LINE PRES SOL (A) — X X I/C SOLENOID (A) — X X FR/B SOLENOID (A) — X X D/C SOLENOID (A) — X X HLR/C SOL (A) — X X Revision: October 2004 AT-92 Not mounted but displayed. 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Monitor Item Selection ECU INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU ON OFF SOL (ON-OFF display) — — X TCC SOL MON (A) — — X L/P SOL MON (A) — — X I/C SL MON (A) — — X FR/B SOL MON (A) — — X D/C SOL MON (A) — — X HLR/C SOL MON (A) — — X ONOFF SOL MON (ON-OFF display) — — X P POSI IND (ON-OFF display) — — X R POSI IND (ON-OFF display) — — X N POSI IND (ON-OFF display) — — X D POSI IND (ON-OFF display) — — X 4TH POSI IND (ON-OFF display) — — X 3RD POSI IND (ON-OFF display) — — X 2ND POSI IND (ON-OFF display) — — X 1ST POSI IND (ON-OFF display) — — X MANU MODE IND (ON-OFF display) — — X POWER M LAMP (ON-OFF display) — — X F-SAFE IND/L (ON-OFF display) — — X ATF WARN LAMP (ON-OFF display) — — X BACK-UP LAMP (ON-OFF display) — — X STARTER RELAY (ON-OFF display) — — X PNP SW3 MON (ON-OFF display) — — X C/V CLB ID1 — — X C/V CLB ID2 — — X C/V CLB ID3 — — X UNIT CLB ID1 — — X UNIT CLB ID2 — — X UNIT CLB ID3 — — X TRGT GR RATIO — — X TRGT PRES TCC (kPa) — — X TRGT PRES L/P (kPa) — — X TRGT PRES I/C (kPa) — — X TRGT PRES FR/B (kPa) — — X TRGT PRES D/C (kPa) — — X TRG PRE HLR/C (kPa) — — X SHIFT PATTERN — — X DRV CST JUDGE — — X START RLY MON — — X NEXT GR POSI — — X SHIFT MODE — — X MANU GR POSI — — X Monitored item (Unit) Revision: October 2004 AT-93 A Remarks B LC/B solenoid AT D LC/B solenoid E F G H I J K L M 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Monitor Item Selection ECU INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU VEHICLE SPEED (km/h) — X X Vehicle speed recognized by the TCM. Voltage (V) — — X Displays the value measured by the voltage probe. Frequency (Hz) — — X DUTY·HI (high) (%) — — X DUTY·LOW (low) (%) — — X PLS WIDTH·HI (ms) — — X PLS WIDTH·LOW (ms) — — X Monitored item (Unit) Remarks The value measured by the pulse probe is displayed. DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE Operation Procedure 1. 2. Perform “CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE”. Refer to AT-87, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE" . Touch “DTC WORK SUPPORT”. BCIA0031E 3. Touch select item menu. SCIA0512E 4. Touch “START”. SCIA5159E Revision: October 2004 AT-94 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 5. Perform driving test according to “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” in “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”. A B AT SCIA5160E D ● When testing conditions are satisfied, CONSULT-II screen changes from “OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”. E F G SCIA5161E 6. Stop vehicle. H I J SCIA5164E ● If “NG” appears on the screen, malfunction may exist. Go to “Diagnostic Procedure”. K L M SCIA5162E Revision: October 2004 AT-95 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 7. 8. 9. Perform test drive to check gear shift feeling in accordance with instructions displayed. Touch “YES” or “NO”. CONSULT-II procedure is ended. SCIA5163E ● If “NG” appears on the screen, malfunction may exist. Go to “Diagnostic Procedure”. SCIA5162E Display Items List DTC work support item Description Check item I/C SOL FUNCTN CHECK* — — FR/B SOL FUNCTN CHECK* — — D/C SOL FUNCTN CHECK* — — HLR/C SOL FUNCTN CHECK* — — LC/B SOL FUNCTN CHECK* — — Following items for “TCC solenoid function (lock-up) ” can be confirmed. TCC SOL FUNCTN CHECK ● ● Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being performed or not) ● TCC solenoid valve ● Hydraulic control circuit Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG) *: Do not use, but displayed. Revision: October 2004 AT-96 2005 Titan DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Description PFP:23710 A ECS00AWY CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent malfunction detection ability. B Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission AT with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ECS00AWZ This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM cannot communicate to other control units. E Possible Cause ECS00AX0 Harness or connectors (CAN communication line is open or shorted.) F DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00AX1 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. G H WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. D Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Start engine and wait for at least 6 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to AT-99, "Diagnostic Procedure" . I J K SAT014K WITH GST L Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II”. M Revision: October 2004 AT-97 2005 Titan DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Wiring Diagram — AT — CAN ECS00CBW BCWA0320E Revision: October 2004 AT-98 2005 Titan DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground Terminal Wire Color Item Condition Data (Approx.) 3 L CAN-H - - 8 P CAN-L - - Diagnostic Procedure A B ECS00AX2 1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT AT With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and start engine. 2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII. Is any malfunction of the “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” indicated? YES >> Print out CONSULT-II screen, GO TO LAN section. Refer to LAN-5, "Precautions When Using CONSULT-II" . NO >> INSPECTION END D E F G PCIA0061E H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 AT-99 2005 Titan DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT Description PFP:25230 ECS00AX3 TCM prohibits cranking other than at "P" or "N" position. ● CONSULT-II Reference Value ECS00AX4 Item name Condition Display value Selector lever in “N”,“P” position. ON Selector lever in other position. OFF STARTER RELAY On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ECS00AX5 This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “P0615 STARTER RELAY/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected when park/neutral (PNP) relay (starter relay) is switched “ON” other than at “P” or “N” position. (Or when switched “OFF” at “P” or “N” position). Possible Cause ● ● ECS00AX6 Harness or connectors [The park/neutral position (PNP) relay (starter relay) and TCM circuit is open or shorted.] Park/neutral position (PNP) relay (starter relay) DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00AX7 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Start engine. Drive vehicle for at least 2 consecutive seconds. If DTC is detected, go to AT-102, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SAT014K Revision: October 2004 AT-100 2005 Titan DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT Wiring Diagram — AT — STSIG ECS00CBX A B AT D E F G H I J K L M BCWA0321E Revision: October 2004 AT-101 2005 Titan DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Item Condition Terminal color 9 B/R Data (Approx.) Selector lever in “N” and “P” positions. Battery voltage Selector lever in other positions. 0V Starter relay Diagnostic Procedure ECS00CBY 1. CHECK STARTER RELAY 1. 2. With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) Select “SELECTION FROM MENU” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and check monitor “STARTER RELAY” ON/OFF. Item name STARTER RELAY Condition Display value Selector lever in “N” and “P” positions. ON Selector lever in other positions. OFF Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) 2. Check voltage between the IPDM E/R connector and ground. Item Connector Starter relay E122 Terminal (Wirer color) 48 (B/R) Ground Shift position PCIA0056E Voltage (Approx.) “N” and “P” Battery voltage “R” and “D” 0V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 2. LCIA0320E 2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN A/T ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR AND IPDM E/R CONNEC- TOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector and IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector and IPDM E/R connector. Item Connector Terminal (Wire color) A/T assembly harness connector F9 9 (B/R) E122 48 (B/R) IPDM E/R connector Continuity Yes 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: October 2004 AT-102 LCIA0388E 2005 Titan DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT 3. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. A Remove control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector and TCM connector. Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector terminal and TCM connector terminal. Item Connector Terminal (Wire color) A/T assembly harness connector F9 9 (G) TCM connector AT Continuity D Yes F502 B 8 (G) 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground and short to power in harness or connectors. E SCIA5440E F 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM G Check the following items: ● Starter relay, Refer to SC-10, "STARTING SYSTEM" . ● IPDM E/R, Refer to PG-16, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)" . OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. H I J 5. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. ● Refer to AT-100, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. K L M Revision: October 2004 AT-103 2005 Titan DTC P0700 TCM DTC P0700 TCM Description PFP:31036 ECS00AX9 The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The TCM controls the A/T. On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ECS00AXA This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “P0700 TCM” with CONSULT-II is detected when the TCM is malfunctioning. Possible Cause ECS00AXB TCM. DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00AXC NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Start engine. Run engine for at least 2 consecutive seconds at idle speed. If DTC is detected, go to AT-104, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SAT014K WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Diagnostic Procedure ECS00AXD 1. CHECK DTC With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII. 3. Touch “ERASE”. 4. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. 5. Perform DTC confirmation procedure, AT-104, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . Is the “TCM” displayed again? YES >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" . NO >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. Revision: October 2004 AT-104 SCIA5304E 2005 Titan DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH Description PFP:32006 A ECS00AXE The park/neutral position (PNP) switch includes a transmission position switch. The transmission range switch detects the selector lever position and sends a signal to the TCM. ● ● CONSULT-II Reference Value ECS00AXF Item name Condition Display value Selector lever in “N”,“P” positions. N/P Selector lever in “R” position. R Selector lever in “D” position. D Selector lever in “4” position. 4 Selector lever in “3” position. 3 Selector lever in “2” position. 2 Selector lever in “1” position. 1 SLCTLVR POSI ● – – ● D E ECS00AXG This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “P0705 PNP SW/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When TCM does not receive the correct voltage signal from the PNP switch 1, 2, 3, 4 based on the gear position. When no other position but “P” position is detected from “N” positions. Possible Cause ● AT F On Board Diagnosis Logic ● B ECS00AXH Harness or connectors [The park/neutral position (PNP) switch 1, 2, 3, 4 and TCM circuit is open or shorted.] Park/neutral position (PNP) switch 1, 2, 3, 4 DTC Confirmation Procedure SAT014K WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. AT-105 K L M Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Start engine. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 2 consecutive seconds. THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V If DTC is detected, go to AT-107, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: October 2004 I ECS00AXI WITH CONSULT-II 5. H J CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. 1. 2. 3. 4. G 2005 Titan DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW ECS00CBZ BCWA0334E Revision: October 2004 AT-106 2005 Titan DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH Diagnostic Procedure ECS00CC0 1. CHECK PNP SW CIRCUIT A With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) Select “SELECTION FROM MENU” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Check if correct selector lever position (N/P, R or D) is displayed as selector lever is moved into each position. B 1. 2. Item name Condition D Display value Selector lever in "N", "P" positions. SLCTLVR POSI AT N/P Selector lever in "R" position. R Selector lever in "D" position. D Selector lever in "4" position. 4 Selector lever in "3" position. 3 Selector lever in "2" position. 2 Selector lever in "1" position. 1 E PCIA0034E F G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 2. H 2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM I J K Check the following items: ● A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. L M Revision: October 2004 AT-107 2005 Titan DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH 4. CHECK SUB-HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Remove control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . Disconnect park/neutral position switch connector and TCM connector. Check continuity between park/neutral position switch connector terminals and TCM connector terminals. Item Connector Terminal (Wire color) Park/neutral position switch connector F505 1 (BR) TCM connector F503 13 (BR) Park/neutral position switch connector F505 2 (W) TCM connector F503 11 (W) Park/neutral position switch connector F505 3 (GR) TCM connector F503 12 (GR) Park/neutral position switch connector F505 5 (L) TCM connector F503 14 (L) Continuity Yes Yes SCIA5457E Yes Yes 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . NG >> Replace open circuit or short to ground and short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. ● Refer to AT-105, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 AT-108 2005 Titan DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) Description PFP:32702 A ECS00AXK The revolution sensor detects the revolution of the idler gear parking pawl lock gear and emits a pulse signal. The pulse signal is sent to the TCM which converts it into vehicle speed. CONSULT-II Reference Value ECS00AXL Item name VHCL/S SE·A/T Condition Display value (km/h) During driving Approximately matches the speedometer reading. On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● – – ● ● AT ECS00AXM This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “P0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT” with CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor. After ignition switch is turned “ON”, irregular signal input from vehicle speed sensor MTR before the vehicle starts moving. Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) Revolution sensor Vehicle speed sensor MTR ECS00AXO I J K Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Drive vehicle and check for an increase of “VHCL/S SE·A/T” value in response to “VHCL/S SE·MTR” value. If the check result is NG, go to AT-112, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the check result is OK, go to following step. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. VHCL SPEED SE: 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more SAT014K THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.0/8 Selector lever: “D” position Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. If the check result is NG, go to AT-112, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the check result is OK, go to following step. Maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. ENGINE SPEED: 3,500 rpm or more THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.0/8 Selector lever: “D” position Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. If the check result is NG, go to AT-112, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: October 2004 F H WITH CONSULT-II 6. E G CAUTION: ● Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. ● Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. 4. 5. D ECS00AXN DTC Confirmation Procedure 1. 2. 3. B AT-109 2005 Titan L M DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: October 2004 AT-110 2005 Titan DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T ECS00CC1 A B AT D E F G H I J K L M BCWA0322E Revision: October 2004 AT-111 2005 Titan DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) Diagnostic Procedure ECS00CC2 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Start the engine. 4. Read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·A/T” while driving. Check the value changes according to driving speed. 1. 2. Item name Condition Display value (km/h) VHCL/S SE·A/T During driving Approximately matches the speedometer reading. SCIA2148E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: October 2004 AT-112 2005 Titan DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR) 4. CHECK SUB-HARNESS 1. 2. 3. A Remove control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . Disconnect park/neutral position switch connector and TCM connector. Check continuity between park/neutral position switch connector terminals and TCM connector terminals. Item Connector Terminal (Wire color) Park/neutral position switch connector F505 8 (Y) TCM connector F503 20 (Y) Park/neutral position switch connector F505 9 (R) TCM connector F503 17 (R) Park/neutral position switch connector F505 10 (B) TCM connector F503 AT Continuity D Yes E Yes SCIA5458E F Yes 16 (B) 4. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. 5. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace open circuit or short to ground and short to power in harness or connectors. G H 5. REPLACE THE REVOLUTION SENSOR AND CHECK DTC I 1. Replace the revolution sensor. Refer to AT-283, "Disassembly" . 2. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-109, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . 6. CHECK DTC J K L Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. ● Refer to AT-109, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 B AT-113 M 2005 Titan DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL Description PFP:24825 ECS00AXQ The engine speed signal is sent from the ECM to the TCM. CONSULT-II Reference Value ECS00AXR Item name ENGINE SPEED Condition Display value (rpm) Engine running Closely matches the tachometer reading. On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ECS00AXS This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIG” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM does not receive the ignition signal from ECM during engine cranking or running. Possible Cause ECS00AXT Harness or connectors (The ECM to the TCM circuit is open or shorted.) DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00AXU CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive seconds. VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more ACCELE POSI: More than 1/8 Selector lever: “D” position If DTC is detected, go to AT-114, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SAT014K Diagnostic Procedure ECS00AXV 1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Perform the self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . Is a malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results? YES >> Check CAN communication line. Refer to AT-97, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . NO >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 AT-114 2005 Titan DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL 2. CHECK DTC WITH TCM A With CONSULT-II Start engine. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. While monitoring engine speed, check for engine speed change corresponding to wide-open throttle position signal. 1. 2. Item name Condition Display value (rpm) ENGINE SPEED Engine running Closely matches the tachometer reading. B AT D PCIA0041E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the ignition signal circuit. ● Refer to EC-596, "IGNITION SIGNAL" . E F 3. CHECK DTC G Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. ● Refer to AT-114, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 4. H 4. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT I Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. J K 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: October 2004 AT-115 2005 Titan L M DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE Description PFP:31940 ECS00AXW The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is activated, with the gear in D4 , D5 by the TCM in response to signals sent from the vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Torque converter clutch piston operation will then be controlled. Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid temperature is too low. When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 1/8) in lock-up condition, the engine speed should not change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up. ● ● ● CONSULT-II Reference Value ECS00AXX Item name TCC SOLENOID Condition Display value (Approx.) (A) When performing slip lock-up 0.2 - 0.4 When performing lock-up 0.4 - 0.6 On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● – – ECS00AXY This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “P0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. Possible Cause ● ● ECS00AXZ Torque converter clutch solenoid valve Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00AY0 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. VHCL SPEED SE: 80 km/h (50 MPH) or more ACCELE POS: 0.5/8 - 1.0/8 SELECTOR LEVER: “D” position Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. If DTC is detected go to AT-117, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SAT014K WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: October 2004 AT-116 2005 Titan DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE Diagnostic Procedure ECS00AY1 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL A With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine. 4. Read out the value of “TCC SOLENOID” while driving. B 1. 2. Item name TCC SOLENOID Condition Display value (Approx.) When performing slip lock-up 0.2 - 0.4 A When performing lock-up 0.4 - 0.6 A AT D E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. SCIA4793E F 2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM H I Check the following items: ● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4. CHECK DTC J K L Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. ● Refer to AT-116, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 G AT-117 M 2005 Titan DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) Description PFP:31940 ECS00AY2 This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into 5th gear position or the torque converter clutch does not lock-up as instructed by the TCM. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc. CONSULT-II Reference Value ECS00AY3 Item name TCC SOLENOID Condition Display value (Approx.) (A) When performing slip lock-up 0.2 - 0.4 When performing lock-up 0.4 - 0.6 On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● – – ECS00AY4 This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “P0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN” with CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good. When TCM detects as irregular by comparing difference value with slip rotation. Possible Cause ● ● ● ECS00AY5 Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) Torque converter clutch solenoid valve Hydraulic control circuit DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00AY6 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. – – – 3. Start engine and Select “TCC S/V FNCTN CHECK” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II and touch “START”. Accelerate vehicle to more than 80 km/h (50 MPH) and maintain the following condition continuously until “TESTING” has turned to “COMPLETE”. (It will take approximately 30 seconds after “TESTING” shows.) ACCELE POSI: More than 1.0/8 (at all times during step 4) TCC SOLENOID: 0.4 - 0.6 A Selector lever: “D” position [Reference speed: Constant speed of more than 80 km/h (50 SAT014K MPH)] Make sure “GEAR” shows “5”. For shift schedule, refer to AT-62, "Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Complete Lockup" . If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0744 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”. Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.) Refer to AT-119, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Refer to shift schedule, AT-62, "Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Complete Lock-up" . Revision: October 2004 AT-118 2005 Titan DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP) WITH GST A Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Diagnostic Procedure ECS00AY7 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. B With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Start the engine. Read out the value of “TCC SOLENOID” while driving. Item name TCC SOLENOID Condition Display value (Approx.) When performing slip lock-up 0.2 - 0.4 A When performing lock-up 0.4 - 0.6 A OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. AT D E SCIA4793E F G 2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. H I 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4. CHECK DTC K L M Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. ● Refer to AT-118, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 J AT-119 2005 Titan DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE Description PFP:31940 ECS00AY8 The line pressure solenoid valve regulates the oil pump discharge pressure to suit the driving condition in response to a signal sent from the TCM. The line pressure duty cycle value is not consistent when the closed throttle position signal is “ON”. To confirm the line pressure duty cycle at low pressure, the accelerator (throttle) should be open until the closed throttle position signal is “OFF”. CONSULT-II Reference Value Item name LINE PRES SOL ECS00AY9 Condition Display value (Approx.) (A) During driving 0.2 - 0.6 On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● – – ECS00AYA This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “P0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. Possible Cause ● ● ECS00AYB Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) Line pressure solenoid valve DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00AYC NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Engine start and wait at least 5 second. If DTC is detected, go to AT-121, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SAT014K WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: October 2004 AT-120 2005 Titan DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE Diagnostic Procedure ECS00CC3 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL A With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Start the engine. 4. Read out the value of “LINE PRES SOL” while driving. B 1. 2. Item name Condition Display value (Approx.) LINE PRES SOL During driving 0.2 - 0.6 A OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. AT D E SCIA4793E 2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT F Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. G H 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. I J K 4. CHECK DTC L Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. ● Refer to AT-120, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 AT-121 M 2005 Titan DTC P1702 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (RAM) DTC P1702 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (RAM) Description PFP:31036 ECS00AYE The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The TCM controls the A/T. On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ECS00AYF This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “P1702 TCM·RAM” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM memory RAM is malfunctioning. Possible Cause ECS00AYG TCM. DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00AYH NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Start engine. Run engine for at least 2 consecutive seconds at idle speed. If DTC is detected, go to AT-122, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SAT014K Diagnostic Procedure ECS00AYI 1. CHECK DTC With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII. 3. Touch “ERASE”. 4. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. 5. Perform “DTC confirmation procedure”, AT-122, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . Is the “TCM·RAM” displayed again? YES >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" . NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: October 2004 AT-122 SCIA5304E 2005 Titan DTC P1703 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (ROM) DTC P1703 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (ROM) Description PFP:31036 A ECS00AYJ The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The TCM controls the A/T. On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● B ECS00AYK This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. AT Diagnostic trouble code “P1703 TCM·ROM” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM memory ROM is malfunctioning. Possible Cause ECS00AYL D ECS00AYM E TCM. DTC Confirmation Procedure NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. F WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. G Turn ignition switch to “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II. Start engine. Run engine for at least 2 consecutive seconds at idle speed. If DTC is detected, go to AT-123, "Diagnostic Procedure" . H I SAT014K Diagnostic Procedure ECS00AYN 1. CHECK DTC K With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII. 3. Touch “ERASE”. 4. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. 5. Perform “DTC confirmation procedure”, AT-123, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . Is the “TCM·ROM” displayed again? YES >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" . NO >> INSPECTION END Revision: October 2004 J AT-123 L M SCIA5304E 2005 Titan DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Description PFP:22620 ECS00AYO Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, accelerator pedal position sensor, throttle position sensor, etc. The actuator sends a signal to the ECM, and ECM sends signals to TCM with CAN communication. CONSULT-II Reference Value Item name ACCELE POSI THROTTLE POSI ECS00AYP Condition Display value (Approx.) Released accelerator pedal. 0.0/8 Fully depressed accelerator pedal. 8/8 Released accelerator pedal. 0.0/8 Fully depressed accelerator pedal. 8/8 On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ECS00AYQ This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “P1705 TP SEN/CIRC A/T” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM does not receive the proper accelerator pedal position signals (input by CAN communication) from ECM. Possible Cause ECS00AYR Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00AYS NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to AT-125, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SAT014K Revision: October 2004 AT-124 2005 Titan DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure ECS00CC4 1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE A Perform the self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . Is a malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results? YES >> Check CAN communication line. Refer to AT-97, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . NO >> GO TO 2. AT 2. CHECK DTC WITH TCM With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Depress accelerator pedal and read out the value of “ACCELE POSI” and “THROTTLE POSI”. Item name ACCELE POSI B Condition Display value (Approx.) Released accelerator pedal. 0.0/8 Fully depressed accelerator pedal. 8/8 D E F G PCIA0070E THROTTLE POSI Released accelerator pedal. 0.0/8 Fully depressed accelerator pedal. 8/8 H 4. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. J 3. CHECK DTC WITH ECM With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-127, "SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check the DTC detected item. Refer to EC-127, "SELFDIAG RESULTS MODE" . ● If CAN communication line is detected, go to AT-97, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . K L M SAT014K 4. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. ● Refer to AT-124, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 5. Revision: October 2004 I AT-125 2005 Titan DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 5. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: October 2004 AT-126 2005 Titan DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT Description PFP:31940 A ECS00AYU The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and sends a signal to the TCM. B CONSULT-II Reference Value ECS00AYV Condition °C (°F) Item name ATF TEMP SE 1 ATF TEMP SE 2 ● ● 2.2 - 1.7 - 0.45 ECS00AYW This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the sensor. Possible Cause ● AT 2.2 - 1.8 - 0.6 0 (32) - 20 (68) - 80 (176) On Board Diagnosis Logic ● Display value (Approx.) V D E ECS00AYX Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) A/T fluid temperature sensors 1, 2 F DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00AYY CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. G H I WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 10 minutes (Total). (It is not necessary to maintain continuously.) VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.0/8 Selector lever: “D” position If DTC is detected, go to AT-129, "Diagnostic Procedure" . J K L SAT014K WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: October 2004 AT-127 2005 Titan M DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS ECS00CC5 BCWA0323E Revision: October 2004 AT-128 2005 Titan DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT Diagnostic Procedure ECS00CC6 1. CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 SIGNAL A With CONSULT-II Start engine. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out the value of “ATF TEMP SE 1”. B 1. 2. Item name Condition °C (°F) Display value (Approx.) ATF TEMP SE 1 0 (32) - 20 (68) - 80 (176) 2.2 - 1.8 - 0.6 V AT D OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. E PCIA0039E 2. CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 SIGNAL F With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out the value of “ATF TEMP SE 2”. Item name Condition °C (°F) Display value (Approx.) ATF TEMP SE 2 0 (32) - 20 (68) - 80 (176) 2.2 - 1.7 - 0.45 V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 5. G H I PCIA0039E J 3. CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 Check A/T fluid temperature sensor 1. Refer to AT-131, "A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . K L 4. CHECK SUB-HARNESS 1. 2. M Disconnect park/neutral position switch connector and TCM connector. Check continuity between park/neutral position switch connector terminals and TCM connector terminals. Item Connector Terminal (Wire color) Park/neutral position switch connector F505 6 (G) TCM connector F503 19 (G) Park/neutral position switch connector F505 7 (O) TCM connector F503 18 (O) Continuity Yes Yes SCIA5461E 3. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace open circuit or short to ground and short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: October 2004 AT-129 2005 Titan DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT 5. CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 Check A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Refer to AT-131, "A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace the A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Refer to AT-258, "A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" . 6. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY 1. 2. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector and TCM connector. Check continuity between A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector terminals and TCM connector terminals. Item Connector Terminal (Wire color) A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector F507 1 (W/Y) TCM connector F502 3 (W/Y) A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector F507 2 (W/R) TCM connector F502 5 (W/R) Continuity Yes Yes SCIA5462E 3. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace open circuit or short to ground and short to power in harness or connectors. 7. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" . 2. Reinstall any part removed. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 8. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. ● Refer to AT-127, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 1. Revision: October 2004 AT-130 2005 Titan DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT Component Inspection ECS00CC7 A A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 1. 2. Remove control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . Check resistance between terminals. Name Connector A/T fluid temperature sensor 1 3. F505 Terminal 6-7 Temperature °C (°F) Resistance (Approx.) (kΩ) 0 (32) 15 20 (68) 6.5 80 (176) 0.9 B AT D If NG, replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . SCIA5463E E A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 1. 2. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Refer to AT-258, "A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" . Check resistance between terminals. Name Connector Terminal Temperature °C (°F) Resistance (Approx.) (kΩ) 0 (32) 10 A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 F507 1-2 20 (68) 4 80 (176) 0.5 3. If NG, replace the A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. Refer to AT258, "A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" . F G H I SCIA5271E J K L M Revision: October 2004 AT-131 2005 Titan DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR Description PFP:31935 ECS00AZ1 The turbine revolution sensor detects input shaft rpm (revolutions per minute). It is located on the input side of the automatic transmission. Monitors revolution of sensor 1 and sensor 2 for non-standard conditions. CONSULT-II Reference Value ECS00AZ2 Item name TURBINE REV Condition Display value (rpm) During driving (lock-up ON) Approximately matches the engine speed. On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● – – ECS00AZ3 This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “P1716 TURBINE REV S/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor. When TCM detects an irregularity only at position of 4th gear for turbine revolution sensor 2. Possible Cause ● ● ECS00AZ4 Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) Turbine revolution sensor 1, 2 DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00AZ5 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. VHCL SPEED SE: 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more ENGINE SPEED: 1,500 rpm or more ACCELE POS: 0.5/8 or more Selector lever: “D” position Gear position (Turbine revolution sensor 1): 4th or 5th position Gear position (Turbine revolution sensor 2): All position Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. If DTC is detected, go to AT-133, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SAT014K WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: October 2004 AT-132 2005 Titan DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure ECS00CC8 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL A With CONSULT-II Start engine. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Vehicle start and read out the value of “TURBINE REV”. B 1. 2. Item name Condition Display value (rpm) TURBINE REV During driving (lock-up ON) Approximately matches the engine speed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. AT D E PCIA0041E 2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT F Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. G H I J K 4. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. ● Refer to AT-132, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 AT-133 L M 2005 Titan DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR Description PFP:24814 ECS00AZ7 The vehicle speed sensor·MTR signal is transmitted from combination meter to TCM by CAN communication line. The signal functions as an auxiliary device to the revolution sensor when it is malfunctioning. The TCM will then use the vehicle speed sensor·MTR signal. CONSULT-II Reference Value Item name VHCL/S SE·MTR ECS00AZ8 Condition Display value (km/h) During driving Approximately matches the speedometer reading. On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ECS00AZ9 This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “P1721 VHE SPD SE·MTR” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM does not receive the proper vehicle speed sensor MTR signal (input by CAN communication) from combination meter. Possible Cause ECS00AZA Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00AZB CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. ACCELE POS: 1/8 or less VHCL SPEED SE: 30 km/h (17 MPH) or more If DTC is detected, go to AT-135, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SAT014K Revision: October 2004 AT-134 2005 Titan DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR Diagnostic Procedure ECS00CC9 1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE A Perform the self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . Is malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the result? YES >> Check CAN communication line. Refer to AT-97, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . NO >> GO TO 2. B AT 2. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Drive vehicle and read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·MTR”. Item name Condition Display value (Approx.) (km/h) VHCL/S SE·MTR During driving Approximately matches the speedometer reading. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. D E F G SCIA2148E 3. CHECK COMBINATION METERS H Check combination meters. Refer to DI-17, "How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. I J 4. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. ● Refer to AT-134, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 5. K L 5. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: October 2004 AT-135 2005 Titan M DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK Description ● PFP:00000 ECS00AZD Fail-safe function to detect interlock conditions. On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ● ECS00AZE This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “P1730 A/T INTERLOCK” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor and switch. TCM monitors and compares gear position and conditions of each ATF pressure switch when gear is steady. Possible Cause ● ● ● ECS00AZF Harness or connectors (The solenoid and switch circuit is open or shorted.) Low coast brake solenoid valve ATF pressure switch 2 DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00AZG NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Start engine. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 2 consecutive seconds. Selector lever: “D” position If DTC is detected, go to AT-137, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SAT014K WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Judgement of A/T Interlock ECS00AZH When A/T Interlock is judged to be malfunctioning, the vehicle should be fixed in 2nd gear, and should be set in a condition in which it can travel. When one of the following fastening patterns is detected, the fail-safe function in correspondence with the individual pattern should be performed. Revision: October 2004 AT-136 2005 Titan DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK A/T INTERLOCK COUPLING PATTERN TABLE ●: NG, X: OK ATF pressure switch output Gear position A/T interlock coupling pattern SW3 (I/C) SW6 (HLR/ C) SW5 (D/C) SW1 (FR/B) SW2 (LC/B) 3rd – X X – ● 4th – X X – 5th X X – X A Clutch pressure output pattern after fail-safe function Fail-safe function B I/C HLR/C D/C FR/B LC/B L/U Held in 2nd gear OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ● Held in 2nd gear OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ● Held in 2nd gear OFF Diagnostic Procedure AT D OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ECS00CCA E 1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS 1. 2. 3. 4. F With CONSULT-II Drive vehicle. Stop vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII. G H I SCIA5304E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check low coast brake solenoid valve circuit and function. Refer to AT-157, "DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE" ,AT-159, "DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION" . 2. CHECK DTC K L Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. ● Refer to AT-136, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 3. M 3. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: October 2004 J AT-137 2005 Titan DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: October 2004 AT-138 2005 Titan DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING Description PFP:00000 A ECS00AZJ Fail-safe function to prevent sudden decrease in speed by engine brake other than at 1 or M1 position. B CONSULT-II Reference Value Item name ON OFF SOL ATF PRES SW 2 ECS00AZK Condition Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . ON Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . OFF Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . ON Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● – – ● ● AT D ECS00AZL This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “P1731 A/T 1ST E/BRAKING” with CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor. When TCM monitors each ATF pressure switch and solenoid monitor value, and detects as irregular when engine brake of 1st gear acts other than at 1 position. Possible Cause ● Display value Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) Low coast brake solenoid valve ATF pressure switch 2 I ECS00AZN J K WITH CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Start engine. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 2 consecutive seconds. ENGINE SPEED: 1,200 rpm Selector lever: “1” position Gear position: 1st gear If DTC is detected, go to AT-140, "Diagnostic Procedure" . L M SAT014K Revision: October 2004 G H NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously preformed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. 5. F ECS00AZM DTC Confirmation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. E AT-139 2005 Titan DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING Diagnostic Procedure ECS00AZO 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS With CONSULT-II Start the engine. Select “SELECTION FROM MENU” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Drive vehicle in the “1” or “M” position (1st gear), and confirm the ON/OFF actuation of “ATF PRES SW 2” and “ON OFF SOL”. 1. 2. Item name ON OFF SOL ATF PRES SW 2 Condition Display value Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT20 . ON Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . OFF Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT20 . ON Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . OFF SCIA4670E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-139, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. ● Revision: October 2004 AT-140 2005 Titan DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE Description PFP:31940 A ECS00AZP Input clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position. CONSULT-II Reference Value B ECS00AZQ AT Item name I/C SOLENOID Condition Input clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . 0.6 - 0.8 Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . 0 - 0.05 On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● – – ● D ECS00AZR This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “P1752 I/C SOLENOID/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. Possible Cause ● Display value (Approx.) (A) ECS00AZS Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) Input clutch solenoid valve WITH CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Start engine. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8 Selector lever: “D” position Gear position: 3rd Þ 4th Gear (I/C ON/OFF) Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. If DTC is detected go to AT-142, "Diagnostic Procedure" . J L M SAT014K WITH GST AT-141 I K Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: October 2004 G ECS00AZT CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. 5. F H DTC Confirmation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. E 2005 Titan DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE Diagnostic Procedure ECS00CCB 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Start the engine. 4. Read out the value of “I/C SOLENOID” while driving. 1. 2. Item name I/C SOLENOID Condition Display value (Approx.) Input clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . 0.6 - 0.8 A Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT20 . 0 - 0.05 A SCIA4793E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. ● Refer to AT-141, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 AT-142 2005 Titan DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION Description PFP:31940 A ECS00AZV Input clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be B shifted to the optimum position. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation. AT ● ● CONSULT-II Reference Value Item name I/C SOLENOID ATF PRES SW 3 ECS00AZW Condition Display value (Approx.) (A) Input clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . 0.6 - 0.8 Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . 0 - 0.05 Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . ON Input clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● – – ● ● E ECS00AZX This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “P1754 I/C SOLENOID FNCTN” with CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of pressure switch 3 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) When TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 3 is irregular during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) Possible Cause ● D ECS00AZY Harness or connectors (The solenoid and switch circuits are open or shorted.) Input clutch solenoid valve ATF pressure switch 3 DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00AZZ Start engine. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions. ACCELE POSI: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8 Selector lever: “D” position Gear position: 3rd Þ 4th Gear (I/C ON/OFF) Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. Perform step “2” again. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, then perform step “1” to “3” again. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII. If DTC (P1754) is detected, refer to AT-144, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If DTC (P1752) is detected, go to AT-142, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If DTC (P1843) is detected, go to AT-169, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: October 2004 H I K L M WITH CONSULT-II 3. 4. 5. G J CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. 1. 2. F AT-143 SAT014K 2005 Titan DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Diagnostic Procedure ECS00CCC 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “SELECTION FROM MENU” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Drive vehicle in “D” position (3rd Þ 4th gear), and confirm the ON/OFF actuation of “ATF PRES SW 3” and electrical current value of “I/C SOLENOID”. Item name I/C SOLENOID ATF PRES SW 3 Condition Display value (Approx.) Input clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . 0.6 - 0.8 A Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT20 . 0 - 0.05 A Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT20 . ON Input clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . OFF SCIA4795E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 4. CHECK DTC Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure. ● Refer to AT-143, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 AT-144 2005 Titan DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE Description PFP:31940 A ECS00B01 Front brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position. CONSULT-II Reference Value B ECS00B02 AT Item name FR/B SOLENOID Condition Display value (Approx.) (A) Front brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . 0.6 - 0.8 Front brake disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . 0 - 0.05 On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● – – ECS00B03 This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “P1757 FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. Possible Cause ● ● D ECS00B04 Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) Front brake solenoid valve WITH CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Start engine. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8 Selector lever: “D” position Gear position: 3rd Þ 4th Gear (FR/B ON/OFF) Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. If DTC is detected go to AT-146, "Diagnostic Procedure" . J L M SAT014K WITH GST AT-145 I K Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: October 2004 G ECS00B05 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. 5. F H DTC Confirmation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. E 2005 Titan DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE Diagnostic Procedure ECS00CCD 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Start engine. 4. Read out the value of “FR/B SOLENOID” while driving. 1. 2. Item name FR/B SOLENOID Condition Display value (Approx.) Front brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT20 . 0.6 - 0.8 A Front brake disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . 0 - 0.05 A SCIA4793E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. ● Refer to AT-145, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 AT-146 2005 Titan DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION Description PFP:31940 A ECS00B07 Front brake solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be B shifted to the optimum position. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation. AT ● ● CONSULT-II Reference Value Item name FR/B SOLENOID ATF PRES SW 1 ECS00B08 Condition Display value (Approx.) (A) Front brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . 0.6 - 0.8 Front brake disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . 0 - 0.05 Front brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . ON Front brake disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● – – ● ● E ECS00B09 This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “P1759 FR/B SOLENOID FNCT” with CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 1 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) When TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 1 is irregular during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) Possible Cause ● D ECS00B0A Harness or connectors (The solenoid and switch circuits are open or shorted.) Front brake solenoid valve ATF pressure switch 1 DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00B0B Start engine. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions. ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8 Selector lever: “D” position Gear position: 3rd Þ 4th Gear (FR/B ON/OFF) Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. Perform step “2” again. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, then perform step “1” to “3” again. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII. If DTC (P1759) is detected, refer to AT-148, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If DTC (P1757) is detected, go to AT-146, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If DTC (P1841) is detected, go to AT-167, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: October 2004 H I K L M WITH CONSULT-II 3. 4. 5. G J CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. 1. 2. F AT-147 SAT014K 2005 Titan DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Diagnostic Procedure ECS00B0C 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “SELECTION FROM MENU” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Drive vehicle in the “D” position (3rd Þ 4th gear), and confirm the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 1” and electrical current value of “FR/B SOLENOID”. Item name FR/B SOLENOID ATF PRES SW 1 Condition Display value (Approx.) Front brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT20 . 0.6 - 0.8 A Front brake disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . 0 - 0.05 A Front brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT20 . ON Front brake disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . OFF SCIA4796E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 4. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. ● Refer to AT-147, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 AT-148 2005 Titan DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE Description PFP:31940 A ECS00B0D Direct clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position. CONSULT-II Reference Value B ECS00B0E AT Item name D/C SOLENOID Condition Display value (Approx.) (A) Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 . 0.6 - 0.8 Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 . 0 - 0.05 On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● – – ECS00B0F This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “P1762 D/C SOLENOID/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. Possible Cause ● ● D ECS00B0G Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) Direct clutch solenoid valve I J WITH CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Start engine. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8 Selector lever: “D” position Gear position: 1st Þ 2nd Gear (D/C ON/OFF) Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. If DTC is detected, go to AT-150, "Diagnostic Procedure" . K L M SAT014K WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: October 2004 G ECS00B0H NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. 5. F H DTC Confirmation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. E AT-149 2005 Titan DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE Diagnostic Procedure ECS00CCE 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Start the engine. 4. Read out the value of “D/C SOLENOID” while driving. 1. 2. Item name D/C SOLENOID Condition Display value (Approx.) Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . 0.6 - 0.8 A Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT20 . 0 - 0.05 A SCIA4793E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. ● Refer to AT-149, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 AT-150 2005 Titan DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION Description PFP:31940 A ECS00B0J Direct clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be B shifted to the optimum position. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation. AT ● ● CONSULT-II Reference Value Item name D/C SOLENOID ATF PRES SW 5 ECS00B0K Condition Display value (Approx) (A) Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . 0.6 - 0.8 Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 . 0 - 0.05 Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . ON Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 . OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● – – ● ● E ECS00B0L This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “P1764 D/C SOLENOID FNCTN” with CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 5 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) When TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 5 is irregular during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) Possible Cause ● D ECS00B0M Harness or connectors (The solenoid and switch circuits are open or shorted.) Direct clutch solenoid valve ATF pressure switch 5 DTC Confirmation Procedure F G H I J ECS00B0N NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. K L WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions. ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8 Selector lever: “D” position Gear position: 1st Þ 2nd Gear (D/C ON/OFF) Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. Perform step “2” again. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, then perform step “1” to “3” again. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII. If DTC (P1764) is detected, refer to AT-152, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If DTC (P1762) is detected, go to AT-150, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If DTC (P1845) is detected, go to AT-171, "Diagnostic Procedure" . M SAT014K WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: October 2004 AT-151 2005 Titan DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION Diagnostic Procedure ECS00B0O 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS With CONSULT-II Start engine. Select “SELECTION FROM MENU” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Drive vehicle in the “D” position (1st Þ 2nd gear), and confirm the display actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 5” and electrical current value of “D/C SOLENOID”. 1. 2. Item name D/C SOLENOID ATF PRES SW 5 Condition Display value (Approx.) Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . 0.6 - 0.8 A Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT20 . 0 - 0.05 A Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT20 . ON Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . OFF SCIA4797E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 4. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. ● Refer to AT-151, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 AT-152 2005 Titan DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE Description PFP:31940 A ECS00B0P High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position. CONSULT-II Reference Value B ECS00B0Q AT Item name HLR/C SOL Condition Display value (Approx.) (A) High and low reverse clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 . 0.6 - 0.8 High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . 0 - 0.05 On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● – – ECS00B0R This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “P1767 HLR/C SOL/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. When TCM detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. Possible Cause ● ● D ECS00B0S Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve WITH CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Start engine. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8 Selector lever: “D” position Gear position: 2nd Þ 3rd Gear (HLR/C ON/OFF) Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. If DTC is detected, go to AT-154, "Diagnostic Procedure" . J L M SAT014K WITH GST AT-153 I K Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: October 2004 G ECS00B0T CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. 5. F H DTC Confirmation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. E 2005 Titan DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE Diagnostic Procedure ECS00CCF 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Start the engine. 4. Read out the value of “HLR/C SOLENOID” while driving. 1. 2. Item name HLR/C SOL Condition Display value (Approx.) High and low reverse clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . 0.6 - 0.8 A High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . 0 - 0.05 A SCIA4793E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. ● Refer to AT-153, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 AT-154 2005 Titan DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION PFP:31940 Description A ECS00B0V High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the TCM in response to signals sent from the B PNP switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical malAT function such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation. ● ● CONSULT-II Reference Value Item name HLR/C SOL ATF PRES SW 6 ECS00B0W Condition Display value (Approx.) (A) High and low reverse clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 . 0.6 - 0.8 High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 . 0 - 0.05 High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 . ON High and low reverse clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 . OFF ● – – ECS00B0X This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “P1769 HLR/C SOL FNCTN” with CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 6 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) When TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 6 is irregular during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) Possible Cause ● ● ● E F On Board Diagnosis Logic ● D ECS00B0Y Harness or connectors (The solenoid and switch circuits are open or shorted.) High and low reverse clutch solenoid valve ATF pressure switch 6 DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00B0Z WITH CONSULT-II 3. 4. 5. Start engine. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions. ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8 Selector lever: “D” position Gear position: 2nd Þ 3rd Gear (HLR/C ON/OFF) Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. Perform step “2” again. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, then perform step “1” to “3” again. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII. If DTC (P1769) is detected, refer to AT-156, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If DTC (P1767) is detected, go to AT-154, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If DTC (P1846) is detected, go to AT-173, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: October 2004 AT-155 H I J CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. 1. 2. G SAT014K 2005 Titan K L M DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Diagnostic Procedure ECS00B10 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS With CONSULT-II 1. Start the engine. 2. Select “SELECTION FROM MENU” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Drive vehicle in the “D” position (2nd Þ 3rd gear), and confirm the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 6” and electrical current value of “HLR/C SOL”. Item name HLR/C SOL ATF PRES SW 6 Condition Display value (Approx.) High and low reverse clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . 0.6 - 0.8 A High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . 0 - 0.05 A High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . ON High and low reverse clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . OFF SCIA4798E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 4. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. ● Refer to AT-155, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 AT-156 2005 Titan DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE Description PFP:31940 A ECS00B11 Low coast brake solenoid valve is turned “ON” or “OFF” by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position. CONSULT-II Reference Value B ECS00B12 AT Item name ON OFF SOL Condition Display value Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 . ON Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 . OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ECS00B13 This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “P1772 LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve. Possible Cause ● ● D ECS00B14 Harness or connectors (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.) Low coast brake solenoid valve E F G DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00B15 NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. H I WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. Start engine. Drive vehicle and maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds. Selector lever: “1” or “2” Gear position: “1st” or “2nd” gear (LC/B ON/OFF) If DTC is detected, go to AT-158, "Diagnostic Procedure" . J K L SAT014K WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: October 2004 AT-157 2005 Titan M DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE Diagnostic Procedure ECS00CCG 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “SELECTION FROM MENU” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Start the engine. 4. Read out the value of “ON OFF SOL” while driving. 1. 2. Item name ON OFF SOL Condition Display value Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT20 . ON Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . OFF SCIA4794E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 4. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. ● Refer to AT-157, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 AT-158 2005 Titan DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION Description PFP:31940 A ECS00B17 Low coast brake solenoid valve is turned “ON” or “OFF” by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle speed sensor and accelerator pedal position sensor (throttle position sensor). Gears B will then be shifted to the optimum position. This is not only caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but also by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation. AT ● ● CONSULT-II Reference Value Item name ON OFF SOL ATF PRES SW 2 ECS00B18 Condition Display value Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . ON Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 . OFF Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 . ON Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 . OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● – – ● ● E ECS00B19 This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “P1774 LC/B SOLENOID FNCT” with CONSULT-II is detected under the following conditions. When TCM detects that actual gear ratio is irregular, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 2 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) When TCM detects that relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 2 is irregular during releasing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) Possible Cause ● D ECS00B1A Harness or connectors (The solenoid and switch circuits are open or shorted.) Low coast brake solenoid valve ATF pressure switch 2 DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00B1B Start engine. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions. Selector lever: “1” or “2” position Gear position: “1st” or “2nd” gear (LC/B ON/OFF) Perform step “2” again. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, then perform step “1” to “3” again. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII. If DTC (P1774) is detected, refer to AT-160, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If DTC (P1772) is detected, go to AT-158, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SAT014K WITH GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II”. Revision: October 2004 H I K L M WITH CONSULT-II 3. 4. 5. G J CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. 1. 2. F AT-159 2005 Titan DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION Diagnostic Procedure ECS00CCH 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS With CONSULT-II Start the engine. Select “SELECTION FROM MENU” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Drive vehicle in the 1 or 2 position ("1 " or "2 " gear) or manual mode (“M1-1st” or “M2-2nd” gear), and confirm the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 2” and “ON OFF SOL”. 1. 2. Item name ON OFF SOL ATF PRES SW 2 Condition Display value Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT20 . ON Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . OFF Low coast brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT20 . ON Low coast brake disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . OFF SCIA4794E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Refer to AT-159, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. ● Revision: October 2004 AT-160 2005 Titan DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH Description PFP:34901 A ECS00B1D When an impossible pattern of switch signals is detected, this is judged to be an irregularity. B CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Monitor Item Condition MANU MODE SW [ON - OFF] NON M-MODE SW [ON - OFF] UP SW LEVER [ON - OFF] DOWN SW LEVER [ON - OFF] ● ON Other than the above OFF Manual shift gate position OFF Other than the above ON Select lever: + side ON Other than the above OFF Select lever: - side ON Other than the above OFF ● ● AT D E F ECS00B1F This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “MANU MODE SW/CIR” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM monitors Manual mode, Non manual mode, Up or Down switch signal, and detects as irregular when impossible input pattern occurs 1 second or more. ECS00B1G Harness or connectors (These switches circuit is open or shorted.) Mode select switch (Into control device) Position select switch (Into control device) I DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00B1H NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. K M SAT014K AT-161 J L Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Move selector lever to “M” position. Start engine and drive vehicle for at least 2 consecutive seconds. If DTC is detected, go to AT-163, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: October 2004 G H Possible Cause ● Reference Value Manual shift gate position (neutral) On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ECS00B1E 2005 Titan DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH Wiring Diagram — AT — MMSW ECS00B1I BCWA0339E Revision: October 2004 AT-162 2005 Titan DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH Diagnostic Procedure ECS00B1J 1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE A Perform the self-diagnosis. Is a malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results? Yes or No Yes >> Check CAN communication line. Refer to AT-97, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . No >> GO TO 2. B AT 2. CHECK MANUAL MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “METER A/C AMP” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out ON/OFF switching action of the “AT-M GEAR”. D E F G PKIA2062E Without CONSULT-II Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and confirm that the actual gear position and the meter's indication of the position mutually coincide when the selector lever is shifted to the “+ (up)” or “- (down)” side (1st ⇔ 5th gear). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 3. 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM I J Check the following items. ● Manual mode switch. Refer to AT-164, "Component Inspection" . ● Pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. ● Open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connector for A/T device (manual mode switch). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4. CHECK TCM Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. Revision: October 2004 H AT-163 2005 Titan K L M DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● Power supply and ground circuit for TCM. ● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> Replace the transmission assembly. Refer to AT-265, "Removal and Installation (4x2)" , AT-268, "Removal and Installation (4x4)" . NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 6. CHECK DTC Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure. ● Refer to AT-161, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 4. Component Inspection ECS00B1K MANUAL MODE SWITCH Check continuity between terminals. Item Position Manual mode (select) switch Manual UP switch DOWN switch UP Connector No. Terminal No. (Unit side) Continuity 2-6 M34 DOWN 2-4 Yes 2-5 WCIA0245E Position Indicator Lamp ECS00B1L DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNALS (WITH CONSULT-II) With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for A/T with CONSULT-II and read out the value of “GEAR”. 3. Drive vehicle in the manual mode, and confirm that the actual gear position and the meter's indication of the position mutually coincide when the select lever is shifted to the “+ (up)” or “(down)” side (1st ⇔ 5th gear). OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Check the following items. PCIA0065E Position Indicator Lamp Symptom Chart Revision: October 2004 AT-164 2005 Titan DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH Items Presumed Location of Trouble The actual gear position does not change, or shifting into the manual mode is not possible (no gear shifting in the manual mode possible). The position indicator lamp is not indicated. Manual mode switch Refer to AT-161, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" . A/T main system (Fail-safe function actuated) The actual gear position changes, but the position indicator lamp is not indicated. Perform the self-diagnosis function. ● ● Refer to AT-87, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE" . A B Refer to AT-87, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE" . AT Perform the self-diagnosis function. The actual gear position and the indication on the position indicator lamp do not coincide. ● Only a specific position or positions is/are not indicated on the position indicator lamp. Check the combination meter. Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" . Refer to AT-87, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE" . D E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 AT-165 2005 Titan DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1 DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1 Description PFP:25240 ECS00B1M Fail-safe function to detect front brake clutch solenoid valve condition. CONSULT-II Reference Value Item name ATF PRES SW 1 ECS00B1N Condition Display value Front brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . ON Front brake disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ECS00B1O This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “P1841 ATF PRES SW 1/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM detects that actual gear ratio is normal, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 1 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) Possible Cause ● ● ECS00B1P ATF pressure switch 1 Harness or connectors (The switch circuit is open or shorted.) DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00B1Q CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions. ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8 Selector lever: “D” position Gear position: 3rd Þ 4th Gear (FR/B ON/OFF) Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. Perform step “2” again. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, then perform step “1” to “3” again. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII. If DTC (P1841) is detected, go to AT-167, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If DTC (P1757) is detected, go to AT-146, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: October 2004 AT-166 SAT014K 2005 Titan DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1 Diagnostic Procedure ECS00CCI 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL A With CONSULT-II Start engine. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Drive vehicle in the “D” position (3rd Þ 4th gear), and confirm the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 1”. B 1. 2. Item name ATF PRES SW 1 Condition Display value Front brake engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT20 . ON Front brake disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . OFF AT D E PCIA0067E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. F 2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT G Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. I 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. ● Refer to AT-166, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 H AT-167 J K L M 2005 Titan DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3 DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3 Description PFP:25240 ECS00B1S Fail-safe function to detect input clutch solenoid valve condition. CONSULT-II Reference Value Item name ATF PRES SW 3 ECS00B1T Condition Display value Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 . ON Input clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 . OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ECS00B1U This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “P1843 ATF PRES SW 3/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM detects that actual gear ratio is normal, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 3 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) Possible Cause ● ● ECS00B1V ATF pressure switch 3 Harness or connectors (The switch circuit is open or shorted.) DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00B1W CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions. ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8 Selector lever: “D” position Gear position: 3rd Þ 4th Gear (I/C ON/OFF) Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. Perform step “2” again. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, then perform step “1” to “3” again. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII. If DTC (P1843) is detected, go to AT-169, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If DTC (P1752) is detected, go to AT-142, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: October 2004 AT-168 SAT014K 2005 Titan DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3 Diagnostic Procedure ECS00CCJ 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL A With CONSULT-II Start engine. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Drive vehicle in the “D” position (3rd Þ 4th gear), and confirm the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 3”. B 1. 2. Item name ATF PRES SW 3 Condition Display value Input clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT20 . ON Input clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . OFF AT D E PCIA0067E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. F 2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT G Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. I 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. ● Refer to AT-168, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 H AT-169 J K L M 2005 Titan DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5 DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5 Description PFP:25240 ECS00B1Y Fail-safe function to detect direct clutch solenoid valve condition. CONSULT-II Reference Value Item name ATF PRES SW 5 ECS00B1Z Condition Display value Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 . ON Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 . OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ECS00B20 This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “P1845 ATF PRES SW 5/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM detects that actual gear ratio is normal, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 5 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) Possible Cause ● ● ECS00B21 ATF pressure switch 5 Harness or connectors (The switch circuit is open or shorted.) DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00B22 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions. ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8 Selector lever: “D” position Gear position: 1st Þ 2nd Gear (D/C ON/OFF) Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. Perform step “2” again. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, then perform step “1” to “3” again. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII. If DTC (P1845) is detected, go to AT-171, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If DTC (P1762) is detected, go to AT-150, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: October 2004 AT-170 SAT014K 2005 Titan DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5 Diagnostic Procedure ECS00CCK 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL A With CONSULT-II Start engine. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Drive vehicle in the “D” position (1st Þ 2nd gear), and confirm the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 5”. B 1. 2. Item name ATF PRES SW 5 Condition Display value Direct clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT20 . ON Direct clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . OFF AT D E PCIA0067E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. F 2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT G Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. I 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. ● Refer to AT-170, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 H AT-171 J K L M 2005 Titan DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6 DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6 Description PFP:25240 ECS00B24 Fail-safe function to detect high & low reverse clutch solenoid valve condition. CONSULT-II Reference Value Item name ATF PRES SW 6 ECS00B25 Condition Display value High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 . ON High and low reverse clutch disengaged. Refer to AT-20 , AT-18 . OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic ● ● ECS00B26 This is not an OBD-II self-diagnostic item. Diagnostic trouble code “P1846 ATF PRES SW 6/CIRC” with CONSULT-II is detected when TCM detects that actual gear ratio is normal, and relation between gear position and condition of ATF pressure switch 6 is irregular during depressing accelerator pedal. (Other than during shift change) Possible Cause ● ● ECS00B27 ATF pressure switch 6 Harness or connectors (The switch circuit is open or shorted.) DTC Confirmation Procedure ECS00B28 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously performed, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds before performing the next test. After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine. Accelerate vehicle to maintain the following conditions. ACCELE POS: 1.5/8 - 2.0/8 Selector lever: “D” position Gear position: 2nd Þ 3rd Gear (HLR/C ON/OFF) Driving location: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. Perform step “2” again. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, then perform step “1” to “3” again. Check “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “A/T” with CONSULTII. If DTC (P1846) is detected, go to AT-173, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If DTC (P1767) is detected, go to AT-154, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: October 2004 AT-172 SAT014K 2005 Titan DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6 Diagnostic Procedure ECS00CCL 1. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL A With CONSULT-II Start the engine. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” or “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Drive vehicle in the “D” position (2nd Þ 3rd gear), and confirm the ON/OFF actuation of the “ATF PRES SW 6”. B 1. 2. Item name ATF PRES SW 6 Condition Display value High and low reverse clutch engaged. Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . ON High and low reverse clutch disengaged Refer to AT-18 , AT-20 . OFF AT D E PCIA0067E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. F 2. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT G Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. I 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● The A/T assembly harness connector pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4. CHECK DTC Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. ● Refer to AT-172, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 H AT-173 J K L M 2005 Titan MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN PFP:00100 ECS00CCM BCWA0382E Revision: October 2004 AT-174 2005 Titan MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Item Condition Terminal color Data (Approx.) P Power supply (Memory back-up) Always 2 P Power supply (Memory back-up) Always Battery voltage 5 B Ground Always 0V 6 BR *1 Y/R *2 1 A Battery voltage B – AT Battery voltage D Power supply – 0V E 10 B Ground Always 0V *1: Column shift *2: Floor shift F Diagnostic Procedure ECS00CCN 1. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE STEP 1 1. 2. 3. G Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector. Check voltage between A/T assembly harness connector terminals and ground. Item Connector Terminal (Wire color) F9 I Voltage 1 (P) - Ground TCM H Battery voltage 2 (P) - Ground J 6 (BR *1 or Y/R *2) Ground 0V SCIA2104E K *1: Column shift *2: Floor shift OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. L M Revision: October 2004 AT-175 2005 Titan MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT 2. CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE STEP 2 1. 2. 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.) Check voltage between A/T assembly harness connector terminals and ground. Item Connector Terminal (Wire color) Voltage 1 (P) - Ground TCM F44 2 (P) - Ground Battery voltage 6 (BR *1 or Y/R *2) Ground SCIA2105E *1: Column shift *2: Floor shift OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● Harness for short or open between battery and A/T assembly harness connector terminals 1, 2 ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and A/T assembly harness connector terminal 6 ● 10A fuse [No. 3, 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)] and 10A fuse (No. 49, located in the IPDM E/R) ● Ignition switch, Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4. CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector. Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector terminals and ground. Continuity should exist. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SCIA2106E 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items: ● The A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: October 2004 AT-176 2005 Titan MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT 6. PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS A Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . OK or NG B OK >> INSPECTION END NG-1 >> Self-diagnosis does not activate: GO TO 7. NG-2 >> DTC is displayed: Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . AT 7. CHECK TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Remove control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector and TCM connector. Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector terminals and TCM connector terminals. Item Connector Terminal (Wire color) A/T assembly harness connector F9 1 (W) F502 9 (W) F9 2 (GR) F502 10 (GR) F9 6 (R) F502 4 (R) TCM connector A/T assembly harness connector TCM connector A/T assembly harness connector TCM connector 4. G Yes H SCIA5464E Yes I Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector terminals and TCM connector terminals. Connector Terminal (Wire color) A/T assembly harness connector F9 5 (B) F504 21 (B) F9 10 (Y) F504 22 (Y) TCM connector A/T assembly harness connector TCM connector J Continuity K Yes L Yes SCIA5465E 5. If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . NG >> Replace open circuit or short to ground and short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: October 2004 E F Continuity Yes Item D AT-177 2005 Titan M TOW MODE SWITCH TOW MODE SWITCH Description PFP:25129 ECS00B2A When tow mode switch is “ON”, tow mode switch signals are sent to TCM from combination meter by CAN communication line.Then it`s a tow mode condition. Revision: October 2004 AT-178 2005 Titan TOW MODE SWITCH Wiring Diagram — AT — TMSW ECS00CCS A B AT D E F G H I J K L M BCWA0383E Revision: October 2004 AT-179 2005 Titan TOW MODE SWITCH Diagnostic Procedure ECS00B2B 1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Perform the self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . Is any malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results? YES >> Check CAN communication line. Refer to AT-97, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . NO >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK POWER SOURCE 1. 2. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Check the voltage between tow mode switch connector terminal 1 and ground. Condition Tow mode switch Data (Approx.) ON 0V When ignition switch is turned to “ON” OFF Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 3. SCIA5156E 3. CHECK TOW MODE SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect tow mode switch connector. Check continuity between tow mode switch connector M254 terminals 1 and 2. Condition Continuity Tow mode switch “ON” Yes Tow mode switch “OFF” No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace tow mode switch. SCIA5584E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the following items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Harness for short or open between combination meter connector terminal 35 and tow mode switch connector terminal 1. ● Harness for short or open between tow mode switch connector terminal 2 and ground. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 5. CHECK COMBINATION METER Check the combination meter. Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NO >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: October 2004 AT-180 2005 Titan CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION AND WIDE OPEN THROTTLE POSITION CIRCUIT CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION AND WIDE OPEN THROTTLE POSITION CIRCUIT PFP:18002 CONSULT-II Reference Value A ECS00B2C Item name CLSD THL POS W/O THL POS Condition Display value Released accelerator pedal. ON Fully depressed accelerator pedal. OFF Fully depressed accelerator pedal. ON Released accelerator pedal. OFF B AT D Diagnostic Procedure ECS00B2D 1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Perform the self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . Is a malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results? YES >> Check CAN communication line. Refer to AT-97, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . NO >> GO TO 2. E F 2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT G With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Depress accelerator pedal and read out the value of “CLSD THL POS” and “W/O THL POS”. H I Monitor Item Accelerator Pedal Operation CLSD THL POS W/O THL POS Released ON OFF Fully depressed OFF ON J PCIA0070E K OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Check the following items. If NG, repair or replace damaged parts. ● Perform the self-diagnosis for “ENGINE” with CONSULT-II. ● Open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. ● Pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. Revision: October 2004 AT-181 L M 2005 Titan BRAKE SIGNAL CIRCUIT BRAKE SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONSULT-II Reference Value Item name BRAKE SW PFP:25320 ECS00B2E Condition Display value Depressed brake pedal. ON Released brake pedal. OFF Diagnostic Procedure ECS00B2F 1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Perform the self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . Is a malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results? YES >> Check CAN communication line. Refer to AT-97, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . NO >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out ON/OFF switching action of the “BRAKE SW”. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 3. 1. 2. PCIA0070E 3. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH Check continuity between stop lamp switch harness connector terminals 1 and 2. Condition Continuity When brake pedal is depressed Yes When brake pedal is released No Check stop lamp switch after adjusting brake pedal — refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Check the following items. If NG, repair or replace damaged parts. ● Harness for short or open between battery and stop lamp switch. ● Harness for short or open between stop lamp switch and combination meter. Revision: October 2004 AT-182 SCIA2144E 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC PFP:00007 A ECS00CCT B AT D E F G H I J K L M BCWA0411E Revision: October 2004 AT-183 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS BCWA0326E Revision: October 2004 AT-184 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS A B AT D E F G H I J K L M BCWA0327E Revision: October 2004 AT-185 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS TCM terminals and data are reference value. Measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Item Terminal color Condition 3 L CAN-H 4 V K-line (CONSULTII signal) 7 R Back-up lamp relay – The terminal is connected to the data link connector for CONSULT-II Selector lever in "R" position. Selector lever in other positions. 8 P CAN-L – AT CHECK Indicator Lamp does not come on Data (Approx.) – – 0V Battery voltage – ECS00B2G SYMPTOM: AT CHECK indicator lamp does not come on for about 2 seconds when turning ignition switch to “ON”. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Perform the self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . Is a malfunction in the CAN communication indicated in the results? YES >> Check CAN communication line. Refer to AT-97, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . NO >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK A/T CHECK INDICATOR LAMP CIRCUIT Check the combination meter. Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 3. CHECK TCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check TCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer toAT-174, "MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” or “N” Position ECS00B2H SYMPTOM: ● ● Engine cannot be started with selector lever in “P” or “N” position. Engine can be started with selector lever in “D”or “R” position. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. Do the self-diagnosis results indicate PNP switch? Yes >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" . No >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 AT-186 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 2. CHECK CONTROL CABLE A Check the control cable. ● Refer to AT-238, "Checking of A/T Position" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-238, "Adjustment of A/ T Position" . B AT D LCIA0345E 3. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM E Check the starting system. Refer to SC-10, "STARTING SYSTEM" . OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. F In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed ECS00B2I G Even though the selector lever is set in the “P” position, the parking mechanism is not actuated, allowing the vehicle to be moved when it is pushed. H SYMPTOM: DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT I Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . Do the self-diagnosis results indicate PNP switch? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" . NO >> GO TO 2. K 2. CHECK CONTROL CABLE Check the control cable. ● Refer to AT-238, "Checking of A/T Position" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-238, "Adjustment of A/ T Position" . L M LCIA0345E 3. CHECK PARKING COMPONENTS Check parking components. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4 NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: October 2004 J AT-187 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 4. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION 1. 2. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.58) SCIA5199E In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves ECS00B2J SYMPTOM: Vehicle moves forward or backward when selecting “N” position. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" . NO >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK CONTROL CABLE Check the control cable. ● Refer to AT-238, "Checking of A/T Position" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-238, "Adjustment of A/ T Position" . LCIA0345E 3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Refill ATF. SAT638A Revision: October 2004 AT-188 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 4. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION A 1. 2. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.67). B AT D SCIA5199E E 5. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. Refer to AT-56, "Check at Idle" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 6. F G 6. PERFORM TCM INSPECTION Perform TCM input/output signals inspection. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. Large Shock (“N” to “D” Position) H I J ECS00B2K SYMPTOM: K A noticeable shock occurs when the selector lever is shifted from the “N” to “D” position. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS L Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . Do the self-diagnostic results indicate A/T fluid temperature sensor, engine speed signal, accelerator pedal position sensor, ATF pressure switch 1, front brake solenoid valve, CAN communication line? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-127, "DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" , AT-114, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" ., AT-124, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" , AT-166, "DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1" , AT-145, "DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-97, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . NO >> GO TO 2. 2. ENGINE IDLE SPEED Check the engine idle speed. Refer to EC-76, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair. Revision: October 2004 AT-189 2005 Titan M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 3. CHECK CONTROL CABLE Check the control cable. ● Refer to AT-238, "Checking of A/T Position" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-238, "Adjustment of A/ T Position" . LCIA0345E 4. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Refill ATF. SAT638A 5. CHECK LINE PRESSURE Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in “D” position. Refer to AT-53, "LINE PRESSURE TEST" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG - 1 >> Line pressure high: GO TO 6. NG - 2 >> Line pressure low: GO TO 7. SAT494G 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" . 2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . 3. Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-300, "Oil Pump" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. Revision: October 2004 AT-190 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A Control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" . B 2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . 3. Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-300, "Oil Pump" . AT – Power train system. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . – Transmission case. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . OK or NG D OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 8. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION E Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 9. 1. 2. F G H SCIA5199E I 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.1). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● J K 10. CHECK SYMPTOM L Check again. Refer to AT-56, "Check at Idle" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 11. M 11. PERFORM TCM INSPECTION Perform TCM input/output signals inspection. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. Revision: October 2004 AT-191 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position ECS00B2L SYMPTOM: The vehicle does not creep in the “R” position. Or an extreme lack of acceleration is observed. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . Do the self-diagnostic results indicate accelerator pedal position sensor, ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve, CAN communication line, PNP switch? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-124, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" , AT-172, "DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6" , AT-153, "DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-97, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" , AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" . NO >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK CONTROL CABLE Check the control cable. ● Refer to AT-238, "Checking of A/T Position" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-238, "Adjustment of A/ T Position" . LCIA0345E 3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Refill ATF. SAT638A 4. CHECK STALL TEST Check stall revolution with selector lever in “1” and “R” positions. Refer to AT-52, "STALL TEST" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. OK in “M” position, NG in “R” position>>GO TO 5. NG in both “M” and “R” positions>>GO TO 8. SAT493G Revision: October 2004 AT-192 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A 1. 2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check the following items: – Reverse brake. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. B AT 6. CHECK LINE PRESSURE D Check the line pressure with the engine idling. Refer to AT-53, "LINE PRESSURE TEST" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 7. NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 8. E F G SAT494G 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM H Control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" . 2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . 3. Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-300, "Oil Pump" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" . 2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . 3. Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-300, "Oil Pump" . – Power train system. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . – Transmission case. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. Revision: October 2004 AT-193 2005 Titan I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 9. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION 1. 2. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 13. SCIA5199E 10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.43). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 11. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. Refer to AT-56, "Check at Idle" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 12. 12. PERFORM TCM INSPECTION Perform TCM input/output signals inspection. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 13. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.43). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● Revision: October 2004 AT-194 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position ECS00B2M A SYMPTOM: Vehicle does not creep forward when selecting “D” position. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE B 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . AT Do the self-diagnostic results indicate accelerator pedal position sensor, CAN communication line, PNP switch? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-124, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SEN- D SOR" , AT-97, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" , AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" . NO >> GO TO 2. E CHECK CONTROL CABLE 2. Check the control cable. ● Refer to AT-238, "Checking of A/T Position" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-238, "Adjustment of A/ T Position" . F G H LCIA0345E I 3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL J Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Refill ATF. K L SAT638A 4. CHECK STALL TEST Check stall revolution with selector lever in “D” position. Refer to AT52, "STALL TEST" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 7. SAT493G Revision: October 2004 AT-195 2005 Titan M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 5. CHECK LINE PRESSURE Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in “D” position. Refer to AT-53, "LINE PRESSURE TEST" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 6. NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 7. SAT494G 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. Control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" . 2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . 3. Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-300, "Oil Pump" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" . 2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . 3. Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-300, "Oil Pump" . – Power train system. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . – Transmission case. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 8. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 12. 1. 2. SCIA5199E Revision: October 2004 AT-196 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.43). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● B AT 10. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. Refer to AT-56, "Check at Idle" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 11. D E 11. PERFORM TCM INSPECTION Perform TCM input/output signals inspection. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. F G H 12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.43). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ECS00B2N SYMPTOM: I J K Vehicle cannot be started from D1 on cruise test - Part 1. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE L 1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Check if vehicle creeps in “R” position. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refer to AT-192, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position" . M 2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnostic results? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. NO >> GO TO 3. Revision: October 2004 AT-197 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 3. CHECK ACCELERATOR POSITION (APP) SENSOR Check accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor. Refer to AT-124, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor. 4. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Refill ATF. SAT638A 5. CHECK LINE PRESSURE Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-53, "LINE PRESSURE TEST" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 6. NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 7. SAT494G 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" . 2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . 3. Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-300, "Oil Pump" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. Revision: October 2004 AT-198 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A Control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" . B 2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . 3. Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-300, "Oil Pump" . AT – Power train system. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . – Transmission case. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . OK or NG D OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 8. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION E Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 12. 1. 2. F G H SCIA5199E I 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.23). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● J K 10. CHECK SYMPTOM L Check again. Refer to AT-57, "Cruise Test - Part 1" , AT-59, "Cruise Test - Part 2" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 11. M 11. PERFORM TCM INSPECTION Perform TCM input/output signals inspection. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. Revision: October 2004 AT-199 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.23). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 ECS00B2O SYMPTOM: The vehicle does not shift-up from the D1 to D2 gear at the specified speed. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” position” and vehicle can be started from D1. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refer to AT-195, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position" , AT-197, "Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" . 2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . Do the self-diagnostic results indicate ATF pressure switch 5, direct clutch solenoid valve, accelerator pedal position sensor, vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor MTR? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-170, "DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5" , AT-149, "DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-124, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" , AT-109, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-134, "DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" . NO >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Refill ATF. SAT638A 4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-53, "LINE PRESSURE TEST" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 5. NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 6. SAT494G Revision: October 2004 AT-200 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A Control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" . B 2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . 3. Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-300, "Oil Pump" . AT OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. D DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. 6. 1. Control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" . 2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . 3. Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-300, "Oil Pump" . – Power train system. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . – Transmission case. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. E F G H 7. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 11. 1. 2. I J K L SCIA5199E 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM M Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.10). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 9. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. Refer to AT-57, "Cruise Test - Part 1" , AT-59, "Cruise Test - Part 2" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 10. Revision: October 2004 AT-201 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 10. PERFORM TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signals inspection. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.10). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 ECS00B2P SYMPTOM: The vehicle does not shift-up from D2 to D3 gear at the specified speed. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” position” and vehicle can be started from D1. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refer to AT-195, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position" , AT-197, "Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" . 2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . Do the self-diagnostic results indicate ATF pressure switch 6, high and low reverse clutch solenoid valve, accelerator pedal position sensor, vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor MTR? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-172, "DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6" , AT-153, "DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-124, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" , AT-109, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-134, "DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" . NO >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Refill ATF. SAT638A Revision: October 2004 AT-202 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE A Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-53, "LINE PRESSURE TEST" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 5. NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 6. B AT D SAT494G 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM E 1. Control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" . 2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . 3. Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-300, "Oil Pump" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. F G H 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" . 2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . 3. Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-300, "Oil Pump" . – Power train system. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . – Transmission case. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 7. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION J K L M Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 11. 1. 2. SCIA5199E Revision: October 2004 I AT-203 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.11). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 9. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. Refer to AT-57, "Cruise Test - Part 1" , AT-59, "Cruise Test - Part 2" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 10. 10. PERFORM TCM INSPECTION Perform TCM input/output signals inspection. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.11). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 ECS00B2Q SYMPTOM: ● ● The vehicle does not shift-up from the D3 to D4 gear at the specified speed. The vehicle does not shift-up from the D3 to D4 gear unless A/T is warmed up. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” position” and vehicle can be started from D1. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refer to AT-195, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position" , AT-197, "Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" . 2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . Do the self-diagnostic results indicate ATF pressure switch 1, ATF pressure switch 3, front brake solenoid valve, input clutch solenoid valve, accelerator pedal position sensor, vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor MTR? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-166, "DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1" , AT-168, "DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3" , AT-141, "DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-145, "DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-124, "DTC Revision: October 2004 AT-204 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS NO P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" , AT-109, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-134, "DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" . >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL A B Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Refill ATF. AT D E SAT638A 4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE F Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-53, "LINE PRESSURE TEST" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 5. NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 6. G H I SAT494G 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM J Control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" . 2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . 3. Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-300, "Oil Pump" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" . 2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . 3. Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-300, "Oil Pump" . – Power train system. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . – Transmission case. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. Revision: October 2004 AT-205 2005 Titan K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 7. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION 1. 2. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 11. SCIA5199E 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.12). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 9. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. Refer to AT-57, "Cruise Test - Part 1" , AT-59, "Cruise Test - Part 2" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 10. 10. PERFORM TCM INSPECTION Perform TCM input/output signals inspection. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.12). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● Revision: October 2004 AT-206 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D5 ECS00B2R A SYMPTOM: ● ● The vehicle does not shift-up from the D4 to D5 gear at the specified speed. The vehicle does not shift-up from the D4 to D5 gear unless A/T is warmed up. B DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM AT Check if vehicle creeps forward in “D” position” and vehicle can be started from D1. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refer to AT-195, "Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D” Position" , AT-197, "Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1" . D 2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS E Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . Do the self-diagnostic results indicate ATF pressure switch 1, ATF pressure switch 5, front brake solenoid valve, direct clutch solenoid valve, accelerator pedal position sensor, turbine revolution sensor, vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor MTR? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-166, "DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1" , AT-170, "DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5" , AT-145, "DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-149, "DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-124, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" , AT-132, "DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR" , AT-109, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-134, "DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" . NO >> GO TO 3. F G H I 3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Refill ATF. J K L SAT638A 4. CHECK LINE PRESSURE Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-53, "LINE PRESSURE TEST" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 5. NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 6. SAT494G Revision: October 2004 AT-207 2005 Titan M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. Control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" . 2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . 3. Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-300, "Oil Pump" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. Control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" . 2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . 3. Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-300, "Oil Pump" . – Power train system. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . – Transmission case. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 7. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 11. 1. 2. SCIA5199E 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.13). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 9. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. Refer to AT-57, "Cruise Test - Part 1" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 10. Revision: October 2004 AT-208 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 10. PERFORM TCM INSPECTION A Perform TCM input/output signals inspection. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness B connector. OK or NG AT OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM D Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.13). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● E F A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up ECS00B2S SYMPTOM: A/T does not perform lock-up at the specified speed. G DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS H Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . Do the self-diagnostic results indicate torque converter clutch solenoid valve, engine speed signal, turbine revolution sensor, accelerator pedal position sensor, CAN communication? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-116, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-114, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" , AT-132, "DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR" , AT-124, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" , AT-97, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . NO >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL I J K Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Refill ATF. L M SAT638A Revision: October 2004 AT-209 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 3. CHECK LINE PRESSURE Check line pressure at the engine stall point. Refer to AT-53, "LINE PRESSURE TEST" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG - 1 >> Line pressure high. GO TO 4. NG - 2 >> Line pressure low. GO TO 5. SAT494G 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM 1. Control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" . 2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . 3. Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-300, "Oil Pump" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Control valve with TCM. Refer to AT-250, "CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" . 2. Disassemble A/T. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . 3. Check the following items: – Oil pump assembly. Refer to AT-300, "Oil Pump" . – Power train system. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . – Transmission case. Refer to AT-283, "DISASSEMBLY" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 6. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 10. 1. 2. SCIA5199E Revision: October 2004 AT-210 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.24). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● B AT 8. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. Refer to AT-57, "Cruise Test - Part 1" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 9. D E 9. PERFORM TCM INSPECTION Perform TCM input/output signals inspection. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. F G H 10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.24). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition ECS00B2T SYMPTOM: I J K The lock-up condition cannot be maintained for more than 30 seconds. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE L 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . Do the self-diagnostic results indicate torque converter clutch solenoid valve, engine speed signal, turbine revolution sensor, CAN communication? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-116, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-114, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" , AT-132, "DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR" , AT-97, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . NO >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 AT-211 2005 Titan M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Refill ATF. SAT638A 3. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION 1. 2. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 7. SCIA5199E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.25). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 5. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. Refer to AT-57, "Cruise Test - Part 1" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 6. 6. PERFORM TCM INSPECTION Perform TCM input/output signals inspection. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. Revision: October 2004 AT-212 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.25). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● B AT Lock-up Is Not Released ECS00B2U SYMPTOM: The lock-up condition cannot be cancelled even after releasing the accelerator pedal. D DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS E Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . Do the self-diagnostic results indicate torque converter clutch solenoid valve, engine speed signal, turbine revolution sensor, CAN communication? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-116, "DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-114, "DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL" , AT-132, "DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR" , AT-97, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . NO >> GO TO 2. F G 2. CHECK SYMPTOM H Check again. Refer to AT-57, "Cruise Test - Part 1" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 3. I J 3. PERFORM TCM INSPECTION Perform TCM input/output signals inspection. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. K L M Revision: October 2004 AT-213 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle ECS00B2V SYMPTOM: When a shift-down is performed, the engine speed does not smoothly return to the idling speed. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Refill ATF. SAT638A 2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . Do the self-diagnostic results indicate front brake solenoid valve, direct clutch solenoid valve, ATF pressure switch 1, ATF pressure switch 5, accelerator pedal position sensor, vehicle speed sensor A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor MTR? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-145, "DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-149, "DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE" , AT-166, "DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1" , AT-170, "DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5" , AT-124, "DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR" , AT-109, "DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)" , AT-134, "DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR" . NO >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 7. 1. 2. SCIA5199E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.72). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● Revision: October 2004 AT-214 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 5. CHECK SYMPTOM A Check again. Refer to AT-57, "Cruise Test - Part 1" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 6. B 6. PERFORM TCM INSPECTION AT Perform TCM input/output signals inspection. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM D E F Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.72). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● Cannot Be Changed to Manual Mode (Column Shift) G H ECS00B2W SYMPTOM: I Does not change to manual mode when manual shift gate is used. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. MANUAL MODE SWITCH J Check the manual mode switch. Refer to AT-161, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. K 2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS L Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . Do the self-diagnosis results indicate turbine revolution sensor? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-132, "DTC P1716 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR" . NO >> INSPECTION END A/T Does Not Shift: 5th gear → 4th gear (Floor Shift Models) ECS00B2X SYMPTOM: When shifted from D5 to 44 position, does not downshift from 5th to 4th gears. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . Do the self-diagnosis results indicate PNP switch, ATF pressure switch 1? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" , AT-166, "DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1" . NO >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 AT-215 2005 Titan M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 2. CHECK 4TH POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “ON”. Select "ECU INPUT SIGNALS" in "DATA MONITOR" mode for "A/T" with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out "OD CONT SW" switch moving selector lever to each position. 1. 2. Monitor item Condition Display value ON OD CONT SW When setting the selector lever to "4" and "3" positions. When setting selector lever to other positions. OFF 1. 2. LCIA0339E Without CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine) Check voltage between A/T device harness connector terminal and ground. Item 4th position switch Connector No. M203 Terminal No. (Wire color) 1 (SB) Ground Condition Data (Approx.) When setting the selector lever to "4" and "3" positions. 0V LCIA0340E When setting selector lever to other positions. Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Refill ATF. SAT638A Revision: October 2004 AT-216 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 4. CHECK CONTROL CABLE A Check the control cable. ● Refer to AT-238, "Checking of A/T Position" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-238, "Adjustment of A/ T Position" . B AT D LCIA0345E 5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION E 1. 2. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 9. F G H SCIA5199E I 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.14). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 7. CHECK SYMPTOM K L Check again. Refer to AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 3" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. M 8. PERFORM TCM INSPECTION Perform TCM input/output signals inspection. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. Revision: October 2004 J AT-217 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.14). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● A/T Does Not Shift: 5th gear → 4th gear (Column Shift Models) ECS00CCO SYMPTOM: When shifted from 5M to 4M position in manual mode, does not downshift from 5th to 4th gear. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch, ATF pressure switch 1? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" , AT-166, "DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1" . NO >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Refill ATF. SAT638A 3. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE Check the control linkage. Refer to AT-238, "Checking of A/T Position" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-238, "Adjustment of A/T Position" . ● LCIA0345E 4. MANUAL MODE SWITCH Check the manual mode switch. Refer to AT-161, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: October 2004 AT-218 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION A 1. 2. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 9. B AT D SCIA5199E E 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.14). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 7. CHECK SYMPTOM F G H Check again. Refer to AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 3" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. I 8. CHECK TCM J Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. K L 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.14). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● Revision: October 2004 AT-219 2005 Titan M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS A/T Does Not Shift: 4th gear → 3rd gear (Floor Shift Models) ECS00B2Y SYMPTOM: When shifted from 44 to 33 position, does not downshift from 4th to 3rd gears. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . Do the self-diagnosis results indicate PNP switch, ATF pressure switch 1, ATF pressure switch 3? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" , AT-166, "DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1" , AT-168, "DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3" . NO >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Refill ATF. SAT638A 3. CHECK CONTROL CABLE Check the control cable. ● Refer to AT-238, "Checking of A/T Position" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-238, "Adjustment of A/ T Position" . LCIA0345E 4. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 8. 1. 2. SCIA5199E Revision: October 2004 AT-220 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.15). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● B AT 6. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. Refer to AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 3" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 7. D E 7. PERFORM TCM INSPECTION Perform TCM input/output signals inspection. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. F G H 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.15). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● I J K L M Revision: October 2004 AT-221 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS A/T Does Not Shift: 4th gear → 3rd gear (Column Shift Models) ECS00CCP SYMPTOM: When shifted from 4M to 3M position in manual mode, does not downshift from 4th to 3rd gear. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch, ATF pressure switch 1, ATF pressure switch 3? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" , AT-166, "DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1" , AT-168, "DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3" . NO >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Refill ATF. SAT638A 3. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE Check the control linkage. ● Refer to AT-238, "Checking of A/T Position" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-238, "Adjustment of A/T Position" . LCIA0345E 4. MANUAL MODE SWITCH Check the manual mode switch. Refer to AT-161, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: October 2004 AT-222 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION A 1. 2. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 9. B AT D SCIA5199E E 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.15). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 7. CHECK SYMPTOM F G H Check again. Refer to AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 3" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. I 8. CHECK TCM J Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. K L 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.15). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● Revision: October 2004 AT-223 2005 Titan M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd gear → 2nd gear (Floor Shift Models) ECS00B2Z SYMPTOM: When shifted from 33 to 22 position, does not downshift from 3rd to 2nd gears. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . Do the self-diagnosis results indicate PNP switch, ATF pressure switch 6? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" , AT-172, "DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6" . NO >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Refill ATF. SAT638A 3. CHECK CONTROL CABLE Check the control cable. ● Refer to AT-238, "Checking of A/T Position" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-238, "Adjustment of A/ T Position" . LCIA0345E 4. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 8. 1. 2. SCIA5199E Revision: October 2004 AT-224 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM A Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.16). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● B AT 6. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. Refer to AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 3" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 7. D E 7. PERFORM TCM INSPECTION Perform TCM input/output signals inspection. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. F G H 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.16). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● I J K L M Revision: October 2004 AT-225 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd gear → 2nd gear (Column Shift Models) ECS00CCQ SYMPTOM: When shifted from 3M to 2M position in manual mode, does not downshift from 3rd to 2nd gear. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch, ATF pressure switch 6? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" , AT-172, "DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6" . NO >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Refill ATF. SAT638A 3. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE Check the control linkage. ● Refer to AT-238, "Checking of A/T Position" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-238, "Adjustment of A/T Position" . LCIA0345E 4. MANUAL MODE SWITCH Check the manual mode switch. Refer to AT-161, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: October 2004 AT-226 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION A 1. 2. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 9. B AT D SCIA5199E E 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.16). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 7. CHECK SYMPTOM F G H Check again. Refer to AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 3" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. I 8. CHECK TCM J Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. K L 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.16). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● Revision: October 2004 AT-227 2005 Titan M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd gear → 1st gear (Floor Shift Models) ECS00B30 SYMPTOM: When shifted from 22 to 11 position, does not downshift from 2nd to 1st gears. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . Do the self-diagnosis results indicate PNP switch, ATF pressure switch 5? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" , AT-170, "DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5" . NO >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK 1ST POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “ON”. Select "ECU INPUT SIGNALS" in "DATA MONITOR" mode for "A/T" with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out "OVERDRIVE SW" switch moving selector lever to each position. 1. 2. Monitor item 1 POSITION SW Condition Display value When setting the selector lever to "1" position. ON When setting selector lever to other positions. OFF LCIA0339E Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine) 2. Check voltage between A/T device harness connector terminal and ground. Item 1st position switch Connector No. M203 Terminal No. (Wire color) 7 (Y/G) Ground Condition Data (Approx.) When setting the selector lever to "1" position. When setting selector lever to other positions. 0V LCIA0341E Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: October 2004 AT-228 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL A Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Refill ATF. B AT D SAT638A 4. CHECK CONTROL CABLE E Check the control cable. ● Refer to AT-238, "Checking of A/T Position" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-238, "Adjustment of A/ T Position" . F G H LCIA0345E 5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION I Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 9. 1. 2. J K L SCIA5199E 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.17). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 7. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. Refer to AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 3" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. Revision: October 2004 AT-229 2005 Titan M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 8. PERFORM TCM INSPECTION 1. Perform TCM input/output signals inspection. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.17). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● Revision: October 2004 AT-230 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd gear → 1st gear (Column Shift Models) ECS00CCR A SYMPTOM: When shifted from 2M to 1M position in manual mode, does not downshift from 2nd to 1st gear. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE B 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . AT Do the self-diagnostic results indicate PNP switch, ATF pressure switch 5? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" , AT-170, "DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5" . D NO >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL E Check A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Refill ATF. F G H SAT638A 3. CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE I Check the control linkage. ● Refer to AT-238, "Checking of A/T Position" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-238, "Adjustment of A/T Position" . J K L LCIA0345E 4. MANUAL MODE SWITCH M Check the manual mode switch. Refer to AT-161, "DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: October 2004 AT-231 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION 1. 2. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 9. SCIA5199E 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.17). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 7. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. Refer to AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 3" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. 8. CHECK TCM Check TCM input/output signals. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 2. 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.17). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● Revision: October 2004 AT-232 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake ECS00B31 A SYMPTOM: No engine brake is applied when the gear is shifted from the 22 to 11 . DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE B 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. AT Do the self-diagnosis results indicate PNP switch, ATF pressure switch 5? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. Refer to AT-105, "DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH" , AT-170, "DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5" . D NO >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK 1ST POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT E With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “ON”. Select "ECU INPUT SIGNALS" in "DATA MONITOR" mode for "A/T" with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out "OVERDRIVE SW" switch moving selector lever to each position. 1. 2. Monitor item 1 POSITION SW Condition Display value When setting the selector lever to "1" position. ON When setting selector lever to other positions. OFF F G H LCIA0339E I Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine) 2. Check voltage between A/T device harness connector terminal and ground. Item 1st position switch Connector No. M203 Terminal No. (Wire color) 7 (Y/G) Ground Condition K Data (Approx.) When setting the selector lever to "1" position. When setting selector lever to other positions. J L 0V LCIA0341E Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: October 2004 AT-233 2005 Titan M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 3. CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL Check the A/T fluid level. Refer to AT-12, "Checking A/T Fluid" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Refill ATF. SAT638A 4. CHECK CONTROL CABLE Check the control cable. ● Refer to AT-238, "Checking of A/T Position" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Adjust control cable. Refer to AT-238, "Adjustment of A/ T Position" . LCIA0345E 5. CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-250, "Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2" . Check A/T fluid condition. Refer to AT-52, "Fluid Condition Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 9. 1. 2. SCIA5199E 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.58). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 7. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. Refer to AT-60, "Cruise Test - Part 3" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. Revision: October 2004 AT-234 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 8. PERFORM TCM INSPECTION A Perform TCM input/output signals inspection. Refer to AT-84, "TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . 2. If NG, recheck A/T assembly harness connector terminals for damage or loose connection with harness B connector. OK or NG AT OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 1. 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM D Check the malfunction items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to AT-63, "Symptom Chart" (Symptom No.58). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 AT-235 2005 Titan SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM Control Device Removal and Installation PFP:34901 ECS00B32 Floor shift models LCIA0348E 1. Selector lever knob 2. A/T console finisher 3. Control device assembly 4. Position lamp 5. A/T selector control cable 6. Lock plate Revision: October 2004 AT-236 2005 Titan SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM Column shift models A B AT D E F LCIA0346E 1. Column shift control 2. Shift cable 3. A/T cable lock plate clip G REMOVAL Floor shift 1. 2. 3. 4. H Remove A/T finisher. Refer to IP-13, "A/T FINISHER" . Disconnect A/T device harness connector. Disconnect selector control cable. Remove control device assembly. I Column shift 1. 2. Remove the column shift control. Refer to PS-9, "STEERING COLUMN" . Remove the A/T cable clip lock plate and remove the cable from column shifter pin. J K L M LCIA0343E INSTALLATION Installation is in reverse order of removal. ● After installation is completed, be sure to check A/T position, refer to AT-238, "Checking of A/T Position" and adjust if necessary, refer to AT-238, "Adjustment of A/T Position" . Revision: October 2004 AT-237 2005 Titan SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM Adjustment of A/T Position 1. 2. 3. ECS00B33 Loosen nut of control cable. Place PNP switch and selector lever in “P” position. After pushing the control cable in the direction shown with a force of 9.8 N·m (1kg-m, 2.2 lb-ft), release it. This is in the natural state, tighten control cable nut to specifications. Control cable nut : 14.5 N·m (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft-lb) LCIA0345E Checking of A/T Position ECS00B34 NOTE: Following procedure will cover both column and floor shift selector levers. 1. Place selector lever in “P” position, and turn ignition switch ON (engine stop). 2. Make sure selector lever can be shifted to other than “P” position when brake pedal is depressed. Also make sure selector lever can be shifted from “P” position only when brake pedal is depressed. 3. Move the selector lever and check for excessive effort, sticking, noise or rattle. 4. Confirm the selector lever stops at each position with the feel of engagement when it is moved through all the positions. Check whether or not the actual position the selector lever is in matches the position shown by the shift position indicator and the transmission body. 5. The method of operating the lever to individual positions correctly should be as shown in the figure. 6. Confirm the back-up lamps illuminate only when lever is placed in the “R” position. Confirm the back-up lamps does not illuminate when selector lever is pushed against “R” position in the “P” or “N” position. 7. Confirm the engine can only be started with the selector lever in the “P” and “N” positions. 8. Make sure transmission is locked completely in “P” position. LCIA0325E LCIA0347E Revision: October 2004 AT-238 2005 Titan A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM Description PFP:34950 A ECS00B35 FLOOR SHIFT ● ● The electrical key interlock mechanism also operates as a shift lock: B With the ignition switch turned to ON, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” (parking) to any other position unless the brake pedal is depressed. With the key removed, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” to any other position. AT The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is placed in “P”. The shift lock and key interlock mechanisms are controlled by the ON-OFF operation of the shift lock solenoid and by the operation of the rotator and slider located inside the key cylinder, respectively. D COLUMN SHIFT ● ● The mechanical key interlock mechanism also operates as a shift lock: With the ignition switch turned to ON, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” (parking) to any other position unless the brake pedal is depressed. With the key removed, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” to any other position. The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is placed in “P”. The shift lock and key interlock mechanisms are controlled by the ON-OFF operation of the shift lock solenoid and by the operation of the rotator and slider located inside the key cylinder. Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location ECS00B36 FLOOR SHIFT E F G H I J K L M LCIA0326E Revision: October 2004 AT-239 2005 Titan A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM COLUMN SHIFT LCIA0344E Revision: October 2004 AT-240 2005 Titan A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM Wiring Diagram — A/T — SHIFT ECS00B37 A FLOOR SHIFT B AT D E F G H I J K L M BCWA0337E Revision: October 2004 AT-241 2005 Titan A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM COLUMN SHIFT BCWA0338E Revision: October 2004 AT-242 2005 Titan A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM Shift Lock Control Unit Reference Values ECS00B38 A SHIFT LOCK HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINALS LAYOUT B AT D LCIA0327E SHIFT LOCK CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE Data are reference values. TERWIRE MINAL COLOR NO. 1 Y/R ITEM Power source 2 L/R Detention switch (for key) 3 GR Detention switch (for shift) 4 R/G Stop lamp switch 5 W/R Vehicle speed signal 6 G/R Ignition signal 7 R/W Shift lock solenoid 8 B 9 10 G/W W/G CONDITION Key unlock solenoid VOLTAGE (V) Ignition switch: “ON” Battery voltage Ignition switch: “OFF” Battery voltage When selector lever is not in “P” position with key inserted. Battery voltage Except the above Approx. 0V When selector lever is not in “P” position Battery voltage Except the above Approx. 0V When brake pedal is depressed Battery voltage When brake pedal is released Approx. 0V — — — Approx. 0V Ignition switch: “ON” Battery voltage When brake pedal is depressed with ignition switch “ON”. Approx. 0V When brake pedal is depressed. Battery voltage Always Approx. 0V When the selector lever is set to a position other than the “P” position, and the key switch is turned from “ON” to “OFF” Battery voltage for approx. 0.1 sec. (Note) Except the above Approx. 0V When ignition switch is not in “ON” position with key inserted. Battery voltage for approx. 0.1 sec. (Note) Except the above Approx. 0V NOTE: Confirm that the pointer swings only momentarily because the output time is so short. If the inspection is done with an oscilloscope, it should be observed that the power source voltage lasts for 3.5 to 10 ms. Revision: October 2004 AT-243 F G H I — Ignition switch: “OFF” Ground Key lock solenoid E 2005 Titan J K L M A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ECS00B39 COLUMN SHIFT SYMPTOM 1: ● Selector lever cannot be moved from “P” position with key in ON position and brake pedal applied. ● Selector lever can be moved from “P” position with key in ON position and brake pedal released. ● Selector lever can be moved from “P” position when key is removed from key cylinder. SYMPTOM 2: ● Ignition key cannot be removed when selector lever is set to “P” position. ● Ignition key can be removed when selector lever is set to any position except “P”. 1. CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION Check the selector lever position for damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check selector lever. Refer to AT-238, "Adjustment of A/T Position" . 2. CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID AND PARK POSITION SWITCH 1. 2. 3. 4. Connect A/T device harness connector. Turn ignition switch “ON”. Selector lever is set in “P” position. Check operation sound. Condition Brake pedal Operation sound When ignition switch is turned to “ON” position and selector lever is set in “P” position. Depressed Yes Released No OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK POWER SOURCE 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Selector lever is set in “P” position. Check the voltage between A/T device connector M68 terminal 3 (G/R) and ground. Condition Brake pedal Data (Approx.) When ignition switch is turned to “ON” position. Depressed Battery voltage Released 0V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 4. Revision: October 2004 SCIA5657E AT-244 2005 Titan A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM 4. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect stop lamp switch connector. Check continuity between stop lamp switch connector E38 terminals 3 and 4. Condition B Continuity When brake pedal is depressed Yes When brake pedal is released No Check stop lamp switch after adjusting brake pedal — refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. AT D WCIA0247E E 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM F Check the following items. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. ● Harness for short or open between fuse block (J/B) and stop lamp switch terminal 4 (G/R) ● Harness for short or open between stop lamp switch terminal 3 (G/R) and A/T device terminal 3 (G/R). ● 10A fuse [No.12, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● Ignition switch. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. G H I 6. CHECK A/T DEVICE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. J Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect A/T device connector. Check continuity between A/T device connector M68 terminal 1 and terminal 3. Condition K Continuity Selector lever in “P” position No Selector lever in other position Yes 4. Connect A/T device connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace shift lock solenoid or park position switch. L M WCIA0248E 7. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect A/T device connector. Check continuity between A/T device connector M68 terminal 1 (B) and ground. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace shift lock solenoid or park position switch. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: October 2004 AT-245 SCIA5656E 2005 Titan A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM Component Inspection ECS00B3A FLOOR SHIFT Shift Lock Solenoid Check operation by applying battery voltage to the A/T device. CAUTION: Be sure to apply the voltage of the correct polarity to the respective terminals. Otherwise, the part may be damaged. ● Connector No. Terminal No. M203 9 (Battery voltage) - 10 (Ground) LCIA0328E DETENTION SWITCH For Key ● Check continuity between terminals of the A/T device. Condition Connector No. Terminal No. M203 5-6 Continuity When selector lever is “P” position. When selector lever is not “P” position. No Yes LIIA1599E For Shift ● Check continuity between terminals of the A/T device. Condition When selector lever is “P” position. Connector No. Terminal No. M203 3-4 Continuity No When selector lever is not “P” position. Yes WCIA0401E KEY LOCK SOLENOID Key Lock Check operation by applying battery voltage to key switch and key lock solenoid. CAUTION: Be careful not to cause burnout of the harness. ● Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) M80 1 (O) (Battery voltage) - 2 (B) (Ground) WCIA0240E Revision: October 2004 AT-246 2005 Titan A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM Key Unlock A Check operation by applying battery voltage to key switch and key lock solenoid. CAUTION: Be careful not to cause burnout of the harness. ● Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) M80 2 (B) (Battery voltage) - 1 (O) (Ground) B AT WCIA0241E D KEY SWITCH ● Check continuity between terminals of the key switch and key lock solenoid. Condition Connector No. Key inserted M80 Terminal No. (Wire color) E Continuity F Yes 3 (R/L) - 4 (R/L) Key withdrawn No G SCIA5662E H STOP LAMP SWITCH ● Check continuity between terminals of the stop lamp switch. Condition When brake pedal is depressed Connector No. Terminal No. (Wire color) E38 1 (R/Y) - 2 (R/G) I Continuity When brake pedal is released Yes J No Check stop lamp switch after adjusting brake pedal. K WCIA0255E L M Revision: October 2004 AT-247 2005 Titan KEY INTERLOCK CABLE KEY INTERLOCK CABLE Components PFP:34908 ECS00B3B LCIA0349E CAUTION: ● Install key interlock cable in such a way that it will not be damaged by sharp bends, twists or interference with adjacent parts. ● After installing key interlock cable to control device, make sure that casing cap and bracket are firmly secured in their positions. If casing cap can be removed with an external load of less than 39.2 N (4.0 kg, 8.8 lb), replace key interlock cable with new one. Removal 1. ECS00B3C Unlock slider from adjuster holder and remove rod from cable. LCIA0350E Revision: October 2004 AT-248 2005 Titan KEY INTERLOCK CABLE 2. Remove casing cap from bracket. A B AT LCIA0356E D 3. Disconnect the holder from the key cylinder and remove the key interlock cable. E F G LCIA0351E Installation 1. 2. 3. ECS00B3D Set key interlock cable to key cylinder and install holder. Set selector lever to P position. Turn key to lock position. H I J K LCIA0351E 4. 5. 6. Insert key interlock rod into adjuster holder. Install casing cap to bracket. Move slider in order to lock adjuster holder to interlock rod. CAUTION: ● Install key interlock cable in such a way that it will not be damaged by sharp bends, twists or interference with adjacent parts. ● After installing key interlock cable to control device, make sure that casing cap and bracket are firmly secured in their positions. If casing cap can be removed with an external load of less than 39.2 N (4.0 kg, 8.8 lb), replace key interlock cable with new one. Revision: October 2004 AT-249 L M LCIA0356E 2005 Titan ON-VEHICLE SERVICE ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2 PFP:00000 ECS00B3E COMPONENTS SCIA5478E 1. Transmission 2. Snap ring 3. Sub-harness 4. Control valve with TCM 5. Bracket 6. A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 7. Oil pan gasket 8. Oil pan 9. Magnet 10. Drain plug 11. Drain plug gasket 13. Terminal cord assembly 14. O-ring 12. Oil pan bolt CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. 2. 3. Disconnect battery negative cable from battery negative terminal. Drain ATF through drain plug. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector. Revision: October 2004 AT-250 2005 Titan ON-VEHICLE SERVICE 4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector. A B AT SCIA5021E D 5. Push A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. E F G SCIA5022E 6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. H I J SCIA2308E 7. Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of malfunction. If the A/T fluid is very dark, smells burned, or contains foreign particles, frictional material (clutches, band) may need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches to stick and can inhibit pump pressure. ● If frictional material is detected, perform A/T fluid cooler cleaning. Refer to AT-12, "A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning" . L M SCIA5199E 8. Remove magnets from oil pan. SCIA5200E Revision: October 2004 AT-251 K 2005 Titan ON-VEHICLE SERVICE 9. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. SCIA5023E 10. Straighten terminal clips to free terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. SCIA5446E 11. Disconnect revolution sensor connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. SCIA5024E 12. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness. SCIA3969E 13. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM. Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts A 42 (1.65) 5 B 55 (2.17) 6 C 40 (1.57) 1 SCIA5139E Revision: October 2004 AT-252 2005 Titan ON-VEHICLE SERVICE 14. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case. CAUTION: When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically. A B AT SCIA5142E D 15. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. E F G SCIA5301E 16. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. H I J SCIA5307E K 17. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector. L M SCIA5155E 18. Disconnect TCM connectors. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors. SCIA5447E Revision: October 2004 AT-253 2005 Titan ON-VEHICLE SERVICE 19. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using a flat-bladed screwdriver. SCIA5448E 20. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. SCIA5449E Installation CAUTION: After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level. Refer to MA-23, "Changing A/T Fluid" and MA-21, "Checking A/T Fluid" . 1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector. SCIA5449E 2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM. SCIA5450E Revision: October 2004 AT-254 2005 Titan ON-VEHICLE SERVICE 3. Connect TCM connectors. A B AT SCIA5447E D 4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse O-ring. ● Apply ATF to O-ring. E F G SCIA5155E 5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. H I J SCIA5306E 6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. K L M SCIA5301E 7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case. CAUTION: ● Make sure that turbine revolution sensor securely installs turbine revolution sensor hole. ● Hang down terminal cord assembly and revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM. ● Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case. SCIA5034E Revision: October 2004 AT-255 2005 Titan ON-VEHICLE SERVICE ● Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection. SCIA5142E 8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM. Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts A 42 (1.65) 5 B 55 (2.17) 6 C 40 (1.57) 1 SCIA5139E 9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After that tighten them in order (1 → 2 → 3), and then tighten other bolts. SCIA5140E 10. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. SCIA5023E 11. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips. SCIA5446E Revision: October 2004 AT-256 2005 Titan ON-VEHICLE SERVICE 12. Connect revolution sensor connector. A B AT SCIA5024E D 13. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips. E F G SCIA3969E 14. Install magnets in oil pan. H I J SCIA5200E 15. Install oil pan in transmission case. a. Install new oil pan gasket in oil pan. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse oil pan gasket. ● Install it in the direction to align hole positions. ● Complete remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. from oil pan gasket mounting surfaces. b. Install oil pan (with new oil pan gasket) in transmission case. CAUTION: ● Install it so that drain plug comes to the position as shown. ● Be careful not to pinch harnesses. ● Complete remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. from oil pan mounting surfaces. SCIA2308E Revision: October 2004 AT-257 2005 Titan K L M ON-VEHICLE SERVICE c. Tighten oil pan bolts to the specified torque in numerical order as shown after temporarily tightening them. Refer to AT-250, "COMPONENTS" . CAUTION: Do not reuse oil pan bolts. 16. Tighten drain plug to the specified torque. Refer to AT-250, "COMPONENTS" . CAUTION: Do not reuse drain plug gasket. SCIA2492E 17. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. SCIA5038E 18. Install snap ring in A/T assembly harness connector. 19. Connect A/T assembly harness connector. 20. Pour ATF into transmission assembly. Refer to MA-23, "Changing A/T Fluid" . 21. Connect the negative battery terminal SCIA5039E A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. 2. 3. Disconnect battery negative cable from battery negative terminal. Drain ATF through drain plug. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. SCIA2308E Revision: October 2004 AT-258 2005 Titan ON-VEHICLE SERVICE 4. Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of malfunction. If the A/T fluid is very dark, smells burned, or contains foreign particles, frictional material (clutches, band) may need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches to stick and can inhibit pump pressure. ● If frictional material is detected, perform A/T fluid cooler cleaning. Refer to AT-12, "A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning" . A B AT SCIA5199E D 5. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. E F G SCIA5023E 6. Straighten terminal clips to free A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. H I J SCIA5146E 7. K Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. L M SCIA5253E 8. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. SCIA5307E Revision: October 2004 AT-259 2005 Titan ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Installation CAUTION: After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level. Refer to MA-23, "Changing A/T Fluid" and MA-21, "Checking A/T Fluid" . 1. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 in bracket. CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. SCIA5306E 2. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 in control valve with TCM. (With bracket.) SCIA5253E 3. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. SCIA5023E 4. Securely fasten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips. SCIA5146E 5. a. Install oil pan in transmission case. Install new oil pan gasket in oil pan. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse oil pan gasket. ● Install it in the direction to align hole positions. ● Complete remove all moisture, oil and old sealant, etc. from oil pan gasket mounting surfaces. Revision: October 2004 AT-260 2005 Titan ON-VEHICLE SERVICE b. Install new oil pan (with oil pan gasket) to transmission case. CAUTION: ● Install it so that drain plug comes to the position as shown. ● Be careful not to pinch harnesses. ● Complete remove all moisture, oil and old sealant, etc. from oil pan mounting surfaces. A B AT SCIA2308E c. 6. 7. 8. Tighten oil pan bolts to the specified torque in numerical order as shown after temporarily tightening them. Refer to AT-250, "COMPONENTS" . CAUTION: Do not reuse oil pan bolts. Tighten drain plug to the specified torque. Refer to AT-250, "COMPONENTS" . CAUTION: Do not reuse drain plug gasket. Pour ATF into transmission assembly. Refer to MA-23, "Changing A/T Fluid" . Connect the negative battery terminal D E F G SCIA2492E H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 AT-261 2005 Titan ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Rear Oil Seal ECS00B3F REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. 2. 3. Remove rear propeller shaft.Refer to PR-8, "Removal and Installation" . Remove transfer from transmission (4WD models). Refer to TF87, "Removal and Installation" . Remove rear oil seal using a flat-bladed screwdriver or suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch rear extension assembly (2WD models) or adapter case assembly (4WD models). SCIA5254E Installation CAUTION: After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level. Refer to MA-23, "Changing A/T Fluid" and MA-21, "Checking A/T Fluid" . 1. Install new rear oil seal into the extension case (2WD models) or adapter case (4WD models) until it is flush with component face, using Tool or suitable drift. CAUTION: ● Apply ATF to rear oil seal. ● Do not reuse rear oil seal 2. Install transfer on transmission (4WD models). Refer to TF-87, "Removal and Installation" . 3. Install rear propeller shaft. Refer to PR-8, "Removal and Installation" . SCIA5583E Revision: October 2004 AT-262 2005 Titan AIR BREATHER HOSE AIR BREATHER HOSE Removal and Installation PFP:31098 A ECS00B3G 4X2 Refer to the figure below for air breather hose removal and installation procedure. B AT D E F G H I J LCIA0352E CAUTION: ● When installing an air breather hose, be careful not to crush or block the hose by folding or bending. ● When inserting a hose in to the transmission tube, be sure to insert it fully until its end reaches the tube bend portion. K L M Revision: October 2004 AT-263 2005 Titan AIR BREATHER HOSE 4X4 Refer to the figure below for air breather hose removal and installation procedure. LCIA0353E CAUTION: ● When installing an air breather hose, be careful not to be crushed or blocked by folding or bending the hose. ● When inserting a hose to the transmission tube, be sure to insert it fully until its end reaches the tube bend portion. Revision: October 2004 AT-264 2005 Titan TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation (4x2) PFP:31020 A ECS00B3H COMPONENTS B AT D E F G H I J LCIA0354E 1. A/T fluid indicator pipe 2. A/T fluid indicator 3. O-ring 6. A/T cross member 4. Transmission assembly 5. A/T fluid cooler tube 7. Insulator 8. Copper washers K L REMOVAL CAUTION: When removing the A/T assembly from engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS) from the A/T assembly. Be careful not to damage sensor edge. 1. Disconnect battery negative cable from battery negative terminal. 2. Remove engine cover. 3. Remove A/T fluid indicator gauge. 4. Remove engine under cover with power tool. 5. Remove exhaust front tube and center muffler with power tool. Refer to EX-4, "REMOVAL" . 6. Remove propeller shaft. Refer to PR-8, "Removal and Installation" . 7. Remove A/T control cable. Refer to AT-236, "SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM" . Revision: October 2004 AT-265 2005 Titan M TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY 8. Remove crankshaft position sensor (POS) from A/T assembly. 9. Remove fluid cooler tube. 10. Remove dust cover from converter housing part. LCIA0334E 11. Turn crankshaft, and remove the four bolts for drive plate and torque converter. CAUTION: When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from the front of the engine. 12. Support A/T assembly with a transmission jack. CAUTION: When setting the transmission jack, be careful not to allow it to collide against the drain plug. 13. Remove cross member with power tool. 14. Remove air breather hose. Refer to AT-263, "Removal and Installation" . 15. Disconnect A/T unit assembly connector. 16. Remove A/T fluid indicator pipe from A/T assembly. 17. Plug up openings such as the fluid charging pipe hole, etc. 18. Remove the A/T assembly to engine bolts with power tool. 19. Remove A/T assembly from vehicle with a transmission jack. ● Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping. ● Secure A/T assembly to a jack. LCIA0335E SCIA0499E INSPECTION Installation and Inspection of Torque Converter ● After inserting a torque converter to a transmission, be sure to check dimension A to ensure it is within the reference value limit. Dimension A : 24.0 mm (0.94 in) or more SAT017B Revision: October 2004 AT-266 2005 Titan TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION A Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of the removal. ● When installing transmission to the engine, attach the bolts as shown. Transmission to engine bolts : 113 N·m (12 kg-m, 83 ft-lb) B NOTE: *: No.2 bolt also secures air breather vent. AT D LCIA0371E E Align the positions of bolts for drive plate with those of the torque converter, and temporarily tighten the bolts. Then, tighten the bolts to the specified torque. CAUTION: ● When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from the front of the engine. ● After converter is installed to drive plate, rotate crankshaft several turns and check to be sure that transmission rotates freely without binding. ● Install crankshaft position sensor (POS). LCIA0335E ● After completing installation, check fluid leakage, fluid level, and the positions of A/T. Refer to MA-23, "Changing A/T Fluid" , AT-238, "Adjustment of A/T Position" , AT-238, "Checking of A/T Position" . ● F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 AT-267 2005 Titan TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation (4x4) ECS00B3I COMPONENTS WCIA0428E 1. A/T fluid indicator pipe 4. Transmission assembly 7. A/T cross member 2. A/T fluid indicator 3. O-ring 5. Fluid cooler tube 6. 8. Insulator Copper washer REMOVAL CAUTION: When removing the A/T assembly from engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor (POS) from the A/T assembly. Be careful not to damage sensor edge. 1. Disconnect battery negative cable from battery negative terminal. 2. Remove engine cover with power tool. 3. Remove A/T fluid indicator. 4. Remove engine under cover with power tool. 5. Remove exhaust front tube and center muffler with power tool. Refer to EX-4, "REMOVAL" . 6. Remove propeller shaft. Refer to PR-4, "Removal and Installation" , PR-8, "Removal and Installation" . 7. Remove A/T control cable. Refer to AT-236, "SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM" . Revision: October 2004 AT-268 2005 Titan TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY 8. Remove crankshaft position sensor (POS) from A/T assembly. 9. Disconnect A/T fluid cooler tube from A/T assembly. 10. Remove dust cover from converter housing part. A B AT LCIA0334E D 11. Turn crankshaft, and remove the four bolts for drive plate and torque converter. CAUTION: When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from the front of the engine. 12. Support A/T assembly with a transmission jack. CAUTION: When setting the transmission jack, be careful not to allow it to collide against the drain plug. 13. Remove cross member with power tool. LCIA0335E 14. Tilt the transmission slightly to keep the clearance between body and transmission, and then disconnect air breather hose from charging pipe. Refer to AT-263, "Removal and Installation" . 15. Disconnect A/T unit assembly connector and transfer unit connector. 16. Remove A/T fluid indicator pipe. 17. Plug up openings such as the fluid charging pipe hole, etc. 18. Remove A/T assembly to engine bolts with power tool. 19. Remove A/T assembly with transfer from vehicle, using Tool. Tool number : — H I J L INSPECTION Installation and Inspection of Torque Converter After inserting a torque converter to a transmission, be sure to check dimension A to ensure it is within the reference value limit. : 24.0 mm (0.94 in) or more SAT017B Revision: October 2004 G K SCIA2203E Dimension A F (J-47002) CAUTION: ● Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping. ● Secure A/T assembly to a jack. NOTE: The actual special service tool may differ from tool as shown. 20. Remove transfer from A/T assembly. Refer to TF-87, "Removal and Installation" . ● E AT-269 2005 Titan M TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION Installation is in the revers order of removal. ● When installing transmission to the engine, attach the bolts as shown. Transmission to engine bolts : 113 N·m (12 kg-m, 83 ft-lb) NOTE: *: No.2 bolt also secures air breather vent. LCIA0371E Align the positions of bolts for drive plate with those of the torque converter, and temporarily tighten the bolts. Then, tighten the bolts with the specified torque. CAUTION: ● When turning crankshaft, turn it clockwise as viewed from the front of the engine. ● After converter is installed to drive plate, rotate crankshaft several turns and check to be sure that transmission rotates freely without binding. ● Install crankshaft position sensor (POS). LCIA0335E ● After completing installation, check fluid leakage, fluid level, and the positions of A/T. Refer to MA-23, "Changing A/T Fluid" , AT-238, "Adjustment of A/T Position" , AT-238, "Checking of A/T Position" . ● Revision: October 2004 AT-270 2005 Titan OVERHAUL OVERHAUL Components PFP:00000 A ECS00B3J B AT D E F G H I J K L M SCIA5180E Revision: October 2004 AT-271 2005 Titan OVERHAUL 1. O-ring 2. Oil pump cover 3. O-ring 4. Oil pump housing 5. Self-sealing bolt 6. Torque converter 7. Converter housing 8. Oil pump housing oil seal 9. Bearing race 10. Needle bearing 11. O-ring 12. Front carrier assembly 13. Needle bearing 14. Snap ring 15. Front sun gear 16. 3rd one-way clutch 17. Snap ring 18. Bearing race 19. Needle bearing 20. Seal ring 21. Input clutch assembly 22. Needle bearing 23. Rear internal gear 24. Brake band 25. Mid carrier assembly 26. Needle bearing 27. Bearing race 28. Rear carrier assembly 29. Needle bearing 30. Mid sun gear 31. Seal ring 32. Rear sun gear 33. 1st one-way clutch 34. Snap ring 35. Needle bearing 36. High and low reverse clutch hub 37. Snap ring 38. Bearing race 39. Bearing race 40. Needle bearing Revision: October 2004 AT-272 2005 Titan OVERHAUL A B AT D E F G H I J K L M SCIA5181E 1. Bearing race 2. High and low reverse clutch assembly 3. Needle bearing 4. Direct clutch assembly 5. Needle bearing 6. Reverse brake dish plate Revision: October 2004 AT-273 2005 Titan OVERHAUL 7. Reverse brake driven plate 8. N-sprig 9. Snap ring 10. Reverse brake retaining plate 11. Reverse brake drive plate 12. Snap ring 13. Spring retainer 14. Return spring 15. Reverse brake piston 16. D-ring 17. Lip seal Revision: October 2004 AT-274 2005 Titan OVERHAUL 2WD models A B AT D E F G H I J K L M SCIA5663E 1. Rear oil seal 2. Bracket 3. Bracket 4. Rear extension 5. Parking actuator support 6. Return spring Revision: October 2004 AT-275 2005 Titan OVERHAUL 7. Parking pawl 10. Bracket 8. Pawl shaft 11. Seal ring 9. Self-sealing bolt 12. Needle bearing 13. Revolution sensor 14. Parking gear 15. Output shaft 16. Bearing race 17. Needle bearing 18. Manual plate 19. Parking rod 20. Manual shaft oil seal 21. Manual shaft 22. O-ring 23. Band servo anchor end pin 24. Detent spring 25. Spacer 26. Seal rings 27. Return spring 28. O-ring 29. Servo assembly 30. Snap ring 31. Snap ring 32. Sub-harness 33. Control valve with TCM 34. Bracket 35. A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 36. Oil pan 37. Magnet 38. Drain plug 39. Drain plug gasket 40. Oil pan mounting bolt 41. Oil pan gasket 42. Terminal cord assembly 43. O-ring 44. Retaining pin 45. Transmission case Revision: October 2004 AT-276 2005 Titan OVERHAUL 4WD models A B AT D E F G H I J K L M SCIA5664E 1. Rear oil seal 2. Bracket 3. Adapter case 4. Parking actuator support 5. Return spring 6. Parking pawl Revision: October 2004 AT-277 2005 Titan OVERHAUL 7. Pawl shaft 10. Seal ring 8. Bracket 9. 11. Needle bearing Self-sealing bolt 12. Gasket 13. Revolution sensor 14. Parking gear 15. Output shaft 16. Bearing race 17. Needle bearing 18. Manual plate 19. Parking rod 20. Manual shaft oil seal 21. Manual shaft 22. O-ring 23. Band servo anchor end pin 24. Detent spring 25. Spacer 26. Seal rings 27. Return spring 28. O-ring 29. Servo assembly 30. Snap ring 31. Snap ring 32. Sub-harness 33. Control valve with TCM 34. Bracket 35. A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 36. Oil pan 37. Magnet 38. Drain plug 39. Drain plug gasket 40. Oil pan mounting bolt 41. Oil pan gasket 42. Terminal cord assembly 43. O-ring 44. Retaining pin 45. Transmission case Revision: October 2004 AT-278 2005 Titan OVERHAUL Oil Channel ECS00B3K A 2WD models B AT D E F G H I J K L M SCIA5185E Revision: October 2004 AT-279 2005 Titan OVERHAUL 4WD models SCIA5189E Revision: October 2004 AT-280 2005 Titan OVERHAUL Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings ECS00B3L A 2WD models B AT D E F G H I J K L M SCIA5196E Revision: October 2004 AT-281 2005 Titan OVERHAUL 4WD models SCIA5197E Revision: October 2004 AT-282 2005 Titan DISASSEMBLY DISASSEMBLY Disassembly PFP:31020 A ECS00CCW CAUTION: Do not disassemble parts behind Drum Support. Refer to AT-15, "Cross-Sectional View (2WD models)" B or AT-16, "Cross-Sectional View (4WD models)" . 1. Drain ATF through drain plug. 2. Remove torque converter by holding it firmly and turing while AT pulling straight out. D E SCIA5010E 3. a. b. c. Check torque converter one-way clutch using check tool as shown. Insert check tool into the groove of bearing support built into one-way clutch outer race. When fixing bearing support with check tool, rotate one- way clutch spline using screwdriver. Check that inner race rotates clockwise only. If not, replace torque converter assembly. F G H I J K L SCIA3171E 4. Remove converter housing from transmission case. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch converter housing. SCIA5171E Revision: October 2004 AT-283 2005 Titan M DISASSEMBLY 5. Remove O-ring from input clutch assembly. SCIA5011E 6. Remove tightening bolts for oil pump assembly and transmission case. SCIA2300E 7. Attach sliding hammer to oil pump assembly and extract it evenly from transmission case. CAUTION: ● Fully tighten sliding hammer screw. ● Make sure that bearing race is installed to the oil pump assembly edge surface. SCIA5012E 8. Remove O-ring from oil pump assembly. SCIA5172E Revision: October 2004 AT-284 2005 Titan DISASSEMBLY 9. Remove bearing race from oil pump assembly. A B AT SCIA5252E D 10. Remove needle bearing from front sun gear assembly. E F G SCIA2808E 11. Remove front sun gear assembly from front carrier assembly. NOTE: Remove front sun gear assembly by rotating left/right. H I J SCIA5014E K 12. Remove seal rings from input clutch assembly. L M SCIA5269E 13. Remove front carrier assembly, input clutch assembly and rear internal gear as a unit. CAUTION: Be careful to remove it with needle bearing. SCIA5173E Revision: October 2004 AT-285 2005 Titan DISASSEMBLY 14. Loosen lock nut and remove band servo anchor end pin from transmission case. SCIA5016E 15. Remove brake band from transmission case. SCIA5345E ● ● To prevent brake linings from cracking or peeling, do not stretch the flexible band unnecessarily. When removing the brake band, always secure it with a clip as shown in the figure at left. Leave the clip in position after removing the brake band. Check brake band facing for damage, cracks, wear or burns. SAT655 16. Remove mid carrier assembly and rear carrier assembly as a unit. SCIA5344E Revision: October 2004 AT-286 2005 Titan DISASSEMBLY 17. Remove mid carrier assembly from rear carrier assembly. A B AT SCIA5174E D 18. Remove needle bearing (front side) from mid carrier assembly. E F G SCIA5176E 19. Remove needle bearing (rear side) from mid carrier assembly. H I J SCIA5177E K 20. Remove bearing race from rear carrier assembly. L M SCIA5178E 21. Remove needle bearing from rear carrier assembly. SCIA5179E Revision: October 2004 AT-287 2005 Titan DISASSEMBLY 22. Remove mid sun gear assembly, rear sun gear assembly and high and low reverse clutch hub as a unit. CAUTION: Be careful to remove then with bearing races and needle bearing. SCIA5018E 23. Remove high and low reverse clutch assembly from direct clutch assembly. CAUTION: Make sure that needle bearing is installed to the high and low reverse clutch assembly edge surface. SCIA2306E 24. Remove direct clutch assembly from reverse brake. SCIA5019E 25. Remove needle bearing from drum support edge surface. SCIA5198E 26. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector. SCIA5021E Revision: October 2004 AT-288 2005 Titan DISASSEMBLY 27. Push A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. A B AT SCIA5022E D 28. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. E F G SCIA2308E H 29. Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine causes of malfunction. If the A/T fluid is very dark, smells burned, or contains foreign particles, the frictional material (clutches, band) may need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches to stick and can inhibit pump pressure. ● If frictional material is detected, perform A/T fluid cooler cleaning. Refer to AT-12, "A/T FLUID COOLER CLEANING PROCEDURE" . I J K SCIA5199E 30. Remove magnets from oil pan. L M SCIA5200E Revision: October 2004 AT-289 2005 Titan DISASSEMBLY 31. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. SCIA5023E 32. Straighten terminal clip to free A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. SCIA5146E 33. Disconnect revolution sensor connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. SCIA5024E 34. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness. SCIA5293E 35. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM. Bolt symbol Length mm (in) Number of bolts A 42 (1.65) 5 B 55 (2.17) 6 C 40 (1.57) 1 SCIA5025E Revision: October 2004 AT-290 2005 Titan DISASSEMBLY 36. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case. CAUTION: When removing, be careful with transmission assembly terminal connector and the manual valve notch and manual plate height.Remove it vertically. A B AT SCIA5308E D 37. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. E F G SCIA5301E 38. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2. H I J SCIA5264E K 39. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector. L M SCIA5155E 40. Remove rear extension assembly (2WD models) or adapter case assembly (4WD models) according to the following procedures. Revision: October 2004 AT-291 2005 Titan DISASSEMBLY a. i. ii. 2WD models Remove tightening bolts for rear extension assembly and transmission case. Remove bracket. SCIA5349E iii. Tap rear extension assembly with soft hammer. SCIA5028E iv. Remove rear extension assembly from transmission case. (With needle bearing) SCIA5029E b. i. ii. 4WD models Remove tightening bolts for adapter case assembly and transmission case. Remove bracket. SCIA5203E Revision: October 2004 AT-292 2005 Titan DISASSEMBLY iii. Tap adapter case assembly with soft hammer. A iv. Remove adapter case assembly from transmission case. (With needle bearing) B AT D SCIA5205E v. Remove gasket from transmission case. E F G SCIA5231E H 41. Remove bearing race from output shaft. I J K SCIA5245E L 42. Remove output shaft from transmission case by rotating left/ right. M SCIA5030E Revision: October 2004 AT-293 2005 Titan DISASSEMBLY 43. Remove parking gear from output shaft. SCIA5247E 44. Remove seal rings from output shaft. SCIA5209E 45. Remove needle bearing from transmission case. SCIA5213E 46. Remove revolution sensor from transmission case. CAUTION: ● Do not subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it. ● Be careful not to damage harness with the edge of case. ● Do not allow metal filings, etc., to get on the sensor's front edge magnetic area. ● Do not place in an area affected by magnetism. SCIA2320E 47. Remove reverse brake snap ring (fixing plate) using 2 flatbladed screwdrivers. NOTE: Press out snap ring from the transmission case oil pan side gap using a flat-bladed screwdriver, and remove it using another screwdriver. 48. Remove reverse brake retaining plate from transmission case. SCIA5032E Revision: October 2004 AT-294 2005 Titan DISASSEMBLY 49. Remove N-spring from transmission case. A B AT SCIA5214E D 50. Remove reverse brake drive plates, driven plates and dish plate from transmission case. E F G SCIA2322E 51. Remove snap ring (fixing spring retainer) from transmission case while compressing return spring, using Tool. Tool number H : KV31102400 (J-34285, J-34285-87) I J K L M SCIA5217E 52. Remove spring retainer and return spring from transmission case. SCIA2324E Revision: October 2004 AT-295 2005 Titan DISASSEMBLY 53. Remove seal rings from drum support. SCIA3333E 54. Remove needle bearing from drum support edge surface. SCIA2796E 55. Remove reverse brake piston from transmission case with compressed air. Refer to AT-279, "Oil Channel" . CAUTION: Care should be taken not to abruptly blow air. It makes pistons incline, as the result, it becomes hard to disassemble the pistons. SCIA5047E 56. Remove D-rings from reverse brake piston. SCIA5340E Revision: October 2004 AT-296 2005 Titan DISASSEMBLY 57. Use a pin punch (4mm dia. commercial service tool) to knock out retaining pin. A B AT SCIA2328E D 58. Remove manual shaft retaining pin with pliers. E F G SCIA5218E 59. Remove manual plate (with parking rod) from manual shaft. H I J SCIA5219E 60. Remove parking rod from manual plate. 61. Remove manual shaft from transmission case. K L M SCIA5220E 62. Remove manual shaft oil seals using a flat-bladed screwdriver. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch transmission case. SCIA5355E Revision: October 2004 AT-297 2005 Titan DISASSEMBLY 63. Remove detent spring and spacer from transmission case. SCIA5248E 64. Using snap ring pliers, remove snap ring from transmission case. SCIA2333E 65. Remove servo assembly (with return spring) from transmission case. 66. Remove return spring from servo assembly. 67. Remove O-rings from servo assembly. SCIA2334E 68. Remove parking actuator support from rear extension (2WD models) or adapter case (4WD models). SCIA3423E Revision: October 2004 AT-298 2005 Titan DISASSEMBLY 69. Remove parking pawl (with return spring) and pawl shaft from rear extension (2WD models) or adapter case (4WD models). A B AT SCIA3424E D 70. Remove return spring from parking pawl. E F G SCIA2445E 71. Remove needle bearing from rear extension (2WD models) or adapter case (4WD models). H I J SCIA5221E 72. Remove rear oil seal from rear extension (2WD models) or adapter case (4WD models). CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch rear extension (2WD models) or adapter case (4WD models). K L M SCIA5272E Revision: October 2004 AT-299 2005 Titan REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS Oil Pump PFP:00000 ECS00CCX COMPONENTS SCIA5227E 1. O-ring 2. Oil pump cover 4. Oil pump housing 5. Oil pump housing oil seal 3. O-ring DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove oil pump housing from oil pump cover. SCIA5228E 2. Remove oil pump housing oil seal using a flat-bladed screwdriver. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch oil pump housing. SCIA2840E Revision: October 2004 AT-300 2005 Titan REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS 3. Remove O-ring from oil pump housing. A B AT SCIA2841E D 4. Remove O-ring from oil pump cover. E F G SCIA5230E ASSEMBLY 1. H Install O-ring to oil pump cover. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse O-ring. ● Apply ATF to O-ring. I J K SCIA5230E 2. L Install O-ring to oil pump housing. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse O-ring. ● Apply ATF to O-ring. M SCIA2841E Revision: October 2004 AT-301 2005 Titan REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS 3. Install oil pump housing oil seal to the oil pump housing until it is flush. Tool number : ST33400001 (J-26082) CAUTION: Do not reuse oil seal. ● Apply ATF to oil seal. ● SCIA2839E 4. Install oil pump housing in oil pump cover. Tighten oil pump housing fitting bolt to the specified torque. Refer to AT-271, "Components" . SCIA5228E Front Sun Gear, 3rd One-Way Clutch ECS00CCY COMPONENTS SCIA3114E 1. Front sun gear Revision: October 2004 2. 3rd one-way clutch AT-302 3. Snap ring 2005 Titan REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS DISASSEMBLY 1. A Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove snap ring from front sun gear. B AT SCIA3110E 2. D Remove 3rd one-way clutch from front sun gear. E F G SCIA3111E H INSPECTION 3rd One-way Clutch ● I Check frictional surface for wear or damage. CAUTION: If necessary, replace the 3rd one-way clutch. J Front Sun Gear Snap Ring ● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. CAUTION: If necessary, replace the snap ring. K Front Sun Gear ● L Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. CAUTION: If necessary, replace the front sun gear. M ASSEMBLY 1. Install 3rd one-way clutch in front sun gear. CAUTION: Apply ATF to 3rd one-way clutch. SCIA3111E Revision: October 2004 AT-303 2005 Titan REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS 2. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, install snap ring in front sun gear. SCIA3110E 3. a. b. Check operation of 3rd one-way clutch. Hold oil pump assembly and turn front sun gear. Check 3rd one-way clutch for correct locking and unlocking directions. CAUTION: If not as shown in illustration, check installation direction of 3rd one-way clutch. SCIA3131E Revision: October 2004 AT-304 2005 Titan REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS Front Carrier, Input Clutch, Rear Internal Gear ECS00CCZ A COMPONENTS B AT D E F G H I J K L M SCIA5244E 1. Seal ring 2. O-ring 3. Needle bearing 4. Bearing race 5. Front carrier assembly 6. Needle bearing 7. Snap ring 8. Snap ring 9. Retaining plate 10. Driven plate 11. Input clutch drum 12. Drive plate 13. Rear internal gear Revision: October 2004 AT-305 2005 Titan REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Compress snap ring using 2 flat-bladed screwdrivers. Remove front carrier assembly and input clutch assembly from rear internal gear. Remove front carrier assembly from input clutch assembly. SCIA5339E a. Remove bearing race from front carrier assembly. SCIA5232E b. Remove needle bearing from front carrier assembly. SCIA5233E c. Remove snap ring from front carrier assembly. CAUTION: Do not expand snap ring excessively. SCIA5234E Revision: October 2004 AT-306 2005 Titan REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS 4. a. Disassemble input clutch assembly. Remove O-ring and seal rings from input clutch assembly. A B AT SCIA5235E D b. Remove needle bearing from input clutch assembly. E F G SCIA2853E c. d. Remove snap ring from input clutch drum, using flat-bladed screwdriver. Remove drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate from input clutch drum. H I J SCIA2864E K INSPECTION Front Carrier Snap Ring ● L Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. CAUTION: If necessary, replace the snap ring. M Input Clutch Snap Ring ● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. CAUTION: If necessary, replace the input clutch assembly. Input Clutch Drum ● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage or burns. CAUTION: If necessary, replace the input clutch assembly. Input Clutch Drive Plates ● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. CAUTION: If necessary, replace the input clutch assembly. Input Clutch Retaining Plate and Driven Plates ● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. Revision: October 2004 AT-307 2005 Titan REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS CAUTION: If necessary, replace the input clutch assembly. Front Carrier Assembly ● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. CAUTION: If necessary, replace the front carrier assembly. Rear Internal Gear ● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. CAUTION: If necessary, replace the rear internal gear. ASSEMBLY 1. a. Install input clutch. Install drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate in input clutch drum. CAUTION: Take care with order of plates. SCIA5237E b. Install snap ring in input clutch drum, using a flat-bladed screwdriver. SCIA2864E Revision: October 2004 AT-308 2005 Titan REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS c. Install needle bearing in input clutch assembly. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. A B AT SCIA2853E D d. Install new O-ring and seal rings in input clutch assembly. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse O-ring and seal rings. ● Apply ATF to O-ring. ● Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings. E F G SCIA5235E 2. a. Install front carrier assembly. Install snap ring to front carrier assembly. CAUTION: Do not expand snap ring excessively. H I J SCIA5234E b. Install needle bearing in front carrier assembly. CAUTION: ● Take care with the direction of needle bearing. Refer to AT-281, "Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings" . ● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. L M SCIA5233E c. d. Install bearing race in front carrier assembly. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race. Install front carrier assembly to input clutch assembly. SCIA5232E Revision: October 2004 AT-309 K 2005 Titan REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS 3. 4. Compress snap ring using 2 flat-bladed screwdrivers. Install front carrier assembly and input clutch assembly to rear internal gear. SCIA5339E Mid Sun Gear, Rear Sun Gear, High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub ECS00CD0 COMPONENTS SCIA5343E 1. Needle bearing 4. High and low reverse clutch hub 7. 1st one-way clutch 2. Bearing race 3. Snap ring 5. Needle bearing 6. Snap ring 8. Rear sun gear 9. Seal ring 10. Mid sun gear DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove needle bearing and bearing races from high and low reverse clutch hub. SCIA5238E Revision: October 2004 AT-310 2005 Titan REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS 2. Using a snap ring pliers, remove snap ring from mid sun gear assembly. CAUTION: Do not expand snap ring excessively. A B AT SCIA2855E D 3. Remove high and low reverse clutch hub from mid sun gear assembly. E F G SCIA2856E a. Remove needle bearing from high and low reverse clutch hub. H I J SCIA2857E 4. K Remove rear sun gear assembly from mid sun gear assembly. L M SCIA2858E Revision: October 2004 AT-311 2005 Titan REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS a. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove snap ring from rear sun gear. SCIA2859E b. Remove 1st one-way clutch from rear sun gear. SCIA4633E 5. Remove seal rings from mid sun gear. SCIA2861E INSPECTION High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub Snap Ring, Rear Sun Gear Snap Ring ● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. CAUTION: If necessary, replace the snap ring. 1st One-way Clutch ● Check frictional surface for wear or damage. CAUTION: If necessary, replace the 1st one-way clutch. Mid Sun Gear ● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. CAUTION: If necessary, replace the mid sun gear. Rear Sun Gear ● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. CAUTION: If necessary, replace the rear sun gear. High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub ● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. Revision: October 2004 AT-312 2005 Titan REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS CAUTION: If necessary, replace the high and low reverse clutch hub. A ASSEMBLY 1. Install seal rings from mid sun gear. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse seal rings. ● Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings. B AT D SCIA2861E 2. Install 1st one-way clutch to rear sun gear. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to 1st one-way clutch. E F G H SCIA4633E 3. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, install snap ring to rear sun gear. I J K SCIA2859E 4. L Install rear sun gear assembly to mid sun gear assembly. M SCIA2858E Revision: October 2004 AT-313 2005 Titan REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS 5. Install needle bearing to high and low reverse clutch hub. CAUTION: ● Take care with the direction of needle bearing. Refer to AT-281, "Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings" . ● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. SCIA2857E 6. Install high and low reverse clutch hub to mid sun gear assembly. SCIA2856E 7. Using a snap ring pliers, install snap ring to mid sun gear assembly. CAUTION: Do not expand snap ring excessively. SCIA2855E 8. a. b. Check operation of 1st one-way clutch. Hold mid sun gear and turn rear sun gear. Check 1st one-way clutch for correct locking and unlocking directions. CAUTION: If not as shown in illustration, check installation direction of 1st one-way clutch. SCIA3132E 9. Install needle bearing and bearing races to high and low reverse clutch hub. CAUTION: ● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing and bearing races. ● Take care with order of bearing races. SCIA5238E Revision: October 2004 AT-314 2005 Titan REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS High and Low Reverse Clutch ECS00CD1 COMPONENTS A B AT D E F SCIA5239E 1. High and low reverse clutch drum 2. Driven plate 3. Retaining plate 4. Snap ring 5. Drive plate 6. Bearing race G H DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove bearing race from high and low reverse clutch drum. I J K SCIA5240E 2. 3. L Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove snap ring from high and low reverse clutch drum. Remove drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate from high and low reverse clutch drum. M SCIA2868E INSPECTION ● Check the following, and replace high and low reverse clutch assembly if necessary. High and Low Reverse Clutch Snap Ring ● Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. High and Low Reverse Clutch Drive Plates ● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. Revision: October 2004 AT-315 2005 Titan REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS High and Low Reverse Clutch Retaining Plate and Driven Plates ● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. ASSEMBLY 1. Install drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate in high and low reverse clutch drum. CAUTION: Take care with the order of plates. SCIA5241E 2. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, install snap ring in high and low reverse clutch drum. SCIA2868E 3. Install bearing race to high and low reverse clutch drum. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race. SCIA5240E Revision: October 2004 AT-316 2005 Titan REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS Direct Clutch ECS00CD2 A COMPONENTS B AT D E F SCIA5242E 1. Direct clutch drum 2. Driven plate 4. Snap ring 5. Drive plate 3. H DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. G Retaining plate Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove snap rings from direct clutch drum. Remove drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate from direct clutch drum. I J K SCIA2868E INSPECTION ● L Check the following, and replace direct clutch assembly if necessary. Direct Clutch Snap Rings ● M Check for deformation, fatigue or damage. Direct Clutch Drive Plates ● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. Direct Clutch Retaining Plate and Driven Plates ● Check facing for burns, cracks or damage. Revision: October 2004 AT-317 2005 Titan REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS ASSEMBLY 1. Install drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate in direct clutch drum. CAUTION: Take care with the order of plates. SCIA5243E 2. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, install snap rings in direct clutch drum. SCIA2868E Revision: October 2004 AT-318 2005 Titan ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY Assembly (1) 1. PFP:00000 A ECS00CD3 As shown in the right figure illustration, use a drift [commercial service tool φ22 mm (0.87 in)] to drive manual shaft oil seals into the transmission case until it is flush. CAUTION: ● Apply ATF to manual shaft oil seals. ● Do not reuse manual shaft oil seals. B AT D SCIA5256E 2. E Install detent spring and spacer in transmission case. Tighten bolt to the specified torque. Refer to AT-271, "Components" . F G H SCIA5248E 3. 4. Install manual shaft to transmission case. Install parking rod to manual plate. I J K SCIA5220E 5. L Install manual plate (with parking rod) to manual shaft. M SCIA5219E Revision: October 2004 AT-319 2005 Titan ASSEMBLY 6. a. b. Install retaining pin into the manual plate and manual shaft. Fit pinhole of the manual plate to pinhole of the manual shaft with a pin punch. Use a hammer to tap the retaining pin into the manual plate. CAUTION: ● Drive retaining pin to 2±0.5 mm over the manual plate. ● Do not reuse retaining pin. SCIA5297E 7. a. b. Install retaining pin into the transmission case and manual shaft. Fit pinhole of the transmission case to pinhole of the manual shaft with a pin punch. Use a hammer to tap the retaining pin into the transmission case. CAUTION: ● Drive retaining pin to 5±1 mm over the transmission case. ● Do not reuse retaining pin. SCIA2427E 8. Install O-rings to servo assembly. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse O-rings. ● Apply petroleum jelly to O-rings. 9. Install return spring to servo assembly. 10. Install servo assembly in transmission case. SCIA2334E 11. Using snap ring pliers, install snap ring to transmission case. SCIA2333E 12. Install D-rings in reverse brake piston. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse D-rings. ● Apply ATF to D-rings. SCIA5340E Revision: October 2004 AT-320 2005 Titan ASSEMBLY 13. Install reverse brake piston in transmission case. A B AT SCIA2325E 14. Install needle bearing to drum support edge surface. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. D E F G SCIA2796E 15. Install seal rings to drum support. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse seal rings. ● Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings. H I J SCIA3333E K 16. Install spring retainer and return spring in transmission case. L M SCIA2324E Revision: October 2004 AT-321 2005 Titan ASSEMBLY 17. Set SST on spring retainer and install snap ring (fixing spring retainer) in transmission case while compressing return spring. CAUTION: Securely assemble them using a flat-bladed screwdriver so that snap ring tension is slightly weak. SCIA5217E 18. Install reverse brake drive plates, driven plates and dish plate in transmission case. CAUTION: Take care with the order and direction of plates. SCIA5342E Revision: October 2004 AT-322 2005 Titan ASSEMBLY 19. Assemble N-spring. 20. Install reverse brake retaining plate in transmission case. A B AT D E F G SCIA5249E 21. Install snap ring in transmission case. H I J SCIA2439E K 22. Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring. If not within specified clearance, select proper retaining plate. L Specified clearance “A”: Standard: 0.7 - 1.1mm (0.028 - 0.043 in) Retaining plate: Refer to AT-343, "Reverse brake" . M SCIA5341E 23. Install needle bearing to transmission case. CAUTION: ● Take care with the direction of needle bearing. Refer toAT-281, "Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings" . ● Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. SCIA5213E Revision: October 2004 AT-323 2005 Titan ASSEMBLY 24. Install revolution sensor to transmission case. Tighten revolution sensor bolt to the specified torque. Refer to AT-271, "Components" . CAUTION: ● Do not subject it to impact by dropping or hitting it. ● Be careful not to damage harness with the edge of case. ● Do not allow metal filings, etc., to get on the sensor's front edge magnetic area. ● Do not place in an area affected by magnetism. SCIA2320E 25. As shown in the right figure illustration, use a drift to drive rear oil seal into the rear extension (2WD models) or adapter case (4WD models) until it is flush. CAUTION: ● Apply ATF to rear oil seal. ● Do not reuse rear oil seal. SCIA5270E 26. Install return spring to parking pawl. SCIA2445E 27. Install parking pawl (with return spring) and pawl shaft to rear extension (2WD models) or adapter case (4WD models). SCIA3424E Revision: October 2004 AT-324 2005 Titan ASSEMBLY 28. Install parking actuator support to rear extension (2WD models) or adapter case (4WD models). A B AT SCIA3423E D 29. Install needle bearing to rear extension (2WD models) or adapter case (4WD models). CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. E F G SCIA5221E 30. Install seal rings to output shaft. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse seal rings. ● Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings. H I J SCIA5209E K 31. Install parking gear to output shaft. L M SCIA5247E 32. Install output shaft in transmission case. CAUTION: Be careful not to mistake front for rear because both sides looks similar. (Thinner end is front side.) SCIA5030E Revision: October 2004 AT-325 2005 Titan ASSEMBLY 33. Install bearing race in output shaft. SCIA5245E 34. Install rear extension assembly (2WD models) or adapter case assembly (4WD models) according to the following procedures. a. 2WD models i. Apply recommended sealant (Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" .) to rear extension assembly as shown in illustration. CAUTION: Complete remove all moisture, oil and old sealant, etc. From the transmission case and rear extension assembly mounting surfaces. SCIA5212E ii. Install rear extension assembly to transmission case. SCIA5029E iii. Install bracket. iv. Tighten rear extension assembly bolts to specified torque. CAUTION: Do not reuse self-sealing bolt. Rear extension assembly bolt: : 52 N·m (5.3 kg-m, 38 ft-lb) Self-sealing bolt: : 61 N·m (6.2 kg-m, 45 ft-lb) SCIA5349E Revision: October 2004 AT-326 2005 Titan ASSEMBLY b. i. 4WD models Install gasket to transmission case. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse gasket. ● Complete remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. From the transmission case and adapter case assembly mounting surfaces. A B AT SCIA5231E D ii. Install adapter case assembly to transmission case. E F G SCIA5205E iii. Install bracket. iv. Tighten adapter case assembly bolts to specified torque. CAUTION: Do not reuse self-sealing bolt. H I Adapter case assembly bolt: : 52 N·m (5.3 kg-m, 38 ft-lb) J Self-sealing bolt: : 61 N·m (6.2 kg-m, 45 ft-lb) K L M SCIA5203E 35. Install needle bearing in drum support edge surface. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. SCIA5198E Revision: October 2004 AT-327 2005 Titan ASSEMBLY 36. Install direct clutch assembly in reverse brake. SCIA5019E 37. Install high and low reverse clutch assembly in direct clutch assembly. SCIA2306E 38. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, range the drive plate. SCIA3169E 39. Install high and low reverse clutch hub, mid sun gear assembly and rear sun gear assembly as a unit. SCIA5018E Revision: October 2004 AT-328 2005 Titan ASSEMBLY CAUTION: Check that portion A of high and low reverse clutch drum protrudes approximately 2 mm (0.08 in) beyond portion B of rear sun gear. A B AT SCIA3130E 40. Install needle bearing in rear carrier assembly. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. D E F G SCIA5179E H 41. Install bearing race in rear carrier assembly. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race. I J K SCIA5178E 42. Install rear carrier assembly in direct clutch drum. L M SCIA2462E Revision: October 2004 AT-329 2005 Titan ASSEMBLY 43. Install needle bearing (rear side) in mid carrier assembly. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. SCIA5177E 44. Install needle bearing (front side) in mid carrier assembly. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. SCIA5176E 45. Install mid carrier assembly in rear carrier assembly. SCIA5344E 46. Install front carrier assembly, input clutch assembly and rear internal gear as a unit. SCIA5173E 47. Install seal rings in input clutch assembly. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse seal rings. ● Apply petroleum jelly to seal rings. SCIA5269E Revision: October 2004 AT-330 2005 Titan ASSEMBLY 48. Install band servo anchor end pin and lock nut in transmission case. CAUTION: Do not reuse band servo anchor end pin. A B AT SCIA5016E 49. Install brake band in transmission case. CAUTION: Assemble it so that identification to avoid incorrect installation faces servo side. D E F G SCIA2809E 50. Install front sun gear assembly to front carrier assembly. CAUTION: Apply ATF to front sun gear radial bearing and 3rd one-way clutch end bearing. H I J SCIA5014E 51. Install needle bearing in front sun gear assembly. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. K L M SCIA2808E 52. Adjust brake band tilting using clips so that brake band contacts front sun gear drum evenly. SCIA5033E Revision: October 2004 AT-331 2005 Titan ASSEMBLY 53. Adjust brake band. a. Loosen lock nut. b. Tighten band servo anchor end pin to specified torque. : 5.0 N·m (0.51 kg-m, 44 in-lb) c. d. Back of band servo anchor end pin three turns. Holding band servo anchor end pin, tighten lock nut to specified torque. Refer to AT-271, "Components" . SCIA2809E Adjustment ECS00CD4 TOTAL END PLAY ● ● Measure clearance between front sun gear and bearing race for oil pump cover. Select proper thickness of bearing race so that end play is within specifications. SCIA2810E 1. Measure dimensions “K” and “L” and then calculate dimension “J”. SCIA5350E a. Measure dimension “K”. SCIA5351E Revision: October 2004 AT-332 2005 Titan ASSEMBLY b. c. Measure dimension “L”. Calculate dimension “J”. A “J”: Distance between oil pump fitting surface of transmission case and needle bearing mating surface of front sun gear. J=K–L B AT SCIA5352E 2. D Measure dimensions “M1 ” and “M2 ” and then calculate dimension “M”. E F G SCIA3125E a. Place bearing race and needle bearing on oil pump assembly. H I J SCIA3124E b. K Measure dimension “M1 ”. L M SCIA3126E c. Measure dimension “M2 ”. SCIA3127E Revision: October 2004 AT-333 2005 Titan ASSEMBLY d. Calculate dimension “M”. “M”: Distance between transmission case fitting surface of oil pump and needle bearing on oil pump. M = M1 – M2 SCIA3125E 3. Adjust total end play “T1 ”. T1 = J – M Total end play “T1 ”: 0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 - 0.0217 in) ● Select proper thickness of bearing race so that total end play is within specifications. Bearing races: Refer to AT-343, "BEARING RACE FOR ADJUSTING TOTAL END PLAY" . Assembly (2) 1. SCIA2810E ECS00CD5 Install O-ring to oil pump assembly. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse O-ring. ● Apply ATF to O-ring. SCIA5172E 2. Install bearing race to oil pump assembly. CAUTION: Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race. SCIA5252E Revision: October 2004 AT-334 2005 Titan ASSEMBLY 3. Install oil pump assembly in transmission case. CAUTION: Apply ATF to oil pump radial bearing. A B AT SCIA2811E D 4. Apply recommended sealant (Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" .) to oil pump assembly as shown. CAUTION: Complete remove all moisture, oil and old sealant, etc. From the oil pump mounting bolts and oil pump mounting bolt mounting surfaces. E F G SCIA5321E 5. Tighten oil pump bolts to specified torque. Refer to AT-271, "Components" . CAUTION: Apply ATF to oil pump bushing. H I J SCIA2300E 6. Install O-ring to input clutch assembly. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse O-ring. ● Apply ATF to O-ring. K L M SCIA5011E 7. Install converter housing to transmission case. CAUTION: Do not reuse self-sealing bolt. Converter housing bolt: : 52 N·m (5.3 kg-m, 38 ft-lb) Self-sealing bolt: : 61 N·m (6.2 kg-m, 45 ft-lb) SCIA5171E Revision: October 2004 AT-335 2005 Titan ASSEMBLY 8. Make sure that brake band does not close turbine revolution sensor hole. SCIA5034E 9. a. Install control valve with TCM. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. SCIA5264E b. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 mounting bolt to the specified torque. Refer to AT-271, "Components" . CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM. SCIA5301E c. Install O-ring to A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse O-ring. ● Apply ATF to O-ring. SCIA5155E d. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case. CAUTION: ● Make sure that turbine revolution sensor securely installs turbine revolution sensor hole. ● Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of transmission case. ● Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control valve with TCM. SCIA5034E Revision: October 2004 AT-336 2005 Titan ASSEMBLY ● Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection. A B AT SCIA5035E e. D Install bolts A, B and C to control valve with TCM. Bolt symbol Length: mm (in) Number of bolts A 42 (1.65) 5 B 55 (2.17) 6 C 40 (1.57) 1 E F G SCIA5025E f. g. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. After that tighten them in order (1 → 2 → 3), and then tighten other bolts. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to AT-271, "Components" . H I J SCIA5037E K 10. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector. L M SCIA5023E 11. Securely fasten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clip. SCIA5146E Revision: October 2004 AT-337 2005 Titan ASSEMBLY 12. Connect revolution sensor connector. SCIA5024E 13. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips. SCIA5293E 14. Pull down A/T assembly harness connector. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector. SCIA5299E 15. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. SCIA5300E 16. Install magnets in oil pan. SCIA5200E Revision: October 2004 AT-338 2005 Titan ASSEMBLY 17. Install oil pan to transmission case. A a. Install oil pan gasket to oil pan. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse oil pan gasket. B ● Install it in the direction to align hole positions. ● Complete remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. From the oil pan gasket mounting surfaces. AT b. Install oil pan (with oil pan gasket) to transmission case. CAUTION: ● Install it so that drain plug comes to the position as D shown in the figure. ● Be careful not to pinch harnesses. ● Complete remove all moisture, oil and old gasket, etc. E From the oil pan mounting surfaces. F SCIA2308E c. Tighten oil pan bolts to the specified torque in numerical order shown after temporarily tightening them. Refer to AT-271, "Components" . CAUTION: Do not reuse oil pan bolts. 18. Install drain plug to oil pan. Tighten drain plug to the specified torque. Refer to AT-271, "Components" . CAUTION: Do not reuse drain plug gasket. G H I SCIA4113E 19. Install torque converter. a. Pour ATF into torque converter. ● Approximately 2 liter (2-1/8 US qt, 1-3/4 Imp qt) of fluid is required for a new torque converter. ● When reusing old torque converter, add the same amount of fluid as was drained. J K L M SAT428DA b. Install torque converter while aligning notches of torque converter with notches of oil pump. CAUTION: Install torque converter while rotating it. SCIA5010E Revision: October 2004 AT-339 2005 Titan ASSEMBLY c. Measure distance “A” to check that torque converter is in proper position. Distance “A”: : 24.0 mm (0.94 in) or more SAT017B Revision: October 2004 AT-340 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specifications Applied model PFP:00030 A ECS00CD6 4x2 4x4 Automatic transmission model Transmission model code number 95X17 Stall torque ratio Transmission gear ratio B RE5R05A 95X18 2.0: 1 1st 3.827 2nd 2.368 3rd 1.520 4th 1.000 5th 0.834 Reverse 2.613 Recommended fluid AT D E NISSAN Matic Fluid J*1 Fluid capacity F 10.6 liter (11-1/4 US qt, 9-3/8 Imp qt) CAUTION: Use only Genuine NISSAN ATF Matic Fluid J. Do not mix with other fluid. ● ● Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN an ATF Matic Fluid J will deteriorate in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the warranty. G *1: Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants" . H Vehicle Speed When Shifting Gears ECS00CD7 NORMAL MODE Final gear ratio Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) Throttle position D2 →D3 D3 →D4 D4 →D5 D5 →D4 D4 →D3 D3 →D2 D2 →D1 Full throttle 70 - 74 (44 - 46) 112 - 120 (70 - 75) 176 - 186 (110 - 116) 249 - 259 (155 - 161) 245 - 255 (152 - 159) 166 - 176 (103 - 110) 100 - 108 (62 - 67) 43 - 47 (27 - 30) Half throttle 46 - 50 (28 - 31) 74 - 82 (46 - 51) 103 - 113 (64 - 70) 135 - 145 (84 - 90) 109 - 119 (68 - 74) 69 - 79 (43 - 49) 44 - 52 (27 - 32) 11 - 15 (7 - 10) Full throttle 61 - 65 (38 - 41) 97 - 105 (61 - 66) 153 - 163 (95 - 102) 236 - 246 (147 - 153) 232 - 242 (144 - 151) 143 - 153 (89 - 95) 87 - 95 (54 - 59) 43 - 47 (27 - 29) Half throttle 41 - 45 (26 - 28) 66 - 74 (41 - 46) 89 - 99 (56 - 62) 117 - 127 (73 - 79) 95 - 105 (59 - 65) 59 - 69 (37 - 43) 38 - 46 (24 - 29) 11 - 15 (7 - 10) 2.937 3.357 ● I D1 →D2 K L At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening. TOW MODE Final gear ratio M Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) Throttle position D1 →D2 D2 →D3 D3 →D4 D4 →D5 D5 →D4 D4 →D3 D3 →D2 D2 →D1 Full throttle 70 - 74 (44 - 46) 112 - 120 (70 - 75) 176 - 186 (110 - 116) 249 - 259 (155 - 161) 245 - 255 (152 - 159) 166 - 176 (103 - 110) 100 - 108 (62 - 67) 43 - 47 (27 - 30) Half throttle 50 - 54 (31 - 34) 81 - 89 (50 - 55) 113 - 123 (70 - 76) 135 - 145 (84 - 90) 109 - 119 (68 - 74) 68 - 78 (42 - 48) 44 - 52 (27 - 32) 11 - 15 (7 - 10) Full throttle 61 - 65 (38 - 41) 97 - 105 (61 - 66) 153 - 163 (95 - 102) 236 - 246 (147 - 153) 232 - 242 (144 - 151) 143 - 153 (89 - 95) 87 - 95 (54 - 59) 43 - 47 (27 - 29) Half throttle 43 - 47 (27 - 29) 72 - 80 (45 - 50) 98 - 108 (61 - 67) 117 - 127 (73 - 79) 95 - 105 (59 - 65) 59 - 69 (37 - 43) 37 - 45 (23 - 28) 11 - 15 (7 - 10) 2.937 3.357 ● J At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening. Revision: October 2004 AT-341 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Complete Lock-up Final gear ratio 2.937 Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) Throttle position Closed throttle Half throttle 3.357 ECS00CD8 Closed throttle Half throttle Lock-up “ON” Lock-up “OFF” 74 - 82 (46 - 51) 71 - 79 (45 - 49) 188 - 196 (117 - 122) 136 - 144 (85 - 90) 65 - 73 (41 - 46) 62 - 70 (39 - 44) 168 - 176 (105 - 110) 118 - 126 (74 - 79) ● At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8 condition. ● At half throttle, the accelerator opening is 4/8 of the full opening. Vehicle Speed When Performing and Releasing Slip Lock-up ● Final gear ratio Throttle position 2.937 Closed throttle 3.357 Closed throttle ECS00CD9 Vehicle speed km/h (MPH) Gear position Slip lock-up “ON” Slip lock-up “OFF” 4th 52 - 60 (33 - 38) 49 - 57 (31 - 36) 5th 52 - 60 (33 - 38) 49 - 57 (31 - 36) 4th 46 - 54 (29 - 34) 43 - 51 (27 - 32) 5th 46 - 54 (29 - 34) 43 - 51 (27 - 32) At closed throttle, the accelerator opening is less than 1/8 condition. Stall Speed ECS00CDA Stall speed 2,500 - 2,800 rpm Line Pressure ECS00CDB Line pressure [kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)] Engine speed R position D position At idle speed 392 - 441 (4.0 - 4.5, 57 - 64) 373 - 422 (3.8 - 4.3, 54 - 61) At stall speed 1,700 - 1,890 (17.3 - 19.3, 247 - 274) 1,310 - 1,500 (13.3 - 15.3, 190 - 218) A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor ECS00CDC Name Condition 0°C (32°F) 2.2 15 A/T fluid temperature sensor 1 20°C (68°F) 1.8 6.5 80°C (176°F) 0.6 0.9 0°C (32°F) 2.2 10 20°C (68°F) 1.7 4 80°C (176°F) 0.45 0.5 A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 CONSULT-II “DATA MONITOR” (Approx.) (V) Resistance (Approx.) (kΩ) Turbine Revolution Sensor Name ECS00CDD Condition Turbine revolution sensor 1 When running at 50 km/h (31 MPH) in 4th speed with the closed throttle position switch “OFF”. Turbine revolution sensor 2 When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH) in 1st speed with the closed throttle position switch “OFF”. Vehicle Speed Sensor A/T (Revolution Sensor) Name Revolution sensor Condition When moving at 20 km/h (12 MPH). Revision: October 2004 Data (Approx.) 1.3 (kHz) ECS00CDE Data (Approx.) 185 (Hz) AT-342 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Reverse brake ECS00CDF A Thickness mm (in) Part number* 4.2 (0.165) 4.4 (0.173) 4.6 (0.181) 4.8 (0.189) 5.0 (0.197) 5.2 (0.205) Thickness of retaining plates 31667 90X14 31667 90X15 31667 90X16 31667 90X17 31667 90X18 31667 90X19 B AT *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Total End Play Total end play ECS00CDG mm (in) D 0.25 - 0.55 (0.0098 - 0.0217) BEARING RACE FOR ADJUSTING TOTAL END PLAY Thickness mm (in) E Part number* 0.8 (0.031) 1.0 (0.039) 1.2 (0.047) 1.4 (0.055) 1.6 (0.063) 1.8 (0.071) 31435 95X00 31435 95X01 31435 95X02 31435 95X03 31435 95X04 31435 95X05 F G *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 AT-343 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Revision: October 2004 AT-344 2005 Titan K ELECTRICAL A B SECTION AUDIO, VISUAL, NAVIGATION & TELEPHONE SYSTEM C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 4 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 4 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 4 PREPARATION ........................................................... 5 Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 5 AUDIO ......................................................................... 6 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..... 6 System Description .................................................. 7 BASE SYSTEM ..................................................... 7 MIDLINE SYSTEM ................................................ 7 PREMIUM SYSTEM ............................................. 8 SPEED SENSITIVE VOLUME SYSTEM .............. 9 CAN Communication System Description ................ 9 Schematic .............................................................. 10 BASE SYSTEM ................................................... 10 MIDLINE SYSTEM ...............................................11 PREMIUM SYSTEM (WITHOUT NAVI) .............. 12 PREMIUM SYSTEM (WITH NAVI) ...................... 13 Wiring Diagram — AUDIO — ................................. 14 BASE SYSTEM ................................................... 14 MIDLINE SYSTEM .............................................. 16 PREMIUM SYSTEM ........................................... 20 TerminalsandReferenceValueforAudioUnit(Base System) .................................................................. 30 Terminals and Reference Value for Audio Unit (Midline System) ........................................................... 31 Terminals and Reference Value for Audio Unit (Premium System) ........................................................ 34 Terminals and Reference Value for Audio Amp. ..... 37 Terminals and Reference Value for Rear Audio Remote Control Unit ............................................... 40 Terminals and Reference Value for AV Switch ....... 41 AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function ........................ 43 STARTING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE (MIDLINE SYSTEM AND PREMIUM SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVI) ................................................. 43 STARTING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE (PREMIUM SYSTEM WITH NAVI) ...................... 43 Revision: October 2004 AV-1 EXITING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE ........... 43 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ..................................... 43 Trouble Diagnosis ................................................... 44 MALFUNCTION WITH RADIO AND CD (BASE SYSTEM) ............................................................ 44 MALFUNCTION WITH RADIO AND CD (MIDLINE OR PREMIUM SYSTEM) ........................... 44 FOR RADIO ONLY .............................................. 45 FOR CD ONLY .................................................... 45 Noise Inspection ..................................................... 45 TYPE OF NOISE AND POSSIBLE CAUSE ........ 45 Power Supply Circuit Inspection ............................. 46 Steering Switch Check ............................................ 47 AV Switch Check .................................................... 49 AudioCommunicationLine Check (WithNavigation System) .................................................................. 49 Sound Is Not Heard From Front Door Speaker or Front Tweeter (Base or Midline System) ................ 50 Sound Is Not Heard From Rear Door Speaker or Rear Door Tweeter (Base or Midline System) ........ 52 Sound Is Not Heard From Front Door Speaker or Front Tweeter (Premium System) ........................... 54 Sound Is Not Heard From Rear Door Speaker or Rear Door Tweeter (Premium System) .................. 58 Sound Is Not Heard From Center Speaker (Premium System) ......................................................... 61 Sound Is Not Heard From Subwoofer (Premium System) .................................................................. 62 Removal and Installation for Audio Unit ................. 65 Removal and Installation for AV Switch .................. 65 Removal and Installation of Front Door Speaker ... 65 Removal and Installation of Rear Door Speaker ... 65 Removal and Installation of Front Tweeter ............. 66 Removal and Installation of Rear Door Tweeter ..... 66 Removal and Installation of Center Speaker .......... 66 Removal and Installation of Subwoofer (Premium System) .................................................................. 66 Removal and Installation of Audio Amp. ................. 66 Removal and Installation of Rear Audio Remote 2005 Titan F G H I J AV L M Control Unit ............................................................. 67 Removal and Installation of Steering Wheel Audio Control Switches ..................................................... 67 AUDIO ANTENNA ..................................................... 68 Location of Antenna ................................................ 68 DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM ............................ 69 ComponentParts and Harness Connector Location... 69 System Description ................................................. 70 Schematic ............................................................... 71 Wiring Diagram — DVD — ..................................... 72 Trouble Diagnosis ................................................... 75 Power Supply Circuit Inspection ............................. 76 Removal and Installation of DVD Player ................. 77 Removal and Installation of Video Monitor ............. 77 NAVIGATION SYSTEM ............................................. 78 System Description ................................................. 78 TRAVEL DISTANCE ............................................ 78 TRAVEL DIRECTION .......................................... 78 MAP-MATCHING ................................................. 78 GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM) .......... 79 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 80 BIRDVIEW™ ....................................................... 80 MAP DISPLAY ..................................................... 81 FUNCTION OF CENTER SWITCH ..................... 82 “VIEW” MODE ..................................................... 87 “HEADING” MODE .............................................. 88 “NEARBY DISPLAY ICONS” MODE ................... 88 “SAVE CURRENT LOCATION” MODE ............... 88 “ADJUST CURRENT LOCATION” MODE ........... 88 “AUTO RE-ROUTE” MODE ................................. 89 “AVOID AREA SETTINGS” MODE ...................... 89 “CLEAR MEMORY” MODE ................................. 89 “EDIT ADDRESS BOOK” MODE ........................ 90 “GPS INFORMATION” MODE ............................. 90 “QUICK STOP CUSTOMER SETTING” MODE... 90 “SET AVERAGE SPEED” MODE ........................ 90 “TRACKING” MODE ............................................ 91 GUIDANCE VOLUME ......................................... 91 DISPLAY WITH PUSHED “TRIP” BUTTON ........ 91 TRIP 1 OR TRIP 2 ............................................... 92 FUEL ECONOMY ................................................ 92 MAINTENANCE .................................................. 92 ENGINE OIL OR TIRE ROTATION ..................... 92 TIRE PRESSURE ................................................ 93 WARNING INDICATIONS ................................... 93 CAN Communication System Description .............. 93 Component Parts Location ..................................... 94 Schematic ............................................................... 95 Wiring Diagram — NAVI — ..................................... 96 Schematic ............................................................. 103 Wiring Diagram — COMM — ............................... 104 Terminals and Reference Value for NAVI Control Unit ....................................................................... 107 Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control Unit ....................................................................... 109 Terminals and Reference Value for Display Unit . 113 Terminals and Reference Value for AV Switch ..... 115 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM .............. 116 On Board Self-Diagnosis Function ....................... 118 Revision: October 2004 DESCRIPTION .................................................. 118 DIAGNOSIS ITEM ............................................. 118 Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU) .................................. 118 OPERATION PROCEDURE .............................. 118 SELF–DIAGNOSIS RESULT ............................. 120 Self-Diagnosis Mode (NAVI) ................................. 121 OPERATION PROCEDURE .............................. 121 SELF–DIAGNOSIS RESULT ............................. 122 Confirmation/Adjustment Mode ............................. 124 OPERATION PROCEDURE .............................. 124 DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS ....................................... 125 VEHICLE SIGNALS ........................................... 125 NAVIGATION ..................................................... 126 DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS ....................................... 126 VEHICLE SIGNALS ........................................... 127 HISTORY OF ERRORS ..................................... 127 DIAGNOSIS BY HISTORY OF ERRORS .......... 127 NAVIGATION ..................................................... 129 CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR ........................ 131 OPERATION PROCEDURE .............................. 131 AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function ....................... 132 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for NAVI Control Unit ........................................................... 133 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display Control Unit ........................................................... 134 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display Unit ........................................................................ 135 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for AV Switch ................................................................... 137 Vehicle Speed Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit.138 VehicleSpeedSignalCheckforDisplayControlUnit. 139 Illumination Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit ... 140 Illumination Signal Check for Display Control Unit.140 Ignition Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit .......... 140 Ignition Signal Check for Display Control Unit ...... 141 Reverse Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit ........ 141 Reverse Signal Check for Display Control Unit .... 141 AV Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and NAVI Control Unit) ...................... 142 Audio Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Audio Unit) .......................... 143 Display Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Display Unit) ....................... 145 AV Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and AV Switch) .................................. 147 CAN Communication Line Check ......................... 148 If NAVI Control Unit Detects That DVD-ROM Map is Not Inserted ....................................................... 148 If NAVI Control Unit Detects That Inserted DVDROM Map is Malfunctioning or If It is Impossible to Load Data from DVD-ROM Map ........................... 148 If Connection Between NAVI Control Unit and GPS Antenna is Malfunctioning ..................................... 149 Operating Screen for Audio and A/C is Not Displayed When Showing NAVI Screen ..................... 149 Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (Only NAVI Screen Looks Bluish) ............................................ 151 Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (Only NAVI Screen Looks Reddish) ......................................... 152 AV-2 2005 Titan Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (Only NAVI Screen Looks Yellowish) ...................................... 153 Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Look Bluish) .................................................................. 154 Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Look Reddish) ............................................................... 155 Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Look Yellowish) ............................................................. 156 NAVI Screen is Rolling ......................................... 157 Guide Sound is Not Heard ................................... 159 Screen is Not Shown ............................................ 160 A/C Screen is Not Shown (NAVI Screen is Shown). 160 FUEL ECONOMY Screen is Not Shown .............. 160 Average Fuel Economy Displayed is Not Shown (“ *** ” is Shown) ...................................................... 160 Distance to Empty Displayed is Not Shown (“ *** ” is Shown) ............................................................. 161 DrivingDistanceor AverageSpeedDisplayedis Not Shown (“ *** ” is Shown) ....................................... 161 WARNING DOOR OPEN Screen is Not Shown . 161 Unable to Operate All of AV Switches (Unable to Start Self-Diagnosis) ............................................ 162 Audio Does Not Work ........................................... 162 Navigation System Does Not Activate ................. 162 Previous NAVI Conditions are Not Stored ............ 163 Previous Vehicle Conditions are Not Stored ........ 163 Position of Current Location Mark is Not Correct. 163 Radio Wave From GPS Satellite is Not Received. 163 Driving Test .......................................................... 164 Example of Symptoms Judged Not Malfunction . 165 BASIC OPERATION ......................................... 165 VEHICLE MARK ............................................... 165 DESTINATION, PASSING POINTS, AND MENU ITEMS CANNOT BE SELECTED/SET .............. 166 VOICE GUIDE ................................................... 166 ROUTE SEARCH .............................................. 167 EXAMPLES OF CURRENT-LOCATION MARK DISPLACEMENT .............................................. 168 CURRENT-LOCATION MARK SHOWS A POSITION WHICH IS COMPLETELY WRONG ........ 171 CURRENT-LOCATION MARK JUMPS ............. 171 CURRENT-LOCATION MARK IS IN A RIVER OR SEA ................................................................... 172 WHEN DRIVING ON SAME ROAD, SOMETIMES CURRENT-LOCATION MARK IS IN RIGHT PLACE AND SOMETIMES IT IS WRONG PLACE ............................................................... 172 LOCATION CORRECTION BY MAP-MATCHING IS SLOW .................................................... 172 ALTHOUGH GPS RECEIVING DISPLAY IS GREEN, VEHICLE MARK DOES NOT RETURN TO CORRECT LOCATION ................................ 172 NAME OF CURRENT PLACE IS NOT DISPLAYED ............................................................. 172 CONTENTS OF DISPLAY DIFFER FOR BIRDVIEW™ AND THE (FLAT) MAP SCREEN ........ 172 Program Loading of NAVI Control Unit ................. 173 Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit ..... 174 Removal and Installation of GPS Antenna ........... 174 Removal and Installation of Steering Wheel Switch. 174 Removal and Installation of AV Switch ................. 175 Removal and Installation of Display Unit .............. 175 Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit . 175 A B C D E F G H I J AV L M Revision: October 2004 AV-3 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EKS00ANU The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis EKS00ANV When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams". ● PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT". When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-11, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES". ● GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident". Revision: October 2004 AV-4 2005 Titan PREPARATION PREPARATION Commercial Service Tool PFP:00002 A EKS00ANW Tool name Description Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts B C D PBIC0191E E F G H I J AV L M Revision: October 2004 AV-5 2005 Titan AUDIO AUDIO Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:28111 EKS00ANX WKIA3599E Revision: October 2004 AV-6 2005 Titan AUDIO System Description EKS00ANY A BASE SYSTEM Refer to Owner's Manual for audio system operating instructions. Power is supplied at all times ● through 20A fuse (No. 31, located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to audio unit terminal 6. With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to audio unit terminal 10. Ground is supplied through the case of the audio unit. Then audio signals are supplied ● through audio unit terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 13, 14, 15 and 16 ● to terminals + and - of front door speaker LH and RH ● to terminals + and - of front tweeter LH and RH ● to terminals + and - of rear door speaker LH and RH and ● to terminals + and - of rear door tweeter LH and RH (crew cab only). B C D E F MIDLINE SYSTEM Refer to Owner's Manual for audio system operating instructions. G Power is supplied at all times ● through 20A fuse (No. 31, located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to audio unit terminal 6 and H ● to AV switch terminal 1. With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)] I ● to audio unit terminal 10 and ● to AV switch terminal 2. J Ground is supplied through the case of the audio unit. Ground is also supplied ● to AV switch terminal 5 AV ● through body grounds M57, M61 and M79. Then audio signals are supplied ● through audio unit terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 13, 14, 15 and 16 L ● to terminals + and - of front door speaker LH and RH ● to terminals + and - of front tweeter LH and RH ● to terminals + and - of rear door speaker LH and RH and M ● to terminals + and - of rear door tweeter LH and RH (crew cab only). When one of steering wheel audio control switches is pushed, the resistance in steering switch circuit changes depending on which button is pushed. Rear Audio Remote Control Unit (Crew Cab Only) Power is supplied ● from audio unit terminal 32 ● to rear audio remote control unit terminal 13. Ground is supplied ● to rear audio remote control unit terminal 15 ● through body grounds B117 and B132. Audio signals are supplied ● through audio unit terminals 26, 27, 28 and 29 ● to terminals 1, 2, 3, and 4 of rear audio remote control unit. Revision: October 2004 AV-7 2005 Titan AUDIO AUX In Jack The AUX in jack allows input of audio signals to the audio unit from an auxiliary audio device. Audio signals are supplied ● from AUX in jack terminals 1 and 4 ● to audio unit terminals 74 and 75. PREMIUM SYSTEM Refer to Owner's Manual for audio system operating instructions. Power is supplied at all times ● through 15A fuse [No. 17, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to audio amp. terminal 17 ● through 20A fuse (No. 31, located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to audio unit terminal 6 ● to audio amp. terminal 1 ● to AV switch terminal 1 and ● to display control unit terminal 1 (with NAVI). With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to audio unit terminal 10 ● to AV switch terminal 2 and ● to display control unit terminal 10 (with NAVI). With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to display control unit terminal 12 (with NAVI). Ground is supplied through the case of the audio unit. Ground is also supplied ● to audio amp. terminals 4 and 20 ● to AV switch terminal 5 ● to display unit terminal 1 (with NAVI) and ● to display control unit terminal 3 (with NAVI) ● through body grounds M57, M61 and M79. Then audio signals are supplied ● through audio unit terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 13, 14, 15 and 16 ● to audio amp. terminals 5, 6, 7, 8, 21, 22, 23 and 24. Audio signals are amplified by the audio amp. The amplified audio signals are supplied ● through audio amp. terminals 2, 3, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 19, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31 and 32 ● to terminals + and - of front door speaker LH and RH ● to terminals + and - of front tweeter LH and RH ● to terminals + and - of center speaker ● to terminals + and - of rear door speaker LH and RH ● to terminals + and - of rear door tweeter LH and RH (crew cab) and ● to terminals 1, 2, 3 and 4 of subwoofer. When one of steering wheel audio control switches is pushed, the resistance in steering switch circuit changes depending on which button is pushed. Rear Audio Remote Control Unit Power is supplied ● from audio unit terminal 32 ● to rear audio remote control unit terminal 13. Ground is supplied Revision: October 2004 AV-8 2005 Titan AUDIO to rear audio remote control unit terminal 15 ● through body grounds B117 and B132. Audio signals are supplied ● through audio unit terminals 26, 27, 28 and 29 ● to terminals 1, 2, 3, and 4 of rear audio remote control unit. ● A B AUX In Jack (With Midline and Premium Systems) The AUX in jack allows input of audio signals to the audio unit from an auxiliary audio device. Audio signals are supplied ● from AUX in jack terminals 1 and 4 ● to audio unit terminals 74 and 75. C D Satellite Radio Tuner (Pre-wiring) (With Midline and Premium Systems) The satellite radio tuner pre-wiring allows connection of a satellite radio tuner. Power is supplied at all times ● through 20A fuse (No. 31, located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to satellite radio tuner pre-wiring terminal 32. With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to satellite radio tuner pre-wiring terminal 36. Ground is supplied through the case of the satellite radio tuner. Then audio signals are supplied ● through satellite radio tuner pre-wiring terminals 21, 22, 23 and 24 ● to audio unit terminals 41, 42, 43 and 44. E F G H SPEED SENSITIVE VOLUME SYSTEM Volume level of this system goes up and down automatically in proportion to the vehicle speed. The control level can be selected by the customer. Refer to Owner's Manual for operating instructions. CAN Communication System Description EKS00ANZ I J Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . AV L M Revision: October 2004 AV-9 2005 Titan AUDIO Schematic EKS00AO0 BASE SYSTEM WKWA1014E Revision: October 2004 AV-10 2005 Titan AUDIO MIDLINE SYSTEM A B C D E F G H I J AV L M WKWA2356E Revision: October 2004 AV-11 2005 Titan AUDIO PREMIUM SYSTEM (WITHOUT NAVI) WKWA2357E Revision: October 2004 AV-12 2005 Titan AUDIO PREMIUM SYSTEM (WITH NAVI) A B C D E F G H I J AV L M WKWA2358E Revision: October 2004 AV-13 2005 Titan AUDIO Wiring Diagram — AUDIO — EKS00AO1 BASE SYSTEM WKWA2331E Revision: October 2004 AV-14 2005 Titan AUDIO A B C D E F G H I J AV L M WKWA2332E Revision: October 2004 AV-15 2005 Titan AUDIO MIDLINE SYSTEM WKWA2333E Revision: October 2004 AV-16 2005 Titan AUDIO A B C D E F G H I J AV L M WKWA2334E Revision: October 2004 AV-17 2005 Titan AUDIO WKWA1554E Revision: October 2004 AV-18 2005 Titan AUDIO A B C D E F G H I J AV L M WKWA2335E Revision: October 2004 AV-19 2005 Titan AUDIO PREMIUM SYSTEM WKWA2336E Revision: October 2004 AV-20 2005 Titan AUDIO A B C D E F G H I J AV L M WKWA2337E Revision: October 2004 AV-21 2005 Titan AUDIO WKWA1557E Revision: October 2004 AV-22 2005 Titan AUDIO A B C D E F G H I J AV L M WKWA2338E Revision: October 2004 AV-23 2005 Titan AUDIO WKWA2339E Revision: October 2004 AV-24 2005 Titan AUDIO A B C D E F G H I J AV L M WKWA1558E Revision: October 2004 AV-25 2005 Titan AUDIO WITHOUT NAVI WKWA2340E Revision: October 2004 AV-26 2005 Titan AUDIO WITH NAVI A B C D E F G H I J AV L M WKWA2341E Revision: October 2004 AV-27 2005 Titan AUDIO WKWA2342E Revision: October 2004 AV-28 2005 Titan AUDIO WITH MIDLINE OR PREMIUM A B C D E F G H I J AV L M WKWA2438E Revision: October 2004 AV-29 2005 Titan AUDIO Terminals and Reference Value for Audio Unit (Base System) Terminal (Wire color) Item + – 2 (L/W) 1 (L/R) Audio sound signal front LH Signal input/ output Output Condition Ignition switch Operation ON Receive audio signal Reference value (Approx.) EKS00AO2 Example of symptom No sound from front door speaker LH or tweeter LH. SKIA0177E 4 (W/B) 3 (L/B) Audio sound signal front RH Output ON No sound from front door speaker RH or tweeter RH. Receive audio signal SKIA0177E 6 (Y) 7 (BR) 8 (R/L) 10 (V) 14 (SB) Ground Battery power Ground Illumination control signal Ground Illumination signal Ground ACC signal 13 (B/Y) Audio sound signal rear LH Input Input Input Input Output System does not work properly. – – Battery voltage ON Illumination control switch is operated by lighting switch in 1st position. Changes between 0 and 12V Lighting switch is in 1st position. Battery voltage Lighting switch is OFF. 3V or less ON Ignition switch ACC or ON Battery voltage ON Receive audio signal OFF Audio unit illumination cannot be controlled. Audio unit illumination does not come on when lighting switch is in 1st position. System does not work properly. No sound from rear door speaker LH or rear door tweeter LH. SKIA0177E 16 (O/L) 15 (R/L) Audio sound signal rear RH Output ON No sound from rear door speaker RH or rear door tweeter RH. Receive audio signal SKIA0177E Revision: October 2004 AV-30 2005 Titan AUDIO Terminals and Reference Value for Audio Unit (Midline System) EKS00AO3 A Terminal (Wire color) Item + – Signal input/ output Condition Ignition switch Reference value (Approx.) Example of symptom B Operation C 2 (L/W) 1 (L/R) Audio sound signal front LH Output ON No sound from front door speaker LH or tweeter LH. Receive audio signal D SKIA0177E E 4 (W/B) 3 (L/B) Audio sound signal front RH Output ON No sound from front door speaker RH or tweeter RH. Receive audio signal SKIA0177E 6 (Y) 7 (BR) 8 (R/L) 10 (V) 14 (SB) Ground Battery power Ground Illumination control signal Ground Ground 13 (B/Y) Illumination signal ACC signal Audio sound signal rear LH Input Input Input Input Output – – ON Illumination control switch is operated by lighting switch in 1st position. Battery voltage ON G System does not work properly. H Changes between 0 and 12V Audio unit illumination cannot be controlled. I Lighting switch is in 1st position. Battery voltage Lighting switch is OFF. 3V or less – Battery voltage OFF ON Audio unit illumination does not come on when lighting switch is in 1st position. 16 (O/L) 15 (R/L) Output ON System does not work properly. No sound from rear door speaker LH or rear door tweeter LH. Receive audio signal No sound from rear door speaker RH or rear door tweeter RH. Receive audio signal SKIA0177E 21 (V) Ground Remote control A Revision: October 2004 Output ON Audio unit ON AV-31 5V J AV SKIA0177E Audio sound signal rear RH F Rear audio remote control unit does not operate properly. 2005 Titan L M AUDIO Terminal (Wire color) Item Signal input/ output Condition Ignition switch Reference value (Approx.) Example of symptom + – 22 (P) Ground Remote control B Output ON Audio unit ON 5V Rear audio remote control unit does not operate properly. 23 (BR/Y) Ground Remote control C Output ON Audio unit ON 5V Rear audio remote control unit does not operate properly. 24 (L) Ground Remote control D Output ON Audio unit ON 5V Rear audio remote control unit does not operate properly. 25 (LG) – Remote control ground – – 0V Rear audio remote control switches do not function. 27 (O/L) 26 (O) Output ON Audio sound signal LH Operation – Receive audio signal No sound from LH headphone channel. SKIA0177E 29 (W) 28 (W/L) Audio sound signal RH Output ON Receive audio signal No sound from RH headphone channel. SKIA0177E 30 – – Ground Remote control enable signal Output ON 32 (V) Ground Remote control switch power supply Output ON 65 (O/L) Ground Audio RX Input ON 31 (O) – Shield 0V Interference and distortion heard from headphones or rear audio remote control unit switches not operating properly. Audio unit ON 5V Rear audio remote control unit does not operate. Audio unit ON 12V Rear audio remote control unit does not operate. – Operate audio volume Audio does not operate properly. SKIA4403E Revision: October 2004 AV-32 2005 Titan AUDIO Terminal (Wire color) Item + – Signal input/ output Condition Ignition switch Reference value (Approx.) A Example of symptom Operation B 66 (W/L) Ground Audio TX Output ON Operate audio volume Audio does not operate properly. SKIA4402E 67 – Shield 72 (W/B) Ground CD eject signal 73 (Y/B) Ground CD load signal Ground Auxiliary audio input RH (+) – ON – Input ON Operate EJECT button Input ON Operate LOAD button C D 0V Interference and distortion heard from speakers. 0V → 5V CD will not eject from audio unit. 0V → 5V CD will not load into audio unit. E F G 74 (BR) Input ON Receive audio signal (AUX input) No sound from auxiliary audio source right channel. H SKIA0177E I 75 (B/R) Ground Auxiliary audio input LH (+) Input ON Receive audio signal (AUX input) No sound from auxiliary audio source left channel. SKIA0177E 76 – Shield – – – 0V J AV Interference and distortion heard from speakers. L M Revision: October 2004 AV-33 2005 Titan AUDIO Terminals and Reference Value for Audio Unit (Premium System) Terminal (Wire color) Item + – 2 (W) 1 (B) Audio sound signal front LH Signal input/ output Output Condition Ignition switch ON Reference value (Approx.) EKS00AO4 Example of symptom Operation No sound from front door speaker LH or tweeter LH. Receive audio signal SKIA0177E 4 (Y) 3 (BR) Audio sound signal front RH Output ON No sound from front door speaker RH or tweeter RH. Receive audio signal SKIA0177E 6 (Y) 7 (BR) 8 (R/L) 9 Ground Battery power Ground Illumination control signal Ground – Illumination signal Shield Input Input Input System does not work properly. – – Battery voltage ON Illumination control switch is operated by lighting switch in 1st position. Changes between 0 and 12V Audio unit illumination cannot be controlled. Lighting switch is in 1st position. Battery voltage Audio unit illumination does not come on when lighting switch is in 1st position. Lighting switch is OFF. 3V or less OFF Interference and distortion heard from speakers. – – – 0V Input ON – Battery voltage System does not work properly. – More than 6.5V Amp. does not work properly. 10 (V) Ground ACC signal 12 (G/W) Ground Amp. ON signal Output ON 14 (BR) 13 (B/R) Audio sound signal rear LH Output ON No sound from rear door speaker LH or rear door tweeter LH. Receive audio signal SKIA0177E 16 (L) 15 (B/W) Audio sound signal rear RH Output ON No sound from rear door speaker RH or rear door speaker RH. Receive audio signal SKIA0177E Revision: October 2004 AV-34 2005 Titan AUDIO Terminal (Wire color) Item + – Signal input/ output Condition Ignition switch A Reference value (Approx.) Example of symptom B Operation Output ON Audio unit ON 5V Rear audio remote control unit does not operate properly. 21 (V) Ground Remote control A Ground Remote control B Output ON Audio unit ON 5V Rear audio remote control unit does not operate properly. C 22 (P) 23 (BR/Y) Ground Remote control C Output ON Audio unit ON 5V Rear audio remote control unit does not operate properly. D 24 (L) Ground Remote control D Output ON Audio unit ON 5V Rear audio remote control unit does not operate properly. E 25 (LG) – Remote control ground – – 0V Rear audio remote control switches do not function. F – G 27 (O/L) 26 (O) Audio sound signal LH Output ON Receive audio signal No sound from LH headphone channel. H SKIA0177E I 29 (W) 28 (W/L) Audio sound signal RH Output ON Receive audio signal No sound from RH headphone channel. AV SKIA0177E 30 31 (O) 32 (V) 42 (R) – Shield – – – 0V Interference and distortion heard from headphones or rear audio remote control unit switches not operating properly. L M Ground Remote control enable signal Output ON Audio unit ON 5V Rear audio remote control unit does not operate. Ground Remote control switch power supply Output ON Audio unit ON 12V Rear audio remote control unit does not operate. 41 (G) Audio left channel sound signal from satellite radio tuner Input ON Receive audio signal No sound from satellite radio tuner left channel. SKIA0177E Revision: October 2004 J AV-35 2005 Titan AUDIO Terminal (Wire color) Item + 44 (W) – 43 (B) Audio right channel sound signal from satellite radio tuner Signal input/ output Input Condition Ignition switch ON Reference value (Approx.) Example of symptom Operation No sound from satellite radio tuner right channel. Receive audio signal SKIA0177E 45 – Shield ground (audio signal) 46 – Shield ground (data) 48 (L) Ground Satellite radio tuner request to audio unit 49 (O/L) Ground Audio RX – – – – – – – – – – Input ON Turn audio unit ON 5V Input ON Operate audio volume Satellite radio tuner does not operate properly. Satellite radio tuner audio information does not display properly. SKIA4403E 50 (W/L) Ground Audio TX Output ON Satellite radio tuner audio information does not display properly. Operate audio volume SKIA4402E 65 (O/L) Ground Audio RX Input ON Operate audio volume Audio does not operate properly. SKIA4403E 66 (W/L) Ground Audio TX Output ON Operate audio volume Audio does not operate properly. SKIA4402E 67 – Shield – ON – 0V Interference and distortion heard from speakers. 70 – Shield – – – 0V Interference and distortion heard from speakers. Revision: October 2004 AV-36 2005 Titan AUDIO Terminal (Wire color) Item + – Signal input/ output Condition Reference value (Approx.) Ignition switch A Example of symptom Operation B 71 (B) 69 (W) Voice guide signal (with NAVI) Output Press the "GUIDE/VOICE" button. ON Only route guide and operation guide are not heard. SKIA0171J 72 (W/B) Ground CD eject signal 73 (Y/B) Ground CD load signal Ground Auxiliary audio input RH (+) Input Input C D ON Operate EJECT button 0V → 5V CD will not eject from audio unit. ON Operate LOAD button 0V → 5V CD will not load into audio unit. E F 74 (BR) Input Receive audio signal (AUX input) ON No sound from auxiliary audio source right channel. G SKIA0177E H 75 (B/R) Ground Auxiliary audio input LH (+) Input Receive audio signal (AUX input) ON No sound from auxiliary audio source left channel. J SKIA0177E 76 – Shield – – – Interference and distortion heard from speakers. 0V Terminals and Reference Value for Audio Amp. Terminal (wire color) + – 1 (Y) Ground 2 (W) 18 (B) Item Battery Subwoofer Signal input/ output L Reference value (Approx.) Operation Input – – Output ON Receive audio signal Example of symptom M Battery voltage System does not work properly. No sound from subwoofer. SKIA0177E 3 (BR/W) 19 (BR) Subwoofer Output ON Receive audio signal No sound from subwoofer. SKIA0177E Revision: October 2004 AV EKS00AO5 Condition Ignition switch I AV-37 2005 Titan AUDIO Terminal (wire color) Item + – 4 (B) Ground Ground 9 (G/W) Ground Amp. ON signal 10 (L/W) 26 (L/B) Center speaker Signal input/ output Condition Reference value (Approx.) Example of symptom – Ignition switch Operation – ON – – Input ON – More than 6.5V Output ON Receive audio signal System does not work properly. No sound from center speaker. SKIA0177E 11 (SB) 27 (B/Y) Rear door speaker LH and rear door tweeter LH Output ON No sound from rear door speaker LH or rear door tweeter LH. Receive audio signal SKIA0177E 12 (O/L) 28 (R/L) Rear door speaker RH and rear door tweeter RH Output ON No sound from rear door speaker RH or rear door tweeter RH. Receive audio signal SKIA0177E 13 (W/B) 29 (L/B) Front door tweeter RH Output ON No sound from front door tweeter RH. Receive audio signal SKIA0177E 14 (L/W) 30 (L/R) Front tweeter LH Output ON Receive audio signal No sound from front tweeter LH. SKIA0177E 15 (L/W) 31 (L/R) Front door speaker LH Output ON No sound from front door speaker LH. Receive audio signal SKIA0177E Revision: October 2004 AV-38 2005 Titan AUDIO Terminal (wire color) Item + – Signal input/ output Condition Ignition switch Reference value (Approx.) Example of symptom A Operation B 16 (W/B) 32 (L/B) Front door speaker RH Output ON No sound from front door speaker RH. Receive audio signal D SKIA0177E 17 (Y/G) Ground Battery Input – – Battery voltage 20 (B) Ground Ground – ON – – 21 (Y) 5 (BR) Audio sound signal front RH Input ON System does not work properly. – No sound from front door speaker RH or front tweeter RH. Receive audio signal C E F G SKIA0177E H 22 (W) 6 (B) Audio sound signal front LH Input ON No sound from front door speaker LH or front tweeter LH. Receive audio signal SKIA0177E 23 (L) 7 (B/W) Audio sound signal rear RH Input ON J No sound from rear door speaker RH or rear door tweeter RH. Receive audio signal I AV L SKIA0177E M 24 (BR) 8 (B/R) Audio sound signal rear LH Input ON No sound from rear door speaker LH or rear door tweeter LH. Receive audio signal SKIA0177E Revision: October 2004 AV-39 2005 Titan AUDIO Terminals and Reference Value for Rear Audio Remote Control Unit Terminal (Wire color) Item + – 2 (G) 1 (B) Audio sound signal LH Signal input/ output Input Condition Ignition switch ON Reference value (Approx.) EKS00AO6 Example of symptom Operation Receive audio signal No sound from LH headphone channel. SKIA0177E 4 (W) 3 (R) Audio sound signal RH Input ON Receive audio signal No sound from RH headphone channel. SKIA0177E 5 6 (R/L) 7 (LG) – Ground – Shield Illumination Remote control ground – Input – ON – – Input ON – 0V Lighting switch ON 12V Lighting switch OFF 0V Interference and distortion heard from headphones or rear audio remote control unit switches not operating properly. Rear audio remote control unit does not illuminate. 0V Rear audio remote control unit switches do not function. Audio unit ON 5V Rear audio remote control unit does not operate. – 8 (O) Ground Remote control enable signal 9 (V) Ground Remote control A Input ON Audio unit ON 5V Rear audio remote control unit does not operate properly. 10 (P) Ground Remote control B Input ON Audio unit ON 5V Rear audio remote control unit does not operate properly. 11 (BR/ Y) Ground Remote control C Input ON Audio unit ON 5V Rear audio remote control unit does not operate properly. 12 (L) Ground Remote control D Input ON Audio unit ON 5V Rear audio remote control unit does not operate properly. 13 (V) Ground Remote control switch power supply Input ON Audio unit ON 12V Rear audio remote control does not operate. 15 (B) – – ON Ground Revision: October 2004 – AV-40 0V – 2005 Titan AUDIO Terminals and Reference Value for AV Switch EKS00AO7 A Terminal No. (Wire color) Item + – 1 (Y) Ground 2 (V) 3 (R/L) 4 (BR) 5 (B) Ground Ground Ground Ground Battery power ACC signal Illumination signal Signal input/ output Input Input Condition Ignition switch Operation OFF – ACC – Lighting switch is ON (position 1). Input Illumination control signal Input Ground – OFF ON ON Voltage (Approx.) Example of symptom Battery voltage System does not work properly. Battery voltage System does not work properly. Battery voltage Turn lighting switch OFF. Approx. 3.0V or less Illumination control switch is operated by lighting switch in 1st position. Changes between 0 and 12V. – 0V AV switch illumination does not come on when lighting switch is ON (position 1). AV switch illumination cannot be controlled. B C D E F – G 6 (V) (with NAVI) Ground Communication signal (+) Input/ output ON System does not work properly. – H SKIA0175E 7 (with NAVI) – Shield ground I – – – – – J 8 (LG) (with NAVI) Ground Communication signal (-) Input/ output ON System does not work properly. – SKIA0176E 12 (R) 13 (G) Ground Ground Remote control A Remote control B Input Input ON ON 14 (L) – Remote control ground – – 16 (W/B) Ground CD EJECT signal Output ON Revision: October 2004 Press MODE switch 0V Press SEEK UP switch 0.75V Press VOL UP switch 2V Except for above 5V Press POWER switch 0V Press SEEK DOWN switch 0.75V Press VOL DOWN switch 2V Except for above 5V – – Pressed 0V Released 5V AV-41 AV L Steering wheel audio controls do not function. Steering wheel audio controls do not function. Steering wheel audio controls do not function. CD eject does not function. 2005 Titan M AUDIO Terminal No. (Wire color) Item Signal input/ output Condition Ignition switch + – 17 (Y/B) Ground CD LOAD signal Output ON 18 (O/L) (without NAVI) Ground Audio TX Output ON Voltage (Approx.) Example of symptom Operation Pressed 0V Released 5V CD load does not function. Audio information does not display properly. Operate audio volume SKIA4403E 19 (W/L) (without NAVI) Ground Audio RX Input ON Audio information does not display properly. Operate audio volume SKIA4402E 24 (W/R) (without NAVI) Ground Vehicle speed signal Input ON Speed sensitive volume function does not work properly. Vehicle is driven SKIA0175E Revision: October 2004 AV-42 2005 Titan AUDIO AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function EKS00AO8 It can check ON/OFF operation of each switch in the AV switch and diagnose the input signals from the steering switch. STARTING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE (MIDLINE SYSTEM AND PREMIUM SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVI) 1. 2. Turn ignition switch from OFF to ACC. Press and hold the “PAUSE/MUTE” switch and turn the volume control dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more. A B C D E F G H I WKIA1688E 3. 4. Then the self-diagnosis operates. A single beep indicates self-diagnosis mode is active. Initially, all display segments will be illuminated. J Press each switch. When each switch is pressed, its name and communication code will be displayed NOTE: CD player LOAD and EJECT buttons are not included in this test and will not change the display when AV pressed. STARTING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE (PREMIUM SYSTEM WITH NAVI) 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch from OFF to ACC. Within 10 seconds press and hold the switches “PAUSE/MUTE” and “PREV” simultaneously for 3 seconds. Then the self-diagnosis operates. A single beep indicates selfdiagnosis mode is active. Press each switch and listen for beep. NOTE: CD player LOAD and EJECT buttons are not included in this test and will not beep when pressed. L M WKIA1489E EXITING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE Turn ignition switch OFF. Then the self-diagnosis ends. DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ● ● It can check for continuity of the switches by sounding the beep when each AV switch and steering switch is pressed. It can check for continuity of harness between AV switch and steering switch. Revision: October 2004 AV-43 2005 Titan AUDIO Trouble Diagnosis EKS00AO9 The majority of the audio troubles are the result of outside causes (bad CD, electromagnetic interference, etc.). Check the inspection items below to diagnose the malfunction. MALFUNCTION WITH RADIO AND CD (BASE SYSTEM) Symptom Possible cause ● Inoperative Audio unit power circuit check. Refer to AV-46, "Power Supply Circuit Inspection" . If above check is OK, replace audio unit. Audio unit presets are lost when ignition switch is turned OFF All speakers do not sound ● If above check is OK, replace audio unit. ● Audio unit ● Front door speaker check. Refer to AV-50, "Sound Is Not Heard From Front Door Speaker or Front Tweeter (Base or Midline System)" . ● Rear door speaker check. Refer to AV-52, "Sound Is Not Heard From Rear Door Speaker or Rear Door Tweeter (Base or Midline System)" . ● Audio unit ● Speaker ● Audio unit ● Electrical equipment (generator, bonding wire, etc.) One or several speakers do not sound Poor sound Noisy Audio unit B+ power circuit check. Refer to AV-46, "Power Supply Circuit Inspection" . MALFUNCTION WITH RADIO AND CD (MIDLINE OR PREMIUM SYSTEM) Before proceeding on models with NAVI, confirm that other AV switch functions (except audio functions) operate. If not, refer to AV-162, "Unable to Operate All of AV Switches (Unable to Start Self-Diagnosis)" . Symptom Inoperative Possible cause ● Audio unit power circuit check. Refer to AV-46, "Power Supply Circuit Inspection" . ● AV switch check. Refer to AV-49, "AV Switch Check" . ● Audio communication line check (with Navigation System). Refer to AV-143, "Audio Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Audio Unit)" . If above check is OK, replace audio unit. Steering switch does not operate ● Steering switch check. Refer to AV-47, "Steering Switch Check" . ● AV switch check. Refer to AV-49, "AV Switch Check" . ● Audio communication line check (with Navigation System). Refer to AV-143, "Audio Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Audio Unit)" . If above check is OK, replace audio unit. Audio information is not displayed on screen (with NAVI) All speakers do not sound ● Display unit check. Refer to AV-118, "Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU)" . ● Audio unit ● Audio amp. ON signal (with Premium) ● Audio amp. power and ground circuit check (with Premium). Refer to AV-46, "Power Supply Circuit Inspection" . ● Audio amp. (with Premium) ● Front door speaker check. Refer to AV-54, "Sound Is Not Heard From Front Door Speaker or Front Tweeter (Premium System)" . ● Rear door speaker check. Refer to AV-58, "Sound Is Not Heard From Rear Door Speaker or Rear Door Tweeter (Premium System)" . ● Subwoofer check. Refer to AV-62, "Sound Is Not Heard From Subwoofer (Premium System)" . ● Center speaker check. Refer to AV-61, "Sound Is Not Heard From Center Speaker (Premium System)" . One or several speakers do not sound Revision: October 2004 AV-44 2005 Titan AUDIO Symptom Possible cause Poor sound Noisy A ● Audio unit ● Audio amp. (with Premium) ● Speaker ● Audio unit ● Audio amp. (with Premium) ● Electrical equipment (generator, bonding wire, etc.) B C FOR RADIO ONLY Symptom Possible cause No sound Noisy D ● Audio unit ● Antenna feeder, wiring or connections ● Antenna ● Audio unit ● Audio unit case ground ● Antenna ● Noise prevention parts ● Electrical equipment ● Wire harness of each piece of electrical equipment ● Audio unit power circuit. Refer to AV-46, "Power Supply Circuit Inspection" . ● Audio unit All radio stations stored in memory are deleted E F G H NOTE: The following noise results from variations in field strength, such as fading noise and multi-path noise, or external noise from trains and other sources. It is not a malfunction. ● Fading noise: This noise occurs because of variations in the field strength in a narrow range due to mountains or buildings blocking the signal. ● Multi-path noise: This noise results from the waves sent directly from the broadcast station arriving at the antenna at a different time from the waves which reflect off mountains or buildings. FOR CD ONLY I J AV Symptom Possible cause CD cannot be inserted. CD cannot be ejected. ● CD The CD cannot be played. ● Audio unit L The sound skips, stops suddenly, or is distorted. M Noise Inspection EKS00AOA The vehicle itself can be a source of noise if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment is malfunctioning. Check if noise is caused and/or changed by engine speed, ignition switch turned to each position, and operation of each piece of electrical equipment, and determine the cause. NOTE: The source of the noise can be found easily by listening to the noise while removing the fuses of electrical components, one by one. TYPE OF NOISE AND POSSIBLE CAUSE Occurrence condition Occurs only when engine is ON. Possible cause A continuous growling noise occurs. The speed of the noise varies with changes in the engine speed. ● Ignition components A whistling noise occurs while the engine speed is high. A booming noise occurs while the engine is running and the lighting switch is ON. ● Generator ● Fuel pump condenser The occurrence of the noise is linked with the operation of the fuel pump. Revision: October 2004 AV-45 2005 Titan AUDIO Occurrence condition Noise only occurs when various electrical components are operating. Possible cause A cracking or snapping sound occurs with the operation of various switches. The noise occurs when various motors are operating. The noise occurs constantly, not just under certain conditions. A cracking or snapping sound occurs while the vehicle is being driven, especially when it is vibrating excessively. ● Relay malfunction, audio unit malfunction ● Motor case ground ● Motor ● Poor ground of antenna feeder line ● Ground wire of body parts ● Ground due to improper part installation ● Wiring connections or a short circuit Power Supply Circuit Inspection EKS00AOB 1. CHECK FUSES Check that the following fuses are not blown. Unit Audio unit AV switch (except Base) Audio amp. (with Premium) Terminals Signal name Fuse No. 6 Battery power 31 10 Ignition switch ACC or ON 4 1 Battery power 31 2 Ignition switch ACC or ON 4 1 Battery power 31 17 Battery power 17 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . Revision: October 2004 AV-46 2005 Titan AUDIO 2. POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK 1. 2. A Disconnect audio unit connector M43 or audio amp. connector M112 (with Premium). Check voltage between the audio unit and ground. B Terminal No. (+) Unit Connector Audio unit Terminal (wire color) (-) 6 (Y) Ground M43 10 (V) Ground OFF ACC ON C Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage D SKIA1992E 3. E Check voltage between audio amp. (with Premium) and ground. F Terminal No. (+) Unit Audio amp. (-) Connector Terminal (wire color) M112 1 (Y) Ground OFF ACC ON G Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. ● Repair harness or connector. H WKIA1657E 3. GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK I J Check continuity between audio amp. (with Premium) harness connector M112 terminal 4 (B), 20 (B) and ground. AV Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. ● Repair harness or connector. L M WKIA1658E Steering Switch Check EKS00AOC 1. AV SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION CHECK 1. Start AV switch self-diagnosis function. Refer to AV-43, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function" . 2. Operate steering switch. Does steering switch operate normally? YES >> Inspection End. NO >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 AV-47 2005 Titan AUDIO 2. CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect AV switch connector M98 and spiral cable connector M30. Check continuity between spiral cable harness connector terminal and AV switch harness connector terminal. Terminals Spiral cable Connector AV switch Terminal Connector Terminal (Wire color) 32 (G) M30 13 (G) 31 (L) M98 14 (L) 24 (R) 4. Continuity Yes 12 (R) Check continuity between AV switch and ground. Terminals WKIA1600E AV switch Connector Continuity — Terminal (Wire color) 12 (R) M98 13 (G) Ground No 14 (L) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. 3. SPIRAL CABLE CHECK 1. 2. Disconnect spiral cable connectors M30 and M102. Check continuity between spiral cable terminals. Terminals Spiral cable Connector Terminal Connector 32 M30 31 24 Continuity Terminal 16 M102 17 Yes 20 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SRS-46, "SPIRAL CABLE" . Revision: October 2004 AV-48 WKIA3489E 2005 Titan AUDIO 4. CHECK STEERING SWITCH RESISTANCE A Check resistance between steering switch terminals. Terminal 16 20 17 17 Signal name Resistance (Ω) (Approx.) Condition Seek (down) Depress (station) down switch. Power Depress power switch. Volume (down) Depress volume down switch. 652 Seek (up) Depress (station) up switch. 165 Mode Depress mode switch. Volume (up) Depress volume up switch. B 165 C 0 D 0 652 WKIA3490E OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-67, "Removal and Installation of Steering Wheel Audio Control Switches" . AV Switch Check E F EKS00AOD 1. AV SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION CHECK G Perform AV switch self-diagnosis function. Refer to AV-43, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function" . Does AV switch operate normally? YES >> Inspection End. NO >> GO TO 2. H 2. CHECK AV SWITCH POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT I Check AV switch power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-137, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for AV Switch" . J OK or NG YES >> Replace AV switch. Refer to AV-65, "Removal and Installation for AV Switch" . AV NO >> Repair malfunctioning part. Audio Communication Line Check (With Navigation System) EKS00AOE 1. CHECK AUDIO COMMUNICATION LINE L Start audio communication line check. Refer to AV-143, "Audio Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Audio Unit)" . OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace malfunctioning part. Revision: October 2004 AV-49 2005 Titan M AUDIO Sound Is Not Heard From Front Door Speaker or Front Tweeter (Base or Midline System) EKS00AOF 1. HARNESS CHECK 1. 2. Disconnect audio unit connector M43 and suspect speaker or tweeter connector. Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M43 terminal and suspect speaker or tweeter harness connector terminal. Terminals Audio unit Connector Speaker or tweeter Terminal (Wire color) Connector 2 (L/W) + (L/W) D12 1 (L/R) 4 (W/B) 2 (L/W) - (L/B) + (L/W) M109 1 (L/R) 4 (W/B) Yes - (L/R) + (W/B) M111 3 (L/B) 3. - (L/R) + (W/B) D112 3 (L/B) M43 Continuity Terminal (Wire color) - (L/B) Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M43 terminal and ground. Terminals WKIA1220E Audio unit Connector Terminal (Wire color) Continuity — 2 (L/W) 1 (L/R) M43 4 (W/B) Ground No 3 (L/B) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. ● Repair harness or connector. Revision: October 2004 AV-50 2005 Titan AUDIO 2. FRONT SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK 1. 2. 3. 4. A Connect audio unit connector and front speaker or tweeter connector. Turn ignition switch to ACC. Push “POWER” switch. Check the signal between audio unit harness connector terminals and ground with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope. B C Terminals (+) Connector Terminal (Wire color) (-) Connector 2 (L/W) M43 Terminal (Wire color) Condition Reference signal D E 1 (L/R) M43 4 (W/B) 3 (L/B) Receive audio signal F G SKIA0177E OK or NG OK >> Replace speaker. Refer to AV-65, "Removal and Installation of Front Door Speaker" or AV-66, "Removal and Installation of Front Tweeter" . NG >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-65, "Removal and Installation for Audio Unit" . H SKIA4278E I J AV L M Revision: October 2004 AV-51 2005 Titan AUDIO Sound Is Not Heard From Rear Door Speaker or Rear Door Tweeter (Base or Midline System) EKS00AOG 1. HARNESS CHECK 1. 2. Disconnect audio unit connector M44 and suspect speaker connector. Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M44 terminal and suspect speaker harness connector terminal. Terminals Audio unit Connector Speaker or tweeter Terminal (Wire color) Connector 13 (B/Y) - (B/Y) D207 14 (SB) 15 (R/L) 13 (B/Y) + (O/L) - (B/Y) D208 14 (SB) 15 (R/L) Yes + (SB) - (R/L) D308 16 (O/L) 3. + (SB) - (R/L) D307 16 (O/L) M44 Continuity Terminal (Wire color) + (O/L) Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M44 terminal and ground. Terminals Audio unit Connector Terminal (Wire color) Continuity WKIA1164E — 13 (B/Y) 14 (SB) M44 15 (R/L) Ground No 16 (O/L) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. ● Repair harness or connector. Revision: October 2004 AV-52 2005 Titan AUDIO 2. REAR SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK 1. 2. 3. 4. A Connect audio unit connector and rear speaker connector. Turn ignition switch to ACC. Push “POWER” switch. Check the signal between audio unit harness connector terminals with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope. B C Terminals (+) Connector (-) Terminal (Wire color) Connector Condition Reference signal D E 14 (SB) M44 Terminal (Wire color) 13 (B/Y) M44 16 (O/L) 15 (R/L) Receive audio signal F G SKIA0177E OK or NG OK >> Replace rear door speaker. Refer to AV-65, "Removal and Installation of Rear Door Speaker" or AV-66, "Removal and Installation of Rear Door Tweeter" . NG >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-65, "Removal and Installation for Audio Unit" . H SKIA4281E I J AV L M Revision: October 2004 AV-53 2005 Titan AUDIO Sound Is Not Heard From Front Door Speaker or Front Tweeter (Premium System) EKS00AOH 1. HARNESS CHECK 1. 2. Disconnect audio amp. connector M113 and suspect speaker connector. Check continuity between audio amp. harness connector terminal M113 and suspect speaker harness connector terminal. Terminals Audio amp. Connector Speaker or tweeter Terminal (Wire color) Connector 15 (L/W) + (L/W) D12 31 (L/R) 16 (W/B) 14 (L/W) - (L/B) + (L/W) M109 30 (L/R) 13 (W/B) Yes - (L/R) + (W/B) M111 29 (L/B) 3. - (L/R) + (W/B) D112 32 (L/B) M113 Continuity Terminal (Wire color) - (L/B) Check continuity between audio amp. harness connector terminal M113 and ground. Terminals Audio amp. Connector Terminal (Wire color) Continuity WKIA1659E — 15 (L/W) 31 (L/R) 16 (W/B) M113 32 (L/B) Ground No 14 (L/W) 30 (L/R) 13 (W/B) 29 (L/B) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. ● Repair harness or connector. Revision: October 2004 AV-54 2005 Titan AUDIO 2. FRONT SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK 1. 2. 3. 4. A Connect audio amp. connector M113 and suspect speaker connector. Turn ignition switch to ACC. Push “POWER” switch. Check the signal between audio amp. harness connector M113 terminals with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope. B C Terminals (+) Connector Terminal (Wire color) (-) Connector Terminal (Wire color) 15 (L/W) 31 (L/R) 16 (W/B) 32 (L/B) 14 (L/W) M113 30 (L/R) M113 13 (W/B) Condition Reference signal D E WKIA1660E Receive audio signal F G 29 (L/B) SKIA0177E OK or NG OK >> Replace suspect speaker. Refer to AV-65, "Removal and Installation of Front Door Speaker" or AV-66, "Removal and Installation of Front Tweeter" . NG >> GO TO 3. H I J AV L M Revision: October 2004 AV-55 2005 Titan AUDIO 3. HARNESS CHECK 1. 2. Disconnect audio unit connector M43 and audio amp. connector M113. Check continuity between audio unit harness connector terminals and audio amp. harness connector terminals. Terminals Audio unit Connector Audio amp. Terminal (Wire color) Connector 1 (B) 6 (B) 2 (W) M43 22 (W) M113 3 (BR) 4 (Y) 3. Continuity Terminal (Wire color) 5 (BR) Yes 21 (Y) Check continuity between audio unit harness connector terminal and ground. Terminals Audio unit Connector Continuity Terminal (Wire color) — 1 (B) 2 (W) M43 3 (BR) Ground No WKIA1661E 4 (Y) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. ● Repair harness or connector. Revision: October 2004 AV-56 2005 Titan AUDIO 4. FRONT SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK 1. 2. 3. 4. A Connect audio unit connector and audio amp. connector. Turn ignition switch to ACC. Push “POWER” switch. Check the signal between audio unit harness connector terminals with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope. B C Terminals (+) Connector (-) Terminal (Wire color) Connector 2 (W) M43 Terminal (Wire color) Condition Reference signal D E 1 (B) M43 4 (Y) 3 (BR) Receive audio signal F G SKIA0177E OK or NG OK >> Replace audio amp. Refer to AV-66, "Removal and Installation of Audio Amp." . NG >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-65, "Removal and Installation for Audio Unit" . H SKIA4278E I J AV L M Revision: October 2004 AV-57 2005 Titan AUDIO Sound Is Not Heard From Rear Door Speaker or Rear Door Tweeter (Premium System) EKS00AOI 1. HARNESS CHECK 1. 2. Disconnect audio amp. connector M113 and suspect speaker connector. Check continuity between audio amp. harness connector terminal M113 and suspect speaker harness connector terminal. Terminals Audio amp. Connector Speaker or tweeter Terminal (Wire color) Connector 11 (SB) + (SB) D207 27 (B/Y) 12 (O/L) 11 (SB) - (R/L) + (SB) D208 27 (B/Y) 12 (O/L) Yes - (B/Y) + (O/L) D308 28 (R/L) 3. - (B/Y) + (O/L) D307 28 (R/L) M113 Continuity Terminal (Wire color) - (R/L) Check continuity between audio amp. harness connector M113 terminal and ground. Terminals Audio amp. Connector Continuity Terminal (Wire color) WKIA1662E — 11 (SB) 27 (B/Y) M113 12 (O/L) Ground No 28 (R/L) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. ● Repair harness or connector. Revision: October 2004 AV-58 2005 Titan AUDIO 2. REAR SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK 1. 2. 3. 4. A Connect audio amp. connector M113 and suspect speaker connector. Turn ignition switch to ACC. Push “POWER” switch. Check the signal between audio amp. harness connector M113 terminals with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope. B C Terminals (+) Connector Terminal (Wire color) (-) Connector 11 (SB) M113 Terminal (Wire color) Condition Reference signal D 27 (B/Y) M113 12 (O/L) 28 (R/L) E Receive audio signal F G SKIA0177E OK or NG OK >> Replace suspect speaker. Refer to AV-65, "Removal and Installation of Rear Door Speaker" or AV-66, "Removal and Installation of Rear Door Tweeter" . NG >> GO TO 3. H WKIA1663E I J AV L M Revision: October 2004 AV-59 2005 Titan AUDIO 3. HARNESS CHECK 1. 2. Disconnect audio unit connector M44 and audio amp. connector M113. Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M44 terminals and audio amp. harness connector M113 terminals. Terminals Audio unit Connector Audio amp. Terminal (Wire color) Connector 13 (B/R) 8 (B/R) 14 (BR) M44 24 (BR) 15 (B/W) M113 16 (L) 3. Continuity Terminal (Wire color) 7 (B/W) Yes 23 (L) Check continuity between audio unit harness connector terminal and ground. Terminals Audio unit Connector Continuity Terminal (Wire color) — 13 (B/R) 14 (BR) M44 15 (B/W) Ground No WKIA1664E 16 (L) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. ● Repair harness or connector. Revision: October 2004 AV-60 2005 Titan AUDIO 4. REAR SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK 1. 2. 3. 4. A Connect audio unit connector M44 and audio amp. connector M113. Turn ignition switch to ACC. Push “POWER” switch. Check the signal between audio unit harness connector M44 terminals with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope. B C Terminals (+) Connector (-) Terminal (Wire color) Connector Reference signal D E 14 (BR) M44 Condition Terminal (Wire color) 13 (B/R) Receive audio signal M44 16 (L) 15 (B/W) F G SKIA0177E OK or NG OK >> Replace audio amp. Refer to AV-66, "Removal and Installation of Audio Amp." . NG >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-65, "Removal and Installation for Audio Unit" . Sound Is Not Heard From Center Speaker (Premium System) H SKIA4316E EKS00AOJ 1. HARNESS CHECK 1. 2. J Disconnect audio amp. connector M113 and center speaker connector M110. Check continuity between audio amp. harness connector M113 terminals and center speaker harness connector M110 terminals. AV L Terminals Audio amp. Connector Center speaker Terminal (Wire color) Connector 26 (L/B) M113 3. Continuity Terminal (Wire color) M - (L/B) M110 10 (L/W) + (L/W) Yes WKIA1665E Check continuity between audio amp. harness connector M113 terminals and ground. Terminals Audio amp. Connector Terminal (Wire color) Continuity — 26 (L/B) M113 10 (L/W) Ground No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. ● Repair harness or connector. Revision: October 2004 I AV-61 2005 Titan AUDIO 2. CENTER SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK 1. 2. 3. 4. Connect audio amp. connector M113 and center speaker connector M110. Turn ignition switch to ACC. Push the “POWER” switch. Check the signal between audio amp. harness connector M113 terminals with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope. Terminals (+) Connector (-) Terminal (Wire color) Connector Terminal (Wire color) Condition Reference signal WKIA1666E M113 10 (L/W) M113 26 (L/B) Receive audio signal SKIA0177E OK or NG OK >> Replace center speaker. Refer to AV-66, "Removal and Installation of Center Speaker" . NG >> Replace audio amp. Refer to AV-66, "Removal and Installation of Audio Amp." . Sound Is Not Heard From Subwoofer (Premium System) EKS00AOK 1. CHECK FUSE Check that the following fuse is not blown. Unit Terminal Audio amp. Signal name Fuse No. 17 Battery power 17 1 Battery power 31 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . 2. POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK 1. 2. Disconnect audio amp. connector. Check voltage between the audio amp. and ground. Terminal No. (+) Unit Connector Audio amp. Terminal (wire color) M112 17 (Y/G) 1 (Y) OFF ACC ON Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage (-) Ground OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. ● Repair harness or connector. Revision: October 2004 AV-62 WKIA1685E 2005 Titan AUDIO 3. GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK A Check continuity between audio amp. harness connector M112 terminal 4 (B) and ground, and 20 (B) and ground. B Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. ● Repair harness or connector. C D WKIA1658E 4. HARNESS CHECK 1. 2. E Disconnect audio amp. connector M112 and subwoofer connector B72. Check continuity between audio amp. harness connector terminal and subwoofer harness connector harness connector terminal. F Terminals G Audio amp. Connector Subwoofer Terminal (Wire color) Connector 3 (BR/W) 1 (W) B72 18 (B) 19 (BR) 3. H 3 (BR/W) 2 (W) M112 Continuity Terminal (Wire color) 2 (B) Yes WKIA1668E I 4 (BR) Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector terminal and ground. J Terminals Audio amp. Connector Terminal (Wire color) Continuity AV — 3 (BR) L 2 (W) M112 18 (B) Ground No 19 (BR) M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. ● Repair harness or connector. Revision: October 2004 AV-63 2005 Titan AUDIO 5. SUBWOOFER SIGNAL CHECK 1. 2. 3. Connect audio amp. connector and subwoofer connector. Turn ignition switch to ACC. Check the signal between audio amp. harness connector terminals with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope. Terminals (+) Connector (-) Terminal (Wire color) Connector 3 (BR/ W) Condition Reference signal 18 (B) 2 (W) M112 Terminal (Wire color) M112 19 (BR) WKIA1669E Receive audio signal SKIA0177E OK or NG OK >> Replace subwoofer. Refer to AV-66, "Removal and Installation of Subwoofer (Premium System)" . NG >> Replace audio amp. Refer to AV-66, "Removal and Installation of Audio Amp." . Revision: October 2004 AV-64 2005 Titan AUDIO Removal and Installation for Audio Unit 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. EKS00AOL A Disconnect the battery negative cable. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-12, "CLUSTER LID C" . Using power tool, remove the four audio unit screws. Pull out audio unit and disconnect connectors. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. B C D WKIA1490E Removal and Installation for AV Switch 1. 2. 3. 4. E EKS00AOM Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-12, "CLUSTER LID C" . Remove the four AV switch screws. Carefully remove the AV switch. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. F G H I WKIA1491E Removal and Installation of Front Door Speaker 1. 2. 3. EKS00AON J Remove door finisher. Refer to EI-32, "DOOR FINISHER" . Remove the four front door speaker screws, disconnect the connector and remove the speaker. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Front door speaker screws AV : 3.5 N·m (0.36 kg-m, 31 in-lb) L M WKIA1498E Removal and Installation of Rear Door Speaker 1. 2. 3. EKS00AOO Remove door finisher. Refer to EI-32, "DOOR FINISHER" . Remove the three rear speaker screws, disconnect the connector and remove speaker. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Rear speaker screws : 3.5 N·m (0.36 kg-m, 31 in-lb) WKIA1492E Revision: October 2004 AV-65 2005 Titan AUDIO Removal and Installation of Front Tweeter 1. 2. 3. 4. EKS00AOP Remove tweeter grille. Remove push pins. Remove tweeter and disconnect connector. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. WKIA1493E Removal and Installation of Rear Door Tweeter 1. 2. 3. EKS00AOQ Remove door finisher. Refer to EI-32, "DOOR FINISHER" . Remove screws and remove tweeter. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. WKIA1494E Removal and Installation of Center Speaker 1. 2. 3. EKS00AOR Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-12, "CLUSTER LID D" . Remove the screws and the center speaker. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. WKIA1495E Removal and Installation of Subwoofer (Premium System) 1. 2. 3. 4. EKS00AOS Remove front seat LH. Refer to SE-91, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the subwoofer bolts. Disconnect the connector and remove the subwoofer. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Subwoofer bolts : 3.5 N·m (0.36 kg-m, 31 in-lb) WKIA1764E Removal and Installation of Audio Amp. 1. EKS00AOT Remove BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . Revision: October 2004 AV-66 2005 Titan AUDIO 2. 3. 4. Remove audio amp. bracket screws and slide audio speaker amp. down. Disconnect connectors and remove audio speaker amp. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Audio amp. mounting screws A B : 3.5 N·m (0.36 kg-m, 31 in-lb) C WKIA1605E Removal and Installation of Rear Audio Remote Control Unit 1. 2. 3. D EKS00AOU Carefully remove the rear audio remote control unit from the roof console assembly. CAUTION: Wrap removal tool with clean shop cloth to prevent damage to the headliner. Disconnect connector and remove the rear audio control unit. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. E F G WKIA1201E Removal and Installation of Steering Wheel Audio Control Switches 1. 2. 3. 4. EKS00AOV Remove steering wheel. Refer to PS-8, "Removal and Installation" . Remove steering wheel rear cover screws and remove steering wheel rear cover. Remove steering wheel switch assembly screws and steering wheel switches. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. H I J AV L WKIA1226E M Revision: October 2004 AV-67 2005 Titan AUDIO ANTENNA AUDIO ANTENNA Location of Antenna PFP:28200 EKS00AOW WKIA1672E Revision: October 2004 AV-68 2005 Titan DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:28184 A EKS00AOX B C D E F G H I J AV L M WKIA3600E Revision: October 2004 AV-69 2005 Titan DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM System Description EKS00AOY Refer to Owner's Manual for DVD entertainment system operating instructions. Power is supplied at all times ● through 20A fuse (No. 31, located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to DVD player terminal 16. With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to DVD player terminal 15. Power is also supplied ● from DVD player terminals 31 and 32 ● to video monitor terminals 11 and 12. Ground is supplied ● to DVD player terminal 22 ● through body grounds M57, M61 and M79. Audio signals are supplied ● through DVD player terminals 1, 2, 3 and 4 ● to audio unit terminals 34, 35, 36 and 37. Video signals are supplied ● through DVD player terminals 23, 24, 28 and 29 ● to video monitor terminals 5, 6, 7 and 8. Revision: October 2004 AV-70 2005 Titan DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM Schematic EKS00AOZ A B C D E F G H I J AV L M WKWA0801E Revision: October 2004 AV-71 2005 Titan DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM Wiring Diagram — DVD — EKS00AP0 WKWA2343E Revision: October 2004 AV-72 2005 Titan DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM A B C D E F G H I J AV L M WKWA1188E Revision: October 2004 AV-73 2005 Titan DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM WKWA2344E Revision: October 2004 AV-74 2005 Titan DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM Trouble Diagnosis EKS00AP1 A Symptom DVD player inoperative No sound when playing DVD Possible causes Repair order 1. Power supply Refer to AV-76, "Power Supply Circuit Inspection" . 2. Ground circuit 1. Audio enable circuit 1. Check audio enable circuit between audio unit terminal 40 and DVD player terminal 9 for open or short. 2. Audio signal circuits 2. Check audio signal circuits for open or short between DVD player terminals 1, 2, 3 and 4 and audio unit terminals 34, 35, 36 and 37. 3. DVD player 4. Audio unit 3. Remove DVD player for repair. 1. Power supply 2. Video monitor ground circuit 3. Video circuits 4. Video monitor 5. DVD player C D 4. Remove audio unit for repair. Video monitor is inoperative/does not operate properly B 1. Operate DVD player and verify battery positive voltage is present at terminals 11 and 12 of video monitor. Verify approximately 5 volts is present at terminal 10 of video monitor. E 2. Check video monitor ground circuits between DVD player terminals 19 and 27 and video monitor terminals 1 and 2. F 3. Check video circuits between DVD player terminals 23 and 24 and video monitor terminals 7 and 8. 4. Remove video monitor for repair. G 5. Remove DVD player for repair. DVD remote control is inoperative/does not operate properly 1. DVD player remote control batteries 1. Replace DVD player remote control batteries. 2. DVD player remote control 2. Replace DVD player remote control. 3. Video monitor 3. Remove video monitor for repair. Headphones inoperative 1. Headphone batteries 1. Replace headphone batteries. 2. Headphones 2. Replace headphones. 3. Rear audio remote control unit 3. Replace rear audio remote control unit. 1. Harness or connectors 1. Check harness and connectors for open or short. 2. DVD player 2. Check DVD player. 1. Harness or connectors 1. Check harness and connectors for open or short. 2. DVD player 2. Check DVD player. 1. Harness or connectors 1. Check harness and connectors for open or short. 2. DVD player 2. Check DVD player. 3. Video monitor 3. Check video monitor. 1. Harness or connectors 1. Check harness and connectors for open or short. 2. DVD player 2. Check DVD player. 3. Video monitor 3. Check video monitor. Snowy video/poor audio Snowy video (audio OK) No video (audio OK) Dim video (audio OK) Revision: October 2004 AV-75 H I J AV L M 2005 Titan DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM Power Supply Circuit Inspection EKS00AP2 1. CHECK FUSES Check that the following fuses are not blown. Unit Terminals DVD player Signal name Fuse No. 16 Battery power 31 15 Ignition switch ACC or ON 4 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . 2. POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK 1. 2. Disconnect DVD player connector M205. Check voltage between the DVD player and ground. Terminal No. (+) Unit Connector DVD player OFF ACC ON Ground Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage Ground 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage Terminal (wire color) (-) 16 (Y) 15 (V) M205 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. ● Repair harness or connector. WKIA1197E 3. GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK Check continuity between DVD player harness connector M206 terminal 22 (B) and ground. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> ● Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. ● Repair harness or connector. WKIA1198E Revision: October 2004 AV-76 2005 Titan DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM Removal and Installation of DVD Player 1. 2. 3. EKS00AP3 A Remove center console bin. Refer to IP-15, "CENTER CONSOLE" . Remove the screws and remove DVD player. Installation is in reverse order of removal. B C D WKIA1503E Removal and Installation of Video Monitor 1. 2. 3. 4. EKS00AP4 Remove roof console assembly. Refer to EI-43, "HEADLINING" . Disconnect the video monitor connector. Remove the video housing screws. Remove the video monitor and housing. E F G H I WKIA1502E 5. 6. Remove the video monitor hinge screws and remove the video monitor. Installation is in reverse order of removal. J AV L WKIA1219E Revision: October 2004 AV-77 2005 Titan M NAVIGATION SYSTEM NAVIGATION SYSTEM System Description PFP:25915 EKS00AP5 The navigation system periodically calculates the vehicle's current position according to the following three signals: Travel distance of the vehicle as determined by the vehicle speed sensor, turning angle of the vehicle as determined by the gyroscope (angular velocity sensor), and the direction of vehicle travel as determined by the GPS antenna (GPS information). The current position of the vehicle is then identified by comparing the calculated vehicle position with map data read from the map DVDROM, which is stored in the DVD-ROM drive (map-matching), and indicated on the screen with a current-location mark. WKIA1371E By comparing the vehicle position detection results found by the GPS and by map-matching, more accurate vehicle position data can be used. The current vehicle position will be calculated by detecting the distance the vehicle moved from the previous calculation point and its direction. SEL684V TRAVEL DISTANCE Travel distance calculations are based on the vehicle speed sensor input signal. Therefore, the calculation may become incorrect as the tires wear down. To prevent this, an automatic distance fine adjustment function has been adopted. Adjustments can be made in extreme cases such as driving with tire chain fitted on tires. Refer to AV-124, "Confirmation/Adjustment Mode" . TRAVEL DIRECTION Change in the travel direction of the vehicle is calculated by a gyroscope (angular velocity sensor) and a GPS antenna (GPS information). As the gyroscope and GPS antenna have both merit and demerit, input signals from them are prioritized in each situation. However, this order of priority may change in accordance with more detailed travel conditions so that the travel direction is detected more accurately. Type Gyroscope (angular velocity sensor) GPS antenna (GPS information) Advantage ● Can detect the vehicle's turning angle quite accurately. ● Can detect the vehicle's travel direction (North/South/East/West). Disadvantage ● Direction errors may accumulate when the vehicle is driven for long distances without stopping. ● Correct direction cannot be detected when the vehicle speed is low. MAP-MATCHING Map-matching is a function that repositions the vehicle on the road map when a new location is judged to be the most accurate. This is done by comparing the current vehicle position, calculated by the method described in the position detection principle, with the road map data around the vehicle, read from the map DVD-ROM stored in the DVD-ROM drive. Therefore, the vehicle position may not be corrected after the vehicle is driven over a certain distance or time in which GPS information is hard to receive. In this case, the current-location mark on the display must be corrected manually. CAUTION: The road map data is based on data stored in the map DVDROM. Revision: October 2004 AV-78 SEL685V 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM ● In map-matching, alternative routes to reach the destination will be shown and prioritized, after the road on which the vehicle is currently driven has been judged and the current-location mark has been repositioned. If there is an error in distance and/or direction, the alternative routes will be shown in different order of priority, and the wrong road can be avoided. If two roads are running in parallel, they are of the same priority. Therefore, the current-location mark may appear on either of them alternately, depending on maneuvering of the steering wheel and configuration of the road. A B C SEL686V D ● ● Map-matching does not function correctly when the road on which the vehicle is driving is new and not recorded in the map DVD-ROM, or when the road pattern stored in the map data and the actual road pattern are different due to repair. When driving on a road not present in the map, the map-matching function may find another road and position the current-location mark on it. Then, when the correct road is detected, the current-location mark may leap to it. Effective range for comparing the vehicle position and travel direction calculated by the distance and direction with the road data read from the map DVD-ROM is limited. Therefore, when there is an excessive gap between the current vehicle position and the position on the map, correction by map-matching is not possible. E F G SKIA0613E H GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM) GPS (Global Positioning System) has been developed and conI trolled by the US Department of Defense. The system utilizes GPS satellite (NAVSTAR), sending out radio waves while flying on an orbit around the earth at the height of approx. 21,000 km (13,000 miles). The GPS receiver calculates the vehicle's position in three dimenJ sions (latitude/longitude/altitude) according to the time lag of the radio waves received from four or more GPS satellites (three-dimensional positioning). If radio waves were received only from three AV GPS satellites, the GPS receiver calculates the vehicle's position in two dimensions (latitude/longitude), utilizing the altitude data calculated previously by using radio waves from four or more GPS satelSEL526V lites (two-dimensional positioning). L Accuracy of the GPS will deteriorate under the following conditions. ● In two-dimensional positioning, the GPS accuracy will deteriorate when the altitude of the vehicle position changes. M ● There may be an error of approximately 10 m (30 ft) in position detected by three-dimensional positioning, which is more accurate than two-dimensional positioning. The accuracy can be even lower depending on the arrangement of the GPS satellites utilized for the positioning. ● Position detection is not possible when the vehicle is in an area where radio waves from the GPS satellite do not reach, such as in a tunnel, parking lot in a building, and under an elevated highway. Radio waves from the GPS satellites may not be received when some object is located over the GPS antenna. ● Position correction by GPS is not available while the vehicle is stopped. Revision: October 2004 AV-79 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM COMPONENT DESCRIPTION NAVI Control Unit ● ● The gyro (angular speed sensor) and the DVD-ROM drive are built-in units that control the navigation functions. Signals are received from the gyro, the vehicle speed sensor, and the GPS antenna. Vehicle location is determined by combining this data with the data contained in the DVD-ROM map. Location information is shown on liquid crystal display (display unit). PKIA0248E DVD-ROM Drive Maps, traffic control regulations, and other pertinent information can be easily read from the DVD-ROM disc. PKIA0249E Map DVD-ROM ● ● The map DVD-ROM has maps, traffic control regulations, and other pertinent information. To improve DVD-ROM map matching and route determination functions, the DVD-ROM uses an exclusive Nissan format. Therefore, the use of a DVD-ROM provided by other manufacturers cannot be used. Gyro (Angular Speed Sensor) ● ● The oscillator gyro sensor is used to detect changes in vehicle steering angle. The gyro is built into the navigation (NAVI) control unit. BIRDVIEW™ The BIRDVIEW™ provides a detailed and easily seen display of road conditions covering the vehicle's immediate to distant area. ● PLAN VIEW SKIA5818E Revision: October 2004 AV-80 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM ● BIRDVIEW™ A B C SKIA5816E D Description ● ● ● Display area: Trapezoidal representation showing approximate distances (Wn, D, and Wd). Ten horizontal grid lines indicate display width while six vertical grid lines indicate display depth and direction. Pushing the “ZOOM IN” button during operation displays the scale change and the view point height on the left side of the screen. The height of the view point increases or decreases when “ZOOM” or “WIDE” is selected with the joystick. E F G H I J SKIA5613E AV MAP DISPLAY Function of each icon is as follows: 1. Azimuth indication. 2. Position marker. – The tip of the arrow shows the current location. The shaft of the arrow indicates the direction in which the vehicle is traveling. 3. GPS reception signal (indicates current reception conditions). 4. Distance display (shows the distance in a reduced scale). L M SKIA5817E Revision: October 2004 AV-81 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM FUNCTION OF CENTER SWITCH Display with Pushed “DEST” button ● Easy Mode ("Short Menus" ON) WKIA3137E ● Expert Mode ("Short Menus" OFF) WKIA3138E The function of each icon is as follows: Mode Icon Easy Address Book Description Expert × Favorite place can be saved to memory. Street Address × × The destination can be searched from the address. Point of Interest (POI) × × The destination of favorite facility can be searched. Previous Dest. × The previous ten destinations stored in memory are displayed. Intersection × The destination can be searched from the intersection. City × The destination can be searched from city name. Map × The destination can be searched from the map. Phone Number × The destination can be set by entering the phone number. Home × Sets the home as a destination. Help × Explanation of navigational functions appear on the display. Country × Revision: October 2004 × Select country (USA, CANADA) AV-82 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Display with Pushed “ROUTE” button ● A Easy Mode ("Short Menus" ON) B C SKIA4494E ● D Expert Mode ("Short Menus" OFF) E F G SKIA4495E H The function of each icon is as follows: Mode Icon Easy Description Expert I Quick Stop × × The selected facility is set as the destination or way point. (Route guidance has been turned OFF or the destination has been reached.) Where am I? × × Next, current and previous street names can be displayed. J The following items can be selected. Cancel Guidance × × ● All Destinations ● Way point ● Not Cancel AV (Displayed only when the destination area has been set.) L The following items can be selected. × Route Info.* ● Complete Route ● Turn List ● Route Simulation M (Displayed only when the destination area has been set.) × Edit Route* Help × Change the destination or add the transit points of the route set in the route guide. (Displayed only when the automatic reroute function has been turned OFF and the recommended route is not followed.) Explanation of navigational functions appear on the display. *: When in Easy Mode, “Route Info.” and “Edit Route” are not displayed. Revision: October 2004 AV-83 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Display with Pushed “SETTING” button The function of each icon is as follows: SKIA4496E Icon Description Display Settings of display can be performed. Vehicle Electronic Systems Settings of vehicle electrical equipment can be performed. System Settings Settings of linguistic select, time adjusting and beep sound can be performed. Navigation Settings and adjusting of navigation can be performed. Short Menus Easy Mode and Expert Mode can be switched. Guidance Volume The volume and/or on/off of voice prompt can be controlled by the joystick. Help (only easy mode) Explanation of navigational functions appear on the display. Display Settings How To Perform Display Setting 1. Start the engine. 2. Push “SETTING” button. 3. Select “Display” with enter button. SKIA5791E Application Items Icon Description Reference page Brightness/Contrast/Map Background Brightness, Contrast and Map Background can be set. AV-84 Display Off Display sleep mode ON/OFF can be switched. AV-84 Setting of the under section display The setting status of A/C or AV can be shown. AV-85 Brightness/Contrast/Map Back ground How To Perform Navigation Setting 1. Select “Brightness/Contrast/Map Background”. ● Brightness, Contrast and Background are shown at the lower part of the screen, and it can be set with the joystick. Display Off How To Perform Navigation Setting 1. Select “Display Off”. ● When setting is turned on (Indicator light ON), the display will be under sleep mode. Revision: October 2004 AV-84 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Setting of the under section display A How To Perform Under Section Display Setting 1. Select “Setting of the Under Section Display”. ● The setting status that is selected from A/C or AV is shown at the lower part of the screen. B Vehicle Electronic Systems C D E WKIA1378E F Application Items Icon G Description Adjust Driver Seat When Exiting Vehicle The driver's seat automatically moves back and returns to the original position. Remote Unlock Driver's Door First This option allows selection of which doors will unlock first during an unlocking operation. Keyless Remote Response — Horn This option allows the horn chirp mode when pressing the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the keyfob to be changed. Keyless Remote Response — Lights This option allows the hazard flash mode when pressing the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the keyfob to be changed. Auto Re-Lock Time This option allows the length of time before doors auto re-lock to be set. Sensitivity of Automatic Headlights This option allows the sensitivity of the autolights to be set. Automatic Headlights Off Delay This option allows the length of time before the autolights turn off to be set. Speed Dependent Wiper This option allows the driving speed dependent wiper function to be turned on or off. Return All Settings Default All settings will return to the initial conditions. I J How To Perform Navigation Setting 1. Start the engine. 2. Push “SETTING” button. 3. Select “Vehicle Electronic Systems”. AV L M System Settings How To Perform System Setting 1. Start the engine. 2. Push “SETTING” button. 3. Select “System Settings”. SKIA4536E Revision: October 2004 H AV-85 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Application Items Icon Description Reference page Language/Unit Settings of language or unit can be performed. AV-86 Clock Settings of clock can be performed. AV-86 Beep Setting Settings of beep sound can be performed. AV-86 Language Setting How To Perform Language Setting 1. Select "Language/Unit". ● Language setting can be switched. ● Unit setting can be changed. SKIA2065E Clock Settings How To Perform Clock Setting 1. Select “Clock”. ● Select the “Hours” or “Minutes” key and tilt the joystick to the right or left to adjust the time. ● Turn ON and OFF daylight saving time. ● Select the “Auto Adjust” key. The time will be reset to the GPS time. ● Select the “Select Time Zone” key. The [TIME ZONE] screen will appear. SKIA2063E Beep Setting How To Perform Beep Setting 1. Select “Beep Setting”. ● When Beep Setting is on (indicator light on), a beep will sound if the button is pushed. NOTE: Items in exception of Beep Setting ON/OFF. ● An error beep. ● An interrupted-screen beep. SKIA4829E Revision: October 2004 AV-86 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Navigation Setting A How To Perform Navigation Setting 1. Start the engine. 2. Push “SETTING” button. 3. Select “NAVIGATION”. B C D SKIA0551E Application Items E Icon Description Reference page View Map display mode can be switched. AV-87 Heading Heading of the map display can be customized for either north heading or the actual driving direction of the vehicle. AV-88 Nearby Display Icons* Icons of facilities can be displayed. Facilities to be displayed can be selected from the variety selections. AV-88 Save Current Location* Current vehicle location can be registered in Address Book. AV-88 Adjust Current Location* Current location of position marker can be adjusted. Direction of position marker also can be calibrated when heading direction of the vehicle on the display is not matched with the actual direction. AV-88 Auto Re-route On/Off* ON/OFF of Auto Re-route can be switched. AV-89 Avoid Area Setting* A particular area can be avoided when routing. AV-89 Clear Memory* Address Book, Previous destination or Avoid area can be deleted. AV-89 Edit Address Book* Address Book can be edited. AV-90 GPS Information* The GPS data includes longitude, latitude and altitude (distance above sea level) of the present vehicle position, and current date and time for the area in which the vehicle is being driven. Also indicated are the GPS reception conditions and the GPS satellite position. AV-90 Quick Stop Customer Setting* One facility of your selection can be added to your Quick Stop. AV-90 Set Average Speed for Estimated Journey Time* Average vehicle speed can be set to calibrate estimated journey time for the destination. AV-90 Tracking On/Off* Tracking to the present vehicle position can be displayed. AV-91 I J AV L M “VIEW” MODE Select “Birdview™” or “Plan View” icon. ● To open the map screen display with Birdview™, select “Birdview™”. ● To open the map screen display with Plan View, select “Plan View”. SKIA0554E Revision: October 2004 G H *: Not displayed in Easy Mode. 1. F AV-87 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM “HEADING” MODE ● ● To display North up, select “North up”. To display the car heading up, select “Heading up”. SKIA0561E “NEARBY DISPLAY ICONS” MODE ● Select an icon to display on the map screen. SKIA0562E “SAVE CURRENT LOCATION” MODE ● The current vehicle location can be registered in “Address Book”. NOTE: “Address Book” can store 50 items maximum. SKIA0556E “ADJUST CURRENT LOCATION” MODE 1. 2. 3. Move marker to correct location. Select "SET" and then vehicle mark will be located in current position. Select an icon “right” or “left” to calibrate the heading direction. (Arrow marks will rotate corresponding to the calibration key.) SKIA0563E Revision: October 2004 AV-88 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM 4. Select “Set”. Then the vehicle mark will be matched to the arrow mark. A B C SKIA0564E D “AUTO RE-ROUTE” MODE ● ● To activate “AUTO RE-ROUTE” mode, select “On”. To deactivate “AUTO RE-ROUTE” mode, select “Off”. E F G SKIA0558E “AVOID AREA SETTINGS” MODE ● H Areas to avoid can be registered. I J AV SKIA2058E “CLEAR MEMORY” MODE ● L To delete all the stored places in “Address Book”, “Avoid Area” and “Previous Destinations”, select “Yes”. M SKIA3572E Revision: October 2004 AV-89 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM “EDIT ADDRESS BOOK” MODE ● Edit the items registered in Address Book. SKIA3511E “GPS INFORMATION” MODE ● Latitude, longitude, altitude, astrometric state, and satellite location are displayed as GPS information. NOTE: Altitude is displayed only in three-dimensional status. SKIA0555E “QUICK STOP CUSTOMER SETTING” MODE ● Select a category for the “Quick Stop” menu. NOTE: This only replaces the fifth position on the "Quick Stop" menu when "ROUTE" is pressed. SKIA5820E “SET AVERAGE SPEED” MODE ● ● Set the average vehicle speed to calibrate the estimated journey time for the destination. Set three items: “Freeway”, “Main Roads”, and “Ordinary Roads”. SKIA0565E Revision: October 2004 AV-90 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM “TRACKING” MODE A To delete the tracking marks on the map, select “Off”. ● To leave the tracking marks on the map, select “On”. NOTE: When a trail display is turned OFF, trail data is erased from the memory. ● B C SKIA0559E GUIDANCE VOLUME Description D E Following guidance volume settings can be changed. F G H SKIA4497E Activation/Deactivation Setting ● I The voice prompt can be turned on/off by pressing the “Guidance Volume” button. Voice Volume Setting ● Volume of the voice can be controlled by tilting the joystick to left/right. J DISPLAY WITH PUSHED “TRIP” BUTTON ● ● When the “TRIP” button is pushed, the following items will display on the screen. Warning message (if there are any) →TRIP 1→TRIP 2→FUEL ECONOMY→MAINTENANCE→OFF. Display items Trip 1 or Trip 2 Fuel Economy Maintenance Revision: October 2004 Display/Setting contents Elapsed Time Displays driving time with a range of 0000:00:00 to 9999:59:59. Driving Distance [(km) or (miles)] Displays driving distance with a range of 00000.0 to 99999.9. Average speed [(km/h) or (MPH)] Displays average speed with a range of 000.0 to 999.9. Average Fuel Economy [(MPG) or (l/100km)] Displays fuel economy with ignition switch ON, average fuel economy each 30 seconds. Distance to Empty [(km) or (miles)] Displays possible driving distance with remaining fuel. Fuel Economy [(MPG) or (l/100km)] Displays fuel economy each approx. 100 ms. Engine oil Maintenance intervals of engine oil and setting of oil change cycle. Tire rotation Maintenance intervals of tire and setting of tire replacement cycle. Tire pressure Tire pressure displayed as tire pressure information. AV-91 Reference page AV L M AV-92 AV-92 AV-92 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM TRIP 1 OR TRIP 2 ● ● Elapsed time, Driving distance and Average speed are displayed as Trip 1 information or Trip 2 information. The way to reset is by pushing the “Reset” switch or by pushing and holding “TRIP” button more than 1.5 seconds. SKIA4526E FUEL ECONOMY ● ● Average Fuel Economy, Distance to Empty, Fuel Economy are displayed as Fuel Economy information. The way to reset is by pushing the “Reset” switch or by pushing and holding “TRIP” button more than 1.5 seconds. SKIA4527E MAINTENANCE Engine Oil, Tire Rotation and Tire pressure are displayed as Maintenance information. SKIA4528E ENGINE OIL OR TIRE ROTATION Possible to set up interval of engine oil and tire rotation by tilting joystick right and left. SKIA4650E Revision: October 2004 AV-92 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM TIRE PRESSURE ● ● ● ● ● A Pressure indication in psi on the screen indicates that the pressure is being measured. After a few trips, the pressures for all four tires will be displayed. The order of tire pressure figures displayed on the screen does not correspond with the actual order of tire position. Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle's traveling condition and the temperature. In case of low tire pressure, the low tire pressure warning light will come on and/or a warning is displayed on the screen. FLAT TIRE – very low tire pressure. B C SKIA4651E D NOTE: ● ● In a case of FLAT TIRE pressure, interrupt screen is not shown on the display. On the screen of TIRE PRESSURE, "FLAT TIRE Check All tire" is displayed. E WARNING INDICATIONS F Warning signal is received from BCM through CAN communication line. G H SKIA5609E Warning indicators Warning lamps in instrument panel Warning detection and cancel conditions Detection condition DOOR OPEN Door Cancel condition Detection condition LIFTGATE OPEN Door Cancel condition Vehicle is running [approx. 5 km/h (3 MPH) or faster] and door ajar of any of the doors is detected. Cases of malfunction L Liftgate and/or glass hatch is open Vehicle is stopped and both liftgate and glass hatch lock. CAN Communication System Description EKS00AP6 Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Revision: October 2004 AV-93 J AV Door is open Vehicle is stopped and all the doors lock. Vehicle is running [approx. 5 km/h (3 MPH) or faster] and liftgate ajar and/or glass hatch ajar is detected. I 2005 Titan M NAVIGATION SYSTEM Component Parts Location EKS00AP7 WKIA3601E Revision: October 2004 AV-94 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Schematic EKS00AP8 A B C D E F G H I J AV L M WKWA2345E Revision: October 2004 AV-95 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Wiring Diagram — NAVI — EKS00AP9 WKWA2346E Revision: October 2004 AV-96 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM A B C D E F G H I J AV L M WKWA2347E Revision: October 2004 AV-97 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM WKWA2348E Revision: October 2004 AV-98 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM A B C D E F G H I J AV L M WKWA2349E Revision: October 2004 AV-99 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM WKWA2350E Revision: October 2004 AV-100 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM A B C D E F G H I J AV L M WKWA2351E Revision: October 2004 AV-101 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM WKWA3352E Revision: October 2004 AV-102 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Schematic EKS00APA A B C D E F G H I J AV L M WKWA0813E Revision: October 2004 AV-103 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Wiring Diagram — COMM — EKS00APB WKWA2353E Revision: October 2004 AV-104 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM A B C D E F G H I J AV L M WKWA2354E Revision: October 2004 AV-105 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM WKWA2355E Revision: October 2004 AV-106 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Terminals and Reference Value for NAVI Control Unit EKS00APC A Terminal No. (Wire color) Item Signal input/ output Condition Ignition switch Operation ON – Voltage (Approx.) Example of symptom 0V – + – 1 (B) Ground Ground Ground Battery power Input OFF – Battery voltage System does not work properly. 4 (B) Ground Ground – ON – 0V – 6 (O) Ground ACC signal Input ACC – Battery voltage System does not work properly. 2 (Y) 3 (Y) – B C D E Only route guide and operation guide are not heard. Press the “GUIDE/ VOICE” button. 8 (W) Voice guide signal 9 – Shield ground – – – – Audio noise interference. 14 – Shield ground – – – – Video display interference. ON Select “Display Diagnosis (NAVI)” of CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT function. 7 (B) Output ON SKIA0171J 15 (B) 17 RGB signal (B: blue) Output F G H I NAVI screen looks yellowish. J SKIA4979E AV 16 (BR) 14 RGB synchronizing signal Output ON Press the “MAP” button. NAVI screen is rolling. L SKIA0164E 17 18 (R/L) Shield ground – 17 RGB signal (R: red) – Output – – ON Select “Display Diagnosis (NAVI)” of CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT function. Video display interference. – NAVI screen looks bluish. SKIA4977E 21 (R/W) 17 RGB signal (G: green) Output ON Select “Display Diagnosis (NAVI)” of CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT function. NAVI screen looks reddish. SKIA4978E Revision: October 2004 AV-107 2005 Titan M NAVIGATION SYSTEM Terminal No. (Wire color) Condition Item + 25 (R/L) 26 (G/R) 27 (G/W) 28 (W/R) – 30 (B) Ground Ground Ground Illumination signal Ignition signal Reverse signal Vehicle speed signal (8-pulse) Signal input/ output Input Input Input Input Ignition switch Operation Voltage (Approx.) Lighting switch in 1st position Battery voltage Lighting switch is OFF 3V or less Example of symptom Display unit illumination does not change when lighting switch is turned to 1st position.- ON ON ON ON – Battery voltage Selector lever in R position Battery voltage Selector lever not in R position 0V Navigation current location mark does not indicate the correct position. The navigation current-location mark moves strangely when the vehicle is moving backwards. Navigation current location mark does not indicate the correct position. When vehicle speed is approx. 40 km/h (25 MPH) PKIA1935E 43 – Shield ground – – – 44 (L) Ground Communication signal (+) Input/ output ON – – – System does not work properly. SKIA0175E 45 (P) Ground Communication signal (–) Input/ output ON System does not work properly. – SKIA0176E 66 67 GPS signal Revision: October 2004 Input ON Connector is not connected. AV-108 5V Navigation system GPS correction is not possible. 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control Unit EKS00APD A Terminal No. (Wire color) Item Signal input/ output Condition Ignition switch Operation Voltage (Approx.) Example of symptom B System does not work properly. C + – 1 (Y) Ground Battery Power Input OFF – Battery voltage 2 (L/W) Ground Power Supply (Inverter) Output ON – 9V 3 (B) Ground Ground – ON – 0V 4 (L/R) Ground Power Supply (Signal) Output ON – 9V 5 (P) Ground (Inverter) Ground – ON – 0V – Input Selector lever in R position Battery voltage Ground Reverse signal Selector lever not in R position 0V Impossible to gain direction of vehicle. 6 (GR) Screen is not shown. – D Screen is not shown. E ON F G 7 (P/L) Ground (Signal) Ground – ON – 0V – 10 (O) Ground ACC signal Input ACC – Battery voltage System does not work properly. H 12 (G/R) Ground Ignition signal Input ON – Battery voltage Vehicle information setting is not possible. I 14 (R/L) Ground Illumination signal Input OFF Lighting switch position 1st or 2nd Battery voltage Lighting switch position OFF 0V Display unit does not change when lighting switch is turned to 1st position. J AV 16 (W/R) Ground Vehicle speed signal (8–pulse) Input ON When vehicle speed is approx. 40 km/h (25 MPH) Value of vehicle speed information is not accurately displayed. L M SKIA0168E 25 (L) – CAN-H – – – – – 26 (P) – CAN-L – – – – – 28 (V) Ground Communication signal (+) Input/ Output ON – System does not work properly. SKIA0175E 29 – Revision: October 2004 Shield ground – – – AV-109 – – 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Terminal No. (Wire color) Condition Item + – 30 (LG) Ground Communication signal (–) Signal input/ output Input/ output Ignition switch Operation ON – Voltage (Approx.) Example of symptom System does not work properly. SKIA0176E Ground Communication signal (+) 33 – Shield ground – – – 34 (P) Ground Communication signal (–) Input/ output ON – 32 (L) Input/ output ON System does not work properly. – SKIA0175E – – System does not work properly. SKIA0176E 36 (B/W) 37 Display Communication signal (DCU-DSP) Output ON Though a screen is displayed, it is impossible to adjust brightness. Press the “TRIP” button. SKIA4364E 37 38 (L) – Shield ground 37 Display Communication signal (DSP-DCU) – Input – ON – – – Though a screen is displayed, it is impossible to adjust brightness. Press the “TRIP” button. SKIA4363E 39 – Shield ground – – – 40 (O/L) Ground Audio TX Communication signal Output ON Operate audio volume. – – Audio does not operate properly. SKIA4402E Revision: October 2004 AV-110 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Terminal No. (Wire color) Condition Item + 41 – Shield ground – Signal input/ output – Ignition switch Operation – – A Voltage (Approx.) Example of symptom B – – C 42 (W/L) Ground Audio RX communication signal Input ON Operate audio volume. Audio does not operate properly. SKIA4403E 43 (W) 41 RGB synchronizing signal Input ON Press the “MAP” button. E NAVI screen is rolling. 44 (R/L) 45 RGB signal (R: red) Input ON F G SKIA0164E Select “Display Diagnosis (NAVI)” of CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT function. D H NAVI screen looks bluish. I SKIA4977E 45 46 (R/W) Shield ground – 45 RGB signal (G: green) – Input – – ON Select “Display Diagnosis (NAVI)” of CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT function. – – NAVI screen looks reddish. J AV L SKIA4978E 47 48 (B) Shield ground – 45 RGB signal (B: blue) – – – – – M Input ON Select “Display Diagnosis (NAVI)” of CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT function. NAVI screen looks yellowish. SKIA4979E 49 50 (R/L) Shield ground – 47 RGB signal (R: red) – Output – – ON Select “Display Diagnosis (DCU)” of CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT function. – – NAVI screen looks bluish. SKIA4980E Revision: October 2004 AV-111 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Terminal No. (Wire color) Condition Item + – 51 (B) 49 RGB area (YS) signal Signal input/ output Output Ignition switch Operation ON Press the“TRIP” button. Voltage (Approx.) Example of symptom RGB screen is not shown. SKIA0162E 52 (R/W) 47 RGB signal (G: green) Output ON Select “Display Diagnosis (DCU)” of CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT function. Screen looks reddish. SKIA4981E 53 (W) 49 Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal Input ON Operating screen for audio and A/C is not displayed when showing NAVI screen. – SKIA4983E 54 (B) 47 RGB signal (B: blue) Output ON Select “Display Diagnosis (DCU)” of CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT function. Screen looks yellowish. SKIA4982E 55 (R) 49 Horizontal synchronizing (HP) signal Input ON Operating screen for audio and A/C is not displayed when showing NAVI screen. – SKIA4983E 56 (G) 49 RGB synchronizing signal Output ON Press the “TRIP” button. NAVI screen is rolling. SKIA0164E Revision: October 2004 AV-112 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Terminals and Reference Value for Display Unit EKS00APE A Terminal No. (Wire color) Item Signal input/ output Condition Ignition switch Operation ON – Voltage (Approx.) Example of symptom 0V – + – 1 (B) Ground Ground 2 (L/W) Ground Power supply (Inverter) Input ON – 9V Screen is not shown. 3 (L/R) Ground Power supply (Signal) Input ON – 9V Screen is not shown. ON Select “Display Diagnosis (DCU)” of CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT function. 6 (R/W) 7 RGB signal (G: green) – Input B C D E Screen looks reddish. F SKIA4981E 7 8 (R) – Shield ground 21 Horizontal synchronizing (HP) signal – Output – ON – – – Operating screen for audio and A/C is not displayed when showing NAVI screen. – G H I SKIA4983E 9 (B) 21 RGB area (YS) signal Input ON Operating screen for audio and A/C is not displayed when showing NAVI screen. Press the “TRIP” button. J AV SKIA0162E L 11 (B/W) 23 Display communication signal (DCU-DSP) Input ON Though a screen is displayed, it is impossible to adjust brightness. – SKIA4364E 13 (P) Ground (Inverter) Ground – ON – 0V – 14 (P/L) Ground (Signal) Ground – ON – 0V – ON Select “Display Diagnosis (DCU)” of CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT function. 17 (R/L) 7 RGB signal (R: red) Input Screen looks bluish. SKIA4980E Revision: October 2004 AV-113 2005 Titan M NAVIGATION SYSTEM Terminal No. (Wire color) Condition Item + 18 (B) – 7 RGB signal (B: blue) Signal input/ output Input Ignition switch Operation ON Select “Display Diagnosis (DCU)” of CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT function. Voltage (Approx.) Example of symptom Screen looks yellowish. SKIA4982E 19 (G) 21 RGB synchronizing signal Input ON Press the “TRIP” button. NAVI screen is rolling. SKIA0164E 20 (W) 21 Vertical synchronizing (VP) signal Output ON Operating screen for audio and A/C is not displayed when showing NAVI screen. – SKIA4983E 21 22 (L) – Shield ground 23 Display communication signal (DSP-DCU) – Output – ON – – – Though a screen is displayed, it is impossible to adjust brightness. – SKIA4363E 23 – Revision: October 2004 Shield ground – – – AV-114 – – 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Terminals and Reference Value for AV Switch EKS00APF A Terminal No. (Wire color) Item + – 1 (Y) Ground 2 (V) 3 (R/L) 4 (BR) 5 (B) Ground Ground Ground Ground Battery power ACC signal Illumination signal Signal input/ output Input Input Condition Ignition switch Operation OFF – ACC – Lighting switch is ON (position 1). Input Illumination control signal Input Ground – OFF ON ON Voltage (Approx.) Example of symptom Battery voltage System does not work properly. Battery voltage System does not work properly. Battery voltage Turn lighting switch OFF. 3.0V or less Illumination control switch is operated by lighting switch in 1st position. Changes between 0 and 12V – 0V AV switch illumination does not come on when lighting switch is ON (position 1). AV switch illumination cannot be controlled. B C D E F – G 6 (V) Ground Communication signal (+) Input/ output ON System does not work properly. – H SKIA0175E 7 – Shield ground – – – – – I J 8 (LG) Ground Communication signal (-) Input/ output ON System does not work properly. – AV SKIA0176E 12 (R) Ground Remote control A Input ON Press MODE switch 0V Press SEEK UP switch 0.75V Press VOL UP switch 2V Except for above 5V L Steering wheel audio controls do not function. Press POWER switch 13 (G) 14 (L) Ground – Remote control B Remote control ground Revision: October 2004 Input – ON – Press SEEK DOWN switch 0.75V Press VOL DOWN switch 2V Except for above 5V – – AV-115 Steering wheel audio controls do not function. Steering wheel audio controls do not function. 2005 Titan M NAVIGATION SYSTEM Terminals and Reference Value for BCM EKS00APG Measuring condition Terminal No. Wire color 2 SB Signal name Combination switch input 5 Ignition switch ON Operation or condition Reference value (Approx.) Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E 3 G/Y Combination switch input 4 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E 4 Y Combination switch input 3 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E 5 G/B Combination switch input 2 6 V Combination switch input 1 11 O Ignition switch (ACC) 32 R/G ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E Combination switch output 5 ACC ON — Battery voltage Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E 33 R/Y Combination switch output 4 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E 34 L Combination switch output 3 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E Revision: October 2004 AV-116 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Measuring condition Terminal No. Wire color 35 O/B Combination switch output 2 36 R/W Combination switch output 1 Signal name Ignition switch Operation or condition Reference value (Approx.) A B ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 C SKIA5292E 38 W/L Ignition switch (ON) ON — Battery voltage 39 L CAN-H — — — 40 P CAN-L — — — 57 Y/R Battery power supply OFF — Battery voltage 67 B Ground ON — 0V 70 W/B Battery power supply (fusible link) OFF — Battery voltage D E F G H I J AV L M Revision: October 2004 AV-117 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM On Board Self-Diagnosis Function EKS00APH DESCRIPTION Diagnosis function consists of the self-diagnosis mode performed automatically and the CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT mode operated manually. Self-diagnosis mode checks for connections between the units constituting this system, analyzes each individual unit at the same time, and displays the results on the LCD screen. CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT mode is used to perform trouble diagnosis that require operation and judgment by an operator (trouble that cannot be automatically judged by the system), to check/change the set value, and to display the History of Errors of the navigation system. ● ● ● DIAGNOSIS ITEM Mode Description Self-diagnosis (DCU) Display control unit diagnosis. ● NAVI Control unit diagnosis (DVD-ROM drive) will not be diagnosed when no map DVD-ROM is in it. ● Analyzes connection between the NAVI control unit and the GPS antenna and operation of each unit. Self-diagnosis (NAVI) On display control unit mode, color tone and shading of the screen can be checked by the display of a color bar and a gray scale. Display diagnosis On display control unit mode, analyzes the following vehicle signals: VehiVehicle signals cle speed signal, light signalNOTE , ignition switch signal, and reverse signal. Auto Climate Control A/C self-diagnosis of A/C system. CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT Display diagnosis On NAVI C/U mode, color tone and shading of the screen can be checked by the display of a color bar and a gray scale. Vehicle signals On NAVI C/U mode, analyzes the following vehicle signals: Vehicle speed signal, light signal, ignition switch signal, and reverse signal. History of Errors Diagnosis results previously stored in the memory (before turning ignition switch ON) are displayed in this mode. Time and location when/where the errors occurred are also displayed. Navigation Navigation Display Longitude & Latitude Display the map. Use the joystick to adjust position. Longitude and latitude will be displayed. Speed Calibration Under ordinary conditions, the navigation system distance measuring function will automatically compensate for minute decreases in wheel and tire diameter caused by tire wear or low-pressure. Speed calibration immediately restores system accuracy in cases such as when distance calibration is needed because of the use of tire chains in inclement weather. Angle adjustment Corrects difference between actual turning angle of a vehicle and turning angle of the car mark on the display. Initialize Location This mode is for initializing the current location. Use when the vehicle is transported a long distance on a trailer, etc. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR Display status of CAN communication. NOTE: Make the status that is set by D/N function be shown. Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU) EKS00API OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. Start the engine. Turn the audio system off. Revision: October 2004 AV-118 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM 3. While pressing the “PAUSE/MUTE” button, turn the volume control dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more. (When the self-diagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard.) ● Shifting from current screen to previous screen is performed by pressing “PREV” button. A B C D E F G WKIA1504E 4. The initial self-diagnosis screen will be shown, and items “SelfDiagnosis (DCU)”, “Self-Diagnosis (NAVI)”, “Confirmation/ Adjustment” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR” will become selective. H I J SKIA4207E 5. Perform self-diagnosis by selecting the “Self-diagnosis”. ● Self-diagnosis subdivision screen will be shown and the operation enters the self-diagnosis mode. ● A bar graph shown below the self-diagnosis subdivision screen indicates progress of the diagnosis. AV L M SKIA4208E 6. When the self-diagnosis completes, optional part confirmation screen will be shown. ● When connection of an optional part is judged error, a screen to check if the optional part is actually fitted on the vehicle or not will be shown. When fitted, select the switch of the part on the screen and press “End”. Then the “SELF DIAGNOSIS” screen will be shown. ● When the optional part is connected normally, the switch for the part will not appear on the screen. SKIA4209E Revision: October 2004 AV-119 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM 7. On the “SELF DIAGNOSIS” screen, each unit name will be colored according to the diagnosis result, as follows. Green Yellow Red Gray If several malfunctions are present in a unit, color of its switch on the screen will be either red, yellow, or gray, determined by the malfunction of the highest priority. ● 8. : Not malfunctioning. : Cannot be judged by self-diagnosis results. : Unit is malfunctioning. : Diagnosis has not been done. WKIA1189E Select a switch on the “SELF DIAGNOSIS” screen and comments for the diagnosis results will be shown. ● When the switch is green, the following comment will be shown. “Self-diagnosis was successful. Further diagnosis and adjustments are recommended. Follow the “confirmation/ adjustment” menu or refer to the service manual.” ● When the switch is yellow, the following comment will be shown. “Connection to the following unit is abnormal. See the service manual for further details”. ● When the switch is red, the following comment will be shown. “DCU is abnormal”. SKIA4211E SELF–DIAGNOSIS RESULT Quick reference table 1. 2. 3. Select a malfunctioning diagnosis No. in the diagnosis result quick reference table. Find estimated malfunctioning system in the diagnosis No. table and perform check by referring to AV104, "Wiring Diagram — COMM —" . Turn the ignition switch OFF and perform self-diagnosis again. Screen switch Switch color DCU* Red × × Gray x DISPLAY Audio unit Navigation GPS antenna Diagnosis No. 1 x 2 x × 3 × × 4 *: DCU = Display control unit CAUTION: ● When AV switch has a malfunction, you cannot start. Refer to AV-162, "Unable to Operate All of AV Switches (Unable to Start Self-Diagnosis)" . ● When display unit has a malfunction, you cannot start. Refer to AV-160, "Screen is Not Shown" . Self-Diagnosis Codes Diagnosis No. Possible cause Reference page 1 Display control unit malfunction Refer to AV-175 . 2 Display communication line between display control unit and display unit Refer to AV-145 . 3 Audio unit power supply and ground circuit Audio communication line between display control unit and audio unit Refer to AV-142 . 4 NAVI control unit power supply and ground circuit AV communication line between display control unit and NAVI control unit Refer to AV-142 . Revision: October 2004 AV-120 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Self-Diagnosis Mode (NAVI) EKS00APJ OPERATION PROCEDURE A 1. 2. 3. B Start the engine. Turn the audio system off. While pressing the “PAUSE/MUTE” button, turn the volume control dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more. (When the self-diagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard.) ● Shifting from current screen to previous screen is performed by pressing “PREV” button. C D E F G H WKIA1504E 4. I The initial self-diagnosis screen will be shown, and items “SelfDiagnosis (DCU)”, “Self-Diagnosis (NAVI)”, “Confirmation/ Adjustment” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR” will become selective. J AV L SKIA4207E 5. Perform self-diagnosis by selecting the “Self-diagnosis (NAVI)”. ● Self-diagnosis subdivision screen will be shown and the operation enters the self-diagnosis mode. ● A bar graph will be shown on the screen to indicate progress of the diagnosis. M SKIA4212E Revision: October 2004 AV-121 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM 6. On the “SELF DIAGNOSIS” screen, each unit name will be colored according to the diagnosis result, as follows. Green Yellow Red Gray ● 7. : Not malfunctioning. : Cannot be judged by self-diagnosis results. : Unit is malfunctioning. : Diagnosis has not been done. If several malfunctions are present in a unit, color of its switch on the screen will be either red, yellow, or gray, determined by the malfunction of the highest priority. SKIA4214E Select a switch on the “SELF DIAGNOSIS” screen and comments for the diagnosis results will be shown. ● When the switch is green, the following comment will be shown. “Self-diagnosis was successful. Further diagnosis and adjustments are recommended. Follow the “Confirmation and Adjustments” menu or refer to the service manual.” ● When the switch is yellow, the following comment will be shown. “Connection to the following unit is abnormal. See the service manual for further details”. ● When the switch is red, the following comment will be shown. SKIA4211E “Center Control Unit is abnormal”. ● When the switch is gray, the following comment will be shown. “Self-diagnosis for DVD-ROM DRIVER of NAVI was not conducted because no DVD-ROM was available.” SELF–DIAGNOSIS RESULT Quick reference table 1. 2. 3. Select an malfunctioning diagnosis No. in the diagnosis result quick reference table. Find estimated malfunctioning system in the diagnosis No. table and perform check by referring to AV104, "Wiring Diagram — COMM —" . Turn the ignition switch OFF and perform self-diagnosis again. Screen switch Diagnosis No. Switch color Center control unit* Red × 1 Gray × 2 × 3 × 4 Yellow × GPS antenna × 5 *: Center Control unit = NAVI control unit CAUTION: ● When AV switch has a malfunction, you cannot start. Refer to AV-162, "Unable to Operate All of AV Switches (Unable to Start Self-Diagnosis)" . ● When display unit has a malfunction, you cannot start. Refer to AV-160, "Screen is Not Shown" . Self-diagnosis codes Diagnosis No. Possible cause Reference page 1 NAVI control unit malfunction. Refer to AV-174 2 No map DVD-ROM is inserted in the NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-148 Revision: October 2004 AV-122 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Diagnosis No. Possible cause Reference page A When “DVD-ROM error. Please check disc.” is shown. 1. Eject map DVD-ROM and check if it is compatible with the system. 3 2. Check ejected DVD-ROM for dirt, damage, and warpage. 3. If no error is found, insert a known good map DVD-ROM of the same type and perform self-diagnosis again. If same result is shown, the NAVI control unit is malfunctioning. If result is normal, the map DVD-ROM is malfunctioning. 4 If “Error found in DVD-ROM or DVD-ROM driver in control unit. Please perform diagnosis in accordance with service manual” is shown, carry out same inspection as diagnosis No. 3. Refer to AV-148 B C Refer to AV-148 D GPS antenna system. 1. Visually check for a broken wire in the GPS antenna coaxial cable. 5 2. Disconnect GPS antenna connector, and make sure approximately 5V is supplied from the NAVI control unit. If not, the NAVI control unit is malfunctioning. If 5V is supplied, replace the GPS antenna. If the connection is still malfunction after the replacement of the GPS antenna, the NAVI control unit is malfunctioning. Refer to AV-149 E F G H I J AV L M Revision: October 2004 AV-123 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Confirmation/Adjustment Mode EKS00APK OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. Start the engine. Turn the audio system off. While pressing the “PAUSE/MUTE” button, turn the volume control dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more. (When the self-diagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard.) ● Shifting from current screen to previous screen is performed by pressing “PREV” button. WKIA1504E 4. The initial self-diagnosis screen will be shown, and items “SelfDiagnosis (DCU)”, “Self-Diagnosis (NAVI)”, “Confirmation/ Adjustment” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR” will become selective. SKIA4207E 5. 6. 7. When “Confirmation/Adjustment” is selected on the initial selfdiagnosis screen, the operation will enter the CONFIRMATION/ ADJUSTMENT mode. In this mode, check and adjustment of each item will become possible. The initial trouble diagnosis screen will be shown, and items “Display Diagnosis”, “Vehicle Signals”, “Auto Climate Control” and “Navigation” will become selective. Select each switch on “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” screen to display the relevant diagnosis screen. SKIA4220E Revision: October 2004 AV-124 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS A B C D E F LKIA0216E ● When RGB signal error occurred in the RGB system, tone of the color bar will change as follows. R (red) signal error G (green) signal error B (blue) signal error ● G : Screen looks bluish : Screen looks reddish : Screen looks yellowish H When the color of the screen looks unusual, refer to AV-154, "Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Look Bluish)" , AV-155, "Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Look Reddish)" and AV156, "Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Look Yellowish)" . I VEHICLE SIGNALS ● J A comparison check can be made of each actual vehicle signal and the signals recognized by the system. CAUTION: In case of confirming light signal, set D/N mode to ON/OFF of lighting switch (normal setting). ● OFF: D (Day mode) ● ON: N (Night mode) Unless above setting, light signal (ON/OFF) may not be accurately displayed. AV L LKIA0217E Diagnosis item Vehicle speed Display ON Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH) OFF Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH) – Light IGN Reverse Remarks Changes in indication may be delayed by approx. 1.5 seconds. This is normal. Ignition switch in ACC position ON Lighting switch ON OFF Lighting switch OFF ON Ignition switch ON OFF Ignition switch ACC ON Selector lever in R position OFF Selector lever in other than R position – Revision: October 2004 Condition – – Changes in indication may be delayed by approx. 1.5 seconds. This is normal. Ignition switch in ACC position AV-125 2005 Titan M NAVIGATION SYSTEM ● ● ● ● If vehicle speed is NG, refer to AV-139, "Vehicle Speed Signal Check for Display Control Unit" . If light is NG, refer to AV-140, "Illumination Signal Check for Display Control Unit" . If IGN is NG, refer to AV-141, "Ignition Signal Check for Display Control Unit" . If reverse is NG, refer to AV-141, "Reverse Signal Check for Display Control Unit" . NAVIGATION 1. 2. The initial confirmation/adjustment screen will be shown, and items “Display Diagnosis”, “Vehicle Signals”, “History of Errors” and “Navigation” will become selective. Select each switch on “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” screen to display the relevant diagnosis screen. SKIA4226E DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS SKIA0362E ● When RGB signal error occurred in the RGB system, tone of the color bar will change as follows. R (red) signal error G (green) signal error B (blue) signal error ● : Screen looks bluish : Screen looks reddish : Screen looks yellowish When the color of the screen looks unusual, refer to AV-151, "Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (Only NAVI Screen Looks Bluish)" , AV-152, "Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (Only NAVI Screen Looks Reddish)" and AV-156, "Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Look Yellowish)" . Revision: October 2004 AV-126 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM VEHICLE SIGNALS ● A A comparison check can be made of each actual vehicle signal and the signals recognized by the system. CAUTION: In case of confirming light signal, set D/N mode to ON/OFF of light switch (normal setting). ● OFF: D (Day mode) ● ON: N (Night mode) Unless mode is in above setting, light signal (ON/OFF) may not be accurately displayed. B C LKIA0217E Diagnosis item Vehicle speed Display ON Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH) OFF Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH) – Light IGN Reverse ● ● ● E Remarks Changes in indication may be delayed by approx. 1.5 seconds. This is normal. Ignition switch in ACC position ON Lighting switch ON OFF Lighting switch OFF ON Ignition switch ON OFF Ignition switch ACC ON Selector lever in R position OFF Selector lever in other than R position – ● Condition D F – G – H Changes in indication may be delayed by approx. 1.5 seconds. This is normal. Ignition switch in ACC position I If vehicle speed is NG, refer to AV-138, "Vehicle Speed Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit" . If light is NG, refer to AV-140, "Illumination Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit" . If IGN is NG, refer to AV-140, "Ignition Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit" . If reverse is NG, refer to AV-141, "Reverse Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit" . J HISTORY OF ERRORS AV L M SKIA0366E DIAGNOSIS BY HISTORY OF ERRORS The “Self-diagnosis” results indicate whether an error occurred during the period from when the ignition switch is turned to ON until “Self-diagnosis” is completed. Revision: October 2004 AV-127 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM If an error occurred before the ignition switch was turned to ON and does not occur again until the “Self-diagnosis” is completed, the diagnosis result will be judged normal. Therefore, those errors in the past which cannot be found by the “Self-diagnosis” must be found by diagnosing the “History of Errors”. The History of Errors displays the time and place of the most recent occurrence of that error. However, take note of the following points. ● Correct time of the error occurrence may not be displayed when the GPS antenna substrate within the NAVI control unit has malfunctioned. ● Place of the error occurrence is represented by the position of the current-location mark at the time when the error occurred. If the current-location mark has deviated from the correct position, then the place of the error occurrence may be located correctly. ● The maximum number of occurrences which can be stored is 50. For the 51st and later occurrences, the displayed number remains 50. When a reproducible malfunction occurred but its cause cannot be identified because several errors are present, record the item, number and place (longitude/latitude) of error occurrence (or delete the History of Errors), then turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON to reproduce the malfunction. Check the History of Errors to find the items which show an increased number of occurrences, and diagnose the item. Possible causes Error item Example of symptom Action/symptom Communications malfunction between NAVI control unit and internal gyro. Gyro sensor disconnected ● Perform self-diagnosis. ● When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference. Communication error between NAVI control unit and internal GPS substrate. GPS disconnected ● Perform self-diagnosis. ● When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference. ● Navigation location detection performance has deteriorated. (Angular velocity cannot be detected.) ● Navigation location detection performance has deteriorated. (Location correction using GPS is not performed.) ● GPS receiving status remains gray. ● During self-diagnosis, GPS diagnosis is not performed. ● Navigation location detection performance has deteriorated. (Location correction using GPS is not performed.) ● GPS receiving status remains gray. ● Navigation location detection performance has deteriorated. (Location correction using GPS is not performed.) ● GPS receiving status remains gray. ● Location detection accuracy of the navigation system will deteriorate, depending on the error area in the memory, because GPS cannot make correct positioning. (Location correction using GPS is not performed.) Malfunctioning transmission wires to NAVI control unit and internal GPS substrate. GPS transmission cable malfunction ● Perform self-diagnosis. ● When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference. Malfunctioning receiving wires to NAVI control unit and internal GPS substrate. GPS input line connection error ● Perform self-diagnosis. ● When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference. Oscillating frequency of the GPS substrate frequency synchronizing oscillation circuit exceeded (or below) the specification GPS TCX0 over GPS TCX0 under ● Perform self-diagnosis. ● When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference, or the control unit may have been subjected to excessively high or low temperatures. Contents of ROM (or RAM) in GPS substrate are malfunctioning. GPS ROM malfunction GPS RAM malfunction ● Perform self-diagnosis. ● When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference. Revision: October 2004 AV-128 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Possible causes Error item Example of symptom A Action/symptom Clock IC in GPS substrate is malfunctioning. ● Perform self-diagnosis. ● When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference. GPS RTC malfunction ● Correct time may not be displayed. ● After the power is turned on, the system always takes some time until GPS positioning becomes possible. (The GPS receiver starts positioning without re-collecting the whole satellite information when it judged the data stored in the receiver is correct.) ● Malfunctioning connection between GPS substrate in NAVI control unit and GPS antenna. GPS antenna disconnected ● Perform self-diagnosis. ● When connection between NAVI control unit and GPS antenna is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by impact or vibration. The power voltage supplied to the GPS circuit board has decreased. Low voltage of GPS ● Perform self-diagnosis. ● When connection between NAVI control unit and GPS antenna is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by impact or vibration. ● Correct time of error occurrence may not be stored in the ″History of Errors″. Navigation location detection performance has deteriorated. (Location correction using GPS is not performed.) ● GPS receiving status remains gray. ● Navigation location detection performance has deteriorated. (Location correction using GPS is not performed.) ● ● The map of a particular location cannot be displayed. ● Specific guidance information cannot be displayed. Is map DVD-ROM damaged, warped, or dirty? – If damaged or warped, the map DVD-ROM is malfunctioning. – If dirty, wipe the DVD-ROM clean with a soft cloth. ● Map display is slow. ● Perform self-diagnosis. ● Guidance information display is slow. When NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the symptom is judged intermittent, caused by vibration. ● System has been affected by vibration. 2. G I J AV NAVIGATION 1. E H ● ● D GPS receiving status remains gray. - Dedicated map DVD-ROM is in the system, but the data cannot be read. C F Malfunctioning NAVI control unit. DVD-ROM Malfunction DVD-ROM Read error DVD-ROM Response Error B The navigation screen will be shown, and items “Display Longitude & Latitude”, “Speed Calibration”, “Angle Adjustment” and “Initialize Location” will become selective. Select each switch on “NAVIGATION” screen to display the relevant diagnosis screen. L M SKIA4576E Revision: October 2004 AV-129 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Display Longitude & Latitude ● Able to confirm/adjust longitude and latitude. SKIA4575E Angle adjustment ● Adjusts turning angle output detected by the gyroscope. SKIA0364E Speed Calibration ● During normal driving, distance error caused by tire wear and tire pressure change is automatically adjusted for by the automatic distance correction function. This function, on the other hand, is for immediate adjustment, in cases such as driving with tire chain fitted on tires. SKIA0365E Initialize Location ● This mode is for initializing the current location. Revision: October 2004 AV-130 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR EKS00APL OPERATION PROCEDURE A 1. 2. 3. B Start the engine. Turn the audio system off. While pressing the “PAUSE/MUTE” button, turn the volume control dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more. (When the self-diagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard.) ● Shifting from current screen to previous screen is performed by pressing “PREV” button. C D E F G H WKIA1504E 4. 5. I The initial self-diagnosis screen will be shown, and items “SelfDiagnosis (DCU)”, “Self-Diagnosis (NAVI)”, “Confirmation/ Adjustment” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR” will become selective. Select “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR”. J AV L SKIA4207E 6. Display status of CAN communication. Item Content M Error counter CAN_COMM OK/NG 0-50 CAN_CIRC_1 OK/UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_2 OK/UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_3 OK/UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_4 OK/UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_5 OK/UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_6 OK/UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_7 OK/UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_8 OK/UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_9 OK/UNKWN 0-50 SKIA4288E ● If the ignition is turned on and UNKWN is shown on the screen, the value of the counter will be up. (MAX50) Revision: October 2004 AV-131 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM ● ● The value of the counter does not change if the ignition changes to OFF. (MAX50) If the counter shows the value of 50 and UNKWN is shown, the value of 50 will not be changed. AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function EKS00APM Refer to AV-43, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function" . Revision: October 2004 AV-132 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for NAVI Control Unit EKS00APN 1. CHECK FUSE A Make sure the following fuses of the NAVI control unit are not blown. B Terminals Connector Power source Fuse No. 2 (Y), 3 (Y) Battery power 31 6 (O) ACC power 4 Terminal (Wire color) B151 C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . E 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect NAVI control unit connector B151. Check voltage between connector terminals and ground as follows. Terminals D F Ignition switch position G (+) Connector (–) Terminal (Wire color) ACC ON Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage H 2 (Y), 3 (Y) B151 OFF Ground 6 (O) I WKIA1372E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness for open between NAVI control unit and fuse. J 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT AV Check continuity between the following NAVI control unit connector terminals and ground. L Terminals Connector Terminal (Wire color) — B151 1 (B), 4 (B) Ground Ignition switch Continuity OFF Yes M OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Repair or replace harness. SKIA4291E Revision: October 2004 AV-133 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display Control Unit EKS00APO 1. CHECK FUSE Make sure the following fuses of the display control unit are not blown. Terminals Connector Power source Fuse No. 1 (Y) Battery power 31 10 (O) ACC power 4 12 (G/R) IGN power 12 Terminal (Wire color) M94 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect display control unit connector M94. Check voltage between connector terminals and ground as follows. Terminals Ignition switch position (+) Connector (–) Terminal (Wire color) 1 (Y) M94 10 (O) OFF ACC ON Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage 0V 0V Battery voltage Ground 12 (G/R) WKIA1670E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness for open between display control unit and fuse. 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between the following display control unit connector terminals and ground. Terminals Connector Terminal (Wire color) — M94 3 (B) Ground Ignition switch Continuity OFF Yes OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Repair or replace harness. SKIA4293E Revision: October 2004 AV-134 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display Unit 1. EKS00APP A CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT FOR DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT Check power supply and ground circuit for display control unit. Refer to AV-134, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display Control Unit" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair malfunctioning part. 2. 1. 2. 3. B C CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR DISPLAY UNIT D Disconnect display unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between display unit harness connector M93 terminals 2 (L/W), 3 (L/R) and ground. E Approx. 9V F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. G WKIA1227E H 3. CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display unit connector M93 and display control unit connector M94. Check continuity between display control unit harness connector M94 terminals 2 (L/W), 4 (L/R) and display unit harness connector M93 terminals 2 (L/W), 3 (L/R). I J Terminals Display control unit Connector Display unit Terminal (Wire color) Connector 2 (L/W) M94 4. Continuity AV Terminal (Wire color) 2 (L/W) M93 4 (L/R) L Yes 3 (L/R) Check continuity between display unit and ground. M Terminals WKIA1229E Display unit Connector Continuity Terminal (Wire color) — 2 (L/W) M93 3 (L/R) Ground No OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . NG >> Repair harness. Revision: October 2004 AV-135 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM 4. 1. 2. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between display unit harness connector M93 terminals 13 (P), 14 (P/L) and ground. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. WKIA2079E 5. 1. 2. CHECK HARNESS Disconnect display control unit connector M94. Check continuity between display unit harness connector M93 terminals 13 (P), 14 (P/L) and display control unit harness connector M94 terminals 5 (P), 7 (P/L). Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . NG >> Repair harness. WKIA2080E 6. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between display unit and ground as follows. 1. Terminals Terminal (Wire color) — Ignition switch Continuity Connector M93 1 (B) Ground OFF Yes OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Repair harness. WKIA1228E Revision: October 2004 AV-136 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for AV Switch EKS00APQ 1. CHECK FUSE A Make sure the following fuses of the AV switch are not blown. B Terminals Connector Power source Fuse No. 1 (Y) Battery power 31 2 (V) ACC power 4 Terminal (Wire color) M98 C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . E 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. D Disconnect AV switch connector. Check voltage between connector terminals and ground as follows. Terminals F Ignition switch position G (+) Connector (–) Terminal (Wire color) ACC ON Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage H 1 (Y) M98 OFF Ground 2 (V) I WKIA1767E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness for open between AV switch and fuse. J 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT AV Check continuity between AV switch and ground as follows. Terminals Connector Terminal (Wire color) — M98 5 (B) Ground Ignition switch Continuity OFF Yes L M OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Repair or replace harness. WKIA1768E Revision: October 2004 AV-137 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Vehicle Speed Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit EKS00APR 1. CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect NAVI control unit connector B152, combination meter connector M24 and display control unit connector M94. Check continuity between NAVI control unit harness connector B152 terminal 28 (W/R) and combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 29 (W/R). Continuity should exist. 4. Check continuity between NAVI control unit harness connector B152 terminal 28 (W/R) and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness. WKIA1769E 2. CHECK 1: VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Connect NAVI control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between NAVI control unit harness connector B152 terminal 28 (W/R) and ground. Approx. 3.5V or more OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-174, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" . SKIA4295E 3. CHECK 2: VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Connect combination meter connector and display control unit connector. Drive vehicle at a constant speed. Check signal between NAVI control unit harness connector B152 terminal 28 (W/R) and ground with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope. 28 (W/R) - Ground : Refer to AV-107, "Terminals and Reference Value for NAVI Control Unit" . OK or NG OK >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-174, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" . NG >> Check combination meter system. Refer to DI-19, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection" . Revision: October 2004 AV-138 SKIA4615E 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Vehicle Speed Signal Check for Display Control Unit EKS00APS 1. CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display control unit connector M94, combination meter connector M24 and NAVI control unit connector B152. Check continuity between display control unit harness connector M94 terminal 16 (W/R) and combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 29 (W/R). Continuity should exist. 4. B C D Check continuity between display control unit harness connector M94 terminal 16 (W/R) and ground. E Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness. WKIA1506E F 2. CHECK 1: VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. G Connect display control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between display control unit harness connector M94 terminal 16 (W/R) and ground. H Approx. 3.5V or more I OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . J SKIA4297E AV 3. CHECK 2: VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. L Connect combination meter connector and NAVI control unit connector. Drive vehicle at a constant speed. Check signal between display control unit harness connector M94 terminal 16 (W/R) and ground with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope. 16 (W/R) - Ground : Refer to AV-109, "Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control Unit" . OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . NG >> Check combination meter system. Refer to DI-19, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection" . Revision: October 2004 M AV-139 SKIA4616E 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Illumination Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit EKS00APT 1. CHECK ILLUMINATION SIGNAL 1. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON. Check voltage between NAVI control unit and ground. Terminals Lighting switch position (+) Connector Terminal (Wire color) (–) B152 25 (R/L) Ground 1st or 2nd position OFF Battery voltage Approx. 0V OK or NG OK >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-174, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" . NG >> Check harness for open or short between NAVI control unit and IPDM E/R. Illumination Signal Check for Display Control Unit SKIA4298E EKS00APU 1. CHECK ILLUMINATION SIGNAL 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between display control unit and ground. Terminals Lighting switch position (+) Terminal (Wire color) (–) Connector M94 14 (R/L) Ground 1st or 2nd position OFF Battery voltage Approx. 0V OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . NG >> Check harness for open or short between display control unit and IPDM E/R. Ignition Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit SKIA4299E EKS00APV 1. CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Disconnect NAVI control unit connector B152. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between NAVI control unit harness connector B152 terminal 26 (G/R) and ground. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-174, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" . NG >> Check harness for open or short between NAVI control unit and fuse. SKIA4300E Revision: October 2004 AV-140 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Ignition Signal Check for Display Control Unit EKS00APW 1. CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL A 1. 2. 3. B Disconnect display control unit connector M94. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between display control unit harness connector M94 terminal 12 (G/R) and ground. C Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . NG >> Check harness for open or short between display control unit and fuse. D E WKIA1230E Reverse Signal Check for NAVI Control Unit EKS00APX 1. CHECK REVERSE LAMP 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Place selector lever into R-position. Do back-up lamps come on? YES or NO YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Check back-up lamp system. Refer to LT-102, "BACK-UP LAMP" . G H 2. CHECK REVERSE SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. I Disconnect NAVI control unit connector B152. Turn ignition switch ON. With the selector lever in R-position, check voltage between NAVI control unit and ground. Terminals F J AV Selector lever position (+) Connector Terminal (Wire color) (–) B152 27 (G/W) Ground R-position Other than Rposition Battery voltage Approx. 0V L SKIA4302E OK or NG OK >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-174, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" . NG >> Check harness for open or short between NAVI control unit and back-up lamp position relay. Reverse Signal Check for Display Control Unit EKS00APY 1. CHECK REVERSE LAMP 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Place selector lever into R-position. Do back-up lamps come on? YES or NO YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Check back-up lamp system. Refer to LT-102, "BACK-UP LAMP" . Revision: October 2004 AV-141 2005 Titan M NAVIGATION SYSTEM 2. CHECK REVERSE SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Disconnect display control unit connector M94. Turn ignition switch ON. With the selector lever in R-position, check voltage between display control unit and ground. Terminals Selector lever position (+) Connector Terminal (Wire color) (–) M94 6 (GR) Ground R-position Other than R-position Battery voltage Approx. 0V SKIA4303E OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . NG >> Check harness for open or short between display control unit and back-up lamp position relay. AV Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and NAVI Control Unit) EKS00APZ 1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check power supply and ground circuit for NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-133, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for NAVI Control Unit" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. 2. CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect NAVI control unit connector B152 and display control unit connector M95. Check continuity between NAVI control unit and display control unit. Terminals NAVI control unit Connector B152 Display control unit Terminal (Wire color) Connector 44 (L) M95 45 (P) 4. Continuity Terminal (Wire color) 32 (L) Yes 34 (P) Check continuity between NAVI control unit and ground. Terminals SKIA4444E NAVI control unit Connector Terminal (Wire color) Continuity — 44 (L) B152 45 (P) Ground No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: October 2004 AV-142 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM 3. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF DCU A 1. Replace NAVI control unit. 2. Connect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Start self-diagnosis of DCU and check the self-diagnosis result. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . Audio Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Audio Unit) B C D EKS00AQ0 1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT E Check power supply and ground circuit for audio unit. Refer to AV-46, "Power Supply Circuit Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. 2. CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. F G Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect audio unit connector M45 and display control unit connector M95. Check continuity between audio unit and display control unit. H Terminals Display control unit Connector Audio unit Terminal (Wire color) Connector 40 (O/L) M95 4. I Continuity Terminal (Wire color) J 65 (O/L) M45 42 (W/L) Yes 66 (W/L) Check continuity between display control unit and ground. AV Terminals WKIA1192E Display control unit Connector Terminal (Wire color) Continuity — L 40 (O/L) M95 42 (W/L) Ground No M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: October 2004 AV-143 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM 3. CHECK 1: AUDIO-TX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Connect display control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between display control unit harness connector M95 terminal 42 (W/L) and ground. Approx. 3.5V or more. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . WKIA1770E 4. CHECK 2: AUDIO-RX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display control unit connector M95. Connect audio unit connector M45. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between audio unit harness connector M45 terminal 65 (O/L) and ground. Approx. 3.5V or more. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-65, "Removal and Installation for Audio Unit" . WKIA1771E 5. CHECK 3: AUDIO-TX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Connect display control unit connector M95. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between display control unit harness connector M95 terminal 40 (O/L) and ground with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope. 40 (O/L) - Ground : Refer to AV-109, "Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control Unit" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . Revision: October 2004 AV-144 SKIA4447E 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM 6. CHECK 4: AUDIO-RX COMMUNICATION SIGNAL 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between display control unit harness connector M95 terminal 42 (W/L) and ground with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope. 42 (W/L) - Ground B : Refer to AV-109, "Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control Unit" . OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-65, "Removal and Installation for Audio Unit" . C D SKIA4448E E Display Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and Display Unit) EKS00AQ1 1. CHECK HARNESS F 1. 2. 3. G Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display unit connector M93 and display control unit connector M95. Check continuity between display control unit and display unit. Terminals Display control unit Connector Terminal (Wire color) Connector 36 (B/W) M95 4. H Display unit Continuity Terminal (Wire color) I 11 (B/W) M93 38 (L) Yes 22 (L) Check continuity between display control unit and ground. J Terminals WKIA2019E Display control unit Connector Terminal (Wire color) Continuity AV — 36 (B/W) M95 38 (L) Ground No L OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. M 2. CHECK 1: COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (DCU–DSP) 1. 2. 3. Connect display unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between display unit harness connector M93 terminal 11 (B/W) and ground. Approx. 3.5V or more. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Unit" . WKIA1377E Revision: October 2004 AV-145 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM 3. CHECK 2: COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (DSP–DCU) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display control unit connector M95. Connect display control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between display control unit harness connector M95 terminal 38 (L) and ground. Approx. 3.5V or more. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . SKIA4453E 4. CHECK 3: COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (DCU–DSP) 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Connect display unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between display control unit harness connector M95 terminal 36 (B/W) and ground with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope. 36 (B/W) - Ground : Refer to AV-109, "Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control Unit" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . SKIA4452E 5. CHECK 4: COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (DSP–DCU) 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between display control unit harness connector M95 terminal 38 (L) and ground with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope. 38 (L) - Ground : Refer to AV-109, "Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control Unit" . OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Unit" . Revision: October 2004 AV-146 SKIA4453E 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM AV Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and AV Switch) EKS00AQ2 1. CHECK AV SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display control unit connector M95 and AV switch connector M98. Check continuity between display control unit and AV switch. B C Terminals Display control unit Connector AV switch Terminal (Wire color) Connector 28 (V) M95 4. A Continuity Terminal (Wire color) D 6 (V) M98 30 (LG) Yes 8 (LG) E Check continuity between display control unit and ground. Terminals WKIA1597E Display control unit Connector Terminal (Wire color) Continuity — 28 (V) M95 30 (LG) F Ground G No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. H 2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF DCU I 1. Replace AV switch. 2. Connect display control unit connector and AV switch connector. J 3. Turn ignition switch ON. 4. Start self-diagnosis of DCU and check the self-diagnosis result. OK or NG AV OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . L M Revision: October 2004 AV-147 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM CAN Communication Line Check EKS00AQ3 1. CHECK MONITOR DESCRIPTION 1. 2. Start display control unit self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-118, "Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU)" . Select “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR”. Refer to AV-131, "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR" . content Item 3. Error counter Normal condition Error (Example) CAN_COMM OK NG 0-50 CAN_CIRC_1 OK UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_2 OK UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_3 OK UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_4 OK UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_5 OK UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_6 OK UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_7 OK UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_8 OK UNKWN 0-50 CAN_CIRC_9 OK UNKWN 0-50 SKIA4288E Record each item display description (OK/NG/UKNWN) displayed on the following CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR Check Sheet. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR Check Sheet Diagnosis item Screen display Diagnosis item Screen display CAN_COMM OK NG CAN_CIRC_5 OK UNKWN CAN_CIRC_1 OK UNKWN CAN_CIRC_6 OK UNKWN CAN_CIRC_2 OK UNKWN CAN_CIRC_7 OK UNKWN CAN_CIRC_3 OK UNKWN CAN_CIRC_8 OK UNKWN CAN_CIRC_4 OK UNKWN CAN_CIRC_9 OK UNKWN >> After filling in CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR Check Sheet, GO TO LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . If NAVI Control Unit Detects That DVD-ROM Map is Not Inserted EKS00AQ4 1. CHECK DVD-ROM Make sure identified DVD-ROM map is inserted. OK or NG OK >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-174, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" . NG >> Insert identified DVD-ROM map. If NAVI Control Unit Detects That Inserted DVD-ROM Map is Malfunctioning or If It is Impossible to Load Data from DVD-ROM Map EKS00AQ5 1. CHECK 1: DVD-ROM Remove inserted DVD-ROM map to check that it is identified. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace identified DVD-ROM map. Revision: October 2004 AV-148 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM 2. CHECK 2: DVD-ROM A Check DVD-ROM for dirt, scratches and warpage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace DVD-ROM map. B 3. CHECK 3: DVD-ROM C Insert same DVD-ROM to make sure same diagnosis result is found as last self-diagnosis. OK or NG OK >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-174, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" . NG >> Replace DVD-ROM map. D If Connection Between NAVI Control Unit and GPS Antenna is Malfunctioning E EKS00AQ6 1. CHECK GPS ANTENNA F Check cable for GPS antenna for damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace GPS antenna. Refer to AV-174, "Removal and Installation of GPS Antenna" . G 2. CHECK BY REPLACEMENT OF GPS ANTENNA H Replace with other functional GPS antenna to try self-diagnosis again. Result of self-diagnosis; Found same result? YES >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-174, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" . NO >> Replace GPS antenna. Refer to AV-174, "Removal and Installation of GPS Antenna" . Operating Screen for Audio and A/C is Not Displayed When Showing NAVI Screen I J EKS00AQ7 1. CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display control unit connector M95 and display unit connector M93. Check continuity between display control unit harness connector M95 terminal 49, 51 (B), 53 (W), 55 (R) and display unit harness connector M93 terminal 21, 9 (B), 20 (W), 8 (R). AV L Continuity should exist. 4. M Check continuity between display control unit harness connector M95 terminal 49, 51 (B), 53 (W), 55 (R) and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness. WKIA1965E Revision: October 2004 AV-149 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM 2. CHECK HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Connect display control unit connector and display unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between display control unit connector M95 terminals 55 (R) and 49 with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope. 55 (R) - 49 : Refer to AV-109, "Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control Unit" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Unit" . SKIA4305E 3. CHECK VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNAL 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between display control unit connector M95 terminals 53 (W) and 49 with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope. 53 (W) - 49 : Refer to AV-109, "Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control Unit" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Unit" . WKIA1773E 4. CHECK RGB AREA SIGNAL 1. 2. Press the “TRIP” button. Check signal between display control unit connector M95 terminals 51 (B) and 49 with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope. 51 (B) - 49 : Refer to AV-109, "Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control Unit" . OK or NG OK >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Unit" . NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . SKIA4306E Revision: October 2004 AV-150 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (Only NAVI Screen Looks Bluish) EKS00AQ8 1. CHECK RGB HARNESS 1. 2. 3. 4. ● A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect NAVI control unit connector B151 and display control unit connector M95. Check continuity between NAVI control unit and display control unit. Check continuity between NAVI control unit and ground. When the screen looks bluish. B C Terminals NAVI control unit Connector B151 Display control unit Terminal (Wire color) Connector 18 (R) M95 17 D Continuity Terminal (Wire color) 44 (R/L) E Yes 45 F Terminals NAVI control unit Connector Continuity — SKIA4349E Terminal (Wire color) B151 G 18 (R) Ground No 17 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. H 2. CHECK RGB SIGNAL I 1. 2. 3. 4. ● Connect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Display “Color bar” by “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” mode. Check signal between NAVI control unit connector B151 terminal 18 (R) and 17 with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope. When the screen looks bluish. Voltage signal between NAVI control unit connector B151 terminal 18 (R) and 17. 18 (R) - 17 J AV L : Refer to AV-107, "Terminals and Reference Value for NAVI Control Unit" . M OK or NG SKIA4629E OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . NG >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-174, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" . Revision: October 2004 AV-151 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (Only NAVI Screen Looks Reddish) EKS00AQ9 1. CHECK RGB HARNESS 1. 2. 3. 4. ● Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect NAVI control unit connector B151 and display control unit connector M95. Check continuity between NAVI control unit and display control unit. Check continuity between NAVI control unit and ground. When the screen looks reddish. Terminals NAVI control unit Connector B151 Display control unit Terminal (Wire color) Connector 21 (R/W) M95 17 Continuity Terminal (Wire color) 46 (R/W) Yes 45 Terminals NAVI control unit Connector Continuity — SKIA4350E Terminal (Wire color) B151 21 (R/W) Ground No 17 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. 2. CHECK RGB SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. ● Connect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Display ″Color bar″ by ″CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT″ mode. Check signal between NAVI control unit connector B151 terminal 21 (R/W) and 17 with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope. When the screen looks reddish. Voltage signal between NAVI control unit connector B151 terminal 21 (R/W) and 17. 21 (R/W) - 17 : Refer to AV-107, "Terminals and Reference Value for NAVI Control Unit" . OK or NG SKIA4630E OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . NG >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-174, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" . Revision: October 2004 AV-152 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (Only NAVI Screen Looks Yellowish) EKS00AQA 1. CHECK RGB HARNESS 1. 2. 3. 4. ● A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect NAVI control unit connector B151 and display control unit connector M95. Check continuity between NAVI control unit and display control unit. Check continuity between NAVI control unit and ground. When the screen looks yellowish. B C Terminals NAVI control unit Connector B151 Display control unit Terminal (Wire color) Connector 15 (B) M95 17 D Continuity Terminal (Wire color) 48 (B) E Yes 45 F Terminals NAVI control unit Connector Continuity — SKIA4351E Terminal (Wire color) B151 G 15 (B) Ground No 17 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. H 2. CHECK RGB SIGNAL I 1. 2. 3. 4. ● Connect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Display ″Color bar″ by ″CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT″ mode. Check signal between NAVI control unit connector B151 terminal 15 (B) and 17 with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope. When the screen looks yellowish. Voltage signal between NAVI control unit connector B151 terminal 15 (B) and 17. 15 (B) - 17 J AV L : Refer to AV-107, "Terminals and Reference Value for NAVI Control Unit" . M OK or NG SKIA4631E OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . NG >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-174, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" . Revision: October 2004 AV-153 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Look Bluish) EKS00AQB 1. CHECK RGB HARNESS 1. 2. 3. 4. ● Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display control unit connector M95 and display unit connector M93. Check continuity between display control unit and display unit. Check continuity between display control unit and ground. When the screen looks bluish. Terminals Display control unit Connector M95 Display unit Terminal (Wire color) Connector 50 (R/L) M93 47 Continuity Terminal (Wire color) 17 (R/L) Yes 7 Terminals Display control unit Connector Continuity — SKIA4353E Terminal (Wire color) M95 50 (R/L) Ground No 47 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. 2. CHECK RGB SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. ● Connect display control unit connector and display unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Display “Color bar” by “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” mode. Check the following with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope. When the screen looks bluish. Voltage signal between display control unit connector M95 terminal 50 (R/L) and 47. 50 (R/L) - 47 : Refer to AV-109, "Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control Unit" . OK or NG OK >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and SKIA4697E Installation of Display Unit" . NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . Revision: October 2004 AV-154 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Look Reddish) EKS00AQC 1. CHECK RGB HARNESS 1. 2. 3. 4. ● A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display control unit connector M95 and display unit connector M93. Check continuity between display control unit and display unit. Check continuity between display control unit and ground. When the screen looks reddish. B C Terminals Display control unit Connector M95 Display unit Terminal (Wire color) Connector 52 (R/W) M93 47 D Continuity Terminal (Wire color) 6 (R/W) E Yes 7 F Terminals Display control unit Connector Continuity — SKIA4354E Terminal (Wire color) M95 G 52 (R/W) Ground No 47 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. H 2. CHECK RGB SIGNAL I 1. 2. 3. 4. ● Connect display control unit connector and display unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Display “Color bar” by “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” mode. Check the following with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope. When the screen looks reddish. Voltage signal between display control unit connector M95 terminal 52 (R/W) and 47. 52 (R/W) - 47 J AV L : Refer to AV-109, "Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control Unit" . M OK or NG OK >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and SKIA4698E Installation of Display Unit" . NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . Revision: October 2004 AV-155 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Color of RGB Image is Not Proper (All Screens Look Yellowish) EKS00AQD 1. CHECK RGB HARNESS 1. 2. 3. 4. ● Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display control unit connector M95 and display unit connector M93. Check continuity between display control unit and display unit. Check continuity between display control unit and ground. When the screen looks yellowish. Terminals Display control unit Connector M95 Display unit Terminal (Wire color) Connector 54 (B) M93 47 Continuity Terminal (Wire color) 18 (B) Yes 7 Terminals Display control unit Connector Continuity — SKIA4355E Terminal (Wire color) M95 54 (B) Ground No 47 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. 2. CHECK RGB SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. ● Connect display control unit connector and display unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Display “Color bar” by “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” mode. Check the following with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope. When the screen looks yellowish. Voltage signal between display control unit connector M95 terminal 54 (B) and 47. 54 (B) - 47 : Refer to AV-109, "Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control Unit" . OK or NG OK >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and SKIA4356E Installation of Display Unit" . NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . Revision: October 2004 AV-156 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM NAVI Screen is Rolling EKS00AQE 1. CHECK HARNESS A 1. 2. 3. B Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect NAVI control unit connector B151 and display control unit connector M95. Check continuity between NAVI control unit and display control unit. Terminals C NAVI control unit Connector B151 Display control unit Terminal (Wire color) Connector 16 (BR) M95 14 4. Continuity Terminal (Wire color) D 43 (W) Yes 41 E Check continuity between NAVI control unit and ground. Terminals WKIA2020E NAVI control unit Connector — Continuity F No G Terminal (Wire color) B151 16 (BR) Ground 14 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness. H 2. CHECK RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. I Connect NAVI control unit connector and display control unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between NAVI control unit connector M95 terminals 16 (BR) and 14 with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope. 16 (BR) - 14 J : Refer to AV-107, "Terminals and Reference Value for NAVI Control Unit" . AV OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-174, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" . L SKIA4358E Revision: October 2004 AV-157 2005 Titan M NAVIGATION SYSTEM 3. CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect display control unit connector M95 and display unit connector M93. Check continuity between display control unit and display unit. Terminals Display control unit Connector Display unit Terminal (Wire color) Connector 56 (G) M95 4. Continuity Terminal (Wire color) 19 (G) M93 49 Yes 21 Check continuity between display control unit and ground. Terminals WKIA2775E Display control unit Connector Continuity — Terminal (Wire color) M95 56 (G) Ground No 49 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness. 4. CHECK RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Connect display control unit connector and display unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between display unit connector M93 terminals 19 (G) and 21 with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope. 19 (G) - 21 : Refer to AV-113, "Terminals and Reference Value for Display Unit" . OK or NG OK >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Unit" . NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . Revision: October 2004 AV-158 WKIA2022E 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Guide Sound is Not Heard EKS00AQF 1. CHECK VOICE GUIDE SETTING A While driving in the dark pink route, voice guide does not operate. (note) NOTE: Voice guide is only available at intersections that satisfy certain conditions (indicated by ● on the map). Therefore, guidance may not be given even when the route on the map changes direction. Is volume setting switched OFF? YES >> Switch the setting ON and turn the volume up. NO >> GO TO 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect NAVI control unit connector B151 and audio unit connector M45. Check continuity between NAVI control unit and audio unit. E Terminals F NAVI control unit Connector Audio unit Terminal (Wire color) Connector 7 (B) B151 4. C D 2. CHECK HARNESS 1. 2. 3. B Continuity Terminal (Wire color) G 71 (B) M45 8 (W) Yes 69 (W) H Check continuity between NAVI control unit and ground. Terminals WKIA1193E NAVI control unit Connector Terminal (Wire color) Continuity I No J — 7 (B) B151 8 (W) Ground OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. AV 3. CHECK VOICE GUIDE 1. 2. 3. L Connect NAVI control unit connector and audio unit connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check signal between NAVI control unit harness connector B151 terminal 7 (B) and 8 (W) with CONSULT-ll or oscilloscope. 7 (B) - 8 (W) : Refer to AV-107, "Terminals and Reference Value for NAVI Control Unit" . OK or NG OK >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-65, "Removal and Installation for Audio Unit" . NG >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-174, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" . Revision: October 2004 M AV-159 SKIA4362E 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Screen is Not Shown EKS00AQG 1. POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK Check power supply and ground circuit for display unit. Refer to AV-135, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display Unit" . OK or NG OK >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Unit" . NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. A/C Screen is Not Shown (NAVI Screen is Shown) EKS00AQH 1. CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL Check ignition signal. Refer to AV-141, "Ignition Signal Check for Display Control Unit" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. 2. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Check CAN communication line. Refer to AV-148, "CAN Communication Line Check" . OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . NG >> After filling out CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet, GO TO LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . FUEL ECONOMY Screen is Not Shown 1. EKS00AQI CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL Check ignition signal. Refer to AV-141, "Ignition Signal Check for Display Control Unit" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. 2. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Check CAN communication line. Refer to AV-148, "CAN Communication Line Check" . OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . NG >> After filling out CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet, GO TO LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Average Fuel Economy Displayed is Not Shown (“ *** ” is Shown) EKS00AQJ 1. CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL Check vehicle speed signal. Refer to AV-139, "Vehicle Speed Signal Check for Display Control Unit" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. 2. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Check CAN communication line. Refer to AV-148, "CAN Communication Line Check" . OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . NG >> After filling out CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet, GO TO LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Revision: October 2004 AV-160 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Distance to Empty Displayed is Not Shown (“ *** ” is Shown) EKS00AQK 1. CHECK SPEEDOMETER A Confirm that speedometer is functioning. Is speedometer functioning? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Refer to DI-19, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection" . B C 2. CHECK FUEL GAUGE Confirm that fuel gauge is functioning. Is fuel gauge functioning? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Refer to DI-22, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection" . D E 3. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Check CAN communication line. Refer to AV-148, "CAN Communication Line Check" . OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . NG >> After filling out CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet, GO TO LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Driving Distance or Average Speed Displayed is Not Shown (“ *** ” is Shown) EKS00AQL 1. G H CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL Check ignition signal. Refer to AV-141, "Ignition Signal Check for Display Control Unit" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> After filling out CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet, GO TO LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . 2. CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL WARNING DOOR OPEN Screen is Not Shown EKS00AQM CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL Check ignition signal. Refer to AV-141, "Ignition Signal Check for Display Control Unit" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. 2. CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL Check vehicle speed signal. Refer to AV-139, "Vehicle Speed Signal Check for Display Control Unit" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. Revision: October 2004 I J AV Check vehicle speed signal. Refer to AV-139, "Vehicle Speed Signal Check for Display Control Unit" . OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. 1. F AV-161 2005 Titan L M NAVIGATION SYSTEM 3. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Check CAN communication line. Refer to AV-148, "CAN Communication Line Check" . OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . NG >> After filling out CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet, GO TO LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Unable to Operate All of AV Switches (Unable to Start Self-Diagnosis) EKS00AQN 1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check power supply and ground circuit for AV switch. Refer to AV-137, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for AV Switch" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. 2. AV SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS AV switch self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-132, "AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. 3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check power supply and ground circuit for display control unit. Refer to AV-134, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display Control Unit" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. 4. CHECK COMMUNICATION LINE Check communication line. Refer to AV-147, "AV Communication Line Check (Between Display Control Unit and AV Switch)" . OK or NG OK >> Replace AV switch. Refer to AV-65, "Removal and Installation for AV Switch" . NG >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . Audio Does Not Work EKS00AQO Refer to AV-44, "Trouble Diagnosis" . Navigation System Does Not Activate EKS00AQP 1. POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK Check power supply and ground circuit for NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-133, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for NAVI Control Unit" . OK or NG OK >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-174, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" . NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. Revision: October 2004 AV-162 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Previous NAVI Conditions are Not Stored EKS00AQQ 1. CHECK BATTERY POWER A Check NAVI control unit battery power. Refer to AV-133, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for NAVI Control Unit" . OK or NG OK >> Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-174, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" . NG >> Check NAVI control unit battery power system harness. Previous Vehicle Conditions are Not Stored B C EKS00AQR 1. CHECK BATTERY POWER D Check display control unit battery power. Refer to AV-134, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display Control Unit" . OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. Refer to AV-175, "Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit" . NG >> Check display control unit battery power system harness. Position of Current Location Mark is Not Correct E F EKS00AQS 1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS Perform “Self-diagnosis mode” of the self-diagnosis function. Refer to AV-121, "Self-Diagnosis Mode (NAVI)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. 2. HISTORY OF ERRORS DIAGNOSIS H I Was any error stored in AV-127, "HISTORY OF ERRORS" of the "CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT" mode? YES or NO YES >> AV-127, "DIAGNOSIS BY HISTORY OF ERRORS". NO >> AV-164, "Driving Test". Radio Wave From GPS Satellite is Not Received EKS00AQT 1. CHECK ENVIRONMENT Check if any metal object that intercepts radio waves or an object that emits radio waves (such as a portable phone) is located near the GPS antenna. Check if the vehicle is shielded by a building. OK or NG OK >> ● System is not malfunctioning. The GPS antenna may not be able to receive radio waves from the GPS satellite if it is shielded by metal object or an object emitting radio waves is placed near it. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. SELF-DIAGNOSIS Perform “Self-diagnosis mode” of the self-diagnosis function. Refer to AV-121, "Self-Diagnosis Mode (NAVI)" . OK or NG OK >> Replace GPS antenna. Refer to AV-174, "Removal and Installation of GPS Antenna" . NG >> Check the malfunctioning parts. Revision: October 2004 G AV-163 2005 Titan J AV L M NAVIGATION SYSTEM Driving Test EKS00AQU 1. DRIVING TEST 1 1. Scroll the map screen to display the area to make correction. Press “ENTER” and select “CURRENT LOCATION CORRECTION”. 2. Correct direction of the vehicle mark. 3. Perform the distance correction of the "CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT" mode. Note: Normally, adjustment is not necessary because this system has automatic distance correction function. However, when a tire chain is fitted, adjustment in accordance with the tire diameter ratio must be made. 4. Are symptoms malfunctioning to the AV-165, "Example of Symptoms Judged Not Malfunction" after driving the vehicle? YES or NO YES >> Limit of the location detection capacity of the navigation system. NO >> GO TO 2. 2. DRIVING TEST 2 Did any malfunction occur when the proper test in the following test patterns is performed? ● Test pattern Driving test finds the difference between the symptoms monitored with and without each sensor. – Test pattern 1: Test method with no GPS location correction Disconnect GPS antenna connector (GT5) connected to the NAVI control unit. Accurately adjust the current location and the direction, then drive the vehicle. – Test pattern 2: Test method with no map-matching Accurately adjust the current location and the direction. Eject the map DVD-ROM from the NAVI control unit with ignition switch turned to OFF, then drive the vehicle. After driving, insert the map DVD-ROM back in the unit, display the track of the vehicle on the map screen and compare it with the actual road configuration. ● Sample tests – Perform test pattern 1. – Perform test pattern 1 & 2. Compare the track of the vehicle on the map screen and the actual road configuration. For fairly accurate tracking, plotting shall be made every several hundred meters (feet). – Perform test pattern 1 & 2. Drive on a road of which distance is accurately known (by utilizing distance posts on a highway). Calculate the rate of change (increased/decreased) of the distance by comparing with the actual distance. Correction = A/B A: Distance shown on the screen B: Actual distance YES or NO YES >> ● If adjustment is insufficient, perform adjustment again. ● If any error is found in the map, please contact map data supplier. Refer to Navigation System Owner's Manual for contact information. ● Replace NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-174, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" . NO >> Limit of the location detection capacity of the navigation system. ● Revision: October 2004 AV-164 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Example of Symptoms Judged Not Malfunction EKS00AQV A BASIC OPERATION Symptom Cause Remedy No image is shown. Display brightness adjustment is set fully to DARK side. Adjust the display brightness. No guide sound is heard. Audio guide volume is too low or too high. Volume control is set to OFF, MIN or MAX. Adjust the audio guide volume. Audio guidance is not available while the vehicle is driving on a dark pink route. System is not malfunctioning. Screen is too dark. Motion of the image is too slow. Temperature inside the vehicle is low. Wait until the temperature inside the vehicle reaches the proper temperature. Small black or bright spots appear on the screen. Symptom peculiar to a liquid crystal display (display unit). System is not malfunction. B C VEHICLE MARK E Symptom Cause Map screen and BIRDVIEW™ Name of the place varies with the screen. Some thinning of the character data is done to prevent the display becoming to complex. In some cases and in some locations, the display contents may differ. The same place name, street name, etc. may not be displayed every time on account of the data processing. System is not malfunctioning. Vehicle mark is not positioned correctly. Vehicle is transferred by ferry or by towing after its ignition switch is turned to OFF. Drive the vehicle for a while in the GPS satellite signal receiving condition. Screen will not switch to nighttime mode after the lighting switch is turned ON. The daytime screen is selected by the “SWITCH SCREENS” when the last time the screen dimming setting is done. Switching between daytime/nighttime screen may be inhibited by the automatic illumination adjustment function. Perform screen dimming and select the nighttime screen by “SWITCH SCREENS”. Map screen will not scroll in accordance with the vehicle travel. Current location is not displayed. Press “MAP” button to display the current location. Vehicle mark will not be shown. Current location is not displayed. Press “MAP” button to display the current location. Accuracy indicator (GPS satellite mark) on the map screen stays gray. Vehicle location accuracy is low. Revision: October 2004 D Remedy F G H I J AV GPS satellite signal is intercepted because the vehicle is in or behind a building. Move the vehicle out to an open space. GPS satellite signal cannot be received because an obstacle is placed on top of the instrument panel. Do not place anything in the center on top of the display. L GPS satellites are not visible from current location. Wait until GPS satellites are visible by moving the vehicle. M Accuracy indicator (GPS satellite mark) on the map screen stays gray. Current location is not determined. Vehicle speed setting by the vehicle speed pulse has been deviated (advanced or retarded) from the actual vehicle speed because tire chain is fitted or the system has been used on another vehicle. Drive the vehicle for a while [for approx. 30 minutes at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH)] and the deviation will be automatically adjusted. If advancement or retard still occur, perform the distance adjustment by CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT mode of diagnosis function. Map data has error or omission. (Vehicle mark is always deviated to the same position.) As a rule, an updated map DVD–ROM will be released once a year. AV-165 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM DESTINATION, PASSING POINTS, AND MENU ITEMS CANNOT BE SELECTED/SET Symptom Cause Remedy Destination cannot be set. Destination to be set is on an expressway. Set the destination on an ordinary road. Passing point is not searched when re-searching the route. The vehicle has already passed the passing point, or the system judged so. To include the passing points that have been passed into the route again, set the route again. Route information will not be displayed. Route searching has not been done. Set the destination and perform route searching. Vehicle mark is not on the recommended route. Drive on the recommended route. Route guide is turned OFF. Turn route guide ON. Route information is not available on the dark pink route. System is not malfunctioning. After the route searching, no guide sign will appear as the vehicle goes near the entrance/exit to the toll road. Vehicle mark is not on the recommended route. (On the display, only guide signs related to the recommended route will be shown.) Drive on the recommended route. Automatic route searching is not possible. Vehicle is driving on a highway (gray route), or no recommended route is available. Drive on a road to be searched. Or re– search the route manually. In this case, however, the whole route will be searched. Performed automatic detour search (or detour search). However, the result is the same as that of the previous search. Performed search with every condition considered. However, the result is the same as that of the previous search. System is not malfunctioning. Passing points cannot be set. More than five passing points were set. Passing points can be set up to five. To stop at more than five points, perform sharing in several steps. When setting the route, the starting point cannot be selected. The current vehicle location is always set as the starting point of a route. System is not malfunctioning. Some menu items cannot be selected. The vehicle is being driven. Stop the vehicle at a safe place and then operate the system. VOICE GUIDE Symptom Voice guide will not operate. Voice guide does not match the actual road pattern. Revision: October 2004 Cause Remedy Note: Voice guide is only available at intersections that satisfy certain conditions (indicated by ● on the map). Therefore, guidance may not be given even when the route on the map changes direction. System is not malfunctioning. The vehicle is not on the recommended route. Return to the recommended route or research the route. Voice guide is turned OFF. Turn voice guide ON. Route guide is turned OFF. Turn route guide ON. Voice guide may vary with the direction to which the vehicle is turned and the connection of the road to other roads. Drive in conformity to the actual traffic rules. AV-166 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM ROUTE SEARCH Symptom No route is shown. Indicated route is intermittent. A Cause Remedy No road to be searched is found around the destination. Find wider road (orange road or wider) nearby and reset the destination and passing points onto it. Take care of the traveling direction when there are separate up and down roads. B Starting point and the destination are too close. Set the destination at more distant point. C Conditional traffic regulation (day of the week/ time of the day) is set at the area around the current location or the destination. Turn the time-regulating search conditions OFF. Turn “Avoid regulation time” in the search conditions OFF. In some areas, highways (gray routes) are not System is not malfunctioning. used for the search(Note) Therefore, the route to the current location or the passing points may be intermittent. D E When the vehicle has passed the recommended route, it is deleted from the screen. A recommended route is controlled by each section. When the vehicle has passed the passing point 1, then the map data from the starting point up to the passing point 1 will be deleted. (The data may remain undeleted in some areas.) System is not malfunctioning. Detouring route is recommended. In some areas, highways (gray routes) are not used for the search. (Note). Therefore, detour route may be recommended. Set the route closer to the basic route (gray route). G A detour route may be shown when some traffic regulation (one-way traffic, etc.) is set at the area around the starting point or the destination. Slightly move the starting point or the destination, or set the passing point on the route of your choice. H In the area where highways (gray routes) are used for the search, left turn has priority around the current location and the destination (passing points). For this reason, the recommended route may be detouring. System is not malfunctioning. Landmarks on the map do not match the actual ones. This can be happen due to omission or error in the map data. As a rule, an updated map DVD-ROM will be released once a year. Wait until the latest map has become available. Recommended route is far from the starting point, passing points, and destination. Starting point, passing points, and destination of the route guide were set far from the desired points because route searching data around these area were not stored. Reset the destination onto the road nearby. If this road is one of the highways (gray routes), an ordinary road nearby may be displayed as the recommended route. F I J AV L NOTE: Except for the ordinance-designated cities. (Malfunctioning areas may be changed in the updated map disc.) M Revision: October 2004 AV-167 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM EXAMPLES OF CURRENT-LOCATION MARK DISPLACEMENT Vehicle's travel amount is calculated by reading its travel distance and turning angle. Therefore, if the vehicle is driven in the following manner, an error will occur in the vehicle's current location display. If correct location has not been restored after driving the vehicle for a while, perform location correction. SEL698V Revision: October 2004 AV-168 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Cause (condition) –: While driving ooo: Display Driving condition Remarks (correction, etc.) Y–intersections At a Y intersection or similar gradual division of roads, an error in the direction of travel deduced by the sensor may result in the current-location mark appearing on the wrong road. A B C ELK0192D Spiral roads D When driving on a large, continuous spiral road (such as loop bridge), turning angle error is accumulated and the vehicle mark may deviate from the correct location. E ELK0193D Straight roads When driving on a long, straight road and slow curve without stopping, map-matching does not work effectively enough and distance errors may accumulate. As a result, the vehicle mark may deviate from the correct location when the vehicle is turned at a corner. Road configuration ELK0194D Zigzag roads When driving on a zigzag road, the map may be matched to other roads in the similar direction nearby at every turn, and the vehicle mark may deviate from the correct location. F G If after travelling about 10 km (6 miles) the correct location has not been restored, perform location correction and, if necessary, direction correction. H I J ELK0195D Roads laid out in a grid pattern AV When driving where roads are laid out in a grid pattern, or where many roads are running in the similar direction nearby, the map may be matched to them by mistake and the vehicle mark may deviate from the correct location. L ELK0196D M Parallel roads When two roads are running in parallel (such as highway and sideway), the map may be matched to the other road by mistake and the vehicle mark may deviate from the correct location. ELK0197D Revision: October 2004 AV-169 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Cause (condition) –: While driving ooo: Display In a parking lot SEL709V Driving condition Remarks (correction, etc.) When driving in a parking lot, or other location where there are no roads on the map, matching may place the vehicle mark on a nearby road. When the vehicle returns to the road, the vehicle mark may have deviated from the correct location. When driving in circle or turning the steering wheel repeatedly, direction errors accumulate, and the vehicle mark may deviate from the correct location. Turntable When the ignition switch is OFF, the navigation system cannot get the signal from the gyroscope (angular speed sensor). Therefore, the displayed direction may be wrong and the correct road may not be easily returned to after rotating the vehicle on a turntable with the ignition OFF. Place SEL710V Slippery roads On snow, wet roads, gravel, or other roads where tires may slip easily, accumulated mileage errors may cause the vehicle mark to deviate from the correct road. Slopes When parking in sloped garages, when travelling on banked roads, or in other cases where the vehicle turns when tilted, an error in the turning angle will occur, and the vehicle mark may deviate from the road. If after travelling about 10 km (6 miles) the correct location has not been restored, perform location correction and, if necessary, direction correction. Road not displayed on the map screen When driving on new roads or other roads not displayed on the map screen, map matching does not function correctly and matches the location to a nearby road. When the vehicle returns to a road which is on the map, the vehicle mark may deviate from the correct road. SEL699V Map data Different road pattern (Changed due to repair) If the road pattern stored in the map data and the actual road pattern are different, map matching does not function correctly and matches the location to a nearby road. The vehicle mark may deviate from the correct road. ELK0201D Vehicle Use of tire chains Revision: October 2004 When tire chains are used, the mileage is not correctly detected, and the vehicle mark may deviate from the correct road. AV-170 Drive the vehicle for a while. If the distance still deviates, adjust it by using the distance adjustment function. (If the tire chain is removed, recover the original value.) 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Cause (condition) –: While driving ooo: Display Just after the engine is started Continuous driving without stopping Precautions for driving Abusive driving Driving condition Remarks (correction, etc.) A If the vehicle is driven just after the engine is started when the gyroscope (angular speed sensor) correction is not completed, the vehicle can lose its direction and may have deviated from the correct location. Wait for a short while before driving after starting the engine. When driving long distances without stopping, direction errors may accumulate, and the current-location mark may deviate from the correct road. Stop and adjust the orientation. Spinning the wheels or engaging in other kinds of abusive driving may result in the system being unable perform correct detection, and may cause the vehicle mark to deviate from the correct road. If after travelling about 10 km (6 miles) the correct location has not been restored, perform location correction and, if necessary, direction correction. If the accuracy of location settings is poor, accuracy may be reduced when the correct road cannot be found, particularly in places where there are many roads. Enter in the road displayed on the screen with an accuracy of approx. 1mm. Caution: Whenever possible, use detailed map for the correction. B C D E Position correction accuracy How to correct location F G SEL701V Direction when location is corrected H If the accuracy of location settings during correction is poor, accuracy may be reduced afterwards. Perform direction correction. I SEL702V J CURRENT-LOCATION MARK SHOWS A POSITION WHICH IS COMPLETELY WRONG In the following cases, the current-location mark may appear on completely different position in the map depending on the GPS satellite signal receiving conditions. In this case, perform location correction and direcAV tion correction. ● When location correction has not been done – If the receiving conditions of the GPS satellite signal is poor, or if the current-location mark becomes out of place, it may move to a completely different location and not come back if location correction is not done. L The position will be corrected if the GPS signal can be received. ● When the vehicle has traveled by ferry, or when the vehicle has been towed – Because calculation of the current location cannot be done when travelling with the ignition OFF, for M example when traveling by ferry or when being towed, the location before travel is displayed. If the precise location can be detected with GPS, the location will be corrected. CURRENT-LOCATION MARK JUMPS In the following cases, the current-location mark may appear to jump as a result of automatic correction of the current location. ● When map-matching has been done – If the current location and the current-location mark are different when map-matching is done, the currentlocation mark may seem to jump. At this time, the location may be “corrected” to the wrong road or to a location which is not on a road. ● When GPS location correction has been done – If the current location and the current-location mark are different when the location is corrected using GPS measurements, the current-location mark may seem to jump. At this time, the location may be “corrected” to a location which is not on a road. Revision: October 2004 AV-171 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM CURRENT-LOCATION MARK IS IN A RIVER OR SEA The navigation system moves the current-location mark with no distinction between land and rivers or sea. If the location mark is somehow out of place, it may appear that the vehicle is driving in a river or the sea. WHEN DRIVING ON SAME ROAD, SOMETIMES CURRENT-LOCATION MARK IS IN RIGHT PLACE AND SOMETIMES IT IS WRONG PLACE The conditions of the GPS antenna (GPS data) and gyroscope (angular speed sensor) change gradually. Depending on the road traveled and the operation of the steering wheel, the location detection results will be different. Therefore, even on a road on which the location has never been wrong, conditions may cause the vehicle mark to deviate. LOCATION CORRECTION BY MAP-MATCHING IS SLOW ● ● The map-matching function needs to refer to the data of the surrounding area. It is necessary to drive some distance for the function to work. Because map-matching operates on this principle, when there are many roads running in similar directions in the surrounding area, no matching determination may be made. The location may not be corrected until some special feature is found. ALTHOUGH GPS RECEIVING DISPLAY IS GREEN, VEHICLE MARK DOES NOT RETURN TO CORRECT LOCATION ● ● ● The GPS accuracy has an error of approximately 10 m (30 ft). In some cases the current-location mark may not be on the correct street, even when GPS location-correction is done. The navigation system compares the results of GPS location detection with the results from map-matching location detection. The one which is determined to have higher accuracy is used. GPS location correction may not be performed when the vehicle is stopped. NAME OF CURRENT PLACE IS NOT DISPLAYED The current place name may not be displayed if there are no place names displayed on the map screen. CONTENTS OF DISPLAY DIFFER FOR BIRDVIEW™ AND THE (FLAT) MAP SCREEN Difference of the BIRDVIEW™ screen from the flat map screen are as follows. ● ● ● ● ● The current place name displays names which are primarily in the direction of vehicle travel. The amount of time before the vehicle travel or turn angle is updated on the screen is longer than for the (flat) map display. The conditions for display of place names, roads, and other data are different for nearby areas and for more distant areas. Some thinning of the character data is done to prevent the display becoming too complex. In some cases and in some locations, the display contents may differ. The same place name, street name, etc. may be displayed multiple times. Revision: October 2004 AV-172 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Program Loading of NAVI Control Unit EKS00AQW A B C D E F G H I J AV L M SKIA0389E Revision: October 2004 AV-173 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit EKS00AQX CAUTION: To avoid damage, eject map DVD-ROM before removing the NAVI control unit. 1. Slide front seat RH fully forward. 2. Remove NAVI control unit kick shield. WKIA1594E 3. 4. 5. 6. Disconnect connectors. Remove screws and remove NAVI control unit. Remove screws and brackets from NAVI control unit. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. WKIA1510E Removal and Installation of GPS Antenna 1. 2. 3. EKS00AQY Remove defroster grille. Remove screws. Remove center console. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" . WKIA1508E 4. 5. Disconnect GPS antenna connector and remove GPS antenna and feeder assembly out the top. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. WKIA1509E Removal and Installation of Steering Wheel Switch EKS00AQZ Refer to AV-67, "Removal and Installation of Steering Wheel Audio Control Switches" . Revision: October 2004 AV-174 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Removal and Installation of AV Switch EKS00AR0 A Refer to AV-65, "Removal and Installation for AV Switch" . Removal and Installation of Display Unit 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. EKS00AR1 B Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-12, "CLUSTER LID D" . Remove the four display unit assembly screws. Disconnect connectors and remove display unit assembly. Remove screws and remove display unit from brackets. Installation is in reverse order of removal. C D E WKIA1512E Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. EKS00AR2 Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-12, "CLUSTER LID D" . Remove the four display unit assembly screws. Disconnect connectors and remove display unit assembly. Remove screws and remove display control unit from brackets. Installation is in reverse order of removal. F G H I WKIA1512E J AV L M Revision: October 2004 AV-175 2005 Titan NAVIGATION SYSTEM Revision: October 2004 AV-176 2005 Titan K ELECTRICAL A B SECTION BODY CONTROL SYSTEM C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2 BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) ........................... 3 System Description .................................................. 3 BCM FUNCTION ................................................... 3 COMBINATIONSWITCHREADING FUNCTION..... 3 CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL .................... 6 BCM STATUS CONTROL ..................................... 6 SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY..... 7 SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R ........................................................................ 7 MAJOR COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEM ....................................................................... 7 CAN Communication System Description ................ 8 Schematic ................................................................. 9 CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ................................. 11 CONSULT–II INSPECTION PROCEDURE ......... 11 ITEMS OF EACH PART ...................................... 12 WORK SUPPORT ............................................... 12 CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULTII (Self-Diagnosis) ................................................... 13 Configuration .......................................................... 13 DESCRIPTION .................................................... 13 READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE ............ 13 WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE .......... 16 Removal and Installation of BCM ........................... 19 REMOVAL ........................................................... 19 INSTALLATION ................................................... 19 F G H I J BCS L M Revision: October 2004 BCS-1 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EKS00AEY The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Revision: October 2004 BCS-2 2005 Titan BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) System Description ● PFP:284B2 A EKS00AEZ BCM (Body Control Module) controls the operation of various electrical units installed on the vehicle. BCM FUNCTION B BCM has a combination switch reading function for reading the operation of combination switches (light, wiper washer, turn signal) in addition to the function for controlling the operation of various electrical components. Also, it functions as an interface that receives signals from the A/C control unit, and sends signals to ECM using CAN communication. C COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION 1. 2. Description ● BCM reads combination switch (light, wiper) status, and controls various electrical components according to the results. ● BCM reads information of a maximum of 20 switches by combining five output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and five input terminals (INPUT 1-5). Operation description ● BCM activates transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) periodically and allows current to flow in turn. ● If any (1 or more) of the switches are turned ON, circuit of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and input terminals (INPUT 1-5) becomes active. ● At this time, transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) are activated to allow current to flow. When voltage of input terminals (INPUT 1-5) corresponding to that switch changes, interface in BCM detects voltage change and BCM determines that switch is ON. D E F G H I J BCS L M LIIA1323E 3. BCM - Operation table of combination switch ● BCM reads operation status of combination switch by the combination shown in the following table. Revision: October 2004 BCS-3 2005 Titan BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) LIIA1324E NOTE: Headlamp has a dual system switch. 4. Example operation: (When lighting switch 1st position turned ON) ● When lighting switch 1st position is turned ON, contact in combination switch turns ON. At this time if OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5. ● When OUTPUT 4 transistor is ON, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5, and judges lighting switch 1st position is ON. Then BCM sends tail lamp ON signal to IPDM E/R using CAN communication. ● When OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated again, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5 and recognizes that lighting switch 1st position is continuously ON. Revision: October 2004 BCS-4 2005 Titan BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) A B C D E F G H LIIA1325E I 5. NOTE: Each OUTPUT terminal transistor is activated at 10 ms intervals. Therefore, after a switch is turned ON, electrical loads are activated with a time delay. But this time delay is so short that it cannot be noticed. J Operation mode ● Combination switch reading function has operation modes as follows: BCS Normal status ● When BCM is not in sleep status, OUTPUT terminals (1-5) each turn ON-OFF every 10 ms. Sleep status L M Revision: October 2004 BCS-5 2005 Titan BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) ● When BCM is in sleep mode, transistors of OUTPUT 1 and 5 stop the output, and BCM enters low-current-consumption mode. OUTPUTS (2, 3, and 4) turn ON-OFF at 10 ms intervals, and receives lighting switch input only. SKIA4961E CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL CAN communication allows a high rate of information through the two communication lines (CAN-L, CAN-H) connecting the various control units in the system. Each control unit transmits/receives data, but selectively reads required data only. BCM STATUS CONTROL BCM changes its status depending on the operation status in order to save power consumption. 1. CAN communication status ● With ignition switch ON, CAN communicates with other control units normally. ● Control by BCM is being operated properly. ● When ignition switch is OFF, switching to sleep mode is possible. ● Even when ignition switch is OFF, if CAN communication with IPDM E/R and combination meter is active, CAN communication status is active. 2. Sleep transient status ● This status shuts down CAN communication when ignition switch is turned OFF. ● It transmits sleep request signal to IPDM E/R and combination meter. ● Two seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to inactive status. 3. CAN communication inactive status ● With ignition switch OFF, CAN communication is not active. ● With ignition switch OFF, control performed only by BCM is active. ● Three seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to inactive status. 4. Sleep status Revision: October 2004 BCS-6 2005 Titan BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) ● ● ● ● – – – – – – – – ● ● BCM is activated with low current consumption mode. CAN communication is not active. When CAN communication operation is detected, it switches to CAN communication status. When a state of the following switches changes, it switches to CAN communication state: Key switch Hazard switch Door lock/unlock switch Front door switch (LH, RH) Rear door switch (LH, RH) Combination switch (passing, lighting switch 1st position, front fog lamp) Keyfob (lock/unlock signal) Door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) When control performed only by BCM is required by switch, it shifts to CAN communication inactive mode. Status of combination switch reading function is changed. ● ● B C D E F SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY ● A Power door lock system. Refer to BL-16, "POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM" . Remote keyless entry system. Refer to BL-53, "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM" . Power window system. Refer to GW-19, "POWER WINDOW SYSTEM" . G NOTE Sunroof system. Refer to RF-10, "SUNROOF" . NOTE ● Room lamp timer. Refer to LT-126, "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP" . ● Warning chime system. Refer to DI-42, "WARNING CHIME" . ● Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system. Refer to LT-75, "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS" . NOTE: Power supply only. No system control. ● H I J SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R ● ● ● ● Panic system. Refer to BL-53, "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM" . BCS NVIS (NATS) system. Refer to BL-136, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)" . Headlamp, tail lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems. Refer to LT-5, "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" or LT-32, "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -" . L Front wiper and washer system. Refer to WW-4, "FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM" . MAJOR COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEM System Remote keyless entry system Input Keyfob Output ● All door locking actuator ● Turn signal lamp (LH, RH) M Power door lock system Front power door lock/unlock switch (LH, RH) All door locking actuator Power supply (IGN) to power window and sunroof Ignition power supply Power supply to power window and sunroof system Power supply (BAT) to power window and sunroof Battery power supply Power supply to power window and sunroof system Panic alarm Auto light system Battery saver control Headlamp Revision: October 2004 ● Key switch ● Keyfob ● Optical sensor ● Combination switch ● Ignition switch ● Combination switch IPDM E/R Combination switch BCS-7 IPDM E/R IPDM E/R IPDM E/R 2005 Titan BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) System Input Output Tail lamp Combination switch IPDM E/R Fog lamp Combination switch IPDM E/R Turn signal lamp Combination switch Hazard lamp Hazard switch ● Turn signal lamp ● Combination meter ● Turn signal lamp ● Combination meter ● Key switch ● Keyfob ● Front door lock/unlock switch (LH) ● Front door switch LH ● All door switch ● Key switch ● Front door switch LH ● Combination switch ● Key switch ● Front door switch LH Vehicle-speed-sensing intermittent wiper ● Combination switch ● Combination meter Air conditioner switch signal Front air control ECM Blower fan switch signal Front air control ECM Room lamp timer Key warning chime Light warning chime Interior room lamp Combination meter (warning buzzer) Combination meter (warning buzzer) CAN Communication System Description IPDM E/R EKS00AF0 Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Revision: October 2004 BCS-8 2005 Titan BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) Schematic EKS00AF1 A B C D E F G H I J BCS L M WIWA0812E Revision: October 2004 BCS-9 2005 Titan BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) WIWA0302E Revision: October 2004 BCS-10 2005 Titan BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) CONSULT-II Function (BCM) EKS00AF2 A CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode B WORK SUPPORT DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part Content Changes setting of each function. Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. SELF-DIAG RESULTS Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. ECU PART NUMBER BCM part number can be read. CONFIGURATION Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. C D E CONSULT–II INSPECTION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON. F G H I BBIA0369E 2. J Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. BCS L M BCIA0029E 3. Touch “BCM” on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen. BCIA0030E Revision: October 2004 BCS-11 2005 Titan BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) 4. Select item to be diagnosed on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen. LKIA0169E ITEMS OF EACH PART NOTE: CONSULT-II will only display systems the vehicle possesses. Diagnostic test mode (Inspection by part) System and item CONSULT-II display Power door lock system DOOR LOCK Warning chime BUZZER Room lamp timer INT LAMP Remote keyless entry system WORK SUPPORT SELF− DIAG RESULTS CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR × DATA MONITOR ECU PART NUMBER ACTIVE TEST × × × × × × × MULTI REMOTE ENT × × × Headlamp HEAD LAMP × × × Wiper WIPER × × Turn signal lamp Hazard lamp FLASHER × × Blower fan switch signal Air conditioner switch signal AIR CONDITIONER × Combination switch COMB SW × BCM BCM NVIS (NATS) IMMU Interior lamp battery saver BATTERY SAVER Retained power control RETAINED PWR Oil pressure switch SIGNAL BUFFER × × × CONFIGURATION × × × × × × × × × × × WORK SUPPORT Operation Procedure 1. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. LKIA0169E Revision: October 2004 BCS-12 2005 Titan BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch item on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen. Touch "START". Touch "CHANGE SET". The setting will be changed and "RESETTING COMPLETED" will be displayed. Touch "END". A B C BCIA0031E D Display Item List Item Description RESET SETTING VALUE E Return a value set with WORK SUPPORT of each system to a default value in factory shipment. CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis) EKS00AF3 1. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT CHECK F NOTE: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication. 1. Connect to CONSULT–II, and select “BCM” on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen. 2. Select “BCM control unit ” on “SELECT WORK ITEM” screen, and select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. 3. Check display content in self-diagnostic results. CONSULT-II display code G H Diagnosis item I INITIAL DIAG TRANSMIT DIAG ECM U1000 J IPDM E/R METER/M&A BCS I-KEY Contents displayed No malfunction>>Inspection end. Malfunction in CAN communication system>>After printing the monitor items, go to “CAN System”. Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . L Configuration M EKS00AF4 DESCRIPTION CONFIGURATION has two functions as follows: ● READ CONFIGURATION is the function to confirm vehicle configuration of current BCM. ● WRITE CONFIGURATION is the function to write vehicle configuration on BCM. CAUTION: ● When replacing BCM, you must perform WRITE CONFIGURATION with CONSULT-II. ● Complete the procedure of WRITE CONFIGURATION in order. ● If you set incorrect WRITE CONFIGURATION, incidents will occur. ● Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model. READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. Revision: October 2004 BCS-13 2005 Titan BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0369E 2. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. BCIA0029E 3. Touch “BCM” on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to General Information Section to check CONSULT II data link connector (DLC) circuit. Refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . BCIA0030E 4. Touch “BCM” on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen. LKIA0169E 5. Touch “CONFIGURATION” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen. BCIA0031E Revision: October 2004 BCS-14 2005 Titan BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) 6. Touch “A60” and "OK" on “VEHICLE SELECT” screen. For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. NOTE: Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to GI-46, "Model Variation" in GI section. A B C LKIA0613E 7. D Touch “READ CONFIGURATION” on “SELECT CONFIG ITEM” screen. E F G LKIA0547E 8. Configuration of current BCM is printed out automatically. A listing of manual setting items and auto setting items will be displayed. Auto setting items are preset and cannot be changed. Manual setting items can be set by using WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE. Refer to BCS-16, "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" . H I J BCS L M LKIA0504E 9. Touch “BACK” on “READ CONFIGURATION” screen. LKIA0395E Revision: October 2004 BCS-15 2005 Titan BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector and turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0369E 2. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. BCIA0029E 3. Touch “BCM” on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to LAN Section to check data link connector (DLC) circuit. BCIA0030E 4. Touch “BCM” on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen. LKIA0169E Revision: October 2004 BCS-16 2005 Titan BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) 5. Touch “CONFIGURATION” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen. A B C BCIA0031E D 6. Touch “A60” and "OK" on “VEHICLE SELECT” screen. For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. NOTE: Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to GI-46, "Model Variation" in GI section. E F G LKIA0613E 7. Touch “WRITE CONFIGURATION” on “SELECT CONFIG ITEM” screen. H I J LKIA0547E 8. BCS Touch "YES”. For canceling, touch "NO". L M LKIA0175E Revision: October 2004 BCS-17 2005 Titan BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) 9. Set by touching selection on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen based on the following ITEM LIST. ITEM SET VAL KEYLESS ENTRY WITH ⇔ WITHOUT AUTO LIGHT WITH ⇔ WITHOUT FR FOG LAMP WITH ⇔ WITHOUT DTRL WITH ⇔ WITHOUT THEFT ALARM WITH ⇔ WITHOUT DISPLAY STYLE MODE2 NOTE: Confirm vehicle model on IDENTIFICATION PLATE. Refer to GI-46, "Model Variation" in GI section. 10. Touch "CHNG SETTING" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. CAUTION: Make sure to touch "CHNG SETTING" even if the indicated configuration of brand-new BCM is same as the desirable configuration. If not, configuration which is set automatically by selecting vehicle model cannot be memorized. 11. Touch “OK” on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. If "CANCEL" is touched, it will return to previous screen. LKIA0397E 12. Wait until the next screen during setting. LKIA0398E Revision: October 2004 BCS-18 2005 Titan BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) 13. WRITE CONFIGURATION results are printed out automatically. Confirm "WRITE CONFIGURATION" is correctly executed by comparing sheet automatically printed out with applicable configuration list shown in step 9. A B C D E F G LKIA0509E 14. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. WRITE CONFIGURATION is completed. H I J LKIA0400E Removal and Installation of BCM EKS00AF5 REMOVAL NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference when configuring new BCM after installation. Refer to BCS-13, "Configuration" . 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove lower knee bolster. Refer to IP-10, "Removal and Installation" . 3. Remove screw and release BCM. 4. Disconnect connectors and then remove BCM. LEIA0068E INSTALLATION Install in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 BCS BCS-19 2005 Titan L M BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) NOTE: ● When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to BCS-13, "Configuration" . ● When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-136, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)" . ● When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system. Refer to WT-13, "ID Registration Procedure" . Revision: October 2004 BCS-20 2005 Titan I BODY A B SECTION BODY, LOCK & SECURITY SYSTEM C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 4 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 4 Precautions for work ................................................ 4 Wiring Diagnosis and Trouble Diagnosis ................. 4 PREPARATION ........................................................... 5 Special Service Tool ................................................. 5 Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 5 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES..... 6 Work Flow ................................................................ 6 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW ..................................... 6 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE ....... 7 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS ........... 7 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE ...................................................... 7 REPAIR THE CAUSE ........................................... 7 CONFIRM THE REPAIR ....................................... 8 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ........... 8 INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................... 8 CENTER CONSOLE ............................................. 8 DOORS ................................................................. 8 TRUNK .................................................................. 9 SUNROOF/HEADLINING ..................................... 9 OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)..... 9 SEATS ................................................................... 9 UNDERHOOD ....................................................... 9 Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................ 10 HOOD ....................................................................... 12 Fitting Adjustment .................................................. 12 CLEARANCE AND SURFACE HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT .................................................... 13 HOOD LOCK ADJUSTMENT ............................. 13 Removal and Installation of Hood Assembly .......... 13 Removal and Installation of Hood Lock Control ..... 14 REMOVAL ........................................................... 14 INSTALLATION ................................................... 15 Hood Lock Control Inspection ................................ 15 POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM .............................. 16 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 16 Revision: October 2004 System Description ................................................. 17 KING CAB ........................................................... 17 CREW CAB ......................................................... 18 OUTLINE ............................................................. 18 Schematic (King Cab) ............................................. 20 Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK — (King Cab) ............. 21 Schematic (Crew Cab) ........................................... 26 Wiring Diagrams — D/LOCK — (Crew Cab) .......... 27 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM ............... 31 Work Flow ............................................................... 31 CONSULT–II Function (BCM) ................................ 32 CONSULT–II INSPECTION PROCEDURE ......... 32 DATA MONITOR ................................................. 33 ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 33 Trouble Diagnoses Symptom Chart ....................... 34 BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check ...... 34 Door Switch Check (King Cab) ............................... 35 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) .............................. 37 Key Switch (Insert) Check (Column Shift) .............. 39 Key Switch (Insert) Check (Floor Shift) .................. 40 Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (King Cab) .......... 42 Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (Crew Cab) ......... 45 Door Lock Actuator Check (Front LH) .................... 47 Door Lock Actuator Check (Front RH) .................... 49 Door Lock Actuator Check (Rear RH/LH) ............... 50 FrontDoorLockAssemblyLH(KeyCylinderSwitch) Check (King Cab) ................................................... 51 FrontDoorLockAssemblyLH(KeyCylinderSwitch) Check (Crew Cab) .................................................. 52 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM ..................... 53 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 53 System Description ................................................. 54 INPUTS ............................................................... 54 OPERATED PROCEDURE ................................. 55 CAN Communication System Description .............. 58 Schematic (King Cab) ............................................. 59 Wiring Diagram — KEYLES — (King Cab) ............ 60 Schematic (Crew Cab) ........................................... 64 Wiring Diagram — KEYLES — (Crew Cab) ........... 65 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM ............... 68 BL-1 2005 Titan F G H BL J K L M Terminals and Reference Value for IPDM E/R ........ 69 CONSULT-II Function (BCM) .................................. 69 CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure ......................... 70 “MULTI REMOTE ENT” ....................................... 70 CONSULT-II Application Items ............................... 71 “MULTI REMOTE ENT” ....................................... 71 Trouble Diagnosis Procedure ................................. 73 Pre-Diagnosis Inspection ........................................ 73 BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check ...... 73 Trouble Diagnoses .................................................. 74 SYMPTOM CHART ............................................. 74 Key Switch (Insert) Check (Column Shift) .............. 76 Key Switch (Insert) Check (Floor Shift) ................... 78 Door Switch Check (King Cab) ............................... 79 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) .............................. 81 Keyfob Battery and Function Check ....................... 82 Remote Keyless Entry Receiver System Check ..... 83 ACC Power Check .................................................. 85 IPDM E/R Operation Check .................................... 85 Check Hazard Function .......................................... 87 Check Horn Function .............................................. 87 Check Headlamp Function ..................................... 87 CheckFrontRoom/MapLampIlluminationFunction ... 87 ID Code Entry Procedure ....................................... 88 KEYFOB ID SET UP WITH CONSULT-II ............ 88 KEYFOB ID SET UP WITHOUT CONSULT-II ..... 90 Keyfob Battery Replacement .................................. 91 VEHICLESECURITY(THEFTWARNING)SYSTEM... 92 ComponentParts and Harness Connector Location... 92 System Description ................................................. 93 DESCRIPTION .................................................... 93 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ....... 93 INITIAL CONDITION TO ACTIVATE THE SYSTEM ..................................................................... 94 VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM ALARM OPERATION .................................................................. 94 VEHICLESECURITYSYSTEMDEACTIVATION... 94 PANIC ALARM OPERATION ............................... 94 CAN Communication System Description .............. 95 Schematic (King Cab) ............................................. 96 Wiring Diagram — VEHSEC — (King Cab) ............ 97 Schematic (Crew Cab) ......................................... 103 Wiring Diagram — VEHSEC — (Crew Cab) ......... 104 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM .............. 109 Terminals and Reference Value for IPDM E/R ...... 109 CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ................................ 110 DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS DESCRIPTION ............... 110 CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE ........ 110 CONSULT-II APPLICATION ITEM ......................111 Trouble Diagnosis ................................................. 112 WORK FLOW .................................................... 112 Preliminary Check ................................................ 113 Symptom Chart ..................................................... 114 Door Switch Check (King Cab) ............................. 115 Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) ............................ 116 Security Indicator Lamp Check ............................. 118 FrontDoorLockAssemblyLH(KeyCylinderSwitch) Check (King Cab) ................................................. 119 Revision: October 2004 FrontDoorLockAssemblyLH(KeyCylinderSwitch) Check (Crew Cab) ................................................ 120 Vehicle Security Horn Alarm Check ...................... 121 Vehicle Security Headlamp Alarm Check ............. 121 Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check ........................... 121 DOOR ...................................................................... 122 Fitting Adjustment ................................................. 122 FRONT DOOR ................................................... 123 REAR DOOR ..................................................... 123 STRIKER ADJUSTMENT .................................. 123 Removal and Installation ....................................... 124 KING CAB .......................................................... 124 CREW CAB ........................................................ 125 FRONT DOOR LOCK .............................................. 127 Component Structure ............................................ 127 Removal and Installation ....................................... 127 REMOVAL .......................................................... 127 INSTALLATION .................................................. 129 Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 129 DOOR KEY CYLINDER ASSEMBLY ................. 129 REAR DOOR LOCK ................................................ 130 Component Structure ............................................ 130 Removal and Installation ....................................... 131 REMOVAL .......................................................... 131 INSTALLATION .................................................. 133 TAIL GATE ............................................................... 134 Removal and Installation ....................................... 134 GAS STAY ......................................................... 135 NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMNATS) ...................................................................... 136 ComponentParts and Harness Connector Location.136 System Description ............................................... 137 System Composition ............................................. 137 ECM Re-communicating Function ........................ 138 Wiring Diagram — NATS — .................................. 139 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM .............. 140 CONSULT-II .......................................................... 140 CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE ........ 140 CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE FUNCTION .................................................................. 141 HOW TO READ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS.142 NVIS (NATS) SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ITEM CHART ..................................................... 142 Work Flow ............................................................. 143 Trouble Diagnoses ................................................ 144 SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1 .......................... 144 SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 2 .......................... 145 DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM ................... 145 Diagnostic Procedure 1 ......................................... 146 Diagnostic Procedure 2 ......................................... 147 Diagnostic Procedure 3 ......................................... 148 Diagnostic Procedure 4 ......................................... 149 Diagnostic Procedure 5 ......................................... 150 Diagnostic Procedure 6 ......................................... 153 How to Replace NATS Antenna Amp. .................. 154 HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER ............. 155 Wiring Diagram — TRNSCV — ............................ 155 Trouble Diagnoses ................................................ 156 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ............................. 156 BL-2 2005 Titan CAB AND REAR BODY ......................................... 158 Body Mounting, King Cab .................................... 158 Body Mounting, Crew Cab ................................... 159 BODY REPAIR ........................................................ 160 Body Exterior Paint Color ..................................... 160 Body Component Parts ........................................ 161 UNDERBODY COMPONENT PARTS .............. 161 BODY COMPONENT PARTS ........................... 163 FRAME COMPONENT PARTS ......................... 167 Corrosion Protection ............................................ 170 DESCRIPTION .................................................. 170 ANTI-CORROSIVE WAX .................................. 171 UNDERCOATING ............................................. 172 Body Sealing ........................................................ 173 DESCRIPTION .................................................. 173 Body Construction ................................................ 177 BODY CONSTRUCTION .................................. 177 Body Alignment .................................................... 179 BODY CENTER MARKS .................................. 179 PANEL PARTS MATCHING MARKS ................ 181 DESCRIPTION .................................................. 183 ENGINE COMPARTMENT ............................... 184 UNDERBODY ................................................... 186 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT ....................... 189 REAR BODY ..................................................... 195 Handling Precautions for Plastics ......................... 198 LOCATION OF PLASTIC PARTS ...................... 199 Precautions in Repairing High Strength Steel ....... 201 HIGH STRENGTH STEEL (HSS) USED IN NISSAN VEHICLES ................................................ 201 Foam Repair ......................................................... 203 URETHANE FOAM APPLICATIONS ................ 203 FILL PROCEDURES ......................................... 203 Replacement Operations ...................................... 204 DESCRIPTION .................................................. 204 HOODLEDGE ................................................... 207 FRONT PILLAR ................................................. 208 CENTER PILLAR .............................................. 211 OUTER SILL ..................................................... 213 REAR CAB PILLAR ........................................... 217 REAR PANEL .................................................... 221 REAR FLOOR REAR ........................................ 222 PICKUP BED ..................................................... 224 CRUSH HORN .................................................. 235 A B C D E F G H BL J K L M Revision: October 2004 BL-3 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EIS0048I The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precautions for work ● ● EIS0048J After removing and installing the opening/closing parts, be sure to carry out fitting adjustments to check their operation. Check the lubrication level, damage, and wear of each part. If necessary, grease or replace it. Wiring Diagnosis and Trouble Diagnosis EIS0048K When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" ● PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-11, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" ● GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" Check for any Service bulletins before servicing the vehicle. Revision: October 2004 BL-4 2005 Titan PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tool PFP:00002 A EIS0048L The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. B Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-39570) Chassis ear C Locating the noise D SIIA0993E — (J-43980) NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit E F Repairing the cause of noise G H SIIA0994E BL — (J-43241) Remote Keyless Entry Tester Used to test key fobs J K LEL946A L Commercial Service Tool EIS0048M (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name M Description (J-39565) Engine ear Locating the noise SIIA0995E Revision: October 2004 BL-5 2005 Titan SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Work Flow PFP:00000 EIS0048N SBT842 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any customer's comments; refer to BL-10, "Diagnostic Worksheet" . This information is necessary to duplicate the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. ● The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur). ● If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer. ● After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when defining the noise. ● Squeak —(Like tennis shoes on a clean floor) Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces = higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping. ● Creak—(Like walking on an old wooden floor) Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch dependent on materials/often brought on by activity. ● Rattle—(Like shaking a baby rattle) Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing clip or fastener/incorrect clearance. ● Knock —(Like a knock on a door) Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action. ● Tick—(Like a clock second hand) Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver action or road conditions. ● Thump—(Heavy, muffled knock noise) Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity. ● Buzz—(Like a bumble bee) Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact. ● Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer. ● Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level. Revision: October 2004 BL-6 2005 Titan SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair. If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following: 1) Close a door. 2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from. 3) Rev the engine. 4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”. 5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model). 6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer. ● Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs. ● If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the vehicle body. A B C D E CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related to that concern or symptom. If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise. F LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE 1. 2. ● ● ● ● ● G Narrow down the noise to a general area.To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool (Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanic's stethoscope). Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by: H removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from. Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise. BL tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise. Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only temporarily. feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the J noise. placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise. K looking for loose components and contact marks. Refer to BL-8, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting" . REPAIR THE CAUSE If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely. ● If the cause is insufficient clearance between components: – separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible. – insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized NISSAN Parts Department. CAUTION: Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged. Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be ordered separately as needed. URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick] Insulates connectors, harness, etc. 76268-9E005: 100×135 mm (3.94×5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60×85 mm (2.36×3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) INSULATOR (Foam blocks) Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel. 73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in) INSULATOR (Light foam block) L ● Revision: October 2004 BL-7 2005 Titan M SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES 80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30×50 mm (1.18×1.97 in) FELT CLOTH TAPE Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications. 68370-4B000: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll. The following materials not found in the kit can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles. UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications. SILICONE GREASE Used instead of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit. Note: Will only last a few months. SILICONE SPRAY Use when grease cannot be applied. DUCT TAPE Use to eliminate movement. CONFIRM THE REPAIR Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet. Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting EIS0048O Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information. INSTRUMENT PANEL Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between: 1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel 2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing 3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish 4. Instrument panel to windshield 5. Instrument panel mounting pins 6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter 7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness. CAUTION: Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will not be able to recheck the repair. CENTER CONSOLE Components to pay attention to include: 1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher 2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C 3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console. DOORS Pay attention to the: 1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise 2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher 3. Wiring harnesses tapping 4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise. Revision: October 2004 BL-8 2005 Titan SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES TRUNK Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner. In addition look for: 1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment 2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment 3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together 4. A loose license plate or bracket Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise. SUNROOF/HEADLINING A B C D Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following: 1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise 2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder 3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape. E F OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR) Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage. In addition look for: 1. Loose harness or harness connectors. 2. Front console map/reading lamp lense loose. 3. Loose screws at console attachment points. SEATS G H BL When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the noise. Cause of seat noise include: 1. Headrest rods and holder 2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame 3. The rear seatback lock and bracket These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component or applying urethane tape to the contact area. J K L UNDERHOOD Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then transmitted into the passenger compartment. Causes of transmitted underhood noise include: 1. Any component mounted to the engine wall 2. Components that pass through the engine wall 3. Engine wall mounts and connectors 4. Loose radiator mounting pins 5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment 6. Hood striker out of adjustment These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or insulating the component causing the noise. Revision: October 2004 BL-9 2005 Titan M SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Diagnostic Worksheet EIS0048P LIWA0276E Revision: October 2004 BL-10 2005 Titan SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES A B C D E F G H BL J K L M SBT844 Revision: October 2004 BL-11 2005 Titan HOOD HOOD Fitting Adjustment PFP:F5100 EIS0048Q LIIA1606E Revision: October 2004 BL-12 2005 Titan HOOD 1. Hood hinge 2. Hood damper stay 3. Hood lock assembly 4. Hood assembly 5. Front grille 6. Headlamp 7 Front fender A CLEARANCE AND SURFACE HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT B 1. Remove the hood lock assembly and adjust the height by rotating the bumper rubber until the hood clearance of hood and fender becomes 1 mm (0.04 in) lower than fitting standard dimension. 2. Temporarily tighten the hood lock, and position it by engaging it with the hood striker. Check the lock and striker for looseness, and tighten the lock bolt to the specified torque. 3. Adjust the clearance and surface height of hood and fender according to the fitting standard dimension by rotating right and left bumper rubbers. CAUTION: Adjust right/left gap between hood and each part to the following specification. Hood and headlamp (B–B) : Less than 2.0 mm C D E HOOD LOCK ADJUSTMENT 1. 2. 3. Move the hood lock to the left or right so that striker center is vertically aligned with hood lock center F (when viewed from vehicle front). Make sure the secondary latch is properly engaged with the secondary striker with hood's own weight by dropping it from G approx. 200 mm (7.87 in) height or by pressing it lightly approx. 3 kg (29 N, 7lb). CAUTION: Do not drop the hood from 300 mm (11.81 in) height or H higher. After adjusting hood lock, tighten the lock bolts to the specified torque. BL PIIA3806E Removal and Installation of Hood Assembly EIS0048R J K L M LIIA1078E 1. Support the hood latch striker with proper material to prevent it from falling. WARNING: Body injury may occur if no supporting rod is holding the hood open when removing the hood damper stay. 2. Remove the hinge nuts from the hood to remove the hood assembly. CAUTION: Operate with two workers, because of its heavy weight. Revision: October 2004 BL-13 2005 Titan HOOD Installation in the reverse order of removal. Removal and Installation of Hood Lock Control EIS0048S WIIA0612E 1. Hood lock assembly 2. Hood lock cable REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the front grill. Refer to EI-20, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the front fender protector (LH). Refer to EI-24, "Removal and Installation" . Disconnect the hood lock cable from the hood lock, and unclip it from the radiator core support upper and hoodledge. Remove the bolts and the hood opener. Remove the grommet on the dashboard, and pull the hood lock cable toward the passenger room. CAUTION: While pulling, be careful not to damage the outside of the hood lock cable. Revision: October 2004 BL-14 2005 Titan HOOD INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. A Pull the hood lock cable through the panel hole to the engine room. Be careful not to bend the cable too much, keeping the radius 100mm (3.94 in) or more. Make sure the cable is not offset from the positioning grommet, and push the grommet into the panel hole securely. Apply the sealant to the grommet (at * mark) properly. B C D PIIA0173E 4. 5. Install the cable securely to the lock. After installing, check the hood lock adjustment and hood opener operation. E F G PIIA0174E Hood Lock Control Inspection H EIS0048T CAUTION: If the hood lock cable is bent or deformed, replace it. 1. Make sure the secondary latch is properly engaged with the secondary striker with hood's own weight by dropping it from approx. 200 mm (7.87 in) height. 2. While operating the hood opener, carefully make sure the front end of the hood is raised by approx. 20 mm (0.79 in). Also make sure the hood opener returns to the original position. BL J K L PIIA1086E 3. M Check the hood lock lubrication condition. If necessary, apply body grease to the points shown in the figure. PIIA0176E Revision: October 2004 BL-15 2005 Titan POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:24814 EIS0048U WIIA0579E Revision: October 2004 BL-16 2005 Titan POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM System Description EIS0048V A Power is supplied at all times ● through 50A fusible link (letter f, located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to BCM terminal 70 and B ● through 10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to key switch and key lock solenoid terminal 3 (floor shift) or key switch terminal 3 (column shift) ● through 15A fuse [No. 22, located in the fuse block (J/B)] C ● to BCM terminal 57. With ignition key inserted, power is supplied D ● through key switch and key lock solenoid terminal 4 (floor shift) or key switch terminal 4 (column shift) ● to BCM terminal 37. Ground is supplied to terminal 67 of BCM through body grounds M57, M61 and M79. When the door is locked or unlocked with main power window and door lock/unlock switch, ground is supplied E ● to CPU of main power window and door lock/unlock switch ● through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 15 (King Cab) or 17 (Crew Cab) F ● through grounds M57, M61 and M79. Then main power window and door lock/unlock switch operation signal is supplied. ● to BCM terminal 22 G ● through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 12 (King Cab) or 14 (Crew Cab). When the door is locked or unlocked with power window and door lock/unlock switch RH, ground is supplied H ● to CPU of power window and door lock/unlock switch RH ● through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 11 ● through grounds M57, M61 and M79. BL Then power window and door lock/unlock switch RH operation signal is supplied ● to BCM terminal 22 ● through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 16. J When the door is locked with front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch), ground is supplied ● to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 6 (King Cab) or 4 (Crew Cab) ● through key cylinder switch terminals 1 and 5 K ● through grounds M57, M61 and M79. Then key cylinder switch operation signal is supplied L ● to BCM terminal 22 ● through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 12 (King Cab) or 14 (Crew Cab). When the door is unlocked with front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch), ground is supplied M ● to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 7 (King Cab) or 6 (Crew Cab) ● through key cylinder switch terminals 6 and 5 ● through grounds M57, M61 and M79. Then key cylinder switch operation signal is supplied ● to BCM terminal 22 ● through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 12 (King Cab) or 14 (Crew Cab). KING CAB BCM is connected to main power window and door lock/unlock switch and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH through a serial link. When the front door switch LH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 47 ● through front door switch LH terminals 2 and 3 ● through grounds B7 and B19. When the rear door switch upper LH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 47 Revision: October 2004 BL-17 2005 Titan POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM through rear door switch upper LH terminals 1 and 2 ● through grounds B7 and B19. When the rear door switch lower LH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 47 ● through rear door switch lower LH terminals 1 and 2 ● through grounds B7 and B19. When the front door switch RH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 12 ● through front door switch RH terminals 2 and 3 ● through grounds B117 and B132. When the rear door switch upper RH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 12 ● through rear door switch upper RH terminals 1 and 2 ● through grounds B117 and B132. When the rear door switch lower RH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 12 ● through rear door switch lower RH terminals 1 and 2 ● through grounds B117 and B132. ● CREW CAB BCM is connected to main power window and door lock/unlock switch and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH through a serial link. When the front door switch LH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 47 ● through front door switch LH terminal 2 ● through front door switch LH case ground. When the front door switch RH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 12 ● through front door switch RH terminal 2 ● through front door switch RH case ground. When the rear door switch LH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 48 ● through rear door switch LH terminal 2 ● through rear door switch LH case ground. When the rear door switch RH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 13 ● through rear door switch RH terminal 2 ● through rear door switch RH case ground. OUTLINE Functions available by operating the door lock and unlock switches on driver's door and passenger's door ● ● Interlocked with the locking operation of door lock and unlock switch, door lock actuators of all doors are locked. Interlocked with the unlocking operation of door lock and unlock switch, door lock actuators of all doors are unlocked. Functions available by operating the key cylinder switch on driver's door ● ● ● Interlocked with the locking operation of door key cylinder, door lock actuators of all doors are locked. When door key cylinder is unlocked, front door lock assembly LH is unlocked. When door key cylinder is unlocked for the second time within 5 seconds after the first operation, door lock actuators on all doors are unlocked. Revision: October 2004 BL-18 2005 Titan POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Key reminder door system When door lock and unlock switch is operated to lock doors with ignition key in key cylinder and any door open, all door lock actuators are locked and then unlocked. A B C D E F G H BL J K L M Revision: October 2004 BL-19 2005 Titan POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Schematic (King Cab) EIS0048W WIWA0273E Revision: October 2004 BL-20 2005 Titan POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK — (King Cab) EIS0048X A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIWA0760E Revision: October 2004 BL-21 2005 Titan POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM WIWA0787E Revision: October 2004 BL-22 2005 Titan POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIWA0788E Revision: October 2004 BL-23 2005 Titan POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM WIWA0300E Revision: October 2004 BL-24 2005 Titan POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIWA0275E Revision: October 2004 BL-25 2005 Titan POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Schematic (Crew Cab) EIS0048Y WIWA0299E Revision: October 2004 BL-26 2005 Titan POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Wiring Diagrams — D/LOCK — (Crew Cab) EIS0048Z A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIWA0761E Revision: October 2004 BL-27 2005 Titan POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM WIWA0304E Revision: October 2004 BL-28 2005 Titan POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIWA0786E Revision: October 2004 BL-29 2005 Titan POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM WIWA0789E Revision: October 2004 BL-30 2005 Titan POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Terminals and Reference Value for BCM EIS00490 A Terminal Wire Color Item Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Front door switch RH (All) 12 R/L Rear door switch lower RH (King Cab) B Door open (ON) → Door close (OFF) 0 → Battery voltage Rear door switch upper RH (King Cab) 13 22 GR G C Rear door switch RH (Crew Cab) Door open (ON) → Door close (OFF) Anti–pinch serial link When ignition switch is ON or power window timer operates 0 → Battery voltage D E PIIA2344E 37 B/R Key switch (insert) Key inserted in IGN key cylinder (ON) → Key removed from IGN key cylinder (OFF) Battery voltage → 0 G 39 L CAN-H — — 40 P CAN-L — — H Front door switch LH (All) 47 SB Rear door switch lower LH (King Cab) Door open (ON) → Door close (OFF) 0 → Battery voltage Door open (ON) → Door close (OFF) 0 → Battery voltage — Battery voltage Driver door lock knob (locked → unlocked) 0 → Battery voltage BL Rear door switch upper LH (King Cab) 48 R/Y Rear door switch LH (Crew Cab) 57 Y/R Battery power supply 59 G Front door lock assembly LH (unlock) 65 V All door lock actuator (lock) Driver door lock knob (neutral → lock) 0 → Battery voltage 66 G/Y Front door lock actuator RH and rear door lock actuators LH/RH (unlock) Door lock and unlock switch (locked → unlocked) 0 → Battery voltage 67 B 70 W/B Ground — — BAT power supply — Battery voltage Work Flow 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. J K L M EIS00491 Check the symptom and customer's requests. Understand the outline of system. Refer to BL-17, "System Description" . According to the trouble diagnosis chart, repair or replace the cause of the malfunction. Refer to BL-34, "Trouble Diagnoses Symptom Chart" . Does power door lock system operate normally? OK: GO TO 5, NG: GO TO 3. Inspection End. Revision: October 2004 F BL-31 2005 Titan POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM CONSULT–II Function (BCM) EIS00492 CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode WORK SUPPORT DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part Content Changes setting of each function. Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. SELF-DIAG RESULTS Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. ECU PART NUMBER BCM part number can be read. CONFIGURATION Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. CONSULT–II INSPECTION PROCEDURE "DOOR LOCK" CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. BBIA0369E 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. BCIA0029E 5. Touch “BCM”. If “BCM” is not indicated, refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . BCIA0030E Revision: October 2004 BL-32 2005 Titan POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM 6. Touch “DOOR LOCK”. A B C LIIA1137E D 7. Select diagnosis mode. “DATA MONITOR” and “ACTIVE TEST” are available. E F G BCIA0031E DATA MONITOR Monitor item "OPERATION" H Content KEY ON SW "ON/OFF" Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch. CDL LOCK SW "ON/OFF" Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from lock/unlock switch LH and RH. CDL UNLOCK SW "ON/OFF" Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from lock/unlock switch LH and RH. KEY CYL LK-SW "ON/OFF" Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from key cylinder. KEY CYL UN-SW "ON/OFF" Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from key cylinder. IGN ON SW "ON/OFF" Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch. DOOR SW–DR "ON/OFF" Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH. DOOR SW–AS "ON/OFF" Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch RH. DOOR SW–RR "ON/OFF" Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch RH. DOOR SW–RL "ON/OFF" Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch LH. BL J K L ACTIVE TEST Test item M Content ALL LOCK/UNLOCK This test is able to check all door lock actuators lock operation. These actuators lock when "ON" on CONSULT–II screen is touched. DR UNLOCK This test is able to check front door lock assembly LH unlock operation.These actuators lock when "ON" on CONSULT–II screen is touched. OTHER UNLOCK This test is able to check door lock actuators (except front door lock assembly LH) unlock operation.These actuators unlock when "ON" on CONSULT–II screen is touched. Revision: October 2004 BL-33 2005 Titan POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses Symptom Chart EIS00493 Symptom Repair order Key reminder door system does not operate properly. Refer to page 1. Door switch check BL-35 2. Key switch (Insert) check BL-39 3. Replace BCM. BCS-19 Power door lock does not operate with door lock and unlock switch on main power window and door lock/unlock switch or power window and door lock/unlock switch RH 1. Door lock/unlock switch check BL-42 Front door lock assembly LH does not operate. 1. Door lock actuator check (Front LH) BL-47 Specific door lock actuator does not operate. 1. Door lock actuator check (Front RH, Rear LH/ RH) BL-49 1. Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) check BL-51 Power door lock does not operate with front door key cylinder LH operation. 2. Replace BCM. Power door lock does not operate. BCS-19 1. BCM power supply and ground circuit check BL-34 2. Door lock/unlock switch check BL-42 BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check EIS00494 1. CHECK FUSE Check the following BCM fuses and fusible link. Component Parts BCM Terminal No. (SIGNAL) Ampere No. 57 (BAT power supply) 15A 22 70 (BAT power supply) 50A f Location Fuse block (J/B) Fuse and fusible link box NOTE: Refer to BL-16, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse, refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM. Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminals 57, 70 and ground. Connector Terminals (Wire color) ( + ) Ground 57 (Y/R) Ignition switch Voltage Battery power supply OFF Battery voltage Battery power supply OFF Battery voltage ( – ) 70 (W/B) M20 Signal name OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: October 2004 LIIA1252E BL-34 2005 Titan POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT A Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 67 and ground. B Terminals (Wire color) Connector M20 Continuity (+) (-) 67 (B) Ground C Yes OK or NG OK >> Power supply and ground circuit is OK. NG >> Repair or replace harness. D LIIA1040E Door Switch Check (King Cab) EIS00495 1. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Check door switches ("DOOR SW-DR", "DOOR SW-AS") in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" . ● When any doors are open: DOOR SW-DR DOOR SW-AS ● E F G :ON :ON H When any doors are closed: DOOR SW-DR DOOR SW-AS :OFF :OFF BL J WIIA0560E Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between BCM connector M18 or M19 terminals 12, 47 and ground. Terminals (Wire color) Connector Item M19 Door switches LH M18 Door switches RH (+) (–) 47 (SB) Ground 12 (R/L) Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) L Open ↓ Closed 0 ↓ Battery voltage M OK or NG OK >> System is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 K LIIA1174E BL-35 2005 Titan POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM 2. CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door switch and BCM. Check continuity between door switch connector B8 (Front LH), B108 (Front RH) terminal 2, B73 (Rear upper LH), B156 (Rear upper RH), B74 (Rear lower LH), B157 (Rear lower RH) terminal 1 and BCM connector M18, M19 terminals 12, and 47. 2 (SB) - 47 (SB) 2 (R/L) - 12 (R/L) 1 (SB) - 47 (SB) 1 (R/L) - 12 (R/L) 4. :Continuity should exist :Continuity should exist :Continuity should exist :Continuity should exist Check continuity between door switch connector B8 (Front LH), B108 (Front RH) terminal 2, B73 (Rear upper LH), B156 (Rear upper RH), B74 (Rear lower LH), B157 (Rear lower RH) terminal 1 and ground. 2 (SB or R/L) - Ground 1 (SB or R/L) - Ground :Continuity should not exist :Continuity should not exist LIIA1175E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. 3. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES 1. 2. Disconnect door switch. Check continuity between door switch terminals. Item Terminal Door switches (front) 2–3 Door switches (rear upper and lower) 1–2 Condition Continuity Open No Closed Yes Open No Closed Yes OK or NG OK >> Repair or replace harness. NG >> Replace door switch. WIIA0595E Revision: October 2004 BL-36 2005 Titan POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) EIS00496 1. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL A With CONSULT-II Check door switches ("DOOR SW-DR", "DOOR SW-AS", "DOOR SW-RL", "DOOR SW-RR") in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" . ● When any doors are open: DOOR SW-DR DOOR SW-AS DOOR SW-RL DOOR SW-RR ● C :ON :ON :ON :ON D When any doors are closed: DOOR SW-DR DOOR SW-AS DOOR SW-RL DOOR SW-RR E :OFF :OFF :OFF :OFF PIIA6222E M19 M18 Terminals (Wire color) Item (+) Front door switch LH 47 (SB) Rear door switch LH 48 (R/Y) (–) 12 (R/L) Rear door switch RH 13 (GR) H Voltage (V) (Approx.) BL Ground Front door switch RH Condition F G Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between BCM connector M18 or M19 terminals 12, 13, 47, 48 and ground. Connector B Open ↓ Closed 0 ↓ Battery voltage J LIIA1177E OK or NG OK >> System is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. K L M Revision: October 2004 BL-37 2005 Titan POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM 2. CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door switch and BCM. Check continuity between door switch connector B8 (Front LH), B108 (Front RH), B18 (Rear LH), B116 (Rear RH) terminal 2 and BCM connector M18, M19 terminals 12, 13, 47 and 48. 2 (SB) - 47 (SB) 2 (R/L) - 12 (R/L) 2 (R/Y) - 48 (R/Y) 2 (GR) - 13 (GR) 4. :Continuity should exist :Continuity should exist :Continuity should exist :Continuity should exist Check continuity between door switch connector B8 (Front LH), B108 (Front RH), B18 (Rear LH), B116 (Rear RH) terminal 2 and ground. 2 (SB, R/L, R/Y or GR) Ground :Continuity should not exist LIIA1178E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. 3. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES 1. 2. Disconnect door switch. Check continuity between door switch terminals. Terminal Door switch (front and rear) 2 – Ground Condition Continuity Open Yes Closed No OK or NG OK >> Check door switch case ground condition. NG >> Replace door switch. LIIA1179E Revision: October 2004 BL-38 2005 Titan POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Key Switch (Insert) Check (Column Shift) EIS00497 1. CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL A With CONSULT-II Check key switch "KEY ON SW" in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" . ● When key is inserted to ignition key cylinder: KEY ON SW B C :ON When key is removed from ignition key cylinder: ● KEY ON SW D :OFF E LIIA0169E Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 37 and ground. Connector M18 G Terminal (Wire color) (+) (–) 37 (B/R) Ground Condition Voltage (V) Key is inserted. Battery voltage Key is removed. 0 OK or NG OK >> System is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. F H BL LIIA0567E J 2. CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT) 1. 2. 3. K Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect key switch connector. Check continuity between key switch terminals 3 and 4. Terminals 3–4 Condition Continuity Key is inserted. Yes Key is removed. No L M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace key switch. WIIA0313E Revision: October 2004 BL-39 2005 Titan POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM 3. CHECK KEY SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Disconnect BCM connector. Check continuity between the BCM harness connector M18 terminal 37 (B/R) and key switch harness connector M80 terminal 4 (B/R). Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 37 (B/R) and ground. 37 (B/R) - 4 (B/R) 37 (B/R) - Ground : Continuity should exist : Continuity should not exist OK or NG OK >> Check the following. ● 10A fuse [No. 19, located in fuse block (J/B)] ● Harness for open or short between key switch and fuse NG >> Repair or replace harness. Key Switch (Insert) Check (Floor Shift) WIIA0596E EIS00498 1. CHECK KEY SWITCH AND KEY LOCK SOLENOID INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Check key switch "KEY ON SW" in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" . ● When key is inserted to ignition key cylinder: KEY ON SW ● :ON When key is removed from ignition key cylinder: KEY ON SW :OFF LIIA0169E Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 37 and ground. Connector M18 Terminal (Wire color) (+) (–) 37 (B/R) Ground Condition Voltage (V) Key is inserted. Battery voltage Key is removed. 0 OK or NG OK >> System is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 LIIA0567E BL-40 2005 Titan POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM 2. CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT) 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect key switch and key lock solenoid connector. Check continuity between key switch and key lock solenoid terminals 3 and 4. Terminals 3–4 Condition Continuity Key is inserted. Yes Key is removed. No B C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace key switch and key lock solenoid. D E LIIA1044E 3. CHECK KEY SWITCH AND KEY LOCK SOLENOID CIRCUIT F 1. 2. G 3. Disconnect BCM connector. Check continuity between the BCM harness connector M18 terminal 37 (B/R) and key switch and key lock solenoid harness connector M27 terminal 4 (B/R). Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 37 (B/R) and ground. 37 (B/R) - 4 (B/R) 37 (B/R) - Ground H : Continuity should exist : Continuity should not exist OK or NG OK >> Check the following. ● 10A fuse [No. 19, located in fuse block (J/B)] ● Harness for open or short between key switch and key lock solenoid and fuse NG >> Repair or replace harness. BL WIIA0597E J K L M Revision: October 2004 BL-41 2005 Titan POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (King Cab) EIS00499 1. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Check door lock/unlock switch ("CDL LOCK SW", "CDL UNLOCK SW") in DATA MONITOR mode in CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" . ● When door lock/unlock switch is turned to LOCK: CDL LOCK SW ● :ON When door lock/unlock switch is turned to UNLOCK: CDL UNLOCK SW :ON PIIA6538E Without CONSULT-II Remove key from ignition key cylinder. Check the signal between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and ground with oscilloscope when door lock/ unlock switch is turned to LOCK or UNLOCK. 3. Make sure the signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 seconds just after the door lock/unlock switch is turned to LOCK or UNLOCK. 1. 2. Connector M18 Terminal (Wire color) (+) (–) 22 (G) Ground Signal (Reference value) PIIA1297E PIIA6379E OK or NG OK >> Door lock and unlock switch circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL Check ("POWER WINDOW DOWN") in ACTIVE TEST mode for "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM" with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-71, "Active Test" . When "ACTIVE TEST" is performed, are the front windows lowered? OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . PIIA3080E Revision: October 2004 BL-42 2005 Titan POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM 3. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH GROUND HARNESS 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch or power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Check continuity between main power window and door lock/ unlock switch connector D7 terminal 15 and ground. 15 (B) - Ground B C : Continuity should exist D E LIIA0604E 4. Check continuity between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 11 and ground. 11 (B) - Ground F : Continuity should exist G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. H LIIA1140E BL J K L M Revision: October 2004 BL-43 2005 Titan POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM 4. CHECK POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM. Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 12. 22 (G) - 12 (LG/W) : Continuity should exist LIIA0649E 3. Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 16. 22 (G) - 16 (LG/W) : Continuity should exist OK or NG OK >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch or power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. NG >> Repair or replace harness. WIIA0598E Revision: October 2004 BL-44 2005 Titan POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (Crew Cab) EIS0049A 1. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL A With CONSULT-II Check door lock/unlock switch ("CDL LOCK SW", "CDL UNLOCK SW") in DATA MONITOR mode in CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" . ● When door lock/unlock switch is turned to LOCK: CDL LOCK SW ● B C :ON When door lock/unlock switch is turned to UNLOCK: CDL UNLOCK SW D :ON E PIIA6538E Without CONSULT-II Remove key from ignition key cylinder. Check the signal between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and ground with oscilloscope when door lock/ unlock switch is turned to LOCK or UNLOCK. 3. Make sure the signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 seconds just after the door lock/unlock switch is turned to LOCK or UNLOCK. 1. 2. Connector Terminal (Wire color) (+) (–) F G H BL Signal (Reference value) J M18 22 (G) Ground K PIIA1297E PIIA6379E OK or NG OK >> Door lock and unlock switch circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. M 2. CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL Check ("POWER WINDOW DOWN") in ACTIVE TEST mode for "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM" with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-71, "Active Test" . When "ACTIVE TEST" is performed, are the front windows lowered? OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . PIIA3080E Revision: October 2004 L BL-45 2005 Titan POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM 3. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH GROUND HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch or power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Check continuity between main power window and door lock/ unlock switch connector D8 terminal 17 and ground. 17 (B) - Ground : Continuity should exist LIIA0392E 4. Check continuity between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 11 and ground. 11 (B) - Ground : Continuity should exist OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA1140E Revision: October 2004 BL-46 2005 Titan POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM 4. CHECK POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect BCM. Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 14. 22 (G) - 14 (LG/W) B : Continuity should exist C D E LIIA0394E 3. Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 16. 22 (G) - 16 (LG/W) F : Continuity should exist G OK or NG OK >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch or power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. NG >> Repair or replace harness. H BL WIIA0598E Door Lock Actuator Check (Front LH) EIS0049B J 1. CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR SIGNAL Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminals 59, 65 and ground. Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) L Driver door lock/unlock switch is turned to UNLOCK 0 → Battery voltage M Driver door lock/unlock switch is turned to LOCK 0 → Battery voltage (-) 59 (G) M20 K Ground 65 (V) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . Revision: October 2004 BL-47 LIIA1046E 2005 Titan POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM 2. CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR HARNESS 1. 2. Disconnect BCM and front door lock assembly LH. Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminals 59, 65 and front door lock assembly LH connector D14 terminals 2, 3. Connector Terminals (Wire color) Connector 59 (G) M20 3. D14 65 (V) Terminals (wire color) Continuity 2 (G) Yes 3 (V) Yes Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminals 59, 65 and ground. Connector Terminals (Wire color) 59 (G) M20 65 (V) Continuity WIIA0316E No Ground No OK or NG OK >> Replace front door lock assembly LH. Refer to BL-127, "Removal and Installation" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: October 2004 BL-48 2005 Titan POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Door Lock Actuator Check (Front RH) EIS0049C 1. CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR SIGNAL A Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminals 65, 66 and ground. Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition (-) 65 (V) M20 Ground 66 (G/Y) B Door lock/unlock switch is turned to LOCK 0 → Battery voltage Door lock/unlock switch is turned to UNLOCK 0 → Battery voltage C D OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . LIIA1048E E 2. CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR HARNESS 1. 2. Disconnect BCM and door lock actuator RH. Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminals 65, 66 and front door lock actuator RH terminals 2, 3. Terminal 3. F G Continuity 65 (V) 3 (V) Yes 66 (G/Y) 2 (G/Y) Yes H BL Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminals 65, 66 and ground. Terminals (Wire color) 65 (V) 66 (G/Y) Continuity No Ground WIIA0317E J No K OK or NG OK >> Replace front door lock actuator RH. Refer to BL-127, "Removal and Installation" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. L M Revision: October 2004 BL-49 2005 Titan POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Door Lock Actuator Check (Rear RH/LH) EIS0049D 1. CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR SIGNAL Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminals 65, 66 and ground. Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition (-) 65 (V) M20 Ground 66 (G/Y) Door lock/unlock switch is turned to LOCK 0 → Battery voltage Door lock/unlock switch is turned to UNLOCK 0 → Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . LIIA1048E 2. CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR HARNESS 1. 2. Disconnect BCM and inoperative door lock actuator. Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminals 65, 66 and rear door lock actuator connector terminals 2, 3. Terminal 3. Continuity 65 (V) 3 (V) Yes 66 (G/Y) 2 (G/Y) Yes Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminals 65, 66 and ground. Terminals (Wire color) 65 (V) 66 (G/Y) Continuity No Ground WIIA0318E No OK or NG OK >> Replace door lock actuator. Refer to BL-131, "Removal and Installation" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: October 2004 BL-50 2005 Titan POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) EIS0049E 1. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LH A With CONSULT-II Check front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) ("KEY CYL LK-SW") and ("KEY CYL UN-SW) in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" . ● When key inserted in front key cylinder is turned to LOCK: KEY CYL LK-SW B C : ON When key inserted in front key cylinder is turned to UNLOCK: ● KEY CYL UN-SW D : ON E LIIA0188E F Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminals 6, 7 and ground. Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Neutral/Unlock 5 Lock 0 Neutral/Lock 5 Unlock 0 (–) 6 (L) D7 Condition Ground 7 (R) G H BL J LIIA1256E OK or NG OK >> Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) signal is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. K 2. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LH 1. 2. L Disconnect front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch). Check continuity between door key cylinder switch LH connector terminals 1, 5 and 6. Terminals Condition Continuity 1–5 Key is turned to LOCK. Yes 6–5 Key is turned to UNLOCK. Yes M OK or NG OK >> Check the following. ● Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) ground circuit. ● Harness for open or short between main power winWIIA0319E dow and door lock/unlock switch and front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch). NG >> Replace front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch). Refer to BL-127, "Removal and Installation" . Revision: October 2004 BL-51 2005 Titan POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) EIS0049F 1. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LH With CONSULT-II Check front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) ("KEY CYL LK-SW") and ("KEY CYL UN-SW) in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" . ● When key inserted in front key cylinder is turned to LOCK: KEY CYL LK-SW : ON When key inserted in front key cylinder is turned to UNLOCK: ● KEY CYL UN-SW : ON LIIA0188E Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminals 4, 6 and ground. Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Neutral/Unlock 5 Lock 0 (–) 4 (L) D7 Condition Ground 6 (R) Neutral/Lock 5 Unlock 0 LIIA1273E OK or NG OK >> Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) signal is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LH 1. 2. Disconnect front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch). Check continuity between door key cylinder switch LH connector terminals 1, 5 and 6. Terminals Condition Continuity 1–5 Key is turned to LOCK. Yes 6–5 Key is turned to UNLOCK. Yes OK or NG OK >> Check the following. ● Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) ground circuit. ● Harness for open or short between main power winWIIA0319E dow and door lock/unlock switch and front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch). NG >> Replace front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch). Refer to BL-127, "Removal and Installation" . Revision: October 2004 BL-52 2005 Titan REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:28596 A EIS0049G B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIIA0580E Revision: October 2004 BL-53 2005 Titan REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM System Description EIS0049H INPUTS Power is supplied at all times ● to BCM terminal 70 ● through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box). ● to BCM terminal 57 ● through 15A fuse [No. 22, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. When the key switch and key lock solenoid (floor shift) or key switch (column shift) is ON (inserted), power is supplied ● to BCM terminal 37 ● through key switch and key lock solenoid (floor shift) or key switch (column shift) terminals 3 and 4 ● through 10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. When the ignition switch is ACC or ON, power is supplied ● to BCM terminal 11 ● through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. When the ignition switch is ON or START, power is supplied ● to BCM terminal 38 ● through 10A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box). KING CAB BCM is connected to main power window and door lock/unlock switch and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH through a serial link. When the front door switch LH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 47 ● through front door switch LH terminals 2 and 3 ● through grounds B7 and B19. When the rear door switch upper LH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 47 ● through rear door switch upper LH terminals 1 and 2 ● through grounds B7 and B19. When the rear door switch lower LH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 47 ● through rear door switch lower LH terminals 1 and 2 ● through grounds B7 and B19. When the front door switch RH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 12 ● through front door switch RH terminals 2 and 3 ● through grounds B117 and B132. When the rear door switch upper RH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 12 ● through rear door switch upper RH terminals 1 and 2 ● through grounds B117 and B132. When the rear door switch lower RH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 12 ● through rear door switch lower RH terminals 1 and 2 ● through grounds B117 and B132. CREW CAB BCM is connected to main power window and door lock/unlock switch and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH through a serial link. When the front door switch LH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied Revision: October 2004 BL-54 2005 Titan REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM to BCM terminal 47 ● through front door switch LH terminal 2 ● through front door switch LH case ground. When the front door switch RH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 12 ● through front door switch RH terminal 2 ● through front door switch RH case ground. When the rear door switch LH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 48 ● through rear door switch LH terminal 2 ● through rear door switch LH case ground. When the rear door switch RH is ON (door is open), ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 13 ● through rear door switch RH terminal 2 ● through rear door switch RH case ground. Keyfob signal is inputted to BCM from the remote keyless entry receiver. The remote keyless entry system controls operation of the ● power door lock ● interior lamp and step lamps ● panic alarm ● hazard and horn reminder ● keyless power window down (open) ● auto door lock operation ● A B C D E F G H BL OPERATED PROCEDURE ● ● ● ● ● ● ● When the keyfob is operated, the signal from the keyfob is sent and the remote keyless entry receiver receives the signal and sends it to the BCM. The BCM only locks/unlocks the doors if the ID number matches. (Remote control entry functions) Using the keyfob, the transmitter sends radio waves to the remote keyless entry receiver, which then sends the received waves to the BCM. Only if the ID number matches does the BCM lock/unlock the doors. (Remote control door function) Unless the key is inserted into the ignition key cylinder or one of the doors is opened within 1 minute after the UNLOCK switch on the keyfob is pressed, all the doors are automatically locked. (Auto lock function) When a door is locked or unlocked, the vehicle turn signal lamps flash and the horn sounds to verify operation. (Active check function) When the key is in the ignition key cylinder [when the key switch and key lock solenoid (floor shift) or key switch (column shift) is ON (inserted)] and one of the doors is open, the door lock function does not work even when the door lock is operated with the keyfob. Keyfob ID set up is available. If a keyfob is lost, a new keyfob can be set up. A maximum of 5 IDs can be set up simultaneously. Remote Control Entry Functions Operation Description ● When a button on the keyfob is operated, the signal is sent from the keyfob and received by the keyless remote entry receiver. ● The received signal is sent to the BCM and compared with the registered ID number. ● If the ID number matches, the BCM uses communication to send the lock/unlock signal to each door lock actuator. ● When the door lock actuators receive this communication, each operates to lock/unlock its door. Remote control entry operation conditions Revision: October 2004 BL-55 2005 Titan J K L M REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Keyfob operation Operation condition Door lock operation (locking) Door lock operation (unlocking) ● With key removed (key switch: OFF) ● Closing all doors (door switch: OFF) With key removed (key switch: OFF) Auto Lock Function Operation Description ● Unless the key is inserted into the ignition key cylinder, one of the doors is opened, or the keyfob is operated within 1 minute after a door lock is unlocked by keyfob operation, all the doors are automatically locked. The 1 minute timer count is executed by the BCM and after 1 minute, the BCM sends the lock signal to all doors. Lock operations are the same as for the remote control entry function. Active Check Function Operation Description When a door is locked or unlocked by keyfob operation, the vehicle turn signals flash and the horn sounds to verify operation. ● When a button on the keyfob is operated, the signal is sent from the remote controller and received by the keyless remote entry receiver. ● The received signal is sent to the BCM and compared with the registered ID number. ● If the ID number matches, the BCM uses communication to send the turn signal flashing and horn signal to the IPDM E/R. ● The IPDM E/R flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the horn for each keyfob operation. Operating function of hazard and horn reminder C mode S mode Keyfob operation Lock Unlock Lock Unlock Hazard warning lamp flash Twice Once Twice — Horn sound Once — — — Hazard and Horn Reminder BCM output to IPDM E/R for horn reminder signal as DATA LINE (CAN-H line and CAN-L line). The hazard and horn reminder has C mode (horn chirp mode) and S mode (non-horn chirp mode). Operating function of hazard and horn reminder C mode S mode Remote controller operation Lock Unlock Lock Unlock Hazard warning lamp flash Twice Once Twice — Horn sound Once — — — How to change hazard and horn reminder mode With CONSULT-II Hazard and horn reminder can be changed using “WORK SUPPORT” mode in “MULTI ANSWER BACK SET". Without CONSULT-II Revision: October 2004 BL-56 2005 Titan REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM When LOCK and UNLOCK signals are sent from the keyfob for more than 2 seconds at the same time, the hazard and horn reminder mode is changed and hazard warning lamp flashes and horn sounds as follows: A B C D SEL153WA Interior Lamp Operation When the following input signals are both supplied: ● all door switches are in the OFF position (when all the doors are closed) and ● interior lamp switch is in DOOR position. Remote keyless entry system turns on interior lamp and (for 30 seconds) with input of UNLOCK signal from keyfob. For detailed description, refer to LT-129, "ROOM LAMP TIMER OPERATION" . E F G Panic Alarm Operation When key switch is OFF (when ignition key is removed from the key cylinder), remote keyless entry system turns on and off horn and headlamp intermittently with input of PANIC ALARM signal from keyfob. The alarm automatically turns off after 25 seconds or when BCM receives any signal from keyfob. H Keyless Power Window Down (open) Operation When keyfob unlock switch is turned ON with ignition switch OFF, and the switch is detected to be on continu- BL ously for 3 seconds, the driver's door and passenger's door power windows are simultaneously opened. Power window is operated to open and the operation continues as long as the keyfob unlock switch is pressed. J K L M Revision: October 2004 BL-57 2005 Titan REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM CAN Communication System Description EIS0049I Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Revision: October 2004 BL-58 2005 Titan REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Schematic (King Cab) EIS0049J A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIWA0279E Revision: October 2004 BL-59 2005 Titan REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Wiring Diagram — KEYLES — (King Cab) EIS0049K WIWA0832E Revision: October 2004 BL-60 2005 Titan REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIWA0762E Revision: October 2004 BL-61 2005 Titan REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM WIWA0790E Revision: October 2004 BL-62 2005 Titan REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIWA0763E Revision: October 2004 BL-63 2005 Titan REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Schematic (Crew Cab) EIS0049L WIWA0283E Revision: October 2004 BL-64 2005 Titan REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Wiring Diagram — KEYLES — (Crew Cab) EIS0049M A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIWA0833E Revision: October 2004 BL-65 2005 Titan REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM WIWA0764E Revision: October 2004 BL-66 2005 Titan REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIWA0765E Revision: October 2004 BL-67 2005 Titan REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Terminals and Reference Value for BCM Terminal Wire Color 11 O EIS0049N Item Ignition switch (ACC) Condition Ignition switch in ACC Voltage (V) (Approx.) Battery voltage Front door switch RH (All) 12 R/L Rear door switch upper RH (King Cab) Door close (OFF) → Open (ON) Battery voltage → 0 Rear door switch lower RH (King Cab) 13 GR 18 P 19 V/W Rear door switch RH (Crew Cab) Door close (OFF) → Open (ON) Battery voltage → 0 Remote keyless entry receiver ground — 0 Remote keyless entry receiver (Power supply) Ignition switch OFF LIIA1893E Stand-by (keyfob buttons released) 20 G/W LIIA1894E Remote keyless entry receiver signal (Signal) When remote keyless entry receiver receives signal from keyfob (keyfob buttons pressed) LIIA1895E 37 B/R Key switch Key inserted in IGN key cylinder → Key removed from IGN key cylinder 38 W/L Ignition switch (ON) Ignition switch ON 39 L CAN-H — — 40 P CAN-L — — Battery voltage → 0 Battery voltage Front door switch LH (All) 47 SB Rear door switch upper LH (King Cab) Door close (OFF) → Open (ON) Battery voltage → 0 Rear door switch lower LH (King Cab) 48 R/Y Rear door switch LH (Crew Cab) Door close (OFF) → Open (ON) Battery voltage → 0 56 R/G Battery saver (Interior lamp) Battery saver does operated → Does not operated (ON → OFF) Battery voltage → 0 57 Y/R Power source (BAT) 59 G Driver door lock actuator Revision: October 2004 — Door lock & unlock switch (Neutral → Unlock) BL-68 Battery voltage 0 → Battery voltage 2005 Titan REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Terminal Wire Color Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) 60 G/B Turn signal LH When doors are locked or unlocked using keyfob (OFF → ON) *2 0 → Battery voltage 61 G/Y Turn signal RH When doors are locked or unlocked using keyfob (OFF → ON) *2 0 → Battery voltage 62 R/W Step lamp LH and RH 63 L Item Room lamp Step lamp ON 0 Step lamp OFF Battery voltage Room lamp ON *1 Battery voltage Room Lamp OFF *1 65 V 66 G/Y 67 B 69 70 A D Door lock actuators 0 → Battery voltage Passenger and rear doors lock actuator Door lock & unlock switch (Neutral → Unlock) 0 → Battery voltage Ground — 0 W/R Power window power source — Battery voltage W/B Power source (BAT) — Battery voltage *1: when room lamp switch is in "DOOR" position. ● *2: when hazard reminder is ON. C 0 Door lock & unlock switch (Neutral → Lock) ● B E F G Terminals and Reference Value for IPDM E/R EIS0049O H Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Ground — 0 L CAN-H — — P CAN-L — — Terminal Wire Color 38 B 39 40 45 G/W 59 B Item Horn relay When doors locks are operated using keyfob (OFF → ON) * Ground — BL J Battery voltage → 0 0 K *: when horn reminder is ON. CONSULT-II Function (BCM) EIS0049P L CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode WORK SUPPORT DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part Content M Changes setting of each function. Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. SELF-DIAG RESULTS Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. ECU PART NUMBER BCM part number can be read. CONFIGURATION Revision: October 2004 Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. BL-69 2005 Titan REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure EIS0049Q “MULTI REMOTE ENT” CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. BBIA0369E 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. BCIA0029E 5. Touch “BCM”. If “BCM” is not indicated, refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . BCIA0030E 6. Touch “MULTI REMOTE ENT”. LIIA0194E Revision: October 2004 BL-70 2005 Titan REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM 7. Select diagnosis mode. “DATA MONITOR”, “ACTIVE TEST” and “WORK SUPPORT” are available. A B C BCIA0031E D CONSULT-II Application Items EIS0049R “MULTI REMOTE ENT” Data Monitor E Monitored Item Description DOOR SW-AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch RH. DOOR SW-RR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch RH. DOOR SW-RL Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch LH. F DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH. KEY ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch. ACC ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ACC position. IGN ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ON position. KEYLESS PANIC Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of panic signal from keyfob. KEYLESS UNLOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from keyfob. KEYLESS LOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from keyfob. KEY CYL LK-SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from door key cylinder switch. KEY CYL UN-SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from door key cylinder switch. CDL UNLOCK SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from lock/unlock switch. CDL LOCK SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from lock/unlock switch. RKE LCK-UNLCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock/unlock signal at the same time from keyfob. RKE KEEP UNLK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from keyfob. G H BL J Active Test L Test Item Description FLASHER This test is able to check right and left hazard reminder operation. The right hazard lamp turns on when “RH” on CONSULT-II screen is touched and the left hazard lamp turns on when "LH" on CONSULT-II screen is touched. POWER WINDOW DOWN This test is able to check power window down operation. The windows are lowered when “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched. HORN This test is able to check panic alarm and horn reminder operations. The alarm activate for 0.5 seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched. DOOR LOCK This test is able to check door lock operation. The doors lock and unlock based on the item on CONSULT-II screen touched. Work Support Test Item Description REMO CONT ID REGIST Keyfob ID code can be registered. REMO CONT ID ERASUR Keyfob ID code can be erased. REMO CONT ID CONFIR It can be checked whether keyfob ID code is registered or not in this mode. HORN CHIRP SET Horn chirp function mode can be changed in this mode. The function mode will be changed when "CHANG SETT" on CONSULT-II screen is touched. Revision: October 2004 K BL-71 2005 Titan M REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Test Item Description HAZARD LAMP SET Hazard lamp function mode can be changed in this mode. The function mode will be changed when "CHANG SETT" on CONSULT-II screen is touched. MULTI ANSWER BACK SET Hazard and horn reminder mode can be changed in this mode. The reminder mode will be changed when “CHANG SETT” on CONSULT-II screen is touched. AUTO LOCK SET Auto locking function mode can be changed in this mode. The function mode will be changed when "CHANG SETT" on CONSULT-II screen is touched. PANIC ALRM SET Panic alarm operation mode can be changed in this mode. The operation mode will be changed when "CHANG SETT" on CONSULT-II screen is touched. PW DOWN SET Keyless power window down (open) operation mode can be changed in this mode. The operation mode will be changed when "CHANG SETT" on CONSULT-II screen is touched. Hazard and horn reminder mode MODE 1 (C mode) MODE 2 (S mode) MODE 3 MODE 4 MODE 5 MODE 6 Keyfob operation Lock Unlock Lock Unlock Lock Unlock Lock Unlock Lock Unlock Lock Unlock Hazard warning lamp flash Twice Once Twice — — — Twice Once Twice — — Once Horn sound Once — — — — — — — Once — Once — Auto locking function mode Auto locking function MODE 1 MODE 2 MODE 3 5 minutes Nothing 1 minute MODE 1 MODE 2 MODE 3 0.5 seconds Nothing 1.5 seconds MODE 1 MODE 2 MODE 3 3 seconds Nothing 5 seconds Panic alarm operation mode Keyfob operation Keyless power window down operation mode Keyfob operation Revision: October 2004 BL-72 2005 Titan REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Trouble Diagnosis Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. EIS0049S Check the trouble symptom and customer's requests. Understand outline of system. Refer to BL-54, "System Description" . Confirm system operation. ● Check that the power door lock system operates normally. Refer to BL-16, "POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM" . Perform pre-diagnosis inspection. Refer to BL-73, "Pre-Diagnosis Inspection" . Refer to trouble diagnosis chart by symptom, repair or replace any malfunctioning parts. Refer to BL-74, "Trouble Diagnoses" . Inspection End. Pre-Diagnosis Inspection A B C D EIS0049T 1. CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION E Confirm BCM Configuration for "KEYLESS ENTRY" is set to "WITH". Refer to BCS-13, "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> Continue Trouble Diagnosis. Refer to BL-73, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check" . NG >> Change BCM Configuration for "KEYLESS ENTRY" to "WITH". Refer to BCS-16, "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" . BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check F G EIS0049U 1. CHECK FUSE H Check the following BCM fuses and fusible link. Component Parts BCM Terminal No. (SIGNAL) Ampere No. Location 57 (BAT power supply) 15A 22 70 (BAT power supply) 50A f Fuse and fusible link box 11 (ACC power supply) 10A 4 Fuse block (J/B) 38 (IGN power supply) 10A 59 Fuse and relay box BL Fuse block (J/B) J NOTE: Refer to BL-16, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location" . K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse, refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . L M Revision: October 2004 BL-73 2005 Titan REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM. Check voltage between BCM connectors M18, M20 terminals 11, 38, 57, 70 and ground. Connector Terminals (Wire color) Signal name Ignition switch Voltage 70 (W/B) Battery power supply OFF Battery voltage 57 (Y/R) Battery power supply OFF Battery voltage 11 (O) ACC power supply ACC Battery voltage 38 (W/L) IGN power supply ON Battery voltage ( + ) ( – ) M20 Ground M18 LIIA1274E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 67 and ground. Terminals (Wire color) Connector M20 Continuity (+) (-) 67 (B) Ground Yes OK or NG OK >> Power supply and ground circuit is OK. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA1040E Trouble Diagnoses EIS0049V SYMPTOM CHART NOTE: ● Always check the "Trouble Diagnosis Procedure" before troubleshooting. Refer to BL-73, "Trouble Diagnosis Procedure" . ● Always check keyfob battery before replacing keyfob. Refer to BL-82, "Keyfob Battery and Function Check" . ● The panic alarm operation of remote keyless entry system does not activate with the ignition key inserted in the ignition key cylinder. ● Use Remote Keyless Entry Tester J-43241 (follow instructions on tester) to check operation of keyfob before replacing keyfob. Symptom Diagnoses/service procedure 1. Keyfob battery and function check (use Remote Keyless Entry Tester J-43241) All functions of remote keyless entry system do not operate. BL-82 NOTE: If the result of keyfob function check with CONSULT-II is OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning. 2. Check BCM and keyless receiver. Revision: October 2004 Reference page BL-74 BL-83 2005 Titan REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Symptom Diagnoses/service procedure 1. Keyfob battery and function check (use Remote Keyless Entry Tester J-43241) Reference page BL-82 B NOTE: If the result of keyfob function check with CONSULT-II is OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning. The new ID of keyfob cannot be entered. 2. Key switch (insert) check BL-76, BL78 3. Door switch check BL-79, BL81 4. ACC power check BL-85 5. Replace BCM. Door lock or unlock does not function. (If the power door lock system does not operate manually, check power door lock system. Refer to BL-16, "POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM" ) 1. Keyfob battery and function check (use Remote Keyless Entry Tester J-43241) BL-82 Hazard and horn reminder does not activate properly when pressing lock or unlock button of keyfob. 2. Door switch check 3. Replace BCM. D E F BCS-19 1. Check hazard and horn reminder mode with CONSULT-II NOTE: Hazard and horn reminder mode can be changed. First check the hazard and horn reminder mode setting. C BCS-19 NOTE: If the result of keyfob function check with CONSULT-II is OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning. 2. Replace BCM. A G BL-71 BL-79, BL81 BCS-19 H BL 1. Check hazard reminder mode with CONSULT-II Hazard reminder does not activate properly when pressing lock or unlock button of keyfob. (Horn reminder OK) NOTE: Hazard reminder mode can be changed. First check the hazard reminder mode setting. 2. Check hazard function with hazard switch 3. Replace BCM. BL-71 J — BCS-19 K 1. Check horn reminder mode with CONSULT-II Horn reminder does not activate properly when pressing lock or unlock button of keyfob. (Hazard reminder OK) NOTE: Horn reminder mode can be changed. First check the horn reminder mode setting. 2. Check horn function with horn switch 3. IPDM E/R operation check 4. Replace BCM. Room lamp and step lamp operation do not activate properly. — BL-85 BCS-19 BL-87 2. Step lamp operation check LT-127 3. Door switch check 1. Keyfob battery and function check (use Remote Keyless Entry Tester J-43241) BL-79, BL81 BCS-19 BL-82 NOTE: If the result of keyfob function check with CONSULT-II is OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning. 2. Key switch (insert) check 3. Replace BCM. Revision: October 2004 L 1. Room lamp operation check 4. Replace BCM. Panic alarm (horn and headlamp) does not activate when panic alarm button is continuously pressed. BL-71 BL-75 BL-76, BL78 BCS-19 2005 Titan M REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Symptom Diagnoses/service procedure Reference page 1. Check auto door lock operation mode with CONSULT-II Auto door lock operation does not activate properly. (All other remote keyless entry functions OK.) NOTE: Auto door lock operation mode can be changed. First check the auto door lock operation mode setting. 2. Replace BCM. BL-71 BCS-19 1. Check power window down operation mode with CONSULT-II Keyless power window down (open) operation does not activate properly. (All other remote keyless entry functions OK.) NOTE: Power window down operation mode can be changed. First check the power window down operation mode setting. 2. Check power window function with switch. 3. Replace BCM. Key Switch (Insert) Check (Column Shift) BL-71 — BCS-19 EIS0049W 1. CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Check key switch "KEY ON SW" in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" . ● When key is inserted to ignition key cylinder: KEY ON SW ● :ON When key is removed from ignition key cylinder: KEY ON SW :OFF LIIA0169E Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 37 and ground. Connector M18 Terminal (Wire color) (+) (–) 37 (B/R) Ground Condition Voltage (V) Key is inserted. Battery voltage Key is removed. 0 OK or NG OK >> System is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 LIIA0567E BL-76 2005 Titan REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM 2. CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT) 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect key switch connector. Check continuity between key switch terminals 3 and 4. Terminals 3–4 Condition Continuity Key is inserted. Yes Key is removed. No B C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace key switch. D E WIIA0313E 3. CHECK KEY SWITCH CIRCUIT F 1. 2. G 3. Disconnect BCM connector. Check continuity between the BCM harness connector M18 terminal 37 (B/R) and key switch harness connector M80 terminal 4 (B/R). Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 37 (B/R) and ground. 37 (B/R) - 4 (B/R) 37 (B/R) - Ground H : Continuity should exist : Continuity should not exist OK or NG OK >> Check the following. ● 10A fuse [No. 19, located in fuse block (J/B)] ● Harness for open or short between key switch and fuse NG >> Repair or replace harness. BL WIIA0596E J K L M Revision: October 2004 BL-77 2005 Titan REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Key Switch (Insert) Check (Floor Shift) EIS0049X 1. CHECK KEY SWITCH AND KEY LOCK SOLENOID INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Check key switch "KEY ON SW" in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" . ● When key is inserted to ignition key cylinder: KEY ON SW :ON When key is removed from ignition key cylinder: ● KEY ON SW :OFF LIIA0169E Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 37 and ground. Connector M18 Terminal (Wire color) (+) (–) 37 (B/R) Ground Condition Voltage (V) Key is inserted. Battery voltage Key is removed. 0 OK or NG OK >> System is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. LIIA0567E 2. CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT) 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect key switch and key lock solenoid connector. Check continuity between key switch and key lock solenoid terminals 3 and 4. Terminals 3–4 Condition Continuity Key is inserted. Yes Key is removed. No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace key switch and key lock solenoid. LIIA1044E Revision: October 2004 BL-78 2005 Titan REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM 3. CHECK KEY SWITCH AND KEY LOCK SOLENOID CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Disconnect BCM connector. Check continuity between the BCM harness connector M18 terminal 37 (B/R) and key switch and key lock solenoid harness connector M27 terminal 4 (B/R). Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 37 (B/R) and ground. 37 (B/R) - 4 (B/R) 37 (B/R) - Ground B C : Continuity should exist : Continuity should not exist OK or NG OK >> Check the following. ● 10A fuse [No. 19, located in fuse block (J/B)] ● Harness for open or short between key switch and key lock solenoid and fuse NG >> Repair or replace harness. D WIIA0597E E F Door Switch Check (King Cab) EIS0049Y 1. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL G With CONSULT-II Check door switches ("DOOR SW-DR", "DOOR SW-AS") in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" . ● When any doors are open: DOOR SW-DR DOOR SW-AS ● :ON :ON H BL When any doors are closed: DOOR SW-DR DOOR SW-AS :OFF :OFF J K PIIA6222E L Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between BCM connector M18 or M19 terminals 12, 47 and ground. Terminals (Wire color) Connector Item M19 Door switches LH 47 (SB) Door switches RH 12 (R/L) M18 (+) Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Open ↓ Closed 0 ↓ Battery voltage (–) Ground OK or NG OK >> System is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 M LIIA1174E BL-79 2005 Titan REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM 2. CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door switch and BCM. Check continuity between door switch connector B8 (Front LH), B108 (Front RH) terminal 2, B73 (Rear upper LH), B156 (Rear upper RH), B74 (Rear lower LH), B157 (Rear lower RH) terminal 1 and BCM connector M18, M19 terminals 12, and 47. 2 (SB) - 47 (SB) 2 (R/L) - 12 (R/L) 1 (SB) - 47 (SB) 1 (R/L) - 12 (R/L) 4. :Continuity should exist :Continuity should exist :Continuity should exist :Continuity should exist Check continuity between door switch connector B8 (Front LH), B108 (Front RH) terminal 2, B73 (Rear upper LH), B156 (Rear upper RH), B74 (Rear lower LH), B157 (Rear lower RH) terminal 1 and ground. 2 (SB or R/L) - Ground 1 (SB or R/L) - Ground :Continuity should not exist :Continuity should not exist LIIA1175E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. 3. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES 1. 2. Disconnect door switch. Check continuity between door switch terminals. Terminal Door switches (front) 2–3 Door switches (rear upper and lower) 1–2 Condition Continuity Open No Closed Yes Open No Closed Yes OK or NG OK >> Repair or replace harness. NG >> Replace door switch. WIIA0595E Revision: October 2004 BL-80 2005 Titan REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) EIS0049Z 1. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL A With CONSULT-II Check door switches ("DOOR SW-DR", "DOOR SW-AS", "DOOR SW-RL", "DOOR SW-RR") in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" . ● When any doors are open: DOOR SW-DR DOOR SW-AS DOOR SW-RL DOOR SW-RR ● C :ON :ON :ON :ON D When any doors are closed: DOOR SW-DR DOOR SW-AS DOOR SW-RL DOOR SW-RR E :OFF :OFF :OFF :OFF PIIA6222E M19 Terminals (Wire color) Item Front door switch LH Rear door switch LH M18 (+) (–) Condition H Voltage (V) (Approx.) 47 (SB) BL 48 (R/Y) Ground Front door switch RH 12 (R/L) Rear door switch RH 13 (GR) F G Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between BCM connector M18 or M19 terminals 12, 13, 47, 48 and ground. Connector B Open ↓ Closed 0 ↓ Battery voltage J LIIA1177E OK or NG OK >> System is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. K L M Revision: October 2004 BL-81 2005 Titan REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM 2. CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door switch and BCM. Check continuity between door switch connector B8 (Front LH), B108 (Front RH), B18 (Rear LH), B116 (Rear RH) terminal 2 and BCM connector M18, M19 terminals 12, 13, 47 and 48. 2 (SB) - 47 (SB) 2 (R/L) - 12 (R/L) 2 (R/Y) - 48 (R/Y) 2 (GR) - 13 (GR) 4. :Continuity should exist :Continuity should exist :Continuity should exist :Continuity should exist Check continuity between door switch connector B8 (Front LH), B108 (Front RH), B18 (Rear LH), B116 (Rear RH) terminal 2 and ground. 2 (SB, R/L, R/Y or GR) Ground :Continuity should not exist LIIA1178E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. 3. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES 1. 2. Disconnect door switch. Check continuity between door switch terminals. Terminal Door switch (front and rear) 2 – Ground Condition Continuity Open Yes Closed No OK or NG OK >> Check door switch case ground condition. NG >> Replace door switch. LIIA1179E Keyfob Battery and Function Check EIS004A0 1. CHECK KEYFOB BATTERY Remove battery and measure voltage across battery positive and negative terminals, (+) and (−). Voltage : 2.5V - 3.0V NOTE: Keyfob does not function if battery is not set correctly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace battery. SEL237W Revision: October 2004 BL-82 2005 Titan REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM 2. CHECK KEYFOB FUNCTION A With CONSULT-II Check keyfob function in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. B When pushing each button of keyfob, the corresponding monitor item should be turned as follows. Condition Monitor item Pushing LOCK KEYLESS LOCK : ON Pushing UNLOCK KEYLESS UNLOCK : ON Keep pushing UNLOCK RKE KEEP UNLK turns to ON 3 seconds after UNLOCK button is pushed. : ON Pushing PANIC KEYLESS PANIC : ON Pushing LOCK and UNLOCK at the same time RKE LCK-UNLCK : ON C D PIIA6468E E F Without CONSULT-II Check keyfob function using Remote Keyless Entry Tester J-43241. G OK or NG OK >> WITH CONSULT-II: Keyfob, remote keyless entry receiver and wiring harness between BCM and remote keyless entry receiver are OK. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation H of BCM" . OK >> WITHOUT CONSULT-II: Keyfob is OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to BL-74, "SYMPTOM CHART" . BL NG >> WITH CONSULT-II: Further inspection is necessary. Refer to BL-74, "SYMPTOM CHART" . NG >> WITHOUT CONSULT-II: Replace keyfob. Refer to BL-88, "ID Code Entry Procedure" . Remote Keyless Entry Receiver System Check EIS0061Y J 1. REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER SIGNAL K Check signal voltage waveform between BCM connector M18 terminal 20 and ground using an oscilloscope. Condition: Keyfob buttons released Keyfob buttons pressed L : Refer to BL-68, "Terminals and Reference Value for BCM" . : Refer to BL-68, "Terminals and Reference Value for BCM" . M LIIA1275E OK or NG OK >> Remote keyless entry receiver signal power supply, ground and signal circuits are OK. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 BL-83 2005 Titan REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM 2. REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER POWER SUPPLY INSPECTION Check signal voltage waveform between BCM connector M18 terminal 19 and ground using an oscilloscope. 19 (V/W) - Ground : Refer to BL-68, "Terminals and Reference Value for BCM" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . WIIA0433E 3. REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION (BCM) Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 18 and ground. 18 (P) - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . WIIA0434E 4. HARNESS INSPECTION BETWEEN BCM AND REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER 1. 2. Disconnect remote keyless entry receiver and BCM connectors. Check continuity between remote keyless entry receiver connector M120 terminals 1, 2, 4 and BCM connector M18 terminals 18, 19, 20. 1 (P) - 18 (P) 2 (G/W) - 20 (G/W) 4 (V/W) - 19 (V/W) 3. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between remote keyless entry receiver terminals 1, 2 and 4 and ground. 1 (P) - Ground 2 (G/W) - Ground 4 (V/W) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. WIIA0308E OK or NG OK >> Replace remote keyless entry receiver. NG >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: October 2004 BL-84 2005 Titan REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM ACC Power Check EIS004A2 1. CHECK ACC POWER A With CONSULT-II Check "ACC ON SW" in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" . B Monitor Item Condition ACC ON SW Ignition switch position is ACC : ON Ignition switch position is OFF : OFF C D E PIIA3367E F Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 11 and ground. Connector M18 Terminal (Wire color) (+) (–) 11 (O) Ground Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) ACC Battery voltage OFF 0 OK or NG OK >> ACC power circuit is OK. NG >> Check the following. ● 10A fuse [No. 4, located in fuse block (J/B)] ● Harness for open or short. IPDM E/R Operation Check G H BL PIIA7002E J EIS004A3 1. CHECK IPDM E/R INPUT VOLTAGE K Check voltage between IPDM E/R connector E122 terminal 45 and ground. L Terminal (Wire color) Connector E122 Voltage (V) (Approx.) (+) (–) 45 (G/W) Ground Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 M BL-85 LIIA1278E 2005 Titan REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM 2. CHECK IPDM E/R INPUT VOLTAGE 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R and horn relay. Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector E122 terminal 45 and horn relay connector H-1 terminal 1. 45 (G/W) - 1 (R/W) : Continuity should exist OK or NG OK >> Further inspection is necessary. Refer to BL-74, "SYMPTOM CHART" . NG >> Repair or replace harness LIIA1054E Revision: October 2004 BL-86 2005 Titan REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM Check Hazard Function EIS004A4 1. CHECK HAZARD WARNING LAMP A Does hazard indicator flash with hazard switch? Yes or No Yes >> Hazard warning lamp circuit is OK. No >> Check “hazard indicator”. Refer to LT-75, "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS" . B C Check Horn Function EIS004A5 First, perform the "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" in "BCM" with CONSULT-II, then perform the trouble diagnosis of malfunction system indicated in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" of "BCM". 1. CHECK HORN FUNCTION Does horn sound with horn switch? Yes or No Yes >> Horn circuit is OK. No >> Check horn circuit. Refer to WW-37, "HORN" . Check Headlamp Function D E F EIS004A6 First, perform the "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" in "BCM" with CONSULT-II, then perform the trouble diagnosis of malfunction system indicated in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" of "BCM". G 1. CHECK HEADLAMP OPERATION H Does headlamp come on when turning lighting switch ON? Yes or No Yes >> Headlamp operation circuit is OK. No >> Check headlamp circuit. Refer to LT-5, "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" . Check Front Room/Map Lamp Illumination Function BL EIS004A7 1. CHECK MAP LAMP ILLUMINATION FUNCTION J When front room/map lamp switch is in DOOR position, open the front door LH or RH. Front room/map lamp and ignition key illumination should illuminate. K OK or NG OK >> System is OK. NG >> Check front room/map lamp illumination circuit. Refer to LT-151, "ILLUMINATION" . L M Revision: October 2004 BL-87 2005 Titan REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM ID Code Entry Procedure EIS004A8 KEYFOB ID SET UP WITH CONSULT-II NOTE: ● If a keyfob is lost, the ID code of the lost keyfob must be erased to prevent unauthorized use. A specific ID code can be erased with CONSULT-II. However, when the ID code of a lost keyfob is not known, all controller ID codes should be erased. After all ID codes are erased, the ID codes of all remaining and/or new keyfobs must be re-registered. ● When registering an additional keyfob, the existing ID codes in memory may or may not be erased. If five ID codes are stored in memory when an additional code is registered, only the oldest code is erased. If less than five codes are stored in memory when an additional code is registered, the new ID code is added and no ID codes are erased. ● Entry of a maximum of five ID codes is allowed. When more than five codes are entered, the oldest ID code will be erased. ● Even if the same ID code that is already in memory is input, the same ID code can be entered. The code is counted as an additional code. CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. BBIA0336E 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. BCIA0029E 5. Touch “BCM”. If “BCM” is not indicated, refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . BCIA0030E Revision: October 2004 BL-88 2005 Titan REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM 6. Touch “MULTI REMOTE ENT”. A B C LIIA0194E D 7. Touch “WORK SUPPORT”. E F G BCIA0031E 8. The items are shown on the figure at left can be set up. “REMO CONT ID REGIST” Use this mode to register a keyfob ID code. NOTE: Register the ID code when keyfob or BCM is replaced, or when additional keyfob is required. ● “REMO CONT ID ERASUR” Use this mode to erase a keyfob ID code. ● “REMO CONT ID CONFIR” Use this mode to confirm if a keyfob ID code is registered or not. H ● BL J LIIA1147E K L M Revision: October 2004 BL-89 2005 Titan REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM KEYFOB ID SET UP WITHOUT CONSULT-II LIIA1670E Revision: October 2004 BL-90 2005 Titan REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM NOTE: ● If a keyfob is lost, the ID code of the lost keyfob must be erased to prevent unauthorized use. A specific ID code can be erased with CONSULT-II. However, when the ID code of a lost keyfob is not known, all controller ID codes should be erased. After all ID codes are erased, the ID codes of all remaining and/or new keyfobs must be re-registered. To erase all ID codes in memory, register one ID code (keyfob) five times. After all ID codes are erased, the ID codes of all remaining and/or new keyfobs must be re-registered. ● When registering an additional keyfob, the existing ID codes in memory may or may not be erased. If five ID codes are stored in memory, when an additional code is registered, only the oldest code is erased. If less than five ID codes are stored in memory, when an additional ID code is registered, the new ID code is added and no ID codes are erased. ● If you need to activate more than two additional new keyfobs, repeat the procedure “Additional ID code entry” for each new keyfob. ● Entry of maximum five ID codes is allowed. When more than five ID codes are entered, the oldest ID code will be erased. ● Even if same ID code that is already in the memory is input, the same ID code can be entered. The code is counted as an additional code. Keyfob Battery Replacement EIS004A9 A B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIIA1514E Revision: October 2004 BL-91 2005 Titan VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:28491 EIS004AA WIIA0581E Revision: October 2004 BL-92 2005 Titan VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM System Description EIS004AB A DESCRIPTION Operation Flow B C D E F G PIIA1367E H Setting the vehicle security system Initial condition ● Ignition switch is in OFF position. BL Disarmed phase ● When the vehicle is being driven or when doors are open, the vehicle security system is set in the disarmed phase on the assumption that the owner is inside or near the vehicle. J Pre-armed phase and armed phase ● The vehicle security system turns into the "pre-armed" phase when hood and all doors are closed and locked by electronic key. The security indicator lamp illuminates for 30 seconds. Then, the system auto- K matically shifts into the "armed" phase. Canceling the set vehicle security system L When one of the following operations is performed, the armed phase is canceled. ● Unlock the doors with the key or the keyfob. Activating the alarm operation of the vehicle security system Make sure the system is in the armed phase. When one of the following operations is performed, the system sounds the horns and flashes the headlamps for about 50 seconds. 1. Engine hood or any door is opened before unlocking door with key or keyfob. 2. Door is unlocked without using key or keyfob. POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Power is supplied at all times ● through 10A fuse [No.19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to combination meter (security indicator lamp) terminal 8 and ● through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to BCM terminal 70 ● through 15A fuse [No. 22, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to BCM terminal 57 ● through 15A fuse (No. 25, located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to horn relay terminal 2 Revision: October 2004 BL-93 2005 Titan M VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM through 20A fuse (No. 52, located in the IPDM E/R) and ● through 20A fuse (No. 53, located in the IPDM E/R), ● to IPDM E/R internal CPU. With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse box (J/B)] ● to BCM terminal 11. Ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 67 ● through body grounds M57, M61 and M79 and ● to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 59 ● through body ground E9, E15 and E24. ● INITIAL CONDITION TO ACTIVATE THE SYSTEM The operation of the vehicle security system is controlled by the doors and hood. To activate the vehicle security system, BCM must receive signals indicating the doors and hood are closed and the doors are locked. When a door is open, BCM terminal 12, 13, 47 or 48 receives a ground signal from each door switch. When front door LH is unlocked, BCM terminal 22 receives a signal from terminal 12 (King Cab) or 14 (Crew Cab) of main power window and door lock/unlock switch. When front door RH is unlocked, BCM terminal 22 receives a signal from terminal 16 of power window and door lock/unlock switch RH or the rear power window switch LH or RH. VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM ALARM OPERATION The vehicle security system is triggered by ● opening a door ● unlocking door without using the key or keyfob. The vehicle security system will be triggered once the system is in armed phase, ● when BCM receives a ground signal at terminals 12, 13, 47, 48 (door switch). Power is supplied at all times ● to horn relay terminal 2 ● through 15A fuse (No. 25, located in fuse and fusible link box). When the vehicle security system is triggered, ground is supplied intermittently ● from IPDM E/R terminal 45 ● to headlamp high relay and ● to horn relay terminal 1. The headlamps flash and the horn sounds intermittently. The alarm automatically turns off after 50 seconds, but will reactivate if the vehicle is tampered with again. VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM DEACTIVATION To deactivate the vehicle security system, a door must be unlocked with the key or keyfob. When the key is used to unlock a door, BCM terminal 22 receives signal ● from terminal 12 (King Cab) or 14 (Crew Cab) of the main power window and door lock/unlock switch. When the BCM receives either one of these signals or unlock signal from keyfob or key cylinder switch, the vehicle security system is deactivated. (Disarmed phase) PANIC ALARM OPERATION Remote keyless entry system may or may not operate vehicle security system (horn and headlamps) as required. When the remote keyless entry system is triggered, ground is supplied intermittently ● from IPDM E/R terminal 45 ● to headlamp high relay and ● to horn relay terminal 1. The headlamp flashes and the horn sounds intermittently. The alarm automatically turns off after 30 seconds or when BCM receives any signal from keyfob. Revision: October 2004 BL-94 2005 Titan VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM CAN Communication System Description EIS004AC A Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . B C D E F G H BL J K L M Revision: October 2004 BL-95 2005 Titan VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM Schematic (King Cab) EIS004AD WIWA0835E Revision: October 2004 BL-96 2005 Titan VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM Wiring Diagram — VEHSEC — (King Cab) EIS004AE A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIWA0766E Revision: October 2004 BL-97 2005 Titan VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM WIWA0289E Revision: October 2004 BL-98 2005 Titan VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIWA0290E Revision: October 2004 BL-99 2005 Titan VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM WIWA0291E Revision: October 2004 BL-100 2005 Titan VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIWA0767E Revision: October 2004 BL-101 2005 Titan VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM WIWA0798E Revision: October 2004 BL-102 2005 Titan VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM Schematic (Crew Cab) EIS004AF A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIWA0836E Revision: October 2004 BL-103 2005 Titan VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM Wiring Diagram — VEHSEC — (Crew Cab) EIS004AG WIWA0768E Revision: October 2004 BL-104 2005 Titan VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIWA0295E Revision: October 2004 BL-105 2005 Titan VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM WIWA0296E Revision: October 2004 BL-106 2005 Titan VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIWA0769E Revision: October 2004 BL-107 2005 Titan VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM WIWA0793E Revision: October 2004 BL-108 2005 Titan VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM Terminals and Reference Value for BCM EIS004AH A Terminal Wire Color 11 O Item Ignition switch (ACC) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition Battery voltage B Door close (OFF) → Open (ON) Battery voltage → 0 C Door close (OFF) → Open (ON) Battery voltage → 0 Ignition switch in ACC Front door switch RH 12 R/L Rear door switch upper RH (King Cab) Rear door switch lower RH (King Cab) 13 GR Rear door switch RH (Crew Cab) D E 22 G Anti–pinch serial link When ignition switch is ON or power window timer operates F PIIA2344E Security indicator lamp Goes off → illuminates (Every 2.4 seconds) G/O 39 L CAN-H — — 40 P CAN-L — — 48 R/Y Rear door switch LH (Crew Cab) Door close (OFF) → Open (ON) G Battery voltage → 0 23 H Battery voltage → 0 BL Front door switch LH 47 SB Rear door switch upper LH (King Cab) Door close (OFF) → Open (ON) Battery voltage → 0 J Rear door switch lower LH (King Cab) 57 Y/R 67 B 70 W/B Power source (BAT) — Battery voltage Ground — 0 Power source (BAT) — Battery voltage K Terminals and Reference Value for IPDM E/R Terminal Wire Color 38 B 39 EIS004AI Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Ground — 0 L CAN-H — — 40 P CAN-L — — 45 G/W Horn relay When doors locks are operated using keyfob (OFF → ON) *1 Battery voltage → 0 0V L Headlamp low (LH) Lighting switch 2ND position OFF 52 ON Battery voltage 0V R/Y Headlamp low (RH) Lighting switch 2ND position OFF 54 ON Battery voltage 0V G Headlamp high (LH) Lighting switch HIGH or PASS position OFF 55 ON Battery voltage L/W *2 Y *3 0V Headlamp high (RH) Lighting switch HIGH or PASS position OFF 56 ON Battery voltage 59 B Item Ground Revision: October 2004 — BL-109 L M 0 2005 Titan VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM *1: when horn reminder is ON. *2: L/W is for USA. *3: Y is for Canada. CONSULT-II Function (BCM) EIS004AJ CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS DESCRIPTION BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode WORK SUPPORT DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part Content Changes setting of each function. Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. SELF-DIAG RESULTS Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. ECU PART NUMBER BCM part number can be read. CONFIGURATION Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. BBIA0369E 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. BCIA0029E Revision: October 2004 BL-110 2005 Titan VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM 5. Touch “BCM”. If “BCM” is not indicated, refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . A B C BCIA0030E D 6. Touch “THEFT ALM” on the “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen. E F G LIIA0034E 7. Select diagnosis mode. “DATA MONITOR”, “ACTIVE TEST” and “WORK SUPPORT” are available. H BL J BCIA0031E K CONSULT-II APPLICATION ITEM Data Monitor Monitored Item DOOR SW-AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch RH. DOOR SW-RR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch RH. DOOR SW-RL Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch LH. DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH. ACC ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ACC position. IGN ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ON position. KEYLESS UNLOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from keyfob. KEYLESS LOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from keyfob. KEY CYL LK-SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from door key cylinder switch. KEY CYL UN-SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from door key cylinder switch. CDL UNLOCK SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from lock/unlock switch. CDL LOCK SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from lock/unlock switch. Revision: October 2004 L Description BL-111 M 2005 Titan VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM Active Test Test Item Description THEFT IND This test is able to check security indicator lamp operation. The lamp will be turned on when “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched. HEADLAMP (HI) This test is able to check vehicle security lamp operation. The highbeam headlamps will be activated for 0.5 seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched. VEHICLE SECURITY HORN This test is able to check vehicle security horn operation. The horns will be activated for 0.5 seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched. Work Support Test Item Description SECURITY ALARM SET This mode can confirm and change security alarm ON-OFF setting. THEFT ALM TRG The switch which triggered vehicle security alarm is recorded. This mode is able to confirm and erase the record of vehicle security alarm. The trigger data can be erased by touching “CLEAR” on CONSULT-II screen. Trouble Diagnosis EIS004AK WORK FLOW WIIA0599E ● ● “POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM” Diagnosis refer to BL-16, "POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM" . “REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM” Diagnosis refer to BL-53, "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM" . Revision: October 2004 BL-112 2005 Titan VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM Preliminary Check EIS004AL 1. CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION A Confirm BCM Configuration for "THEFT ALARM" is set to "WITH". Refer to BCS-13, "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Change BCM Configuration for "THEFT ALARM" to "WITH". Refer to BCS-16, "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" . 2. CHECK SYSTEM OPERATION B C D The system operation is canceled by turning ignition switch to ACC at any step between START and ARMED in the following flow chart. E F G H BL J K L M LIIA1057E >> After performing preliminary check, go to symptom chart. Refer to BL-114, "Symptom Chart" . Revision: October 2004 BL-113 2005 Titan VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM Symptom Chart EIS004AM PROCEDURE Diagnostic procedure SYMPTOM Door switch Refer to BL-115, "Door Switch Check (King Cab)" , BL-116, "Door Switch Check (Crew Cab)" . If the above systems are “OK”, replace BCM. Refer to BL-121, "Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check" . 1 Vehicle security system cannot be set by ···· Lock/unlock switch Door outside key If the above systems are “OK”, check main power window and door lock/ unlock switch. Refer to BL-119, "Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab)" , BL-120, "Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab)" . If the above systems are “OK”, check main power window and door lock/ unlock switch. Security indicator does not turn “ON”. Refer to BL-118, "Security Indicator Lamp Check" . If the above systems are “OK”, replace BCM. 2 *1 Vehicle security system does not alarm when ···· Any door is opened. Refer to BL-115, "Door Switch Check (King Cab)" , BL-116, "Door Switch Check (Crew Cab)" . If the above systems are “OK”, replace BCM. Refer to BL-121, "Vehicle Security Headlamp Alarm Check" . 3 Vehicle security alarm does not activate. Horn alarm Head lamp alarm If the above systems are “OK”, check horn system. Refer to WW-37, "HORN" . Refer to BL-121, "Vehicle Security Headlamp Alarm Check" . If the above systems are “OK”, replace BCM. 4 Vehicle security system cannot be canceled by ···· Door outside key Refer to BL-119, "Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab)" , BL-120, "Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab)" . If the above systems are “OK”, check main power window and door lock/ unlock switch. Keyfob Check remote keyless entry function If the above systems are “OK”, replace BCM. *1 : Make sure the system is in the armed phase. Revision: October 2004 BL-114 2005 Titan VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM Door Switch Check (King Cab) EIS004AN 1. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL A With CONSULT-II Check door switches ("DOOR SW-DR", "DOOR SW-AS") in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" . ● When any doors are open: DOOR SW-DR DOOR SW-AS ● C :ON :ON When any doors are closed: DOOR SW-DR DOOR SW-AS D :OFF :OFF E PIIA6222E Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between BCM connector M18 or M19 terminals 12, 47 and ground. Terminals (Wire color) Connector Item M19 Door switches LH 47 (SB) Door switches RH 12 (R/L) M18 (+) (–) Ground Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Open ↓ Closed 0 ↓ Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> System is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. H BL J LIIA1174E 4. K Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door switch and BCM. Check continuity between door switch connector B8 (Front LH), B108 (Front RH) terminal 2, B73 (Rear upper LH), B156 (Rear upper RH), B74 (Rear lower LH), B157 (Rear lower RH) terminal 1 and BCM connector M18, M19 terminals 12, and 47. 2 (SB) - 47 (SB) 2 (R/L) - 12 (R/L) 1 (SB) - 47 (SB) 1 (R/L) - 12 (R/L) :Continuity should exist :Continuity should exist :Continuity should exist :Continuity should exist Check continuity between door switch connector B8 (Front LH), B108 (Front RH) terminal 2, B73 (Rear upper LH), B156 (Rear upper RH), B74 (Rear lower LH), B157 (Rear lower RH) terminal 1 and ground. 2 (SB or R/L) - Ground 1 (SB or R/L) - Ground :Continuity should not exist :Continuity should not exist LIIA1175E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: October 2004 F G 2. CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. B BL-115 2005 Titan L M VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM 3. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES 1. 2. Disconnect door switch. Check continuity between door switch terminals. Item Terminal Door switches (front) 2–3 Door switches (rear upper and lower) 1–2 Condition Continuity Open No Closed Yes Open No Closed Yes OK or NG OK >> Repair or replace harness. NG >> Replace door switch. WIIA0595E Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) EIS004AO 1. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Check door switches ("DOOR SW-DR", "DOOR SW-AS", "DOOR SW-RL", "DOOR SW-RR") in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" . ● When any doors are open: DOOR SW-DR DOOR SW-AS DOOR SW-RL DOOR SW-RR ● :ON :ON :ON :ON When any doors are closed: DOOR SW-DR DOOR SW-AS DOOR SW-RL DOOR SW-RR :OFF :OFF :OFF :OFF PIIA6222E Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between BCM connector M18 or M19 terminals 12, 13, 47, 48 and ground. Connector Terminals (Wire color) Item Front door switch LH M19 M18 Rear door switch LH (+) (–) Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Open ↓ Closed 0 ↓ Battery voltage 47 (SB) 48 (R/Y) Ground Front door switch RH 12 (R/L) Rear door switch RH 13 (GR) LIIA1177E OK or NG OK >> System is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 BL-116 2005 Titan VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM 2. CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 2 (SB) - 47 (SB) 2 (R/L) - 12 (R/L) 2 (R/Y) - 48 (R/Y) 2 (GR) - 13 (GR) 4. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door switch and BCM. Check continuity between door switch connector B8 (Front LH), B108 (Front RH), B18 (Rear LH), B116 (Rear RH) terminal 2 and BCM connector M18, M19 terminals 12, 13, 47 and 48. :Continuity should exist :Continuity should exist :Continuity should exist :Continuity should exist C D Check continuity between door switch connector B8 (Front LH), B108 (Front RH), B18 (Rear LH), B116 (Rear RH) terminal 2 and ground. 2 (SB, R/L, R/Y or GR) Ground B E :Continuity should not exist LIIA1178E F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. G 3. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES 1. 2. H Disconnect door switch harness. Check continuity between door switch connector terminals. Item Door switch (front and rear) Terminal 2 – Ground Condition Continuity Open Yes Closed No BL J OK or NG OK >> Check door switch case ground condition. NG >> Replace door switch. K LIIA1179E L M Revision: October 2004 BL-117 2005 Titan VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM Security Indicator Lamp Check EIS004AP 1. SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP ACTIVE TEST With CONSULT-II Check "THEFT IND” in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CONSULT-II. PIIA7005E Without CONSULT-II 1. Disconnect BCM. 2. Check voltage between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 23 and ground. Terminal (Wire color) Connector M18 (+) (-) 23 (G/O) Ground Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) ON 0 OFF Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> Security indicator lamp is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. LIIA0523E 2. SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP CHECK Check indicator lamp condition. Refer to BL-97, "Wiring Diagram — VEHSEC — (King Cab)" , BL-104, "Wiring Diagram — VEHSEC — (Crew Cab)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace indicator lamp. 3. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM and combination meter (security indicator lamp) connector. Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 23 and combination meter (security indicator lamp) harness connector M24 terminal 28. 23 (G/O) - 28 (G/O) : Continuity should exist OK or NG OK >> Check the following. ● 10A fuse [No. 19, located in fuse block (J/B)] ● Harness for open or short between combination meter (security indicator lamp) and fuse NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA1058E Revision: October 2004 BL-118 2005 Titan VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) EIS004AQ 1. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LH A With CONSULT-II Check front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) ("KEY CYL LK-SW") and ("KEY CYL UN-SW) in DATA MONITOR mode in CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" . ● When key inserted in front key cylinder is turned to LOCK: KEY CYL LK-SW B C : ON When key inserted in front key cylinder is turned to UNLOCK: ● KEY CYL UN-SW D : ON E LIIA0188E F Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminals 6, 7 and ground. Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Neutral/Unlock 5 Lock 0 Neutral/Lock 5 Unlock 0 (–) 6 (L) D7 Condition Ground 7 (R) G H BL J LIIA1256E OK or NG OK >> Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) signal is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. K 2. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LH L 1. 2. 3. M Turn ignition switch off. Disconnect front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch). Check continuity between door key cylinder switch LH connector terminals 1, 5 and 6. Terminals Condition Continuity 1–5 Key is turned to LOCK. Yes 6–5 Key is turned to UNLOCK. Yes OK or NG OK >> Check the following. ● Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) ground circuit. ● Harness for open or short between main power winWIIA0323E dow and door lock/unlock switch and front door lock actuator LH (key cylinder switch LH). NG >> Replace front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch). Refer to BL-127, "Removal and Installation" . Revision: October 2004 BL-119 2005 Titan VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) EIS004AR 1. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LH With CONSULT-II Check front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) ("KEY CYL LK-SW") and ("KEY CYL UN-SW) in DATA MONITOR mode in CONSULT–II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" . ● When key inserted in front key cylinder is turned to LOCK: KEY CYL LK-SW : ON When key inserted in front key cylinder is turned to UNLOCK: ● KEY CYL UN-SW : ON LIIA0188E Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminals 4, 6 and ground. Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Neutral/Unlock 5 Lock 0 (–) 4 (L) D7 Condition Ground 6 (R) Neutral/Lock 5 Unlock 0 LIIA0566E OK or NG OK >> Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) signal is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH LH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch off. Disconnect front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch). Check continuity between door key cylinder switch LH connector terminals 1, 5 and 6. Terminals Condition Continuity 1–5 Key is turned to LOCK. Yes 6–5 Key is turned to UNLOCK. Yes OK or NG OK >> Check the following. ● Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) ground circuit. ● Harness for open or short between main power winWIIA0323E dow and door lock/unlock switch and front door lock actuator LH (key cylinder switch LH). NG >> Replace front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch). Refer to BL-127, "Removal and Installation" . Revision: October 2004 BL-120 2005 Titan VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM Vehicle Security Horn Alarm Check EIS004AS 1. CHECK HORN OPERATION A Check if horn sounds with horn switch. Does horn operate? YES >> Check harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and horn relay. NO >> Check horn circuit. Refer to WW-37, "HORN" . Vehicle Security Headlamp Alarm Check B C EIS004AT 1. CHECK VEHICLE SECURITY HEADLAMP ALARM OPERATION D Check if headlamps operate with lighting switch. Do headlamps come on when turning switch ON? YES >> Headlamp alarm is OK. NO >> Check headlamp system. Refer to LT-5, "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" . Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check E EIS004AU 1. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL F Check if power door lock operates with door lock/unlock switch. Do doors lock/unlock when using each door lock/unlock switch? YES >> Door lock/unlock switch is OK. NO >> Refer to BL-121, "Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check" . G H BL J K L M Revision: October 2004 BL-121 2005 Titan DOOR DOOR Fitting Adjustment PFP:80100 EIS004AV KING CAB WIIA0332E Revision: October 2004 BL-122 2005 Titan DOOR CREW CAB A B C D E F G H BL J WIIA0333E FRONT DOOR Longitudinal clearance and surface height adjustment at front end 1. 2. K Remove the front fender. Refer to EI-23, "Removal and Installation" . Loosen the hinge bolts. Raise the front door at rear end to adjust. L REAR DOOR Longitudinal clearance and surface height adjustment at front end 1. 2. Remove the center pillar upper garnish. Refer to EI-36, "Removal and Installation" . Accessing from inside the vehicle, loosen the nuts. Open the rear door, and raise the rear door at rear end to adjust. STRIKER ADJUSTMENT 1. Adjust the striker so that it becomes parallel with the lock insertion direction. Striker Bolts :16.6 N·m (1.7 kg–m, 12 ft–lb) LIIA1621E Revision: October 2004 BL-123 2005 Titan M DOOR Removal and Installation EIS004AW KING CAB Front Door CAUTION: ● When removing and installing the door assembly, support the door with a jack and shop cloth to protect the door and body. ● When removing and installing door assembly, be sure to carry out the fitting adjustment. ● Check the hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply body grease. 1. Remove the front door glass and regulator assembly. Refer to GW-86, "FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR" . 2. Remove the door harness. 3. Remove the check link cover. 4. Remove the check link bolt from the hinge pillar. LIIA1503E 5. Remove the door-side hinge nuts and bolts, and remove the door assembly. LIIA1504E Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Rear Door CAUTION: ● When removing and installing the door assembly, support the door with a jack and shop cloth to protect the door and body. ● When removing and installing door assembly, be sure to carry out the fitting adjustment. ● Check the hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply body grease. 1. Remove the door glass. Refer to GW-91, "SIDE WINDOW GLASS" . 2. Remove the speaker. 3. Remove the door handles and latch assembly. Refer to BL-130, "Component Structure" . 4. Remove the check link. 5. Remove the wire harness. Revision: October 2004 BL-124 2005 Titan DOOR 6. Remove the door assembly. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Door hinge nuts Check link bolt A : 24.5 N·m (2.5 kg–m, 18 ft–lb) : 5.1 N·m (0.52 kg–m, 45 in–lb) B C D E F G WIIA0334E CREW CAB H CAUTION: ● When removing and installing the door assembly, support the door with a jack and shop cloth to protect the door and body. ● When removing and installing door assembly, be sure to carry out the fitting adjustment. BL ● Check the hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply body grease. 1. Remove the door finisher. Refer to EI-33, "Rear Door - Crew Cab" . J 2. Remove the inner seal. 3. Remove the door window and regulator assembly. Refer to GW-86, "FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR" , GW-88, "REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR" . K 4. Remove the door harness. 5. Remove the check link cover. 6. Remove the check link bolt from the hinge pillar. L M LIIA1503E Revision: October 2004 BL-125 2005 Titan DOOR 7. Remove the door-side hinge nuts and bolts, and the door assembly. LIIA1504E Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 BL-126 2005 Titan FRONT DOOR LOCK FRONT DOOR LOCK Component Structure PFP:80502 A EIS004AY B C D E F G LIIA1331E 1. Grommet 2. Outside handle bracket 3. Key cylinder rod (Driver side only) 4. Front gasket 5. Lock knob cable 6. Inside handle 7. Door lock rocker switch 8. Screw cap 9. Inside handle cable 10. Outside handle cable 11. Door lock assembly 12. Striker 13. Outside handle 14. Door key cylinder assembly (Driver side) Outside handle escutcheon (Passenger side) 15. Rear gasket H BL J Removal and Installation EIS004AZ REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the front door window and front door regulator assembly. Refer to GW-86, "FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR" . Remove the front door window rear glass run. Remove the door side grommet, and the bolt (TORX T30) from the grommet hole. Torx bolt K L 5.3 N·m (0.54 kg-m, 47 in-lb) M PIIA3553E Revision: October 2004 BL-127 2005 Titan FRONT DOOR LOCK 4. While pulling the outside handle, remove the door key cylinder assembly or escutcheon. PIIA3554E 5. 6. Separate the key cylinder rod from the door key cylinder assembly (if equipped). While pulling the outside handle, slide it toward rear of vehicle to remove. LIIA0532E 7. Remove the front and rear gaskets. PIIA3557E 8. Remove the TORX bolts (T30), and the door lock assembly. Door lock assembly bolts 7.5 N·m (0.77 kg-m, 00 in-lb) PIIA1090E Revision: October 2004 BL-128 2005 Titan FRONT DOOR LOCK 9. While pulling the outside handle bracket, slide it toward the rear of vehicle to remove it and the door lock assembly. A B C PIIA3558E D 10. Disconnect the door lock actuator electrical connector. 11. Separate the outside handle cable connection from the outside handle bracket. E F G PIIA5059E H INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install each rod, be sure to rotate the rod holder until a click is felt. Disassembly and Assembly BL EIS004B0 DOOR KEY CYLINDER ASSEMBLY J K L M PIIA4136E Remove the key cylinder escutcheon pawl and remove the door key cylinder. Revision: October 2004 BL-129 2005 Titan REAR DOOR LOCK REAR DOOR LOCK Component Structure PFP:82502 EIS004B1 KING CAB WIIA0335E 1. Rear upper door lock striker 2. Rear door handle 3. Rear lower door lock striker 4. Lower latch cable 5. Rear lower door latch 6. Rear door lock assembly 7. Rear inside door handle 8. Upper latch cable 9. Rear upper door latch Revision: October 2004 BL-130 2005 Titan REAR DOOR LOCK CREW CAB A B C D E F G H BL J K L WIIA0336E 1. Rear inside door handle 2. Rear door lock knob 3. Lock knob cable 4. Inside handle cable 5. Rear door lock/remote control assembly 6. Outside handle cable Removal and Installation M EIS004B2 REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the rear door window and rear door module assembly. Refer to GW-88, "Rear Door Glass" . Remove the door side grommet and the bolt (TORX T30) from the grommet hole. Torx bolt 5.3 N·m (0.54 kg-m, 47 in-lb) PIIA3553E Revision: October 2004 BL-131 2005 Titan REAR DOOR LOCK 3. While pulling the outside handle, remove the door handle escutcheon. LIIA1971E 4. While pulling the outside handle, slide it toward the rear of vehicle to remove. LIIA0532E 5. Remove the front and rear gaskets. PIIA3557E 6. 7. Remove the inside handle screws. Remove the TORX bolts (T30), remove the door lock assembly. Door lock assembly bolts 6.0 N·m (0.61 kg-m, 53 in-lb) PIIA1090E Revision: October 2004 BL-132 2005 Titan REAR DOOR LOCK 8. While pulling outside handle bracket, slide toward rear of vehicle to remove outside handle bracket and door lock assembly. A B C PIIA3558E D 9. Disconnect the outside handle cable. E F G PIIA5059E INSTALLATION H Installation is in the reverse order of removal. BL J K L M Revision: October 2004 BL-133 2005 Titan TAIL GATE TAIL GATE Removal and Installation PFP:93400 EIS004B3 WIIA0576E 1. Rear gate liner cover (if equipped) 2. Rear gate inner panel 3. Rear gate rubber bumper 4. Rear gate stay assembly 5. Washer 6. Rear gate cover 7. Rear gate hinge assembly (RH), body side 8. Rear gate ring (RH) 9. Rear gate hinge assembly (RH), gate side 10. Rear gate 11. Rear gate handle 12. Rear gate lock cylinder 13. Rear gate hinge assembly (LH), gate side 14. Rear gate ring (LH) 15. Rear gate hinge assembly (LH), body side 16. Rear gate control assembly 17. Rubber bumper 18. Rear gate latch assembly (RH & LH) 19. Gas stay 20. Gas stay bracket Revision: October 2004 BL-134 2005 Titan TAIL GATE GAS STAY Removal A WARNING: The gas stay is under high pressure. Remove the gas stay only with the tailgate fully closed. Injury may result if the gas stay is removed when the tailgate is open. 1. Remove the RH rear combination lamp assembly. Refer to LT-118, "Removal and Installation" . 2. Remove the gas stay. B C D E F G H BL LIIA1984E Installation J Installation is in the reverse order of removal. K L M Revision: October 2004 BL-135 2005 Titan NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:28591 EIS004B4 WIIA0582E Revision: October 2004 BL-136 2005 Titan NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) System Description EIS004B5 NVIS (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS) has the following immobilizer functions: ● Since only NVIS (NATS) ignition keys, whose IDs have been registered into the ECM and BCM, allow the engine to run, operation of a stolen vehicle without a NVIS (NATS) registered key is prevented by NVIS (NATS). NVIS (NATS) will immobilize the engine if someone tries to start it without the registered key of NVIS (NATS). ● All of the originally supplied ignition key IDs have been NVIS (NATS) registered. If requested by the vehicle owner, a maximum of five key IDs can be registered into the NVIS (NATS) components. ● The security indicator blinks when the ignition switch is in OFF or ACC position. NVIS (NATS) warns outsiders that the vehicle is equipped with the anti-theft system. ● When NVIS (NATS) detects trouble, the security indicator lamp lights up while ignition key is in the ON position. ● NVIS (NATS) trouble diagnoses, system initialization and additional registration of other NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs must be carried out using CONSULT-II hardware and CONSULT-II NVIS (NATS) software. When NVIS (NATS) initialization has been completed, the ID of the inserted ignition key is automatically NVIS (NATS) registered. Then, if necessary, additional registration of other NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs can be carried out. Regarding the procedures of NVIS (NATS) initialization and NVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS. ● When servicing a malfunction of the NVIS (NATS) (indicated by lighting up of Security Indicator Lamp) or registering another NVIS (NATS) ignition key ID, it may be necessary to re-register original key identification. Therefore, be sure to receive ALL KEYS from vehicle owner. System Composition A B C D E F G H EIS004B6 The immobilizer function of the NVIS (NATS) consists of the following: ● NATS ignition key ● NATS antenna amp. located in the ignition key cylinder ● Body control module (BCM) ● Engine control module (ECM) ● Security indicator NOTE: The communication between ECM and BCM uses the CAN communication system. BL J K L M PIIA1121E Revision: October 2004 BL-137 2005 Titan NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) ECM Re-communicating Function EIS004B7 The following procedure can automatically perform re-communication of ECM and BCM, but only when the ECM has been replaced with a new one which has never been energized on-board. (In this step, initialization procedure by CONSULT-II is not necessary) NOTE: ● When registering new Key IDs or replacing the ECM other than brand new, refer to CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS. ● If multiple keys are attached to the key holder, separate them before work. ● Distinguish keys with unregistered key ID from those with registered ID. 1. Install ECM. 2. Using a registered key (*1), turn ignition switch to ON. *1: To perform this step, use the key (except for card plate key) that has been used before performing ECM replacement. 3. Maintain ignition switch in ON position for at least 5 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch to OFF. 5. Start engine. If engine can be started, procedure is completed. If engine cannot be started, refer to CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS and initialize control unit. Revision: October 2004 BL-138 2005 Titan NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) Wiring Diagram — NATS — EIS004B8 A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIWA0770E Revision: October 2004 BL-139 2005 Titan NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) Terminals and Reference Value for BCM Terminal Wire Color 21 G 23 Item EIS004B9 Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Just after turning ignition switch ON: Pointer of tester should move. NATS antenna amp. Ignition switch (OFF → ON) G/O Security indicator lamp Goes OFF → illuminates (Every 2.4 seconds) 25 BR NATS antenna amp. Ignition switch (OFF → ON) 38 W/L Ignition switch (ON or START) Ignition switch (ON or START position) Battery voltage 39 L CAN-H — — 40 P CAN-L — — 57 Y/R Power source (Fuse) — Battery voltage 67 B Ground — 0 70 W/B Power source (Fusible link) — Battery voltage CONSULT-II Battery voltage → 0 Just after turning ignition switch ON: Pointer of tester should move. EIS004BA CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Insert NVIS (NATS) program card into CONSULT-II. Program card 3. : NATS (AEN02C-1) Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector. BBIA0369E 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. Touch “START”. PBR455D Revision: October 2004 BL-140 2005 Titan NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) 6. Touch "OTHER" A B C LIIA0556E D 7. Select “NATS V.5.0”. If “NATS V5.0” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . E F G SEL027X 8. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service procedure. For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS. H BL J SEL150X K CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE FUNCTION CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE Description L C/U INITIALIZATION When replacing any of the following components, C/U initialization and re-registration of all NATS ignition keys are necessary. [(NATS ignition key/ BCM/ ECM] SELF-DIAG RESULTS Detected items (screen terms) are as shown in the chart. Refer to BL-142, "NVIS (NATS) SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ITEM CHART" . NOTE: ● When any initialization is performed, all IDs previously registered will be erased and all NATS ignition keys must be registered again. ● The engine cannot be started with an unregistered key. In this case, the system will show “DIFFERENCE OF KEY” or “LOCK MODE” as a self-diagnostic result on the CONSULT-II screen. ● In rare case, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored as a self-diagnostic result during key registration procedure, even if the system is not malfunctioning. Revision: October 2004 BL-141 2005 Titan M NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) HOW TO READ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS PIIA1124E NVIS (NATS) SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ITEM CHART Detected items [NVIS (NATS) program card screen terms] P No. Code (Self-diagnostic result of “ENGINE”) Malfunction is detected when..... Reference page CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU [P1612] NATS MALFUNCTION P1612 Communication impossible between ECM and BCM In rare case, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored during key registration procedure, even if the system is not malfunctioning. Refer to BL-146 . DIFFERENCE OF KEY [P1615] NATS MALFUNCTION P1615 BCM can receive the key ID signal but the result of ID verification between key ID and BCM is NG. Refer to BL-147 . CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY [P1614] NATS MALFUNCTION P1614 BCM cannot receive the key ID signal. Refer to BL-150 . ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM [P1611] NATS MALFUNCTION P1611 The result of ID verification between BCM and ECM is NG. System initialization is required. Refer to BL-148 . When the starting operation is carried out five or more times consecutively under the following conditions, NVIS (NATS) will shift the mode to one which prevents the engine from being started. Refer to BL-149 . LOCK MODE [P1610] DON'T ERASE BEFORE CHECKING ENG DIAG Revision: October 2004 NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 — ● Unregistered ignition key is used. ● BCM or ECM’s malfunctioning. All engine trouble codes except NVIS (NATS) trouble code has been detected in ECM. Refer to BL-143 . BL-142 2005 Titan NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) Work Flow EIS004BB A B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIIA1152E Revision: October 2004 BL-143 2005 Titan NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) Trouble Diagnoses EIS004BC SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1 Self-diagnosis related item Symptom Displayed “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” on CONSULT-II screen. CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU [P1612] ● Security indicator lighting up* ● Engine cannot be started DIFFERENCE OF KEY [P1615] CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY [P1614] ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM [P1611] Security indicator lighting up* Diagnostic Procedure (Reference page) PROCEDURE 1 (BL-146 ) PROCEDURE 2 (BL-147 ) PROCEDURE 5 (BL-150 ) PROCEDURE 3 (BL-148 ) LOCK MODE [P1610] PROCEDURE 4 (BL-149 ) DON'T ERASE BEFORE CHECKING ENG DIAG WORK FLOW (BL-143 ) System (Malfunctioning part or mode) Reference Part No. Of Illustration On System Diagram In rare case, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored during key registration procedure, even if the system is not malfunctioning. — Open circuit in battery voltage line of BCM circuit C1 Open circuit in ignition line of BCM circuit C2 Open circuit in ground line of BCM circuit C3 Open or short circuit between BCM and ECM communication line C4 ECM B BCM A Unregistered key D BCM A Malfunction of key ID chip E5 Communication line between ANT/ AMP and BCM: Open circuit or short circuit of battery voltage line or ground line E1 E2 Open circuit in power source line of ANT/ AMP circuit E3 Open circuit in ground line of ANT/ AMP circuit E4 NATS antenna amp. E6 BCM A System initialization has not yet been completed. F ECM B LOCK MODE D Engine trouble data and NVIS (NATS) trouble data have been detected in ECM — *: When NVIS (NATS) detects trouble, the security indicator lights up while ignition key is in the “ON” position. Revision: October 2004 BL-144 2005 Titan NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 2 A Non self-diagnosis related item Symptom Security indicator does not light up*. Diagnostic Procedure (Reference page) PROCEDURE 6 (BL-153 ) System (Malfunctioning part or mode) Reference Part No. Of Illustration On System Diagram B Combination meter (security indictor lamp) — Open circuit between Fuse and BCM — BCM A C *: CONSULT-II self-diagnostic results display screen “no malfunction is detected”. D DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM E F G H BL J LIIA0557E K L M Revision: October 2004 BL-145 2005 Titan NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) Diagnostic Procedure 1 EIS004BD Self-diagnostic results: “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-II screen First perform the “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” in “BCM” with CONSULT-II, then perform the trouble diagnosis of malfunction system indicated “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” of “BCM”. Refer to BL-140, "CONSULT-II" . 1. CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-II screen. NOTE: In rare case, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored during key registration procedure, even if the system is not malfunctioning. Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as shown? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO BL-144, "SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1" . PIIA1260E 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR BCM Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminal 70 and ground. 70 (W/B) – Ground :Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following. ● 50A fusible link (letter f , located in fuse and fusible link box) ● Harness for open or short between fuse and BCM connector Ref. Part No. C1 LIIA1279E 3. CHECK IGN SWITCH ON SIGNAL 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 38 and ground. 38 (W/L) – Ground :Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check the following. ● 10A fuse [No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box] ● Harness for open or short between fuse and BCM connector Ref. part No. C2 Revision: October 2004 BL-146 LIIA0527E 2005 Titan NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) 4. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR BCM 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 67 and ground. 67 (B) – Ground B :Continuity should exist OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace harness. Ref. part No. C3 C D LIIA1040E E 5. REPLACE BCM F 1. 2. Replace BCM. Ref. part No. A Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”. Does the engine start? Yes >> BCM is malfunctioning. No >> ● ECM is malfunctioning. ● Replace ECM. Ref. part No. B ● Perform initialization or re-communicating function. ● For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”. ● For re-communicating function, refer to BL-138, "ECM Re-communicating Function" . Diagnostic Procedure 2 G H BL EIS004BE J Self-diagnostic results: “DIFFERENCE OF KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen 1. CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS K Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “DIFFERENCE OF KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen. Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as shown? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO BL-144, "SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1" . L M PIIA1261E Revision: October 2004 BL-147 2005 Titan NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) 2. PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-II Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. Re-register all NATS ignition key IDs. For initialization and registration of NATS ignition key IDs, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/ NVIS”. NOTE: If the initialization is not completed or malfunctions, CONSULT-II shows message on the screen. Can the system be initialized and can the engine be started with reregistered NATS ignition key? Yes >> ● Ignition key ID was unregistered. Ref. part No. D No >> ● BCM is malfunctioning. ● Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . Ref. part No. A ● Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. SEL297W ● For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”. Diagnostic Procedure 3 EIS004BF Self-diagnostic results: “ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM” displayed on CONSULT-II screen 1. CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM” displayed on CONSULT-II screen. NOTE: “ID DISCORD IMM-ECM”: Registered ID of BCM is in discord with that of ECM. Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as shown? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO BL-144, "SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1" . PIIA1262E 2. PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-II Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. Re-register all NATS ignition key IDs. For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATSIVIS/NVIS”. NOTE: If the initialization is not completed or malfunctions, CONSULT-II shows message on the screen. Can the system be initialized? Yes >> ● Start engine. (END) ● (System initialization had not been completed. Ref. part No. F ) No >> ● ECM is malfunctioning. ● Replace ECM. Ref. part No. B ● Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”. Revision: October 2004 BL-148 SEL297W 2005 Titan NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) Diagnostic Procedure 4 EIS004BG A Self-diagnostic results: “LOCK MODE” displayed on CONSULT-II screen 1. CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS B Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “LOCK MODE” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as shown? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO BL-144, "SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1" . C D E PIIA1264E 2. ESCAPE FROM LOCK MODE F 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Turn ignition switch ON with registered key. (Do not start engine.) Wait 5 seconds. 3. Return the key to OFF position. Wait 5 seconds. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 twice (total of three cycles). 5. Start the engine. Does engine start? Yes >> System is OK (Now system is escaped from “LOCK MODE”). Clear all codes. No >> GO TO 3. G H BL 3. PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-II J Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATSIVIS/NVIS”. NOTE: If the initialization is not completed or malfunctions, CONSULT-II shows the message on the screen. Can the system be initialized? Yes >> System is OK. No >> GO TO 4. K L M SEL297W Revision: October 2004 BL-149 2005 Titan NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) 4. PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-II AGAIN 1. 2. Replace BCM. Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATSIVIS/NVIS”. NOTE: If the initialization is not completed or malfunctions, CONSULT-II shows the message on the screen. Can the system be initialized? Yes >> System is OK. (BCM is malfunctioning. Ref. part No. A ) No >> ● ECM is malfunctioning. ● Replace ECM. Ref. part No. B ● Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”. Diagnostic Procedure 5 SEL297W EIS004BH Self-diagnostic results: “CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen 1. CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen. Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as shown? Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO BL-144, "SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1" . PIIA1263E 2. CHECK NATS ANTENNA AMP. INSTALLATION Check NATS antenna amp. installation. Refer to BL-154, "How to Replace NATS Antenna Amp." . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Reinstall NATS antenna amp. correctly. 3. CHECK NVIS (NATS) IGNITION KEY ID CHIP Start engine with another registered NATS ignition key. Does the engine start? Yes >> ● Ignition key ID chip is malfunctioning. ● Replace the ignition key. Ref. part No, E5 ● Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”. No >> GO TO 4. Revision: October 2004 BL-150 2005 Titan NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) 4. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR NATS ANTENNA AMP. A Check voltage between NATS antenna amp. connector M21 terminal 1 and ground. 1 (W) – Ground B :Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace harness. C D LIIA1280E 5. CHECK NATS ANTENNA AMP. SIGNAL LINE- 1 E Check voltage between NATS antenna amp. connector M21 terminal 2 and ground with analog tester. 2 (G) - Ground Before inserting key into ignition key cylinder Voltage: Battery voltage After inserting key into ignition key cylinder : Pointer of tester should move for 30 seconds, then return to battery voltage. Just after turning ignition switch ON : Pointer of tester should move for approx. 1 second, then return to battery voltage. F G H LIIA1281E BL J OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> ● Repair or replace harness. NOTE: If harness is OK, replace BCM, perform initialization with CONSULT-II. For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”. K L M Revision: October 2004 BL-151 2005 Titan NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) 6. CHECK NATS ANTENNA AMP. SIGNAL LINE- 2 Check voltage between NATS antenna amp. connector M21 terminal 4 and ground with analog tester. 4 (BR) - Ground Before inserting key into ignition key cylinder Voltage: Battery voltage After inserting key into ignition key cylinder : Pointer of tester should move for 30 seconds, then return to battery voltage. Just after turning ignition switch ON : Pointer of tester should move for approx. 1 second, then return to battery voltage. LIIA1282E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> ● Repair or replace harness. NOTE: If harness is OK, replace BCM, perform initialization with CONSULT-II. For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”. 7. CHECK NATS ANTENNA AMP. GROUND LINE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect NATS antenna amp. connector. Check continuity between NATS antenna amp. connector M21 terminal 3 and ground. 3 (B) – Ground :Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> ● NATS antenna amp. is malfunctioning. Ref. part No. E6 NG >> ● Repair or replace harness. NOTE: If harness is OK, replace BCM, perform initialization with CONSULT-II. For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”. Revision: October 2004 BL-152 LIIA1283E 2005 Titan NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) Diagnostic Procedure 6 EIS004BI A SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT LIGHT UP 1. CHECK FUSE B Check 10A fuse [No.19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] NOTE: Refer to BL-136, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. C D 2. CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP 1. 2. Start engine and turn ignition switch OFF. Check the combination meter (security indicator lamp) lights up. E Security indicator lamp should light up. F OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> GO TO 3. G 3. CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect combination meter (security indicator lamp) connector. Check voltage between combination meter (security indicator lamp) connector M24 terminal 8 and ground. 8 (Y/R) – Ground H BL :Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. J K LIIA1072E 4. CHECK BCM (NATS CONTROL UNIT) FUNCTION 1. 2. 3. L Connect combination meter (security indicator lamp) connector. Disconnect BCM. Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 23 and ground. 23 (G/O) – Ground M :Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> BCM is malfunctioning. ● Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . Ref. part No. A ● Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. LIIA0523E ● For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS-IVIS/NVIS”. NG >> Check the following. ● Harness for open or short between combination meter (security indicator lamp) and BCM (NATS control unit). ● Indicator lamp condition Revision: October 2004 BL-153 2005 Titan NVIS(NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) How to Replace NATS Antenna Amp. EIS004BJ NOTE: ● If NATS antenna amp. is not installed correctly, NVIS (NATS) system will not operate properly and SELF-DIAG RESULTS on CONSULT-II screen will show “LOCK MODE” or “CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY”. ● Initialization is not necessary only when NATS antenna amp. is replaced with a new one. SIIA1683E Revision: October 2004 BL-154 2005 Titan HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER Wiring Diagram — TRNSCV — PFP:96401 A EIS0061Z B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIWA0759E Revision: October 2004 BL-155 2005 Titan HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER Trouble Diagnoses EIS00620 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE SYMPTOM: Transmitter does not activate receiver. Before conducting the procedure given below, make sure that system receiver (garage door opener, etc.) operates with original, hand-held transmitter. If NG, receiver or hand-held transmitter is at fault, not vehicle related. 1. ILLUMINATE CHECK Turn ignition switch OFF. Does amber light (LED) of transmitter illuminate when any button is pressed? YES or NO YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> GO TO 3. ● ● LIIA1466E 2. TRANSMITTER CHECK Check transmitter with Tool.* *For details, refer to Technical Service Bulletin. OK or NG OK >> Receiver or handheld transmitter malfunction, not vehicle related. NG >> Replace transmitter. 3. CHECK BCM OUTPUT POWER SUPPLY Does room lamp come on when driver side door is opened? Refer to LT-126, "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP" . Yes or No? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Repair or replace the compass and thermometer assembly. 4. POWER SUPPLY CHECK 1. 2. Disconnect transmitter. Check voltage between Homelink® universal transceiver connector R106 terminal 1 and ground. 1 (Y/R) - Ground : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA1467E Revision: October 2004 BL-156 2005 Titan HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER 5. GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK A Check continuity between Homelink® universal transceiver connector R106 terminal 2 (B) and body ground. 2 (B) - Ground : Continuity should exist. B OK or NG OK >> Replace compass and thermometer assembly. NG >> Repair or replace harness. C D LIIA2039E E F G H BL J K L M Revision: October 2004 BL-157 2005 Titan CAB AND REAR BODY CAB AND REAR BODY Body Mounting, King Cab PFP:93020 EIS004BM When removing, be sure to replace bolts and nuts (sealant applied bolts or self-lock nuts are used for all mounting). LIIA1622E Frame to Cab bolts Revision: October 2004 : 87.5 N·m (8.9 kg-m, 65 ft-lb) BL-158 2005 Titan CAB AND REAR BODY Body Mounting, Crew Cab EIS004BN When removing, be sure to replace bolts and nuts (sealant applied bolts or self-lock nuts are used for all mounting). A B C D E F G H BL J LIIA1623E Frame to Cab bolts K : 87.5 N·m (8.9 kg-m, 65 ft-lb) L M Revision: October 2004 BL-159 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR BODY REPAIR Body Exterior Paint Color PFP:60100 EIS004BO LIIA1192E Color code A15 A20 B18 C10 D13 G10 K11 K12 Q10 Red Brawn Red Alert Deep Water Copper Canteen Galaxy Smoke Radiant Silver Blizzard Paint type M M M M M 2P M M 2S Clear coat t t t t t t t t t KH3 KH3 KH3 KH3 KH3 KH3 KH3 KH3 KH3 Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Body color A15 A20 B18 C10 D13 G10 K11 K12 Q10 End caps Body color A15 A20 B18 C10 D13 G10 K11 K12 Q10 Center Chrome Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr KH3 KH3 KH3 KH3 KH3 KH3 KH3 KH3 KH3 Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr A15 A20 B18 C10 D13 G10 K11 K12 Q10 Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Black KH3 KH3 KH3 KH3 KH3 KH3 KH3 KH3 KH3 XE Body color A15 A20 B18 C10 D13 G10 K11 K12 Q10 SE and LE Chrome Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Description Component 1 Outside mirror Black XE SE and LE XE 2 3 4 5 Front bumper Outside handles Radiator grille Rear Bumper SE and LE Chrome XE Black SE and LE Chrome XE Body color SE and LE Center Chrome Grid M: Metallic; 2S: 2-Coat Solid, 2P: 2-Coat Pearl; 3P: 3-Coat Pearl; t: New Cross Linking Clear Coat Revision: October 2004 BL-160 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR Body Component Parts EIS004BP A UNDERBODY COMPONENT PARTS B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIIA1209E Revision: October 2004 BL-161 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. Rear floor Rear seat crossmember 4th crossmember Rear floor reinforcement assembly Front seat mounting crossmember Sill inner extension RH, LH) Front floor reinforcement Inner sill (RH, LH) 2nd crossmember extension (RH, LH) Front floor 2nd crossmember assembly Dash side (RH, LH) Hoodledge assembly (RH, LH) Harness bracket Hoodledge front reinforcement (LH) Battery mounting reinforcement (RH) 1st body mounting bracket (LH) Hoodledge reinforcement (RH, LH) Rear hoodledge reinforcement (RH, LH) Cowl top Cowl top extension Upper dash assembly Revision: October 2004 BL-162 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR BODY COMPONENT PARTS KING CAB A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIIA0325E Revision: October 2004 BL-163 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. Side panel assembly (RH, LH) Inner side panel assembly (RH, LH) Rear strut assembly (RH, LH) Inner rear strut assembly (RH, LH) Rear gate Tail floor bolster assembly Rear body floor assembly Front outer strut assembly (RH, LH) Rear roof rail Inner lock pillar (RH, LH) Back panel assembly Outer lock pillar reinforcement (RH, LH) Body side outer (RH, LH) Rear door assembly (RH, LH) Front door assembly (RH, LH) Front fender (RH, LH) Hood Dash side (RH, LH) Front pillar brace (RH, LH) Outer sill reinforcement (RH, LH) Inner upper front pillar (RH, LH) Inner roof side rail (RH,LH) Roof Upper front pillar reinforcement (RH, LH) Front roof rail No. 1 roof bow Header panel Revision: October 2004 BL-164 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR CREW CAB A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIIA0326E Revision: October 2004 BL-165 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. Rear strut assembly (RH, LH) Inner rear strut assembly (RH, LH) Rear gate Rear body floor assembly Tail floor bolster assembly Inner side panel assembly (RH, LH) Side panel assembly (RH, LH) Front outer strut assembly (RH, LH) Rear roof rail Inner lock pillar (RH, LH) Back panel assembly Outer lock pillar reinforcement (RH, LH) Body side outer (RH, LH) Rear door assembly (RH, LH) Front door assembly (RH, LH) Front fender (RH, LH) Hood Hoodledge rear reinforcement (RH, LH) Front pillar brace (RH, LH) Outer sill reinforcement (RH, LH) Inner upper front pillar (RH, LH) Inner roof side rail (RH,LH) Inner center pillar (RH, LH) Upper front pillar reinforcement (RH, LH) Lower center pillar brace (RH, LH) Front roof rail Sunroof frame No. 2 roof bow Standard roof Roof with sunroof opening Header panel Revision: October 2004 BL-166 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR FRAME COMPONENT PARTS King Cab A B C D E F G H BL J LIIA1624E K 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. Front differential mounting bracket RH/LH 1st cab mounting bracket RH/LH Front side member extension assembly RH/LH 1st crossmember assembly Front upper link mounting bracket RH/LH Panhard rod bracket reinforcement Bound bumper bracket RH/LH Front brake hose bracket RH/LH Front shock absorber bracket RH/LH Panhard rod reinforcement 4th crossmember gusset RH/LH 2nd cab mounting bracket RH/LH 3rd cab mounting reinforcement 3rd cab mounting bracket RH/LH 1st rear body mounting bracket RH/LH Rear spring front bracket assembly RH/LH 2nd rear body mounting bracket RH/LH Rear bound bumper bracket RH/LH Rear bound bumper reinforcement RH/LH Revision: October 2004 BL-167 L M 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. Rear spring rear bracket assembly RH/LH 5th rear body mounting reinforcement bracket RH/LH 9th crossmember assembly Exhaust bracket assembly 8th crossmember assembly Rear shock absorber bracket assembly RH/LH Canister bracket, RH Canister bracket, LH 7th crossmember assembly 6th crossmember assembly 5th crossmember assembly 4th crossmember assembly 3rd crossmember assembly 2nd crossmember assembly Frame assembly Crew Cab LIIA1625E 1. 2. 3. 4. Front differential mounting bracket RH/LH 1st cab mounting bracket RH/LH Front side member extension assembly RH/LH 1st crossmember assembly Revision: October 2004 BL-168 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. Front upper link mounting bracket RH/LH Panhard rod bracket reinforcement Bound bumper bracket RH/LH Front brake hose bracket RH/LH Front shock absorber bracket RH/LH Panhard rod reinforcement 4th crossmember gusset RH/LH 2nd cab mounting bracket RH/LH 3rd cab mounting bracket RH/LH 4th cab mounting bracket RH/LH Rear spring front bracket assembly RH/LH 2nd rear body mounting bracket RH/LH Rear bound bumper bracket RH/LH Rear bound bumper reinforcement RH/LH Rear spring rear bracket assembly RH/LH 5th rear body mounting reinforcement bracket RH/LH 9th crossmember assembly Exhaust bracket assembly 8th crossmember assembly Rear shock absorber bracket assembly RH/LH Canister bracket, RH Canister bracket, LH 7th crossmember assembly 6th crossmember assembly 5th crossmember assembly 4th crossmember assembly 3rd crossmember assembly 2nd crossmember assembly Frame assembly A B C D E F G H BL J K L M Revision: October 2004 BL-169 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR Corrosion Protection EIS004BQ DESCRIPTION To provide improved corrosion prevention, the following anti-corrosive measures have been implemented in NISSAN production plants. When repairing or replacing body panels, it is necessary to use the same anti-corrosive measures. ANTI-CORROSIVE PRECOATED STEEL (GALVANNEALED STEEL) To improve repairability and corrosion resistance, a new type of anticorrosive precoated steel sheet has been adopted replacing conventional zinc-coated steel sheet. Galvannealed steel is electroplated and heated to form Zinc-iron alloy, which provides excellent and long term corrosion resistance with cationic electrode position primer. PIIA0093E Nissan Genuine Service Parts are fabricated from galvannealed steel. Therefore, it is recommended that GENUINE NISSAN PARTS or equivalent be used for panel replacement to maintain the anti-corrosive performance built into the vehicle at the factory. PHOSPHATE COATING TREATMENT AND CATIONIC ELECTRODEPOSITION PRIMER A phosphate coating treatment and a cationic electrode position primer, which provide excellent corrosion protection, are employed on all body components. CAUTION: Confine paint removal during welding operations to an absolute minimum. PIIA0095E Nissan Genuine Service Parts are also treated in the same manner. Therefore, it is recommended that GENUINE NISSAN PARTS or equivalent be used for panel replacement to maintain anti-corrosive performance built into the vehicle at the factory. Revision: October 2004 BL-170 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR ANTI-CORROSIVE WAX To improve corrosion resistance, anti-corrosive wax is applied inside the body sill and inside other closed sections. Accordingly, when replacing these parts, be sure to apply anti-corrosive wax to the appropriate areas of the new parts. Select an excellent anti-corrosive wax which will penetrate after application and has a long shelf life. A B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIIA1210E Revision: October 2004 BL-171 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR UNDERCOATING The underside of the floor and wheelhouse are undercoated to prevent rust, vibration, noise and stone chipping. Therefore, when such a panel is replaced or repaired, apply undercoating to that part. Use an undercoating which is rust preventive, soundproof, vibration-proof, shock-resistant, adhesive, and durable. Precautions in undercoating 1. 2. 3. 4. Do not apply undercoating to any place unless specified (such as the areas above the muffler and three way catalyst which are subjected to heat). Do not undercoat the exhaust pipe or other parts which become hot. Do not undercoat rotating parts. Apply bitumen wax after applying undercoating. LIIA1211E Revision: October 2004 BL-172 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR Body Sealing EIS004BR A DESCRIPTION The following figure shows the areas which are sealed at the factory. Sealant which has been applied to these areas should be smooth and free from cuts or gaps. Care should be taken not to apply an excess amount of B C D E F G H BL J K L M Revision: October 2004 BL-173 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR sealant and not to allow other unaffected parts to come into contact with the sealant. LIIA1303E Revision: October 2004 BL-174 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR A B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIIA1315E Revision: October 2004 BL-175 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR LIIA1316E Revision: October 2004 BL-176 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR Body Construction EIS004BS A BODY CONSTRUCTION King Cab B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIIA1317E Revision: October 2004 BL-177 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR Crew Cab LIIA1318E Revision: October 2004 BL-178 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR Body Alignment EIS004BT BODY CENTER MARKS A A mark has been placed on each part of the body to indicate the vehicle center. When repairing parts damaged by an accident which might affect the vehicle frame (members, pillars, etc.), more accurate and effective repair will be possible by using these marks together with body alignment specifications. B C D E F G H BL J K L M Revision: October 2004 BL-179 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR WIIA0327E Revision: October 2004 BL-180 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR PANEL PARTS MATCHING MARKS A mark has been placed on each body panel to indicate the parts matching positions. When repairing parts damaged by an accident which might affect the vehicle structure (members, pillars, etc.), more accurate and A B C D E F G H BL J K L M Revision: October 2004 BL-181 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR effective repair will be possible by using these marks together with body alignment specifications. WIIA0338E Revision: October 2004 BL-182 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR DESCRIPTION ● ● ● ● ● ● All dimensions indicated in the figures are actual. When using a tracking gauge, adjust both pointers to equal length. Then check the pointers and gauge itself to make sure there is no free play. When a measuring tape is used, check to be sure there is no elongation, twisting or bending. Measurements should be taken at the center of the mounting holes. An asterisk (*) following the value at the measuring point indicates that the measuring point on the other side is symmetrically the same value. The coordinates of the measurement points are the distances measured from the standard line of "X", "Y" and "Z". A B C D E F G H BL LIIA1506E J K L M Revision: October 2004 BL-183 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR ENGINE COMPARTMENT MEASUREMENT WIIA0551E Revision: October 2004 BL-184 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR MEASUREMENT POINTS A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIIA0279E Revision: October 2004 BL-185 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR UNDERBODY MEASUREMENT LIIA1213E Revision: October 2004 BL-186 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR MEASUREMENT POINTS A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIIA0577E Revision: October 2004 BL-187 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR WIIA0340E Revision: October 2004 BL-188 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR PASSENGER COMPARTMENT MEASUREMENT A Windshield Opening B C D E F G H BL LIIA1289E J K L M Revision: October 2004 BL-189 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR King Cab Door Opening LIIA1290E Crew Cab Door Opening LIIA1291E Revision: October 2004 BL-190 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR Rear Window Opening A B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIIA1292E Revision: October 2004 BL-191 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR MEASUREMENT POINTS LIIA1300E Revision: October 2004 BL-192 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR A B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIIA1321E Revision: October 2004 BL-193 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR LIIA1322E Revision: October 2004 BL-194 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR REAR BODY MEASUREMENT A B C D E F G H BL LIIA1295E J K L M LIIA1296E Revision: October 2004 BL-195 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR King Cab Bed Opening LIIA1293E Crew Cab Bed Opening LIIA1294E Revision: October 2004 BL-196 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR Measurement Points A B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIIA1334E Revision: October 2004 BL-197 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR Handling Precautions for Plastics Abbreviation Material name EIS004BU Heat resisting temperature °C (°F) Resistance to gasoline and solvents Other cautions PE Polyethylene 60 (140) Gasoline and most solvents are harmless if applied for a very short time (wipe up quickly). Flammable PVC Polyvinyl Chloride 80 (176) Same as above. Poison gas is emitted when burned. EPM/ EPDM Ethylene Propylene (Diene) rubber 80 (176) Same as above. Flammable TPO/ TPR Thermoplastic Olefine/ Thermoplastic Rubber 80 (176) Same as above. Flammable PP Polypropylene 90 (194) Same as above. Flammable, avoid battery acid. UP Polyester thermoset 90 (194) Same as above. Flammable PS Polystyrene 80 (176) Avoid solvents. Flammable ABS Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene resin 80 (176) Avoid gasoline and solvents. AES Acrylonitrile Ethylene Styrene 80 (176) Same as above. PMMA Polymethyl Methacrylate 85 (185) Same as above. AAS Acrylonitrile Acrylic Styrene 85 (185) Same as above. AS Acrylonitrile Styrene 85 (185) Same as above. EVA Polyvinyl Ethyl Acetate 90 (194) Same as above. ASA Acrylonitrile Styrene Acrylate 100 (222) Same as above. PPO/ PPE Polyphenylene Oxide/ Polyphenylene Ether 110 (230) Same as above. PC Polycarbonate 120 (248) Same as above. PAR Polyacrylate 180 (356) Same as above. LLDPE Lenear Low Density PE 45 (100) Gasoline and most solvents are harmless. PUR Polyurethane 90 (194) Same as above. TPU Thermoplastic Urethane 110 (230) Same as above. PPC Polypropylene Composite 115 (239) Same as above. Flammable POM Polyacetal 120 (248) Same as above. Avoid battery acid. PBT+P C Polybutylene Terephthalate+Polycarbonate 120 (248) Same as above. Flammable PA Polyamide (Nylon) 140 (284) Same as above. Avoid immersing in water. PBT Polybutylene Terephthalate 140 (284) Same as above. FRP Fiber Reinforced Plastics 170 (338) Same as above. PET Polyethylene Terephthalate 180 (356) Same as above. PEI Polyetherimide 200 (392) Same as above. Flammable Flammable Avoid battery acid. 1. When repairing and painting a portion of the body adjacent to plastic parts, consider their characteristics (influence of heat and solvent) and remove them if necessary or take suitable measures to protect them. 2. Plastic parts should be repaired and painted using methods suiting the materials, characteristics. Revision: October 2004 BL-198 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR LOCATION OF PLASTIC PARTS A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIIA0350E Revision: October 2004 BL-199 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR WIIA0351E Revision: October 2004 BL-200 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR Precautions in Repairing High Strength Steel EIS004BV High strength steel is used for body panels in order to reduce vehicle weight. Accordingly, precautions in repairing automotive bodies made of high strength steel are described below: HIGH STRENGTH STEEL (HSS) USED IN NISSAN VEHICLES Tensile strength 373 N/mm2 (38kg/mm2 ,54klb/sq in) B Nissan/Infiniti designation SP130 Major applicable parts ● Front inner pillar upper ● Front pillar hinge brace ● Outer front pillar reinforcement ● Other reinforcements ● Outer sill reinforcement ● Main back pillar C D 2 785-981 N/mm (80-100kg/mm2 114-142klb/sq in) A SP150 E SP130 is the most commonly used HSS. SP150 HSS is used only on parts that require much more strength. Read the following precautions when repairing HSS: 1. Additional points to consider ● The repair of reinforcements (such as side members) by heating is not recommended since it may weaken the component. When heating is unavoidable, do not heat HSS parts above 550°C (1,022°F). Verify heating temperature with a thermometer. (Crayon-type and other similar type thermometer are appropriate.) F G H BL PIIA0115E J ● When straightening body panels, use caution in pulling any HSS panel. Because HSS is very strong, pulling may cause deformation in adjacent portions of the body. In this case, increase the number of measuring points, and carefully pull the HSS panel. K L M PIIA0116E ● When cutting HSS panels, avoid gas (torch) cutting if possible. Instead, use a saw to avoid weakening surrounding areas due to heat. If gas (torch) cutting is unavoidable, allow a minimum margin of 50 mm (1.97in). PIIA0117E Revision: October 2004 BL-201 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR ● When welding HSS panels, use spot welding whenever possible in order to minimize weakening surrounding areas due to heat. If spot welding is impossible, use M.I.G. welding. Do not use gas (torch) welding because it is inferior in welding strength. PIIA0144E ● ● 2. The spot weld on HSS panels is harder than that of an ordinary steel panel. Therefore, when cutting spot welds on a HSS panel, use a low speed high torque drill (1,000 to 1,200 rpm) to increase drill bit durability and facilitate the operation. SP150 HSS panels with a tensile strength of 785 to 981 N/ mm2 (80 to 100 kg/mm2 , 114 to 142 klb/sq in), used as reinforcement in the door guard beams, is too strong to repair. When these HSS parts are damaged, the outer panels also sustain substantial damage; therefore, the assembly parts must be replaced. PIIA0145E Precautions in spot welding HSS This work should be performed under standard working conditions. Always note the following when spot welding HSS: ● The electrode tip diameter must be sized properly according to the metal thickness. PIIA0146E ● The panel surfaces must fit flush to each other, leaving no gaps. PIIA0147E Revision: October 2004 BL-202 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR ● Follow the specifications for the proper welding pitch. Unit:mm Thickness (t) Minimum pitch ( ) 0.6 (0.024) 0.8 (0.031) 1.0 (0.039) 1.2 (0.047) 1.6 (0.063) 1.8 (0.071) 10 (0.39) or over 12 (0.47) or over 18 (0.71) or over 20 (0.79) or over 27 (1.06) or over 31 (1.22) or over A B C PIIA0148E D Foam Repair EIS004BW During factory body assembly, foam insulators are installed in certain body panels and locations around the vehicle. Use the following procedure(s) to replace any factory-installed foam insulators. E URETHANE FOAM APPLICATIONS Use commercially available spray foam for sealant (foam material) repair of material used on vehicle. Read instructions on product for fill procedures. F FILL PROCEDURES 1. – – – – Fill procedures after installation of service part. Remove foam material remaining on vehicle side. Clean area in which foam was removed. Install service part. Insert nozzle into hole near fill area and fill foam material or fill in enough to close gap with the service part. G H BL J K LIIA1081E 2. – – – – Fill procedures before installation of service part. Remove foam material remaining on vehicle side. Clean area in which foam was removed. Fill foam material on wheelhouse outer side. NOTE: Fill in enough to close gap with service part while avoiding flange area. Install service part. NOTE: Refer to label for information on working times. M LIIA1082E Revision: October 2004 BL-203 L 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR Replacement Operations EIS004BX DESCRIPTION This section is prepared for technicians who have attained a high level of skill and experience in repairing collision-damaged vehicles and also use modern service tools and equipment. Persons unfamiliar with body repair techniques should not attempt to repair collision-damaged vehicles by using this section. Technicians are also encouraged to read Body Repair Manual (Fundamentals) in order to ensure that the original functions and quality of the vehicle can be maintained. The Body Repair Manual (Fundamentals) contains additional information, including cautions and warnings, that are not including in this manual. Technicians should refer to both manuals to ensure proper repairs. Please note that this information is prepared for worldwide usage, and as such, certain procedures may not apply in some regions or countries. Revision: October 2004 BL-204 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR The symbols used in this section for cutting and welding / brazing operations are shown below. A B C D E F G H BL J K L M PIIA0149E Revision: October 2004 BL-205 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR ● Front pillar butt joint can be determined anywhere within shaded area as shown in the figure. The best location for the butt joint is at position A due to the construction of the vehicle. Refer to the front pillar section. PIIA0150E ● Determine cutting position and record distance from the locating indent. Use this distance when cutting the service part. Cut outer front pillar over 60 mm above inner front pillar cut position. PIIA0151E ● Prepare a cutting jig to make outer pillar easier to cut. Also, this will permit service part to be accurately cut at joint position. PIIA0152E ● 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. An example of cutting operation using a cutting jig is as follows. Mark cutting lines. A: Cut position of outer pillar B: Cut position of inner pillar Align cutting line with notch on jig. Clamp jig to pillar. Cut outer pillar along groove of jig. (At position A) Remove jig and cut remaining portions. Cut inner pillar at position B in same manner. PIIA0153E Revision: October 2004 BL-206 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR HOODLEDGE ● A Work after radiator core support has been removed. B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIIA0341E Revision: October 2004 BL-207 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR FRONT PILLAR ● Work after rear hoodledge reinforcement has been removed. WIIA0342E Revision: October 2004 BL-208 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR A B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIIA1156E Revision: October 2004 BL-209 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR WIIA0343E Revision: October 2004 BL-210 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR CENTER PILLAR A B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIIA1159E Revision: October 2004 BL-211 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR LIIA1112E Revision: October 2004 BL-212 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR OUTER SILL KING CAB A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIIA0344E Revision: October 2004 BL-213 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR LIIA1195E Revision: October 2004 BL-214 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR A B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIIA1196E Revision: October 2004 BL-215 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR CREW CAB LIIA1197E Revision: October 2004 BL-216 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR REAR CAB PILLAR KING CAB A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIIA0345E Revision: October 2004 BL-217 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR LIIA1201E Revision: October 2004 BL-218 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR CREW CAB A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIIA0346E Revision: October 2004 BL-219 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR WIIA0347E Revision: October 2004 BL-220 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR REAR PANEL A B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIIA1205E Revision: October 2004 BL-221 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR REAR FLOOR REAR KING CAB LIIA1203E Revision: October 2004 BL-222 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR CREW CAB A B C D E F G H BL J K L M WIIA0348E Revision: October 2004 BL-223 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR PICKUP BED KING CAB WIIA0349E Revision: October 2004 BL-224 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR A B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIIA1223E Revision: October 2004 BL-225 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR CREW CAB LIIA1224E Revision: October 2004 BL-226 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR A B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIIA1225E Revision: October 2004 BL-227 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR LIIA1215E Revision: October 2004 BL-228 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR A B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIIA1216E Revision: October 2004 BL-229 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR LIIA1217E Revision: October 2004 BL-230 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR A B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIIA1218E Revision: October 2004 BL-231 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR LIIA1219E Revision: October 2004 BL-232 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR A B C D E F G H BL J K L M LIIA1220E Revision: October 2004 BL-233 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR LIIA1221E Revision: October 2004 BL-234 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR CRUSH HORN ● A Work after 1st crossmember has been removed. B C D E F G H BL J LIIA1083E Portions to be welded: A. Inner side rail crush horn, inner side rail crush horn and outer side rail crush horn. B. Outer side rail crush horn, outer side rail crush horn and inner side rail crush horn. K L M Revision: October 2004 BL-235 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR Removal Notes ● Scribe a straight line on the outer side rail crush horn and inner side rail crush horn along the hole center as shown in the figure. LIIA1084E ● Cut off outer side rail crush horn and inner side rail crush horn along scribed line A. Do not cut on the hole. ● Cut inner side rail crush horn at 45 mm backward cut position of cut line A. (along line B) LIIA1085E Revision: October 2004 BL-236 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR A B C D E F LIIA1086E ● After removing outer panel, dress area on the inner panel surface with a sander or equivalent. G H BL J K L M Revision: October 2004 BL-237 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR Installation Notes LIIA1087E ● Scribe a straight line on the inner side rail crush horn along the hole center as shown in the figure. Cut off inner side rail crush horn along scribed line. LIIA1088E ● Scribe a straight line on the outer side rail crush horn along the hole center as shown in the figure. Cut off outer side rail crush horn along scribed line. Revision: October 2004 BL-238 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR ● Weld part to be butt-welded and seam-welded corner to corner as shown in the figure. A B C D E F G H BL J K L LIIA1089E M Revision: October 2004 BL-239 2005 Titan BODY REPAIR Revision: October 2004 BL-240 2005 Titan F BRAKES A B SECTION BRAKE SYSTEM C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3 Precautions for Brake System .................................. 3 PREPARATION ........................................................... 4 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 4 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 5 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 5 BRAKE PEDAL .......................................................... 6 Inspection and Adjustment ....................................... 6 INSPECTION ........................................................ 6 ADJUSTMENT ...................................................... 6 Removal and Installation .......................................... 7 REMOVAL ............................................................. 8 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ......................... 9 INSTALLATION ..................................................... 9 BRAKE FLUID .......................................................... 10 On-board Inspection ............................................... 10 LEVEL CHECK ................................................... 10 Drain and Refill ....................................................... 10 Bleeding Brake System ...........................................11 BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE .................................... 12 Hydraulic Circuit ..................................................... 12 Removal and Installation of Front Brake Piping and Brake Hose ............................................................ 12 REMOVAL ........................................................... 12 INSTALLATION ................................................... 13 Removal and Installation of Rear Brake Piping and Brake Hose ............................................................ 13 REMOVAL ........................................................... 13 INSTALLATION ................................................... 13 Inspection After Installation .................................... 14 BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER .................................. 15 On-board Inspection ............................................... 15 LEAK INSPECTION ............................................ 15 With ABS ................................................................ 15 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ........................ 15 Revision: October 2004 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ....................... 16 With ABLS or VDC ................................................. 16 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ........................ 17 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ....................... 17 BRAKE BOOSTER ................................................... 18 On-Vehicle Service ................................................. 18 OPERATING CHECK .......................................... 18 AIRTIGHT CHECK .............................................. 18 With ABS or BLSD .................................................. 19 REMOVAL ........................................................... 19 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 19 INSTALLATION ................................................... 20 With VDC ................................................................ 20 REMOVAL ........................................................... 20 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 21 INSTALLATION ................................................... 21 VACUUM LINES ....................................................... 22 Removal and Installation ........................................ 22 Inspection ............................................................... 22 VISUAL INSPECTION ......................................... 22 CHECK VALVE INSPECTION ............................. 22 FRONT DISC BRAKE ............................................... 23 On-vehicle Inspection ............................................. 23 PAD WEAR INSPECTION ................................... 23 Components ........................................................... 23 Removal and Installation of Brake Pad .................. 24 REMOVAL ........................................................... 24 INSTALLATION ................................................... 24 Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor ....................................................................... 24 REMOVAL ........................................................... 24 INSTALLATION ................................................... 24 Disassembly and Assembly of Brake Caliper ......... 25 DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 25 CALIPER INSPECTION ...................................... 26 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 26 DISC ROTOR INSPECTION ............................... 27 BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE ................. 27 REAR DISC BRAKE ................................................. 28 On-vehicle Inspection ............................................. 28 BR-1 2005 Titan BR G H I J K L M PAD WEAR INSPECTION ................................... 28 Components ........................................................... 28 Removal and Installation of Brake Pad ................... 29 REMOVAL ........................................................... 29 INSTALLATION .................................................... 29 Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor ....................................................................... 29 REMOVAL ........................................................... 29 Revision: October 2004 INSTALLATION ....................................................29 Disassembly and Assembly of Brake Caliper .........30 DISASSEMBLY ....................................................30 CALIPER INSPECTION .......................................30 ASSEMBLY ..........................................................31 DISC ROTOR INSPECTION ...............................31 BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE .................32 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ......33 General Specifications ............................................33 Brake Pedal ............................................................33 Brake Booster .........................................................33 Check Valve ............................................................33 Front Disc Brake .....................................................33 Rear Disc Brake ......................................................34 BR-2 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A EFS004O0 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along B with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front C air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. D WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. E ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. BR ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. G Precautions for Brake System EFS004O1 Always use recommended brake fluid. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . ● Do not reuse drained brake fluid. ● Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas. ● To clean or wash all parts of master cylinder, disc brake caliper and wheel cylinder, use clean brake fluid. ● Do not use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. They will ruin rubber parts of the hydraulic system. ● Use flare nut wrench when removing and installing brake tube. ● Always check tightening torque when installing brake lines. ● Before working, turn ignition switch to OFF and disconnect connectors for ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) or battery terminals. ● Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or replacing drums or rotors, after replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-27, "BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE" . WARNING: SBR686C ● Clean brake pads and shoes with a waste cloth, then wipe with a dust collector. ● Revision: October 2004 BR-3 2005 Titan H I J K L M PREPARATION PREPARATION Commercial Service Tools PFP:00002 EFS004O2 Tool name Description 1. Flare nut crowfoot 2. Torque wrench Removing and installing each brake piping a: 10mm (0.39 in)/12mm (0.47 in) S-NT360 Power tool Removing front and rear caliper assembly, tires PBIC0190E PBIC0191E Revision: October 2004 BR-4 2005 Titan Symptom Revision: October 2004 × × × Shake × Shimmy, Shudder × × BR-5 × × × × × PROPELLER SHAFT DIFFERENTIAL DRIVESHAFT SUSPENSION TIRES AND ROAD WHEEL STEERING Rotor thickness variation Rotor rust Rotor deflection Rotor deformation Rotor runout Rotor damage Rotor imbalance Shims damaged Noise Pads - uneven wear Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS × PS-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart WT-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" FSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart", RSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart", RAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" RFD-8, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart", FFD-7, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" PR-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" BR-27, BR-32 BR-27, BR-32 BR-27, BR-31 BR-27, BR-31 BR-27, BR-31 BR-27, BR-31 BR-27, BR-31 BR-23, BR-28 BR-23, BR-28 BR-23, BR-28 Reference page Pads - damaged NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING PFP:00003 EFS004O3 A Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. B C × × × × × × × × × × × × × × ×: Applicable 2005 Titan D E BR G H I J K L M BRAKE PEDAL BRAKE PEDAL Inspection and Adjustment PFP:46501 EFS004O4 INSPECTION 1. 2. Inspect the brake pedal free height "H" from the lower dash. Adjust the height referring to the following specifications. CAUTION: When equipped with adjustable pedal, the pedal must be in the forwardmost (closest to the floor) position for pedal height measurement. WFIA0160E Brake Pedal Specifications Unit: mm (in) Free height "H" : 182.3 - 192.3 (7.18 - 7.57) Depressed pedal height "D" [under a force of 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb) with engine running] : More than 90.3 (3.55) Clearance between pedal stopper and threaded end of stop lamp switch and ASCD switch "C1 " or “C2 ” : 0.74 - 1.96 (0.029 - 0.077) Pedal play "A" : 3 - 11 (0.12 - 0.43) ADJUSTMENT 1. Loosen the stop lamp switch and ASCD switch by turning 45° counterclockwise. Revision: October 2004 BR-6 2005 Titan BRAKE PEDAL 2. Loosen lock nut on the input rod, then turn input rod to adjust the pedal to specified height. When finished adjusting, tighten lock nut. CAUTION: Make sure that the screw portion of the end of input rod is located inside the clevis. Lock nut 3. 4. 5. 6. A B : 18.5 N·m (1.9 kg-m, 14 ft-lb) With the pedal pulled up and held by hand, press the stop lamp switch and the ASCD switch in until threaded ends contact pedal arm. With the threaded ends of the stop lamp switch and ASCD switch contacting the pedal arm, turn the switches 45° clockwise to lock in place. CAUTION: Make sure that the gap (C) between the rubber stops and switch ends are within specification. Check the pedal play. CAUTION: Make sure that the stop lamp goes off when the pedal is released. Start the engine and check the height of the brake pedal when depressing it. Removal and Installation C D E BR G PFIA0436E EFS004O5 H Non-Adjustable Pedals I J K L M WFIA0231E Revision: October 2004 BR-7 2005 Titan BRAKE PEDAL 1. Brake pedal assembly 2. Snap pin 3. Clip 4. Stop lamp switch 5. Pedal pad 6. Clevis pin 7. ASCD cancel switch Adjustable Pedals WFIA0232E 1. Brake pedal assembly 2. Snap pin 3. Clip 4. Stop lamp switch 5. Pedal pad 6. Clevis pin 7. ASCD cancel switch REMOVAL WARNING: Do not deform the brake tube. CAUTION: ● Before removal and installation the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the forwardmost position (closest to the floor). This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals (adjustable type only). ● Do not disassemble the brake pedal adjusting mechanism (adjustable type only). ● Avoid damage from dropping the brake pedal assembly during handling. ● Keep the brake pedal assembly away from water. 1. Remove the lower driver instrument panel. Refer to IP-13, "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL LH" . 2. Remove the stop lamp switch and ASCD switch from the pedal assembly. Revision: October 2004 BR-8 2005 Titan BRAKE PEDAL 3. 4. 5. On adjustable pedal assembly, disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric motor. ● Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable to disconnect it from the adjustable pedal electric motor as shown. Remove snap pin and clevis pin from the clevis of brake booster. Remove mounting nuts and the pedal assembly. ● Temporarily install nuts by hand to support booster. CAUTION: ● Before removal and installation the accelerator and brake LBIA0374E pedals must be in the forwardmost position (closest to the floor). This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals (adjustable type only). ● Do not disassemble the brake pedal adjusting mechanism (adjustable type only). ● Avoid damage from dropping the brake pedal assembly during handling. ● Keep the brake pedal assembly away from water. A B C D E BR INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check brake pedal for following items. ● Crack or deformation of clevis pin stopper ● Clevis pin deformation ● Crack of any welded portion ● Brake pedal bend G H I SBR997 J INSTALLATION 1. ● Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Check the brake pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when applying or releasing the brake pedal. ● Check the brake pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when adjusting the brake pedal forward or backward. After installing the brake pedal assembly in the vehicle, be sure to adjust it. Refer to BR-6, "Inspection and Adjustment" . K L M Revision: October 2004 BR-9 2005 Titan BRAKE FLUID BRAKE FLUID On-board Inspection PFP:KN100 EFS004O6 LEVEL CHECK ● ● ● ● Make sure the fluid level in reservoir tank is within the standard (between MAX and MIN lines). Visually check around reservoir tank for fluid leaks. If fluid level is excessively low, check brake system for leaks. If brake warning lamp remains illuminated after parking lever is released, check brake system for fluid leakage. LFIA0225E Drain and Refill EFS004O7 CAUTION: ● Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . ● Do not reuse drained brake fluid. ● Do not let brake fluid splash on the painted surfaces of the body. This might damage the paint, so when splashing it, immediately wipe off the area and wash away with water. ● Before servicing, disconnect actuator connector or battery negative cable. 1. Connect a vinyl tube to each bleed valve. 2. Depress brake pedal, loosen each bleed valve, and gradually remove brake fluid. SBR419C 3. 4. Make sure there is no foreign material in reservoir tank, and refill with new brake fluid. Rest foot on brake pedal. Loosen bleed valve. Slowly depress pedal until it stops. Tighten bleed valve. Release brake pedal. Repeat this process a few times, then pause to add new brake fluid to master cylinder. Continue until new brake fluid flows out. Bleed air. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System" . SBR995 Revision: October 2004 BR-10 2005 Titan BRAKE FLUID Bleeding Brake System EFS004O8 CAUTION: While bleeding, pay attention to master cylinder fluid level. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector or battery negative cable. 2. Connect a vinyl tube to the rear right bleed valve. 3. Fully depress brake pedal 4 to 5 times. 4. With brake pedal depressed, loosen bleed valve to let the air out, and then tighten it immediately. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until no more air comes out. 6. Tighten bleed valve to the specified torque. Refer to BR-23, "Components" (front disc brake), BR-28, "Components" (rear disc brake). 7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 at each wheel, with master cylinder reservoir tank filled at least half way, bleeding air in order from the front left, rear left, and front right bleed valves. A B C D E BR G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 BR-11 2005 Titan BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE Hydraulic Circuit PFP:46210 EFS004O9 WFIA0291E 1. Actuator 4. Connector 2. Master cylinder 3. Brake booster CAUTION: ● All hoses and piping (tubes) must be free from excessive bending, twisting and pulling. ● Make sure there is no interference with other parts when turning steering both clockwise and counterclockwise. ● The brake piping is an important safety part. If a brake fluid leak is detected, always disassemble the parts. Replace applicable part with a new one, if necessary. ● Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it way cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. ● Do not bend or twist brake hose sharply, or strongly pull it. ● When removing components, cover connections so that no dirt, dust, or other foreign matter gets in. ● Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . ● Do not reuse drained brake fluid. Removal and Installation of Front Brake Piping and Brake Hose EFS004OA REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-10, "Drain and Refill" . Using a flare nut wrench, remove brake tube from brake hose. Remove lock plate and brake hose from bracket. Remove union bolt and then remove brake hose from cylinder body. Revision: October 2004 BR-12 2005 Titan BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE INSTALLATION 1. A Install brake hose by aligning with the protrusion on cylinder body, then install the union bolt. NOTE: Do not reuse copper washer. B C LFIA0214E 2. 3. 4. Insert brake hose end through bracket, then secure it to bracket with lock plate. Install brake tube to brake hose, then tighten the flare nut using a flare nut wrench. Refill brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System" . D E BR G LFIA0213E Removal and Installation of Rear Brake Piping and Brake Hose H EFS004OB REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-10, "Drain and Refill" . Using a flare nut wrench, remove brake tube from brake hose. Remove lock plate and brake hose from bracket. Remove brake hose from cylinder body. I J INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Install brake hose to cylinder body. NOTE: Do not reuse copper washer. K Insert brake hose end through bracket, then secure it to bracket with lock plate. Install brake tube to brake hose, then tighten the flare nut using a flare nut wrench. Refer to BR-12, "Hydraulic Circuit" . Refill brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System" . L M LFIA0213E Revision: October 2004 BR-13 2005 Titan BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE Inspection After Installation EFS004OC CAUTION: If a leak is detected at the connections, retighten it or, if necessary, replace the damaged part. 1. Check brake lines (tubes and hoses), and connections for fluid leaks, damage, twist, deformation, contact with other parts, and loose connections. Replace any damage parts. 2. While depressing brake pedal under a force of 785 N (80 kg, 177 lb) with engine running for approximately 5 seconds, check for fluid leakage from each part. Revision: October 2004 BR-14 2005 Titan BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER On-board Inspection PFP:46010 A EFS004OD LEAK INSPECTION ● Check for leaks at master cylinder to brake booster attachment point, reservoir tank, and brake tube connections. With ABS B EFS004OE C D E BR G H I J K L WFIA0379E 1. Reservoir cap 2. Fluid level sensor 3. Grommet 4. Master cylinder sub-assembly 5. Reservoir tank 6. Seal M CAUTION: Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it way cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-10, "Drain and Refill" . Disconnect harness connector for fluid level sensor. Using a flare nut wrench, disconnect brake tube from master cylinder assembly. Remove master cylinder assembly mounting nuts and master cylinder assembly. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Refill brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System" . CAUTION: ● Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . Revision: October 2004 BR-15 2005 Titan BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER Do not reuse drained brake fluid. Adjust brake pedal. Refer to BR-6, "ADJUSTMENT" . ● ● DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembly CAUTION: ● Master cylinder cannot be disassembled. ● Remove reservoir tank only when absolutely necessary. Pull reservoir tank off master cylinder sub-assembly, then remove grommets from master cylinder sub-assembly body. Assembly CAUTION: ● Never use mineral oil such as kerosene or gasoline during the cleaning and assembly process. ● Do not drop parts. If a part is dropped, do not use it. 1. Apply brake fluid or rubber grease to new grommets, then insert into master cylinder sub-assembly. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . CAUTION: Do not reuse grommet. 2. Install reservoir tank onto master cylinder assembly. With ABLS or VDC EFS004OF WFIA0378E 1. Reservoir cap 4. Master cylinder sub-assembly 7. Reservoir tank Revision: October 2004 2. Fluid level sensor 3. Grommet 5. Front pressure sensor 6. Rear pressure sensor 8. Seal BR-16 2005 Titan BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal A CAUTION: ● Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it way cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. ● Before removing brake brake master cylinder, depress the brake pedal 5-6 times with the key OFF to deplete vacuum in the booster. 1. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-10, "Drain and Refill" . 2. Disconnect harness connectors for fluid level sensor and pressure sensors. 3. Using a flare nut wrench, disconnect brake tube from master cylinder assembly. 4. Remove master cylinder assembly mounting nuts and master cylinder assembly. B C D Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Refill brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System" . CAUTION: ● Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . ● Do not reuse drained brake fluid. ● Adjust brake pedal. Refer to BR-6, "ADJUSTMENT" . E BR G DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembly CAUTION: ● Master cylinder cannot be disassembled. ● Remove reservoir tank only when absolutely necessary. 1. Pull reservoir tank off master cylinder sub-assembly, then remove grommets from master cylinder subassembly body. 2. Remove master cylinder pressure sensors. H Assembly J CAUTION: ● Never use mineral oil such as kerosene or gasoline during the cleaning and assembly process. ● Do not drop parts. If a part is dropped, do not use it. 1. Apply brake fluid or rubber grease to new grommets, then insert into master cylinder sub-assembly. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . CAUTION: Do not reuse grommet. 2. Install reservoir tank onto master cylinder assembly. 3. Install master cylinder pressure sensors. Revision: October 2004 BR-17 2005 Titan I K L M BRAKE BOOSTER BRAKE BOOSTER On-Vehicle Service PFP:47200 EFS004OG OPERATING CHECK With engine stopped, change the vacuum to the atmospheric pressure by depressing brake pedal several times. Then with brake pedal fully depressed, start engine and when the vacuum pressure reaches the standard, make sure the clearance between brake pedal and floor panel decreases. CAUTION: Depressing pedal interval is approximately 5 seconds. BRA0037D AIRTIGHT CHECK Run engine at idle for approximately 1 minute, and stop it after applying vacuum to booster. Depress brake pedal normally to change the vacuum to the atmospheric pressure. Make sure distance between brake pedal and floor panel gradually increases. ● Depress brake pedal while engine is running and stop engine with pedal depressed. The pedal stroke should not change after holding pedal down for 30 seconds. CAUTION: Depressing pedal interval is approximately 5 seconds. ● SBR365AA Revision: October 2004 BR-18 2005 Titan BRAKE BOOSTER With ABS or BLSD EFS004OH A B C D E BR WFIA0380E 1. Reservoir tank 2. Master cylinder 3. Gasket 4. Brake pedal 5. Lock nut 6. Spacer block 7. Brake booster G H REMOVAL CAUTION: ● Be careful not to deform or bend brake piping while removing and installing brake booster. ● Replace clevis pin if it is damaged. ● Be careful not to damage brake booster stud bolt threads. If brake booster is tilted or inclined during installation, dash panel may damage the threads. ● Attach the check valve in the correct direction. 1. Remove engine room cover with power tool. Refer to EM-11, "Removal and Installation" . 2. Remove engine air duct assembly. Refer to EM-14, "Removal and Installation" . 3. Remove brake piping from brake master cylinder. 4. Remove brake master cylinder. Refer to BR-15, "With ABS" . 5. Remove vacuum hose from brake booster. Refer to BR-22, "VACUUM LINES" . 6. Remove brake pedal attachment snap pin and clevis pin from inside the vehicle. 7. Remove nuts on brake booster and brake pedal assembly. 8. Remove brake booster assembly from dash panel. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Output Rod Length Inspection 1. 2. Using a handy vacuum pump, apply a vacuum of – 66.7 kPa (– 500 mmHg, –19.69 inHg) to brake booster. Check output rod length. Standard dimension when vacuum – 66.7 kPa (– 500 mmHg, – 19.69 inHg) : 15.6 − 15.9 mm (0.614 − 0.626 in) SBR208E Revision: October 2004 BR-19 2005 Titan I J K L M BRAKE BOOSTER INSTALLATION 1. Loosen lock nut to adjust input rod length so that the length B (in the figure) satisfies the specified value. Length “B” : 148.5 mm (5.85 in) 2. After adjusting “B”, temporarily tighten lock nut and install booster assembly to the vehicle. ● Install a gaskets and spacer block between booster assembly and the dash panel. 3. Connect brake pedal with clevis of input rod. 4. Install pedal bracket mounting nuts and tighten them to the WFIA0382E specified torque. 5. Install brake piping from brake master cylinder to ABS actuator. Refer to BR-12, "Hydraulic Circuit" . 6. Connect vacuum hose to brake booster. 7. Install master cylinder to booster assembly. Refer to BR-19, "With ABS or BLSD" . 8. Adjust the height and play of brake pedal. Refer to BR-6, "ADJUSTMENT" . 9. Tighten lock nut of input rod to the specified torque. 10. Install engine air duct assembly. Refer to EM-14, "Removal and Installation" . 11. Install engine room cover. Refer to EM-11, "Removal and Installation" . 12. Refill brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System" . CAUTION: ● Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . ● Do not reuse drained brake fluid. With VDC EFS004OI WFIA0381E 1. Reservoir tank 2. Master cylinder 3. 4. Brake pedal 5. Lock nut 6. Gasket Spacer block 7. Brake booster 8. Active booster 9. Delta stroke sensor REMOVAL CAUTION: ● Be careful not to deform or bend brake piping while removing and installing brake booster. ● Replace clevis pin if it is damaged. ● Be careful not to damage brake booster stud bolt threads. If brake booster is tilted or inclined during installation, dash panel may damage the threads. ● Attach the check valve in the correct direction. Revision: October 2004 BR-20 2005 Titan BRAKE BOOSTER 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Remove engine room cover with power tool. Refer to EM-11, "Removal and Installation" Remove engine air duct assembly. Refer to EM-14, "Removal and Installation" . Remove brake piping from brake master cylinder. Remove brake master cylinder. Refer to BR-15, "With ABS" . Remove vacuum hose from brake booster. Refer to BR-22, "VACUUM LINES" . Disconnect active boost and delta stroke sensor harness connectors from brake booster assembly. Remove brake pedal attachment snap pin and clevis pin from inside the vehicle. Remove nuts on brake booster and brake pedal assembly. Remove brake booster assembly from dash panel. 2. Using a handy vacuum pump, apply a vacuum of – 66.7 kPa (– 500 mmHg, –19.69 inHg) to brake booster. Check output rod length. Standard dimension when vacuum – 66.7 kPa (– 500 mmHg, – 19.69 inHg) B C D INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Output Rod Length Inspection 1. A E : 15.6 − 15.9 mm (0.614 − 0.626 in) BR G SBR208E H INSTALLATION 1. Loosen lock nut to adjust input rod length so that the length B (in the figure) satisfies the specified value. Length “B” 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. I : 148.5 mm (5.85 in) After adjusting “B”, temporarily tighten lock nut and install booster assembly to the vehicle. ● Install a gaskets and spacer block between booster assembly and the dash panel. Connect brake pedal with clevis of input rod. Install pedal bracket mounting nuts and tighten them to the WFIA0382E specified torque. Install brake piping from brake master cylinder to ABS actuator. Refer to BR-12, "Hydraulic Circuit" . Connect active boost and delta stroke sensor harness connectors to brake booster assembly. Connect vacuum hose to brake booster. Install master cylinder to booster assembly. Refer to BR-20, "With VDC" . Adjust the height and play of brake pedal. Refer to BR-6, "ADJUSTMENT" . Tighten lock nut of input rod to the specified torque. Install engine air duct assembly. Refer to EM-14, "Removal and Installation" . Install engine room cover. Refer to EM-11, "Removal and Installation" . Refill brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System" . CAUTION: ● Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . ● Do not reuse drained brake fluid. Revision: October 2004 BR-21 2005 Titan J K L M VACUUM LINES VACUUM LINES Removal and Installation PFP:41920 EFS004OJ LFIA0216E 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. Hose clip 4. Check valve 2. Clamp 3. Vacuum hose Disconnect vacuum hose from hose clip. Release clamps and disconnect vacuum hose. Remove check valve from brake booster. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: ● Insert vacuum hose for at least 24 mm (0.94 in). ● Do not use lubricating oil during assembly. SBR225B Inspection EFS004OK VISUAL INSPECTION Check for improper assembly, damage and deterioration. CHECK VALVE INSPECTION Airtightness Inspection Use a suitable vacuum pump to check. Connect to brake booster side of check valve. Check valve specification : Vacuum decrease should be within 1.3 kPa (10 mmHg, 0.39 inHg) for 15 seconds under a vacuum of – 66.7 kPa (– 500 mmHg, – 19.69 inHg) LFIA0217E Revision: October 2004 BR-22 2005 Titan FRONT DISC BRAKE FRONT DISC BRAKE On-vehicle Inspection PFP:41000 A EFS004OL PAD WEAR INSPECTION ● Inspect the thickness of pad through cylinder body inspection hole. Use a scale for inspection if necessary. Standard thickness Repair limit thickness B : 11.88 mm (0.468 in) : 1.0 mm (0.039 in) C D BRA0010D Components E EFS004OM BR G H I J K L M WFIA0377E 1. Upper sliding pin 4. Torque member 5. Piston seal 6. Piston 7. Inner pad 8. Pad retainer 9. Outer pad 10. Piston boot 2. Sliding pin boot 11. Union bolt 3. Torque member bolt 12. Copper washer 13. Sliding pin bolt 14. Bleed valve 15. Cylinder body 16. Cap 17. Brake hose 18. Lower sliding pin WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of airborne particles or other materials. Revision: October 2004 BR-23 2005 Titan FRONT DISC BRAKE CAUTION: ● While removing cylinder body never depress brake pedal because piston will pop out. ● It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or replacement of cylinder body. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch brake hose. ● Do not damage piston boot. ● Burnish brake contact surface after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-27, "BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE" . Removal and Installation of Brake Pad EFS004ON REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove tires from vehicle using power tool. Remove lower sliding pin bolt. Suspend cylinder body with a wire and remove pad and shim from torque member. INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Push pistons in so that pad is firmly installed and mount cylinder body to torque member. NOTE: Using a disc brake piston tool (commercial service tool), etc., makes it easier to push in piston. CAUTION: By pushing in piston, brake fluid returns to master cylinder reservoir tank. Watch the level of the surface of reservoir tank. Attach pad retainer to torque member. NOTE: Apply Molykote M-77 grease to pad ratainers where brake pads contact. CAUTION: When attaching pad retainer, attach it firmly so that it does not float up higher than torque member, as shown in the figure. Install lower sliding pin bolt and tighten it to the specified torque. Refer to BR-23, "Components" . Check brake for drag. Install tires to the vehicle. Refer to WT-6, "Rotation" . PFIA0273E Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor EFS004OO REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove tires from vehicle using power tool. Drain brake fluid as necessary. Refer to BR-10, "Drain and Refill" . NOTE: Do not remove union bolt unless removing cylinder body from vehicle. Remove union bolt as necessary and torque member bolts, then remove cylinder body from the vehicle. NOTE: Position cylinder body aside using suitable wire, as necessary. NOTE: When servicing cylinder body, remove sliding pin bolts and caliper from torque member. Remove disc rotor. INSTALLATION CAUTION: ● Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . ● Do not reuse drained brake fluid. 1. Install disc rotor. Revision: October 2004 BR-24 2005 Titan FRONT DISC BRAKE 2. 3. Install sliding pin bolts if removed and tighten to specified torque. Refer to BR-23, "Components" . Install cylinder body to the vehicle, then tighten the torque member bolts to the specified torque. Refer to BR-23, "Components" . CAUTION: ● When attaching cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe any oil off knuckle spindle, washers and cylinder body attachment surfaces. ● Do not reuse caliper torque member bolts. A B C LFIA0209E 4. Install brake hose to cylinder body, then tighten union bolt to the specified torque. Refer to BR-23, "Components" . CAUTION: ● Do not reuse copper washers for union bolt. ● Attach brake hose to cylinder body together with union bolt and washers. D E BR G LFIA0214E 5. 6. Refill new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System" . Attach tires to the vehicle. Refer to WT-6, "Rotation" . Disassembly and Assembly of Brake Caliper H I EFS004OP DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove sliding pin bolt, and then remove the pad, shim, shim cover, and pad retainer from the torque member. 2. 3. Remove sliding pins and sliding pin boots from torque member. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt mounting hole to remove pistons and piston boots. CAUTION: Do not get your fingers caught in piston. J K L M MAA0272D 4. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove piston seal from cylinder body. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall. SFIA1301E Revision: October 2004 BR-25 2005 Titan FRONT DISC BRAKE CALIPER INSPECTION Cylinder Body CAUTION: ● Use new brake fluid for cleaning. Do not use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . ● Check inside surface of cylinder for score, rust, wear, damage or foreign materials. If any of the above conditions are observed, replace cylinder body. ● Minor damage from rust or foreign materials may be eliminated by polishing surface with a fine emery paper. Replace cylinder body if necessary. Torque Member Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part. Piston Check piston for score, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign materials. Replace if any of the above conditions are observed. CAUTION: Piston sliding surface is plated, do not polish with emery paper even if rust of foreign materials are stuck to sliding surface. Sliding Pins, and Sliding Pin Boots Check sliding pin and sliding pin boot for wear, damage, and cracks. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part. CAUTION: Trailing/upper sliding pin must be replaced at each service. ASSEMBLY CAUTION: Do not use NISSAN Rubber Grease (KRE00 00010, KRE00 00010 01) when assembling. 1. Apply clean brake fluid to new piston seal and insert seal in to groove on cylinder body. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . CAUTION: Do not reuse piston seal. WFIA0210E 2. Apply clean brake fluid to piston and piston boot, then install piston boot in to piston groove. CAUTION: Do not reuse piston boot. WFIA0211E 3. 4. Insert into cylinder body by hand and insert piston boot piston-side lip into piston groove. CAUTION: Press piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed. Install sliding pins and sliding pin boots to torque member. Revision: October 2004 BR-26 2005 Titan FRONT DISC BRAKE 5. CAUTION: Trailing/upper sliding pin must be replaced at each service. Install cylinder body. Tighten sliding pin bolt to the specified torque. Refer to BR-23, "Components" . DISC ROTOR INSPECTION Visual Inspection A B Check surface of disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. If any of them is detected, replace applicable part. C Runout Inspection 1. 2. Using wheel nuts, install disc rotor to wheel hub at 2 or more positions. Inspect runout using a dial gauge. (Measured at 10 mm (0.39 in) inside the disc edge.) Runout limit (on vehicle) 3. 4. D : 0.04 mm (0.0016 in) NOTE: Make sure that wheel bearing axial end play is within the specifications before measuring runout. Refer to FAX-5, "WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION" . If runout is outside the limit, find the minimum runout point by shifting mounting positions of disc rotor and wheel hub by one hole. If runout still out of specification, turn rotor with on-car brake lathe. E BR BRA0013D G Thickness Inspection H Using a micrometer, check thickness of disc rotor. If thickness is either at or below the wear limit, or exceeds maximum uneven wear, replace disc rotor. I Standard thickness Repair limit thickness Maximum uneven wear (Measured at 8 positions) : 26.0 mm (1.024 in) : 24.5 mm (0.965 in) : 0.015 mm (0.0006 in) J K SBR020B BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE L Burnish brake contact surface according to the following procedure after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. CAUTION: Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution. 1. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at 50 km/h (31 MPH). 2. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from 50 km/h (31 MPH). Adjust brake pedal/foot pressure such that vehicle stopping time equals 3 to 5 seconds. 3. To cool brake system, drive the vehicle at 50 km/h (31 MPH) for 1 minute without stopping. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3, 10 times or more to complete the burnishing procedure. Revision: October 2004 BR-27 2005 Titan M REAR DISC BRAKE REAR DISC BRAKE On-vehicle Inspection PFP:44000 EFS004OQ PAD WEAR INSPECTION ● Inspect the thickness of pad through cylinder body inspection hole. Use a scale for inspection if necessary. Standard thickness Repair limit thickness : 12.13 mm (0.478 in) : 1.0 mm (0.039 in) BRA0010D Components EFS004OR WFIA0293E 1. Brake hose 2. Copper washer 4. Bleed valve 5. Mounting bolt 6. Cylinder body 7. Piston seal 8. Piston 9. Piston boot 10. Knuckle slide 11. Sliding sleeve boot 13. Inner pad 14. Outer pad 3. Cap 12. Sliding sleeve WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of airborne particles or other materials. Revision: October 2004 BR-28 2005 Titan REAR DISC BRAKE CAUTION: ● While removing cylinder body, never depress brake pedal because piston will pop out. ● It is not necessary to remove the torque member and disconnect the brake hose except for disassembly or replacement of cylinder body. When replacing brake pads, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch brake hose. ● Do not damage piston boot. ● Burnish brake contact surface after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or it a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-32, "BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE" . Removal and Installation of Brake Pad A B C EFS004OS REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. D Remove tires from vehicle with power tool. Remove mounting bolt from the top mount. Swing cylinder body open, and remove pads. E INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Push piston in so that pad is firmly attached and mount cylinder body to torque member. NOTE: BR Using a disc brake piston tool (commercial service tool), makes it easier to push in the piston. CAUTION: By pushing in piston, brake fluid returns to master cylinder reservoir tank. Watch the level of the G surface of reservoir tank. Install pads to cylinder body. Install top mounting bolt and tighten to specification. H Check brake for drag. Install tires to the vehicle. Refer to WT-6, "Rotation" . I Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor EFS004OT REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove tires from vehicle with power tool. Drain brake fluid as necessary. Refer to BR-10, "Drain and Refill" . NOTE: Do not remove union bolt unless removing the cylinder body. Remove bolts as shown, and cylinder body. NOTE: Position cylinder body aside using suitable wire, as necessary. Remove disc rotor. J K L M LFIA0211E INSTALLATION CAUTION: ● Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . ● Do not reuse drained brake fluid. 1. Install disc rotor. 2. Install cylinder body to the vehicle, and tighten mounting bolts to specification. Refer to BR-28, "Components" . CAUTION: Before installing cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe off mounting surface of cylinder body. 3. Install brake hose to cylinder body and tighten to specification. Refer to BR-28, "Components" . Revision: October 2004 BR-29 2005 Titan REAR DISC BRAKE 4. 5. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse copper washers. ● Securely attach brake hose to protrusion on cylinder body. Refill new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System" . Install tires to the vehicle. Refer to WT-6, "Rotation" . Disassembly and Assembly of Brake Caliper EFS004OU DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Remove pads from cylinder body. Remove sliding sleeve and boot from cylinder body. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt mounting hole to remove piston and piston boot. CAUTION: Do not get your fingers caught in piston. BRD0041D 4. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove piston seal from cylinder body. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall. PFIA0269E CALIPER INSPECTION Cylinder Body CAUTION: ● Use new brake fluid to clean. Do not use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. ● Check inside surface of cylinder for score, rust wear, damage or foreign materials. If any of the above conditions are observed, replace cylinder body. ● Minor damage from rust or foreign materials may be eliminated by polishing surface with a fine emery paper. Replace cylinder body if necessary. Torque Member Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part. Piston CAUTION: ● Piston sliding surface is plated, do not polish with emery paper even if rust or foreign materials are stuck to sliding surface. ● Check piston for score, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign materials. Replace if any of the above conditions are observed. Sliding Pin Bolts and Sliding Pin Boots Make sure there is no wear, damage, or cracks in sliding sleeve and sliding sleeve boots, and if there are, replace them. Revision: October 2004 BR-30 2005 Titan REAR DISC BRAKE ASSEMBLY A CAUTION: Do not use NISSAN Rubber Grease (KRE00 00010, KRE00 00010 01) when assembling. 1. Apply clean brake fluid to new piston seal and insert into groove on cylinder body. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . CAUTION: Do not reuse piston seal. B C D WFIA0210E E 2. Apply brake fluid to piston and to piston boot, then install piston boot in to piston groove. CAUTION: Do not reuse piston boot. BR G H WFIA0211E 3. 4. Insert piston into cylinder body by hand and insert piston boot piston-side lip into piston groove. CAUTION: Press piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed. Install sliding boots and sleeves to cylinder body. DISC ROTOR INSPECTION Visual Inspection Check surface of disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. If any non-standard condition is detected, replace applicable part. Runout Inspection 1. 2. 3. 4. K M : 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) NOTE: Make sure that wheel bearing axial end play is within the specification before measuring runout. Refer to RAX-12, "Axle Bearing" . If runout is outside the limit, find the minimum runout point by shifting mounting positions of disc rotor and wheel hub by one hole. If runout still out of specification, turn rotor with on-car brake lathe. Revision: October 2004 J L Using wheel nuts, install disc rotor to wheel hub at 2 or more positions. Inspect runout using a dial gauge. [Measured at 10 mm (0.39 in) inside disk edge.] Runout limit (on vehicle) I BR-31 BRA0013D 2005 Titan REAR DISC BRAKE Thickness Inspection Using a micrometer, check thickness of disc rotor. If thickness is either at or below the wear limit, or exceeds maximum uneven wear, replace disc rotor. Standard thickness : 14.0 mm (0.551 in) Wear limit : 12.0 mm (0.472 in) Maximum uneven wear : 0.015 mm (0.0006 in) (measured at 8 positions) SBR020B BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE Burnish brake contact surface according to the following procedure after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. CAUTION: Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution. 1. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at 50 km/h (31 MPH). 2. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from 50 km/h (31 MPH). Adjust brake pedal/foot pressure such that vehicle stopping time equals 3 to 5 seconds. 3. To cool brake system, drive the vehicle at 50 km/h (31 MPH) for 1 minute without stopping. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3, 10 times or more to complete the burnishing procedure. Revision: October 2004 BR-32 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specifications PFP:00030 A EFS004OV Unit: mm (in) Front brake Brake model CLZ31VC Rotor outer diameter × thickness 320 × 26 (12.60 × 1.02) Pad Length × width × thickness Rear brake 111.0 × 73.5 × 9.5 (4.73 × 2.894 × 0.374) Cylinder bore diameter 51 (2.01) Brake model AD14VE Rotor outer diameter × thickness Brake booster Booster model 48 (1.89) C215T 215 (8.46) BR Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . Recommended brake fluid G Brake Pedal EFS004OW 182.3 − 192.3 mm (7.18 − 7.57 in) Brake pedal height (from dash panel top surface) Depressed pedal height [under a force of 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb) with engine running] H More than 90.3 mm (3.55 in) Clearance between stopper rubber and the threaded end of stop lamp switch 0.74 − 1.96 mm (0.029 − 0.077 in) I 3 − 11 mm (0.12 − 0.43 in) Pedal play Brake Booster EFS004OX J EFS004OY K 15.6 − 15.9 mm (0.614 − 0.626 in) Output rod installation standard dimension Check Valve Vacuum leakage [at vacuum of – 66.7 kPa(– 500 mmHg, – 19.69 inHg)] Within 1.3 kPa (10 mmHg, 0.39 inHg) of vacuum for 15 seconds L Front Disc Brake EFS004OZ Brake model Disc rotor E Electric brake force distribution Diaphragm diameter Brake pad D 83.0 × 33.0 × 8.5 (3.268 × 1.299 × 0.335) Cylinder bore diameter Valve model C 320 × 14 (12.60 × 0.55) Pad Length × width × thickness Control valve B CLZ31VC Standard thickness (new) Repair limit thickness 1.0 mm (0.039 in) Standard thickness (new) 26.0 mm (1.024 in) Repair limit thickness 24.5 mm (0.965 in) Maximum uneven wear (measured at 8 positions) 0.015mm (0.0006 in) Runout limit (with it attached to the vehicle) 0.04 mm (0.0016 in) Revision: October 2004 M 11.88 mm (0.468 in) BR-33 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Rear Disc Brake EFS004P0 Brake model Brake pad Disc rotor AD14VE Standard thickness (new) 12.13 mm (0.478 in) Repair limit thickness 1.0 mm (0.039 in) Standard thickness (new) 14.0 mm (0.551 in) Repair limit thickness 12.0 mm (0.472 in) Maximum uneven wear (measured at 8 positions) 0.015 mm (0.0006 in) Runout limit (with it attached to the vehicle) 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) Revision: October 2004 BR-34 2005 Titan F BRAKES A B SECTION BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM C D E CONTENTS ABS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 4 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 4 Precautions for Brake System .................................. 4 Precautions When Using CONSULT-II ..................... 4 CHECK POINTS FOR USING CONSULT-II ......... 4 Precautions for Brake Control .................................. 5 Precautions for CAN System ................................... 5 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 6 PREPARATION ........................................................... 7 Special Service Tool ................................................. 7 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 7 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................................ 8 System Components ................................................ 8 ABS Function ........................................................... 8 EBD Function ........................................................... 8 Fail-Safe Function .................................................... 8 ABS/EBD SYSTEM ............................................... 8 Hydraulic Circuit Diagram ........................................ 9 CAN COMMUNICATION .......................................... 10 System Description ................................................ 10 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .............................................11 How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and Accurate Repair ......................................................11 INTRODUCTION ..................................................11 WORK FLOW ...................................................... 12 CLARIFY CONCERN .......................................... 13 EXAMPLE OF DIAGNOSIS SHEET ................... 13 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 14 Schematic .............................................................. 15 Wiring Diagram — ABS — ..................................... 16 Basic Inspection ..................................................... 20 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL, FLUID LEAK, AND BRAKE PAD INSPECTION ................................. 20 POWER SYSTEM TERMINAL LOOSENESS AND BATTERY INSPECTION ............................ 20 ABS WARNING LAMP INSPECTION ................. 20 Warning Lamp and Indicator Timing ...................... 21 Revision: October 2004 Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard ............. 21 REFERENCE VALUE FROM CONSULT-II ......... 21 CONSULT-II Function (ABS) .................................. 23 CONSULT-IIBASICOPERATIONPROCEDURE ... 23 SELF-DIAGNOSIS .............................................. 24 DATA MONITOR ................................................. 26 ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 27 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS ........................................................................ 29 Wheel Sensor System ............................................ 29 ABS Control Unit Inspection ................................... 30 Solenoid Valve System Inspection ......................... 31 Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection... 32 ABS Control Unit Power and Ground Systems Inspection ............................................................... 33 CAN Communication System Inspection ................ 34 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS ............ 35 ABS Works Frequently ........................................... 35 Unexpected Pedal Action ....................................... 36 Long Stopping Distance .......................................... 37 ABS Does Not Work ............................................... 37 Pedal Vibration or ABS Operation Noise ................ 37 ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On ........................................ 38 ABS Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On ........................................................... 38 WHEEL SENSORS ................................................... 39 Removal and Installation ........................................ 39 REMOVAL ........................................................... 39 INSTALLATION ................................................... 39 SENSOR ROTOR ..................................................... 40 Removal and Installation ........................................ 40 FRONT ................................................................ 40 REAR .................................................................. 40 ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)... 41 Removal and Installation ........................................ 41 REMOVAL ........................................................... 41 INSTALLATION ................................................... 42 BRC-1 2005 Titan BRC G H I J K L M ABLS/ABS PRECAUTIONS ......................................................... 43 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” ................................................................. 43 Precautions for Brake System ................................ 43 Precautions When Using CONSULT-II ................... 43 CHECK POINTS FOR USING CONSULT-II ........ 43 Precautions for Brake Control ................................ 44 Precautions for CAN System .................................. 44 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ................ 45 PREPARATION ......................................................... 46 Special Service Tool ............................................... 46 Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 46 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .......................................... 47 System Components .............................................. 47 ABS Function .......................................................... 48 EBD Function ......................................................... 48 ABLS Function ........................................................ 48 Fail-Safe Function .................................................. 48 ABS/EBD SYSTEM ............................................. 48 ABLS SYSTEM .................................................... 48 Hydraulic Circuit Diagram ....................................... 49 CAN COMMUNICATION ........................................... 50 System Description ................................................. 50 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 51 How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and Accurate Repair ...................................................... 51 INTRODUCTION ................................................. 51 WORK FLOW ...................................................... 52 CLARIFY CONCERN .......................................... 53 EXAMPLE OF DIAGNOSIS SHEET .................... 53 ComponentParts and Harness Connector Location... 54 Schematic ............................................................... 55 Wiring Diagram — ABLS — ................................... 56 Basic Inspection ..................................................... 60 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL, FLUID LEAK, AND BRAKE PAD INSPECTION ................................. 60 POWER SYSTEM TERMINAL LOOSENESS AND BATTERY INSPECTION ............................. 60 ABS WARNING LAMP AND SLIP INDICATOR LAMP INSPECTION ............................................ 60 Warning Lamp and Indicator Timing ....................... 61 Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard .............. 61 REFERENCE VALUE FROM CONSULT-II ......... 61 CONSULT-II Function (ABS) .................................. 64 CONSULT-IIBASICOPERATIONPROCEDURE ... 64 SELF-DIAGNOSIS .............................................. 65 DATA MONITOR .................................................. 67 ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 69 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS ........................................................................ 72 Wheel Sensor System Inspection ........................... 72 Engine System Inspection ...................................... 73 ABS/ABLS Control Unit Inspection ......................... 74 Solenoid and Change-Over Valve System Inspection .......................................................................... 74 Revision: October 2004 Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection...75 Stop Lamp Switch System Inspection .....................76 ABS/ABLS Control Unit Power and Ground Systems Inspection .......................................................77 Brake Fluid Level Switch System Inspection ..........78 Pressure Sensor System Inspection .......................78 CAN Communication System Inspection ................81 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS .............82 ABS Works Frequently ............................................82 Unexpected Pedal Action ........................................83 Long Stopping Distance ..........................................84 ABS Does Not Work ...............................................84 Pedal Vibration or ABS Operation Noise ................84 ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On .........................................85 ABS Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On ...........................................................85 WHEEL SENSORS ...................................................86 Removal and Installation .........................................86 REMOVAL ............................................................86 INSTALLATION ....................................................86 SENSOR ROTOR ......................................................87 Removal and Installation .........................................87 FRONT .................................................................87 REAR ...................................................................87 ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) ...88 Removal and Installation .........................................88 REMOVAL ............................................................88 INSTALLATION ....................................................89 VDC/TCS/ABS PRECAUTIONS .........................................................90 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................90 Precautions for Brake System ................................90 Precautions When Using CONSULT-II ...................90 CHECK POINTS FOR USING CONSULT-II ........90 Precautions for Brake Control .................................91 Precautions for CAN System ..................................91 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................92 PREPARATION .........................................................93 Special Service Tool ................................................93 Commercial Service Tools ......................................93 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ...........................................94 System Components ...............................................94 ABS Function ..........................................................95 EBD Function ..........................................................95 TCS Function ..........................................................95 VDC Function ..........................................................95 Fail-Safe Function ...................................................95 ABS/EBD SYSTEM ..............................................96 VDC/TCS SYSTEM .............................................96 ACTIVE BOOSTER .............................................96 Hydraulic Circuit Diagram .......................................96 CAN COMMUNICATION ...........................................97 System Description .................................................97 BRC-2 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 98 How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and Accurate Repair ..................................................... 98 INTRODUCTION ................................................. 98 WORK FLOW ...................................................... 99 CLARIFY CONCERN ........................................ 100 EXAMPLE OF DIAGNOSIS SHEET ................. 100 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location. 101 Schematic ............................................................ 102 Wiring Diagram — VDC — ................................... 103 Basic Inspection ....................................................110 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL, FLUID LEAK, AND BRAKE PAD INSPECTION ................................110 POWER SYSTEM TERMINAL LOOSENESS AND BATTERY INSPECTION ...........................110 ABS WARNING LAMP, SLIP INDICATOR LAMP ANDVDCOFFINDICATORLAMPINSPECTION..110 Warning Lamp and Indicator Timing ..................... 111 Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard ............ 111 REFERENCE VALUE FROM CONSULT-II ........ 111 CONSULT-II Function (ABS) .................................115 CONSULT-IIBASICOPERATIONPROCEDURE ..115 SELF-DIAGNOSIS .............................................116 DATA MONITOR ................................................119 ACTIVE TEST ................................................... 123 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS ..................................................................... 125 Wheel Sensor System Inspection ........................ 125 Engine System Inspection .................................... 126 ABS/TCS/VDC Control Unit Inspection ................ 127 Steering Angle Sensor System ............................ 127 Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor System Inspection. 128 Solenoid and VDC Change-Over Valve System Inspection ............................................................. 130 Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection. 131 Stop Lamp Switch System Inspection .................. 132 ABS/TCS/VDC Control Unit Power and Ground Systems Inspection .............................................. 133 Brake Fluid Level Sensor System Inspection ....... 134 Active Booster System Inspection ........................ 135 Delta Stroke Sensor System Inspection ............... 136 Revision: October 2004 Pressure Sensor System Inspection .................... 138 CAN Communication System Inspection .............. 140 Inspection For Self-diagnosis Result "ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL" ....................................................... 141 Inspection For Self-diagnosis Result "DECEL G SEN SET" ............................................................. 141 VDC OFF Indicator lamp Does Not Illuminate ...... 141 Component Inspection .......................................... 142 VDC OFF SWITCH ........................................... 142 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS .......... 143 ABS Works Frequently ......................................... 143 Unexpected Pedal Action ..................................... 144 Long Stopping Distance ........................................ 145 ABS Does Not Work ............................................. 145 Pedal Vibration or ABS Operation Noise .............. 145 ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On ...................................... 146 ABS Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On ......................................................... 146 Vehicle Jerks During TCS/VDC Activation ........... 147 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE .......................................... 148 Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position ........................................................................ 148 Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor ..... 148 WHEEL SENSORS ................................................. 150 Removal and Installation ...................................... 150 REMOVAL ......................................................... 150 INSTALLATION ................................................. 150 SENSOR ROTOR ................................................... 151 Removal and Installation ...................................... 151 FRONT .............................................................. 151 REAR ................................................................ 151 ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY). 152 Removal and Installation ...................................... 152 REMOVAL ......................................................... 152 INSTALLATION ................................................. 153 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ................................ 154 Removal and Installation ...................................... 154 G SENSOR .............................................................. 155 Removal and Installation ...................................... 155 REMOVAL ......................................................... 155 INSTALLATION ................................................. 155 BRC-3 2005 Titan A B C D E BRC G H I J K L M PRECAUTIONS [ABS] PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EFS004P8 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precautions for Brake System EFS004P9 CAUTION: ● Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" for recommended brake fluid. ● Never reuse drained brake fluid. ● Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. ● To clean or wash all parts of master cylinder and disc brake caliper, use clean brake fluid. ● Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. They will ruin rubber parts of the hydraulic system. ● Use flare nut wrench when removing and installing brake tube. ● If a brake fluid leak is found, the part must be disassembled without fail. Then it has to be replaced with a new one if a defect exists. ● Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the connector of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) or the battery terminal before performing the work. ● Always torque brake lines when installing. ● Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or SBR686C replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-27, "BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE" (front disc brake) or BR-32, "BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE" (rear disc brake). WARNING: ● Clean brake pads and shoes with a waste cloth, then wipe with a dust collector. Precautions When Using CONSULT-II EFS004PA When connecting CONSULT-II to data link connector, connect them through CONSULT-II CONVERTER. CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication. CHECK POINTS FOR USING CONSULT-II 1. Has CONSULT-II been used without connecting CONSULT-II CONVERTER on this vehicle? ● If YES, GO TO 2. ● If NO, GO TO 5. Revision: October 2004 BRC-4 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS [ABS] 2. 3. 4. 5. Is there any indication other than indications relating to CAN communication system in the self-diagnosis results? ● If YES, GO TO 3. ● If NO, GO TO 4. Based on self-diagnosis results unrelated to CAN communication, carry out the inspection. Malfunctions may be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control units carrying out CAN communication. Therefor, erase the self-diagnosis results. Diagnose CAN communication system. Refer to BRC-10, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Precautions for Brake Control ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● B C EFS004PB During ABS operation, the brake pedal may vibrate lightly and a mechanical noise may be heard. This is D normal. Just after starting vehicle, the brake pedal may vibrate or a motor operating noise may be heard from engine compartment. This is a normal status of operation check. E Stopping distance may be longer than that of vehicles without ABS when vehicle drives on rough, gravel, or snow-covered (fresh, deep snow) roads. When an error is indicated by ABS or another warning lamp, collect all necessary information from cus- BRC tomer (what symptoms are present under what conditions) and check for simple causes before starting diagnosis. Besides electrical system inspection, check brake booster operation, brake fluid level, and fluid leaks. G If incorrect tire sizes or types are installed on the vehicle or brake pads are not Genuine NISSAN parts, stopping distance or steering stability may deteriorate. If there is a radio, antenna or related wiring near control module, ABS function may have a malfunction or H error. If aftermarket parts (car stereo, CD player, etc.) have been installed, check for incidents such as harness pinches, open circuits or improper wiring. I Precautions for CAN System ● A EFS004PC Do not apply voltage of 7.0V or higher to terminal to be measured. Maximum open terminal voltage of tester in use must be less than 7.0V. Before checking harnesses, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery negative cable. Area to be repaired must be soldered and wrapped with tape. Make sure that fraying of twisted wire is within 110 mm (4.33 in). J K L M PKIA0306E ● Do not make a bypass connection to repaired area. (If the circuit is bypassed, characteristics of twisted wire will be lost.) PKIA0307E Revision: October 2004 BRC-5 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS [ABS] Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis EFS004PD When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams". ● PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT". When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-11, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES". ● GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident". Revision: October 2004 BRC-6 2005 Titan PREPARATION [ABS] PREPARATION Special Service Tool PFP:00002 A EFS004PE The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description B (J-45741) ABS active wheel sensor tester Checking operation of ABS active wheel sensors C D WFIA0101E 205-D002 ( — ) Bearing splitter E Removing axle shaft bearing BRC G ZZA0700D Commercial Service Tools EFS004PF H Tool name Description 1. Flare nut crowfoot 2. Torque wrench Removing and installing brake piping a: 10mm (0.39 in)/12mm (0.47 in) I J S-NT360 K L M Revision: October 2004 BRC-7 2005 Titan SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [ABS] SYSTEM DESCRIPTION System Components PFP:00000 EFS004PG WFIA0118E ABS Function ● ● ● ● ● ● EFS004PH The Anti-Lock Brake System detects wheel revolution while braking and improves handling stability during sudden braking by electrically preventing wheel lockup. Maneuverability is also improved for avoiding obstacles. If the electrical system malfunctions, the Fail-Safe function is activated, the ABS becomes inoperative and the ABS warning lamp turns on. The electrical system can be diagnosed using CONSULT-II. During ABS operation, the brake pedal may vibrate lightly and a mechanical noise may be heard. This is normal. Just after starting the vehicle, the brake pedal may vibrate or a motor operating noise may be heard from engine compartment. This is a normal status of operation check. Stopping distance may be longer than that of vehicles without ABS when vehicle drives on rough, gravel, or snow-covered (fresh, deep snow) roads. EBD Function ● ● ● ● ● EFS004PI Electronic Brake Distribution is a function that detects subtle slippages between the front and rear wheels during braking, and it improves handling stability by electronically controlling the brake fluid pressure which results in reduced rear wheel slippage. If the electrical system malfunctions, the Fail-Safe function is activated, the EBD and ABS become inoperative, and the ABS warning lamp and brake warning lamp are turned on. The electrical system can be diagnosed using CONSULT-II. During EBD operation, the brake pedal may vibrate lightly and a mechanical noise may be heard. This is normal. Just after starting the vehicle, the brake pedal may vibrate or a motor operating noise may be heard from engine compartment. This is a normal status of operation check. Fail-Safe Function EFS004PJ CAUTION: If the Fail-Safe function is activated, perform the Self Diagnosis for ABS system. ABS/EBD SYSTEM In case of an electrical malfunction with the ABS, the ABS warning lamp will turn on. In case of an electrical malfunction with the EBD system, the brake warning lamp and the ABS warning lamp will turn on. The system will revert to one of the following conditions of the Fail-Safe function. Revision: October 2004 BRC-8 2005 Titan SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [ABS] 1. 2. For ABS malfunction, only the EBD is operative and the condition of the vehicle is the same condition of vehicles without ABS system. For EBD malfunction, the EBD and ABS become inoperative, and the condition of the vehicle is the same as the condition of vehicles without ABS or EBD system. Hydraulic Circuit Diagram EFS004PK A B C D E BRC G H I J K WFIA0214E L M Revision: October 2004 BRC-9 2005 Titan CAN COMMUNICATION [ABS] CAN COMMUNICATION System Description PFP:23710 EFS004PL Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Revision: October 2004 BRC-10 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABS] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and Accurate Repair PFP:00000 A EFS004PM INTRODUCTION The ABS system has an electronic control unit to control major functions. The control unit accepts input signals from sensors and controls actuator operation. It is also important to check for conventional problems such as air leaks in the booster or lines, lack of brake fluid, or other problems with the brake system. It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are caused by poor electrical connections or faulty wiring. In this case, careful checking of suspicious circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts. A visual check only may not find the cause of the problem, so a road test should be performed. Before undertaking actual checks, take just a few minutes to talk with a customer who approaches with an ABS complaint. The customer is a very good source of information on such problems, especially intermittent ones. Through the talks with the customer, find out what symptoms are present and under what conditions they occur. Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first. This is one of the best ways to troubleshoot brake problems on an ABS equipped vehicle. Also check related Service Bulletins for information. B C D SEF233G E BRC G H SEF234G I J K L M Revision: October 2004 BRC-11 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABS] WORK FLOW LFIA0197E Revision: October 2004 BRC-12 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABS] CLARIFY CONCERN ● ● ● A A customer's description of a vehicle concern may vary depending on the individual. It is important to clarify the customer's concern. Ask the customer about what symptoms are present under what conditions. Use this information to reproduce the symptom while driving. It is also important to use the diagnosis sheet to understand what type of trouble the customer is having. B C SBR339B D EXAMPLE OF DIAGNOSIS SHEET E BRC G H I J K L M WFIA0226E Revision: October 2004 BRC-13 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABS] Component Parts and Harness Connector Location EFS004PN WFIA0371E Revision: October 2004 BRC-14 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABS] Schematic EFS004PO A B C D E BRC G H I J K L M WFWA0198E Revision: October 2004 BRC-15 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABS] Wiring Diagram — ABS — EFS004PP WFWA0199E Revision: October 2004 BRC-16 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABS] A B C D E BRC G H I J K L M WFWA0200E Revision: October 2004 BRC-17 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABS] WFWA0201E Revision: October 2004 BRC-18 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABS] A B C D E BRC G H I J K L M WFWA0202E Revision: October 2004 BRC-19 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABS] Basic Inspection EFS004PQ BRAKE FLUID LEVEL, FLUID LEAK, AND BRAKE PAD INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. Check fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir. If fluid level is low, add fluid. Check the brake piping and around the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for leaks. If there is leaking or seeping fluid, check the following items. ● If ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connection is loose, tighten the piping to the specified torque and recheck for leaks. ● If there is damage to the connection flare nut or ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) threads, replace the damaged part and recheck for leaks. ● When there is fluid leaking or seeping from a fluid connection, use a clean cloth to wipe off the fluid and recheck for leaks. If fluid is still seeping out, replace the damaged part. If the fluid is leaking at the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) assembly. CAUTION: The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot be disassembled and must be replaced as an assembly. Check the brake pads for excessive wear. POWER SYSTEM TERMINAL LOOSENESS AND BATTERY INSPECTION Make sure the battery positive cable, negative cable and ground connection are not loose. In addition, make sure the battery is sufficiently charged. ABS WARNING LAMP INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. 4. Make sure ABS warning lamp turns on for approximately 1 second when the ignition switch is turned ON. If it does not, check CAN communications. If there are no errors with the CAN communication system, check the combination meter. Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" . Make sure the lamp turns off approximately 1 second after the ignition switch is turned ON. If the lamp does not turn off, conduct self-diagnosis. Make sure ABS warning lamp turns off approximately 2 seconds after the engine is started. If ABS warning lamp has not turned off 10 seconds after the engine has been started, conduct self-diagnosis of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). After conducting the self-diagnosis, be sure to erase the error memory. Refer to BRC-23, "CONSULT-II Function (ABS)" . Revision: October 2004 BRC-20 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABS] Warning Lamp and Indicator Timing EFS004PR A ABS warning lamp Remarks When the ignition switch is OFF – – After the ignition switch is turned ON for approx. 1 second × – After the ignition switch is turned ON for approx. 2 seconds – Condition ABS malfunction B Lamp goes off approx. 2 seconds after the engine is started. × – × When the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is malfunctioning (power supply or ground malfunction). X: ON —: OFF EFS004PS REFERENCE VALUE FROM CONSULT-II BRC CAUTION: The display shows the control unit calculation data, so a normal value might be displayed even in the event the output circuit (harness) is open or short circuited. Data monitor Display content Condition N POSI SIG P POSI SIG GEAR PNP switch signal ON/ OFF condition PNP switch signal ON/ OFF condition A/T gear position FR RH SENSOR FR LH SENSOR RR RH SENSOR RR LH SENSOR Wheel speed BATTERY VOLT Battery voltage supplied to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) STOP LAMP SW Stop lamp switch operation ABS WARN LAMP MOTOR RELAY Revision: October 2004 D E Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard Monitor item C ABS warning lamp ON condition (Note 2) Operation status of motor and motor relay Reference value in normal operation A/T shift position = N position ON A/T shift position = other than N positions OFF A/T shift position P position ON A/T shift position = other than P positions OFF 1st gear 1 2nd gear 2 3rd gear 3 4th gear 4 5th gear 5 Vehicle stopped 0 [km/h (MPH)] Vehicle running (Note 1) Almost in accordance with speedometer display (within ±10%) Ignition switch ON 10 to 16V Brake pedal depressed ON Brake pedal not depressed OFF ABS warning lamp ON ON ABS warning lamp OFF OFF Ignition switch ON or running (ABS not activated) OFF Ignition switch ON or engine running (ABS activated) ON BRC-21 Note: Error inspection checklist G H BRC-34, "CAN Communication System Inspection" I BRC-34, "CAN Communication System Inspection" J K — L BRC-29, "Wheel Sensor System" BRC-33, "ABS Control Unit Power and Ground Systems Inspection" — BRC-38, "ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On" BRC-32, "Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection" 2005 Titan M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABS] Data monitor Monitor item ACTUATOR RLY Display content Actuator relay operation status FR LH IN SOL FR LH OUT SOL FR RH IN SOL FR RH OUT SOL RR RH IN SOL RR RH OUT SOL RR LH IN SOL RR LH OUT SOL Solenoid valve operation FLUID LEV SW ON/OFF status of brake fluid level switch ABS SIGNAL EBD SIGNAL ABS FAIL SIG EBD FAIL SIG Signal status Fail signal status Condition Reference value in normal operation Vehicle stopped (Ignition switch ON) OFF Vehicle stopped (Engine running) ON Actuator (solenoid) is active (“ACTIVE TEST” with CONSULT-II) or actuator relay is inactive (in fail-safe mode). ON When actuator (solenoid) is not active and actuator relay is active (ignition switch ON). OFF When brake fluid level switch ON ON When brake fluid level switch OFF OFF ABS active EBD active ON ABS not active EBD not active OFF ABS fail EBD fail ON ABS normal EBD normal OFF Note: Error inspection checklist BRC-32, "Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection" BRC-31, "Solenoid Valve System Inspection" DI-30, "WARNING LAMPS" ABS system EBD system ABS system EBD system Note 1: Confirm tire pressure is normal. Note 2: ON/OFF timing of ABS warning lamp ON: For approximately 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON, or when a malfunction is detected. OFF: Approximately 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON (when system is in normal operation). Revision: October 2004 BRC-22 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABS] CONSULT-II Function (ABS) EFS004PT A CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. ABS diagnostic mode WORK SUPPORT SELF-DIAG RESULTS DATA MONITOR Description Supports inspection and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and received data is displayed. B Displays ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis results. C Displays ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) input/output data in real time. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. ACTIVE TEST Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. FUNCTION TEST ECU PART NUMBER D Conducted by CONSULT-II instead of a technician to determine whether each system is "OK" or "NG". E ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) part number can be read. CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. BRC Turn ignition switch OFF. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. Turn ignition switch ON. G H I BBIA0369E 4. J Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. K L M BCIA0029E 5. Touch “ABS” in the “SELECT SYSTEM” screen. If “ABS” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . BCIA0030E Revision: October 2004 BRC-23 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABS] 6. Select the required diagnostic location from the “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen. For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation Manual. BCIA0031E SELF-DIAGNOSIS Description If an error is detected in the system, the ABS warning lamp will turn on. In this case, perform self-diagnosis as follows: Operation Procedure 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. Start engine and drive at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute. After stopping the vehicle, with the engine running, touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”, “ABS”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” in order on the CONSULT-II screen. CAUTION: If “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)” is touched immediately after starting the engine or turning on the ignition switch, “ABS” might not be displayed in the SELECT SYSTEM screen. In this case, repeat the operation from step 1. 6. The self-diagnostic results are displayed. (If necessary, the self-diagnostic results can be printed out by touching “PRINT”.) ● When “NO DTC IS DETECTED” is displayed, check the ABS warning lamp. 7. Conduct the appropriate inspection from the display item list, and repair or replace the malfunctioning component. 8. Start engine and drive at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute. CAUTION: ● When a wheel sensor “short-circuit” is detected, if the vehicle is not driven at 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least 1 minute, the ABS warning lamp will not turn off even if the malfunction is repaired. 9. Turn ignition switch OFF to prepare for erasing the memory. 10. Start the engine and touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”, “ABS”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”, “ERASE” in order on the CONSULT-II screen to erase the error memory. If “ABS” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . CAUTION: If the error memory is not erased, re-conduct the operation from step 5. 11. For the final inspection, drive at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute and confirm that the ABS warning lamp is off. Revision: October 2004 BRC-24 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABS] Display Item List Self-diagnostic item Malfunction detecting condition Check system A FR LH SENSOR 1 [C1104] Circuit of front LH wheel sensor is open, shorted or sensor power voltage is unusual. RR RH SENSOR 1 [C1101] Circuit of rear RH wheel sensor is open, shorted or sensor power voltage is unusual. FR RH SENSOR 1 [C1103] Circuit of front RH wheel sensor is open, shorted or sensor power voltage is unusual. RR LH SENSOR 1 [C1102] Circuit of rear LH wheel sensor is open, shorted or sensor power voltage is unusual. FR LH SENSOR 2 [C1108] ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor. RR RH SENSOR 2 [C1105] ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor. E FR RH SENSOR 2 [C1107] ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor. BRC RR LH SENSOR 2 [C1106] ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor. G BATTERY VOLTAGE [ABNORMAL] [C1109] ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power voltage is too low. BRC-33, "ABS Control Unit Power and Ground Systems Inspection" CONTROLLER FAILURE [C1110] Internal malfunction of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) BRC-30, "ABS Control Unit Inspection" I BRC-32, "Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection" J BRC-30, "ABS Control Unit Inspection" K PUMP MOTOR (Note 3) [C1111] During actuator motor operation with ON, when actuator motor turns OFF or when control line for actuator motor relay is open. During actuator motor operation with OFF, when actuator motor turns ON or when control line for relay is shorted to ground. G-SENSOR [C1113] G-sensor is malfunctioning. FR LH IN ABS SOL [C1120] Circuit of front LH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. FR LH OUT ABS SOL [C1121] Circuit of front LH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. RR RH IN ABS SOL [C1126] Circuit of rear RH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. RR RH OUT ABS SOL [C1127] Circuit of rear RH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. FR RH IN ABS SOL [C1122] Circuit of front RH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. FR RH OUT ABS SOL [C1123] Circuit of front RH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. RR LH IN ABS SOL [C1124] Circuit of rear LH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. RR LH OUT ABS SOL [C1125] Circuit of rear LH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. REAR IN ABS SOL [C1190] Circuit of rear IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. REAR OUT ABS SOL [C1191] Circuit of rear OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. Revision: October 2004 BRC-25 B C D BRC-29, "Wheel Sensor System" (Note 1) H L M BRC-31, "Solenoid Valve System Inspection" 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABS] Self-diagnostic item ACTUATOR RLY [C1140] CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] Malfunction detecting condition Check system BRC-32, "Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection" ABS actuator relay or circuit malfunction. ● CAN communication line is open or shorted. ● ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) internal malfunction ● Battery voltage for ECM is suddenly interrupted for approximately 0.5 second or more. BRC-34, "CAN Communication System Inspection" (Note 2) Note 1. If wheel sensor 2 for each wheel is indicated, check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power supply voltage in addition to wheel sensor circuit check. Note 2. If multiple malfunctions are detected including CAN communication line [U1000], perform diagnosis for CAN communication line first. Note 3. "ACTUATOR RLY" on the CONSULT-II self-diagnosis results indicates the malfunction of the actuator motor relay or circuit. DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. After turning OFF the ignition switch, connect CONSULT-II and the CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”, “ABS”, “DATA MONITOR” in order on the CONSULT-II screen. If “ABS” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . CAUTION: When “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)” is touched immediately after starting the engine or turning on the ignition switch, “ABS” might not be displayed in the SELECT SYSTEM screen. In this case, repeat the operation from step 2. Return to the SELECT MONITOR ITEM screen, and touch “ECU INPUT SIGNALS”, “MAIN SIGNALS” or “SELECTION FROM MENU”. Refer to the following information. When “START” is touched, the data monitor screen is displayed. Display Item List Data monitor item selection Item (Unit) ECU INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU Remarks FR RH SENSOR (km/h, MPH) × × × Wheel speed calculated by front RH wheel sensor signal is displayed. FR LH SENSOR (km/h, MPH) × × × Wheel speed calculated by front LH wheel sensor signal is displayed. RR RH SENSOR (km/h, MPH) × × × Wheel speed calculated by rear RH wheel sensor signal is displayed. RR LH SENSOR (km/h, MPH) × × × Wheel speed calculated by rear LH wheel sensor signal is displayed. BATTERY VOLT (V) × × × Voltage supplied to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is displayed. STOP LAMP SW (ON/OFF) × × × Stop lamp switch (ON/OFF) status is displayed. ABS WARN LAMP (ON/OFF) – × × ABS warning lamp (ON/OFF) status is displayed. FR LH IN SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Front LH IN ABS solenoid (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. FR LH OUT SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Front LH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. Revision: October 2004 BRC-26 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABS] Item (Unit) Data monitor item selection A Remarks ECU INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU RR RH IN SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Rear RH IN ABS solenoid (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. RR RH OUT SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Rear RH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. FR RH IN SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Front RH IN ABS solenoid (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. FR RH OUT SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Front RH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. RR LH IN SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Rear LH IN ABS solenoid (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. RR LH OUT SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Rear LH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. MOTOR RELAY (ON/OFF) – × × ABS motor relay signal (ON/OFF) status is displayed. ACTUATOR RLY (ON/OFF) – × × ABS actuator relay signal (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. ABS FAIL SIG (ON/OFF) – – × ABS fail signal (ON/OFF) status is displayed. EBD FAIL SIG (ON/OFF) – – × EBD fail signal (ON/OFF) status is displayed. FLUID LEV SW (ON/OFF) × – × Brake fluid level switch (ON/OFF) status is displayed. EBD SIGNAL (ON/OFF) – – × EBD operation (ON/OFF) status is displayed. ABS SIGNAL (ON/OFF) – – × ABS operation (ON/OFF) status is displayed. B C D E BRC G H I J ×: Applicable –: Not applicable ACTIVE TEST K CAUTION: ● Do not perform active test while driving. ● Make sure to completely bleed air from the brake system. ● The ABS and brake warning lamps turn on during the active test. L Operation Procedure M 1. 2. 3. 4. Connect the CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector and start the engine. CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)” on the display screen. Touch “ABS”. If “ABS” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . Touch “ACTIVE TEST”. Revision: October 2004 BRC-27 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABS] 5. 6. The SELECT TEST ITEM screen is displayed. Touch necessary test item. LBR379 7. 8. With the “MAIN SIGNALS” display selected, touch “START”. The Active Test screen will be displayed, so conduct the following test. Solenoid Valve Operation Chart ABS solenoid valve ABS solenoid valve (ACT) Operation UP KEEP DOWN UP ACTUATOR UP ACTUATOR KEEP FR RH SOL FR RH ABS SOLENOID (ACT) FR RH IN SOL OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF FR RH OUT SOL OFF OFF ON* OFF OFF OFF FR LH SOL FR LH ABS SOLENOID (ACT) FR LH IN SOL OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF FR LH OUT SOL OFF OFF ON* OFF OFF OFF RR RH SOL RR RH ABS SOLENOID (ACT) RR RH IN SOL OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF RR RH OUT SOL OFF OFF ON* OFF OFF OFF RR LH SOL RR LH ABS SOLENOID (ACT) RR LH IN SOL OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF RR LH OUT SOL OFF OFF ON* OFF OFF OFF RR RH IN SOL OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF RR RH OUT SOL OFF OFF ON* OFF OFF OFF RR LH IN SOL OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF RR LH OUT SOL OFF OFF ON* OFF OFF OFF REAR SOL *: ON for 1 to 2 seconds after the touch, and then OFF NOTE: ● If active test is performed with brake pedal depressed, pedal stroke may change. This is normal. ● “TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed approximately 10 seconds after operation starts. ● After “TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed, to perform test again, repeat Step 6. ABS Motor Touch “ON” and “OFF” on the screen. Check that ABS motor relay operates as shown in table below. ON OFF ABS actuator relay Operation ON ON ABS motor relay ON OFF NOTE: ● If active test is performed with brake pedal depressed, pedal stroke may change. This is normal. ● “TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed approximately 10 seconds after operation starts. Revision: October 2004 BRC-28 SFIA0593E 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [ABS] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS Wheel Sensor System PFP:00000 A EFS004PU INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. CONNECTOR INSPECTION B Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and wheel sensor of malfunctioning code. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. BRC-41, "Removal and Installation" 2. CHECK WHEEL SENSOR OUTPUT SIGNAL C D E 1. 2. Connect ABS active wheel sensor tester (J-45741) to wheel sensor using appropriate adapter. Turn on the ABS active wheel sensor tester power switch. BRC NOTE: The green POWER indicator should illuminate. If the POWER indicator does not illuminate, replace the battery in the ABS active wheel sensor tester before proceeding. 3. Spin the wheel of the vehicle by hand and observe the red SENSOR indicator on the ABS active wheel G sensor tester. The red SENSOR indicator should flash on and off to indicate an output signal. NOTE: If the red SENSOR indicator illuminates but does not flash, reverse the polarity of the tester leads and H retest. Does the ABS active wheel sensor tester detect a signal? YES >> GO TO 3. I NO >> Replace the wheel sensor. Refer to BRC-39, "Removal and Installation" . 3. CHECK TIRES J Check for inflation pressure, wear and size of each tire. Are tire pressure and size correct and is tire wear within specifications? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Adjust tire pressure or replace tire(s). K 4. CHECK WHEEL BEARINGS L Check wheel bearing axial end play. Refer to FAX-5, "WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION" or RAX-5, "WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. Refer to RAX-6, "Removal and Installation" or FAX-5, "Removal and Installation" . 5. CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and wheel sensor connector of malfunction code No. Check resistance between wheel sensor harness connector terminals and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair the circuit. WFIA0343E Revision: October 2004 BRC-29 2005 Titan M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [ABS] 6. CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector and wheel sensor harness connector. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Wheel sensor Connector - terminal Front LH Front RH Rear LH Rear RH Wire color Wheel sensor Connector - terminal Continuity Wire color E125 - 45 G/O E18 - 1 G/O E125 - 46 BR/W E18 - 2 BR/W E125 - 34 B/R E117 - 1 B/R E125 - 33 BR E117 - 2 BR E125 - 37 P C11 - 2 P E125 - 36 L C11 - 1 L E125 - 42 V C10 - 2 V E125 - 43 G/Y C10 - 1 G/Y Yes Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-41, "Removal and Installation" . NG >> Repair the circuit. ABS Control Unit Inspection EFS004PW INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK Check self-diagnosis results. Self-diagnosis results CONTROLLER FAILURE G-SENSOR Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-41, "Removal and Installation" . NO >> Inspection End. Revision: October 2004 BRC-30 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [ABS] Solenoid Valve System Inspection EFS004PX A INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK B Check self-diagnosis results. Self-diagnosis results C FR LH IN ABS SOL FR LH OUT ABS SOL RR RH IN ABS SOL D RR RH OUT ABS SOL FR RH IN ABS SOL E FR RH OUT ABS SOL RR LH IN ABS SOL RR LH OUT ABS SOL BRC REAR IN ABS SOL REAR OUT ABS SOL Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. G 2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION H 1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. 2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. I J K L M Revision: October 2004 BRC-31 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [ABS] 3. 1. CHECKING SOLENOID POWER AND GROUND Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 and body ground. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 32 (Y) Body ground — Measured value (Approx.) 12V WFIA0195E 2. Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 and body ground. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 16 (B) 47 (B) Body ground — — Measured value Ω (Approx.) 0Ω 0Ω OK or NG OK >> Perform self-diagnosis again. If the same results appear, replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-41, "Removal and Installation" . NG >> Repair the circuit. Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection WFIA0196E EFS004PY INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. CHECKING SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Check self-diagnosis results. Self-diagnosis results PUMP MOTOR ACTUATOR RLY Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. 2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION 1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. 2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. Revision: October 2004 BRC-32 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [ABS] 3. 1. CHECKING ABS MOTOR AND MOTOR RELAY POWER SYSTEM A Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 and ground. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 1 (B/Y) Body ground — B Measured value (Approx.) 12V C D WFIA0209E 2. Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and ground. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 16 (B) 47 (B) Body ground — — E Measured value (Approx.) 0Ω 0Ω OK or NG OK >> Perform self-diagnosis again. If the same results appear, replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-41, "Removal and Installation" . NG >> Repair the circuit. ABS Control Unit Power and Ground Systems Inspection BRC G WFIA0196E H I EFS004Q0 INSPECTION PROCEDURE J 1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK Check self-diagnosis results. K Self-diagnosis results BATTERY VOLTAGE L Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. M 2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION 1. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. 2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. Revision: October 2004 BRC-33 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [ABS] 3. ABS CONTROL UNIT POWER AND GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION Measure the voltage and continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 and ground. Signal name ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 Power supply Ground 1 (B/Y) 32 (Y) 16 (B) 47 (B) Body ground Measured value — Battery voltage (Approx. 12V) — Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Check the battery for loose terminals, low voltage, etc. Repair as necessary. NG >> Repair the circuit. CAN Communication System Inspection EFS004Q1 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness, and so on. If there is a malfunction, repair or replace the terminal. 2. Reconnect connector to perform self-diagnosis. Is "CAN COMM CIRCUIT" displayed in self-diagnosis display items? YES >> Print out the self-diagnostic results, and refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . NO >> Connector terminal is loose, damaged, open, or shorted. Revision: October 2004 BRC-34 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [ABS] TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS ABS Works Frequently PFP:99999 A EFS005FE 1. CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION B Make sure warning lamp remains off while driving. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer toBRC-24, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" . C D 2. CHECK WHEEL SENSORS Check the following. ● Wheel sensor mounting for looseness ● Wheel sensors for physical damage ● Wheel sensor connectors for terminal damage or loose connections ● Sensor rotor and mount for physical damage (rear only) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. E BRC G 3. CHECK FRONT AND REAR AXLES H Check front and rear axles for excessive looseness. Refer to FAX-5, "WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION" or RAX-5, "WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair as necessary. I J 4. CHECK BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE Check brake fluid pressure distribution. Refer to BRC-20, "Basic Inspection" . Is brake fluid pressure distribution normal? YES >> Inspection End. NO >> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-20, "Basic Inspection" . K L M Revision: October 2004 BRC-35 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [ABS] Unexpected Pedal Action EFS005FF 1. CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION Make sure warning lamp remains off while driving. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-24, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" . 2. CHECK BRAKE PEDAL STROKE Check brake pedal stroke. Is pedal stroke excessive? YES >> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-20, "Basic Inspection" . NO >> GO TO 3. SBR540A 3. CHECK CONNECTOR AND BRAKING PERFORMANCE 1. 2. Disable ABS by disconnecting ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Drive vehicle and check brake operation. NOTE: ● Stopping distance may be longer than vehicles without ABS when road condition is slippery. ● Driving the vehicle with the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) disconnected may induce DTCs in electrical control units using CAN communication. After the inspection, clear all DTCs. Refer to LAN7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-20, "Basic Inspection" . 4. CHECK WHEEL SENSORS Check the following. ● Wheel sensor mounting for looseness ● Wheel sensors for physical damage ● Wheel sensor connectors for terminal damage or loose connections OK or NG OK >> Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. Reconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector. Then retest. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. Revision: October 2004 BRC-36 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [ABS] Long Stopping Distance EFS005FG A 1. CHECK BASE BRAKING SYSTEM PERFORMANCE 1. 2. Disable ABS by disconnecting ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Drive vehicle and check brake operation. NOTE: ● Stopping distance may be longer than vehicles without ABS when road condition is slippery. ● Driving the vehicle with the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) disconnected may induce DTCs in electrical control units using CAN communication. After the inspection, clear all DTCs. Refer to LAN7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . OK or NG OK >> Go to BRC-35, "ABS Works Frequently" . NG >> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-20, "Basic Inspection" . ABS Does Not Work B C D E EFS005FH BRC CAUTION: The ABS does not operate when the vehicle speed is 10 km/h (6 MPH) or less. G 1. CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION Turn ignition switch ON and check for warning lamp activation. ● Warning lamp should activate for approximately 2 seconds after turning the ignition switch ON. OK or NG OK >> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-24, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" . NG >> Go to BRC-38, "ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On" . Pedal Vibration or ABS Operation Noise H I EFS005FI NOTE: During ABS activation, pedal vibration may be felt and a noise may be heard. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. J K 1. CHECK SYMPTOM L 1. Apply brake. 2. Start engine. Does the symptom occur only when engine is started? YES >> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-24, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" . NO >> GO TO 2. M 2. RECHECK SYMPTOM Does the symptom occur only when electrical equipment switches (such as headlamps) are turned on? YES NO >> Check for radio, antenna or related wiring that is routed too close to the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and reroute as necessary. >> Go to BRC-35, "ABS Works Frequently" . Revision: October 2004 BRC-37 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [ABS] ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On EFS005FJ 1. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) FUSES Check 30A fusible link h and 30A fusible link i for ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). For fusible link layout, refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fusible link is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before replacing. 2. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS 1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. 2. Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector terminal 1 (B/Y) and ground and terminal 32 (Y) and ground. Does battery voltage exist? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair harness or connectors between fusible link and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). WFIA0199E 3. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector terminal 16 (B) and ground and terminal 47 (B) and ground. Does continuity exist? YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-41, "Removal and Installation" . NO >> Repair harness or connectors between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ground. WFIA0196E ABS Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On EFS005FK 1. CARRY OUT SELF-DIAGNOSIS Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-24, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" . Are malfunctions detected in self-diagnosis? YES >> Refer to BRC-25, "Display Item List" . NO >> Refer to DI-30, "WARNING LAMPS" . Revision: October 2004 BRC-38 2005 Titan WHEEL SENSORS [ABS] WHEEL SENSORS Removal and Installation PFP:47910 A EFS004Q9 B C D E BRC WFIA0374E G REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove wheel sensor mounting screw. ● When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel sensor mounting bolt. Refer to BR-24, "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor" . Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. CAUTION: ● Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. ● Do not pull on the sensor harness. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts. INSTALLATION Before installing wheel sensors, ● Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged. ● Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle. ● Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 BRC-39 2005 Titan H I J K L M SENSOR ROTOR [ABS] SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation PFP:47970 EFS004QA FRONT The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly. Refer to FAX-5, "Removal and Installation" . REAR Removal 1. 2. Remove axle shaft assembly. Refer to RAX-6, "Removal and Installation" . NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor. Pull the sensor rotor of off the axle shaft using Tool and a press. Tool number : 205-D002 ( — ) Installation 1. 2. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure sensor rotor is fully seated. CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor. Install axle shaft assembly. Refer to RAX-6, "Removal and Installation" . CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Revision: October 2004 BRC-40 2005 Titan ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) [ABS] ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation PFP:47660 A EFS004QB B C D E BRC G H I J WFIA0375E K 1. To rear left 2. To rear right 3. To front left 4. To front right 5. From the master cylinder secondary side 6. From the master cylinder primary side 7. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) 8. Harness connector L REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to EI-21, "Removal and Installation" . Drain the brake fluid. Refer to BR-10, "Drain and Refill" . Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: ● To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. ● Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas. Disconnect the brake tubes. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Revision: October 2004 BRC-41 2005 Titan M ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) [ABS] INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). ● Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Refer to BR-12, "BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE" . ● Never reuse drained brake fluid. ● After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System" . Revision: October 2004 BRC-42 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS [ABLS/ABS] PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A EFS004QC The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along B with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. C WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be perD formed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air E Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or BRC harness connectors. Precautions for Brake System EFS004QD CAUTION: ● Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" for recommended brake fluid. ● Never reuse drained brake fluid. ● Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. ● To clean or wash all parts of master cylinder and disc brake caliper, use clean brake fluid. ● Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. They will ruin rubber parts of the hydraulic system. ● Use flare nut wrench when removing and installing brake tube. ● If a brake fluid leak is found, the part must be disassembled without fail. Then it has to be replaced with a new one if a defect exists. ● Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the connector of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) or the battery terminal before performing the work. ● Always torque brake lines when installing. ● Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or SBR686C replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-27, "BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE" (front disc brake) or BR-32, "BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE" (rear disc brake). WARNING: ● Clean brake pads and shoes with a waste cloth, then wipe with a dust collector. Precautions When Using CONSULT-II EFS004QE When connecting CONSULT-II to data link connector, connect them through CONSULT-II CONVERTER. CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. CHECK POINTS FOR USING CONSULT-II 1. Has CONSULT-II been used without connecting CONSULT-II CONVERTER on this vehicle? ● If YES, GO TO 2. ● If NO, GO TO 5. Revision: October 2004 BRC-43 2005 Titan G H I J K L M PRECAUTIONS [ABLS/ABS] 2. 3. 4. 5. Is there any indication other than indications relating to CAN communication system in the self-diagnosis results? ● If YES, GO TO 3. ● If NO, GO TO 4. Based on self-diagnosis results unrelated to CAN communication, carry out the inspection. Malfunctions may be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control units carrying out CAN communication. Therefor, erase the self-diagnosis results. Diagnose CAN communication system. Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Precautions for Brake Control ● ● ● ● ● ● ● EFS004QF During ABS operation, the brake pedal may vibrate lightly and a mechanical noise may be heard. This is normal. Just after starting vehicle, the brake pedal may vibrate or a motor operating noise may be heard from engine compartment. This is a normal status of operation check. Stopping distance may be longer than that of vehicles without ABS when vehicle drives on rough, gravel, or snow-covered (fresh, deep snow) roads. When an error is indicated by ABS or another warning lamp, collect all necessary information from customer (what symptoms are present under what conditions) and check for simple causes before starting diagnosis. Besides electrical system inspection, check brake booster operation, brake fluid level, and fluid leaks. If incorrect tire sizes or types are installed on the vehicle or brake pads are not Genuine NISSAN parts, stopping distance or steering stability may deteriorate. If there is a radio, antenna or related wiring near control module, ABS function may have a malfunction or error. If aftermarket parts (car stereo, CD player, etc.) have been installed, check for incidents such as harness pinches, open circuits or improper wiring. Precautions for CAN System ● ● ● ● EFS004QG Do not apply voltage of 7.0V or higher to terminal to be measured. Maximum open terminal voltage of tester in use must be less than 7.0V. Before checking harnesses, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery negative cable. Area to be repaired must be soldered and wrapped with tape. Make sure that fraying of twisted wire is within 110 mm (4.33 in). PKIA0306E ● Do not make a bypass connection to repaired area. (If the circuit is bypassed, characteristics of twisted wire will be lost.) PKIA0307E Revision: October 2004 BRC-44 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS [ABLS/ABS] Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis EFS004QH A When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams". ● PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT". When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-11, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES". ● GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident". B C D E BRC G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 BRC-45 2005 Titan PREPARATION [ABLS/ABS] PREPARATION Special Service Tool PFP:00002 EFS004QI The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description (J-45741) ABS active wheel sensor tester Checking operation of ABS active wheel sensors WFIA0101E 205-D002 ( — ) Bearing splitter Removing axle shaft bearing ZZA0700D Commercial Service Tools EFS004QJ Tool name Description 1. Flare nut crowfoot 2. Torque wrench Removing and installing brake piping a: 10mm (0.39 in)/12mm (0.47 in) S-NT360 Revision: October 2004 BRC-46 2005 Titan SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [ABLS/ABS] SYSTEM DESCRIPTION System Components PFP:00000 A EFS004QK B C D E BRC G H I J K L M WFIA0301E Revision: October 2004 BRC-47 2005 Titan SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [ABLS/ABS] ABS Function ● ● ● ● ● ● EFS004QL The Anti-Lock Brake System detects wheel revolution while braking and improves handling stability during sudden braking by electrically preventing wheel lockup. Maneuverability is also improved for avoiding obstacles. If the electrical system malfunctions, the Fail-Safe function is activated, the ABS becomes inoperative and the ABS warning lamp turns on. The electrical system can be diagnosed using CONSULT-II. During ABS operation, the brake pedal may vibrate lightly and a mechanical noise may be heard. This is normal. Just after starting the vehicle, the brake pedal may vibrate or a motor operating noise may be heard from engine compartment. This is a normal status of operation check. Stopping distance may be longer than that of vehicles without ABS when vehicle drives on rough, gravel, or snow-covered (fresh, deep snow) roads. EBD Function ● ● ● ● ● EFS004QM Electronic Brake Distribution is a function that detects subtle slippages between the front and rear wheels during braking, and it improves handling stability by electronically controlling the brake fluid pressure which results in reduced rear wheel slippage. If the electrical system malfunctions, the Fail-Safe function is activated, the EBD and ABS become inoperative, and the ABS warning lamp and brake warning lamp are turned on. The electrical system can be diagnosed using CONSULT-II. During EBD operation, the brake pedal may vibrate lightly and a mechanical noise may be heard. This is normal. Just after starting the vehicle, the brake pedal may vibrate or a motor operating noise may be heard from engine compartment. This is a normal status of operation check. ABLS Function ● ● ● EFS004QN Active brake limited slip is a function to improve vehicle traction. Spinning of the drive wheels is detected by the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) using inputs from the wheel speed sensors. If wheel spin occurs, the ABLS system brakes the spinning wheel which distributes the driving power to the other drive wheel. The SLIP indicator lamp turns on to inform the driver of ABLS operation. During ABLS operation, the brake pedal may vibrate lightly and a mechanical noise may be heard. This is normal. Fail-Safe Function EFS004QO CAUTION: If the Fail-Safe function is activated, perform the Self Diagnosis for ABS/ABLS system. ABS/EBD SYSTEM In case of an electrical malfunction with the ABS, the ABS warning lamp will turn on. In case of an electrical malfunction with the EBD system, the brake warning lamp and ABS warning lamp will turn on. The system will revert to one of the following conditions of the Fail-Safe function. 1. For ABS malfunction, only the EBD is operative and the condition of the vehicle is the same condition of vehicles without ABS/ABLS system. 2. For EBD malfunction, the EBD and ABS become inoperative, and the condition of the vehicle is the same as the condition of vehicles without ABS/ABLS or EBD system. ABLS SYSTEM In case of an ABLS system malfunction, the ABS warning lamp will turn on and only the EBD is operative. The condition of the vehicle is the same as the condition of vehicles without ABS/ABLS system. Revision: October 2004 BRC-48 2005 Titan SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [ABLS/ABS] Hydraulic Circuit Diagram EFS004QP A B C D E BRC G H I J WFIA0302E K L M Revision: October 2004 BRC-49 2005 Titan CAN COMMUNICATION [ABLS/ABS] CAN COMMUNICATION System Description PFP:23710 EFS004QQ Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Revision: October 2004 BRC-50 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABLS/ABS] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and Accurate Repair PFP:00000 A EFS004QR INTRODUCTION The ABS/ABLS system has an electronic control unit to control major functions. The control unit accepts input signals from sensors and controls actuator operation. It is also important to check for conventional problems such as air leaks in the booster or lines, lack of brake fluid, or other problems with the brake system. It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are caused by poor electrical connections or faulty wiring. In this case, careful checking of suspicious circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts. A visual check only may not find the cause of the problem, so a road test should be performed. Before undertaking actual checks, take just a few minutes to talk with a customer who approaches with an ABS/ABLS complaint. The customer is a very good source of information on such problems, especially intermittent ones. Through the talks with the customer, find out what symptoms are present and under what conditions they occur. Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first. This is one of the best ways to troubleshoot brake problems on an ABS/ ABLS equipped vehicle. Also check related Service Bulletins for information. B C D SEF233G E BRC G H SEF234G I J K L M Revision: October 2004 BRC-51 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABLS/ABS] WORK FLOW WFIA0364E Revision: October 2004 BRC-52 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABLS/ABS] CLARIFY CONCERN ● ● ● A A customer's description of a vehicle concern may vary depending on the individual. It is important to clarify the customer's concern. Ask the customer about what symptoms are present under what conditions. Use this information to reproduce the symptom while driving. It is also important to use the diagnosis sheet to understand what type of trouble the customer is having. B C SBR339B D EXAMPLE OF DIAGNOSIS SHEET E BRC G H I J K L M WFIA0365E Revision: October 2004 BRC-53 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABLS/ABS] Component Parts and Harness Connector Location EFS004QS WFIA0372E Revision: October 2004 BRC-54 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABLS/ABS] Schematic EFS004QT A B C D E BRC G H I J K L M WFWA0203E Revision: October 2004 BRC-55 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABLS/ABS] Wiring Diagram — ABLS — EFS004QU WFWA0204E Revision: October 2004 BRC-56 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABLS/ABS] A B C D E BRC G H I J K L M WFWA0205E Revision: October 2004 BRC-57 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABLS/ABS] WFWA0206E Revision: October 2004 BRC-58 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABLS/ABS] A B C D E BRC G H I J K L M WFWA0207E Revision: October 2004 BRC-59 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABLS/ABS] Basic Inspection EFS004QV BRAKE FLUID LEVEL, FLUID LEAK, AND BRAKE PAD INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. Check fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir. If fluid level is low, add fluid. Check the brake piping and around the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for leaks. If there is leaking or seeping fluid, check the following items. ● If ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connection is loose, tighten the piping to the specified torque and recheck for leaks. ● If there is damage to the connection flare nut or ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) threads, replace the damaged part and recheck for leaks. ● When there is fluid leaking or seeping from a fluid connection, use a clean cloth to wipe off the fluid and recheck for leaks. If fluid is still seeping out, replace the damaged part. If the fluid is leaking at the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) assembly. CAUTION: The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot be disassembled and must be replaced as an assembly. Check the brake pads for excessive wear. POWER SYSTEM TERMINAL LOOSENESS AND BATTERY INSPECTION Make sure the battery positive cable, negative cable and ground connection are not loose. In addition, make sure the battery is sufficiently charged. ABS WARNING LAMP AND SLIP INDICATOR LAMP INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. 4. Make sure ABS warning lamp and SLIP indicator lamp turn on for approximately 1 second when the ignition switch is turned ON. If they do not, check CAN communications. If there are no errors with CAN communication system, check combination meter. Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" . Make sure the lamps turn off approximately 1 second after the ignition switch is turned ON. If the lamps do not turn off, conduct self-diagnosis. Make sure ABS warning lamp turns off approximately 2 seconds after the engine is started. If ABS warning lamp has not turned off 10 seconds after the engine has been started, conduct self-diagnosis of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). After conducting the self-diagnosis, be sure to erase the error memory. Refer to BRC-64, "CONSULT-II Function (ABS)" . Revision: October 2004 BRC-60 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABLS/ABS] Warning Lamp and Indicator Timing EFS004QW A ABS warning lamp SLIP indicator lamp Remarks When the ignition switch is OFF — — — After the ignition switch is turned ON for approx. 1 second X X — After the ignition switch is turned ON for approx. 2 seconds — — X — Condition Lamp goes off approx. 2 seconds after the engine is started. C — When the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is malfunctioning (power supply or ground malfunction). ABS/ABLS malfunction X B — D E X: ON —: OFF Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard EFS004QX REFERENCE VALUE FROM CONSULT-II CAUTION: The display shows the control unit calculation data, so a normal value might be displayed even in the event the output circuit (harness) is open or short circuited. BRC G Data monitor Monitor item Display content Condition N POSI SIG PNP switch signal ON/ OFF condition P POSI SIG PNP switch signal ON/ OFF condition GEAR A/T gear position FR RH SENSOR FR LH SENSOR RR RH SENSOR RR LH SENSOR Wheel speed ACCEL POS SIG Open/close condition of throttle valve (linked with accelerator pedal). ENGINE SPEED BATTERY VOLT Revision: October 2004 A/T shift position = N position ON A/T shift position = other than N positions OFF Note: Error inspection checklist H BRC-81, "CAN Communication System Inspection" I BRC-81, "CAN Communication System Inspection" J A/T shift position P position ON A/T shift position = other than P positions OFF 1st gear 1 2nd gear 2 3rd gear 3 4th gear 4 5th gear 5 Vehicle stopped 0 [km/h (MPH)] Vehicle running (Note 1) Almost in accordance with speedometer display (within ±10%) BRC-72, "Wheel Sensor System Inspection" Accelerator pedal not depressed (ignition switch is ON) 0% Depress accelerator pedal (ignition switch is ON) BRC-81, "CAN Communication System Inspection" 0 to 100% With engine stopped 0 rpm Engine running Almost in accordance with tachometer display With engine running Battery voltage supplied to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Reference value in normal operation Ignition switch ON BRC-61 10 to 16V K — L BRC-73, "Engine System Inspection" BRC-77, "ABS/ABLS Control Unit Power and Ground Systems Inspection" 2005 Titan M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABLS/ABS] Data monitor Monitor item STOP LAMP SW ABS WARN LAMP MOTOR RELAY ACTUATOR RLY SLIP LAMP FR LH IN SOL FR LH OUT SOL FR RH IN SOL FR RH OUT SOL RR RH IN SOL RR RH OUT SOL RR LH IN SOL RR LH OUT SOL CV1 CV2 SV1 SV2 PRESS SENSOR FLUID LEV SW ABS SIGNAL EBD SIGNAL ABS FAIL SIG EBD FAIL SIG Display content Stop lamp switch operation ABS warning lamp ON condition (Note 2) Operation status of motor and motor relay Actuator relay operation status SLIP indicator lamp status (Note 3) Solenoid valve operation Switch-over valve status Brake fluid pressure detected by pressure sensor ON/OFF status of brake fluid level switch Signal status Fail signal status Condition Reference value in normal operation Brake pedal depressed ON Brake pedal not depressed OFF ABS warning lamp ON ON ABS warning lamp OFF OFF Ignition switch ON or running (ABS not activated) OFF Ignition switch ON or engine running (ABS activated) ON Vehicle stopped (Ignition switch ON) OFF Vehicle stopped (Engine running) ON When SLIP indicator lamp is ON ON When SLIP indicator lamp is OFF OFF Actuator (solenoid) is active (“ACTIVE TEST” with CONSULT-II) or actuator relay is inactive (in fail-safe mode). ON When actuator (solenoid) is not active and actuator relay is active (ignition switch ON). OFF Note: Error inspection checklist BRC-76, "Stop Lamp Switch System Inspection" — BRC-75, "Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection" BRC-75, "Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection" BRC-81, "CAN Communication System Inspection" BRC-74, "Solenoid and Change-Over Valve System Inspection" When actuator (switch-over valve) is active (“ACTIVE TEST” with CONSULT-II) or actuator relay is inactive (when in fail-safe mode). ON When actuator (switch-over valve) is not active and actuator relay is active (ignition switch ON). OFF Do not step on the Brake pedal (When ignition switch is ON) Approx. 0 bar Step on the Brake pedal (When ignition switch is ON) -40 to 300 bar When brake fluid level switch ON ON When brake fluid level switch OFF OFF ABS active EBD active ON ABS not active EBD not active OFF ABS fail EBD fail ON ABS normal EBD normal OFF — DI-30, "WARNING LAMPS" ABS system EBD system ABS system EBD system Note 1: Confirm tire pressure is normal. Note 2: ON/OFF timing of ABS warning lamp ON: For approximately 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON, or when a malfunction is detected. Revision: October 2004 BRC-62 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABLS/ABS] OFF: Approximately 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON (when system is in normal operation) and ABLS/ABS function is not activated. Note 3: SLIP indicator lamp ON/OFF timing ON: For approximately 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON, or when ABLS function is activated while driving. OFF: Approximately 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON (when system is in normal operation) and ABLS function is not activated. A B C D E BRC G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 BRC-63 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABLS/ABS] CONSULT-II Function (ABS) EFS004QY CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. ABS diagnostic mode WORK SUPPORT SELF-DIAG RESULTS DATA MONITOR Description Supports inspection and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and received data is displayed. Displays ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis results. Displays ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) input/output data in real time. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. ACTIVE TEST Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. FUNCTION TEST ECU PART NUMBER Conducted by CONSULT-II instead of a technician to determine whether each system is "OK" or "NG". ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) part number can be read. CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0369E 4. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. BCIA0029E 5. Touch “ABS” in the “SELECT SYSTEM” screen. If “ABS” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . BCIA0030E Revision: October 2004 BRC-64 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABLS/ABS] 6. Select the required diagnostic location from the “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen. For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation Manual. A B C BCIA0031E D SELF-DIAGNOSIS Description If an error is detected in the system, the ABS warning lamp will turn on. In this case, perform self-diagnosis as follows: E Operation Procedure 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. BRC Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be G detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. Start engine and drive at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute. After stopping the vehicle, with the engine running, touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”, “ABS”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” in order on the CONSULT-II screen. CAUTION: If “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)” is touched immediately after starting the engine or turning on the ignition switch, “ABS” might not be displayed in the SELECT SYSTEM screen. In this case, repeat the operation from step 1. 6. The self-diagnostic results are displayed. (If necessary, the self-diagnostic results can be printed out by touching “PRINT”.) ● When “NO DTC IS DETECTED” is displayed, check the ABS warning lamp. 7. Conduct the appropriate inspection from the display item list, and repair or replace the malfunctioning component. 8. Start engine and drive at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute. CAUTION: ● When a wheel sensor “short-circuit” is detected, if the vehicle is not driven at 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least 1 minute, the ABS warning lamp will not turn off even if the malfunction is repaired. 9. Turn ignition switch OFF to prepare for erasing the memory. 10. Start the engine and touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”, “ABS”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”, “ERASE” in order on the CONSULT-II screen to erase the error memory. If “ABS” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . CAUTION: If the error memory is not erased, re-conduct the operation from step 5. 11. For the final inspection, drive at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute and confirm that the ABS warning lamp is off. Revision: October 2004 BRC-65 2005 Titan H I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABLS/ABS] Display Item List Self-diagnostic item Malfunction detecting condition Check system FR LH SENSOR 1 [C1104] Circuit of front LH wheel sensor is open, shorted or sensor power voltage is unusual. RR RH SENSOR 1 [C1101] Circuit of rear RH wheel sensor is open, shorted or sensor power voltage is unusual. FR RH SENSOR 1 [C1103] Circuit of front RH wheel sensor is open, shorted or sensor power voltage is unusual. RR LH SENSOR 1 [C1102] Circuit of rear LH wheel sensor is open, shorted or sensor power voltage is unusual. FR LH SENSOR 2 [C1108] ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor. RR RH SENSOR 2 [C1105] ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor. FR RH SENSOR 2 [C1107] ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor. RR LH SENSOR 2 [C1106] ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor. STOP LAMP SW [C1116] Stop lamp switch or circuit malfunction. BRC-76, "Stop Lamp Switch System Inspection" DECEL G SEN SET [C1160] ABS decel sensor adjustment is incomplete. BRC-74, "ABS/ABLS Control Unit Inspection" FR LH IN ABS SOL [C1120] Circuit of front LH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. FR LH OUT ABS SOL [C1121] Circuit of front LH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. RR RH IN ABS SOL [C1126] Circuit of rear RH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. RR RH OUT ABS SOL [C1127] Circuit of rear RH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. FR RH IN ABS SOL [C1122] Circuit of front RH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. FR RH OUT ABS SOL [C1123] Circuit of front RH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. RR LH IN ABS SOL [C1124] Circuit of rear LH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. RR LH OUT ABS SOL [C1125] Circuit of rear LH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. CV1 [C1164] Front side switch-over solenoid valve (cut valve) is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. CV2 [C1165] Rear side switch-over solenoid valve (cut valve) is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. SV1 [C1166] Front side switch-over solenoid valve (suction valve) is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. SV2 [C1167] Rear side switch-over solenoid valve (suction valve) is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. Revision: October 2004 BRC-66 BRC-72, "Wheel Sensor System Inspection" (Note 1) BRC-74, "Solenoid and Change-Over Valve System Inspection" 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABLS/ABS] Self-diagnostic item PUMP MOTOR (Note 3) [C1111] Malfunction detecting condition During actuator motor operation with ON, when actuator motor turns OFF or when control line for actuator motor relay is open. During actuator motor operation with OFF, when actuator motor turns ON or when control line for relay is shorted to ground. BATTERY VOLTAGE [ABNORMAL] [C1109] ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power voltage is too low. G-SENSOR [C1113] G-sensor is malfunctioning. CONTROLLER FAILURE [C1110] Internal malfunction of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] ● CAN communication line is open or shorted. ● ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) internal malfunction ● Battery voltage for ECM is suddenly interrupted for approximately 0.5 second or more. BR FLUID LEVEL LOW [C1155] Brake fluid level drops or circuit between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and brake fluid level switch is open or shorted. ENGIN SIGNAL 1 [C1130] Based on the signal from ECM, ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) judges that engine fuel cut system is malfunctioning. ENGIN SIGNAL 2 [C1131] Based on the signal from ECM, ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) judges that engine fuel cut system is malfunctioning. ENGIN SIGNAL 6 [C1136] Based on the signal from ECM, ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) judges that engine fuel cut system is malfunctioning. Check system A BRC-75, "Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection" BRC-77, "ABS/ABLS Control Unit Power and Ground Systems Inspection" BRC-74, "ABS/ABLS Control Unit Inspection" D E BRC-81, "CAN Communication System Inspection" (Note 2) BRC-78, "Brake Fluid Level Switch System Inspection" BRC G H BRC-73, "Engine System Inspection" I J ABS actuator relay or circuit malfunction. BRC-75, "Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection" PRESS SEN CIRCUIT [C1142] ABS pressure sensor circuit malfunction. BRC-78, "Pressure Sensor System Inspection" ABS VARIANT CODING [C1170] V coding is not malfunctioning. BRC-74, "ABS/ABLS Control Unit Inspection" L BRC-81, "CAN Communication System Inspection" M Note 1: If wheel sensor 2 for each wheel is indicated, check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power supply voltage in addition to wheel sensor circuit check. Note 2: If multiple malfunctions are detected including CAN communication line [U1000], perform diagnosis for CAN communication line first. DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 2. C ACTUATOR RLY [C1140] ABS DIFLOCK CONTROLLER NG [C1187] 1. B After turning OFF the ignition switch, connect CONSULT-II and the CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”, “ABS”, “DATA MONITOR” in order on the CONSULT-II screen. If “ABS” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . Revision: October 2004 BRC-67 2005 Titan K TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABLS/ABS] 3. 4. CAUTION: When “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)” is touched immediately after starting the engine or turning on the ignition switch, “ABS” might not be displayed in the SELECT SYSTEM screen. In this case, repeat the operation from step 2. Return to the SELECT MONITOR ITEM screen, and touch “ECU INPUT SIGNALS”, “MAIN SIGNALS”, or “SELECTION FROM MENU”. Refer to the following information. When “START” is touched, the data monitor screen is displayed. Display Item List Data monitor item selection Item (Unit) Remarks ECU INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU GEAR × × × Gear position judged by PNP switch signal is displayed. FR RH SENSOR (km/h, MPH) × × × Wheel speed calculated by front RH wheel sensor signal is displayed. FR LH SENSOR (km/h, MPH) × × × Wheel speed calculated by front LH wheel sensor signal is displayed. RR RH SENSOR (km/h, MPH) × × × Wheel speed calculated by rear RH wheel sensor signal is displayed. RR LH SENSOR (km/h, MPH) × × × Wheel speed calculated by rear LH wheel sensor signal is displayed. BATTERY VOLT (V) × × × Voltage supplied to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is displayed. N POSI SIG – – × Shift position judged by PNP switch signal. P POSI SIG – – × Shift position judged by PNP switch signal. ACCEL POS SIG (%) × – × Throttle valve open/close status judged by CAN communication signal is displayed. ENGINE SPEED (rpm) × × × Engine speed judged by CAN communication signal is displayed. STOP LAMP SW (ON/OFF) × × × Stop lamp switch (ON/OFF) status is displayed. ABS WARN LAMP (ON/OFF) – × × ABS warning lamp (ON/OFF) status is displayed. SLIP LAMP (ON/OFF) – × × SLIP indicator lamp (ON/OFF) status is displayed. FR LH IN SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Front LH IN ABS solenoid (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. FR LH OUT SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Front LH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. RR RH IN SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Rear RH IN ABS solenoid (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. RR RH OUT SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Rear RH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. FR RH IN SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Front RH IN ABS solenoid (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. FR RH OUT SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Front RH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. RR LH IN SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Rear LH IN ABS solenoid (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. Revision: October 2004 BRC-68 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABLS/ABS] Item (Unit) Data monitor item selection A Remarks ECU INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU RR LH OUT SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Rear LH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. MOTOR RELAY (ON/OFF) – × × ABS motor relay signal (ON/OFF) status is displayed. ACTUATOR RLY (ON/OFF) – × × ABS actuator relay signal (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. CV1 (ON/OFF) – – × Front side switch-over solenoid valve (cut valve) (ON/OFF) status is displayed. D CV2 (ON/OFF) – – × Rear side switch-over solenoid valve (cut-valve) (ON/OFF) status is displayed. E SV1 (ON/OFF) – – × Front side switch-over solenoid valve (suction valve) (ON/OFF) status is displayed. SV2 (ON/OFF) – – × Rear side switch-over solenoid valve (suction valve) (ON/OFF) status is displayed. TCS FAIL SIG (ON/OFF) – – × TCS fail signal (ON/OFF) status is displayed. ABS FAIL SIG (ON/OFF) – – × ABS fail signal (ON/OFF) status is displayed. EBD FAIL SIG (ON/OFF) – – × EBD fail signal (ON/OFF) status is displayed. FLUID LEV SW (ON/OFF) × – × Brake fluid level switch (ON/OFF) status is displayed. EBD SIGNAL (ON/OFF) – – × EBD operation (ON/OFF) status is displayed. ABS SIGNAL (ON/OFF) – – × ABS operation (ON/OFF) status is displayed. TCS SIGNAL (ON/OFF) – – × TCS operation (ON/OFF) status is displayed. EBD WARN LAMP – – × Brake warning lamp (ON/OFF) status is displayed. SLCT LVR POSI × × × Shift position judged by PNP switch signal. R POSI SIG – – × Shift position judged by PNP switch signal. 2WD/4WD – – × It recognizes on software whether it is 2WD and whether it is in 4WD state. PRESS SENSOR × – × Brake pressure detected by pressure sensor is displayed. CRANKING SIG – – × The input state of the key SW START position signal is displayed. PRESS SEN 2 – – × Brake pressure detected by pressure sensor is displayed. ×: Applicable –: Not applicable ACTIVE TEST CAUTION: ● Do not perform active test while driving. Revision: October 2004 BRC-69 2005 Titan B C BRC G H I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABLS/ABS] ● ● Make sure to completely bleed air from the brake system. The ABS and brake warning lamps turn on during the active test. Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Connect the CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector and start the engine. CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)” on the display screen. Touch “ABS”. If “ABS” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . Touch “ACTIVE TEST”. The SELECT TEST ITEM screen is displayed. Touch necessary test item. LBR379 7. 8. With the “MAIN SIGNALS” display selected, touch “START”. The Active Test screen will be displayed, so conduct the following test. Solenoid Valve Operation Chart ABS solenoid valve ABS solenoid valve (ACT) Operation UP KEEP DOWN UP ACTUATOR UP ACTUATOR KEEP FR RH SOL FR RH ABS SOLENOID (ACT) FR RH IN SOL OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF FR RH OUT SOL OFF OFF ON* OFF OFF OFF FR LH SOL FR LH ABS SOLENOID (ACT) FR LH IN SOL OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF FR LH OUT SOL OFF OFF ON* OFF OFF OFF RR RH SOL RR RH ABS SOLENOID (ACT) RR RH IN SOL OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF RR RH OUT SOL OFF OFF ON* OFF OFF OFF RR LH SOL RR LH ABS SOLENOID (ACT) RR LH IN SOL OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF RR LH OUT SOL OFF OFF ON* OFF OFF OFF RR RH IN SOL OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF RR RH OUT SOL OFF OFF ON* OFF OFF OFF RR LH IN SOL OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF RR LH OUT SOL OFF OFF ON* OFF OFF OFF REAR SOL *: ON for 1 to 2 seconds after the touch, and then OFF NOTE: ● If active test is performed with brake pedal depressed, pedal stroke may change. This is normal. ● “TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed approximately 10 seconds after operation starts. ● After “TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed, to perform test again, repeat Step 6. Revision: October 2004 BRC-70 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [ABLS/ABS] ABS Motor A Touch “ON” and “OFF” on the screen. Check that ABS motor relay operates as shown in table below. Operation ON OFF ABS actuator relay ON ON ABS motor relay ON OFF NOTE: ● If active test is performed with brake pedal depressed, pedal stroke may change. This is normal. ● “TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed approximately 10 seconds after operation starts. B C SFIA0593E D E BRC G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 BRC-71 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [ABLS/ABS] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS Wheel Sensor System Inspection PFP:00000 EFS004QZ INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. CONNECTOR INSPECTION Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and wheel sensor of malfunctioning code. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. 2. CHECK WHEEL SENSOR OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. Connect ABS active wheel sensor tester (J-45741) to wheel sensor using appropriate adapter. Turn on the ABS active wheel sensor tester power switch. NOTE: The green POWER indicator should illuminate. If the POWER indicator does not illuminate, replace the battery in the ABS active wheel sensor tester before proceeding. 3. Spin the wheel of the vehicle by hand and observe the red SENSOR indicator on the ABS active wheel sensor tester. The red SENSOR indicator should flash on and off to indicate an output signal. NOTE: If the red SENSOR indicator illuminates but does not flash, reverse the polarity of the tester leads and retest. Does the ABS active wheel sensor tester detect a signal? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Replace the wheel sensor. Refer to BRC-86, "Removal and Installation" . 3. CHECK TIRES Check for inflation pressure, wear and size of each tire. Are tire pressure and size correct and is tire wear within specifications? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Adjust tire pressure or replace tire(s). 4. CHECK WHEEL BEARINGS Check wheel bearing axial end play. Refer to FAX-5, "WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION" or RAX-5, "WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. Refer to FAX-5, "Removal and Installation" or RAX-6, "Removal and Installation" . 5. CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and wheel sensor connector of malfunction code No. Check resistance between wheel sensor harness connector terminals and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair the circuit. WFIA0343E Revision: October 2004 BRC-72 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [ABLS/ABS] 6. CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT A Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 and the malfunctioning wheel sensor harness connector E18, E117, C10, or C11. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Wheel sensor Connector - terminal Front LH Front RH Rear LH Rear RH B Wheel sensor Wire color Connector - terminal Continuity Wire color E125 - 45 G/O E18 - 1 G/O E125 - 46 BR/W E18 - 2 BR/W E125 - 34 B/R E117 - 1 B/R E125 - 33 BR E117 - 2 BR E125 - 37 P C11 - 2 P E125 - 36 L C11 - 1 L E125 - 42 V C10 - 2 V E125 - 43 G/Y C10 - 1 G/Y C D Yes E BRC Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-88, "Removal and Installation" . NG >> Repair the circuit. Engine System Inspection G H EFS004R0 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK I Check self-diagnosis results. J Self-diagnosis results ENGINE SIGNAL 1 ENGINE SIGNAL 2 K ENGINE SIGNAL 6 Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. L 2. ENGINE SYSTEM INSPECTION M 1. Perform ECM self-diagnosis and repair as necessary. 2. Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. Revision: October 2004 BRC-73 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [ABLS/ABS] ABS/ABLS Control Unit Inspection EFS004R1 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK Check self-diagnosis results. Self-diagnosis results CONTROLLER FAILURE DECEL G SEN SET G-SENSOR Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-88, "Removal and Installation" . NO >> Inspection End. Solenoid and Change-Over Valve System Inspection EFS004R2 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK Check self-diagnosis results. Self-diagnosis results FR LH IN ABS SOL FR LH OUT ABS SOL RR RH IN ABS SOL RR RH OUT ABS SOL FR RH IN ABS SOL FR RH OUT ABS SOL RR LH IN ABS SOL RR LH OUT ABS SOL CV 1 CV 2 SV 1 SV 2 Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. 2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION 1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. 2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. Revision: October 2004 BRC-74 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [ABLS/ABS] 3. 1. CHECKING SOLENOID POWER AND GROUND A Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 and body ground. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 32 (B/Y) Body ground — B Measured value (Approx.) 12V C D WFIA0195E 2. Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 and body ground. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 16 (B) 47 (B) Body ground — — E Measured value Ω (Approx.) 0Ω 0Ω OK or NG OK >> Perform self-diagnosis again. If the same results appear, replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-88, "Removal and Installation" . NG >> Repair the circuit. Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection BRC G WFIA0196E H I EFS004R3 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. CHECKING SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS J Check self-diagnosis results. K Self-diagnosis results PUMP MOTOR L ACTUATOR RLY Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. M 2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION 1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. 2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. Revision: October 2004 BRC-75 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [ABLS/ABS] 3. 1. CHECKING ABS MOTOR AND MOTOR RELAY POWER SYSTEM Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 and body ground. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 1 (Y) Measured value (Approx.) 12V Body ground — WFIA0209E 2. Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and body ground. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 16 (B) 47 (B) Measured value Ω (Approx.) 0Ω 0Ω Body ground — — OK or NG OK >> Perform self-diagnosis again. If the same results appear, replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-88, "Removal and Installation" . NG >> Repair the circuit. Stop Lamp Switch System Inspection WFIA0196E EFS004R4 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK Check self-diagnosis results. Self-diagnosis results STOP LAMP SW Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. 2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION 1. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and stop lamp switch connector E38. 2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. Revision: October 2004 BRC-76 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [ABLS/ABS] 3. STOP LAMP SWITCH INSPECTION A Check the voltage between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminal 41 (V) and body ground. B Brake pedal depressed : Battery voltage (approx. 12V) Brake pedal not depressed : Approx. 0V C OK or NG OK >> Perform self-diagnosis again. If the same results appear, replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-88, "Removal and Installation" . NG >> Refer to LT-98, "STOP LAMP" . D WFIA0198E ABS/ABLS Control Unit Power and Ground Systems Inspection EFS004R5 E INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK BRC Check self-diagnosis results. Self-diagnosis results G BATTERY VOLTAGE Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. H 2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION I 1. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. 2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. J K 3. ABS/ABLS CONTROL UNIT POWER AND GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION Measure the voltage and continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 and body ground. Signal name ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 Power supply Ground 1 (Y) 32 (B/Y) 16 (B) 47 (B) Body ground Measured value — Battery voltage (Approx. 12V) — Continuity should exist. M OK or NG OK >> Check the battery for loose terminals, low voltage, etc. Repair as necessary. NG >> Repair the circuit. Revision: October 2004 BRC-77 L 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [ABLS/ABS] Brake Fluid Level Switch System Inspection EFS004R6 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK 1. 2. Check the brake reservoir tank fluid level. If the level is low, add brake fluid. Erase the self-diagnosis results and check the self-diagnosis results. Self-diagnosis results BR FLUID LEVEL LOW Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. 2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION 1. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and brake fluid level switch connector E21. 2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. 3. CHECK THE HARNESS BETWEEN THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH AND THE ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) Check the continuity between the brake fluid level switch harness connector E21 and the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 Brake fluid level switch harness connector E21 Continuity 8 (P/B) 1 (P/B) Yes 8 (P/B) Ground No Ground 2 (B) Yes OK or NG OK >> Perform self-diagnosis again. If the same results appear, replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-88, "Removal and Installation" . NG >> Repair the circuit. Pressure Sensor System Inspection EFS004R7 FRONT PRESSURE INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. DISPLAY SELF DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Check self-diagnosis results. Self-diagnosis results PRESS SEN CIRCUIT Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES or NO YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. Revision: October 2004 BRC-78 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [ABLS/ABS] 2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION A 1. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front pressure sensor connector E31 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and inspect the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness, or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair connector. B C 3. FRONT PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. Measure the continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 and front pressure sensor harness connector E31. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 Front pressure sensor harness connector E31 18 (R/W) 3 (R/W) 19 (R) 1 (R) 20 (R/L) 2 (R/L) E Continuity BRC Yes G Measure the continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 and body ground. H ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 Body ground Continuity I 18 (R/W) 19 (R) — No J 20 (R/L) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connector. K 4. FRONT PRESSURE SENSOR INSPECTION 1. 2. D L Reconnect the front pressure sensor and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connectors. Use "DATA MONITOR" to check if the status of "PRESS SENSOR" is normal. Condition When brake pedal is depressed When brake pedal is released M Data monitor display (Approx.) PRESS SENSOR Positive value 0 bar OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace front pressure sensor. Refer to BR-17, "REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" . Revision: October 2004 BRC-79 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [ABLS/ABS] REAR PRESSURE INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. DISPLAY SELF DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Check self-diagnosis results. Self-diagnosis results PRESS SEN CIRCUIT Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES or NO YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. 2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION 1. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the rear pressure sensor connector E32 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and inspect the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness, or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair connector. 3. REAR PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. Measure the continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and rear pressure sensor connector E32. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 Rear pressure sensor connector E32 21 (R/B) 1 (R/B) 22 (W/L) 3 (W/L) 23 (W/O) 2 (W/O) Continuity Yes Measure the continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and body ground. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 Body ground Continuity — No 21 (R/B) 22 (W/L) 23 (W/O) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connector. Revision: October 2004 BRC-80 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [ABLS/ABS] 4. REAR PRESSURE SENSOR INSPECTION 1. 2. A Reconnect the rear pressure sensor and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connectors. Use "DATA MONITOR" to check if the status of "PRESS SEN 2" is normal. Condition When brake pedal is depressed When brake pedal is released B Data monitor display (Approx.) PRESS SEN 2 Positive value 0 bar C OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace rear pressure sensor. Refer to BR-17, "REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" . CAN Communication System Inspection D EFS004R8 E INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. CHECK CONNECTOR BRC 1. Turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness, and so on. If there is a malfunction, repair or replace the terminal. 2. Reconnect connector to perform self-diagnosis. Is "CAN COMM CIRCUIT" displayed in self-diagnosis display items? YES >> Print out the self-diagnostic results, and refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . NO >> Connector terminal is loose, damaged, open, or shorted. G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 BRC-81 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [ABLS/ABS] TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS ABS Works Frequently PFP:99999 EFS005FL 1. CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION Make sure warning lamp remains off while driving. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-65, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" . 2. CHECK WHEEL SENSORS Check the following. ● Wheel sensor mounting for looseness ● Wheel sensors for physical damage ● Wheel sensor connectors for terminal damage or loose connections ● Sensor rotor and mount for physical damage (rear only) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. 3. CHECK FRONT AND REAR AXLES Check front and rear axles for excessive looseness. Refer to FAX-5, "WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION" or RAX-5, "WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair as necessary. 4. CHECK BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE Check brake fluid pressure distribution. Refer to BRC-60, "Basic Inspection" . Is brake fluid pressure distribution normal? YES >> Inspection End. NO >> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-60, "Basic Inspection" . Revision: October 2004 BRC-82 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [ABLS/ABS] Unexpected Pedal Action EFS005FM A 1. CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION B Make sure warning lamp remains off while driving. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-65, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" . C 2. CHECK BRAKE PEDAL STROKE D Check brake pedal stroke. Is pedal stroke excessive? YES >> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-60, "Basic Inspection" . NO >> GO TO 3. E BRC G SBR540A 3. CHECK CONNECTOR AND BRAKING PERFORMANCE H 1. 2. Disable ABS by disconnecting ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Drive vehicle and check brake operation. NOTE: ● Stopping distance may be longer than vehicles without ABS when road condition is slippery. ● Driving the vehicle with the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) disconnected may induce DTCs in electrical control units using CAN communication. After the inspection, clear all DTCs. Refer to LAN7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-60, "Basic Inspection" . 4. CHECK WHEEL SENSORS J K L Check the following. ● Wheel sensor mounting for looseness ● Wheel sensors for physical damage ● Wheel sensor connectors for terminal damage or loose connections OK or NG OK >> Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. Reconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector. Then retest. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. Revision: October 2004 I BRC-83 2005 Titan M TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [ABLS/ABS] Long Stopping Distance EFS005FN 1. CHECK BASE BRAKING SYSTEM PERFORMANCE 1. 2. Disable ABS by disconnecting ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Drive vehicle and check brake operation. NOTE: ● Stopping distance may be longer than vehicles without ABS when road condition is slippery. ● Driving the vehicle with the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) disconnected may induce DTCs in electrical control units using CAN communication. After the inspection, clear all DTCs. Refer to LAN7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . OK or NG OK >> Go to BRC-82, "ABS Works Frequently" . NG >> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-60, "Basic Inspection" . ABS Does Not Work EFS005FO CAUTION: The ABS does not operate when the vehicle speed is 10 km/h (6 MPH) or less. 1. CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION Turn ignition switch ON and check for warning lamp activation. Warning lamp should activate for approximately 2 seconds after turning the ignition switch ON. OK or NG OK >> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-65, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" . NG >> Go to BRC-85, "ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On" . ● Pedal Vibration or ABS Operation Noise EFS005FP NOTE: During ABS activation, pedal vibration may be felt and a noise may be heard. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. 1. CHECK SYMPTOM 1. Apply brake. 2. Start engine. Does the symptom occur only when engine is started? YES >> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-65, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" . NO >> GO TO 2. 2. RECHECK SYMPTOM Does the symptom occur only when electrical equipment switches (such as headlamps) are turned on? YES NO >> Check for radio, antenna or related wiring that is routed too close to the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and reroute as necessary. >> Go to BRC-82, "ABS Works Frequently" . Revision: October 2004 BRC-84 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [ABLS/ABS] ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On EFS005FQ A 1. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) FUSES Check 30A fusible link h and 40A fusible link i for ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). For fusible link layout, refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fusible link is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before replacing. 2. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS B C D 1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. 2. Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector terminal 1 (Y) and ground and terminal 32 (B/Y) and ground. Does battery voltage exist? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair harness or connectors between fusible link and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). E BRC G WFIA0199E H 3. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector terminal 16 (B) and ground and terminal 47 (B) and ground. Does continuity exist? YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-88, "Removal and Installation" . NO >> Repair harness or connectors between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ground. I J K WFIA0196E ABS Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On L EFS005FR 1. CARRY OUT SELF-DIAGNOSIS M Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-65, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" . Are malfunctions detected in self-diagnosis? YES >> Refer to BRC-66, "Display Item List" . NO >> Refer to DI-30, "WARNING LAMPS" . Revision: October 2004 BRC-85 2005 Titan WHEEL SENSORS [ABLS/ABS] WHEEL SENSORS Removal and Installation PFP:47910 EFS004RG WFIA0374E REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove wheel sensor mounting screw. ● When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel sensor mounting bolt. Refer to BR-24, "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor" . Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. CAUTION: ● Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. ● Do not pull on the sensor harness. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts. INSTALLATION Before installing wheel sensors, ● Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged. ● Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle. ● Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 BRC-86 2005 Titan SENSOR ROTOR [ABLS/ABS] SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation PFP:47970 A EFS004RH FRONT The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly. Refer to FAX-5, "Removal and Installation" . REAR Removal 1. 2. C Remove axle shaft assembly. Refer to RAX-6, "Removal and Installation" . NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor. Pull the sensor rotor of off the axle shaft using Tool and a press. Tool number B : 205-D002 ( D — ) E Installation 1. 2. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure sensor rotor is fully seated. BRC CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor. Install axle shaft assembly. Refer to RAX-6, "Removal and Installation" . G CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 BRC-87 2005 Titan ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) [ABLS/ABS] ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation PFP:47660 EFS004RI WFIA0375E 1. To rear left 2. To rear right 4. To front right 5. From the master cylinder secondary side 6. From the master cylinder primary side 3. To front left 7. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) 8. Harness connector REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to EI-21, "Removal and Installation" . Drain the brake fluid. Refer to BR-10, "Drain and Refill" . Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: ● To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. ● Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas. Disconnect the brake tubes. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Revision: October 2004 BRC-88 2005 Titan ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) [ABLS/ABS] INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). ● Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Refer to BR-12, "BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE" . ● Never reuse drained brake fluid. ● After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System" . A B C D E BRC G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 BRC-89 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS [VDC/TCS/ABS] PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EFS004RJ The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precautions for Brake System EFS004RK CAUTION: ● Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" for recommended brake fluid. ● Never reuse drained brake fluid. ● Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately. ● To clean or wash all parts of master cylinder and disc brake caliper, use clean brake fluid. ● Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. They will ruin rubber parts of the hydraulic system. ● Use flare nut wrench when removing and installing brake tube. ● If a brake fluid leak is found, the part must be disassembled without fail. Then it has to be replaced with a new one if a defect exists. ● Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the connector of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) or the battery terminal before performing the work. ● Always torque brake lines when installing. ● Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or SBR686C replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-27, "BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE" (front disc brake) or BR-32, "BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE" (rear disc brake). WARNING: ● Clean brake pads and shoes with a waste cloth, then wipe with a dust collector. Precautions When Using CONSULT-II EFS004RL When connecting CONSULT-II to data link connector, connect them through CONSULT-II CONVERTER. CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. CHECK POINTS FOR USING CONSULT-II 1. Has CONSULT-II been used without connecting CONSULT-II CONVERTER on this vehicle? ● If YES, GO TO 2. ● If NO, GO TO 5. Revision: October 2004 BRC-90 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS [VDC/TCS/ABS] 2. 3. 4. 5. Is there any indication other than indications relating to CAN communication system in the self-diagnosis results? ● If YES, GO TO 3. ● If NO, GO TO 4. Based on self-diagnosis results unrelated to CAN communication, carry out the inspection. Malfunctions may be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control units carrying out CAN communication. Therefor, erase the self-diagnosis results. Diagnose CAN communication system. Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Precautions for Brake Control ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● B C EFS004RM During ABS operation, the brake pedal may vibrate lightly and a mechanical noise may be heard. This is D normal. Just after starting vehicle, the brake pedal may vibrate or a motor operating noise may be heard from engine compartment. This is a normal status of operation check. E Stopping distance may be longer than that of vehicles without ABS when vehicle drives on rough, gravel, or snow-covered (fresh, deep snow) roads. When an error is indicated by ABS or another warning lamp, collect all necessary information from cus- BRC tomer (what symptoms are present under what conditions) and check for simple causes before starting diagnosis. Besides electrical system inspection, check brake booster operation, brake fluid level, and fluid leaks. G If incorrect tire sizes or types are installed on the vehicle or brake pads are not Genuine NISSAN parts, stopping distance or steering stability may deteriorate. If there is a radio, antenna or related wiring near control module, ABS function may have a malfunction or H error. If aftermarket parts (car stereo, CD player, etc.) have been installed, check for incidents such as harness pinches, open circuits or improper wiring. I If the following components are replaced with non-genuine components or modified, the VDC OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp may turn on or the VDC system may not operate properly. Components related to suspension (shock absorbers, struts, springs, bushings, etc.), tires, wheels (exclude specified size), components related to brake system (pads, rotors, calipers, etc.), components related to engine J (muffler, ECM, etc.), components related to body reinforcement (roll bar, tower bar, etc.). Driving with broken or excessively worn suspension components, tires or brake system components may cause the VDC OFF indicator lamp and the SLIP indicator lamp to turn on, and the VDC system may not K operate properly. When the TCS or VDC is activated by sudden acceleration or sudden turn, some noise may occur. The noise is a result of the normal operation of the TCS and VDC. L When driving on roads which have extreme slopes (such as mountainous roads) or high banks (such as sharp curves on a freeway), the VDC may not operate normally, or the VDC warning lamp and the SLIP indicator lamp may turn on. This is not a problem if normal operation can be resumed after restarting the M engine. Sudden turns (such as spin turns, acceleration turns), drifting, etc. with VDC turned off may cause the yaw rate/side G sensor to indicate a problem. This is not a problem if normal operation can be resumed after restarting the engine. Precautions for CAN System ● A EFS004RN Do not apply voltage of 7.0V or higher to terminal to be measured. Maximum open terminal voltage of tester in use must be less than 7.0V. Before checking harnesses, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery negative cable. Revision: October 2004 BRC-91 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS [VDC/TCS/ABS] ● Area to be repaired must be soldered and wrapped with tape. Make sure that fraying of twisted wire is within 110 mm (4.33 in). PKIA0306E ● Do not make a bypass connection to repaired area. (If the circuit is bypassed, characteristics of twisted wire will be lost.) PKIA0307E Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis EFS004RO When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams". ● PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT". When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-11, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES". ● GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident". Revision: October 2004 BRC-92 2005 Titan PREPARATION [VDC/TCS/ABS] PREPARATION Special Service Tool PFP:00002 A EFS004RP The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description B (J-45741) ABS active wheel sensor tester Checking operation of ABS active wheel sensors C D WFIA0101E 205-D002 ( — ) Bearing splitter E Removing axle shaft bearing BRC G ZZA0700D Commercial Service Tools EFS004RQ H Tool name Description 1. Flare nut crowfoot 2. Torque wrench Removing and installing brake piping a: 10mm (0.39 in)/12mm (0.47 in) I J S-NT360 K L M Revision: October 2004 BRC-93 2005 Titan SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [VDC/TCS/ABS] SYSTEM DESCRIPTION System Components PFP:00000 EFS004RR WFIA0292E Revision: October 2004 BRC-94 2005 Titan SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [VDC/TCS/ABS] ABS Function ● ● ● ● ● ● EFS004RS The Anti-Lock Brake System detects wheel revolution while braking and improves handling stability during sudden braking by electrically preventing wheel lockup. Maneuverability is also improved for avoiding obstacles. If the electrical system malfunctions, the Fail-Safe function is activated, the ABS becomes inoperative and the ABS warning lamp turns on. The electrical system can be diagnosed using CONSULT-II. During ABS operation, the brake pedal may vibrate lightly and a mechanical noise may be heard. This is normal. Just after starting the vehicle, the brake pedal may vibrate or a motor operating noise may be heard from engine compartment. This is a normal status of operation check. Stopping distance may be longer than that of vehicles without ABS when vehicle drives on rough, gravel, or snow-covered (fresh, deep snow) roads. ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● D Electronic Brake Distribution is a function that detects subtle slippages between the front and rear wheels during braking, and it improves handling stability by electronically controlling the brake fluid pressure BRC which results in reduced rear wheel slippage. If the electrical system malfunctions, the Fail-Safe function is activated, the EBD and ABS become inoperative, and the ABS warning lamp and BRAKE warning lamp are turned on. G The electrical system can be diagnosed using CONSULT-II. During EBD operation, the brake pedal may vibrate lightly and a mechanical noise may be heard. This is normal. H Just after starting the vehicle, the brake pedal may vibrate or a motor operating noise may be heard from engine compartment. This is a normal status of operation check. EFS004RU Spinning of the drive wheels is detected by the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) using inputs from the wheel speed sensors. If wheel spin occurs, the drive wheel right and left brake fluid pressure control and engine fuel cut are activated while the throttle value is restricted to reduce the engine torque and decrease the amount of wheel spin. In addition, the throttle opening is controlled to achieve the optimum engine torque. Depending on road condition, the vehicle may have a sluggish feel. This is normal, because optimum traction has the highest priority during TCS operation. TCS may be activated during sudden vehicle acceleration, wide open throttle acceleration, sudden transmission shifts or when the vehicle is driven on a road with a varying surface friction coefficient. The SLIP indicator lamp flashes to inform the driver of TCS operation. VDC Function ● C EFS004RT TCS Function ● B E EBD Function ● A EFS004RV In addition to the ABS/TCS function, the driver steering amount and brake operation amount are detected from the steering angle sensor and pressure sensors, and the vehicle's driving status (amount of under steering/over steering) is determined using inputs from the yaw rate sensor/side G sensor, wheel speed sensors, etc. and this information is used to improve vehicle stability by controlling the braking and engine torque application to the wheels. The SLIP indicator lamp flashes to inform the driver of VDC operation. During VDC operation, the vehicle body and brake pedal may vibrate lightly and a mechanical noise may be heard. This is normal. The ABS warning lamp, VDC OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp may turn on when the vehicle is subject to strong shaking or large vibration, such as when the vehicle is on a turn table or a ship while the engine is running or on a steep slope. In this case, restart the engine on a normal road and if the ABS warning lamp, VDC OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp turn off, there is no problem. Fail-Safe Function EFS004RW CAUTION: If the Fail-Safe function is activated, perform the Self Diagnosis for ABS/TCS/VDC system. Revision: October 2004 BRC-95 2005 Titan I J K L M SYSTEM DESCRIPTION [VDC/TCS/ABS] ABS/EBD SYSTEM In case of an electrical malfunction with the ABS, the ABS warning lamp, VDC OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp will turn on. In case of an electrical malfunction with the EBD system, the BRAKE warning lamp, ABS warning lamp, VDC OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp will turn on. The system will revert to one of the following conditions of the Fail-Safe function. 1. For ABS malfunction, only the EBD is operative and the condition of the vehicle is the same condition of vehicles without ABS/TCS/VDC system. 2. For EBD malfunction, the EBD and ABS become inoperative, and the condition of the vehicle is the same as the condition of vehicles without ABS/TCS/VDC or EBD system. VDC/TCS SYSTEM In case of TCS/VDC system malfunction, the VDC OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp are turned on and the condition of the vehicle is the same as the condition of vehicles without TCS/VDC system. In case of an electrical malfunction with the TCS/VDC system, the ABS control continues to operate normally without TCS/VDC control. ACTIVE BOOSTER The active brake booster consists of vacuum booster, an active booster control group and a delta stroke sensor. In case of brake booster system malfunction due to loss of vacuum the delta stroke sensor will signal the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) that a booster failure has occurred. The active booster then applies supplemental force to the master cylinder relative to the amount of force exerted on the brake pedal. Hydraulic Circuit Diagram EFS004RX WFIA0187E Revision: October 2004 BRC-96 2005 Titan CAN COMMUNICATION [VDC/TCS/ABS] CAN COMMUNICATION System Description PFP:23710 A EFS004RY Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . B C D E BRC G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 BRC-97 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and Accurate Repair PFP:00000 EFS004RZ INTRODUCTION The ABS/TCS/VDC system has an electronic control unit to control major functions. The control unit accepts input signals from sensors and controls actuator operation. It is also important to check for conventional problems such as air leaks in the booster or lines, lack of brake fluid, or other problems with the brake system. It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are caused by poor electrical connections or faulty wiring. In this case, careful checking of suspicious circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts. A visual check only may not find the cause of the problem, so a road test should be performed. Before undertaking actual checks, take just a few minutes to talk with a customer who approaches with an ABS/TCS/VDC complaint. The customer is a very good source of information on such problems, especially intermittent ones. Through the talks with the customer, find out what symptoms are present and under what conditions they occur. Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first. This is one of the best ways to troubleshoot brake problems on an ABS/ TCS/VDC equipped vehicle. Also check related Service Bulletins for information. SEF233G SEF234G Revision: October 2004 BRC-98 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] WORK FLOW A B C D E BRC G H I J K L M WFIA0358E Revision: October 2004 BRC-99 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] CLARIFY CONCERN ● ● ● A customer's description of a vehicle concern may vary depending on the individual. It is important to clarify the customer's concern. Ask the customer about what symptoms are present under what conditions. Use this information to reproduce the symptom while driving. It is also important to use the diagnosis sheet to understand what type of trouble the customer is having. SBR339B EXAMPLE OF DIAGNOSIS SHEET WFIA0097E Revision: October 2004 BRC-100 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] Component Parts and Harness Connector Location EFS004S0 A B C D E BRC G H I J K L M WFIA0373E Revision: October 2004 BRC-101 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] Schematic EFS004S1 WFWA0208E Revision: October 2004 BRC-102 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] Wiring Diagram — VDC — EFS004S2 A B C D E BRC G H I J K L M WFWA0209E Revision: October 2004 BRC-103 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] WFWA0210E Revision: October 2004 BRC-104 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] A B C D E BRC G H I J K L M WFWA0211E Revision: October 2004 BRC-105 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] WFWA0212E Revision: October 2004 BRC-106 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] A B C D E BRC G H I J K L M WFWA0213E Revision: October 2004 BRC-107 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] WFWA0214E Revision: October 2004 BRC-108 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] A B C D E BRC G H I J K L M WFWA0215E Revision: October 2004 BRC-109 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] Basic Inspection EFS004S3 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL, FLUID LEAK, AND BRAKE PAD INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. Check fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir. If fluid level is low, add fluid. Check the brake piping and around the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for leaks. If there is leaking or seeping fluid, check the following items. ● If ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connection is loose, tighten the piping to the specified torque and recheck for leaks. ● If there is damage to the connection flare nut or ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) threads, replace the damaged part and recheck for leaks. ● When there is fluid leaking or seeping from a fluid connection, use a clean cloth to wipe off the fluid and recheck for leaks. If fluid is still seeping out, replace the damaged part. If the fluid is leaking at the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) assembly. CAUTION: The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot be disassembled and must be replaced as an assembly. Check the brake pads for excessive wear. POWER SYSTEM TERMINAL LOOSENESS AND BATTERY INSPECTION Make sure the battery positive cable, negative cable and ground connection are not loose. In addition, make sure the battery is sufficiently charged. ABS WARNING LAMP, SLIP INDICATOR LAMP AND VDC OFF INDICATOR LAMP INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Make sure ABS warning lamp, SLIP indicator lamp and VDC OFF indicator lamp (when VDC OFF switch is off), turn on for approximately 1 second when the ignition switch is turned ON. If they do not, check the VDC OFF indicator lamp and the VDC OFF switch. Refer to BRC-142, "VDC OFF SWITCH" . Check CAN communications. If there are no errors with the VDC OFF switch or CAN communication system, check combination meter. Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" . Make sure the lamps turn off approximately 1 second after the ignition switch is turned ON. If the lamp does not turn off, conduct self-diagnosis. With the engine running, make sure the VDC OFF indicator lamp turns on and off when the VDC OFF switch is turned on and off. If the indicator lamp status does not correspond to switch operation, check the VDC OFF switch. Refer to BRC-142, "VDC OFF SWITCH" . Make sure ABS warning lamp, SLIP indicator lamp and VDC OFF indicator lamp turn off approximately 2 seconds after the engine is started. If ABS warning lamp, SLIP indicator lamp or VDC OFF indicator lamp have not turned off 10 seconds after the engine has been started, conduct self-diagnosis of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). After conducting the self-diagnosis, be sure to erase the error memory. Refer to BRC-115, "CONSULT-II Function (ABS)" . Revision: October 2004 BRC-110 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] Warning Lamp and Indicator Timing EFS004S4 A ABS warning lamp VDC OFF indicator lamp SLIP indicator lamp Remarks When the ignition switch is OFF — — — — After the ignition switch is turned ON for approx. 1 second × × × — After the ignition switch is turned ON for approx. 2 seconds — — — Lamp goes off approx. 2 seconds after the engine is started. When the VDC OFF switch is pressed (VDC function OFF) — × — — × × × — Condition C D × × — When the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is malfunctioning (power supply or ground malfunction). — × × — ABS/TCS/VDC malfunction When the VDC is malfunctioning B E BRC X: ON —: OFF Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard EFS004S5 G REFERENCE VALUE FROM CONSULT-II CAUTION: The display shows the control unit calculation data, so a normal value might be displayed even in the event the output circuit (harness) is open or short circuited. Data monitor Monitor item N POSI SIG P POSI SIG GEAR FR RH SENSOR FR LH SENSOR RR RH SENSOR RR LH SENSOR ACCEL POS SIG ENGINE SPEED Revision: October 2004 Display content PNP switch signal ON/ OFF condition PNP switch signal ON/ OFF condition A/T gear position Condition Note: Error inspection checklist I BRC-140, "CAN Communication System Inspection" J BRC-140, "CAN Communication System Inspection" K A/T shift position = N position ON A/T shift position = other than N positions OFF A/T shift position P position ON A/T shift position = other than P positions OFF 1st gear 1 2nd gear 2 3rd gear 3 4th gear 4 5th gear 5 Vehicle stopped 0 [km/h (MPH)] Vehicle running (Note 1) Almost in accordance with speedometer display (within ±10%) BRC-125, "Wheel Sensor System Inspection" Accelerator pedal not depressed (ignition switch is ON) 0% Depress accelerator pedal (ignition switch is ON) BRC-140, "CAN Communication System Inspection" 0 to 100% With engine stopped 0 rpm Engine running Almost in accordance with tachometer display Wheel speed Open/close condition of throttle valve (linked with accelerator pedal). Reference value in normal operation With engine running BRC-111 H L — M BRC-126, "Engine System Inspection" 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] Data monitor Monitor item STR ANGLE SIG YAW RATE SEN SIDE G SENSOR Display content Steering angle detected by steering angle sensor Yaw rate detected by yaw rate sensor Transverse G detected by side G-sensor BATTERY VOLT Battery voltage supplied to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) STOP LAMP SW Stop lamp switch operation OFF SW VDC OFF switch ON/OFF status ABS WARN LAMP ABS warning lamp ON condition (Note 2) MOTOR RELAY Operation status of motor and motor relay ACTUATOR RLY OFF LAMP SLIP LAMP Revision: October 2004 Actuator relay operation status VDC OFF indicator lamp status (Note 3) SLIP indicator lamp status (Note 4) Condition Reference value in normal operation Straight-ahead Approx. 0 deg Steering wheel turned –756 to 756 deg Vehicle stopped Approx. 0 d/s Vehicle running –100 to 100 d/s Vehicle stopped Approx. 0 m/s2 Vehicle running –16.7 to 16.7 m/s2 Ignition switch ON 10 to 16V Brake pedal depressed ON Brake pedal not depressed OFF VDC OFF switch ON (When VDC OFF indicator lamp is ON) ON VDC OFF switch OFF (When VDC OFF indicator lamp is OFF) OFF ABS warning lamp ON ON ABS warning lamp OFF OFF Ignition switch ON or running (ABS not activated) OFF Ignition switch ON or engine running (ABS activated) ON Vehicle stopped (Ignition switch ON) OFF Vehicle stopped (Engine running) ON When VDC OFF indicator lamp is ON ON When VDC OFF indicator lamp is OFF OFF When SLIP indicator lamp is ON ON When SLIP indicator lamp is OFF OFF BRC-112 Note: Error inspection checklist BRC-127, "Steering Angle Sensor System" BRC-128, "Yaw Rate/ Side/Decel G Sensor System Inspection" BRC-128, "Yaw Rate/ Side/Decel G Sensor System Inspection" BRC-133, "ABS/TCS/ VDC Control Unit Power and Ground Systems Inspection" BRC-132, "Stop Lamp Switch System Inspection" BRC-142, "VDC OFF SWITCH" — BRC-131, "Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection" BRC-131, "Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection" BRC-140, "CAN Communication System Inspection" BRC-140, "CAN Communication System Inspection" 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] Data monitor Monitor item FR LH IN SOL FR LH OUT SOL FR RH IN SOL FR RH OUT SOL RR RH IN SOL RR RH OUT SOL RR LH IN SOL RR LH OUT SOL CV1 CV2 SV1 SV2 DECEL G-SEN PRESS SENSOR FLUID LEV SW VDC SIGNAL TCS SIGNAL ABS SIGNAL EBD SIGNAL VDC FAIL SIG TCS FAIL SIG ABS FAIL SIG EBD FAIL SIG Display content Solenoid valve operation VDC switch-over valve status Longitudinal acceleration detected by Decel G-Sensor Brake fluid pressure detected by pressure sensor ON/OFF status of brake fluid level switch Signal status Fail signal status Condition Reference value in normal operation Actuator (solenoid) is active (“ACTIVE TEST” with CONSULT-II) or actuator relay is inactive (in fail-safe mode). ON When actuator (solenoid) is not active and actuator relay is active (ignition switch ON). OFF Note: Error inspection checklist B C BRC-130, "Solenoid and VDC Change-Over Valve System Inspection" When actuator (switch-over valve) is active (“ACTIVE TEST” with CONSULT-II) or actuator relay is inactive (when in fail-safe mode). ON When actuator (switch-over valve) is not active and actuator relay is active (ignition switch ON). OFF Vehicle stopped Approx. 0 G Vehicle running -1.7 to 1.7 G Do not step on the Brake pedal (When ignition switch is ON) Approx. 0 bar Step on the Brake pedal (When ignition switch is ON) -40 to 300 bar When brake fluid level switch ON ON When brake fluid level switch OFF OFF VDC active TCS active ABS active EBD active ON VDC not active TCS not active ABS not active EBD not active OFF VDC fail TCS fail ABS fail EBD fail ON VDC normal TCS normal ABS normal EBD normal OFF BRC-113 D E BRC BRC-128, "Yaw Rate/ Side/Decel G Sensor System Inspection" G H — I DI-30, "WARNING LAMPS" J VDC system TCS system ABS system EBD system K L M VDC system TCS system ABS system EBD system Note 1: Confirm tire pressure is normal. Note 2: ON/OFF timing of ABS warning lamp ON: For approximately 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON, or when a malfunction is detected. OFF: Approximately 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON (when system is in normal operation) and TCS/VDC function is not activated. Note 3: ON/OFF timing of VDC OFF indicator lamp ON: For approximately 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON, or when a malfunction is detected and VDC OFF switch is ON. OFF: Approximately 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON (when system is in normal operation.) And when VDC OFF switch is OFF. Note 4: SLIP indicator lamp ON/OFF timing ON: For approximately 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON, or when a malfunction is detected and TCS/VDC function is activated while driving. Revision: October 2004 A 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] OFF: Approximately 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON (when system is in normal operation) and TCS/VDC function is not activated. Flashing: TCS/VDC function is active during driving Revision: October 2004 BRC-114 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] CONSULT-II Function (ABS) EFS004S6 A CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. ABS diagnostic mode WORK SUPPORT SELF-DIAG RESULTS DATA MONITOR Description Supports inspection and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and received data is displayed. B Displays ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis results. C Displays ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) input/output data in real time. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. ACTIVE TEST Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. FUNCTION TEST ECU PART NUMBER D Conducted by CONSULT-II instead of a technician to determine whether each system is "OK" or "NG". E ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) part number can be read. CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. BRC Turn ignition switch OFF. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. Turn ignition switch ON. G H I BBIA0369E 4. J Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. K L M BCIA0029E 5. Touch “ABS” in the “SELECT SYSTEM” screen. If “ABS” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . BCIA0030E Revision: October 2004 BRC-115 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] 6. Select the required diagnostic location from the “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen. For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation Manual. BCIA0031E SELF-DIAGNOSIS Description If an error is detected in the system, the ABS warning lamp will turn on. In this case, perform self-diagnosis as follows: Operation Procedure 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. Start engine and drive at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute. After stopping the vehicle, with the engine running, touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”, “ABS”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” in order on the CONSULT-II screen. CAUTION: If “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)” is touched immediately after starting the engine or turning on the ignition switch, “ABS” might not be displayed in the System Selection screen. In this case, repeat the operation from step 1. 6. The self-diagnostic results are displayed. (If necessary, the self-diagnostic results can be printed out by touching “PRINT”.) ● When “NO DTC IS DETECTED” is displayed, check the ABS warning lamp, SLIP indicator lamp and VDC OFF indicator lamp. 7. Conduct the appropriate inspection from the display item list, and repair or replace the malfunctioning component. 8. Start engine and drive at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute. CAUTION: ● When a wheel sensor “short-circuit” is detected, if the vehicle is not driven at 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least 1 minute, the ABS warning lamp will not turn off even if the malfunction is repaired. 9. Turn ignition switch OFF to prepare for erasing the memory. 10. Start the engine and touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”, “ABS”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”, “ERASE” in order on the CONSULT-II screen to erase the error memory. If “ABS” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . CAUTION: If the error memory is not erased, re-conduct the operation from step 5. 11. For the final inspection, drive at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute and confirm that the ABS warning lamp, SLIP indicator lamp, and VDC OFF indicator lamp are off. Revision: October 2004 BRC-116 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] Display Item List Self-diagnostic item Malfunction detecting condition Check system A FR LH SENSOR 1 [C1104] Circuit of front LH wheel sensor is open, shorted or sensor power voltage is unusual. RR RH SENSOR 1 [C1101] Circuit of rear RH wheel sensor is open, shorted or sensor power voltage is unusual. FR RH SENSOR 1 [C1103] Circuit of front RH wheel sensor is open, shorted or sensor power voltage is unusual. RR LH SENSOR 1 [C1102] Circuit of rear LH wheel sensor is open, shorted or sensor power voltage is unusual. FR LH SENSOR 2 [C1108] ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor. RR RH SENSOR 2 [C1105] ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor. E FR RH SENSOR 2 [C1107] ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor. BRC RR LH SENSOR 2 [C1106] ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot identify sensor pulses, because of large gap between wheel sensor and sensor rotor. G STOP LAMP SW [C1116] Stop lamp switch or circuit malfunction. BRC-132, "Stop Lamp Switch System Inspection" DECEL G SEN SET [C1160] ABS decel sensor adjustment is incomplete. BRC-141, "Inspection For Self-diagnosis Result "DECEL G SEN SET"" ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT [C1143] Neutral position of steering angle sensor is dislocated, or steering angle sensor is malfunctioning. BRC-127, "Steering Angle Sensor System" YAW RATE SENSOR [C1145] Yaw rate sensor has generated an error, or yaw rate sensor signal line is open or shorted. BRC-128, "Yaw Rate/ Side/Decel G Sensor System Inspection" B C BRC-125, "Wheel Sensor System Inspection" (Note 1) D H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 BRC-117 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] Self-diagnostic item Malfunction detecting condition FR LH IN ABS SOL [C1120] Circuit of front LH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. FR LH OUT ABS SOL [C1121] Circuit of front LH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. RR RH IN ABS SOL [C1126] Circuit of rear RH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. RR RH OUT ABS SOL [C1127] Circuit of rear RH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. FR RH IN ABS SOL [C1122] Circuit of front RH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. FR RH OUT ABS SOL [C1123] Circuit of front RH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. RR LH IN ABS SOL [C1124] Circuit of rear LH IN ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. RR LH OUT ABS SOL [C1125] Circuit of rear LH OUT ABS solenoid is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. CV1 [C1164] Front side VDC switch-over solenoid valve (cut valve) is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. CV2 [C1165] Rear side VDC switch-over solenoid valve (cut valve) is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. SV1 [C1166] Front side VDC switch-over solenoid valve (suction valve) is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. SV2 [C1167] Rear side VDC switch-over solenoid valve (suction valve) is open or shorted, or control line is open or shorted to power supply or ground. PUMP MOTOR (Note 3) [C1111] During actuator motor operation with ON, when actuator motor turns OFF or when control line for actuator motor relay is open. During actuator motor operation with OFF, when actuator motor turns ON or when control line for relay is shorted to ground. Check system BRC-130, "Solenoid and VDC Change-Over Valve System Inspection" BRC-131, "Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection" BATTERY VOLTAGE [ABNORMAL] [C1109] ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power voltage is too low. BRC-133, "ABS/TCS/ VDC Control Unit Power and Ground Systems Inspection" ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL [C1144] Neutral position correction of steering angle sensor is not finished. BRC-141, "Inspection For Self-diagnosis Result "ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL"" ST ANG SEN COM CIR [C1156] CAN communication line or steering angle sensor has generated an error. BRC-127, "Steering Angle Sensor System" G-SENSOR [C1113] G-sensor is malfunctioning, or signal line of G-sensor is open or shorted. BRC-128, "Yaw Rate/ Side/Decel G Sensor System Inspection" CONTROLLER FAILURE [C1110] Internal malfunction of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) BRC-127, "ABS/TCS/ VDC Control Unit Inspection" CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] Revision: October 2004 ● CAN communication line is open or shorted. ● ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) internal malfunction ● Battery voltage for ECM is suddenly interrupted for approximately 0.5 second or more. BRC-118 BRC-140, "CAN Communication System Inspection" (Note 2) 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] Self-diagnostic item Malfunction detecting condition Check system Side G-sensor is malfunctioning, or signal line of side G-sensor is open or shorted. BRC-128, "Yaw Rate/ Side/Decel G Sensor System Inspection" BR FLUID LEVEL LOW [C1155] Brake fluid level drops or circuit between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and brake fluid level switch is open or shorted. BRC-134, "Brake Fluid Level Sensor System Inspection" ENGIN SIGNAL 1 [C1130] Based on the signal from ECM, ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) judges that engine fuel cut system is malfunctioning. C ENGIN SIGNAL 2 [C1131] Based on the signal from ECM, ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) judges that engine fuel cut system is malfunctioning. D ENGIN SIGNAL 3 [C1132] Based on the signal from ECM, ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) judges that engine fuel cut system is malfunctioning. ENGIN SIGNAL 4 [C1133] Based on the signal from ECM, ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) judges that engine fuel cut system is malfunctioning. BRC ENGIN SIGNAL 6 [C1136] Based on the signal from ECM, ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) judges that engine fuel cut system is malfunctioning. G ACTUATOR RLY [C1140] ABS actuator relay or circuit malfunction. BRC-131, "Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection" H PRESS SEN CIRCUIT [C1142] ABS pressure sensor circuit malfunction. BRC-138, "Pressure Sensor System Inspection" I VARIANT CODING [C1170] V coding is not malfunctioning. BRC-127, "ABS/TCS/ VDC Control Unit Inspection" J ABS ACTIVEBOOSTER SV NG [C1178] Active booster solenoid is malfunctioning, or signal line of active booster servo is open or shorted. BRC-135, "Active Booster System Inspection" DELTA S SEN NG [C1179] Delta stroke sensor malfunctioning, or signal line of delta stroke sensor is open or shorted. BRC-136, "Delta Stroke Sensor System Inspection" ABS ACTIVEBOOSTER RESPONSE NG [C1181] Active booster response is malfunctioning, or signal line of active booster response is open or shorted. ABS BRAKE RELEASE SW NG [C1184] Brake release switch is malfunctioning, or signal line of brake release switch is open or shorted. ABS BRAKEBOOSTER DEFECT [C1189] Brake booster is defective or malfunctioning. BRC-126, "Engine System Inspection" BRC-135, "Active Booster System Inspection" Note 1. If wheel sensor 2 for each wheel is indicated, check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power supply voltage in addition to wheel sensor circuit check. Note 2. If multiple malfunctions are detected including CAN communication line [U1000], perform diagnosis for CAN communication line first. Note 3: "ACTUATOR RLY" on the CONSULT-II self-diagnosis results indicates the malfunction of the actuator motor relay or circuit. DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. A SIDE G-SEN CIRCUIT [C1146] After turning OFF the ignition switch, connect CONSULT-II and the CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. Revision: October 2004 BRC-119 2005 Titan B E K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] 2. 3. 4. CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”, “ABS”, “DATA MONITOR” in order on the CONSULT-II screen. If “ABS” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . CAUTION: When “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)” is touched immediately after starting the engine or turning on the ignition switch, “ABS” might not be displayed in the system selection screen. In this case, repeat the operation from step 2. Return to the Monitor Item Selection screen, and touch “ECU INPUT SIGNALS”, “MAIN SIGNALS”, or “SELECTION FROM MENU”. Refer to the following information. When “START” is touched, the data monitor screen is displayed. Display Item List Item (Unit) Data monitor item selection Remarks ECU INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU GEAR × × × Gear position judged by PNP switch signal is displayed. FR RH SENSOR (km/h, MPH) × × × Wheel speed calculated by front RH wheel sensor signal is displayed. FR LH SENSOR (km/h, MPH) × × × Wheel speed calculated by front LH wheel sensor signal is displayed. RR RH SENSOR (km/h, MPH) × × × Wheel speed calculated by rear RH wheel sensor signal is displayed. RR LH SENSOR (km/h, MPH) × × × Wheel speed calculated by rear LH wheel sensor signal is displayed. BATTERY VOLT (V) × × × Voltage supplied to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) is displayed. N POSI SIG – – × Shift position judged by PNP switch signal. P POSI SIG – – × Shift position judged by PNP switch signal. ACCEL POS SIG (%) × – × Throttle valve open/close status judged by CAN communication signal is displayed. ENGINE SPEED (rpm) × × × Engine speed judged by CAN communication signal is displayed. STR ANGLE SIG (deg) × – × Steering angle detected by steering angle sensor is displayed. YAW RATE SEN (d/s) × × × Yaw rate detected by yaw rate sensor is displayed. DECEL G SEN (d/s) × × × Longitudinal acceleration detected by decel G-sensor is displayed. SIDE G-SENSOR × – × Transverse acceleration detected by side G-sensor is displayed. STOP LAMP SW (ON/OFF) × × × Stop lamp switch (ON/OFF) status is displayed. OFF SW (ON/OFF) × × × VDC OFF switch (ON/OFF) status is displayed. ABS WARN LAMP (ON/OFF) – × × ABS warning lamp (ON/OFF) status is displayed. (m/s2 ) Revision: October 2004 BRC-120 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] Item (Unit) Data monitor item selection ECU INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU Remarks A SLIP LAMP (ON/OFF) – × × SLIP indicator lamp (ON/OFF) status is displayed. B FR LH IN SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Front LH IN ABS solenoid (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. FR LH OUT SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Front LH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. RR RH IN SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Rear RH IN ABS solenoid (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. RR RH OUT SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Rear RH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. FR RH IN SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Front RH IN ABS solenoid (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. FR RH OUT SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Front RH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. RR LH IN SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Rear LH IN ABS solenoid (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. RR LH OUT SOL (ON/OFF) – × × Rear LH OUT ABS solenoid (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. OFF LAMP (ON/OFF) – × × OFF Lamp (ON/OFF) status is displayed. C D E BRC G H MOTOR RELAY (ON/OFF) – × × ABS motor relay signal (ON/OFF) status is displayed. ACTUATOR RLY (ON/OFF) – × × ABS actuator relay signal (ON/ OFF) status is displayed. CV1 (ON/OFF) – – × Front side switch-over solenoid valve (cut valve) (ON/OFF) status is displayed. CV2 (ON/OFF) – – × Rear side switch-over solenoid valve (cut-valve) (ON/OFF) status is displayed. K SV1 (ON/OFF) – – × Front side switch-over solenoid valve (suction valve) (ON/OFF) status is displayed. L SV2 (ON/OFF) – × Rear side switch-over solenoid valve (suction valve) (ON/OFF) status is displayed. M – VDC FAIL SIG (ON/OFF) – – × VDC fail signal (ON/OFF) status is displayed. TCS FAIL SIG (ON/OFF) – – × TCS fail signal (ON/OFF) status is displayed. ABS FAIL SIG (ON/OFF) – – × ABS fail signal (ON/OFF) status is displayed. EBD FAIL SIG (ON/OFF) – – × EBD fail signal (ON/OFF) status is displayed. FLUID LEV SW (ON/OFF) × – × Brake fluid level switch (ON/OFF) status is displayed. EBD SIGNAL (ON/OFF) – – × EBD operation (ON/OFF) status is displayed. ABS SIGNAL (ON/OFF) – – × ABS operation (ON/OFF) status is displayed. TCS SIGNAL (ON/OFF) – – × TCS operation (ON/OFF) status is displayed. Revision: October 2004 BRC-121 2005 Titan I J TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] Item (Unit) Data monitor item selection ECU INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU Remarks VDC SIGNAL (ON/OFF) – – × VDC operation (ON/OFF) status is displayed. EBD WARN LAMP – – × Brake warning lamp (ON/OFF) status is displayed. SLCT LVR POSI × × × Shift position judged by PNP switch signal. R POSI SIG – – × Shift position judged by PNP switch signal. 4WD FAIL REQ – – × The state of 4WD controller is displayed by CAN communication signal. 2WD/4WD – – × It recognizes on software whether it is 2WD and whether it is in 4WD state. BST OPER SIG – – × Active booster operation (ON/OFF) status is displayed. PRESS SENSOR × – × Brake pressure detected by pressure sensor is displayed. CRANKING SIG – – × The input state of the key SW START position signal is displayed. PRESS SEN 2 – – × Brake pressure detected by pressure sensor is displayed. × The amount of stroke sensor movements in the active booster detected by DELTA S SEN is displayed. × Release switch signal (ON/OFF) status is displayed. "ON" indicates that the brake pedal is depressed. "OFF" is that the brake pedal is released. DELTA S SEN RELEASE SW NO – – – – RELEASE SW NC – – × Release switch signal (ON/OFF) status is displayed. "OFF" indicates that the brake pedal is depressed on. "ON" is that the brake pedal is released. OHB FAIL – – × OHB fail status is displayed. HBA FAIL – – × HBA fail status is displayed. OHB SIG – – × OHB operation (ON/OFF) status is displayed. HBA SIG – – × HBA operation (ON/OFF) status is displayed. PRES CTRL ACC – – × Pressure control state (ON/OFF) is displayed. It is applied only to an ICC vehicle. PRES FAIL ACC – – × Pressure control fail state (ON/ OFF) is displayed. It is applied only to an ICC vehicle. STP OFF RLY – – × Stop lamp relay signal (ON/OFF) status is displayed. ×: Applicable –: Not applicable Revision: October 2004 BRC-122 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] ACTIVE TEST A CAUTION: ● Do not perform active test while driving. ● Make sure to completely bleed air from the brake system. ● The ABS and brake (EBD) warning lamps turn on during the active test. B Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Connect the CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector and start the engine. C CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. D Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)” on the display screen. Touch “ABS”. If “ABS” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . E Touch “ACTIVE TEST”. The test item selection screen is displayed. Touch necessary test item. BRC G H LBR379 7. 8. I With the “MAIN SIGNALS” display selected, touch “START”. The Active Test screen will be displayed, so conduct the following test. Solenoid Valve Operation Chart J ABS solenoid valve Operation ABS solenoid valve (ACT) UP KEEP DOWN UP ACTUATOR UP ACTUATOR KEEP FR RH SOL FR RH ABS SOLENOID (ACT) FR RH IN SOL OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF FR RH OUT SOL OFF OFF ON* OFF OFF OFF FR LH SOL FR LH ABS SOLENOID (ACT) FR LH IN SOL OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF FR LH OUT SOL OFF OFF ON* OFF OFF OFF RR RH SOL RR RH ABS SOLENOID (ACT) RR RH IN SOL OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF RR RH OUT SOL OFF OFF ON* OFF OFF OFF RR LH SOL RR LH ABS SOLENOID (ACT) RR LH IN SOL OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF RR LH OUT SOL OFF OFF ON* OFF OFF OFF RR RH IN SOL OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF RR RH OUT SOL OFF OFF ON* OFF OFF OFF RR LH IN SOL OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF RR LH OUT SOL OFF OFF ON* OFF OFF OFF REAR SOL *: ON for 1 to 2 seconds after the touch, and then OFF NOTE: ● If active test is performed with brake pedal depressed, pedal stroke may change. This is normal. ● “TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed approximately 10 seconds after operation starts. ● After “TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed, to perform test again, repeat Step 6. Revision: October 2004 BRC-123 2005 Titan K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [VDC/TCS/ABS] ABS Motor Touch “ON” and “OFF” on the screen. Check that ABS motor relay operates as shown in table below. Operation ON OFF ABS actuator relay ON ON ABS motor relay ON OFF NOTE: ● If active test is performed with brake pedal depressed, pedal stroke may change. This is normal. ● “TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed approximately 10 seconds after operation starts. Revision: October 2004 BRC-124 SFIA0593E 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [VDC/TCS/ABS] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS Wheel Sensor System Inspection PFP:00000 A EFS004S7 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. CONNECTOR INSPECTION B Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and wheel sensor of malfunctioning code. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. 2. CHECK WHEEL SENSOR OUTPUT SIGNAL C D E 1. 2. Connect ABS active wheel sensor tester (J-45741) to wheel sensor using appropriate adapter. Turn on the ABS active wheel sensor tester power switch. BRC NOTE: The green POWER indicator should illuminate. If the POWER indicator does not illuminate, replace the battery in the ABS active wheel sensor tester before proceeding. 3. Spin the wheel of the vehicle by hand and observe the red SENSOR indicator on the ABS active wheel G sensor tester. The red SENSOR indicator should flash on and off to indicate an output signal. NOTE: If the red SENSOR indicator illuminates but does not flash, reverse the polarity of the tester leads and H retest. Does the ABS active wheel sensor tester detect a signal? YES >> GO TO 3. I NO >> Replace the wheel sensor. Refer to BRC-150, "Removal and Installation" . 3. CHECK TIRES J Check for inflation pressure, wear and size of each tire. Are tire pressure and size correct and is tire wear within specifications? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Adjust tire pressure or replace tire(s). K 4. CHECK WHEEL BEARINGS L Check wheel bearing axial end play. Refer to FAX-5, "WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION" or RAX-5, "WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. Refer to FAX-5, "Removal and Installation" or RAX-6, "Removal and Installation" . 5. CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and wheel sensor connector of malfunction code No. Check resistance between wheel sensor harness connector terminals and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair the circuit. WFIA0343E Revision: October 2004 BRC-125 2005 Titan M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [VDC/TCS/ABS] 6. CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 and the malfunctioning wheel sensor harness connector E18, E117, C10, or C11. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Wheel sensor Connector - terminal Front LH Front RH Rear LH Rear RH Wire color Wheel sensor Connector - terminal Continuity Wire color E125 - 45 G/O E18 - 1 G/O E125 - 46 BR/W E18 - 2 BR/W E125 - 34 B/R E117 - 1 B/R E125 - 33 BR E117 - 2 BR E125 - 37 P C11 - 2 P E125 - 36 L C11 - 1 L E125 - 42 V C10 - 2 V E125 - 43 G/Y C10 - 1 G/Y Yes Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-152, "Removal and Installation" . NG >> Repair the circuit. Engine System Inspection EFS004S8 INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK Check self-diagnosis results. Self-diagnosis results ENGINE SIGNAL 1 ENGINE SIGNAL 2 ENGINE SIGNAL 3 ENGINE SIGNAL 4 ENGINE SIGNAL 6 Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. 2. ENGINE SYSTEM INSPECTION 1. Perform ECM self-diagnosis and repair as necessary. Refer to EC-127, "SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE" . 2. Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. Revision: October 2004 BRC-126 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [VDC/TCS/ABS] ABS/TCS/VDC Control Unit Inspection EFS004S9 A INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK B Check self-diagnosis results. Self-diagnosis results C CONTROLLER FAILURE Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-152, "Removal and Installation" . NO >> Inspection End. D Steering Angle Sensor System E EFS004SA INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT BRC Check self-diagnosis results. Self-diagnosis results G ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT ST ANG SEN COM CIR Is above displayed in self-diagnosis item? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. H 2. CHECK CONNECTOR I 1. Disconnect steering angle sensor connector M47 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and check terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness, or damage. Repair or replace as necessary. 2. Reconnect connectors and repeat ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis. IS "ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT" or "ST ANG SEN COM CIR" DISPLAYED? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Inspection End. 3. CHECK STEERING ANGLE SENSOR HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Check CAN communication system. Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect steering angle sensor connector M47 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and steering angle sensor connector M47. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 11 (L) 15 (P) Steering angle sensor harness connector M47 3 (L) 4 (P) WFIA0224E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: October 2004 BRC-127 K L M Continuity Yes Yes J 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [VDC/TCS/ABS] 4. CHECK DATA MONITOR 1. 2. Connect steering angle sensor and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connectors. Use “DATA MONITOR” to check if the status of "STR ANGLE SIG" is normal. Steering condition Data monitor Straight-ahead –3.5 deg to +3.5 deg Turn wheel to the right by 90° Approx. - 90deg Turn wheel to the left by 90° Approx. + 90deg OK or NG OK >> Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again. NG >> Replace spiral cable (steering angle sensor) and adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-148, "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position" . Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor System Inspection EFS004SB CAUTION: Sudden turns (such as spin turns, acceleration turns), drifting, etc. when VDC function is OFF may cause the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor system to indicate a problem. This is not a problem if normal operation can be resumed after restarting the engine. INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK Check self-diagnosis results. Self-diagnosis results YAW RATE SENSOR SIDE G-SEN CIRCUIT G-SENSOR CAUTION: If vehicle is on turn table at entrance to parking garage, or on other moving surface, VDC OFF indicator lamp may illuminate and CONSULT-II self-diagnosis may indicate yaw rate sensor system malfunction. However, in this case there is no malfunction in yaw rate sensor system. Take vehicle off of turn table or other moving surface, and start engine. Results will return to normal. Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. 2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and yaw rate/side/decel G sensor connector M108. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. Revision: October 2004 BRC-128 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [VDC/TCS/ABS] 3. YAW RATE/SIDE/DECEL G SENSOR HARNESS INSPECTION 1. 2. A Turn off the ignition switch and disconnect yaw rate/side/decel G sensor connector M108 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. Check continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor connector M108. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 Yaw rate/side/decel G sensor harness connector M108 6 (Y/R) 3 (Y/R) 24 (P) 5 (P) 25 (G/R) 1 (G/R) 29 (G/W) 2 (G/W) C Continuity D Yes E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. BRC G 4. YAW RATE/SIDE/DECEL G SENSOR INSPECTION 1. 2. B Connect the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor connector M108 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. Use “DATA MONITOR” to check if the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor signals are normal. Vehicle status Yaw rate sensor (Data monitor standard) Side G sensor (Data monitor standard) Decel G Sensor (Data monitor standard) When stopped -4 to +4 deg/s -1.1 to +1.1 m/s -0.11 G to +0.11 G Right turn Negative value Negative value - Left turn Positive value Positive value - Speed up - - Negative value Speed down - - Positive value OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Refer to BRC-155, "Removal and Installation" . H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 BRC-129 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [VDC/TCS/ABS] Solenoid and VDC Change-Over Valve System Inspection EFS004SC INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK Check self-diagnosis results. Self-diagnosis results FR LH IN ABS SOL FR LH OUT ABS SOL RR RH IN ABS SOL RR RH OUT ABS SOL FR RH IN ABS SOL FR RH OUT ABS SOL RR LH IN ABS SOL RR LH OUT ABS SOL CV 1 CV 2 SV 1 SV 2 Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. 2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION 1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. 2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. Revision: October 2004 BRC-130 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [VDC/TCS/ABS] 3. 1. CHECKING SOLENOID POWER AND GROUND A Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 and body ground. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 32 (B/Y) Body ground — B Measured value (Approx.) 12V C D WFIA0195E 2. Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 and body ground. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 16 (B) 47 (B) Body ground — — E Measured value Ω (Approx.) 0Ω 0Ω OK or NG OK >> Perform self-diagnosis again. If the same results appear, replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-152, "Removal and Installation" . NG >> Repair the circuit. Actuator Motor, Motor Relay, and Circuit Inspection BRC G WFIA0196E H I EFS004SD INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. CHECKING SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS J Check self-diagnosis results. K Self-diagnosis results PUMP MOTOR L ACTUATOR RLY Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. M 2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION 1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. 2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. Revision: October 2004 BRC-131 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [VDC/TCS/ABS] 3. 1. CHECKING ABS MOTOR AND MOTOR RELAY POWER SYSTEM Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 and body ground. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 1 (Y) Measured value (Approx.) 12V Body ground — WFIA0209E 2. Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and body ground. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 16 (B) 47 (B) Measured value Ω (Approx.) 0Ω 0Ω Body ground — — OK or NG OK >> Perform self-diagnosis again. If the same results appear, replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-152, "Removal and Installation" . NG >> Repair the circuit. Stop Lamp Switch System Inspection WFIA0196E EFS004SE INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK Check self-diagnosis results. Self-diagnosis results STOP LAMP SW Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. 2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION 1. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and stop lamp switch connector E38. 2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. Revision: October 2004 BRC-132 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [VDC/TCS/ABS] 3. STOP LAMP SWITCH INSPECTION A Check the voltage between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminal 41 (R/B) and body ground. B Brake pedal depressed : Battery voltage (approx. 12V) Brake pedal not depressed : Approx. 0V OK or NG OK >> Perform self-diagnosis again. If the same results appear, replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-152, "Removal and Installation" . NG >> GO TO 4. C D WFIA0198E E 4. STOP LAMP RELAY CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. Disconnect the stop lamp relay harness connector E12. Check the continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminal 41 (R/B) and stop lamp relay harness connector E12 terminal 4 (R/B). BRC G Continuity should exist OK or NG OK >> Perform self-diagnosis again. If the same results appear, replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-152, "Removal and Installation" . NG >> Refer to LT-98, "STOP LAMP" . H I LFIA0218E ABS/TCS/VDC Control Unit Power and Ground Systems Inspection EFS004SF J INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK K Check self-diagnosis results. Self-diagnosis results L BATTERY VOLTAGE Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. M 2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION 1. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. 2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. Revision: October 2004 BRC-133 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [VDC/TCS/ABS] 3. ABS/TCS/VDC CONTROL UNIT POWER AND GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION Measure the voltage and continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 and body ground. Signal name ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 Power supply Body ground Measured value — Battery voltage (Approx. 12V) — Continuity should exist. 1 (Y) 32 (B/Y) Ground 16 (B) 47 (B) OK or NG OK >> Check the battery for loose terminals, low voltage, etc. Repair as necessary. NG >> Repair the circuit. Brake Fluid Level Sensor System Inspection EFS004SG INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK 1. 2. Check the brake reservoir tank fluid level. If the level is low, add brake fluid. Erase the self-diagnosis results and check the self-diagnosis results. Self-diagnosis results BR FLUID LEVEL LOW Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. 2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION 1. Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and brake fluid level switch connector E21. 2. Check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. Revision: October 2004 BRC-134 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [VDC/TCS/ABS] 3. CHECK THE HARNESS BETWEEN THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SENSOR AND THE ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) Check the continuity between the brake fluid level switch harness connector E21 and the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 Brake fluid level switch harness connector E21 Continuity 8 (P/B) 1 (P/B) Yes 8 (P/B) Ground No Ground 2 (B) Yes B C D OK or NG OK >> Perform self-diagnosis again. If the same results appear, replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-152, "Removal and Installation" . NG >> Repair the circuit. Active Booster System Inspection A E BRC EFS004SH INSPECTION PROCEDURE G 1. DISPLAY SELF DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Check self-diagnosis results. H Self-diagnosis results ABS ACTIVEBOOSTER SV NG I ABS ACTIVEBOOSTER RESPONSE ABS BRAKE RELEASE SWITCH NG ABS BRAKEBOOSTER DEFECT J Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES or NO YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. K 2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION L 1. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the active booster connector E49 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and inspect the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness, or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair connector. Revision: October 2004 BRC-135 2005 Titan M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [VDC/TCS/ABS] 3. ACTIVE BOOSTER CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. Measure the continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and active booster connector E49. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 Active booster connector E49 17 (W/R) 3 (W/R) 27 (L/B) 1 (L/B) 28 (Y/B) 5 (Y/B) 30 (LG/R) 2 (LG/R) 31 (W/G) 4 (W/G) Continuity Yes Measure the continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and body ground. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 Body ground Continuity — No 17 (W/R) 27 (L/B) 28 (Y/B) 30 (LG/R) 31 (W/G) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connector. 4. ACTIVE BOOSTER SENSOR INSPECTION 1. 2. Reconnect the active booster and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connectors. Use "DATA MONITOR" to check if the status of "RELEASE SW NO" and "RELEASE SW NC" is normal. Condition When brake pedal is depressed When brake pedal is released Data monitor display RELEASE SW NO RELEASE SW NC ON OFF OFF ON OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace active booster. Refer to BR-19, "With ABS or BLSD" . Delta Stroke Sensor System Inspection EFS004SI INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. DISPLAY SELF DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Check self-diagnosis results. Self-diagnosis results DELTA S SEN NG Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES or NO YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. Revision: October 2004 BRC-136 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [VDC/TCS/ABS] 2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION A 1. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the delta stroke sensor connector E114 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and inspect the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness, or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair connector. B C 3. DELTA STROKE SENSOR CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. Measure the continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and delta stroke sensor connector E114. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 Delta stroke sensor connector E114 26 (W/V) 1 (W/V) 39 (G/B) 3 (G/B) 40 (R/Y) 5 (R/Y) E Continuity BRC Yes Measure the continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and body ground. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 D G Body ground Continuity H — No I 26 (W/V) 39 (G/B) 40 (R/Y) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connector. J 4. DELTA STROKE SENSOR INSPECTION K 1. 2. L Reconnect the delta stroke sensor and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connectors. Use "DATA MONITOR" to check if the status of "DELTA S SEN" is normal. Data monitor display (Approx.) DELTA S SEN 0.00 mm (+0.6/-0.4) 1.05–1.80 mm Condition When brake pedal is depressed When brake pedal is released M OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace delta stroke sensor. Refer to BR-19, "With ABS or BLSD" . Revision: October 2004 BRC-137 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [VDC/TCS/ABS] Pressure Sensor System Inspection EFS004SJ FRONT PRESSURE INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. DISPLAY SELF DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Check self-diagnosis results. Self-diagnosis results PRESS SEN CIRCUIT Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES or NO YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. 2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION 1. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front pressure sensor connector E31 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and inspect the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness, or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair connector. 3. FRONT PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. Measure the continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 and front pressure sensor harness connector E31. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 Front pressure sensor harness connector E31 18 (LG) 3 (LG) 19 (SB) 1 (SB) 20 (R/L) 2 (R/L) Continuity Yes Measure the continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 and body ground. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 Body ground Continuity — No 18 (LG) 19 (SB) 20 (R/L) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connector. Revision: October 2004 BRC-138 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [VDC/TCS/ABS] 4. FRONT PRESSURE SENSOR INSPECTION 1. 2. A Reconnect the front pressure sensor and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connectors. Use "DATA MONITOR" to check if the status of "PRESS SENSOR" is normal. B Data monitor display (Approx.) PRESS SENSOR Positive value 0 bar Condition When brake pedal is depressed When brake pedal is released C OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace front pressure sensor. Refer to BR-15, "With ABS" . D REAR PRESSURE INSPECTION PROCEDURE E 1. DISPLAY SELF DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Check self-diagnosis results. BRC Self-diagnosis results PRESS SEN CIRCUIT G Is the above displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES or NO YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. H 2. CONNECTOR INSPECTION I 1. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the rear pressure sensor connector E32 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and inspect the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness, or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair connector. J K L M Revision: October 2004 BRC-139 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [VDC/TCS/ABS] 3. REAR PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. Measure the continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and rear pressure sensor connector E32. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 Rear pressure sensor connector E32 21 (R/G) 1 (R/G) 22 (W/L) 3 (W/L) 23 (W/O) 2 (W/O) Continuity Yes Measure the continuity between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 and body ground. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125 Body ground Continuity — No 21 (R/G) 22 (W/L) 23 (W/O) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connector. 4. REAR PRESSURE SENSOR INSPECTION 1. 2. Reconnect the rear pressure sensor and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connectors. Use "DATA MONITOR" to check if the status of "PRESS SEN 2" is normal. Condition When brake pedal is depressed When brake pedal is released Data monitor display (Approx.) PRESS SEN 2 Positive value 0 bar OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace rear pressure sensor. Refer to BR-15, "With ABS" . CAN Communication System Inspection EFS004SK INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness, and so on. If there is a malfunction, repair or replace the terminal. 2. Reconnect connector to perform self-diagnosis. Is "CAN COMM CIRCUIT" displayed in self-diagnosis display items? YES >> Print out the self-diagnostic results, and refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . NO >> Connector terminal is loose, damaged, open, or shorted. Revision: October 2004 BRC-140 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [VDC/TCS/ABS] Inspection For Self-diagnosis Result "ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL" EFS004SL A INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS B Check self-diagnosis results. Self-diagnosis results C ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL Do self-diagnosis results indicate anything other than shown above? YES >> Perform repair or replacement for the item indicated. NO >> Perform adjustment of steering angle sensor neutral position. Refer to BRC-148, "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position" . GO TO 2. D 2. PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS AGAIN E 1. Turn the ignition switch to OFF and then to ON and erase self-diagnosis results. 2. Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again. Are any self-diagnosis results displayed? YES >> Replace steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-154, "Removal and Installation" . NO >> Inspection End. Inspection For Self-diagnosis Result "DECEL G SEN SET" BRC G EFS004SM INSPECTION PROCEDURE H 1. PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS Check self-diagnosis results. I Self-diagnosis results DECEL G SEN SET Do self-diagnosis results indicate anything other than shown above? YES >> Perform repair or replacement for the item indicated. NO >> Perform calibration of yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Refer to BRC-148, "Calibration of Yaw Rate/ Side/Decel G Sensor" . GO TO 2. J K 2. PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS AGAIN L 1. Turn the ignition switch to OFF and then to ON and erase self-diagnosis results. 2. Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again. Are any self-diagnosis results displayed? YES >> Replace yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Refer to BRC-155, "Removal and Installation" . NO >> Inspection End. VDC OFF Indicator lamp Does Not Illuminate M EFS004SN INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. CHECK VDC OFF INDICATOR LAMP Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E125. Do the ABS warning lamp and VDC OFF indicator lamp illuminate? YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-152, "Removal and Installation" . NO >> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" . Revision: October 2004 BRC-141 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS [VDC/TCS/ABS] Component Inspection EFS004SO VDC OFF SWITCH Check the continuity between terminals 1 and 2. 1-2 : Continuity should exist when pushing the switch. Continuity should not exist when releasing the switch. PFIA0307E Revision: October 2004 BRC-142 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [VDC/TCS/ABS] TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS ABS Works Frequently PFP:99999 A EFS005FS 1. CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION B Make sure warning lamp remains off while driving. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-116, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" . C D 2. CHECK WHEEL SENSORS Check the following. ● Wheel sensor mounting for looseness ● Wheel sensors for physical damage ● Wheel sensor connectors for terminal damage or loose connections ● Sensor rotor and mount for physical damage (rear only) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. E BRC G 3. CHECK FRONT AND REAR AXLES H Check front and rear axles for excessive looseness. Refer to FAX-5, "WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION" or RAX-5, "WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair as necessary. I J 4. CHECK BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE Check brake fluid pressure distribution. Refer to BRC-110, "Basic Inspection" . Is brake fluid pressure distribution normal? YES >> Inspection End. NO >> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-110, "Basic Inspection" . K L M Revision: October 2004 BRC-143 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [VDC/TCS/ABS] Unexpected Pedal Action EFS005FT 1. CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION Make sure warning lamp remains off while driving. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-116, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" . 2. CHECK BRAKE PEDAL STROKE Check brake pedal stroke. Is pedal stroke excessive? YES >> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-110, "Basic Inspection" . NO >> GO TO 3. SBR540A 3. CHECK CONNECTOR AND BRAKING PERFORMANCE 1. 2. Disable ABS by disconnecting ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Drive vehicle and check brake operation. NOTE: ● Stopping distance may be longer than vehicles without ABS when road condition is slippery. ● Driving the vehicle with the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) disconnected may induce DTCs in electrical control units using CAN communication. After the inspection, clear all DTCs. Refer to LAN7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-110, "Basic Inspection" . 4. CHECK WHEEL SENSORS Check the following. ● Wheel sensor mounting for looseness ● Wheel sensors for physical damage ● Wheel sensor connectors for terminal damage or loose connections OK or NG OK >> Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. Reconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector. Then retest. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. Revision: October 2004 BRC-144 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [VDC/TCS/ABS] Long Stopping Distance EFS005FU A 1. CHECK BASE BRAKING SYSTEM PERFORMANCE 1. 2. Disable ABS by disconnecting ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Drive vehicle and check brake operation. NOTE: ● Stopping distance may be longer than vehicles without ABS when road condition is slippery. ● Driving the vehicle with the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) disconnected may induce DTCs in electrical control units using CAN communication. After the inspection, clear all DTCs. Refer to LAN7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . OK or NG OK >> Go to BRC-143, "ABS Works Frequently" . NG >> Perform Basic Inspection. Refer to BRC-110, "Basic Inspection" . ABS Does Not Work B C D E EFS005FV BRC CAUTION: The ABS does not operate when the vehicle speed is 10 km/h (6 MPH) or less. G 1. CHECK WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION Turn ignition switch ON and check for warning lamp activation. ● Warning lamp should activate for approximately 2 seconds after turning the ignition switch ON. OK or NG OK >> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-116, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" . NG >> Go to BRC-146, "ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On" . Pedal Vibration or ABS Operation Noise H I EFS005FW NOTE: During ABS activation, pedal vibration may be felt and a noise may be heard. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. J K 1. CHECK SYMPTOM L 1. Apply brake. 2. Start engine. Does the symptom occur only when engine is started? YES >> Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-116, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" . NO >> GO TO 2. M 2. RECHECK SYMPTOM Does the symptom occur only when electrical equipment switches (such as headlamps) are turned on? YES NO >> Check for radio, antenna or related wiring that is routed too close to the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and reroute as necessary. >> Go to BRC-143, "ABS Works Frequently" . Revision: October 2004 BRC-145 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [VDC/TCS/ABS] ABS Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On EFS005FX 1. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) FUSES Check 40A fusible link i and 30A fusible link h for ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). For fusible link layout, refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fusible link is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before replacing. 2. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS 1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. 2. Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector terminal 1 (Y) and ground and terminal 32 (B/Y) and ground. Does battery voltage exist? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Repair harness or connectors between fusible link and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). WFIA0199E 3. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector terminal 16 (B) and ground and terminal 47 (B) and ground. Does continuity exist? YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-152, "Removal and Installation" . NO >> Repair harness or connectors between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ground. WFIA0196E ABS Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On EFS005FY 1. CARRY OUT SELF-DIAGNOSIS Carry out self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-116, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" . Are malfunctions detected in self-diagnosis? YES >> Refer to BRC-117, "Display Item List" . NO >> Refer to DI-30, "WARNING LAMPS" . Revision: October 2004 BRC-146 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS [VDC/TCS/ABS] Vehicle Jerks During TCS/VDC Activation EFS005FZ A 1. ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis. Are self-diagnosis result items displayed? YES >> After checking and repairing the applicable item, perform the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis again. NO >> GO TO 2. B C 2. ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL INSPECTION D Perform data monitor with CONSULT-II for the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Is the engine speed at idle 400 rpm or higher? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> GO TO 3. E 3. ECM SELF-DIAGNOSIS BRC Perform ECM self-diagnosis. Are self-diagnosis result items displayed? YES >> After checking and repairing the applicable item, perform the ECM self-diagnosis again. NO >> GO TO 4. G H 4. TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS Perform TCM self-diagnosis. Are self-diagnosis result items displayed? YES >> After checking and repairing the applicable item, perform the TCM self-diagnosis again. NO >> GO TO 5. I J 5. CONNECTOR INSPECTION Disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and the ECM connectors and check the terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. 6. CAN COMMUNICATION INSPECTION L M Check the CAN communication system. Refer to BRC-140, "CAN Communication System Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Revision: October 2004 K BRC-147 2005 Titan ON-VEHICLE SERVICE [VDC/TCS/ABS] ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position PFP:00000 EFS004SX After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), steering angle sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor before running vehicle. NOTE: Adjustment of steering angle sensor neutral position requires CONSULT-II. 1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine). 3. Touch “ABS”, “WORK SUPPORT” and “ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT” on CONSULT-II screen in this order. BBIA0369E 4. Touch “START”. CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor. 5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch “END”. (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select “DATA MONITOR”, “SELECTION FROM MENU”, and “STR ANGLE SIG” on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that “STR ANGLE SIG” is within 0±3.5 deg. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 1 to 5. 9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM. 10. Turn ignition switch to OFF. Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor WFIA0239E EFS004SY After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), yaw rate/side/decel G sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor before running vehicle. NOTE: Calibration of yaw rate/side/decel G sensor requires CONSULT-II. 1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. CAUTION: ● The work should be done on a level area with an unloaded vehicle. ● Keep all the tires inflated to the correct pressures. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified pressure value. 2. Connect CONSULT-II with CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine). CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION" on CONSULT-II screen in this order. Refer to BRC-115, "CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE" . Revision: October 2004 BRC-148 2005 Titan ON-VEHICLE SERVICE [VDC/TCS/ABS] 4. Touch "START". CAUTION: Set vehicle as shown in the display. 5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. SFIA1162E 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "SELECTION FROM MENU", and "DECEL G SEN" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "DECEL G SEN" is within ±0.08G. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7. 9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM. 10. Turn ignition switch to OFF. A B C D E BRC G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 BRC-149 2005 Titan WHEEL SENSORS [VDC/TCS/ABS] WHEEL SENSORS Removal and Installation PFP:47910 EFS004SZ WFIA0374E REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove wheel sensor mounting screw. ● When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel sensor mounting bolt. Refer to BR-24, "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor" . Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. CAUTION: ● Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth. ● Do not pull on the sensor harness. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts. INSTALLATION Before installing wheel sensors, ● Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged. ● Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle. ● Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 BRC-150 2005 Titan SENSOR ROTOR [VDC/TCS/ABS] SENSOR ROTOR Removal and Installation PFP:47970 A EFS004T0 FRONT The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly. Refer to FAX-5, "Removal and Installation" . REAR Removal 1. 2. C Remove axle shaft assembly. Refer to RAX-6, "Removal and Installation" . NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor. Pull the sensor rotor of off the axle shaft using Tool and a press. Tool number B : 205-D002 ( D — ) E Installation 1. 2. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure sensor rotor is fully seated. BRC CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor. Install axle shaft assembly. Refer to RAX-6, "Removal and Installation" . G CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 BRC-151 2005 Titan ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) [VDC/TCS/ABS] ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) Removal and Installation PFP:47660 EFS004T1 WFIA0375E 1. To rear left 2. To rear right 4. To front right 5. From the master cylinder secondary side 6. From the master cylinder primary side 3. To front left 7. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) 8. Harness connector REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to EI-21, "Removal and Installation" . Drain the brake fluid. Refer to BR-10, "Drain and Refill" . Disconnect the actuator harness from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). CAUTION: ● To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from being damaged. ● Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas. Disconnect the brake tubes. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Revision: October 2004 BRC-152 2005 Titan ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) [VDC/TCS/ABS] INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut wrench (commercial service tool). ● Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing. Refer to BR-12, "BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE" . ● Never reuse drained brake fluid. ● After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), perform the following. – Refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System" . – Adjust the steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-148, "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position" . – Calibrate the decel G sensor. Refer to BRC-148, "Calibration of Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor" . A B C D E BRC G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 BRC-153 2005 Titan STEERING ANGLE SENSOR [VDC/TCS/ABS] STEERING ANGLE SENSOR Removal and Installation PFP:25554 EFS004T2 NOTE: The steering angle sensor is an integral part of the spiral cable. Refer to SRS-46, "Removal and Installation" . Revision: October 2004 BRC-154 2005 Titan G SENSOR [VDC/TCS/ABS] G SENSOR Removal and Installation PFP:47930 A EFS004T3 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove center console or center seat as required. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" or SE-91, "FRONT SEAT" . Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor attaching nuts as shown. ● The location of the sensor it the same for all models. CAUTION: ● Do not use power tools to remove or install yaw rate/side/ decel G sensor. ● Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/ decel G sensor. B C D E WFIA0230E INSTALLATION BRC Installation is in the reverse order of removal. G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 BRC-155 2005 Titan G SENSOR [VDC/TCS/ABS] Revision: October 2004 BRC-156 2005 Titan B ENGINE A CO SECTION ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2 Precautions for Liquid Gasket .................................. 2 REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING .......... 2 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE..... 2 PREPARATION ........................................................... 4 Special Service Tools ............................................... 4 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 4 OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS .......................... 6 Troubleshooting Chart .............................................. 6 COOLING SYSTEM .................................................... 8 Cooling Circuit .......................................................... 8 System Drawing ....................................................... 9 ENGINE COOLANT .................................................. 10 Inspection ............................................................... 10 LEVEL CHECK ................................................... 10 CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS... 10 CHECKING RESERVOIR CAP ........................... 10 CHECKING RADIATOR CAP .............................. 10 Changing Engine Coolant ...................................... 10 DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT ......................... 10 REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT .........................11 FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM ..........................11 RADIATOR ................................................................ 12 Removal and Installation ........................................ 12 REMOVAL ........................................................... 12 INSTALLATION ................................................... 14 Revision: October 2004 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 14 Checking Radiator .................................................. 14 ENGINE COOLING FAN ........................................... 15 Removal and Installation (Crankshaft driven type)... 15 REMOVAL ........................................................... 15 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 15 INSTALLATION ................................................... 15 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 15 Removal and Installation (Motor driven type) ......... 16 REMOVAL ........................................................... 16 INSTALLATION ................................................... 16 WATER PUMP .......................................................... 17 Removal and Installation ........................................ 17 REMOVAL ........................................................... 17 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 17 INSTALLATION ................................................... 17 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 18 THERMOSTAT AND WATER PIPING ...................... 19 Removal and Installation ........................................ 19 REMOVAL ........................................................... 19 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 20 INSTALLATION ................................................... 20 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 20 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 21 Standard and Limit .................................................. 21 ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) .................................................................. 21 THERMOSTAT .................................................... 21 RADIATOR .......................................................... 21 CO-1 2005 Titan F G H I J K L M PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EBS00KNE The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precautions for Liquid Gasket EBS00NIL REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING ● After removing the bolts and nuts, separate the mating surface and remove the old liquid gasket sealing using Tool. Tool number ● ● : KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: Do not damage the mating surfaces. Tap the seal cutter to insert it. In areas where the Tool is difficult to use, lightly tap to slide it. WBIA0566E LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. Remove the old liquid gasket adhering to the gasket application surface and the mating surface using suitable tool. ● Remove the liquid gasket completely from the groove of the liquid gasket application surface, bolts, and bolt holes. Thoroughly clean the mating surfaces and remove adhering moisture, grease and foreign material. PBIC0003E Revision: October 2004 CO-2 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS 3. Attach the liquid gasket tube to the Tool. Tool number 4. : WS39930000 ( — A ) Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . Apply the liquid gasket without breaks to the specified location with the specified dimensions. CO C WBIA0567E D If there is a groove for the liquid gasket application, apply the liquid gasket to the groove. ● As for the bolt holes, normally apply the liquid gasket inside the holes. If specified in the procedure, it should also be applied outside the holes. ● Within five minutes of liquid gasket application, install the mating component. ● If the liquid gasket protrudes, wipe it off immediately. ● Do not retighten after the installation. ● Wait 30 minutes or more after installation before refilling the engine with engine oil and engine coolant. CAUTION: If there are specific instructions in this manual, observe them. ● E F G SEM159F H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 CO-3 2005 Titan PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 EBS00KNG The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Description Tool name KV10111100 (J-37228) Seal cutter Removing steel oil pan and rear timing chain case NT046 WS39930000 ( — ) Tube pressure Pressing the tube of liquid gasket S-NT052 EG17650301 (J-33984-A) Radiator cap tester adapter Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap and radiator filler neck a: 28 (1.10) dia. b: 31.4 (1.236) dia. c: 41.3 (1.626) dia. Unit: mm (in) S-NT564 — (J-23688) Engine coolant refractometer Checking concentration of ethylene glycol in engine coolant WBIA0539E Commercial Service Tools EBS00KNH Tool name Description Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts PBIC0190E Radiator cap tester Checking radiator and radiator cap PBIC1982E Revision: October 2004 CO-4 2005 Titan PREPARATION Tool name Description Coolant system tester adapter Adapting radiator cap tester to reservoir filler neck A CO C WBIA0408E Coolant system tester adapter Adapting radiator cap tester to reservoir cap D E WBIA0409E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 CO-5 2005 Titan OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS Troubleshooting Chart PFP:00012 EBS00KNI Symptom Check items Water pump malfunction Worn or loose drive belt Thermostat stuck closed — Dust contamination or paper clogging Damaged fins Physical damage Poor heat transfer Clogged radiator cooling tube Excess foreign material (rust, dirt, sand, etc.) Water cut valve malfunction Excess foreign material (rust, dirt, sand, etc.), physical damage — Cooling fan does not operate Reduced air flow High resistance to fan rotation Fan assembly — Damaged fan blades Cooling system parts malfunction Damaged radiator shroud — — — Improper engine coolant mixture ratio — — — Poor engine coolant quality — Engine coolant density — Loose clamp Cooling hose Water pump Cracked hose Poor sealing Loose Radiator cap Engine coolant leaks Poor sealing O-ring for damage, deterioration or improper fitting Insufficient engine coolant Radiator Cracked radiator tank Cracked radiator core Reservoir tank Overflowing reservoir tank Revision: October 2004 CO-6 Exhaust gas leaks into cooling system Cracked reservoir tank Cylinder head deterioration Cylinder head gasket deterioration 2005 Titan OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS Symptom Check items High engine rpm under no load Abusive driving Driving in low gear for extended time A CO Driving at extremely high speed — Overload on engine Installed improper size wheels and tires Except cooling system parts malfunction C Powertrain system malfunction — D Dragging brakes Improper ignition timing Blocked bumper E — Installed car brassiere Blocked radiator grille Blocked or restricted air flow Blocked radiator Mud contamination or paper clogging F — — Blocked condenser G Blocked air flow Installed large fog lamp H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 CO-7 2005 Titan COOLING SYSTEM COOLING SYSTEM Cooling Circuit PFP:21020 EBS00KNJ WBIA0439E Revision: October 2004 CO-8 2005 Titan COOLING SYSTEM System Drawing EBS00KNK A CO C D E F G H I WBIA0463E J K L M Revision: October 2004 CO-9 2005 Titan ENGINE COOLANT ENGINE COOLANT Inspection PFP:KQ100 EBS00KNL LEVEL CHECK ● ● Check if the engine coolant reservoir tank level is within MIN to MAX level when engine is cool. Adjust engine coolant level as necessary. SMA412B CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS WARNING: Never remove the radiator or reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high-pressure engine coolant escaping from the radiator or reservoir. ● To check for leakage, apply pressure to the cooling system at the reservoir filler neck using suitable tool and Tool. Tool number : EG17650301 (J-33984-A) Leakage test pressure ● : 137 kPa (1.4 kg/cm, 20 psi) CAUTION: Higher pressure than specified may cause radiator damage. NOTE: In case that engine coolant decreases, replenish cooling system with engine coolant. If any concerns are found, repair or replace damaged parts. WBIA0612E CHECKING RESERVOIR CAP ● Check reservoir cap relief pressure using suitable tool and Tool. Tool number Standard ● : EG17650301 (J-33984-A) : 95 - 125 kPa (0.97 - 1.28 kg/cm2 , 14 - 18 psi) NOTE: Apply engine coolant to the cap seal. Replace the reservoir cap if there is any damage in the negative-pressure valve, or if the open-valve pressure is outside of the limit. WBIA0611E CHECKING RADIATOR CAP Inspect the radiator cap. NOTE: Thoroughly wipe out the radiator filler neck to remove any waxy residue or foreign material. ● Replace the cap if the metal plunger cannot be seen around the edge of the black rubber gasket. ● Replace the cap if deposits of waxy residue or other foreign material are on the black rubber gasket or the metal retainer. Changing Engine Coolant EBS00KNM Refer to MA-13, "Changing Engine Coolant" . DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT Refer to MA-13, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . Revision: October 2004 CO-10 2005 Titan ENGINE COOLANT REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT A Refer to MA-14, "REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT" . FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM Refer to MA-15, "FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM" . CO C D E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 CO-11 2005 Titan RADIATOR RADIATOR Removal and Installation PFP:21400 EBS00KNN WBIA0440E 1. Radiator 2. Bolt 3. Mounting rubber 4. A/T fluid cooler hose 5. Radiator hose (lower) 6. Flaps 7. Radiator shroud (upper) 8. Radiator shroud (lower) 9. Drain plug 10. Radiator hose (upper) 11. Reservoir tank hose 13. Reservoir tank 14. Reservoir tank cap 12. By-pass hose WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high-pressure engine coolant escaping from the radiator. REMOVAL CAUTION: Perform when the engine is cold. 1. Drain engine coolant from the radiator. Refer to MA-13, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . 2. Remove air cleaner and air duct assembly. Refer to EM-14, "REMOVAL" . 3. Disconnect A/T fluid cooler hoses. ● Install blind plug to avoid leakage of A/T fluid. 4. Disconnect radiator upper and lower hoses from radiator. CAUTION: Do not allow coolant to contact drive belts. Revision: October 2004 CO-12 2005 Titan RADIATOR 5. Remove the lower radiator shroud. ● Release the tabs, pull lower radiator shroud rearwards and down to remove. A CO C WBIA0407E D 6. Remove the radiator shroud upper bolts and remove the radiator shroud upper. E F G PBIC1535E 7. H Remove the A/C condenser bolts and brackets. NOTE: Lift A/C condenser up and forward to remove from radiator. I J K WBIA0395E 8. Remove A/T oil cooler bolts and oil cooler from radiator and position aside. L M WBIA0396E Revision: October 2004 CO-13 2005 Titan RADIATOR 9. Lift up and remove the radiator. CAUTION: Do not damage or scratch air conditioner condenser and radiator core when removing. PBIC1536E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ● ● Check for leaks of engine coolant. Refer to CO-10, "CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS" . Start and warm up the engine. Visually check for leaks of the engine coolant and A/T fluid. Checking Radiator EBS00KNP Check radiator for mud or clogging. If necessary, clean radiator as follows. CAUTION: ● Be careful not to bend or damage the radiator fins. ● When radiator is cleaned without removal, remove all surrounding parts such as cooling fan, radiator shroud and horns. Then tape the harness and electrical connectors to prevent water from entering. 1. Apply water by hose to the back side of the radiator core vertically downward. 2. Apply water again to all radiator core surfaces. 3. Stop washing when dirt and debris no longer flow out from the radiator. 4. Blow air into the back side of radiator core vertically downward. Use compressed air lower than 490 kPa (5 kg/cm2 , 71 psi) and keep distance more than 30 cm (11.8 in). Blow air again into all the radiator core surfaces until no water sprays out. ● 5. Revision: October 2004 CO-14 2005 Titan ENGINE COOLING FAN ENGINE COOLING FAN Removal and Installation (Crankshaft driven type) PFP:21140 A EBS00KNQ CO C D WBIA0632E 1. Cooling fan 4. Cooling fan pulley 2. Fan coupling 3. E Fan bracket REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. F Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to EM-14, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the engine front undercover using power tool. Remove the lower radiator shroud. Refer to CO-12, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the drive belt. Refer to EM-12, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the cooling fan. G H INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Fan Coupling Inspect fan coupling for oil leakage and bimetal conditions. I J K SLC072 L Fan Bracket ● ● Visually check that there is no significant looseness in the fan bracket shaft, and that it turns smoothly by hand. If there are any unusual concerns, replace the cooling fan pulley. M WBIA0418E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Install cooling fan with its front mark “F” facing front of engine. Refer to CO-15, "Removal and Installation (Crankshaft driven type)" . INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ● Check for leaks of the engine coolant. Refer to CO-10, "CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS" . Revision: October 2004 CO-15 2005 Titan ENGINE COOLING FAN ● Start and warm up the engine. Visually make sure that there are no leaks of the engine coolant. Removal and Installation (Motor driven type) EBS00KNR REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove front grille. Refer to EI-20, "Removal and Installation" . Disconnect harness connector from fan motor. Remove the bolt and remove the fan grille and motor assembly. WBIA0397E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Cooling fan is controlled by ECM. For details, refer to EC-436, "Cooling Fan Operation" . Revision: October 2004 CO-16 2005 Titan WATER PUMP WATER PUMP Removal and Installation PFP:21020 A EBS00KNS CO C D E F KBIA2543E 1. Gasket 2. Water pump 3. Water pump pulley H CAUTION: ● When removing water pump, be careful not to get engine coolant on drive belt. ● Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as a unit. I REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Drain engine coolant so that no engine coolant comes out from water pump fitting hole. Refer to MA-13, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . CAUTION: Perform when the engine is cold. Remove the engine front undercover using power tool. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to EM-14, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the drive belt. Refer to EM-12, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the water pump pulley. Remove the water pump. ● Engine coolant will leak from the cylinder block, so have a receptacle ready below. CAUTION: Handle water pump vane so that it does not contact any other parts. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ● ● ● Visually check that there is no significant dirt or rust on the water pump body and vane. Make sure there is no looseness in the vane shaft, and that it turns smoothly when rotated by hand. Replace the water pump assembly, if necessary. KBIA2552E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 G CO-17 2005 Titan J K L M WATER PUMP ● After installation bleed the air from the cooling system. Refer to MA-14, "REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT" . INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ● ● Check for leaks of engine coolant. Refer to CO-10, "CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS" . Start and warm up engine. Visually check for leaks of the engine coolant. Revision: October 2004 CO-18 2005 Titan THERMOSTAT AND WATER PIPING THERMOSTAT AND WATER PIPING Removal and Installation PFP:21200 A EBS00KNT CO C D E F G H I J KBIA2501E K 1. Heater pipe 2. Gasket 3. Water outlet 4. Gasket 5. O-ring 6. O-ring 7. Thermostat housing 8. Rubber ring 9. Thermostat 10. Water inlet 11. Water suction hose 12. Water suction pipe 13. Gasket 14. Heater pipe L M REMOVAL Removal of Thermostat 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Drain engine coolant from the radiator. Refer to MA-13, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . CAUTION: Perform when engine is cold. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to EM-14, "REMOVAL" . Remove the engine room cover using power tools. Disconnect the water suction hose from the water inlet. Remove the water inlet and thermostat. Removal of Thermostat Housing, Water Outlet and Heater Pipe 1. 2. Remove the intake manifold. Refer to EM-15, "REMOVAL" . Remove the thermostat housing, water outlet and heater pipe. Revision: October 2004 CO-19 2005 Titan THERMOSTAT AND WATER PIPING Removal of Water Cut Valve 1. 2. 3. 4. Drain the engine coolant from the radiator. Refer to MA-13, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . CAUTION: Perform when the engine is cold. Disconnect the heater hoses. Disconnect the water valve electrical connector. Remove the water cut valve. Installation of Water Cut Valve Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Check for leaks of the engine coolant using suitable tool. Refer to CO-10, "CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS" . ● Start and warm up the engine. Visually make sure that there is no leaks of the engine coolant. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ● ● ● ● Place a thread so that it is caught in the valve of the thermostat. Immerse fully in a container filled with water. Heat while stirring. The valve opening temperature is the temperature at which the valve opens and falls from the thread. Continue heating. Check the full-open lift amount. After checking the full-open lift amount, lower the water temperature and check the valve closing temperature. SLC252B Standard values: Thermostat Valve opening temperature 80 - 84°C (176 - 183° F) Full-open lift amount More than 10 mm/ 95°C (0.39 in/ 203°F) Valve closing temperature 77°C (171°F) or lower INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Installation of Thermostat ● ● Install the thermostat with the whole circumference of each flange part fit securely inside the rubber ring as shown. Install the thermostat with the jiggle valve facing upwards. KBIA2502E Installation of Water Outlet Pipe and Heater Pipe First apply a neutral detergent to the O-rings, then quickly insert the insertion parts of the water outlet pipe and heater pipe into the installation holes. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ● ● Check for leaks of the engine coolant. Refer to CO-10, "CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS" . Start and warm up the engine. Visually check for leaks of the engine coolant. Revision: October 2004 CO-20 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Standard and Limit PFP:00030 A EBS00KNU ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) Unit: Engine coolant capacity with reservoir (“MAX” level) (US gal, Imp gal) 12.2 (3 1/4, 2 5/8) CO THERMOSTAT Valve opening temperature C 80° - 84°C (176° - 183°F) Maximum valve lift More than 10 mm at 95°C (0.39 in at 203°F) Valve closing temperature 77°C (171°F) or lower D RADIATOR Unit: kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) Reservoir cap relief pressure Standard E 95 - 125 (0.97- 1.28, 14 - 18) Leakage test pressure 137 (1.4, 20) F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 CO-21 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Revision: October 2004 CO-22 2005 Titan K ELECTRICAL A B SECTION DRIVER INFORMATION SYSTEM C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTION ............................................................ 3 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 3 PREPARATION ........................................................... 4 Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 4 COMBINATION METERS ........................................... 5 System Description .................................................. 5 UNIFIED METER CONTROL UNIT ...................... 5 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ........ 6 WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE ........................ 6 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE ....................... 6 A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE ........................ 6 VOLTAGE GAUGE ................................................ 6 TACHOMETER ..................................................... 6 FUEL GAUGE ....................................................... 6 SPEEDOMETER ................................................... 6 CAN Communication System Description ................ 7 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..... 7 Combination Meter ................................................... 8 CHECK .................................................................. 8 Circuit Diagram ........................................................ 9 Wiring Diagram — METER — ................................ 10 Terminals and Reference Value for Combination Meter ...................................................................... 12 Meter/Gauge Operation and Do/Trip Meter ............ 13 SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION .......................... 13 HOW TO INITIATE COMBINATION METER SELF- DIAGNOSIS MODE ................................. 13 COMBINATION METER SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE FUNCTIONS ........................................... 13 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis ................ 17 Diagnosis Flow ....................................................... 17 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection ........ 18 Symptom Chart ...................................................... 19 Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection ............................ 19 Water Temperature Signal Inspection .................... 19 Engine Speed Signal Inspection ............................ 19 Engine Oil Pressure Signal Inspection ................... 20 Revision: October 2004 Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection .......................... 22 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT ............................. 22 LOW-FUEL WARNING LAMP ............................. 22 Fuel Gauge Fluctuates, Indicates Wrong Value, or Varies ...................................................................... 24 Fuel Gauge Does Not Move to Full-position ........... 24 Electrical Components Inspection .......................... 25 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK ................ 25 Removal and Installation of Combination Meter ..... 25 COMPASS AND THERMOMETER ........................... 26 System Description ................................................. 26 OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY ................. 26 DIRECTION DISPLAY ......................................... 26 Wiring Diagram — COMPAS — ............................. 27 Trouble Diagnoses ................................................. 28 PRELIMINARY CHECK FOR THERMOMETER... 28 INSPECTION/COMPASS AND THERMOMETER ..................................................................... 28 Calibration Procedure for Compass ....................... 29 CORRECTION FUNCTIONS OF COMPASS ...... 29 INITIAL CORRECTION PROCEDURE FOR COMPASS ........................................................... 29 WARNING LAMPS .................................................... 30 Schematic ............................................................... 30 Wiring Diagram — WARN — .................................. 31 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp Stays Off (Ignition Switch ON) ............................................................. 37 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp Does Not Turn Off (Oil Pressure Is Normal) ................................................ 39 A/T INDICATOR ........................................................ 40 Wiring Diagram — AT/IND — ................................. 40 A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate ........................... 41 WARNING CHIME ..................................................... 42 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 42 System Description ................................................. 43 FUNCTION .......................................................... 43 IGNITION KEY WARNING CHIME ..................... 43 LIGHT WARNING CHIME ................................... 43 SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME ........................... 44 CAN Communication System Description .............. 44 DI-1 2005 Titan F G H I J DI L M Wiring Diagram — CHIME — ................................. 45 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM ................ 47 Terminals and Reference Value for Combination Meter ...................................................................... 48 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis ................ 48 Preliminary Check .................................................. 48 INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ............................................. 48 CONSULT-II Function (BCM) .................................. 50 CONSULT-IIBASICOPERATIONPROCEDURE ... 50 DATA MONITOR .................................................. 51 ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 51 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ........................... 52 All Warning Chimes Do Not Operate ...................... 52 Key Warning Chime and Light Warning Chime Do Not Operate (Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Operate) ......................................................................... 53 Key Warning Chime Does Not Operate .................. 54 Light Warning Chime Does Not Operate ................ 56 Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Not Operate ......... 57 REAR SONAR SYSTEM ........................................... 59 ComponentParts and Harness Connector Location... 59 System Description ................................................. 60 FUNCTION .......................................................... 60 REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH .............. 60 Revision: October 2004 DI-2 SONAR BUZZER .................................................60 REAR SONAR SENSOR .....................................61 Wiring Diagram — SONAR — ................................62 Terminals And Reference Value For Sonar Control Unit ..........................................................................64 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis ................64 Pre-diagnosis Inspection .........................................65 SENSOR STATUS CHECK .................................65 Self-diagnosis Function ...........................................65 ENTERING DIAGNOSTICS MODE .....................65 REQUESTING NUMBER OF FAULT CODES MODE ..................................................................65 REQUESTING FAULT CODES MODE ................66 IDLING OR CLEARING FAULT CODES MODE...66 Preliminary Check ...................................................67 INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .............................................67 Symptom Chart .......................................................68 Component Inspection ............................................69 SONAR BUZZER .................................................69 REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH ..............69 REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF INDICATOR .........70 Removal and Installation of Rear Sonar System ...70 REAR SONAR SENSORS ...................................70 SONAR CONTROL UNIT ....................................70 2005 Titan PRECAUTION PRECAUTION PFP:00011 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A EKS00ACO The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis B C D E F G EKS00ACP When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● Refer to GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" . ● Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" for power distribution circuit. When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● Refer to GI-11, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" . ● Refer to GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" . H I J DI L M Revision: October 2004 DI-3 2005 Titan PREPARATION PREPARATION Commercial Service Tool PFP:00002 EKS00ACQ Tool name Description Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts. PBIC0191E Revision: October 2004 DI-4 2005 Titan COMBINATION METERS COMBINATION METERS System Description PFP:24814 A EKS00ACR UNIFIED METER CONTROL UNIT ● ● ● ● ● Speedometer, odometer, tachometer, fuel gauge, oil pressure gauge, voltage meter, A/T temperature gauge, and water temperature gauge are controlled by the unified meter control unit, which is built into the combination meter. Warning indicators are controlled by signals drawn from the CAN communication system, and components connected directly to the combination meter. Digital meter is adopted for odometer/trip meters*, as well as the A/T position indicator display. *The record of the odometer is kept even if the battery cable is disconnected. Odometer/trip meters and A/T indicator segments can be checked in diagnosis mode. Meters/gauges can be checked in diagnosis mode. Illumination control B C D E The unified meter control unit outputs the speedometer, odometer/trip meters, tachometer, engine oil pressure gauge, voltage meter, A/T indicator, A/T oil temperature gauge, fuel and temperature gauge lighting when the ignition switch is turned on. When the headlamp (combination) switch is turned on, the illumination control switch can be used to adjust the brightness of the combination meter illumination and the odometer/trip meters and meter illumination. When the ignition switch is turned from the OFF to the ON position, the combination meter dial lighting will remain off for 0.7 seconds. For additional combination meter illumination control information, refer to LT-151, "System Description" . F G H I J DI L M Revision: October 2004 DI-5 2005 Titan COMBINATION METERS POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Power is supplied at all times ● through 10A fuse [No.19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to combination meter terminal 8. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse [No.14, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to combination meter terminal 24. With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse [No.4, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to combination meter terminal 1. Ground is supplied ● to combination meter terminal 17 ● through body grounds M57, M61 and M79. WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE The water temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. ECM provides an engine coolant temperature signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines. ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE The engine oil pressure gauge indicates the engine oil pressure. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied ● through combination meter terminal 22 ● to oil pressure sensor terminal 1. Ground is supplied ● to combination meter terminal 21 ● through oil pressure sensor terminal 3. The combination meter receives the oil pressure signal from oil pressure sensor ● through oil pressure sensor terminal 2 ● to combination meter terminal 20. NOTE: This gauge is not designed to indicate low oil level. Use the oil level gauge to check the oil level. A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE The A/T oil temperature gauge indicates the A/T fluid temperature. TCM provides a A/T oil temperature signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines. VOLTAGE GAUGE The voltage gauge indicates the battery/charging system voltage. The voltage gauge is regulated by the unified meter control unit. TACHOMETER The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). ECM provides an engine speed signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines. FUEL GAUGE The fuel gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the fuel tank. The fuel gauge is regulated by the unified meter control unit and a variable resistor signal supplied ● to combination meter terminal 15. ● through fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 2 ● through fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 5 ● from combination meter terminal 16. SPEEDOMETER ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) provides a vehicle speed signal to the combination meter via CAN communication lines. Revision: October 2004 DI-6 2005 Titan COMBINATION METERS CAN Communication System Description EKS00ACS A Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Component Parts and Harness Connector Location EKS00ACT B C D E F G H I WKIA3520E J DI L M Revision: October 2004 DI-7 2005 Titan COMBINATION METERS Combination Meter EKS00ACU CHECK WKIA3521E Revision: October 2004 DI-8 2005 Titan COMBINATION METERS Circuit Diagram EKS00ACV A B C D E F G H I J DI L M WKWA2379E Revision: October 2004 DI-9 2005 Titan COMBINATION METERS Wiring Diagram — METER — EKS00ACW WKWA2380E Revision: October 2004 DI-10 2005 Titan COMBINATION METERS A B C D E F G H I J DI L M WKWA2381E Revision: October 2004 DI-11 2005 Titan COMBINATION METERS Terminals and Reference Value for Combination Meter Terminal No. Wire color 1 O Condition EKS00ACX Ignition switch Operation or condition Reference value (V) (Approx.) Ignition switch ACC or ON ACC — Battery voltage Battery power supply Item 8 Y/R OFF — Battery voltage 11 L CAN-H — — — 12 P CAN-L — — — 15 Y/L Fuel level sensor signal — — Refer to DI-22, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection" . 16 B/P Fuel level sensor and oil pressure sensor ground ON — Refer to DI-22, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection" . 17 B Ground — — 18 BR Illumination control switch — 20 Y Oil pressure sensor signal ON — 0 - 5V 22 GR/L Oil pressure sensor power supply ON — 5V 24 O/L Ignition switch ON or START ON — Battery voltage Revision: October 2004 Lighting switch ON DI-12 0V Refer to LT-152, "ILLUMINATION OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH" . 2005 Titan COMBINATION METERS Meter/Gauge Operation and Do/Trip Meter EKS00ACY A SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION The following items can be checked during Combination Meter Self-Diagnosis Mode. ● Gauge sweep and present gauge values. ● Illuminates all odometer, fuel, and engine temperature segments. ● Illuminates all micro controlled lamps/LEDs regardless of switch configuration. ● Displays estimated present battery voltage. ● Displays seat belt buckle switch LH status. B C HOW TO INITIATE COMBINATION METER SELF- DIAGNOSIS MODE NOTE: Once entered, Combination Meter Self-Diagnosis Mode will function with the ignition switch in ON or START. Combination Meter Self-Diagnosis Mode will exit upon turning the ignition switch to OFF or ACC. To initiate Combination Meter Self-Diagnosis Mode, refer to the following procedure. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON, while holding the odometer/trip meter switch for 5 - 8 seconds. NOTE: If the diagnosis function is activated the odometer/trip meter will display tESt. D E F COMBINATION METER SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE FUNCTIONS To interpret Combination Meter Self-Diagnosis Mode functions, refer to the following table. G Event Odometer/trip meter A/B switch held from 5 to 8 seconds (or until released) Odometer Display Description of Test/Data tESt Notes: Return to normal operation of all lamps/LEDs and displays hex ROM rev. If a ROM checksum fault exists, display alternates between "r XXXX" and "FAIL". I Odometer/trip meter A/B switch engaged and released = next test requested rXXXX, FAIL Next test requested nrXXXX Displays hex ROM rev as stored in NVM. GAGE Performs sweep of all gauges, then displays present gauge values. Performs checksum tests on ROM and EE. Gauges sweep within 10 seconds Next test requested (All segments illuminated) Lights all odometer/trip meter, fuel, and engine temperature display segments. Initiating self-diagnosis mode complete Next test requested bulb Illuminates all micro-controlled lamps/LEDs regardless of SW configuration. Next test requested EE XX, FAIL Hex EE level. If EE checksum fault exists, display alternates between "EE XX" and "FAIL". Next test requested dtXXXX Hex coding of final manufacturing test date. Next test requested Revision: October 2004 H Initiating self-diagnosis mode DI-13 J DI L M 2005 Titan COMBINATION METERS Event Odometer Display Description of Test/Data Notes: Next test requested Sc1XX Displays 8-bit software configuration value in Hex format. Bit Coding 7-3 = reserved for future use 2 = TCS/VDC 0 = not present 1 = present 1 = Shift type 0 = Column shift 1 = Floor shift 0 = ICC 0 = not present 1 = present Next test requested Sc2XX Displays 8-bit software configuration value in Hex format. Bit coding 7-0 = Reserved for future use Next test requested EprXX Displays 8-bit software configuration value in Hex format. Bit Coding 7-2 = reserved for future use 1 = A/T Oil Temp (gauge) 0 = not present 1 = present 1 = Odo Units 0 = kilometers 1 = miles Next test requested 1nFXX Displays 8-bit market info value in Hex format. $31 = USA $2A = Canada Next test requested cYLXX Displays 8-bit engine configuration value in Hex format. $08 = 8 cylinder $06 = 6 cylinder Next test requested FFXXXX Displays 16-bit fuel flow constant "Q" in tenths of cc/min in Hex format. $0000 - $FFFF Next test requested tF Displays 16-bit tire factor "A" in hundredths in Hex format. $0000 - $FFFF Next test requested ot1XX Displays oil pressure telltale "on" threshold in A/D counts in Hex format. $00 - $FF Next test requested ot0XX Displays oil pressure telltale "off" threshold in A/D counts in Hex format. $00 - $FF XXXXX Raw uncompensated english speed value in hundredths of MPH. Speedometer indicates present speed. Will display "-----" if message is not received. Will display "99999" if data received is invalid Next test requested XXXXX Raw uncompensated metric speed value in hundredths of KPH. Speedometer indicates present speed. Will display "-----" if message is not received. Will display "99999" if data received is invalid Next test requested tXXXX Tachometer value in RPM. Tachometer indicates present RPM. Will display "-----" if message is not received. F1 XXXX Present ratioed fuel level A/D input 1 in decimal format. Fuel gauge indicates present filtered level. 000-009 = Short circuit 010-254 = Normal range 255 = Open circuit --- = Missing 5 seconds XXXC Last temperature gauge input value in degrees C. Temperature gauge indicates present filtered temperature. Will display "---"C if message is not received. Will display "999" if data received is invalid. Next test requested Next test requested Next test requested Revision: October 2004 DI-14 2005 Titan COMBINATION METERS Event Odometer Display Description of Test/Data Notes: A Next test requested BAtXX.X Estimated present battery voltage. Next test requested rES -X Seat belt buckle switch LH status. Next test requested PA -XX Hex value port A. Next test requested Pb -XX Hex value port B. Next test requested PE -XX Hex value port E. Next test requested PL -XX Hex value port L. Next test requested P6 -XX Hex value port K. Next test requested Pn -XX Hex value port M. Next test requested PP -XX Hex value port P. Next test requested PS -XX Hex value port S. Next test requested Pt -XX Hex value port T. Next test requested Pu -XX Hex value port U. Next test requested P4 -XX Hex value port V. Next test requested Puu -XX Hex value port W. Next test requested A01XXX A/D port A/D value (nonratioed). 0-255 Next test requested A02XXX A/D port A/D value (nonratioed). 0-255 Next test requested A03XXX A/D port A/D value (nonratioed). 0-255 Next test requested A04XXX A/D port A/D value (nonratioed). 0-255 Next test requested A05XXX A/D port A/D value (nonratioed). 0-255 Next test requested A06XXX A/D port A/D value (nonratioed). 0-255 Next test requested A07XXX A/D port A/D value (nonratioed). 0-255 Next test requested A08XXX A/D port A/D value (nonratioed). 0-255 Next test requested A09XXX A/D port A/D value (nonratioed). 0-255 Next test requested A10XXX A/D port A/D value (nonratioed). 0-255 Next test requested A11XXX A/D port A/D value (nonratioed). 0-255 Next test requested A12XXX A/D port A/D value (nonratioed). 0-255 Next test requested A13XXX A/D port A/D value (nonratioed). 0-255 Next test requested A14XXX A/D port A/D value (nonratioed). 0-255 Next test requested A15XXX A/D port A/D value (nonratioed). 0-255 Next test requested PA0-XX Hex value representing state of A/D ports 0-7. Next test requested PA1-XX Hex value representing state of A/D ports 0-7. Revision: October 2004 DI-15 1= Buckled 0 = Unbuckled B C D E F G H I J DI L M 2005 Titan COMBINATION METERS Event Odometer Display Description of Test/Data Notes: Next test requested Thr-XXX Decimal value of thermistor A/D reading. 0-255 Next test requested D-HI Meter/LCD Illumination. Full daytime brightness all LCD segments active Next test requested N-HI Meter/LCD Illumination. Full nighttime brightness all LCD segments active Next test requested N-LO Meter/LCD Illumination. Min. nighttime brightness all LCD segments active Next test requested GAGE Revision: October 2004 Return to beginning of selfdiagnosis. DI-16 2005 Titan COMBINATION METERS How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. EKS00ACZ A Confirm the symptom or customer complaint. Perform diagnosis according to diagnosis flow. Refer to DI-17, "Diagnosis Flow" . According to the symptom chart, repair or replace the cause of the symptom. Does the meter operate normally? If so, go to 5. If not, go to 2. Inspection End. Diagnosis Flow B EKS00AD0 C 1. CHECK WARNING INDICATOR ILLUMINATION 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Make sure warning indicators (such as malfunction indicator lamp and oil pressure low/coolant temperature high warning indicator) illuminate. Do warning indicators illuminate? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Check ignition power supply system of combination meter. Refer to DI-18, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection" . D E F 2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS OPERATION OF COMBINATION METER Perform combination meter self-diagnosis. Refer to DI-13, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION" . Does self-diagnosis function operate? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Check combination meter power supply and ground circuit. Refer to DI-18, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection" . 3. CHECK ODOMETER OPERATION G H I Check segment display status of odometer. Is the display normal? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" . J DI L WKIA1531E 4. CHECK COMBINATION METER CIRCUIT M Check indication of each meter/gauge in self-diagnosis mode. OK or NG OK >> Go to DI-19, "Symptom Chart" . NG >> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" . WKIA1532E Revision: October 2004 DI-17 2005 Titan COMBINATION METERS Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection EKS00AD1 1. CHECK FUSES Check for blown combination meter fuses. Unit Power source Combination meter Fuse No. Battery 19 Ignition switch ON or START 14 Ignition switch ACC or ON 4 Refer to DI-10, "Wiring Diagram — METER —" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect combination meter connector. Check voltage between combination meter harness connector terminals and ground. Terminals Ignition switch position (+) Connector Terminal (Wire color) (–) 1 (O) M24 8 (Y/R) Ground 24 (O/L) OFF ACC ON 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage 0V 0V Battery voltage WKIA1815E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the harness for open between combination meter and fuse. 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector terminal and ground. Terminals (+) (–) Connector Terminal (Wire color) M24 17 (B) Ground Continuity Yes WKIA1526E OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: October 2004 DI-18 2005 Titan COMBINATION METERS Symptom Chart EKS00AD2 A Trouble phenomenon Possible cause Improper tachometer indication. Refer to DI-19, "Engine Speed Signal Inspection" . Improper water temperature gauge indication. Refer to DI-19, "Water Temperature Signal Inspection" . Improper speedometer or odometer. Refer to DI-19, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection" . Improper engine oil pressure gauge indication. Refer to DI-20, "Engine Oil Pressure Signal Inspection" . Improper A/T oil temperature gauge indication. Refer to AT-127, "DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT" . Improper voltage meter indication. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" . B C D Improper fuel gauge indication. Fuel warning lamp indication is irregular. Refer to DI-22, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection" . More than one gauge does not give proper indication. Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" . Improper A/T position indication. Refer to DI-40, "A/T INDICATOR" . Illumination control does not operate properly. Refer to LT-151, "ILLUMINATION" . E F Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection EKS00AD3 1. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS G Perform ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-24, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" . Self-diagnostic result content No malfunction detected>>Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" . Malfunction detected>>Perform the "Diagnostic Procedure" for displayed DTC. H Water Temperature Signal Inspection I EKS00AD4 1. CHECK ECM SELF-DIAGNOSIS 1. Perform ECM self-diagnosis. Refer to EC-127, "SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE" . Self-diagnostic result content No malfunction detected>>Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" . Malfunction detected>>Perform "Diagnostic procedure" for displayed DTC. Engine Speed Signal Inspection J DI EKS00AD5 1. CHECK ECM SELF-DIAGNOSIS L 1. Perform ECM self-diagnosis. Refer to EC-127, "SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE" . Self-diagnostic result content No malfunction detected>>Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" . Malfunction detected>>Perform "Diagnostic procedure" for displayed DTC. M Revision: October 2004 DI-19 2005 Titan COMBINATION METERS Engine Oil Pressure Signal Inspection EKS00AD6 1. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 20 (Y) and ground. Terminals (+) Connector Terminal (Wire color) (–) M24 20 (Y) Ground Condition Voltage (V) When ignition switch is in ON position. (Engine stopped.) Yes Engine running. (Idle speed) Yes WKIA1833E OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" . NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect oil pressure sensor connector F4. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 22 (GR/L) and ground. Voltage : Approx. 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" . WKIA1834E 3. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect combination connector M24. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 22 (GR/L) and oil pressure sensor harness connector F4 terminal 1 (GR/L). Continuity should exist. 4. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 22 (GR/L) and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA1835E Revision: October 2004 DI-20 2005 Titan COMBINATION METERS 4. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. A Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 20 (Y) and oil pressure sensor harness connector F4 terminal 2 (Y). B Continuity should exist. 2. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 20 (Y) and ground. C Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair harness or connector. D E WKIA1836E 5. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT F Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 16 (B/P) and oil pressure sensor harness connector F4 terminal 3 (B/P). G Continuity should exist. H OK or NG OK >> Replace oil pressure sensor. NG >> Repair harness or connector. I WKIA1837E J DI L M Revision: October 2004 DI-21 2005 Titan COMBINATION METERS Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection EKS00AD7 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT The following symptoms do not indicate a malfunction. ● Depending on vehicle position or driving circumstance, the fuel in the tank shifts and the indication may fluctuate. ● If the vehicle is fueled with the ignition switch ON, the indication will update slowly. ● If the vehicle is tilted when the ignition switch is turned ON, fuel in the tank may flow to one direction resulting in a change of reading. LOW-FUEL WARNING LAMP Depending on vehicle posture or driving circumstances, the fuel level in the tank varies, and the warning lamp ON timing may be changed. 1. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR Check combination meter and fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminals (meter-side, and harness-side) for poor connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace terminals or connectors. 2. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 15 (Y/L) and ground. Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" . WKIA1816E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN OR SHORT CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect combination meter connector M24. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 15 (Y/L) and fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector C5 terminal 2 (Y/L). Continuity should exist. 4. Check continuity between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector C5 terminal 2 (Y/L) and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: October 2004 WKIA1838E DI-22 2005 Titan COMBINATION METERS 4. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT 1. A Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 16 (B/P) and fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector C5 terminal 5 (B/P). B Continuity should exist. 2. Check continuity between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector C5 terminal 5 (B/P) and ground. C Continuity should not exist. D OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA2071E E 5. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT Check the fuel level sensor unit. Refer to DI-25, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace the fuel level sensor unit. Refer to FL-5, "Removal and Installation" . F G 6. CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION Check fuel level sensor unit installation, and determine whether the float arm interferes or binds with any of the internal components in the fuel tank. OK or NG OK >> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" . NG >> Install the fuel level sensor unit properly. H I J DI L M Revision: October 2004 DI-23 2005 Titan COMBINATION METERS Fuel Gauge Fluctuates, Indicates Wrong Value, or Varies EKS00AD8 1. CHECK FUEL GAUGE FLUCTUATION Test drive vehicle to see if gauge fluctuates only during driving or just before or just after stopping. Does the indication value vary only during driving or just before or just after stopping? YES >> The fluctuation may be caused by fuel level change in the fuel tank. Condition is normal. NO >> Ask the customer about the situation when the symptom occurs in detail, Refer to DI-22, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection" . Fuel Gauge Does Not Move to Full-position EKS00AD9 1. CHECK POINTER MOVEMENT TO FULL-POSITION Does it take a long time for the pointer to move to full-position? YES or NO YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> GO TO 3. 2. CHECK IGNITION SWITCH POSITION Was the vehicle fueled with the ignition switch ON? YES or NO YES >> Be sure to fuel the vehicle with the ignition switch OFF. Otherwise, it will take a long time for the pointer to move to full-position because of the characteristic of the fuel gauge. NO >> GO TO 3. 3. OBSERVE VEHICLE POSITION Is the vehicle parked on an incline? YES or NO YES >> Check the fuel level indication with vehicle on a level surface. NO >> GO TO 4. 4. CHECK POINTER MOVEMENT TO EMPTY-POSITION During driving, does the fuel gauge move gradually toward empty-position? YES or NO YES >> Check the fuel level sensor unit. Refer to DI-25, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK" . NO >> Check fuel level sensor unit installation, and determine whether the float arm interferes or binds with any of the internal components in the fuel tank. Revision: October 2004 DI-24 2005 Titan COMBINATION METERS Electrical Components Inspection EKS00ADA A FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK For removal, refer to FL-5, "Removal and Installation" . Check Fuel Level Sensor Unit and Fuel Pump B Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump connector terminals 2 and 5. Terminals 2 5 Float position mm (in) Resistance value Ω (Approx.) C D *1 Empty 25.86 (1.02) 81.66 *2 Full 254.6 (10.02) 6.98 *1 and *2: When float rod is in contact with stopper. E LKIA0402E Removal and Installation of Combination Meter EKS00ADB F Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" . G H I J DI L M Revision: October 2004 DI-25 2005 Titan COMPASS AND THERMOMETER COMPASS AND THERMOMETER System Description PFP:24835 EKS00D78 This unit displays the following items: ● Earth magnetism and heading direction of vehicle. ● Outside air temperature. ● Caution for frozen road surfaces. WKIA1817E OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY Push the mode switch when the ignition switch is in the ON position. The outside temperature will be displayed in “°F”. ● Selecting the indication range Push the mode switch to change from °F → °C → OFF → °F. ● The indicated temperature on the thermometer is not readily affected by engine heat. It changes only when one of the following conditions is present. – The temperature detected by the ambient sensor is lower than the indicated temperature on the thermometer. – The vehicle speed is greater than 20 km/h (13 MPH). (This is to prevent the indicated temperature from being affected by engine heat during low-speed driving.) – The ignition switch has been turned to the OFF position for more than 2 hours. (The engine is cold.) DIRECTION DISPLAY Push the mode switch when the ignition switch is in the ON position. The direction will be displayed. Revision: October 2004 DI-26 2005 Titan COMPASS AND THERMOMETER Wiring Diagram — COMPAS — EKS00D79 A B C D E F G H I J DI L M WKWA2382E Revision: October 2004 DI-27 2005 Titan COMPASS AND THERMOMETER Trouble Diagnoses EKS00D7A PRELIMINARY CHECK FOR THERMOMETER 1. COOL DOWN CHECK 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Cool down the ambient sensor with water or ice. Does the indicated temperature drop? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> The system is malfunctioning. Refer to DI-28, "INSPECTION/COMPASS AND THERMOMETER" . 2. WARM UP CHECK 1. Leave the vehicle for 10 minutes. 2. With the ignition switch in the ON position, disconnect and reconnect the ambient sensor connector. Does the indicated temperature rise? YES >> The system is OK. NO >> The system is malfunctioning. Refer to DI-28, "INSPECTION/COMPASS AND THERMOMETER" . NOTE: The indicated temperature on the thermometer is not readily affected by engine heat. It changes only when one of the following conditions is present. ● The temperature detected by the ambient sensor is lower than the indicated temperature on the thermometer. ● The vehicle speed is greater than 20 km/h (13 MPH). (This is to prevent the indicated temperature from being affected by engine heat during low-speed driving.) ● The ignition switch has been turned to the OFF position for more than 2 hours. (The engine is cold.) INSPECTION/COMPASS AND THERMOMETER Symptom No display at all Possible causes Repair order 1. 10A fuse 1. Check 10A fuse [No. 12, located in fuse block (J/B)]. Turn the ignition switch ON and verify that battery positive voltage is at terminal 2 of compass and thermometer. 2. Ground circuit 3. Compass and thermometer 2. Check ground circuit for compass and thermometer. 3. Replace compass and thermometer. Forward direction indication slips off the mark or incorrect 1. In manual correction mode (Bar and display vanish) 1. Drive the vehicle and turn at an angle of 90°. Compass reading remains unchanged 1. Vehicle speed signal is not entered Displays wrong temperature when ambient temperature is between −40°C (−40°F) and 55°C (130°F) (See NOTE above) 1. Check operation 1. Perform preliminary check shown above. 2. Ambient sensor circuit 2. Check harness for open or short between ambient sensor 2 and compass and thermometer. 2. Perform the zone variation change. 2. Zone variation change is not done 2. Compass and thermometer 1. Check harness for open or short between combination meter terminal 29 and compass and thermometer terminal 8. 2. Replace compass and thermometer. 3. Vehicle speed signal is not entered 4. Ambient sensor 2 5. Compass and thermometer 3. Check harness for open or short between combination meter terminal 29 and compass and thermometer terminal 8. 4. Replace ambient sensor 2. 5. Replace compass and thermometer. Displays SC or OC 1. Ambient sensor circuit 2. Ambient sensor 2 1. Check harness for open or short between ambient sensor 2 and compass and thermometer. 3. Compass and thermometer 2. Replace ambient sensor 2. 3. Replace compass and thermometer. Revision: October 2004 DI-28 2005 Titan COMPASS AND THERMOMETER Calibration Procedure for Compass EKS00D7B The difference between magnetic North and geographical North can sometimes be great enough to cause false compass readings. In order for the compass to operate accurately in a particular zone, it must be calibrated using the following procedure. A B C D E F G H I WKIA3604E J CORRECTION FUNCTIONS OF COMPASS The direction display is equipped with automatic correction function. If the direction is not shown correctly, carry out initial correction. DI L M WKIA1817E INITIAL CORRECTION PROCEDURE FOR COMPASS 1. Pushing the Mode switch for about 10 seconds will enter the initial correction mode. The compass display will begin to flash. 2. Turn the vehicle slowly in an open, safe place. The initial correction is completed in approximately three turns. NOTE: In places where the terrestrial magnetism is extremely disturbed, the initial correction may start automatically. Revision: October 2004 DI-29 2005 Titan WARNING LAMPS WARNING LAMPS Schematic PFP:24814 EKS00ADG WKWA2383E Revision: October 2004 DI-30 2005 Titan WARNING LAMPS Wiring Diagram — WARN — EKS00ADH A B C D E F G H I J DI L M WKWA2384E Revision: October 2004 DI-31 2005 Titan WARNING LAMPS WKWA2385E Revision: October 2004 DI-32 2005 Titan WARNING LAMPS A B C D E F G H I J DI L M WKWA2386E Revision: October 2004 DI-33 2005 Titan WARNING LAMPS WKWA2369E Revision: October 2004 DI-34 2005 Titan WARNING LAMPS A B C D E F G H I J DI L M WKWA2388E Revision: October 2004 DI-35 2005 Titan WARNING LAMPS 4WD Models WKWA2389E Revision: October 2004 DI-36 2005 Titan WARNING LAMPS Oil Pressure Warning Lamp Stays Off (Ignition Switch ON) EKS00D7C 1. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 20 (Y) and ground. B Terminals C (+) Connector M24 Condition Terminal (Wire color) 20 (Y) Voltage (V) (–) D Ground When ignition switch is in ON position. (Engine stopped) Yes Engine running. (Idle speed) Yes WKIA1833E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. E F 2. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. G Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect combination meter connector M24 and oil pressure sensor connector F4. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 16 (B/P) and oil pressure sensor harness connector F4 terminal 3 (B/P). H I Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" . NG >> Repair harness or connector. J WKIA1837E DI 3. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect oil pressure sensor connector F4. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 22 (GR/L) and ground. Voltage L M : Approx. 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" . WKIA1834E Revision: October 2004 DI-37 2005 Titan WARNING LAMPS 4. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect combination meter connector M24. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 22 (GR/L) and oil pressure sensor harness connector F4 terminal 1 (GR/L). Continuity should exist. 4. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 22 (GR/L) and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA1835E 5. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 20 (Y) and oil pressure sensor harness connector F4 terminal 2 (Y). Continuity should exist. 2. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 20 (Y) and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA1836E 6. CHECK OIL PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 16 (B/P) and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace oil pressure sensor. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA2685E Revision: October 2004 DI-38 2005 Titan WARNING LAMPS Oil Pressure Warning Lamp Does Not Turn Off (Oil Pressure Is Normal) EKS00D7D A NOTE: For oil pressure inspection, refer to LU-7, "OIL PRESSURE CHECK" . 1. CHECK ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE OPERATION B Observe operation of engine oil pressure gauge. Does engine oil pressure gauge function properly? YES >> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" . NO >> Go to DI-20, "Engine Oil Pressure Signal Inspection" . C D E F G H I J DI L M Revision: October 2004 DI-39 2005 Titan A/T INDICATOR A/T INDICATOR Wiring Diagram — AT/IND — PFP:24814 EKS00ADI WKWA2390E Revision: October 2004 DI-40 2005 Titan A/T INDICATOR A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate EKS00ADJ 1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF COMBINATION METER A Perform combination meter self-diagnosis. Refer to DI-13, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" . B C 2. CHECK TCM Perform self-diagnosis of TCM. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" . NG >> Refer to DI-13, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION" . D E F G H I J DI L M Revision: October 2004 DI-41 2005 Titan WARNING CHIME WARNING CHIME Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:24814 EKS00ADK WKIA3605E Revision: October 2004 DI-42 2005 Titan WARNING CHIME System Description EKS00ADL A FUNCTION Power is supplied at all times ● through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to BCM terminal 70, and ● through 10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to key switch and key lock solenoid terminal 3 (floor shift) or key switch terminal 3 (console shift). With ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box) ● to BCM terminal 38. Ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 67 ● through body grounds M57, M61, and M79. NOTE: When ignition key warning chime, light warning chime, and seat belt warning chime are required at the same time, the priorities for each chime are the following. 1. Light warning chime 2. Ignition key warning chime 3. Seat belt warning chime B C D E F G IGNITION KEY WARNING CHIME With the key inserted in the ignition switch, the ignition switch in OFF position, and the driver's door open, the H warning chime will sound. Power is supplied ● through key switch and key lock solenoid terminal 4 (floor shift) or key switch terminal 4 (console shift) I ● to BCM terminal 37. Ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 47 J ● through front door switch LH terminal 2 ● through body grounds B7 and B19 (king cab) or through front door switch LH case ground (crew cab). BCM detects key inserted into the ignition switch, and sends key warning signal to combination meter via CAN DI communication lines. When the combination meter receives key warning signal, it sounds warning chime. LIGHT WARNING CHIME With the key removed from the ignition switch, the driver's door open, and the lighting switch (part of the combination switch) in 1st or 2nd position, the warning chime will sound. [Except when headlamp battery saver control operates (5 minutes after ignition switch is turned to OFF or ACC position) and headlamps do not illuminate.] Signal is supplied ● from combination switch (lighting switch) terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 and 10 ● to BCM terminals 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 32, 33, 34, 35 and 36. NOTE: BCM detected lighting switch in 1st or 2nd position. Refer to BCS-3, "COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION" . Ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 47 ● through front door switch LH terminal 2. ● through body grounds B7 and B19 (king cab) or through front door switch LH case ground (crew cab). Front door switch LH is case grounded. BCM detects headlamps are illuminated, and sends light warning signal to combination meter CAN communication lines. When the combination meter receives light warning signal, it sounds warning chime. Revision: October 2004 DI-43 2005 Titan L M WARNING CHIME SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME When the ignition switch is turned ON with the seat belt unfastened (seat belt buckle switch LH unfastened), warning chime will sound for approximately 6 seconds. Ground is supplied ● to combination meter terminal 27 ● through seat belt buckle switch LH terminal 1. Seat belt buckle switch LH terminal 2 is grounded through body grounds B7 and B19. The combination meter sends seat belt buckle switch LH unfastened signal to BCM via CAN communication line. BCM receives seat belt buckle switch LH unfastened signal from combination meter via CAN communication line, and sends seat belt warning signal to the combination meter via CAN communication line. When the combination meter receives the seat belt warning signal, it sounds the warning chime. The BCM controls the (6 second) duration of the seat belt warning chime. CAN Communication System Description EKS00ADM Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Revision: October 2004 DI-44 2005 Titan WARNING CHIME Wiring Diagram — CHIME — EKS00ADN A B C D E F G H I J DI L M WKWA2391E Revision: October 2004 DI-45 2005 Titan WARNING CHIME WKWA1131E Revision: October 2004 DI-46 2005 Titan WARNING CHIME Terminals and Reference Value for BCM EKS00ADO A Terminal No. 2 Condition Wire color SB Item Combination switch input 5 Ignition switch Measurement method Reference value (V) (Approx.) B ● Light switch and wiper switch OFF ● Wiper dial position 4 ON C SKIA5291E 3 G/Y Combination switch input 4 ● Light switch and wiper switch OFF ● Wiper dial position 4 ON D E F SKIA5292E G 4 Y Combination switch input 3 ● Light switch and wiper switch OFF ● Wiper dial position 4 ON H SKIA5291E 5 G/B Combination switch input 2 I ● Light switch and wiper switch OFF ● Wiper dial position 4 ON 6 V Combination switch input 1 J SKIA5292E DI ● 32 R/G Combination switch output 5 ON ● Light switch and wiper switch OFF L Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E 33 R/Y Combination switch output 4 ● Light switch and wiper switch OFF ● Wiper dial position 4 ON SKIA5292E 34 L Combination switch output 3 ● Light switch and wiper switch OFF ● Wiper dial position 4 ON SKIA5291E Revision: October 2004 DI-47 2005 Titan M WARNING CHIME Terminal No. Wire color 35 O/B 36 R/W Condition Item Ignition switch Measurement method Reference value (V) (Approx.) Combination switch output 2 Combination switch output 1 ● Light switch and wiper switch OFF ● Wiper dial position 4 ON SKIA5292E Key is removed 0 Key is inserted Battery voltage 37 B/R Key switch signal OFF 38 W/L Ignition switch ON or START ON — Battery voltage 39 L CAN-H — — — 40 P CAN-L — — — 47 SB 67 B 70 W/B Front door switch LH signal OFF ON (open) 0 OFF (closed) 5 Ground ON — 0 Battery power supply OFF — Battery voltage Terminals and Reference Value for Combination Meter Terminal No. Wire color 11 L 12 P 27 O/B Condition EKS00ADP Ignition switch Measurement method Reference value (V) (Approx.) CAN-H — — — CAN-L — — — Seat belt buckle switch LH ON Item Unfastened (ON) 0 Fastened (OFF) Battery voltage How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. EKS00ADQ Confirm the symptom or customer complaint. Understand operation description and function description. Refer to DI-43, "System Description" . Perform the preliminary check. Refer to DI-48, "Preliminary Check" . Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. Does the warning chime operate properly? If so, go to 6. If not, go to 3. Inspection End. Preliminary Check EKS00ADR INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT 1. CHECK FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK Check for blown BCM fuse or fusible link. Unit BCM Power source Fuse or fusible link No. Battery f Ignition switch ON or START 59 Refer to DI-45, "Wiring Diagram — CHIME —" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . Revision: October 2004 DI-48 2005 Titan WARNING CHIME 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect BCM connectors M18 and M20. Check voltage between BCM harness connector terminals and ground. Terminals Ignition switch position (+) Connector Terminal (Wire color) M20 70 (W/B) M18 38 (W/L) B OFF ON C Battery voltage Battery voltage D 0V Battery voltage (–) Ground OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness for open between BCM and fuse. WKIA1840E E 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT F 1. 2. G Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal 67 (B) and ground. Continuity should exist. H OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Repair harness or connector. I LIIA0915E J DI L M Revision: October 2004 DI-49 2005 Titan WARNING CHIME CONSULT-II Function (BCM) EKS00ADS CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode Description WORK SUPPORT Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received data is displayed. DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part SELF-DIAG RESULTS CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER CONFIGURATION Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. BCM part number can be read. Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect “CONSULT-II” and “CONSULT-II CONVERTER” to the data link connector, and turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0369E 2. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. BCIA0029E 3. Touch “BCM” on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen. If “BCM” is not indicated, go to BCS-11, "CONSULT–II INSPECTION PROCEDURE" . BCIA0030E Revision: October 2004 DI-50 2005 Titan WARNING CHIME 4. Touch “BUZZER” in “BCM”. A B C SKIA5788E D 5. Select “DATA MONITOR” or “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. E F G BCIA0031E DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. H Touch “BUZZER” on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen. Touch “DATA MONITOR” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen. Touch “ALL SIGNALS” or “SELECTION FROM MENU” on “DATA MONITOR” screen. ALL SIGNALS Monitors main items. SELECTION FROM MENU Selects and monitors items. 4. 5. 6. I J If “SELECTION FROM MENU” is selected, touch the item you desire to monitor. If “ALL SIGNALS” is DI selected, all control items are monitored. Touch “START”. During monitoring, touching “RECORD” can start recording the monitored item status. L Display Item List Monitored item Description IGN ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch. KEY ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch. DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch (driver side). LIGHT SW 1ST Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lighting switch. BUCKLE SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of seat belt buckle switch LH. M ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Touch “BUZZER” on “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen. Touch “ACTIVE TEST” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen. Touch the item to be tested, and check the operation. During the operation check, touching “OFF” deactivates the operation. Revision: October 2004 DI-51 2005 Titan WARNING CHIME Display Item List Test item Malfunction is detected when··· LIGHT WARN ALM This test is able to check light warning chime operation. Light warning chime sounds for 2 seconds after touching “ON” on CONSULT-II screen. IGN KEY WARN ALM This test is able to check key warning chime operation. Key warning chime sounds for 2 seconds after touching “ON” on CONSULT-II screen. SEAT BELT WARN TEST This test is able to check seat belt warning chime operation. Seat belt warning chime sounds for 2 seconds after touching “ON” on CONSULT-II screen. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Touch “BCM” on "SELECT TEST ITEM” screen. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen. Self-diagnostic results are displayed. Display Item List Monitored Item CAN communication CONSULT-II display CAN communication [U1000] Description Malfunction is detected in CAN communication. NOTE: If "CAN communication [U1000]" is displayed, after printing the monitor item, go to "CAN System". Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . All Warning Chimes Do Not Operate EKS00ADT 1. CHECK BCM CHIME OPERATION Select "BUZZER" on CONSULT-II, and perform "LIGHT WARN ALM", "IGN KEY WARN ALM", OR "SEAT BELT WARN TEST" active test. Does chime sound? YES >> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NO >> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" . SKIA6331E Revision: October 2004 DI-52 2005 Titan WARNING CHIME Key Warning Chime and Light Warning Chime Do Not Operate (Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Operate) EKS00ADU A 1. CHECK BCM INPUT SIGNAL B With CONSULT-II 1. Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. 2. With "DATA MONITOR" of "BUZZER", confirm "DOOR SW-DR" changes with the status of front door LH. When front door LH is opened When front door LH is closed C : DOOR SW-DR ON D : DOOR SW-DR OFF E LKIA0335E Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between BCM harness connector M19 terminal 47 (SB) and ground. When front door LH is opened When front door LH is closed G : Approx. 0V H : Approx. 5V OK or NG OK >> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> GO TO 2. I WKIA1515E J 2. CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH LH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connector M19 and front door switch LH connector B8. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M19 terminal 47 (SB) and front door switch LH harness connector B8 terminal 2 (SB). DI L Continuity should exist. 4. M Check continuity between BCM harness connector M19 terminal 47 (SB) and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: October 2004 WKIA1516E DI-53 2005 Titan WARNING CHIME 3. CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH LH CREW CAB MODELS Check continuity between front door switch LH connector B8 terminal 2 and exposed metal of switch while pushing and releasing switch. WKIA2023E KING CAB MODELS Check continuity between front door switch LH connector B8 terminal 2 and terminal 3 of switch while pushing and releasing switch. When front door switch LH is released When front door switch LH is pushed : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Replace the front door switch LH. Key Warning Chime Does Not Operate WKIA2804E EKS00ADV 1. CHECK FUSE Check if the key switch fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] is blown. Refer to DI-45, "Wiring Diagram — CHIME —" . Is the fuse blown? YES >> Replace the fuse. Be sure to repair the cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. NO >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK WARNING CHIME OPERATION With key removed from the ignition and the front door LH open, turn the lighting switch to 1st or 2nd position. Does warning chime sound? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> Go to DI-52, "All Warning Chimes Do Not Operate" or DI-53, "Key Warning Chime and Light Warning Chime Do Not Operate (Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Operate)" . Revision: October 2004 DI-54 2005 Titan WARNING CHIME 3. CHECK BCM INPUT SIGNAL A With CONSULT-II With "DATA MONITOR" of "BUZZER", confirm "KEY ON SW" changes when the key is inserted/removed from the ignition key cylinder. When key is inserted in ignition key cylinder When key is removed from ignition key cylinder B : KEY ON SW ON C : KEY ON SW OFF D SKIA1960E E Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 37 (B/ R) and ground. When key is inserted in ignition key cylinder When key is removed from ignition key cylinder F : Approx. 12V : Approx. 0V G OK or NG OK >> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> GO TO 4. H LKIA0255E 4. CHECK KEY SWITCH 1. 2. 3. I Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect key switch and key lock solenoid connector (floor shift) or key switch connector (column shift). J Check continuity between key switch and key lock solenoid harness connector M27 (floor shift) or key switch harness connector M80 (column shift) terminals 3 and 4. DI When key is inserted in ignition : Continuity should key cylinder exist L When key is removed from : Continuity should ignition key cylinder not exist OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace the key switch and key lock solenoid connector (floor shift) or key switch connector (column shift). Revision: October 2004 DI-55 M WKIA1830E 2005 Titan WARNING CHIME 5. CHECK KEY SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 37 (B/R) and key switch and key lock solenoid harness connector M80 (floor shift) or key switch harness connector M27 (column shift) terminal 4 (B/R). Continuity should exist. 3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 37 (B/R) and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA1841E 6. CHECK KEY SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT Check voltage between key switch and key lock solenoid harness connector M80 (floor shift) or key switch harness connector M27 (column shift) terminal 3 (Y/R) and ground. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Check harness for open or short between fuse and key switch and key lock solenoid connector (floor shift) or key switch connector (column shift). Light Warning Chime Does Not Operate WKIA1842E EKS00ADW 1. CHECK WARNING CHIME OPERATION Check key warning chime and seat belt warning chime functions. Do key warning chime and seat belt warning chime sound? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Go to DI-52, "All Warning Chimes Do Not Operate" . 2. CHECK BCM INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II 1. Select "BCM". 2. With "DATA MONITOR" of "BUZZER", confirm "LIGHT SW 1ST" status changes when the lighting switch is moved from ON (1st position) to OFF. Lighting switch ON (1st position) Lighting switch OFF : LIGHT SW 1ST ON : LIGHT SW 1ST OFF Without CONSULT-II Check combination switch. Refer to LT-93, "Combination Switch Reading Function" . OK or NG OK >> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Check lighting switch. Refer to LT-93, "Combination Switch Reading Function" . Revision: October 2004 DI-56 WKIA1877E 2005 Titan WARNING CHIME Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Not Operate EKS00ADX 1. CHECK WARNING CHIME OPERATION A 1. With key removed from the ignition and the front door LH open, turn the lighting switch to 1st or 2nd position. 2. Return lighting switch to OFF position, and insert key into ignition. Does warning chime sound for both steps? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Go to DI-52, "All Warning Chimes Do Not Operate" . 2. CHECK SEAT BELT WARNING LAMP OPERATION B C D Turn ignition switch ON. Buckle and unbuckle the driver seat belt while watching seat belt warning lamp. When seat belt is fastened When seat belt is unfastened : Warning lamp OFF : Warning lamp ON E OK or NG OK >> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> GO TO 3. F 3. CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL G 1. 2. H Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 27 (O/B) and ground. When seat belt is fastened When seat belt is unfastened : Approx. 12V : Approx. 0V I OK or NG OK >> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" . NG >> GO TO 4. J WKIA1843E DI 4. CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH L 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect seat belt buckle switch LH connector. Check continuity between seat belt buckle switch LH harness connector B12 terminals 1 and 2. When seat belt is fastened When seat belt is unfastened M : Continuity should exist : Continuity should not exist OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace the seat belt buckle switch LH. WKIA1522E Revision: October 2004 DI-57 2005 Titan WARNING CHIME 5. CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect combination meter connector. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 27 (O/B) and seat belt buckle switch LH harness connector B12 terminal 1 (O/B). Continuity should exist. 3. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 27 (O/B) and ground. Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA1831E 6. CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between seat belt buckle switch LH harness connector B12 terminal 2 (B) and ground. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" . NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA1844E Revision: October 2004 DI-58 2005 Titan REAR SONAR SYSTEM REAR SONAR SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:28532 A EKS00ADY B C D E F G H I J DI L M WKIA3522E Revision: October 2004 DI-59 2005 Titan REAR SONAR SYSTEM System Description EKS00ADZ FUNCTION With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse [No. 12 , located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to sonar control unit terminal 8, and ● through 10A fuse (No. 51, located in the IPDM E/R) ● to back-up lamp relay terminals 1 and 3. Ground is supplied ● to sonar control unit terminal 6 ● through body grounds B7 and B19. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, and the transmission gear selector lever in the R position, power is supplied ● to sonar control unit terminal 5 ● from back-up lamp relay terminal 5. With power and ground supplied, transmission gear selector lever in R position, and the rear sonar system OFF switch ON, the rear sonar system will detect obstacles within 1.8 m (5.9 ft.) of the rear sonar sensors. The vehicle operator is notified of obstacles by varied rate of tone from the sonar buzzer depending on distance of obstacle being sensed. REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH With power and ground supplied to the sonar control unit, transmission gear selector lever in R position, the sonar system can be disabled and the sonar buzzer silenced by momentarily pressing the rear sonar system OFF switch. The rear sonar system OFF indicator lamp will be illuminated in the rear sonar system OFF switch. To disable the rear sonar system, ground is supplied ● to sonar control unit terminal 13 ● through rear sonar system OFF switch terminal 1 ● through rear sonar system OFF switch terminal 2 ● from body grounds M57, M61, and M79. To light the rear sonar system OFF indicator, power is supplied ● to the rear sonar system OFF switch terminal 5 ● from sonar control unit terminal 4. Ground is supplied ● to the rear sonar system OFF switch terminal 6 ● from body grounds M57, M61, and M79. The rear sonar system and buzzer will be disabled and the rear sonar system OFF indicator will be illuminated until the ignition switch is turned OFF. When the ignition is turned ON, the rear sonar system will be enabled. Depressing the rear sonar system OFF switch momentarily will enable the rear sonar system also. Enabling the rear sonar system will cause the rear sonar system OFF indicator to go out. SONAR BUZZER With the power supplied to the sonar control unit and the transmission gear selector lever in R position, a stationary object that is at least 7.0 cm (2.8 in.) wide and 1.0 m (39.0 in.) tall and that is closer than 1.8 meters (5.9 ft.) will be detected by the rear sonar sensors, causing the sonar buzzer to sound a tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the object, the rate of the tone will increase. When the object is less than 25.0 cm (10 in.) from the rear bumper, the tone will sound continuously. Power is supplied ● to sonar buzzer terminal + ● from sonar control unit terminal 7. Ground is supplied ● to sonar buzzer terminal ● from sonar control unit terminal 3. Revision: October 2004 DI-60 2005 Titan REAR SONAR SYSTEM REAR SONAR SENSOR With power and ground supplied to the rear sonar sensors, the sonar sensors transmit a 38.4 kHz ultrasonic signal. This signal is reflected back to the sensor by objects large enough and close enough to be detected. The rear sonar sensors measure the time from the transmitted signal to the time the signal is reflected back and sends this information to the sonar control unit. Power is supplied ● to each rear sonar sensor terminal 1 ● from sonar control unit terminal 16. Ground is supplied ● to each rear sonar sensor terminal 3 ● from sonar control unit terminal 15. Signal is supplied ● to sonar control unit terminals 9, 10, 11 and 12. ● from each rear sonar sensor terminal 2 A B C D E F G H I J DI L M Revision: October 2004 DI-61 2005 Titan REAR SONAR SYSTEM Wiring Diagram — SONAR — EKS00AE0 WKWA2392E Revision: October 2004 DI-62 2005 Titan REAR SONAR SYSTEM A B C D E F G H I J DI L M WKWA2474E Revision: October 2004 DI-63 2005 Titan REAR SONAR SYSTEM Terminals And Reference Value For Sonar Control Unit EKS00AE1 CONDITION TERMINAL (COLOR) ITEM IGNITION SWITCH OPERATION Reference value (V) (Approx.) — 0 - 12 (variable) 3 (R) Sonar buzzer return ON 4 (BR/Y) Rear sonar system OFF indicator output ON 5 (G/W) Reverse signal ON ON 0 OFF Battery voltage Transmission gear selector lever R position Battery voltage Transmission gear selector lever Not R position 0 Rear sonar system OFF switch 6 (B) Sonar control unit ground — — 0 7 (L) Sonar buzzer drive signal ON — Battery voltage 8 (G/R) Sonar control unit power ON — Battery voltage 9 (GR) 10 (P) 11 (O) 12 (LG) Rear sonar sensor signal - RH outer Rear sonar sensor signal - LH outer Rear sonar sensor signal - LH inner Rear sonar sensor signal - RH inner ON ON ON ON 13 (LG) Rear sonar system OFF switch signal ON 15 (Y) Rear sonar sensor ground ON 16 (LG/B) Rear sonar sensor power ON ● Rear sonar system OFF switch ON ● Transmission gear selector lever in R position ● Distant or no obstacles ● Rear sonar system OFF switch ON ● Transmission gear selector lever in R position ● Distant or no obstacles ● Rear sonar system OFF switch ON ● Transmission gear selector lever in R position ● Distant or no obstacles ● Rear sonar system OFF switch ON ● Transmission gear selector lever in R position ● Distant or no obstacles Rear sonar system OFF switch — Ignition switch ON Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage ON 0 OFF Battery voltage 0 Battery voltage How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. EKS00AE2 Confirm the symptom or customer complaint. Understand operation description and function description. Refer to DI-60, "System Description" . Perform pre-diagnosis inspection. Refer to DI-65, "Pre-diagnosis Inspection" . Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to DI-65, "Self-diagnosis Function" . Perform the preliminary check. Refer to DI-67, "Preliminary Check" . Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. Refer to DI-68, "Symptom Chart" . Clear fault codes. Refer to DI-66, "IDLING OR CLEARING FAULT CODES MODE" . Does the rear sonar system operate properly? If so, go to 9. If not, go to 3. Inspection End. Revision: October 2004 DI-64 2005 Titan REAR SONAR SYSTEM Pre-diagnosis Inspection EKS00AE3 A SENSOR STATUS CHECK Check that the rear sonar sensors are properly aligned (bumper is not misaligned, no deformation in sensor mounting area. ● Check that snow, mud, or other foreign objects are not adhering to the rear sonar sensors. ● Check that there is no deformation, scratches, or other damage to the rear sonar sensors. ● Check that water has not accumulated in the rear sonar sensors. CAUTION: Use water, cotton swab, or other soft material for cleaning the sensors. 1. Check that there are no obstacles within each rear sonar sensor's detection range. ● B C D Detection range Rear sonar sensors 2. 3. Approx. 1.8 m (5.9 ft.) maximum Check that there are no nearby ultrasound sources (such as the sounds of vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, or truck air brakes). Check that the vehicle is on a level surface. Self-diagnosis Function 3. G H ENTERING DIAGNOSTICS MODE 2. F EKS00AE4 There are four modes of self-diagnosis; entering diagnostics, requesting number of fault codes, requesting fault codes, and idling or clearing fault codes. These steps must be followed in order. Self-diagnosis can be manually exited by turning the ignition OFF, or selecting reverse gear. Self-diagnosis will exit unless a fault code request occurs before a message is repeated five times without acknowledgement. 1. E Turn ignition switch ON. Rear sonar system OFF switch indicator lamp illuminates for three seconds and then turns off. Immediately push rear sonar system OFF switch ten times within five seconds. The sonar buzzer will sound once and the rear sonar system OFF indicator will flash once. I J DI LKIA0389E L REQUESTING NUMBER OF FAULT CODES MODE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. While in diagnostic mode, push rear sonar system OFF switch once. The sonar buzzer will sound once. Rear sonar system OFF indicator will flash once and sonar buzzer will sound once for each fault code detected. There will be a four second pause. The number of fault codes will repeat five times then pause. NOTE: Self-diagnosis will exit unless requesting fault codes occurs before five repeats ends. Revision: October 2004 DI-65 M LKIA0388E 2005 Titan REAR SONAR SYSTEM REQUESTING FAULT CODES MODE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. While in "requesting number of fault codes" mode, push rear sonar system OFF switch once. The sonar buzzer will sound once. Rear sonar system OFF indicator will flash and sonar buzzer will sound the first digit of the fault code followed by a one second pause. Rear sonar system OFF indicator will flash and sonar buzzer will sound the second digit of the fault code followed by a four second pause. The fault codes will repeat five times then pause. LKIA0390E NOTE: Requesting fault codes will exit unless the fault code is acknowledged before five repeats ends. The fault code is acknowledged by pushing the rear sonar system OFF switch once (the sonar buzzer may sound). When all fault codes have been indicated, idle mode will be entered. See the following table for fault code identification. Fault Code Malfunction Page Reference 11 Rear sonar sensor LH outer 12 Rear sonar sensor LH inner 13 Rear sonar sensor RH inner 14 Rear sonar sensor RH outer 21 Sonar buzzer DI-69, "SONAR BUZZER" 22 Rear sonar system OFF indicator DI-70, "REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF INDICATOR" 23 Rear sonar system OFF switch DI-69, "REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH" Sonar control unit Replace sonar control unit. Refer to DI-70, "SONAR CONTROL UNIT" . 24 Check harness for open or short. If NG repair or replace harness. If OK replace sensor. Refer to DI-70, "REAR SONAR SENSORS" . IDLING OR CLEARING FAULT CODES MODE NOTE: While in idle mode, self-diagnosis will automatically exit if no activity occurs for thirty seconds. 1. Push and hold rear sonar system OFF switch for three seconds to reset time-out counter. 2. Push and hold rear sonar system OFF switch for three seconds to clear codes. LKIA0391E Revision: October 2004 DI-66 2005 Titan REAR SONAR SYSTEM Preliminary Check EKS00AE5 A INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT 1. CHECK FUSES B Check for blown rear sonar system fuses. Unit Power Source Fuse Sonar control unit ON or START 12 C Refer to DI-62, "Wiring Diagram — SONAR —" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . E 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect sonar control unit connector. Check voltage between sonar control unit connector B56 terminal 8 (G/R) and ground. Terminals D F Ignition switch position G (+) Connector Terminal (Wire color) (-) B56 8 (G/R) Ground ON or START H Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness for open between sonar control unit and fuse. I WKIA1145E J 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between sonar control unit B56 terminal 6 and ground. DI L Terminals (+) (–) Connector Terminal (Wire color) B56 6 (B) Ground Continuity M Yes OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Check harness ground circuit. Revision: October 2004 WKIA1146E DI-67 2005 Titan REAR SONAR SYSTEM Symptom Chart EKS00AE6 Symptom Repair order 1. Check rear sonar system OFF switch for malfunction. Refer to DI-69, "REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH" . When the rear sonar system OFF switch is OFF, the indicator lamp does not light and the buzzer does not sound. 2. Check rear sonar system OFF switch ground circuit. 3. Check harness and connections between rear sonar system OFF switch and sonar control unit. 4. Replace sonar control unit. Refer to DI-70, "SONAR CONTROL UNIT" . 1. Check rear sonar system OFF indicator for malfunction. Refer to DI-70, "REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF INDICATOR" . When the rear sonar system OFF switch is OFF, the indicator lamp does not light but buzzer sounds. 2. Check harness and connections between rear sonar system OFF indicator and sonar control unit. 3. Replace sonar control unit. Refer to DI-70, "SONAR CONTROL UNIT" . 1. Check sonar buzzer. Refer to DI-69, "SONAR BUZZER" . 2. Check harness and connections between sonar buzzer and sonar control unit. When the rear sonar system OFF switch is OFF, the sonar buzzer does not sound but indicator lamp illuminates. 3. Replace sonar control unit. Refer to DI-70, "SONAR CONTROL UNIT" . When rear sonar system OFF switch is ON, the rear sonar system OFF indicator lamp lights up and the sonar buzzer sounds intermittently (for about 4 seconds). 1. Check harness between rear sonar sensors and sonar control unit for an open condition. 2. Check rear sonar sensors for malfunction. 3. Replace sonar control unit. Refer to DI-70, "SONAR CONTROL UNIT" . 1. Check rear sonar system OFF switch for malfunction. Refer to DI-69, "REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH" . The rear sonar system operates with the rear sonar system OFF switch OFF. 2. Check rear sonar system OFF switch ground circuit. 3. Check harness and connections between rear sonar system OFF switch and sonar control unit. 4. Replace sonar control unit. Refer to DI-70, "SONAR CONTROL UNIT" . 1. Check for PNP switch failure. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . When the transmission gear selector lever is in the R position and the rear sonar system OFF switch is OFF, the sonar system does not operate. 2. Check harness and connections between sonar control unit and PNP/reverse lamp circuits. 3. Replace sonar control unit. Refer to DI-70, "SONAR CONTROL UNIT" . Revision: October 2004 DI-68 2005 Titan REAR SONAR SYSTEM Symptom Repair order 1. Check for adhesion of snow, mud, or other foreign objects to rear sonar sensors; dew condensation; etc. Refer to DI-65, "Pre-diagnosis Inspection" . When the rear sonar system OFF switch is OFF, the indicator lamp lights up and buzzer sounds although there is no obstacle within the detection range. A 2. Check that the rear sonar sensors are properly aligned (bumper is not misaligned, no deformation in sensor mounting area B 3. Check harness and connections between rear sonar sensors and sonar control unit. C 4. Check rear sonar sensors for malfunction. 5. Replace sonar control unit. Refer to DI-70, "SONAR CONTROL UNIT" . D 1. Check rear sonar sensors for malfunction. The rear sonar sensors do not operate according to the distance between each sensor and the obstacle. (There is a large error in the obstacle detection distance. 2. Replace sonar control unit. Refer to DI-70, "SONAR CONTROL UNIT" . E 3. Check for adhesion of snow, mud, or other foreign objects to rear sonar sensors; dew condensation; etc. Refer to DI-65, "Pre-diagnosis Inspection" . F 4. Check that the rear sonar sensors are properly aligned (bumper is not misaligned, no deformation in sensor mounting area. Component Inspection G EKS00AE7 SONAR BUZZER 1. 2. Disconnect the sonar buzzer connector. Check continuity between buzzer connector M117 terminal (+) and terminal (-) (+) - (-) H I : Continuity should exist J WKIA1534E DI REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH Disconnect the rear sonar system OFF switch M116. Check the continuity between following terminals. Rear sonar system OFF switch Terminal to be inspected Continuity M ON OFF L Yes 1-2 No WKIA1540E Revision: October 2004 DI-69 2005 Titan REAR SONAR SYSTEM REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF INDICATOR Disconnect the rear sonar system OFF switch connector M116, and apply battery voltage (approx. 12V) to terminal 5. Check the rear sonar system OFF indicator operation when terminal 6 is connected to battery ground. Terminal to be inspected Condition Operation 5 Approx. 12V 6 Ground Rear sonar system OFF indicator lights Rear sonar system OFF switch WKIA1541E Removal and Installation of Rear Sonar System EKS00AE8 REAR SONAR SENSORS Refer to EI-18, "Removal and Installation" . SONAR CONTROL UNIT Removal 1. 2. 3. Remove rear seat back. Refer to SE-100, "Removal and Installation" . Remove rear finisher to gain access to sonar control unit. Refer to EI-39, "REAR" . Disconnect electrical connector, remove the bolts, then remove sonar control unit. Refer to DI-59, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location" . Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 DI-70 2005 Titan B ENGINE A EC SECTION ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM C D E CONTENTS INDEX FOR DTC ........................................................ 8 DTC No. Index ......................................................... 8 Alphabetical Index .................................................. 12 PRECAUTIONS ........................................................ 16 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” ................................................................ 16 On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T .......................................................................... 16 Precaution .............................................................. 16 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ................ 19 PREPARATION ......................................................... 20 Special Service Tools ............................................. 20 Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 22 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM .................................. 23 System Diagram ..................................................... 23 Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System .................... 24 Electronic Ignition (EI) System ............................... 26 Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed) .................................................................... 27 AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL ..................... 28 Input/Output Signal Chart ....................................... 28 System Description ................................................ 28 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)... 29 System Description ................................................ 29 Component Description .......................................... 30 CAN COMMUNICATION .......................................... 31 System Description ................................................ 31 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ....................... 32 Description ............................................................. 32 Component Inspection ........................................... 35 Removal and Installation ........................................ 36 How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage ....................... 37 ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) ...................................................................... 39 System Description ................................................ 39 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................. 40 Component Inspection ........................................... 43 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ................. 45 Revision: October 2004 Description .............................................................. 45 Component Inspection ............................................ 45 NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMNATS) ........................................................................ 47 Description .............................................................. 47 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ............ 48 Introduction ............................................................. 48 Two Trip Detection Logic ........................................ 48 Emission-related Diagnostic Information ................ 49 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ........................... 63 OBD System Operation Chart ................................ 65 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE ............................... 71 Basic Inspection ..................................................... 71 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check .................... 76 Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment ................................. 78 VIN Registration ..................................................... 89 Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning ...... 89 Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning ................. 89 Idle Air Volume Learning ........................................ 90 Fuel Pressure Check .............................................. 92 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 94 Trouble Diagnosis Introduction ............................... 94 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................... 100 Fail-safe Chart ...................................................... 102 Symptom Matrix Chart .......................................... 103 Engine Control Component Parts Location .......... 107 Vacuum Hose Drawing ......................................... 113 Circuit Diagram ..................................................... 114 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ........... 116 ECM Terminals and Reference Value ................... 116 CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE) .......................... 124 Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function ....................... 136 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor ..... 138 Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode ..................................................................... 141 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE. 143 Description ............................................................ 143 Testing Condition .................................................. 143 Inspection Procedure ............................................ 143 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 144 EC-1 2005 Titan F G H I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT ....................................................................... 153 Description ............................................................ 153 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 153 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ........... 154 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 154 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 155 Ground Inspection ................................................ 159 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE. 160 Description ............................................................ 160 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 160 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 160 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 161 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 162 DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER. 163 Description ............................................................ 163 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode . 163 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 163 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 164 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 165 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 168 Component Inspection .......................................... 170 Removal and Installation ...................................... 170 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR ..................................... 171 Component Description ........................................ 171 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode . 171 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 171 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 172 Overall Function Check ........................................ 173 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 174 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 175 Component Inspection .......................................... 178 Removal and Installation ...................................... 179 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR ......................... 180 Component Description ........................................ 180 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode . 180 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 180 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 181 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 182 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 183 Component Inspection .......................................... 186 Removal and Installation ...................................... 187 DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR ........................... 188 Component Description ........................................ 188 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 188 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 188 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 189 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 190 Component Inspection .......................................... 191 Removal and Installation ...................................... 191 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR .......................... 192 Component Description ........................................ 192 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 192 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 193 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 194 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 195 Revision: October 2004 Component Inspection .......................................... 196 Removal and Installation ....................................... 197 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR ............................ 198 Component Description ........................................ 198 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode .198 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 198 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 199 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 200 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 201 Component Inspection .......................................... 204 Removal and Installation ....................................... 204 DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR ...................................... 205 Component Description ........................................ 205 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 205 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 206 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 206 Component Inspection .......................................... 207 Removal and Installation ....................................... 207 DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR ........................................ 208 Component Description ........................................ 208 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 208 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 208 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 209 Component Inspection .......................................... 210 Removal and Installation ....................................... 210 DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION ................. 211 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 211 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 211 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 211 Component Inspection .......................................... 211 Removal and Installation ....................................... 212 DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 ..................................... 213 Component Description ........................................ 213 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode .213 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 213 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 214 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 215 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 218 Component Inspection .......................................... 220 Removal and Installation ....................................... 221 DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 ..................................... 222 Component Description ........................................ 222 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode .222 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 222 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 223 Overall Function Check ......................................... 223 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 225 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 228 Component Inspection .......................................... 231 Removal and Installation ....................................... 232 DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION .............................................................. 233 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 233 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 233 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 235 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 237 EC-2 2005 Titan DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION .............................................................. 242 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 242 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 242 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 244 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 246 DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR ...................................... 250 Component Description ........................................ 250 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 250 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 250 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 252 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 253 Component Inspection ......................................... 255 Removal and Installation ...................................... 255 DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR ......................... 256 Component Description ........................................ 256 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 256 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 256 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 257 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 258 Component Inspection ......................................... 260 Removal and Installation ...................................... 260 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR ........................... 261 Component Description ........................................ 261 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode . 261 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 261 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 262 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 263 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 264 Component Inspection ......................................... 267 Removal and Installation ...................................... 267 DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MISFIRE ..................... 268 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 268 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 268 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 269 DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS .................. 276 Component Description ........................................ 276 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 276 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 276 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 277 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 278 Component Inspection ......................................... 280 Removal and Installation ...................................... 280 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) .......................... 281 Component Description ........................................ 281 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode . 281 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 281 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 281 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 283 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 284 Component Inspection ......................................... 287 Removal and Installation ...................................... 287 DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) ..................... 288 Component Description ........................................ 288 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 288 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 288 Revision: October 2004 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 290 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 291 Component Inspection .......................................... 294 Removal and Installation ...................................... 294 DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION ........................................................................ 295 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 295 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 295 Overall Function Check ........................................ 296 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 297 DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 301 System Description ............................................... 301 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 301 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 301 Overall Function Check ........................................ 302 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 303 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 306 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 306 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 307 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 308 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ...................... 314 Description ............................................................ 314 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode . 314 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 315 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 315 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 316 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 318 Component Inspection .......................................... 319 Removal and Installation ...................................... 320 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE ..................................................................... 321 Component Description ........................................ 321 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode . 321 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 321 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 322 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 323 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 324 Component Inspection .......................................... 326 DTCP0451EVAP CONTROLSYSTEMPRESSURE SENSOR ................................................................. 328 Component Description ........................................ 328 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode . 328 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 328 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 329 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 329 Component Inspection .......................................... 330 DTCP0452EVAP CONTROLSYSTEMPRESSURE SENSOR ................................................................. 331 Component Description ........................................ 331 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode . 331 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 331 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 332 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 333 EC-3 2005 Titan A EC C D E F G H I J K L M Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 334 Component Inspection .......................................... 336 DTCP0453EVAPCONTROLSYSTEMPRESSURE SENSOR .................................................................. 337 Component Description ........................................ 337 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode . 337 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 337 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 338 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 339 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 340 Component Inspection .......................................... 344 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 345 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 345 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 346 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 347 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM ................. 353 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 353 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 354 Overall Function Check ........................................ 355 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 356 DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ....................... 362 Component Description ........................................ 362 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 362 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 362 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 363 Removal and Installation ...................................... 363 DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ....................... 364 Component Description ........................................ 364 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 364 Overall Function Check ........................................ 364 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 365 Removal and Installation ...................................... 365 DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT ........................................................................ 366 Component Description ........................................ 366 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 366 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 366 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 367 Removal and Installation ...................................... 367 DTC P0500 VSS ...................................................... 368 Description ............................................................ 368 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 368 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 368 Overall Function Check ........................................ 368 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 369 DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM ....................................... 370 Description ............................................................ 370 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 370 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 370 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 371 DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM ....................................... 372 Description ............................................................ 372 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 372 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 372 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 373 DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR ...................................... 374 Component Description ........................................ 374 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Revision: October 2004 .374 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 374 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 374 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 375 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 376 Component Inspection .......................................... 378 Removal and Installation ....................................... 378 DTC P0605 ECM ..................................................... 379 Component Description ........................................ 379 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 379 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 379 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 380 DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER ................................................................... 382 Description ............................................................ 382 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode .382 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 382 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 382 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 383 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 386 Component Inspection .......................................... 388 Removal and Installation ....................................... 388 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY ........................ 389 Component Description ........................................ 389 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 389 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 389 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 390 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 391 DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR ............................................................. 393 Component Description ........................................ 393 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 393 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 393 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 394 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION .............................................................. 395 Description ............................................................ 395 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 395 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 395 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 396 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 397 Component Inspection .......................................... 400 Removal and Installation ....................................... 400 DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY ..................................................................... 401 Component Description ........................................ 401 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode .401 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 401 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 401 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 403 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 404 DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR ......... 406 Component Description ........................................ 406 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 406 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 406 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 407 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 408 EC-4 2005 Titan Component Inspection ......................................... 409 Removal and Installation ...................................... 410 DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 ......................................411 Component Description .........................................411 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode ..411 On Board Diagnosis Logic ....................................411 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 412 Overall Function Check ........................................ 412 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 414 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 417 Component Inspection ......................................... 420 Removal and Installation ...................................... 421 DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 ..................................... 422 Component Description ........................................ 422 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode . 422 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 422 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 423 Overall Function Check ........................................ 423 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 425 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 428 Component Inspection ......................................... 431 Removal and Installation ...................................... 432 DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL .... 433 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 433 DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT ......................... 434 Description ........................................................... 434 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 434 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 434 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 434 DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE ............ 435 Description ........................................................... 435 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 435 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 435 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 435 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE ....... 436 Description ........................................................... 436 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode . 436 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 437 Overall Function Check ........................................ 437 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 439 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 441 Main 12 Causes of Overheating ........................... 444 Component Inspection ......................................... 445 DTC P1225 TP SENSOR ........................................ 446 Component Description ........................................ 446 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 446 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 446 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 447 Removal and Installation ...................................... 447 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR ........................................ 448 Component Description ........................................ 448 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 448 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 448 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 449 Removal and Installation ...................................... 449 DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY ................ 450 Revision: October 2004 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 450 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 450 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 451 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 452 DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1 ....................... 455 Component Description ........................................ 455 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode . 455 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 455 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 455 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 457 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 460 Removal and Installation ...................................... 463 DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1 ....................... 464 Component Description ........................................ 464 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode . 464 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 464 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 464 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 466 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 469 Removal and Installation ...................................... 472 DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1 ....................... 473 Component Description ........................................ 473 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode . 473 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 473 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 473 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 475 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 478 Removal and Installation ...................................... 482 DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1 ....................... 483 Component Description ........................................ 483 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode . 483 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 483 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 483 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 485 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 488 Removal and Installation ...................................... 492 DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1 ....................... 493 Component Description ........................................ 493 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode . 493 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 493 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 493 Overall Function Check ........................................ 494 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 496 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 499 Removal and Installation ...................................... 502 DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1 ....................... 503 Component Description ........................................ 503 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode . 503 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 503 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 504 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 506 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 509 Removal and Installation ...................................... 514 EC-5 2005 Titan A EC C D E F G H I J K L M DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1 ........................ 515 Component Description ........................................ 515 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode . 515 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 515 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 516 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 518 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 521 Removal and Installation ...................................... 526 DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ............................... 527 Description ............................................................ 527 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode . 527 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 528 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 528 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 529 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 531 Component Inspection .......................................... 534 Removal and Installation ...................................... 534 DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE ..................................................................... 535 Component Description ........................................ 535 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode . 535 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 535 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 536 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 537 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 538 Component Inspection .......................................... 539 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH ................ 541 Component Description ........................................ 541 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode . 541 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 541 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 542 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 543 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 544 Component Inspection .......................................... 547 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ...................... 548 Component Description ........................................ 548 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode . 548 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 548 DTC confirmation Procedure ................................ 549 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 550 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 551 Component Inspection .......................................... 555 DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ..... 556 Component Description ........................................ 556 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 556 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 556 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 557 DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH ...................................... 558 Component Description ........................................ 558 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode . 558 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 558 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 558 Revision: October 2004 Overall Function Check ......................................... 559 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 560 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 561 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH ................................. 563 Description ............................................................ 563 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode .563 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 563 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 563 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 564 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 565 Component Inspection .......................................... 567 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR ......................... 568 Component Description ........................................ 568 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode .568 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 568 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 569 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 570 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 571 Component Inspection .......................................... 573 Removal and Installation ....................................... 573 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR ......................... 574 Component Description ........................................ 574 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode .574 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 574 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 575 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 576 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 577 Component Inspection .......................................... 580 Removal and Installation ....................................... 580 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR ........................................ 581 Component Description ........................................ 581 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode .581 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 581 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 582 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 583 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 584 Component Inspection .......................................... 587 Removal and Installation ....................................... 587 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR ...................................... 588 Component Description ........................................ 588 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode .588 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 588 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 589 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 590 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 591 Component Inspection .......................................... 595 Removal and Installation ....................................... 595 IGNITION SIGNAL .................................................. 596 Component Description ........................................ 596 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 597 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 602 Component Inspection .......................................... 606 Removal and Installation ....................................... 607 INJECTOR CIRCUIT ............................................... 608 EC-6 2005 Titan Component Description ........................................ 608 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode . 608 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 609 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 610 Component Inspection ......................................... 613 Removal and Installation ...................................... 613 FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT ............................................ 614 Description ........................................................... 614 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode . 614 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 615 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 616 Component Inspection ......................................... 619 Removal and Installation ...................................... 619 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ................. 620 Component Description ........................................ 620 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 621 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 622 Removal and Installation ...................................... 624 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ................................ 625 Description ........................................................... 625 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode . 625 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 625 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ......................................... 626 Component Description ........................................ 626 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode . 626 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 627 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 628 Component Inspection .......................................... 632 ASCD INDICATOR .................................................. 633 Component Description ........................................ 633 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode . 633 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 634 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 635 MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR ...................... 636 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 636 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 638 Fuel Pressure ....................................................... 638 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing ............................. 638 Calculated Load Value .......................................... 638 Mass Air Flow Sensor ........................................... 638 Intake Air Temperature Sensor ............................. 638 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ................... 638 A/F Sensor 1 Heater ............................................. 638 Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater .......................... 638 Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) ....................... 638 Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) .................... 638 Throttle Control Motor ........................................... 638 Injector .................................................................. 639 Fuel Pump ............................................................ 639 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-7 2005 Titan INDEX FOR DTC INDEX FOR DTC DTC No. Index PFP:00024 UBS00KU8 NOTE: If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-160, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . DTC*1 CONSULT-II GST*2 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) ECM*3 Reference page U1000 1000*4 CAN COMM CIRCUIT EC-160 U1001 1001* 4 CAN COMM CIRCUIT EC-160 P0000 0000 NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. P0037 0037 HO2S2 HTR (B1) EC-163 P0038 0038 HO2S2 HTR (B1) EC-163 P0057 0057 HO2S2 HTR (B2) EC-163 P0058 0058 HO2S2 HTR (B2) EC-163 P0101 0101 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT EC-171 P0102 0102 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT EC-180 P0103 0103 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT EC-180 P0112 0112 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT EC-188 P0113 0113 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT EC-188 P0117 0117 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT EC-192 P0118 0118 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT EC-192 P0122 0122 TP SEN 2/CIRC EC-198 P0123 0123 TP SEN 2/CIRC EC-198 P0125 0125 ECT SENSOR EC-205 P0127 0127 IAT SENSOR EC-208 P0128 0128 THERMSTAT FNCTN EC-211 P0138 0138 HO2S2 (B1) EC-213 P0139 0139 HO2S2 (B1) EC-222 P0158 0158 HO2S2 (B2) EC-213 P0159 0159 HO2S2 (B2) EC-222 P0171 0171 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 EC-233 — P0172 0172 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 EC-242 P0174 0174 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2 EC-233 P0175 0175 FUEL SYS-RICH-B2 EC-242 P0181 0181 FTT SENSOR EC-250 P0182 0182 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT EC-256 P0183 0183 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT EC-256 P0222 0222 TP SEN 1/CIRC EC-261 P0223 0223 TP SEN 1/CIRC EC-261 P0300 0300 MULTI CYL MISFIRE EC-268 P0301 0301 CYL 1 MISFIRE EC-268 P0302 0302 CYL 2 MISFIRE EC-268 P0303 0303 CYL 3 MISFIRE EC-268 Revision: October 2004 EC-8 2005 Titan INDEX FOR DTC DTC*1 CONSULT-II GST*2 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) ECM*3 Reference page P0304 0304 CYL 4 MISFIRE EC-268 P0305 0305 CYL 5 MISFIRE EC-268 P0306 0306 CYL 6 MISFIRE EC-268 P0307 0307 CYL 7 MISFIRE EC-268 P0308 0308 CYL 8 MISFIRE EC-268 P0327 0327 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-276 P0328 0328 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-276 P0332 0332 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B2 EC-276 P0333 0333 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B2 EC-276 P0335 0335 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT EC-281 P0340 0340 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-288 P0420 0420 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 EC-295 P0430 0430 TW CATALYST SYS-B2 EC-295 P0441 0441 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON EC-301 P0442 0442 EVAP SMALL LEAK EC-306 P0444 0444 PURG VOLUME CONT/V EC-314 P0445 0445 PURG VOLUME CONT/V EC-314 P0447 0447 VENT CONTROL VALVE EC-321 P0451 0451 EVAP SYS PRES SEN EC-328 P0452 0452 EVAP SYS PRES SEN EC-331 P0453 0453 EVAP SYS PRES SEN EC-337 P0455 0455 EVAP GROSS LEAK EC-345 P0456 0456 EVAP VERY SML LEAK EC-353 P0460 0460 FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH EC-362 P0461 0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR EC-364 P0462 0462 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC EC-366 P0463 0463 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC EC-366 P0500 0500 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*5 EC-368 P0506 0506 ISC SYSTEM EC-370 P0507 0507 ISC SYSTEM EC-372 P0550 0550 PW ST P SEN/CIRC EC-374 P0605 0605 ECM EC-379 P0700 0700 TCM AT-104 P0705 0705 PNP SW/CIRC AT-105 P0710 0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC AT-127 5 P0720 0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT* AT-109 P0740 0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC AT-116 P0744 0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN AT-118 P0745 0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC AT-120 P1031 1031 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) EC-382 P1032 1032 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) EC-382 P1051 1051 A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) EC-382 Revision: October 2004 EC-9 2005 Titan A EC C D E F G H I J K L M INDEX FOR DTC DTC*1 CONSULT-II 2 GST* Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) ECM*3 Reference page P1052 1052 A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) EC-382 P1065 1065 ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT EC-389 P1121 1121 ETC ACTR EC-393 P1122 1122 ETC FUNCTION/CIRC EC-395 P1124 1124 ETC MOT PWR EC-401 P1126 1126 ETC MOT PWR EC-401 P1128 1128 ETC MOT EC-406 P1146 1146 HO2S2 (B2) EC-411 P1147 1147 HO2S2 (B2) EC-422 P1148 1148 CLOSED LOOP-B1 EC-433 P1166 1166 HO2S2 (B2) EC-411 P1167 1167 HO2S2 (B2) EC-422 P1168 1168 CLOSED LOOP-B2 EC-433 P1211 1211 TCS C/U FUNCTN EC-434 P1212 1212 TCS/CIRC EC-435 P1217 1217 ENG OVER TEMP EC-436 P1225 1225 CTP LEARNING EC-446 P1226 1226 CTP LEARNING EC-448 P1229 1229 SENSOR POWER/CIRC EC-450 P1271 1271 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-455 P1272 1272 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-464 P1273 1273 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-473 P1274 1274 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-483 P1276 1276 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-493 P1278 1278 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-503 P1279 1279 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) EC-515 P1281 1281 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) EC-455 P1282 1282 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) EC-464 P1283 1283 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) EC-473 P1284 1284 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) EC-483 P1286 1286 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) EC-493 P1288 1288 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) EC-503 P1289 1289 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) EC-515 P1444 1444 PURG VOLUME CONT/V EC-527 P1446 1446 VENT CONTROL VALVE EC-535 P1564 1564 ASCD SW EC-541 P1572 1572 ASCD BRAKE SW EC-548 6 P1574 1574 ASCD VHL SPD SEN* P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 NATS MALFUNCTION BL-136 P1706 1706 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT EC-558 P1716 1716 TURBINE REV S/CIRC AT-132 P1730 1730 A/T INTERLOCK AT-136 Revision: October 2004 EC-10 EC-556 2005 Titan INDEX FOR DTC DTC*1 CONSULT-II GST*2 Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) ECM*3 Reference page P1752 1752 I/C SOLENOID/CIRC AT-141 P1754 1754 I/C SOLENOID FNCTN AT-143 P1757 1757 FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC AT-145 P1759 1759 FR/B SOLENOID FNCT AT-147 P1762 1762 D/C SOLENOID/CIRC AT-149 P1764 1764 D/C SOLENOID FNCTN AT-151 P1767 1767 HLR/C SOL/CIRC AT-153 P1769 1769 HLR/C SOL FNCTN AT-155 P1772 1772 LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC AT-157 P1774 1774 LC/B SOLENOID FNCT AT-159 P1805 1805 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT EC-563 P2122 2122 APP SEN 1/CIRC EC-568 P2123 2123 APP SEN 1/CIRC EC-568 P2127 2127 APP SEN 2/CIRC EC-574 P2128 2128 APP SEN 2/CIRC EC-574 P2135 2135 TP SENSOR EC-581 P2138 2138 APP SENSOR EC-588 *1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. *2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012. *3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN. *4: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II. *5: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates. *6: 2WD models A EC C D E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-11 2005 Titan INDEX FOR DTC Alphabetical Index UBS00KU9 NOTE: If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-160, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) DTC*1 CONSULT-II 2 GST* Reference page ECM*3 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1271 1271 EC-455 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1272 1272 EC-464 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1273 1273 EC-473 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1274 1274 EC-483 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1276 1276 EC-493 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1278 1278 EC-503 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1279 1279 EC-515 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1281 1281 EC-455 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1282 1282 EC-464 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1283 1283 EC-473 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1284 1284 EC-483 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1286 1286 EC-493 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1288 1288 EC-503 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1289 1289 EC-515 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P1031 1031 EC-382 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P1032 1032 EC-382 A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) P1051 1051 EC-382 A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) P1052 1052 EC-382 A/T INTERLOCK P1730 1730 AT-136 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 0744 AT-118 APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 EC-568 APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 EC-568 APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 EC-574 APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 EC-574 APP SENSOR P2138 2138 EC-588 ASCD BRAKE SW P1572 1572 EC-548 ASCD SW P1564 1564 EC-541 ASCD VHL SPD SEN*6 P1574 1574 EC-556 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 0710 AT-127 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 EC-563 CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 1000*4 EC-160 CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001*4 EC-160 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 EC-281 CLOSED LOOP-B1 P1148 1148 EC-433 CLOSED LOOP-B2 P1168 1168 EC-433 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 EC-288 CTP LEARNING P1225 1225 EC-446 CTP LEARNING P1226 1226 EC-448 Revision: October 2004 EC-12 2005 Titan INDEX FOR DTC Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) DTC*1 CONSULT-II GST*2 Reference page CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 EC-268 CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 0302 EC-268 CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 0303 EC-268 CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 0304 EC-268 CYL 5 MISFIRE P0305 0305 EC-268 CYL 6 MISFIRE P0306 0306 EC-268 CYL 7 MISFIRE P0307 0307 EC-268 CYL 8 MISFIRE P0308 0308 EC-268 D/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1762 1762 AT-149 D/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1764 1764 AT-151 ECM P0605 0605 EC-379 ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT P1065 1065 EC-389 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0117 0117 EC-192 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0118 0118 EC-192 ECT SENSOR P0125 0125 EC-205 ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 EC-436 ETC ACTR P1121 1121 EC-393 ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P1122 1122 EC-395 ETC MOT P1128 1128 EC-406 ETC MOT PWR P1124 1124 EC-401 ETC MOT PWR P1126 1126 EC-401 EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 0455 EC-345 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P0441 0441 EC-301 EVAP SMALL LEAK P0442 0442 EC-306 EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0451 0451 EC-328 EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0452 0452 EC-331 EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0453 0453 EC-337 EVAP VERY SML LEAK P0456 0456 EC-353 FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1757 1757 AT-145 FR/B SOLENOID FNCT P1759 1759 AT-147 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0182 0182 EC-256 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0183 0183 EC-256 FTT SENSOR P0181 0181 EC-250 FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH P0460 0460 EC-362 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR P0461 0461 EC-364 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0462 0462 EC-366 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0463 0463 EC-366 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 P0171 0171 EC-233 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2 P0174 0174 EC-233 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 EC-242 FUEL SYS-RICH-B2 P0175 0175 EC-242 HLR/C SOL/CIRC P1767 1767 AT-153 Revision: October 2004 EC-13 A ECM*3 2005 Titan EC C D E F G H I J K L M INDEX FOR DTC Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) DTC*1 CONSULT-II 2 GST* Reference page ECM*3 HLR/C SOL FNCTN P1769 1769 AT-155 HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 EC-213 HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 EC-222 HO2S2 (B1) P1146 1146 EC-411 HO2S2 (B1) P1147 1147 EC-422 HO2S2 (B2) P0158 0158 EC-213 HO2S2 (B2) P0159 0159 EC-222 HO2S2 (B2) P1166 1166 EC-411 HO2S2 (B2) P1167 1167 EC-422 HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0037 0037 EC-163 HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0038 0038 EC-163 HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0057 0057 EC-163 HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0058 0058 EC-163 I/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1752 1752 AT-141 I/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1754 1754 AT-143 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0112 0112 EC-188 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0113 0113 EC-188 IAT SENSOR P0127 0127 EC-208 ISC SYSTEM P0506 0506 EC-370 ISC SYSTEM P0507 0507 EC-372 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 EC-276 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0328 0328 EC-276 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B2 P0332 0332 EC-276 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B2 P0333 0333 EC-276 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 0745 AT-120 LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1772 1772 AT-157 LC/B SOLENOID FNCT P1774 1774 AT-159 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0101 0101 EC-171 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0102 0102 EC-180 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0103 0103 EC-180 MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 EC-268 NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 BL-136 NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. P0000 0000 — P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 1706 EC-558 PNP SW/CIRC P0705 0705 AT-105 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0444 0444 EC-314 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0445 0445 EC-314 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P1444 1444 EC-527 PW ST P SEN/CIRC P0550 0550 EC-374 SENSOR POWER/CIRC P1229 1229 EC-450 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 0740 AT-116 Revision: October 2004 EC-14 2005 Titan INDEX FOR DTC Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) DTC*1 CONSULT-II GST*2 Reference page A ECM*3 TCM P0700 0700 AT-104 TCS C/U FUNCTN P1211 1211 EC-434 TCS/CIRC P1212 1212 EC-435 THERMSTAT FNCTN P0128 0128 EC-211 TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 EC-261 TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 EC-261 TP SEN 2/CIRC P0122 0122 EC-198 TP SEN 2/CIRC P0123 0123 EC-198 TP SENSOR P2135 2135 EC-581 TURBINE REV S/CIRC P1716 1716 AT-132 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0420 EC-295 TW CATALYST SYS-B2 P0430 0430 EC-295 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*5 P0720 0720 AT-109 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*5 P0500 0500 EC-368 VENT CONTROL VALVE P0447 0447 EC-321 VENT CONTROL VALVE P1446 1446 EC-535 *1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. *2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012. *3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN. *4: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II. *5: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates. *6: 2WD models EC C D E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-15 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” UBS00EMF The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T UBS00EMG The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration. CAUTION: ● Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery cable before any repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. will cause the MIL to light up. ● Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will cause the MIL to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease, dirt, bent terminals, etc.) ● Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slidelocking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-69, "HARNESS CONNECTOR" . ● Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness with a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to the short circuit. ● Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube may cause the MIL to light up due to the malfunction of the EVAP system or fuel injection system, etc. ● Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and TCM (Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer. Precaution ● ● ● ● UBS00EMH Always use a 12 volt battery as power source. Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is running. Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative battery cable. Failure to do so may damage the ECM because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition switch is turned OFF. Before removing parts, turn ignition switch OFF and then disconnect battery ground cable. SEF289H Revision: October 2004 EC-16 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS ● ● ● – – – – – – ● Do not disassemble ECM. If a battery cable is disconnected, the memory will return to the ECM value. The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial value. Engine operation can vary slightly when the terminal is disconnected. However, this is not an indication of a malfunction. Do not replace parts because of a slight variation. If the battery is disconnected, the following emissionrelated diagnostic information will be lost within 24 hours. Diagnostic trouble codes 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes Freeze frame data 1st trip freeze frame data System readiness test (SRT) codes Test values When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten it securely with a lever as far as it will go as shown in the figure. A EC C PBIB1164E D E F G H BBIA0387E I ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or break). Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors. Securely connect ECM harness connectors. A poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge) voltage to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in damage to ICs. Keep engine control system harness at least 10 cm (4 in) PBIB0090E away from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control system malfunctions due to receiving external noise, degraded operation of ICs, etc. Keep engine control system parts and harness dry. Before replacing ECM, perform ECM Terminals and Reference Value inspection and make sure ECM functions properly. Refer to EC-116, "ECM Terminals and Reference Value" . Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage. Do not disassemble mass air flow sensor. Do not clean mass air flow sensor with any type of detergent. Do not disassemble electric throttle control actuator. Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause seriMEF040D ous incidents. Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), crankshaft position sensor (POS). Revision: October 2004 EC-17 2005 Titan J K L M PRECAUTIONS ● After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check. The DTC should not be displayed in the DTC Confirmation Procedure if the repair is completed. The Overall Function Check should be a good result if the repair is completed. SEF217U ● ● When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never allow the two tester probes to contact. Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and damage the ECM power transistor. Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/ output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. SEF348N ● B1 indicates the bank 1, B2 indicates the bank 2 as shown in the figure. PBIB1144E Revision: October 2004 EC-18 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS ● ● Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines. Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque. A EC C BBIA0402E D ● ● ● Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting. Immediately after starting, do not rev up engine unnecessarily. Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown. E F G SEF709Y ● – – – – When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure to observe the following as it may adversely affect electronic control systems depending on installation location. Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic control units. Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away from the harness of electronic controls. Do not let them run parallel for a long distance. Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standingwave radio can be kept smaller. Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body. Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis H I J K SEF708Y UBS00EMI When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" ● PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" for power distribution circuit When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-11, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" ● GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" Revision: October 2004 EC-19 L M 2005 Titan PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 UBS00EMJ The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Description Tool name EG17650301 (J-33984-A) Radiator cap tester adapter Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap and radiator filler neck a: 28 (1.10) dia. b: 31.4 (1.236) dia. c: 41.3 (1.626) dia. Unit: mm (in) S-NT564 KV10117100 (J-36471-A) Heated oxygen sensor wrench Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors with 22 mm (0.87 in) hexagon nut S-NT379 KV10114400 (J-38365) Heated oxygen sensor wrench Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors a: 22 mm (0.87 in) S-NT636 (J-44626) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor wrench Loosening or tightening air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 LEM054 (J-44321) Fuel pressure gauge kit Checking fuel pressure LEC642 (J-44321-6) Fuel pressure adapter Connecting fuel pressure gauge to quick connector type fuel lines. LBIA0376E (J-45488) Quick connector release Remove fuel tube quick connectors in engine room. PBIC0198E Revision: October 2004 EC-20 2005 Titan PREPARATION Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name A Description KV109E0010 (J-46209) Break-out box Measuring the ECM signals with a circuit tester EC C S-NT825 KV109E0080 (J-45819) Y-cable adapter Measuring the ECM signals with a circuit tester D E S-NT826 (J-23688) Engine coolant refractometer Checking concentration of ethylene glycol in engine coolant F G H WBIA0539E I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-21 2005 Titan PREPARATION Commercial Service Tools Tool name (Kent-Moore No.) UBS00EMK Description Leak detector i.e.: (J-41416) Locating the EVAP leak S-NT703 EVAP service port adapter i.e.: (J-41413-OBD) Applying positive pressure through EVAP service port S-NT704 Fuel filler cap adapter i.e.: (MLR-8382) Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening pressure S-NT815 Socket wrench Removing and installing engine coolant temperature sensor S-NT705 Oxygen sensor thread cleaner i.e.: (J-43897-18) (J-43897-12) Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with antiseize lubricant shown below. a: 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5 mm for Zirconia Oxygen Sensor b: 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25 mm for Titania Oxygen Sensor AEM488 Anti-seize lubricant i.e.: (PermatexTM 133AR or equivalent meeting MIL specification MIL-A-907) Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool when reconditioning exhaust system threads. S-NT779 Revision: October 2004 EC-22 2005 Titan ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM System Diagram PFP:23710 A UBS00KUA EC C D E F G H I J K L M PBIB2635E Revision: October 2004 EC-23 2005 Titan ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System UBS00KUB INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART Sensor Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator Engine speed*3 Piston position Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position Knock sensor Engine knocking condition Battery Battery voltage*3 Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation Heated oxygen sensor 2*1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)*2 VDC/TCS operation command Air conditioner switch*2 Air conditioner operation Wheel sensor*2 Vehicle speed Fuel injection & mixture ratio control Fuel injector *1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system. This is used only for the on board diagnosis. *2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. *3: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from both the crankshaft position sensor and the mass air flow sensor. VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operating conditions as listed below. ● During warm-up ● When starting the engine ● During acceleration ● Hot-engine operation ● When selector lever is changed from N to D ● High-load, high-speed operation ● During deceleration ● During high engine speed operation Revision: October 2004 EC-24 2005 Titan ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL) A EC C SEF503YB The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission control. The three way catalyst (manifold) can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor whether the engine operation is rich or lean. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1, refer to EC-455, "DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1" . This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichiometric (ideal air-fuel mixture). This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition. Heated oxygen sensor 2 is located downstream of the three way catalyst (manifold). Even if the switching characteristics of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal from heated oxygen sensor 2. D E F G Open Loop Control The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion. ● Deceleration and acceleration ● High-load, high-speed operation ● Malfunction of A/F sensor 1 or its circuit ● Insufficient activation of A/F sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature ● High engine coolant temperature ● During warm-up ● After shifting from N to D ● When starting the engine H I J K MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from A/F sensor 1. This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to the theoretical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as originally designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot wire) and characteristic changes during operation (i.e., injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio. Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between the two ratios. “Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim includes short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim. “Short term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical value. The signal from A/F sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN compared to the theoretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and an increase in fuel volume if it is lean. “Long term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation of the short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences, wear over time and changes in the usage environment. Revision: October 2004 EC-25 2005 Titan L M ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM FUEL INJECTION TIMING PBIB0122E Two types of systems are used. Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used when the engine is running. Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System Fuel is injected simultaneously into all eight cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM. The eight injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle. This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating. FUEL SHUT-OFF Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration, operation of the engine at excessively high speeds or operation of the vehicle at excessively high speed. Electronic Ignition (EI) System UBS00KUC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART Sensor Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator Engine speed*2 Piston position Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Knock sensor Engine knocking Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position Battery Battery voltage*2 Wheel sensor*1 Vehicle speed Ignition timing control Power transistor *1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. *2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Firing order: 1 - 8 - 7 - 3 - 6 - 5 - 4 -2 The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-fuel ratio for every running condition of the engine. The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM. The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and camshaft position sensor signal. Computing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor. During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the ECM according to the other data stored in the ECM. ● At starting ● During warm-up ● At idle ● At low battery voltage Revision: October 2004 EC-26 2005 Titan ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM During acceleration The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed A within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition. The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition. EC ● Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed) UBS00KUD INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART Sensor Input signal to ECM Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Neutral position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed Wheel sensor* Vehicle speed ECM function Actuator C D Fuel cut control Fuel injector E *: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. F SYSTEM DESCRIPTION If the engine speed is above 1,800 rpm under no load (for example, the shift position is neutral and engine speed over is 1,800 rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies based on engine speed. Fuel cut will be operated until the engine speed reaches 1,500 rpm, then fuel cut will be cancelled. NOTE: This function is different from deceleration control listed under EC-24, "Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System" . G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-27 2005 Titan AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL Input/Output Signal Chart Sensor Air conditioner switch* 1 PFP:23710 UBS00KUE Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator Air conditioner ON signal Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*2 Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature 2 Battery Battery voltage* Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation Wheel sensor*1 Vehicle speed Air conditioner cut control Air conditioner relay *1: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. *2: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. System Description UBS00KUF This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used. Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned OFF. ● When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed. ● When cranking the engine. ● At high engine speeds. ● When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high. ● When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed. ● When engine speed is excessively low. ● When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high. Revision: October 2004 EC-28 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) System Description PFP:18930 A UBS00KUG INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART Sensor ASCD brake switch Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator EC Brake pedal operation Stop lamp switch Brake pedal operation ASCD steering switch ASCD steering switch operation C ASCD vehicle speed control Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position Wheel sensor* Vehicle speed TCM* Powertrain revolution Electric throttle control actuator D *: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line E BASIC ASCD SYSTEM Refer to Owner's Manual for ASCD operating instructions. Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) allows a driver to keep vehicle at predetermined constant speed without depressing accelerator pedal. Driver can set vehicle speed in advance between approximately 40 km/ h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH). ECM controls throttle angle of electric throttle control actuator to regulate engine speed. Operation status of ASCD is indicated by CRUISE indicator and SET indicator in combination meter. If any malfunction occurs in ASCD system, it automatically deactivates control. NOTE: Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws. F G H SET OPERATION Press MAIN switch. (The CRUISE indicator in combination meter illuminates.) When vehicle speed reaches a desired speed between approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH), press SET/COAST switch. (Then SET indicator in combination meter illuminates.) I ACCEL OPERATION J If the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is pressed during cruise control driving, increase the vehicle speed until the switch is released or vehicle speed reaches maximum speed controlled by the system. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed. K CANCEL OPERATION When any of following conditions exist, cruise operation will be canceled. ● CANCEL switch is pressed ● More than 2 switches at ASCD steering switch are pressed at the same time (Set speed will be cleared) ● Brake pedal is depressed ● Selector lever is changed to N, P, R position ● Vehicle speed decreased to 13 km/h (8 MPH) lower than the set speed ● VDC system is operated When the ECM detects any of the following conditions, the ECM will cancel the cruise operation and inform the driver by blinking indicator lamp. ● Engine coolant temperature is slightly higher than the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp may blink slowly. When the engine coolant temperature decreases to the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp will stop blinking and the cruise operation will be able to work by pressing SET/COAST switch or RESUME/ ACCELERATE switch. ● Malfunction for some self-diagnoses regarding ASCD control: SET lamp will blink quickly. If MAIN switch is turned to OFF during ASCD is activated, all of ASCD operations will be canceled and vehicle speed memory will be erased. Revision: October 2004 EC-29 2005 Titan L M AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) COAST OPERATION When the SET/COAST switch is pressed during cruise control driving, decrease vehicle set speed until the switch is released. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed. RESUME OPERATION When the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is pressed after cancel operation other than pressing MAIN switch is performed, vehicle speed will return to last set speed. To resume vehicle set speed, vehicle condition must meet following conditions. ● Brake pedal is released ● A/T selector lever is in other than P and N positions ● Vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH) and less than 144 km/h (89 MPH) Component Description UBS00KUH ASCD STEERING SWITCH Refer to EC-541 . ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Refer to EC-548 , and EC-626 . STOP LAMP SWITCH Refer to EC-548 , EC-563 and EC-626 . ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EC-393 , EC-395 , EC-401 and EC-406 . ASCD INDICATOR Refer to EC-633 . Revision: October 2004 EC-30 2005 Titan CAN COMMUNICATION CAN COMMUNICATION System Description PFP:23710 A UBS00KUI CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec- EC tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. C Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" , about CAN communication for detail. D E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-31 2005 Titan EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM Description PFP:14950 UBS00KUJ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION PBIB1631E The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister. The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank. The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the engine operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is proportionally regulated as the air flow increases. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating and idling. Revision: October 2004 EC-32 2005 Titan EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING A EC C D E F G H I J K L M PBIB2053E Revision: October 2004 EC-33 2005 Titan EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM BBIA0444E Revision: October 2004 EC-34 2005 Titan EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM Component Inspection UBS00KUK A EVAP CANISTER Check EVAP canister as follows: 1. Block port B . 2. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port C . 3. Release blocked port B . 4. Apply vacuum pressure to port B and check that vacuum pressure exists at the ports A and C . 5. Block port A and B . 6. Apply pressure to port C and check that there is no leakage. EC C D PBIB1212E FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP) 1. E Wipe clean valve housing. F G H SEF445Y 2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum. I Pressure: 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm , 2.22 - 2.90 psi) Vacuum: −6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2 , −0.87 to −0.48 psi) 2 3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly. CAUTION: Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. J K SEF943S L EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-314 and EC-527 . M FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-250 and EC-256 . EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-321 and EC-535 . EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-328 , EC-331 and EC-337 . Revision: October 2004 EC-35 2005 Titan EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM EVAP SERVICE PORT Positive pressure is delivered to the EVAP system through the EVAP service port. If fuel vapor leakage in the EVAP system occurs, use a leak detector to locate the leak. BBIA0366E Removal and Installation UBS00KUL EVAP CANISTER Tighten EVAP canister as shown in the figure. BBIA0349E : N-·m (kg-m, in-lb) EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE 1. Turn EVAP canister vent control valve counterclockwise. 2. Remove the EVAP canister vent control valve. Always replace O-ring with a new one. BBIA0350E Revision: October 2004 EC-36 2005 Titan EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage UBS00KUM A CAUTION: ● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in EVAP system. NOTE: ● Do not start engine. ● Improper installation of EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause a leak. ● EC C WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port. Also attach the pressure pump and hose to the EVAP service port adapter. Turn ignition switch ON. Select the “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT MODE” with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. A bar graph (Pressure indicating display) will appear on the screen. D E F G PEF838U 6. 7. Apply positive pressure to the EVAP system until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure pump. H I J K PEF917U L 8. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . M SEF200U Revision: October 2004 EC-37 2005 Titan EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM WITHOUT CONSULT-II 1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port. BBIA0366E 2. Also attach the pressure pump with pressure gauge to the EVAP service port adapter. SEF462UA 3. Apply battery voltage between the terminals of EVAP canister vent control valve to make a closed EVAP system. 4. To locate the leak, deliver positive pressure to the EVAP system until pressure gauge points reach 1.38 to 2.76 kPa (0.014 to 0.028 kg/cm2 , 0.2 to 0.4 psi). Remove EVAP service port adapter and hose with pressure pump. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" BBIA0443E 5. 6. Revision: October 2004 EC-38 2005 Titan ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) System Description PFP:00032 A UBS00KUN EC C D E F PBIB1068E From the beginning of refueling, the air and vapor inside the fuel tank go through refueling EVAP vapor cut valve and EVAP/ORVR line to the EVAP canister. The vapor is absorbed by the EVAP canister and the air is released to the atmosphere. When the refueling has reached the full level of the fuel tank, the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve is closed and refueling is stopped because of auto shut-off. The vapor which was absorbed by the EVAP canister is purged during driving. WARNING: When conducting inspections below, be sure to observe the following: ● Put a “CAUTION: INFLAMMABLE” sign in workshop. ● Do not smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from work area. ● Be sure to furnish the workshop with a CO2 fire extinguisher. CAUTION: ● Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following procedures: – Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put lid on securely. – Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-92, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . – Disconnect battery ground cable. ● Always replace O-ring when the fuel gauge retainer is removed. ● Do not kink or twist hose and tube when they are installed. ● Do not tighten hose and clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses. ● After installation, run engine and check for fuel leaks at connection. ● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire. Revision: October 2004 EC-39 2005 Titan G H I J K L M ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) Diagnostic Procedure UBS00KUO SYMPTOM: FUEL ODOR FROM EVAP CANISTER IS STRONG. 1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. 2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 2.5 kg (5.5 lb). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. 2. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER Does water drain from the EVAP canister? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> GO TO 5. BBIA0351E 3. REPLACE EVAP CANISTER Replace EVAP canister with a new one. >> GO TO 4. 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection. >> Repair or replace EVAP hose. 5. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE Refer to EC-43, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. Revision: October 2004 EC-40 2005 Titan ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) SYMPTOM: CANNOT REFUEL/FUEL ODOR FROM THE FUEL FILLER OPENING IS STRONG WHILE REFUELING. A 1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor EC attached. 2. Weigh the EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. C The weight should be less than 2.5 kg (5.5 lb). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. D NG >> GO TO 3. 1. 2. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER E Does water drain from the EVAP canister? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> GO TO 5. F G H BBIA0351E 3. REPLACE EVAP CANISTER I Replace EVAP canister with a new one. J >> GO TO 4. 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART K Check the EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection. L >> Repair or replace EVAP hose. 5. CHECK VENT HOSES AND VENT TUBES M Check hoses and tubes between EVAP canister and refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes. 6. CHECK FILLER NECK TUBE Check recirculation line for clogging, dents and cracks. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace filler neck tube. Revision: October 2004 EC-41 2005 Titan ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) 7. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE Refer to EC-43, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. 8. CHECK FUEL FILLER TUBE Check filler neck tube and hose connected to the fuel tank for clogging, dents and cracks. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace fuel filler tube. 9. CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-I Check one-way valve for clogging. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank. 10. CHECK ONE-WAY FUEL VALVE-II 1. 2. 3. Make sure that fuel is drained from the tank. Remove fuel filler tube and hose. Check one-way fuel valve for operation as follows. When a stick is inserted, the valve should open, when removing stick it should close. Do not drop any material into the tank. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace fuel filler tube or replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank. SEF665U Revision: October 2004 EC-42 2005 Titan ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) Component Inspection UBS00KUP A REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. 2. a. b. c. 3. 4. a. b. c. d. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-10, "FUEL TANK" . EC Drain fuel from the tank as follows: Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge retainer. Connect a spare fuel hose, one side to fuel gauge retainer where the hose was removed and the other C side to a fuel container. Drain fuel using “FUEL PUMP RELAY” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows. D Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that the air flows freely into the tank. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows. E Connect vacuum pump to hose end. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit. Always replace O-ring with new one. F Put fuel tank upside down. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable. G H I J K BBIA0401E L Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. a. b. 3. 4. a. b. c. Remove fuel tank. Refer to FL-10, "FUEL TANK" . Drain fuel from the tank as follows: Remove fuel gauge retainer. Drain fuel from the tank using a handy pump into a fuel container. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows. Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that the air flows freely into the tank. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows. Connect vacuum pump to hose end. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit. Always replace O-ring with new one. Put fuel tank upside down. Revision: October 2004 EC-43 2005 Titan M ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR) d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [−13.3 kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable. BBIA0401E Revision: October 2004 EC-44 2005 Titan POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION Description PFP:11810 A UBS00KUQ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION EC C D E F G PBIB0062E This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold. The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake manifold. During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the PCV valve. Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of ventilating air. The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. Under full-throttle condition, the manifold vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the hose connection in the reverse direction. On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all conditions. H I J K L PBIB1588E Component Inspection UBS00KUR PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is placed over valve inlet. PBIB1589E Revision: October 2004 EC-45 2005 Titan M POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE 1. 2. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose cannot be freed of obstructions, replace. S-ET277 Revision: October 2004 EC-46 2005 Titan NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS) Description ● ● ● PFP:25386 A UBS00KUS If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch in the ON position or “NATS MALFUNCTION” is displayed on EC “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen, perform self-diagnostic results mode with CONSULT-II using NATS program card. Refer to BL-136, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer SysC tem-NATS)" . Confirm no self-diagnostic results of NVIS (NATS) is displayed before touching “ERASE” in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” D mode with CONSULT-II. When replacing ECM, initialization of NVIS (NATS) system SEF543X and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs must be carried out with CONSULT-II using NATS program card. E Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner. Regarding the procedures of NVIS (NATS) initialization and NVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II operation manual, IVIS/NVIS. F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-47 2005 Titan ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM Introduction PFP:00028 UBS00KUT The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actuators. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including: Emission-related diagnostic information Diagnostic service Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Service $03 of SAE J1979 Freeze Frame data Service $02 of SAE J1979 System Readiness Test (SRT) code Service $01 of SAE J1979 1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC) Service $07 of SAE J1979 1st Trip Freeze Frame data Test values and Test limits Service $06 of SAE J1979 Calibration ID Service $09 of SAE J1979 The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below. ×: Applicable —: Not applicable DTC 1st trip DTC Freeze Frame data 1st trip Freeze Frame data SRT code SRT status Test value CONSULT-II × × × × × × — GST × × × — × × × ECM × ×* — — — × — *: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other. The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-102, "Fail-safe Chart" .) Two Trip Detection Logic UBS00KUU When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not light up at this stage. <1st trip> If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL lights up. The MIL lights up at the same time when the DTC is stored. <2nd trip> The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed during vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to light up or blink the MIL, and store DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below. ×: Applicable MIL DTC 1st trip Items —: Not applicable 1st trip DTC 2nd trip 1st trip displaying 2nd trip displaying 1st trip displaying 2nd trip displaying — — — × — × — — × — — × — — × — — — — — × — × × — Blinking Lighting up Blinking Lighting up Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage) — DTC: P0300 P0308 is being detected × — — Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage) — DTC: P0300 P0308 is being detected — — One trip detection diagnoses (Refer to EC-49, "EMISSIONRELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS" .) — Except above — When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there is malfunction on engine control system. Revision: October 2004 EC-48 2005 Titan ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means of operating fail-safe function. The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected and demands the driver to repair the malfunction. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode UBS00KUV C EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS DTC*1 CONSULT-II GST*2 ×:Applicable —: Not applicable SRT code Test value/ Test limit (GST only) Trip MIL Reference page D E ECM*3 U1000 1000*5 — — 1 × EC-160 CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001* 5 — — 2 — EC-160 NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. P0000 0000 — — — Flashing*7 EC-64 HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0037 0037 × × 2 × EC-163 HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0038 0038 × × 2 × EC-163 HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0057 0057 × × 2 × EC-163 HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0058 0058 × × 2 × EC-163 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0101 0101 — — 2 × EC-171 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0102 0102 — — 1 × EC-180 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0103 0103 — — 1 × EC-180 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0112 0112 — — 2 × EC-188 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0113 0113 — — 2 × EC-188 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0117 0117 — — 1 × EC-192 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0118 0118 — — 1 × EC-192 TP SEN 2/CIRC P0122 0122 — — 1 × EC-198 TP SEN 2/CIRC P0123 0123 — — 1 × EC-198 ECT SENSOR P0125 0125 — — 1 × EC-205 IAT SENSOR P0127 0127 — — 2 × EC-208 THERMSTAT FNCTN P0128 0128 — — 2 × EC-211 HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0138 — × 2 × EC-213 HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0139 × × 2 × EC-222 HO2S2 (B2) P0158 0158 — × 2 × EC-213 HO2S2 (B2) P0159 0159 × × 2 × EC-222 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 P0171 0171 — — 2 × EC-233 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 P0172 0172 — — 2 × EC-242 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2 P0174 0174 — — 2 × EC-233 FUEL SYS-RICH-B2 P0175 0175 — — 2 × EC-242 FTT SENSOR P0181 0181 — — 2 × EC-250 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0182 0182 — — 2 × EC-256 FTT SEN/CIRCUIT P0183 0183 — — 2 × EC-256 TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 — — 1 × EC-261 TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 — — 1 × EC-261 MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0300 — — 2 × EC-268 CAN COMM CIRCUIT Revision: October 2004 EC Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut Emission-related Diagnostic Information Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) A EC-49 2005 Titan F G H I J K L M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) DTC*1 CONSULT-II GST*2 SRT code Test value/ Test limit (GST only) Trip MIL Reference page ECM*3 CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0301 — — 2 × EC-268 CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 0302 — — 2 × EC-268 CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 0303 — — 2 × EC-268 CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 0304 — — 2 × EC-268 CYL 5 MISFIRE P0305 0305 — — 2 × EC-268 CYL 6 MISFIRE P0306 0306 — — 2 × EC-268 CYL 7 MISFIRE P0307 0307 — — 2 × EC-268 CYL 8 MISFIRE P0308 0308 — — 2 × EC-268 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 — — 2 — EC-276 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0328 0328 — — 2 — EC-276 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B2 P0332 0332 — — 2 — EC-276 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B2 P0333 0333 — — 2 — EC-276 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 — — 2 × EC-281 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 — — 2 × EC-288 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0420 × × 2 × EC-295 TW CATALYST SYS-B2 P0430 0430 × × 2 × EC-295 EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P0441 0441 × × 2 × EC-301 EVAP SMALL LEAK P0442 0442 × × 2 × EC-306 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0444 0444 — — 2 × EC-314 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0445 0445 — — 2 × EC-314 VENT CONTROL VALVE P0447 0447 — — 2 × EC-321 EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0451 0451 — — 2 × EC-328 EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0452 0452 — — 2 × EC-331 EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0453 0453 — — 2 × EC-337 EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 0455 — — 2 × EC-345 EVAP VERY SML LEAK P0456 0456 ×*4 × 2 × EC-353 FUEL LEV SEN SLOSH P0460 0460 — — 2 × EC-362 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR P0461 0461 — — 2 × EC-364 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0462 0462 — — 2 × EC-366 FUEL LEVL SEN/CIRC P0463 0463 — — 2 × EC-366 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*6 P0500 0500 — — 2 × EC-368 ISC SYSTEM P0506 0506 — — 2 × EC-370 ISC SYSTEM P0507 0507 — — 2 × EC-372 PW ST P SEN/CIRC P0550 0550 — — 2 — EC-374 ECM P0605 0605 — — 1 or 2 × or — EC-379 TCM P0700 0700 — — 1 × AT-104 PNP SW/CIRC P0705 0705 — — 2 × AT-105 P0710 0710 — — 2 × AT-127 VHCL SPD SEN/CIR AT* P0720 0720 — — 1 × AT-109 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 0740 — — 2 × AT-116 A/T TCC S/U FNCTN P0744 0744 — — 2 × AT-118 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 0745 — — 2 × AT-120 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC 6 Revision: October 2004 EC-50 2005 Titan ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) DTC*1 CONSULT-II GST*2 SRT code Test value/ Test limit (GST only) Trip MIL Reference page A EC ECM*3 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P1031 1031 × × 2 × EC-382 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) P1032 1032 × × 2 × EC-382 A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) P1051 1051 × × 2 × EC-382 A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) P1052 1052 × × 2 × EC-382 ECM BACK UP/CIRC P1065 1065 — — 2 × EC-389 ETC ACTR P1121 1121 — — 1 × EC-393 ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P1122 1122 — — 1 × EC-395 ETC MOT PWR P1124 1124 — — 1 × EC-401 ETC MOT PWR P1126 1126 — — 1 × EC-401 ETC MOT P1128 1128 — — 1 × EC-406 HO2S2 (B1) P1146 1146 × × 2 × EC-411 HO2S2 (B1) P1147 1147 × × 2 × EC-422 CLOSED LOOP-B1 P1148 1148 — — 1 × EC-433 HO2S2 (B2) P1166 1166 × × 2 × EC-411 HO2S2 (B2) P1167 1167 × × 2 × EC-422 CLOSED LOOP-B2 P1168 1168 — — 1 × EC-433 TCS C/U FUNCTN P1211 1211 — — 2 — EC-434 TCS/CIRC P1212 1212 — — 2 — EC-435 ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 — — 1 × EC-436 CTP LEARNING P1225 1225 — — 2 — EC-446 CTP LEARNING P1226 1226 — — 2 — EC-448 SENSOR POWER/CIRC P1229 1229 — — 1 × EC-450 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1271 1271 — × 2 × EC-455 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1272 1272 — × 2 × EC-464 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1273 1273 — × 2 × EC-473 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1274 1274 — × 2 × EC-483 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1276 1276 — × 2 × EC-493 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1278 1278 × × 2 × EC-503 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) P1279 1279 × × 2 × EC-515 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1281 1281 — × 2 × EC-455 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1282 1282 — × 2 × EC-464 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1283 1283 — × 2 × EC-473 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1284 1284 — × 2 × EC-483 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1286 1286 — × 2 × EC-493 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1288 1288 × × 2 × EC-503 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) P1289 1289 × × 2 × EC-515 PURG VOLUME CONT/V P1444 1444 — — 2 × EC-527 VENT CONTROL VALVE P1446 1446 — — 2 × EC-535 ASCD SW P1564 1564 — — 1 — EC-541 P1572 1572 — — 1 — EC-548 P1574 1574 — — 1 — EC-556 ASCD BRAKE SW ASCD VHL SPD SEN* 8 Revision: October 2004 EC-51 2005 Titan C D E F G H I J K L M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) DTC*1 CONSULT-II GST*2 SRT code Test value/ Test limit (GST only) Trip MIL Reference page ECM*3 NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 P1615 1610 - 1615 — — 2 — BL-136 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 1706 — — 2 × EC-558 TURBINE REV S/CIRC P1716 1716 — — 2 × AT-132 A/T INTERLOCK P1730 1730 — — 1 × AT-136 I/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1752 1752 — — 1 × AT-141 I/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1754 1754 — — 1 × AT-143 FR/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1757 1757 — — 1 × AT-145 FR/B SOLENOID FNCT P1759 1759 — — 1 × AT-147 D/C SOLENOID/CIRC P1762 1762 — — 1 × AT-149 D/C SOLENOID FNCTN P1764 1764 — — 1 × AT-151 HLR/C SOL/CIRC P1767 1767 — — 1 × AT-153 HLR/C SOL FNCTN P1769 1769 — — 1 × AT-155 LC/B SOLENOID/CIRC P1772 1772 — — 1 × AT-157 LC/B SOLENOID FNCT P1774 1774 — — 1 × AT-159 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 — — 2 — EC-563 APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 — — 1 × EC-568 APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 — — 1 × EC-568 APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 — — 1 × EC-574 APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 — — 1 × EC-574 TP SENSOR P2135 2135 — — 1 × EC-581 APP SENSOR P2138 2138 — — 1 × EC-588 *1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. *2: This number is prescribed by SAE J2012. *3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN. *4: SRT code will not be set if the self-diagnostic result is NG. *5: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II. *6: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur at the same time, the MIL illuminates. *7: When the ECM is in the mode of displaying SRT status, MIL may flash. For the details, refer to EC-57, "How to Display SRT Status" . *8: 2WD models DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip DTC will not be displayed. If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up. In other words, the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consecutive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or light up the MIL during the 1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory. Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to EC-49, "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS" . These items are required by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/ component. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously are also displayed on CONSULT-II. Revision: October 2004 EC-52 2005 Titan ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM 1st trip DTC is specified in Service $07 of SAE J1979. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without lighting up the MIL and therefore does not warn the driver of a malfunction. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent the A vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests. When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame data as specified in Work Flow procedure Step 2, refer to EC-95, "WORK FLOW" . Then perform DTC ConfirEC mation Procedure or Overall Function Check to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the malfunction is duplicated, the item requires repair. How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC C DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods. With CONSULT-II With GST CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P1148, P1706, etc. These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012. (CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.) No Tools The number of blinks of the MIL in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results) indicates the DTC. Example: 0340, 1148, 1706, etc. These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN. ● 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No. ● Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, GST or the Diagnostic Test Mode II do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to normal. CONSULT-II can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if available) is recommended. A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode of CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC. If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be [0]. If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be [1t]. D E F G H I J K L PBIB0911E FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA M The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, absolute throttle position, base fuel schedule and intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected. Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data. The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II or GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For details, see EC-127, "Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data" . Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the following priorities to update the data. Revision: October 2004 EC-53 2005 Titan ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM Priority 1 Items Freeze frame data Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0308 Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175 2 3 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items) 1st trip freeze frame data For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different malfunction is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or 1st trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and freeze frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged in the ECM memory. Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM memory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Service $01 of SAE J1979. As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and components. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed. If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, use the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”. In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains “CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased. Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer's normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items. NOTE: The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM memory power supply is interrupted for several hours. If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector will continue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the SRT items the vehicle is returned to the customer untested. NOTE: If MIL is ON during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer untested even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT (“CMPLT”) and DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection. SRT Item The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”. SRT item (CONSULT-II indication) Performance Priority* Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT” Corresponding DTC No. CATALYST 2 Three way catalyst function P0420, P0430 EVAP SYSTEM 2 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring P0441 1 EVAP control system P0442 2 EVAP control system P0456 2 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 P1278, P1288 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 P1279, P1289 HO2S Revision: October 2004 Heated oxygen sensor 2 P0139, P0159 Heated oxygen sensor 2 P1146, P1166 Heated oxygen sensor 2 P1147, P1167 EC-54 2005 Titan ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM SRT item (CONSULT-II indication) Performance Priority* HO2S HTR 2 Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT” Corresponding DTC No. Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 *: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority for models with CONSULT-II. A EC C SRT Set Timing SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is done regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and is shown in the table below. Example Self-diagnosis result All OK Case 1 Case 2 NG exists Case 3 E Ignition cycle ← ON → OFF ← ON → Diagnosis ← ON → P0400 OK (1) — (1) OK (2) — (2) P0402 OK (1) — (1) — (1) OK (2) OFF OFF ← ON → P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2) SRT of EGR “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” P0400 OK (1) — (1) — (1) — (1) P0402 — (0) — (0) OK (1) — (1) P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2) SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” P0400 OK OK — — P0402 — — — — P1402 NG — NG NG (Consecutive NG) (1st trip) DTC 1st trip DTC — 1st trip DTC DTC (= MIL ON) SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK. NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG. —: Self-diagnosis is not carried out. F G H I J K L When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT will indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 1 above When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. → Case 2 above If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses showed NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 3 above The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is one (1) for each self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state emissions inspection, it is unnecessary for each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the following reasons: ● The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result. ● The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results. ● When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT, the self-diagnosis memory must be erased from ECM after repair. ● If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”. NOTE: SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out prior to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”. Revision: October 2004 D EC-55 2005 Titan M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM SRT Service Procedure If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next page. PBIB2320E *1 EC-53, "How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC" Revision: October 2004 *2 EC-57, "How to Display SRT Status" EC-56 *3 EC-57, "How to Set SRT Code" 2005 Titan ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM How to Display SRT Status WITH CONSULT-II Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-II. For items whose SRT codes are set, a “CMPLT” is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen; for items whose SRT codes are not set, “INCMP” is displayed. A sample of CONSULT-II display for SRT code is shown at right. “INCMP” means the self-diagnosis is incomplete and SRT is not set. “CMPLT” means the self-diagnosis is complete and SRT is set. WITH GST Selecting Service $01 with GST (Generic Scan Tool) NO TOOLS A SRT code itself can not be displayed while only SRT status can be. 1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 20 seconds. 2. SRT status is indicated as shown below. ● When all SRT codes are set, MIL lights up continuously. ● When any SRT codes are not set, MIL will flash periodically for 10 seconds. A EC C SEF935Z D E F G H I J K PBIB2317E L How to Set SRT Code To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions. WITH CONSULT-II Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on Performance Priority in the table on EC-54, "SRT Item" . WITHOUT CONSULT-II The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained on the next page. The driving pattern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes. Revision: October 2004 EC-57 2005 Titan M ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM Driving Pattern PBIB2314E Revision: October 2004 EC-58 2005 Titan ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driving habits, etc. A Zone A refers to the range where the time, required for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the shortest. Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed EC within zone A. *: Normal conditions refer to the following: ● Sea level C ● Flat road ● Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F) ● Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions. D Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diagnosis may also be performed. Pattern 1: E ● The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is 3.0 - 4.3V). ● The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than F 70°C (158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 73 and ground is lower than 1.4V). ● The engine is started at the fuel tank temperature of warmer than 0°C (32°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 107 and ground is less than 4.1V). G Pattern 2: ● When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be conducted. In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended. H Pattern 3: ● Operate vehicle following the driving pattern shown in the figure. ● Release the accelerator pedal during decelerating vehicle speed I from 90 km/h (56 MPH) to 0 km/h (0 MPH). Pattern 4: J ● The accelerator pedal must be held very steady during steadystate driving. ● If the accelerator pedal is moved, the test must be conducted all over again. K *1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH), then release the accelerator pedal and keep it released for PBIB2244E more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle L speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH) again. *2: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised. ● M Suggested Transmission Gear Position Set the selector lever in the D position with the overdrive switch turned ON. Revision: October 2004 EC-59 2005 Titan ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-II) The following is the information specified in Service $06 of SAE J1979. The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is OK or NG while being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored. These data (test value and test limit) are specified by Test ID (TID) and Component ID (CID) and can be displayed on the GST screen. Test value (GST display) Item Self-diagnostic test item DTC Test limit Conversion 01H Max. 1/128 02H 81H Min. 1 P0430 03H 02H Max. 1/128 P0430 04H 82H Min. 1 EVAP control system (Small leak) P0442 05H 03H Max. 1/128 mm2 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring P0441 06H 83H Min. 20 mV EVAP control system (Very small leak) P0456 07H 03H Max. 1/128 mm2 Three way catalyst function (Bank 1) CATALYST Three way catalyst function (Bank 2) EVAP SYSTEM Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (Bank 1) HO2S Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (Bank 2) Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 1) Heated oxygen sensor 2 (Bank 2) Revision: October 2004 TID CID P0420 01H P0420 P1271 41H 8EH Min. 5mV P1272 42H 0EH Max. 5mV P1273 43H 0EH Max. 0.002 P1274 44H 8EH Min. 0.002 P1278 45H 8EH Min. 0.002 P1276 46H 0EH Max. 5mV P1276 47H 8EH Min. 5mV P1279 48H 8EH Min. 0.002 P1281 4CH 8FH Min. 5mV P1282 4DH 0FH Max. 5mV P1283 4EH 0FH Max. 0.002 P1284 4FH 8FH Min. 0.002 P1288 50H 8FH Min. 0.002 P1286 51H 0FH Max. 5mV P1286 52H 8FH Min. 5mV P1289 53H 8FH Min. 0.002 P0138 1CH 06H Max. 10mV P0139 19H 86H Min. 10mV/500 ms P1147 1AH 86H Min. 10 mV P1146 1BH 06H Max. 10 mV P0158 24H 07H Max. 10mV P0159 21H 87H Min. 10 mV/500 ms P1167 22H 87H Min. 10 mV P1166 23H 07H Max. 10 mV EC-60 2005 Titan ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM Item Self-diagnostic test item DTC Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater (Bank 1) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater (Bank 2) HO2S HEATER Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (Bank 1) Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (Bank 2) Test value (GST display) Test limit Conversion 10H Max. 5 mV 90H Min. 5 mV TID CID P1032 57H P1031 58H P1052 59H 11H Max. 5 mV P1051 5AH 91H Min. 5 mV P0038 2DH 0AH Max. 20 mV P0037 2EH 8AH Min. 20 mV P0058 2FH 0BH Max. 20 mV P0057 30H 8BH Min. 20 mV HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION How to Erase DTC A EC C D E WITH CONSULT-II The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELFDIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. If DTCs are displayed for both ECM and TCM (Transmission control module), they need to be erased individually from the ECM and TCM (Transmission control module). NOTE: If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-8, "INDEX FOR DTC" ), skip steps 2 through 4. 1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. 2. Turn CONSULT-II ON and touch “A/T”. 3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. 4. Touch “ERASE”. [The DTC in the TCM (Transmission control module) will be erased.] Then touch “BACK” twice. 5. Touch “ENGINE”. 6. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. 7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.) F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-61 2005 Titan ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM SCIA5671E WITH GST The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting Service $04 with GST. NOTE: If the DTC is not for A/T related items (see EC-8, "INDEX FOR DTC" ), skip step 2. 1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. 2. Perform AT-39, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)" . (The DTC in TCM will be erased) 3. Select Service $04 with GST (Generic Scan Tool). No Tools NOTE: If the DTC is not for AT related items (see EC-8, "INDEX FOR DTC" ), skip step 2. 1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again. 2. Perform AT-39, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)" . (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.) 3. Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I by depressing the accelerator pedal. Refer to EC-64, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" . ● If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost within 24 hours. ● The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased. – Diagnostic trouble codes – 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes – Freeze frame data – 1st trip freeze frame data – System readiness test (SRT) codes Revision: October 2004 EC-62 2005 Titan ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM Test values Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but all of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures. – Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) UBS00KUW DESCRIPTION The MIL is located on the instrument panel. 1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a bulb check. If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-30, "WARNING LAMPS" , or see EC-636, "MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR" . 2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off. If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an engine system malfunction. A EC C D E SEF217U ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION F The on board diagnostic system has the following three functions. Diagnostic Test Mode KEY and ENG. Status Function Mode I Ignition switch in ON position BULB CHECK Explanation of Function G This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown, open circuit, etc.). If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit. Engine stopped Engine running Mode II Ignition switch in ON position H I MALFUNCTION WARNING This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is detected twice in two consecutive driving cycles (two trip detection logic), the MIL will light up to inform the driver that a malfunction has been detected. The following malfunctions will light up or blink the MIL in the 1st trip. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ● Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage) ● One trip detection diagnoses J K L This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read. M Engine stopped When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there is malfunction on engine control system. Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means of operating fail-safe function. The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected and demands the driver to repair the malfunction. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Revision: October 2004 Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut EC-63 2005 Titan ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM MIL Flashing Without DTC When any SRT codes are not set, MIL may flash without DTC. For the details, refer to EC-57, "How to Display SRT Status" . HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE NOTE: ● It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. ● It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has a malfunction. ● Always ECM returns to Diagnostic Test Mode I after ignition switch is turned OFF. How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results) 1. 2. a. b. 3. 4. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. Fully release the accelerator pedal. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 10 seconds until the MIL starts blinking. NOTE: Do not release the accelerator pedal for 10 seconds if MIL may start blinking on the halfway of this 10 seconds. This blinking is displaying SRT status and is continued for another 10 seconds. For the details, refer to EC-57, "How to Display SRT Status" . Fully release the accelerator pedal. ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). NOTE: Wait until the same DTC (or 1st trip DTC) appears to confirm all DTCs certainly. PBIB0092E How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results) 1. 2. 3. Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to EC-64, "How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" . Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for more than 10 seconds. The emission-related diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM. Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed. DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to DI30, "WARNING LAMPS" or see EC-636, "MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR" . DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING MIL Condition ON When the malfunction is detected. OFF No malfunction. This DTC number is clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS) DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MIL as shown below. Revision: October 2004 EC-64 2005 Titan ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MIL does not illuminate in diagnostic test mode I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MIL A illuminates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes are displayed, they may be either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These unidentified codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-II or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for how to EC read a code. C D E F G PBIA3905E A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes. The “zero” is indicated by the number of ten flashes. The length of time the 1,000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds consisting of an ON (0.6-second) - OFF (0.6-second) cycle. The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-second ON and 0.3-second OFF cycle. A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other words, the later numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared. A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-second OFF. In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC 0000 refers to no malfunction. (See EC-8, "INDEX FOR DTC" ) H I J K How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results) The DTC can be erased from the back up memory in the ECM by depressing accelerator pedal. Refer to EC64, "How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" . ● If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory within 24 hours. ● Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses. L OBD System Operation Chart M UBS00KUX RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS ● ● ● ● ● When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are stored in the ECM memory. When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL will come on. For details, refer to EC-48, "Two Trip Detection Logic" The MIL will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times (driving pattern B) with no malfunction. The drive is counted only when the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction occurs while counting, the counter will reset. The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A) without the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and Fuel Injection System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times (driving pattern C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode of CONSULT-II will count the number of times the vehicle is driven. The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in OK for the 2nd trip. Revision: October 2004 EC-65 2005 Titan ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM SUMMARY CHART Items MIL (goes off) DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no display) 1st Trip DTC (clear) 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data (clear) Fuel Injection System Misfire Other 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 80 (pattern C) 80 (pattern C) 40 (pattern A) 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern B) *1, *2 *1, *2 1 (pattern B) For details about patterns B and C under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see EC-68, "EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”" . For details about patterns A and B under Other, see EC-70, "EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”" . *1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected. *2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip. Revision: October 2004 EC-66 2005 Titan ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ” , “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” A EC C D E F G H I J K L M SEF392S *1: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, MIL will light up. *2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven 3 times (pattern B) without any malfunctions. *3: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored in ECM. *4: The DTC and the freeze frame data will not be displayed any longer after vehicle is driven 80 times (pattern C) without the same malfunction. (The DTC and the freeze frame data still remain in ECM.) *5: When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data will be stored in ECM. *6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data will be cleared at the moment OK is detected. *7: When the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip freeze frame data will be cleared. *8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when vehicle is driven once (pattern C) without the same malfunction after DTC is stored in ECM. Revision: October 2004 EC-67 2005 Titan ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows: All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system. ● The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern. ● The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction. ● The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”) Driving pattern C means the vehicle operation as follows: The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time: Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1±0.1) [%] Engine coolant temperature (T) condition: ● When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), T should be lower than 70°C (158°F). ● When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), T should be higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F). Example: If the stored freeze frame data is as follows: Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F) To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions: Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C (158°F) ● The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of vehicle conditions above. ● The C counter will be counted up when vehicle conditions above is satisfied without the same malfunction. ● The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80. ● The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC is stored in ECM. Revision: October 2004 EC-68 2005 Titan ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” A EC C D E F G H I J K L M SEF393SD *1: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, MIL will light up. *2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven 3 times (pattern B) without any malfunctions. *3: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored in ECM. *4: The DTC and the freeze frame data will not be displayed any longer after vehicle is driven 40 times (pattern A) without the same malfunction. (The DTC and the freeze frame data still remain in ECM.) *5: When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data will be stored in ECM. *6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after vehicle is driven once (pattern B) without the same malfunction. *7: When the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip freeze frame data will be cleared. Revision: October 2004 EC-69 2005 Titan ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE ”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM” AEC574 ● ● ● The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4). The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction. The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40. Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows: All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system. ● The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern. ● The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions. ● The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART). Revision: October 2004 EC-70 2005 Titan BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE Basic Inspection PFP:00018 A UBS00KUY 1. INSPECTION START 1. 2. – – – – – – 3. – – – – 4. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for scheduled maintenance. Open engine hood and check the following: Harness connectors for improper connections Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections Hoses and ducts for leaks Air cleaner clogging Gasket Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied. Headlamp switch is OFF. SEF983U Air conditioner switch is OFF. Rear window defogger switch is OFF. Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points the middle of gauge. Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm. EC C D E F G H I J SEF976U 5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load. 6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. K L M SEF977U 2. REPAIR OR REPLACE Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure. >> GO TO 3. Revision: October 2004 EC-71 2005 Titan BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE 3. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED 1. 2. With CONSULT-II Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute. PBIA8513J 3. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-76, "IDLE SPEED" . 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) SEF058Y Without CONSULT-II Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute. 3. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-76, "IDLE SPEED" . 1. 2. 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 4. 4. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING 1. 2. Stop engine. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . >> GO TO 5. 5. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . >> GO TO 6. Revision: October 2004 EC-72 2005 Titan BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE 6. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING A Refer to EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 7. No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. 2. GO TO 4. EC C 7. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN D With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-76, "IDLE SPEED" . E 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) F Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-76, "IDLE SPEED" . G 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) H OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 8. I 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-288, "DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)" . ● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-281, "DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> 1. Repair or replace. 2. GO TO 4. 2. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is a rare case.) Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-138, "ECM Re-communicating Function" . >> GO TO 4. Revision: October 2004 K L M 9. CHECK ECM FUNCTION 1. J EC-73 2005 Titan BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE 10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING 1. 2. Run engine at idle. Check ignition timing with a timing light. Refer to EC-76, "IGNITION TIMING" . 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> GO TO 11. BBIA0379E 11. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING 1. 2. Stop engine. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . >> GO TO 12. 12. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . >> GO TO 13. 13. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING Refer to EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 14. No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. 2. GO TO 4. 14. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-76, "IDLE SPEED" . 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-76, "IDLE SPEED" . 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 17. Revision: October 2004 EC-74 2005 Titan BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE 15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN 1. 2. A Run engine at idle. Check ignition timing with a timing light. Refer to EC-76, "IGNITION TIMING" . EC 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> GO TO 16. C D BBIA0379E E 16. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-35, "TIMING CHAIN" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation. 2. GO TO 4. F G 17. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART H Check the following. Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-288, "DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)" . ● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-281, "DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> 1. Repair or replace. 2. GO TO 4. ● I J K 18. CHECK ECM FUNCTION 1. 2. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is a rare case.) Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-138, "ECM Re-communicating Function" . >> GO TO 4. 19. INSPECTION END Did you replace ECM, referring this Basic Inspection procedure? Yes or No Yes >> 1. Perform EC-89, "VIN Registration" . 2. INSPECTION END No >> INSPECTION END Revision: October 2004 EC-75 2005 Titan L M BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check UBS00KUZ IDLE SPEED With CONSULT-II Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. SEF058Y With GST Check idle speed with GST. IGNITION TIMING Any of following two methods may be used. Method A 1. Attach timing light to loop wire as shown. BBIA0377E 2. Check ignition timing. BBIA0379E Method B 1. Remove ignition coil No.1. BBIA0360E Revision: October 2004 EC-76 2005 Titan BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE 2. Connect ignition coil No.1 and spark plug with suitable high-tension wire as shown, and attach timing light clamp to this wire. A EC C BBIA0378E D E F G SEF011V 3. Check ignition timing. H I J BBIA0379E K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-77 2005 Titan BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE Idle Mixture Ratio Adjustment UBS00KV0 PREPARATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Make sure that the following parts are in good order. ● Battery ● Ignition system ● Engine oil and coolant levels ● Fuses ● ECM harness connector ● Vacuum hoses ● Air intake system (Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.) ● Fuel pressure ● Engine compression ● Throttle valve ● Evaporative emission system On air conditioner equipped models, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is OFF. Checks should be carried out while selector lever is in P or N position. When measuring CO percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe. Turn off headlamp, heater blower, rear window defogger. Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead. Revision: October 2004 EC-78 2005 Titan BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE OVERALL SEQUENCE A EC C D E F G H I J K L M PBIB2086E Revision: October 2004 EC-79 2005 Titan BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE DETAILED PROCEDURE 1. INSPECTION START 1. 2. – – – – – – 3. – – – – 4. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for scheduled maintenance. Open engine hood and check the following: Harness connectors for improper connections Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections Hoses and ducts for leaks Air cleaner clogging Gasket Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied. Head lamp switch is OFF. SEF983U Air conditioner switch is OFF. Rear window defogger switch is OFF. Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points the middle of gauge. Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm. SEF976U 5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load. 6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. SEF977U 2. REPAIR OR REPLACE Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure. >> GO TO 3. Revision: October 2004 EC-80 2005 Titan BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE 3. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED 1. 2. A With CONSULT-II Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) 2 or 3 times under no load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute. EC C D E PBIA8513J 3. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-76, "IDLE SPEED" . F 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) G H SEF058Y I Without CONSULT-II 1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load. 2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) 2 or 3 times under no load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute. 3. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-76, "IDLE SPEED" . J K 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 4. L 4. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING M 1. 2. Stop engine. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . >> GO TO 5. 5. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . >> GO TO 6. Revision: October 2004 EC-81 2005 Titan BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE 6. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 7. No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. 2. GO TO 4. 7. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-76, "IDLE SPEED" . 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-76, "IDLE SPEED" . 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 8. 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-288, "DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)" . ● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-281, "DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> 1. Repair or replace. 2. GO TO 4. 9. CHECK ECM FUNCTION 1. 2. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is a rare case.) Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-138, "ECM Re-communicating Function" . >> GO TO 4. Revision: October 2004 EC-82 2005 Titan BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE 10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING 1. 2. A Run engine at idle. Check ignition timing with a timing light. Refer to EC-76, "IGNITION TIMING" . EC 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 19. OK (With GST)>>GO TO 20. NG >> GO TO 11. C D BBIA0379E E 11. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING 1. 2. Stop engine. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . F >> GO TO 12. G 12. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING H Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . >> GO TO 13. I 13. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 14. No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. 2. GO TO 4. J K L 14. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-76, "IDLE SPEED" . M 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Check idle speed. Refer to EC-76, "IDLE SPEED" . 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 17. Revision: October 2004 EC-83 2005 Titan BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE 15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN 1. 2. Run engine at idle. Check ignition timing with a timing light. Refer to EC-76, "IGNITION TIMING" . 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 19. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 20. NG >> GO TO 16. BBIA0379E 16. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-35, "TIMING CHAIN" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation. 2. GO TO 4. 17. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-288, "DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)" . ● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-281, "DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> 1. Repair or replace. 2. GO TO 4. 18. CHECK ECM FUNCTION 1. 2. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is a rare case.) Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-138, "ECM Re-communicating Function" . >> GO TO 4. Revision: October 2004 EC-84 2005 Titan BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE 19. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION A With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at a least 10 seconds. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position. NOTE: Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. 4. Release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. 5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 for 5 times. 6. Stop the vehicle and connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. 7. Make sure that no (1st trip) DTC is displayed in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 21. 1. 2. 3. EC C D E F 20. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION G With GST Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at a least 10 seconds. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position. NOTE: Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. 4. Release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. 5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 for 5 times. 6. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle. 7. Make sure that no (1st trip) DTC is displayed. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 21. 1. 2. 3. H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-85 2005 Titan BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE 21. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HARNESS 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery ground cable. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to EC-457, "Wiring Diagram" . A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 2 75 5 35 6 56 1 76 2 77 5 57 6 58 Bank1 Bank 2 Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 22. NG >> 1. Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 2. GO TO 4. 22. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING 1. 2. Reconnect ECM harness connector. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . >> GO TO 23. 23. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . >> GO TO 24. 24. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING Refer to EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? Yes or No Yes (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 25. Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 26. No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. 2. GO TO 4. Revision: October 2004 EC-86 2005 Titan BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE 25. CHECK CO% A With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points the middle of gauge. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. Select “ENG COOLANT TEMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Set “ENG COOLANT TEMP” to 5°C (41°F) by touching “DOWN” and “Qd”. 5. Start engine and rev it (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no load, then run engine at idle speed. 6. Check CO%. 1. 2. 3. 4. EC C D Idle CO: 3 − 11% and engine runs smoothly. E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 28. NG >> GO TO 27. SEF172Y F 26. CHECK CO% 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of gauge. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. Connect a resistor (4.4 kΩ) between terminals of engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. Start engine and rev it (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no load, then run engine at idle speed. Check CO%. Idle CO: 3 − 11% and engine runs smoothly. After checking CO%, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect the resistor from the terminals of engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector, and then connect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector to engine coolant temperature sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 28. NG >> GO TO 27. G H I J 7. K SEF982UA L M 27. RECONNECT AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Reconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. >> GO TO 31. 28. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 1. 2. Stop engine. Replace A/F sensor 1 on the malfunctioning bank. With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 29. With GST>>GO TO 30. Revision: October 2004 EC-87 2005 Titan BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE 29. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at a least 10 seconds. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position. NOTE: Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. 4. Release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. 5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 for 5 times. 6. Stop the vehicle and connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle. 7. Make sure that no (1st trip) DTC is displayed in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 31. 1. 2. 3. 30. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION With GST Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at a least 10 seconds. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in D position. NOTE: Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. 4. Release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. 5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 for 5 times. 6. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle. 7. Make sure that no (1st trip) DTC is displayed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 31. 1. 2. 3. 31. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Check fuel pressure regulator, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-92, "Fuel Pressure Check" . ● Check mass air flow sensor and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-171, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" and EC-180, "DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR" . ● Check injector and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC-608, "INJECTOR CIRCUIT" . ● Check engine coolant temperature sensor and its circuit, and repair or replace if necessary. Refer to EC192, "DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR" and EC-205, "DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 33. NG >> 1. Repair or replace. 2. GO TO 32. Revision: October 2004 EC-88 2005 Titan BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE 32. ERASE UNNECESSARY DTC A After this inspection, unnecessary DTC might be displayed. Erase the stored memory in ECM and TCM. Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" and AT-39, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)" . EC >> GO TO 4. C 33. CHECK ECM FUNCTION 1. 2. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but this is a rare case.) Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-138, "ECM Re-communicating Function" . D E >> GO TO 4. VIN Registration UBS00KV1 DESCRIPTION F VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is replaced. NOTE: Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M). G OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II H 1. 2. 3. 4. I Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to GI-46, "IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION" . Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped. Select “VIN REGISTRATION” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-II display. J K L PBIB2242E Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning UBS00KV2 DESCRIPTION M Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected. OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning UBS00KV3 DESCRIPTION Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected. Revision: October 2004 EC-89 2005 Titan BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF wait at least 10 seconds. Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound. Idle Air Volume Learning UBS00KV4 DESCRIPTION Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions: ● Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced. ● Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification. PREPARATION Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment. ● Battery voltage: More than 12.9V (At idle) ● Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F) ● Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch: ON ● Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is start the headlamp will not be illuminated. ● Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) ● Vehicle speed: Stopped ● Transmission: Warmed-up For models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until “ATF TEMP SE 1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/T” system indicates less than 0.9V. For models without CONSULT-II, drive vehicle for 10 minutes. OPERATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode. SEF217Z Revision: October 2004 EC-90 2005 Titan BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE 6. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds. A EC C SEF454Y D 7. 8. Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If “CMPLT” is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE below. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. ITEM SPECIFICATION Idle speed 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) Ignition timing 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) E F G MBIB0238E Without CONSULT-II NOTE: ● It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. ● It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has a malfunction. 1. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . 2. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds. a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal. 8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON. 10. Start engine and let it idle. 11. Wait 20 seconds. SEC897C 12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications. Revision: October 2004 EC-91 2005 Titan H I J K L M BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE ITEM SPECIFICATION Idle speed 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) Ignition timing 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE below. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: 1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-143, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . 5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the incident and perform Idle Air Volume Learning all over again: ● Engine stalls. ● Erroneous idle. Fuel Pressure Check UBS00KV5 FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. Turn ignition switch OFF. SEF214Y Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. Start engine. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. Turn ignition switch OFF. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system. BBIA0380E Revision: October 2004 EC-92 2005 Titan BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE FUEL PRESSURE CHECK A CAUTION: ● Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger. ● Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the EC quick connector o-ring maintains sealability. ● Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel pressure. ● Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical system operating (i.e. lights, rear defog, A/C, etc.). Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine loads and changes in C manifold vacuum. NOTE: Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pres- D sure cannot be completely released because A60 models do not have fuel return system. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-92, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . E 2. Remove engine cover. 3. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to EM-15, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . ● Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose. F ● Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector. ● Keep fuel hose connections clean. 4. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure G Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown in figure. ● Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter. H ● When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality. 5. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for I fuel leakage. 6. Start engine and check for fuel leakage. 7. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. BBIA0390E J ● During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes. At idling: K Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi) 8. 9. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. Check the following. ● Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging ● Fuel filter for clogging ● Fuel pump ● Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace. 10. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-92, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Revision: October 2004 EC-93 2005 Titan L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Trouble Diagnosis Introduction PFP:00004 UBS00KV6 INTRODUCTION The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel control, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM accepts input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators. It is essential that both input and output signals are proper and stable. At the same time, it is important that there are no malfunctions such as vacuum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other malfunctions with the engine. MEF036D It is much more difficult to diagnose an incident that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case, careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts. SEF233G A visual check only may not find the cause of the incidents. A road test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should be performed. Follow the Work Flow on EC-95, "WORK FLOW" . Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The customer can supply good information about such incidents, especially intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under what conditions they occur. A Diagnostic Worksheet like the example on EC-99, "Worksheet Sample" should be used. Start your diagnosis by looking for conventional malfunctions first. This will help troubleshoot driveability malfunctions on an electronically controlled engine vehicle. Revision: October 2004 EC-94 SEF234G 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WORK FLOW Overall Sequence A EC C D E F G H I J K L M PBIB2267E Revision: October 2004 EC-95 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Detailed Flow 1. GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when the incident/malfunction occurred) using the EC-98, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET" . >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK DTC*1 1. Check DTC*1 . 2. Perform the following procedure if DTC*1 is displayed. – Record DTC*1 and freeze frame data*2 . (Print them out with CONSULT-II or GST.) – Erase DTC*1 . (Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .) Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC*1 and the symptom described by the customer. (Symptom Matrix Chart is useful. Refer to EC-103, "Symptom Matrix Chart" .) 3. Check related service bulletins for information. Is any symptom described and any DTC detected? – Symptom is described, DTC*1 is displayed>>GO TO 3. Symptom is described, DTC*1 is not displayed>>GO TO 4. Symptom is not described, DTC*1 is displayed>>GO TO 5. 3. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer (except MIL ON). DIAGNOSIS WORK SHEET is useful to verify the incident. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode and check real time diagnosis results. Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected. >> GO TO 5. 4. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer. DIAGNOSIS WORK SHEET is useful to verify the incident. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode and check real time diagnosis results. Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected. >> GO TO 6. Revision: October 2004 EC-96 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 5. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE A 1 1 Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for the displayed DTC* , and then make sure that DTC* is detected again. At this time, always connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle, and check diagnostic results in real time on “DATA EC MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)”. If two or more DTCs*1 are detected, refer to EC-100, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" and determine trouble diagnosis order. C NOTE: ● Freeze frame data*2 is useful if the DTC*1 is not detected. ● Perform Overall Function Check if DTC Confirmation Procedure is not included on Service Manual. This D simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC*1 cannot be detected during this check. If the result of Overall Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC*1 by DTC ConfirmaE tion Procedure. Is DTC*1 detected? Yes >> GO TO 10. No >> Check according to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . F 6. PERFORM BASIC INSPECTION G Perform EC-71, "Basic Inspection" . With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7. Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 9. H 7. PERFORM DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE I With CONSULT-II Make sure that “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “B/FUEL SCHDL”, and “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” are within the SP value using CONSULT-II “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode. Refer to EC-143, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . Are they within the SP value? Yes >> GO TO 9. No >> GO TO 8. J K L SEF601Z M 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-144, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Is malfunctioning part detected? Yes >> GO TO 11. No >> GO TO 9. 9. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART Detect malfunctioning system according to EC-103, "Symptom Matrix Chart" based on the confirmed symptom in step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom. >> GO TO 10. Revision: October 2004 EC-97 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system. NOTE: The Diagnostic Procedure in EC section described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to Circuit Inspection in GI27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" . Is malfunctioning part detected? Yes >> GO TO 11. No >> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related ECM terminals using CONSULT-II. Refer to EC-116, "ECM Terminals and Reference Value" , EC-138, "CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor" . 11. REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART 1. 2. 3. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure again after repair and replacement. Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it, refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . >> GO TO 12. 12. FINAL CHECK When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check again, and then make sure that the malfunction have been repaired securely. When symptom was described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and make sure that the symptom is not detected. OK or NG NG (DTC*1 is detected)>>GO TO 10. NG (Symptom remains)>>GO TO 6. OK >> 1. Before returning the vehicle to the customer, make sure to erase unnecessary DTC*1 in ECM and TCM (Transmission Control Module). (Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSIONRELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" and AT-39, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)" .) 2. If the completion of SRT is needed, drive vehicle under the specific driving pattern. Refer to EC58, "Driving Pattern" . 3. INSPECTION END *1: Include 1st trip DTC. *2: Include 1st trip freeze frame data. DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET Description There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate. In general, each customer feels differently about a incident. It is important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a customer complaint. Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order to organize all the information for troubleshooting. Some conditions may cause the MIL to come on steady or blink and DTC to be detected. Examples: ● Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire. ● Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. Revision: October 2004 EC-98 SEF907L 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Worksheet Sample A EC C D E F G H I J K L M MTBL0017 Revision: October 2004 EC-99 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS DTC Inspection Priority Chart UBS00KV7 If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority chart. NOTE: If DTC U1000 and/or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-160, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . Priority 1 Detected items (DTC) ● U1000 U1001 CAN communication line ● P0101 P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor ● P0112 P0113 P0127 Intake air temperature sensor ● P0117 P0118 P0125 Engine coolant temperature sensor ● P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P1225 P1226 P2135 Throttle position sensor ● P0128 Thermostat function ● P0181 P0182 P0183 Fuel tank temperature sensor ● P0327 P0328 P0332 P0333 Knock sensor ● P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS) ● P0340 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) ● P0460 P0461 P0462 P0463 Fuel level sensor ● P0500 Vehicle speed sensor ● P0605 ECM ● P0705 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch ● P1229 Sensor power supply ● P1610 - P1615 NATS ● P1706 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch ● P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor Revision: October 2004 EC-100 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Priority 2 3 Detected items (DTC) A ● P0037 P0038 P0057 P0058 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater ● P0138 P0139 P0158 P0159 P1146 P1147 P1166 P1167 Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● P0441 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring ● P0444 P0445 P1444 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve ● P0447 P1446 EVAP canister vent control valve ● P0451 P0452 P0453 EVAP control system pressure sensor ● P0550 Power steering pressure sensor ● P0700 P0710 P0720 P0740 P0744 P0745 P1716 P1730 P1752 P1754 P1757 P1759 P1762 P1764 P1767 P1769 P1772 P1774 A/T related sensors and solenoid valves ● P1031 P1032 P1051 P1052 A/F sensor 1 heater ● P1065 ECM power supply ● P1122 Electric throttle control function ● P1124 P1126 P1128 Electric throttle control actuator ● P1217 Engine over temperature (OVERHEAT) ● P1271 P1272 P1273 P1274 P1276 P1278 P1279 P1281 P1282 P1283 P1284 P1286 P1288 P1289 A/F sensor 1 ● P1805 Brake switch ● P0171 P0172 P0174 P0175 Fuel injection system function ● P0300 - P0308 Misfire ● P0420 P0430 Three way catalyst function ● P0442 P0455 P0456 EVAP control system ● P0506 P0507 Idle speed control system ● P1121 Electric throttle control actuator ● P1148 P1168 Closed loop control ● P1211 TCS control unit ● P1212 TCS communication line ● P1564 ASCD steering switch ● P1572 ASCD brake switch ● P1574 ASCD vehicle speed sensor EC C D E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-101 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Fail-safe Chart UBS00KV8 When the DTC listed below is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut. P0117 P0118 Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch ON or START. CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM. Condition Engine coolant temperature decided (CONSULT-II display) Just as ignition switch is turned ON or START 40°C (104°F) More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or START 80°C (176°F) Except as shown above 40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F) (Depends on the time) When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates while engine is running. P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P2135 Throttle position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. P1121 Electric throttle control actuator (When electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring malfunction:) ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm. (When throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not in specified range:) ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less. (When ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open:) While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls. The engine can restart in N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more. ● P1122 Electric throttle control function ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. P1124 P1126 Throttle control motor relay ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. P1128 Throttle control motor ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. P1229 Sensor power supply ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there is malfunction on engine control system. Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open by means of operating fail-safe function. The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected and demands the driver to repair the malfunction. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Revision: October 2004 Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut EC-102 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Symptom Matrix Chart UBS00KV9 A SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM 1 1 2 3 2 Fuel pressure regulator system 3 3 4 4 4 Injector circuit 1 1 2 3 2 Evaporative emission system 3 3 4 4 4 Air Positive crankcase ventilation system 3 3 4 4 4 Incorrect idle speed adjustment Ignition Electric throttle control actuator 1 1 2 3 3 Incorrect ignition timing adjustment 3 3 1 1 Ignition circuit 1 1 2 2 2 3 Main power supply and ground circuit Mass air flow sensor circuit BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE) Fuel pump circuit EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION Fuel EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION AE OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION AD SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION AC IDLING VIBRATION HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT AB ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING ENGINE STALL AA Warranty symptom code HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA) SYMPTOM AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA 2 2 4 4 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 1 1 4 2 EC 3 4 EC-608 4 4 EC-32 4 4 4 1 1 1 EC-71 2 EC-393, EC-395 , EC-401 , EC-406 2 1 1 1 1 EC-71 2 2 2 2 2 EC-596 3 3 3 3 3 EC-154 2 2 2 2 2 Knock sensor circuit 2 Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit Revision: October 2004 2 2 2 EC-455, EC-464 , EC-473 , EC-483 , EC-493 , EC-503 , EC-515 EC-198, EC-261 , EC-446 , EC-448 , EC-581 2 EC-515, EC-568 , EC-574 , EC-588 1 3 EC-276 EC-281 EC-103 H I J K L EC-192, EC-205 3 Throttle position sensor circuit 2 2 EC-171, EC-180 3 2 G EC-45 2 3 3 EC-614 2 Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit F 2 1 D E EC-92 1 1 Reference page 4 2 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit 2 C 2005 Titan M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ENGINE STALL HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING IDLING VIBRATION SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE) Warranty symptom code HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA) SYMPTOM AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA 3 2 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit Vehicle speed signal circuit 2 Power steering pressure sensor circuit 2 ECM 2 2 Park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit EC-288 3 3 3 3 3 Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit 3 3 3 3 2 ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Electrical load signal circuit Air conditioner circuit EC-368 EC-374 3 3 3 3 EC-379, EC-389 3 EC-558 4 EC-620 3 2 2 Reference page 3 3 4 3 3 3 EC-625 3 3 3 2 MTC-28 EC-434, EC-435 or BRC98 1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. (continued on next page) Revision: October 2004 EC-104 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER A Fuel ENGINE STALL HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING IDLING VIBRATION SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE) Warranty symptom code HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA) SYMPTOM AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA EC Fuel tank Fuel piping 5 5 5 5 5 5 F G — 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 — Air duct EM-14 Air cleaner EM-14 Electric throttle control actuator 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Battery 1 1 1 1 EM-15 1 1 Generator circuit SC-17 3 Signal plate 6 EM-76 Park/neutral position (PNP) switch 4 AT-105 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 5 3 EM-60 Cylinder block Piston 4 Piston ring Connecting rod 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 EM-76 Bearing Crankshaft Valve mechanism Timing chain EM-35 Camshaft Intake valve EM-44 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 3 Exhaust valve Revision: October 2004 5 EC-105 L SC-10 1 Cylinder head 5 K SC-4 Starter circuit Cylinder head gasket I J 5 EM-15 1 H EM-14 5 Air leakage from intake manifold/ Collector/Gasket Engine E — 5 Air leakage from air duct (Mass air flow sensor — electric throttle control actuator) Cranking D FL-3 Valve deposit Air Reference page FL-10 5 Vapor lock Poor fuel (Heavy weight gasoline, Low octane) C EM-60 2005 Titan M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 5 5 5 BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE) 5 EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION 5 Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/ Gasket EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION AE OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH AD SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE AC IDLING VIBRATION LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION AB ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION AA HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT Exhaust ENGINE STALL Warranty symptom code HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA) SYMPTOM AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA 5 5 5 Reference page EM-19, EX3 Three way catalyst Lubrication Cooling Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil filter/Oil gallery/Oil cooler 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-22, LU13 , LU-10 , LU-11 Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil LU-7 Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap CO-12 Thermostat 5 CO-19 Water pump Water gallery CO-17 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 5 CO-8 Cooling fan 5 CO-15 Coolant level (Low)/Contaminated coolant 5 CO-10 NVIS (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS) 1 1 BL-136 1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. Revision: October 2004 EC-106 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Engine Control Component Parts Location UBS00KVA A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBIA0452E Revision: October 2004 EC-107 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS BBIA0381E Revision: October 2004 EC-108 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBIA0382E Revision: October 2004 EC-109 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS BBIA0440E Revision: October 2004 EC-110 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBIA0384E Revision: October 2004 EC-111 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PBIB2637E Revision: October 2004 EC-112 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Vacuum Hose Drawing UBS00KVB A EC C D E F G H I J K L M PBIB2052E Refer to EC-23, "System Diagram" for Vacuum Control System. Revision: October 2004 EC-113 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Circuit Diagram UBS00KVC BBWA1720E Revision: October 2004 EC-114 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1721E Revision: October 2004 EC-115 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout UBS00KVD MBIB0045E ECM Terminals and Reference Value UBS00KVE PREPARATION 1. 2. ECM is located in the engine room passenger side behind battery. Remove ECM harness connector. BBIA0386E 3. 4. When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen it with levers as far as they will go as shown in the figure. Connect a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST) between the ECM and ECM harness connector. ● Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time. ● Data is for comparison and may not be exact. BBIA0387E ECM INSPECTION TABLE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 1 WIRE COLOR B ITEM ECM ground CONDITION [Engine is running] ● Idle speed DATA (DC Voltage) Body ground Approximately 5V [Engine is running] 2 O/B A/F sensor 1 heater (bank 1) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed PBIB1584E Revision: October 2004 EC-116 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS TERMINAL NO. 3 WIRE COLOR L ITEM Throttle control motor relay power supply CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) A EC 0 - 14V [Ignition switch: ON] 4 L/W Throttle control motor (Close) ● Engine: Stopped ● Selector lever: D ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released C D PBIB1104E 0 - 14V E [Ignition switch: ON] 5 L/B Throttle control motor (Open) ● Engine: Stopped ● Selector lever: D ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed F PBIB1105E G [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. – 6 GR Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (bank 1) H 0 - 1.0V Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load I [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine: Stopped [Engine is running] ● 12 R ● Steering wheel: Being turned [Engine is running] ● J 0.5 - 4.5V K Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm [Engine is running] Power steering pressure sensor BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Steering wheel: Not being turned [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed 0.4 - 0.8V L Approximately 10V M NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle 13 O PBIB1041E Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Approximately 10V [Engine is running] ● Engine speed: 2,000 rpm PBIB1042E Revision: October 2004 EC-117 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed DATA (DC Voltage) 1.0 - 4.0V NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle 14 Y PBIB1039E Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 1.0 - 4.0V [Engine is running] ● Engine speed: 2,000 rpm PBIB1040E 15 W Knock sensor (bank 1) [Engine is running] ● 16 35 Idle speed BR/R BR/G 56 LG/B 75 P/B Approximately 2.5V Approximately 3.1V [Engine is running] A/F sensor 1 (bank 1) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 2.6V Approximately 2.3V Approximately 2.3V BATTERY VOLTAGE [Engine is running] 21 22 23 44 O/L BR GR/W O Injector No. 5 Injector No. 3 Injector No. 1 Injector No. 7 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed (11 - 14V) NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle SEC984C BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed: 2,000 rpm SEC985C Approximately 5V [Engine is running] 24 BR/W A/F sensor 1 heater (bank 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed PBIB1584E Revision: October 2004 EC-118 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. – 25 O/G Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (bank 2) EC 0 - 1.0V Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load C [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine: Stopped [Engine is running] ● 32 L EVAP control system pressure sensor 34 R/B Intake air temperature sensor 36 W Knock sensor (bank 2) D BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm E [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V [Engine is running] Approximately 0 - 4.8V Output voltage varies with intake air temperature. F Approximately 2.5V G [Engine is running] ● Idle speed BATTERY VOLTAGE [Engine is running] 40 41 42 63 Y/G P L G Injector No. 6 Injector No. 4 Injector No. 2 Injector No. 8 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed (11 - 14V) H I NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle SEC984C J BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) K [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed: 2,000 rpm L SEC985C M BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] 45 L/Y ● Idle speed ● Accelerator pedal: Not depressed even slightly, after engine starting EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve SEC990C BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] ● Engine speed: About 2,000 rpm (More than 100 seconds after starting engine) SEC991C Revision: October 2004 EC-119 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 47 Y Sensor power supply (Throttle position sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 48 SB Sensor power supply (EVAP control system pressure sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 49 R/Y Sensor power supply (Refrigerant pressure sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] 50 B ● Engine: Stopped ● Selector lever: D ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released Throttle position sensor 1 More than 0.36V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine: Stopped ● Selector lever: D ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V [Engine is running] 51 W ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Mass air flow sensor 1.0 - 1.3V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed: 2,500 rpm 1.7 - 2.1V [Engine is running] 55 R ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) – 57 58 After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load L/P GR/G 76 G/L 77 BR/B Approximately 2.6V [Engine is running] A/F sensor 1 (bank 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed L/R GR/R O/W Y/R Approximately 2.3V Approximately 3.1V Approximately 2.3V [Engine is running] 46 60 61 62 0 - Approximately 1.0V Ignition signal No. 7 Ignition signal No. 5 Ignition signal No. 3 Ignition signal No. 1 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed 0 - 0.3V NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle SEC986C 0.1 - 0.6V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed: 2,500 rpm SEC987C Revision: October 2004 EC-120 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A [Engine is running] 66 R Sensor ground (Throttle position sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V EC Approximately 0V C Approximately 5V D Less than 4.75V E [Engine is running] 67 68 B Sensor ground W/L Sensor power supply (PSP sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Ignition switch: ON] [Ignition switch: ON] 69 W Throttle position sensor 2 ● Engine: Stopped ● Selector lever: D ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine: Stopped ● Selector lever: D ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed F More than 0.36V G [Engine is running] 70 73 B/W Y/B Refrigerant pressure sensor Engine coolant temperature sensor ● Warm-up condition ● Both A/C switch and blower switch: ON (Compressor: Operates.) [Engine is running] 1.0 - 4.0V H Approximately 0 - 4.8V Output voltage varies with engine coolant temperature. I [Engine is running] 74 L ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) – J 0 - Approximately 1.0V K After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load L [Engine is running] 78 B/W Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Engine is running] 65 79 80 81 G/R V/W W/R W/G Ignition signal No. 8 Ignition signal No. 6 Ignition signal No. 4 Ignition signal No. 2 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V M 0 - 0.3V NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle SEC986C 0.1 - 0.6V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed: 2,500 rpm SEC987C Revision: October 2004 EC-121 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 82 B/R Sensor ground (APP sensor 1) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V [Engine is running] 83 85 G/W G/W Sensor ground (APP sensor 2) Data link connector ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Ignition switch: ON] ● CONSULT-II or GST: Disconnected Approximately 0V Approximately 5V - Battery voltage (11 - 14V) 86 P CAN communication line [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 1.1 - 2.3V Output voltage varies with the communication status 90 L Sensor power supply (APP sensor 1) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 91 W/R Sensor power supply (APP sensor 2) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 94 L CAN communication line [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 2.6 - 3.2V Output voltage varies with the communication status. [Ignition switch: ON] 98 G/R Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 ● Engine: Stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine: Stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed [Ignition switch: ON] ● ASCD steering switch: OFF [Ignition switch: ON] ● 99 G/Y ASCD steering switch MAIN switch: Pressed [Ignition switch: ON] ● CANCEL switch: Pressed [Ignition switch: ON] ● RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed [Ignition switch: ON] ● SET/COAST switch: Pressed [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 101 R/W Stop lamp switch Brake pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: OFF] ● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed [Ignition switch: ON] ● 102 GR/R PNP switch O Selector lever: P or N [Ignition switch: ON] ● 104 Except the above gear position 2.0 - 2.5V Approximately 4V Approximately 0V Approximately 1V Approximately 3V Approximately 2V Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V Throttle control motor relay Revision: October 2004 0.25 - 0.50V EC-122 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) A [Ignition switch: ON] 106 107 BR/W V/R Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 Fuel tank temperature sensor ● Engine: Stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released ● Engine: Stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed [Engine is running] ● BR/W ASCD brake switch Brake pedal: Slightly depressed [Ignition switch: ON] ● 109 L/W Brake pedal: Fully released C Approximately 0 - 4.8V Output voltage varies with fuel tank temperature. D Approximately 0V E BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) F 0V [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Ignition switch ● W/B 4.2 - 4.8V [Ignition switch: OFF] [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] 111 EC [Ignition switch: ON] [Ignition switch: ON] 108 0.5 - 1.0V ECM relay (Self shut-off) For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF G 0 - 1.5V H BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) I 0 - 1.5V J BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) K Body ground L [Ignition switch: ON] ● 113 GR Fuel pump relay For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: ON] ● More than 1 second after turning ignition switch ON [Engine is running] 115 116 B B/W ECM ground 117 L/Y EVAP canister vent control valve [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 119 120 BR BR Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 121 W Power supply for ECM (Buckup) [Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) ● Idle speed : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Revision: October 2004 EC-123 2005 Titan M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE) UBS00KVF FUNCTION Diagnostic test mode Function Work support This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the indications on the CONSULT-II unit. Self-diagnostic results Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data can be read and erased quickly.* Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read. Data monitor (SPEC) Input/Output of the specification for Basic fuel schedule, AFM, A/F feedback control value and the other data monitor items can be read. CAN diagnostic support monitor The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. Active test Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also shifts some parameters in a specified range. DTC & SRT confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed. Function test This mode is used to inform customers when their vehicle condition requires periodic maintenance. ECM part number ECM part number can be read. *: The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased. ● Diagnostic trouble codes ● 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes ● Freeze frame data ● 1st trip freeze frame data ● System readiness test (SRT) codes ● Test values Revision: October 2004 EC-124 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION A DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE INPUT OUTPUT ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS Item WORK SUPPORT SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS DTC*1 FREEZE FRAME DATA*2 DATA MONITOR DATA MONITOR (SPEC) DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION ACTIVE TEST SRT STATUS DTC WORK SUPPORT Crankshaft position sensor (POS) × × × × Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) × × × × Mass air flow sensor × × × Engine coolant temperature sensor × × × Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 × × × × × Heated oxygen sensor 2 × × × × × Wheel sensor × × × Accelerator pedal position sensor × × × Throttle position sensor × × × Fuel tank temperature sensor × × × EVAP control system pressure sensor × × × Intake air temperature sensor × × × Knock sensor × Refrigerant pressure sensor × × Closed throttle position switch (accelerator pedal position sensor signal) × × Air conditioner switch × × × × × × × × × Stop lamp switch × × × Power steering pressure sensor × × × Battery voltage × × Load signal × × D × × G H J K L × × × ASCD steering switch × × × ASCD brake switch × × × Fuel injector × × × Power transistor (Ignition timing) × × × × × × × Throttle control motor relay × Throttle control motor × EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve × Air conditioner relay × M × × × × × × × × Cooling fan relay × × × Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater × × × × Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater × × × × × × × × × × × Calculated load value Revision: October 2004 E F Fuel level sensor EVAP canister vent control valve C I Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Fuel pump relay EC EC-125 × 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS X: Applicable *1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs. *2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-II screen in freeze frame data mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-53, "FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA" . INSPECTION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Connect “CONSULT-II” and “CONSULT-II CONVERTER” to data link connector, which is located under LH dash panel near the hood opener handle. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0369E 4. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. BCIA0029E 5. Touch “ENGINE”. If “ENGINE” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . BCIA0030E 6. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service procedure. For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation Manual. BCIA0031E Revision: October 2004 EC-126 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WORK SUPPORT MODE Work Item A WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE ● FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START” DURING IDLING. CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS. When releasing fuel pressure from fuel line IDLE AIR VOL LEARN ● THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN ECM. When learning the idle air volume SELF-LEARNING CONT ● THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEFFICIENT. When clearing the coefficient of self-learning control value EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE CLOSE THE EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE IN ORDER TO MAKE EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS. ● IGN SW ON ● ENGINE NOT RUNNING ● AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IS ABOVE 0°C (32°F). ● NO VACUUM AND NO HIGH PRESSURE IN EVAP SYSTEM ● When detecting EVAP vapor leak point of EVAP system WITHIN 10 MINUTES AFTER STARTING “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” ● WHEN TRYING TO EXECUTE “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” UNDER THE CONDITION EXCEPT ABOVE, CONSULTII WILL DISCONTINUE IT AND DISPLAY APPROPRIATE INSTRUCTION. C D E F G FUEL TANK TEMP. IS MORE THAN 0°C (32°F). ● EC H I NOTE: WHEN STARTING ENGINE, CONSULT-II MAY DISPLAY “BATTERY VOLTAGE IS LOW. CHARGE BATTERY”, EVEN IN USING CHARGED BATTERY. J VIN REGISTRATION ● IN THIS MODE, VIN IS REGISTERED IN ECM When registering VIN in ECM TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ* ● IDLE CONDITION When setting target idle speed TARGET IGN TIM ADJ* ● IDLE CONDITION When adjusting target ignition timing *: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure. K L SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE Self Diagnostic Item Regarding items of “DTC and 1st trip DTC”, refer to EC-49, "EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS" . Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data Freeze frame data item* DIAG TROUBLE CODE [PXXXX] Description ● The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as “PXXXX”. (Refer to EC-8, "INDEX FOR DTC" .) ● “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. ● One mode in the following is displayed. “Mode2”: Open loop due to detected system malfunction “Mode3”: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enleanment) “Mode4”: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control “Mode5”: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop CAL/LD VALUE [%] ● The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. COOLANT TEMP [°C] or [°F] ● The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. FUEL SYS-B1 FUEL SYS-B2 Revision: October 2004 EC-127 2005 Titan M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Freeze frame data item* L-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] Description ● “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. ● The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule than short-term fuel trim. ● “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. ● The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule. ENGINE SPEED [rpm] ● The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. VEHICL SPEED [km/h] or [mph] ● The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. ABSOL TH-P/S [%] ● The throttle valve opening at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. B/FUEL SCHDL [msec] ● The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. INT/A TEMP SE [°C] or [°F] ● The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. L-FUEL TRM-B2 [%] S-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] S-FUEL TRM-B2 [%] *: The item is the same as that of 1st trip freeze frame data. DATA MONITOR MODE Monitored Item Monitored item [Unit] ECM INPUT SIGNALS ×: Applicable MAIN SIGNALS Description ● ENG SPEED [rpm] × × MAS A/F SE-B1 [V] × × B/FUEL SCHDL [msec] × A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] × ● The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor is displayed. ● Base fuel schedule indicates the fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM, prior to any learned on board correction. ● The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle is indicated. × A/F ALPHA-B2 [%] COOLAN TEMP/S [°C] or [°F] × × A/F SEN1 (B1) [V] × × A/F SEN1 (B2) [V] × HO2S2 (B1) [V] × HO2S2 (B2) [V] × Revision: October 2004 Indicates the engine speed computed from the signal of the crankshaft position sensor (POS) and camshaft position sensor (PHASE). ● The engine coolant temperature (determined by the signal voltage of the engine coolant temperature sensor) is displayed. ● The A/F signal computed from the input signal of the A/F sensor 1 is displayed. ● The signal voltage of the heated oxygen sensor 2 is displayed. EC-128 Remarks ● Accuracy becomes poor if engine speed drops below the idle rpm. ● If the signal is interrupted while the engine is running, an abnormal value may be indicated. ● When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated. ● When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated. ● This data also includes the data for the air-fuel ratio learning control. ● When the engine coolant temperature sensor is open or short-circuited, ECM enters fail-safe mode. The engine coolant temperature determined by the ECM is displayed. 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Monitored item [Unit] ECM INPUT SIGNALS HO2S2 MNTR (B1) [RICH/LEAN] × MAIN SIGNALS ● HO2S2 MNTR (B2) [RICH/LEAN] × VHCL SPEED SE [km/h] or [mph] × × BATTERY VOLT [V] × × ACCEL SEN 1 [V] × × ACCEL SEN 2 [V] × THRTL SEN 1 [V] × THRTL SEN 2 [V] × FUEL T/TMP SE [°C] or [°F] Description × Display of heated oxygen sensor 2 signal: RICH: means the amount of oxygen after three way catalyst is relatively small. LEAN: means the amount of oxygen after three way catalyst is relatively large. ● The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle speed signal sent from combination meter is displayed. ● The power supply voltage of ECM is displayed. ● The accelerator pedal position sensor signal voltage is displayed. ● The throttle position sensor signal voltage is displayed. ● The fuel temperature (determined by the signal voltage of the fuel tank temperature sensor) is displayed. ● The intake air temperature (determined by the signal voltage of the intake air temperature sensor) is indicated. × INT/A TEMP SE [°C] or [°F] × EVAP SYS PRES [V] × ● The signal voltage of EVAP control system pressure sensor is displayed. FUEL LEVEL SE [V] × ● The signal voltage of the fuel level sensor is displayed. ● Indicates start signal status [ON/OFF] computed by the ECM according to the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. × START SIGNAL [ON/OFF] × × CLSD THL POS [ON/OFF] × × AIR COND SIG [ON/OFF] × × P/N POSI SW [ON/OFF] × × PW/ST SIGNAL [ON/OFF] ● ● × ● [ON/OFF] condition of the power steering system (determined by the signal voltage of the power steering pressure sensor signal) is indicated. ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the electrical load signal. ON: Lighting switch is in 2nd position. OFF: Lighting switch is OFF. LOAD SIGNAL [ON/OFF] × IGNITION SW [ON/OFF] × ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ignition switch signal. HEATER FAN SW [ON/OFF] × ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from heater fan switch signal. Revision: October 2004 ● When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated. C D E ● ● ACCEL SEN 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal. F THRTL SEN 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal. G H I J ● After starting the engine, [OFF] is displayed regardless of the starter signal. EC-129 K L Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air conditioner switch as determined by the air conditioner signal. Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the park/neutral position (PNP) switch signal. × EC Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] computed by ECM according to the accelerator pedal position sensor signal. ● × A Remarks M 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Monitored item [Unit] BRAKE SW [ON/OFF] ECM INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS × INJ PULSE-B1 [msec] × Description ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the stop lamp switch signal. ● Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse width compensated by ECM according to the input signals. ● Indicates the ignition timing computed by ECM according to the input signals. ● “Calculated load value” indicates the value of the current air flow divided by peak air flow. ● Indicates the mass air flow computed by ECM according to the signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor. ● Indicates the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve control value computed by the ECM according to the input signals. ● The opening becomes larger as the value increases. ● The air conditioner relay control condition (determined by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated. ● Indicates the fuel pump relay control condition determined by ECM according to the input signals. ● The control condition of the EVAP canister vent control valve (determined by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated. ON: Closed OFF: Open ● Indicates the throttle control motor relay control condition determined by the ECM according to the input signals. ● The control condition of the cooling fan (determined by ECM according to the input signals) is indicated. HI: High speed operation OFF: Stop ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated oxygen sensor 2 heater determined by ECM according to the input signals. ● Indicates the engine speed computed from the turbine revolution sensor signal. ● Indicates the vehicle speed computed from the revolution sensor signal. ● Display the condition of idle air volume learning YET: Idle Air Volume Learning has not been performed yet. CMPLT: Idle Air Volume Learning has already been performed successfully. INJ PULSE-B2 [msec] IGN TIMING [BTDC] × CAL/LD VALUE [%] MASS AIRFLOW [g·m/s] PURG VOL C/V [%] AIR COND RLY [ON/OFF] × FUEL PUMP RLY [ON/OFF] × VENT CONT/V [ON/OFF] THRTL RELAY [ON/OFF] COOLING FAN [HI/OFF] HO2S2 HTR (B1) [ON/OFF] × × HO2S2 HTR (B2) [ON/OFF] I/P PULLY SPD [rpm] VEHICLE SPEED [km/h] or [MPH] IDL A/V LEARN [YET/CMPLT] Revision: October 2004 EC-130 Remarks ● When the engine is stopped, a certain computed value is indicated. ● When the engine is stopped, a certain value is indicated. 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Monitored item [Unit] ECM INPUT SIGNALS TRVL AFTER MIL [km] or [mile] A/F S1 HTR (B1) [%] A/F S1 HTR (B2) [%] AC PRESS SEN [V] VHCL SPEED SE [km/h] or [mph] SET VHCL SPD [km/h] or [mph] MAIN SIGNALS Description ● Distance traveled while MIL is activated. ● A/F sensor 1 heater control value computed by ECM according to the input signals. ● The current flow to the heater becomes larger as the value increases. ● The signal voltage from the refrigerant pressure sensor is displayed. D ● The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle speed signal sent from combination meter is displayed. E ● The preset vehicle speed is displayed. MAIN SW [ON/OFF] ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from MAIN switch signal. CANCEL SW [ON/OFF] ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from CANCEL switch signal. RESUME/ACC SW [ON/OFF] ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from RESUME/ACCELERATE switch signal. SET SW [ON/OFF] ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from SET/ COAST switch signal. BRAKE SW1 [ON/OFF] ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ASCD brake switch signal. BRAKE SW2 [ON/OFF] ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of stop lamp switch signal. ● Indicates the vehicle cruise condition. NON: Vehicle speed is maintained at the ASCD set speed. CUT: Vehicle speed increased to excessively high compared with the ASCD set speed, and ASCD operation is cut off. VHCL SPD CUT [NON/CUT] ● LO SPEED CUT [NON/CUT] AT OD MONITOR [ON/OFF] AT OD CANCEL [ON/OFF] CRUISE LAMP [ON/OFF] SET LAMP [ON/OFF] Revision: October 2004 A Remarks EC C F G H I J K Indicates the vehicle cruise condition. NON: Vehicle speed is maintained at the ASCD set speed. CUT: Vehicle speed decreased to excessively low compared with the ASCD set speed, and ASCD operation is cut off. ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D according to the input signal from the TCM. ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D cancel signal sent from the TCM. ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of CRUISE lamp determined by the ECM according to the input signals. ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of SET lamp determined by the ECM according to the input signals. EC-131 L M 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ECM INPUT SIGNALS Monitored item [Unit] MAIN SIGNALS Description Remarks Voltage [V] Frequency [msec], [Hz] or [%] ● DUTY-HI Voltage, frequency, duty cycle or pulse width measured by the probe. ● Only # is displayed if item is unable to be measured. ● Figures with #s are temporary ones. They are the same figures as an actual piece of data which was just previously measured. DUTY-LOW PLS WIDTH-HI PLS WIDTH-LOW NOTE: Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically. DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE Monitored Item ECM INPUT SIGNALS Monitored item [Unit] MAIN SIGNALS ENG SPEED [rpm] × × MAS A/F SE-B1 [V] × × B/FUEL SCHDL [msec] Description ● Indicates the engine speed computed from the signal of the crankshaft position sensor (POS) and camshaft position sensor (PHASE). ● The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor specification is displayed. ● Base fuel schedule indicates the fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM, prior to any learned on board correction. × ● A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] A/F ALPHA-B2 [%] × The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle is indicated. Remarks ● When engine is running specification range is indicated. ● When engine is running specification range is indicated. ● When engine is running specification range is indicated. ● This data also includes the data for the air-fuel ratio learning control. NOTE: Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically. ACTIVE TEST MODE Test Item TEST ITEM CONDITION ● FUEL INJECTION IGNITION TIMING POWER BALANCE ● Engine: Return to the original trouble condition Change the amount of fuel injection using CONSULT-II. JUDGEMENT If trouble symptom disappears, see CHECK ITEM. CHECK ITEM (REMEDY) ● Harness and connectors ● Fuel injector ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Perform Idle Air Volume Learning. ● Engine: Return to the original trouble condition ● Timing light: Set ● Retard the ignition timing using CONSULT-II. ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine. ● Harness and connectors ● Compression ● A/C switch: OFF ● Fuel injector ● Selector lever: P or N ● Power transistor ● Cut off each injector signal one at a time using CONSULT-II. ● Spark plug ● Ignition coil Revision: October 2004 If trouble symptom disappears, see CHECK ITEM. Engine runs rough or dies. EC-132 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS TEST ITEM COOLING FAN* ENG COOLANT TEMP FUEL PUMP RELAY PURG VOL CONT/V FUEL/T TEMP SEN VENT CONTROL/V CONDITION JUDGEMENT ● Ignition switch: ON ● Turn the cooling fan HI and OFF using CONSULT-II. ● Engine: Return to the original trouble condition ● Change the engine coolant temperature using CONSULT-II. ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) ● Turn the fuel pump relay ON and OFF using CONSULT-II and listen to operating sound. ● Engine: After warming up, run engine at 1,500 rpm. ● Change the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve opening percent using CONSULT-II. CHECK ITEM (REMEDY) Cooling fan moves and stops. If trouble symptom disappears, see CHECK ITEM. Fuel pump relay makes the operating sound. ● Harness and connectors ● Cooling fan motor ● IPDM E/R ● Harness and connectors ● Engine coolant temperature sensor ● Fuel injector ● Harness and connectors ● Fuel pump relay A EC C D E Engine speed changes according to the opening percent. ● Change the fuel tank temperature using CONSULT-II. ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) ● Turn solenoid valve ON and OFF with the CONSULT-II and listen to operating sound. ● Harness and connectors ● Solenoid valve F G Solenoid valve makes an operating sound. ● Harness and connectors ● Solenoid valve H I *: Leaving cooling fan OFF with CONSULT-II while engine is running may cause the engine to overheat. DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE SRT STATUS Mode J For details, refer to EC-54, "SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE" . SRT WORK SUPPORT Mode K This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT while monitoring the SRT status. DTC WORK SUPPORT Mode Test mode EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM A/F SEN1 Test item Condition PURG FLOW P0441 EC-301 EVP SML LEAK P0442/P1442* EC-306 EVP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456* EC-353 PURG VOL CN/V P1444 EC-527 A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276 EC-493 A/F SEN1 (B2) P1286 EC-493 Refer to corresponding trouble diagnosis for DTC. A/F SEN1 (B1) P1278/P1279 A/F SEN1 (B2) P1288/P1289 HO2S2 Reference page EC-503, EC-515 EC-515, EC-515 HO2S2 (B1) P0139 EC-222 HO2S2 (B1) P1146 EC-411 HO2S2 (B1) P1147 EC-411 HO2S2 (B2) P0159 EC-222 HO2S2 (B2) P1166 EC-411 HO2S2 (B2) P1167 EC-422 *: DTC P1442 and P1456 does not apply to A60 models but appears in DTC Work Support Mode screens. Revision: October 2004 EC-133 2005 Titan L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE (RECORDING VEHICLE DATA) Description CONSULT-II has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by touching “SETTING” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. 1. “AUTO TRIG” (Automatic trigger): ● The malfunction will be identified on the CONSULT-II screen in real time. In other words, DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will be displayed if the malfunction is detected by ECM. At the moment a malfunction is detected by ECM, “MONITOR” in “DATA MONITOR” screen is changed to “Recording Data ... xx%” as shown in the figure, and the data after the malfunction detection is recorded. Then when the percentage reached 100%, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is displayed. If “STOP” is touched on the screen during “Recording Data ... SEF705Y xx%”, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is also displayed. The recording time after the malfunction detection and the recording speed can be changed by “TRIGGER POINT” and “Recording Speed”. Refer to CONSULT-II Operation Manual. 2. “MANU TRIG” (Manual trigger): ● DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will not be displayed automatically on CONSULT-II screen even though a malfunction is detected by ECM. DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though a malfunction is detected. SEF707X Revision: October 2004 EC-134 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Operation 1. 2. A “AUTO TRIG” ● While trying to detect the DTC/1st trip DTC by performing the DTC Confirmation Procedure, be sure to select to “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. You can confirm the malfunction at the moment it is detected. EC ● While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT-II should be set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode, especially in case the incident is intermittent. When you are inspecting the circuit by gently shaking (or twisting) the suspicious connectors, compo- C nents and harness in the DTC Confirmation Procedure, the moment a malfunction is found the DTC/1st trip DTC will be displayed. (Refer to “INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS” in GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .) D “MANU TRIG” ● If the malfunction is displayed as soon as “DATA MONITOR” is selected, reset CONSULT-II to “MANU TRIG”. By selecting “MANU TRIG” you can monitor and store the data. The data can be utilized for furE ther diagnosis, such as a comparison with the value for the normal operating condition. F G H I J K L M PBIB0197E Revision: October 2004 EC-135 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function UBS00KVG DESCRIPTION Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with SAE J1978 has 8 different functions explained below. ISO9141 is used as the protocol. The name GST or Generic Scan Tool is used in this service manual. SEF139P FUNCTION Diagnostic test mode Function Service $01 READINESS TESTS This diagnostic service gains access to current emission-related data values, including analog inputs and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information. Service $02 (FREEZE DATA) This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by ECM during the freeze frame. For details, refer to EC-53, "FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA" . Service $03 DTCs This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which were stored by ECM. This diagnostic service can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This includes: Service $04 CLEAR DIAG INFO ● Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (Service $01) ● Clear diagnostic trouble codes (Service $03) ● Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (Service $01) ● Clear freeze frame data (Service $02) ● Reset status of system monitoring test (Service $01) ● Clear on board monitoring test results (Service $06 and $07) Service $06 (ON BOARD TESTS) This diagnostic service accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of specific components/systems that are not continuously monitored. Service $07 (ON BOARD TESTS) This diagnostic service enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emissionrelated powertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal driving conditions. This diagnostic service can close EVAP system in ignition switch ON position (Engine stopped). When this diagnostic service is performed, the EVAP canister vent control valve can be closed. In the following conditions, this diagnostic service cannot function. Service $08 Service $09 — (CALIBRATION ID) Revision: October 2004 ● Low ambient temperature ● Low battery voltage ● Engine running ● Ignition switch OFF ● Low fuel temperature ● Too much pressure is applied to EVAP system This diagnostic service enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle information such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs. EC-136 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Connect GST to data link connector, which is located under LH dash panel near the hood opener handle. EC C D BBIA0369E 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in the operation manual. (*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are shown.) E F G SEF398S 5. Perform each diagnostic service according to each service procedure. For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of the tool maker. H I J K SEF416S L M Revision: October 2004 EC-137 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor UBS00KVH Remarks: ● Specification data are reference values. ● Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector. * Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations. i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data in spite of the ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM according to the signals input from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION ENG SPEED ● Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer indication. Almost the same speed as the tachometer indication. MAS A/F SE-B1 See EC-143, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . B/FUEL SCHDL See EC-143, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . A/F ALPHA-B1 A/F ALPHA-B2 See EC-143, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . COOLAN TEMP/S ● Engine: After warming up A/F SEN1 (B1) A/F SEN1 (B2) ● Engine: After warming up ● Warm-up condition ● After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load ● Warm-up condition ● After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. ● Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer indication. Almost the same speed as the speedometer indication ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14V ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.2 - 4.8V Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.2 - 4.8V ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V ● Selector lever: D Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V EVAP SYS PRES ● Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V START SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON → START → ON OFF → ON → OFF HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 (B2) HO2S2 MNTR (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B2) VHCL SPEED SE BATTERY VOLT ACCEL SEN 1 ACCEL SEN 2* THRTL SEN 1 THRTL SEN 2* CLSD THL POS AIR COND SIG P/N POSI SW PW/ST SIGNAL ● ● ● ● ● LOAD SIGNAL ● IGNITION SW ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Engine: After warming up, idle the engine Ignition switch: ON Engine: After warming up, idle the engine Ignition switch: ON More than 70°C (158°F) Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 1.5 V Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 1.0V Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly. LEAN ←→ RICH Accelerator pedal: Fully released Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF Air conditioner switch: ON (Compressor: Operates.) ON Shift lever: P or N ON Shift lever: Except above OFF Steering wheel: Not being turned (Forward direction) OFF Steering wheel: Being turned ON Lighting switch: In 2nd position ON Lighting switch: OFF. OFF Ignition switch: ON → OFF → ON Revision: October 2004 ON ON → OFF → ON EC-138 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS MONITOR ITEM HEATER FAN SW BRAKE SW INJ PULSE-B1 INJ PULSE-B2 IGN TIMING CAL/LD VALUE MASS AIRFLOW PURG VOL C/V AIR COND RLY CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine ● Ignition switch: ON ● Engine: After warming up ● Selector lever: P or N ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No load ● Engine: After warming up ● Selector lever: P or N ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No load ● Engine: After warming up ● Selector lever: P or N ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No load ● Engine: After warming up ● Selector lever: P or N ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No load ● Engine: After warming up ● Selector lever: P or N ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● No load ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine SPECIFICATION Heater fan: Not operating OFF Heater fan: Operating ON Brake pedal: Fully released OFF Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON Idle 2.0 - 2.8 msec 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec Idle 10° - 20° BTDC 2,000 rpm 25° - 45° BTDC Idle 14% - 33% 2,500 rpm 12% - 25% Idle 3.0 - 9.0 g·m/s 2,500 rpm 9.0 - 28.0 g·m/s D E F G H Idle (Accelerator pedal: Not depressed even slightly, after engine starting.) 0% 2,000 rpm — Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF Air conditioner switch: ON (Compressor: Operates) ON I J For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON ● Engine running or cranking ● Except above conditions OFF VENT CONT/V ● Ignition switch: ON OFF THRTL RELAY ● Ignition switch: ON ON ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine COOLING FAN EC C ● FUEL PUMP RLY A ON Engine coolant temperature: 99°C (210°F) or less OFF Engine coolant temperature: 100°C (212°F) or more HI K L M ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. – Engine: After warming up – Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load ● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF ● Vehicle speed: More than 20 km/h (12 MPH) Almost the same speed as the tachometer indication ● Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer indication. Almost the same speed as the speedometer indication TRVL AFTER MIL ● Ignition switch: ON A/F S1 HTR (B1) A/F S1 HTR (B2) ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine HO2S2 HTR (B1) HO2S2 HTR (B2) I/P PULLY SPD VEHICLE SPEED Revision: October 2004 ON Vehicle has traveled after MIL has turned ON. EC-139 0 - 65,535 km (0 - 40,723 mile) 0 - 100% 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) ● Engine: Idle ● Air conditioner switch: ON ● Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer indication. Almost the same speed as the speedometer indication SET VHCL SPD ● Engine: Running ASCD: Operating. The preset vehicle speed is displayed. MAIN SW Ignition switch: ON MAIN switch: Pressed ON ● MAIN switch: Released OFF CANCEL switch: Pressed ON CANCEL switch: Released OFF RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed ON RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Released OFF AC PRESS SEN VHCL SPEED SE CANCEL SW RESUME/ACC SW SET SW BRAKE SW1 BRAKE SW2 CRUISE LAMP SET LAMP ● ● ● ● ● Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON Approx. 0V 1.0 - 4.0V SET/COAST switch: Pressed ON SET/COAST switch: Released OFF Brake pedal: Fully released ON Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF Brake pedal: Fully released OFF Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON ● Ignition switch: ON MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st time → at the 2nd time ON → OFF ● MAIN switch: ON ASCD: Operating ON ● Vehicle speed: Between 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH) ASCD: Not operating OFF *: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ from ECM terminals voltage signal. Revision: October 2004 EC-140 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode UBS00KVI A The following are the major sensor reference graphs in “DATA MONITOR” mode. CLSD THL POS, ACCEL SEN 1, THRTL SEN 1 Below is the data for “CLSD THL POS”, “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” when depressing the accelera- EC tor pedal with the ignition switch ON and with selector lever in D position. The signal of “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” should rise gradually without any intermittent drop or rise after “CLSD THL POS” is changed from ON to OFF. C D E F PBIB0198E ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S2 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1 Below is the data for “ENG SPEED”, “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “THRTL SEN 1”, “HO2S2 (B1)” and “INJ PULSE-B1” when revving engine quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up engine sufficiently. Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary. G H I J K L M PBIB2445E Revision: October 2004 EC-141 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PBIB2099E Revision: October 2004 EC-142 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE Description PFP:00031 A UBS00KVJ The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode of CONSULT-II during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “DATA MONI- EC TOR (SPEC)” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the value in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have one or more malfunctions. The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the C MIL. The SP value will be displayed for the following three items: ● B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board cor- D rection) ● A/F ALPHA-B1/B2 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle) E ● MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor) Testing Condition ● UBS00KVK Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,017 miles) F 2 ● Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm , 14.25 - 15.12 psi) Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F) Engine coolant temperature: 75 - 95°C (167 - 203°F) ● Transmission: Warmed-up*1 ● ● G Electrical load: Not applied*2 ● Engine speed: Idle *1: After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “ATF TEMP SE 1” (A/T fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates more than 60°C (140°F). *2: Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are OFF. Steering wheel is straight ahead. H Inspection Procedure J ● UBS00KVL NOTE: Perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode in maximum scale display. 1. Perform EC-71, "Basic Inspection" . 2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met. 3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” and “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with CONSULT-II. 4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value. 5. If NG, go to EC-144, "Diagnostic Procedure" . K L M SEF601Z Revision: October 2004 EC-143 I 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE Diagnostic Procedure UBS00KVM OVERALL SEQUENCE PBIB2268E Revision: October 2004 EC-144 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE A EC C D E F G H I J K L M PBIB2548E Revision: October 2004 EC-145 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE DETAILED PROCEDURE 1. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” 1. 2. 3. Start engine. Confirm that the testing conditions are met. Refer to EC-143, "Testing Condition" . Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the each indication is within the SP value. NOTE: Check “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” for approximately 1 minute because they may fluctuate. It is NG if the indication is out of the SP value even a little. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 2. NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 3. PBIB2369E 2. CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 19. PBIB2332E 3. CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 6. NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 25. PBIB2332E 4. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” 1. 2. 3. 4. Stop the engine. Disconnect PCV hose, and then plug it. Start engine. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the each indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 6. Revision: October 2004 EC-146 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE 5. CHANGE ENGINE OIL 1. 2. A Stop the engine. Change engine oil. EC NOTE: This symptom may occur when a large amount of gasoline is mixed with engine oil because of driving conditions (such as when engine oil temperature does not rise enough since a journey distance is too short during winter). The symptom will not be detected after changing engine oil or changing driving con- C dition. >> INSPECTION END D 6. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE Check fuel pressure. (Refer to EC-92, "Fuel Pressure Check" .) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG (Fuel pressure is too high)>>Replace fuel pressure regulator, refer to EC-93, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" . GO TO 8. NG (Fuel pressure is too low)>>GO TO 7. E 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART G 1. – – – 2. Check the following. Clogged and bent fuel hose and fuel tube Clogged fuel filter Fuel pump and its circuit (Refer to EC-614, "FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT" .) If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part. (Refer to EC-92, "Fuel Pressure Check" .) If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. F H I J >> GO TO 8. 8. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” K 1. 2. Start engine. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the each indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 9. 9. PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST 1. 2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Make sure that the each cylinder produces a momentary engine speed drop. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 10. PBIB0133E Revision: October 2004 EC-147 2005 Titan L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE 10. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART 1. – – – – 2. Check the following. Ignition coil and its circuit (Refer to EC-596, "IGNITION SIGNAL" .) Fuel injector and its circuit (Refer to EC-608, "INJECTOR CIRCUIT" .) Intake air leakage Low compression pressure (Refer to EM-60, "CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE" .) If NG, repair or replace the malfunctioning part. If OK, replace fuel injector. (It may be caused by leakage from fuel injector or clogging.) >> GO TO 11. 11. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” 1. 2. Start engine. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the each indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 12. 12. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 FUNCTION Perform all DTC Confirmation Procedure related with A/F sensor 1. ● For DTC P1271, P1281, refer to EC-455, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . ● For DTC P1272, P1282, refer to EC-464, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . ● For DTC P1273, P1283, refer to EC-473, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . ● For DTC P1274, P1284, refer to EC-483, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . ● For DTC P1276, P1286, refer to EC-493, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . ● For DTC P1278, P1288, refer to EC-504, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . ● For DTC P1279, P1289, refer to EC-516, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 13. 13. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT Perform Diagnostic Procedure according to corresponding DTC. >> GO TO 14. 14. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” 1. 2. Start engine. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the each indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 15. Revision: October 2004 EC-148 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE 15. DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. 2. A Stop the engine. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage, and then reconnect it. EC >> GO TO 16. 16. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” C 1. 2. D Start engine. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the each indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-103, "Symptom Matrix Chart" . 17. CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” E F Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG (More than the SP value)>>GO TO 18. NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 25. G H I PBIB2332E 18. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART 1. – – – – – 2. – – – J Check for the cause of large engine friction. Refer to the following. Engine oil level is too high Engine oil viscosity Belt tension of power steering, alternator, A/C compressor, etc. is excessive Noise from engine Noise from transmission, etc. Check for the cause of insufficient combustion. Refer to the following. Valve clearance malfunction Intake valve timing control function malfunction Camshaft sprocket installation malfunction, etc. K L M >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 30. 19. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following. Crushed air ducts ● Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element ● Uneven dirt of air cleaner element ● Improper specification of intake air system OK or NG OK >> GO TO 21. NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 20. ● Revision: October 2004 EC-149 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE 20. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, AND “B/FUEL SCHDL” Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the each indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG (“B/FUEL SCHDL” is more, “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” are less than the SP value)>>GO TO 21. 21. DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. 2. Stop the engine. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage and then reconnect it again. >> GO TO 22. 22. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” 1. 2. Start engine. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the each indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> 1. Detect malfunctioning part of mass air flow sensor circuit and repair it. Refer to EC-180, "DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR" . 2. GO TO 29. NG >> GO TO 23. 23. CHECK “MAS A/F SE-B1” Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 24. NG (More than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and then GO TO 29. PBIB2370E 24. REPLACE ECM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Replace ECM. Perform initialization of NVIS(NATS) system and registration of all NVIS(NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-138, "ECM Re-communicating Function" . Perform EC-89, "VIN Registration" . Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> GO TO 29. Revision: October 2004 EC-150 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE 25. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM A Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following. ● Crushed air ducts ● Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element ● Uneven dirt of air cleaner element ● Improper specification of intake air system OK or NG OK >> GO TO 27. NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 26. EC C D 26. CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG (Less than the SP value)>>GO TO 27. 27. CHECK “MAS A/F SE-B1” E F G Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 28. NG (Less than the SP value)>>Replace mass air flow sensor, and then GO TO 30. H I J PBIB2370E 28. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM K Check for the cause of air leak after the mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following. ● Disconnection, looseness, and cracks in air duct ● Looseness of oil filler cap ● Disconnection of oil level gauge ● Open stuck, breakage, hose disconnection, or cracks of PCV valve ● Disconnection or cracks of EVAP purge hose, open stuck of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve ● Malfunctioning seal of rocker cover gasket ● Disconnection, looseness, or cracks of hoses, such as vacuum hose, connecting to intake air system parts ● Malfunctioning seal of intake air system, etc. >> GO TO 30. 29. CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, AND “B/FUEL SCHDL” Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and make sure that the each indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-103, "Symptom Matrix Chart" . Revision: October 2004 EC-151 2005 Titan L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE 30. CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode, and then make sure that the indication is within the SP value. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-103, "Symptom Matrix Chart" . Revision: October 2004 EC-152 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Description PFP:00006 A UBS00KVN Intermittent incidents may occur. In many cases, the malfunction resolves itself (the part or circuit function returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer's EC complaint often do not recur on (1st trip) DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of intermittent incidents occurrences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident occurred may not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may C not indicate the specific malfunctioning area. Common Intermittent Incidents Report Situations STEP in Work Flow 2 3 or 4 Situation D The CONSULT-II is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than [0] or [1t]. The symptom described by the customer does not recur. 5 (1st trip) DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure. 10 The Diagnostic Procedure for PXXXX does not indicate the malfunctioning area. Diagnostic Procedure E UBS00KVO F 1. INSPECTION START Erase (1st trip) DTCs. Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . G H >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK GROUND TERMINALS I Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace. J 3. SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT K Perform GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , “INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS”. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace. 4. CHECK CONNECTOR TERMINALS Refer to GI-24, "How to Check Terminal" , “HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS”, “How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal”. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace connector. Revision: October 2004 EC-153 2005 Titan L M POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Wiring Diagram PFP:24110 UBS00ENP BBWA1670E Revision: October 2004 EC-154 2005 Titan POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 1 EC WIRE COLOR B ITEM ECM ground CONDITION [Engine is running] ● 109 L/W Ignition switch Idle speed ECM relay (Self shut-off) [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) B B/W ECM ground 119 120 BR BR Power supply for ECM For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 115 116 C Body ground 0V ● W/B DATA (DC Voltage) [Ignition switch: OFF] [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] 111 More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Engine is running] ● Idle speed [Ignition switch: ON] Diagnostic Procedure D E 0 - 1.5V F BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) G Body ground BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) H UBS00ENQ 1. INSPECTION START I Start engine. Is engine running? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 8. No >> GO TO 2. J K 2. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 109 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. L M Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. MBIB0015E 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse >> Repair harness or connectors. Revision: October 2004 EC-155 2005 Titan POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT 4. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 5. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors F32, E2 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and ground >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 7. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. Reconnect ECM harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> Go to EC-596, "IGNITION SIGNAL" . NG >> GO TO 8. PBIB2063E Revision: October 2004 EC-156 2005 Titan POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT 8. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and then OFF. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: EC After turning ignition switch OFF, battery voltage will exist for a few seconds, then drop approximately 0V. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG (Battery voltage does not exist.)>>GO TO 9. NG (Battery voltage exists for more than a few seconds.)>>GO TO 11. C D PBIB1630E 9. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV 1. 2. E F Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Check voltage between ECM terminal 111 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. G Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 11. H I PBIB1191E J 10. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V 1. 2. 3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E119. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 119, 120 and IPDM E/R terminal 3. Refer to Wiring Diagram. K L Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. M 11. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VI 1. 2. 3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E119. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 111 and IPDM E/R terminal 7. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: October 2004 EC-157 2005 Titan POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT 12. CHECK 20A FUSE Check 20A fuse (No. 53, located in IPDM E/R). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace 20A fuse. 13. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 14. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 15. 15. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors F32, E2 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and ground >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 16. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: October 2004 EC-158 2005 Titan POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Ground Inspection UBS00ENR A Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drasti- EC cally affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: C ● Remove the ground bolt or screw. ● Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. D ● Clean as required to assure good contact. ● Reinstall bolt or screw securely. ● Inspect for “add-on” accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. ● If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the E wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. F For detailed ground distribution information, refer to PG-29, "Ground Distribution" . G H I J K PBIB1870E L M Revision: October 2004 EC-159 2005 Titan DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Description PFP:23710 UBS00ENS CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name U1000*1 1000*1 U1001*2 DTC detecting condition ● CAN communication line 1001*2 UBS00ENT ● ECM cannot communicate to other control units. ECM cannot communicate for more than the specified time. Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (CAN communication line is open or shorted) *1: This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. *2: The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. DTC Confirmation Procedure 1. 2. 3. UBS00ENU Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 3 seconds. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-162, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: October 2004 EC-160 2005 Titan DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Wiring Diagram UBS00ENV A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1671E Revision: October 2004 EC-161 2005 Titan DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Diagnostic Procedure UBS00ENW Go to LAN-5, "Precautions When Using CONSULT-II" . Revision: October 2004 EC-162 2005 Titan DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER Description PFP:226A0 A UBS00ENX SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input signal to ECM Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air ECM function Actuator Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control EC Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed, amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature. C D OPERATION Engine speed rpm E Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater Above 3,600 OFF Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. F ● Engine: After warming up ● Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load ON G CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00ENY Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM HO2S2 HTR (B1) HO2S2 HTR (B2) CONDITION ● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. – Engine: After warming up – Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load ● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm I ON OFF J On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0037 0037 (Bank 1) P0057 0057 (Bank 2) P0038 0038 (Bank 1) P0058 0058 (Bank 2) H SPECIFICATION UBS00ENZ Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control circuit low The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.) Possible cause ● K Harness or connectors (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is open or shorted.) ● Heater oxygen sensor 2 heater ● Harness or connectors (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is shorted.) ● Heater oxygen sensor 2 heater L M Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater control circuit high Revision: October 2004 The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.) EC-163 2005 Titan DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00EO0 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start the engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 rpm and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-168, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF174Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: October 2004 EC-164 2005 Titan DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER Wiring Diagram UBS00EO1 A BANK 1 EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1672E Revision: October 2004 EC-165 2005 Titan DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. – 6 GR Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (bank 1) 0 - 1.0V Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine: Stopped [Engine is running] ● Revision: October 2004 BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm. EC-166 2005 Titan DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER BANK 2 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1673E Revision: October 2004 EC-167 2005 Titan DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. – 25 O/G Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (bank 2) 0 - 1.0V Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine: Stopped [Engine is running] ● BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm. Diagnostic Procedure UBS00EO2 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: October 2004 EC-168 2005 Titan DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER 2. CHECK HO2S2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. A Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. EC C D BBIA0435E 2. 3. E Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between HO2S2 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. G H PBIB0112E 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. ● Harness connectors E5, F14 ● IPDM E/R connector E119 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and fuse J K >> Repair harness or connectors. L 4. CHECK HO2S2 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. M Terminals DTC Bank ECM Sensor P0037, P0038 6 2 1 P0057, P0058 25 2 2 Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: October 2004 EC-169 2005 Titan DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER 5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER Refer to EC-170, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2. 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00EO3 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER 1. Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as follows. Terminal No. Resistance 2 and 3 5.0 - 7.0 Ω at 25°C (77°F) 1 and 2, 3, 4 ∞Ω (Continuity should not exist) 4 and 1, 2, 3 2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-4389718 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. SEF249Y Removal and Installation UBS00EO4 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EM-19, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . Revision: October 2004 EC-170 2005 Titan DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR Component Description PFP:22680 A UBS00EO5 The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the electric current supplied to the hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. EC C D BBIA0355E E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00EO6 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM MAS A/F SE-B1 CAL/LD VALUE MASS AIRFLOW CONDITION See EC-143, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . ● Engine: After warming up ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Selector lever: P or N ● No load ● Engine: After warming up ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Selector lever: P or N ● No load Idle 14% - 33% 2,500 rpm 12% - 25% Idle 3.0 - 9.0 g·m/s 2,500 rpm 9.0 - 28.0 g·m/s G H I On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name UBS00EO7 J DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● A) P0101 0101 F SPECIFICATION A high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM under light load driving condition. Mass air flow sensor circuit range/performance problem B) Revision: October 2004 A low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM under heavy load driving condition. EC-171 Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Mass air flow sensor ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● Intake air temperature sensor ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Intake air leaks ● Mass air flow sensor ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● Intake air temperature sensor 2005 Titan K L M DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00EO8 Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A NOTE: If engine will not start or stops soon, wait at least 10 seconds with engine stopped (Ignition switch ON) instead of running engine at idle speed. With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Run engine for at least 10 seconds at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-175, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF174Y With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. If engine cannot be started, go to EC-175, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check the voltage of “MAS A/F SE-B1” with “DATA MONITOR”. Increases engine speed to about 4,000 rpm. Monitor the linear voltage rise in response to engine speed increases. If NG, go to EC-175, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If OK, go to following step. SEF243Y Revision: October 2004 EC-172 2005 Titan DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR 7. Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive seconds. ENG SPEED More than 2,000 rpm THRTL SEN 1 More than 3V THRTL SEN 2 More than 3V Selector lever Suitable position Driving location Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test. 8. A EC If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-175, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Overall Function Check C PBIB0199E D UBS00EO9 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B E Use this procedure to check the overall function of the mass air flow sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. With GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. F Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select Service $01 with GST. Check the mass air flow sensor signal with Service $01. Check for linear mass air flow sensor signal value rise in response to increases to about 4,000 rpm in engine speed. If NG, go to EC-175, "Diagnostic Procedure" . G H I SEF534P J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-173 2005 Titan DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR Wiring Diagram UBS00EOA BBWA1674E Revision: October 2004 EC-174 2005 Titan DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 51 W Mass air flow sensor ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed C 1.0 - 1.3V D [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed: 2,500 rpm. 1.7 - 2.1V E [Engine is running] 67 B Sensor ground ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 111 W/B ECM relay (Self shut-off) For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 119 120 BR BR A Power supply for ECM More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 0V F 0 - 1.5V G BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) H BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) I Diagnostic Procedure UBS00EOB 1. INSPECTION START J Which malfunction (A or B) is duplicated? A or B A >> GO TO 3. B >> GO TO 2. K 2. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM L Check the following for connection. ● Air duct ● Vacuum hoses ● Intake air passage between air duct to intake manifold OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Reconnect the parts. Revision: October 2004 EC-175 M 2005 Titan DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR 3. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0368E 3. Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. PBIB1168E 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors E2, F32 ● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and mass air flow sensor ● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM ● >> Repair harness or connectors. Revision: October 2004 EC-176 2005 Titan DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR 6. CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. C 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D 7. CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. E Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 51. Refer to Wiring Diagram. F Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G H 8. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-191, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace intake air temperature sensor. I J 9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-330, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. K L 10. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR M Refer to EC-178, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor. 11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: October 2004 EC-177 2005 Titan DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR Component Inspection UBS00EOC MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Connect CONSULT-II and select “DATA MONITOR” mode. Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” and check indication under the following conditions. Condition MAS A/F SE-B1 (V) Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4 Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.0 - 1.3 2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.7 - 2.1 Idle to about 4,000 rpm* 1.0 - 1.3 to Approx. 2.4 PBIB2371E *: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm. 5. a. b. 6. 7. 8. 9. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following. ● Crushed air ducts ● Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element ● Uneven dirt of air cleaner element ● Improper specification of intake air system parts If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again. If OK, go to next step. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. Perform step 2 to 4 again. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground. Condition MAS A/F SE-B1 (V) Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4 Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.0 - 1.3 2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.7 - 2.1 Idle to about 4,000 rpm* 1.0 - 1.3 to Approx. 2.4 PBIB1106E *: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm. 4. a. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following. ● Crushed air ducts ● Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element ● Uneven dirt of air cleaner element ● Improper specification of intake air system parts Revision: October 2004 EC-178 2005 Titan DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR b. 5. 6. 7. 8. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 3 again. If OK, go to next step. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. Perform step 2 and 3 again. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. Removal and Installation A EC UBS00EOD MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR C Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" . D E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-179 2005 Titan DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR Component Description PFP:22680 UBS00EOE The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. Therefore, the electric current supplied to the hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change. BBIA0355E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00EOF Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM MAS A/F SE-B1 CAL/LD VALUE MASS AIRFLOW CONDITION SPECIFICATION See EC-143, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . ● Engine: After warming up ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Selector lever: P or N ● No load ● Engine: After warming up ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Selector lever: P or N ● No load Idle 14% - 33% 2,500 rpm 12% - 25% Idle 3.0 - 9.0 g·m/s 2,500 rpm 9.0 - 28.0 g·m/s On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00EOG These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P0102 0102 P0103 0103 Trouble diagnosis name Mass air flow sensor circuit low input Mass air flow sensor circuit high input DTC detecting condition An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Intake air leaks ● Mass air flow sensor ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Mass air flow sensor FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Detected items Mass air flow sensor circuit Revision: October 2004 Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut. EC-180 2005 Titan DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00EOH NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. A Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-183, "Diagnostic Procedure" . C D E F SEF058Y With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. G PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103 With CONSULT-II H 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-183, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If DTC is not detected, go to next step. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-183, "Diagnostic Procedure" . I J K SEF058Y L With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. M Revision: October 2004 EC-181 2005 Titan DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR Wiring Diagram UBS00EOI BBWA1674E Revision: October 2004 EC-182 2005 Titan DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 51 W Mass air flow sensor ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed C 1.0 - 1.3V D [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed: 2,500 rpm. 1.7 - 2.1V E [Engine is running] 67 B Sensor ground ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 111 W/B ECM relay (Self shut-off) For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 119 120 BR BR A Power supply for ECM More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 0V F 0 - 1.5V G BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) H BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) I Diagnostic Procedure UBS00EOJ 1. INSPECTION START J Which malfunction (P0102 or P0103) is duplicated? P0102 or P0103 P0102 >> GO TO 2. P0103 >> GO TO 3. K 2. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM L Check the following for connection. ● Air duct ● Vacuum hoses ● Intake air passage between air duct to intake manifold OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Reconnect the parts. Revision: October 2004 EC-183 M 2005 Titan DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR 3. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0368E 3. Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. PBIB1168E 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors E2, F32 ● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and mass air flow sensor ● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM ● >> Repair harness or connectors. Revision: October 2004 EC-184 2005 Titan DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR 6. CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. C 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D 7. CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. E Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 51. Refer to Wiring Diagram. F Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G H 8. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EC-186, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor. I J 9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . K >> INSPECTION END L M Revision: October 2004 EC-185 2005 Titan DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR Component Inspection UBS00EOK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Connect CONSULT-II and select “DATA MONITOR” mode. Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” and check indication under the following conditions. Condition MAS A/F SE-B1 (V) Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4 Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.0 - 1.3 2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.7 - 2.1 Idle to about 4,000 rpm* 1.0 - 1.3 to Approx. 2.4 PBIB2371E *: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm. 5. a. b. 6. 7. 8. 9. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following. ● Crushed air ducts ● Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element ● Uneven dirt of air cleaner element ● Improper specification of intake air system parts If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 4 again. If OK, go to next step. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. Perform step 2 to 4 again. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check voltage between ECM terminal 51 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground. Condition MAS A/F SE-B1 (V) Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4 Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.0 - 1.3 2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 1.7 - 2.1 Idle to about 4,000 rpm* 1.0 - 1.3 to Approx. 2.4 PBIB1106E *: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm. 4. a. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to following. ● Crushed air ducts ● Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element ● Uneven dirt of air cleaner element ● Improper specification of intake air system parts Revision: October 2004 EC-186 2005 Titan DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR b. 5. 6. 7. 8. If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part and perform step 2 to 3 again. If OK, go to next step. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again. Perform step 2 and 3 again. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor. Removal and Installation A EC UBS00EOL MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR C Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" . D E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-187 2005 Titan DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR Component Description PFP:22630 UBS00EOM The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM. The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise. BBIA0355E Intake air temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ 25 (77) 3.32 1.94 - 2.06 80 (176) 1.23 0.295 - 0.349 *: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 34 (Intake air temperature sensor) and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. SEF012P On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name UBS00EON DTC detecting condition Possible cause P0112 0112 Intake air temperature sensor circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) P0113 0113 Intake air temperature sensor circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. ● Intake air temperature sensor DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00EOO NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-190, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: October 2004 EC-188 2005 Titan DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR Wiring Diagram UBS00EOP A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA0879E Revision: October 2004 EC-189 2005 Titan DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure UBS00EOQ 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (intake air temperature sensor is built-into) harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0368E 3. Check voltage between mass air flow sensor terminal 5 and ground. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connectors. PBIB1169E Revision: October 2004 EC-190 2005 Titan DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR 3. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between mass air flow sensor terminal 6 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. C 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D 4. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR E Refer to EC-191, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor). F 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT G Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . H >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00EOR INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. 2. I Check resistance between mass air flow sensor terminals 5 and 6 under the following conditions. J Intake air temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 25 (77) 1.94 - 2.06 K If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor). L BBIA0355E M SEF012P Removal and Installation UBS00EOS MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" . Revision: October 2004 EC-191 2005 Titan DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR Component Description PFP:22630 UBS00EOT The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. SEF594K Engine coolant temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V –10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4 20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260 Resistance kΩ *: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground. SEF012P CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00EOU These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name P0117 0117 Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) P0118 0118 Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. ● Engine coolant temperature sensor DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch ON or START. CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM. Engine coolant temperature decided (CONSULT-II display) Condition Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit Just as ignition switch is turned ON or START 40°C (104°F) More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or START 80°C (176°F) 40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F) (Depends on the time) Except as shown above When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates while engine is running. Revision: October 2004 EC-192 2005 Titan DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00EOV NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. A Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-195, "Diagnostic Procedure" . C D E F SEF058Y WITH GST G Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-193 2005 Titan DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR Wiring Diagram UBS00EOW BBWA1676E Revision: October 2004 EC-194 2005 Titan DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure UBS00EOX 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . EC C D E BBIA0354E F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. G 2. CHECK ECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor harness connector. H I J K BBIA0370E 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECT sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. L Voltage: Approximately 5V M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB0080E 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING RART Check the following. ● Harness connector F26, F101 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and engine coolant temperature sensor >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: October 2004 EC-195 2005 Titan DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR 4. CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECT sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connector F26, F101 ● Harness for open and short between ECT sensor and ECM ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-196, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00EOY ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure. PBIB2005E Revision: October 2004 EC-196 2005 Titan DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR Engine coolant temperature 2. °C (°F) Resistance A kΩ 20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 EC If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. C SEF012P D Removal and Installation UBS00EOZ ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EM-60, "CYLINDER HEAD" . E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-197 2005 Titan DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR Component Description PFP:16119 UBS00EP0 Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. PBIB0145E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00EP1 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM THRTL SEN 1 THRTL SEN 2* CONDITION SPECIFICATION ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V ● Selector lever: D Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V *: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00EP2 These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause P0122 0122 Throttle position sensor 2 circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor 2 is sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors (TP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.) (APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.) P0123 0123 Throttle position sensor 2 circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor 2 is sent to ECM. ● Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 2) ● Accelerator pedal position sensor FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. Revision: October 2004 EC-198 2005 Titan DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00EP3 A NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. C Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-201, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D E F SEF058Y WITH GST G Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-199 2005 Titan DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR Wiring Diagram UBS00EP4 BBWA1677E Revision: October 2004 EC-200 2005 Titan DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 47 EC WIRE COLOR Y A ITEM Sensor power supply (Throttle position sensor) CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) C Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] 50 B ● Engine: Stopped ● Selector lever: D ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released Throttle position sensor 1 D More than 0.36V E [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine: Stopped ● Selector lever: D ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V F [Engine is running] 66 R Sensor ground (Throttle position sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V G [Ignition switch: ON] 69 W ● Engine: Stopped ● Selector lever: D ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released Throttle position sensor 2 H Less than 4.75V [Ignition switch: ON] 91 W/R Sensor power supply (APP sensor 2) ● Engine: Stopped ● Selector lever: D ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed [Ignition switch: ON] Diagnostic Procedure I More than 0.36V J Approximately 5V UBS00EP5 K 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. L Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . M BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: October 2004 EC-201 2005 Titan DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR 2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. PBIB1480E 3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB2065E 3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 2 and ECM terminal 47. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace open circuit. 4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram 47 Electric throttle control actuator terminal 2 EC-200 91 APP sensor terminal 6 EC-590 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR Refer to EC-595, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 6. Revision: October 2004 EC-202 2005 Titan DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR 6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. A Replace the accelerator pedal assembly. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . EC C >> INSPECTION END 7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. D Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 4 and ECM terminal 66. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. F 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G 8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. H Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 3. Refer to Wiring Diagram. I Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. J K 9. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Refer to EC-204, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 10. L M 10. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. E Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END 11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: October 2004 EC-203 2005 Titan DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR Component Inspection UBS00EP6 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Turn ignition switch ON Set selector lever to D position. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), 69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following conditions. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 50 (Throttle position sensor 1) Fully released More than 0.36V Fully depressed Less than 4.75V Fully released Less than 4.75V Fully depressed More than 0.36V 69 (Throttle position sensor 2) 6. 7. 8. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next step. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Removal and Installation PBIB1530E UBS00EP7 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EM-15, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . Revision: October 2004 EC-204 2005 Titan DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR Component Description PFP:22630 A UBS00EP8 NOTE: If DTC P0125 is displayed with P0117 or P0118, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0117 or EC P0118. Refer to EC-192, "DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR" . The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the C ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. D E SEF594K F Engine coolant temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V –10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4 20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260 Resistance kΩ G H *: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 73 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground. I SEF012P CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00EP9 K This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P0125 0125 Trouble diagnosis name Insufficient engine coolant temperature for closed loop fuel control Revision: October 2004 J DTC detecting condition ● Voltage sent to ECM from the sensor is not practical, even when some time has passed after starting the engine. ● Engine coolant temperature is insufficient for closed loop fuel control. EC-205 Possible cause L ● Harness or connectors (High resistance in the circuit) ● Engine coolant temperature sensor ● Thermostat 2005 Titan M DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00EPA CAUTION: Be careful not to overheat engine. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 10°C (50°F). If it is above 10°C (50°F), the test result will be OK. If it is below 10°C (50°F), go to following step. Start engine and run it for 65 minutes at idle speed. If “COOLAN TEMP/S” increases to more than 10°C (50°F) within 65 minutes, stop engine because the test result will be OK. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-206, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF174Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Diagnostic Procedure UBS00EPB 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 2. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-207, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. Revision: October 2004 EC-206 2005 Titan DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR 3. CHECK THERMOSTAT OPERATION A When the engine is cold [lower than 70°C (158°F)] condition, grasp lower radiator hose and confirm the engine coolant does not flow. EC OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace thermostat. Refer to CO-19, "THERMOSTAT AND WATER PIPING" . C CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT 4. Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . For Wiring Diagram, refer to EC-194, "Wiring Diagram" . D >> INSPECTION END E Component Inspection UBS00EPC ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure. F G H PBIB2005E I Engine coolant temperature 2. °C (°F) Resistance J kΩ 20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 K If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. L SEF012P M Removal and Installation UBS00EPD ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to CO-19, "THERMOSTAT AND WATER PIPING" . Revision: October 2004 EC-207 2005 Titan DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR Component Description PFP:22630 UBS00EPE The intake air temperature sensor is built into mass air flow sensor. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM. The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise. BBIA0355E Intake air temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ 25 (77) 3.32 1.9 - 2.1 80 (176) 1.23 0.31 - 0.37 *: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 34 (Intake air temperature sensor) and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. SEF012P On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0127 0127 Trouble diagnosis name Intake air temperature too high UBS00EPF DTC detecting condition Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signal from engine coolant temperature sensor. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Intake air temperature sensor UBS00EPG NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. TESTING CONDITION: This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. a. Wait until engine coolant temperature is less than 90°C (194°F) Turn ignition switch ON. Revision: October 2004 EC-208 2005 Titan DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR b. c. d. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check the engine coolant temperature. If the engine coolant temperature is not less than 90°C (194°F), turn ignition switch OFF and cool down engine. ● Perform the following steps before engine coolant temperature is above 90°C (194°F). Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine. Hold vehicle speed at more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 100 consecutive seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-209, "Diagnostic Procedure" . A EC C SEF189Y D WITH GST E Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Diagnostic Procedure UBS00EPH F 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . G H I J BBIA0354E K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. L 2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-210, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor). M 3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . For wiring diagram, refer to EC-189, "Wiring Diagram" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: October 2004 EC-209 2005 Titan DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR Component Inspection UBS00EPI INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. 2. Check resistance between intake air temperature sensor terminals 5 and 6 under the following conditions. Intake air temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 25 (77) 1.94 - 2.06 If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor). BBIA0355E SEF012P Removal and Installation UBS00EPJ MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" . Revision: October 2004 EC-210 2005 Titan DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:21200 A UBS00EPK Engine coolant temperature has not risen enough to open the thermostat even though the engine has run long enough. EC This is due to a leak in the seal or the thermostat stuck open. DTC No. P0128 0128 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition The engine coolant temperature does not reach to specified temperature even though the engine has run long enough. Thermostat function DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause C ● Thermostat ● Leakage from sealing portion of thermostat ● Engine coolant temperature sensor D UBS00EPL NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: ● For best results, perform at ambient temperature of –10°C (14°F) or higher. ● For best results, perform at engine coolant temperature of –10°C (14°F) to 60°C (140°F). WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Replace thermostat with new one. Refer to CO-19, "THERMOSTAT AND WATER PIPING" . Use only a genuine NISSAN thermostat as a replacement. If an incorrect thermostat is used, the MIL may come on. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that the “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F). If it is below 60°C (140°F), go to following step. If it is above 60°C (140°F), cool down the engine to less than 60°C (140°F), then retry from step 1. Drive vehicle for 10 consecutive minutes under the following conditions. VHCL SPEED SE E F G H I J 80 - 120 km/h (50 - 75 MPH) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-211, "Diagnostic Procedure" . WITH GST 1. K Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Diagnostic Procedure UBS00EPM 1. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-211, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. Component Inspection M UBS00EPN ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure. PBIB2005E Revision: October 2004 EC-211 L 2005 Titan DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION Engine coolant temperature 2. °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. SEF012P Removal and Installation UBS00EPO ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to CO-19, "THERMOSTAT AND WATER PIPING" . Revision: October 2004 EC-212 2005 Titan DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 Component Description PFP:226A0 A UBS00EPP The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. EC C D SEF327R E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00EPQ Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 (B2) HO2S2 MNTR (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B2) CONDITION ● Warm-up condition ● After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. F SPECIFICATION Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly. 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 1.0V G LEAN ←→ RICH On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00EPR The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the voltage is unusually high during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut. H I J K PBIB1848E L DTC No. P0138 0138 (Bank 1) P0158 0158 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause M Heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit high voltage Revision: October 2004 An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. EC-213 ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2 2005 Titan DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00EPS CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 2 minutes. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-218, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF174Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: October 2004 EC-214 2005 Titan DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 Wiring Diagram UBS00EPT A BANK 1 EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1678E Revision: October 2004 EC-215 2005 Titan DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 55 R Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met – 0 - Approximately 1.0V After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load [Engine is running] 78 B/W Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor 2) Revision: October 2004 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed EC-216 Approximately 0V 2005 Titan DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 BANK 2 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1679E Revision: October 2004 EC-217 2005 Titan DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 74 L Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met – 0 - Approximately 1.0V After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load [Engine is running] 78 B/W Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V UBS00EPU 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: October 2004 EC-218 2005 Titan DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 2. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. A Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. EC C D BBIA0435E 2. 3. E Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2 terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. F Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G H 3. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. I Terminals DTC Bank ECM Sensor P0138 55 1 1 P0158 74 1 2 J K Continuity should exist. 2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Terminals DTC L Bank ECM Sensor P0138 55 1 1 P0158 74 1 2 M Continuity should not exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: October 2004 EC-219 2005 Titan DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 4. CHECK HO2S2 CONNECTOR FOR WATER Check HO2S2 harness connectors for water. Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EC-220, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2. 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00EPV HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. SEF174Y 6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. PBIB1672E Revision: October 2004 EC-220 2005 Titan DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2 7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%. A EC C PBIB2636E “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.58V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. D E F Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 55 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 74 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and ground. 6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.58V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage is above 0.58V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary. 7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position. The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this PBIB2054E procedure. 8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads (using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12) and approved anti-seize lubricant. Removal and Installation UBS00EPW HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EM-19, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . Revision: October 2004 EC-221 2005 Titan G H I J K L M DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 Component Description PFP:226A0 UBS00EPX The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. SEF327R CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00EPY Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 (B2) HO2S2 MNTR (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B2) CONDITION ● Warm-up condition ● After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. SPECIFICATION Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly. 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 1.0V LEAN ←→ RICH On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00EPZ The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the switching response of the sensor's voltage is faster than specified during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut. SEF302U DTC No. P0139 0139 (Bank 1) P0159 0159 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit slow response Revision: October 2004 DTC detecting condition It takes more time for the sensor to respond between rich and lean than the specified time. EC-222 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● Fuel pressure ● Fuel injector ● Intake air leaks 2005 Titan DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00EQ0 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. A EC WITH CONSULT-II TESTING CONDITION: For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F). 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 5. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F). SEF174Y If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F). 7. Open engine hood. 8. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P0139” or “HO2S2 (B2) P0159” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 9. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-II. C D E F G H I J K PBIB2374E NOTE: It will take at most 10 minutes until “COMPLETED is displayed. 10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-228, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following. a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle). b. Return to step 1. Overall Function Check L M UBS00EQ1 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 55 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 74 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and ground. Revision: October 2004 EC-223 2005 Titan DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 6. 7. 8. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 second during this procedure. If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position. A change of voltage should be more than 0.06V for 1 second during this procedure. If NG, go to EC-228, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: October 2004 EC-224 PBIB2054E 2005 Titan DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 Wiring Diagram UBS00EQ2 A BANK 1 EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1678E Revision: October 2004 EC-225 2005 Titan DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 55 R Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met – 0 - Approximately 1.0V After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load [Engine is running] 78 B/W Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor 2) Revision: October 2004 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed EC-226 Approximately 0V 2005 Titan DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 BANK 2 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1679E Revision: October 2004 EC-227 2005 Titan DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 74 L Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met – 0 - Approximately 1.0V After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load [Engine is running] 78 B/W Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V UBS00EQ3 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: October 2004 EC-228 2005 Titan DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA A With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. 4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? 1. 2. EC C D E SEF968Y Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected? BBIA0368E Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-233, "DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" or EC-242, "DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" . No >> GO TO 3. 1. 2. 3. F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-229 2005 Titan DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. BBIA0435E 3. 4. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2 terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Terminals DTC Bank ECM Sensor P0139 55 1 1 P0159 74 1 2 Continuity should exist. 2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Terminals DTC Bank ECM Sensor P0139 55 1 1 P0159 74 1 2 Continuity should not exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: October 2004 EC-230 2005 Titan DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 A Refer to EC-231, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2. EC 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT C Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . D >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00EQ4 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. E Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. F G H SEF174Y I 6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. J K L PBIB1672E 7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%. M PBIB2636E “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.58V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. Revision: October 2004 EC-231 2005 Titan DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2 ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 55 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 74 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and ground. 6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.58V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage is above 0.58V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary. 7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position. The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this PBIB2054E procedure. 8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Removal and Installation UBS00EQ5 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EM-19, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . Revision: October 2004 EC-232 2005 Titan DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:16600 A UBS00KVP With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the A/F sensors 1. The ECM calcu- EC lates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios. In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic). C Sensor Input signal to ECM Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal) A/F sensor 1 DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name ECM function Fuel injection control P0174 0174 (Bank 2) Fuel injection system too lean ● Fuel injection system does not operate properly. ● The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too large. (The mixture ratio is too lean.) Fuel injector D DTC detecting condition P0171 0171 (Bank 1) Actuator Possible cause ● Intake air leaks ● A/F sensor 1 ● Fuel injector ● Exhaust gas leaks ● Incorrect fuel pressure ● Lack of fuel ● Mass air flow sensor ● Incorrect PCV hose connection DTC Confirmation Procedure E F G UBS00KVQ NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. H I WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. a. b. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-237, "Diagnostic Procedure" . NOTE: If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. SEF968Y Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the table below. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time. Engine speed Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH) Engine coolant temperature (T) condition Revision: October 2004 When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F), T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F). When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F), T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F). EC-233 2005 Titan J K L M DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION 7. 8. If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-237, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. a. b. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Select Service $03 with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is detected. Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. Select Service $07 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 BBIA0368E should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-237, "Diagnostic Procedure" . NOTE: If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the table below. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time. Engine speed Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH) Engine coolant temperature (T) condition When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F), T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F). When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F), T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F). 10. If it is difficult to start engine at step 8, the fuel injection system has a malfunction. 11. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-237, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually. Revision: October 2004 EC-234 2005 Titan DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION Wiring Diagram UBS00KVR A BANK 1 EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1680E Revision: October 2004 EC-235 2005 Titan DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION BANK 2 BBWA1681E Revision: October 2004 EC-236 2005 Titan DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION Diagnostic Procedure UBS00KVS 1. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK 1. 2. A Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold). EC C D E PBIB1216E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. F 2. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK G 1. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. 2. Check PCV hose connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace. H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-237 2005 Titan DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION 3. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect corresponding A/F sensor 1 harness connector. BBIA0376E 3. 4. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 2 75 5 35 6 56 1 76 2 77 5 57 6 58 Bank 1 Bank 2 Continuity should exist. 5. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Bank 1 Bank 2 A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 1 76 2 75 2 77 5 35 5 57 6 56 6 58 Continuity should not exist. 6. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: October 2004 EC-238 2005 Titan DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION 4. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE 1. 2. A Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-92, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-93, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" . EC At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. C 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART D Check the following. ● Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-614, "FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT" .) ● Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-93, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .) ● Fuel lines ● Fuel filter for clogging E F >> Repair or replace. G 6. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR 1. 2. With CONSULT-II Install all removed parts. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 3.0 - 9.0 g·m/sec: 9.0 - 28.0 g·m/sec: H I at idling at 2,500 rpm With GST 1. Install all removed parts. 2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST. 3.0 - 9.0 g·m/sec: 97.0 - 28.0 g·m/sec: J K at idling at 2,500 rpm OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or grounds. Refer to EC-171, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" . Revision: October 2004 EC-239 2005 Titan L M DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION 7. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS With CONSULT-II Start engine. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop. 1. 2. PBIB0133E Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Listen to each injector operating sound. Clicking noise should be heard. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for INJECTORS, refer to EC608, "INJECTOR CIRCUIT" . PBIB1986E 8. CHECK INJECTOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect all injector harness connectors. Remove injector gallery assembly. Refer to EM-29, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" . Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery. For DTC P0171, reconnect injector harness connectors on bank 1. For DTC P0174, reconnect injector harness connectors on bank 2. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors. Prepare pans or saucers under each injector. Crank engine for about 3 seconds. For DTC P0171, make sure that fuel sprays out from injectors on bank 1. For DTC P0174, make sure that fuel sprays out from injectors on bank 2. Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each injector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace injectors from which fuel does not spray out. Always replace O-ring with new ones. Revision: October 2004 EC-240 PBIB1926E 2005 Titan DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION 9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT A Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . EC >> INSPECTION END C D E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-241 2005 Titan DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:16600 UBS00KVT With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the A/F sensors 1. The ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios. In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic). Sensor A/F sensor 1 DTC No. P0172 0172 (Bank 1) P0175 0175 (Bank 2) Input signal to ECM Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal) Trouble diagnosis name Fuel injection system too rich ECM function Actuator Fuel injection control DTC detecting condition Fuel injector Possible cause ● A/F sensor 1 ● Fuel injection system does not operate properly. ● Fuel injector ● The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too large. (The mixture ratio is too rich.) ● Exhaust gas leaks ● Incorrect fuel pressure ● Mass air flow sensor DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00KVU NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. a. b. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. The 1st trip DTC P0172, P0175 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-246, "Diagnostic Procedure" . NOTE: If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. SEF968Y Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the table below. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time. Engine speed Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH) Engine coolant temperature (T) condition 7. 8. When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F), T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F). When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F), T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F). If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. Revision: October 2004 EC-242 2005 Titan DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION If engine starts, go to EC-246, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, remove spark plugs and check for fouling, etc. A WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. a. b. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. EC Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. C Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. D Select Service $03 with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is detected. Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102. E Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. Select Service $07 with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go BBIA0368E to EC-246, "Diagnostic Procedure" . F NOTE: If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performing the following procedure is advised. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. G Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes. Refer to the table below. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. H The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time. Engine speed Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH) Engine coolant temperature (T) condition I J When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F), T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F). When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F), T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F). K 9. If it is difficult to start engine at step 7, the fuel injection system has a malfunction. 10. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-246, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, remove spark plugs and check for fouling, etc. L M Revision: October 2004 EC-243 2005 Titan DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION Wiring Diagram UBS00KVV BANK 1 BBWA1680E Revision: October 2004 EC-244 2005 Titan DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION BANK 2 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1681E Revision: October 2004 EC-245 2005 Titan DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION Diagnostic Procedure UBS00KVW 1. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK 1. 2. Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold). PBIB1216E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. 2. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace. Revision: October 2004 EC-246 2005 Titan DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION 3. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect corresponding A/F sensor 1 harness connector. EC C D BBIA0376E 3. 4. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. F A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 2 75 5 35 6 56 1 76 2 77 5 57 6 58 Bank 1 Bank 2 E G H I J Continuity should exist. 5. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Bank 1 K Bank 2 A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 1 76 2 75 2 77 5 35 5 57 6 56 6 58 L M Continuity should not exist. 6. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: October 2004 EC-247 2005 Titan DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION 4. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE 1. 2. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-92, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-93, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" . At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-614, "FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT" .) ● Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-93, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .) >> Repair or replace. 6. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR With CONSULT-II 1. Install all removed parts. 2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 3.0 - 9.0 g·m/sec: 9.0 - 28.0 g·m/sec: at idling at 2,500 rpm With GST 1. Install all removed parts. 2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST. 3.0 - 9.0 g·m/sec: 9.0 - 28.0 g·m/sec: at idling at 2,500 rpm OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or grounds. Refer to EC-171, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" . Revision: October 2004 EC-248 2005 Titan DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION 7. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS A With CONSULT-II Start engine. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop. 1. 2. EC C D E PBIB0133E 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Start engine. Listen to each injector operating sound. F Clicking noise should be heard. G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for INJECTORS, refer to EC608, "INJECTOR CIRCUIT" . H I PBIB1986E 8. CHECK INJECTOR J Remove injector assembly. Refer to EM-29, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" . Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery. 2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle. 3. Disconnect all injector harness connectors. 4. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors. 5. Prepare pans or saucers under each injectors. 6. Crank engine for about 3 seconds. Make sure fuel does not drip from injector. OK or NG OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 9. NG (Drips.)>>Replace the injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one. 1. 9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: October 2004 EC-249 2005 Titan K L M DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR Component Description PFP:22630 UBS00EQE The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. BBIA0442E Fluid temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7 50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90 *: This data is reference value and is measured between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor) and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. SEF012P On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0181 0181 Trouble diagnosis name Fuel tank temperature sensor circuit range/ performance UBS00EQF DTC detecting condition Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM, compared with the voltage signals from engine coolant temperature sensor and intake air temperature sensor. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Fuel tank temperature sensor UBS00EQG NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 10 seconds. If the result is NG, go to EC-253, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the result is OK, go to following step. Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” value. If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C (140°F), the result will be OK. If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 60°C (140°F), go to the following step. Cool engine down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than 60°C (140°F). Wait at least 10 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-253, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: October 2004 EC-250 SEF174Y 2005 Titan DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR WITH GST A Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. EC C D E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-251 2005 Titan DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR Wiring Diagram UBS00EQH BBWA1682E Revision: October 2004 EC-252 2005 Titan DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure UBS00EQI 1. CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION A Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Go to DI-22, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection" . EC C 2. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . D E F G BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. H I 3. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. J K L BBIA0442E 3. Check voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0932E Revision: October 2004 EC-253 2005 Titan M DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors C1, E41 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” >> Repair harness or connector. 5. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect combination meter harness connector. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 3 and combination meter terminal 16. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors C1, E41 ● Harness connectors E152, M31 ● Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and combination meter >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connector. 7. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-255, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace “fuel level sensor unit fuel pump”. 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: October 2004 EC-254 2005 Titan DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR Component Inspection UBS00EQJ A FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. 2. Remove fuel level sensor unit. Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminals 3 and 4 by heating with hot water or heat gun as shown in the figure. Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7 50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90 EC C D SEF476YA E Removal and Installation UBS00EQK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-255 2005 Titan DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR Component Description PFP:22630 UBS00EQL The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases. BBIA0442E Fluid temperature °C (°F) Voltage* V Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7 50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90 *: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor) and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. SEF012P On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name UBS00EQM DTC detecting condition Possible cause P0182 0182 Fuel tank temperature sensor circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) P0183 0183 Fuel tank temperature sensor circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. ● Fuel tank temperature sensor DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00EQN NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-258, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF174Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: October 2004 EC-256 2005 Titan DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR Wiring Diagram UBS00EQO A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1682E Revision: October 2004 EC-257 2005 Titan DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure UBS00EQP 1. CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Go to DI-22, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection" . 2. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 3. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0442E 3. Check voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 4 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0932E Revision: October 2004 EC-258 2005 Titan DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Harness connectors C1, E41 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” EC >> Repair harness or connector. C 5. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect combination meter harness connector. Check harness continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 3 and combination meter terminal 16. Refer to Wiring Diagram. D E Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. F G 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors C1, E41 ● Harness connectors E152, M31 ● Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and combination meter >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connector. H I J 7. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-260, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace “fuel level sensor unit fuel pump”. K L 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT M Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: October 2004 EC-259 2005 Titan DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR Component Inspection UBS00EQQ FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1. 2. Remove fuel level sensor unit. Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminals 3 and 4 by heating with hot water or heat gun as shown in the figure. Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7 50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90 SEF476YA Removal and Installation UBS00EQR FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . Revision: October 2004 EC-260 2005 Titan DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR Component Description PFP:16119 A UBS00EQS Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. EC C D PBIB0145E E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00EQT Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM THRTL SEN 1 THRTL SEN 2* CONDITION F SPECIFICATION ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V ● Selector lever: D Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V G *: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00EQU H These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition P0222 0222 Throttle position sensor 1 circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor 1 is sent to ECM. P0223 0223 Throttle position sensor 1 circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor 1 is sent to ECM. Possible cause I ● Harness or connectors (TP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.) (APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.) J ● Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1) ● Accelerator pedal position sensor K FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. L Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. Revision: October 2004 EC-261 2005 Titan M DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00EQV NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-264, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: October 2004 EC-262 2005 Titan DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR Wiring Diagram UBS00EQW A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1683E Revision: October 2004 EC-263 2005 Titan DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 47 WIRE COLOR Y ITEM Sensor power supply (Throttle position sensor) CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] 50 B ● Engine: Stopped ● Selector lever: D ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released Throttle position sensor 1 More than 0.36V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine: Stopped ● Selector lever: D ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V [Engine is running] 66 R Sensor ground (Throttle position sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V [Ignition switch: ON] 69 W ● Engine: Stopped ● Selector lever: D ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released Throttle position sensor 2 Less than 4.75V [Ignition switch: ON] 91 W/R Sensor power supply (APP sensor 2) ● Engine: Stopped ● Selector lever: D ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed [Ignition switch: ON] Diagnostic Procedure More than 0.36V Approximately 5V UBS00EQX 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: October 2004 EC-264 2005 Titan DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR 2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. A Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0371E 3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E Voltage: Approximately 5V F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. G PBIB2065E H 3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 2 and ECM terminal 47. Refer to Wiring Diagram. I J Continuity should exist. K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace open circuit. L 4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. ECM terminal Sensor terminal M Reference Wiring Diagram 47 Electric throttle control actuator terminal 2 EC-263 91 APP sensor terminal 6 EC-590 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR Refer to EC-595, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 6. Revision: October 2004 EC-265 2005 Titan DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR 6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. Replace the accelerator pedal assembly. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END 7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 4 and ECM terminal 66. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Refer to EC-267, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 10. 10. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END 11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: October 2004 EC-266 2005 Titan DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR Component Inspection UBS00EQY A THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Turn ignition switch ON. Set selector lever to D position. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), 69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following conditions. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 50 (Throttle position sensor 1) Fully released More than 0.36V Fully depressed Less than 4.75V Fully released Less than 4.75V Fully depressed More than 0.36V 69 (Throttle position sensor 2) 6. 7. 8. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next step. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Removal and Installation EC C D E PBIB1530E F G UBS00EQZ ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR H Refer to EM-15, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-267 2005 Titan DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MISFIRE DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MISFIRE PFP:00000 On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00ER0 When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring. Sensor Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Input signal to ECM Engine speed ECM function On board diagnosis of misfire The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions. 1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage) On the 1st trip that a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to overheating, the MIL will blink. When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 200 engine revolutions for a change. When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will turn off. If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a second trip, the MIL will blink. When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will remain on. If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MIL will begin to blink again. 2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration) For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MIL will only light when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 1,000 engine revolutions. A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or on multiple cylinders. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition P0300 0300 Multiple cylinder misfire detected Multiple cylinder misfire. P0301 0301 No.1 cylinder misfire detected No. 1 cylinder misfires. P0302 0302 No. 2 cylinder misfire detected P0303 0303 No. 3 cylinder misfire detected No. 3 cylinder misfires. P0304 0304 No. 4 cylinder misfire detected No. 4 cylinder misfires. P0305 0305 No. 5 cylinder misfire detected No. 5 cylinder misfires. P0306 0306 No. 6 cylinder misfire detected P0307 0307 No. 7 cylinder misfire detected No. 7 cylinder misfires. P0308 0308 No. 8 cylinder misfire detected No. 8 cylinder misfires. No. 2 cylinder misfires. No. 6 cylinder misfires. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Improper spark plug ● Insufficient compression ● Incorrect fuel pressure ● The injector circuit is open or shorted ● Fuel injector ● Intake air leak ● The ignition signal circuit is open or shorted ● Lack of fuel ● Signal plate ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Incorrect PCV hose connection UBS00ER1 CAUTION: Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws when driving. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. Revision: October 2004 EC-268 2005 Titan DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MISFIRE WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. a. b. A Turn ignition switch ON, and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. EC Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Restart engine and let it idle for about 15 minutes. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-269, "Diagnostic Procedure" C . NOTE: If 1st trip DTC is not detected during above procedure, performD ing the following procedure is advised. PBIB0164E Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain E time. Refer to the table below. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible. The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following conditions should be satisfied at the same time. Engine speed Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH) Engine coolant temperature (T) condition F G When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70 °C (158 °F), T should be lower than 70 °C (158 °F). H When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F), T should be higher than or equal to 70 °C (158 °F). I The time to driving varies according to the engine speed in the freeze frame data. Engine speed Time J Around 1,000 rpm Approximately 10 minutes Around 2,000 rpm Approximately 5 minutes More than 3,000 rpm Approximately 3.5 minutes K WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. L Diagnostic Procedure UBS00KVX 1. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE M 1. Start engine and run it at idle speed. 2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak. 3. Check PCV hose connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Discover air leak location and repair. 2. CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst and muffler for dents. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace it. Revision: October 2004 EC-269 2005 Titan DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MISFIRE 3. PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST 1. 2. With CONSULT-II Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary engine speed drop? PBIB0133E Without CONSULT-II When disconnecting each injector harness connector one at a time, is there any cylinder which does not produce a momentary engine speed drop? BBIA0374E Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> GO TO 7. 4. CHECK INJECTOR Does each injector make an operating sound at idle? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> Check injector(s) and circuit(s). Refer to EC-608, "INJECTOR CIRCUIT" . PBIB1986E Revision: October 2004 EC-270 2005 Titan DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MISFIRE 5. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I A CAUTION: Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure. NOTE: Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following procedure. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils. 7. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be checked. 8. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder. 9. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil. 10. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion as shown in the figure. 11. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and check whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal portion. EC C D E BBIA0380E F G H I Spark should be generated. CAUTION: ● Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock PBIB2325E while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage becomes 20kV or more. ● It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken. NOTE: When the gap is less than 13 mm, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 6. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect spark plug and connect a known-good spark plug. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal portion. Spark should be generated. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-596, "IGNITION SIGNAL" . Revision: October 2004 K L M 6. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II 1. 2. 3. J EC-271 2005 Titan DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MISFIRE 7. CHECK SPARK PLUG Check the initial spark plug for fouling, etc. OK or NG OK >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to EM-27, "SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)" . NG >> 1. Repair or clean spark plug. 2. GO TO 8. SEF156I 8. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III 1. 2. Reconnect the initial spark plugs. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded portion. Spark should be generated. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to EM-27, "SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)" . 9. CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-60, "CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE" . Standard: 1,275 kPa (13.0 kg/cm2 , 185 psi)/300 rpm Minimum: 981 kPa (10.0 kg/cm2 , 142 psi)/300 rpm Difference between each cylinder: 98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2 , 14 psi)/300 rpm OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets. 10. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE 1. 2. 3. Install all removed parts. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-92, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-93, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" . At idle: Approx. 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2 , 51 psi) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11. Revision: October 2004 EC-272 2005 Titan DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MISFIRE 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Fuel pump and circuit (Refer to EC-614, "FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT" .) ● Fuel pressure regulator (Refer to EC-93, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .) ● Fuel lines ● Fuel filter for clogging EC C >> Repair or replace. 12. CHECK IGNITION TIMING D Check the following items. Refer to EC-71, "Basic Inspection" . Items E Specifications Target idle speed 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) Ignition timing 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Follow the EC-71, "Basic Inspection" . G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-273 2005 Titan DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MISFIRE 13. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. BBIA0376E 3. 4. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 2 75 5 35 6 56 1 76 2 77 5 57 6 58 Bank 1 Bank 2 Continuity should exist. 5. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Bank 1 Bank 2 A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 1 76 2 75 2 77 5 35 5 57 6 56 6 58 Continuity should not exist. 6. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 14. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER Refer to EC-388, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> Replace (malfunctioning) A/F sensor 1. Revision: October 2004 EC-274 2005 Titan DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MISFIRE 15. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR A With CONSULT-II Check mass air flow sensor signal in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 3.0 - 9.0 g·m/sec: 9.0 - 28.0 g·m/sec: EC at idling at 2,500 rpm With GST Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST. 3.0 - 9.0 g·m/sec: 9.0 - 28.0 g·m/sec: C at idling at 2,500 rpm D OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or ground. Refer to EC-171, "DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR" . E 16. CHECK SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART F Check items on the rough idle symptom in EC-103, "Symptom Matrix Chart" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Repair or replace. G 17. ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC H Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set. Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . I J >> GO TO 18. 18. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT K Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END L M Revision: October 2004 EC-275 2005 Titan DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS Component Description PFP:22060 UBS00ER3 The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. PBIB0021E On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00ER4 The MIL will not light up for these diagnoses. DTC No. P0327 0327 (bank 1) Trouble diagnosis name Knock sensor circuit low input DTC detecting condition An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. P0332 0332 (bank 2) P0328 0328 (bank 1) Knock sensor circuit high input Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● Knock sensor An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. P0333 0333 (bank 2) DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00ER5 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-278, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: October 2004 EC-276 2005 Titan DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS Wiring Diagram UBS00ER6 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1684E Revision: October 2004 EC-277 2005 Titan DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 15 36 WIRE COLOR W W ITEM Knock sensor (bank 1) Knock sensor (bank 2) CONDITION [Engine is running] ● Idle speed DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 2.5V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00ER7 1. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check resistance between ECM terminals 15, 36 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. NOTE: It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ. Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)] 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II 1. 2. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 15 and knock sensor (bank1) terminal 1, ECM terminal 36 and knock sensor (bank 2) terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB0021E 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors F26, F101 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and knock sensor >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR Refer to EC-280, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace knock sensor. Revision: October 2004 EC-278 2005 Titan DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS 5. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS A Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . EC C D BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. E F 6. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector. Check harness continuity between knock sensor terminal 2 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. G H Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. I 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART J Check the following. ● Harness connectors F26, F101 ● Harness connectors F14, E5 ● Harness for open or short between knock sensor terminal 2 and ground K L >> Repair open circuit or short power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT M Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: October 2004 EC-279 2005 Titan DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS Component Inspection UBS00ER8 KNOCK SENSOR Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground. NOTE: It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ. Resistance: Approximately 532 - 588 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)] CAUTION: Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones. SEF227W Removal and Installation UBS00ER9 KNOCK SENSOR Refer to EM-76, "CYLINDER BLOCK" . Revision: October 2004 EC-280 2005 Titan DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) Component Description PFP:23731 A UBS00ERA The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the A/T assembly facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. EC C D PBIB0562E E F G H PBIB2448E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00ERB I Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM ENG SPEED CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer indication. On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0335 0335 Trouble diagnosis name Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit UBS00ERC DTC detecting condition ● The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is not detected by the ECM during the first few seconds of engine cranking. ● The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft position sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM while the engine is running. ● J Almost the same speed as the tachometer indication. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is not in the normal pattern during engine running. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause L ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Crankshaft position sensor (POS) ● Signal plate UBS00ERD NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with ignition switch ON. Revision: October 2004 EC-281 K 2005 Titan M DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-284, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: October 2004 EC-282 2005 Titan DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) Wiring Diagram UBS00ERE A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1685E Revision: October 2004 EC-283 2005 Titan DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed DATA (DC Voltage) 1.0 - 2.0V NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle. 13 O PBIB1041E Crankshaft position sensor (POS) 1.0 - 2.0V [Engine is running] ● Engine speed: 2,000 rpm. PBIB1042E : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure UBS00ERF 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: October 2004 EC-284 2005 Titan DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) 2. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0367E 3. E Check voltage between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. G SEF481Y H 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. ● Harness connectors F32, E2 ● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ECM ● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and IPDM E/R J K >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. L Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 1 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. M Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors F32, E2 ● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ground >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: October 2004 EC-285 2005 Titan DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) 6. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 13 and CKP sensor (POS) terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) Refer to EC-287, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS). 8. CHECK GEAR TOOTH Visually check for chipping signal plate gear tooth. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace the signal plate. 9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: October 2004 EC-286 2005 Titan DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) Component Inspection UBS00ERG A CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) 1. 2. 3. 4. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector. Remove the sensor. Visually check the sensor for chipping. EC C D E PBIB0563E 5. F Check resistance as shown in the figure. Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] G 1 (+) - 2 (-) 1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞ 2 (+) - 3 (-) H I PBIB0564E Removal and Installation UBS00ERH CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) J Refer to AT-265, "TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY" . K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-287 2005 Titan DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) Component Description PFP:23731 UBS00ERI The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the protrusion of exhaust valve cam sprocket to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position. When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification signals. The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to change. The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes. ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. PBIB0562E PBIB2448E On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition ● P0340 0340 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit UBS00ERJ The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM for the first few seconds during engine cranking. Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) ● Camshaft (Exhaust) ● The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM during engine running. ● Starter motor (Refer to SC-10, "STARTING SYSTEM" .) ● The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal pattern during engine running. ● Starting system circuit (Refer to SC-10, "STARTING SYSTEM" .) ● Dead (Weak) battery DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00ERK NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with ignition switch ON. WITH CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. Revision: October 2004 EC-288 2005 Titan DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-291, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step. Maintaining engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-291, "Diagnostic Procedure" . A EC C SEF058Y D WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-289 2005 Titan DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) Wiring Diagram UBS00ERL BBWA1686E Revision: October 2004 EC-290 2005 Titan DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. A CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) C [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed 1.0 - 4.0V D NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle. 14 Y E PBIB1039E Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 1.0 - 4.0V F [Engine is running] ● Engine speed: 2,000 rpm. G PBIB1040E H : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure UBS00ERM I 1. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM Turn ignition switch to START position. J Does the engine turn over? Does the starter motor operate? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> Check starting system. (Refer to SC-10, "STARTING SYSTEM" .) K 2. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS L 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . M BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: October 2004 EC-291 2005 Titan DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) 3. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0372E 3. Check voltage between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. SEF481Y 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors F32, E2 ● Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and ECM ● Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and IPDM E/R >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 1 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors F32, E2 ● Harness for open or short between CMP sensor (PHASE) and ground >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: October 2004 EC-292 2005 Titan DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) 7. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. A Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 14 and CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. C D 8. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) E Refer to EC-294, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE). F 9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT G Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-293 2005 Titan DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) Component Inspection UBS00ERN CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) 1. 2. 3. 4. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector. Remove the sensor. Visually check the sensor for chipping. PBIB0563E 5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] 3(+) - 1 (-) 2 (+) - 1 (-) Except 0 or ∞ 3 (+) - 2 (-) PBIB0564E Removal and Installation UBS00ERO CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) Refer to EM-44, "CAMSHAFT" . Revision: October 2004 EC-294 2005 Titan DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:20905 A UBS00ERP The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of air fuel sensor (A/F) sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2. A three way catalyst (manifold) with high oxygen storage capacity will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2. As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor 2 switching frequency will increase. When the frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2 approaches a specified limit value, the three way catalyst (manifold) malfunction is diagnosed. EC C D PBIB2055E E DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name P0420 0420 (Bank 1) P0430 0430 (Bank 2) DTC detecting condition ● Catalyst system efficiency below threshold ● Three way catalyst (manifold) does not operate properly. Three way catalyst (manifold) does not have enough oxygen storage capacity. Possible cause ● Three way catalyst (manifold) ● Exhaust tube ● Intake air leaks ● Fuel injector ● Fuel injector leaks ● Spark plug ● Improper ignition timing DTC Confirmation Procedure F G H UBS00ERQ NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. J WITH CONSULT-II TESTING CONDITION: Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified minutes below. 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 5. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F). If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F). 7. Open engine hood. Revision: October 2004 I EC-295 K L M SEF189Y 2005 Titan DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION 8. Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 9. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and hold it for 3 consecutive minutes then release the accelerator pedal completely. If “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changed to “CMPLT”, go to step 12. 10. Wait 5 seconds at idle. PBIB1784E 11. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and maintain it until “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changes to “CMPLT” (It will take approximately 5 minutes). If not “CMPLT”, stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C (158°F) and then retest from step 1. PBIB1785E 12. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. 13. Confirm that the 1st trip DTC is not detected. If the 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-297, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF535Z Overall Function Check UBS00ERR Use this procedure to check the overall function of the three way catalyst (manifold). During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Open engine hood. Set voltmeter probe between ECM terminals ECM terminals 55 [HO2S2 (bank 1) signal], 74 [HO2S2 (bank 2) signal] and ground. Keep engine speed at 2,500 rpm constant under no load. Make sure that the voltage does not vary for more than 5 seconds. If the voltage fluctuation cycle takes less than 5 seconds, go to EC-297, "Diagnostic Procedure" . ● 1 cycle: 0.6 - 1.0 → 0 - 0.3 → 0.6 - 1.0 PBIB2056E Revision: October 2004 EC-296 2005 Titan DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION Diagnostic Procedure UBS00ERS 1. CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM A Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. EC C 2. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK 1. 2. Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before the three way catalyst (manifold). D E F G PBIB1216E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace. H 3. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK I Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace. J K 4. CHECK IGNITION TIMING Check the following items. Refer to EC-71, "Basic Inspection" . Items L Specifications Target idle speed 650 ± 50 rpm (in P or N position) Ignition timing 15 ± 5° BTDC (in P or N position) M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Follow the EC-71, "Basic Inspection" . Revision: October 2004 EC-297 2005 Titan DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION 5. CHECK INJECTORS 1. 2. Stop engine and then turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 40, 41, 42, 44, 63 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Refer to Wiring Diagram for Injectors, EC-609, "Wiring Diagram" . Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Perform EC-610, "Diagnostic Procedure" . PBIB1527E 6. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I CAUTION: Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure. NOTE: Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following procedure. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils. 7. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be checked. 8. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder. 9. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil. 10. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion as shown in the figure. 11. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and check whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal portion. BBIA0380E Spark should be generated. CAUTION: Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock PBIB2325E while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage becomes 20kV or more. ● It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken. NOTE: When the gap is less than 13 mm, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 7. ● Revision: October 2004 EC-298 2005 Titan DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION 7. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect spark plug and connect a known-good spark plug. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and EC the grounded metal portion. Spark should be generated. C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-596, "IGNITION SIGNAL" . D 8. CHECK SPARK PLUG E Check the initial spark plug for fouling, etc. OK or NG OK >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to EM-27, "SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)" . NG >> 1. Repair or clean spark plug. 2. GO TO 9. F G SEF156I H 9. CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III 1. 2. Reconnect the initial spark plugs. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded portion. I J Spark should be generated. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to EM-27, "SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)" . 10. CHECK INJECTOR 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove injector assembly. Refer to EM-29, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" . Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery. 3. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors. 4. Reconnect all injector harness connector disconnected. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. Make sure fuel does not drip from injector. OK or NG OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 11. NG (Drips.)>>Replace the injector(s) from which fuel is dripping. Revision: October 2004 EC-299 K L M 2005 Titan DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION 11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . Trouble is fixed.>>INSPECTION END Trouble is not fixed.>>Replace three way catalyst assembly. Revision: October 2004 EC-300 2005 Titan DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM System Description PFP:14950 A UBS00ERT NOTE: If DTC P0441 is displayed with other DTC such as P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128 or P2138, first perform EC trouble diagnosis for other DTC. C D E F G H PBIB1026E In this evaporative emission (EVAP) control system, purge flow occurs during non-closed throttle conditions. Purge volume is related to air intake volume. Under normal purge conditions (non-closed throttle), the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is open to admit purge flow. Purge flow exposes the EVAP control system pressure sensor to intake manifold vacuum. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00ERU I J Under normal conditions (non-closed throttle), sensor output voltage indicates if pressure drop and purge flow are adequate. If not, a malfunction is determined. DTC No. P0441 0441 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP control system incorrect purge flow DTC detecting condition EVAP control system does not operate properly, EVAP control system has a leak between intake manifold and EVAP control system pressure sensor. DTC Confirmation Procedure K Possible cause ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve stuck closed ● EVAP control system pressure sensor and the circuit ● Loose, disconnected or improper connection of rubber tube ● Blocked rubber tube ● Cracked EVAP canister ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve circuit ● Accelerator pedal position sensor ● Blocked purge port ● EVAP canister vent control valve UBS00ERV CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more. Revision: October 2004 EC-301 2005 Titan L M DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and let it idle for at least 70 seconds. Select “PURG FLOW P0441” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. If “COMPLETED” is displayed, go to step 7. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take at least 35 seconds.) Selector lever Suitable position VHCL SPEED SE 32 - 120 km/h (20 - 75 MPH) ENG SPEED 500 - 3,000 rpm B/FUEL SCHDL 1.0 - 12.0 msec COOLAN TEMP/S 70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F) PBIB0826E 7. If “TESTING” is not changed for a long time, retry from step 2. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC303, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Overall Function Check UBS00ERW Use this procedure to check the overall monitoring function of the EVAP control system purge flow monitoring. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Lift up drive wheels. Start engine (VDC switch OFF) and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and wait at least 70 seconds. Set voltmeter probes to ECM terminals 32 (EVAP control system pressure sensor signal) and ground. Check EVAP control system pressure sensor value at idle speed and note it. Establish and maintain the following conditions for at least 1 minute. Air conditioner switch ON Headlamp switch ON Rear window defogger switch ON Engine speed Approx. 3,000 rpm Gear position Any position other than P, N or R PBIB1109E 8. Verify that EVAP control system pressure sensor value stays 0.1V less than the value at idle speed (measured at step 6) for at least 1 second. Revision: October 2004 EC-302 2005 Titan DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 9. If NG, go to EC-303, "Diagnostic Procedure" . A Diagnostic Procedure UBS00ERX 1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER EC 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check EVAP canister for cracks. OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3. NG >> Replace EVAP canister. C D 2. CHECK PURGE FLOW 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. With CONSULT-II Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . Start engine and let it idle. Select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm. Touch “Qd” and “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to adjust “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening and check vacuum existence. PURG VOL CONT/V Should exist. 0% Should not exist. F G H Vacuum 100% E I OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 4. J PBIB1678E 3. CHECK PURGE FLOW 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. K Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port and install vacuum gauge. For the location of EVAP service port, refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . Start engine and let it idle. Do not depress accelerator pedal even slightly. Check vacuum gauge indication before 60 seconds passed after starting engine. Vacuum should not exist. 6. Revving engine up to 2,000 rpm after 100 seconds passed after starting engine. Vacuum should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 4. Revision: October 2004 EC-303 2005 Titan L M DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 4. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check EVAP purge line for improper connection or disconnection. Refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair it. 5. CHECK EVAP PURGE HOSE AND PURGE PORT 1. 2. Disconnect purge hoses connected to EVAP service port A and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve B . Blow air into each hose and EVAP purge port C . SEF367U 3. Check that air flows freely. OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 6. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or clean hoses and/or purge port. SEF368U 6. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. PBIB1678E 7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-319, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. Revision: October 2004 EC-304 2005 Titan DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 8. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR 1. 2. A Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. Check connectors for water. EC Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. C 9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION D Refer to DTC Confirmation Procedure for DTC P0452 EC-332, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" , P0453 EC338, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. F 10. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING 1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower. G H 11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE I Refer to EC-326, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. J 12. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE K Inspect EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube). Check for evidence of leaks. Refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Replace it. L M 13. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower. >> GO TO 14. 14. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: October 2004 E EC-305 2005 Titan DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:14950 UBS00ERY This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using engine intake manifold vacuum. If pressure does not increase, the ECM will check for leaks in the line between the fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve, under the following “Vacuum test” conditions. The EVAP canister vent control valve is closed to shut the EVAP purge line off. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will then be opened to depressurize the EVAP purge line using intake manifold vacuum. After this occurs, the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve will be closed. PBIB1026E DTC No. P0442 0442 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP control system small leak detected (negative pressure) Revision: October 2004 DTC detecting condition EVAP control system has a leak, EVAP control system does not operate properly. EC-306 Possible cause ● Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve ● Incorrect fuel filler cap used ● Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close. ● Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap. ● Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. ● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve. ● EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks ● EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks ● EVAP purge line rubber tube bent ● Loose or disconnected rubber tube ● EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and the circuit ● Fuel tank temperature sensor ● O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or damaged ● EVAP canister is saturated with water ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● Fuel level sensor and the circuit ● Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve ● ORVR system leaks 2005 Titan DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM CAUTION: ● Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, A the MIL may come on. ● If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on. ● Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement. EC DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00ERZ NOTE: ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: ● Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is placed on flat level surface. ● Always perform test at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F). C D E WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Make sure that the following conditions are met. COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F) INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 30°C (32 - 86°F) Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Follow the instruction displayed. F G H I J K PBIB0829E NOTE: If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to EC-71, "Basic Inspection" . 6. M Make sure that “OK” is displayed. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-308, "Diagnostic Procedure" . NOTE: Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve properly. SEC763C WITH GST NOTE: Be sure to read the explanation of EC-58, "Driving Pattern" before driving vehicle. 1. Start engine. 2. Drive vehicle according to EC-58, "Driving Pattern" . Revision: October 2004 EC-307 L 2005 Titan DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 3. 4. 5. – – Stop vehicle. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. Select Service $07 with GST. If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-308, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-303, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Diagnostic Procedure UBS00ES0 1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap. SEF915U 2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower. 2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard. 3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. 4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE Refer to EC-35, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one. Revision: October 2004 EC-308 2005 Titan DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 5. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP A To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely. NOTE: Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking. EC C D BBIA0366E E F G SEF916U With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 6. Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7. H I 6. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK J With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. CAUTION: ● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. ● K L Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. M PEF917U 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace. SEF200U Revision: October 2004 EC-309 2005 Titan DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 7. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch OFF. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of test.) BBIA0443E 3. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter. CAUTION: ● Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump. Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace. ● SEF200U 8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Check the following. ● EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly. Refer to EC-36, "Removal and Installation" . ● EVAP canister vent control valve. Refer to EC-326, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring. Revision: October 2004 EC-310 2005 Titan DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 9. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER A Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. EC 2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 10. C No (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12. No (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13. 1. D BBIA0351E E 10. CHECK EVAP CANISTER Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 2.5 kg (5.5 lb). OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13. NG >> GO TO 11. F G H 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. ● EVAP canister for damage ● EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection J >> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. K 12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION With CONSULT-II Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100%. 5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 14. 1. 2. 3. 4. PBIB1678E Revision: October 2004 EC-311 2005 Titan L M DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 13. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. Vacuum should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 14. 14. CHECK VACUUM HOSE Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-113, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. 15. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-319, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. 16. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-255, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. 17. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-330, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 18. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection. Refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. 19. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower. >> GO TO 20. Revision: October 2004 EC-312 2005 Titan DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 20. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE A Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-39, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" . EC OK or NG OK >> GO TO 21. NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes. C CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE 21. Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and improper connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 22. NG >> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube. D E 22. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE F Refer to EC-43, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 23. NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. G 23. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR H Refer to DI-22, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 24. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. I 24. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT J Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . K >> INSPECTION END L M Revision: October 2004 EC-313 2005 Titan DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE PFP:14920 Description UBS00ES1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*1 Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Battery Battery voltage*1 Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal) Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank Wheel sensor*2 Vehicle speed ECM function Actuator EVAP canister purge flow control EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve *1: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. *2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/ OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse, the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve. PBIB2057E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00ES2 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM PURG VOL C/V CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Selector lever: P or N ● No load Revision: October 2004 SPECIFICATION Idle (Accelerator pedal: Not depressed even slightly, after starting engine) 0% 2,000 rpm — EC-314 2005 Titan DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00ES3 A DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● P0444 0444 P0445 0445 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve circuit open EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve circuit shorted An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM through the valve An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM through the valve DTC Confirmation Procedure Harness or connectors (The solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.) ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve ● Harness or connectors (The solenoid valve circuit is shorted.) ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve EC C D UBS00ES4 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. E F WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for at least 13 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-318, "Diagnostic Procedure" . G H I J SEF058Y K WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. L M Revision: October 2004 EC-315 2005 Titan DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Wiring Diagram UBS00ES5 BBWA1687E Revision: October 2004 EC-316 2005 Titan DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. A CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) C BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] 45 L/Y ● Idle speed ● Accelerator pedal: Not depressed even slightly, after starting engine. D E EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve PBIB0050E F 11 - 14V [Engine is running] ● G Engine speed: About 2,000 rpm (More than 100 seconds after starting engine) PBIB0051E [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 111 W/B ECM relay (Self shut-off) [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 119 120 BR BR Power supply for ECM For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.5V H I BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) J K : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) L M Revision: October 2004 EC-317 2005 Titan DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Diagnostic Procedure UBS00ES6 1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0366E 4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. PBIB2245E 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors E2, F32 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R ● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM ● >> Repair harness or connectors. 3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 45 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 4. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: October 2004 EC-318 2005 Titan DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 4. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION A With CONSULT-II Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Start engine. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 1. 2. 3. EC C D E PBIB1678E 5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE F Refer to EC-319, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. G H 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . I >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00ES7 J EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II K Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions. Condition (PURG VOL CONT/V value) Air passage continuity between A and B 100% Yes 0% No L M PBIB2058E Without CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions. Condition Air passage continuity between A and B 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No supply No PBIB2059E Revision: October 2004 EC-319 2005 Titan DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Removal and Installation UBS00ES8 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EM-15, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . Revision: October 2004 EC-320 2005 Titan DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Component Description PFP:14935 A UBS00ES9 The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent. This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized. A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative emission control system components. This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains opened. When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows “EVAP Control System” diagnosis. EC C D PBIB1263E E F G H BBIA0443E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00ESA I Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM VENT CONT/V CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0447 0447 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP canister vent control valve circuit open J OFF UBS00ESB DTC detecting condition An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM through EVAP canister vent control valve. K Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The valve circuit is open or shorted.) ● EVAP canister vent control valve L M Revision: October 2004 EC-321 2005 Titan DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00ESC NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and wait at least 8 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-324, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: October 2004 EC-322 2005 Titan DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Wiring Diagram UBS00ESD A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1688E Revision: October 2004 EC-323 2005 Titan DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 117 WIRE COLOR L/Y ITEM EVAP canister vent control valve CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] Diagnostic Procedure DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) UBS00ESE 1. INSPECTION START Do you have CONSULT-II? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 3. 2. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then turn ON. 2. Select “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch “ON/OFF” on CONSULT-II screen. 4. Check for operating sound of the valve. Clicking noise should be heard. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB1679E Revision: October 2004 EC-324 2005 Titan DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE 3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect EVAP canister vent control valve harness connector. EC C D BBIA0443E 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E F Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. G H PBIB0152E I 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E41, C1 ● IPDM E/R harness connector E119 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and IPDM E/R J K >> Repair harness or connectors. 5. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND L SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 117 and EVAP canister vent control valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. Revision: October 2004 EC-325 2005 Titan M DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E41, C1 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister vent control valve and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING 1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower. 8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-326, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. 9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00ESF EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. PBIB1033E 5. 6. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time. Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. Condition VENT CONTROL/V Air passage continuity between A and B ON No OFF Yes Operation takes less than 1 second. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Revision: October 2004 EC-326 PBIB1679E 2005 Titan DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE 7. 8. Clean the air passage (portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. Perform step 6 again. A Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted. EC C D E PBIB1033E 3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. Condition F Air passage continuity between A and B 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 No OFF Yes G H Operation takes less than 1 second. 4. 5. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Clean the air passage (portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. Perform step 3 again. PBIB1034E I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-327 2005 Titan DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description PFP:22365 UBS00ESG The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases. BBIA0443E PBIB1207E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00ESH Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM EVAP SYS PRES CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00ESI NOTE: If DTC P0451 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to EC-450, "DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY" . DTC No. P0451 0451 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP control system pressure sensor performance Revision: October 2004 DTC detecting condition ECM detects a sloshing signal from the EVAP control system pressure sensor EC-328 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors ● EVAP control system pressure sensor 2005 Titan DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00ESJ NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and wait at least 40 seconds. NOTE: Do not depress accelerator pedal even slightly. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-329, "Diagnostic Procedure" . C D E SEF194Y F WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. G Diagnostic Procedure UBS00ESK 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. H Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . I J K L BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: October 2004 EC-329 M 2005 Titan DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 2. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR WATER 1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. 2. Check sensor harness connector for water. BBIA0443E Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness connector. 3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-330, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . For wiring diagram, refer to EC-333, "Wiring Diagram" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00ESL EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister. Always replace O-ring with a new one. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions. Applied vacuum kPa (mmHg, inHg) Voltage V Not applied 1.8 - 4.8 -26.7 (-200, -7.87) 2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value CAUTION: Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. ● Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg). If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. ● 4. Revision: October 2004 EC-330 PBIB1173E 2005 Titan DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description PFP:25085 A UBS00ESM The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases. EC C D E BBIA0443E F G H PBIB1207E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00ESN J Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM EVAP SYS PRES CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V On Board Diagnosis Logic K UBS00ESO NOTE: If DTC P0452 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to EC-450, "DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY" . DTC No. P0452 0452 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP control system pressure sensor low input Revision: October 2004 I DTC detecting condition An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. EC-331 Possible cause L M ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● EVAP control system pressure sensor 2005 Titan DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00ESP NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Make sure that “FUEL T/TMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F). Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-334, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF194Y WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check that voltage between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds. Select Service $07 with GST. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-334, "Diagnostic Procedure" . PBIB1110E Revision: October 2004 EC-332 2005 Titan DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Wiring Diagram UBS00ESQ A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1689E Revision: October 2004 EC-333 2005 Titan DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 32 L EVAP control system pressure sensor [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V 48 SB Sensor power supply (EVAP control system pressure sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 67 B Sensor ground ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Engine is running] Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V UBS00ESR 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 2. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. 2. Check sensor harness connector for water. BBIA0443E Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness connector. Revision: October 2004 EC-334 2005 Titan DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. EC Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. C D SEF079U E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors C1, E41 ● Harness connectors E5, F14 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM F G >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND H SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. J K 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. L 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART M Check the following. ● Harness connectors C1, E41 ● Harness connectors E5, F14 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: October 2004 I EC-335 2005 Titan DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 32 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8. 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors C1, E41 ● Harness connectors E5, F14 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-336, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 10. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00ESS EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister. Always replace O-ring with a new one. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions. Applied vacuum kPa (mmHg, inHg) Voltage V Not applied 1.8 - 4.8 -26.7 (-200, -7.87) 2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value CAUTION: Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. ● Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg). If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. ● 4. Revision: October 2004 EC-336 PBIB1173E 2005 Titan DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description PFP:25085 A UBS00EST The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases. EC C D E BBIA0443E F G H PBIB1207E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00ESU J Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM EVAP SYS PRES CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1.8 - 4.8V K On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00ESV NOTE: If DTC P0451 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to EC-450, "DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY" . DTC No. P0453 0453 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP control system pressure sensor high input Revision: October 2004 I DTC detecting condition An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. EC-337 Possible cause L M ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● EVAP canister vent control valve ● EVAP canister ● Rubber hose from EVAP canister vent control valve to vehicle frame 2005 Titan DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00ESW NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Make sure that “FUEL T/TMP SE” is more than 0°C (32°F). Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-340, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF194Y WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check that voltage between ECM terminal 107 (Fuel tank temperature sensor signal) and ground is less than 4.2V. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and wait at least 20 seconds. Select Service $07 with GST. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-340, "Diagnostic Procedure" . PBIB1110E Revision: October 2004 EC-338 2005 Titan DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Wiring Diagram UBS00ESX A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1689E Revision: October 2004 EC-339 2005 Titan DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 32 L EVAP control system pressure sensor [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 1.8 - 4.8V 48 SB Sensor power supply (EVAP control system pressure sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 67 B Sensor ground ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Engine is running] Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V UBS00ESY 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 2. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. BBIA0443E 2. Check sensor harness connector for water. Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness connector. Revision: October 2004 EC-340 2005 Titan DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 3. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. EC Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. C D SEF079U E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors C1, E41 ● Harness connectors E5, F14 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM F G >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND H SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. J K 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. L 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART M Check the following. ● Harness connectors C1, E41 ● Harness connectors E5, F14 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: October 2004 I EC-341 2005 Titan DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 32 and EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8. 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors C1, E41 ● Harness connectors E5, F14 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP control system pressure sensor and ECM >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9. CHECK RUBBER TUBE 1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging, vent or kinked. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower, repair or replace rubber tube. 10. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-326, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. 11. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-344, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. Revision: October 2004 EC-342 2005 Titan DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 12. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER A Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. EC 2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 13. C No >> GO TO 15. 1. D BBIA0351E E 13. CHECK EVAP CANISTER Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 2.5 kg (5.5 lb). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 14. F G H 14. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. EVAP canister for damage ● EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection I ● J >> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. 15. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT K Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . L >> INSPECTION END M Revision: October 2004 EC-343 2005 Titan DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Component Inspection UBS00ESZ EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its harness connector connected from EVAP canister. Always replace O-ring with a new one. Install a vacuum pump to EVAP control system pressure sensor. Turn ignition switch ON and check output voltage between ECM terminal 32 and ground under the following conditions. Applied vacuum kPa (mmHg, inHg) Voltage V Not applied 1.8 - 4.8 -26.7 (-200, -7.87) 2.1 to 2.5V lower than above value CAUTION: Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. ● Do not apply below -93.3 kPa (-700 mmHg, -27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg). If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. ● 4. Revision: October 2004 EC-344 PBIB1173E 2005 Titan DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:14950 A UBS00ET0 This diagnosis detects a very large leak (fuel filler cap fell off etc.) in EVAP system between the fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. EC C D E F G PBIB1026E DTC No. P0455 0455 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP control system gross leak detected DTC detecting condition EVAP control system has a very large leak such as fuel filler cap fell off, EVAP control system does not operate properly. Possible cause ● Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close. ● Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve ● Incorrect fuel filler cap used ● Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap. ● Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. ● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve. ● EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks ● EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks ● EVAP purge line rubber tube bent. ● Loose or disconnected rubber tube ● EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and the circuit ● Fuel tank temperature sensor ● O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or damaged. ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve ● ORVR system leaks CAUTION: ● Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. ● If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on. ● Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement. Revision: October 2004 EC-345 H 2005 Titan I J K L M DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00ET1 CAUTION: Never remove fuel filler cap during the DTC Confirmation Procedure. NOTE: ● Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve properly. ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: ● Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4 full, and vehicle is placed on flat level surface. ● Open engine hood before conducting the following procedures. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Tighten fuel filler cap securely until ratcheting sound is heard. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Make sure that the following conditions are met. COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F) INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 60°C (32 - 140°F) Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0442/P1442” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Follow the instruction displayed. PBIB0829E 7. NOTE: If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, go to EC-71, "Basic Inspection" . Make sure that “OK” is displayed. If “NG” is displayed, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode and make sure that “EVAP GROSS LEAK [P0455]” is displayed. If it is displayed, refer to EC-347, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If P0442 is displayed, perform Diagnostic Procedure for DTC P0442 EC-308, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEC763C Revision: October 2004 EC-346 2005 Titan DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM WITH GST A NOTE: Be sure to read the explanation of EC-58, "Driving Pattern" before driving vehicle. 1. Start engine. 2. Drive vehicle according to EC-58, "Driving Pattern" . 3. Stop vehicle. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. 5. Select Service $07 with GST. ● If P0455 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-347, "Diagnostic Procedure" . ● If P0442 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-308, "Diagnostic Procedure" . ● If P0441 is displayed on the screen, go to EC-303, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Diagnostic Procedure EC C D UBS00ET2 E 1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap. F G H SEF915U I 2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION J Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower. 2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard. K L 3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. M 4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE Refer to EC-35, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one. Revision: October 2004 EC-347 2005 Titan DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 5. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks, improper connection or disconnection. Refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. 6. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower. >> GO TO 7. 7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Check the following. ● EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly. Refer to EC-36, "Removal and Installation" . ● EVAP canister vent control valve. Refer to EC-326, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring. 8. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely. NOTE: Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking. BBIA0366E SEF916U With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 9. Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 10. Revision: October 2004 EC-348 2005 Titan DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 9. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK A With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. CAUTION: ● Do not use compressed air or a high pressure pump. 1. 2. ● EC C D Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. E PEF917U 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Repair or replace. F G H SEF200U I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-349 2005 Titan DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 10. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch OFF. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of test.) BBIA0443E 3. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter. CAUTION: ● Do not use compressed air or a high pressure pump. Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Repair or replace. ● SEF200U 11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION With CONSULT-II 1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. 2. Start engine. 3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. 4. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100%. 5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> GO TO 13. PBIB1678E Revision: October 2004 EC-350 2005 Titan DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. A Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. EC C Vacuum should exist. D OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 13. E 13. CHECK VACUUM HOSE Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-113, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" . OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 14. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 15. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. F G 14. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE H With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 15. I J K L PBIB1678E 15. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE M Refer to EC-319, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. 16. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-255, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. Revision: October 2004 EC-351 2005 Titan DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 17. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-330, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 18. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-39, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes. 19. CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and improper connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 20. NG >> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube. 20. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE Refer to EC-43, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 21. NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. 21. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: October 2004 EC-352 2005 Titan DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:14950 A UBS00ET3 This diagnosis detects very small leaks in the EVAP line between fuel tank and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve, using the intake manifold vacuum in the same way as conventional EVAP small leak EC diagnosis. If ECM judges a leak which corresponds to a very small leak, the very small leak P0456 will be detected. If ECM judges a leak equivalent to a small leak, EVAP small leak P0442 will be detected. C If ECM judges there are no leaks, the diagnosis will be OK. D E F G H PBIB1026E DTC No. P0456 0456 Trouble diagnosis name Evaporative emission control system very small leak (negative pressure check) Revision: October 2004 DTC detecting condition Possible cause J ● Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve ● Incorrect fuel filler cap used ● Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close. ● Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap. ● Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. ● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control valve. ● EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks ● EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks ● EVAP purge line rubber tube bent K ● EVAP system has a very small leak. ● Loose or disconnected rubber tube ● EVAP system does not operate properly. ● EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and the circuit ● Fuel tank temperature sensor ● O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing or damaged ● EVAP canister is saturated with water ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve ● ORVR system leaks ● Fuel level sensor and the circuit ● Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve EC-353 I 2005 Titan L M DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM CAUTION: ● Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. ● If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on. ● Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00ET4 NOTE: ● If DTC P0456 is displayed with P0442, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0456. ● After repair, make sure that the hoses and clips are installed properly. ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: ● Open engine hood before conducting following procedure. ● If any of following conditions are met just before the DTC confirmation procedure, leave the vehicle for more than 1 hour. – Fuel filler cap is removed. – Fuel is refilled or drained. – EVAP component parts is/are removed. ● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Make sure the following conditions are met. FUEL LEVEL SE: 0.25 - 1.4V COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 32°C (32 - 90°F) FUEL T/TMP SE: 0 - 35°C (32 - 95°F) INT/A TEMP SE: More than 0°C (32°F) If NG, turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle) or refilling/draining fuel until the output voltage condition of the “FUEL LEVEL SE” meets within the range above and leave the vehicle for more than 1 hour. Then start from step 1). Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. Select “EVAP V/S LEAK P0456/P1456” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Follow the instruction displayed. PBIB0837E 5. Make sure that “OK” is displayed. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-356, "Diagnostic Procedure" . NOTE: ● If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the range displayed on CONSULT-II screen, go to EC-71, "Basic Inspection" . ● Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve properly. Revision: October 2004 EC-354 2005 Titan DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM Overall Function Check UBS00ET5 A WITH GST Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EVAP very small leak function. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. EC CAUTION: ● Do not use compressed air, doing so may damage the EVAP system. ● Do not start engine. C ● Do not exceeded 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi). 1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the EVAP service port. D E F BBIA0366E 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Set the pressure pump and a hose. Also set a vacuum gauge via 3-way connector and a hose. Turn ignition switch ON. Connect GST and select Service $08. Using Service $08, control the EVAP canister vent control valve (close). Apply pressure and make sure the following conditions are satisfied. Pressure to be applied: 2.7 kPa (20 mmHg, 0.79 inHg) Time to be waited after the pressure drawn in to the EVAP system and the pressure to be dropped: 60 seconds and the pressure should not be dropped more than 0.4 kPa (3 mmHg, 0.12 inHg). If NG, go to EC-356, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If OK, go to next step. Disconnect GST. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Restart engine and let it idle for 90 seconds. Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm for 30 seconds. Turn ignition switch OFF. NOTE: For more information, refer to GST Instruction Manual. Revision: October 2004 EC-355 G H I J SEF462UI K L M 2005 Titan DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM Diagnostic Procedure UBS00ET6 1. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP DESIGN 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap design. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace with genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap. SEF915U 2. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP INSTALLATION Check that the cap is tightened properly by rotating the cap clockwise. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> 1. Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap and fuel filler neck threads using air blower. 2. Retighten until ratcheting sound is heard. 3. CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP FUNCTION Check for air releasing sound while opening the fuel filler cap. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. 4. CHECK FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE Refer to EC-35, "FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FULLER CAP)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace fuel filler cap with a genuine one. Revision: October 2004 EC-356 2005 Titan DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 5. INSTALL THE PRESSURE PUMP A To locate the EVAP leak, install EVAP service port adapter and pressure pump to EVAP service port securely. NOTE: Improper installation of the EVAP service port adapter to the EVAP service port may cause leaking. EC C D BBIA0366E E F G SEF916U With CONSULT-II>>GO TO 6. Without CONSULT-II>>GO TO 7. H I 6. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK J With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch “START” and apply pressure into the EVAP line until the pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph. CAUTION: ● Do not use compressed air or a high pressure pump. ● K L Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. M PEF917U 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace. SEF200U Revision: October 2004 EC-357 2005 Titan DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 7. CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch OFF. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP canister vent control valve. The valve will close. (Continue to apply 12 volts until the end of test.) BBIA0443E 3. Pressurize the EVAP line using pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7 kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to 0.79 inHg), then remove pump and EVAP service port adapter. CAUTION: ● Do not use compressed air or a high pressure pump. Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2 , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the system. 4. Using EVAP leak detector, locate the EVAP leak. For the leak detector, refer to the instruction manual for more details. Refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace. ● SEF200U 8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Check the following. ● EVAP canister vent control valve is installed properly. Refer to EC-36, "Removal and Installation" . ● EVAP canister vent control valve. Refer to EC-326, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace EVAP canister vent control valve and O-ring. Revision: October 2004 EC-358 2005 Titan DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 9. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER A Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. EC 2. Does water drain from the EVAP canister? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 10. C No (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12. No (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13. 1. D BBIA0351E E 10. CHECK EVAP CANISTER Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 2.5 kg (5.5 lb). OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13. NG >> GO TO 11. F G H 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. ● EVAP canister for damage ● EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection J >> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. K 12. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION With CONSULT-II Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Touch “Qu” on CONSULT-II screen to increase “PURG VOL CONT/V” opening to 100%. 5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> GO TO 14. 1. 2. 3. 4. PBIB1678E Revision: October 2004 EC-359 2005 Titan L M DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 13. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Stop engine. Disconnect vacuum hose to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve at EVAP service port. Start engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. Check vacuum hose for vacuum when revving engine up to 2,000 rpm. Vacuum should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> GO TO 14. 14. CHECK VACUUM HOSE Check vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection. Refer to EC-113, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. 15. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-319, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 16. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. 16. CHECK FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-255, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 17. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. 17. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-330, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 18. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 18. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection. Refer to EC-33, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 19. NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose. 19. CLEAN EVAP PURGE LINE Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) using air blower. >> GO TO 20. Revision: October 2004 EC-360 2005 Titan DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM 20. CHECK EVAP/ORVR LINE A Check EVAP/ORVR line between EVAP canister and fuel tank for clogging, kink, looseness and improper connection. For location, refer to EC-39, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" . EC OK or NG OK >> GO TO 21. NG >> Repair or replace hoses and tubes. C CHECK RECIRCULATION LINE 21. Check recirculation line between filler neck tube and fuel tank for clogging, kink, cracks, looseness and improper connection. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 22. NG >> Repair or replace hose, tube or filler neck tube. D E 22. CHECK REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE F Refer to EC-43, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 23. NG >> Replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank. G 23. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR H Refer to DI-22, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 24. NG >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. I 24. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT J Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . K >> INSPECTION END L M Revision: October 2004 EC-361 2005 Titan DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Component Description PFP:25060 UBS00ET7 The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. BBIA0402E On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00ET8 NOTE: If DTC P0460 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-160, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . When the vehicle is parked, naturally the fuel level in the fuel tank is stable. It means that output signal of the fuel level sensor does not change. If ECM senses sloshing signal from the sensor, fuel level sensor malfunction is detected. DTC No. P0460 0460 Trouble diagnosis name Fuel level sensor circuit noise DTC detecting condition Even though the vehicle is parked, a signal being varied is sent from the fuel level sensor to ECM. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted) ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Combination meter ● Fuel level sensor UBS00ET9 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and wait maximum of 2 consecutive minutes. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-363, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF195Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: October 2004 EC-362 2005 Titan DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure UBS00ETA 1. CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION A Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Go to DI-22, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection" . EC C 2. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . D >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation UBS00ETB E FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-363 2005 Titan DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Component Description PFP:25060 UBS00ETC The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. BBIA0402E On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00ETD NOTE: If DTC P0461 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-160, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . Driving long distances naturally affect fuel gauge level. This diagnosis detects the fuel gauge malfunction of the gauge not moving even after a long distance has been driven. DTC No. P0461 0461 Trouble diagnosis name Fuel level sensor circuit range/performance DTC detecting condition The output signal of the fuel level sensor does not change within the specified range even though the vehicle has been driven a long distance. Overall Function Check Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted) ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Combination meter ● Fuel level sensor UBS00ETE Use this procedure to check the overall function of the fuel level sensor function. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WARNING: When performing following procedure, be sure to observe the handling of the fuel. Refer to FL-10, "FUEL TANK" . TESTING CONDITION: Before starting overall function check, preparation of draining fuel and refilling fuel is required. WITH CONSULT-II NOTE: Start from step 10, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/ 8 Imp gal) in advance. 1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose. 2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line, refer to EC-92, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . 3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit. 4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds then turn ON. Revision: October 2004 EC-364 2005 Titan DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Select “FUEL LEVEL SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it. Select “FUEL PUMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULTII. Touch “ON” and drain fuel approximately 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 65/8 Imp gal) and stop it. Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it. Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal). Check “FUEL LEVEL SE” output voltage and note it. Confirm whether the voltage changes more than 0.03V during step 7 to 10 and 10 to 12. If NG, go to EC-365, "Diagnostic Procedure" . A EC C SEF195Y D WITH GST E NOTE: Start from step 8, if it is possible to confirm that the fuel cannot be drained by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) in advance. 1. Prepare a fuel container and a spare hose. 2. Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to EC-92, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . 3. Remove the fuel feed hose on the fuel level sensor unit. 4. Connect a spare fuel hose where the fuel feed hose was removed. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. 6. Drain fuel by 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal) from the fuel tank using proper equipment. 7. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies. 8. Fill fuel into the fuel tank for 30 (7-7/8 US gal, 6-5/8 Imp gal). 9. Confirm that the fuel gauge indication varies. 10. If NG, go to EC-365, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Diagnostic Procedure UBS00ETF F G H I J 1. CHECK DTC WITH COMBINATION METER Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Go to DI-22, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection" . K L 2. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT M Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation UBS00ETG FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . Revision: October 2004 EC-365 2005 Titan DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT Component Description PFP:25060 UBS00ETH The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the fuel tank and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line. It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float. BBIA0402E On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00ETI NOTE: If DTC P0462 or P0463 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-160, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . This diagnosis indicates the former, to detect open or short circuit malfunction. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition P0462 0462 Fuel level sensor circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. P0463 0463 Fuel level sensor circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted) ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Combination meter ● Fuel level sensor UBS00ETJ NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at ignition switch ON. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-367, "Diagnostic Procedure" SEF195Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: October 2004 EC-366 2005 Titan DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT Diagnostic Procedure UBS00ETK 1. CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION A Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Go to DI-22, "Fuel Level Sensor Unit Inspection" . EC C 2. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . D >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation UBS00ETL E FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-367 2005 Titan DTC P0500 VSS DTC P0500 VSS Description PFP:32702 UBS00ETM NOTE: If DTC P0500 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-160, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)” by CAN communication line. The c combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM by CAN communication line. On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0500 0500 Trouble diagnosis name Vehicle speed sensor UBS00ETN DTC detecting condition The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from vehicle speed sensor is sent to ECM even when vehicle is being driven. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted) ● Harness or connectors (The vehicle speed signal circuit is open or shorted) ● Wheel sensor ● Combination meter ● ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) UBS00ETO CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Steps 1 and 2 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine (VDC switch OFF). Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. The vehicle speed on CONSULTII should exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position. If NG, go to EC-369, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If OK, go to following step. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Warm engine up to normal operating temperature. Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive seconds. ENG SPEED More than 1,600 rpm COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F) B/FUEL SCHDL More than 6.9 msec Selector lever Except P or N position PW/ST SIGNAL OFF 6. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-369, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Overall Function Check SEF196Y UBS00ETP Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle speed sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. Lift up drive wheels. Revision: October 2004 EC-368 2005 Titan DTC P0500 VSS 2. 3. 4. Start engine. A Read vehicle speed sensor signal in Service $01 with GST. The vehicle speed sensor on GST should be able to exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position. If NG, go to EC-369, "Diagnostic Procedure" . EC Diagnostic Procedure UBS00ETQ 1. CHECK DTC WITH ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) C Refer to BRC-11, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" , BRC-51, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" or BRC-98, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. D E 2. CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" . F >> INSPECTION END G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-369 2005 Titan DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM Description PFP:23781 UBS00ETR NOTE: If DTC P0506 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC. The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions, such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan operation, etc.). On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0506 0506 UBS00ETS Trouble diagnosis name Idle speed control system RPM lower than expected DTC detecting condition The idle speed is less than the target idle speed by 100 rpm or more. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Electric throttle control actuator ● Intake air leak UBS00ETT NOTE: ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. ● If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" , before conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure. For the target idle speed, refer to the EC-638, "SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)" . TESTING CONDITION: ● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. ● Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F). WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Open engine hood. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON again and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-371, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF174Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: October 2004 EC-370 2005 Titan DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM Diagnostic Procedure UBS00ETU 1. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK A 1. Start engine and let it idle. 2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Discover air leak location and repair. EC C 2. REPLACE ECM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Stop engine. Replace ECM. Perform initialization of NVIS(NATS) system and registration of all NVIS(NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-138, "ECM Re-communicating Function" . Perform EC-89, "VIN Registration" . Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . D E F G >> INSPECTION END H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-371 2005 Titan DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM Description PFP:23781 UBS00ETV NOTE: If DTC P0507 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for the other DTC. The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air, which is let into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating of the throttle valve is varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the target value memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the engine can operate steadily. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consideration various engine conditions, such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan operation, etc.). On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P0507 0507 UBS00ETW Trouble diagnosis name Idle speed control system RPM higher than expected DTC detecting condition The idle speed is more than the target idle speed by 200 rpm or more. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Electric throttle control actuator ● Intake air leak ● PCV system UBS00ETX NOTE: ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. ● If the target idle speed is out of the specified value, perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" , before conducting DTC Confirmation Procedure. For the target idle speed, refer to the EC-638, "SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)" . TESTING CONDITION: ● Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. ● Always perform the test at a temperature above −10°C (14°F). WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Open engine hood. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON again and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle speed. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-373, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF174Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: October 2004 EC-372 2005 Titan DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM Diagnostic Procedure UBS00ETY 1. CHECK PCV HOSE CONNECTION A Confirm that PCV hose is connected correctly. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. EC C 2. CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK 1. Start engine and let it idle. 2. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Discover air leak location and repair. D E 3. REPLACE ECM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. F Stop engine. Replace ECM. Perform initialization of NVIS(NATS) system and registration of all NVIS(NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-138, "ECM Re-communicating Function" . Perform EC-89, "VIN Registration" . Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . G H I >> INSPECTION END J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-373 2005 Titan DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR Component Description PFP:49763 UBS00ETZ Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load. BBIA0365E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00EU0 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM PW/ST SIGNAL CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine SPECIFICATION Steering wheel: Not being turned (Forward direction) OFF Steering wheel: Being turned ON On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00EU1 The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. NOTE: If DTC P0550 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to EC-450, "DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY" . DTC No. P0550 0550 Trouble diagnosis name Power steering pressure sensor circuit DTC detecting condition An excessively low or high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Power steering pressure sensor UBS00EU2 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-376, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: October 2004 EC-374 2005 Titan DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR Wiring Diagram UBS00EU3 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1690E Revision: October 2004 EC-375 2005 Titan DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] 12 R Power steering pressure sensor ● Steering wheel: Being turned. [Engine is running] ● Steering wheel: Not being turned. DATA (DC Voltage) 0.5 - 4.5V 0.4 - 0.8V [Engine is running] 67 68 B W/L Sensor ground Sensor power supply (Power steering pressure sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Ignition switch: ON] Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V Approximately 5V UBS00EU4 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: October 2004 EC-376 2005 Titan DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR 2. CHECK PSP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect power steering pressure (PSP) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0365E 3. Check voltage between PSP sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E Voltage: Approximately 5V F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connectors. G PBIB0188E H 3. CHECK PSP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. I Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between PSP sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. J Continuity should exist. K 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L 4. CHECK PSP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. M Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 12 and PSP sensor terminal 2. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK PSP SENSOR Refer to EC-378, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace PSP sensor. Revision: October 2004 EC-377 2005 Titan DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00EU5 POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Start engine and let it idle. Check voltage between ECM terminal 12 and ground under the following conditions. Condition Voltage Steering wheel: Being turned 0.5 - 4.5V Steering wheel: Not being turned 0.4 - 0.8V MBIB0126E Removal and Installation UBS00EU6 POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to PS-32, "HYDRAULIC LINE" . Revision: October 2004 EC-378 2005 Titan DTC P0605 ECM DTC P0605 ECM Component Description PFP:23710 A UBS00EU7 The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine. EC C D PBIB1164E E On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00EU8 This self-diagnosis has one or two trip detection logic. DTC No. P0605 0605 Trouble diagnosis name Engine control module DTC detecting condition A) ECM calculation function is malfunctioning. B) ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning. C) ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning. F Possible cause ● ECM G FAIL-SAFE MODE H ECM enters fail-safe mode when the malfunction A is detected. Detected items Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode ● ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. ● ECM deactivates ASCD operation. Malfunction A J DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00EU9 Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. If there is no malfunction on PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. K L M Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-380, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. Revision: October 2004 I EC-379 2005 Titan DTC P0605 ECM PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-380, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. Repeat step 3 for 32 times. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-380, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. Diagnostic Procedure UBS00EUA 1. INSPECTION START With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “ERASE”. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure. See EC-379, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . 5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again? 1. 2. 3. 4. With GST Turn ignition switch ON. Select Service $04 with GST. Touch “ERASE”. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure. See EC-379, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . 5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. 3. 4. Revision: October 2004 EC-380 2005 Titan DTC P0605 ECM 2. REPLACE ECM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. A Replace ECM. Perform initialization of NVIS(NATS) system and registration of all NVIS(NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to EC BL-138, "ECM Re-communicating Function" . Perform EC-89, "VIN Registration" . Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . C Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . D >> INSPECTION END E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-381 2005 Titan DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER Description PFP:22693 UBS00EUB SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input Signal to ECM Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air ECM function Actuator Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater control Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the A/F sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine operating condition to keep the temperature of A/F sensor 1 element at the specified range. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00EUC Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F S1 HTR (B1) A/F S1 HTR (B2) CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Engine: After warming up, idle the engine 0 - 100% On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P1031 1031 (Bank 1) P1051 1051 (Bank 2) P1032 1032 (Bank 1) P1052 1052 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater control circuit low Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater control circuit high UBS00EUD DTC detecting condition The current amperage in the heated air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM through the heated air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater.) The current amperage in the heated air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM through the heated air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater.) DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is open or shorted.) ● A/F sensor 1 heater ● Harness or connectors (The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is shorted.) ● A/F sensor 1 heater UBS00EUE NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-386, "Diagnostic Procedure" SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: October 2004 EC-382 2005 Titan DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER Wiring Diagram UBS00EUF A BANK 1 EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1691E Revision: October 2004 EC-383 2005 Titan DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V [Engine is running] 2 O/B A/F sensor 1 heater (bank 1) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed PBIB1584E : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Revision: October 2004 EC-384 2005 Titan DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER BANK 2 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1692E Revision: October 2004 EC-385 2005 Titan DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V [Engine is running] 24 BR/W A/F sensor 1 heater (bank 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed PBIB1584E : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure UBS00EUG 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: October 2004 EC-386 2005 Titan DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER 2. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. A Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector. EC C D BBIA0376E 2. 3. E Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. G H PBIB1683E 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. ● Harness connectors E5, F14 ● IPDM E/R harness connector E119 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse J K >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. L 4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 2 (bank 1) or 24 (bank 2) and A/F sensor 1 terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER Refer to EC-388, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 7. Revision: October 2004 EC-387 2005 Titan M DTC P1031, P1032, P1051, P1052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace. 7. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Replace air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. CAUTION: ● Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads (using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12) and approved anti-seize lubricant. >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00EUH AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER Check resistance between terminals 3 and 4. Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3Ω at 25°C (77°F) Check continuity between terminals 3 and 1, 2, 5, 6, terminals 4 and 1, 2, 5, 6. Continuity should not exist. If NG, replace the A/F sensor 1. CAUTION: ● Discard any A/F sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new A/F sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Heated Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. PBIB1684E Removal and Installation UBS00EUI AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-19, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . Revision: October 2004 EC-388 2005 Titan DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY Component Description PFP:23710 A UBS00EUJ Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the idle air volume learning value memory, etc. EC C D PBIB1164E E On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P1065 1065 UBS00EUK Trouble diagnosis name ECM power supply circuit DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● Harness or connectors [ECM power supply (back-up) circuit is open or shorted.] ● ECM ECM back-up RAM system does not function properly. DTC Confirmation Procedure G UBS00EUL NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. F H I Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for 4 times. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-391, "Diagnostic Procedure" . J K L SEF058Y M WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: October 2004 EC-389 2005 Titan DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY Wiring Diagram UBS00EUM BBWA1693E Revision: October 2004 EC-390 2005 Titan DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 121 EC WIRE COLOR W A ITEM Power supply for ECM (Back-up) CONDITION [Ignition switch: OFF] Diagnostic Procedure DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) C UBS00EUN 1. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY D 1. 2. 3. E Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check voltage between ECM terminal 121 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. G H MBIB0026E 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. ● IPDM E/R connector E121 ● 20A fuse ● Harness for open or short between ECM and battery J K >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT L Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. M Revision: October 2004 EC-391 2005 Titan DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY 4. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “ERASE”. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure. See EC-389, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . 5. Is the 1st trip DTC P1065 displayed again? 1. 2. 3. 4. With GST Turn ignition switch ON. Select Service $04 with GST. Touch “ERASE”. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure. See EC-389, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" . 5. Is the 1st trip DTC P1065 displayed again? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 5. No >> INSPECTION END 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. REPLACE ECM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Replace ECM. Perform initialization of NVIS(NATS) system and registration of all NVIS(NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to BL-138, "ECM Re-communicating Function" . Perform EC-89, "VIN Registration" . Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: October 2004 EC-392 2005 Titan DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Component Description PFP:16119 A UBS00EUO Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. EC The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening C angle properly in response to driving condition. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00EUP D This self-diagnosis has one trip detection logic. DTC No. P1121 1121 Trouble diagnosis name Electric throttle control actuator DTC detecting condition A) Electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring malfunction. B) Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not in specified range. C) ECM detect the throttle valve is stuck open. Possible cause E ● Electric throttle control actuator F G FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Detected items H Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Malfunction A The ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm. Malfunction B ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less. Malfunction C While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls. The engine can restart in N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more. I J DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00EUQ NOTE: ● Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B first. If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C. ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. K L PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Shift selector lever to D position and wait at least 3 seconds. Shift selector lever to P position. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Shift selector lever to D position and wait at least 3 seconds. Shift selector lever to P position. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. 10. If DTC is detected, go to EC-394, "Diagnostic Procedure" . M 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. SEF058Y With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. Revision: October 2004 EC-393 2005 Titan DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Shift selector lever to D position and wait at least 3 seconds. Shift selector lever to N, P position. Start engine and let it idle for 3 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-394, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. Diagnostic Procedure UBS00EUR 1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY 1. 2. Remove the intake air duct. Check if a foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and the housing. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle control actuator inside. BBIA0364E 2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: October 2004 EC-394 2005 Titan DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION Description PFP:16119 A UBS00EUS NOTE: If DTC P1122 is displayed with DTC P1121 or 1126, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1121 or EC P1126. Refer to EC-393, "DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR" or EC-401, "DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY" . Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. C The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feedback to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. D On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00EUT This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name E DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● P1122 1122 Electric throttle control performance problem Electric throttle control function does not operate properly. ● Harness or connectors (Throttle control motor circuit is open or shorted) F Electric throttle control actuator G FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. H Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. I DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00EUU NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V when engine is running. J K WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-397, "Diagnostic Procedure" . L M SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: October 2004 EC-395 2005 Titan DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION Wiring Diagram UBS00EUV BBWA1694E Revision: October 2004 EC-396 2005 Titan DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. A CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. EC TERMINAL NO. 3 WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) C L Throttle control motor relay power supply [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 0 - 14V D [Ignition switch: ON] 4 L/W Throttle control motor (Close) ● Engine: Stopped ● Selector lever: D ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released E PBIB1104E F 0 - 14V [Ignition switch: ON] 5 L/B Throttle control motor (Open) ● Engine: Stopped ● Selector lever: D ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed G H PBIB1105E 104 O [Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V Throttle control motor relay I : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure J UBS00EUW 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. K Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . L M BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: October 2004 EC-397 2005 Titan DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION 2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I 1. Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester. Ignition switch Voltage OFF Approximately 0V ON Battery voltage (11 - 14V) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 3. MBIB0028E 3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check voltage between ECM terminal 104 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB1171E 4. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E122. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 104 and IPDM E/R terminal 47. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK FUSE 1. Disconnect 20A fuse. 2. Check 20A fuse for blown. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace 20A fuse. Revision: October 2004 EC-398 2005 Titan DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION 6. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. A Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E119. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 6. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. C 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. D 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART E Check the following. ● Harness connectors E2, F32 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R F >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-16, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)" . NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 9. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. 5 6 ECM terminal K L Continuity 5 Should not exist 4 Should exist 5 Should exist 4 Should not exist M PBIB1480E 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair or replace. Revision: October 2004 I J Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Electric throttle control actuator terminal H EC-399 2005 Titan DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION 10. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY 1. 2. Remove the intake air duct. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and the housing. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle control actuator inside. BBIA0364E 11. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR Refer to EC-400, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 13. 12. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. 13. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00EUX THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR 1. 2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Check resistance between terminals 5 and 6. Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)] 3. 4. 5. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next step. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . PBIB2066E Removal and Installation UBS00EUY ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EM-15, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . Revision: October 2004 EC-400 2005 Titan DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY Component Description PFP:16119 A UBS00EUZ Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends EC an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not provided to the ECM. C CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00EV0 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM THRTL RELAY CONDITION ● D SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON ON On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00EV1 E These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P1124 1124 P1126 1126 Trouble diagnosis name Throttle control motor relay circuit short Throttle control motor relay circuit open DTC detecting condition ECM detect the throttle control motor relay is stuck ON. ECM detects a voltage of power source for throttle control motor is excessively low. F Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (Throttle control motor relay circuit is shorted) ● Throttle control motor relay ● Harness or connectors (Throttle control motor relay circuit is open) ● Throttle control motor relay G H FAIL-SAFE MODE I When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MlL lights up. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00EV2 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V. M With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. If DTC is detected, go to EC-404, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. Revision: October 2004 K L PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1124 1. 2. 3. J EC-401 2005 Titan DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY PROCEDURE FOR DTC P1126 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. Select “DATA MONITOR””mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-404, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y With GST Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. Revision: October 2004 EC-402 2005 Titan DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY Wiring Diagram UBS00EV3 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1695E Revision: October 2004 EC-403 2005 Titan DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 3 104 WIRE COLOR L O ITEM Throttle control motor relay power supply CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0V Throttle control motor relay Diagnostic Procedure UBS00EV4 1. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check voltage between ECM terminal 104 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. PBIB1171E 2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E122. Check continuity between ECM terminal 104 and IPDM E/R terminal 47. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 3. CHECK FUSE 1. Disconnect 20A fuse. 2. Check 20A fuse for blown. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace 20A fuse. Revision: October 2004 EC-404 2005 Titan DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY 4. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I 1. A Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester. Ignition switch Voltage OFF Approximately 0V ON Battery voltage (11 - 14V) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 5. EC C D MBIB0028E 5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II E 1. 2. 3. 4. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E119. Check continuity between ECM terminal 3 and IPDM E/R terminal 6. Refer to Wiring Diagram. G Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. H I 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E2, F32 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R J K >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT L Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-16, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)" . NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. Revision: October 2004 EC-405 2005 Titan M DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR Component Description PFP:16119 UBS00EV5 The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feedback to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00EV6 This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P1128 1128 Trouble diagnosis name Throttle control motor circuit short DTC detecting condition ECM detects short in both circuits between ECM and throttle control motor. Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (Throttle control motor circuit is shorted.) ● Electric throttle control actuator (Throttle control motor) FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00EV7 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-408, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: October 2004 EC-406 2005 Titan DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR Wiring Diagram UBS00EV8 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1696E Revision: October 2004 EC-407 2005 Titan DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 0 - 14V [Ignition switch: ON] 4 L/W Throttle control motor (Close) ● Engine: Stopped ● Selector lever: D ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released PBIB1104E 0 - 14V [Ignition switch: ON] 5 L/B Throttle control motor (Open) ● Engine: Stopped ● Selector lever: D ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed PBIB1105E : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure UBS00EV9 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: October 2004 EC-408 2005 Titan DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR 2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT 1. 2. 3. A Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Electric throttle control actuator terminal ECM terminal 5 6 EC C Continuity 5 Should not exist 4 Should exist 5 Should exist 4 Should not exist D BBIA0371E E 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace. F 3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR G Refer to EC-409, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5. H 4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT I Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. J 5. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR K 1. 2. 3. L Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . M >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00EVA THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR 1. 2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Check resistance between terminals 5 and 6. Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)] 3. 4. 5. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next step. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . PBIB2066E Revision: October 2004 EC-409 2005 Titan DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR Removal and Installation UBS00EVB ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR Refer to EM-15, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . Revision: October 2004 EC-410 2005 Titan DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 Component Description PFP:226A0 A UBS00EVC The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. EC C D SEF327R E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00EVD Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 (B2) HO2S2 MNTR (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B2) CONDITION ● Warm-up condition ● After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. F SPECIFICATION Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly. 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 1.0V G LEAN ←→ RICH On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00EVE The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the minimum voltage of sensor is sufficiently low during the various driving condition such as fuel-cut. H I J K PBIB2376E L DTC No. P1146 1146 (Bank 1) P1166 1166 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Heated oxygen sensor 2 minimum voltage monitoring Revision: October 2004 DTC detecting condition The minimum voltage from the sensor is not reached to the specified voltage. EC-411 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● Fuel pressure ● Fuel injector 2005 Titan M DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00EVF NOTE: If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II TESTING CONDITION: For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F). 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 5. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F). SEF174Y If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F). 7. Open engine hood. 8. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1146” or “HO2S2 (B2) P1166” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 9. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-II. PBIB2372E NOTE: It will take at most 10 minutes until “COMPLETED” is displayed. 10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-417, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following. a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle). b. Return to step 1. Overall Function Check UBS00EVG Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 55 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 74 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and ground. Revision: October 2004 EC-412 2005 Titan DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 6. 7. 8. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position. The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this procedure. If NG, go to EC-417, "Diagnostic Procedure" . A EC C PBIB2054E D E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-413 2005 Titan DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 Wiring Diagram UBS00EVH BANK 1 BBWA1678E Revision: October 2004 EC-414 2005 Titan DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 55 R Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met – C 0 - Approximately 1.0V B/W Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor 2) D After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load E [Engine is running] 78 A ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-415 2005 Titan DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 BANK 2 BBWA1679E Revision: October 2004 EC-416 2005 Titan DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 74 L Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met – C 0 - Approximately 1.0V D After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load E [Engine is running] 78 B/W Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V F UBS00EVI 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. A G Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . H I J K BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. L M Revision: October 2004 EC-417 2005 Titan DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. 4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? 1. 2. SEF968Y Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected? BBIA0368E Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-242, "DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" . No >> GO TO 3. 1. 2. 3. Revision: October 2004 EC-418 2005 Titan DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. EC C D BBIA0435E 3. 4. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2 terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. E F Continuity should exist. G 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. H 4. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. I Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. J Terminals DTC Bank ECM Sensor P1146 55 1 1 P1166 74 1 2 K Continuity should exist. 2. L Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Terminals DTC M Bank ECM Sensor P1146 55 1 1 P1166 74 1 2 Continuity should not exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: October 2004 EC-419 2005 Titan DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EC-420, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2. 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00EVJ HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. SEF174Y 6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. PBIB1672E 7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%. PBIB2636E “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.58V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. Revision: October 2004 EC-420 2005 Titan DTC P1146, P1166 HO2S2 ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. A Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. EC Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. C Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 55 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 74 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and ground. 6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load D at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.58V at least once during this E procedure. If the voltage is above 0.58V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary. 7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or F check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position. The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this PBIB2054E G procedure. 8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: H ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread I Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Removal and Installation UBS00EVK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 J Refer to EM-19, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-421 2005 Titan DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 Component Description PFP:226A0 UBS00EVL The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank. Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation. SEF327R CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00EVM Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM HO2S2 (B1) HO2S2 (B2) HO2S2 MNTR (B1) HO2S2 MNTR (B2) CONDITION ● Warm-up condition ● After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load. SPECIFICATION Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly. 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 1.0V LEAN ←→ RICH On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00EVN The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of the sensor is sufficiently high during the various driving condition such as fuelcut. PBIB1154E DTC No. P1147 1147 (Bank 1) P1167 1167 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Heated oxygen sensor 2 maximum voltage monitoring Revision: October 2004 DTC detecting condition The maximum voltage from the sensor is not reached to the specified voltage. EC-422 Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) ● Heated oxygen sensor 2 ● Fuel pressure ● Fuel injector ● Intake air leaks 2005 Titan DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00EVO NOTE: If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. A EC WITH CONSULT-II TESTING CONDITION: For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F). 1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. 5. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F). SEF174Y If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F). 7. Open engine hood. 8. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1147” or “HO2S2 (B2) P1167” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 9. Start engine and following the instruction of CONSULT-II. C D E F G H I J K PBIB2373E NOTE: It will take at most 10 minutes until “COMPLETED” is displayed. 10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC-428, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If “CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED” is displayed, perform the following. a. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle). b. Return to step 1. Overall Function Check L M UBS00EVP Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 55 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 74 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and ground. Revision: October 2004 EC-423 2005 Titan DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 6. 7. 8. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.58V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage can be confirmed in step 6, step 7 is not necessary. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position. The voltage should be above 0.58V at least once during this procedure. If NG, go to EC-428, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: October 2004 EC-424 PBIB2054E 2005 Titan DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 Wiring Diagram UBS00EVQ A BANK 1 EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1678E Revision: October 2004 EC-425 2005 Titan DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 55 R Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met – 0 - Approximately 1.0V After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load [Engine is running] 78 B/W Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor 2) Revision: October 2004 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed EC-426 Approximately 0V 2005 Titan DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 BANK 2 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1679E Revision: October 2004 EC-427 2005 Titan DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 74 L Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions are met – 0 - Approximately 1.0V After keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load [Engine is running] 78 B/W Sensor ground (Heated oxygen sensor 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V UBS00EVR 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: October 2004 EC-428 2005 Titan DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 2. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA A With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. 4. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? 1. 2. EC C D E SEF968Y Without CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector, and restart and run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. 4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 5. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 6. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 7. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 8. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected? BBIA0368E Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171or P0174. Refer to EC-233, "DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" . No >> GO TO 3. 1. 2. 3. F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-429 2005 Titan DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 3. CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. BBIA0435E 3. 4. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 78 and HO2S2 terminal 4. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. 1. CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT Check harness continuity between ECM terminal and HO2S2 terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Terminals DTC Bank ECM Sensor P1147 55 1 1 P1167 74 1 2 Continuity should exist. 2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Terminals DTC Bank ECM Sensor P1147 55 1 1 P1167 74 1 2 Continuity should not exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: October 2004 EC-430 2005 Titan DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 A Refer to EC-431, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2. EC 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT C Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . D >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00EVS HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. E Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. F G H SEF174Y I 6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item with CONSULT-II. J K L PBIB1672E 7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%. M PBIB2636E “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.58V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%. “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.18V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. Revision: October 2004 EC-431 2005 Titan DTC P1147, P1167 HO2S2 ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 55 [HO2S2 (B1) signal] or 74 [HO2S2 (B2) signal] and ground. 6. Check the voltage when revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times. (Depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as possible.) The voltage should be above 0.58V at least once during this procedure. If the voltage is above 0.58V at step 6, step 7 is not necessary. 7. Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position. The voltage should be below 0.18V at least once during this PBIB2054E procedure. 8. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 2. CAUTION: ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant. Removal and Installation UBS00EVT HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 Refer to EM-19, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . Revision: October 2004 EC-432 2005 Titan DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:22690 A UBS00EVU These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P1148 1148 (Bank 1) P1168 1168 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Closed loop control function DTC detecting condition The closed loop control function for bank 1 does not operate even when vehicle is driving in the specified condition. The closed loop control function for bank 2 does not operate even when vehicle is driving in the specified condition. EC Possible cause ● Harness or connectors [The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.] ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater DTC P1148 or P1168 is displayed with another DTC for air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. Perform the trouble diagnosis for the corresponding DTC. C D E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-433 2005 Titan DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT Description PFP:47850 UBS00EVV The malfunction information related to TCS is transferred through the CAN communication line from “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)” to ECM. Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)” but also for ECM after TCS related repair. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00EVW Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis. The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis. DTC No. P1211 1211 Trouble diagnosis name TCS control unit DTC detecting condition ECM receives a malfunction information from “ABS actuator electric unit (control unit)” DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) ● TCS related parts UBS00EVX TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for at least 60 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-434, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Diagnostic Procedure UBS00EVY Go to BRC-98, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" . Revision: October 2004 EC-434 2005 Titan DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE Description PFP:47850 A UBS00EVZ NOTE: If DTC P1212 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, EC U1001. Refer to EC-160, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . This CAN communication line is used to control the smooth engine operation during the TCS operation. Pulse signals are exchanged between ECM and “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)”. Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for “ABS actuator and electric unit C (control unit)” but also for ECM after TCS related repair. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00EW0 D Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis. The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition ● P1212 1212 TCS communication line ECM can not receive the information from “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)” continuously. E Possible cause Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted.) ● ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) ● Dead (Weak) battery F G DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00EW1 TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle. H WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-435, "Diagnostic Procedure" . I J K L SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. M Diagnostic Procedure UBS00EW2 Go to BRC-98, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" . Revision: October 2004 EC-435 2005 Titan DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE Description PFP:00000 UBS00EW3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION NOTE: If DTC P1217 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-160, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . Cooling Fan Control Sensor Input signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*1 Battery Battery voltage*1 Wheel sensor*2 Vehicle speed Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Air conditioner switch Air conditioner ON signal*2 Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure ECM function Cooling fan control Actuator IPDM E/R (Cooling fan relay) *1: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. *2: This signal is sent to ECM through CAN communication line. The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 2-step control [HI/OFF]. Cooling Fan Operation PBIB2060E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00EW4 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM COOLING FAN CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine Revision: October 2004 SPECIFICATION Engine coolant temperature: 99°C (210°F) or less OFF Engine coolant temperature: 100°C (212°F) or more HI EC-436 2005 Titan DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00EW5 A If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will rise. When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is EC indicated. This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition ● ● P1217 1217 Engine over temperature (Overheat) Cooling fan does not operate properly (Overheat). Cooling fan system does not operate properly (Overheat). Possible cause C ● Harness or connectors (The cooling fan circuit is open or shorted.) ● Cooling fan ● IPDM E/R (Cooling fan relay) ● Radiator hose Radiator ● Engine coolant was not added to the system using the proper filling method. ● ● Radiator cap ● Engine coolant is not within the specified range. ● Water pump ● Thermostat D E F For more information, refer to EC-444, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating" . CAUTION: When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to CO-10, "Changing Engine Coolant" . Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to LU-8, "Changing Engine Oil" . 1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-12, "ANTI-FREEZE COOLANT MIXTURE RATIO" . 2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted. Overall Function Check G H I UBS00EW6 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed. WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off. J K L WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator. Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level. If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-441, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-441, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Turn ignition switch ON. M SEF621W Revision: October 2004 EC-437 2005 Titan DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE 4. 5. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. If the results are NG, go to EC-441, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF646X WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator. Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level. If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-441, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-441, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. SEF621W Start engine and make sure that cooling fan operates. CAUTION: Be careful not to overheat engine. If NG, go to EC-441, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF882V Revision: October 2004 EC-438 2005 Titan DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE Wiring Diagram UBS00EW7 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1697E Revision: October 2004 EC-439 2005 Titan DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE BBWA1698E Revision: October 2004 EC-440 2005 Titan DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE Diagnostic Procedure UBS00EW8 1. INSPECTION START A Do you have CONSULT-II? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 3. EC C 2. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR OPERATION With CONSULT-II Start engine and let it idle. Select “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Make sure that cooling fan operates. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check cooling fan control circuit. (Go to EC-443, "PROCEDURE A" .) D 1. 2. E F G SEF646X 3. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR OPERATION H Without CONSULT-II 1. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. 2. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. 3. Start engine and let it idle. 4. Make sure that cooling fan operates. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check cooling fan control circuit. (Go to EC-443, "PROCEDURE A" .) I J K L M SEF882V Revision: October 2004 EC-441 2005 Titan DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE 4. CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the pressure drops. Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2 , 23 psi) CAUTION: Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage. Pressure should not drop. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Check the following for leak. Refer to CO-10, "CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS" . ● Hose ● Radiator ● Water pump 5. PBIC1528E CHECK RADIATOR CAP Apply pressure to cap with a tester. Radiator cap relief pressure: 59 - 98 kPa (0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2 , 9 - 14 psi) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace radiator cap. SLC755A 6. CHECK THERMOSTAT 1. 2. Check valve seating condition at normal room temperatures. It should seat tightly. Check valve opening temperature and valve lift. Valve opening temperature: Valve lift: 82°C (180°F) [standard] More than 10.0 mm/95°C (0.394 in/203°F) 3. Check if valve is closed at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening temperature. For details, refer to CO-19, "THERMOSTAT AND WATER PIPING" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace thermostat SLC343 7. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Refer to EC-196, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. Revision: October 2004 EC-442 2005 Titan DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE 8. CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES A If the cause cannot be isolated, go to EC-444, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating" . EC >> INSPECTION END PROCEDURE A 1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT C 1. 2. 3. D Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E120. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 22 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. F G PBIB2067E 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART H Check the following. ● 40A fusible link ● Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and battery I >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. J 3. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT 1. 2. K Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector. Check harness continuity between cooling fan motor terminal 1 and IPDM E/R terminal 24, cooling fan motor terminal 2 and body ground. Refer to wiring diagram. L Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. M BBIA0363E 4. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR Refer to EC-445, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace cooling fan motor. Revision: October 2004 EC-443 2005 Titan DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-16, "IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)" . NG >> Repair or replace harness connectors. Main 12 Causes of Overheating Engine Step OFF 1 Inspection item ● Blocked radiator ● Blocked condenser ● Blocked radiator grille ● Blocked bumper 2 ● 3 4 UBS00EW9 Equipment Standard Reference page ● Visual No blocking Coolant mixture ● Coolant tester 50 - 50% coolant mixture MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" ● Coolant level ● Visual Coolant up to MAX level in reservoir tank and radiator filler neck CO-10, "Changing Engine Coolant" ● Radiator cap ● Pressure tester 59 - 98 kPa CO-10, "CHECKING RESERVOIR CAP" (0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2 , 9 - 14 psi) (Limit) — ON*2 5 ● Coolant leaks ● Visual No leaks CO-10, "CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS" ON*2 6 ● Thermostat ● Touch the upper and lower radiator hoses Both hoses should be hot CO-19, "THERMOSTAT AND WATER PIPING" ON*1 7 ● Cooling fan ● CONSULT-II Operating See trouble diagnosis for DTC P1217 (EC-436, "DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE" ). OFF 8 ● Combustion gas leak ● Color checker chemical tester 4 Gas analyzer Negative — ON*3 9 ● Coolant temperature gauge ● Visual Gauge less than 3/4 when driving — ● Coolant overflow to reservoir tank ● Visual No overflow during driving and idling CO-10, "Changing Engine Coolant" OFF*4 10 ● Coolant return from reservoir tank to radiator ● Visual Should be initial level in reservoir tank CO-10, "Changing Engine Coolant" OFF 11 ● Cylinder head ● Straight gauge feeler gauge 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maximum distortion (warping) EM-66, "Inspection After Disassembly" 12 ● Cylinder block and pistons ● Visual No scuffing on cylinder walls or piston EM-92, "Inspection After Disassembly" *1: Turn the ignition switch ON. *2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes. *3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes. *4: After 60 minutes of cool down time. For more information, refer to CO-6, "OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS" . Revision: October 2004 EC-444 2005 Titan DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE Component Inspection UBS00EWA A COOLING FAN MOTOR 1. 2. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and check operation. Cooling fan motor should operate. If NG, replace cooling fan motor. EC C D SEF888V E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-445 2005 Titan DTC P1225 TP SENSOR DTC P1225 TP SENSOR Component Description PFP:16119 UBS00EWB Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. PBIB0145E On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00EWC The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. DTC No. P1225 1225 Trouble diagnosis name Closed throttle position learning performance problem DTC detecting condition Closed throttle position learning value is excessively low. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1 and 2) UBS00EWD NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-447, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: October 2004 EC-446 2005 Titan DTC P1225 TP SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure UBS00EWE 1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY A 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove the intake air duct. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and the housing. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle control actuator inside. EC C D E BBIA0364E 2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR F 1. 2. 3. G Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . H >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation UBS00EWF ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR I Refer to EM-15, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-447 2005 Titan DTC P1226 TP SENSOR DTC P1226 TP SENSOR Component Description PFP:16119 UBS00EWG Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. PBIB0145E On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00EWH The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. DTC No. P1226 1226 Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Closed throttle position learning performance problem Closed throttle position learning is not performed successfully, repeatedly. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1 and 2) UBS00EWI NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for 32 times. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-449, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: October 2004 EC-448 2005 Titan DTC P1226 TP SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure UBS00EWJ 1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY A 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove the intake air duct. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and the housing. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle control actuator inside. EC C D E BBIA0364E 2. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR F 1. 2. 3. G Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . H >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation UBS00EWK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR I Refer to EM-15, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-449 2005 Titan DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY On Board Diagnosis Logic PFP:16119 UBS00EWL This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. P1229 1229 Trouble diagnosis name Sensor power supply circuit short DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (APP sensor 1 circuit is shorted.) (PSP sensor circuit is shorted.) (Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is shorted.) (EVAP control system pressure sensor circuit is shorted.) ● Accelerator pedal position sensor ● Power steering pressure sensor ● Refrigerant pressure sensor ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ECM detects a voltage of power source for sensor is excessively low or high. FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00EWM NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-452, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: October 2004 EC-450 2005 Titan DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY Wiring Diagram UBS00EWN A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1699E Revision: October 2004 EC-451 2005 Titan DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) 48 SB Sensor power supply (EVAP control system pressure sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 49 R/Y Sensor power supply (Refrigerant pressure sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 68 W/L Sensor power supply (Power steering pressure sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 90 L Sensor power supply (APP sensor 1) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00EWO 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: October 2004 EC-452 2005 Titan DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY 2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0361E 3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 7 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E Voltage: Approximately 5V F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 3. G PBIB2070E H 3. CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS I Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram 48 EVAP control system pressure sensor terminal 3 EC-333 49 Refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 EC-621 68 Power steering pressure sensor terminal 1 EC-375 90 APP sensor terminal 7 EC-451 J K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L 4. CHECK COMPONENTS M Check the following. ● EVAP control system pressure sensor (Refer to EC-336, "Component Inspection" .) ● Power steering pressure sensor (Refer to EC-378, "Component Inspection" .) ● Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to MTC-79, "COMPONENT INSPECTION" .) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace malfunctioning components. 5. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEEDAL POSITION SENSOR Refer to EC-595, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. Revision: October 2004 EC-453 2005 Titan DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY 6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. Replace accelerator pedal position assembly. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: October 2004 EC-454 2005 Titan DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1 DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description PFP:22693 A UBS00EWP The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. EC C D SEF579Z E An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). F G H SEF580Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00EWQ I Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) A/F SEN1 (B2) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm J Fluctuates around 1.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00EWR K To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is not inordinately low. DTC No. P1271 1271 (Bank 1) P1281 1281 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit no activity detected ● L Possible Cause The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 0V. ● Harness or connectors (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00EWS NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Revision: October 2004 EC-455 2005 Titan M DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1 3. 4. 5. 6. Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” indication. If the indication is constantly approx. 0V, go to EC-460, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the indication is not constantly approx. 0V, go to next step. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then restart engine. Drive and accelerate vehicle to more than 40 km/h (25 MPH) within 20 seconds after restarting engine. Maintain the following conditions for about 20 consecutive seconds. SEF581Z ENG SPEED 1,000 - 3,200 rpm VHCL SPEED SE More than 40 km/h (25 MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 1.5 - 9.0 msec Gear position Suitable position NOTE: Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. ● If this procedure is not completed within 1 minute after restarting engine at step 4, return to step 4. If 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-460, "Diagnostic Procedure" . ● 7. WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: October 2004 EC-456 2005 Titan DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1 Wiring Diagram UBS00EWT A BANK 1 EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1700E Revision: October 2004 EC-457 2005 Titan DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 16 35 WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION Approximately 3.1V BR/R [Engine is running] BR/G 56 LG/B 75 P/B DATA (DC Voltage) A/F sensor 1 (bank 1) Revision: October 2004 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 2.6V Approximately 2.3V Approximately 2.3V EC-458 2005 Titan DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1 BANK 2 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1701E Revision: October 2004 EC-459 2005 Titan DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 57 58 WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION Approximately 2.6V L/P [Engine is running] GR/G 76 G/L 77 BR/B DATA (DC Voltage) A/F sensor 1 (bank 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 2.3V Approximately 3.1V Approximately 2.3V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00EWU 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: October 2004 EC-460 2005 Titan DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1 2. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. A Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. EC C D BBIA0376E 2. 3. E Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. G H PBIB1683E 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. ● Harness connectors E5, F14 ● IPDM E/R harness connector E119 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse J K >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. L M Revision: October 2004 EC-461 2005 Titan DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1 4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between A/F sensor 1 terminal and ECM terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 2 75 5 35 6 56 1 76 2 77 5 57 6 58 Bank1 Bank 2 Continuity should exist. 4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Bank 1 Bank 2 A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 1 76 2 75 2 77 5 35 5 57 6 56 6 58 Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace. 6. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Replace air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. CAUTION: ● Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads (using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12) and approved anti-seize lubricant. >> INSPECTION END Revision: October 2004 EC-462 2005 Titan DTC P1271, P1281 A/F SENSOR 1 Removal and Installation UBS00EWV A AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-19, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . EC C D E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-463 2005 Titan DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1 DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description PFP:22693 UBS00EWW The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. SEF579Z An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). SEF580Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00EWX Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) A/F SEN1 (B2) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 1.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00EWY To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is not inordinately high. DTC No. P1272 1272 (Bank 1) P1282 1282 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit no activity detected DTC detecting condition ● Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.) ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 5V. DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00EWZ NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Revision: October 2004 EC-464 2005 Titan DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1 3. 4. 5. 6. Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” indication. If the indication is constantly approx. 5V, go to EC-469, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the indication is not constantly approx. 5V, go to next step. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then restart engine. Drive and accelerate vehicle to more than 40 km/h (25 MPH) within 20 seconds after restarting engine. Maintain the following conditions for about 20 consecutive seconds. A EC C SEF581Z D ENG SPEED 1,000 - 3,200 rpm VHCL SPEED SE More than 40 km/h (25 MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 1.5 - 9.0 msec Gear position Suitable position E NOTE: Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising. ● If this procedure is not completed within 1 minute after restarting engine at step 4, return to step 4. If 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-469, "Diagnostic Procedure" . ● 7. F G WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-465 2005 Titan DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1 Wiring Diagram UBS00EX0 BANK 1 BBWA1700E Revision: October 2004 EC-466 2005 Titan DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 16 35 EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] BR/G LG/B 75 P/B DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 3.1V BR/R 56 A A/F sensor 1 (bank 1) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed C Approximately 2.6V Approximately 2.3V D Approximately 2.3V E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-467 2005 Titan DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1 BANK 2 BBWA1701E Revision: October 2004 EC-468 2005 Titan DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 57 58 EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] GR/G G/L 77 BR/B DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 2.6V L/P 76 A A/F sensor 1 (bank 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed C Approximately 2.3V Approximately 3.1V D Approximately 2.3V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00EX1 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS E 1. 2. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . G H I BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-469 2005 Titan DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1 2. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. BBIA0376E Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB1683E 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors E5, F14 ● IPDM E/R harness connector E119 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse ● >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. Revision: October 2004 EC-470 2005 Titan DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1 4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between A/F sensor 1 terminal and ECM terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 2 75 5 35 6 56 1 76 2 77 5 57 6 58 Bank1 Bank 2 EC C D E F Continuity should exist. 4. G Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Bank 1 Bank 2 H A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 1 76 2 75 2 77 5 35 5 57 6 56 6 58 I J Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K L 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT M Perform EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace. 6. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Replace air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. CAUTION: ● Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads (using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12) and approved anti-seize lubricant. >> INSPECTION END Revision: October 2004 EC-471 2005 Titan DTC P1272, P1282 A/F SENSOR 1 Removal and Installation UBS00EX2 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-19, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . Revision: October 2004 EC-472 2005 Titan DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1 DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description PFP:22693 A UBS00EX3 The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. EC C D SEF579Z E An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). F G H SEF580Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00EX4 I Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) A/F SEN1 (B2) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION J Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 1.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00EX5 K To judge the malfunction, the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is monitored not to be shifted to LEAN side or RICH side. DTC No. P1273 1273 (Bank 1) P1283 1283 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 lean shift monitoring DTC detecting condition ● The output voltage computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is shifted to the lean side for a specified period. DTC Confirmation Procedure L Possible Cause ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater ● Fuel pressure ● Fuel injector ● Intake air leaks UBS00EX6 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Revision: October 2004 EC-473 2005 Titan M DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Clear the self-learning coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 minutes. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-478, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF968Y WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 6. Select Service $03 with GST and make sure that DTC P0102 is detected. 7. Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102. 8. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load. 9. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 10. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 minutes. 11. Select Service $07 with GST. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-478, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: October 2004 EC-474 BBIA0368E 2005 Titan DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1 Wiring Diagram UBS00EX7 A BANK 1 EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1700E Revision: October 2004 EC-475 2005 Titan DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 16 35 WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION Approximately 3.1V BR/R [Engine is running] BR/G 56 LG/B 75 P/B DATA (DC Voltage) A/F sensor 1 (bank 1) Revision: October 2004 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 2.6V Approximately 2.3V Approximately 2.3V EC-476 2005 Titan DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1 BANK 2 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1701E Revision: October 2004 EC-477 2005 Titan DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 57 58 WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION Approximately 2.6V L/P [Engine is running] GR/G 76 G/L 77 BR/B DATA (DC Voltage) A/F sensor 1 (bank 2) ● ● Warm-up condition Idle speed Approximately 2.3V Approximately 3.1V Approximately 2.3V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00EX8 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 2. RETIGHTEN A/F SENSOR 1 Loosen and retighten the A/F sensor 1. BBIA0375E Tightening torque: 50 N-m (5.1 kg-m, 37 ft-lb) >> GO TO 3. Revision: October 2004 EC-478 2005 Titan DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1 3. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA 1. 2. 3. 4. A With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? EC C D E SEF968Y F Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. 5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 9. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. BBIA0368E Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171 or P0174. Refer to EC-233, "DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" . No >> GO TO 4. G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-479 2005 Titan DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1 4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. BBIA0376E 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. PBIB1683E 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E5, F14 ● IPDM E/R harness connector E119 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. Revision: October 2004 EC-480 2005 Titan DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1 6. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between A/F sensor 1 terminal and ECM terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 2 75 5 35 6 56 1 76 2 77 5 57 6 58 Bank1 Bank 2 EC C D E F Continuity should exist. 4. G Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Bank 1 Bank 2 H A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 1 76 2 75 2 77 5 35 5 57 6 56 6 58 I J Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K L 7. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER M Refer to EC-388, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 9. 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace. Revision: October 2004 EC-481 2005 Titan DTC P1273, P1283 A/F SENSOR 1 9. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Replace air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. CAUTION: ● Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads (using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12) and approved anti-seize lubricant. >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation UBS00EX9 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-19, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . Revision: October 2004 EC-482 2005 Titan DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1 DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description PFP:22693 A UBS00EXA The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. EC C D SEF579Z E An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). F G H SEF580Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00EXB I Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) A/F SEN1 (B2) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm J Fluctuates around 1.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00EXC K To judge the malfunction, the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is monitored not to be shifted to LEAN side or RICH side. DTC No. P1274 1274 (Bank 1) P1284 1244 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 rich shift monitoring DTC detecting condition ● The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is shifted to the rich side for a specified period. DTC Confirmation Procedure L Possible Cause ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater ● Fuel pressure ● Fuel injector UBS00EXD NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Revision: October 2004 EC-483 2005 Titan M DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Clear the self-learning coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 minutes. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-488, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF968Y WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 6. Select Service $03 with GST and make sure that DTC P0102 is detected. 7. Select Service $04 with GST and erase the DTC P0102. 8. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load. 9. Let engine idle for 1 minute. 10. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 minutes. 11. Select Service $07 with GST. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-488, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: October 2004 EC-484 PBIB1077E 2005 Titan DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1 Wiring Diagram UBS00EXE A BANK 1 EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1700E Revision: October 2004 EC-485 2005 Titan DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 16 35 WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION Approximately 3.1V BR/R [Engine is running] BR/G 56 LG/B 75 P/B DATA (DC Voltage) A/F sensor 1 (bank 1) Revision: October 2004 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 2.6V Approximately 2.3V Approximately 2.3V EC-486 2005 Titan DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1 BANK 2 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1701E Revision: October 2004 EC-487 2005 Titan DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 57 58 WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION Approximately 2.6V L/P [Engine is running] GR/G 76 G/L 77 BR/B DATA (DC Voltage) A/F sensor 1 (bank 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 2.3V Approximately 3.1V Approximately 2.3V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00EXF 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. 2. RETIGHTEN A/F SENSOR 1 Loosen and retighten the A/F sensor 1. BBIA0375E Tightening torque: 50 N-m (5.1 kg-m, 37 ft-lb) >> GO TO 3. Revision: October 2004 EC-488 2005 Titan DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1 3. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA. 1. 2. 3. 4. A With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? EC C D E SEF968Y F Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. 5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 9. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. BBIA0368E Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172 or P0175. Refer to EC-242, "DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" . No >> GO TO 4. G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-489 2005 Titan DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1 4. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. BBIA0376E 3. Check harness connector for water. Water should not exit. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace harness connector. 5. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. PBIB1683E 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E5, F14 ● IPDM E/R harness connector E119 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. Revision: October 2004 EC-490 2005 Titan DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1 7. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between A/F sensor 1 terminal and ECM terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 2 75 5 35 6 56 1 76 2 77 5 57 6 58 Bank1 Bank 2 EC C D E F Continuity should exist. 4. G Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Bank 1 Bank 2 H A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 1 76 2 75 2 77 5 35 5 57 6 56 6 58 I J Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K L 8. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER M Refer to EC-388, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 10. 9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair or replace. Revision: October 2004 EC-491 2005 Titan DTC P1274, P1284 A/F SENSOR 1 10. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Replace air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. CAUTION: ● Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads (using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12) and approved anti-seize lubricant. >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation UBS00EXG AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-19, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . Revision: October 2004 EC-492 2005 Titan DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1 DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description PFP:22693 A UBS00EXH The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. EC C D SEF579Z E An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). F G H SEF580Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00EXI I Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) A/F SEN1 (B2) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm J Fluctuates around 1.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00EXJ K To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal fluctuates according to fuel feedback control. DTC No. P1276 1276 (Bank 1) P1286 1286 (Bank 2) Trouble diagnosis name Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit high voltage DTC detecting condition ● The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 1.5V. L Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.) ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00EXK CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” indication. Revision: October 2004 EC-493 2005 Titan M DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1 4. 5. 6. If the indication is constantly approx. 1.5V and does not fluctuates, go to EC-499, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If the indication fluctuates around 1.5V, go to next step. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276” or “A/F SEN1 (B2) P1286” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. ENG SPEED 850 - 3,200 rpm Vehicle speed More than 64 km/h (40 MPH) B/FUEL SCHDL 1.0 - 8.0 msec Selector lever D position If “TESTING” is not displayed after 20 seconds, retry from step 2. SEF576Z 7. Release accelerator pedal fully. NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. SEF577Z 8. 9. Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, retry from step 6. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULT”. If “NG” is displayed, go to EC-499, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF578Z Overall Function Check UBS00EXL Use this procedure to check the overall function of the A/F sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in the suitable gear position. Set 5th position, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). NOTE: Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal. Repeat steps 2 to 3 for five times. Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF. Wait at least 10 seconds and restart engine. Repeat steps 2 to 3 for five times. Revision: October 2004 EC-494 2005 Titan DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1 8. 9. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle. Make sure that no DTC is displayed. If the DTC is displayed, go to EC-499, "Diagnostic Procedure" . A EC C D E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-495 2005 Titan DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1 Wiring Diagram UBS00EXM BANK 1 BBWA1700E Revision: October 2004 EC-496 2005 Titan DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 16 35 EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] BR/G LG/B 75 P/B DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 3.1V BR/R 56 A A/F sensor 1 (bank 1) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed C Approximately 2.6V Approximately 2.3V D Approximately 2.3V E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-497 2005 Titan DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1 BANK 2 BBWA1701E Revision: October 2004 EC-498 2005 Titan DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 57 58 EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] GR/G G/L 77 BR/B DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 2.6V L/P 76 A A/F sensor 1 (bank 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed C Approximately 2.3V Approximately 3.1V D Approximately 2.3V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00EXN 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS E 1. 2. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . G H I BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-499 2005 Titan DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1 2. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. BBIA0376E Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB1683E 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors E5, F14 ● IPDM E/R harness connector E119 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse ● >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. Revision: October 2004 EC-500 2005 Titan DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1 4. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between A/F sensor 1 terminal and ECM terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 2 75 5 35 6 56 1 76 2 77 5 57 6 58 Bank1 Bank 2 EC C D E F Continuity should exist. 4. G Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Bank 1 Bank 2 H A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 1 76 2 75 2 77 5 35 5 57 6 56 6 58 I J Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K L 5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT M Perform EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace. 6. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Replace air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. CAUTION: ● Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads (using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12) and approved anti-seize lubricant. >> INSPECTION END Revision: October 2004 EC-501 2005 Titan DTC P1276, P1286 A/F SENSOR 1 Removal and Installation UBS00EXO AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-19, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . Revision: October 2004 EC-502 2005 Titan DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1 DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description PFP:22693 A UBS00EXP The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. EC C D SEF579Z E An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). F G H SEF580Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00EXQ I Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) A/F SEN1 (B2) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION J Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 1.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00EXR To judge the malfunction of A/F sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel feedback control constant, and the A/F sensor 1 temperature index. Judgment is based on whether the compensated time (the A/F signal cycling time index) is inordinately long or not. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition P1278 1278 (Bank 1) P1288 1288 (Bank 2) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit slow response Revision: October 2004 ● The response (from RICH to LEAN) of the A/F signal computed by ECM from A/F sensor 1 signal takes more than the specified time. EC-503 K L Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.) ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater ● Fuel pressure ● Fuel injector ● Intake air leaks ● Exhaust gas leaks ● PCV ● Mass air flow sensor 2005 Titan M DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1 DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00EXS NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Select “A/F SEN1(B1) P1278/P1279” or “A/F SEN1(B1) P1288/P1289” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step 10. If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-II screen, go to the following step. PBIB0756E 7. a. b. 8. After perform the following procedure, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it for 10 seconds. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 10 seconds. If “TESTING” is not displayed after 10 seconds, refer to EC143, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . Wait for about 20 seconds at idle at under the condition that “TESTING” is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. PBIB1925E 9. Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, refer to EC-143, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . 10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULT”. If “NG” is displayed, go to EC-509, "Diagnostic Procedure" . PBIB0758E WITH GST 1. 2. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select Service $01 with GST. Calculate the total value of “Short term fuel trim” and “Long term fuel trim” indications. Make sure that the total percentage should be within ±15%. If OK, go to the following step. If NG, check the following. Revision: October 2004 EC-504 2005 Titan DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1 Intake air leaks A ● Exhaust gas leaks ● Incorrect fuel pressure ● Lack of fuel EC ● Fuel injector ● Incorrect PCV hose connection ● PCV valve C ● Mass air flow sensor Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load. D Let engine idle for 1 minute. Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it for 10 seconds. E Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 1 minute. Select Service $07 with GST. If the 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-509, "Diagnostic Procedure" . F ● 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-505 2005 Titan DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1 Wiring Diagram UBS00EXT BANK 1 BBWA1700E Revision: October 2004 EC-506 2005 Titan DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR 16 BR/R 35 BR/G 56 LG/B 75 P/B ITEM CONDITION A/F sensor 1 (bank 1) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed EC DATA (DC Voltage) C Approximately 3.1V [Engine is running] A Approximately 2.6V Approximately 2.3V D Approximately 2.3V E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-507 2005 Titan DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1 BANK 2 BBWA1701E Revision: October 2004 EC-508 2005 Titan DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 57 58 EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] GR/G G/L 77 BR/B DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 2.6V L/P 76 A A/F sensor 1 (bank 2) ● ● Warm-up condition Idle speed C Approximately 2.3V Approximately 3.1V D Approximately 2.3V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00EXU 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS E 1. 2. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . G H I BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. J 2. RETIGHTEN A/F SENSOR 1 K Loosen and retighten the A/F sensor 1. L M BBIA0375E Tightening torque: 50 N-m (5.1 kg-m, 37 ft-lb) >> GO TO 3. Revision: October 2004 EC-509 2005 Titan DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1 3. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK 1. 2. Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold). PBIB1216E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace. 4. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace. Revision: October 2004 EC-510 2005 Titan DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1 5. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA 1. 2. 3. 4. A With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR” or “START”. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P172, P0174 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? EC C D E SEF968Y F Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. 5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 9. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. BBIA0368E Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-233, "DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" or EC-242, "DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" . No >> GO TO 6. G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-511 2005 Titan DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1 6. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. BBIA0376E 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. PBIB1683E 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E5, F14 ● IPDM E/R harness connector E119 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. Revision: October 2004 EC-512 2005 Titan DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1 8. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between A/F sensor 1 terminal and ECM terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 2 75 5 35 6 56 1 76 2 77 5 57 6 58 Bank1 Bank 2 EC C D E F Continuity should exist. 4. G Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Bank 1 Bank 2 H A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 1 76 2 75 2 77 5 35 5 57 6 56 6 58 I J Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K L 9. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER M Refer to EC-388, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 13. 10. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EC-178, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor. Revision: October 2004 EC-513 2005 Titan DTC P1278, P1288 A/F SENSOR 1 11. CHECK PCV VALVE Refer to EC-45, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Repair or replace PCV valve. 12. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Repair or replace. 13. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Replace air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. CAUTION: ● Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads (using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12) and approved anti-seize lubricant. >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation UBS00EXV AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-19, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . Revision: October 2004 EC-514 2005 Titan DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1 DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1 Component Description PFP:22693 A UBS00EXW The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element. The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range (0.7 < < air). The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance. EC C D SEF579Z E An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygenpump cell so that the composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at = 1. Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800°C (1,292 - 1,472°F). F G H SEF580Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00EXX I Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM A/F SEN1 (B1) A/F SEN1 (B2) CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up SPECIFICATION Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm J Fluctuates around 1.5V On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00EXY To judge the malfunction of A/F sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel feedback control constant, and the A/F sensor 1 temperature index. Judgment is based on whether the compensated time (the A/F signal cycling time index) is inordinately long or not. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition P1279 1279 (Bank 1) ● P1289 1289 (Bank 2) Revision: October 2004 ● The response (from LEAN to RICH) of the A/F signal computed by ECM from A/F sensor 1 signal takes more than the specified time. EC-515 L Possible Cause ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit slow response K Harness or connectors (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.) Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 ● Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater ● Fuel pressure ● Fuel injector ● Intake air leaks ● Exhaust gas leaks ● PCV ● Mass air flow sensor 2005 Titan M DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1 DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00EXZ NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load. Let engine idle for 1 minute. Select “A/F SEN1(B1) P1278/P1279” or “A/F SEN1(B1) P1288/P1289” of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go to step 10. If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-II screen, go to the following step. PBIB0756E 7. a. b. 8. After perform the following procedure, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it for 10 seconds. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 10 seconds. If “TESTING” is not displayed after 10 seconds, refer to EC143, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . Wait for about 20 seconds at idle at under the condition that “TESTING” is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. PBIB1925E 9. Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”. If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, refer to EC-143, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . 10. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULT”. If “NG” is displayed, go to EC-521, "Diagnostic Procedure" . PBIB0758E WITH GST 1. 2. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select Service $01 with GST. Calculate the total value of “Short term fuel trim” and “Long term fuel trim” indications. Make sure that the total percentage should be within ±15%. If OK, go to the following step. If NG, check the following. Revision: October 2004 EC-516 2005 Titan DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1 Intake air leaks A ● Exhaust gas leaks ● Incorrect fuel pressure ● Lack of fuel EC ● Fuel injector ● Incorrect PCV hose connection ● PCV valve C ● Mass air flow sensor Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no load. D Let engine idle for 1 minute. Increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 5,000 rpm and keep it for 10 seconds. E Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 1 minute. Select Service $07 with GST. If the 1st trip DTC is displayed, go to EC-521, "Diagnostic Procedure" . F ● 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-517 2005 Titan DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1 Wiring Diagram UBS00EY0 BANK 1 BBWA1700E Revision: October 2004 EC-518 2005 Titan DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 16 35 EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] BR/G LG/B 75 P/B DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 3.1V BR/R 56 A A/F sensor 1 (bank 1) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed C Approximately 2.6V Approximately 2.3V D Approximately 2.3V E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-519 2005 Titan DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1 BANK 2 BBWA1701E Revision: October 2004 EC-520 2005 Titan DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1 Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 57 58 EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] GR/G G/L 77 BR/B DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 2.6V L/P 76 A A/F sensor 1 (bank 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed C Approximately 2.3V Approximately 3.1V D Approximately 2.3V Diagnostic Procedure UBS00EY1 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS E 1. 2. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . G H I BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. J 2. RETIGHTEN A/F SENSOR 1 K Loosen and retighten the A/F sensor 1. L M BBIA0375E Tightening torque: 50 N-m (5.1 kg-m, 37 ft-lb) >> GO TO 3. Revision: October 2004 EC-521 2005 Titan DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1 3. CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK 1. 2. Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (Manifold). PBIB1216E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace. 4. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace. Revision: October 2004 EC-522 2005 Titan DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1 5. CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA 1. 2. 3. 4. A With CONSULT-II Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR” or “START”. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P172, P0174 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? EC C D E SEF968Y F Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. 5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. 6. Make sure DTC P0102 is displayed. 7. Erase the DTC memory. Refer to EC-61, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" . 8. Make sure DTC P0000 is displayed. 9. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. BBIA0368E Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? Yes or No Yes >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-233, "DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" or EC-242, "DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION" . No >> GO TO 6. G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-523 2005 Titan DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1 6. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. BBIA0376E 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between A/F sensor 1 terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. PBIB1683E 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E5, F14 ● IPDM E/R harness connector E119 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. Revision: October 2004 EC-524 2005 Titan DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1 8. CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between A/F sensor 1 terminal and ECM terminal as follows. Refer to Wiring Diagram. A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 2 75 5 35 6 56 1 76 2 77 5 57 6 58 Bank1 Bank 2 EC C D E F Continuity should exist. 4. G Check harness continuity between the following terminals and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Bank 1 Bank 2 H A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal A/F sensor 1 terminal ECM terminal 1 16 1 76 2 75 2 77 5 35 5 57 6 56 6 58 I J Continuity should not exist. 5. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K L 9. CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER M Refer to EC-388, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> GO TO 13. 10. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR Refer to EC-178, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor. Revision: October 2004 EC-525 2005 Titan DTC P1279, P1289 A/F SENSOR 1 11. CHECK PCV VALVE Refer to EC-45, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Repair or replace PCV valve. 12. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Perform EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Repair or replace. 13. REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Replace air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. CAUTION: ● Discard any air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. ● Before installing new air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads (using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12) and approved anti-seize lubricant. >> INSPECTION END Removal and Installation UBS00EY2 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 Refer to EM-19, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" . Revision: October 2004 EC-526 2005 Titan DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE PFP:14920 Description A UBS00EY3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*1 Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Battery Battery voltage*1 Throttle position sensor Throttle position Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas (Mixture ratio feedback signal) Fuel tank temperature sensor Fuel temperature in fuel tank 2 ECM function EC Actuator C D EVAP canister purge flow control EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve E F Vehicle speed Wheel sensor* *1: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. *2: This signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line. G This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass passage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes. H I COMPONENT DESCRIPTION The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/ OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse, the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve. J K L PBIB2057E M CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00EY4 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM PURG VOL C/V CONDITION ● Engine: After warming up ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Selector lever: P or N ● No load Revision: October 2004 SPECIFICATION Idle (Accelerator pedal: Not depressed even slightly, after starting engine) 0% 2,000 rpm — EC-527 2005 Titan DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P1444 1444 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve UBS00EY5 DTC detecting condition The canister purge flow is detected during the specified driving conditions, even when EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is completely closed. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● EVAP control system pressure sensor ● EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve (The valve is stuck open.) ● EVAP canister vent control valve ● EVAP canister ● Hoses (Hoses are connected incorrectly or clogged.) UBS00EY6 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Always perform test at a temperature of 5°C (41°F) or more. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “PURG VOL CN/V P1444” of “EVAPORATIVE SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. Touch “START”. PBIB0839E 6. 7. Start engine and let it idle until “TESTING” on CONSULT-II changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 10 seconds.) If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry from step 2. Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to EC531, "Diagnostic Procedure" . WITH GST 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Start engine and let it idle for at least 20 seconds. Select Service $07 with GST. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-531, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: October 2004 EC-528 2005 Titan DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Wiring Diagram UBS00EY7 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1687E Revision: October 2004 EC-529 2005 Titan DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] 45 L/Y ● Idle speed ● Accelerator pedal: Not depressed even slightly, after starting engine EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve PBIB0050E 11 - 14V [Engine is running] ● Engine speed: About 2,000 rpm (More than 100 seconds after starting engine). PBIB0051E [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 111 W/B ECM relay (Self shut-off) [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 119 120 BR BR Power supply for ECM For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.5V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Revision: October 2004 EC-530 2005 Titan DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Diagnostic Procedure UBS00EY8 1. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIR- A CUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D E BBIA0366E 4. F Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. H PBIB2245E I 2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E2, F32 ● IPDM E/R harness connector E119 ● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R ● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM J K L >> Repair harness or connectors. 3. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 45 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: October 2004 EC-531 2005 Titan M DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 4. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR 1. 2. Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. Check connectors for water. Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 5. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to EC-330, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 6. OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 7. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. 6. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. 3. Start engine. 4. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve opening. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 7. PBIB1678E 7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EC-534, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. 8. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING 1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. 2. Check the rubber tube for clogging. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower. 9. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-539, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. Revision: October 2004 EC-532 2005 Titan DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 10. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER A Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. EC 2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 11. C No >> GO TO 13. 1. D BBIA0351E E 11. CHECK EVAP CANISTER Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 2.5 kg (5.5 lb). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> GO TO 12. F G H 12. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. EVAP canister for damage ● EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection I ● J >> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. 13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT K Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . L >> INSPECTION END M Revision: October 2004 EC-533 2005 Titan DTC P1444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Component Inspection UBS00EY9 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE With CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions. Condition (PURG VOL CONT/V value) Air passage continuity between A and B 100% Yes 0% No PBIB2058E Without CONSULT-II Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following conditions. Condition Air passage continuity between A and B 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No supply No PBIB2059E Removal and Installation UBS00EYA EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE Refer to EM-15, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . Revision: October 2004 EC-534 2005 Titan DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Component Description PFP:14935 A UBS00EYB The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the canister vent. This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve is energized. A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evaporative emission control system components. This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains opened. When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows EVAP Control System diagnosis. EC C D PBIB1263E E F G H BBIA0443E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00EYC I Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM VENT CONT/V CONDITION ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON J OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00EYD K DTC No. P1446 1446 Trouble diagnosis name EVAP canister vent control valve close Revision: October 2004 DTC detecting condition EVAP canister vent control valve remains closed under specified driving conditions. EC-535 Possible cause ● EVAP canister vent control valve ● EVAP control system pressure sensor and the circuit ● Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister vent control valve ● EVAP canister is saturated with water 2005 Titan L M DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00EYE NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 7. a. b. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 5 seconds. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for at least 1 minute. Repeat next procedures 3 times. Increase the engine speed up to 3,000 to 3,500 rpm and keep it for 2 minutes and 50 seconds to 3 minutes. Never exceed 3 minutes. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for about 5 seconds. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-538, "Diagnostic Procedure" SEF058Y . If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the next step. Repeat next procedure 20 times. Quickly increase the engine speed up to 4,000 to 4,500 rpm or more and keep it for 25 to 30 seconds. Fully released accelerator pedal and keep engine idle for at least 35 seconds. 8. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-538, "Diagnostic Procedure" . 4. 5. a. b. 6. PBIB0972E WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: October 2004 EC-536 2005 Titan DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Wiring Diagram UBS00EYF A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1688E Revision: October 2004 EC-537 2005 Titan DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 117 WIRE COLOR L/Y ITEM EVAP canister vent control valve CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] Diagnostic Procedure DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) UBS00EYG 1. CHECK RUBBER TUBE 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister vent control valve. BBIA0443E 3. Check the rubber tube for clogging. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Clean rubber tube using an air blower. 2. CHECK EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE Refer to EC-539, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace EVAP canister vent control valve. 3. CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATURATED WITH WATER 1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. 2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP canister. Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 4. No >> GO TO 6. BBIA0351E Revision: October 2004 EC-538 2005 Titan DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE 4. CHECK EVAP CANISTER A Weigh the EVAP canister with the EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP control system pressure sensor attached. The weight should be less than 2.5 kg (5.5 lb). EC OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. C 5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART D Check the following. ● EVAP canister for damage ● EVAP hose between EVAP canister and vehicle frame for clogging or poor connection E >> Repair hose or replace EVAP canister. 6. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR 1. 2. F Disconnect EVAP control system pressure sensor harness connector. Check connectors for water. G Water should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. H 7. CHECK EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR I Refer to EC-330, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace EVAP control system pressure sensor. J K 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . L >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00EYH EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE With CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. PBIB1033E Revision: October 2004 EC-539 2005 Titan M DTC P1446 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE 5. 6. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time. Make sure that new O-ring is installed properly. Condition VENT CONTROL/V Air passage continuity between A and B ON No OFF Yes Operation takes less than 1 second. 7. 8. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. Perform step 6 again. PBIB1679E Without CONSULT-II 1. 2. Remove EVAP canister vent control valve from EVAP canister. Check portion B of EVAP canister vent control valve for being rusted. PBIB1033E 3. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following conditions. Make sure that new O-ring is installed properly. Condition Air passage continuity between A and B 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 No OFF Yes Operation takes less than 1 second. 4. 5. If NG, replace EVAP canister vent control valve. If OK, go to next step. Clean the air passage (Portion A to B ) of EVAP canister vent control valve using an air blower. Perform step 3 again. Revision: October 2004 EC-540 PBIB1034E 2005 Titan DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH Component Description PFP:25551 A UBS00KVY ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads voltage variation of switch, and determines which button is operated. EC C D E PBIB2638E Refer to EC-29, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function. F CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00KVZ Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM MAIN SW ● CANCEL SW ● RESUME/ACC SW SET SW CONDITION ● ● Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION MAIN switch: Pressed ON MAIN switch: Released OFF CANCEL switch: Pressed ON CANCEL switch: Released OFF RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed ON RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Released OFF SET/COAST switch: Pressed ON SET/COAST switch: Released OFF H Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON I J On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00KW0 This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. NOTE: If DTC P1564 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to EC-379, "DTC P0605 ECM". DTC No. P1564 1564 G Trouble Diagnosis Name ASCD steering switch Revision: October 2004 DTC Detecting Condition ● An excessively high voltage signal from the ASCD steering switch is sent to ECM. ● ECM detects that input signal from the ASCD steering switch is out of the specified range. ● ECM detects that the ASCD steering switch is stuck ON. EC-541 K L Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The switch circuit is open or shorted.) ● ASCD steering switch ● Combination switch (spiral cable) ● ECM 2005 Titan M DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00KW1 NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Wait at least 10 seconds. Press MAIN switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds. Press CANCEL switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds. Press RESUME/ACCELERATE switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds. Press SET/COAST switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds. If DTC is detected, go to EC-544, "Diagnostic Procedure" . WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: October 2004 EC-542 2005 Titan DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH Wiring Diagram UBS00KW2 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1702E Revision: October 2004 EC-543 2005 Titan DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 67 B Sensor ground ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Ignition switch: ON] ● ASCD steering switch: OFF [Ignition switch: ON] ● 99 G/Y ASCD steering switch MAIN switch: ON [Ignition switch: ON] ● CANCEL switch: ON [Ignition switch: ON] ● RESUME/ACCELERATTTE switch: ON [Ignition switch: ON] ● SET/COAST switch: ON Diagnostic Procedure Approximately 0V Approximately 4V Approximately 0V Approximately 1V Approximately 3V Approximately 2V UBS00KW3 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: October 2004 EC-544 2005 Titan DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH 2. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT A With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. EC Select “MAIN SW”, “CANCEL SW”, “RESUME/ACC SW” and “SET SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Check each item indication under the following conditions. C 1. 2. Switch MAIN switch CANCEL switch RESUME/ACCELERATE switch Monitor item MAIN SW CANCEL SW RESUME/ACC SW Condition Indication Pressed ON Released OFF Pressed ON Released OFF Pressed ON Released OFF Pressed ON Released OFF D E SEC006D SET/COAST switch SET SW G Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 99 and ground with pressing each button. Switch MAIN switch CANCEL switch RESUME/ACCELERATE switch SET/COAST switch Condition Voltage [V] Pressed Approx. 0 Released Approx. 4 Pressed Approx. 1 Released Approx. 4 Pressed Approx. 3 Released Approx. 4 Pressed Approx. 2 Released Approx. 4 H I J PBIB0311E M 3. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect combination switch harness connector M102. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between combination switch terminal 15 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. Revision: October 2004 K L OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 3. 1. 2. 3. 4. F EC-545 BBIA0362E 2005 Titan DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M31, E152 ● Harness connectors E19, F33 ● Combination switch (spiral cable) ● Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 99 and combination switch terminal 14. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M31, E152 ● Combination switch (spiral cable) ● Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH Refer to EC-547, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Replace ASCD steering switch. Refer to AV-67, "Removal and Installation of Steering Wheel Audio Control Switches" . 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: October 2004 EC-546 2005 Titan DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH Component Inspection UBS00KW4 A ASCD STEERING SWITCH 1. 2. Disconnect combination switch (spiral cable) harness connector M102. Check continuity between combination switch (spiral cable) terminals 14 and 15 with pushing each switch. Switch MAIN switch CANCEL switch RESUME/ACCELERATE switch SET/COAST switch Condition EC Resistance [Ω] Pressed Approx. 0 Released Approx. 4,000 Pressed Approx. 250 Released Approx. 4,000 Pressed Approx. 1,480 Released Approx. 4,000 Pressed Approx. 660 Released Approx. 4,000 C D PBIB1673E E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-547 2005 Titan DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Component Description PFP:25320 UBS00KW5 When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal). Refer to EC-29, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function. BBIA0373E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00KW6 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION BRAKE SW 1 (ASCD brake switch) ● BRAKE SW 2 (Stop lamp switch) ● Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION Brake pedal: Fully released ON Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF Brake pedal: Fully released OFF Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00KW7 This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. NOTE: ● If DTC P 1572 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to EC-379, "DTC P0605 ECM" . ● This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. When malfunction A is detected, DTC is not stored in ECM memory. And in that case, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip freeze frame data are displayed. 1st trip DTC is erased when ignition switch OFF. And even when malfunction A is detected in two consecutive trips, DTC is not stored in ECM memory. DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detecting Condition A) P1572 1572 When the vehicle speed is above 30km/h (19 MPH), ON signals from the stop lamp switch and the ASCD brake switch are sent to ECM at the same time. ASCD brake switch B) Revision: October 2004 ASCD brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for extremely long time while the vehicle is driving EC-548 Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The stop lamp switch circuit is shorted.) ● Harness or connectors (The ASCD brake switch circuit is shorted.) ● Stop lamp switch ● ASCD brake switch ● Incorrect stop lamp switch installation ● Incorrect ASCD brake switch installation ● ECM 2005 Titan DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH DTC confirmation Procedure UBS00KW8 A CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: ● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait EC at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. ● Procedure for malfunction B is not described here. It takes extremely long time to complete procedure for malfunction B. By performing procedure for malfunction A, the incident that causes malfunction B can be C detected. TESTING CONDITION: Steps 3 and 4 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a D road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. E Start engine (VDC switch OFF). Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Press MAIN switch and make sure that CRUISE indicator lights up. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition. F G VHCL SPEED SE More than 30 km/h (19 MPH) Selector lever Suitable position 5. If DTC is detected, go to EC-551, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If DTC is not detected, go to the following step. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition. H PBIB2386E I VHCL SPEED SE More than 30 km/h (19 MPH) Selector lever Suitable position J Driving location Depress the brake pedal for more than five seconds so as not to come off from the above-mentioned condition. K 6. If DTC is detected, go to EC-551, "Diagnostic Procedure" . WITH GST L Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. M Revision: October 2004 EC-549 2005 Titan DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Wiring Diagram UBS00KW9 BBWA1873E Revision: October 2004 EC-550 2005 Titan DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 101 R/W Stop lamp switch Brake pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: OFF] ● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed [Ignition switch: ON] ● 108 BR/W A ASCD brake switch Brake pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: ON] ● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Diagnostic Procedure DATA (DC Voltage) C Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) D BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) E Approximately 0V UBS00KWA F 1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I G With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions. CONDITION H INDICATION Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF Brake pedal: Fully released ON I J K SEC011D 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the following conditions. CONDITION Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Brake pedal: Fully released L M VOLTAGE Approximately 0V Battery voltage MBIB0061E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. Revision: October 2004 EC-551 2005 Titan DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II With CONSULT-II Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode. CONDITION INDICATION Brake pedal: Fully released OFF Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON SEC013D Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions. CONDITION Brake pedal: Fully released Brake pedal: Slightly depressed VOLTAGE Approximately 0V Battery voltage PBIB1537E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 7. Revision: October 2004 EC-552 2005 Titan DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 3. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0373E E 4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. F Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. G H PBIB0857E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. ● Harness connectors M31, E152 ● Fuse block (J/B) connector M4 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse J K >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L 5. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. M Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Refer to EC-555, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch. Revision: October 2004 EC-553 2005 Titan DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 7. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. BBIA0373E 3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8. WBIA0545E 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors M31, E152 ● Fuse block (J/B) connector M60 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 10. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH Refer to EC-555, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace stop lamp switch. Revision: October 2004 EC-554 2005 Titan DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT A Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . EC >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00KWB ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 1. 2. 3. C Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. Condition Brake pedal: Fully released Brake pedal: Slightly depressed D Continuity E Should exist. Should not exist. F If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again. SEC023D G STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. Condition Brake pedal: Fully released Brake pedal: Slightly depressed H I Continuity Should not exist. J Should exist. If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again. K WBIA0546E L M Revision: October 2004 EC-555 2005 Titan DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR Component Description PFP:31036 UBS00F1S The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from combination meter and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ASCD control. Refer to EC-29, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for ASCD functions. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00F1T This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. NOTE: ● If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-160, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . ● If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0500, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0500. Refer to EC-368, "DTC P0500 VSS". ● If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to EC-379, "DTC P0605 ECM". DTC No. P1574 1574 Trouble Diagnosis Name ASCD vehicle speed sensor DTC Detecting Condition ECM detects a difference between two vehicle speed signals is out of the specified range. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible Cause ● Harness or connectors (The CAN communication line is open or shorted.) ● Combination meter ● ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) ● Wheel sensor ● TCM ● ECM UBS00F1U CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Step 3 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Start engine (VDC switch OFF). Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25 MPH). If DTC is detected, go to EC-557, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: October 2004 EC-556 2005 Titan DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR Diagnostic Procedure UBS00F1V 1. CHECK DTC WITH TCM A Check DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-39, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated. EC C 2. CHECK DTC WITH ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) Refer to BRC-11, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" , BRC-51, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" or BRC-98, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace. D E 3. CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION F Check combination meter function. Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" . G >> INSPECTION END H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-557 2005 Titan DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH Component Description PFP:32006 UBS00EYW When the gear position is P or N, park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON. TCM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists. Then the TCM sends the PNP switch signal to the ECM via combination meter. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00EYX Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM P/N POSI SW CONDITION ● Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION Selector lever: P or N ON Selector lever: Except above OFF On Board Diagnosis Logic DTC No. P1706 1706 Trouble diagnosis name Park/neutral position switch UBS00EYY DTC detecting condition The signal of the park/neutral position (PNP) switch is not changed in the process of engine starting and driving. DTC Confirmation Procedure Possible cause ● Harness or connectors [The park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit is open or shorted.] ● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch ● Combination meter ● TCM UBS00EYZ CAUTION: Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” signal under the following conditions. Position (Selector lever) Known-good signal N or P position ON Except the above position OFF If NG, go to EC-561, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If OK, go to following step. SEF212Y 3. 4. 5. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive seconds. ENG SPEED More than 1,000 rpm COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F) B/FUEL SCHDL More than 2.0 msec VHCL SPEED SE More than 64 km/h (40 MPH) Selector lever Suitable position 6. SEF213Y If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-561, "Diagnostic Procedure" . Revision: October 2004 EC-558 2005 Titan DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH Overall Function Check UBS00EZ0 Use this procedure to check the overall function of the park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. WITH GST 1. 2. Condition (Gear position) Except the above position 3. EC Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 102 (PNP switch signal) and ground under the following conditions. P or N position A C Voltage V (Known good data) Approx. 0 D BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) If NG, go to EC-561, "Diagnostic Procedure" . E MBIB0043E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-559 2005 Titan DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH Wiring Diagram UBS00EZ1 BBWA1704E Revision: October 2004 EC-560 2005 Titan DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] ● 102 GR/R A PNP switch Selector lever: P or N [Ignition switch: ON] ● Except the above gear position DATA (DC Voltage) C Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Diagnostic Procedure D UBS00EZ2 1. CHECK DTC WITH TCM E Refer to AT-39, "OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace. F 2. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM G Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it to START. Does starter motor operate? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 3. No >> Refer to SC-10, "STARTING SYSTEM" . H I 3. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector. Disconnect combination meter harness connector. Check harness continuity between A/T assembly terminal 9 and combination meter terminal 39. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. K L 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. M 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors F14, E5 ● Harness connectors E152, M31 ● Harness for open or short between A/T assembly and combination meter >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: October 2004 J EC-561 2005 Titan DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH 5. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and combination meter terminal 40. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M31, E152 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and combination meter >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 7. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-III 1. 2. Disconnect TCM harness connector. Check harness continuity between TCM terminal 8 and A/T assembly terminal 9. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair or replace. 9. REPLACE COMBINATION METER FUNCTION Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: October 2004 EC-562 2005 Titan DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH Description PFP:25320 A UBS00EZ3 Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed. This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving. EC CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00EZ4 Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM BRAKE SW C CONDITION ● Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION Brake pedal: Fully released OFF Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON D On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00EZ5 E The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis. DTC No. P1805 1805 Trouble diagnosis name Brake switch DTC detecting condition Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (Stop lamp switch circuit is open or shorted.) ● Stop lamp switch A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for an extremely long time while the vehicle is driving. F G FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode. H Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a small range. Therefore, acceleration will be poor. Vehicle condition Driving condition When engine is idling Normal When accelerating Poor acceleration DTC Confirmation Procedure I J UBS00EZ6 WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. K Turn ignition switch ON. Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds. Erase the DTC with CONSULT-II. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-565, "Diagnostic Procedure" . L M SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: October 2004 EC-563 2005 Titan DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH Wiring Diagram UBS00EZ7 BBWA1723E Revision: October 2004 EC-564 2005 Titan DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 101 R/W A Stop lamp switch Brake pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: OFF] ● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Diagnostic Procedure DATA (DC Voltage) C Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) D UBS00EZ8 1. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT E 1. 2. F Turn ignition switch OFF. Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal. Brake pedal Stop lamp Fully released Not illuminated Depressed Illuminated G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. H 2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. I Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. J K L BBIA0373E 2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. M Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. WBIA0545E Revision: October 2004 EC-565 2005 Titan DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH 3. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors M31, E152 ● Fuse block (J/B) connector M60 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and fuse >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH Refer to EC-567, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace stop lamp switch. 6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: October 2004 EC-566 2005 Titan DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH Component Inspection UBS00EZ9 A STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. EC C D BBIA0373E 2. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. Conditions Brake pedal: Fully released Brake pedal: Slightly depressed 3. E Continuity F Should not exist. Should exist. If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 2 again. G WBIA0546E H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-567 2005 Titan DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR Component Description PFP:18002 UBS00EZA The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals. PBIB1741E Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00EZB Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● ACCEL SEN 1 ACCEL SEN 2* CLSD THL POS ● ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.2 - 4.8V Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.2 - 4.8V Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF *: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differ from ECM terminal voltage. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00EZC These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. NOTE: If DTC P2122 or P2123 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to EC-450, "DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY" . Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition P2122 2122 DTC No. Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the APP sensor 1 is sent to ECM. P2123 2123 Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the APP sensor 1 is sent to ECM. Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (The APP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.) ● Accelerator pedal position sensor (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. Revision: October 2004 EC-568 2005 Titan DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00EZD A NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. C Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-571, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D E F SEF058Y WITH GST G Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-569 2005 Titan DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR Wiring Diagram UBS00EZE BBWA1706E Revision: October 2004 EC-570 2005 Titan DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. EC WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Engine is running] 82 B/R Sensor ground (APP sensor 1) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed C Approximately 0V D [Engine is running] 83 G/W A Sensor ground (APP sensor 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V E 90 L Sensor power supply (APP sensor 1) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 91 W/R Sensor power supply (APP sensor 2) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V F [Ignition switch: ON] 98 G/R Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 ● Engine: Stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.25 - 0.50V G [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine: Stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 2.0 - 2.5V H [Ignition switch: ON] 106 BR/W Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 ● Engine: Stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V I 4.2 - 4.8V J [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine: Stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Diagnostic Procedure UBS00EZF 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . K L M BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: October 2004 EC-571 2005 Titan DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR 2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0361E 3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 7 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. PBIB2070E 3. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 82 and APP sensor terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 4. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK APP SENSOR Refer to EC-573, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. Revision: October 2004 EC-572 2005 Titan DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR 6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. A Replace the accelerator pedal assembly. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . EC C >> INSPECTION END 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT D Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . E >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00EZG ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 106 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V Fully depressed 4.2 - 4.8V Fully released 0.25 - 0.5V Fully depressed 2.0 - 2.5V 98 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) 4. 5. 6. 7. F Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following conditions. G H I MBIB0023E If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Removal and Installation J K UBS00EZH ACCELERATOR PEDAL L Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" . M Revision: October 2004 EC-573 2005 Titan DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR Component Description PFP:18002 UBS00EZI The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals. PBIB1741E Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00EZJ Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION ● ACCEL SEN 1 ACCEL SEN 2* CLSD THL POS ● ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.2 - 4.8V Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.2 - 4.8V Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF *: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differ from ECM terminal voltage. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00EZK These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition P2127 2127 Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 circuit low input An excessively low voltage from the APP sensor 2 is sent to ECM. P2128 2128 Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 circuit high input An excessively high voltage from the APP sensor 2 is sent to ECM. Possible cause ● Harness or connectors (APP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.) (TP sensor circuit is shorted.) ● Accelerator pedal position sensor (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) ● Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor) FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. Revision: October 2004 EC-574 2005 Titan DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00EZL A NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. C Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-577, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D E F SEF058Y WITH GST G Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-575 2005 Titan DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR Wiring Diagram UBS00EZM BBWA1707E Revision: October 2004 EC-576 2005 Titan DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 47 A EC WIRE COLOR ITEM Y Sensor power supply (TP sensor) B/R Sensor ground (APP sensor 1) CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V C Approximately 0V D Approximately 0V E F [Engine is running] 82 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Engine is running] 83 G/W Sensor ground (APP sensor 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed 90 L Sensor power supply (APP sensor 1) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 91 W/R Sensor power supply (APP sensor 2) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V G [Ignition switch: ON] 98 G/R Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 ● Engine: Stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.25 - 0.50V H [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine: Stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 2.0 - 2.5V I [Ignition switch: ON] 106 BR/W Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 ● Engine: Stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V J [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine: Stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Diagnostic Procedure 4.2 - 4.8V K UBS00EZN 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. L Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . M BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: October 2004 EC-577 2005 Titan DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR 2. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0361E 3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB2069E 3. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 6 and ECM terminal 91. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace open circuit. 4. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram 47 Electric throttle control actuator terminal 2 EC-583 91 APP sensor terminal 6 EC-576 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Refer to EC-587, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 6. Revision: October 2004 EC-578 2005 Titan DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR 6. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. A Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . EC >> INSPECTION END C 7. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 83 and APP sensor terminal 3. Refer to Wiring Diagram. D E Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. F G 8. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. H Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 98 and APP sensor terminal 5. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. I 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. J 9. CHECK APP SENSOR K Refer to EC-580, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 10. L 10. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY M 1. 2. 3. 4. Replace the accelerator pedal assembly. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END 11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: October 2004 EC-579 2005 Titan DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR Component Inspection UBS00EZO ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following conditions. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 106 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V Fully depressed 4.2 - 4.8V Fully released 0.25 - 0.5V Fully depressed 2.0 - 2.5V 98 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) 4. 5. 6. 7. MBIB0023E If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Removal and Installation UBS00EZP ACCELERATOR PEDAL Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" . Revision: October 2004 EC-580 2005 Titan DTC P2135 TP SENSOR DTC P2135 TP SENSOR Component Description PFP:16119 A UBS00EZQ Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement. The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition. EC C D PBIB0145E E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00EZR Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM THRTL SEN 1 THRTL SEN 2* CONDITION F SPECIFICATION ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V ● Selector lever: D Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V G *: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00EZS H This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition ● P2135 2135 Throttle position sensor circuit range/performance problem Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM compared with the signals from TP sensor 1 and TP sensor 2. I Possible cause Harness or connector (TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or shorted.) (APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.) ● Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor 1 and 2) ● Accelerator pedal position sensor FAIL-SAFE MODE J K L When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. Revision: October 2004 EC-581 2005 Titan M DTC P2135 TP SENSOR DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00EZT NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-584, "Diagnostic Procedure" . SEF058Y WITH GST Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. Revision: October 2004 EC-582 2005 Titan DTC P2135 TP SENSOR Wiring Diagram UBS00EZU A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1708E Revision: October 2004 EC-583 2005 Titan DTC P2135 TP SENSOR Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 47 WIRE COLOR Y ITEM Sensor power supply (Throttle position sensor) CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V [Ignition switch: ON] 50 B ● Engine: Stopped ● Selector lever: D ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released Throttle position sensor 1 More than 0.36V [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine: Stopped ● Selector lever: D ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V [Engine is running] 66 R Sensor ground (Throttle position sensor) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed Approximately 0V [Ignition switch: ON] 69 W ● Engine: Stopped ● Selector lever: D ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released Throttle position sensor 2 Less than 4.75V [Ignition switch: ON] 91 W/R Sensor power supply (APP sensor 2) ● Engine: Stopped ● Selector lever: D ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed [Ignition switch: ON] Diagnostic Procedure More than 0.36V Approximately 5V UBS00EZV 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: October 2004 EC-584 2005 Titan DTC P2135 TP SENSOR 2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. A Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0371E 3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E Voltage: Approximately 5V F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 3. G PBIB2065E H 3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 2 and ECM terminal 47. Refer to Wiring Diagram. I J Continuity should exist. K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace open circuit. L 4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. ECM terminal Sensor terminal M Reference Wiring Diagram 47 Electric throttle control actuator terminal 2 EC-583 91 APP sensor terminal 6 EC-590 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR Refer to EC-595, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 6. Revision: October 2004 EC-585 2005 Titan DTC P2135 TP SENSOR 6. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. Replace the accelerator pedal assembly. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END 7. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 4 and ECM terminal 66. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 50 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 1, ECM terminal 69 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 3. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Refer to EC-587, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> GO TO 10. 10. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END 11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: October 2004 EC-586 2005 Titan DTC P2135 TP SENSOR Component Inspection UBS00EZW A THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Turn ignition switch ON. Set selector lever to D position. Check voltage between ECM terminals 50 (TP sensor 1 signal), 69 (TP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following conditions. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 50 (Throttle position sensor 1) Fully released More than 0.36V Fully depressed Less than 4.75V Fully released Less than 4.75V Fully depressed More than 0.36V 69 (Throttle position sensor 2) 6. 7. 8. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next step. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Removal and Installation EC C D E PBIB1530E F G UBS00EZX ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR H Refer to EM-15, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-587 2005 Titan DTC P2138 APP SENSOR DTC P2138 APP SENSOR Component Description PFP:18002 UBS00EZY The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM. Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals. PBIB1741E Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00EZZ Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM ACCEL SEN 1 ACCEL SEN 2* CLSD THL POS CONDITION ● ● ● SPECIFICATION Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.2 - 4.8V Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.2 - 4.8V Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF *: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differ from ECM terminal voltage. On Board Diagnosis Logic UBS00F00 This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. NOTE: If DTC P2138 is displayed with DTC P1229, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1229. Refer to EC-450, "DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY" . DTC No. P2138 2138 Trouble diagnosis name Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit range/performance problem DTC detecting condition Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM compared with the signals from APP sensor 1 and APP sensor 2. Possible cause ● Harness or connector (APP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or shorted.) (TP sensor circuit is shorted.) ● Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 and 2 ● Electric throttle control actuator (TP sensor) FAIL-SAFE MODE When the malfunction is detected, ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees. The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition. So, the acceleration will be poor. Revision: October 2004 EC-588 2005 Titan DTC P2138 APP SENSOR DTC Confirmation Procedure UBS00F01 A NOTE: If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. EC TESTING CONDITION: Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8V at idle. WITH CONSULT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. C Turn ignition switch ON. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. If DTC is detected, go to EC-591, "Diagnostic Procedure" . D E F SEF058Y WITH GST G Follow the procedure “WITH CONSULT-II” above. H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-589 2005 Titan DTC P2138 APP SENSOR Wiring Diagram UBS00F02 BBWA1709E Revision: October 2004 EC-590 2005 Titan DTC P2138 APP SENSOR Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. 47 A EC WIRE COLOR ITEM Y Sensor power supply (TP sensor) B/R Sensor ground (APP sensor 1) CONDITION [Ignition switch: ON] DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V C Approximately 0V D Approximately 0V E F [Engine is running] 82 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed [Engine is running] 83 G/W Sensor ground (APP sensor 2) ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed 90 L Sensor power supply (APP sensor 1) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V 91 W/R Sensor power supply (APP sensor 2) [Ignition switch: ON] Approximately 5V G [Ignition switch: ON] 98 G/R Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 ● Engine: Stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.25 - 0.50V H [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine: Stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 2.0 - 2.5V I [Ignition switch: ON] 106 BR/W Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 ● Engine: Stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V J [Ignition switch: ON] ● Engine: Stopped ● Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Diagnostic Procedure 4.2 - 4.8V K UBS00F03 1. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. L Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . M BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: October 2004 EC-591 2005 Titan DTC P2138 APP SENSOR 2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0361E 3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 7 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. PBIB2070E 3. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 6 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB2069E 4. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 6 and ECM terminal 91. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair open circuit in harness or connectors. Revision: October 2004 EC-592 2005 Titan DTC P2138 APP SENSOR 5. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III A Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals ECM terminal Sensor terminal Reference Wiring Diagram 47 Electric throttle control actuator terminal 2 EC-583 91 APP sensor terminal 6 EC-590 EC C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness connectors. D 6. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Refer to EC-595, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 7. E F 7. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR 1. 2. 3. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . G H >> INSPECTION END 8. CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT I 1. 2. 3. J Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 82 and APP sensor terminal 1, ECM terminal 83 and APP sensor terminal 3. Refer to Wiring Diagram. K Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L M 9. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 2, ECM terminal 98 and APP sensor terminal 5. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: October 2004 EC-593 2005 Titan DTC P2138 APP SENSOR 10. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR Refer to EC-595, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11. 11. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. 4. Replace the accelerator pedal assembly. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . >> INSPECTION END 12. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Revision: October 2004 EC-594 2005 Titan DTC P2138 APP SENSOR Component Inspection UBS00F04 A ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1. 2. 3. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 signal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and ground under the following conditions. Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage 106 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1) Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V Fully depressed 4.2 - 4.8V Fully released 0.25 - 0.5V Fully depressed 2.0 - 2.5V 98 (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2) 4. 5. 6. 7. EC C D E MBIB0023E If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step. Perform EC-89, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" . Perform EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . Perform EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Removal and Installation F UBS00F05 G ACCELERATOR PEDAL Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" . H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-595 2005 Titan IGNITION SIGNAL IGNITION SIGNAL Component Description PFP:22448 UBS00F06 IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power transistor turns ON and OFF the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil secondary circuit. BBIA0359E Revision: October 2004 EC-596 2005 Titan IGNITION SIGNAL Wiring Diagram UBS00F07 A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1710E Revision: October 2004 EC-597 2005 Titan IGNITION SIGNAL Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 111 W/B ECM relay (Self shut-off) [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 119 120 BR BR Power supply for ECM Revision: October 2004 For a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF [Ignition switch: ON] EC-598 DATA (DC Voltage) 0 - 1.5V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) 2005 Titan IGNITION SIGNAL A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1711E Revision: October 2004 EC-599 2005 Titan IGNITION SIGNAL Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] 46 60 61 62 L/R GR/R O/W Y/R Ignition signal No. 7 Ignition signal No. 5 Ignition signal No. 3 Ignition signal No. 1 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed DATA (DC Voltage) 0 - 0.2V NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle. PBIB0044E 0.1 - 0.4V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed: 2,000 rpm. PBIB0045E : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Revision: October 2004 EC-600 2005 Titan IGNITION SIGNAL A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1712E Revision: October 2004 EC-601 2005 Titan IGNITION SIGNAL Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Engine is running] 65 79 80 81 G/R V/W W/R W/G Ignition signal No. 8 Ignition signal No. 6 Ignition signal No. 4 Ignition signal No. 2 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed DATA (DC Voltage) 0 - 0.2V NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle. PBIB0044E 0.1 - 0.4V [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed: 2,000 rpm. PBIB0045E : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure UBS00F08 1. CHECK ENGINE START Turn ignition switch OFF, and restart engine. Is engine running? Yes or No Yes (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2. Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3. No >> GO TO 4. 2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION With CONSULT-II 1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 2. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 10. PBIB0133E Revision: October 2004 EC-602 2005 Titan IGNITION SIGNAL 3. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION A Without CONSULT-II Let engine idle. Read the voltage signal between ECM terminals 46, 60, 61, 62, 65, 79, 80, 81 and ground with an oscilloscope. 3. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as shown below. NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle. 1. 2. EC C D E PBIB2094E PBIB0044E F OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 10. G 4. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. Check voltage between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. H I Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Go to EC-154, "POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" . J K MBIB0034E L M Revision: October 2004 EC-603 2005 Titan IGNITION SIGNAL 5. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect condenser harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0358E 4. Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 6. PBIB0624E 6. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector E119. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 4 and condenser terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> Go to EC-154, "POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" . NG >> GO TO 7. 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E2, F32 ● Harness for open or short between ignition coil and IPDM E/R >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: October 2004 EC-604 2005 Titan IGNITION SIGNAL 8. CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. EC Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. C D 9. CHECK CONDENSER E Refer to EC-606, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace condenser. F 10. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV 1. 2. 3. G Turn ignition switch OFF. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector. H I J K BBIA0359E 4. 5. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. L Voltage: Battery voltage M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11. PBIB0138E 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E2, F32 ● Harness for open or short between ignition coil and harness connector F32 >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. Revision: October 2004 EC-605 2005 Titan IGNITION SIGNAL 12. CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 13. CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 46, 60, 61, 62, 65, 79, 80, 81 and ignition coil terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 14. CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR Refer to EC-606, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> Replace ignition coil with power transistor. 15. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00KWC IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR CAUTION: Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector. 3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as follows. Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] 1 and 2 Except 0 or ∞ 1 and 3 Except 0 2 and 3 4. 5. 6. If NG, replace ignition coil with power transistor. If OK, go to next step. Turn ignition switch OFF. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Revision: October 2004 EC-606 PBIB0847E 2005 Titan IGNITION SIGNAL 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. Remove fuel pump fuse in fuse block No. 1 to release fuel pressure. NOTE: Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following procedure. Start engine. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. Turn ignition switch OFF. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be checked. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal portion as shown in the figure. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and check whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal portion. A EC C BBIA0380E D E F G Spark should be generated. CAUTION: ● Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil within 50cm. Be careful not to get an electrical shock PBIB2325E while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage becomes 20kV or more. ● It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken. NOTE: When the gap is less than 13 mm, the spark might be generated even if the coil is malfunctioning. 17. If NG, replace ignition coil with power transistor. CONDENSER 1. 2. 3. I J K Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect condenser harness connector. Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2. Resistance H L Above 1 MΩ at 25°C (77°F) M PBIB0794E Removal and Installation UBS00F0A IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR Refer to EM-26, "IGNITION COIL" . Revision: October 2004 EC-607 2005 Titan INJECTOR CIRCUIT INJECTOR CIRCUIT Component Description PFP:16600 UBS00F0B The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM supplies a ground to the injector circuit, the coil in the injector is energized. The energized coil pulls the ball valve back and allows fuel to flow through the injector into the intake manifold. The amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse duration. Pulse duration is the length of time the injector remains open. The ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on engine fuel needs. SEF375Z CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00F0C Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM B/FUEL SCHDL INJ PULSE-B1 INJ PULSE-B2 CONDITION SPECIFICATION See EC-143, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . ● Engine: After warming up ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Selector lever: P or N ● No load Revision: October 2004 Idle 2.0 - 2.8 msec 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec EC-608 2005 Titan INJECTOR CIRCUIT Wiring Diagram UBS00F0D A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1713E Revision: October 2004 EC-609 2005 Titan INJECTOR CIRCUIT Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) BATTERY VOLTAGE [Engine is running] 21 22 23 40 41 42 44 63 O/L BR GR/W Y/G P L O G Injector No. 5 Injector No. 3 Injector No. 1 Injector No. 6 Injector No. 4 Injector No. 2 Injector No. 7 Injector No. 8 ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed (11 - 14V) NOTE: The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle. PBIB0042E BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) [Engine is running] ● Warm-up condition ● Engine speed: 2,000 rpm PBIB0043E : Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) Diagnostic Procedure UBS00F0E 1. INSPECTION START Turn ignition switch to START. Is any cylinder ignited? Yes or No Yes >> GO TO 2. No >> GO TO 3. Revision: October 2004 EC-610 2005 Titan INJECTOR CIRCUIT 2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION A With CONSULT-II Start engine. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop. 1. 2. EC C D E PBIB0133E Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Listen to each injector operating sound. Clicking noise should be heard. F G H I PBIB1986E J OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 3. K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-611 2005 Titan INJECTOR CIRCUIT 3. CHECK INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect injector harness connector. BBIA0374E 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between injector terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0582E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E2, F32 ● IPDM E/R connector E119 ● 15A fuse ● Harness for open or short between injector and fuse >> Repair harness or connectors. 5. CHECK INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between injector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 40, 41, 42, 44, 63. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: October 2004 EC-612 2005 Titan INJECTOR CIRCUIT 6. CHECK INJECTOR A Refer to EC-610, "Diagnostic Procedure" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace injector. EC 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT C Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . D >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00F0F INJECTOR 1. 2. E Disconnect injector harness connector. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure. F Resistance: 11.1 - 14.5Ω [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)] G H PBIB1727E I Removal and Installation UBS00F0G INJECTOR Refer to EM-29, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" . J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-613 2005 Titan FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT Description PFP:17042 UBS00F0H SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sensor Input signal to ECM Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed* Battery Battery voltage* ECM Function Actuator Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay *: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON to improve engine startability. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows that the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the engine speed signal is not received when the ignition switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and prevents battery discharging, thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump. Condition Fuel pump operation Ignition switch is turned to ON. Operates for 1 second. Engine running and cranking Operates. When engine is stopped Stops in 1.5 seconds. Except as shown above Stops. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION A turbine type design fuel pump is used in the fuel tank. BBIA0402E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00F0I Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM FUEL PUMP RLY CONDITION ● For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON ● Engine running or cranking ● Except above conditions Revision: October 2004 SPECIFICATION ON OFF EC-614 2005 Titan FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT Wiring Diagram UBS00F0J A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1714E Revision: October 2004 EC-615 2005 Titan FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) [Ignition switch: ON] ● 113 GR Fuel pump relay For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON 0 - 1.5V [Engine is running] [Ignition switch: ON] ● More than 1 second after turning ignition switch ON. Diagnostic Procedure BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) UBS00F0K 1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Pinch fuel feed hose with two fingers. Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel feed hose for 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. BBIA0357E 2. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 113 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 3. PBIB1187E Revision: October 2004 EC-616 2005 Titan FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT 3. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II 1. 2. 3. 4. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E122. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 46 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. EC C Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 13. D E PBIB2084E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART F Check harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and ECM G >> Repair harness or connectors. 5. CHECK CONDENSER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 4. H Turn ignition switch OFF. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. Disconnect condenser harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. I J K L BBIA0388E 5. Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: M Battery voltage should exist for 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON. 6. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 6. PBIB0624E Revision: October 2004 EC-617 2005 Titan FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT 6. CHECK 15A FUSE 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect 15A fuse. 3. Check 15A fuse. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace fuse. 7. CHECK CONDENSER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E119. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 13 and condenser terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 8. CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. 9. CHECK CONDENSER Refer to EC-619, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Replace condenser. 10. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E119. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R terminal 13 and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 1, “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminal 3 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 11. Revision: October 2004 EC-618 BBIA0442E 2005 Titan FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT 11. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A Check the following. ● Harness connectors E41, C1 ● Harness for open or short between fuel pump and IPDM E/R ● Harness for open or short between fuel pump and ground EC C >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 12. CHECK FUEL PUMP D Refer to EC-619, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”. E 13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT F Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . G OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. Component Inspection H UBS00F0L FUEL PUMP 1. 2. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector. Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminals 1 and 3. I J Resistance: 0.2 - 5.0Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] K L SEC918C CONDENSER 1. 2. 3. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect condenser harness connector. Check resistance between condenser terminals as 1 and 2. Resistance Above 1 MΩ at 25°C (77°F) PBIB0794E Removal and Installation UBS00F0M FUEL PUMP Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . Revision: October 2004 EC-619 2005 Titan REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Component Description PFP:92136 UBS00F0N The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the liquid tank of the air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system. BBIA0356E SEF099XA Revision: October 2004 EC-620 2005 Titan REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Wiring Diagram UBS00F0O A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1715E Revision: October 2004 EC-621 2005 Titan REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION 49 R/Y Sensor power supply (Refrigerant pressure sensor) [Ignition switch: ON] 67 B Sensor ground ● Warm-up condition ● Idle speed DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 5V [Engine is running] Approximately 0V [Engine is running] 70 B/W Refrigerant pressure sensor ● Warm-up condition ● Both A/C switch and blower switch: ON (Compressor: Operates.) Diagnostic Procedure 1.0 - 4.0V UBS00F0P 1. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION 1. 2. 3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Turn A/C switch and blower switch ON. Check voltage between ECM terminal 70 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: 1.0 - 4.0V OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. PBIB1188E 2. CHECK GROUND CONNECTIONS 1. 2. 3. Turn A/C switch and blower switch OFF. Turn ignition switch OFF. Loosen and retighten three ground screws on the body. Refer to EC-159, "Ground Inspection" . BBIA0354E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace ground connections. Revision: October 2004 EC-622 2005 Titan REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR 3. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. EC C D BBIA0356E 3. E Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Approximately 5V F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. G PBIB0188E H 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. ● Harness connectors E5, F14 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor J >> Repair harness or connectors. 5. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. 6. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E5, F14 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. Revision: October 2004 EC-623 2005 Titan K L M REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR 7. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 70 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8. 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. ● Harness connectors E5, F14 ● Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . OK or NG OK >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor. NG >> Repair or replace. Removal and Installation UBS00F0Q REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR Refer to MTC-120, "Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor" . Revision: October 2004 EC-624 2005 Titan ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL Description PFP:25350 A UBS00F0R The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, etc.) is transferred through the CAN communication line from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R. EC CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00F0S Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM LOAD SIGNAL C CONDITION ● Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION Lighting switch: In 2nd position ON Lighting switch: OFF OFF Diagnostic Procedure D UBS00F0T 1. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I E 1. 2. 3. F Turn ignition switch ON. Connect CONSULT-II and select “DATA MONITOR” mode. Select “LOAD SIGNAL” and check indication under the following conditions. Condition Indication Lighting switch: ON at 2nd position ON Lighting switch: OFF OFF G H OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. I PBIB0103E 2. CHECK HEADLAMP SYSTEM J Refer to LT-5, "HEADLAMP (FOR USA)" , or LT-32, "HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -" . K >> INSPECTION END L M Revision: October 2004 EC-625 2005 Titan ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Component Description PFP:25320 UBS00KWD When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal). Refer to EC-29, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function. BBIA0087E CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00KWE Specification data are reference values. MONITOR ITEM CONDITION BRAKE SW 1 (ASCD brake switch) ● BRAKE SW 2 (Stop lamp switch) ● Revision: October 2004 Ignition switch: ON Ignition switch: ON SPECIFICATION Brake pedal: Fully released ON Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF Brake pedal: Fully released OFF Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON EC-626 2005 Titan ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Wiring Diagram UBS00KWF A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1724E Revision: October 2004 EC-627 2005 Titan ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. TERMINAL NO. WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION [Ignition switch: OFF] ● 101 R/WL Stop lamp switch Brake pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: OFF] ● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed [Ignition switch: ON] ● 108 BR/W ASCD brake switch Brake pedal: Fully released [Ignition switch: ON] ● Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Diagnostic Procedure DATA (DC Voltage) Approximately 0V BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V) Approximately 0V UBS00KWG 1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select “BRAKE SW 1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Check “BRAKE SW 1” indication under the following conditions. CONDITION INDICATION Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF Brake pedal: Fully released ON SEC011D Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the following conditions. CONDITION Brake pedal: Slightly depressed Brake pedal: Fully released VOLTAGE Approximately 0V Battery voltage MBIB0061E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. Revision: October 2004 EC-628 2005 Titan ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II A With CONSULT-II Check “BRAKE SW 2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode. CONDITION EC INDICATION Brake pedal: Fully released OFF Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON C D SEC013D Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions. CONDITION Brake pedal: Fully released Brake pedal: Slightly depressed E F VOLTAGE Approximately 0V G Battery voltage H I PBIB1537E OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 7. J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-629 2005 Titan ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 3. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0373E 4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0857E 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the following. Harness connectors M31, E152 ● Fuse block (J/B) connector M4 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse ● >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. Continuity should exist. 4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH Refer to EC-632, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch. Revision: October 2004 EC-630 2005 Titan ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 7. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. EC C D BBIA0373E E 3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT -II or tester. F Voltage: Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 8. G H WBIA0545E 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I Check the following. ● Harness connectors M31, E152 ● Fuse block (J/B) connector M60 ● 10A fuse ● Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery J K >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L 9. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram. M Continuity should exist. 3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 10. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 10. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH Refer to EC-632, "Component Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Replace stop lamp switch. Revision: October 2004 EC-631 2005 Titan ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . >> INSPECTION END Component Inspection UBS00KWH ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. Condition Brake pedal: Fully released. Brake pedal: Slightly depressed. Continuity Should exist. Should not exist. If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again. SEC023D STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions. Condition Brake pedal: Fully released. Brake pedal: Slightly depressed. Continuity Should not exist. Should exist. If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again. WBIA0546E Revision: October 2004 EC-632 2005 Titan ASCD INDICATOR ASCD INDICATOR Component Description PFP:24814 A UBS00F0Z ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. Lamp has two indicators, CRUISE and SET, and is integrated in combination meter. EC CRUISE indicator illuminates when MAIN switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicate that ASCD system is ready for operation. SET indicator illuminates when following conditions are met. C ● CRUISE indicator is illuminated. ● SET/COAST switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON while vehicle speed is within the range of ASCD setting. D SET indicator remains lit during ASCD control. Refer to EC-29, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function. CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode UBS00F10 E Specification data are reference value. MONITOR ITEM CRUISE LAMP SET LAMP CONDITION ● MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st time → at the 2nd time SPECIFICATION F ON → OFF ● Ignition switch: ON ● MAIN switch: ON ● ASCD: Operating ON ● When vehicle speed is between 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH) ● ASCD: Not operating OFF G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-633 2005 Titan ASCD INDICATOR Wiring Diagram UBS00F11 BBWA1717E Revision: October 2004 EC-634 2005 Titan ASCD INDICATOR Diagnostic Procedure UBS00F12 1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION A Check ASCD indicator under the following conditions. ASCD INDICATOR CRUISE LAMP SET LAMP CONDITION SPECIFICATION ● MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st time → at the 2nd time MAIN switch: ON ● ASCD: Operating ON When vehicle speed is between 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH) ● ASCD: Not operating OFF ● Ignition switch: ON ● ● EC ON → OFF C D OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 2. E 2. CHECK DTC Check that DTC U1000 or U1001 is not displayed. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-160, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" . 3. F G H CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Go to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" . I J 4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to EC-153, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . K >> INSPECTION END L M Revision: October 2004 EC-635 2005 Titan MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR Wiring Diagram PFP:24814 UBS00F13 BBWA1718E Revision: October 2004 EC-636 2005 Titan MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR A EC C D E F G H I J K L M BBWA1719E Revision: October 2004 EC-637 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Fuel Pressure Fuel pressure at idling kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) PFP:00030 UBS00F1F Approximately 350 (3.57, 51) Idle Speed and Ignition Timing UBS00F1G Target idle speed No-load* (in P or N position) 650±50 rpm Air conditioner: ON In P or N position 700 rpm or more Ignition timing In P or N position 15° ± 5° BTDC *: Under the following conditions: ● Air conditioner switch: OFF ● Electric load: OFF (Lights and heater fan) ● Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position Calculated Load Value UBS00F1H Condition Calculated load value % (Using CONSULT-II or GST) At idle 14.0 - 33.0 At 2,500 rpm 12.0 - 25.0 Mass Air Flow Sensor UBS00F1I Supply voltage Battery voltage (11 - 14V) Output voltage at idle 1.0 - 1.3V* 3.0 - 9.0 g·m/sec at idle* 9.0 - 28.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm* Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-II or GST) *: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no load. Intake Air Temperature Sensor UBS00F1J Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ 25 (77) 1.94 - 2.06 80 (176) 0.298 - 0.349 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Temperature °C (°F) UBS00F1K Resistance kΩ 20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00 90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 A/F Sensor 1 Heater UBS00F1L Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 2.3 - 4.3Ω Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater UBS00F1M Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 5.0 - 7.0Ω Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) UBS00F1N Refer to EC-287, "Component Inspection" . Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) UBS00F1O Refer to EC-294, "Component Inspection" . Throttle Control Motor UBS00F1P Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Revision: October 2004 Approximately 1 - 15Ω EC-638 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Injector UBS00F1Q A Resistance [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)] 11.1 - 14.5Ω Fuel Pump UBS00F1R EC Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 0.2 - 5.0Ω C D E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EC-639 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Revision: October 2004 EC-640 2005 Titan I BODY A B SECTION EXTERIOR & INTERIOR C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3 Service Notice .......................................................... 3 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3 PREPARATION ........................................................... 4 Special Service Tools ............................................... 4 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 4 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES..... 5 Work Flow ................................................................ 5 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW ..................................... 5 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE ....... 6 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS ........... 6 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE ...................................................... 6 REPAIR THE CAUSE ........................................... 6 CONFIRM THE REPAIR ....................................... 7 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ........... 7 INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................... 7 CENTER CONSOLE ............................................. 7 DOORS ................................................................. 7 TRUNK .................................................................. 8 SUNROOF/HEADLINING ..................................... 8 OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)..... 8 SEATS ................................................................... 8 UNDERHOOD ....................................................... 8 Diagnostic Worksheet .............................................. 9 CLIP AND FASTENER ..............................................11 Clip and Fastener ....................................................11 FRONT BUMPER ..................................................... 14 Removal and Installation ........................................ 14 STEEL BUMPER ................................................ 14 PLASTIC BUMPER ............................................. 16 REAR BUMPER ....................................................... 18 Removal and Installation ........................................ 18 FRONT GRILLE ........................................................ 20 Removal and Installation ........................................ 20 COWL TOP ............................................................... 21 Removal and Installation ........................................ 21 Revision: October 2004 FRONT FENDER ...................................................... 23 Removal and Installation ........................................ 23 FENDER PROTECTOR ............................................ 24 Removal and Installation ........................................ 24 FRONT ................................................................ 24 RUNNING BOARDS ................................................. 25 Removal and Installation ........................................ 25 MUDGUARD ............................................................. 27 Removal and Installation ........................................ 27 DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING ..................................... 28 Removal and Installation ........................................ 28 FRONT DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING .................. 29 REAR DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING .................... 29 SIDE GUARD MOLDING .......................................... 30 Removal and Installation ........................................ 30 REMOVAL ........................................................... 31 INSTALLATION ................................................... 31 DOOR FINISHER ...................................................... 32 Removal and Installation ........................................ 32 FRONT DOOR .................................................... 32 REAR DOOR - CREW CAB ................................ 33 REAR DOOR - KING CAB .................................. 34 BODY SIDE TRIM ..................................................... 36 Removal and Installation ........................................ 36 KING CAB ........................................................... 36 CREW CAB ......................................................... 37 LOWER DASH SIDE FINISHER ......................... 38 CENTER PILLAR LOWER FINISHER ................ 38 CENTER PILLAR UPPER FINISHER ................. 38 FRONT PILLAR FINISHER ................................. 38 KICKING PLATES ............................................... 38 DOOR PARTING SEALS .................................... 38 REAR .................................................................. 39 FLOOR TRIM ............................................................ 41 Removal and Installation ........................................ 41 HEADLINING ............................................................ 43 Removal and Installation ........................................ 43 BED RAILS AND TRIM ............................................. 47 Removal and Installation ........................................ 47 EI-1 2005 Titan F G H EI J K L M TAIL GATE FINISHER .............................................. 49 Removal and Installation ........................................ 49 Revision: October 2004 STORAGE BOX .........................................................50 Removal and Installation .........................................50 EI-2 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS Service Notice ● ● ● ● ● PFP:00001 A EIS004E7 When removing or installing various parts, place a cloth or padding on the vehicle body to prevent scratches. Handle trim, molding, instruments, grille, etc. carefully during removing or installing. Be careful not to soil or damage them. Apply sealing compound where necessary when installing parts. When applying sealing compound, be careful that the sealing compound does not protrude from parts. When replacing any metal parts (for example body outer panel, members, etc.), be sure to take rust prevention measures. B C D Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EIS004E8 E The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front F air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. G WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be per- H formed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air EI Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connecJ tors. K L M Revision: October 2004 EI-3 2005 Titan PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 EIS004E9 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-39570) Chassis ear Locating the noise SBT839 — (J-43980) NISSAN Squeak and Rattle kit Repairing the cause of noise SBT840 Commercial Service Tools EIS004EA (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description (J-39565) Engine ear Locating the noise SIIA0995E Revision: October 2004 EI-4 2005 Titan SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Work Flow PFP:00000 A EIS004EB B C D E F SBT842 G CUSTOMER INTERVIEW Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diag- H nostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any customer's comments; refer to EI-9, "Diagnostic Worksheet" . This information is necessary to duplicate the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. EI ● The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur). ● If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer J is concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer. ● After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when K defining the noise. ● Squeak —(Like tennis shoes on a clean floor) Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surL faces = higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping. ● Creak—(Like walking on an old wooden floor) Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch dependent on materials/often brought on by activity. M ● Rattle—(Like shaking a baby rattle) Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing clip or fastener/incorrect clearance. ● Knock —(Like a knock on a door) Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action. ● Tick—(Like a clock second hand) Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver action or road conditions. ● Thump—(Heavy, muffled knock noise) Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity. ● Buzz—(Like a bumble bee) Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact. ● Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer. ● Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level. Revision: October 2004 EI-5 2005 Titan SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair. If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following: 1) Close a door. 2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from. 3) Rev the engine. 4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”. 5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model). 6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer. ● Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs. ● If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the vehicle body. CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related to that concern or symptom. If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise. LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE 1. 2. ● ● ● ● ● Narrow down the noise to a general area.To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool (Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanic's stethoscope). Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by: removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from. Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise. tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise. Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only temporarily. feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the noise. placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise. looking for loose components and contact marks. Refer to EI-7, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting" . REPAIR THE CAUSE If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely. ● If the cause is insufficient clearance between components: – separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible. – insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized NISSAN Parts Department. CAUTION: Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged. Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be ordered separately as needed. URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick] Insulates connectors, harness, etc. 76268-9E005: 100×135 mm (3.94×5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60×85 mm (2.36×3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) INSULATOR (Foam blocks) Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel. 73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in) INSULATOR (Light foam block) ● Revision: October 2004 EI-6 2005 Titan SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES 80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30×50 mm (1.18×1.97 in) FELT CLOTH TAPE Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications. 68370-4B000: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll. The following materials not found in the kit can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles. UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications. SILICONE GREASE Used instead of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit. Note: Will only last a few months. SILICONE SPRAY Use when grease cannot be applied. DUCT TAPE Use to eliminate movement. CONFIRM THE REPAIR A B C D E Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet. Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting EIS004EC F Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information. INSTRUMENT PANEL G Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between: 1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel H 2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing 3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish 4. Instrument panel to windshield EI 5. Instrument panel mounting pins 6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter 7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint J These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harK ness. CAUTION: Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will L not be able to recheck the repair. CENTER CONSOLE Components to pay attention to include: 1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher 2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C 3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console. M DOORS Pay attention to the: 1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise 2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher 3. Wiring harnesses tapping 4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise. Revision: October 2004 EI-7 2005 Titan SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES TRUNK Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner. In addition look for: 1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment 2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment 3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together 4. A loose license plate or bracket Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise. SUNROOF/HEADLINING Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following: 1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise 2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder 3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape. OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR) Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage. In addition look for: 1. Loose harness or harness connectors. 2. Front console map/reading lamp lens loose. 3. Loose screws at console attachment points. SEATS When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the noise. Cause of seat noise include: 1. Headrest rods and holder 2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame 3. The rear seatback lock and bracket These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component or applying urethane tape to the contact area. UNDERHOOD Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then transmitted into the passenger compartment. Causes of transmitted underhood noise include: 1. Any component mounted to the engine wall 2. Components that pass through the engine wall 3. Engine wall mounts and connectors 4. Loose radiator mounting pins 5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment 6. Hood striker out of adjustment These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or insulating the component causing the noise. Revision: October 2004 EI-8 2005 Titan SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Diagnostic Worksheet EIS004ED A B C D E F G H EI J K L M LIWA0276E Revision: October 2004 EI-9 2005 Titan SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES SBT844 Revision: October 2004 EI-10 2005 Titan CLIP AND FASTENER CLIP AND FASTENER Clip and Fastener PFP:76906 A EIS004EE B C D E F G H EI J K L M SIIA0315E Revision: October 2004 EI-11 2005 Titan CLIP AND FASTENER SIIA0316E Revision: October 2004 EI-12 2005 Titan CLIP AND FASTENER A B C D E F G H EI J K L M SIIA0317E Revision: October 2004 EI-13 2005 Titan FRONT BUMPER FRONT BUMPER Removal and Installation PFP:F2022 EIS004EF STEEL BUMPER WIIA0255E 1. 2. 3. 1. Front bumper side bracket RH 2. Front bumper stay RH 3. Front bumper side finisher RH 4. Front bumper assembly 5. Front valance 6. Lower intake grille 7. Fog lamp opening finisher (if equipped) 8. Skid plate 9. Access cover 10. Fog lamp assembly (if equipped) 11. Front bumper side finisher LH 12. Front bumper stay LH 13. Front bumper side bracket LH 14. Front bumper bracket LH 15. Front bumper bracket RH Remove lower intake grille. Remove radiator grille. Refer to EI-20, "FRONT GRILLE" . Remove front valance. Revision: October 2004 EI-14 2005 Titan FRONT BUMPER 4. Remove engine underside cover. 5. Remove strut braces LH and RH. 6. Disconnect fog lamp harnesses, if equipped. 7. Remove front bumper RH and LH side finishers. 8. Remove front bumper assembly. 9. Remove front bumper brackets LH and RH. 10. Remove front bumper stays LH and RH. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. A B C D E F G H EI J K L M Revision: October 2004 EI-15 2005 Titan FRONT BUMPER PLASTIC BUMPER LIIA1250E 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. Front bumper side bracket RH 2. Front bumper stay RH 3. Front bumper bracket RH 4. Retainer bracket 5. Energy absorber 6. Fastener 7. Plastic fascia assembly 8. Skid plate 9. Access cover 10. Fog lamp opening finisher (if equipped) 11. Fog lamp assembly (if equipped) 12. Plastic clip 13. Front bumper bracket LH 14. Front bumper stay LH 15. Front bumper side bracket LH Remove radiator grille. Refer to EI-20, "FRONT GRILLE" . Remove skid plate. Disconnect fog lamp harnesses, if equipped. Remove screws and fasteners and remove plastic fascia assembly. ● Remove fog lamp assembly, if equipped, from plastic fascia assembly. Revision: October 2004 EI-16 2005 Titan FRONT BUMPER Remove fog lamp opening finisher, if equipped, from plastic fascia assembly. 5. Remove clips and remove energy absorber from retainer bracket. 6. Remove retainer bracket. 7. Remove front bumper side brackets LH and RH. 8. Remove front bumper brackets LH and RH. 9. Remove front bumper stays LH and RH. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● A B C D E F G H EI J K L M Revision: October 2004 EI-17 2005 Titan REAR BUMPER REAR BUMPER Removal and Installation PFP:H5022 EIS004EG LIIA1165E 1. Rear bumper reinforcement 4. License lamp harness 7. Carriage bolt 10. License lamp 2. Sonar sensor harness 3. Sonar sensor 5. Upper step pad 6. License lamp clip 8. Rear chrome bumper 9. Sonar sensor retainer 11. License lamp washer 12. Lower step pad 13. Tow hitch (if equipped) NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the tow hitch to service the rear bumper. 1. Disconnect harness from tow hitch, if equipped. 2. Remove bolts on each side of tow hitch and remove tow hitch, if equipped. 3. Disconnect sonar sensor harness connector, if equipped. Revision: October 2004 EI-18 2005 Titan REAR BUMPER Disconnect sonar sensors from retainers. 4. Disconnect license lamp harness. 5. Remove clips from license lamps and remove lamps. 6. Release clips and remove upper step pads. 7. Remove rear chrome bumper. 8. Disconnect harness clips from black steel bumper. 9. Remove rear bumper reinforcement. 10. Remove sonar sensor retainers from rear chrome bumper, if equipped. 11. Remove sonar sensors and harness from rear chrome bumper, if equipped. ● Disconnect sonar sensors from harness. 12. Remove license lamp harness from rear chrome bumper. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Apply sealant to clips securing upper step pad during installation. ● A B C D E F G H EI J K L M Revision: October 2004 EI-19 2005 Titan FRONT GRILLE FRONT GRILLE Removal and Installation PFP:62310 EIS004EH LIIA0996E 1. Plastic clip 2. Plastic clip 3. Grommet 4. Front bumper filler panel RH 5. Front grille 6. Front bumper filler panel LH 1. Release plastic clips and remove front grille. 2. Remove LH and RH front bumper filler panels. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 EI-20 2005 Titan COWL TOP COWL TOP Removal and Installation PFP:66100 A EIS004EI B C D E F G H EI J K L LIIA1288E 1. 1. 2. 3. 4. Grommet 2. Plastic clip 3. Cowl top RH 4. Cowl top seal 5. Drain tube 6. Cowl top extension bracket RH 7. Cowl top extension 8. Cowl top extension bracket LH 9. Cowl top LH Remove right and left wiper arms. Refer to WW-31, "Removal and Installation of Front Wiper Arms, Adjustment of Wiper Arms Stop Location" . Remove cowl top seal. ● Release plastics clips on cowl top seal which go through cowl tops LH and RH and cowl top extension. Remove cowl top covers LH and RH. ● Release plastic clips under cowl top covers attaching to grommets on hoodledge. ● Disconnect washer tubes from washer nozzles. Remove cowl top extension brackets LH and RH. ● Disconnect wiper motor harness from cowl top extension bracket LH. ● Cowl top extension bracket LH must be removed prior to removal of wiper motor and connecting rod assembly. Revision: October 2004 EI-21 2005 Titan M COWL TOP 5. Remove wiper motor and connecting rod linkage. Refer to WW-31, "Removal and Installation of Wiper Motor and Linkage" . 6. Disconnect windshield washer tube. Refer to WW-33, "Washer Tube Layout" . 7. Remove A/C low-pressure pipe bracket from cowl top extension. Refer to MTC-112, "REFRIGERANT LINES" . 8. Remove drain tube from each side of cowl top extension. 9. Remove cowl top extension. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 EI-22 2005 Titan FRONT FENDER FRONT FENDER Removal and Installation PFP:63100 A EIS004EJ B C D E F G H EI WIIA0302E 1. Remove the front mudguards (if equipped). Refer toEI-27, "MUDGUARD" . 2. Remove headlamps. Refer to LT-31, "Removal and Installation" . 3. Remove fender protector. Refer to EI-24, "FENDER PROTECTOR" . 4. Remove hood stay. Refer to BL-12, "HOOD" . 5. Remove front fender. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. J K L M Revision: October 2004 EI-23 2005 Titan FENDER PROTECTOR FENDER PROTECTOR Removal and Installation PFP:63840 EIS004EK FRONT LIIA1008E 1. Fender protector LH 2. Pushpin 4. Screw 5. Grommet 3. Plastic clip 1. Remove front mudguard. Refer to EI-27, "MUDGUARD" . 2. Remove screws. 3. Remove plastic clips. 4. Remove pushpins. 5. Remove front fender protector. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 EI-24 2005 Titan RUNNING BOARDS RUNNING BOARDS Removal and Installation PFP:96110 A EIS004EL B C D E F G H EI J K L M LIIA1171E Revision: October 2004 EI-25 2005 Titan RUNNING BOARDS 1. Running board bracket 2. Weld stud 3. End cap 4. End cap reinforcement 5. Plastic clip 6. Step pad 7. Running board 1. 2. Remove bolts and remove running board from running board brackets. Remove screw and remove end cap. ● Remove reinforcement from end cap. 3. Release clips and remove step pad from running board. 4. Remove nuts and bolts and remove running board brackets. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 EI-26 2005 Titan MUDGUARD MUDGUARD Removal and Installation PFP:63854 A EIS004EM B C D E F G LIIA1631E NOTE: Crew Cab shown King Cab similar. H EI J K L M Revision: October 2004 EI-27 2005 Titan DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING Removal and Installation PFP:82820 EIS004EN WIIA0256E Revision: October 2004 EI-28 2005 Titan DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING 1. Front door outside molding LH 2. Screw 3. Hole cover 4. Front door LH 5. Rear door outside molding LH 6. Rear door-Crew cab A FRONT DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING Removal and Installation B 1. 2. 3. C Open window fully. Remove door mirror. Refer to GW-121, "DOOR MIRROR" . Remove molding. ● Remove hole cover and remove screw. ● Lift molding from rear side. ● Disconnect clips from flange. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. D REAR DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING Removal and Installation E 1. 2. Open window fully. Remove molding. ● Remove hole cover and remove screw. ● Lift molding from rear side. ● Disconnect clips from flange. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. F G H EI J K L M Revision: October 2004 EI-29 2005 Titan SIDE GUARD MOLDING SIDE GUARD MOLDING Removal and Installation PFP:76840 EIS004EO LIIA1172E Revision: October 2004 EI-30 2005 Titan SIDE GUARD MOLDING REMOVAL CAUTION: Never apply tack-paper adhesive remover to body panel surface finished with lacquer-based paints. ● Original side guard molding is affixed to body panel with double-faced adhesive tape. 1. Heat molding to between 30° and 40°C (86° to 104°F) with a heat gun. 2. Raise end of molding and cut away tape to remove molding. Remove all traces of tape. A INSTALLATION C On vehicles coated with Hard Clear Coat, use double-faced 3M adhesive tape Product No. 4210 or equivalent, after priming with 3M primer Product No. N200, C-100 or equivalent. ● The repair parts are also affixed with double-faced adhesive tape. ● To re-use existing molding, clean all traces of double sided tape from the molding and apply new doublefaced tape to the molding. 1. Clean the panel surface with isopropyl alcohol or equivalent to degrease the surface. 2. Heat the panel and molding tape surface to 30° to 40°C (86° to 104°F). 3. Remove the backing sheet from the tape surface. ● Align the locating pin into the hole in the outer door. ● Continue aligning the pins into their corresponding holes in the outer door during installation. 4. Press ends by hand and use a roller to apply 5 kg-f (11 lbs-f) to press molding to door surface. ● Apply even pressure along molding to insure proper wet out. CAUTION: To secure contact, do not wash vehicle for 24 hours after installation. B ● D E F G H EI J K L M Revision: October 2004 EI-31 2005 Titan DOOR FINISHER DOOR FINISHER Removal and Installation PFP:80900 EIS004EP FRONT DOOR LIIA1036E 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1. Power window switch assembly (if equipped) 2. Armrest 3. Front door finisher LH 4. Pull handle cover 5. Pull handle escutcheon 6. Cap 7. Door lock knob 8. Step lamp 9. Seat memory switch (if equipped) Remove power window switch assembly (if equipped). ● Disconnect harness connectors. Remove pull handle cover. ● Remove screws behind pull handle cover. Remove cap from pull handle escutcheon and remove screw. Remove pull handle escutcheon. ● Remove screws behind pull handle escutcheon. Remove armrest. ● Remove screw behind armrest. Remove memory seat switch (if equipped). Revision: October 2004 EI-32 2005 Titan DOOR FINISHER Disconnect harness connector. 7. Remove step lamp. ● Disconnect harness connector. 8. Remove door finisher and disconnect lock cable and handle cable from door handle assembly. Refer to BL-127, "FRONT DOOR LOCK" . 9. Remove door lock knob. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● REAR DOOR - CREW CAB A B C D E F G H EI J K L M LIIA1038E 1. 2. 3. 1. Power window switch assembly (if equipped) 2. Armrest 3. Rear door finisher LH 4. Pull handle cover 5. Cap 6. Pull handle escutcheon 7. Door lock knob 8. Step lamp 9. Rear door tweeter Remove power window switch assembly (if equipped). ● Disconnect harness connector. Remove pull handle cover. ● Remove screws behind pull handle cover. Remove cap from pull handle escutcheon and remove screw. Revision: October 2004 EI-33 2005 Titan DOOR FINISHER 4. Remove pull handle escutcheon. ● Remove screws behind pull handle escutcheon. 5. Remove armrest. ● Remove screws behind armrest. 6. Remove step lamp. ● Disconnect harness connector. 7. Remove door finisher and disconnect lock cable and handle cable from door handle assembly. Refer to BL-130, "REAR DOOR LOCK" . ● Disconnect speaker connector. 8. Remove door lock knob. 9. Remove rear door tweeter. Refer to AV-66, "Removal and Installation of Rear Door Tweeter" . Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REAR DOOR - KING CAB LIIA1173E 1. 1. Rear door LH 4. Seat belt retractor cover 2. Rear door finisher 3. Armrest Remove upper and lower seat belt anchor bolts. Refer to SB-8, "Removal and Installation of Rear Seat Belt" . Revision: October 2004 EI-34 2005 Titan DOOR FINISHER 2. Release clips and remove seat belt retractor cover. 3. Remove armrest. 4. Remove screws behind armrest. 5. Release clips and remove rear door finisher. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. A B C D E F G H EI J K L M Revision: October 2004 EI-35 2005 Titan BODY SIDE TRIM BODY SIDE TRIM Removal and Installation PFP:76913 EIS004EQ KING CAB CAUTION: ● Wrap the tip of flat-bladed screwdriver with a cloth when removing metal clips from finishers. ● When removing or installing body side welts, do not allow butyl seal to come in contact with pillar finisher. LIIA1629E 1. Door welt 2. Rear door parting seal 4. Front kicking plate 5. Lower dash side finisher 6. Front door parting seal 7. Front pillar assist grip 8. Front pillar finisher 9. Rear body side welt Revision: October 2004 EI-36 3. Rear kicking plate 2005 Titan BODY SIDE TRIM CREW CAB CAUTION: ● Wrap the tip of flat-bladed screwdriver with a cloth when removing metal clips from finishers. ● When removing or installing body side welts, do not allow butyl seal to come in contact with pillar finisher. A B C D E F G H EI J K L M LIIA1605E 1. Center pillar upper finisher 2. Center pillar assist grip 4. 7. Rear door parting seal 5. Front kicking plate 8. 11. 10. Front door welt Revision: October 2004 3. Rear door welt Rear kicking plate 6. Center pillar lower finisher Lower dash side finisher 9. Front door parting seal Front pillar assist grip 12. Front pillar finisher EI-37 2005 Titan BODY SIDE TRIM LOWER DASH SIDE FINISHER Removal and Installation 1. Remove push pin from lower dash side finisher. 2. Remove front kicking plate. Refer to EI-38, "KICKING PLATES" . 3. Remove lower dash side finisher and front kicking plate together. 4. Remove lower dash side finisher from front kicking plate. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CENTER PILLAR LOWER FINISHER Removal and Installation 1. Remove seat belt lower anchor. Refer to SB-3, "Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt" . ● On RH side, disconnect seat belt tension sensor. 2. Remove front and rear kicking plates. Refer to EI-38, "KICKING PLATES" . 3. Remove center pillar lower finisher. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CENTER PILLAR UPPER FINISHER Removal and Installation 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove front and rear door welts. Remove front and rear kicking plates. Refer to EI-38, "KICKING PLATES" . Remove center pillar lower finisher. Refer to EI-38, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER FINISHER" . Remove seat belt shoulder anchor and D ring. Refer to SB-3, "Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt" . 5. Remove assist grip. 6. Remove center pillar upper finisher. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. FRONT PILLAR FINISHER Removal and Installation 1. Remove assist grip. 2. Remove front pillar finisher. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. KICKING PLATES Removal and Installation Release clips and remove front and/or rear kicking plates. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. DOOR PARTING SEALS Removal and Installation 1. Open front and/or rear doors fully. 2. Release clips and remove parting seals. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 EI-38 2005 Titan BODY SIDE TRIM REAR CAUTION: ● Wrap the tip of flat-bladed screwdriver with a cloth when removing metal clips from finishers. A B C D E F G H EI J K L M WIIA0594E Revision: October 2004 EI-39 2005 Titan BODY SIDE TRIM 1. Drafter duct (Crew Cab) 2. Drafter duct cover (Crew Cab) 3. Rear upper finisher RH 4. Rear panel (Crew Cab) 5. Rear lower finisher RH 6. Push pin 7. Nut 8. Center anchor bracket cover 9. Drafter duct cover (King Cab) 10. Drafter duct (King Cab) 11. Rear lower finisher LH 12. Plastic clip 13. Metal clip 14. Rear panel (King Cab) 15. Rear upper finisher LH 16. Rear panel upper finisher 1. Remove rear seats. Refer to SE-100, "REAR SEAT" . 2. Remove rear kicking plates. Refer to EI-38, "KICKING PLATES" . 3. Remove seat belt anchor bolts. Refer to SB-8, "Removal and Installation of Rear Seat Belt" . 4. Remove seatback latch strikers. Refer to SE-100, "REAR SEAT" . 5. Remove rear lower finishers LH/RH. 6. Remove rear upper finishers LH/RH. 7. Remove center anchor bracket cover, if equipped. 8. Remove rear panel upper finisher and rear panel. 9. Remover drafter duct cover and drafter duct. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 EI-40 2005 Titan FLOOR TRIM FLOOR TRIM Removal and Installation PFP:74902 A EIS004ER B C D E F G H EI J K L M LIIA1184E 1. 2. 1. Push pin 4. Crew Cab carpet 2. King Cab carpet 3. Floor mat hook Remove front seats. Refer to SE-91, "FRONT SEAT" . Remove rear seats. Refer to SE-100, "REAR SEAT" . Revision: October 2004 EI-41 2005 Titan FLOOR TRIM 3. Remove lower seat belt anchors. Refer to SB-3, "SEAT BELTS" . 4. Remove lower body side trim. Refer to EI-36, "BODY SIDE TRIM" . 5. Remove center console, if equipped. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" . 6. Remove floor mat hooks from front carpet. 7. Remove carpet. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 EI-42 2005 Titan HEADLINING HEADLINING Removal and Installation PFP:73910 A EIS004ES B C D E F G H EI J K L M WIIA0354E Revision: October 2004 EI-43 2005 Titan HEADLINING 1. Headlining (without sunroof) 2. Sunvisor holder 3. Sunvisor assembly standard LH 4. Sunvisor assembly standard RH 5. Assist grip bracket 6. Headlining (with sunroof) 7. Dual sun visor assembly LH 8. Front roof console 9. Extended sun visor assembly LH 10. Extended sun visor assembly RH 11. Dual sun visor assembly RH 12. Rear storage bin or DVD display 13. Rear roof console 14. Rear roof console finisher 15. Lamp assembly 16. Rear audio control assembly (if equipped) 17. Rear roof console bracket 18. Assist grip 19. Room lamp 20. CHMSL access cover Revision: October 2004 EI-44 2005 Titan HEADLINING A B C D E F G H EI J K L M WIIA0355E 1. Headlining (standard) 2. Sunvisor assembly standard LH 3. 4. Headlining (optional) 5. Dual sun visor assembly LH 6. Extended sun visor assembly LH 7. Extended sun visor assembly RH 8. Sunvisor holder 9. Dual sun visor assembly RH Revision: October 2004 EI-45 Sunvisor assembly standard RH 2005 Titan HEADLINING 10. Assist grip 11. 13. Center roof console 14. Plastic clip CHMSL access cover 16. Room lamp 12. Striker cover 15. Coat hook CAUTION: Disconnect both terminals from battery in advance. 1. Remove body side trim. Refer to EI-36, "BODY SIDE TRIM" . 2. Remove rear trim. Refer to EI-36, "BODY SIDE TRIM" . 3. Remove sun visor assemblies. 4. Remove sun visor holders. 5. Remove front roof console (if equipped). ● Disconnect harnesses. 6. Remove rear roof console (if equipped). ● Disconnect harnesses. 7. Remove center roof console (if equipped). ● Disconnect harnesses. 8. Remove assist grips. 9. Remove striker covers (if equipped). 10. Remove room lamp. 11. Remove headlining. ● Disconnect harnesses. 12. Remove rear audio control assembly from rear roof console (if equipped). ● Disconnect harness. 13. Remove lamp assemblies from roof console. ● Disconnect harnesses. 14. Remove rear roof console bracket (if equipped). 15. Remove center roof console front bracket (if equipped). 16. Remove assist grip brackets from roof (if equipped). Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 EI-46 2005 Titan BED RAILS AND TRIM BED RAILS AND TRIM Removal and Installation PFP:84999 A EIS004ET B C D E F G H EI J K L M LIIA1239E Revision: October 2004 EI-47 2005 Titan BED RAILS AND TRIM 1. Header top trim 4. Tiedown cleat 7. Bed side front tiedown rail LH 2. Header tiedown rail 3. Rope hook 5. Floor rail cover LH 6. Floor rail LH 8. Top side rail trim LH 9. Bed side rear tiedown rail LH 10. Floor rail RH 11. Floor rail cover RH 13. Top side rail trim RH 14. Bed side front tiedown rail RH 12. Bed side rear tiedown rail RH 1. Remove floor rail covers. 2. Remove tiedown cleats. 3. Remove floor rails LH/RH. 4. Remove bed side front and rear tiedown rails LH/RH. 5. Remove rope hooks. 6. Remove header tiedown rail. 7. Release clips and remove header top trim. 8. Release clips and remove top side rail trim LH/RH. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 EI-48 2005 Titan TAIL GATE FINISHER TAIL GATE FINISHER Removal and Installation PFP:93486 A EIS004EU B C D E F G H EI J K L M LIIA1238E 1. Tailgate protector (if equipped) 4. Tailgate 2. Tailgate cover plate 3. Tailgate top protector 1. Release clips and remove tailgate top protector. 2. Remove screws and remove tailgate protector (if equipped) and tailgate cover plate. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 EI-49 2005 Titan STORAGE BOX STORAGE BOX Removal and Installation PFP:97002 EIS004EV WIIA0352E 1. Surround assembly Front outer bracket 3. Storage box 4. Door stay assembly 5. Bulb seal 6. Outer seal 7. Key cylinder lid assembly 8. Key cylinder 9. Storage box door 10. Key cylinder retainer 1. 2. 3. 4. 2. 11. Latch assembly 12. Inner door cover 13. Striker 14. Door seal 15. Shelf bin 16. Shelf bin mat 17. Rear outer bracket 18. Back stop Remove rear mudguard (if equipped). Refer to EI-27, "MUDGUARD" . Remove bolts, release clips and remove storage box assembly. Remove shelf bin and mat from storage box. Remove storage box door from hinge. Revision: October 2004 EI-50 2005 Titan STORAGE BOX Remove door stay assembly. 5. Remove inner door cover. 6. Remove nuts and remove latch assembly from door. ● Remove key cylinder. 7. Remove outer seal and key cylinder lid assembly from door. 8. Remove bulb seal and door seal from storage box. 9. Remove storage box from surround assembly. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● A B C D E F G H EI J K L M Revision: October 2004 EI-51 2005 Titan STORAGE BOX Revision: October 2004 EI-52 2005 Titan B ENGINE A EM SECTION ENGINE MECHANICAL C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3 Precautions for Drain Engine Coolant ...................... 3 Precautions for Disconnecting Fuel Piping .............. 3 Precautions for Removal and Disassembly ............. 3 Precautions for Inspection, Repair and Replacement ......................................................................... 3 Precautions for Assembly and Installation ............... 3 Parts Requiring Angular Tightening ......................... 3 Precautions for Liquid Gasket .................................. 4 REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING .......... 4 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE..... 4 PREPARATION ........................................................... 5 Special Service Tools ............................................... 5 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 7 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 9 NVH Troubleshooting —Engine Noise ..................... 9 Use the Chart Below to Help You Find the Cause of the Symptom. ..................................................... 10 ENGINE ROOM COVER ...........................................11 Removal and Installation .........................................11 REMOVAL ............................................................11 INSTALLATION ....................................................11 DRIVE BELTS ........................................................... 12 Checking Drive Belts .............................................. 12 Tension Adjustment ................................................ 12 Removal and Installation ........................................ 12 DRIVE BELT ....................................................... 12 INSTALLATION ................................................... 13 Drive Belt Auto Tensioner and Idler Pulley ............. 13 REMOVAL ........................................................... 13 INSTALLATION ................................................... 13 AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT ............................... 14 Removal and Installation ........................................ 14 REMOVAL ........................................................... 14 INSTALLATION ................................................... 14 CHANGING AIR CLEANER FILTER ................... 14 Revision: October 2004 INTAKE MANIFOLD ................................................. 15 Removal and Installation ........................................ 15 REMOVAL ........................................................... 15 INSTALLATION ................................................... 17 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 18 EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST .......................................................................... 19 Removal and Installation ........................................ 19 REMOVAL ........................................................... 19 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 20 INSTALLATION ................................................... 21 OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER ................................. 22 Removal and Installation ........................................ 22 REMOVAL ........................................................... 22 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 23 INSTALLATION ................................................... 24 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 25 IGNITION COIL ......................................................... 26 Removal and Installation ........................................ 26 REMOVAL ........................................................... 26 INSTALLATION ................................................... 26 SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE) ............. 27 Removal and Installation ........................................ 27 REMOVAL ........................................................... 27 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 27 INSTALLATION ................................................... 28 FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE ........................ 29 Removal and Installation ........................................ 29 REMOVAL ........................................................... 29 INSTALLATION ................................................... 30 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 31 ROCKER COVER ..................................................... 33 Removal and Installation ........................................ 33 REMOVAL ........................................................... 33 INSTALLATION ................................................... 34 EM-1 2005 Titan F G H I J K L M TIMING CHAIN .......................................................... 35 Removal and Installation ........................................ 35 REMOVAL ........................................................... 36 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ........................ 38 INSTALLATION .................................................... 39 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 43 CAMSHAFT ............................................................... 44 Removal and Installation ........................................ 44 REMOVAL ........................................................... 44 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ........................ 47 INSTALLATION .................................................... 49 Valve Clearance ...................................................... 52 INSPECTION ....................................................... 52 ADJUSTMENT .................................................... 54 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 56 OIL SEAL .................................................................. 57 Removal and Installation of Valve Oil Seal ............. 57 REMOVAL ........................................................... 57 INSTALLATION .................................................... 57 Removal and Installation of Front Oil Seal ............. 58 REMOVAL ........................................................... 58 INSTALLATION .................................................... 58 Removal and Installation of Rear Oil Seal .............. 58 REMOVAL ........................................................... 58 INSTALLATION .................................................... 59 CYLINDER HEAD ..................................................... 60 On-Vehicle Service ................................................. 60 CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE ......... 60 Removal and Installation ........................................ 61 REMOVAL ........................................................... 61 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ........................ 62 INSTALLATION .................................................... 62 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 63 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 64 DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 64 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 65 Inspection After Disassembly ................................. 66 CYLINDER HEAD DISTORTION ........................ 66 VALVE DIMENSIONS .......................................... 67 VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE .............................. 67 VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT ......................... 67 VALVE SEAT CONTACT ..................................... 69 VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT ........................... 70 VALVE SPRING SQUARENESS ......................... 71 VALVE SPRING DIMENSIONS AND VALVE SPRING PRESSURE LOAD ............................... 71 ENGINE ASSEMBLY ................................................ 72 Removal and Installation ........................................ 72 REMOVAL ........................................................... 72 INSTALLATION .................................................... 75 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 75 Revision: October 2004 CYLINDER BLOCK ...................................................76 Disassembly and Assembly ....................................76 DISASSEMBLY ....................................................77 ASSEMBLY ..........................................................80 How to Select Piston and Bearing ..........................85 DESCRIPTION ....................................................85 HOW TO SELECT PISTON .................................85 HOW TO SELECT CONNECTING ROD BEARING .......................................................................86 HOW TO SELECT MAIN BEARING ....................88 Inspection After Disassembly ..................................92 CRANKSHAFT END PLAY ..................................92 CONNECTING ROD SIDE CLEARANCE ...........92 PISTON AND PISTON PIN CLEARANCE ...........92 PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE .....................93 PISTON RING END GAP ....................................93 CONNECTING ROD BEND AND TORSION .......94 CONNECTING ROD BEARING (BIG END) ........94 CONNECTING ROD BUSHING OIL CLEARANCE (SMALL END) ...........................................94 CYLINDER BLOCK DISTORTION ......................95 MAIN BEARING HOUSING INSIDE DIAMETER...96 PISTON TO CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE ...96 CRANKSHAFT JOURNAL DIAMETER ...............97 CRANKSHAFT PIN DIAMETER ..........................98 OUT-OF-ROUND AND TAPER OF CRANKSHAFT .................................................................98 CRANKSHAFT RUNOUT ....................................98 CONNECTING ROD BEARING OIL CLEARANCE ...................................................................98 MAIN BEARING OIL CLEARANCE .....................99 CRUSH HEIGHT OF MAIN BEARING .............. 100 CRUSH HEIGHT OF CONNECTING ROD BEARING ........................................................... 100 MAIN BEARING CAP BOLT DIAMETER ........... 100 CONNECTING ROD BOLT DIAMETER ............ 101 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 102 Standard and Limit ................................................ 102 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ........................... 102 DRIVE BELTS .................................................... 102 EXHAUST MANIFOLD ...................................... 102 CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT BEARING ......... 103 CYLINDER HEAD .............................................. 105 CYLINDER BLOCK ............................................ 107 PISTON, PISTON RING AND PISTON PIN ...... 108 CONNECTING ROD .......................................... 109 CRANKSHAFT ................................................... 110 MAIN BEARING ................................................. 112 EM-2 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS Precautions for Drain Engine Coolant PFP:00001 A EBS00KLZ Drain engine coolant when engine is cooled. Precautions for Disconnecting Fuel Piping ● ● ● Before starting work, make sure no fire or spark producing items are in the work area. Release fuel pressure before disconnecting and disassembly. After disconnecting pipes, plug openings to stop fuel leakage. Precautions for Removal and Disassembly ● ● ● ● ● EM EBS00KM0 C EBS00KM1 When instructed to use special service tools, use the specified tools. Always be careful to work safely, avoid forceful or uninstructed operations. Exercise maximum care to avoid damage to mating or sliding surfaces. Cover openings of engine system with tape or the equivalent, if necessary, to seal out foreign materials. Mark and arrange disassembly parts in an organized way for easy troubleshooting and assembly. When loosening nuts and bolts, as a basic rule, start with the one furthest outside, then the one diagonally opposite, and so on. If the order of loosening is specified, do exactly as specified. Power tools may be used where noted in the step. Precautions for Inspection, Repair and Replacement EBS00KM2 Before repairing or replacing, thoroughly inspect parts. Inspect new replacement parts in the same way, and replace if necessary. Precautions for Assembly and Installation ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● – – – – ● ● ● EBS00KM4 For final tightening of the following engine parts use Tool: Tool number : KV10112100 (BT-8653-A) Cylinder head bolts Main bearing cap bolts Connecting rod cap bolts Crankshaft pulley bolt (No angle wrench is required as the bolt flange is provided with notches for angle tightening) Do not use a torque value for final tightening. The torque value for these parts are for a preliminary step. Ensure thread and seat surfaces are clean and lightly coated with engine oil. Revision: October 2004 EM-3 E F G H EBS00KM3 Use torque wrench to tighten bolts or nuts to specification. When tightening nuts and bolts, as a basic rule, equally tighten in several different steps starting with the ones in center, then ones on inside and outside diagonally in this order. If the order of tightening is specified, do exactly as specified. Replace with new gasket, packing, oil seal or O-ring. Thoroughly wash, clean, and air-blow each part. Carefully check engine oil or engine coolant passages for any restriction and blockage. Avoid damaging sliding or mating surfaces. Completely remove foreign materials such as cloth lint or dust. Before assembly, oil sliding surfaces well. Release air within route when refilling after draining engine coolant. Before starting engine, apply fuel pressure to fuel lines with turning ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). Then make sure that there are no leaks at fuel line connections. After repairing, start engine and increase engine speed to check engine coolant, fuel, oil, and exhaust systems for leakage. Parts Requiring Angular Tightening D 2005 Titan I J K L M PRECAUTIONS Precautions for Liquid Gasket EBS00KM5 REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING ● After removing the bolts and nuts, separate the mating surface and remove the old liquid gasket sealing using Tool. Tool number ● ● : KV1011100 (J-37228) CAUTION: Do not damage the mating surfaces. Tap the seal cutter to insert it. In areas where the Tool is difficult to use, lightly tap to slide it. WBIA0566E LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. Remove the old liquid gasket adhering to the gasket application surface and the mating surface using suitable tool. ● Remove the liquid gasket completely from the groove of the liquid gasket application surface, bolts, and bolt holes. Thoroughly clean the mating surfaces and remove adhering moisture, grease and foreign material. PBIC0003E 3. Attach the liquid gasket tube to the Tool. Tool number 4. : WS39930000 ( — ) Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . Apply the liquid gasket without breaks to the specified location with the specified dimensions. WBIA0567E If there is a groove for the liquid gasket application, apply the liquid gasket to the groove. ● As for the bolt holes, normally apply the liquid gasket inside the holes. If specified in the procedure, it should also be applied outside the holes. ● Within five minutes of liquid gasket application, install the mating component. ● If the liquid gasket protrudes, wipe it off immediately. ● Do not retighten after the installation. ● Wait 30 minutes or more after installation before refilling the engine with engine oil and engine coolant. CAUTION: If there are specific instructions in this manual, observe them. ● Revision: October 2004 EM-4 SEM159F 2005 Titan PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A EBS00KM6 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number Description (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name KV10111100 (J-37228) Seal cutter EM Removing steel oil pan and rear timing chain case C D S-NT046 — (J-44626) Air fuel sensor Socket Loosening or tightening air fuel ratio A/F sensor a: 22 mm (0.87 in) E F LBIA0444E EG15050500 (J-45402) Compression gauge adapter G Inspecting compression pressure H I ZZA1225D KV10116200 (J-26336-A) Valve spring compressor 1. KV10115900 (J-26336-20) Attachment 2. KV10109220 ( — ) Adapter Disassembling valve mechanism Part (1) is a component of KV10116200 26336-A), but part (2) is not. (J- J K PBIC1650E KV10112100 (BT-8653-A) Angle wrench Tightening bolts for cylinder head, main bearing cap and connecting rod cap L M S-NT014 KV10107902 (J-38959) Valve oil seal puller Removing valve oil seal S-NT011 Revision: October 2004 EM-5 2005 Titan PREPARATION Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description KV10115600 (J-38958) Valve oil seal drift Installing valve oil seal Use side A. a: 20 (0.79) dia. d: 8 (0.31) dia. b: 13 (0.51) dia. e: 10.7 (0.421) dia. c: 10.3 (0.406) dia. f: 5 (0.20) dia. Unit: mm (in) S-NT603 EM03470000 (J-8037) Piston ring compressor Installing piston assembly into cylinder bore S-NT044 ST16610001 (J-23907) Pilot bushing puller Removing crankshaft pilot bushing S-NT045 WS39930000 ( — ) Tube presser Pressing the tube of liquid gasket S-NT052 — (J-45476) Ring gear stopper Removing and installing crankshaft pulley PBIC1655E 16441 6N210 (J-45488) Quick connector release Removing fuel tube quick connectors in engine room (Available in SEC. 164 of PARTS CATALOG: Part No. 16441 6N210) PBIC0198E — (J-46535) Drive belt tension releaser Releasing drive belt tension WBIA0536E Revision: October 2004 EM-6 2005 Titan PREPARATION Commercial Service Tools EBS00KM7 A (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts EM C PBIC0190E Spark plug wrench Removing and installing spark plug D E F S-NT047 (J-24239-01) Cylinder head bolt wrench Loosening and tightening cylinder head bolt, and use with angle wrench [SST: KV10112100 (BT-8653-A)] a: 13 (0.51) dia. b: 12 (0.47) c: 10 (0.39) Unit: mm (in) G H NT583 Valve seat cutter set Finishing valve seat dimensions I J S-NT048 Pulley puller Removing crankshaft pulley K L ZZA0010D Piston ring expander Removing and installing piston ring S-NT030 Valve guide drift Removing and installing valve guide Intake & Exhaust: a: 9.5 mm (0.374 in) dia. b: 5.5 mm (0.217 in) dia. S-NT015 Revision: October 2004 EM-7 2005 Titan M PREPARATION (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description Valve guide reamer 1: Reaming valve guide hole 2: Reaming hole for oversize valve guide Intake & Exhaust: d1 : 6.0 mm (0.236 in) dia. d2 : 10.2 mm (0.402 in) dia. S-NT016 Front oil seal drift Installing front oil seal ZZA0012D Rear oil seal drift Installing rear oil seal ZZA0025D (J-43897-18) (J-43897-12) Oxygen sensor thread cleaner AEM488 Anti-seize lubricant (Permatex 133AR or equivalent meeting MIL specification MIL-A-907) Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before installing a new A/F sensor and heated oxygen sensor (Use with anti-seize lubricant shown below.) a: J-43897-18 (18 mm dia.) (0.71 in) for zirconia heated oxygen sensor b: J-43897-12 (12 mm dia.) (0.55 in) for titania heated oxygen sensor Lubricating A/F sensors and heated oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool when reconditioning exhaust system threads AEM489 Revision: October 2004 EM-8 2005 Titan NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting —Engine Noise PFP:00003 A EBS00KM8 EM C D E F G H I J K L M KBIA2503E Revision: October 2004 EM-9 2005 Titan NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING Use the Chart Below to Help You Find the Cause of the Symptom. EBS00KM9 1. Locate the area where noise occurs. 2. Confirm the type of noise. 3. Specify the operating condition of engine. 4. Check specified noise source. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. Operating condition of engine Location of noise Top of engine Rocker cover Cylinder head Type of noise Before warmup After warmup When starting When idling When racing While driving Source of noise Ticking or clicking C A — A B — Tappet noise Valve clearance EM-52 Rattle C A — A B C Camshaft bearing noise Camshaft journal clearance Camshaft runout EM-47 EM-47 — Piston pin noise Piston and piston pin clearance Connecting rod bushing clearance EM-93 EM-95 A Piston slap noise Piston-to-bore clearance Piston ring side clearance Piston ring end gap Connecting rod bend and torsion EM-97 EM-93 EM-93 EM-94 Connecting rod bushing oil clearance (Small end) Connecting rod bearing clearance (Big end) EM-95 EM-94 Slap or knock Crankshaft pulley Cylinder block (Side of engine) Oil pan Front of engine Chain case cover Front cover Front of engine Slap or rap — A A — — — B B B B Check item Reference page Knock A B C B B B Connecting rod bearing noise Knock A B — A B C Main bearing noise Main bearing oil clearance Crankshaft runout EM-99 EM-98 Timing chain cracks and wear Timing chain tensioner operation EM-38 EM-35 Tapping or ticking A A — B B B Timing chain and chain tensioner noise Squeaking or fizzing A B — B — C Drive belts (Sticking or slipping) Drive belts deflection Creaking A B A B A B Drive belts (Slipping) Idler pulley bearing operation Squall Creaking A B — B A B Water pump noise Water pump operation A: Closely related B: Related Revision: October 2004 C: Sometimes related EM-12 CO-17 —: Not related EM-10 2005 Titan ENGINE ROOM COVER ENGINE ROOM COVER Removal and Installation PFP:14049 A EBS00KMA REMOVAL ● Remove the engine cover bolts and cover. CAUTION: Do not damage or scratch cover when installing or removing. EM C D E WBIA0528E INSTALLATION F Installation is in the reverse order of removal. G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EM-11 2005 Titan DRIVE BELTS DRIVE BELTS Checking Drive Belts PFP:02117 EBS00KMB LBIA0391E 1. Drive belt 2. Power steering oil pump pulley 3. Generator pulley 4. Crankshaft pulley 5. A/C compressor 6. Idler pulley 7. Cooling fan pulley 8. Water pump pulley 9. Drive belt tensioner WARNING: Be sure to perform when the engine is stopped. 1. Remove air duct and resonator assembly when inspecting drive belt. Refer to EM-14, "Removal and Installation" . 2. Make sure that indicator (single line notch) of each auto tensioner is within the allowable working range ″A″ (between three line notches). NOTE: ● Check the auto tensioner indication when the engine is cold. ● When the new drive belt is installed, the range should be as shown. ● The indicator notch is located on the moving side of the auto tensioner. 3. Visually check entire belt for wear, damage or cracks. 4. If the indicator is out of allowable working range or belt is damaged, replace the belt. Tension Adjustment EBS00KMC Belt tensioning is not necessary, as it is automatically adjusted by auto tensioner. Removal and Installation EBS00KMD DRIVE BELT Removal 1. 2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to EM-14, "REMOVAL" . Install Tool on auto tensioner pulley bolt, move in the direction of arrow (loosening direction of tensioner) as shown. Tool number 3. : — (J-46535) CAUTION: Avoid placing hand in a location where pinching may occur if the holding tool accidentally comes off. Remove the drive belt. WBIA0537E Revision: October 2004 EM-12 2005 Titan DRIVE BELTS INSTALLATION A Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Make sure belt is securely installed around all pulleys. EM ● Rotate crankshaft pulley several turns clockwise to equalize belt tension between pulleys. ● Make sure belt tension is within the allowable working range, using indicator notch on the auto tensioner. Refer to EM-12, "Checking Drive Belts" . C Drive Belt Auto Tensioner and Idler Pulley EBS00KME D E F G H I WBIA0607E 1. Auto tensioner 2. Idler pulley J REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to EM-14, "REMOVAL" . Remove drive belt. Refer to EM-12, "DRIVE BELT" . Remove auto tensioner and idler pulley using power tool. K INSTALLATION L Installation is in the reverse order of removal. M Revision: October 2004 EM-13 2005 Titan AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT Removal and Installation PFP:16500 EBS00KMF LBIA0394E 1. Air cleaner case (upper) 4. Air duct and resonator assembly 2. Air cleaner filter 3. Air cleaner case (lower) REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to EM-11, "REMOVAL" . Disconnect harness connector from air cleaner case (upper). Remove air duct and resonator assembly and air cleaner case. ● Add marks as necessary for easier installation. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CHANGING AIR CLEANER FILTER 1. 2. 3. Remove air duct and resonator assembly and air cleaner case (upper). Remove air cleaner filter from air cleaner case. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 EM-14 2005 Titan INTAKE MANIFOLD INTAKE MANIFOLD Removal and Installation PFP:14003 A EBS00KMG EM C D E F G H I KBIA2461E J 1. Intake manifold 2. PCV hose 3. Gasket 4. Electric throttle control actuator 5. Water hose 6. Water hose 7. PCV hose 8. EVAP hose 9. EVAP canister purge control solenoid valve 10. Bracket 11. Gasket REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Partially drain the engine coolant. Refer to MA-13, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . WARNING: To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the engine coolant when the engine is hot. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to EM-11, "REMOVAL" . Release fuel pressure. Refer to EC-92, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to EM-11, "REMOVAL" . Disconnect the fuel tube quick connector on the engine side. LBIA0395E Revision: October 2004 EM-15 2005 Titan K L M INTAKE MANIFOLD ● Perform the following steps to disconnect the quick connector using Tool. Tool number a. : 16441 6N210 (J-45488) Remove quick connector cap (engine side only). SBIA0354E b. With the sleeve side of Tool facing quick connector, install Tool onto fuel tube. c. Insert Tool into quick connector until sleeve contacts and goes no further. Hold the Tool in that position. CAUTION: Inserting the Tool hard will not disconnect quick connector. Hold Tool where it contacts and goes no further. d. Draw and pull out quick connector straight from fuel tube. CAUTION: ● Pull quick connector holding "A" position in illustration. WBIA0604E ● Do not pull with lateral force applied. O-ring inside quick connector may be damaged. ● Prepare container and cloth beforehand as fuel will leak out. ● Avoid fire and sparks. ● Be sure to cover openings of disconnected pipes with plug or plastic bag to avoid fuel leakage and entry of foreign materials. 6. Remove or disconnect harnesses, brackets, vacuum hose, vacuum gallery and PCV hose and tube from intake manifold. 7. Remove electric throttle control actuator by loosening bolts diagonally. CAUTION: ● Handle carefully to avoid any damage to the electric throttle control actuator. ● Do not disassemble. 8. Remove fuel injectors and fuel tube assembly. Refer to EM-29, "Removal and Installation" . 9. Loosen bolts in reverse order shown using power tool. 10. Remove the intake manifold. CAUTION: Cover engine openings to avoid entry of foreign materials. KBIA2462E Revision: October 2004 EM-16 2005 Titan INTAKE MANIFOLD INSTALLATION A Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Tighten the intake manifold bolts in numerical order as shown. EM C D KBIA2462E ● ● ● ● Install the EVAP canister purge control solenoid valve connector with it facing front of engine. Tighten the electronic throttle control actuator bolts of electric throttle control actuator equally and diagonally in several steps. After installation perform procedure in EM-18, "INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION" . Install water hose so that its overlap width for connection is between 27 mm (1.06 in) and 32 mm (1.26 in) (target: 27 mm 1.06 in). E F G Connecting Quick Connector of Fuel Tube Install quick connector as follows. (The steps are the same for quick connectors on both engine side and vehicle side except for the quick connector cap.) 1. Make sure no foreign substances are deposited in and around tube and quick connector, and they are not damaged. 2. Thinly apply new engine oil around the fuel tube from tip end to the spool end. 3. Align center to insert quick connector straight into fuel tube. ● Insert until the paint mark for engagement identification (white) goes completely inside quick connector so that you cannot see it from the straight side of the connected part. Use a mirror to check this where it is not possible to view directly from the straight side, such as quick connector on vehicle side. H I J K L PBIC0017E Insert fuel tube into quick connector until top spool is completely inside quick connector, and 2nd level spool exposes right below quick connector on engine side. CAUTION: ● Hold "A" position in illustration when inserting fuel tube into quick connector. ● Carefully align center to avoid inclined insertion to prevent damage to O-ring inside quick connector. ● Insert until you hear a "click" sound and actually feel the engagement. KBIA0272E ● To avoid misidentification of engagement with a similar sound, be sure to perform the next step. Pull quick connector by hand holding "A" position. Make sure it is completely engaged (connected) so that it does not come out from fuel tube. NOTE: Recommended pulling force is 50 N (5.1 kg, 11.2 lb). ● 4. Revision: October 2004 EM-17 2005 Titan M INTAKE MANIFOLD 5. 6. 7. Install quick connector cap on quick connector joint (on engine side only). Install fuel hose and tube to hose clamps. Refill engine coolant. Refer to MA-14, "REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT" . SBIA0354E INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ● – – ● ● After installing fuel tubes, make sure there is no fuel leakage at connections in the following steps. Apply fuel pressure to fuel lines by turning ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). Then check for fuel leaks at connections. Start the engine and rev it up and check for fuel leaks at the connections. Perform procedures for “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning” after finishing repairs. Refer to EC-89, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . If electric throttle control actuator is replaced, perform procedures for “Idle Air Volume Learning” after finishing repairs. Refer to EC-90, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . Revision: October 2004 EM-18 2005 Titan EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST Removal and Installation PFP:14004 A EBS00KMH EM C D E F G H I WBIA0466E J 1. Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 2) 2. Exhaust manifold cover (bank 2) 3. Exhaust manifold (bank 2) 4. Gaskets 5. Exhaust manifold (bank 1) 6. Exhaust manifold cover (bank 1) 7. Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 (bank 1) K REMOVAL WARNING: Perform the work when the exhaust and cooling system have cooled sufficiently. 1. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to EM-14, "REMOVAL" . 2. Drain engine coolant from the radiator. Refer to MA-13, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . 3. Remove engine undercover using power tool. 4. Remove the radiator and radiator hoses. Refer to CO-12, "REMOVAL" . 5. Remove drive belts. Refer to EM-12, "Removal" . 6. Remove the air fuel ratio A/F sensors (right bank, left bank). ● Follow steps below to remove each air fuel ratio A/F sensors. a. Remove engine room cover with power tool. Refer to EM-11, "REMOVAL" . b. Remove harness connector of each air fuel ratio A/F sensor, and harness from bracket and middle clamp. Revision: October 2004 EM-19 2005 Titan L M EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST c. Remove the air fuel ratio A/F sensors from both left and right exhaust manifolds using Tool. Tool number : — (J-44626) CAUTION: Do not damage the air fuel ratio A/F sensors ● Discard any air fuel ratio A/F sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor. Replace it with a new one. Remove front cross bar. Refer to FSU-5, "Components" . Remove exhaust manifold (left bank) following the steps below. Remove exhaust front tube using power tool. Refer to EX-4, "REMOVAL" . Remove the exhaust manifold cover. Loosen nuts in reverse order of illustration using power tool. Remove exhaust studs from positions 2, 4, 6, 8 and remove left exhaust manifold Remove exhaust manifold (right bank) following the steps below. Remove exhaust front tube. Refer to EX-4, "REMOVAL" . Remove oil level gauge guide. Refer to EM-22, "REMOVAL" . Remove the exhaust manifold cover. Loosen nuts in reverse order of illustration using power tool. Remove exhaust studs from positions 2, 4, 6, 8 and remove right exhaust manifold. ● 7. 8. a. b. c. d. 9. a. b. c. d. e. WBIA0630E KBIA2464E INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Surface Distortion ● Check the flatness of each exhaust manifold flange surface using suitable tools. Flatness limit ● : 0.3 mm (0.012 in) If measurement exceeds the limit, replace the exhaust manifold. KBIA2504E Revision: October 2004 EM-20 2005 Titan EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST INSTALLATION A Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Install new exhaust manifold gasket with the top of the triangular up mark on it facing up and its coated face (gray side) toward the exhaust manifold side. EM C D KBIA2553E ● E Tighten the exhaust manifold nuts in numerical order shown. Then recheck the torque of the nuts. F G KBIA2464E ● Before installing new air fuel ration A/F sensors, clean the exhaust system threads using Tool and apply anti-seize lubricant. Tool number H I : ( — ) J-43879-12 : ( — ) J-43897-18 CAUTION: ● Do not over tighten the air fuel ratio A/F sensors. Doing so may cause damage to the sensor, resulting in the MIL coming on. J K L M Revision: October 2004 EM-21 2005 Titan OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER Removal and Installation PFP:11110 EBS00KMI KBIA2465E 1. Oil pan (Upper) 2. O-ring 3. O-ring 4. O-ring 5. O-ring (with collar) 6. Oil level gauge guide 7. Oil level gauge 8. O-ring 9. Connector bolt 10. Oil filter 11. Oil cooler 12. Relief valve 13. Oil pressure sensor 14. Gasket 15. Drain plug 16. Oil pan (Lower) 17. Oil strainer REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the engine oil when the engine is hot. 1. Remove the engine. Refer to EM-72, "REMOVAL" . 2. Remove oil pan (lower) using the following steps. a. Remove oil pan (lower) bolts in reverse order shown using power tool. KBIA2466E Revision: October 2004 EM-22 2005 Titan OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER b. Remove the oil pan (lower) using Tool. Tool number A : KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: Do not damage mating surface. EM C WBIA0566E 3. 4. a. Remove oil strainer from oil pan (upper). Remove oil pan (upper) using the following steps. Remove oil pan (upper) bolts in reverse order shown. D E F G H KBIA2467E b. Remove the oil pan (upper) from the cylinder block by prying it at the points shown, using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not damage mating surface. I J K KBIA2468E 5. Remove O-rings from oil pump and front cover. NOTE: Do not reuse O-rings. M KBIA2469E INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Clean the oil strainer. Revision: October 2004 EM-23 L 2005 Titan OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER INSTALLATION 1. a. Install oil pan (upper) using the following steps. Apply liquid gasket thoroughly as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . CAUTION: Apply liquid gasket to outside of bolt hole for the hole shown by . KBIA2470E b. Install new O-rings to oil pump and front cover side. KBIA2469E c. Tighten bolts in numerical order as shown. M6 × 30 mm (1.18 in) M8 × 25 mm (0.98in) M8 × 45 mm (1.77 in) M8 × 123 mm (4.84in) d. : No. 15, 16 : No. 1, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13 : No. 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 14 : No. 9, 12 Install rear plate cover. PBIC2553E 2. 3. a. Install oil strainer to upper oil pan (upper). Install oil pan (lower). Apply liquid gasket thoroughly as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . KBIA2471E Revision: October 2004 EM-24 2005 Titan OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER b. Tighten oil pan (lower) bolts in numerical order as shown. A EM C PBIC2595E D 4. 5. Install oil pan drain plug. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. ● Do not fill the engine oil for at least 30 minutes after oil pan is installed. E INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Check engine oil level and add engine oil if necessary. Refer to LU-7, "OIL LEVEL" . Start the engine, and check for leaks of engine oil. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. Check engine oil level again. F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EM-25 2005 Titan IGNITION COIL IGNITION COIL Removal and Installation PFP:22448 EBS00KMJ KBIA2505E 1. Ignition coil 2. Spark plug REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to EM-11, "REMOVAL" . Disconnect harness connector from ignition coil. Remove ignition coil. CAUTION: Do not shock ignition coil. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 EM-26 2005 Titan SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE) SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE) Removal and Installation PFP:22401 A EBS00KMK EM C D E F G KBIA2505E 1. Ignition coil 2. Spark plug REMOVAL H 1. 2. 3. I Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to EM-11, "REMOVAL" . Remove ignition coil. Refer to EM-26, "REMOVAL" . Remove spark plug using suitable tool. J K L SEM294A INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Use standard type spark plug for normal condition. M The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as: ● Frequent engine starts ● Low ambient temperatures The cold type spark plug is suitable when spark knock occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as: ● Extended highway driving ● Frequent high engine revolution Make Model NGK Standard model FFV model Standard type PLFR5A-11 PLFR5A-11D Hot type PLFR4A-11 PLFR4A-11D Cold type PLFR6A-11 PLFR6A-11D Revision: October 2004 EM-27 2005 Titan SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE) Gap (Nominal) : 1.1 mm (0.043 in) CAUTION: ● Do not drop or shock spark plug. ● Do not use a wire brush for cleaning. ● If plug tip is covered with carbon, spark plug cleaner may be used. Cleaner air pressure: Less than 588 kPa (5.9 bar, 6 kg/cm2 , 85 psi) Cleaning time: Less than 20 seconds SMA773C ● Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals. SMA806CA INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 EM-28 2005 Titan FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE Removal and Installation PFP:16600 A EBS00KML EM C D E F G H I J KBIA2472E 1. Fuel tube (right bank) 2. Cap 3. Fuel damper 4. O-ring 5. O-ring (Standard model: Blue) (FFV model: Black) 6. Fuel injector 7. Clip 8. O-ring (Standard model: Brown) (FFV model: Green) 9. O-ring 10. Fuel hose assembly L 11. Fuel tube (left bank) M CAUTION: Do not remove or disassemble parts unless instructed as shown in the figure. REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to EM-11, "REMOVAL" . Release fuel pressure. Refer to EC-92, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Disconnect fuel injector harness connectors. Disconnect fuel hose assembly from fuel tube (right bank and left bank). CAUTION: ● While hoses are disconnected, plug them to prevent fuel from draining. ● Do not separate fuel connector and fuel hose. Remove fuel injectors with fuel tube assembly. Revision: October 2004 K EM-29 2005 Titan FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE 7. a. b. Remove fuel injector from fuel tube. Spread open to remove clip. Remove fuel injector from the fuel tube by pulling straight out. CAUTION: ● Be careful with remaining fuel that may leak out from fuel tube. ● Do not damage injector nozzles during removal. ● Do not bump or drop fuel injectors. ● Do not disassemble fuel injectors. KBIA2506E 8. Remove fuel damper from each fuel tube. INSTALLATION 1. a. b. c. Install fuel damper to each fuel tube. Apply engine oil to O-ring and set it into the cap of fuel tube. CAUTION: ● Handle O-ring with bare hands. Never wear gloves. ● Lubricate O-ring with new engine oil. ● Do not clean O-ring with solvent. ● Make sure that O-ring and its mating part are free of foreign material. ● When installing O-ring, be careful not to scratch it with tool or fingernails. Also be careful not to twist or stretch O-ring. Make sure that backup spacer is in the O-ring connecting surface of fuel damper. NOTE: Backup spacer is fuel damper assembly part. Insert fuel damper until it seats on fuel tube. CAUTION: ● Insert straight, making sure that the axis is lined up. ● Do not pressure-fit with excessive force. Reference value d. 2. KBIA2473E :130 N (13.3 kg, 29.2 lb) Install cap, and then tighten bolts evenly by turns. ● After tightening bolts, make sure that there is no gap between cap and fuel tube. Install O-rings to fuel injector paying attention to the items below. CAUTION: ● Upper and lower O-ring are different. Standard model Fuel tube side Nozzle side Revision: October 2004 : Blue : Brown FFV model Fuel tube side Nozzle side EM-30 : Black : Green 2005 Titan FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE Handle O-ring with bare hands. Never wear gloves. A ● Lubricate O-ring with new engine oil. ● Do not clean O-ring with solvent. ● Make sure that O-ring and its mating part are free of foreign material. EM ● When installing O-ring, be careful not to scratch it with tool or fingernails. Also be careful not to twist or stretch O-ring. If O-ring was stretched while it was being attached, do not insert it quickly into fuel tube. C ● Insert O-ring straight into fuel tube. Do not angle or twist it. Install fuel injector to fuel tube. Insert clip into clip mounting groove on fuel injector. D ● Insert clip so that lug “A” of fuel injector matches notch “A” of the clip. CAUTION: E ● Do not reuse clip. Replace it with a new one. ● Be careful to keep clip from interfering with O-ring. If interference occurs, replace O-ring. F Insert fuel injector into fuel tube with clip attached. ● Insert it while matching it to the axial center. ● Insert fuel injector so that lug “B” of fuel tube matches notch G “B” of the clip. ● Make sure that fuel tube flange is securely fixed in flange fixing groove on clip. H Make sure that installation is complete by checking that fuel injector does not rotate or come off. ● Make sure that protrusions of fuel injectors are aligned with I cutouts of clips after installation. ● 3. a. b. c. KBIA2507E 4. Install fuel tube and fuel injector assembly to intake manifold. CAUTION: Be careful not to let tip of injector nozzle come in contact with other parts. ● Tighten fuel tube assembly mounting bolts “a” to “b” in illustration and in two steps. 1st step 2nd step J K L : 12.8 N·m (1.3 kg-m, 9 ft-lb) : 24.5 N·m (2.5 kg-m, 18 ft-lb) M KBIA2474E 5. 6. Install fuel hose assembly. ● Refer to precautions for fuel injector when handling O-ring. ● Insert connectors straight, making sure that the axis is lined up with fuel tube side to prevent O-ring from being damaged. ● Tighten bolts evenly in several steps. ● Make sure that there is no gap between flange and fuel tube after tightening bolts. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION After installing fuel tubes, make sure there are no fuel leaks at connections using the following steps. Revision: October 2004 EM-31 2005 Titan FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE 1. 2. Apply fuel pressure to fuel lines by turning ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). Then check for leaks at connections. Start the engine and rev it up and check for fuel leaks at connections. NOTE: Use mirrors for checking on hidden points. CAUTION: Do not touch the engine immediately after stopping, as engine becomes extremely hot. Revision: October 2004 EM-32 fuel 2005 Titan ROCKER COVER ROCKER COVER Removal and Installation PFP:13264 A EBS00KMM EM C D E F G H I KBIA2508E J 1. Rocker cover (left bank) 2. PCV control valve 3. O-ring 4. Rocker cover gasket (left bank) 5. Rocker cover (right bank) 6. PCV control valve 7. O-ring 8. Oil filler cap 9. Rocker cover gasket (right bank) K REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to EM-11, "REMOVAL" . Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to EM-14, "REMOVAL" (for left bank only). Move harness on upper rocker cover and its peripheral aside. Remove electric throttle control actuator, loosening bolts diagonally (for left bank only). Remove ignition coil. Refer to EM-26, "REMOVAL" . Remove PCV hose from PCV control valve. Loosen bolts in reverse order shown using power tool. CAUTION: Do not hold the rocker cover by the oil filler neck (right bank). L M KBIA2509E Revision: October 2004 EM-33 2005 Titan ROCKER COVER INSTALLATION 1. a. b. Apply liquid gasket to joint part of cylinder head and camshaft bracket following the steps below. NOTE: Illustration shows an example of left bank side (zoomed in shows No.1 camshaft bracket). Refer to illustration “a” to apply liquid gasket to joint part of No.1 camshaft bracket and cylinder head. Refer to illustration “b” to apply liquid gasket 90° to illustration “a”. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . KBIA2510E 2. Install the rocker cover. ● Make sure the new rocker cover gasket is installed in the groove of the rocker cover. ● Tighten the bolts in two steps in the numerical order shown. 1st step 2nd step 3. 4. : 2.0 N·m (0.2 kg-m, 18 in-lb) : 8.3 N·m (0.85 kg-m, 73 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not hold the rocker cover by the oil filler neck (right bank). Install the PCV hose. NOTE: ● Remove foreign materials from inside the hose using compressed air. ● The inserted length is within 25 - 30 mm (0.98 - 1.18 in) [Target: 25 mm (0.98 in)]. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 EM-34 KBIA2509E 2005 Titan TIMING CHAIN TIMING CHAIN Removal and Installation PFP:13028 A EBS00KMN EM C D E F G H I J K L M KBIA2511E Revision: October 2004 EM-35 2005 Titan TIMING CHAIN 1. Camshaft sprocket (left bank EXH) 2. Camshaft sprocket (left bank INT) 4. Camshaft sprocket (right bank EXH) 5. Front cover 6. Chain case cover (right bank) 7. Chain case cover (left bank) 8. Crankshaft pulley bolt 9. Crankshaft pulley 11. Front oil seal 12. Oil pump drive spacer 10. Chain tensioner cover 3. Camshaft sprocket (right bank INT) 13. Oil pump assembly 14. Crankshaft sprocket 15. Bracket 16. O-ring 17. Timing chain tension guide (right bank) 18. Timing chain slack guide (right bank) 19. Timing chain (right bank) 20. Timing chain (left bank) 21. Chain tensioner (right bank) 22. Timing chain slack guide (left bank) 23. Timing chain tension guide (left bank) 24. Chain tensioner (left bank) NOTE: ● To remove timing chain and associated parts, start with those on the left bank. The procedure for removing parts on the right bank is omitted because it is the same as that for removal on the left bank. ● To install timing chain and associated parts, start with those on the right bank. The procedure for installing parts on the left bank is omitted because it is the same as that for installation on the right bank. REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. a. b. Remove engine assembly from vehicle. Refer to EM-72, "REMOVAL" . Remove the following components and related parts: ● Drive belt auto tensioner and idler pulley. Refer to EM-13, "REMOVAL" . ● Thermostat housing and water hose. Refer to CO-19, "Removal of Thermostat Housing, Water Outlet and Heater Pipe" . ● Power steering oil pump bracket. Refer to PS-27, "POWER STEERING OIL PUMP" . ● Oil pan (lower), (upper) and oil strainer. Refer to EM-22, "REMOVAL" . ● Ignition coil. Refer to EM-26, "IGNITION COIL" . ● Rocker cover. Refer to EM-33, "ROCKER COVER" . Remove chain case cover (right bank) and (left bank). Loosen and remove bolts in the reverse of order shown. Cut the liquid gasket and remove the covers using Tool. Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: Do not damage mating surfaces. KBIA2475E 4. a. Obtain compression TDC of No. 1 cylinder as follows: Turn crankshaft pulley clockwise to align the TDC identification notch (without paint mark) with timing indicator on front cover. KBIA2476E Revision: October 2004 EM-36 2005 Titan TIMING CHAIN b. At this time, make sure both intake and exhaust cam lobes of No. 1 cylinder (top front on left bank) point outside. ● If they do not point outside, turn crankshaft pulley once more. A EM C KBIA0400J D 5. a. Remove crankshaft pulley. Loosen the bolts using suitable tool. E F G PBIC0053E b. Remove the crankshaft pulley from the crankshaft. ● Remove the crankshaft pulley using suitable tool. Set the bolts in the two bolt holes [M6 x 1.0 mm (0.04 in)] on the front surface. NOTE: The dimension between the centers of the two bolt holes is 61 mm (2.40 in). H I J KBIA2477E 6. a. b. Remove front cover. Loosen and remove bolts in the reverse of order shown. Cut the liquid gasket and remove the covers using Tool. Tool number 7. 8. L : KV10111100 (J-37228) M CAUTION: Do not damage mating surfaces. Remove the front oil seal using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not damage front cover. KBIA2478E Remove oil pump drive spacer. ● Hold and remove flat space of oil pump drive spacer by pulling it forward. KBIA2512E Revision: October 2004 K EM-37 2005 Titan TIMING CHAIN 9. Remove oil pump. Refer to LU-13, "Removal and Installation" . 10. Remove the chain tensioner on the left bank using the following steps. NOTE: To remove the timing chain and associated parts, start with those on the left bank. The procedure for removing parts on the right bank is omitted because it is the same as that for the left bank. a. Squeeze the return-proof clip ends using suitable tool and push the plunger into the tensioner body. b. Secure the plunger using stopper pin. ● Stopper pin is made from hard wire approximately 1 mm (0.04 in) in diameter. c. Remove the bolts and chain tensioner. WARNING: Plunger, spring, and spring seat pop out when (squeezing) return-proof clip without holding plunger head. It may cause serious injuries. Always hold plunger head when KBIA2479E removing. NOTE: Stop the plunger in the fully extended position by using the return-proof clip 1 if the stopper pin is removed. ● Push the plunger 2 into the tensioner body while squeezing the return-proof clip 1. Secure it using stopper pin 3. ● KBIA2483E 11. Remove chain tension guide and slack guide. 12. Remove timing chain and crankshaft sprocket. 13. Loosen the camshaft sprocket bolts as shown and remove the camshaft sprocket. CAUTION: To avoid interference between valves and pistons, do not turn crankshaft or camshaft when timing chain is disconnected. 14. Repeat the same procedure to remove the right timing chain and associated parts. KBIA2513E INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check for cracks and any excessive wear at link plates. Replace chain if necessary. ● In the same way as for left bank, inspect timing chain and associated parts on right bank. PBIC0282E Revision: October 2004 EM-38 2005 Titan TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION A EM C D E F G H KBIA2514E NOTE: ● The above figure shows the relationship between the mating mark on each timing chain and that of the corresponding sprocket, with the components installed. ● To install timing chain and associated parts, start with those on right bank. The procedure for installing parts on left bank is omitted because it is the same as that for installation on right bank. 1. Make sure the crankshaft key and dowel pin of each camshaft are facing in the direction as shown. I J K L M SBIA0356E 2. Install camshaft sprockets. ● Install intake and exhaust camshaft sprocket by selectively using the groove of dowel pin according to the bank. (Common part used for both banks.) ● Lock the hexagonal part of camshaft in the same way as for removal, and tighten bolts. KBIA2480E Revision: October 2004 EM-39 2005 Titan TIMING CHAIN 3. Install crankshaft sprockets for both banks. ● Install each crankshaft sprocket so that its flange side (the larger diameter side without teeth) faces in the direction as shown. NOTE: The same parts are used but facing directions are different. KBIA2515E 4. 5. 6. 7. Install the timing chains and associated parts. ● Align the mating mark on each sprocket and the timing chain for installation. CAUTION: ● Before installing chain tensioner, it is possible to change the position of mating mark on timing chain and each sprocket. After the mating marks are aligned, keep them aligned by holding them by hand. ● Install the slack guides and tension guides onto the correct side by checking the identification mark on the surface. ● Install the chain tensioner with the plunger locked in with the stopper pin. CAUTION: ● Before and after the installation of the chain tensioner, make sure that the mating mark on the timing chain is not out of alignment. ● After installing the chain tensioner, remove the stopper pin to release the tensioner. Make sure the tensioner is released. ● To avoid chain-link skipping of the timing chain, do not move crankshaft or camshafts until the front cover is installed. In the same way as for right bank, install timing chain and associated parts on left side. Install oil pump. Install the oil pump drive spacer as follows: ● Install so that the front mark on the front edge of the oil pump drive spacer faces the front of the engine. ● Insert the oil pump drive spacer according to the directions of the crankshaft key and the two flat surfaces of the oil pump inner rotor. ● If the positional relationship does not allow the insertion, rotate the oil pump inner rotor to allow the oil pump drive spacer to be inserted. KBIA2490E 8. Install the front oil seal using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not scratch or make burrs on the circumference of the oil seal. PBIC0059E Revision: October 2004 EM-40 2005 Titan TIMING CHAIN 9. Install chain tensioner cover. ● Apply liquid gasket as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . A EM C KBIA2547E D 10. Install front cover as follows: a. Install new O-ring on cylinder block. E F G KBIA2516E b. c. Apply liquid gasket as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". Check again that the timing mating mark on timing chain and that on each sprocket are aligned. Then install front cover. H I J KBIA2517E d. e. Install bolts in the numerical order shown. After tightening, re-tighten to the specified torque. CAUTION: Be sure to wipe off any excessive liquid gasket leaking onto surface mating with oil pan. M6 × 50 mm (1.97 in) M6 × 80 mm (3.15 in) M6 × 20 mm (0.79 in) L M : No. 1, 20, 25, 26, 27 : No. 4, 5, 7 : Except the above KBIA2478E 11. Install chain case cover (right bank and left bank) as follows: a. Apply liquid gasket as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". CAUTION: The start and end of the application of the liquid gasket should be crossed at a position that cannot be seen after attaching the chain case cover. KBIA2481E Revision: October 2004 EM-41 K 2005 Titan TIMING CHAIN b. Install bolts in the numerical order shown. KBIA2475E 12. Install the crankshaft pulley. ● Install the key of the crankshaft. ● Insert the pulley by lightly tapping it. CAUTION: Do not tap pulley on the side surface where the belt is installed (outer circumference). 13. Tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt. ● Lock the crankshaft using suitable tool, then tighten the bolt. ● Perform the following steps for angular tightening: a. Apply engine oil onto the threaded parts of the bolt and seating area. b. Select the one most visible notch of the four on the bolt flange. Corresponding to the selected notch, put a mating mark (such as paint) on the crankshaft pulley. Crankshaft pulley bolt torque Step 1 : 93.1 N·m (9.5 kg-m, 69 ft-lb) Step 2 : additional 90° (angle tightening) 14. Rotate crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from engine front) to check for parts interference. 15. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 EM-42 KBIA2519E 2005 Titan TIMING CHAIN INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Inspection for Leaks A The following are procedures for checking fluid leaks, lubricant leaks and exhaust gases leaks. ● Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required EM quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants" . ● Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage. – Turn ignition switch “ON” (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel C leakage at connection points. – Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points. ● Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. D NOTE: If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal/installation, slack in the guide may generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is normal. Noise will stop after E hydraulic pressure rises. ● Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gases, or any oil/fluids including engine oil and engine coolant. F ● Bleed air from lines and hoses of applicable lines, such as in cooling system. ● After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to the specified level, if necessary. G Summary of the inspection items: Item Before starting engine Engine running After engine stopped Engine coolant Level Leakage Level Engine oil Level Leakage Level Other oils and fluid* Level Leakage Level Leakage Leakage Leakage Fuel H I * Transmission/transaxle/CVT fluid, power steering fluid, brake fluid, etc. J K L M Revision: October 2004 EM-43 2005 Titan CAMSHAFT CAMSHAFT Removal and Installation PFP:13001 EBS00KMO WBIA0469E * Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . 1. Cylinder head (right bank) 2. Camshaft bracket (No. 2, 3, 4, 5) 3. Valve lifter 4. Camshaft bracket (No. 1) 5. Seal washer 6. Camshaft (right bank EXH) 7. Camshaft (right bank INT) 8. Camshaft (left bank INT) 9. Camshaft (left bank EXH) 10. Camshaft sprocket (right bank EXH) 11. Camshaft sprocket (right bank INT) 12. Camshaft sprocket (left bank INT) 13. Camshaft sprocket (left bank EXH) 14. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 15. O-ring 16. Cylinder head (left bank) REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove rocker cover (right bank) and (left bank). Refer to EM-33, "ROCKER COVER" . Obtain compression TDC of No. 1 cylinder. Refer to EM-35, "TIMING CHAIN" . Remove chain case cover (right bank) and (left bank). Refer to EM-35, "TIMING CHAIN" . Paint matching marks on the timing chain links aligning with camshaft sprocket matching marks. KBIA2488E Revision: October 2004 EM-44 2005 Titan CAMSHAFT 5. a. b. c. Remove the chain tensioner on the left bank using the following steps. A WARNING: Plunger, spring, and spring seat pop out when squeezing return-proof clip without holding plunger head. It may cause serious injuries. Always hold plunger head when removing. EM Squeeze return-proof clip ends using suitable tool and push the plunger into the tensioner body. Secure plunger using stopper pin. C ● Stopper pin is made from hard wire approximately 1 mm (0.04 in) in diameter. Remove the bolts and the chain tensioner. D KBIA2479E NOTE: Stop plunger in the fully extended position using return-proof clip 1 if stopper pin is removed. ● Push the plunger 2 into the tensioner body while squeezing the return-proof clip 1. Secure it using stopper pin 3. ● E F G H KBIA2483E 6. Remove the right chain tensioner cover from the front cover using Tool. Tool number I J : KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: Do not damage mating surfaces. K L KBIA2521E M 7. a. b. Remove chain tensioner on right bank using the following steps. WARNING: Plunger, spring, and spring seat pop out when squeezing return-proof clip without holding plunger head. It may cause serious injuries. Always hold plunger head when removing. Squeeze return-proof clip ends using suitable tool and push the plunger into the tensioner body. Secure plunger using stopper pin. ● Stopper pin is made from hard wire approximately 1 mm (0.04 in) in diameter. KBIA2479E Revision: October 2004 EM-45 2005 Titan CAMSHAFT c. Remove the bolts and the right bank chain tensioner. NOTE: If it is difficult to push plunger on right bank chain tensioner, remove the plunger under extended condition. KBIA2484E 8. Loosen camshaft sprocket bolts as shown and remove camshaft sprockets. CAUTION: To avoid interference between valves and pistons, do not turn crankshaft or camshaft with timing chain disconnected. KBIA2485E 9. Remove front cover bolts. KBIA2486E 10. Remove bolts in the reverse of order shown to remove camshaft brackets. ● Remove No. 1 camshaft bracket. NOTE: The bottom and front surface of bracket will be stuck because of liquid gasket. 11. Remove camshaft. 12. Remove valve lifters if necessary. ● Correctly identify location where each part is removed from. Keep parts organized to avoid mixing them up. KBIA2522E Revision: October 2004 EM-46 2005 Titan CAMSHAFT INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Camshaft Runout 1. 2. 3. A Put V block on precise flat work bench, and support No. 1 and No. 5 journals of camshaft. Set dial gauge vertically to No. 3 journal. Turn the camshaft to one direction, and measure the camshaft runout on dial indicator (total indicator reading). Camshaft runout ● EM C : Less than 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) If measurement exceeds specification, replace the camshaft. D EMK0641D Camshaft Cam Height ● E Measure camshaft cam height. Standard cam height (intake & exhaust) Cam wear limit (intake & exhaust) ● : 44.465 - 44.655 mm (1.7506 - 1.7581 in) : 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) F G If measurement is not within the specifications, replace the camshaft. H PBIC0039E Camshaft Journal Clearance I Camshaft Journal Diameter ● Measure diameter of camshaft journal. Standard diameter : 25.953 - 25.970 mm (1.0218 - 1.0224 in) J K L PBIC0040E Camshaft Bracket Inner Diameter ● Tighten the camshaft bracket bolt to the specified torque. ● Measure the inner diameter of the camshaft bracket. Standard M : 26.000 - 26.021 mm (1.0236 - 1.0244 in) Calculation of Camshaft Journal Clearance (Journal clearance) = (camshaft bracket inner diameter) – (camshaft journal diameter) Standard ● : 0.030 - 0.068 mm (0.0012 - 0.0027 in) If measurement is not within specification, replace either or both camshaft and cylinder head. PBIC1645E NOTE: The inner diameter of the camshaft bracket is manufactured together with the cylinder head. Replace the whole cylinder head as an assembly. Revision: October 2004 EM-47 2005 Titan CAMSHAFT Camshaft End Play ● Install dial gauge in the thrust direction on the front end of the camshaft. Measure the end play when the camshaft is moved forward/backward (in direction to axis). Standard ● ● : 0.115 - 0.188 mm (0.0045 - 0.0074 in) If measurement is out of the specified range, replace the camshaft and measure again. If measurement is still out of the specified range, replace the cylinder head. PBIC0042E ● – Measure the following parts if end play is outside the specified value. Dimension ″A″ for camshaft No. 1 journal Standard – Dimension ″B″ for cylinder head No. 1 journal Standard ● : 30.500 - 30.548 mm (1.2008-1.2027 in) : 30.360 - 30.385 mm (1.1953-1.1963 in) If measurements are not within specification, replace the camshaft and/or cylinder head. KBIA2426J Camshaft Sprocket Runout 1. 2. 3. Install camshaft in cylinder head. Install camshaft sprocket to camshaft. Measure camshaft sprocket runout. Runout ● : Less than 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) If measurement exceeds the specification, replace the camshaft sprocket. KBIA0181J Valve Lifter Check if surface of valve lifter has any wear or cracks. ● If any damage is found, replace valve lifter. ● Select the thickness of the head so that valve clearance is within the standard when replacing. Refer to EM-52, "Valve Clearance" . KBIA0182E Revision: October 2004 EM-48 2005 Titan CAMSHAFT Valve Lifter Clearance A Valve Lifter Diameter ● Measure diameter of valve lifter. Standard : 33.977 - 33.987 mm (1.3377 - 1.3381 in) EM C D JEM798G Valve Lifter Hole Diameter Measure the diameter of the valve lifter hole of the cylinder head, using suitable tool. E ● Standard F : 34.000 - 34.016 mm (1.3386 - 1.3392 in) Calculation of Valve Lifter Clearance (Valve lifter clearance) = (valve lifter hole diameter) – (valve lifter diameter) Standard ● G : 0.013 - 0.039 mm (0.0005 - 0.0015 in) If the measurement is not within specification, referring to each specification of the valve lifter diameter and hole diameter, replace either or both the valve lifter and cylinder head. H PBIC0043E INSTALLATION 1. 2. I Install valve lifters if removed. ● Install removed parts in their original locations. Install camshafts. Refer to the table below for identification of right and left bank, and intake and exhaust. Bank RH LH INT EXH Identification paint (front) Identification paint (rear) Identification rib INT White — Yes. EXH — Light blue Yes. INT White — No. EXH — Light blue No. J K L KBIA2523E ● Install so that dowel pin at the front of camshaft face is in the direction shown. KBIA2524E Revision: October 2004 EM-49 2005 Titan M CAMSHAFT 3. Install camshaft brackets. ● Install by referring to installation location mark on upper surface. ● Install so that installation location mark can be correctly read when viewed from the intake manifold side. KBIA2525E ● – Install No. 1 camshaft bracket using the following procedure: Apply liquid gasket to No. 1 camshaft bracket as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". CAUTION: ● After installation, be sure to wipe off any excessive liquid gasket leaking from part “A” and “B” (both on right and left sides). ● Remove completely any excess of liquid gasket inside bracket. PBIC0035E – Apply liquid gasket to the back side of front cover as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". KBIA2487E Revision: October 2004 EM-50 2005 Titan CAMSHAFT – Position No. 1 camshaft bracket close to mounting position, and then install it to prevent from touching liquid gasket applied to each surface. A EM C SBIA0259E D – Temporarily tighten front cover bolts (4 for each bank) as shown. E F G KBIA2486E 4. Tighten the camshaft bracket bolts as follows: H Camshaft bracket bolts Step 1 (bolts 9 - 12) : 1.96 N·m (0.2 kg-m, 17 in-lb) Step 2 (bolts 1 - 8) : 1.96 N·m (0.2 kg-m, 17 in-lb) Step 3 (all bolts) : 5.88 N·m (0.6 kg-m, 52 in-lb) Step 4 (all bolts) : 10.4 N·m (1.1 kg-m, 92 in-lb) I J CAUTION: After tightening the camshaft bracket bolts, be sure to wipe off excessive liquid gasket from the parts listed below. ● Mating surface of rocker cover ● Mating surface of front cover K L M KBIA2522E a. Tighten front cover bolts (4 for each bank) as shown to the specified torque. Front cover bolts : 11.0 N·m (1.1 kg-m, 8ft - lb) KBIA2486E Revision: October 2004 EM-51 2005 Titan CAMSHAFT 5. a. Install the camshaft sprockets using the following procedure: Install the camshaft sprockets aligning them with the matching marks painted on the timing chain when removed. Align the camshaft sprocket key groove with the dowel pin on the camshaft front edge at the same time. Then temporarily tighten bolts. KBIA2482E Install the intake and exhaust side camshaft sprockets by selectively using the groove of the dowel pin according to the bank. (Common part used for both banks.) Lock the hexagonal part of the camshaft in the same way as for removal, and tighten the bolts. Check again that the timing mating mark on the timing chain and on each sprocket are aligned. ● b. c. KBIA2480E 6. a. Install the chain tensioner using the following procedure: NOTE: Left bank is shown. Install the chain tensioner. ● Compress the plunger and hold it using a stopper pin when installing. ● Loosen the slack guide side timing chain by rotating the camshaft hexagonal part if mounting space is small. Chain tensioner bolts : 6.9 N·m (0.70 kg-m, 61 in-lb) KBIA2479E b. c. Remove the stopper pin and release the plunger, and then apply tension to the timing chain. Install the chain tensioner cover onto the front cover (RH bank). ● Apply liquid gasket as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . Tensioner cover bolts 7. 8. : 9.0 N·m (0.92 kg-m, 80 in-lb) Check and adjust valve clearances. Refer to EM-103, "Valve Clearance" . Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. Valve Clearance KBIA2547E EBS00KMP INSPECTION NOTE: Perform the following inspection after removal, installation or replacement of camshaft or valve-related parts, or if there are unusual engine conditions due to changes in valve clearance over time (starting, idling, and/or noise). 1. Warm up the engine. Then stop the engine. 2. Remove engine cover, battery cover and air duct assembly. Refer to EM-11, "REMOVAL" , SC-9, "REMOVAL" and EM-14, "REMOVAL" . Revision: October 2004 EM-52 2005 Titan CAMSHAFT 3. 4. Remove right bank and left bank rocker covers using power tool. Refer to EM-33, "Removal and Installation" . A Turn crankshaft pulley in the normal direction (clockwise when viewed from engine front) to align TDC identification notch (without paint mark) with timing indicator. EM C D KBIA2476E 5. At this time, make sure both the intake and exhaust cam noses of No. 1 cylinder (top front on left bank) face outside. ● If they do not face outside, turn crankshaft pulley once more. E F G KBIA0400J 6. Measure valve clearances at locations marked “×” as shown in the table below (locations indicated with black arrow). NOTE: Firing order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2 ● No. 1 cylinder compression TDC Measuring position (RH bank) No. 1 cylinder at TDC No. 4 CYL No. 6 CYL Measuring position (LH bank) I J No. 8 CYL × EXH INT No. 1 cylinder at TDC No. 2 CYL H × × No. 1 CYL No. 3 CYL INT × EXH × K No. 5 CYL No. 7 CYL × L × M KBIA2526E Revision: October 2004 EM-53 2005 Titan CAMSHAFT ● Measure valve clearance using suitable tool. Valve clearance standard: Hot* Intake : 0.304 - 0.416 mm (0.012 - 0.016 in) Exhaust : 0.308 - 0.432 mm (0.012 - 0.017 in) Cold Intake : 0.26 - 0.34 mm (0.010 - 0.013 in) Exhaust : 0.29 - 0.37 mm (0.011 - 0.015 in) *: Approximately 80°C (176°F) 7. 8. KBIA0185E CAUTION: If the inspection was carried out with a cold engine, make sure the values with a fully warmed up engine are still within specifications. Turn crankshaft pulley clockwise 270° from the position of No. 1 cylinder compression TDC to obtain No. 3 cylinder compression TDC. Measure valve clearances at the locations marked “×” as shown in the table below (locations indicated with white arrow). ● No. 3 cylinder compression TDC Measuring position (RH bank) No. 2 CYL No. 8 CYL × INT Measuring position (LH bank) No. 3 cylinder at TDC No. 6 CYL × EXH No. 3 cylinder at TDC No. 4 CYL No. 1 CYL No. 3 CYL INT × EXH × No. 5 CYL No. 7 CYL × × KBIA2526E 9. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise 90° from the position of No. 3 cylinder compression TDC (clockwise by 360° from the position of No. 1 cylinder compression TDC) to measure the intake and exhaust valve clearances of No. 6 cylinder and the exhaust valve clearance of No. 2 cylinder. KBIA2548E 10. If out of specifications, adjust as necessary, Refer to EM-54, "ADJUSTMENT" : ADJUSTMENT NOTE: ● Perform adjustment depending on selected head thickness of valve lifter. Revision: October 2004 EM-54 2005 Titan CAMSHAFT ● 1. 2. 3. The specified valve lifter thickness is the dimension at normal temperatures. Ignore dimensional differences caused by temperature. Use the specifications for hot engine condition to adjust. A Remove camshaft. Refer to EM-44, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the valve lifters at the locations that are out of specification. EM Measure the center thickness of the removed valve lifters using suitable tool. C D KBIA0057E 4. Use the equation below to calculate valve lifter thickness for replacement. ● Valve lifter thickness calculation: Thickness of replacement valve lifter = t1+ (C1 - C2) t1 = Thickness of removed valve lifter C1 = Measured valve clearance C2= Standard valve clearance: F G Intake : 0.36 mm (0.0142 in)* Exhaust : 0.37 mm (0.0146 in)* *: Approximately 80°C (176°F) ● ● H I Thickness of a new valve lifter can be identified by stamp marks on the reverse side (inside the cylinder). Stamp mark N788 indicates 7.88 mm (0.3102 in) in thickness. Available thickness of valve lifter: 25 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.36 mm (0.3102 to 0.3291 in) in steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) (when manufactured at factory). Refer to EM-104, "Available Valve Lifter" . J K KBIA0119E 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Install the selected valve lifter. Install camshaft. Manually turn crankshaft pulley a few turns. Make sure valve clearances for cold engine are within specifications by referring to the specified values. After completing the repair, check the valve clearances again with the specifications for a warmed engine. Make sure the values are within specifications. Valve clearance standard: Hot* Intake : 0.304 - 0.416 mm (0.012 - 0.016 in) Exhaust : 0.308 - 0.432 mm (0.012 - 0.017 in) Cold Intake : 0.26 - 0.34 mm (0.010 - 0.013 in) Exhaust : 0.29 - 0.37 mm (0.011 - 0.015 in) *: Approximately 80°C (176°F) Revision: October 2004 E EM-55 2005 Titan L M CAMSHAFT INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Inspection for Leaks The following are procedures for checking fluid leaks, lubricant leaks and exhaust gases leaks. ● Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants" . ● Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage. – Turn ignition switch “ON” (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leakage at connection points. – Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points. ● Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. NOTE: If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal/installation, slack in the guide may generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is normal. Noise will stop after hydraulic pressure rises. ● Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gases, or any oil/fluids including engine oil and engine coolant. ● Bleed air from lines and hoses of applicable lines, such as in cooling system. ● After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to the specified level, if necessary. Summary of the inspection items: Item Before starting engine Engine running After engine stopped Engine coolant Level Leakage Level Engine oil Level Leakage Level Other oils and fluid* Level Leakage Level Leakage Leakage Leakage Fuel * Transmission/transaxle/CVT fluid, power steering fluid, brake fluid, etc. Revision: October 2004 EM-56 2005 Titan OIL SEAL OIL SEAL Removal and Installation of Valve Oil Seal PFP:00100 A EBS00KMQ REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove camshaft relating to valve oil seal to be removed. Refer to EM-44, "REMOVAL" . EM Remove valve lifters. Refer to EM-44, "REMOVAL" . ● Correctly identify location where each part is removed from. Keep parts organized to avoid mixing them up. C Turn crankshaft until the cylinder requiring new oil seals is at TDC. This will prevent the valve from dropping into the cylinder. Remove the valve collet using Tools. D Tool number : KV10116200 (J-26336-B) : KV10115900 (J-26336-20) E : KV10109220 ( — ) CAUTION: Do not damage the valve lifter holes. Remove valve spring retainer and valve spring. CAUTION: Do not remove valve spring seat from valve spring. F WBIA0578E G Remove the valve oil seal using Tool. Tool number : KV10107902 (J-38959) H I J WBIA0478E INSTALLATION ● Tool number ● ● K Install the valve oil seal using Tool. : KV10115600 (J-38958) L Apply new engine oil on the new valve oil seal joint and seal lip. Install the valve oil seal to the specified height "H". M Height "H" (Without valve spring seat installed) Intake and exhaust : 14.3 - 14.9 mm (0.563 - 0.587 in) WBIA0490E Revision: October 2004 EM-57 2005 Titan OIL SEAL Removal and Installation of Front Oil Seal EBS00KMR REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the engine. Refer to EM-72, "REMOVAL" . Remove crankshaft pulley. Refer to EM-35, "TIMING CHAIN" . Remove the front oil seal using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not damage front cover and oil pump drive spacer. SBIA0359E INSTALLATION 1. 2. Apply new engine oil to both the oil seal lip and dust seal lip of the new front oil seal. Install the front oil seal. ● Install the front oil seal so that each seal lip is oriented as shown. SEM715A Press-fit until the height of the front oil seal is level with the mounting surface using suitable tool. CAUTION: ● Do not damage front timing chain case and crankshaft. ● Press-fit straight and avoid causing burrs or tilting oil seal. ● PBIC2931E 3. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. Removal and Installation of Rear Oil Seal EBS00KMS REMOVAL 1. a. Remove transmission assembly. Refer to AT-265, "REMOVAL" (4X2 models) or AT-268, "REMOVAL" (4X4 models). Remove drive plate. ● Holding crankshaft pulley bolt, lock crankshaft to remove drive plate bolts. ● Remove the bolts diagonally. CAUTION: ● Do not damage the drive plate. Especially, avoid deforming and damaging the signal plate teeth (circumference position). ● Place the drive plate with the signal plate surface facing other than downward. ● Keep magnetic materials away from signal plate. Revision: October 2004 EM-58 2005 Titan OIL SEAL b. 2. Remove engine rear plate. Remove the rear oil seal using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not damage crankshaft and oil seal retainer surface. A EM C WBIA0437E D INSTALLATION 1. 2. Apply new engine oil to both the oil seal lip and dust seal lip of the new rear oil seal. Install the rear oil seal. ● Install the rear oil seal so that each seal lip is oriented as shown. E F G H SEM715A ● ● I Press-fit the rear oil seal using suitable tool. CAUTION: ● Do not damage the crankshaft or cylinder block. ● Press-fit the oil seal straight to avoid causing burrs or tilting. ● Do not touch grease applied onto the oil seal lip. ● Do not damage or scratch the outer circumference of the rear oil seal. Tap until flattened with the front edge of the oil seal retainer. J K L WBIA0438E 3. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 EM-59 M 2005 Titan CYLINDER HEAD CYLINDER HEAD On-Vehicle Service PFP:11041 EBS00KMT CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Warm up the engine thoroughly. Then stop the engine. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to EC-92, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . CAUTION: Leave the fuel pump fuse disconnected until step 7. Remove the spark plug from each cylinder. Refer to EM-27, "REMOVAL" . Connect the engine tachometer (not required in use of CONSULT-II). Install the compression tester with Tool into the spark plug hole. Tool number 6. : EG15050500 (J-45402) With the accelerator pedal fully depressed, turn the ignition switch to “START” for cranking. When the gauge pointer stabilizes, read the compression pressure and engine rpm. Perform these steps to check each cylinder. Unit: kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) /rpm Standard 1,520 (15.5, 220) / 200 7. 8. 9. Minimum 1,324 (13.5, 192) / 200 Deference limit between cylinders 98 (1.0, 14) / 300 WBIA0605E CAUTION: Always use a fully charged battery to obtain specified engine speed. ● If the engine speed is out of the specified range, check the battery liquid for proper gravity. Check the engine speed again with normal battery gravity. ● If the compression pressure is below the minimum value, check the valve clearances and parts associated with the combustion chamber (valve, valve seat, piston, piston ring, cylinder bore, cylinder head, cylinder head gasket). After checking, measure the compression pressure again. ● If some cylinders have low compression pressure, pour a small amount of engine oil into the spark plug hole of the cylinder to re-check it for compression. – If the added engine oil improves the compression, the piston rings may be worn out or damaged. Check the piston rings and replace if necessary. – If the compression pressure remains at a low level despite the addition of engine oil, the valves may be malfunctioning. Check the valves for damage. Replace the valve or valve seat accordingly. ● If two adjacent cylinders have respectively low compression pressure and their compression remains low even after the addition of engine oil, the gaskets may be leaking, or a valve in adjacent cylinders may be damaged. Inspect and repair as required. Install the components in the reverse order of removal. Start the engine and confirm that it runs smoothly. Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC appears, erase it. Refer to EC-31, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Revision: October 2004 EM-60 2005 Titan CYLINDER HEAD Removal and Installation EBS00KMU A EM C D E F KBIA2528E 1. Harness bracket 2. Engine coolant temperature sensor 3. Washer 4. Cylinder head gasket (left bank) 5. Cylinder head (right bank) 6. Cylinder head bolt 7. Cylinder head gasket (right bank) 8. Cylinder head (left bank) G H REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove engine assembly from vehicle. Refer to EM-72, "REMOVAL" . Remove the following components and related parts: ● Auto tensioner of drive belts and idler pulley. Refer to EM-13, "REMOVAL" . ● Thermostat housing and hose. Refer to CO-19, "Removal of Thermostat Housing, Water Outlet and Heater Pipe" . ● Oil pan and oil strainer. Refer to EM-22, "REMOVAL" . ● Fuel tube and fuel injector assembly. Refer to EM-29, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" . ● Intake manifold. Refer to EM-15, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . ● Ignition coil. Refer to EM-26, "IGNITION COIL" . ● Rocker cover. Refer to EM-33, "ROCKER COVER" . Remove crankshaft pulley, front cover, oil pump, and timing chain. Refer to EM-35, "TIMING CHAIN" . Remove camshaft sprockets and camshafts. Refer to EM-44, "CAMSHAFT" . Remove cylinder head bolts in reverse of order shown. PBIC0068E Revision: October 2004 EM-61 2005 Titan I J K L M CYLINDER HEAD INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Cylinder Head Bolts Diameter ● Cylinder head bolts are tightened by plastic zone tightening method. Whenever the size difference between d1 and d2 exceeds the limit, replace the bolt with a new one. Limit (d1 - d2) ● : 0.18 mm (0.0071 in) If reduction of diameter appears in a position other than d2, use it as d2 point. KBIA0189E INSTALLATION 1. 2. a. Install cylinder head gasket. Install the cylinder head. Follow the steps below to tighten the bolts in the numerical order shown. CAUTION: ● If cylinder head bolts are re-used, check their diameters before installation. Refer to EM-62, "Cylinder Head Bolts Diameter" . Apply engine oil to threads and seating surface of the bolts. Step a Step b Step c b. : 98.1 N·m (10 kg-m, 72 ft-lb) :Loosen in the reverse order of tightening. : 44.1 N·m (4.5 kg-m, 33 ft-lb) PBIC0068E Measure the tightening angle using Tool. Tool number : KV10112100 (BT-8653-A) CAUTION: Measure the tightening angle using Tool. Do not measure visually. Step d Step e : 60° clockwise : 60° clockwise WBIA0603E 3. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 EM-62 2005 Titan CYLINDER HEAD INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Inspection for Leaks A The following are procedures for checking fluid leaks, lubricant leaks and exhaust gases leaks. ● Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required EM quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . ● Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage. – Turn ignition switch “ON” (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel C leakage at connection points. – Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points. ● Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. D NOTE: If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal/installation, slack in the guide may generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is normal. Noise will stop after E hydraulic pressure rises. ● Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gases, or any oil/fluids including engine oil and engine coolant. F ● Bleed air from lines and hoses of applicable lines, such as in cooling system. ● After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to the specified level, if necessary. G Summary of the inspection items: Item Before starting engine Engine running After engine stopped Engine coolant Level Leakage Level Engine oil Level Leakage Level Other oils and fluid* Level Leakage Level Leakage Leakage Leakage Fuel H I * Transmission/transaxle/CVT fluid, power steering fluid, brake fluid, etc. J K L M Revision: October 2004 EM-63 2005 Titan CYLINDER HEAD Disassembly and Assembly EBS00KMV KBIA2529E 1. Spark plug 2. Valve lifter 3. Valve collet 4. Valve spring retainer 5. Valve spring 6. Valve spring seat 7. Valve oil seal 8. Valve guide 9. Valve seat 10. Valve (INT) 11. Valve (EXH) 12. Cylinder head (left bank) 13. Spark plug tube 14. Cylinder head (right bank) DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Remove spark plug. Refer to EM-27, "REMOVAL" . Remove the valve lifter. ● Identify the installation positions, and store them without mixing them up. Remove the valve collet using Tool. Tool number 4. 5. 6. : KV10116200 (J-26336-B) : KV10115900 (J-26336-20) : KV10109220 ( — ) CAUTION: When working, take care not to damage valve lifter holes. Remove valve spring retainer, valve spring and valve spring seat. Inspect the valve guide clearance. Refer to EM-67, "Valve Guide Clearance" . Push the valve stem to the combustion chamber side, and remove the valve. ● Identify the installation positions, and store them without mixing them up. Revision: October 2004 EM-64 WBIA0578E 2005 Titan CYLINDER HEAD 7. Remove the valve oil seal using Tool. Tool number A : KV10107902 (J-38959) EM C WBIA0478E 8. Replace the valve seat if necessary. Refer to EM-70, "VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT" . 9. Replace the valve guide if necessary. Refer to EM-70, "VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT" . 10. Remove the spark plug tube, as necessary. ● Remove the spark plug tube out of the cylinder head using suitable tool. CAUTION: ● Do not damage the cylinder head. ● Do not remove the spark plug tube unless absolutely necessary. Once removed, the spark plug tube will be deformed and cannot be reused. Install the valve guide if necessary. Refer to EM-67, "VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT" . Install the valve seat if necessary. Refer to EM-70, "VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT" . Install the valve oil seal using Tool. Tool number ● ● E F G ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. D H : KV10115600 (J-38958) Apply new engine oil on the new valve oil seal joint and seal lip. Install the valve oil seal to the specified height "H". I J Height "H" (Without valve spring seat installed) Intake and exhaust : 14.3 - 14.9 mm (0.563 - 0.587 in) K WBIA0490E 4. 5. 6. 7. Install valves. Install valve spring seats. Install valve springs. ● Install narrow pitch (Paint mark side) to cylinder head side. Install valve spring retainers. L M SEM085D Revision: October 2004 EM-65 2005 Titan CYLINDER HEAD 8. Install the valve collet using Tool. Tool number : KV10116200 (J-26336-B) : KV10115900 (J-26336-20) : KV10109220 ( — ) CAUTION: When working, take care not to damage valve lifter holes. WBIA0578E 9. Install valve lifters. ● Install removed parts in there same locations. ● If installing new lifters, select the correct size lifter for proper valve clearance. Refer to EM-52, "Valve Clearance" . 10. Install the spark plug tube if necessary, following the procedure below. a. Remove any old liquid gasket adhering to the cylinder-head spark plug tube hole. b. Apply liquid gasket to area within approximately 12 mm (0.47 in) from the edge of the spark plug tube press-fit side. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . c. Press-fit the spark plug tube to the specified height “H” using suitable tool. Standard press-fit height “H” :38.4 - 39.4 mm (1.512 - 1.551 in) CAUTION: ● When press-fitting, take care not to deform the spark plug tube. ● After press-fitting, wipe off any liquid gasket protruding onto the cylinder-head upper face. 11. Install spark plugs. Inspection After Disassembly KBIA1248E EBS00KMW CYLINDER HEAD DISTORTION 1. 2. Remove any oil, scale, gasket, sealant and carbon deposits from the cylinder head surface. CAUTION: Do not allow any debris to enter the oil or coolant passages. Measure the bottom surface of the cylinder head for distortion in six directions as shown, using suitable tools. Standard Limit ● : 0.03 mm (0.0012 in) : 0.1mm (0.004 in) If measurement exceeds the limit, replace the cylinder head. PBIC0075E Revision: October 2004 EM-66 2005 Titan CYLINDER HEAD VALVE DIMENSIONS ● ● A Check the dimensions of each valve. Refer to EM-67, "VALVE DIMENSIONS" . If dimensions are out of the standard, replace valve. EM C SEM188A VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE Valve Stem Diameter D E Measure diameter of valve stem using suitable tool. Standard Intake Exhaust F : 5.965 - 5.980 mm (0.2348 - 0.2354 in) : 5.955 - 5.970 mm (0.2344 - 0.2350 in) G H SEM938C Valve Guide Inside Diameter I Measure inside diameter of valve guide using suitable tool. Standard Intake and Exhaust : 6.000 - 6.018 mm (0.2362 - 0.2369 in) J Valve Guide Clearance ● K (Valve guide clearance) = (Valve guide inside diameter) – (Valve stem diameter). Valve guide clearance: Standard Intake : 0.020 - 0.053 mm (0.0008 - 0.0021 in) Exhaust : 0.030 - 0.063 mm (0.0012 - 0.0025 in) Limit Intake : 0.08 mm (0.0031 in) Exhaust : 0.09 mm (0.0035 in) ● L M If the calculated value exceeds the limit, replace valve and/or valve guide. When the valve guide must be replaced, refer to EM-67, "VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT" . VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT When valve guide is removed, replace with oversized (0.2 mm, 0.008 in) valve guide. Revision: October 2004 EM-67 2005 Titan CYLINDER HEAD 1. To remove valve guide, heat cylinder head to 110° to 130°C (230° to 266°F) by soaking in heated oil. SEM008A 2. Remove the valve guide using suitable tool. CAUTION: Cylinder head contains heat. When working, wear protective equipment to avoid getting burned. SEM931C 3. Ream cylinder head valve guide hole using suitable tool. Valve guide hole diameter: Standard Intake and exhaust : 9.975 - 9.996 mm (0.3927 0.3935 in) Oversize (service) Intake and exhaust : 10.175 - 10.196 mm (0.4006 - 0.4014 in) SEM932C 4. Heat cylinder head to 110 to 130°C (230 to 266°F) by soaking in heated oil. SEM008A 5. Press valve guide from camshaft side to dimensions as shown. Revision: October 2004 EM-68 2005 Titan CYLINDER HEAD CAUTION: Cylinder head contains heat. When working, wear protective equipment to avoid getting burned. A EM C KBIA2530E 6. D Ream cylinder head valve guide hole using suitable tool. Valve guide hole diameter: Intake and exhaust : 6.000 - 6.018 mm (0.2362 - 0.2369 in) E F G SEM932C H VALVE SEAT CONTACT ● ● ● ● After confirming that the dimensions of valve guides and valves are within specifications, perform this procedure. Apply prussian blue (or white lead) onto contacting surface of valve seat to check the condition of the valve contact on the surface. Check if the contact area band is continuous all around the circumference. If not, grind to adjust valve fitting and check again. If the contacting surface still has NG conditions even after the re-check, replace valve seat. I J K SBIA0322E L M Revision: October 2004 EM-69 2005 Titan CYLINDER HEAD VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT When valve seat is removed, replace with oversized (0.5 mm, 0.020 in) valve seat. 1. Bore out old seat until it collapses. Boring should not continue beyond the bottom face of the seat recess in cylinder head. Set the machine depth stop to ensure this. 2. Ream cylinder head recess diameter for service valve seat. Oversize [0.5 mm (0.020 in)] (Service): Intake : 38.500 - 38.516 mm (1.5157 - 1.5164 in) Exhaust : 32.700 - 32.716 mm (1.2874 - 1.2880 in) ● ● Be sure to ream in circles concentric to the valve guide center. This will enable valve seat to fit correctly. SEM795A 3. Heat cylinder head to 110 to 130°C (230 to 266°F) by soaking in heated oil. SEM008A 4. 5. Cool the valve seats well with dry ice. Force fit the valve seat into the cylinder head. CAUTION: ● Avoid directly touching cold valve seats. ● Cylinder head contains heat. When working, wear protective equipment to avoid getting burned. Finish the seat to the specified dimensions using suitable tool. Refer to EM-106, "Valve Seat" . CAUTION: When using valve seat cutter, firmly grip the cutter handle with both hands. Then, press on the contacting surface all around the circumference to cut in a single drive. Improper pressure on with the cutter or cutting many different times may result in stage valve seat. SEM934C 6. Grind to obtain the dimensions indicated as shown. ● Using compound, grind to adjust valve fitting. KBIA2531E Revision: October 2004 EM-70 2005 Titan CYLINDER HEAD A EM C KBIA2544E 7. D Check again for normal contact. Refer to EM-69, "VALVE SEAT CONTACT" . VALVE SPRING SQUARENESS ● Limit ● E Set try square along the side of valve spring and rotate the spring. Measure the maximum clearance between the top face of spring and try square. F : Less than 2.2 mm (0.087 in) If measurement is not within specifications, replace the valve spring. G H PBIC0080E VALVE SPRING DIMENSIONS AND VALVE SPRING PRESSURE LOAD ● Check the valve spring pressure at the specified spring height. I Standard: Intake and exhaust Free height: Installation height: Installation load: J 50.58 mm (1.9913 in) 37.0 mm (1.457 in) 165.8 - 187.0 N (16.9 19.1 kg, 37- 42 lb) Height during valve open: 28.2 mm (1.110 in) Load with valve open: 314.8 - 355.0 N (32.1 36.2 kg, 71 - 80 lb) ● K SEM113 If measurement is not within specifications, replace the valve spring. Revision: October 2004 EM-71 L M 2005 Titan ENGINE ASSEMBLY ENGINE ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation PFP:10001 EBS00KMX LBIA0397E 1. Rear engine mounting insulator 4x4 2. Rear engine mounting insulator 4x2 3. LH engine mounting bracket 4. LH heat shield plate 5. LH engine mounting insulator 6. RH engine mounting bracket 7. RH heat shield plate 8. RH engine mounting insulator WARNING: ● Situate vehicle on a flat and solid surface. ● Place chocks at front and back of rear wheels. ● For engines not equipped with engine slingers, attach proper slingers and bolts described in PARTS CATALOG. CAUTION: ● Always be careful to work safely, avoid forceful or uninstructed operations. ● Do not start working until exhaust system and engine coolant are cooled sufficiently. ● If items or work required are not covered by the engine section, refer to the applicable sections. ● Always use the support point specified for lifting. ● Use either 2-point lift type or separate type lift. If board-on type is used for unavoidable reasons, support at the rear axle jacking point with transmission jack or similar tool before starting work, in preparation for the backward shift of center of gravity. ● For supporting points for lifting and jacking point at rear axle, refer to GI-40, "Garage Jack and Safety Stand" . REMOVAL Preparation 1. 2. 3. 4. Drain engine coolant. Refer to MA-13, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . Partially drain A/T fluid. Refer to MA-23, "Changing A/T Fluid" . Release fuel pressure. Refer to EC-92, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Remove the engine hood. Refer to BL-13, "Removal and Installation of Hood Assembly" . Revision: October 2004 EM-72 2005 Titan ENGINE ASSEMBLY 5. 6. Remove the cowl extension. Refer to EI-21, "Removal and Installation" . Remove engine room cover using power tools. A EM C WBIA0528E 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. Remove the air duct and air cleaner case assembly EM-14, "REMOVAL" . Disconnect vacuum hose between vehicle and engine and set it aside. Remove the radiator assembly and hoses. Refer to CO-12, "REMOVAL" . Remove the drive belts. Refer to EM-12, "Removal" . Remove the fan blade. Refer to CO-15, "REMOVAL" . Disconnect the engine room harness from the fuse box and set it aside. Disconnect the ECM. Disconnect the engine room harness from the engine side and set it aside. Disconnect the engine harness grounds. Disconnect the power steering reservoir tank from engine and move it aside. Disconnect power steering oil pump from engine. Move it aside and secure it using suitable wire or rope. Refer to PS-27, "REMOVAL" . Remove the A/C compressor bolts and set the compressor aside. Refer to MTC-115, "REMOVAL" . Disconnect brake booster vacuum line. Disconnect EVAP line. Disconnect the fuel hose at the engine side connection. Refer to EM-29, "REMOVAL" . Disconnect the heater hoses at cowl, and install plugs to avoid leakage of engine coolant. Remove the A/T oil level indicator and indicator tube upper bolts. Remove front final drive assembly (4x4 only). Refer to FFD-12, "REMOVAL" . Remove exhaust manifolds. Refer to EM-19, "REMOVAL" . Install engine slingers into left bank cylinder head and right bank cylinder head. Engine slinger torque: E F G H I J K L 45.0 N·m (4.6 kg-m, 33 ft-lb) 27. Remove the A/T. Refer to AT-265, "Removal and Installation (4x2)" or AT-268, "Removal and Installation (4x4)" . 28. Lift using a hoist and secure the engine in position. 29. Remove engine assembly from vehicle, avoid interference with vehicle body. CAUTION: PBIC1556E ● Before and during this lifting, always check if any harnesses are left connected. 30. Remove the parts that may restrict installation of engine to engine stand. NOTE: This procedure is described assuming that you use an engine stand mounting to the surface to which the transmission mounts. a. Remove drive plate. ● Holding crankshaft pulley bolt, lock crankshaft to remove drive plate bolts. ● Loosen bolts diagonally. Revision: October 2004 D EM-73 2005 Titan M ENGINE ASSEMBLY CAUTION: ● Be careful not to damage drive plate. Especially avoid deforming and damaging of signal plate teeth (circumference position). ● Place the drive plate with signal plate surface facing other than downward. ● Keep magnetic materials away from signal plate. KBIA2491E CAUTION: Use an engine stand that has a load capacity [approximately 240kg (529 lb) or more] large enough for supporting the engine weight. ● If the load capacity of the stand is not adequate, remove the following parts beforehand to reduce the potential risk of overturning the stand. – Remove fuel tube and fuel injector assembly. Refer to EM-29, "REMOVAL" . – Remove intake manifold. Refer to EM-15, "REMOVAL" . – Remove ignition coil. Refer to EM-26, "REMOVAL" . – Remove rocker cover. Refer to EM-33, "REMOVAL" . – Other removable brackets. CAUTION: Before removing the hanging chains, make sure the engine stand is stable and there is no risk of overturning. 31. Remove alternator. Refer to SC-26, "REMOVAL" . 32. Remove engine mounting insulator and bracket using power tool. Revision: October 2004 EM-74 2005 Titan ENGINE ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION A Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: ● When replacing an engine or transmission you must make sure the dowels are installed correctly EM during re-assembly. ● Improper alignment caused by missing dowels may cause vibration, oil leaks or breakage of drivetrain components. C INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Inspection for Leaks The following are procedures for checking fluid leaks, lubricant leaks and exhaust gases leaks. ● Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants" . ● Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage. – Turn ignition switch “ON” (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leakage at connection points. – Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points. ● Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. NOTE: If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal/installation, slack in the guide may generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is normal. Noise will stop after hydraulic pressure rises. ● Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gases, or any oil/fluids including engine oil and engine coolant. ● Bleed air from lines and hoses of applicable lines, such as in cooling system. ● After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to the specified level, if necessary. D E F G H I Summary of the inspection items: Item Before starting engine Engine running After engine stopped Engine coolant Level Leakage Level Engine oil Level Leakage Level Other oils and fluid* Level Leakage Level Leakage Leakage Leakage Fuel J K L * Transmission/transaxle/CVT fluid, power steering fluid, brake fluid, etc. M Revision: October 2004 EM-75 2005 Titan CYLINDER BLOCK CYLINDER BLOCK Disassembly and Assembly PFP:11010 EBS00KMY WBIA0471E Revision: October 2004 EM-76 2005 Titan CYLINDER BLOCK * Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . 1. Knock sensor sub-harness 2. Knock sensor 3. Cylinder block 4. Main bearing 5. Top ring 6. Second ring 7. Oil ring 8. Crankshaft key 9. Piston 10. Connecting rod 11. Snap ring 12. Piston pin 13. Connecting rod bearing 14. Connecting rod bearing cap 15. Main bearing cap 16. Thrust bearing 17. Main bearing 18. Crankshaft 19. Pilot converter 20. Thrust bearing 21. Side bolt 22. Drive plate 23. Reinforcement plate 24. Rear oil seal retainer 25. Rear oil seal 26. Transmission 27. O-ring 28. Crankshaft position sensor (POS) 29. Gasket 30. Cylinder block heater 31. Connector cap A EM C D DISASSEMBLY NOTE: Explained here is how to disassemble with engine stand supporting transmission surface. When using different type of engine stand, note steps may be different. 1. Remove engine assembly and mount engine to stand. Refer to EM-72, "REMOVAL" . CAUTION: Before removing the hanging chains, make sure engine stand is stable and there is no risk of overturning. 2. Drain engine oil. Refer to LU-8, "Changing Engine Oil" . 3. Drain engine coolant by removing the cylinder block drain plugs “A”, “B”, “C” and “D” as shown. E F G H I J WBIA0419E 4. 5. 6. 7. a. b. Remove the following components and associated parts (the parts referred to in step 1 are not included here). ● Oil pan and oil strainer. Refer to EM-22, "REMOVAL" . ● Crankshaft pulley, front cover and timing chain. Refer to EM-36, "REMOVAL" . ● Camshaft. Refer to EM-44, "REMOVAL" . ● Cylinder head. Refer to EM-61, "REMOVAL" . Remove knock sensor. CAUTION: Carefully handle the sensor, avoiding shocks. Check connecting rod side clearance. Refer to EM-92, "CONNECTING ROD SIDE CLEARANCE" . Remove the piston and connecting rod assembly as follows. Position the crankshaft pin corresponding to the connecting rod to be removed onto the bottom dead center. Remove the connecting rod cap. Revision: October 2004 EM-77 2005 Titan K L M CYLINDER BLOCK c. Push the piston and connecting rod assembly out to the cylinder head side using suitable tool. PBIC0086E 8. Remove the connecting rod bearings. CAUTION: When removing them, note the installation position. Keep them in the correct order. 9. Check piston ring side clearance. Refer to EM-93, "PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE" . 10. Remove the piston rings from the piston using suitable tool. CAUTION: ● Do not damage piston. ● Do not damage piston rings by expanding them excessively. PBIC0087E 11. Remove piston from connecting rod as follows. a. Remove snap ring using suitable tool. PBIC0260E b. Heat piston to 60° to 70°C (140° to 158°F) using suitable tool. PBIC0261E Revision: October 2004 EM-78 2005 Titan CYLINDER BLOCK c. Push out piston pin using suitable tool. A EM C PBIC0262E D 12. Separate and remove rear oil seal retainer from cylinder block. CAUTION: Do not damage mating surface. 13. Remove the rear oil seal from the rear oil seal retainer. 14. Measure the crankshaft side clearance. Refer to EM-92, "CRANKSHAFT END PLAY" . 15. Remove the main bearing caps as follows: ● Loosen bolts in several different steps. a. Loosen the side bolts (M10) starting from 30 to 21 to remove. b. Loosen the main bearing cap sub bolts (M9) starting from 20 to 11 to remove. c. Loosen the main bearing cap bolts (M12) starting from 10 to 1 to remove. E F G H PBIC0090E d. Remove the main bearing cap. ● Insert bolts (2) into bolt holes, and then remove main bearing cap by lifting up and shaking forward and backward. I J K L KBIA2492E M 16. Remove the crankshaft. 17. Remove the main bearings and thrust bearings from the cylinder block and main bearing caps. ● When removing them, note the installation position. Keep them in the correct order. 18. Remove the pilot converter using Tool if necessary. Tool number : ST16610001 (J-23907) PBIC0092E Revision: October 2004 EM-79 2005 Titan CYLINDER BLOCK ASSEMBLY 1. 2. Fully air-blow the coolant and oil passages in the cylinder block, the cylinder bore, and the crankcase to remove any foreign material. CAUTION: Use goggles to protect your eyes. Install each plug to the cylinder block. (Only screw-type plugs are shown.) ● Apply liquid gasket. Use Genuine Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". ● Replace the copper washers with new ones. ● Tighten each plug as specified below. Part Washer Tightening torque A Yes 53.9 N·m (5.5 kg-m, 40 ft-lb) B No 19.6 N·m (2.0 kg-m, 15 ft-lb) C Yes 62.7 N·m (6.4 kg-m, 46 ft-lb) D Yes 62.7 N·m (6.4 kg-m, 46 ft-lb) WBIA0419E 3. a. b. Install the main bearings and the thrust bearings. Remove dust, dirt, and oil on the bearing mating surfaces of the cylinder block and the main bearing caps. Install the thrust bearings to both sides of the No. 3 journal housing on the cylinder block and main bearing caps ● Install the thrust bearings with the oil groove facing the crankshaft arm (outside). ● Install the thrust bearings with a protrusion in the center on the main bearing caps. PBIC0093E c. Install main bearings paying attention to the direction. ● Install the one with oil holes onto the cylinder block and the one without oil holes onto the main bearing cap. ● Before installing bearings, apply engine oil to bearing surface (inside). Do not apply oil to the back surface, but thoroughly clean it. ● When installing, align the bearing stopper to the notch. ● Ensure the oil holes on the cylinder block and those on the corresponding bearing are aligned. PBIC0094E 4. 5. Install the pilot converter to the crankshaft using suitable tool. Install the crankshaft to the cylinder block. ● While turning the crankshaft by hand, make sure it turns smoothly. EMP0569D Revision: October 2004 EM-80 2005 Titan CYLINDER BLOCK 6. Install the main bearing caps. ● Align the identification number to the journal position to install. ● Install it with front mark (indicated by the arrow) facing front of engine. ● Tap the caps lightly to seat them in the installation position. A EM C KBIA2533E D 7. a. Follow the steps below to tighten each main bearing cap bolt. Apply engine oil to threads and seating surfaces of bolts, and tighten all bolts temporarily. Main bearing cap bolts in order of 1 to 10 Main bearing cap sub bolts in order of 11 to 20 E : 39.2 N·m (4.0 kg-m, 29 ft.-lb) F : 29.4 N·m (3.0 kg-m, 22 ft-lb) G PBIC0090E b. Measure tightening angle using Tool. Tool number H : KV10112100 (BT-8653-A) CAUTION: Measure tightening angle using Tool. Do not measure visually. Main bearing cap bolts in order of 1 to 10 Main bearing cap sub bolts in order of 11 to 20 Side bolts in order of 21 to 30 I : 40° J : 30° WBIA0597E : 49 N·m (5.0 kg-m, 36 ft-lb) Rotate crankshaft by hand after bolts are tightened. Check if it rotates smoothly. Check crankshaft side clearance. Refer to EM-92, "CRANKSHAFT END PLAY" . Rotate crankshaft by hands after bolts are tightened. Check if it rotates smoothly. Check the crankshaft side clearance. Install rear oil seal to rear oil seal retainer. CAUTION: Do not damage or scratch outer circumference of oil seal. ● Install new rear oil seal in the direction shown. ● L ● ● ● 8. M SEM715A Revision: October 2004 EM-81 K 2005 Titan CYLINDER BLOCK ● ● Tap until flattened with the front edge of the rear oil seal retainer using suitable tool. Fit the rear oil seal until it is level with the rear end surface of rear oil seal retainer. PBIC0097E 9. Install rear oil seal retainer. ● Apply liquid gasket thoroughly to rear oil seal retainer as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". ● Apply new engine oil on lips of rear oil seal. Do not touch. SBIA0391E 10. Install the piston to the connecting rod. a. Install the snap ring to the grooves of the piston rear side. ● Insert it fully into the groove to install. b. Install the piston to the connecting rod. ● Heat piston until piston pin can be pushed in by hand without excess force [approx. 60° to 70 C° (140° to 158 °F)]. From the front to the rear, insert the piston pin into the piston and the connecting rod. ● Assemble so that the front mark on the piston crown and the oil holes and cylinder No. on the connecting rod are positioned as shown. c. Install the snap ring to the grooves of the piston front side. ● Insert it fully into the groove to install. ● After installing, make sure connecting rod moves smoothly. KBIA2534E 11. Install piston rings. CAUTION: Do not damage piston. ● Position each ring with the gap as shown, referring to the piston front mark. ● Install the second ring with the stamped surface facing upward. Stamped mark Second ring : 2N PBIC0100E Revision: October 2004 EM-82 2005 Titan CYLINDER BLOCK 12. Install the connecting rod bearings to the connecting rod and connecting rod cap. ● When installing the connecting rod bearings, apply engine oil to the bearing surface (inside). Do not apply oil to the back surface, but thoroughly clean it. ● When installing, align the connecting rod bearing stopper protrusion with the cutout of the connecting rod to install. ● Check that the oil holes on the connecting rod and those on the corresponding bearing are aligned. A EM C PBIC0266E D 13. Install the piston and connecting rod assembly to the crankshaft using Tool. Tool number ● ● ● ● : EM03470000 (J-8037) E Position the crankshaft pin corresponding to the connecting rod to be installed onto bottom dead center. Apply engine oil sufficiently to the cylinder bore, piston, and crankshaft pin. Match the cylinder position with the cylinder No. on the connecting rod to install. WBIA0626E Install the piston with the front mark on the piston crown facing the front of the engine. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the crankshaft pin, resulting from an interference of the connecting rod big end. F G H I 14. Install the connecting rod cap. ● Match the stamped cylinder number marks on the connecting rod with those on the cylinder cap to install. J K L KBIA2536E 15. Tighten connecting rod bolts using Tool. Tool number : KV10112100 (BT-8653-A) Connecting rod bolts Step 1 Step 2 ● ● ● : 19.6 N·m (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft-lb) : 90° clockwise Apply engine oil to threads and seats of connecting rod bolts. After tightening bolts, make sure the crankshaft rotates smoothly. Check connecting rod side clearance. Refer to EM-92, "CONNECTING ROD SIDE CLEARANCE" . Revision: October 2004 M EM-83 WBIA0627E 2005 Titan CYLINDER BLOCK 16. Install knock sensor. CAUTION: If knock sensor is dropped, replace it with a new one. ● Make sure that there is no foreign material on the cylinder block mating surface and the back surface of knock sensor. ● Install it with its connector facing the center of the cylinder block side. ● Do not tighten knock sensor bolts while holding connector. ● Make sure knock sensor does not interfere with other parts. KBIA2493E ● Position the sub-harness as shown before installing intake manifold. KBIA2549E 17. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. 18. Remove engine assembly from engine stand. 19. Install drive plate. ● Align dowel pin of crankshaft rear end with pin holes of each parts to install. KBIA2494E ● ● Install drive plate, reinforcement plate and pilot converter (if not installed in step 4) as shown. Face chamfered or rounded edge side to crankshaft. KBIA2537E Revision: October 2004 EM-84 2005 Titan CYLINDER BLOCK How to Select Piston and Bearing EBS00KMZ A DESCRIPTION Connecting points Between cylinder block to crankshaft Connecting parts Selection items Main bearing grade (bearing thickness) Main bearing Selection methods Determined by match of cylinder block bearing housing grade (Housing inside diameter) and crankshaft journal grade (journal outside diameter) Between crankshaft to connecting rod Connecting rod bearing Connecting rod bearing grade (bearing thickness) Connecting rod bearing grade = crankshaft pin grade (pin diameter). No grade exists for inside diameter of connecting rod large end. Between cylinder block to piston Piston and piston pin assembly. The piston is available together with piston pin as an assembly. Piston grade (piston diameter) Piston grade = cylinder bore grade (diameter of bore) *Between piston to connecting rod — — C D E F — *For the service parts, the grade for fitting cannot be selected between a piston pin and a connecting rod. (Only 0 grade is available.) The information at the shipment from the plant is described as a reference. ● The identification grade stamped on each part is the grade for the dimension measured in new condition. This grade cannot apply to reused parts. ● For reused or repaired parts, measure the dimension accurately. Determine the grade by comparing the measurement with the values of each selection table. ● For details of the measurement method of each part, the reuse standards, and the selection method of the selective fitting parts, refer to the text. HOW TO SELECT PISTON Piston Selective Fitting When New Cylinder Block is Used: ● EM G H I J Check the cylinder bore grade on the bottom face of cylinder block, and select the piston of the same grade. K L M KBIA2495E KBIA2496E When Cylinder Block is Reused 1. Measure the cylinder block bore diameter. Revision: October 2004 EM-85 2005 Titan CYLINDER BLOCK 2. Determine the bore grade by comparing the measurement with the values under the “Cylinder bore diameter” of the piston selection table. Use oversized piston if clearance of standard grade piston is outside the specified value. Piston Selection Table Unit: mm (in) Grade number (Mark) 1 2 3 Cylinder bore diameter 98.000-98.010 (3.8583-3.8587) 98.010-98.020 (3.8587-3.8590) 93.020-98.030 (3.8590-3.8594) Piston diameter 97.980-97.990 (3.8575-3.8579) 97.990-98.000 (3.8579-3.8583) 98.000-98.010 (3.8583-3.8587) CAUTION: Oversize must be used in all cylinders when using oversized parts. Piston oversize (Service) : 0.20 mm (0.0079 in) NOTE: ● The piston is available together with piston pin as an assembly. ● The piston pin (piston pin bore) grade is provided only for the parts installed at the plant. For service parts, no grades can be selected (Only 0 grade is available.). ● Hone cylinder to obtain specified clearance between piston and cylinder bore when using an oversized piston. Be sure to use the same oversized piston rings. HOW TO SELECT CONNECTING ROD BEARING When New Connecting Rod and Crankshaft are Used 1. Apply the big end inside diameter grade stamped on the connecting rod side face to the row in the “Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table”. KBIA2536E 2. 3. 4. Apply the pin diameter grade stamped on the crankshaft front side to the column in the “Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table”. Read the symbol at the cross point of the selected row and column in the “Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table”. Apply the symbol obtained to the "Connecting Rod Bearing Grade Table" to select. PBIC0110E When Crankshaft and Connecting Rod are Reused 1. 2. 3. Measure dimensions of the big end inside diameter of the connecting rod and diameter of the crankshaft pin individually. Apply the measured dimension to the “Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table”. The following steps are the same as in “When New Connecting Rod and Crankshaft are Used”. Refer to .EM-86, "When New Connecting Rod and Crankshaft are Used" . Revision: October 2004 EM-86 2005 Titan CYLINDER BLOCK Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table A EM C D E F KBIA2538E Connecting Rod Bearing Grade Table. Grade number G Thickness “T” mm (in) Identification color (mark) 0 1.500 - 1.503 (0.0591 - 0.0592) Black 1 1.503 - 1.506 (0.0592 - 0.0593) Brown 2 1.506 - 1.509 (0.0593 - 0.0594) Green 3 1.509 - 1.512 (0.0594 - 0.0595) Yellow H I Undersize Bearings Usage Guide ● ● When the specified oil clearance is not obtained with standard size connecting rod bearings, use undersize (US) bearings. When using undersize bearing, measure the bearing inside diameter with bearing installed, and grind the crankshaft pin so that the oil clearance satisfies the standard. Bearing undersize table J K Unit: mm (in) Undersize Thickness 0.25 (0.0098) 1.627 - 1.635 (0.0641 - 0.0644) L CAUTION: In grinding the crankshaft pin to use undersize bearings, keep the fillet R (All crankshaft pins). Fillet R M : 1.5 - 1.7 mm (0.059 - 0.067 in) PBIC0111E Revision: October 2004 EM-87 2005 Titan CYLINDER BLOCK HOW TO SELECT MAIN BEARING When New Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Used 1. Apply main bearing housing grade on bottom face of cylinder block to row in "Main Bearings Selection Table". KBIA2495E 2. Apply journal diameter grade on crankshaft front to column in "Main Bearings Selection Table". PBIC0110E 3. 4. Read the symbol at the cross point of the selected row and column in the "Main Bearings Selection Table". CAUTION: ● Initial clearance for No. 1, 5 journal and No. 2, 3, 4 journal is different. Use two different selection lists for each part. ● No. 1, 5 journal and No. 2, 3, 4 journal have the same signs but different measures. Do not confuse them. Apply the symbol to the "Main Bearings Grade Table" to select. NOTE: ● Grade list applies to all journals. ● Service parts are available as a set of both upper and lower. When Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Reused 1. 2. 3. Measure inside diameter of cylinder block main bearings housing and outside diameter of crankshaft journal. Apply measurement in above step 1 to "Main Bearings Selection Table". The following steps are same as in “When New Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Used”. Refer to EM-88 . Revision: October 2004 EM-88 2005 Titan CYLINDER BLOCK Main Bearings Selection Table (No. 1 and No. 5 journal) A EM C D E F G H I J K L M WBIA0608E Revision: October 2004 EM-89 2005 Titan CYLINDER BLOCK Main Bearings Selection Table (No. 2, 3 and 4 journal) WBIA0609E Revision: October 2004 EM-90 2005 Titan CYLINDER BLOCK Main Bearings Grade Table (All Journals) Unit: mm (in) Grade number UPR/LWR Thickness Identification color 0 — 2.483 - 2.486 (0.0978 - 0.0979) Black 1 — 2.486 - 2.489 (0.0979 - 0.0980) Brown 2 — 2.489 - 2.492 (0.0980 - 0.0981) Green 3 — 2.492 - 2.495 (0.0981 - 0.0982) Yellow 4 — 2.495 - 2.498 (0.0982 - 0.0983) Blue 5 — 2.498 - 2.501 (0.0983 - 0.0985) Pink 6 — 2.501 - 2.504 (0.0985 - 0.0986) Purple 7 — 2.504 - 2.507 (0.0986 - 0.0987) White 8 — 2.507 - 2.510 (0.0987 - 0.0988) Red UPR 2.483 - 2.486 (0.0978 - 0.0979) Black LWR 2.486 - 2.489 (0.0979 - 0.0980) Brown UPR 2.486 - 2.489 (0.0979 - 0.0980) Brown 01 12 23 34 45 56 67 78 LWR 2.489 - 2.492 (0.0980 - 0.0981) Green UPR 2.489 - 2.492 (0.0980 - 0.0981) Green LWR 2.492 - 2.495 (0.0981 - 0.0982) Yellow UPR 2.492 - 2.495 (0.0981 - 0.0982) Yellow LWR 2.495 - 2.498 (0.0982 - 0.0983) Blue UPR 2.495 - 2.498 (0.0982 - 0.0983) Blue LWR 2.498 - 2.501 (0.0983 - 0.0985) Pink UPR 2.498 - 2.501 (0.0983 - 0.0985) Pink LWR 2.501 - 2.504 (0.0985 - 0.0986) Purple UPR 2.501 - 2.504 (0.0985 - 0.0986) Purple LWR 2.504 - 2.507 (0.0986 - 0.0987) White UPR 2.504 - 2.507 (0.0986 - 0.0987) White LWR 2.507 - 2.510 (0.0987 - 0.0988) Red A Remarks EM Grade is the same for upper and lower bearings. C D E F G Grade and color are different for upper and lower bearings. H I J K Use Undersize Bearing Usage Guide ● ● Use undersize (US) bearing when oil clearance with standard size main bearing is not within specification. When using undersize (US) bearing, measure inside diameter of bearing installed and grind journal until oil clearance falls within specification. Bearing undersize table Unit: mm (in) Undersize Thickness 0.25 (0.0098) 2.618 - 2.626 (0.1031 - 0.1034) CAUTION: Do not damage fillet R when grinding crankshaft journal in order to use undersized bearing (All journals). Fillet R : 1.5 - 1.7 mm (0.059 - 0.067 in) PBIC0111E Revision: October 2004 EM-91 2005 Titan L M CYLINDER BLOCK Inspection After Disassembly EBS00KN0 CRANKSHAFT END PLAY ● Move the crankshaft fully forward and backward and measure the clearance between the thrust bearings and crankshaft arm using suitable tool. Standard Limit ● : 0.10 - 0.26 mm (0.0039 - 0.0102 in) : 0.30 mm (0.0118 in) If measured value exceeds the repair limit, replace the thrust bearings, and measure again. If it still exceeds the repair limit, replace crankshaft also. PBIC0114E CONNECTING ROD SIDE CLEARANCE ● Measure side clearance between the connecting rod and crankshaft arm using suitable tool. Standard Limit ● : 0.20 - 0.40 mm (0.0079 - 0.0157 in) : 0.40 mm (0.0157 in) If measured value exceeds the repair limit, replace the connecting rod bearings, and measure again. If it still exceeds the repair limit, replace the crankshaft also. PBIC0115E PISTON AND PISTON PIN CLEARANCE Piston Pin Hole Diameter ● Measure diameter of piston pin hole using suitable tool. Standard : 21.993 - 21.999 mm (0.8659 - 0.8661 in) PBIC0116E Piston Pin Diameter ● Measure diameter of piston pin using suitable tool. Standard : 21.989 - 21.995 mm (0.8657 - 0.8659 in) PBIC0117E Revision: October 2004 EM-92 2005 Titan CYLINDER BLOCK Piston and Piston Pin Clearance A (Piston pin clearance) = (Piston pin hole diameter) – (Piston pin diameter) Standard ● ● ● ● : 0.002 - 0.006 mm (0.0001 - 0.0002 in) If clearance exceeds specification, replace either or both of piston/piston pin assembly and connecting rod assembly with reference to specification of each part. Refer to piston selection table to replace piston/piston pin assembly. Refer to EM-85, "HOW TO SELECT PISTON" . Refer to connecting rod bearing selection table to replace connecting rod. Refer to EM-86, "HOW TO SELECT CONNECTING ROD BEARING" . NOTE: The connecting rod small end grade and piston pin hole (piston pin) grade are provided only for the parts installed at the plant. For service parts, no grades can be selected. (Only 0 grade is available.) Refer to EM-95, "Connecting Rod Bushing Oil Clearance (Small End)" for the values for each grade at the plant. EM C KBIA2496E D E F G KBIA2536E H PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE ● Measure side clearance of the piston ring and piston ring groove using suitable tool. Standard: Top ring 2nd ring Oil ring Limit: Top ring 2nd ring ● I : 0.035 - 0.085 mm (0.0014 - 0.0033 in) : 0.030 - 0.070 mm (0.0012 - 0.0028 in) : 0.015 - 0.050 mm (0.0006 - 0.0020 in) : 0.11 mm (0.0043 in) : 0.10 mm (0.0039 in) J K SEM024AA If out of specification, replace piston and/or piston ring assembly. M PISTON RING END GAP ● ● L Check if diameter of cylinder bore is within specification. Refer to EM-97, "Piston to Cylinder Bore Clearance" . Insert piston ring into the middle of cylinder using piston, and measure gap. Standard: Top ring 2nd ring Oil ring Limit: Top ring 2nd ring Oil ring Revision: October 2004 : 0.23 - 0.33 mm (0.0091 - 0.0130 in) : 0.25 - 0.40 mm (0.0098 - 0.0157 in) : 0.20 - 0.60 mm (0.0079 - 0.0236 in) PBIC0118E : 0.56 mm (0.0220 in) : 0.52 mm (0.0205 in) : 0.96 mm (0.0378 in) EM-93 2005 Titan CYLINDER BLOCK ● If out of specification, replace piston ring. If gap still exceeds the limit even with a new ring, re-bore cylinder and use oversized piston and piston ring. CONNECTING ROD BEND AND TORSION ● Check connecting rod alignment using suitable tool. Limit: Bend : 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) per 100 mm (3.94 in) length Torsion : 0.30 mm (0.0118 in) per 100 mm (3.94 in) length SEM003F ● If measurement exceeds the limit, replace connecting rod assembly. SEM038F CONNECTING ROD BEARING (BIG END) ● Install the connecting rod cap without the connecting rod bearing installed. After tightening the connecting rod bolt to the specified torque, measure the connecting rod large end inside diameter. Refer to EM-80, "ASSEMBLY" . Standard ● : 57.000 - 57.013 mm (2.2441 - 2.2446 in) If measurement exceeds the standard, replace the connecting rod. PBIC1641E CONNECTING ROD BUSHING OIL CLEARANCE (SMALL END) Connecting Rod Inside Diameter (Small End) ● Measure inside diameter of bushing using suitable tool. Standard : 22.000 - 22.006 mm (0.8661 - 0.8664 in) PBIC0120E Revision: October 2004 EM-94 2005 Titan CYLINDER BLOCK Piston Pin Diameter ● A Measure diameter of piston pin using suitable tool. Standard : 21.989 - 21.995 mm (0.8657 - 0.8659 in) EM C PBIC0117E D Connecting Rod Bushing Oil Clearance (Small End) (Connecting rod small end oil clearance) = (Inside diameter of connecting rod small end) – (Piston pin diameter) Standard ● ● E : 0.005 - 0.017 mm (0.0002 - 0.0007 in) F If the measured value exceeds the standard, replace the connecting rod assembly and/or piston and piston pin assembly. If replacing the piston and piston pin assembly, refer to the Table for Selective Fitting for Piston to select the piston corresponding to the applicable bore grade of the cylinder block to be used. Refer to EM-85, "HOW TO SELECT PISTON" . G KBIA2536E Factory installed parts grading: ● Only grade 0 is available. H I Unit: mm (in) Grade 0 Connecting rod bushing inside diameter 22.000 - 22.006 (0.8661 - 0.8664) Piston pin diameter 21.989 - 21.995 (0.8657 - 0.8659) Piston pin hole diameter 21.993 - 21.999 (0.8659 - 0.8661) J K KBIA2496E L CYLINDER BLOCK DISTORTION ● ● Remove any oil, scale, gasket, sealant and carbon deposits from the cylinder block surface. CAUTION: Do not allow any debris to enter the oil or coolant passages. Measure block upper face for distortion in six directions as shown. Standard Limit ● M : 0.03 mm (0.0012 in) : 0.1 mm (0.004 in) If measurement exceeds the limit, replace cylinder block. SEM123C Revision: October 2004 EM-95 2005 Titan CYLINDER BLOCK MAIN BEARING HOUSING INSIDE DIAMETER ● ● Install the main bearing caps with the main bearings removed, and tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Refer to EM-80, "ASSEMBLY" . Measure the inside diameter of the main bearing housing. Standard ● : 68.944 - 68.968 mm (2.7143 - 2.7153 in) If out of the standard, replace the cylinder block and main bearing caps as an assembly. NOTE: These components must be replaced as a single unit, because they were processed together. PBIC1643E PISTON TO CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE Cylinder Bore Diameter ● Measure the cylinder bore for wear, out-of-round and taper at six different points on each cylinder (″X″ and ″Y″ directions at ″A″, ″B″ and ″C″). NOTE: When determining cylinder bore grade, measure cylinder bore at "B" position. PBIC0123E Standard diameter: 98.000 - 98.030 mm (3.8583 - 3.8594 in) Wear limit: 0.20 mm (0.0079 in) Out-of-round (Difference between ″X″ and ″Y″): Limit: 0.015 mm (0.0006 in) Taper limit (Difference between ″A″ and ″C″): Limit: 0.010 mm (0.0004 in) PBIC0124E ● ● If measured value exceeds the repair limit, or if there are scratches and/or seizure on the cylinder inner wall, hone or bore the inner wall. An oversize piston is provided. When using an oversize piston, hone the cylinder so that the clearance between the piston and cylinder satisfies the standard. Piston oversize Grade No. 0 (Service) ● : 0.20 mm (0.0079 in) If oversize piston is used, use it for all cylinders with oversize piston rings. Piston Skirt Diameter ● Measure piston skirt diameter using suitable tool. Standard : 97. 980 - 98. 010 mm (3.8575 - 3.8587 in) PBIC0125E Revision: October 2004 EM-96 2005 Titan CYLINDER BLOCK ● Measure point “H” Distance from the top A : 39 mm (1.54 in) EM C KBIA2545E Piston to Cylinder Bore Clearance ● Calculate by diameter of piston skirt and cylinder bore diameter (direction X, position B). (Clearance) = (Cylinder bore diameter) – (piston skirt diameter) Standard Limit ● D E : 0.010 - 0.030 mm (0.0004 - 0.0012 in) : 0.08 mm (0.0031 in) F If calculation exceeds the limit, replace piston/piston pin assembly. Reboring Cylinder Bore 1. Cylinder bore size is determined by adding piston-to-bore clearance to piston diameter “A”. G Rebored size calculation: D = A +B - C where, D: Bored diameter A: Piston diameter as measured B: Piston - to - bore clearance (standard value) C: Honing allowance 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) 2. 3. 4. 5. H I Install main bearing caps, and tighten to the specified torque. Otherwise, cylinder bores may be distorted in final assembly. Cut cylinder bores. NOTE: ● When any cylinder needs boring, all other cylinders must also be bored. ● Do not cut too much out of cylinder bore at one time. Cut only 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) or so in diameter at a time. Hone cylinders to obtain specified piston-to-bore clearance. Measure finished cylinder bore for out-of-round and taper. NOTE: Measurement should be done after cylinder bore cools down. CRANKSHAFT JOURNAL DIAMETER ● Measure diameter of crankshaft journals. Standard ● : 63.940 - 63.964 mm (2.5173 - 2.5183 in) If measurement is out of standard, measure the main bearing oil clearance. Then use the undersize bearing. Refer to EM-99, "MAIN BEARING OIL CLEARANCE" . Revision: October 2004 EM-97 2005 Titan J K L M CYLINDER BLOCK CRANKSHAFT PIN DIAMETER ● Measure diameter of crankshaft pin using suitable tool. Standard ● : 53.956 - 53.974 mm (2.1243 - 2.1250 in) If measurement is out of standard, measure the connecting rod bearing oil clearance. Then use the undersize bearing. Refer to EM-98, "CONNECTING ROD BEARING OIL CLEARANCE" . PBIC0127E OUT-OF-ROUND AND TAPER OF CRANKSHAFT ● ● ● Measure dimensions at four different points as shown on each journal and pin. Out-of-roundness is indicated by the difference in dimension between ″X″ and ″Y″ at ″A″ and ″B″. Taper is indicated by the difference in dimension between ″A″ and ″B″ at ″X″ and ″Y″. Limit Out-of-round (Difference between ″X″ and ″Y″) : 0.002 mm (0.0001 in) Taper (Difference between ″A″ and ″B″) : 0.002 mm (0.0001 in) ● ● PBIC1685E If measured value exceeds the standard, correct or replace crankshaft. If corrected, measure the bearing oil clearance of the corrected journal or pin. Then select the main bearing or connecting rod bearing. Refer to EM-99, "MAIN BEARING OIL CLEARANCE" or EM-98, "CONNECTING ROD BEARING OIL CLEARANCE" . CRANKSHAFT RUNOUT ● ● ● ● Place a V-block on a precise flat table to support the journals on both ends of the crankshaft. Measure at No. 3 journal using suitable tool. While rotating crankshaft, read the movement of the pointer. Half of the movement shows the runout. Limit ● : Less than 0.05 mm (0.002 in) If measurement exceeds the limit, replace crankshaft. PBIC0129E CONNECTING ROD BEARING OIL CLEARANCE Method of Measurement ● Install the connecting rod bearings to the connecting rod and the cap. Tighten the connecting rod bolt to the specified torque. Refer to EM-80, "ASSEMBLY" . Revision: October 2004 EM-98 2005 Titan CYLINDER BLOCK Measure the inside diameter of connecting rod bearing. (Oil clearance) = (Inside diameter of connecting rod bearing) – (Crankshaft pin diameter) Standard Limit ● A : 0.020 - 0.039 mm (0.0008 - 0.0015 in) : 0.055 mm (0.0022 in) EM If clearance cannot be adjusted within the standard, grind crankshaft pin and use undersized bearing. Refer to EM-88, "HOW TO SELECT MAIN BEARING" . C PBIC1642E D Method of Using Plastigage ● ● ● ● Remove oil and dust on the crankshaft pin and surfaces of each bearing completely. Cut a plastigage slightly shorter than the bearing width, and place it in the crankshaft axial direction, avoiding oil holes. Install the connecting rod bearings to the connecting rod and connecting rod bearing cap, and tighten the connecting rod bolts to the specified torque. CAUTION: Do not rotate crankshaft with plastigage installed. Remove the connecting rod bearing cap and bearings. Measure KBIA2550E the plastigage width using the scale on the plastigage bag. NOTE: The procedure when the measured value exceeds the repair limit is the same as that described in “Method of Measurement”. Install the main bearings to the cylinder block and main bearing cap. Measure the main bearing inside diameter with the bearing cap bolt tightened to the specified torque. Refer to EM-80, "ASSEMBLY" . (Oil clearance) = (Inside diameter of main bearing) – (Crankshaft journal diameter) Standard: No. 1 and 5 journals : 0.001 - 0.011 mm (0.00004 - 0.0004 in) No. 2, 3 and 4 journals : 0.007 - 0.017 mm (0.0003 - 0.0007 in) Limit: No.1 and 5 journals : 0.021 mm (0.0008 in) No. 2, 3 and 4 journals : 0.027 mm (0.0011 in) ● G H J K L PBIC1644E If the measured value exceeds the repair limit, select main bearings referring to the main bearing inside diameter and crankshaft journal diameter, so that the oil clearance satisfies the standard. Refer to EM-88 . Revision: October 2004 F I MAIN BEARING OIL CLEARANCE Method of Measurement ● E EM-99 2005 Titan M CYLINDER BLOCK Method of Using Plastigage ● ● ● ● Remove oil and dust on the crankshaft journal and surfaces of each bearing completely. Cut a plastigage slightly shorter than the bearing width, and place it in crankshaft axial direction, avoiding oil holes. Install the main bearings to the cylinder block and main bearing cap, and tighten the main bearing bolts to the specified torque. CAUTION: Do not rotate crankshaft with plastigage installed. Remove bearing cap and bearings. Measure plastigage width using the scale on the plastigage bag. KBIA2551E NOTE: The procedure when the measured value exceeds the repair limit is the same as that described in “Method of Measurement”. CRUSH HEIGHT OF MAIN BEARING ● When the bearing cap is removed after being tightened to the specified torque with main bearings installed, the tip end of bearing must protrude. Refer to EM-80, "ASSEMBLY" for the tightening procedure. Standard ● : There must be crush height If the standard is not met, replace main bearings. SEM502G CRUSH HEIGHT OF CONNECTING ROD BEARING ● When the connecting rod bearing cap is removed after being tightened to the specified torque with connecting rod bearings installed, the tip end of bearing must protrude. Refer to EM-80, "ASSEMBLY" for the tightening procedure. Standard ● : There must be crush height. If the standard is not met, replace connecting rod bearings. PBIC1646E MAIN BEARING CAP BOLT DIAMETER ● ● ● ● Check for bolts (M9 and M12) installed from lower side using the following procedure. NOTE: ● Side bolt (M10) is outside the target. ● Figure shows M12 bolt. Measure bolt diameter ″d1″ from tip of the bolt to dimension "a". Measure bolt diameter ″d2″ from the dimension between tip of the bolt and dimension ″b″ as base station to dimension ″c″. NOTE: If a narrower part in the threads is determined by visual check, measure ″d2″ at that point. Calculate the difference between ″d1″ and ″d2″. Revision: October 2004 EM-100 KBIA2497E 2005 Titan CYLINDER BLOCK M9 bolt Dimension “a” Dimension “b” Dimension “c” Limit A : 9 mm (0.35 in) : 15 mm (0.59 in) : 20 mm (0.79 in) : 0.10 mm (0.0039 in) EM M12 bolt Dimension “a” Dimension “b” Dimension “c” Limit ● C : 12 mm (0.47 in) : 55 mm (2.17 in) : 20 mm (0.79 in) : 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) D Replace applicable bolts if outside the limit. E CONNECTING ROD BOLT DIAMETER ● ● Measure diameter ″d″ at position shown. When “d” is out of specifications (when it becomes thinner), replace bolt with a new one. Limit F : 7.75 mm (0.3051 in) or less. G H SBIA0286E I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EM-101 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Standard and Limit PFP:00030 EBS00KN1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Cylinder arrangement Displacement V-8 3 cm (cu in) 5,552 (338.80) mm (in) 98 x 92 (3.86 x 3.62) Bore and stroke Valve arrangement DOHC Firing order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2 Compression Number of piston rings 2 Oil 1 Number of main bearings 5 Compression ratio 9.8 Compression pressure kPa (kg/cm2 , psi)/rpm Standard 1,520 (15.5, 220)/200 Minimum 1,324 (13.5, 192)/200 Differential limit between cylinders 98 (1.0, 14)/300 Cylinder number SEM957C Valve timing PBIC0187E Unit: degree a b c d e f 232 230 2 48 3 49 DRIVE BELTS Tension of drive belts Auto adjustment by auto tensioner EXHAUST MANIFOLD Unit: mm (in) Items Surface distortion Revision: October 2004 Limit Exhaust manifold EM-102 0.3 (0.012) 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT BEARING Unit: mm (in) Items A Standard Camshaft runout [TIR*] Less than 0.02 (0.0008) EM C D E SEM671 Camshaft cam height “A” 44.465 - 44.655 (1.7506 - 1.7581) Intake & Exhaust Cam wear limit 0.02 (0.0008) Outside diameter of camshaft journal 25.953 - 25.970 (1.0218 - 1.0224) Camshaft bracket inside diameter 26.000 - 26.021 (1.0236 - 1.0244) Camshaft journal clearance 0.030 - 0.068 (0.0012 - 0.0027) Camshaft end play 0.115 - 0.188 (0.0045 - 0.0074) Camshaft sprocket runout [TIR*] F G H Less than 0.15 (0.0059) *: Total indicator reading Valve Lifter I Unit: mm (in) Items Standard Valve lifter diameter 33.977 - 33.987 (1.3377 - 1.3381) Valve lifter hole diameter 34.000 - 34.016 (1.3386 - 1.3392) Clearance between lifter and lifter guide J 0.013 - 0.039 (0.0005 - 0.0015) K Valve Clearance Unit: mm (in) Items Hot* Cold Intake 0.304 - 0.416 (0.012 - 0.016) 0.26 - 0.34 (0.010 - 0.013) Exhaust 0.308 - 0.432 (0.012 - 0.017) 0.29 - 0.37 (0.011 - 0.015) L M *: Approximately 80°C (176°F) Revision: October 2004 EM-103 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Available Valve Lifter Unit: mm (in) Identification (stamped) Mark Thickness SEM758G Revision: October 2004 N788 7.88 (0.3102) N790 7.90 (0.3110) N792 7.92 (0.3118) N794 7.94 (0.3126) N796 7.96 (0.3134) N798 7.98 (0.3142) N800 8.00 (0.3150) N802 8.02 (03.157) N804 8.04 (0.3165) N806 8.06 (0.3173) N808 8.08 (0.3181) N810 8.10 (0.3189) N812 8.12 (0.3197) N814 8.14 (0.3205) N816 8.16 (0.3213) N818 8.18 (0.3220) N820 8.20 (0.3228) N822 8.22 (0.3236) N824 8.24 (0.3244) N826 8.26 (0.3252) N828 8.28 (0.3260) N830 8.30 (0.3268) N832 8.32 (0.3276) N834 8.34 (0.3283) N836 8.36 (0.3291) EM-104 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) CYLINDER HEAD Unit: mm (in) Items Head surface distortion Standard Limit 0.03 (0.0012) 0.1 (0.004) Nominal cylinder head height “H” A EM 126.3 (4.97) C D E KBIA2554E F Valve Dimensions Unit: mm (in) G H I J SEM188 Standard model Valve head diameter “D” Valve length “L” Valve stem diameter “d” FFV model Intake 37.0 - 37.3 (1.457 - 1.469) Exhaust 31.2 - 31.5 (1.228 - 1.240) K Intake 96.21- 96.71 (3.7878 - 3.8075) Exhaust 93.74 - 94.24 (3.6905 - 3.7102) Intake 5.965 - 5.980 (0.2348 - 0.2354) Exhaust 5.955 - 5.970 (0.2344 - 0.2350) L M Intake Valve seat angle “α” Intake Valve margin “T” Revision: October 2004 45°15′ - 45°45′ Exhaust 1.1 (0.043) Exhaust 0.6 (0.024) 1.3 (0.051) EM-105 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Valve Guide Unit: mm (in) KBIA2555E Items Outside diameter Valve guide Inside diameter (Finished size) Cylinder head valve guide hole diameter Standard Oversize [0.2 (0.008)] (service) 10.023 - 10.034 (0.3946 - 0.3950) 10.223 - 10.234 (0.4025 - 0.4029) 6.000 - 6.018 (0.2362 - 0.2369) — 9.975 - 9.996 (0.3927 - 0.3935) 10.175 - 10.196 (0.4006 - 0.4014) Interference fit of valve guide 0.027 - 0.059 (0.0011 - 0.0023) Items Stem to guide clearance Projection length “L” Standard Limit Intake 0.020 - 0.053 (0.0008 - 0.0021) 0.08 (0.0031) Exhaust 0.030 - 0.063 (0.0012 - 0.0025) 0.09 (0.0035) Intake 12.6 - 12.8 (0.496 - 0.504) Exhaust 12.5 - 12.9 (0.492 - 0.508) Valve Seat Unit: mm (in) KBIA2541E Items Cylinder head seat recess diameter (D) Valve seat interference fit Valve seat diameter (d) Standard Oversize [0.5 (0.020)] (Service) Intake 38.000 - 38.016 (1.4961 - 1.4967) 38.500 - 38.516 (1.5157 - 1.5164) Exhaust 32.200 - 32.216 (1.2677 - 1.2683) 32.700 - 32.716 (1.2874 - 1.2880) Intake 0.081 - 0.113 (0.0032 - 0.0044) Exhaust 0.064 - 0.096 (0.0025 - 0.0038) Intake 38.097 - 38.113 (1.4999 - 1.5005) 38.597 - 38.613 (1.5196 - 1.5202) Exhaust 32.280 - 32.296 (1.2709 - 1.2715) 32.780 - 32.796 (1.2905 - 1.2912) Valve Spring Free height Pressure mm (in) N (kg, lb) at height mm (in) Out-of-square 50.58 (1.9913) Installation 165.8 - 187.0 (16.9 - 19.1, 37 - 42) at 37.0 (1.457) Valve open 314.8 - 355.0 (32.1 - 36.2, 71 - 80) at 28.2 (1.110) mm (in) Revision: October 2004 Less than 2.2 (0.087) EM-106 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) CYLINDER BLOCK Unit: mm (in) A EM C D PBIC0123E Surface flatness Standard 0.03 (0.0012) LImit Main bearing housing inside diameter Cylinder bore diameter Standard Standard 68.944 - 68.968 (2.7143 - 2.7153) Grade No. 1 98.000 - 98.010 (3.8583 - 3.8587) Grade No. 2 98.010 - 98.020 (3.8587 - 3.8590) Grade No. 3 98.020 - 98.030 (3.8590 - 3.8594) Wear limit Out-of-round (Difference between X and Y) G 0.015 (0.0006) Limit H 0.010 (0.0004) Grade No. A Grade No. B Grade No. C Grade No. D Grade No. E Grade No. F Grade No. G Grade No. H Grade No. J Grade No. K Grade No. L Grade No. M Grade No. N Grade No. P Grade No. R Grade No. S Grade No. T Grade No. U Grade No. V Grade No. W Grade No. X Grade No. Y Grade No. 4 Grade No. 7 Main journal inside diameter grade (Without bearing) Revision: October 2004 F 0.20 (0.0079) Taper (Difference between A and C) Difference in bore diameter between cylinders E 0.1 (0.004) Standard EM-107 68.944 - 68.945 (2.7143 - 2.7144) 68.945 - 68.946 (2.7144 - 2.7144) 68.946 - 68.947 (2.7144 - 2.7144) 68.947 - 68.948 (2.7144 - 2.7145) 68.948 - 68.949 (2.7145 - 2.7145) 68.949 - 68.950 (2.7145 - 2.7146) 68.950 - 68.951 (2.7146 - 2.7146) 68.951 - 68.952 (2.7146 - 2.7146) 68.952 - 68.953 (2.7146 - 2.7147) 68.953 - 68.954 (2.7147 - 2.7147) 68.954 - 68.955 (2.7147 - 2.7148) 68.955 - 68.956 (2.7148 - 2.7148) 68.956 - 68.957 (2.7148 - 2.7148) 68.957 - 68.958 (2.7148 - 2.7149) 68.958 - 68.959 (2.7149 - 2.7149) 68.959 - 68.960 (2.7149 - 2.7150) 68.960 - 68.961 (2.7150 - 2.7150) 68.961 - 68.962 (2.7150 - 2.7150) 68.962 - 68.963 (2.7150 - 2.7151) 68.963 - 68.964 (2.7151 - 2.7151) 68.964 - 68.965 (2.7151 - 2.7152) 68.965 - 68.966 (2.7152 - 2.7152) 68.966 - 68.967 (2.7152 - 2.7152) 68.967 - 68.968 (2.7152 - 2.7153) Less than 0.03 (0.0012) 2005 Titan I J K L M SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) PISTON, PISTON RING AND PISTON PIN Available Piston Unit: mm (in) PBIC0188E Items Piston skirt diameter “A” Standard Limit Grade No. 1 97.980 - 97.990 (3.8575 - 3.8579) — Grade No. 2 97.990 - 98.000 (3.8579 - 3.8583) — Grade No. 3 98.000 - 98.010 (3.8583 - 3.8587) — Grade No. 0 (Service) 98.180 - 98.210 (3.8653 - 3.8665) 0.20 (0.0079) 39 (1.54) — “H” dimension Piston pin hole diameter Grade No. 0 Piston to cylinder bore clearance 21.993 - 21.999 (0.8659 - 0.8661) 0.010 - 0.030 (0.0004 - 0.0012) — 0.08 (0.0031) Piston Ring Unit: mm (in) Items Side clearance End gap Standard Limit Top 0.035 - 0.085 (0.0014 - 0.0033) 0.11 (0.0043) 2nd 0.030 - 0.070 (0.0012 - 0.0028) 0.10 (0.0039) Oil ring 0.015 - 0.050 (0.0006 - 0.0020) — Top 0.23 - 0.33 (0.0091 - 0.0130) 0.56 (0.0220) 2nd 0.25 - 0.40 (0.0098 - 0.0157) 0.52 (0.0205) Oil ring 0.20 - 0.60 (0.0079 - 0.0236) 0.96 (0.0378) Piston Pin Unit: mm (in) Items Piston pin diameter Standard Grade No. 0 21.989 - 21.995 (0.8657 - 0.8659) Piston to piston pin clearance 0.002 - 0.006 (0.0001 - 0.0002) Connecting rod bushing oil clearance 0.005 - 0.017 (0.0002 - 0.0007) Revision: October 2004 EM-108 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) CONNECTING ROD Unit: mm (in) Items Standard Limit 154.45 - 154.55 (6.08 - 6.08) — Bend [per 100 (3.94)] — 0.15 (0.0059) Torsion [per 100 (3.94)] — 0.30 (0.0118) 22.000 - 22.006 (0.8661 - 0.8664) — 57.000 - 57.013 (2.2441 - 2.2446) — 0.20 - 0.40 (0.0079 - 0.0157) 0.40 (0.0157) Center distance Connecting rod bushing inside diameter* (small end) Grade No. 0 Connecting rod big end inside diameter (without bearing) Side clearance Connecting rod bearing housing Grade No. 0 Grade No. 1 Grade No. 2 Grade No. 3 Grade No. 4 Grade No. 5 Grade No. 6 Grade No. 7 Grade No. 8 Grade No. 9 Grade No. A Grade No. B Grade No. C A EM C 57.000 - 57.001 (2.2441 - 2.2441) 57.001 - 57.002 (2.2441 - 2.2442) 57.002 - 57.003 (2.2442 - 2.2442) 57.003 - 57.004 (2.2442 - 2.2443) 57.004 - 57.005 (2.2443 - 2.2443) 57.005 - 57.006 (2.2443 - 2.2443) 57.006 - 57.007 (2.2443 - 2.2444) 57.007 - 57.008 (2.2444 - 2.2444) 57.008 - 57.009 (2.2444 - 2.2444) 57.009 - 57.010 (2.2444 - 2.2445) 57.010 - 57.011 (2.2445 - 2.2445) 57.011 - 57.012 (2.2445 - 2.2446) 57.012 - 57.013 (2.2446 - 2.2446) D E F G *: After installing in connecting rod H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EM-109 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) CRANKSHAFT Unit: mm (in) PBIC1686E SEM645 Main journal dia. “Dm” grade (No. 1 and 5) Main journal dia. “Dm” grade (No. 2, 3 and 4) Revision: October 2004 Standard Grade No. G Grade No. H Grade No. J Grade No. K Grade No. L Grade No. M Grade No. N Grade No. P Grade No. R Grade No. S Grade No. T Grade No. U Grade No. V Grade No. W Grade No. X Grade No. Y Grade No. 1 Grade No. 2 Grade No. 3 Grade No. 4 Grade No. 5 Grade No. 6 Grade No. 7 Grade No. 9 63.963 - 63.964 (2.5182 - 2.5183) 63.962 - 63.963 (2.5182 - 2.5182) 63.961 - 63.962 (2.5181 - 2.5182) 63.960 - 63.961 (2.5181 - 2.5181) 63.959 - 63.960 (2.5181 - 2.5181) 63.958 - 63.959 (2.5180 - 2.5181) 63.957 - 63.958 (2.5180 - 2.5180) 63.956 - 63.957 (2.5179 - 2.5180) 63.955 - 63.956 (2.5179 - 2.5179) 63.954 - 63.955 (2.5179 - 2.5179) 63.953 - 63.954 (2.5178 - 2.5179) 63.952 - 63.953 (2.5178 - 2.5178) 63.951 - 63.952 (2.5178 - 2.5178) 63.950 - 63.951 (2.5177 - 2.5178) 63.949 - 63.950 (2.5177 - 2.5177) 63.948 - 63.949 (2.5176 - 2.5177) 63.947 - 63.948 (2.5176 - 2.5176) 63.946 - 63.947 (2.5176 - 2.5176) 63.945 - 63.946 (2.5175 - 2.5176) 63.944 - 63.945 (2.5175 - 2.5175) 63.943 - 63.944 (2.5174 - 2.5175) 63.942 - 63.943 (2.5174 - 2.5174) 63.941 - 63.942 (2.5174 - 2.5174) 63.940 - 63.941 (2.5173 - 2.5174) Standard Grade No. A Grade No. B Grade No. C Grade No. D Grade No. E Grade No. F Grade No. G Grade No. H Grade No. J Grade No. K Grade No. L Grade No. M Grade No. N Grade No. P Grade No. R Grade No. S Grade No. T Grade No. U Grade No. V Grade No. W Grade No. X Grade No. Y Grade No. 1 Grade No. 2 63.963 - 63.964 (2.5182 - 2.5183) 63.962 - 63.963 (2.5182 - 2.5182) 63.961 - 63.962 (2.5181 - 2.5182) 63.960 - 63.961 (2.5181 - 2.5181) 63.959 - 63.960 (2.5181 - 2.5181) 63.958 - 63.959 (2.5180 - 2.5181) 63.957 - 63.958 (2.5180 - 2.5180) 63.956 - 63.957 (2.5179 - 2.5180) 63.955 - 63.956 (2.5179 - 2.5179) 63.954 - 63.955 (2.5179 - 2.5179) 63.953 - 63.954 (2.5178 - 2.5179) 63.952 - 63.953 (2.5178 - 2.5178) 63.951 - 63.952 (2.5178 - 2.5178) 63.950 - 63.951 (2.5177 - 2.5178) 63.949 - 63.950 (2.5177 - 2.5177) 63.948 - 63.949 (2.5176 - 2.5177) 63.947 - 63.948 (2.5176 - 2.5176) 63.946 - 63.947 (2.5176 - 2.5176) 63.945 - 63.946 (2.5175 - 2.5176) 63.944 - 63.945 (2.5175 - 2.5175) 63.943 - 63.944 (2.5174 - 2.5175) 63.942 - 63.943 (2.5174 - 2.5174) 63.941 - 63.942 (2.5174 - 2.5174) 63.940 - 63.941 (2.5173 - 2.5174) EM-110 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Pin journal dia. “Dp” Standard Grade No. 0 53.968 - 53.974 (2.1247 - 2.1250) Grade No. 1 53.962 - 53.968 (2.1245 - 2.1247) Grade No. 2 53.956 - 53.962 (2.1243 - 2.1245) Center distance “r” 45.96 - 46.04 (1.8094 - 1.8126) Out-of-round (Difference between X and Y) Taper (Difference between A and B) EM 0.002 (0.0001) Limit Runout [TIR*] Crankshaft end play A 0.002 (0.0001) Less than 0.05 (0.002) Standard Limit C 0.10 - 0.26 (0.0039 - 0.0102) 0.30 (0.0118) D *: Total indicator reading E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EM-111 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) MAIN BEARING Unit: mm (in) PBIC0189E Grade number UPR/LWR Thickness Identification color 0 — 2.483 - 2.486 (0.0978 - 0.0979) Black 1 — 2.486 - 2.489 (0.0979 - 0.0980) Brown 2 — 2.489 - 2.492 (0.0980 - 0.0981) Green 3 — 2.492 - 2.495 (0.0981 - 0.0982) Yellow 4 — 2.495 - 2.498 (0.0982 - 0.0983) Blue 5 — 2.498 - 2.501 (0.0983 - 0.0985) Pink 6 — 2.501 - 2.504 (0.0985 - 0.0986) Purple 7 — 2.504 - 2.507 (0.0986 - 0.0987) White 8 — 2.507 - 2.510 (0.0987 - 0.0988) Red UPR 2.483 - 2.486 (0.0978 - 0.0979) Black LWR 2.486 - 2.489 (0.0979 - 0.0980) Brown 01 12 23 34 45 56 67 78 UPR 2.486 - 2.489 (0.0979 - 0.0980) Brown LWR 2.489 - 2.492 (0.0980 - 0.0981) Green UPR 2.489 - 2.492 (0.0980 - 0.0981) Green LWR 2.492 - 2.495 (0.0981 - 0.0982) Yellow UPR 2.492 - 2.495 (0.0981 - 0.0982) Yellow LWR 2.495 - 2.498 (0.0982 - 0.0983) Blue UPR 2.495 - 2.498 (0.0982 - 0.0983) Blue LWR 2.498 - 2.501 (0.0983 - 0.0985) Pink UPR 2.498 - 2.501 (0.0983 - 0.0985) Pink LWR 2.501 - 2.504 (0.0985 - 0.0986) Purple UPR 2.501 - 2.504 (0.0985 - 0.0986) Purple LWR 2.504 - 2.507 (0.0986 - 0.0987) White UPR 2.504 - 2.507 (0.0986 - 0.0987) White LWR 2.507 - 2.510 (0.0987 - 0.0988) Red Remarks Grade is the same for upper and lower bearings Grade is different for upper and lower bearings. Undersize Unit: mm (in) Undersize Thickness 0.25 (0.0098) 2.618 - 2.626 (0.1031 - 0.1034) Revision: October 2004 EM-112 Main journal diameter Grind so that bearing clearance is the specified value. 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Main Bearing Oil Clearance Unit: mm (in) Items Main bearing oil clearance Standard Limit No.1 and 5 0.001 - 0.011 (0.00004 - 0.0004) 0.021 (0.0008) No.2, 3 and 4 0.007 - 0.017 (0.0003 - 0.0007) 0.027 (0.0011) A EM Connecting Rod Bearing Grade number Thickness “T” mm (in) Identification color (mark) 0 1.500 - 1.503 (0.0591 - 0.0592) Black 1 1.503 - 1.506 (0.0592 - 0.0593) Brown 2 1.506 - 1.509 (0.0593 - 0.0594) Green 3 1.509 - 1.512 (0.0594 - 0.0595) Yellow C D E Undersize Unit: mm (in) Undersize Thickness 0.25 (0.0098) 1.627 - 1.635 (0.0641 - 0.0644) Crank pin journal diameter “Dp” Grind so that bearing clearance is the specified value. F Connecting Rod Bearing Oil Clearance Unit: mm (in) Items Connecting rod bearing oil clearance Standard Limit 0.020 - 0.039 (0.0008 - 0.0015) 0.055 (0.0022) G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EM-113 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Revision: October 2004 EM-114 2005 Titan B ENGINE A EX SECTION EXHAUST SYSTEM C D E CONTENTS PREPARATION ........................................................... 2 Special Service Tool ................................................. 2 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 2 EXHAUST SYSTEM ................................................... 3 Checking Exhaust System ........................................ 3 Removal and Installation .......................................... 3 REMOVAL ............................................................. 4 INSTALLATION ..................................................... 4 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION .................. 4 F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 EX-1 2005 Titan PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tool PFP:00002 EBS00L3L The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number Description (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name KV10114400 (J-38365) Heated oxygen sensor wrench Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors: a: 22 mm (0.87 in) S-NT636 Commercial Service Tools EBS00L3M (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description (J-43897-18) (J-43897-12) Oxygen sensor thread cleaner Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before installing a new heated oxygen sensor (Use with anti-seize lubricant shown below): a: J-43897-18 (18 mm, 0.71 in) dia. for zirconia oxygen sensor b: J-43897-12 (12 mm, 0.47 in) dia. for titania oxygen sensor AEM488 Anti-seize lubricant (Permatex 133AR or equivalent meeting MIL specification MIL-A-907) Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool when reconditioning exhaust system threads AEM489 Power tool Loosening nuts and bolts PBIC0190E Revision: October 2004 EX-2 2005 Titan EXHAUST SYSTEM EXHAUST SYSTEM Checking Exhaust System PFP:20100 A EBS00L3N Check exhaust pipes, muffler and mounting for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, damage or deterioration. ● If anything is found, repair or replace damaged parts. EX C D SMA211A Removal and Installation E EBS00L3O Exhaust System F G H I J K L M WBIA0541E 1. Tailpipe hanger bracket 2. Tailpipe 3. Gasket 4. Main muffler 5. Right front exhaust tube 6. Ring gasket 7. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) 8. Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) 9. Left front exhaust tube 10. Center exhaust tube 11. Muffler hanger bracket front 12. Muffler hanger bracket rear CAUTION: ● Be sure to use genuine exhaust system parts or equivalents which are specially designed for heat resistance, corrosion resistance, and shape. ● Perform the operation with the exhaust system fully cooled. The system will be hot just after the engine stops. ● Be careful not to cut your hand on the heat insulator edge. Revision: October 2004 EX-3 2005 Titan EXHAUST SYSTEM REMOVAL Remove exhaust system components using power tool. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: ● Always replace exhaust gaskets with new ones when reassembling. ● Before installing a new heated oxygen sensor, clean and lube the exhaust tube threads using Tool. Tool number A : — (J-43897-18) B : — (J-43897-12) ● ● ● ● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; replace with a new one. Do not over-torque the heated oxygen sensor. Doing so may damage the heated oxygen sensor, resulting in the MIL coming on. If any mounting insulator is badly deformed, repair or replace it. If deposits such as mud pile up on the mounting insulators, clean and inspect them. Temporarily tighten the nuts on the exhaust manifold side and the bolts on the vehicle side. Check each part for interference with other components, and then tighten the nuts and bolts to specification. INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ● ● With the engine running, check exhaust tube joints for gas leakage and unusual noises. Check to ensure that mounting brackets and mounting rubbers are installed properly and free from undue stress. Improper installation could result in excessive noise and vibration. Revision: October 2004 EX-4 2005 Titan D DRIVELINE/AXLE A B SECTION FRONT AXLE C FAX E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions .............................................................. 2 PREPARATION ........................................................... 3 Special Service Tools ............................................... 3 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 4 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 4 WHEEL HUB .............................................................. 5 On-Vehicle Inspection and Service .......................... 5 WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION ......................... 5 Removal and Installation .......................................... 5 REMOVAL ............................................................. 5 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ......................... 6 INSTALLATION ..................................................... 6 DRIVE SHAFT ............................................................. 7 Removal and Installation .......................................... 7 REMOVAL ............................................................. 7 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ......................... 7 INSTALLATION ..................................................... 8 Disassembly and Assembly ...................................... 8 DISASSEMBLY ..................................................... 8 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY .................. 9 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 10 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 13 Wheel Bearing ........................................................ 13 Drive Shaft .............................................................. 13 F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 FAX-1 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS Precautions PFP:00001 EDS001Q6 Observe the following precautions when disassembling and servicing the wheel hub and drive shafts. ● Perform work in a location which is as dust-free as possible. ● Before disassembling and servicing, clean the outside of parts. ● Prevention of the entry of foreign objects must be taken into account during disassembly of the component parts. ● Disassembled parts must be carefully reassembled in the correct order. If work is interrupted, a clean cover must be placed over parts. ● Paper shop cloths must be used. Fabric shop cloths must not be used because of the danger of lint adhering to parts. ● Disassembled parts (except for rubber parts) should be cleaned with a suitable solvent which shall be removed by blowing with air or wiping with paper shop cloths. Revision: October 2004 FAX-2 2005 Titan PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A EDS001Q7 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number Description (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name ST29020001 (J-24319-01) Gear arm puller B Removing ball joint for steering knuckle a: 34 mm (1.34 in) b: 6.5 mm (0.256 in) c: 61.5 mm (2.421 in) C FAX NT694 E Commercial Service Tools EDS001Q8 Tool name Description Power tools Removing bolts and nuts F G PBIC0190E H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 FAX-3 2005 Titan Symptom AXLE Revision: October 2004 FAX-7 Improper installation, looseness × × Shake × FAX-4 Noise × × × Shake × × × × × × Vibration × × × × × × Shimmy × × × × × × × Shudder × × × × × × Poor quality ride or handling × × × × × × × WT-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" BR-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" PS-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" BRAKES STEERING × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × Refer to AXLE in this chart. ROAD WHEEL Refer to DRIVE SHAFT in this chart. DRIVE SHAFT WT-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" × TIRES × FSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" FFD-7, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" DIFFERENTIAL × SUSPENSION PR-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" PROPELLER SHAFT × AXLE FAX-5 Wheel bearing damage — FAX-9 Imbalance Noise, Vibration Parts interference FAX-9 DRIVE SHAFT Joint sliding resistance Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS FAX-7 Reference page Excessive joint angle NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart PFP:00003 EDS001Q9 Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. × ×: Applicable 2005 Titan WHEEL HUB WHEEL HUB On-Vehicle Inspection and Service PFP:43202 A EDS001QA Make sure the mounting conditions (looseness, backlash) of each component and component status (wear, damage) are normal. B WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION ● Move wheel hub in the axial direction by hand. Make sure there is no looseness of wheel bearing. Axial end play limit ● C : 0.05 mm (0.002 in) or less Rotate wheel hub and make sure there is no unusual noise or other irregular conditions. If there are any irregular conditions, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly. FAX E SMA571A F Removal and Installation EDS001QB G H I J K L WDIA0043E 1. Disc rotor 2. Wheel hub and bearing assembly 4. Splash guard 5. Steering knuckle 3. Wheel stud M REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. For 4X4 models, remove engine undercover using power tool. Without disassembling the hydraulic lines, remove torque member bolts using power tool. Then reposition brake caliper aside with wire. Refer to BR-24, "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor" . NOTE: Do not press brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. Revision: October 2004 FAX-5 2005 Titan WHEEL HUB 4. Put alignment mark on disc rotor and wheel hub and bearing assembly, then remove disc rotor. WDIA0044E 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. For 4X4 models, remove cotter pin, then remove lock nut from drive shaft using power tool. Refer to FAX7, "Removal and Installation" . For 4X4 models, remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly. Refer to FAX-7, "Removal and Installation" . Remove ABS sensor. Refer to BRC-39, "Removal and Installation" . ● Inspect the ABS sensor O-ring, replace the ABS sensor assembly if damaged. ● Clean the ABS sensor hole and mounting surface with a suitable brake cleaner and clean lint-free shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle bearing area. ● Apply a coat of suitable grease to the ABS sensor O-ring and mounting hole. CAUTION: Do not pull on the ABS sensor harness. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly bolts using power tool. Remove splash guard and wheel hub and bearing assembly from steering knuckle. INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if necessary. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, position the disc rotor according to alignment mark. (When not using the alignment mark, refer to BR-27, "DISC ROTOR INSPECTION" .) ● When installing wheel and tire. Refer to WT-6, "Rotation" . WDIA0044E Revision: October 2004 FAX-6 2005 Titan DRIVE SHAFT DRIVE SHAFT Removal and Installation PFP:39100 A EDS001QC B C FAX WDIA0041E 1. Cotter pin 2. Drive shaft nut 3. E Drive shaft REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. Remove engine under cover using power tool. Remove ABS sensor harness from mount on knuckle. CAUTION: Do not pull on ABS sensor harness. Without disassembling the hydraulic lines, remove brake caliper using power tool. Reposition it aside with wire. Refer to BR-24, "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor" . NOTE: Avoid depressing brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. Remove coil spring and shock absorber assembly using power tool. Refer to FSU-9, "Removal and Installation" . Separate upper link ball joint stud from steering knuckle using Tool. ● Support lower link with jack. Tool number 7. 8. 9. ● ● Remove cotter pin, then remove drive shaft nut. Remove drive shaft mounting bolts from front final drive. Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly. CAUTION: ● When removing drive shaft, do not apply an excessive angle to drive shaft joint. Also be careful not to excessively extend slide joint. H I J K L LEIA0095E M Move joint up, down, left, right, and in axial direction. Check for any rough movement or significant looseness. Check boot for cracks or other damage, and for grease leakage. If damaged, disassemble drive shaft to verify damage, and repair or replace as necessary. RAA0030D Revision: October 2004 G : ST29020001 (J-24319-01) INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ● F FAX-7 2005 Titan DRIVE SHAFT INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Tighten wheel nuts to specification. Refer to WT-6, "Rotation" . Disassembly and Assembly EDS001QD WDIA0054E 1. Sliding joint housing 2. Snap ring 3. Ball cage, steel ball, inner race assembly 4. Stopper ring 5. Boot band 6. Boot 7. Drive shaft 8. Circlip 9. Joint sub-assembly DISASSEMBLY Final Drive Side 1. 2. 3. Mount the drive shaft in a vise. CAUTION: When mounting the drive shaft in a vise, use copper or aluminum plates between the vise and the drive shaft. Remove the boot bands. Remove the stopper ring with a flat-bladed screwdriver as shown, and pull the housing off. SRA249A Revision: October 2004 FAX-8 2005 Titan DRIVE SHAFT 4. Remove the snap ring, then remove the ball cage, steel ball, inner race assembly from the drive shaft. A B C SFA514A FAX 5. 6. Remove the boot from the drive shaft. Remove any old grease on the housing using paper towels. E Wheel Side 1. 2. 3. Mount the drive shaft in a vise. CAUTION: When mounting the drive shaft in a vise, use copper or aluminum plates between the vise and the drive shaft. Remove the boot bands, then remove the boot from the joint sub-assembly. Screw a suitable drive shaft puller 30 mm (1.18 in) or more into the threaded part of the joint sub-assembly. Pull the joint subassembly off of the drive shaft as shown. NOTE: Align the sliding hammer and drive shaft and remove the joint sub-assembly by pulling directly. CAUTION: ● If the joint sub-assembly cannot be removed after five or more attempts, replace the drive shaft and joint subassembly as a set. F G H I J SDIA0606E 4. 5. 6. Remove the boot from the drive shaft. Remove the circlip from the drive shaft. While rotating the ball cage, remove any old grease from the joint sub-assembly using paper towels. INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Drive Shaft ● L Replace the drive shaft if there is any runout, cracking, or other damage. M Joint Sub-assembly ● ● ● Check for any rough rotation or unusual axial looseness. Clean any foreign material from inside the joint sub-assembly. Check for any compression scars, cracks, or fractures. CAUTION: If any defective conditions are found in the joint sub-assembly components, replace the entire joint sub-assembly. Sliding Joint Side Housing ● ● ● Check for any compression scars, cracks, fractures, or unusual wear on the ball rolling surface. Check for any damage to the drive shaft screws. Check for any deformation of the boot installation components. Ball Cage ● K Check the sliding surface for any compression scars, cracks, or fractures. Revision: October 2004 FAX-9 2005 Titan DRIVE SHAFT Steel Ball ● Check for any compression scars, cracks, fractures, or unusual wear. Inner Race ● ● Check the ball sliding surface for any compression scars, cracks, or fractures. Check for any damage to the serrated part. CAUTION: If any defective conditions are found, install a new housing, ball cage, steel ball, and inner race as a set. ASSEMBLY Final Drive Side 1. Wrap the serrated part of the drive shaft with tape. Install the boot band and boot to drive shaft. NOTE: Discard the old boot band and boot and use a new one for assembly. SFA800 2. Remove the tape wound around the serrated part of the drive shaft. 3. Install the ball cage, steel ball, and inner race assembly on the drive shaft, and secure them tightly using the snap ring. NOTE: Discard the old snap ring and use a new one for assembly. SDIA1125E 4. Insert the specified quantity of Genuine NISSAN Grease or equivalent, onto the housing (indicated by * marks), and install it onto shaft. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . Grease capacity : 130 − 150 g (4.58 − 5.29 oz) RAC0678D 5. 6. Install the stopper ring onto the housing. After installation, pull on the shaft to check engagement between the sliding joint and the stopper ring. Revision: October 2004 FAX-10 2005 Titan DRIVE SHAFT 7. 8. Install the boot securely into the grooves (indicated by * marks) as shown. CAUTION: If there is grease on boot mounting surfaces (indicated by * marks) of shaft and housing, boot may come off. Remove all grease from surfaces. Check that the boot installation length “L” is the length indicated below. Insert a flat-tip screwdriver or similar tool into smaller side of boot. Bleed air from boot to prevent boot deformation. Boot installation length “L ” : 145 mm (5.71 in) A B C WDIA0045E FAX CAUTION: ● The boot may break if the boot installation length is less than the specified value. ● Do not to touch the tip of the screwdriver to the inside of the boot. 9. Secure the big and small ends of the boot with the new boot bands as shown. NOTE: Discard the old boot bands and use new ones for assembly. E F G H SFA395 10. After installing the sliding joint housing to the drive shaft, rotate the boot to check that the boot is positioned correctly. If the boot is not positioned correctly, reposition the boot and secure the boot using a new boot band. Wheel Side 1. I J Insert the Genuine NISSAN Grease or equivalent, into the joint sub-assembly serration hole until the grease begins to ooze from the ball groove and serration hole. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . After inserting the grease, use a shop cloth to wipe off the grease that has oozed out. K L M SDIA1127E 2. 3. Wrap the serrated part of the drive shaft with tape. Install the boot band and boot onto the shaft. Do not damage the boot. NOTE: Discard the old boot band and boot and use a new one for assembly. Remove the protective tape wound around the serrated part of the drive shaft. SFA800 Revision: October 2004 FAX-11 2005 Titan DRIVE SHAFT 4. 5. Attach the circlip to the drive shaft. The circlip must fit securely into the drive shaft groove. Attach the nut to the joint sub-assembly. Use a soft hammer to press-fit the circlip. NOTE: Discard the old circlip and use a new one for assembly. Insert the specified quantity of Genuine NISSAN Grease or equivalent, into the joint sub-assembly and the large end of the boot. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . Grease capacity 6. 7. : 145 − 165 g (5.11 − 5.82 oz) Install the boot securely into the grooves (indicated by the * marks) as shown. CAUTION: If there is grease on the boot mounting surfaces (indicated by the * marks) of the drive shaft and joint sub-assembly, the boot may come off. Remove all grease from the drive shaft surfaces. Check that the boot installation length “L” is the specified length. Insert a flat-tip screwdriver or similar tool into the smaller side of the boot. Bleed the air from the boot to prevent boot deformation. Boot installation length “L” RAC0049D WDIA0046E : 168.4 mm (6.63 in) CAUTION: The boot may break if the boot installation length is less than the specified length. ● Do not contact inside surface of boot with the tip of the screwdriver. Secure the big and small ends of the boot using new boot bands as shown. NOTE: Discard the old boot bands and use new ones for assembly. ● 8. SFA395 9. After installing the joint sub-assembly to the drive shaft, rotate the boot to check that it is positioned correctly. If the boot is not positioned correctly, reposition the boot and secure the boot using a new boot band. Revision: October 2004 FAX-12 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Wheel Bearing Axial end play PFP:00030 A EDS001QE 0.05 mm (0.002 in) or less B Drive Shaft EDS001QF C FAX E WDIA0055E Drive shaft joint type Final drive side Rzeppa Wheel side Rzeppa Nissan Genuine Grease or equivalent Quality Grease Capacity Boot length Final drive side 130 - 150 g (4.58 - 5.29 oz) Wheel side 145 - 165 g (5.11 - 5.82 oz) Final drive side "L1" F G H 145 mm (5.71 in) Wheel side "L2 " 168.4 mm (6.63 in) I J K L M Revision: October 2004 FAX-13 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Revision: October 2004 FAX-14 2005 Titan D DRIVELINE/AXLE A B SECTION FRONT FINAL DRIVE C FFD E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions .............................................................. 2 PREPARATION ........................................................... 3 Special Service Tools ............................................... 3 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 6 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 7 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 7 FRONT OIL SEAL ...................................................... 8 Removal and Installation .......................................... 8 REMOVAL ............................................................. 8 INSTALLATION ..................................................... 9 SIDE OIL SEALS ...................................................... 10 Removal and Installation ........................................ 10 REMOVAL ........................................................... 10 REAR COVER GASKET ...........................................11 Removal and Installation .........................................11 REMOVAL ............................................................11 INSTALLATION ....................................................11 FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY .......................... 12 Removal and Installation ........................................ 12 REMOVAL ........................................................... 12 INSTALLATION ................................................... 13 Components ........................................................... 14 M205 2-PINION ................................................... 14 Pre-Inspection ........................................................ 15 Revision: October 2004 TOTAL PRELOAD ............................................... 15 DRIVE GEAR TO DRIVE PINION BACKLASH... 15 COMPANION FLANGE RUNOUT ....................... 15 TOOTH CONTACT .............................................. 15 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 16 REMOVAL OF DRIVE GEAR AND DIFFERENTIAL CASE ASSEMBLY ...................................... 16 REMOVAL OF DRIVE PINION ASSEMBLY ........ 18 DIFFERENTIAL CASE DISASSEMBLY .............. 20 INSPECTION ...................................................... 21 ADJUSTMENT OF DIFFERENTIAL CASE ......... 22 Adjustment of Drive Gear and Drive Pinion Assembly ........................................................................... 24 DRIVE PINION HEIGHT ADJUSTING WASHER SELECTION ........................................................ 24 PINION GEAR HEIGHT ...................................... 25 TOOTH CONTACT .............................................. 26 INSTALLATION OF DRIVE PINION ASSEMBLY... 27 INSTALLATION OF DIFFERENTIAL CASE ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 29 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 32 General Specifications ............................................ 32 Side Gear Adjustment ............................................ 32 Total Preload Adjustment ........................................ 32 Drive Pinion Height Adjustment .............................. 33 FFD-1 2005 Titan F G H I J K L M PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS Precautions PFP:00001 EDS001OA CAUTION: ● Before starting diagnosis of the vehicle, understand symptoms well. Perform correct and systematic operations. ● Check for the correct installation status prior removal or disassembly. When matching marks are required, be sure they do not interfere with the function of the parts they are applied to. ● Carry out an overhaul in a clean work place, Using a dust proof room is recommended. ● Before disassembly, using steam or white gasoline, completely remove sand and mud from the exterior the unit, preventing them from entering into the unit during disassembly or assembly. ● Check appearance of the disassembled parts for damage, deformation, and abnormal wear. If a malfunction is detected, replace it with a new one. ● Normally replace lock pins, oil seals, and bearings with new ones every times they are removed. ● In principle, tighten bolts or nuts gradually in several steps working diagonally from inside to outside. If tightening sequence is specified, observe it. ● Clean and flush the parts sufficiently and blow them dry. ● Be careful not to damage the sliding surfaces and mating surface. ● When applying sealant, remove the old sealant from the mounting surface; then remove any moisture, oil, and foreign materials from the application and mounting surfaces. ● Always use shop paper for cleaning the inside of components. ● Avoid using cotton gloves or a shop cloth to prevent entering of lint. ● During assembly, observe the specified tightening torque, and new differential gear oil, Vaseline, or multi-purpose grease, as specified for each vehicle, when necessary. Revision: October 2004 FFD-2 2005 Titan PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A EDS002GR The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description B ST35271000 ( — ) Drift Installing drive pinion front bearing outer race. a: 72 mm (2.83 in) dia. b: 36 mm (1.42 in) dia. C ZZA0702D KV38100500 (J-25273) Drift FFD E Installing front oil seal. a: 80 mm (3.15 in) dia. b: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia. F G ZZA0811D ST30021000 ( – ) Puller ● Removing side bearing inner race. ● Removing drive pinion rear bearing inner race. H I ZZA0700D KV38100300 (J-25523) Drift Installing side bearing inner race. a: 54 mm (2.13 in) dia. b: 46 mm (1.81 in) dia. c: 32mm (1.26 in) dia. J K ZZA1046D ST30901000 ( – ) Drift Installing drive pinion rear bearing outer race. A: 79mm (3.11 in) dia. B: 45 mm (1.77 in) dia. C: 35.2 mm (1.39 in) dia. L M SDIA0217J KV40104810 ( – ) Drift Installing drive pinion front bearing outer race. a: 68 mm (2.68 in) dia. b: 55 mm (2.17 in) dia. ZZA1003D KV38102200 ( — ) Drift Installing front oil seal. a: 90 mm (3.54 in) dia. b: 55.3 mm (2.18 in) dia. NT660 Revision: October 2004 FFD-3 2005 Titan PREPARATION Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description ST33081000 ( – ) Adapter Removing and installing side bearing inner race. a: 43 mm (1.69 in) dia. b: 33.5 mm (1.32 in) dia. ZZA1000D KV38108300 (J-44195) Companion flange wrench Removing and installing drive pinion nut. NT771 ST3127S000 (J-25765-A) Preload gauge 1. GG91030000 (J-25765) Torque wrench 2. HT62940000 ( – ) Socket adapter (1/2″) 3. HT62900000 ( – ) Socket adapter (3/8″) Inspecting drive pinion bearing preload and total preload NT124 — (8144) Pinion block Adjusting pinion gear height SDIA2599E — (6740) Cone Adjusting pinion gear height SDIA2601E — (6741) Screw Adjusting pinion gear height SDIA2602E — (6739) Pinion height lock Adjusting pinion gear height SDIA2603E Revision: October 2004 FFD-4 2005 Titan PREPARATION Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — TBD Arbor disc Adjusting pinion gear height A B C SDIA2605E — (D-115-2) Scooter block Adjusting pinion gear height FFD E SDIA2604E — (D-115-3) Arbor F Adjusting pinion gear height G H SDIA2606E — (C-4040) Installer Installing drive pinion rear bearing inner race. I J SDIA2607E KV40105230 ( – ) Drift Installing drive pinion rear bearing outer race. a: 92 mm(3.62 in) dia. b: 85.5 mm (3.37 in) dia. K L ZZA0898D — (SP8P) Slide hammer ● Removing front oil seal ● Removing side oil seal ● Removing drive pinion front bearing outer race ● Removing drive pinion rear bearing outer race M LDIA0133E — (C-4171) Handle LDIA0134E Revision: October 2004 FFD-5 2005 Titan PREPARATION Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (D-103) Remover Removing drive pinion front bearing outer race LDIA0135E — (C-4307) Remover Removing drive pinion rear bearing outer race LDIA0135E Commercial Service Tools EDS002GS Tool name Description Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts PBIC0190E Revision: October 2004 FFD-6 2005 Titan × FFD-15 × Tooth surfaces worn FFD-21 × Incorrect backlash FFD-15 × Companion flange excessive runout FFD-15 × Improper gear oil × Propeller shaft MA-26, "Checking Final Drive Oil" PR-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" WT-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" × Road wheel WT-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" × Drive shaft FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" × Brakes BR-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" × Steering PS-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" PFP:00003 Tires EDS001OD × 2005 Titan × FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" and FSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" Axle and suspension NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING × Improper gear contact NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart Noise FFD-7 FFD-21 Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. Reference page Differential Possible cause and suspected parts Symptom ×: Applicable Revision: October 2004 Rough gear tooth A B C FFD E F G H I J K L M FRONT OIL SEAL FRONT OIL SEAL Removal and Installation PFP:38189 EDS002GT REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove front propeller shaft. Refer to PR-5, "REMOVAL" . Separate the RH and LH drive shafts from the front final drive. Refer to FAX-7, "REMOVAL" . Measure the drive pinion bearing preload with front oil seal resistance using Tool. Tool number 4. NOTE: Record the preload measurement. Loosen drive pinion nut while holding the companion flange using Tool. Tool number 5. : ST3127S000 (J25765-A) : KV38108300 (J44195) Remove companion flange using a suitable puller. BDIA0001E 6. Place a small hole in seal case, using a suitable punch or drill. LDIA0129E 7. Assemble Tool as shown and remove seal. Tool number : SP8P LDIA0130E Revision: October 2004 FFD-8 2005 Titan FRONT OIL SEAL INSTALLATION 1. A Apply multi-purpose grease to cavity at sealing lips of front oil seal. Press front oil seal into gear carrier using suitable tool. B C BDIA0003E 2. Install companion flange and a new drive pinion nut. Tighten drive pinion nut while holding the companion flange using Tool until there is no end play. Tool number 3. E : KV38108300 (J44195) F Measure the drive pinion bearing preload with front oil seal resistance using Tool. Tool number : ST3127S000 (J25765-A) G NOTE: ● Drive pinion bearing preload should equal the measurement BDIA0001E taken during removal plus an additional 0.56 N·m (0.06 Kg-m, 5 in-lb). ● If drive pinion bearing preload is low, tighten drive pinion nut in 6.8 N·m (0.69 Kg-m, 5ft-lb) increments until drive pinion preload is met. CAUTION: Never loosen the drive pinion nut to decrease drive pinion bearing preload. Do not exceed specified preload. If preload torque is exceed a new collapsible spacer must be installed. If maximum torque is reached prior to reaching the required preload, the collapsible spacer may have been damaged. Replace the collapsible spacer. Drive pinion nut 4. 5. FFD : 298 - 678 N·m (31 - 69Kg-m, 220 - 500 ft-lb) H I J K Attach the RH and LH drive shafts. Refer to FAX-8, "INSTALLATION" . Install the front propeller shaft. Refer to PR-5, "INSTALLATION" . L M Revision: October 2004 FFD-9 2005 Titan SIDE OIL SEALS SIDE OIL SEALS Removal and Installation PFP:33142 EDS002GU REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove front final drive. Refer to FFD-12, "REMOVAL" . Remove differential side shaft and side flange using suitable tool. BDIA0006E 3. Place a small hole in seal case, using suitable punch or drill. LDIA0129E 4. Assemble Tool as shown and remove seal. Tool number 5. : SP8P Installation is in the reverse order of removal. LDIA0130E Revision: October 2004 FFD-10 2005 Titan REAR COVER GASKET REAR COVER GASKET Removal and Installation PFP:38320 A EDS002GV REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove front final drive. Refer to FFD-12, "REMOVAL" . Drain gear oil. Refer to MA-27, "DRAINING" . Remove rear cover. B C INSTALLATION 1. Apply 3.2mm (0.126 in) bead of sealant to the rear cover. ● Use Genuine Silicone RTV sealant or equivalent. Refer to. GI45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . FFD E F BDIA0004E 2. 3. 4. Install rear cover and tighten rear cover bolts in the order as shown FFD-14, "Components" . Fill final drive with recommended gear oil. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants" . Install front final drive. Refer to FFD-13, "INSTALLATION" . G H I BDIA0005E J K L M Revision: October 2004 FFD-11 2005 Titan FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation PFP:38500 EDS002GW BDIA0007E 1. Gear carrier assembly 2. Front crosemember 3. Skid plate (if equipped) REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove front propeller shaft. Refer to PR-5, "REMOVAL" . CAUTION: Be careful not to damage spline, sleeve yoke and front oil seal when removing propeller shaft. Separate LH and RH drive shafts from front final drive. Refer to FAX-7, "REMOVAL" . Remove front cross member. Disconnect the vent hose. Revision: October 2004 FFD-12 2005 Titan FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY 5. Support the front final drive with suitable jack and remove the front final drive bolts. Carefully remove front final drive. A B C BDIA0008E FFD INSTALLATION 1. Install front final drive assembly. Front final drive bolts 2. 3. 4. 5. : 182.5 N·m (19 Kg-m, 135 ft-lb) E Connect the vent hose. Install the front cross member. Install LH and RH drive shaft. Refer to FAX-8, "INSTALLATION" . Install front propeller shaft. Refer to PR-5, "INSTALLATION" . F G BDIA0008E H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 FFD-13 2005 Titan FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY Components EDS002GX M205 2-PINION SDIA2219E 1. Side bearing adjust nut 2. Side bearing 3. Side gear thrust washer 4. Side gear 5. Lock pin 6. Pinion mate thrust washer 7. Pinion mate gear 8. Pinion mate shaft 9. Drive pinion 10. Drive pinion height adjusting washer 11. Drive pinion rear bearing 12. Collapsible spacer 13. Breather tube 15. Dust shield 14. Differential side flange 16. Circular clip 17. Side oil seal 18. Drive pinion front bearing 19. Front oil seal 20. Companion flange 21. Drive pinion nut 22. Drain plug 23. Differential side shaft 24. Axle shaft bearing 25. Extension tube 26. O-ring 27. Gear carrier 28. Plate 29. Differential case 30. Drive gear 31. Side bearing cap 32. Filler plug 33. Rear cover Revision: October 2004 FFD-14 2005 Titan FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY 34. Bushing 37 35. Bearing 36 Screw A Dowel pin Pre-Inspection EDS002GY B Before disassembling the front final drive, drain off oil from final drive assembly and remove the rear cover. Then perform the following inspection. TOTAL PRELOAD 1. 2. C Turn drive pinion in both directions several times to set bearing rollers. Check total preload using Tool. Tool number Total preload (with oil seal) FFD : ST3127S000 (J-25765-A) E : 2.98 - 4.76 N·m (0.31 - 0.48 Kg-m, 27 - 42 in-lb) F SDIA2220E DRIVE GEAR TO DRIVE PINION BACKLASH G Check drive gear to drive pinion backlash using a dial gauge at several points. Drive gear to drive pinion backlash: 0.13 - 0.18 mm(0.0051 - 0.0071 in) H I J SDIA2221E COMPANION FLANGE RUNOUT 1. 2. Fit a dial gauge onto the companion flange face (inner side of the propeller shaft bolt holes). Rotate the companion flange to check for runout. Runout limit 3. 4. a. b. c. L : 0.10 mm (0.0039 in) Fit a test indicator to the inner side of the companion flange (socket diameter). Rotate the companion flange to check for runout. Runout limit 5. K M : 0.13 mm (0.0051 in) SDIA0569E If the runout value is outside the repair limit, follow the procedure below to adjust. Check for runout while changing the phase between companion flange and drive pinion gear by 90° step, and search for the point where the runout is the minimum. If the runout value is still outside of the limit after the phase has been changed, replace the companion flange. If the runout value still outside of the limit after the companion flange has been replaced, check pinion bearing and drive pinion assembly. TOOTH CONTACT Check tooth contact. Refer to FFD-15, "TOOTH CONTACT" . Revision: October 2004 FFD-15 2005 Titan FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY Disassembly and Assembly EDS002GZ REMOVAL OF DRIVE GEAR AND DIFFERENTIAL CASE ASSEMBLY 1. Remove differential side shaft with a soft hammer. SDIA2223E 2. Remove differential side flange with a soft hammer. SDIA2224E 3. Remove extension tube and O-ring. SDIA2226E 4. Place a small hole in seal case, using suitable punch or drill. LDIA0129E Revision: October 2004 FFD-16 2005 Titan FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY 5. Assemble Tool as shown and remove seal. Tool number : — A (SP8P) B C LDIA0130E 6. FFD Remove rear cover from gear carrier. E F G LDIA0128E 7. For proper reinstallation, paint matching mark on one side bearing cap. NOTE: Bearing caps are line-board for initial assembly. The matching marks are used to replace them in their original positions. H I J SDIA2228E 8. K Remove side bearing caps. L M SDIA2229E 9. Remove side bearing adjust nuts. SDIA2230E Revision: October 2004 FFD-17 2005 Titan FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY 10. Keep the side bearing outer races together with inner race. Do not mix them up. SPD919 REMOVAL OF DRIVE PINION ASSEMBLY 1. 2. Put matching marks on companion flange and drive pinion with paint. Loosen drive pinion nut using Tool. Tool number : KV38108300 (J-44195) SDIA2232E 3. Remove companion flange using a suitable puller. SDIA2233E 4. 5. Remove drive pinion (together with rear bearing inner race, collapsible spacer.) Remove pinion front bearing inner race. SDIA2234E Revision: October 2004 FFD-18 2005 Titan FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY 6. Place a small hole in case, using suitable punch or drill. A B C LDIA0129E FFD 7. Assemble Tool as shown and remove seal. Tool number : — (SP8P) E F G LDIA0130E 8. Turn nose of gear carrier down. Remove drive pinion front bearing outer race using Tool. Locate driver on back edge of outer race, then drive outer race out. CAUTION: Do not nick gear carrier. Tool number H I A: — (C-4171) B: — (D-103) J LDIA0131E 9. Turn nose of gear carrier up. Remove drive pinion rear bearing outer race using Tool. Locate driver on back edge of outer race, then drive outer race out. CAUTION: Do not nick gear carrier. Tool number A: B: L — (C-4171) — (C-4307) M LDIA0132E 10. Remove drive pinion rear bearing inner race and drive pinion height adjusting washer using Tool. Tool number : ST30021000 ( — ) SDIA2236E Revision: October 2004 K FFD-19 2005 Titan FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY DIFFERENTIAL CASE DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove side bearing inner race. To prevent damage to bearing, engage puller jaws in groove. Tool number A Tool number B : ST33081000 ( : ST30021000 ( — — ) ) CAUTION: To prevent damage to the side bearing and drive gear, place copper plates between these parts and vise. ● It is not necessary to remove side bearing except it is replaced. ● SDIA2237E ● Be careful not to confuse left-hand and right-hand parts. Keep bearing and bearing race for each side together. SPD022 2. 3. Loosen drive gear bolts in a crisscross fashion. Tap drive gear off the differential case with a soft hammer. ● Tap evenly all around to keep the drive gear from bending. SDIA2238E 4. Drive out pinion mate shaft lock pin using suitable punch from drive gear side. SPD025 Revision: October 2004 FFD-20 2005 Titan FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY 5. Remove the pinion mate shaft. A B C SDIA0031J FFD 6. Turn the pinion mate gear, then remove the pinion mate gear, pinion mate thrust washer, side gear and side gear thrust washer from the differential case. E F G SDIA0032J 7. H Check mating surfaces of differential case, side gears, pinion mate gears, pinion mate shaft and thrust washers. I J K SDIA0187J INSPECTION ● Clean up the disassemble parts. Then, inspect if the parts are wear or damaged. If so, follow the measures below. Content Measures ● If the gear teeth do not mesh or line-up correctly, determine the cause and adjust, repair, or replace as necessary. ● If the gears are worn, cracked, damaged, pitted or chipped (by friction) noticeably, replace with new gears. ● If found any chipped (by friction), pitted, worn, rusted, scratched mark, or unusual noise from the bearing, replace with new bearing assembly (as a new set). ● Replace with a new one if found any cracks or damage on the surface of the tooth. ● Replace with a new one if found any worn or chipped mark on the contact sides of the thrust washer. ● Replace with a new one if found that it is chipped (by friction), damaged, or unusual worn. ● Oil seals must be replaced with a new one whenever disassembled. Drive gear and drive pinion Bearing Side gear thrust washer and pinion mate thrust washer Side gear and pinion mate thrust washer Oil seal Revision: October 2004 L FFD-21 2005 Titan M FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY Content Differential case Measures ● Replace with a new one if found any wear or cracks on the contact sides of the differential case. ● Replace with a new one if found any chipped marks (about 0.10 mm, 0.0039 in) or other damage on the contact sides of the lips of the companion flange. Companion flange ADJUSTMENT OF DIFFERENTIAL CASE Thrust Washer Selection 1. 2. Apply gear oil to contact surfaces of each gear, thrust washers and differential case. Install the removed thrust washer or same thickness washer to side gear. SDIA0193J 3. Install the side gears, thrust washers, pinion mate gears and thrust washers into differential case. SDIA2025E 4. Install pinion mate shaft to differential case so that it meets lock pin holes. SDIA0195J 5. Adjust clearance between rear face of side gear and thrust washer by selecting side gear thrust washer. Refer to FFD-32, "Side Gear Adjustment" . Use two feeler gauges to prevent leaning of side gear as showing figure. Clearance between side gear thrust washer and differential case : 0.20 mm (0.0079 in) or less SPD828 Revision: October 2004 FFD-22 2005 Titan FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY 6. Make sure lock pin is flush with case, using a suitable punch. A B C SPD030 FFD 7. 8. Apply gear oil to gear tooth surfaces and thrust surfaces and check to see they turn properly. Install differential case assembly on drive gear. ● Tighten bolts in a crisscross pattern, lightly tapping bolt head with a hammer. E F G SPD322 9. H Place differential case on drive gear. Tighten bolts in a crisscross fashion. I J K SDIA2239E 10. Press-fit side bearing inner race on differential case using Tools. Tool number A Tool number B L : KV38100300 (J-25523) : ST33081000 ( — ) M SDIA2240E Revision: October 2004 FFD-23 2005 Titan FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY Adjustment of Drive Gear and Drive Pinion Assembly EDS002H0 DRIVE PINION HEIGHT ADJUSTING WASHER SELECTION ● Drive gear and pinions are supplied in matched sets only. Matching numbers on both pinion and drive gear are etched for verification. If a new gear set is being used, verify the numbers of each pinion gear and drive gear before proceeding with assembly. SDIA2241E ● ● ● The mounting distance from the centerline of the drive gear to the back face of the pinion gear for the Model 205 axle assembly is 103.5 mm (4.0748 inches). On the button end of each pinion, there is etched a plus (+) number, a minus (-) number, or a zero (0), which indicates the best running position for each particular gear set. This dimension is controlled by a selective shim between the inner pinion bearing race and pinion gear. For example: If a pinion is etched m+8 (+3), it would require 0.08 mm (0.003 inch) less shim than a pinion etched “0”. This means decreasing shim thickness; increases the mounting distance of the pinion to 103.6 mm (4.0778 inches). If a pinion is etched m+8 (-3), it would require adding 0.08mm (0.003 inch) more to the shim than would be required if the pinion were etched “0”. By adding 0.08 mm (0.003 inch), the mounting distance of the pinion was decreased to 103.4 mm (4.0718 inches) which is just what m-8 (a-3) etching indicated. To change the pinion adjustment, use different shims which come in different thickness. Use the following tables as a guide for selecting the correct shim thickness to add or subtract from the old shim. NEW PINION MARKING (ENGLISH 0.000) OLD PINION MARKING -4 -3 -2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +4 +0.008 +0.007 +0.006 +0.005 +0.004 +0.003 +0.002 +0.001 0 +3 +0.007 +0.006 +0.005 +0.004 +0.003 +0.002 +0.001 0 -0.001 +2 +0.006 +0.005 +0.004 +0.003 +0.002 +0.001 0 -0.001 -0.002 +1 +0.005 +0.004 +0.003 +0.002 +0.001 0 -0.001 -0.002 -0.003 0 +0.004 +0.003 +0.002 +0.001 0 -0.001 -0.002 -0.003 -0.004 -1 +0.003 +0.002 +0.001 0 -0.001 -0.002 -0.003 -0.004 -0.005 -2 +0.002 +0.001 0 -0.001 -0.002 -0.003 -0.004 -0.005 -0.006 -3 +0.001 0 -0.001 -0.002 -0.003 -0.004 -0.005 -0.006 -0.007 -4 0 -0.001 -0.002 -0.003 -0.004 -0.005 -0.006 -0.007 -0.008 NEW PINION MARKING (METRIC 0.00) OLD PINION MARKING -10 -8 -5 -3 0 +3 +5 +8 +10 +10 +0.20 +0.18 +0.15 +0.13 +0.10 +0.08 +0.05 +0.02 0 +8 +0.18 +0.15 +0.13 +0.10 +0.08 +0.05 +0.02 0 -0.02 +5 +0.15 +0.13 +0.10 +0.08 +0.05 +0.02 0 -0.02 -0.05 +3 +0.13 +0.10 +0.08 +0.05 +0.02 0 -0.02 -0.05 -0.08 0 +0.10 +0.08 +0.05 +0.02 0 -0.02 -0.05 -0.08 -0.10 -3 +0.08 +0.05 +0.02 0 -0.02 -0.05 -0.08 -0.10 -0.13 -5 +0.05 +0.02 0 -0.02 -0.05 -0.08 -0.10 -0.13 -0.15 -8 +0.02 0 -0.02 -0.05 -0.08 -0.10 -0.13 -0.15 -0.18 -10 0 -0.02 -0.05 -0.08 -0.10 -0.13 -0.15 -0.18 -0.20 Revision: October 2004 FFD-24 2005 Titan FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY PINION GEAR HEIGHT 1. 2. A Make sure all parts are clean and that the bearings are well lubricated. Assemble the pinion gear bearings into the differential shim selector tool. Tool number A Tool number B Tool number C : : : — — — B (8144) (6740) (6741) C SDIA2242E 3. Install pinion bearing inner race and pinion height adjusting washer to gear carrier using Tool as shown. FFD E F G SDIA2243E H 4. Turn the assembly several times to seat the bearings. I J K SDIA2244E 5. L Measure the turning torque. Tool number : ST3127S000 (J-25765-A) Turning torque specification : 2.98 - 4.76 N·m (0.31 - 0.48 Kg-m, 27 - 42 in-lb) M SDIA2245E Revision: October 2004 FFD-25 2005 Titan FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY 6. Tighten side-bearing cap to the specified torque installing Tools as shown in the figure. Tool number A Tool number B Tool number C Tool number D : : : : — — — — (6739) (D-115-2) TBD (D-115-3) SDIA2246E 7. Put scooter block on pinion height block. Make sure that dial gauge is level adjusting pressure with a hand. Dial gauge indicates “0”. SDIA2247E 8. 9. Slide dial gauge along arbor. Record the maximum. Adjust pinion height adjusting washer so that the maximum will be “0”. TOOTH CONTACT Checking gear tooth contact pattern is necessary to verify correct relationship between drive gear and drive pinion. Hypoid gears which are not positioned in proper arrangement may be noisy and/or have a short life. Check gear tooth contact pattern to obtain the best contact for low noise and long life. 1. Thoroughly clean drive gear and drive pinion teeth. 2. Lightly apply a mixture of powdered ferric oxide and oil or the equivalent. Apply it to 3 or 4 teeth of drive gear drive side. SDIA2248E 3. Hold companion flange steady by hand and rotate the drive gear in both directions. SDIA2249E Revision: October 2004 FFD-26 2005 Titan FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY A B C FFD E F SDIA1796E INSTALLATION OF DRIVE PINION ASSEMBLY 1. G Press-fit rear bearing outer race with Tools. Tool number A Tool number B : ST30901000 ( — ) : KV40105230 ( — ) H I SDIA2251E 2. J Press-fit front bearing outer race with Tools. Tool number A Tool number B K : ST35271000 ( — ) : KV40104810 ( — ) L M SDIA2252E 3. 4. Select drive pinion height adjusting washer. Refer to FFD-33, "Drive Pinion Height Adjustment" . Install drive pinion adjusting washer in drive pinion, and press-fit pinion rear bearing inner race in it, using a press and Tool. Tool number : — (C - 4040) SDIA2253E Revision: October 2004 FFD-27 2005 Titan FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY 5. Place pinion front bearing inner race in gear carrier. SDIA2254E 6. Apply multi-purpose grease to cavity at sealing lips of oil seal. Install front oil seal, using Tools. Tool number A Tool number B : KV38100500 (J-25273) : KV38102200 ( — ) SDIA2264E 7. Place collapsible spacer, drive pinion height adjusting washer and drive pinion in gear carrier. SDIA2255E 8. Insert companion flange onto drive pinion. Tap the companion flange with a soft hammer until fully seated. SDIA2266E Revision: October 2004 FFD-28 2005 Titan FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY 9. Tighten pinion nut until total preload is within specification. ● The threaded portion of drive pinion and pinion nut should be free from oil or grease. Tool number A : KV38108300 (J-44195) B C PDIA0182E FFD 10. Tighten the pinion nut by very small degrees until the specified preload is achieved. When checking the preload, turn the drive pinion in both directions several times to set the bearing rollers. Tool number E : ST3127S000 (J-25765-A) Pinion bearing preload: 2.3 - 3.4 N·m (24 - 34 Kg-cm, 21 - 30 in-lb) This procedure will have to be repeated if: Maximum preload is achieved before the minimum pinion nut torque is reached. ● Minimum preload is not achieved before maximum pinion nut torque is reached. F G ● SDIA2220E H INSTALLATION OF DIFFERENTIAL CASE ASSEMBLY 1. 2. Install side bearing adjust nut into gear carrier. Install differential case assembly with side bearing outer races into gear carrier. I J K SPD919 3. L Align mark on bearing cap with that on gear carrier and install bearing cap on gear carrier. ● Do not tighten at this point. This allows further tightening of side bearing adjusters. M SDIA2258E Revision: October 2004 FFD-29 2005 Titan FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY 4. Tighten each side bearing adjust nuts alternately turning drive gear. SDIA2265E 5. Measure backlash of drive gear and drive pinion using a dial gauge. Drive gear to drive pinion back lash :0.13 - 0.18mm (0.0051 - 0.0071 in) SDIA2221E 6. 7. Use each adjust nut to adjust backlash. In case of lots of backlash, loosen adjust nut A and tighten adjust nut B. In case of less backlash, loosen adjust nut B and tighten adjust nut A. SDIA2262E 8. After adjusting backlash, fix adjuster with screws and tighten cap bolt to the specified torque. Refer to FFD-14, "Components" . SDIA2263E Revision: October 2004 FFD-30 2005 Titan FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY 9. Check total preload with tool. Tool number : ST3127S000 (J-25765-A) A Total preload (With oil seal) : 2.98 - 4.76 N·m (0.31 - 0.48 Kg-m, 27 - 42 in-lb) B C SDIA2220E FFD 10. Check tooth contact. Refer to FFD-26, "TOOTH CONTACT" . 11. Install rear cover. Apply liquid sealant to rear cover side and install gear carrier. 12. Apply multi-purpose grease to cavity at sealing lips of oil seal.Install side oil seal. E F G SDIA2267E H 13. Install O-ring and extension tube. 14. Install sides haft and side flange. I J K SDIA2226E L M Revision: October 2004 FFD-31 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specifications PFP:00030 EDS001OM Engine VK56E Vehicle grade All M205 Front final drive 2-pinion Gear ratio 2.937 3.357 Number of teeth (Drive gear/drive pinion) 47/16 47/14 Oil capacity (Approx.) 1.6 (3-3/8 , 2-7/8) (US pt, lmp pt) Side Gear Adjustment EDS001ON Side gear to pinion mate gear backlash (Clearance between side gear thrust washer and differential case) mm (in) Available side gear thrust washers less than 0.20 (0.0079) or less Thickness mm (in) Package part number* 0.76 (0.030) 0.79 (0.031) 0.81 (0.032) 0.84 (0.033) 0.87 (0.034) 38424 8S111 0.89 (0.035) 0.91 (0.036) 0.94 (0.037) 0.97 (0.038) 0.99 (0.039) 38424 8S112 Total Preload Adjustment Total preload N·m (Kg-m, in-lb) EDS001OO Gear ratio 2.937 Type Gear ratio 3.357 type 3.09 - 4.87 (0.32 - 0.49, 28 - 43) 2.98 - 4.76 (0.31 - 0.48, 27 - 42) Drive gear to drive pinion backlash mm (in) Revision: October 2004 0.13 - 0.18 (0.0051 - 0.0071) FFD-32 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Drive Pinion Height Adjustment EDS001OP A Available drive pinion height adjusting washers Thickness mm (in) Package part number* 1.22 (0.048) 1.24 (0.049) 1.27 (0.050) 1.30 (0.051) 1.32 (0.052) 38154 8S111 B C 1.35 (0.053) 1.37 (0.054) 1.40 (0.055) 1.42 (0.056) 1.45 (0.057) 38154 8S112 1.47 (0.058) 1.50 (0.059) 1.52 (0.060) 1.55 (0.061) 1.57 (0.062) 38154 8S113 FFD E F 1.60 (0.063) 1.63 (0.064) 1.65 (0.065) 1.68 (0.066) 1.70 (0.067) 38154 8S114 1.73 (0.068) 1.75 (0.069) 1.78 (0.070) 1.80 (0.071) 1.83 (0.072) 38154 8S115 G H *Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. I J K L M Revision: October 2004 FFD-33 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Revision: October 2004 FFD-34 2005 Titan B ENGINE A FL SECTION FUEL SYSTEM C D E CONTENTS PREPARATION ........................................................... 2 Special Service Tools ............................................... 2 Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 2 FUEL SYSTEM ........................................................... 3 Checking Fuel Lines ................................................. 3 General Precautions ................................................ 3 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY ........................................... 5 Removal and Installation .......................................... 5 REMOVAL ............................................................. 6 INSTALLATION ..................................................... 8 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................. 8 FUEL TANK .............................................................. 10 Removal and Installation ........................................ 10 REMOVAL ........................................................... 11 INSTALLATION ................................................... 13 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 14 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 15 Standard and Limit .................................................. 15 F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 FL-1 2005 Titan PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 EBS00L3E The actual shapes of the Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of the special tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-46536) Fuel tank lock ring tool Removing and installing fuel tank lock ring LBIA0398E Commercial Service Tool EBS00L3F Tool name Description Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts PBIC0190E Revision: October 2004 FL-2 2005 Titan FUEL SYSTEM FUEL SYSTEM Checking Fuel Lines PFP:17503 A EBS00L3G Inspect fuel lines, fuel filler cap and fuel tank for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing or deterioration. If necessary, repair or replace damaged parts. FL C D SMA803A E General Precautions EBS00L3H WARNING: When replacing fuel line parts, be sure to observe the following. ● Put a “CAUTION: INFLAMMABLE” sign in the workshop. ● Be sure to work in a well ventilated area and furnish workshop with a CO2 fire extinguisher. ● Do not smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from the work area. CAUTION: ● Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following procedures: – Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put the lid on securely. Keep the container in safe area. – Release fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to EC-92, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . – Disconnect the battery negative terminal. ● Always replace O-rings and clamps with new ones. ● Do not kink or twist hoses when they are being installed. ● Do not tighten hose clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses. Tighten high-pressure rubber hose clamp so that clamp end is 3 mm (0.12 in) from hose end. Tightening torque specifications are the same for all rubber hose clamps. Ensure that screw does not contact adjacent parts. F G H I J K L M MMA104A Revision: October 2004 FL-3 2005 Titan FUEL SYSTEM ● ● – – ● ● ● After connecting the fuel tube quick connectors, make sure the quick connectors are secure. Ensure that the connector and resin tube do not contact any adjacent parts. After installing tubes, make sure there is no fuel leakage at connections in the following steps. Apply fuel pressure to fuel lines with turning ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). Then check for fuel leaks at connections. Start the engine and rev it up and check for fuel leaks at connections. Use only a Genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on. For servicing “Evaporative Emission System” parts, refer to EC-32, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM" . For servicing “On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR)” parts, refer to EC-39, "ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)" . PBIC1268E Revision: October 2004 FL-4 2005 Titan FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation PFP:17042 A EBS00L3I FL C D E F G H I J K L M LBIA0420E 1. Fuel line pump protector 2. Lock ring 3. Fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly 4. Fuel tank 5. Fuel tank protector 6. Fuel tank protector clips 7. Fuel tank straps 8. Fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring 9. Fuel filler hose 11. Fuel filler hose grommet 12. Fuel filler cap 10. Fuel filler pipe 13. Fuel tank shield Revision: October 2004 FL-5 2005 Titan FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY REMOVAL WARNING: Follow the “General Precautions” before working on the fuel system. Refer to FL-3, "General Precautions" . 1. Remove the fuel filler cap to release the pressure from inside the fuel tank. 2. Check the fuel level on level gauge. If the fuel gauge indicates more than the level as shown (full or almost full), drain the fuel from the fuel tank until the fuel gauge indicates the level as shown, or less. ● If the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure to drain the fuel to the specified level. a. Insert a suitable hose of less than 15 mm (0.59 in) diameter into the fuel filler pipe through the fuel filler opening to drain the fuel from fuel filler pipe. b. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire. Refer to WT-6, "Rotation" . WBIA0390E c. Remove the fuel filler pipe shield. LBIA0437E d. e. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler pipe and disconnect the vent hose quick connector. Insert a suitable hose into the fuel tank through the fuel filler hose to drain the fuel from the fuel tank. ● As a guide, the fuel level reaches the fuel gauge position as shown, or less, when approximately 14 liters (3 3/4 US gal, 3 1/8 Imp gal) of fuel are drained from the fuel tank when it is full. LBIA0386E 3. 4. 5. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to EC-92, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Remove the three nuts and remove fuel line pump protector. Disconnect the EVAP hose at the EVAP canister. LBIA0405E Revision: October 2004 FL-6 2005 Titan FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY 6. Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly electrical connector and the fuel feed hose. A FL C LBIA0406E D Disconnect the quick connector as follows: ● Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the tube. ● If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them by pulling. E F G SFE562A H CAUTION: ● The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist the quick connector more than necessary. ● Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector. ● Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube. ● Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube. ● Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection. ● Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin tube or the retainer is replaced. ● When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one (white colored retainer). I J K L M PBIC1268E Revision: October 2004 FL-7 2005 Titan FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY ● To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown. PBIC0163E 7. 8. Remove the fuel tank strap bolts while supporting the fuel tank with a suitable lift jack. Lower the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack and remove it from the vehicle to access the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. LBIA0387E 9. Remove the lock ring using Tool as shown. Tool number : — (J-46536) 10. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. Remove and discard the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring. CAUTION: ● Do not bend the float arm during removal. ● Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components. LBIA0407E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● For installation, use a new fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring. ● Connect the quick connector as follows: – Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials. – Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is heard. – After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as follows: – Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected. – Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected. PBIC1653E INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Turn the ignition switch ON but do not start engine, then check the fuel pipes and hose connections for leaks while applying fuel pressure to the system. Revision: October 2004 FL-8 2005 Titan FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY 2. Start the engine and rev it above idle speed, then check that there are no fuel leaks at any of the fuel pipe and hose connections. A FL C D E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 FL-9 2005 Titan FUEL TANK FUEL TANK Removal and Installation PFP:17202 EBS00L3J LBIA0420E 1. Fuel line pump protector 2. Lock ring 3. Fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly 4. Fuel tank 5. Fuel tank protector 6. Fuel tank protector clips 7. Fuel tank straps 8. Fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring 9. Fuel filler hose 11. Fuel filler hose grommet 12. Fuel filler cap 10. Fuel filler pipe 13. Fuel tank shield Revision: October 2004 FL-10 2005 Titan FUEL TANK REMOVAL A WARNING: Follow the “General Precautions” before working on the fuel system. Refer to FL-3, "General Precautions" . FL 1. Remove the fuel filler cap to release the pressure from inside the fuel tank. 2. Check the fuel level on level gauge. If the fuel gauge indicates more than the level as shown (full or almost full), drain the fuel from the fuel tank until the fuel gauge indicates the level as C shown, or less. ● If the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure to drain the fuel to the specified level. D a. Insert a suitable hose of less than 15 mm (0.59 in) diameter into the fuel filler pipe through the fuel filler opening to drain the fuel from fuel filler pipe. E b. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire. Refer to WT-6, "Rotation" . WBIA0390E c. Remove the fuel filler pipe shield. F G H LBIA0437E d. e. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler pipe and disconnect the vent hose quick connector. Insert a suitable hose into the fuel tank through the fuel filler hose to drain the fuel from the fuel tank. I J K L LBIA0386E 3. 4. 5. M Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to EC-92, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Remove the three nuts and remove fuel line pump protector. Disconnect the EVAP hose at the EVAP canister. LBIA0405E Revision: October 2004 FL-11 2005 Titan FUEL TANK 6. Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly electrical connector, and the fuel feed hose. LBIA0406E Disconnect the quick connector as follows: ● Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the tube. ● If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them by pulling. SFE562A CAUTION: ● The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist the quick connector more than necessary. ● Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector. ● Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube. ● Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube. ● Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection. ● Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin tube or the retainer is replaced. ● When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a new one (white colored retainer). PBIC1268E Revision: October 2004 FL-12 2005 Titan FUEL TANK ● To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown. A FL C PBIC0163E D 7. 8. Remove the four bolts and remove the fuel tank shield using power tool. Remove the three clips and remove the fuel tank protector at the front of the fuel tank as necessary to transfer to the new fuel tank. E F G LBIA0388E H 9. Disconnect fuel filler hose at the fuel tank side. 10. Remove the fuel tank strap bolts while supporting the fuel tank with a suitable lift jack. 11. Lower the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack and remove it from the vehicle. I J K LBIA0387E L 12. If necessary, remove the lock ring using Tool as shown. Tool number : — (J-46536) M 13. If necessary, remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. Discard the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring. CAUTION: ● Do not bend the float arm during removal. ● Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components. LBIA0407E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● For installation, use a new fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring. ● Connect the quick connector as follows: – Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials. – Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is heard. Revision: October 2004 FL-13 2005 Titan FUEL TANK – – – After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as follows: Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected. Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected. PBIC1653E INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON but do not start engine, then check the fuel pipe and hose connections for leaks while applying fuel pressure. Start the engine and rev it above idle, then check that there are no fuel leaks at any of the fuel pipe and hose connections. Revision: October 2004 FL-14 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Standard and Limit Fuel tank capacity PFP:00030 A EBS00L3K 105.8 (28 US gal, 23 1/4 Imp gal) FL C D E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 FL-15 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Revision: October 2004 FL-16 2005 Titan E SUSPENSION A B SECTION FRONT SUSPENSION C D FSU CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions .............................................................. 2 PREPARATION ........................................................... 3 Special Service Tools ............................................... 3 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 4 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 4 FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY ........................... 5 Components ............................................................. 5 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE ............................................. 6 Front Suspension Parts ............................................ 6 Front Wheel Alignment ............................................. 6 PRELIMINARY INSPECTION ............................... 6 CAMBER AND CASTER ....................................... 7 TOE-IN .................................................................. 7 FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE ..................... 8 COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER ................. 9 Removal and Installation .......................................... 9 REMOVAL ............................................................. 9 INSTALLATION ..................................................... 9 Disassembly and Assembly ..................................... 9 DISASSEMBLY ..................................................... 9 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ................. 9 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 10 STABILIZER BAR ......................................................11 Removal and Installation .........................................11 REMOVAL ............................................................11 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ........................11 INSTALLATION ....................................................11 Revision: October 2004 UPPER LINK ............................................................. 12 Removal and Installation ........................................ 12 REMOVAL ........................................................... 12 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 12 INSTALLATION ................................................... 12 LOWER LINK ............................................................ 13 Removal and Installation ........................................ 13 REMOVAL ........................................................... 13 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 13 INSTALLATION ................................................... 13 UPPER BALL JOINT AND LOWER BALL JOINT... 14 Removal and Installation ........................................ 14 Inspection ............................................................... 14 SWINGING FORCE ............................................ 14 TURNING FORCE ............................................... 14 VERTICAL END PLAY ........................................ 15 KNUCKLE ................................................................. 16 On-Vehicle Inspection and Service ......................... 16 Removal and Installation ........................................ 16 REMOVAL ........................................................... 16 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 17 INSTALLATION ................................................... 18 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 19 General Specifications (Front) ................................ 19 Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1) ................................ 19 Ball Joint ................................................................. 20 Wheelarch Height (Unladen*1) ............................... 20 FSU-1 2005 Titan F G H I J K L M PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS Precautions ● ● ● ● PFP:00001 EES001C9 When installing the rubber bushings, the final tightening must be done under unladen condition and with the tires on level ground. Oil will shorten the life of the rubber bushings, so wipe off any spilled oil immediately. Unladen condition means the fuel tank, engine coolant and lubricants are at the full specification. The spare tire, jack, hand tools, and mats are in their designated positions. After installing suspension components, check the wheel alignment. Lock nuts are not reusable. Always use new lock nuts for installation. New lock nuts are pre-oiled, do not apply any additional lubrication. Revision: October 2004 FSU-2 2005 Titan PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A EES001CA The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number Description (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name ST29020001 (J-24319-01) Gear arm puller B Removing ball joint for steering knuckle a: 34 mm (1.34 in) b: 6.5 mm (0.256 in) c: 61.5 mm (2.421 in) C D NT694 HT72520000 (J-25730-A) Ball joint remover FSU Removing tie-rod outer end a: 33 mm (1.30 in) b: 50 mm (1.97 in) r: 11.5 mm (0.453 in) F NT546 G Commercial Service Tools EES001CB Tool name Description Attachment wheel alignment Measure wheel alignment a: Screw M24 x 1.5 pitch b: 35 mm (1.38 in) dia. c: 65 mm (2.56 in) dia. d: 56 mm (2.20 in) e: 12 mm (0.47 in) H I J NT148 Spring compressor Removing and installing coil spring K L NT717 Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts M PBIC0190E Revision: October 2004 FSU-3 2005 Titan × Vibration × × × × Shimmy × × × × Shudder × × × Poor quality ride or handling × × × Revision: October 2004 × FSU-4 × × × × FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" WT-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" WT-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" BR-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" PS-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" TIRES ROAD WHEEL BRAKES STEERING × AXLE × FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" × DRIVE SHAFT × FFD-7, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" × DIFFERENTIAL PR-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" × PROPELLER SHAFT × FSU-11 × Stabilizer bar fatigue Shake FSU-6 × Incorrect wheel alignment × FSU-5 × Suspension looseness FSU-5 Parts interference × FSU-9 FSU-5 Bushing or mounting deterioration Noise Spring fatigue FSU-9 Shock absorber deformation, damage or deflection Possible Cause and SUSPECTED PARTS FSU-5 Reference page Improper installation, looseness Symptom NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart PFP:00003 EES001CC Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. Repair or replace parts as necessary. × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × x: Applicable 2005 Titan FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY Components PFP:54010 A EES001CD B C D FSU F G H I J K L M WEIA0083E 1. Washer 2. Spacer 3. Shock absorber mounting insulator 4. Shock absorber bushing 5. Upper seat 6. Coil spring 7. Dust cover 8. Shock absorber 9. Upper link 10. Steering knuckle 11. Cotter pin 12. Drive shaft 13. Lower link 14. Cam bolt 15. Jounce bumper 16. Cam washer 17. Stabilizer bar 18. Stabilizer bar bushing 19. Stabilizer bar mounting bracket 20. Connecting rod Revision: October 2004 FSU-5 2005 Titan ON-VEHICLE SERVICE ON-VEHICLE SERVICE Front Suspension Parts PFP:00000 EES001CE Check front suspension parts for excessive play, cracks, wear and other damage. ● Shake each front wheel to check for excessive play. If looseness is noted, inspect wheel bearing end play, then check ball joint end play. Refer to FSU-14, "Inspection" . ● Make sure that the cotter pin is inserted (4x4). ● Retighten all nuts and bolts to the specified torque. Suspension component torque : Refer to FSU-5, "Components" . SMA525A ● ● Check shock absorber for oil leakage and other damage. Check suspension ball joint for grease leakage and ball joint dust cover for cracks and other damage. SFA392B Front Wheel Alignment EES001CF PRELIMINARY INSPECTION WARNING: Always adjust the alignment with the vehicle on a flat surface. NOTE: If alignment is out of specification, inspect and replace any damaged or worn rear suspension parts before making any adjustments. 1. Check and adjust the wheel alignment with the vehicle under unladen conditions. “Unladen conditions” means that the fuel, coolant, and lubricant are full; and that the spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in their designated positions. 2. Check the tires for incorrect air pressure and excessive wear. 3. Check the wheels for run out and damage. Refer to WT-4, "Inspection" . 4. Check the wheel bearing axial end play. Refer to FAX-5, "WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION" . 5. Check the shock absorbers for leaks or damage. 6. Check each mounting point of the suspension components for any excessive looseness or damage. 7. Check each link, arm, and the rear suspension member for any damage. 8. Check the vehicle height. Refer to FSU-20, "Wheelarch Height (Unladen*1)" . ● For air leveling vehicles, verify the level using Consult-II memory register 1103 and set to 0 ± 10 mm (0 ± 0.39 in) as necessary. Revision: October 2004 FSU-6 2005 Titan ON-VEHICLE SERVICE CAMBER AND CASTER 1. A Measure camber and caster of both the right and left wheels with a suitable alignment gauge and adjust as necessary to specification. Camber B : Refer to FSU-6, "Front Wheel Alignment" . C SRA096A 2. If outside of the specified value, adjust camber and caster using the adjusting bolts in the lower links. CAUTION: After adjusting the camber then check the toe-in. NOTE: Camber changes about 3' (0.11°) minutes with each graduation of one adjusting bolt. Refer to table below for examples of lower link adjusting bolt effect on camber and caster. D FSU F G WEIA0079E H Rear adjusting bolt 1 In 1 Out 1 In 1 Out 0 0 1 In 1 Out Front adjusting bolt 1 Out 1 In 1 In 1 Out 1 In 1 Out 0 0 Camber Degree minute (Decimal degree) 0 (0) 0 (0) 7' (0.11°) -7' (-0.11°) 3' (0.11°) -3' (-0.11°) 3' (0.11°) -3' (-0.11°) J Caster Degree minute (Decimal degree) -14' (-0.11°) 14' (0.11°) 0 (0) 0 (0) 7' (0.11°) -7' (-0.11°) -7' (-0.11°) 7' (0.11°) K 3. I Tighten the adjusting bolt nuts to specification. Refer to FSU-5, "Components" . L TOE-IN WARNING: ● Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface. ● Make sure that no person is in front of the vehicle before pushing it. 1. Bounce the front of vehicle up and down to stabilize the vehicle height (posture). 2. Push the vehicle straight ahead about 5 m (16 ft). 3. Put a mark on base line of the tread (rear side) of both front tires at the same height as hub center as shown. These marks are measuring points. M AFA050 Revision: October 2004 FSU-7 2005 Titan ON-VEHICLE SERVICE 4. 5. 6. Measure the distance “A” on the rear side of the front tires as shown. Push the vehicle slowly ahead to rotate the wheels 180° degrees (1/2 a turn). CAUTION: If the wheels have rotated more than 180° degrees (1/2 turn), start this procedure again from the beginning. Never push the vehicle backward. Measure the distance “B” on the front side of the front tires at the same marks as shown. Total toe-in is calculated as “A” – “B”. SFA234AC Total toe-in 7. a. b. : Refer to FSU-19, "Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)" . Adjust the toe-in by varying the length of the steering outer tierods. Loosen the outer tie-rod lock nuts. Adjust the toe-in by screwing the outer tie-rods in or out. Standard length “L” c. : Refer to PS-35, "Steering Outer Socket and Inner Socket" . Tighten the outer tie-rod lock nuts to specification. Lock nut : Refer to PS-18, "Disassembly and Assembly" . SFA486A FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE NOTE: Check front wheel turning angle after the toe-in inspection. 1. Place front wheels on turning radius gauges in straight ahead position and rear wheels on stands so that vehicle can be level. Check the maximum inner and outer wheel turning angles for LH and RH road wheels. 2. Start engine and run at idle, turn steering wheel all the way right and left, measure the turning angle. Wheel turning angle (full turn) ● – – – : Refer to FSU-19, "Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)" . Any turning angles are not adjustable. If any of steering angles are out of the specification, check if the following parts are worn or damaged. Steering gear Steering column Front suspension components If found that they are worn or damaged, replace them with new ones. Revision: October 2004 FSU-8 SFA439BA 2005 Titan COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER Removal and Installation PFP:56210 A EES001CG REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. Remove the shock absorber lower bolt using power tool. Remove the three shock absorber upper mounting nuts using power tool. Remove the coil spring and shock absorber assembly. ● Turn steering knuckle out to gain enough clearance for removal. B C D FSU LEIA0093E INSTALLATION F Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● The step in the shock absorber assembly lower seat faces outside of vehicle. ● Tighten all nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to FSU-5, "Components" . ● When installing wheel and tire, refer to WT-6, "Rotation" . Disassembly and Assembly G EES001CH DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. H Set the shock absorber in a vise, then loosen (without removing) the piston rod lock nut as shown. CAUTION: Do not remove piston rod lock nut at this time. Compress the spring using commercial service tool until the shock absorber mounting insulator can be turned by hand. WARNING: Make sure that the pawls of the two spring compressors are firmly hooked on the spring. The spring compressors must be tightened alternately and evenly so as not to tilt the spring. I J K SSU002 Remove the piston rod lock nut. ● Discard the piston rod lock nut, use a new nut for assembly. L M SSU003 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Shock Absorber Assembly ● ● ● Check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression and extension. Check for oil leakage on welded or gland packing portions. Check shock absorber for cracks, deformation or other damage and replace if necessary. Mounting Insulator and Rubber Parts Check cemented rubber-to-metal portion for separation or cracks. Check rubber parts for deterioration and replace if necessary. Revision: October 2004 FSU-9 2005 Titan COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER Coil Spring ● ● Check for cracks, deformation or other damage and replace if necessary. Check the free spring height. Front spring free height 4x2 : 334.5 ± 3 mm (13.2 ± 0.1 in) 4x4 : 355.5 ± 3 mm (14.0 ± 0.1 in) ASSEMBLY 1. When installing coil spring on shock absorber, it must be positioned as shown. SFA508A 2. 3. Install upper spring seat as shown in line with lower absorber shock mount and step in lower seat. ● The step in the shock absorber assembly lower seat faces outside of vehicle. Tighten the shock absorber rod lock nut to specification. Refer to FSU-5, "Components" . ● Use a new shock absorber rod lock nut for assembly. WEIA0058E Revision: October 2004 FSU-10 2005 Titan STABILIZER BAR STABILIZER BAR Removal and Installation PFP:54611 A EES001CI REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove engine under cover using power tool. Remove stabilizer bar mounting bracket bolts and connecting rod nuts using power tool, as shown. Remove bushings from stabilizer bar. B C D FSU LEIA0094E INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ● ● F Check stabilizer bar for twist and deformation. Replace if necessary. Check rubber bushing for cracks, wear and deterioration. Replace if necessary. INSTALLATION G Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Tighten all nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to FSU-5, "Components" . H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 FSU-11 2005 Titan UPPER LINK UPPER LINK Removal and Installation PFP:54524 EES001CJ REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. Remove cotter pin and nut from upper link ball joint. Separate upper link ball joint stud from steering knuckle using Tool. ● Support lower link with jack. Tool number 4. : ST29020001 (J-24319-01) Remove fender protector. LEIA0095E 5. Remove upper link mounting bolts and nuts. LEIA0096E INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Upper Link Check for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary. Upper Link Ball Joint Check for distortion and damage. Replace if necessary. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Tighten all nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to FSU-5, "Components" . ● When installing wheel and tire, refer to WT-6, "Rotation" . ● After installation, check that the front wheel alignment is within specification. Refer to FSU-6, "Front Wheel Alignment" . Revision: October 2004 FSU-12 2005 Titan LOWER LINK LOWER LINK Removal and Installation PFP:55020 A EES001CK REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. Remove lower shock absorber bolt. Remove stabilizer bar connecting rod lower nut using power tool, then separate connecting rod from lower link. Refer to FSU-11, "Removal and Installation" . Remove drive shaft, if equipped. Refer to FAX-7, "Removal and Installation" . Remove pinch bolt from steering knuckle using power tool, then separate lower link ball joint from steering knuckle. B C D FSU F LEIA0097E 6. G Remove lower link adjusting bolts and nuts, then the lower link. H I J WEIA0079E INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Lower Link K Check for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary. Lower Link Bushing L Check for distortion and damage. Replace if necessary. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Tighten all nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to FSU-5, "Components" . ● When installing wheel and tire, refer to WT-6, "Rotation" . ● After installation, check that the front wheel alignment is within specification. Refer to FSU-6, "Front Wheel Alignment" . Revision: October 2004 FSU-13 2005 Titan M UPPER BALL JOINT AND LOWER BALL JOINT UPPER BALL JOINT AND LOWER BALL JOINT Removal and Installation PFP:40110 EES001CL The ball joints are part of the upper and lower links. Refer to FSU-12, "Removal and Installation" (upper link), FSU-13, "Removal and Installation" (lower link). Inspection ● ● ● ● EES001CM Check the ball joint for excessive play. Replace the upper or lower link assembly if any of the following exists: Ball joint stud is worn. Ball joint is hard to swing. Ball joint play in axial directions or end play is excessive. SWINGING FORCE NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10 revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in. 1. Measure the ball joint swinging force using a suitable tool. ● Measure at the cotter pin hole for upper ball joint as shown. ● Measure at the groove for lower ball joint as shown. WEIA0076E 2. Verify the ball joint swinging force is within specification. Swinging force “A” Upper ball joint : 8.1–103.2 N (0.8–10.5 kg-f, 1.8–23.2 lb-f) Lower ball joint : 11.4–145.5 N (1.1–14.8 kg-f, 2.5–32.7 lb-f) SFA858A TURNING FORCE NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10 revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in. Turning torque “B” : 0.5 - 6.4 N·m (0.05 - 0.65 kg-m, 4 - 57 in-lb) SFA858A Revision: October 2004 FSU-14 2005 Titan UPPER BALL JOINT AND LOWER BALL JOINT VERTICAL END PLAY A Check dust cover for damage. Replace it and the cover clamp if necessary. NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10 revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in. Vertical end play “C” B : 0 mm (0 in) C D SFA858A FSU F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 FSU-15 2005 Titan KNUCKLE KNUCKLE On-Vehicle Inspection and Service PFP:40014 EES001CN Make sure the mounting conditions (looseness, backlash) of each component and component status (wear, damage) are within specifications. Refer to FSU-20, "Ball Joint" . Removal and Installation EES001CO WDIA0043E 1. Disc rotor 2. Wheel hub and bearing assembly 4. Splash guard 5. Steering knuckle 3. Wheel stud REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle using power tool. Without disassembling the hydraulic lines, remove brake caliper using power tool. Reposition it aside with wire. Refer to BR-24, "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor" . NOTE: Avoid depressing brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. Put alignment marks on disc rotor and wheel hub and bearing assembly, then remove disc rotor. WDIA0044E 4. 5. 6. Remove ABS sensor from steering knuckle. Refer to BRC-39, "Removal and Installation" . CAUTION: Do not pull on ABS sensor harness. On 4X4 models remove cotter pin, then remove lock nut from drive shaft using power tool. Remove steering outer socket cotter pin at steering knuckle, then loosen mounting nut using power tool. Revision: October 2004 FSU-16 2005 Titan KNUCKLE 7. Disconnect steering outer socket from steering knuckle using Tool. Be careful not to damage ball joint boot. CAUTION: To prevent damage to threads and to prevent Tool from coming off suddenly, temporarily tighten mounting nut. A B C SGIA0488E D 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. On 4X4 models, remove drive shaft. Refer to FAX-7, "Removal and Installation" . Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly bolts using power tool. Remove splash guard and wheel hub and bearing assembly from steering knuckle. Support lower link using a suitable jack. Remove cotter pin and nut from upper link ball joint. Separate upper link ball joint from steering knuckle using Tool. Tool number FSU F : ST29020001 (J-24319-01) G H LEIA0095E 14. Remove pinch bolt from steering knuckle using power tool. Then remove steering knuckle from lower link ball joint. I J K L LEIA0097E M INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if necessary. ● Perform ball joint inspection. Refer to FSU-14, "Inspection" . Revision: October 2004 FSU-17 2005 Titan KNUCKLE INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Refer to FSU-5, "Components" for tightening torques. ● When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, align the marks. (When not using the alignment mark, refer to BR-27, "DISC ROTOR INSPECTION" .) ● When installing wheel and tire, refer to WT-6, "Rotation" . WDIA0044E Revision: October 2004 FSU-18 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specifications (Front) Suspension type PFP:00030 A EES001CP Independent double wishbone coil over shock Shock absorber type B Double-acting hydraulic Stabilizer Standard equipment Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1) EES001CQ Drive type Camber Degree minute (Decimal degree) 4x2 4x4 Minimum -0° 52′ (-0.87°) -0° 19′ (-0.32°) Nominal -0° 7′ (-0.12°) 0° 26′ (0.43°) Maximum 0° 38′ (0.63°) 1° 11′ (1.18°) 0° 45′ (0.75°) or less 0° 45′ (0.75°) or less Minimum 2° 31′ (2.52°) 1° 37′ (1.62°) Nominal 3° 16′ (3.27°) 2° 22′ (2.37°) Maximum 4° 1′ (4.02°) 3° 7′ (3.12°) 0° 45′ (0.75°) or less 0° 45′ (0.75°) or less 13° 33′ (13.55°) 13°0′ (13.00°) Cross camber Caster Degree minute (Decimal degree) Cross caster Kingpin inclination (Reference only) Degree minute (Decimal degree) C D FSU F G H I J SFA234AC Minimum 1.8 mm (0.07 in) 1.8 mm (0.07 in) Nominal 2.8 mm (0.11 in) 2.8 mm (0.11 in) Maximum 3.8 mm (0.15 in) 3.8 mm (0.15 in) Minimum 0° 3′ (0.05°) 0° 3′ (0.05°) Nominal 0° 5′ (0.08°) 0° 5′ (0.08°) Maximum 0° 7′ (0.12°) 0° 7′ (0.12°) Inside Degree minute (Decimal degree) 34° 30′ – 38° 30′ *2 (34.50° – 38.50°) 34° 56′ – 38° 56′ *4 (34.93° – 38.93°) Outside Degree minute (Decimal degree) 30° 58′ – 34° 58′ *3 (30.97° – 34.97°) 31° 01′ – 35° 01′ *5 (31.02° – 35.02°) Distance (A − B) Total toe-in Angle (left plus right) Degree minute (Decimal degree) Wheel turning angle (full turn) *1: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. *2: Target value 37° 30′ (37.50°) *3: Target value 33° 58′ (33.97°) *4: Target value 37° 56′ (37.93°) *5: Target value 34° 01′ (34.02°) Revision: October 2004 FSU-19 2005 Titan K L M SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Ball Joint EES001CR SFA858A WEIA0076E Swinging force “A” Upper ball joint 8.1 – 103.2 N (0.8 – 10.5 kg-f, 1.8 – 23.2 lb-f) *1 Lower ball joint 11.4 – 145.5 N (1.1 – 14.8 kg-f, 2.5 – 32.7 lb-f) *2 Turning torque “B” 0.5 - 6.4 N·m (0.05 - 0.65 kg-m, 4 - 57 in-lb) Vertical end play “C” 0 mm (0 in) *1 Measure at cotter pin hole *2 Measure at groove Wheelarch Height (Unladen*1) EES001CS Unit: mm (in) LEIA0085E Drive type 4X2 Body Front wheelarch height (Hf) Rear wheelarch height (Hr) 4X4 King Cab Crew Cab King Cab Crew Cab 265/70R18 913 (35.9) 916 (36.1) 952 (37.5) *2 955 (37.6) *2 285/70R17 914 (36.0) 917 (36.1) 953 (37.5) *2 956 (37.6) *2 245/75R17 904 (35.6) 907 (35.7) 941 (37.0) 944 (37.2) 265/70R18 955 (37.6) 956 (37.6) 995 (39.2) *2 996 (39.2) *2 285/70R17 956 (37.6) 957 (37.7) 996 (39.2) *2 997 (39.3) *2 245/75R17 946 (37.2) 947 (37.3) 984 (38.7) 985 (38.8) *1: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. *2: Includes when equipped with tow package. Revision: October 2004 FSU-20 2005 Titan QUICK REFERENCE INDEX Edition: October 2004 Revision: October 2004 Publication No. SM5E-1A60U0 A GENERAL INFORMATION GI General Information B ENGINE EM Engine Mechanical LU Engine Lubrication System CO Engine Cooling System EC Engine Control System FL Fuel System EX Exhaust System ACC Accelerator Control System TRANSMISSION/ TRANSAXLE AT Automatic Transmission D DRIVELINE/AXLE TF Transfer PR Propeller Shaft FFD Front Final Drive RFD Rear Final Drive FAX Front Axle RAX Rear Axle FSU Front Suspension RSU Rear Suspension WT Road Wheels & Tires BR Brake System PB Parking Brake System BRC Brake Control System C E SUSPENSION F BRAKES G STEERING PS Power Steering System H RESTRAINTS SB Seat Belts SRS I BODY J AIR CONDITIONER K ELECTRICAL Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) BL Body, Lock & Security System GW Glasses, Window System & Mirrors RF Roof EI Exterior & Interior IP Instrument Panel SE Seat AP Adjustable Pedal MTC Manual Air Conditioner SC Starting & Charging System LT Lighting System DI Driver Information System WW Wiper, Washer & Horn BCS Body Control System LAN LAN System AV ACS Audio Visual, Navigation & Telephone System Auto Cruise Control System PG Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements L MAINTENANCE MA Maintenance M INDEX IDX Alphabetical Index © 2004 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC. All rights reserved. No part of this Service Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photo-copying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan North America, Inc., Gardena, California. -1 A B C D E F G H I J K L M This manual contains maintenance and repair procedures for the 2005 NISSAN TITAN. In order to assure your safety and the efficient functioning of the vehicle, this manual should be read thoroughly. It is especially important that the PRECAUTIONS in the GI section be completely understood before starting any repair task. All information in this manual is based on the latest product information at the time of publication. The right is reserved to make changes in specifications and methods at any time without notice. IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE The proper performance of service is essential for both the safety of the technician and the efficient functioning of the vehicle. The service methods in this Service Manual are described in such a manner that the service may be performed safely and accurately. Service varies with the procedures used, the skills of the technician and the tools and parts available. Accordingly, anyone using service procedures, tools or parts which are not specifically recommended by NISSAN must first be completely satisfied that neither personal safety nor the vehicle’s safety will be jeopardized by the service method selected. -2 PLEASE HELP MAKE THIS SERVICE MANUAL BETTER! Your comments are important to NISSAN and will help us to improve our Service Manuals. Use this form to report any issues or comments you may have regarding our Service Manuals. Please print this form and type or write your comments below. Mail or fax to: Nissan North America, Inc. Technical Service Information 39001 Sunrise Drive, P.O. Box 9200 Farmington Hills, MI USA 48331 FAX: (248) 488-3910 SERVICE MANUAL: Model: Year: PUBLICATION NO. (Please photocopy back cover): VEHICLE INFORMATION VIN: Production Date: Please describe any issues or problems in detail: Note: Please include a copy of each page, marked with your comments. Page number(s) Are the trouble diagnosis procedures logical and easy to use? (circle your answer) YES NO Note: Please include a copy of each page, marked with your comments. If no, what page number(s)? Please describe the issue or problem in detail: Is the organization of the manual clear and easy to follow? (circle your answer) YES NO Please comment: What information should be included in NISSAN Service Manuals to better support you in servicing or repairing customer vehicles? DATE: DEALER: CITY: YOUR NAME: DEALER NO.: STATE/PROV./COUNTRY: POSITION: ADDRESS: ZIP/POSTAL CODE: QUICK REFERENCE CHART TITAN 2005 QUICK REFERENCE CHART TITAN Engine Tune-Up Data PFP:00000 ELS000YK Engine Specifications Cylinder arrangement V-8 Displacement 5,552 Bore and stroke cm3 (338.80 in3 ) 98 x 92 mm (3.86 x 3.62 in) Valve arrangement DOHC Firing order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2 Compression Number of piston rings 2 Oil 1 Number of main bearings 5 Compression ratio 9.8:1 Compression pressure Standard 1,520 kPa (15.5 kg/cm2 , 220 psi) / 200 rpm Minimum 1,324 kPa (13.5 kg/cm2 , 192 psi) / 200 rpm Differential limit between cylinders 98 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2 , 14 psi) / 300 rpm Cylinder number SEM957C Valve timing PBIC0187E Unit: degree a b c d e f 232° 230° 2° 48° 3° 49° Drive Belt Deflection and Tension Tension of drive belts Auto adjustment by auto tensioner Make Model NGK Standard model FFV model Standard type PLFR5A-11 PLFR5A-11D Hot type PLFR4A-11 PLFR4A-11D Cold type PLFR6A-11 PLFR6A-11D Gap (nominal) 1.1 mm (0.043 in) QUICK REFERENCE CHART TITAN 2005 Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1 ) ELS0012F Drive type Camber Degree minute (Decimal degree) 4x2 4x4 Minimum -0° 52′ (-0.87°) -0° 19′ (-0.32°) Nominal -0° 7′ (-0.12°) 0° 26′ (0.43°) Maximum 0° 38′ (0.63°) 1° 11′ (1.18°) 0° 45′ (0.75°) or less 0° 45′ (0.75°) or less Minimum 2° 31′ (2.52°) 1° 37′ (1.62°) Nominal 3° 16′ (3.27°) 2° 22′ (2.37°) Maximum 4° 1′ (4.02°) 3° 7′ (3.12°) 0° 45′ (0.75°) or less 0° 45′ (0.75°) or less 13° 33′ (13.55°) 13°0′ (13.00°) Minimum 1.8 mm (0.07 in) 1.8 mm (0.07 in) Nominal 2.8 mm (0.11 in) 2.8 mm (0.11 in) Maximum 3.8 mm (0.15 in) 3.8 mm (0.15 in) Minimum 0° 3′ (0.05°) 0° 3′ (0.05°) Nominal 0° 5′ (0.08°) 0° 5′ (0.08°) Maximum 0° 7′ (0.12°) Cross camber Caster Degree minute (Decimal degree) Cross caster Kingpin inclination (Reference only) Degree minute (Decimal degree) SFA234AC Distance (A − B) Total toe-in Angle (left plus right) Degree minute (Decimal degree) Wheel turning angle (full turn) 0° 7′ (0.12°) Inside Degree minute (Decimal degree) 34° 30′ – 38° 30′ * (34.50° – 38.50°) 2 34° 56′ – 38° 56′ *4 (34.93° – 38.93°) Outside Degree minute (Decimal degree) 30° 58′ – 34° 58′ *3 (30.97° – 34.97°) 31° 01′ – 35° 01′ *5 (31.02° – 35.02°) *1: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. *2: Target value 37° 30′ (37.50°) *3: Target value 33° 58′ (33.97°) *4: Target value 37° 56′ (37.93°) *5: Target value 34° 01′ (34.02°) Brake ELS000ZT Unit: mm (in) Front brake Brake model Rotor outer diameter × thickness Pad Length × width × thickness Rear brake 320 × 26 (12.60 × 1.02) 111.0 × 73.5 × 9.5 (4.73 × 2.894 × 0.374) Cylinder bore diameter 51 (2.01) Brake model AD14VE Rotor outer diameter × thickness Pad Length × width × thickness Cylinder bore diameter Control valve CLZ31VC Valve model 320 × 14 (12.60 × 0.55) 83.0 × 33.0 × 8.5 (3.268 × 1.299 × 0.335) 48 (1.89) Electric brake force distribution QUICK REFERENCE CHART TITAN 2005 Brake booster Booster model C215T Diaphragm diameter 215 (8.46) Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116) Recommended brake fluid Disc Brake - Repair Limits ELS000ZU Unit: mm (in) Brake model Brake Pad Disc rotor CLZ31VC (Front) AD14VE (Rear) Repair limit thickness 1.0 (0.039) 1.0 (0.039) Repair limit thickness 24.5 (0.965) 12.0 (0.472) Maximum uneven wear (measured at 8 positions) 0.015 (0.0006) 0.015 (0.0006) Runout limit (with it attached to the vehicle) 0.04 (0.0016) 0.05 (0.0020) Brake Pedal ELS000ZV Unit: mm (in) 182.3 − 192.3 (7.18 − 7.57) Brake pedal height (from dash panel top surface) Depressed pedal height [under a force of 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb) with engine running] More than 90.3 (3.55) 0.74 − 1.96 (0.029 − 0.077) Clearance between stopper rubber and the threaded end of stop lamp switch 3 − 11 (0.12 − 0.43) Pedal play Parking Drum Brake ELS00111 Unit: mm (in) Type Drum 3.79 ± 0.21 (0.149 ± 0.008) Standard thickness (new) Brake lining Wear limit thickness 0.5 (0.020) 205 ± 0.13 (8.07 ± 0.01) Standard inner diameter (new) Drum inner diameter (disc) Wear limit of inner diameter 205.7 (8.10) Refill Capacities ELS000YO Capacity (Approximate) Description Metric US measure Imp measure 105.8 28 gal 23 1/4 gal With oil filter change 6.2 6 1/2 qt 5 1/2 qt Without oil filter change 5.9 6 1/4 qt 5 1/4 qt Dry engine (engine overhaul) 7.6 8 qt 6 3/4 qt Cooling system with reservoir at MAX level 12.2 3 1/4 gal 2 5/8 gal Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) 10.6 11 1/4 qt 9 3/8 qt Rear final drive oil 2.01 4 1/4 pt 3 1/2 pt Transfer fluid 2.0 2 1/8 qt 1 3/4 qt Front final drive oil 1.6 3 3/8 pt 2 7/8 pt Power steering fluid (PSF) 1.0 2 1/8 pt 1 3/4 pt Windshield washer fluid 4.5 1 1/4 gal 1 gal 1.54 ± 0.11 lb 1.54 ± 0.11 lb 6.8 fl oz 7.0 fl oz Fuel Engine oil Drain and refill Air conditioning system refrigerant Air conditioning system lubricants 0.70 ± 0.05 kg 200 m A GENERAL INFORMATION GI B SECTION GENERAL INFORMATION C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3 Description ............................................................... 3 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3 General Precautions ................................................ 3 Precautions for Three Way Catalyst ......................... 5 Precautions for Fuel (Unleaded Regular Gasoline Recommended) ........................................................ 5 Precautions for Multiport Fuel Injection System or Engine Control System ............................................ 5 Precautions for Hoses .............................................. 5 HOSE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 5 HOSE CLAMPING ................................................ 6 Precautions for Engine Oils ...................................... 6 HEALTH PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS ............. 6 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS ................................................................... 7 Precautions for Air Conditioning ............................... 7 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ................................... 8 Description ............................................................... 8 Terms ....................................................................... 8 Units ......................................................................... 8 Contents ................................................................... 8 Components ............................................................. 8 SYMBOLS ............................................................. 9 How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses ............................ 9 DESCRIPTION .................................................... 10 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES ................................................11 HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION ........................................11 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES ............................... 13 How to Read Wiring Diagrams ............................... 14 CONNECTOR SYMBOLS ................................... 14 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL - ......... 16 DESCRIPTION .................................................... 17 Abbreviations ......................................................... 22 SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCI- Revision: October 2004 DENT ......................................................................... 24 How to Check Terminal ........................................... 24 CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT ............ 24 HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS ...................... 24 How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident ................................................................... 27 WORK FLOW ...................................................... 27 INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS ........................ 27 CIRCUIT INSPECTION ....................................... 30 Control Units and Electrical Parts ........................... 35 PRECAUTIONS .................................................. 35 SMJ INSTALLATION ........................................... 36 CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM .......................... 37 Description .............................................................. 37 Function and System Application ........................... 37 Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement ............ 37 Checking Equipment .............................................. 37 CONSULT-II Start Procedure .................................. 38 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit ... 38 INSPECTION PROCEDURE .............................. 38 LIFTING POINT ......................................................... 40 Pantograph Jack ..................................................... 40 Garage Jack and Safety Stand ............................... 40 2-Pole Lift ............................................................... 41 TOW TRUCK TOWING ............................................. 42 Tow Truck Towing ................................................... 42 4X2 MODEL ........................................................ 42 4X4 MODEL ........................................................ 43 Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle) ............ 43 TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS ... 44 Tightening Torque Table ......................................... 44 RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS ............................................................... 45 Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants... 45 IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION ............................ 46 Model Variation ....................................................... 46 Identification Number .............................................. 48 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ARRANGEMENT ................................................ 48 ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER ................................ 49 GI-1 2005 Titan F G H I J K L M TRANSFER SERIAL NUMBER ........................... 49 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER ........... 49 Dimensions ............................................................. 50 Wheels & Tires ....................................................... 50 Revision: October 2004 TERMINOLOGY ........................................................51 SAE J1930 Terminology List ...................................51 GI-2 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS Description PFP:00001 GI EAS001D1 Observe the following precautions to ensure safe and proper servicing. These precautions are not described in each individual section. Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” B EAS001D2 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. General Precautions ● ● Do not operate the engine for an extended period of time without proper exhaust ventilation. Keep the work area well ventilated and free of any inflammable materials. Special care should be taken when handling any inflammable or poisonous materials, such as gasoline, refrigerant gas, etc. When working in a pit or other enclosed area, be sure to properly ventilate the area before working with hazardous materials. Do not smoke while working on the vehicle. E F G H I J K Before jacking up the vehicle, apply wheel chocks or other tire blocks to the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. After jacking up the vehicle, support the vehicle weight with safety stands at the points designated for proper lifting before working on the vehicle. These operations should be done on a level surface. When removing a heavy component such as the engine or transaxle/transmission, be careful not to lose your balance and drop them. Also, do not allow them to strike adjacent parts, especially the brake tubes and master cylinder. GI-3 L M SGI231 Revision: October 2004 D EAS001D3 SGI285 ● C 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS ● ● Before starting repairs which do not require battery power: Turn off ignition switch. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. If the battery terminals are disconnected, recorded memory of radio and each control unit is erased. SEF289H ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● To prevent serious burns: Avoid contact with hot metal parts. Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Dispose of drained oil or the solvent used for cleaning parts in an appropriate manner. Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire. Clean all disassembled parts in the designated liquid or solvent SGI233 prior to inspection or assembly. Replace oil seals, gaskets, packings, O-rings, locking washers, cotter pins, self-locking nuts, etc. with new ones. Replace inner and outer races of tapered roller bearings and needle bearings as a set. Arrange the disassembled parts in accordance with their assembled locations and sequence. Do not touch the terminals of electrical components which use microcomputers (such as ECM). Static electricity may damage internal electronic components. After disconnecting vacuum or air hoses, attach a tag to indicate the proper connection. Use only the fluids and lubricants specified in this manual. Use approved bonding agent, sealants or their equivalents when required. Use hand tools, power tools (disassembly only) and recommended special tools where specified for safe and efficient service repairs. When repairing the fuel, oil, water, vacuum or exhaust systems, check all affected lines for leaks. PBIC0190E ● Before servicing the vehicle: Protect fenders, upholstery and carpeting with appropriate covers. Take caution that keys, buckles or buttons do not scratch paint. SGI234 Revision: October 2004 GI-4 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS WARNING: To prevent ECM from storing the diagnostic trouble codes, do not carelessly disconnect the harness GI connectors which are related to the engine control system and TCM (transmission control module) system. The connectors should be disconnected only when working according to the WORK FLOW of TROUBLE DIAGNOSES in EC and AT sections. B Precautions for Three Way Catalyst EAS001D4 If a large amount of unburned fuel flows into the catalyst, the catalyst temperature will be excessively high. To prevent this, follow the instructions. ● Use unleaded gasoline only. Leaded gasoline will seriously damage the three way catalyst. ● When checking for ignition spark or measuring engine compression, make tests quickly and only when necessary. ● Do not run engine when the fuel tank level is low, otherwise the engine may misfire, causing damage to the catalyst. Do not place the vehicle on flammable material. Keep flammable material off the exhaust pipe and the three way catalyst. Precautions for Fuel (Unleaded Regular Gasoline Recommended) EAS001D5 C D E F Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91). G CAUTION: Do not use leaded gasoline. Using leaded gasoline will damage the three way catalyst. Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control devices and systems, and could also affect the warranty coverage validity. Precautions for Multiport Fuel Injection System or Engine Control System ● ● ● EAS001D6 I Before connecting or disconnecting any harness connector for the multiport fuel injection system or ECM: Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position. Disconnect negative battery terminal. Otherwise, there may be damage to ECM. Before disconnecting pressurized fuel line from fuel pump to injectors, be sure to release fuel pressure. Be careful not to jar components such as ECM and mass air flow sensor. J K SGI787 Precautions for Hoses M To prevent damage to rubber hose, do not pry off rubber hose with tapered tool or screwdriver. SMA019D Revision: October 2004 L EAS001D7 HOSE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ● H GI-5 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS ● To reinstall the rubber hose securely, make sure of hose insertion length and clamp orientation. (If tube is equipped with hose stopper, insert rubber hose into tube until it butts up against hose stopper.) SMA020D HOSE CLAMPING ● If old rubber hose is re-used, install hose clamp in its original position (at the indentation where the old clamp was). If there is a trace of tube bulging left on the old rubber hose, align rubber hose at that position. SMA021D ● ● Discard old clamps; replace with new ones. After installing leaf spring clamps, apply force to them in the direction of the arrow, tightening rubber hose equally all around. SMA022D Precautions for Engine Oils EAS001D8 Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. HEALTH PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Avoid prolonged and repeated contact with oils, particularly used engine oils. Wear protective clothing, including impervious gloves where practicable. Do not put oily rags in pockets. Avoid contaminating clothes, particularly underpants, with oil. Heavily soiled clothing and oil-impregnated footwear should not be worn. Overalls must be cleaned regularly. First aid treatment should be obtained immediately for open cuts and wounds. Use barrier creams, applying them before each work period, to help the removal of oil from the skin. Wash with soap and water to ensure all oil is removed (skin cleansers and nail brushes will help). Preparations containing lanolin replace the natural skin oils which have been removed. Do not use gasoline, kerosene, diesel fuel, gas oil, thinners or solvents for cleaning skin. If skin disorders develop, obtain medical advice without delay. Where practical, degrease components prior to handling. Revision: October 2004 GI-6 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS ● Where there is a risk of eye contact, eye protection should be worn, for example, chemical goggles or face shields; in addition an eye wash facility should be provided. GI ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS Dispose of used oil and used oil filters through authorized waste disposal contractors to licensed waste disposal sites, or to the waste oil reclamation trade. If in doubt, contact the local authority for advice on disposal facilities. It is illegal to pour used oil on to the ground, down sewers or drains, or into water sources. The regulations concerning pollution vary between regions. Precautions for Air Conditioning B C EAS001D9 Use an approved refrigerant recovery unit any time the air conditioning system must be discharged. Refer to MTC-112, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" for specific instructions. D E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 GI-7 2005 Titan HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Description PFP:00008 EAS001DA This volume explains “Removal, Disassembly, Installation, Inspection and Adjustment” and “Trouble Diagnoses”. Terms ● EAS001DB The captions WARNING and CAUTION warn you of steps that must be followed to prevent personal injury and/or damage to some part of the vehicle. WARNING indicates the possibility of personal injury if instructions are not followed. CAUTION indicates the possibility of component damage if instructions are not followed. BOLD TYPED STATEMENTS except WARNING and CAUTION give you helpful information. Standard value: Tolerance at inspection and adjustment. Limit value: The maximum or minimum limit value that should not be exceeded at inspection and adjustment. Units ● EAS001DC The UNITS given in this manual are primarily expressed as the SI UNIT (International System of Unit), and alternatively expressed in the metric system and in the yard/pound system. “Example” Outer Socket Lock Nut : 59 - 78 N-m (6.0 - 8.0 kg-m, 43 - 58 ft-lb) Contents EAS001DD ● ALPHABETICAL INDEX is provided at the end of this manual so that you can rapidly find the item and page you are searching for. ● A QUICK REFERENCE INDEX, a black tab (e.g. ) is provided on the first page. You can quickly find the first page of each section by matching it to the section's black tab. THE CONTENTS are listed on the first page of each section. THE TITLE is indicated on the upper portion of each page and shows the part or system. THE PAGE NUMBER of each section consists of two or three letters which designate the particular section and a number (e.g. “BR-5”). THE SMALL ILLUSTRATIONS show the important steps such as inspection, use of special tools, knacks of work and hidden or tricky steps which are not shown in the previous large illustrations. Assembly, inspection and adjustment procedures for the complicated units such as the automatic transaxle or transmission, etc. are presented in a step-by-step format where necessary. ● ● ● ● Components ● EAS001DE THE LARGE ILLUSTRATIONS are exploded views (See the following) and contain tightening torques, lubrication points, section number of the PARTS CATALOG (e.g. SEC. 440) and other information necessary to perform repairs. The illustrations should be used in reference to service matters only. When ordering parts, refer to the appropriate PARTS CATALOG . Revision: October 2004 GI-8 2005 Titan HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Components shown in an illustration may be identified by a circled number. When this style of illustration is used, the text description of the components will follow the illustration. GI B C D E F G H I SAIA0399E SYMBOLS SYMBOL J DESCRIPTION Tightening torque The tightening torque specifications of bolts and nuts may be presented as either a range or a standard tightening torque. K Should be lubricated with grease. Unless otherwise indicated, use recommended multi-purpose grease. L Should be lubricated with oil. Sealing point M Checking point Always replace after every disassembly. Apply petroleum jelly. P Apply ATF. Select with proper thickness. Adjustment is required. How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses EAS001DF NOTICE: Trouble diagnoses indicates work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnoses, read the “Preliminary Check”, the “Symptom Chart” or the “Work Flow”. Revision: October 2004 GI-9 2005 Titan HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in EL section for identification of harness connectors. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. DESCRIPTION NOTICE: Trouble diagnoses indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following instructions before diagnosing. 1. Before performing trouble diagnoses, read the “Preliminary Check”, the “Symptom Chart” or the “Work Flow”. 2. After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated. 3. Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for identification/location of components and harness connectors. 4. Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check. If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in PG section for identification of harness connectors. 5. When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF. 6. Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage. 7. After accomplishing the Diagnostic Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all harness connectors are reconnected as they were. Revision: October 2004 GI-10 2005 Titan HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES GI B C D E F G H I J SAIA0256E 1. 2. Work and diagnostic procedure Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups. Questions and required results Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as follows: K L a. Battery voltage → 11 - 14V or approximately 12V b. Voltage : Approximately 0V → Less than 1V 3. 4. Symbol used in illustration Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in GI Section and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES" below. Action items Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is shown in the left upper portion of each test group. HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication. Revision: October 2004 GI-11 2005 Titan M HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration ● ● ● Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color. Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors. Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors. AGI070 Revision: October 2004 GI-12 2005 Titan HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text GI B C D E F G H SGI144A I KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES Symbol Symbol explanation Symbol Check after disconnecting the connector to be measured. Symbol explanation J Procedure with Generic Scan Tool (GST, OBD-II scan tool) K Check after connecting the connector to be measured. Procedure without CONSULT-II or GST L Insert key into ignition switch. A/C switch is OFF. M Revision: October 2004 Remove key from ignition switch. A/C switch is ON. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. REC switch is ON. Turn ignition switch to ON position. REC switch is OFF. Turn ignition switch to “START” position. DEF switch is ON. GI-13 2005 Titan HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Symbol Symbol explanation Symbol Symbol explanation Turn ignition switch from OFF to ACC position. VENT switch is ON. Turn ignition switch from ACC to OFF position. Fan switch is ON. (At any position except for OFF position) Turn ignition switch from OFF to ON position. Fan switch is OFF. Turn ignition switch from ON to OFF position. Apply positive voltage from battery with fuse directly to components. Do not start engine, or check with engine stopped. Drive vehicle. Start engine, or check with engine running. Disconnect battery negative cable. Apply parking brake. Depress brake pedal. Release parking brake. Release brake pedal. Check after engine is warmed up sufficiently. Depress accelerator pedal. Voltage should be measured with a voltmeter. Release accelerator pedal. Circuit resistance should be measured with an ohmmeter. Pin terminal check for SMJ type ECM and TCM connectors. For details regarding the terminal arrangement, refer to PG-72, "ELECTRICAL UNITS" . Current should be measured with an ammeter. Procedure with CONSULT-II Procedure without CONSULT-II How to Read Wiring Diagrams EAS001KK CONNECTOR SYMBOLS Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Revision: October 2004 GI-14 2005 Titan HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ● ● ● Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the direction mark. Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by the direction mark. Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG section, “Description”, “HARNESS CONNECTOR”. GI B C D E F G SAIA0257E ● Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. H I J K L M SGI363 Revision: October 2004 GI-15 2005 Titan HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL ● For detail, refer to following “DESCRIPTION”. SGI091A Revision: October 2004 GI-16 2005 Titan HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Optional Splice GI B C D E F G H SGI942 I DESCRIPTION Number 1 2 Item Power condition Fusible link 3 Fusible link/fuse location 4 Fuse 5 6 Current rating Connectors J Description ● This shows the condition when the system receives battery positive voltage (can be operated). ● The double line shows that this is a fusible link. ● The open circle shows current flow in, and the shaded circle shows current flow out. ● This shows the location of the fusible link or fuse in the fusible link or fuse box. For arrangement, refer to PG section, POWER SUPPLY ROUTING. ● The single line shows that this is a fuse. ● The open circle shows current flow in, and the shaded circle shows current flow out. ● This shows the current rating of the fusible link or fuse. ● This shows that connector E3 is female and connector M1 is male. ● The G/R wire is located in the 1A terminal of both connectors. ● Terminal number with an alphabet (1A, 5B, etc.) indicates that the connector is SMJ connector. Refer to PG section, SMJ (SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION). 7 Optional splice ● The open circle shows that the splice is optional depending on vehicle application. 8 Splice ● The shaded circle shows that the splice is always on the vehicle. 9 Page crossing ● This arrow shows that the circuit continues to an adjacent page. ● The A will match with the A on the preceding or next page. 10 Common connector ● The dotted lines between terminals show that these terminals are part of the same connector. 11 Option abbreviation ● This shows that the circuit is optional depending on vehicle application. 12 Relay ● This shows an internal representation of the relay. For details, refer to PG section, STANDARDIZED RELAY. 13 Connectors ● This shows that the connector is connected to the body or a terminal with bolt or nut. Revision: October 2004 GI-17 2005 Titan K L M HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Number Item Description ● 14 Wire color This shows a code for the color of the wire. BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (Violet) = Purple GY or GR = Gray SB = Sky Blue CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as shown below: Example: L/W = Blue with White Stripe 15 Option description 16 Switch 17 Assembly parts 18 Cell code 19 ● This shows a description of the option abbreviation used on the page. ● This shows that continuity exists between terminals 1 and 2 when the switch is in the A position. Continuity exists between terminals 1 and 3 when the switch is in the B position. ● Connector terminal in component shows that it is a harness incorporated assembly. ● This identifies each page of the wiring diagram by section, system and wiring diagram page number. ● Arrow indicates electric current flow, especially where the direction of standard flow (vertically downward or horizontally from left to right) is difficult to follow. ● A double arrow “ cuit operation. ● This shows that the system branches to another system identified by cell code (section and system). Current flow arrow ” shows that current can flow in either direction depending on cir- 20 System branch ● This arrow shows that the circuit continues to another page identified by cell code. 21 Page crossing ● The C will match with the C on another page within the system other than the next or preceding pages. 22 Shielded line ● The line enclosed by broken line circle shows shield wire. 23 Component box in wave line ● This shows that another part of the component is also shown on another page (indicated by wave line) within the system. 24 Component name ● This shows the name of a component. ● This shows the connector number. ● The letter shows which harness the connector is located in. ● Example: M : main harness. For detail and to locate the connector, refer to PG section "Main Harness", “Harness Layout”. A coordinate grid is included for complex harnesses to aid in locating connectors. ● The line spliced and grounded under wire color shows that ground line is spliced at the grounded connector. ● This shows the ground connection. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution" in PG section. ● This area shows the connector faces of the components in the wiring diagram on the page. ● Connectors enclosed in broken line show that these connectors belong to the same component. ● This shows a code for the color of the connector. For code meaning, refer to wire color codes, Number 14 of this chart. ● This shows the arrangement of fusible link(s) and fuse(s), used for connector views of "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" in PG section. The open square shows current flow in, and the shaded square shows current flow out. ● This shows that more information on the Super Multiple Junction (SMJ) and Joint Connectors (J/C) exists on the PG section. Refer to "Reference Area" for details. 25 Connector number 26 Ground (GND) 27 Ground (GND) 28 Connector views 29 Common component 30 Connector color 31 Fusible link and fuse box 32 Reference area Revision: October 2004 GI-18 2005 Titan HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Harness Indication ● ● GI Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color. Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors. B C D E F G AGI070 H Component Indication Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors. Switch Positions I Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the “normal” condition. A vehicle is in the “normal” condition when: ● ignition switch is “OFF”, ● doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed, ● pedals are not depressed, and ● parking brake is released. J K L M SGI860 Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used. Revision: October 2004 GI-19 2005 Titan HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ● ● A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a “detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)”. A “detectable line for DTC” is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a “non-detectable line for DTC”. A “non-detectable line for DTC” is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic system. SGI862-B Multiple Switch The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. ● The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams. Revision: October 2004 GI-20 2005 Titan HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ● The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams. GI B C D E F G H I J SGI875 K L M Revision: October 2004 GI-21 2005 Titan HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Reference Area The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference pages at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area. SGI092A Abbreviations EAS001DH The following ABBREVIATIONS are used: ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION A/C Air Conditioner A/T Automatic Transaxle/Transmission ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid D1 Drive range 1st gear D2 Drive range 2nd gear Revision: October 2004 GI-22 2005 Titan HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION D3 Drive range 3rd gear D4 Drive range 4th gear FR, RR Front, Rear LH, RH Left-Hand, Right-Hand GI B M/T Manual Transaxle/Transmission OD Overdrive P/S Power Steering SAE Society of Automotive Engineers, Inc. SDS Service Data and Specifications SST Special Service Tools 2WD 2-Wheel Drive 22 2nd range 2nd gear 21 2nd range 1st gear 12 1st range 2nd gear 11 1st range 1st gear C D E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 GI-23 2005 Titan SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Check Terminal PFP:00000 EAS001DI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals. The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/ INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name (J38751-95NI) Connector and terminal pin kit (NISSAN) (J38751-95INF) Connector and terminal pin kit (INFINITI) (J42992-98KIT) OBD and terminal repair kit (J42992-2000UPD) OBD-II Connector Kit Update Description WAIA0004E WAIA0005E HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks. The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a “T” pin. For the best contact grasp the “T” pin using an alligator clip. Probing from Harness Side Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with “T” pin. ● If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing the terminal. ● Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and connector may result. SGI841 Probing from Terminal Side FEMALE TERMINAL ● There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the “T” pin through the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal. SEL265V Revision: October 2004 GI-24 2005 Titan SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT ● Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing. GI B C SEL266V D MALE TERMINAL Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a “T” pin. Do not bend terminal. E F G SEL267V How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal H An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal. 1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire. Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal. 2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up. I J K L SEL270V 3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female terminal. Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands. M SEL271V Revision: October 2004 GI-25 2005 Titan SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT 4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not. SEL272V ● If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal. SEL273V Waterproof Connector Inspection If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems. Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics. RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION ● Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications. ● The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female connector. SEL275V WIRE SEAL INSPECTION The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly. Terminal Lock Inspection Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit. SEL330V Revision: October 2004 GI-26 2005 Titan SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident EAS001DJ GI WORK FLOW B C D E F SGI838 STEP DESCRIPTION Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident occurred. The following are key pieces of information required to make a good analysis: STEP 1 STEP 2 WHAT Vehicle Model, Engine, Transmission/Transaxle and the System (i.e. Radio). WHEN Date, Time of Day, Weather Conditions, Frequency. WHERE Road Conditions, Altitude and Traffic Situation. HOW System Symptoms, Operating Conditions (Other Components Interaction). Service History and if any After Market Accessories have been installed. H I J Operate the system, road test if necessary. Verify the parameter of the incident. If the problem cannot be duplicated, refer to “Incident Simulation Tests”. K Get the proper diagnosis materials together including: STEP 3 G ● Power Supply Routing ● System Operation Descriptions ● Applicable Service Manual Sections ● Check for any Service Bulletins L Identify where to begin diagnosis based upon your knowledge of the system operation and the customer comments. STEP 4 Inspect the system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage. Determine which circuits and components are involved and diagnose using the Power Supply Routing and Harness Layouts. STEP 5 Repair or replace the incident circuit or component. STEP 6 Operate the system in all modes. Verify the system works properly under all conditions. Make sure you have not inadvertently created a new incident during your diagnosis or repair steps. INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS Introduction Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The following section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an electrical incident. The section is broken into the six following topics: ● Vehicle vibration ● Heat sensitive Revision: October 2004 GI-27 2005 Titan M SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Freezing ● Water intrusion ● Electrical load ● Cold or hot start up Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the problem. ● Vehicle Vibration The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration. CONNECTORS & HARNESS Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection. HINT Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system. SENSORS & RELAYS Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay. SGI839 ENGINE COMPARTMENT There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the things to check for are: ● Connectors not fully seated. ● Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking. ● Wires laying across brackets or moving components. ● Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires. ● Wires routed too close to hot components. To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity. BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw. UNDER SEATING AREAS Revision: October 2004 GI-28 2005 Titan SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or GI pinching. Heat Sensitive B The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition. To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or equivalent. Do not heat components above 60°C (140°F). If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly insulate the component. C D SGI842 E Freezing The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system. There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical components which could be affected. The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or replace the component. F G H SGI843 I Water Intrusion The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car or running it through a car wash. Do not spray water directly on any electrical components. J K L SGI844 Electrical Load The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on. SGI845 Cold or Hot Start Up On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis. Revision: October 2004 GI-29 2005 Titan M SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT CIRCUIT INSPECTION Introduction In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method. Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow the correct test procedure. You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring harness or electrical component to do this. OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit. There are two types of shorts. SHORT ● SHORT CIRCUIT When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to change. ● SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit. NOTE: Refer to “How to Check Terminal” to probe or check terminal. Testing for “Opens” in the Circuit Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system. SGI846-A CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level. To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic. ● Disconnect the battery negative cable. ● Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example) ● Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side. ● Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A) ● Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B) ● Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C) Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic. In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function. Revision: October 2004 GI-30 2005 Titan SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground. ● Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. ● With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). ● Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B). ● Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C). Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example. ● GI B C D Testing for “Shorts” in the Circuit E To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic. F G H SGI847-A RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD ● Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse. ● Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. ● Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known good ground. ● With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. ● Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. ● Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps. VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse. ● Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). ● With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1. ● With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). ● Revision: October 2004 GI-31 2005 Titan I J K L M SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT ● no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block. Ground Inspection Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works. Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface. When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules: ● Remove the ground bolt or screw. ● Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc. ● Clean as required to assure good contact. ● Reinstall bolt or screw securely. ● Inspect for “add-on” accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit. ● If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation. For detailed ground distribution information, refer to “Ground Distribution” in PG section. SGI853 Voltage Drop Tests Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation. Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop. Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows: ● Undersized wiring (single strand example) ● Corrosion on switch contacts ● Loose wire connections or splices. If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge. MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP — ACCUMULATED METHOD Revision: October 2004 GI-32 2005 Titan SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground. GI ● Operate the circuit. ● The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to “push” current through that part of the circuit. B Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb. ● C D E F G SGI974 MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP — STEP-BY-STEP The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those in “Computer Controlled Systems”). Circuits in the “Computer Controlled System” operate on very low amperage. The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion. The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance. H I J K L M SAIA0258E Revision: October 2004 GI-33 2005 Titan SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Control Unit Circuit Test System Description:When the switch is ON, the control unit lights up the lamp. MGI034A INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Pin No. 1 Item Switch 2 Lamp Voltage value [V] Condition In case of high resistance such as single strand [V] * Switch ON Battery voltage Lower than battery voltage Approx. 8 (Example) Switch OFF Approx. 0 Approx. 0 Switch ON Battery voltage Approx. 0 (Inoperative lamp) Switch OFF Approx. 0 Approx. 0 The voltage value is based on the body ground. *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single strand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does not turn ON. Therefore, the control unit does not supply power to light up the lamp. MGI035A INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART Pin No. Item 1 Lamp 2 Switch Condition Voltage value [V] In case of high resistance such as single strand [V] * Switch ON Approx. 0 Battery voltage (Inoperative lamp) Switch OFF Battery voltage Battery voltage Switch ON Approx. 0 Higher than 0 Approx. 4 (Example) Switch OFF Approx. 5 Approx. 5 The voltage value is based on the body ground. *:If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single strand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0V. Control unit does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does not turn ON. Therefore, the control unit does not control ground to light up the lamp. Revision: October 2004 GI-34 2005 Titan SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT Control Units and Electrical Parts EAS001DK GI PRECAUTIONS ● ● ● ● ● Never reverse polarity of battery terminals. Install only parts specified for a vehicle. Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts. Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector. If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand. B C D SAIA0251E ● E Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface. F G H SAIA0252E ● For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A in the figure, and then remove the connector. I J K SAIA0253E ● For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard. M SAIA0254E Revision: October 2004 GI-35 L 2005 Titan SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it. Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle. Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector. Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil. Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers. SAIA0255E When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting. When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter. SEF348N SMJ INSTALLATION To install SMJ, tighten bolts until orange “fulltight” mark appears and then retighten to specified torque as required. SMJ :3 - 5 N·m (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb) CAUTION: Do not overtighten bolts, otherwise, they may be damaged. CEL969 Revision: October 2004 GI-36 2005 Titan CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Description ● ● PFP:00000 GI EAS001DL CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. Refer to “CONSULT Operator's Manual” for more information. Function and System Application EAS001DM B C Function Engine A/T Air bag ABS ABS (Including VDC) Air Pressure Monitor Work support This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the indications on CONSULT-II. x — — — x x DTC work support Select the operating condition to confirm Diagnosis Trouble Codes. — x — — — — Self-diagnostic results Self-diagnostic results can be read and erased quickly. x x x x x x Trouble diagnostic record Current self-diagnostic results and all trouble diagnostic records previously stored can be read. — — x — — — ECU discriminated No. Classification number of a replacement ECU can be read to prevent an incorrect ECU from being installed. — — x — — — Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECU (ECM) can be read. x x — x x x I Data monitor (Spec.) The specified values will be displayed when an OK/NG judgment is difficult for the DATA MONITOR items by Bar Chart and Line Graph. x — — — — — J Active test Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from the ECUs and also shifts some parameters in a specified range. x — — x x — K SRT & DTC confirmation The results of SRT (System Readiness Test) and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed. x x* — — — — L ECU (ECM) part number ECU (ECM) part number can be read. x x — x x x Diagnostic test mode E F G x: Applicable *: For VG33E and VG33ER engine Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement EAS001DN CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the following: WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations. Checking Equipment EAS001DO When ordering the below equipment, contact your NISSAN distributor. Revision: October 2004 D GI-37 2005 Titan H M CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Tool name Description NISSAN CONSULT-II 1 CONSULT-II unit (Tester internal soft: Resident Version 3.3.0) and accessories 2 Program card AED04C and AEN02C-1 (for NATS) 3 CAN converter For details, refer to Consult-II Operation Manual. LAIA0038E CONSULT-II Start Procedure EAS001DP NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be erased. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. PAIA0070E 2. 3. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)” or “System Shortcut” (eg: Engine) on the screen. BCIA0029E CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit EAS001DQ LAIA0028E INSPECTION PROCEDURE If the CONSULT-II cannot diagnose the system properly, check the following items. Revision: October 2004 GI-38 2005 Titan CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM Symptom CONSULT-II cannot access any system. CONSULT-II cannot access individual system. (Other systems can be accessed.) Check item GI ● CONSULT-II DLC power supply circuit (Terminal 8) and ground circuit (Terminal 4) ● CONSULT-II DLC cable ● CONSULT-II program card (Check the appropriate CONSULT-II program card for the system. Refer to "Checking Equipment".) ● Power supply and ground circuit for the control unit of the system (For detailed circuit, refer to wiring diagram for each system.) ● Open or short circuit between the system and CONSULT-II DLC (For detailed circuit, refer to wiring diagram for each system.) NOTE: The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT-II access to other systems. B C D E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 GI-39 2005 Titan LIFTING POINT LIFTING POINT Pantograph Jack PFP:00000 EAS001DR WARNING: ● Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands to support the frame when you have to get under the vehicle. ● Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground. WAIA0041E Garage Jack and Safety Stand EAS001DS CAUTION: Place a wooden or rubber block between safety stand and vehicle body when the supporting body is flat. WAIA0042E Revision: October 2004 GI-40 2005 Titan LIFTING POINT 2-Pole Lift EAS001DT WARNING: ● When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible and ensure that the front and rear of the vehicle are well balanced. ● When setting the lift arm, do not allow the arm to contact the brake tubes, brake cable, or fuel lines. GI B C D E F G H WAIA0043E I J K L M Revision: October 2004 GI-41 2005 Titan TOW TRUCK TOWING TOW TRUCK TOWING Tow Truck Towing PFP:00000 EAS001DU WARNING: ● Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands to support the frame when you have to get under the vehicle. ● Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground. CAUTION: ● All applicable State or Provincial (in Canada) laws and local laws regarding the towing operation must be obeyed. ● It is necessary to use proper towing equipment to avoid possible damage during towing operation. Towing is in accordance with Towing Procedure Manual at dealer. ● Always attach safety chains before towing. ● When towing, make sure that the transmission, steering system and power train are in good order. If any unit is damaged, dollies must be used. ● Never tow an automatic transmission model from the rear (i.e., backward) with four wheels on the ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. AGI077 4X2 MODEL NISSAN does not recommend towing automatic transmission equipped vehicles with the drive wheels on the ground. CAUTION: ● When towing with the front wheels on the ground: Turn the ignition key to the OFF position and move the transmission shift lever to the neutral position. On automatic transmission models, to move the selector lever to N (neutral) position, turn the ignition key to OFF position and secure the steering wheel in a straight ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never place the ignition key in the LOCK position. This will result in damage to the steering lock mechanism. ● When towing manual transmission models with the rear wheels on the ground (if you do not use a towing dollies): Always release the parking brake and move the transmission shift lever to the neutral position. Observe the following restricted towing speeds and distances. Speed Distance : Below 95 km/h (60 MPH) : Less than 800 km (500 miles) SGI976 Revision: October 2004 GI-42 2005 Titan TOW TRUCK TOWING Towing Point GI B C D E F WAIA0045E CAUTION: Never tow the vehicle using only the towing points. To avoid damaging the vehicle body, use proper towing equipment when towing. G 4X4 MODEL H NISSAN does not recommend towing automatic transmission equipped vehicles with the drive wheels on the ground. CAUTION: ● When towing with the front wheels on the ground or rear wheels on the ground (If you do not use towing dollies): Set the free-running hubs to the free position and move the transfer case shift lever into the “2H” position. ● When towing with the front on the ground: Turn the ignition key to the OFF position and secure the steering wheel in a straight ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never place the ignition key in the LOCK position. This will result in damage to the steering lock mechanism. ● When towing manual transmission models with the rear wheels on the ground always release the parking brake and move the transmission shift lever to the neutral position. Observe the following restricted towing speeds and distances. Speed Distance I J K L M : Below 95 km/h (60 MPH) : Less than 800 km (500 miles) SGI973 Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle) ● ● ● ● EAS001DV Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle. Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake or cooling systems Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull the vehicle at a sideways angle. Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use for vehicle towing or recovery. Revision: October 2004 GI-43 2005 Titan TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS Tightening Torque Table Grade 4T Bolt size M6 6.0 M8 8.0 M10 M12 7T 10.0 12.0 EAS001DW Tightening torque (Without lubricant) Pitch mm Hexagon head bolt N·m kg-m Hexagon flange bolt ft-lb in-lb N·m kg-m ft-lb in-lb 1.0 5.1 0.52 3.8 45.1 6.1 0.62 4.5 53.8 1.25 13 1.3 9 — 15 1.5 11 — 1.0 13 1.3 9 — 16 1.6 12 — 1.5 25 2.5 18 — 29 3.0 22 — 1.25 25 2.6 19 — 30 3.1 22 — 1.75 42 4.3 31 — 51 5.2 38 — 1.25 46 4.7 34 — 56 5.7 41 — M14 14.0 1.5 74 7.5 54 — 88 9.0 65 — M6 6.0 1.0 8.4 0.86 6.2 74.6 10 1.0 7 87 M8 8.0 1.25 21 2.1 15 — 25 2.5 18 — 1.0 22 2.2 16 — 26 2.7 20 — 1.5 41 4.2 30 — 48 4.9 35 — M10 M12 9T Bolt diameter * mm PFP:00000 10.0 12.0 1.25 43 4.4 32 — 51 5.2 38 — 1.75 71 7.2 52 — 84 8.6 62 — 1.25 77 7.9 57 — 92 9.4 68 — M14 14.0 1.5 127 13.0 94 — 147 15.0 108 — M6 6.0 1.0 12 1.2 9 — 15 1.5 11 — M8 8.0 1.25 29 3.0 22 — 35 3.6 26 — 1.0 31 3.2 23 — 37 3.8 27 — 1.5 59 6.0 43 — 70 7.1 51 — M10 M12 M14 10.0 12.0 14.0 1.25 62 6.3 46 — 74 7.5 54 — 1.75 98 10.0 72 — 118 12.0 87 — 1.25 108 11.0 80 — 137 14.0 101 — 1.5 177 18.0 130 — 206 21.0 152 — *: Nominal diameter 1. Special parts are excluded. 2. This standard is applicable to bolts having the following marks embossed on the bolt head. MGI044A Revision: October 2004 GI-44 2005 Titan RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants PFP:00000 GI EAS001DX Refer to the following chart for help in selecting the appropriate chemical product or sealant. Product Description 1 2 3 Purpose B C 999MP-AM000P 99998-50505 Permatex 81844 Anaerobic Liquid Gasket For metal-to-metal flange sealing. Can fill a 0.38 mm (0.015 inch) gap and provide instant sealing for most powertrain applications. 999MP-AM001P 99998-50503 Permatex 51813 and 51817 High Performance Thread Sealant Provides instant sealing on any threaded straight or parallel threaded fitting. (Thread sealant only, no locking ability.) 999MP-AM002P 999MP-AM002P Permatex 56521 99998-50506 (Ultra Grey) Permatex Ultra Grey 82194; Three Bond 1207,1215, 1216, 1217F and 1217G; Nissan RTV Part No. 999MP-A7007 Medium Strength Thread Locking Sealant (Blue) Revision: October 2004 F Do not use on plastic. 999MP-AM003P (Ultra Grey) Silicone RTV High Temperature, High Strength Thread Locking Sealant (Red) D E Threadlocker Threadlocker (service tool removable) G H I Gasket Maker for Maxima/ Quest 5-speed automatic transmission (RE5F22A) 6 Aftermarket Crossreference Part Nos. Used to permanently remount rear view mirrors to windows. Gasket Maker 5 Nissan Canada Part No. (Canada) Rear View Mirror Adhesive ● 4 Nissan North America Part No. (USA) – – Three Bond 1281B or exact equivalent in its quality J 999MP-AM004P 999MP-AM005P GI-45 999MP-AM004P Permatex 27200; Three Bond 1360, 1360N, 1305 N&P, 1307N, 1335, 1335B, 1363B, 1377C, 1386B, D&E and 1388 999MP-AM005P Permatex 24200, 24206, 24240, 24283 and 09178; Three Bond 1322, 1322N, 1324 D&N, 1333D, 1361C, 1364D, 1370C and 1374 2005 Titan K L M IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION Model Variation PFP:00010 EAS001DY WAIA0039E Revision: October 2004 GI-46 2005 Titan IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION 4x2 Model Body Engine Transmission Destination 50-State King Cab VK56DE RE5R05A (5A/T) Canada 50-State Crew Cab VK56DE RE5R05A (5A/T) Canada GI Grade Model XE BPKELRK-EUN SE BPKELTK-EUN LE BPKELVK-EUN XE BPKELRK-ENN SE BPKELTK-ENN LE BPKELVK-ENN XE CPKELRK-EUN SE CPKELTK-EUN LE CPKELVK-EUN XE CPKELRK-ENN SE CPKELTK-ENN LE CPKELVK-ENN B C D E F 4x4 Model Body Engine Transmission Destination 50-State King Cab VK56DE RE5R05A (5A/T) Canada 50-State Crew Cab VK56DE RE5R05A (5A/T) Canada Grade Model XE BPKMLRK-EUN SE BPKMLTK-EUN LE BPKMLVK-EUN XE BPKMLRK-ENN SE BPKMLTK-ENN LE BPKMLVK-ENN XE CPKMLRK-EUN SE CPKMLTK-EUN LE CPKMLVK-EUN XE CPKMLRK-ENN SE CPKMLTK-ENN LE CPKMLVK-ENN G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 GI-47 2005 Titan IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION Identification Number EAS001DZ LAIA0047E 1. Emission control information label 2. Vacuum hose diagram 4. FMVSS certification label 5. Vehicle identification number plate 3. Tire placard VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ARRANGEMENT WAIA0077E Revision: October 2004 GI-48 2005 Titan IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER GI B C LAIA0044E D TRANSFER SERIAL NUMBER E F G AGI108 H AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER I J PAIA0054E K L M Revision: October 2004 GI-49 2005 Titan IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION Dimensions EAS001E0 Unit: mm (in) Drive type 4x2 4x4 Overall length 5695 (224.2) Overall width 2001 (78.8) Overall height *1 1905.1 (75.0) 1945.8 (76.6) Overall height *2 1907.0 (75.1) 1948.0 (76.7) Front tread width Rear tread width 17 inch tire with offroad package 1715 (67.5) 18 inch tire 1725 (67.9) 17 inch tire with steel wheels 1735 (68.3) 17 inch tire with offroad package 1715 (67.5) 18 inch tire 1725 (67.9) 17 inch tire with steel wheels 1735 (68.3) Wheelbase 3550 (139.8) Minimum Running Ground Clearance (at front suspension)*1 Minimum Running Ground Clearance (at front suspension)*2 With standard undercover 247.2 (9.73) 286.1 (11.26) With offroad skid plate 242.2 (9.54) 281.1 (11.1) With oil pan skid plate — 286.4 (11.28) With standard undercover 251.5 (9.9) 291.5 (11.48) With offroad skid plate 246.5 (9.7) 286.4 (11.28) With oil pan skid plate — 291.3 (11.46) *1: King Cab *2: Crew Cab Wheels & Tires Drive Type EAS001E1 Grade Road wheel Tire Spare tire size XE 17X7.5J Steel P245/75R17 P245/75R17 SE 18X8J Alloy (5-spoke) P265/70R18 P265/70R18 LE 18X8J Alloy (6-spoke) P265/70R18 P265/70R18 17X7.5J Steel P245/75R17 P245/75R17 17x7.5J Alloy (7-spoke) P285/70R17 A/T P285/70R17 A/T 18X8J Alloy (5-spoke) P265/70R18 P265/70R18 17x7.5J Alloy (7-spoke) P285/70R17 A/T P285/70R17 A/T 18X8J Alloy (6-spoke) P265/70R18 P265/70R18 17x7.5J Alloy (7-spoke) P285/70R17 A/T P285/70R17 A/T 4x2 XE 4x4 SE LE Revision: October 2004 GI-50 2005 Titan TERMINOLOGY TERMINOLOGY SAE J1930 Terminology List PFP:00011 GI EAS001E2 All emission related terms used in this publication in accordance with SAE J1930 are listed. Accordingly, new terms, new acronyms/abbreviations and old terms are listed in the following chart. NEW ACRONYM / ABBREVIATION NEW TERM OLD TERM C Air cleaner ACL Air cleaner Barometric pressure BARO *** Barometric pressure sensor-BCDD BAROS-BCDD BCDD Camshaft position CMP *** Camshaft position sensor CMPS Crank angle sensor Canister *** Canister Carburetor CARB Carburetor Charge air cooler CAC Intercooler Closed loop CL Closed loop Closed throttle position switch CTP switch Idle switch Clutch pedal position switch CPP switch Clutch switch Continuous fuel injection system CFI system *** Continuous trap oxidizer system CTOX system *** Crankshaft position CKP *** Crankshaft position sensor CKPS *** Data link connector DLC *** Data link connector for CONSULT-II DLC for CONSULT-II Diagnostic connector for CONSULT-II Diagnostic test mode DTM Diagnostic mode Diagnostic test mode selector DTM selector Diagnostic mode selector Diagnostic test mode I DTM I Mode I Diagnostic test mode II DTM II Mode II Diagnostic trouble code DTC Malfunction code Direct fuel injection system DFI system *** Distributor ignition system DI system Ignition timing control Early fuel evaporation-mixture heater EFE-mixture heater Mixture heater Early fuel evaporation system EFE system Mixture heater control Electrically erasable programmable read only memory EEPROM *** D E F G H I J K L M Electronic ignition system EI system Ignition timing control Engine control EC *** Engine control module ECM ECCS control unit Engine coolant temperature ECT Engine temperature Engine coolant temperature sensor ECTS Engine temperature sensor Engine modification EM *** Engine speed RPM Engine speed Erasable programmable read only memory EPROM *** Evaporative emission canister EVAP canister Canister Evaporative emission system EVAP system Canister control solenoid valve Exhaust gas recirculation valve EGR valve EGR valve Revision: October 2004 B GI-51 2005 Titan TERMINOLOGY NEW ACRONYM / ABBREVIATION NEW TERM OLD TERM Exhaust gas recirculation control-BPT valve EGRC-BPT valve BPT valve Exhaust gas recirculation control-solenoid valve EGRC-solenoid valve EGR control solenoid valve EGRT sensor Exhaust gas temperature sensor Flash electrically erasable programmable read only memory FEEPROM *** Flash erasable programmable read only memory FEPROM *** Flexible fuel sensor FFS *** Flexible fuel system FF system *** Fuel pressure regulator *** Pressure regulator Fuel pressure regulator control solenoid valve *** PRVR control solenoid valve Fuel trim FT *** Heated Oxygen sensor HO2S Exhaust gas sensor Idle air control system IAC system Idle speed control Idle air control valve-air regulator IACV-air regulator Air regulator Idle air control valve-auxiliary air control valve IACV-AAC valve Auxiliary air control (AAC) valve Idle air control valve-FICD solenoid valve IACV-FICD solenoid valve FICD solenoid valve Idle air control valve-idle up control solenoid valve IACV-idle up control solenoid valve Idle up control solenoid valve Idle speed control-FI pot ISC-FI pot FI pot Idle speed control system ISC system *** Ignition control IC *** Ignition control module ICM *** Indirect fuel injection system IFI system *** Intake air IA Air Exhaust gas recirculation temperature sensor EGR temperature sensor Intake air temperature sensor IAT sensor Air temperature sensor Knock *** Detonation Knock sensor KS Detonation sensor Malfunction indicator lamp MIL Check engine light Manifold absolute pressure MAP *** Manifold absolute pressure sensor MAPS *** Manifold differential pressure MDP *** Manifold differential pressure sensor MDPS *** Manifold surface temperature MST *** Manifold surface temperature sensor MSTS *** Manifold vacuum zone MVZ *** Manifold vacuum zone sensor MVZS *** Mass air flow sensor MAFS Air flow meter Mixture control solenoid valve MC solenoid valve Air-fuel ratio control solenoid valve Multiport fuel injection System MFI system Fuel injection control Revision: October 2004 GI-52 2005 Titan TERMINOLOGY NEW ACRONYM / ABBREVIATION NEW TERM OLD TERM Nonvolatile random access memory NVRAM *** On board diagnostic system OBD system Self-diagnosis Open loop OL Open loop Oxidation catalyst OC Catalyst Oxidation catalytic converter system OC system *** Oxygen sensor O2S Exhaust gas sensor Park position switch *** Park switch Park/neutral position switch PNP switch Park/neutral switch Inhibitor switch Neutral position switch Periodic trap oxidizer system PTOX system *** Positive crankcase ventilation PCV Positive crankcase ventilation Positive crankcase ventilation valve PCV valve PCV valve Powertrain control module PCM *** Programmable read only memory PROM *** Pulsed secondary air injection control solenoid valve PAIRC solenoid valve AIV control solenoid valve GI B C D E F G Pulsed secondary air injection system PAIR system Air induction valve (AIV) control Pulsed secondary air injection valve PAIR valve Air induction valve Random access memory RAM *** Read only memory ROM *** Scan tool ST *** Secondary air injection pump AIR pump *** Secondary air injection system AIR system *** Sequential multiport fuel injection system SFI system Sequential fuel injection Service reminder indicator SRI *** Simultaneous multiport fuel injection system *** Simultaneous fuel injection Smoke puff limiter system SPL system *** Supercharger SC *** Supercharger bypass SCB *** System readiness test SRT *** Thermal vacuum valve TVV Thermal vacuum valve Three way catalyst TWC Catalyst Three way catalytic converter system TWC system *** Three way + oxidation catalyst TWC + OC Catalyst Three way + oxidation catalytic converter system TWC + OC system *** Throttle body TB Throttle chamber SPI body Throttle body fuel injection system TBI system Fuel injection control Throttle position TP Throttle position Throttle position sensor TPS Throttle sensor Throttle position switch TP switch Throttle switch Torque converter clutch solenoid valve TCC solenoid valve Lock-up cancel solenoid Lock-up solenoid Revision: October 2004 GI-53 H I J K L M 2005 Titan TERMINOLOGY NEW ACRONYM / ABBREVIATION NEW TERM OLD TERM Transmission control module TCM A/T control unit Turbocharger TC Turbocharger Vehicle speed sensor VSS Vehicle speed sensor Volume air flow sensor VAFS Air flow meter Warm up oxidation catalyst WU-OC Catalyst Warm up oxidation catalytic converter system WU-OC system *** Warm up three way catalyst WU-TWC Catalyst Warm up three way catalytic converter system WU-TWC system *** Wide open throttle position switch WOTP switch Full switch ***: Not applicable Revision: October 2004 GI-54 2005 Titan I BODY A B SECTION GLASSES, WINDOW SYSTEM & MIRRORS C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3 Handling for Adhesive and Primer ........................... 3 Trouble Diagnosis Precaution .................................. 3 PREPARATION ........................................................... 4 Special Service Tool ................................................. 4 Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 4 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES..... 5 Work Flow ................................................................ 5 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW ..................................... 5 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE ....... 6 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS ........... 6 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE ...................................................... 6 REPAIR THE CAUSE ........................................... 6 CONFIRM THE REPAIR ....................................... 7 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ........... 7 INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................... 7 CENTER CONSOLE ............................................. 7 DOORS ................................................................. 7 TRUNK .................................................................. 8 SUNROOF/HEADLINING ..................................... 8 OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)..... 8 SEATS ................................................................... 8 UNDERHOOD ....................................................... 8 Diagnostic Worksheet .............................................. 9 WINDSHIELD GLASS ...............................................11 Removal and Installation .........................................11 REMOVAL ............................................................11 INSTALLATION ....................................................11 REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING ............... 13 Removal and Installation ........................................ 13 FIXED AND SLIDING REAR WINDOW GLASS... 13 REAR WINDOW GLASS AND REGULATOR ..... 15 SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION ...................... 17 REPAIRING WATER LEAKS FOR REAR WINDOW GLASS ...................................................... 18 POWER WINDOW SYSTEM .................................... 19 Revision: October 2004 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 19 System Description ................................................. 20 KING CAB ........................................................... 20 CREW CAB ......................................................... 20 KING CAB ........................................................... 20 CREW CAB ......................................................... 20 MANUAL OPERATION ........................................ 21 AUTO OPERATION ............................................. 23 POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK ....................... 23 POWER WINDOW LOCK ................................... 24 RETAINED POWER OPERATION ...................... 24 ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM ........................................ 24 POWER WINDOW CONTROL BY THE FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) ............................................................. 24 CAN Communication System Description .............. 24 Schematic (King Cab) ............................................. 25 Wiring Diagram — WINDOW — (King Cab) ........... 26 Terminal and Reference Value for Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch (King Cab) ....... 31 Terminal and Reference Value for Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH (King Cab) ........ 31 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM (King Cab)... 33 Schematic (Crew Cab) ........................................... 34 Wiring Diagram — WINDOW — (Crew Cab) ......... 35 Terminal and Reference Value for Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch (Crew Cab) ...... 43 Terminal and Reference Value for Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH (Crew Cab) ....... 44 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM (Crew Cab)... 45 Work Flow ............................................................... 46 CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ................................. 46 CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE .......... 46 ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 47 WORK SUPPORT ............................................... 47 DATA MONITOR ................................................. 47 Trouble Diagnoses Symptom Chart (King Cab) ..... 48 Trouble Diagnoses Symptom Chart (Crew Cab) ... 49 BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check ...... 50 Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch GW-1 2005 Titan F G H GW J K L M Power Supply and GroundCircuit Check (King Cab)... 51 Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check (Crew Cab) ........................................................................ 52 Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check ............... 53 Front Power Window Motor LH Circuit Check ........ 55 Power Window Motor RH Circuit Check ................. 55 Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (King Cab) ..... 56 Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab) ... 58 Limit Switch Circuit Check Front RH ....................... 59 Encoder Circuit Check Front LH (King Cab) ........... 61 Encoder Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab) .......... 63 Encoder Circuit Check Front RH ............................ 65 Door Switch Check ................................................. 67 FrontDoorLockAssemblyLH(KeyCylinderSwitch) Check (King Cab) ................................................... 69 FrontDoorLockAssemblyLH(KeyCylinderSwitch) Check (Crew Cab) .................................................. 71 Power Window Serial Link Check Front LH and RH (King Cab) .............................................................. 73 Power Window Serial Link Check Front LH and RH (Crew Cab) ............................................................. 76 Rear Power Window Motor LH Circuit Check (Crew Cab) ........................................................................ 78 Rear Power Window Motor RH Circuit Check (Crew Cab) ........................................................................ 80 Rear Power Drop Glass Circuit Check ................... 81 Rear Power Drop Glass Up Relay Check ............... 82 Rear Power Drop Glass Down Relay Check .......... 83 FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR ............. 85 Removal and Installation ........................................ 85 FRONT DOOR GLASS ....................................... 85 FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR ................ 86 SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION ...................... 86 REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR ............... 88 Rear Door Glass ..................................................... 88 REMOVAL ........................................................... 88 INSTALLATION .................................................... 88 FITTING INSPECTION ........................................ 88 Rear Door Glass Regulator .................................... 90 REMOVAL ........................................................... 90 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ........................ 90 INSTALLATION .................................................... 90 SIDE WINDOW GLASS ............................................ 91 Removal ................................................................. 91 Installation ............................................................... 91 Repairing Water Leaks for Side Window Glass ...... 92 Revision: October 2004 INSIDE MIRROR .......................................................93 Wiring Diagram — I/MIRR — .................................93 Removal and Installation .........................................94 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER ..................................95 ComponentParts and Harness Connector Location...95 System Description .................................................96 CAN Communication System Description ..............97 Schematic ...............................................................98 Wiring Diagram — DEF — ......................................99 Terminal and Reference Values for BCM .............. 102 Terminal and Reference Values for IPDM E/R ...... 102 Work Flow ............................................................. 102 CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ................................ 103 CONSULT-IIBASICOPERATIONPROCEDURE .103 DATA MONITOR ................................................ 104 ACTIVE TEST .................................................... 104 Trouble Diagnoses Symptom Chart ...................... 104 BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check .... 106 Rear Window Defogger Switch Circuit Check ....... 107 Rear Window Defogger Circuit Check .................. 108 Door Mirror Defogger Power Supply Circuit Check (Without Automatic Drive Positioner) .................... 110 Door Mirror Defogger Power Supply Circuit Check (With Automatic Drive Positioner) ......................... 112 Door Mirror LH Defogger Circuit Check (Without Automatic Drive Positioner) .................................. 114 Door Mirror LH Defogger Circuit Check (With Automatic Drive Positioner) .......................................... 115 Door Mirror RH Defogger Circuit Check (Without Automatic Drive Positioner) .................................. 116 Door Mirror RH Defogger Circuit Check (With Automatic Drive Positioner) .......................................... 117 Rear Window Defogger Signal Check .................. 118 Filament Check ..................................................... 118 Filament Repair ..................................................... 119 REPAIR EQUIPMENT ....................................... 119 REPAIRING PROCEDURE ............................... 119 DOOR MIRROR ....................................................... 121 Wiring Diagram — MIRROR — ............................ 121 Wiring Diagram — H/MIRR — .............................. 122 Door Mirror Assembly ........................................... 124 STANDARD MIRROR ........................................ 124 TRAILER TOW MIRROR ................................... 125 Door Mirror Glass .................................................. 125 REMOVAL .......................................................... 125 INSTALLATION .................................................. 126 GW-2 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A EIS004BY The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Handling for Adhesive and Primer ● ● ● ● ● ● B C D E F G EIS004BZ Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable date. Shelf life of this product is limited to six months after H the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed on the box. Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator. Open the seal of the primer and adhesive just before application. Discard the remainder. GW Before application, be sure to shake the primer container to stir the contents. If any floating material is found, do not use it. If any primer or adhesive contacts the skin, wipe it off with gasoline or equivalent and wash the skin with J soap. When using primer and adhesive, always observe the precautions in the instruction manual. Trouble Diagnosis Precaution EIS004C0 When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" ● PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-11, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" ● GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" Check for any service bulletins before servicing the vehicle. Revision: October 2004 GW-3 K L M 2005 Titan PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tool PFP:00002 EIS004C1 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-39570) Chassis ear Locating the noise SIIA0993E — (J-43980) NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit Repairing the cause of noise SIIA0994E Commercial Service Tool EIS004C2 (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description (J-39565) Engine ear Locating the noise SIIA0995E ( — ) Suction Lifter Holding door glass LIIA1991E Revision: October 2004 GW-4 2005 Titan SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Work Flow PFP:00000 A EIS004C3 B C D E F SBT842 G CUSTOMER INTERVIEW Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diag- H nostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any customer's comments; refer to GW-9, "Diagnostic Worksheet" . This information is necessary to duplicate the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. GW ● The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur). ● If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer J is concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer. ● After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when K defining the noise. ● Squeak —(Like tennis shoes on a clean floor) Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surL faces = higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping. ● Creak—(Like walking on an old wooden floor) Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch dependent on materials/often brought on by activity. M ● Rattle—(Like shaking a baby rattle) Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing clip or fastener/incorrect clearance. ● Knock —(Like a knock on a door) Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action. ● Tick—(Like a clock second hand) Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver action or road conditions. ● Thump—(Heavy, muffled knock noise) Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity. ● Buzz—(Like a bumble bee) Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact. ● Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer. ● Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level. Revision: October 2004 GW-5 2005 Titan SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair. If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following: 1) Close a door. 2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from. 3) Rev the engine. 4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”. 5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model). 6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer. ● Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs. ● If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the vehicle body. CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related to that concern or symptom. If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise. LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE 1. 2. ● ● ● ● ● Narrow down the noise to a general area.To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool (Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanic's stethoscope). Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by: removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from. Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise. tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise. Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only temporarily. feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the noise. placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise. looking for loose components and contact marks. Refer to GW-7, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting" . REPAIR THE CAUSE If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely. ● If the cause is insufficient clearance between components: – separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible. – insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized NISSAN Parts Department. CAUTION: Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged. Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be ordered separately as needed. URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick] Insulates connectors, harness, etc. 76268-9E005: 100×135 mm (3.94×5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60×85 mm (2.36×3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) INSULATOR (Foam blocks) Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel. 73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in) INSULATOR (Light foam block) ● Revision: October 2004 GW-6 2005 Titan SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES 80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30×50 mm (1.18×1.97 in) FELT CLOTH TAPE Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications. 68370-4B000: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll. The following materials not found in the kit can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles. UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications. SILICONE GREASE Used instead of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit. Note: Will only last a few months. SILICONE SPRAY Use when grease cannot be applied. DUCT TAPE Use to eliminate movement. CONFIRM THE REPAIR A B C D E Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet. Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting EIS004C4 F Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information. INSTRUMENT PANEL G Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between: 1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel H 2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing 3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish 4. Instrument panel to windshield GW 5. Instrument panel mounting pins 6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter 7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint J These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harK ness. CAUTION: Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will L not be able to recheck the repair. CENTER CONSOLE Components to pay attention to include: 1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher 2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C 3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console. M DOORS Pay attention to the: 1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise 2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher 3. Wiring harnesses tapping 4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise. Revision: October 2004 GW-7 2005 Titan SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES TRUNK Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner. In addition look for: 1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment 2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment 3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together 4. A loose license plate or bracket Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise. SUNROOF/HEADLINING Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following: 1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise 2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder 3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape. OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR) Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage. In addition look for: 1. Loose harness or harness connectors. 2. Front console map/reading lamp lense loose. 3. Loose screws at console attachment points. SEATS When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the noise. Cause of seat noise include: 1. Headrest rods and holder 2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame 3. The rear seatback lock and bracket These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component or applying urethane tape to the contact area. UNDERHOOD Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then transmitted into the passenger compartment. Causes of transmitted underhood noise include: 1. Any component mounted to the engine wall 2. Components that pass through the engine wall 3. Engine wall mounts and connectors 4. Loose radiator mounting pins 5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment 6. Hood striker out of adjustment These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or insulating the component causing the noise. Revision: October 2004 GW-8 2005 Titan SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Diagnostic Worksheet EIS004C5 A B C D E F G H GW J K L M LIWA0276E Revision: October 2004 GW-9 2005 Titan SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES SBT844 Revision: October 2004 GW-10 2005 Titan WINDSHIELD GLASS WINDSHIELD GLASS Removal and Installation PFP:72712 A EIS004C6 B C D E F LIIA0652E G REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the front pillar garnish. Refer to EI-36, "BODY SIDE TRIM" . H Remove inside mirror. Refer to GW-94, "Removal and Installation" . Partially remove the headlining (front edge). Refer to EI-43, "HEADLINING" . GW Remove cowl top cover. Refer to EI-21, "Removal and Installation" . Apply a protective tape around the windshield glass to protect the painted surface from damage. ● Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag. J ● If the windshield glass is to be reused, mark the body and the glass with mating marks. WARNING: When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent K glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands. CAUTION: ● When the windshield glass is to be reused, do not use a cutting knife or power cutting tool. L ● Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing. ● Do not set or stand glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks. M PIIA0186E INSTALLATION ● ● Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it. While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed. Revision: October 2004 GW-11 2005 Titan WINDSHIELD GLASS The molding must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap. ● Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity. ● Install parts removed. WARNING: ● Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable. ● The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid contact with the skin and eyes. ● Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if inhaled. If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air. ● Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance of the windshield in case of an accident. CAUTION: ● Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed on the box. ● Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator. ● Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off. ● The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidities. The curing time will increase under lower temperatures and lower humidities. ● LIIA1115E Repairing Water Leaks for Windshield Leaks can be repaired without removing and reinstalling glass. If water is leaking between the urethane adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of leakage. This can be done by applying water to the windshield area while pushing glass outward. To stop the leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then urethane adhesive to the leak point. Revision: October 2004 GW-12 2005 Titan REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING Removal and Installation PFP:79712 A EIS004C7 FIXED AND SLIDING REAR WINDOW GLASS B C D E F G H GW J K L M LIIA1243E Removal 1. 2. Remove the rear pillar finishers. Refer to EI-36, "BODY SIDE TRIM" . If the rear window glass is to be reused, mark the body and the glass with mating marks. Revision: October 2004 GW-13 2005 Titan REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING 3. Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag. WARNING: When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands. CAUTION: ● When the rear window glass is to be reused, do not use a cutting knife or power cutting tool. ● Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing. ● Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks. SBF034B Installation Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it. ● While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed. ● The molding must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap. ● Check gap along bottom to confirm that glass does not contact sheet metal. ● Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity. ● Install parts removed. WARNING: ● Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable. ● The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid contact with the skin and eyes. ● Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if inhaled. If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air. ● Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance of the rear window in case of an accident. CAUTION: ● Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed on the box. ● Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator. ● Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off. ● The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidity. The curing time will increase under lower temperatures and lower humidities. ● Revision: October 2004 GW-14 2005 Titan REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING REAR WINDOW GLASS AND REGULATOR Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. A Remove the rear seats. Refer to SE-100, "REAR SEAT" . Remove the headliner. Refer to EI-43, "HEADLINING" . Remove the back panel finisher. Refer to EI-36, "BODY SIDE TRIM" . Remove the sealing screen. Lower the window and remove the rear window glass bolts. B C D E LIIA1826E 6. 7. 8. Raise the window and hold it in place with tape. Disconnect the rear window defogger harness connector. Remove the rear window glass assembly. F G H GW J K L M LIIA1828E 9. Disconnect the rear window motor wiring harness connector. Revision: October 2004 GW-15 2005 Titan REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING 10. Remove the bolts and the regulator and motor assembly. LIIA1827E Installation 1. Position the regulator and motor assembly and install the bolts. Regulator and motor assembly 2. 7.5 N·m (0.76 Kg-m, 66 in-lb) Connect the rear window motor wiring harness connector. LIIA1827E 3. Install the rear window. ● While installing the rear window, make sure that the bottom clips are engaged on the back panel, then rotate the glass into position. – If reusing the existing window assembly, clean the opening and assembly, then apply new butyl to the window assembly. – If installing a new window, clean the opening and remove the plastic liner from the butyl on the new window assembly. Revision: October 2004 GW-16 2005 Titan REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING A B C D E F G H LIIA1829E Rear window assembly nuts 4. 5. GW 3.0 N·m (0.31 Kg-m, 27 in-lb) Connect the rear window defogger. Lower the window and install the rear window glass bolts. Rear window glass bolts J 6.0 N·m (0.61 Kg-m, 53 in-lb) K L M LIIA1826E 6. 7. 8. 9. Install the sealing screen. Install the back panel finisher. Refer to EI-36, "BODY SIDE TRIM" . Install the headliner. Refer to EI-43, "HEADLINING" . Install the rear seats. Refer to SE-100, "REAR SEAT" . SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION Setting of Limit Switch If any of the following operations are performed the limit switch must be reset. ● Motor operation when not installed in the vehicle. ● Removal and installation of the regulator. ● Removal and installation of the motor from the regulator. ● Removal and installation of the glass. Revision: October 2004 GW-17 2005 Titan REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING ● Removal and installation of the glass run. Resetting After installing each component, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch. 1. Raise the glass to the top. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the glass to the bottom. 3. Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, if not pull the switch using suitable tool. 4. Raise the glass to the top position CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top position. SIIA0347E REPAIRING WATER LEAKS FOR REAR WINDOW GLASS Leaks can be repaired without removing or reinstalling glass. If water is leaking between butyl adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of leakage. This can be done by applying water to the rear window area while pushing glass outward. To stop leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then butyl adhesive to the leak point. Revision: October 2004 GW-18 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM POWER WINDOW SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:25401 A EIS004C8 B C D E F G H GW J K L M LIIA1985E Revision: October 2004 GW-19 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM System Description EIS004C9 KING CAB Power is supplied at all times ● from 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to BCM terminal 70 ● through BCM terminal 69 ● to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 1 ● to power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 10. With ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box) ● to BCM terminal 38 ● through BCM terminal 68 ● to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 10. CREW CAB Power is supplied at all times ● from 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to BCM terminal 70 ● through BCM terminal 69 ● to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 19 ● to power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 10 ● to circuit breaker-2 terminal 2 ● through circuit breaker-2 terminal 1 ● to rear power drop glass up and down relays terminal 5. With ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box) ● to BCM terminal 38 ● through BCM terminal 68 ● to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 10 ● to rear power window switches LH and RH terminal 1 ● to rear power drop glass up and down relays terminal 1. KING CAB With ignition switch in ON or START position, Ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 67 ● to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 15 ● to power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 11 ● through body grounds M57, M61 and M79. CREW CAB With ignition switch in ON or START position, Ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 67 ● to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 17 ● to power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 11 ● to rear power drop glass up and down relays terminal 4 ● to rear power drop glass switch terminal 3 ● through body grounds M57, M61 and M79. Revision: October 2004 GW-20 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM MANUAL OPERATION Front Driver Side Door A WINDOW UP When the front LH switch in the main power window and door lock/unlock switch is pressed in the up position, power is supplied ● through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 8 ● to front power window motor LH terminal 2. Ground is supplied ● through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 11 ● to front power window motor LH terminal 1. Then, the motor raises the window until the switch is released. WINDOW DOWN When the front LH switch in the main power window and door lock/unlock switch is pressed in the down position, power is supplied ● through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 11 ● to front power window motor LH terminal 1. Ground is supplied ● through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 8 ● to front power window motor LH terminal 2. Then, the motor lowers the window until the switch is released. B C D E F G Front Passenger Side Door H POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH RH OPERATION WINDOW UP When the power window and door lock/unlock switch RH is pressed in the up position, power is supplied GW ● through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 8 ● to front power window motor RH terminal 2. Ground is supplied J ● through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 9 ● to front power window motor RH terminal 1. Then, the motor raises the window until the switch is released. K WINDOW DOWN When the power window and door lock/unlock switch RH is pressed in the down position, power is supplied ● through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 9 L ● to front power window motor RH terminal 1. Ground is supplied ● through power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 8 M ● to front power window motor RH terminal 2. Then, the motor lowers the window until the switch is released. King Cab MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH OPERATION Signal is sent ● through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 12 ● to power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 16. The operation of power window after receiving the signal is the same as operating the power window with power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Crew Cab MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH OPERATION Signal is sent ● through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 14 ● to power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 16. The operation of power window after receiving the signal is the same as operating the power window with power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Revision: October 2004 GW-21 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM Rear Door (Crew Cab LH or RH) REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH OR RH OPERATION WINDOW UP When the rear power window switch LH or RH is pressed in the up position, power is supplied ● through rear power window switch LH or RH terminal 5 ● to rear power window motor LH or RH terminal 2. Ground is supplied ● through rear power window switch LH or RH terminal 4 ● to rear power window motor LH or RH terminal 1. Then, the motor raises the window until the switch is released. WINDOW DOWN When the rear power window switch LH or RH is pressed in the down position, power is supplied ● through rear power window switch LH or RH terminal 4 ● to rear power window motor LH or RH terminal 1. Ground is supplied ● through rear power window switch LH or RH terminal 5 ● to rear power window motor LH or RH terminal 2. Then, the motor lowers the window until the switch is released. MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH OPERATION WINDOW UP When the main power window and door lock/unlock switch (rear LH) is pressed in the up position, power is supplied ● through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 1 ● to rear power window switch LH terminal 2 ● through rear power window switch LH terminal 5 ● to rear power window motor LH terminal 2. Ground is supplied ● through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 3 ● to rear power window switch LH terminal 3 ● through rear power window switch LH terminal 4 ● to rear power window motor LH terminal 1. Then, the motor raises the window until the switch is released. When the main power window and door lock/unlock switch (rear RH) is pressed in the up position, power is supplied ● through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 5 ● to rear power window switch RH terminal 3 ● through rear power window switch RH terminal 5 ● to rear power window motor RH terminal 2. Ground is supplied ● through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 7 ● to rear power window motor RH terminal 2 ● through rear power window switch RH terminal 4 ● to rear power window motor RH terminal 1. Then, the motor raises the window until the switch is released. WINDOW DOWN When the main power window and door lock/unlock switch (rear LH) is pressed in the down position, power is supplied ● through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 3 ● to rear power window switch LH terminal 3 ● through rear power window switch LH terminal 4 ● to rear power window motor LH terminal 1. Revision: October 2004 GW-22 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM Ground is supplied A ● through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 1 ● to rear power window switch LH terminal 2 ● through rear power window switch LH terminal 5 B ● to rear power window motor LH terminal 2. Then, the motor raises the window until the switch is released. When the main power window and door lock/unlock switch (rear RH) is pressed in the down position, power is C supplied ● through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 7 ● to rear power window switch RH terminal 2 D ● through rear power window switch RH terminal 4 ● to rear power window motor RH terminal 1. Ground is supplied E ● through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 5 ● to rear power window switch RH terminal 3 F ● through rear power window switch RH terminal 5 ● to rear power window motor RH terminal 2. Then, the motor raises the window until the switch is released. G REAR POWER DROP GLASS UP When the rear power drop glass switch is pressed in the up position, ground is supplied ● to rear power drop glass up relay terminal 2. H Then, rear power drop glass up relay is energized. Power is supplied ● through rear power drop glass up relay terminal 3 ● to rear power drop glass motor terminal 1. GW Ground is supplied ● to rear power drop glass down relay terminal 4 ● through rear power drop glass down relay terminal 3 J ● to rear power drop glass motor terminal 4. Then, the motor raises the glass until the switch is released. REAR POWER DROP GLASS DOWN K When the rear power drop glass switch is pressed in the DOWN position, ground is supplied ● to rear power drop glass down relay terminal 2. Then, rear power drop glass down relay is energized. Power is supplied L ● through rear power drop glass down relay terminal 3 ● to rear power drop glass motor terminal 4. M Ground is supplied ● to rear power drop glass up relay terminal 4 ● through rear power drop glass up relay terminal 3 ● to rear power drop glass motor terminal 1. Then, the motor lowers the glass until the switch is released. AUTO OPERATION The power window AUTO feature enables the driver to open or close the window without holding the window switch in the down or up position. POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK Main power window and door lock/unlock switch, power window and door lock/unlock switch RH, and BCM transmit and receive the signal by power window serial link. The signal is transmitted from BCM to main power window and door lock/unlock switch and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH ● Keyless power window down signal. Revision: October 2004 GW-23 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM The signal is transmitted from main power window and door lock/unlock switch to power window and door lock/unlock switch RH ● Front door window RH operation signal. ● Power window control by key cylinder switch signal. ● Power window lock signal. ● Retained power operation signal. POWER WINDOW LOCK The power window lock is designed to lock operation of all windows except for front door window LH. When in the lock position, the power window lock signal is transmitted to power window and door lock/unlock switch RH by power window serial link. This prevents the front power window motor RH from operating. RETAINED POWER OPERATION When the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position from ON or START position. Power is supplied for 45 seconds ● to main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 10 ● from BCM terminal 68. When power and ground are supplied, the BCM continues to be energized, and the power window can be operated. The retained power operation is canceled when the front LH or front RH door is opened. RAP signal period can be changed by CONSULT-II. Refer to GW-46, "CONSULT-II Function (BCM)" . ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM Main power window and door lock/unlock switch and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH monitor the power window motor operation and the power window position (full closed or other) for front LH and front RH power window by the signals from encoder and limit switch in front power window motor LH and RH. When main power window and door lock/unlock switch or power window and door lock/unlock switch RH detects interruption during the following close operation, ● automatic close operation when ignition switch is in the ON position ● automatic close operation during retained power operation Main power window and door lock/unlock switch or power window and door lock/unlock switch RH controls each front power window motor for open and the power window will be lowered about 150 mm (5.91 in). POWER WINDOW CONTROL BY THE FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) When ignition switch is OFF, front power window LH and RH can be opened or closed by turning the front door key cylinder LH to the UNLOCK/LOCK position for more than 3 seconds. ● Front power windows can be opened as the door key cylinder is kept fully turned to the UNLOCK position. ● Front power windows can be closed as the door key cylinder is kept fully turned to the LOCK position. ● While performing open/close operation for the windows, power window is stopped when the door key cylinder is placed in the NEUTRAL position. ● When the ignition switch is turned ON while the power window opening operation is performed, the power window opening stops. CAN Communication System Description EIS004CA Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Revision: October 2004 GW-24 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM Schematic (King Cab) EIS004CB A B C D E F G H GW J K L M WIWA0610E Revision: October 2004 GW-25 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM Wiring Diagram — WINDOW — (King Cab) EIS004CC WIWA0611E Revision: October 2004 GW-26 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM A B C D E F G H GW J K L M WIWA0612E Revision: October 2004 GW-27 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM WIWA0613E Revision: October 2004 GW-28 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM A B C D E F G H GW J K L M WIWA0614E Revision: October 2004 GW-29 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM WIWA0615E Revision: October 2004 GW-30 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM Terminal and Reference Value for Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch (King Cab) EIS004CD Item Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) — Battery voltage Terminal Wire Color 1 W/R Battery power supply 5 BR Encoder power supply When ignition switch ON or power window timer operates Key position (Neutral → Locked) 5→0 5→0 6 L Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) lock signal 7 R Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) unlock signal Key position (Neutral → Unlocked) 8 G/R Front power window motor LH UP signal When power window motor is operated UP Driver side door window is between fully-open and just before fully-closed position (ON) 9 10 O W/L Limit switch signal RAP signal Driver side door window is between just before fully-closed position and fully-closed position (OFF) C D Battery voltage E 0 F 5 G Battery voltage Within 45 seconds after ignition switch is turned to OFF Battery voltage More than 45 seconds after ignition switch is turned to OFF 0 When front door LH or RH open or power window timer operates 0 G/W Front power window motor LH DOWN signal When power window motor is operated DOWN 12 LG/W Power window serial link When ignition switch ON or power window timer operates B 10 When ignition switch ON 11 A H GW Battery voltage J K L PIIA2344J M When power window motor operates 13 G/Y Encoder pulse signal 14 W/B Limit switch and encoder ground — 0 15 B Ground — 0 OCC3383D Terminal and Reference Value for Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH (King Cab) EIS004CE Terminal Wire Color 3 W/B Limit switch and encoder ground 4 G/R Encoder power supply Revision: October 2004 Item Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) — 0 When ignition switch ON or power window timer operates GW-31 10 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Terminal Wire Color Item 8 L Front power window motor RH UP signal When power window motor is operated UP Battery voltage 9 G Front power window motor RH DOWN signal When power window motor is operated DOWN Battery voltage 10 W/R 11 B 12 G/Y Battery power supply — Battery voltage Ground — 0 Encoder pulse signal When power window motor operates OCC3383D 15 16 G/W LG/W Limit switch signal Power window serial link Passenger side door window is between fully-open and just before fully-closed position (ON) 0 Passenger side door window is between just before fully-closed position and fully-closed position (OFF) 5 When ignition switch is ON or power window timer operating PIIA2344J Revision: October 2004 GW-32 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM Terminal and Reference Value for BCM (King Cab) EIS004CF A Terminal Wire Color Item 11 O Ignition switch (ACC or ON) 12 R/L Front door switch RH signal Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) B Ignition switch (ACC or ON position) Battery voltage ON (Open) Battery voltage OFF (Close) C 0 D 22 G Power window serial link When ignition switch ON or power window timer operates E PIIA2344J 38 W/L Ignition switch (ON or START) 47 SB Front door switch LH signal 67 B 68 W/L Ignition switch (ON or START position) Battery voltage ON (Open) Battery voltage OFF (Close) Ground RAP signal 0 — F G 0 When ignition switch ON Battery voltage Within 45 seconds after ignition switch is turned to OFF Battery voltage More than 45 seconds after ignition switch is turned to OFF 0 When front door LH or RH is open or power window timer operates 0 H GW J 69 W/R Power window power supply — Battery voltage 70 W/B Battery power supply — Battery voltage K L M Revision: October 2004 GW-33 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM Schematic (Crew Cab) EIS004CG WIWA0616E Revision: October 2004 GW-34 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM Wiring Diagram — WINDOW — (Crew Cab) EIS004CH A B C D E F G H GW J K L M WIWA0617E Revision: October 2004 GW-35 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM WIWA0618E Revision: October 2004 GW-36 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM A B C D E F G H GW J K L M WIWA0619E Revision: October 2004 GW-37 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM WIWA0620E Revision: October 2004 GW-38 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM A B C D E F G H GW J K L M WIWA0621E Revision: October 2004 GW-39 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM WIWA0622E Revision: October 2004 GW-40 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM A B C D E F G H GW J K L M WIWA0623E Revision: October 2004 GW-41 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM LIWA0529E Revision: October 2004 GW-42 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM Terminal and Reference Value for Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch (Crew Cab) EIS004CI Terminal 1 2 Wire Color R/Y Item Rear power window LH UP signal Condition When rear LH switch in main power window and door lock/unlock switch is operated UP W/B Limit switch and encoder ground 3 R/B Rear power window LH DOWN signal When rear LH switch in main power window and door lock/unlock switch is operated DOWN 4 L Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) lock signal Key position (Neutral → Locked) 5 L Rear power window RH UP signal When rear RH switch in main power window and door lock/unlock switch is operated UP 6 R Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) unlock signal Key position (Neutral → Unlocked) 7 R Rear power window RH DOWN signal 8 G/R Front power window motor LH UP signal 9 10 O W/L Limit switch signal RAP signal — Voltage (V) (Approx.) B Battery voltage C 0 D Battery voltage 5→0 E Battery voltage F 5→0 G When rear RH switch in main power window and door lock/unlock switch is operated DOWN Battery voltage H When power window motor is operated UP Battery voltage Driver side door window is between fully-open and just before fully-closed position (ON) 0 Driver side door window is between just before fully-closed position and fully-closed position (OFF) 5 K Battery voltage Within 45 seconds after ignition switch is turned to OFF Battery voltage More than 45 seconds after ignition switch is turned to OFF 0 When front door LH or RH open or power window timer operates 0 G/W Front power window motor LH DOWN signal When power window motor is operated DOWN 13 G/Y Encoder pulse signal When power window motor operates L M Battery voltage OCC3383D GW-43 GW J When ignition switch ON 11 Revision: October 2004 A 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM Terminal Wire Color 14 LG/W Item Power window serial link Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) When ignition switch ON or power window timer operates PIIA2344J 15 BR 17 B 19 W/R Encoder power supply When ignition switch ON or power window timer operates 10 Ground — 0 Battery power supply — Battery voltage Terminal and Reference Value for Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH (Crew Cab) EIS004CJ Item Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) — 0 Terminal Wire Color 3 W/B Limit switch and encoder ground 4 G/R Encoder power supply When ignition switch ON or power window timer operates 10 8 L Front power window motor RH UP signal When power window motor is operated UP Battery voltage 9 G Front power window motor RH DOWN signal When power window motor is operated DOWN Battery voltage 10 W/R 11 B 12 G/Y Battery power supply — Battery voltage Ground — 0 Encoder pulse signal When power window motor operates OCC3383D 15 16 G/W LG/W Limit switch signal Power window serial link Passenger side door window is between fully-open and just before fully-closed position (ON) 0 Passenger side door window is between just before fully-closed position and fully-closed position (OFF) 5 When ignition switch is ON or power window timer operating PIIA2344J Revision: October 2004 GW-44 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM Terminal and Reference Value for BCM (Crew Cab) EIS004CK A Terminal Wire Color Item 11 O Ignition switch (ACC or ON) 12 R/L Front door switch RH signal Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) B Ignition switch (ACC or ON position) Battery voltage ON (Open) Battery voltage OFF (Close) C 0 D 22 G Power window serial link When ignition switch ON or power window timer operates E PIIA2344J 38 W/L Ignition switch (ON or START) 47 SB Front door switch LH signal 67 B 68 W/L Ignition switch (ON or START position) Battery voltage ON (Open) Battery voltage OFF (Close) Ground RAP signal 0 — F G 0 When ignition switch ON Battery voltage Within 45 seconds after ignition switch is turned to OFF Battery voltage More than 45 seconds after ignition switch is turned to OFF 0 When front door LH or RH is open or power window timer operates 0 H GW J 69 W/R Power window power supply — Battery voltage 70 W/B Battery power supply — Battery voltage K L M Revision: October 2004 GW-45 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM Work Flow 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. EIS004CL Check the symptom and customer's requests. Understand the outline of system. Refer to GW-20, "System Description" . According to the trouble diagnosis chart, repair or replace the cause of the malfunction. Refer to GW-48, "Trouble Diagnoses Symptom Chart (King Cab)" , GW-49, "Trouble Diagnoses Symptom Chart (Crew Cab)" . Does power window system operate normally? Yes, GO TO 5, If No, GO TO 3. Inspection End. CONSULT-II Function (BCM) EIS004CM CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode WORK SUPPORT DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part SELF-DIAG RESULTS CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER CONFIGURATION Content Changes setting of each function. Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. BCM part number can be read. Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. BBIA0369E 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. BCIA0029E Revision: October 2004 GW-46 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM 4. Touch “BCM”. If “BCM” is not indicated, refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . A B C BCIA0030E D 5. Touch “RETAINED PWR”. E F G LIIA0163E 6. Select diagnosis mode. “WORK SUPPORT”, "DATA MONITOR" and “ACTIVE TEST” are available. H GW J BCIA0031E K ACTIVE TEST Test Item Description This test is able to supply RAP signal (power) from BCM (body control module) to power window system and power sunroof system (if equipped). Those systems can be operated when turning on “RETAINED PWR” on CONSULT-II screen even if the ignition switch is turned OFF. RETAINED PWR NOTE: During this test, CONSULT-II can be operated with ignition switch in OFF position. “RETAINED PWR” should be turned “ON” or “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen when ignition switch is ON. Then turn ignition switch OFF to check retained power operation. CONSULT-II might be stuck if “RETAINED PWR” is turned “ON” or “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen when ignition switch is OFF. WORK SUPPORT Work item RETAINED PWR Description RAP signal’s power supply period can be changed by mode setting. Selects RAP signal’s power supply period between three steps ● MODE1 (45 sec.) / MODE2 (OFF) / MODE 3 (2 min.). DATA MONITOR Work item IGN ON SW Revision: October 2004 Description Indicates (ON / OFF) condition of ignition switch GW-47 2005 Titan L M POWER WINDOW SYSTEM DOOR SW-DR Indicates (ON / OFF) condition of front door switch driver side DOOR SW-AS Indicates (ON / OFF) condition of front door switch passenger side Trouble Diagnoses Symptom Chart (King Cab) ● EIS004CN Check that other systems using the signal of the following systems operate normally. Symptom None of the power windows can be operated using any switch Front power window LH alone does not operate Front power window RH alone does not operate Repair order Refer to page 1. BCM power supply and ground circuit check GW-50 2. Main power window and door lock/unlock power supply and ground circuit check GW-51 3. Power window serial link check GW-73 4. Replace BCM. BCS-19 1. Front power window motor LH circuit check GW-55 2. Replace main power window and door lock/ unlock switch EI-32 1. Power window and door lock/unlock switch RH power supply and ground circuit check GW-53 2. Power window serial link check GW-73 3. Front power window motor RH circuit check GW-55 4. Replace BCM. BCS-19 1. Door window sliding part malfunction Anti-pinch system does not operate normally (LH) ● A foreign material adheres to window glass or glass run rubber. ● Glass run rubber wear or deformation. ● Sash is tilted too much, or not enough. — 2. Limit switch adjusting GW-86 3. Limit switch circuit check LH GW-56 4. Encoder circuit check LH GW-61 1. Door window sliding part malfunction Anti-pinch system does not operate normally (RH) Power window retained power operation does not operate properly Does not operate by front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) Power window lock switch does not function Revision: October 2004 ● A foreign material adheres to window glass or glass run rubber. ● Glass run rubber wear or deformation. ● Sash is tilted too much, or not enough. — 2. Limit switch adjusting GW-86 3. Limit switch circuit check RH GW-59 4. Encoder circuit check RH GW-65 1. Check the retained power operation mode setting. GW-47 2. Door switch check GW-67 3. Replace BCM. BCS-19 1. Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) check GW-69 2. Replace main power window and door lock/ unlock switch 1. Power window lock switch circuit check GW-48 EI-32 GW-73 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses Symptom Chart (Crew Cab) ● EIS004CO A Check that other systems using the signal of the following systems operate normally. Symptom None of the power windows can be operated using any switch Front power window LH alone does not operate Front power window RH alone does not operate Repair order Refer to page 1. BCM power supply and ground circuit check GW-50 2. Main power window and door lock/unlock power supply and ground circuit check GW-51 3. Power window serial link check GW-76 4. Replace BCM. BCS-19 1. Front power window motor LH circuit check GW-55 2. Replace main power window and door lock/ unlock switch EI-32 1. Power window and door lock/unlock switch RH power supply and ground circuit check GW-53 2. Power window serial link check GW-76 3. Front power window motor RH circuit check GW-55 4. Replace BCM. BCS-19 Rear power window LH alone does not operate 1. Rear power window motor LH circuit check GW-78 Rear power window RH alone does not operate 1. Rear power window motor RH circuit check GW-80 B C D E F G 1. Door window sliding part malfunction ● Anti-pinch system does not operate normally (Front LH) A foreign material adheres to window glass or glass run rubber. ● Glass run rubber wear or deformation. ● Sash is tilted too much, or not enough. — H GW 2. Limit switch adjusting GW-86 3. Limit switch circuit check LH GW-58 4. Encoder circuit check LH GW-63 J — K 2. Limit switch adjusting GW-86 L 3. Limit switch circuit check RH GW-59 4. Encoder circuit check RH GW-65 1. Check the retained power operation mode setting. GW-47 2. Door switch check GW-67 3. Replace BCM. BCS-19 1. Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) check GW-71 1. Door window sliding part malfunction Anti-pinch system does not operate normally (Front RH) Power window retained power operation does not operate properly Does not operate by front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) ● A foreign material adheres to window glass or glass run rubber. ● Glass run rubber wear or deformation. ● Sash is tilted too much, or not enough. 2. Replace main power window and door lock/ unlock switch EI-32 Power window lock switch does not function 1. Power window lock switch circuit check GW-76 Rear power drop glass does not operate 1. Rear power drop glass circuit check GW-81 Rear power drop glass does not open 1. Rear power drop glass DOWN relay check GW-83 Rear power drop glass does not close 1. Rear power drop glass UP relay check GW-82 Revision: October 2004 GW-49 2005 Titan M POWER WINDOW SYSTEM BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check EIS004CP 1. CHECK FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK Check 50A fusible link (letter f located in the fuse and fusible link box). Check 10A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. Check 10A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box). NOTE: Refer to GW-19, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer toPG3, "PRECAUTIONS" 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between BCM connector M18, M20 terminals 38, 70 and ground. 11 (O) - Ground 38 (W/L) - Ground 70 (W/B) - Ground : Battery voltage : Battery voltage : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. WIIA0504E 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM. Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 67 and ground. 67 (B) - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Power supply and ground circuit is OK. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA0915E Revision: October 2004 GW-50 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check (King Cab) EIS004CQ A 1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminals 1, 10 and ground. 1 (W/R) - Ground 10 (W/L) - Ground B C : Battery voltage : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. D E LIIA0603E F 2. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Check continuity between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 15 and ground. 15 (B) - Ground G H : Continuity should exist. GW OK or NG OK >> Power supply and ground circuit are OK. NG >> Repair or replace harness. J K LIIA0604E 3. CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT L 1. 2. M Disconnect BCM. Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminals 68, 69 and main power window and door lock/ unlock switch connector D7 terminals 1, 10. 68 (W/L) - 10 (W/L) 69 (W/R) - 1 (W/R) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. WIIA0505E Revision: October 2004 GW-51 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM 4. CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Connect BCM. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminals 68, 69 and ground. 68 (W/L) - Ground 69 (W/R) - Ground : Battery voltage : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> Check the condition of the harness and the connector. NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . LIIA0917E Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check (Crew Cab) EIS004CR 1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 10, D8 terminal 19 and ground. 10 (W/L) - Ground 19 (W/R) - Ground : Battery voltage : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. LIIA0307E 2. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Check continuity between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D8 terminal 17 and ground. 17 (B) - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Power supply and ground circuit are OK. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA1253E Revision: October 2004 GW-52 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM 3. CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM. Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminals 68, 69 and main power window and door lock/ unlock switch connector D7 terminal 10 and D8 terminal 19. 68 (W/L) - 10 (W/L) 69 (W/R) - 19 (W/R) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. A B C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. D E WIIA0506E 4. CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. F Connect BCM. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminals 68, 69 and ground. 68 (W/L) - Ground 69 (W/R) - Ground G : Battery voltage : Battery voltage H OK or NG OK >> Check the condition of the harness and the connector. NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . GW J LIIA0917E Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check K EIS004CS 1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. L Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 10 and ground. 10 (W/R) - Ground : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. LIIA1257E Revision: October 2004 GW-53 2005 Titan M POWER WINDOW SYSTEM 2. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Check continuity between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 11 and ground. 11 (B) - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Power supply and ground circuit are OK. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA1258E 3. CHECK POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM. Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 69 and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 10. 69 (W/R) - 10 (W/R) : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. WIIA0507E 4. CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Connect BCM. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminal 69 and ground. 69 (W/R) - Ground : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> Check the condition of the harness and the connector NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . WIIA0508E Revision: October 2004 GW-54 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM Front Power Window Motor LH Circuit Check EIS004CT 1. CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminals 8, 11 and ground. Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) 8 (G/R) D7 Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) UP Battery voltage DOWN 0 UP 0 DOWN Battery voltage (-) Ground 11 (G/W) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" . C D E LIIA0317E F 2. CHECK POWER WINDOW MOTOR CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. G Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch and front power window motor LH. Check continuity between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminals 8, 11 and front power window motor LH connector D9 terminals 1, 2. 8 (G/R) - 2 (G/R) 11 (G/W) - 1 (G/W) B : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. H GW OK or NG OK >> Replace front power window motor LH. Refer to GW-85, "FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. J K LIIA1260E Power Window Motor RH Circuit Check EIS004CU L 1. CHECK POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH RH OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminals 8, 9 and ground. Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) 9 (G) D105 Ground 8 (L) Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) UP 0 DOWN Battery voltage UP Battery voltage DOWN 0 (-) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" . Revision: October 2004 GW-55 LIIA1261E 2005 Titan M POWER WINDOW SYSTEM 2. CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR RH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front power window motor RH and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Check continuity between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminals 8, 9 and front power window motor RH connector D104 terminals 1, 2. 8 (L) - 2 (L) 9 (G) - 1 (G) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front power window motor RH. Refer to GW-85, "FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA1262E Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (King Cab) EIS004CV 1. CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH LIMIT SIGNAL 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 9 and ground. Terminal (Wire color) Connector D7 (+) 9 (O) Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Driver side door window is between fully-open and just before fully-closed position (ON) 0 Driver side door window is between just before fullyclosed position and fullyclosed position (OFF) 5 (-) Ground LIIA0339E OK or NG OK >> Limit switch circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH LIMIT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front power window motor LH. Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 5 and ground. 5 (O) - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 5. WIIA0509E Revision: October 2004 GW-56 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM 3. CHECK LIMIT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT A Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 6 and ground. 6 (W/B) - Ground : Continuity should exist. B OK or NG OK >> Replace front power window motor LH. Refer to GW-85, "FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR" . NG >> GO TO 4. C D LIIA0923E E 4. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 6 and main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 14. 6 (W/B) - 14 (W/B) : Continuity should exist. F G OK or NG OK >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. H GW WIIA0510E J 5. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 5 and main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 9. 5 (O) - 9 (O) : Continuity should exist. L OK or NG OK >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. M LIIA0925E Revision: October 2004 GW-57 K 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab) EIS004CW 1. CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH LIMIT SIGNAL 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 9 and ground. Connector Terminal (Wire color) (+) D7 9 (O) Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Driver side door window is between fully-open and just before fully-closed position (ON) 0 Driver side door window is between just before fullyclosed position and fullyclosed position (OFF) 5 (-) Ground LIIA0339E OK or NG OK >> Limit switch circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH LIMIT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front power window motor LH. Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 5 and ground. 5 (O) - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 5. WIIA0509E 3. CHECK LIMIT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 6 and ground. 6 (W/B) - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front power window motor LH. Refer to GW-85, "FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR" . NG >> GO TO 4. LIIA0923E Revision: October 2004 GW-58 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM 4. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. A Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 6 and main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 2. 6 (W/B) - 2 (W/B) B : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. C D E WIIA0511E 5. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. F Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 5 and main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 9. 5 (O) - 9 (O) G : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. H GW J LIIA0925E Limit Switch Circuit Check Front RH EIS004CX 1. CHECK POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH RH LIMIT SIGNAL 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 15 and ground. Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) D105 15 (G/W) Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Passenger side door window is between fully-open and just before fully-closed position (ON) 0 Passenger side door window is between just before fullyclosed position and fullyclosed position (OFF) 5 (-) Ground GW-59 L M LIIA1263E OK or NG OK >> Limit switch circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 K 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM 2. CHECK LIMIT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front power window motor RH. Check continuity between front power window motor RH connector D104 terminal 5 and ground. 5 (G/W) - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 5. WIIA0509E 3. CHECK LIMIT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between front power window motor RH connector D104 terminal 6 and ground. 6 (W/B) - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front power window motor RH. Refer to GW-85, "FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR" . NG >> GO TO 4. LIIA0923E 4. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. Disconnect power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Check continuity between front power window motor RH connector D104 terminal 6 and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 3. 6 (W/B) - 3 (W/B) : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. WIIA0512E Revision: October 2004 GW-60 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM 5. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. A Disconnect power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Check continuity between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 15 and front power window motor RH connector D104 terminal 5. 15 (G/W) - 5 (G/W) B : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. C D E LIIA1265E Encoder Circuit Check Front LH (King Cab) EIS004CY 1. CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front power window motor LH. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 4 and ground. 4 (BR) - Ground F G H : Approx. 10V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. GW J K WIIA0513E 2. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. 3. L Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 4 and main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 5. 4 (BR) - 5 (BR) : Continuity should exist. LIIA1160E OK or NG OK >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: October 2004 GW-61 2005 Titan M POWER WINDOW SYSTEM 3. CHECK ENCODER GROUND 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 6 and ground. 6 (W/B) - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. LIIA0923E 4. CHECK ENCODER GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 6 and main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 14. 6 (W/B) - 14 (W/B) : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. WIIA0510E 5. CHECK ENCODER SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Connect front power window motor LH. Turn ignition switch ON. Check the signal between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector and ground with oscilloscope. Connector D7 Terminals (Wire color) (+) (-) 13 (G/Y) Ground Condition Signal Opening OCC3383D LIIA0364E OK or NG OK >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" . NG >> GO TO 6. Revision: October 2004 GW-62 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM 6. CHECK ENCODER CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front power window motor LH and main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 3 and main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 13. 3 (G/Y) - 13 (G/Y) : Continuity should exist. B C OK or NG OK >> Replace front power window motor LH. Refer to GW-85, "FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. D E LIIA0937E F Encoder Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab) EIS004CZ 1. CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. 4. G Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front power window motor LH. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 4 and ground. 4 (BR) - Ground H : Approx. 10V GW OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. J K WIIA0513E 2. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY L 1. 2. 3. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 4 and main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 15. 4 (BR) - 15 (BR) : Continuity should exist. LIIA0936E OK or NG OK >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: October 2004 GW-63 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM 3. CHECK ENCODER GROUND 1. 2. Disconnect front power window motor LH. Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 6 and ground. 6 (W/B) - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. LIIA0923E 4. CHECK ENCODER GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 6 and main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 2. 6 (W/B) - 2 (W/B) : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. WIIA0511E 5. CHECK ENCODER SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Connect front power window motor LH. Turn ignition switch ON. Check the signal between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector and ground with oscilloscope. Connector D7 Terminals (Wire color) (+) (-) 13 (G/Y) Ground Condition Signal Opening OCC3383D LIIA0364E OK or NG OK >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" . NG >> GO TO 6. Revision: October 2004 GW-64 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM 6. CHECK ENCODER CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front power window motor LH and main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Check continuity between front power window motor LH connector D9 terminal 3 and main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 13. 3 (G/Y) - 13 (G/Y) : Continuity should exist. B C OK or NG OK >> Replace front power window motor LH. Refer to GW-85, "FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. D E LIIA0937E F Encoder Circuit Check Front RH EIS004D0 1. CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR RH POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. 4. G Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front power window motor RH. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front power window motor RH connector D104 terminal 4 and ground. 4 (G/R) - Ground H : Approx. 10V GW OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. J K WIIA0513E 2. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY L 1. 2. 3. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front power window motor RH and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Check continuity between front power window motor RH connector D104 terminal 4 and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 4. 4 (G/R) - 4 (G/R) : Continuity should exist. LIIA1266E OK or NG OK >> Replace power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: October 2004 GW-65 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM 3. CHECK ENCODER GROUND 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between front power window motor RH connector D104 terminal 6 and ground. 6 (W/B) - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. LIIA0923E 4. CHECK ENCODER GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Check continuity between front power window motor RH connector D104 terminal 6 and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 3. 6 (W/B) - 3 (W/B) : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. WIIA0512E 5. CHECK ENCODER SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Connect front power window motor RH. Turn ignition switch ON. Check the signal between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector and ground with oscilloscope. Connector D105 Terminals (Wire color) (+) (-) 12 (G/Y) Ground Condition Signal Opening OCC3383D LIIA1267E OK or NG OK >> Replace power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" . NG >> GO TO 6. Revision: October 2004 GW-66 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM 6. CHECK ENCODER CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front power window motor RH and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Check continuity between front power window motor RH connector D104 terminal 3 and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 12. 3 (G/Y) - 12 (G/Y) : Continuity should exist. B C OK or NG OK >> Replace front power window motor RH. Refer to GW-85, "FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. D E LIIA1268E F Door Switch Check EIS004D1 1. CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Check front door switches (“DOOR SW-DR” and “DOOR SW-AS”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Monitor item G H Condition DOOR SW-DR DOOR SW-AS OPEN : ON CLOSE : OFF OPEN : ON CLOSE : OFF GW J K PIIA2464E Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check voltage between BCM connector and ground. M Terminals (Wire color) Item Connector Front RH M19 (+) (–) 12 (R/L) Ground Front LH M20 L Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) OPEN 0 CLOSE Battery voltage OPEN 0 CLOSE Battery voltage 47 (SB) OK or NG OK >> Front door switches are OK. NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 WIIA0515E GW-67 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM 2. CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front door switch LH or RH and BCM. Check continuity between front door switch connector B8 (LH) or B108 (RH) terminal 2 and BCM connector M19 terminal 47 (LH) or connector M18 terminal 12 (LH). Front door switch LH 2 (SB) - 47 (SB) Front door switch RH 2 (R/L) - 12 (R/L) 4. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between front door switch connector B8 (LH) or B108 (RH) terminal 2 and ground. 2 (SB or R/L) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA0947E 3. CHECK DOOR SWITCH Check continuity between each front door switch terminal 2 and body ground part of front door switch. Terminal 2 Body ground part of front door switch Door switch Continuity Pushed No Released Yes OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Replace malfunctioning front door switch. LIIA0948E Revision: October 2004 GW-68 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) EIS004D2 1. CHECK FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) INPUT SIGNAL ● A With CONSULT-II Check front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) (“KEY CYL LK SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM” with CONSULT-II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" . B C “KEY CYL LK-SW” should be “ON” when key inserted in door key cylinder is turned to lock. D E LIIA0047E ● Check front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) (“KEY CYL UN-SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM” with CONSULT-II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" . F “KEY CYL UN-SW” should be “ON” when key inserted in door key cylinder was turned to unlock. G H LIIA0050E GW Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check voltage between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector and ground. Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) 6 (L) D7 Ground 7 (R) Key position Voltage (V) (Approx.) Neutral / Lock 5 Lock 0 Neutral / Unlock 5 Unlock 0 (–) OK or NG OK >> Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 GW-69 J K L M LIIA1161E 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM 2. CHECK FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch and front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch). Check continuity between main power window and door lock/ unlock switch connector D7 terminals 6, 7 and front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) connector D14 terminals 1, 6. 7 (R) - 6 (R) 6 (L) - 1 (L) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA1602E 3. CHECK FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) GROUND Check continuity between front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) connector D14 terminal 5 and ground. 5 (B) - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. WIIA0516E 4. CHECK FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) Check continuity between front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) terminals 1, 6 and 5. Terminals 6 5 1 Key position Continuity Neutral / Lock No Unlock Yes Neutral / Unlock No Lock Yes OK or NG OK >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" . NG >> Replace front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch). Refer to BL-127, "Removal and Installation" . Revision: October 2004 GW-70 WIIA0517E 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) EIS004D3 1. CHECK FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) INPUT SIGNAL ● A With CONSULT-II Check front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) (“KEY CYL LK SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM” with CONSULT-II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" . B C “KEY CYL LK-SW” should be “ON” when key inserted in door key cylinder is turned to lock. D E LIIA0047E ● Check front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) (“KEY CYL UN-SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM” with CONSULT-II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" . F “KEY CYL UN-SW” should be “ON” when key inserted in door key cylinder was turned to unlock. G H LIIA0050E GW Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check voltage between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector and ground. Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) 6 (R) D7 Ground 4 (L) Key position Voltage (V) (Approx.) Neutral / Lock 5 Lock 0 Neutral / Unlock 5 Unlock 0 (–) OK or NG OK >> Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 GW-71 J K L M LIIA1269E 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM 2. CHECK FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch and front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch). Check continuity between main power window and door lock/ unlock switch connector D7 terminals 4, 6 and front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) connector D14 terminals 1, 6. 6 (R) - 6 (R) 4 (L) - 1 (L) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA1571E 3. CHECK FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) GROUND Check continuity between front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) connector D14 terminal 5 and ground. 5 (B) - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. WIIA0516E 4. CHECK FRONT DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY LH (KEY CYLINDER SWITCH) Check continuity between front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) terminals 1, 6 and 5. Terminals 6 5 1 Key position Continuity Neutral / Lock No Unlock Yes Neutral / Unlock No Lock Yes OK or NG OK >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" . NG >> Replace front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch). Refer to BL-127, "Removal and Installation" . Revision: October 2004 GW-72 WIIA0517E 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM Power Window Serial Link Check Front LH and RH (King Cab) EIS004D4 1. CHECK SERIAL LINK OUTPUT SIGNAL A With CONSULT-II Check door lock/unlock switch (CDL LOCK SW”, “CDL UNLOCK SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM” with CONSULT-II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" . ● When door lock and unlock switch is turned to LOCK CDL LOCK SW ● B C : ON When door lock and unlock switch is turned to UNLOCK CDL UNLOCK SW : ON D E PIIA6538E Without CONSULT-II 1. Remove key from ignition switch, and make sure the driver side and passenger side doors are closed. 2. Check the signal between BCM connector and ground with oscilloscope when door lock and unlock switch (front LH and front RH) is turned to “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”. 3. Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 second just after door lock and unlock switch (front LH and front RH) is turned to “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”. Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) F G H GW Signal (–) J M18 22 (G) Ground PIIA6379E K PIIA2344E L OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. Revision: October 2004 M GW-73 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM 2. CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL Check power window serial link (“POWER WINDOW DOWN”) in “ACTIVE TEST” mode for "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM" with CONSULT-II. Refer to BL-71, "Active Test" . When “ACTIVE TEST” is executed, the driver side and passenger side windows should lower. PIIA3080E OK or NG OK >> Further inspection is necessary. Refer to symptom chart. NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . 3. CHECK POWER WINDOW SWITCH GROUND 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Check continuity between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 15 and ground. 15 (B) - Ground : Continuity should exist. LIIA0604E 4. Check continuity between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 11 and ground. 11 (B) - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA1270E Revision: October 2004 GW-74 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM 4. CHECK POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect BCM. Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 12. 22 (G) - 12 (LG/W) B : Continuity should exist. C D E WIIA0518E 3. Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 16. 22 (G) - 16 (LG/W) F : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch or power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. G H GW WIIA0519E J K L M Revision: October 2004 GW-75 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM Power Window Serial Link Check Front LH and RH (Crew Cab) EIS004D5 1. CHECK SERIAL LINK OUTPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Check door lock/unlock switch (CDL LOCK SW”, “CDL UNLOCK SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM” with CONSULT-II. Refer to BL-33, "DATA MONITOR" . ● When door lock and unlock switch is turned to LOCK CDL LOCK SW ● : ON When door lock and unlock switch is turned to UNLOCK CDL UNLOCK SW : ON PIIA6538E Without CONSULT-II 1. Remove key from ignition switch, and make sure the driver side and passenger side doors are closed. 2. Check the signal between BCM connector and ground with oscilloscope when door lock and unlock switch (front LH and front RH) is turned to “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”. 3. Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 second just after door lock and unlock switch (front LH and front RH) is turned to “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”. Connector M18 Terminals (Wire color) (+) (–) 22 (G) Ground Signal PIIA6379E PIIA2344E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. Revision: October 2004 GW-76 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM 2. CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL A Check power window serial link (“POWER WINDOW DOWN”) in “ACTIVE TEST” mode for "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM" with CONSULT-II. Refer to BL-71, "Active Test" . B When “ACTIVE TEST” is executed, the driver side and passenger side windows should lower. C D PIIA3080E OK or NG OK >> Further inspection is necessary. Refer to symptom chart. NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . F 3. CHECK POWER WINDOW SWITCH GROUND 1. 2. 3. G Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Check continuity between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D8 terminal 17 and ground. 17 (B) - Ground E H GW : Continuity should exist. J K LIIA0392E 4. L Check continuity between power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 11 and ground. 11 (B) - Ground M : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA1270E Revision: October 2004 GW-77 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM 4. CHECK POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM. Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminal 14. 22 (G) - 14 (LG/W) : Continuity should exist. WIIA0518E 3. Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 22 and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH connector D105 terminal 16. 22 (G) - 16 (LG/W) : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch or power window and door lock/unlock switch RH. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. WIIA0519E Rear Power Window Motor LH Circuit Check (Crew Cab) EIS004D6 1. CHECK REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect rear power window motor LH. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between rear power window motor LH connector D204 terminals 1, 2 and ground. Terminals (Wire color) Connector (+) (-) 2 (L) D204 Ground 1 (G) Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) UP Battery voltage DOWN 0 UP 0 DOWN Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> Replace rear power window motor LH. Refer to GW-88, "Rear Door Glass" . NG >> GO TO 2 Revision: October 2004 GW-78 LIIA0323E 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM 2. CHECK REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect rear power window switch LH. Check continuity between rear power window switch LH connector D203 terminals 4, 5 and rear power window motor LH connector D204 terminals 1, 2. 4 (G) - 1 (G) 5 (L) - 2 (L) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. B C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3 NG >> Repair or replace harness. D E WIIA0520E F 3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. Connect rear power window switch LH. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between rear power window switch LH connector D203 terminal 1 and ground. 1 (W/L) - Ground G : Battery voltage H OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. GW J LIIA0325E K 4. CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Confirm that power window lock switch is in unlocked position. Check continuity between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminals 1, 3 and connector D8 terminal 17. 1 (R/Y) – 17 (B) 3 (R/B) – 17 (B) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Repair or replace harness. NG >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" . LIIA0949E Revision: October 2004 GW-79 2005 Titan L M POWER WINDOW SYSTEM Rear Power Window Motor RH Circuit Check (Crew Cab) EIS004D7 1. CHECK REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect rear power window motor RH. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between rear power window motor RH connector D304 terminals 1, 2 and ground. Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) 2 (BR) D304 Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) UP Battery voltage DOWN 0 UP 0 DOWN Battery voltage (-) Ground 1 (Y/B) OK or NG OK >> Replace rear power window motor RH. Refer to GW-88, "Rear Door Glass" . NG >> GO TO 2. LIIA0323E 2. CHECK REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR RH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect rear power window switch RH. Check continuity between rear power window switch RH connector D303 terminals 4, 5 and rear power window motor RH connector D304 terminals 1, 2. 4 (Y/B) - 1 (Y/B) 5 (BR) - 2 (BR) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. WIIA0520E 3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. Connect rear power window switch RH. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between rear power window switch RH connector D303 terminal 1 and ground. 1 (W/L) - Ground : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA0325E Revision: October 2004 GW-80 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM 4. CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Confirm that power window lock switch is in unlocked position. Check continuity between main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector D7 terminals 5, 7 and connector D8 terminal 17. 5 (L) - 17 (B) 7 (R) - 17 (B) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. B C OK or NG OK >> Repair or replace harness. NG >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" . D E WIIA0521E F Rear Power Drop Glass Circuit Check EIS00590 1. CHECK REAR POWER DROP GLASS SWITCH OPERATION 1. 2. 3. G Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect rear power drop glass switch. Check continuity between rear power drop glass switch terminals 1, 3 and 5. H Terminal Connector Condition Continuity 3 Rear power drop glass switch is pressed UP. Yes 3 Rear power drop glass switch is pressed DOWN. Yes (+) (–) 1 5 M156 GW J OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace rear power drop glass switch. K LIIA1840E 2. CHECK REAR POWER DROP GLASS SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY L Check continuity between rear power drop glass switch connector M156 terminal 3 and ground. 3 (B) - Ground : Continuity should exist. M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA1841E Revision: October 2004 GW-81 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM 3. CHECK REAR POWER DROP GLASS SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Disconnect rear power drop glass motor. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between rear power drop glass motor connector B80 terminals 1, 4 and ground. Terminals (Wire color) Connector (+) (–) Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Up Battery voltage Down 0 Up 0 Down Battery voltage 1 (L/Y) B80 Ground 4 (B/R) OK or NG OK >> Replace rear power drop glass motor. Refer to GW-15, "REAR WINDOW GLASS AND REGULATOR" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. Rear Power Drop Glass Up Relay Check LIIA1842E EIS00591 1. CHECK REAR POWER DROP GLASS UP RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect rear power drop glass up relay. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between rear power drop glass up relay connector and ground. Terminals (Wire color) Connector (–) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Ground Battery voltage (+) 1 (W/L) M154 5 (L/B) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA1843E 2. CHECK REAR POWER DROP GLASS UP RELAY Check continuity between rear power drop glass down relay terminals 3 and 4, 3 and 5. Terminal 3 3 4 5 Condition Continuity 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 No No current supply Yes 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No current supply No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace rear power drop glass up relay. Revision: October 2004 GW-82 WIIA0291E 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM 3. CHECK REAR POWER DROP GLASS UP RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT A Check continuity between rear power drop glass up relay connector M154 terminal 4 and ground. 4 (B) - Ground B : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. C D LIIA1844E 4. CHECK REAR POWER DROP GLASS UP RELAY CIRCUIT 1. 2. E Disconnect rear power drop glass switch. Check continuity between rear power drop glass up relay connector M154 terminal 2 and rear power drop glass switch connector M156 terminal 1. 2 (G) - 1 (G) F : Continuity should exist. G OK or NG OK >> Replace rear power drop glass switch. NG >> Repair or replace harness. H LIIA1845E Rear Power Drop Glass Down Relay Check EIS00592 1. CHECK REAR POWER DROP GLASS UP RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 4. J Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect rear power drop glass down relay. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between rear power drop glass down relay connector and ground. Terminals (Wire color) Connector (–) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Ground Battery voltage (+) GW K L 1 (W/L) M155 5 (L/B) M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA1843E Revision: October 2004 GW-83 2005 Titan POWER WINDOW SYSTEM 2. CHECK REAR POWER DROP GLASS DOWN RELAY Check continuity between rear power drop glass down relay terminals 3 and 4, 3 and 5. Terminal 3 3 4 5 Condition Continuity 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 No No current supply Yes 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No current supply No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace rear power drop glass down relay. WIIA0291E 3. CHECK REAR POWER DROP GLASS DOWN RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between rear power drop glass down relay connector M155 terminal 4 and ground. 4 (B) - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA1844E 4. CHECK REAR POWER DROP GLASS DOWN RELAY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect rear power drop glass switch. Check continuity between rear power drop glass down relay connector M155 terminal 2 and rear power drop glass switch connector M156 terminal 5. 2 (L/W) - 5 (L/W) : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace rear power drop glass switch. NG >> Repair or replace harness. WIIA0522E Revision: October 2004 GW-84 2005 Titan FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Removal and Installation PFP:80300 A EIS00622 B C D E F G H GW LIIA0959E J FRONT DOOR GLASS Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the front door speaker. Refer to AV-65, "Removal and Installation of Front Door Speaker" . Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. Remove the inside seal. Remove the glass bolts. 6. While holding the front door glass, raise it at the rear end and pull the glass out of the sash toward the outside of the door. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 : 6.1 N·m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) GW-85 L M LIIA1687E Glass bolts K 2005 Titan FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Fitting Inspection ● ● Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove. Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)] and check that the clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen the regulator bolts, guide rail bolts, and glass and guide rail bolts to correct the glass position. FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Remove the front door speaker. Refer to AV-65, "Removal and Installation of Front Door Speaker" . Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. Operate the power window main switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. Remove the inside seal. Remove the glass bolts. Raise the front door glass and hold it in place with suitable tool. Disconnect the harness connector from the regulator assembly. Remove the bolts and the regulator assembly. Disassembly And Assembly Remove the regulator motor from the regulator assembly. Inspection After Removal Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or grease it. ● Wire wear ● Regulator deformation ● Grease condition for each sliding part The arrows in the figure show the application points of the body grease. LIIA0670E Installation 1. 2. 3. Install the regulator assembly. Refer to GW-86, "FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR" . Connect the harness connector to the regulator assembly. Align the glass and install the glass bolts. Glass bolts 4. 5. : 6.1 N·m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) Reset the limit switch. Refer to GW-86, "Setting of Limit Switch" . Install front door speaker. Refer to AV-65, "Removal and Installation of Front Door Speaker" . SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION Setting of Limit Switch If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in the motor). ● Removal and installation of the regulator. ● Removal and installation of the motor from the regulator. ● Removal and installation of the glass. ● Removal and installation of the glass run. Resetting After installing each component, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch. Revision: October 2004 GW-86 2005 Titan FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR 1. 2. Raise the glass to the top position. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the glass to the bottom position. 3. Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, if not, pull the switch using suitable tool. 4. Raise the glass to the top position. CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top position. A B C SIIA0347E D E F G H GW J K L M Revision: October 2004 GW-87 2005 Titan REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Rear Door Glass PFP:82300 EIS004DA REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to EI-33, "Rear Door - Crew Cab" . Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. Remove the inside seal. Remove the glass run from the partition glass. Remove the partition sash bolt (lower) and screw (upper) to remove the sash. Remove the glass bolts and the glass. Remove the partition glass from the panel. SIIA0290E INSTALLATION LIIA0960E 1. 2. 3. Install the partition glass in the panel. Install the partition sash. Install the glass from outside to ensure that it is in both the front and rear glass channels. Tighten glass the bolts to the specified torque. Glass bolts 4. 5. : 6.1 N·m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb) Install the inside seal. Install the rear door finisher. Refer to EI-33, "Rear Door - Crew Cab" . FITTING INSPECTION ● Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove. Revision: October 2004 GW-88 2005 Titan REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR ● Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)], and check that the clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen the regulator bolt, guide rail bolts, and glass and carrier plate bolts to correct the glass position. A B C D E F G H GW J K L M Revision: October 2004 GW-89 2005 Titan REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR Rear Door Glass Regulator EIS0062K REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to EI-33, "Rear Door - Crew Cab" . Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. Remove the inside seal. Remove the glass bolts, raise the glass and hold in place with suitable tool. SIIA0290E 5. 6. Remove the bolts and the regulator and guide channel from the panel. Disconnect the connector for the regulator assembly. SIIA0291E INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or grease it. ● Gear wear ● Regulator deformation ● Spring damage ● Grease condition for each sliding part INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 GW-90 2005 Titan SIDE WINDOW GLASS SIDE WINDOW GLASS Removal PFP:83300 A EIS004DB 1. 2. 3. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to EI-34, "Rear Door - King Cab" . If the window glass is to be reused, mark the body and the glass with mating marks. Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag. WARNING: When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands. CAUTION: ● When the side window glass is to be reused, do not use a cutting knife or power cutting tool. ● Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing. ● Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks. B C D E SBF034B F Installation EIS00596 G H GW J K L LIIA1244E Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it. ● While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed. ● Check gap along bottom to confirm that glass does not contact sheet metal. ● Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity. ● Install removed parts. WARNING: ● Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable. ● The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid contact with the skin and eyes. ● Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if inhaled. If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air. ● Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance of the glass in case of an accident. ● Revision: October 2004 GW-91 2005 Titan M SIDE WINDOW GLASS CAUTION: ● Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed on the box. ● Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator. ● Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off. ● The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidity. The curing time will increase under lower temperatures and lower humidities. Repairing Water Leaks for Side Window Glass EIS00597 Leaks can be repaired without removing or reinstalling glass. If water is leaking between urethane adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of leakage. This can be done by applying water to the side window area while pushing glass outward. To stop leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then urethane adhesive to the leak point. Revision: October 2004 GW-92 2005 Titan INSIDE MIRROR INSIDE MIRROR Wiring Diagram — I/MIRR — PFP:96321 A EIS004DC B C D E F G H GW J K L M WIWA0628E Revision: October 2004 GW-93 2005 Titan INSIDE MIRROR Removal and Installation 1. 2. 3. EIS004DD Remove connector cover. Slide the mirror upward to remove. Disconnect the connector. LIIA0277E 1. Inside mirror 2. Inside mirror finisher Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 GW-94 2005 Titan REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:25350 A EIS0059S B C D E F G H GW J K L M LIIA1986E Revision: October 2004 GW-95 2005 Titan REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER System Description EIS0059T The rear window defogger system is controlled by BCM (body control module) and IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room). The rear window defogger operates only for approximately 15 minutes. Power is supplied at all times ● through 15A fuse (Nos. 46 and 47, located in the IPDM E/R) ● to rear window defogger relay (located in the IPDM E/R), and ● through 15A fuse (No. 43, located in the IPDM E/R) (with heated mirrors) ● to heated mirror relay (located in the IPDM E/R) (with heated mirrors), and ● through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to BCM terminal 70. With the ignition switch turned to ON or START position, power is supplied ● through ignition switch ● to rear window defogger relay (located in the IPDM E/R), and ● through 10A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box) ● to BCM terminal 38, and ● through 10A fuse [No. 8, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to front air control terminal 11. Ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 67 ● to front air control terminal 1 ● through body grounds M57, M61 and M79 ● to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 59 ● through body grounds E9, E15 and E24. When front air control (rear window defogger switch) is turned to ON, ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 9 ● through front air control terminal 11 ● through front air control terminal 1 ● through body grounds M57, M61 and M79. Then rear window defogger switch is illuminated. Then BCM recognizes that rear window defogger switch is turned to ON. Then it sends rear window defogger switch signals to IPDM E/R and display control unit (with navigation) or display unit (without navigation) via CAN communication (CAN-H, CAN-L). When display control unit (with navigation) or display unit (without navigation) receives rear window defogger switch signals, and is displayed on the screen. When IPDM E/R receives rear window defogger switch signals, ground is supplied ● to rear window defogger relay (located in the IPDM E/R) ● through IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 59 ● through body grounds E9, E15 and E24. Then, rear window defogger relay is energized. With power and ground supplied, rear window defogger filaments heat and defog the rear window. If the rear power drop glass is lowered while the rear window defogger is ON, the rear window defogger will turn OFF. The rear window defogger will turn ON when the rear power drop glass is raised to the closed position if the rear window defogger switch is ON. When rear window defogger relay is turned to ON, (with door mirror defogger), power is supplied ● through heated mirror relay (located in the IPDM E/R) ● through IPDM E/R terminal 23 ● to door mirror defogger (LH and RH) terminal 10 (with automatic drive positioner), terminal 4 (without automatic drive positioner). Door mirror defogger (LH and RH) is grounded through body grounds M57, M61 and M79. With power and ground supplied, rear window defogger filaments heat and defog the rear window and door mirror defogger filaments heat and defog the mirror. Revision: October 2004 GW-96 2005 Titan REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CAN Communication System Description EIS0059U A Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" B C D E F G H GW J K L M Revision: October 2004 GW-97 2005 Titan REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Schematic EIS0059V WIWA0624E Revision: October 2004 GW-98 2005 Titan REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Wiring Diagram — DEF — EIS0059W A B C D E F G H GW J K L M WIWA0625E Revision: October 2004 GW-99 2005 Titan REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER WIWA0626E Revision: October 2004 GW-100 2005 Titan REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER A B C D E F G H GW J K L M WIWA0627E Revision: October 2004 GW-101 2005 Titan REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Terminal and Reference Values for BCM Terminal Wire color 9 Y/B Item EIS0059X Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Rear window defogger switch signal When rear window defogger switch is pressed. 0 When rear window defogger switch is OFF. 5 Ignition switch ON or START Ignition switch (ON or START position) 38 W/L 39 L CAN-H — — 40 P CAN-L — — Ground — 0 Battery power supply — Battery voltage 67 B 70 W/B Battery voltage Terminal and Reference Values for IPDM E/R Terminal Wire color 23 GR/W Item Heated mirror relay output signal Condition 4. 5. Voltage (V) (Approx.) When rear window defogger switch is ON. Battery voltage When rear window defogger switch is OFF. 0 38 B Ground (Power) — 0 39 L CAN-H — — 40 P CAN-L — — 59 B Ground (Signal) — 0 60 B Rear window defogger output signal When rear window defogger switch is ON. Battery voltage When rear window defogger switch is OFF. 0 Work Flow 1. 2. 3. EIS0059Y EIS0059Z Check the symptom and customer's requests. Understand the outline of system. Refer to GW-96, "System Description" . According to the trouble diagnosis chart, repair or replace the cause of the malfunction. Refer to GW-104, "Trouble Diagnoses Symptom Chart" . Does rear window defogger operate normally? YES: GO TO 5, NO: GO TO 3. Inspection End. Revision: October 2004 GW-102 2005 Titan REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CONSULT-II Function (BCM) EIS005A0 A CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode B WORK SUPPORT DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part Content SELF-DIAG RESULTS CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER CONFIGURATION Changes setting of each function. Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. C Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. BCM part number can be read. D Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. E CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector. F G H GW BBIA0369E 3. 4. J Turn ignition switch ON. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. K L M BCIA0029E 5. Touch “BCM”. If “BCM” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . BCIA0030E Revision: October 2004 GW-103 2005 Titan REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER 6. Touch “REAR DEFOGGER”. LIIA0153E 7. Select diagnosis mode, “DATA MONITOR” and “ACTIVE TEST”. BCIA0031E DATA MONITOR Display Item List Monitor item “Operation” Content REAR DEF SW “ON/OFF” Displays “Press (ON)/others (OFF)” status determined with the rear window defogger switch. IGN ON SW “ON/OFF” Displays “IGN (ON)/OFF” status determined with the ignition switch signal. ACTIVE TEST Display Item List Test item Content REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Gives a drive signal to the rear window defogger to activate it. Trouble Diagnoses Symptom Chart ● EIS005A1 Make sure other systems using the signal of the following systems operate normally. Symptom Diagnoses / Service procedure 1. BCM power supply and ground circuit check 2. IPDM E/R auto active test check Rear window defogger and door mirror defoggers do not operate. (With heated mirrors) 4. Rear window defogger circuit check GW-108 2. IPDM E/R auto active test check PG-28 GW-106 PG-22 3. Rear window defogger switch circuit check GW-107 4. Rear window defogger circuit check GW-108 5. Filament check GW-118 6. Replace IPDM E/R PG-28 1. Rear window defogger circuit check GW-108 2. Filament check GW-118 3. Replace IPDM E/R Revision: October 2004 PG-22 GW-107 1. BCM power supply and ground circuit check Rear window defogger does not operate but both of door mirror defoggers operate. (With heated mirrors) GW-106 3. Rear window defogger switch circuit check 5. Replace IPDM E/R Rear window defogger does not operate. (Without heated mirrors) Refer to page GW-104 PG-28 2005 Titan REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Symptom Both door mirror defoggers do not operate but rear window defogger operates. (With heated mirrors) Door mirror LH defogger does not operate. Diagnoses / Service procedure 1. Door mirror defogger power supply circuit check 2. Replace IPDM E/R 1. Door mirror LH defogger circuit check Refer to page GW-110, GW-112 PG-28 GW-114, GW-115 Door mirror RH defogger does not operate. 1. Door mirror RH defogger circuit check GW-116, GW-117 Rear window defogger switch does not light, and rear window defogger is not shown on the display, but rear window defogger operates. 1. Rear window defogger switch circuit check GW-107 A B C D E F G H GW J K L M Revision: October 2004 GW-105 2005 Titan REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check EIS005A2 1. CHECK FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK Check 10A fuse (No.59, located in the fuse and relay box) ● Check 50A fusible link (letter f, located in the fuse and fusible link box) NOTE: Refer to GW-106, "BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . ● 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between BCM connector M18, M20 terminals 38, 70 and ground. 70 (W/B) - Ground 38 (W/L) - Ground : Battery voltage : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA0914E 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM. Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 67 and ground. 67 (B) - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> BCM power supply and ground circuit is OK. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA0915E Revision: October 2004 GW-106 2005 Titan REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Rear Window Defogger Switch Circuit Check EIS005A3 1. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH OPERATION A With CONSULT-II Check (“REAR DEF SW”, “IGN ON SW”) in DATA MONITOR mode with CONSULT-II. B When rear window defogger switch is turned to ON REAR DEF SW : ON When ignition switch is turned to ON IGN ON SW : ON C D PIIA2373E Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between BCM connector and ground. Terminal (Wire color) Connector M18 (+) 9 (Y/B) Ground F Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Rear window defogger switch is pressed. 0 Rear window defogger switch is OFF. 5 (–) OK or NG OK >> Rear window defogger switch check is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. G H GW WIIA0523E J 2. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM and front air control. Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 9 and front air control connector M49 terminal 11. 9 (Y/B) - 11 (Y/B) 4. E K L : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between BCM connector M18 terminal 9 and ground 9 (Y/B) - Ground M : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA2035E Revision: October 2004 GW-107 2005 Titan REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER 3. CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Connect BCM. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 9 and ground. 9 (Y/B) - Ground : Approx. 5 OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-95, "CONTROL UNIT" . NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . WIIA0523E Rear Window Defogger Circuit Check EIS005A4 1. CHECK FUSES Check if any of the following fuses for IPDM E/R are blown. COMPONENT PARTS AMPERE FUSE NO. 15A 46 15A 47 IPDM E/R NOTE: Refer to GW-95, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse, refer to GW95, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location" . 2. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between IPDM E/R connector E124 terminal 60 and ground. 60 (B) - Ground : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . NG >> GO TO 3. WIIA0525E Revision: October 2004 GW-108 2005 Titan REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER 3. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER POWER CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. 3. 2 (B/W) - 60 (B/W) 4. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R and rear window defogger cut-off relay. Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector E124 terminal 60 and rear window defogger cut-off relay connector M152 terminal 2. : Continuity should exist. C Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector E124 terminal 60 and rear window defogger cut-off relay connector M152 terminal 3. 3 (B/W) - 60 (B/W) B D : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. E LIIA1987E F 4. INSPECTION OF REAR POWER WINDOW DEFOGGER CUT-OFF RELAY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect rear window defogger cut-off relay. Check continuity between rear window defogger cut-off relay terminals 3 and 5. Condition G H Continuity 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes No current supply No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace rear window defogger cut-out relay. GW SEF145X 5. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CUT-OFF RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. K Place rear power drop glass in the closed (UP) position. Check continuity between rear window defogger cut-off relay connector M152 terminal 1 and ground. 1 (W/R) - Ground L : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> GO TO 6. M LIIA1988E Revision: October 2004 J GW-109 2005 Titan REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER 6. CHECK REAR POWER DROP GLASS MOTOR (DEF CUT-OFF SWITCH) 1. 2. Disconnect rear power drop glass motor (def cut-off switch). Check continuity between rear power drop glass motor (def cut-off switch) terminals 2 and 3. Rear power drop glass position Terminal 2 3 Continuity Closed (UP) Yes Open (DOWN) more than 18 mm No OK or NG OK >> Repair or replace harness. NG >> Replace rear power drop glass motor (def cut-off switch). Refer to GW-15, "REAR WINDOW GLASS AND REGULATOR" . LIIA1989E 7. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Disconnect rear window defogger. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between rear window defogger connector B77 terminal 1 and ground. Connector Terminal (Wire color) (+) B77 Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Rear window defogger switch ON. Battery voltage Rear window defogger switch OFF. 0 (–) 1 (W/L) Ground OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA1847E 8. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Disconnect rear window defogger ground. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between rear window defogger connector B78 terminal 2 and ground. 2 (B) - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Check filament. Refer to GW-118, "Filament Check" . ● If filament is OK. Check the condition of the harness and the connector. ● If filament is NG. Repair filament. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA1848E Door Mirror Defogger Power Supply Circuit Check (Without Automatic Drive Positioner) EIS005A6 1. CHECK FUSE Check if the following fuse for IPDM E/R is blown. COMPONENT PARTS AMPERE FUSE NO. IPDM E/R 15A 43 Revision: October 2004 GW-110 2005 Titan REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER NOTE: Refer to GW-95, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location" . A OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to GW95, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location" . 2. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT B C Check voltage between IPDM E/R connector and ground. Connector E120 Terminal (Wire color) (+) 23 (GR/W) (–) Ground Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition Rear window defogger switch ON Battery voltage Rear window defogger switch OFF 0 D E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . F WIIA0526E G 3. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. H Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R and door mirror LH or RH. Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector E120 terminal 23 and door mirror connector D4 (LH) or GW D107 (RH) terminal 4. 23 (GR/W) - 4 (GR/W) : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. J K L WIIA0527E 4. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER GROUND CIRCUIT M Check continuity between each door mirror connector D4 (LH) or D107 (RH) terminal 6 and ground. 6 (B) - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA0970E Revision: October 2004 GW-111 2005 Titan REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER 5. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER Check continuity between each door mirror terminals 4 and 6. 4-6 : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Repair or replace harness. NG >> Replace malfunctioning door mirror LH or RH. Refer to GW-124, "Door Mirror Assembly" . WIIA0528E Door Mirror Defogger Power Supply Circuit Check (With Automatic Drive Positioner) EIS005A7 1. CHECK FUSE Check if the following fuse for IPDM E/R is blown. COMPONENT PARTS AMPERE FUSE NO. IPDM E/R 15A 43 NOTE: Refer to GW-95, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to GW95, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location" . 2. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT Check voltage between IPDM E/R connector and ground. Connector Terminal (Wire color) (+) E120 23 (GR/W) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition (–) Ground Rear window defogger switch ON Battery voltage Rear window defogger switch OFF 0 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . Revision: October 2004 GW-112 WIIA0526E 2005 Titan REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER 3. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R and door mirror LH or RH. Check continuity between IPDM E/R connector E120 terminal 23 and door mirror connector D4 (LH) or D107 (RH) terminal 10. 23 (GR/W) - 10 (GR/W) : Continuity should exist. B C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. D E WIIA0529E F 4. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between each door mirror connector D4 (LH) or D107 (RH) terminal 11 and ground. 11 (B) - Ground G : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace harness. H GW J WIIA0530E 5. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER K Check continuity between each door mirror terminals 10 and 11. 10 - 11 : Continuity should exist. L OK or NG OK >> Repair or replace harness. NG >> Replace malfunctioning door mirror LH or RH. M WIIA0531E Revision: October 2004 GW-113 2005 Titan REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Door Mirror LH Defogger Circuit Check (Without Automatic Drive Positioner) EIS005A8 1. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door mirror LH. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between door mirror LH connector and ground. Terminal (Wire color) Connector D4 (+) 4 (GR/W) Ground Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition (–) Rear window defogger switch ON Battery voltage Rear window defogger switch OFF 0 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace harness. WIIA0532E 2. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between door mirror LH connector D4 terminal 6 and ground. 6 (B) - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA0970E 3. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER Check continuity between each door mirror terminals 4 and 6. 4-6 : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Repair or replace harness. NG >> Replace malfunctioning door mirror LH or RH. Refer to GW-124, "Door Mirror Assembly" . WIIA0528E Revision: October 2004 GW-114 2005 Titan REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Door Mirror LH Defogger Circuit Check (With Automatic Drive Positioner) EIS005A9 1. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 4. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door mirror LH. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between door mirror LH connector and ground. Connector Terminal (Wire color) (+) D4 10 (GR/W) C Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition (–) Ground B D Rear window defogger switch ON Battery voltage Rear window defogger switch OFF 0 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace harness. E LIIA1456E F 2. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. G Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between door mirror LH connector D4 terminal 11 and ground. 11 (B) - Ground H : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. GW J LIIA1458E K 3. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER Check continuity between door mirror terminals 10 and 11. 10 - 11 L : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Repair or replace harness. NG >> Replace door mirror LH. Refer to GW-124, "Door Mirror Assembly" . M WIIA0531E Revision: October 2004 GW-115 2005 Titan REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Door Mirror RH Defogger Circuit Check (Without Automatic Drive Positioner) EIS005AA 1. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door mirror RH. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between door mirror RH connector and ground. Terminal (Wire color) Connector D107 (+) 4 (GR/W) Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Rear window defogger switch ON Battery voltage Rear window defogger switch OFF 0 (–) Ground OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace harness. WIIA0532E 2. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between door mirror RH connector D107 terminal 6 and ground. 6 (B) - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA0970E 3. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER Check continuity between each door mirror terminals 4 and 6. 4-6 : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Repair or replace harness. NG >> Replace door mirror RH. Refer to GW-124, "Door Mirror Assembly" . WIIA0528E Revision: October 2004 GW-116 2005 Titan REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Door Mirror RH Defogger Circuit Check (With Automatic Drive Positioner) EIS005AB 1. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 4. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door mirror RH. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between door mirror RH connector and ground. Connector Terminal (Wire color) (+) D107 10 (GR/W) Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Rear window defogger switch ON Battery voltage Rear window defogger switch OFF 0 (–) Ground B C D OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace harness. E LIIA1456E F 2. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. G Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between door mirror RH connector D107 terminal 11 and ground. 11 (B) - Ground H : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. GW J LIIA1458E K 3. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER L Check continuity between each door mirror terminals 10 and 11. 10 - 11 : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Repair or replace harness. NG >> Replace door mirror RH. Refer to GW-124, "Door Mirror Assembly" . M WIIA0531E Revision: October 2004 GW-117 2005 Titan REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Rear Window Defogger Signal Check EIS005AC 1. CHECK AV COMMUNICATION LINE AV communication line check is executed. Refer to BCS-8, "CAN Communication System Description" . Is rear window defogger displayed on the display? OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace display control unit. 2. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CAN communication line check is executed. Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" OK or NG OK >> Check the condition of the harness and the connector. NG >> In addition, it is necessary to check CAN communication line. Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" Filament Check 1. EIS005AD When measuring voltage, wrap tin foil around the top of the negative probe.Then press the foil against the wire with your finger. SEL122R 2. Attach probe circuit tester (in Volt range) to middle portion of each filament. SEL263 Revision: October 2004 GW-118 2005 Titan REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER 3. 4. If a filament is burned out, circuit tester registers 0 or battery voltage. To locate burned out point, move probe to left and right along filament. Test needle will swing abruptly when probe passes the point. A B C D E F G SEL265 Filament Repair EIS005AE REPAIR EQUIPMENT ● ● ● ● ● ● H Conductive silver composition (DuPont No. 4817 or equivalent) Ruler 30 cm (11.8 in) long Drawing pen Heat gun Alcohol Cloth GW J REPAIRING PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. Wipe broken heat wire and its surrounding area clean with a cloth dampened in alcohol. Apply a small amount of conductive silver composition to tip of drawing pen. Shake silver composition container before use. Place ruler on glass along broken line. Deposit conductive silver composition on break with drawing pen. Slightly overlap existing heat wire on both sides [preferably 5 mm (0.20 in)] of the break. K L M PIIA0215E 4. After repair has been completed, check repaired wire for continuity. This check should be conducted 10 minutes after silver composition is deposited. Do not touch repaired area while test is being conducted. SEL012D Revision: October 2004 GW-119 2005 Titan REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER 5. Apply a constant stream of hot air directly to the repaired area for approximately 20 minutes with a heat gun. A minimum distance of 3 cm (1.2 in) should be kept between repaired area and hot air outlet. If a heat gun is not available, let the repaired area dry for 24 hours. SEL013D Revision: October 2004 GW-120 2005 Titan DOOR MIRROR DOOR MIRROR Wiring Diagram — MIRROR — PFP:96301 A EIS004DE B C D E F G H GW J K L M WIWA0629E Revision: October 2004 GW-121 2005 Titan DOOR MIRROR Wiring Diagram — H/MIRR — EIS004DF WIWA0630E Revision: October 2004 GW-122 2005 Titan DOOR MIRROR A B C D E F G H GW J K L M LIWA0530E Revision: October 2004 GW-123 2005 Titan DOOR MIRROR Door Mirror Assembly EIS004DG STANDARD MIRROR LIIA1570E Removal and Installation NOTE: Be careful not to damage the mirror bodies. 1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to EI-32, "Front Door" . 2. Disconnect the mirror electrical connector. 3. Remove the door mirror assembly. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 GW-124 2005 Titan DOOR MIRROR TRAILER TOW MIRROR A B C D E F G H LIIA1619E GW Removal NOTE: Be careful not to damage the mirror bodies. 1. Remove the front door sash cover. Refer to AV-66, "Removal and Installation of Front Tweeter" . 2. Remove the door mirror harness connector. 3. Remove the door mirror mounting nuts, and remove the door mirror assembly. J K Installation L Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Door Mirror Glass EIS004DH REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. M Set mirror assembly mirror glass upward. Apply protective tape to mirror housing. Insert a screwdriver at notch and gently pry mirror glass and holder from mirror holder bracket. Disconnect two electrical connectors from mirror glass and holder. LIIA1591E Revision: October 2004 GW-125 2005 Titan DOOR MIRROR INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Set mirror holder bracket and mirror glass and holder in the horizontal position. Connect two electrical connectors to the back of the mirror holder. Align mirror glass and holder with mirror holder bracket and push mirror glass and holder onto mirror holder bracket. Rotate mirror to ensure proper installation. LIIA1592E Revision: October 2004 GW-126 2005 Titan M INDEX A SECTION ALPHABETICAL INDEX B C D E F G H I J K L IDX IDX-1 ALPHABETICAL INDEX Numerics 4LO switch ......................................................... 4WD shift switch ................................................ 4WD system description .................................... 4WD system diagram ........................................ TF-42 TF-45 TF-15 TF-18 A A/C air flow ..................................................... MTC-25 A/C compressor clutch removal and installation . MTC116 A/C compressor mounting ............................ MTC-115 A/C compressor precaution .............................. MTC-9 A/C compressor special service tool ............... MTC-12 A/C control operation (auto A/C) ..................... MTC-24 A/C diagnostic work flow (auto A/C) ............... MTC-89 A/C evaporator .............................................. MTC-122 A/C HFC134a (R134a) system identification .... MTC-6 A/C HFC134a (R134a) system precaution ....... MTC-4 A/C HFC134a (R134a) system service procedure ....... MTC-112 A/C HFC134a (R134a) system service tools .. MTC-12 A/C HFC134a system service equipment precaution ... MTC-9 A/C lubricant (R134a) ..................................... MTC-20 A/C lubrication oil ............................................ MTC-20 A/C operational check ..................................... MTC-47 A/C self-diagnoses (auto A/C) ......... MTC-45, MTC-89 A/C service data specification ....................... MTC-127 A/C trouble diagnoses (auto A/C) ................... MTC-28 A/C, A - Wiring diagram .................................. MTC-37 A/T fluid checking ...................... AT-12, AT-52, MA-21 A/T fluid replacement ............................. AT-12, MA-23 A/T fluid temperature sensor ........................... AT-127 A/T IND - Wiring diagram .................................... DI-40 A/T indicator ........................................................ DI-40 A/T self-diagnoses ............................................. AT-87 A/T shift lock system ........................................ AT-239 A/T trouble diagnoses ........................................ AT-43 A/T Wiring diagram AT - CAN ............................ AT-98 A/T Wiring diagram AT - FTS .......................... AT-128 A/T Wiring diagram AT - MAIN ........................ AT-174 A/T Wiring diagram AT - MMSW ..................... AT-162 A/T Wiring diagram AT - NONDTC .................. AT-183 A/T Wiring diagram AT - PNP/SW ................... AT-106 A/T Wiring diagram AT - STSIG ...................... AT-101 A/T Wiring diagram AT - VSS A/T ................... AT-111 ABS - Wiring diagram ...... BRC-16, BRC-56, BRC-103 ABS (anti-lock brake system) BRC-8, BRC-47, BRC-94 Accelerator control system ............................... ACC-2 Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor . EC-568, EC574, EC-588 Accelerator pedal released position learning ..... EC-89 AF1B1-Wiring diagram EC-457, EC-466, EC-475, EC485, EC-496, EC-506, EC-518 AF1B2-Wiring diagram EC-459, EC-468, EC-477, EC487, EC-498, EC-508, EC-520 AF1HB1-Wiring diagram .................................. EC-383 AF1HB2-Wiring diagram ................................. EC-385 Aiming adjustment .................................. LT-29, LT-73 Air bag ............................................................... SRS-3 Air bag disposal .............................................. SRS-60 Air bag precautions .............................................. AP-2 Air cleaner and air duct ..................................... EM-14 Air cleaner filter replacement ............................ MA-16 Air conditioner cut control ................................. EC-28 Air flow meter - See Mass air flow sensor EC-171, EC180 Air fuel ratio sensor 1 .. EC-455, EC-464, EC-473, EC483, EC-493, EC-503, EC-515 Air fuel ratio sensor 1 heater ........................... EC-382 Air mix. door motor .......................................... MTC-56 Angular tightening application ............................. EM-3 APPS1 - Wiring diagram ................................. EC-570 APPS2 - Wiring diagram ................................. EC-576 APPS3 - Wiring diagram ................................. EC-590 ASC/BS - Wiring diagram ............................... EC-550 ASC/SW - Wiring diagram .............................. EC-543 ASCBOF - Wiring diagram .............................. EC-627 ASCD ................................................................ EC-29 ASCD (automatic speed control device) ........... ACS-2 ASCD brake switch ........................... EC-548, EC-626 ASCD indicator lamp ....................................... EC-633 ASCD steering switch ..................................... EC-541 ASCIND - Wiring diagram ............................... EC-634 ATP switch ......................................................... TF-64 AUDIO - Wiring diagram .................................... AV-14 AUT/DP - Wiring diagram .................................. SE-19 Auto air conditioner - Wiring diagram .............. MTC-37 Auto anti-dazzling inside mirror ........................ GW-93 Autolamp ............................................................ LT-46 Automatic amplifier ......................................... MTC-49 Automatic drive positioner .................................. SE-11 Automatic transmission number .......................... GI-49 AV and NAVI control unit ................................... AV-80 AV communication line .................................... AV-104 B Back door trim ..................................................... EI-32 Back sonar .......................................................... DI-59 BACK/L - Wiring diagram ................................. LT-102 Back-up lamp ................................................... LT-102 Ball joint (front) ................................................ FSU-14 Basic inspection ................................................ EC-71 Battery ................................................................. SC-4 Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester SC-6, SC-12, SC-19 BCM (Body control module) .............................. BCS-3 Block heater ...................................................... EM-76 Blower motor .................................... MTC-67, MTC-97 Body alignment ................................................ BL-179 Body component parts ..................................... BL-161 Body construction ............................................ BL-177 Body exterior paint color .................................. BL-160 Body mounting ................................... BL-158, BL-159 Body repair ....................................................... BL-160 IDX-2 ALPHABETICAL INDEX Body sealing ..................................................... BL-173 Brake booster .................................................... BR-18 Brake fluid level ................................................. MA-30 Brake hydraulic line ........................................... BR-12 Brake inspection ................................................ MA-30 Brake lines and cables inspection ..................... MA-30 Brake master cylinder ....................................... BR-15 Brake switch ........................ EC-548, EC-563, EC-626 BRK/SW - Wiring diagram ............................... EC-564 Bulb specifications ........................................... LT-167 Bumper, front ...................................................... EI-14 Bumper, rear ....................................................... EI-18 C Camshaft ........................................................... EM-44 Camshaft inspection .......................................... EM-47 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) ................ EC-288 CAN - Wiring diagram EC-161, LAN-26, LAN-54, LAN82, LAN-112, LAN-145, LAN-174, LAN-208, LAN-237, LAN-269, LAN-303, LAN-335, LAN-371, LAN-410 CAN (Controller Area Network) . WT-9, BRC-10, BRC50, BRC-97, SE-16, LAN-24, LAN-52, LAN-80, LAN110, LAN-143, LAN-172, LAN-206, LAN-235, LAN-267, LAN-301, LAN-333, LAN-369, LAN-408 CAN communication ... EC-31, EC-160, AT-97, TF-19, TF-64, RFD-45, RFD-71, WT-9, BRC-10, BRC-50, BRC97, SE-16, LAN-24, LAN-52, LAN-80, LAN-110, LAN143, LAN-172, LAN-206, LAN-235, LAN-267, LAN-301, LAN-333, LAN-369, LAN-408 Canister-See EVAP canister ............................. EC-35 CHARGE - Wiring diagram ............................... SC-18 Charging system ............................................... SC-17 Chassis and body maintenance ........................ MA-20 Chassis and body maintenanceSchedule 1 ........ MA-8 Chassis and body maintenanceSchedule 2 ...... MA-10 CHIME - Wiring diagram ..................................... DI-45 Circuit breaker ................................................... PG-68 Closed loop control ........................................... EC-25 Closed loop control (Bank 1) ........................... EC-433 Closed loop control (Bank 2) ........................... EC-433 Coil spring (front) ............................................... FSU-9 Collision diagnosis .......................................... SRS-67 Combination lamp, front, removal and installation . LT31 Combination lamp, rear, removal and installation .. LT118 Combination meter ................................................ DI-5 Combination switch ............................................ LT-92 COMBSW - Wiring diagram ............................... LT-92 COMM - Wiring diagram ................................. AV-104 COMPAS - Wiring diagram ................................. DI-27 Compass ............................................................. DI-26 Component Location (auto A/C) ..................... MTC-34 Compressor clutch removal and installation MTC-116 Compressor mounting .................................. MTC-115 Compressor precaution .................................... MTC-9 Compressor special service tool .................... MTC-12 Condenser .................................................... MTC-120 Connecting rod .................................................. EM-94 Connecting rod bearing clearance ..................... EM-94 Connecting rod bushing clearance .................... EM-94 Console box - See Instrument panel ................... IP-10 CONSULT for VDC .......... BRC-23, BRC-64, BRC-115 CONSULT-áU for engine ................................. EC-124 Control units (terminal arrangement) ................. PG-72 Control valve (A/T) ............................................. AT-37 Controller Area Network (CAN) . WT-9, BRC-10, BRC50, BRC-97, SE-16, LAN-24, LAN-52, LAN-80, LAN110, LAN-143, LAN-172, LAN-206, LAN-235, LAN-267, LAN-301, LAN-333, LAN-369, LAN-408 Converter housing installation ............ AT-267, AT-270 COOL/F - Wiring diagram ................................ EC-439 Coolant mixture ratio ......................................... MA-12 Coolant replacement ......................................... MA-13 Cooling circuit (engine) ........................................ CO-8 Cooling fan ........................................................ CO-15 Cooling fan control ........................................... EC-436 Cooling fan motor ............................................ EC-445 Cooling unit (A/C evaporator) ...... MTC-100, MTC-122 Corrosion protection ......................................... BL-170 Crankcase ventilation system - See Positive crankcase ventilation .......................................................... EC-45 Crankshaft ......................................................... EM-77 Crankshaft position sensor (POS) ................... EC-281 Crash zone sensor .......................................... SRS-55 Cylinder block .................................................... EM-76 Cylinder block boring ......................................... EM-97 A B C D E F G H I D J Data link connector for Consult ......... EC-126, EC-137 Daytime light system .......................................... LT-32 Daytime running light - See Daytime light system .. LT32 DEF - Wiring diagram ....................................... GW-99 Diagnosis sensor unit ...................................... SRS-58 Diagnostic trouble code (DTC) for OBD system . EC-8, EC-52 Diagnostic trouble code (DTC) inspection priority chart EC-100 Differential gear oil replacement ........................ MA-27 DIFLOC - Wiring diagram ................................ RFD-48 Dimensions ......................................................... GI-50 Direct clutch solenoid valve ................ AT-149, AT-151 Display and amp.assembly ............................. MTC-49 Display Control Unit ......................................... AV-175 Dome light - See Interior lamp .......................... LT-126 Door glass .......................................... GW-85, GW-88 Door lock .......................................................... BL-127 Door mirror lamp ............................................... LT-126 Door trim .............................................................. EI-32 Door, front ........................................... BL-123, GW-85 Door, rear ........................................... BL-123, GW-88 Drive belt ........................................................... EM-12 Drive chain (Transfer) ......................................... TF-88 Driver air bag ................................................... SRS-44 DTC work support ............................................ EC-133 IDX-3 K L IDX ALPHABETICAL INDEX DTRL - Wiring diagram ....................................... LT-36 Duct and grilles ............................................. MTC-109 DVD Player ........................................................ AV-77 E ECM input/output signal ..................... EC-116, EC-138 ECM power supply ............................. EC-154, EC-389 ECM relay ........................................................ EC-154 ECM/PW - Wiring diagram ............................... EC-390 ECTS - Wiring diagram .................................... EC-194 Electric sunroof .................................................. RF-10 Electric throttle control actuator ......... EC-393, EC-395 Electrical load signal circuit .............................. EC-625 Electronic ignition (EI) system ........................... EC-26 Engine control circuit diagram ......................... EC-114 Engine control component parts location ......... EC-107 Engine control module (ECM) .......................... EC-379 Engine coolant .................................................. CO-10 Engine coolant temperature sensor (ECTS) ... EC-192, EC-205 Engine fail-safe system .................................... EC-102 Engine oil ............................................................. LU-7 Engine oil filter replacement ............................. MA-17 Engine oil precautions .......................................... GI-6 Engine oil replacement ..................................... MA-17 Engine removal ................................................. EM-72 Engine room cover ............................................ EM-11 Engine serial number .......................................... GI-49 ETC1 - Wiring diagram .................................... EC-396 ETC2 - Wiring diagram .................................... EC-403 ETC3 - Wiring diagram .................................... EC-407 EVAP canister .................................................... EC-35 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve .... EC-314, EC-527 EVAP canister vent control valve ....... EC-321, EC-535 EVAP control system (small leak) diagnosis .. EC-306, EC-345, EC-353 EVAP control system pressure sensor .... EC-328, EC331, EC-337 EVAP control system purge flow monitoring diagnosis EC-301 EVAP vapor lines inspection ............................. MA-19 Evaporative emission (EVAP) system ............... EC-32 Evaporator .................................................... MTC-122 Exhaust manifold .............................................. EM-19 Exhaust system ................................................... EX-3 Exhaust system inspection .................................. EX-3 Expansion valve ............................................ MTC-123 F F/FOG - Wiring diagram ..................................... LT-66 F/PUMP - Wiring diagram ................................ EC-615 Final drive removal and installation . FFD-12, RFD-14, RFD-82 Flow charts ......................................................... GI-27 Fluid temperature sensor (A/T) ........................ AT-127 Fluids ................................................................ MA-11 Fluorescent leak detector .............................. MTC-123 Fog lamp, front ................................................... LT-64 Foot lamp ......................................................... LT-127 Freeze frame data ............................... EC-53, EC-127 Front brake solenoid valve ................. AT-145, AT-147 Front bumper ...................................................... EI-14 Front case (Transfer) ......................................... TF-88 Front combination lamp removal and installation LT-31 Front door ............................. BL-123, BL-127, GW-85 Front Door Trim ................................................... EI-32 Front drive shaft (Transfer) ................... TF-88, TF-108 Front fog lamp .................................................... LT-64 Front passenger air bag .................................. SRS-49 Front seat ........................................................... SE-91 Front seat belt ...................................................... SB-3 Front seat belt pre-tensioner ............... SRS-3, SRS-57 Front side air bag ............................................ SRS-52 Front washer ...................................................... WW-4 Front wiper ......................................................... WW-4 FTTS - Wiring diagram ...................... EC-252, EC-257 Fuel cut control (at no load high engine speed) EC-27 Fuel filter replacement ......................................... FL-5 Fuel gauge ............................................................ DI-5 Fuel injection system (Bank 1) .......... EC-233, EC-242 Fuel injection system (Bank 2) .......... EC-233, EC-242 Fuel injector and fuel tube ................................. EM-29 Fuel level sensor ................. EC-362, EC-364, EC-366 Fuel line inspection .............................................. FL-3 Fuel precautions ................................................... GI-5 Fuel pressure check .......................................... EC-92 Fuel pressure release ....................................... EC-92 Fuel pump ....................................................... EC-614 Fuel pump and gauge .......................................... FL-5 Fuel system .......................................................... FL-3 Fuel tank ............................................................ FL-10 Fuel tank temperature sensor ........... EC-250, EC-256 Fuel tank vacuum relief valve ........................... EC-35 FUELB1 - Wiring diagram ................. EC-235, EC-244 FUELB2 - Wiring diagram ................. EC-236, EC-245 Fuse ...................................................... PG-68, PG-78 Fuse block ......................................................... PG-77 Fusible link ............................................ PG-68, PG-78 G Garage jack and safety stand ............................. GI-40 Gauges ................................................................. DI-5 Generator .......................................................... SC-17 Generic scan tool (GST) ................................. EC-136 Glass ........................ GW-11, GW-13, GW-85, GW-88 Glove box lamp ................................................ LT-152 GPS antenna ..................................................... AV-79 Grease .............................................................. MA-11 Ground distribution ............................................ PG-29 H Handling precautions for plastics ..................... BL-198 Harness connector ............................................ PG-69 IDX-4 ALPHABETICAL INDEX Harness layout .................................................. PG-38 Hazard warning lamp ......................................... LT-75 Headlamp removal and installation .................... LT-31 Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 1) .... EC-213, EC-222, EC-411, EC-422 Heated oxygen sensor 2 (bank 2) .... EC-213, EC-222, EC-411, EC-422 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (bank 1) ........ EC-163 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (bank 2) ........ EC-163 Heated seat ....................................................... SE-88 Heater and cooling unit (Heater core) MTC-100, MTC102 Heater unit (heater core) ............. MTC-100, MTC-102 Height (Dimensions) ........................................... GI-50 HFC134a (R134a) system identification .......... MTC-6 HFC134a (R134a) system precaution .............. MTC-4 HFC134a (R134a) system service procedure MTC-112 HFC134a (R134a) system service tools ........ MTC-12 HFC134a system service equipment precaution MTC-9 High & low reverse clutch solenoid valve . AT-153, AT155 Horn ................................................................ WW-37 HORN - Wiring diagram .................................. WW-37 How to erase DTC for OBD system .................. EC-61 HSEAT - Wiring diagram ................................... SE-89 I I/MIRR - Wiring diagram ................................... GW-93 IATS - Wiring diagram ..................................... EC-189 Identification plate .............................................. GI-48 Idle air volume learning ..................................... EC-90 Idle mixture ratio ................................................ EC-78 Idle speed .............................................. EC-71, EC-76 Idle speed control (ISC) .................... EC-370, EC-372 Ignition coil .......................................... EM-26, EC-596 Ignition control system .................................... EC-596 Ignition key hole illumination ............................ LT-126 Ignition timing ........................................ EC-71, EC-76 IGNSYS - Wiring diagram ............................... EC-597 ILL - Wiring diagram ......................................... LT-157 Illumination ....................................................... LT-151 INJECT - Wiring diagram ................................ EC-609 Injector ............................................................ EC-608 Input clutch solenoid valve ................. AT-141, AT-143 Instrument panel ................................................. IP-10 Instrument panel speaker .................................. AV-66 INT/L - Wiring diagram ................................... GW-122 Intake air temperature sensor ........... EC-188, EC-208 Intake door control linkage adjustment MTC-61, MTC64 Intake door motor .......................... MTC-60, MTC-105 Intake manifold .................................................. EM-15 Intake sensor ................................... MTC-92, MTC-96 Interior ................................................................. EI-36 Interior lamp ..................................................... LT-126 Interior lamp on-off control ............................... LT-127 Internal gear (Transfer) ...................................... TF-88 IPDM (Intelligent power distribution module engine room) ................................................................. PG-16 A J Jacking points ..................................................... GI-40 Junction box (J/B) .............................................. PG-77 B K C Key illumination ................................................ LT-127 Keyless entry system - See Multi-remote control system BL-53 Knock sensor (KS) ........................................... EC-276 KS - Wiring diagram ........................................ EC-277 D L E Leaf spring (rear) .............................................. RSU-8 Length (Dimensions) .......................................... GI-50 License lamp .................................................... LT-104 Lifting points ....................................................... GI-41 Line pressure solenoid valve ........................... AT-120 Line pressure test (A/T) ..................................... AT-53 Location of electrical units ................................. PG-65 Low coast brake solenoid valve .......... AT-157, AT-159 Low tire pressure warning system ...................... WT-7 Low tire pressure warning system - trouble diagnoses WT-10 Low tire pressure warning system - Wiring diagram ..... WT-10 Lubricant (R134a) A/C .................................... MTC-20 Lubricants .......................................................... MA-11 Lubrication circuit (engine) .................................. LU-5 Lubrication oil A/C .......................................... MTC-20 Lubrication-locks, hinges and hood latches ....... MA-33 F G H I J K M MAFS - Wiring diagram ..................... EC-174, EC-182 Magnet clutch ................................ MTC-74, MTC-116 MAIN - Wiring diagram .................................... EC-154 Mainshaft (Transfer) ........................................... TF-88 Maintenance (engine)Schedule 1 ........................ MA-7 Maintenance (engine)Schedule 2 ........................ MA-9 Major overhaul (Final drive) .............. RFD-15, RFD-83 Major overhaul (Transfer) ................................... TF-88 Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) ....................... EC-63 Map lamp .......................................................... LT-127 Mass air flow sensor (MAFS) ............ EC-171, EC-180 Meter .................................................................... DI-5 METER - Wiring diagram .................................... DI-10 MIL data link connectors circuit ....................... EC-636 MIL/DL - Wiring diagram .................................. EC-636 MIRROR - Wiring diagram .............................. GW-121 Misfire .............................................................. EC-268 Mode door control linkage adjustment ............ MTC-53 Mode door motor ........................... MTC-52, MTC-106 Model variation ................................................... GI-46 Multiport fuel injection (MFI) system .................. EC-24 IDX-5 L IDX ALPHABETICAL INDEX Multiport fuel injection precautions ....................... GI-5 Multi-remote control system ............................... BL-53 N NATS - Wiring diagram .................................... BL-139 NAVI - Wiring diagram ....................................... AV-96 NAVI Control Unit ............................................ AV-174 NVH troubleshooting (AX) ................................. FAX-4 NVH troubleshooting (EM) .................................. EM-9 NVH troubleshooting (Final drive) ....... RFD-8, RFD-41 NVH troubleshooting (Propeller shaft) ................. PR-3 NVH troubleshooting (ST) .................................... PS-5 NVH troubleshooting (Transfer) ......................... TF-11 NVH troubleshooting (WT)NVH troubleshooting (WT) . WT-3 O O2H2B1 - Wiring diagram ................................ EC-165 O2H2B2 - Wiring diagram ................................ EC-167 O2S2B1 - Wiring diagram .. EC-215, EC-225, EC-414, EC-425 O2S2B2 - Wiring diagram .. EC-217, EC-227, EC-416, EC-427 Oil cooler (engine) ............................................. LU-11 Oil filter ............................................................... LU-10 Oil pan (engine) ................................................ EM-22 Oil pressure (engine) ........................................... LU-7 Oil pressure relief valve (engine) ......................... LU-5 Oil pump (engine) .............................................. LU-13 Oil seal replacement (engine) ........................... EM-57 Oil seal replacement (front of final drive) ........... FFD-8 Oil seal replacement (side of final drive) .......... FFD-10 On board diagnostic system .............................. EC-48 ORVR (On-board Refueling Vapor Recovery) ... EC-39 Overheat .......................................................... EC-436 P P/SCKT - Wiring diagram ................................ WW-35 Pantograph jack .................................................. GI-40 Park/Neutral position switch ............................ EC-558 Park/neutral position switch (A/T) .................... AT-105 Parking brake control ........................................... PB-4 PCV (positive crankcase ventilation) ................. EC-45 Personal lamp ................................................... LT-127 PGC/V - Wiring diagram .................... EC-316, EC-529 PHASE - Wiring diagram ................... EC-288, EC-290 Piston pin inspection ......................................... EM-92 Piston ring inspection ........................................ EM-93 Piston to bore clearance ................................... EM-97 Planetary carrier (Transfer) ................... TF-88, TF-104 PNP/SW - Wiring diagram ............................... EC-560 POS - Wiring diagram ...................................... EC-283 POWER - Wiring diagram .................................... PG-6 Power seat ......................................................... SE-84 Power steering fluid level .................................. MA-31 Power steering gear ........................................... PS-16 Power steering oil pump .................................... PS-27 Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor ........... EC-374 Power steering system bleeding .......................... PS-6 Power supply routing .......................................... PG-4 Power window .................................................. GW-19 PRE/SE - Wiring diagram ................. EC-333, EC-339 Precautions (General) ........................................... GI-3 Precautions in repairing high strength steel ..... BL-201 Pressure switch 1 ............................... AT-147, AT-166 Pressure switch 2 ............................................. AT-159 Pressure switch 3 ............................... AT-143, AT-168 Pressure switch 5 ............................... AT-151, AT-170 Pressure switch 6 ............................... AT-155, AT-172 Pressure test (A/T) ............................................. AT-53 Propeller shaft ........................................... PR-4, PR-8 Propeller shaft inspection .................................. MA-26 Propeller shaft on vehicle service ....................... PR-8 Propeller shaft vibration ............................ PR-4, PR-8 PS/SEN - Wiring diagram ............................... EC-375 R Radiator ............................................................ CO-12 Rear Audio Remote Control Unit ....................... AV-67 Rear bumper ....................................................... EI-18 Rear case (Transfer) .......................................... TF-88 Rear combination lamp removal and installation ... LT118 Rear door ............................................ BL-123, GW-88 Rear seat ......................................................... SE-100 Rear seat belt ....................................................... SB-8 Rear window .................................................... GW-13 Rear window defogger ..................................... GW-95 Refrigerant connection precaution .................... MTC-6 Refrigerant discharging evacuating charging MTC-112 Refrigerant general precaution ......................... MTC-5 Refrigerant lines .......... MTC-112, MTC-119, MTC-120 Refrigerant pressure sensor .. EC-620, MTC-79, MTC120 Remote keyless entry system ............................ BL-53 Removal and installation (A/T) ........... AT-265, AT-268 Removal and installation (Transfer) ................... TF-87 Revolution sensor (A/T) ................................... AT-109 Road wheel size .................................................. GI-50 Rocker cover ..................................................... EM-33 Room lamp ....................................................... LT-126 Room lamp - See Interior lamp ........................ LT-126 ROOM/L - Wiring diagram ............................... LT-134 RP/SEN - Wiring diagram ............................... EC-621 S SAE J1979 - Servise $01 - 09 ........................... EC-48 SEAT - Wiring diagram .......................... SE-84, SE-85 Seat belt inspection ............................... SB-10, MA-34 Seat belt pre-tensioner .................................... SRS-57 Seat belt pre-tensioner disposal ..................... SRS-60 Seat belt, front ...................................................... SB-3 Seat belt, rear ...................................................... SB-8 IDX-6 ALPHABETICAL INDEX Seat, front .......................................................... SE-91 Seat, rear ........................................................ SE-100 Self-diagnosis (Transfer) .................................... TF-33 SEN/PW - Wiring diagram ............................... EC-451 Shift control (Transfer) ......................... TF-88, TF-110 Shift lock system .............................................. AT-239 Shock absorber (front) ...................................... FSU-9 Shock absorber (rear) ....................................... RSU-7 Side air bag ..................................................... SRS-52 Side air bag (satellite) sensor .......................... SRS-56 Side curtain air bag ......................................... SRS-53 Side trim .............................................................. EI-36 SMJ (super multiple junction) ............................ PG-75 SONAR - Wiring diagram .................................... DI-62 Spare tire size .................................................... GI-50 Spark plug ......................................................... EM-27 Spark plug replacement .................................... MA-18 Specification value .......................................... EC-143 Speedometer ......................................................... DI-5 Spiral cable ..................................................... SRS-46 SROOF - Wiring diagram .................................. RF-13 SRS - See Supplemental Restraint System ...... SRS-6 SRS - Wiring diagram ..................................... SRS-13 SRS Trouble diagnoses .................................... SRS-9 Stabilizer bar (front) ......................................... FSU-11 Stall test (A/T) .................................................... AT-52 Standardized relay ............................................ PG-73 START - Wiring diagram ................................... SC-11 Starter ............................................................... SC-10 Starting system ................................................. SC-10 Steering gear, linkage and transfer gear inspection ..... MA-31 Steering linkage ................................................ PS-16 Steering wheel and column ................................. PS-7 Step lamp ......................................................... LT-127 Stop lamp ........................................................... LT-98 Stop lamp switch ................. EC-548, EC-563, EC-626 STOP/L - Wiring diagram ................................... LT-99 Strut (front) ........................................................ FSU-9 Sun gear (Transfer) ............................................ TF-88 Sun roof, electric ............................................... RF-10 Sunroof .............................................................. RF-23 Supplemental Restraint System ........................ SRS-6 Supplemental restraint system - Wiring diagram . SRS13 Symbols and abbreviations ....................... GI-9, GI-22 Symptom matrix chart ..................................... EC-103 System readiness test (SRT) code ................... EC-54 T Tachometer ........................................................... DI-5 Tail lamp ........................................................... LT-104 TAIL/L - Wiring diagram ................................... LT-106 TCM circuit diagram ........................................... AT-51 TCM inspection table ......................................... AT-84 TCS - Wiring diagram ....... BRC-15, BRC-16, BRC-56, BRC-103 TCS (traction control system) BRC-8, BRC-47, BRC-94 TCS component parts and connector location BRC-14, BRC-54, BRC-101 TCS wheel sensors ......... BRC-14, BRC-54, BRC-101 Thermometer ...................................................... DI-26 Three way catalyst ............................................. EM-19 Three way catalyst function (Bank 1) .............. EC-295 Three way catalyst function (Bank 2) .............. EC-295 Three way catalyst precautions ............................ GI-5 Throttle control motor ...................................... EC-406 Throttle control motor relay .............................. EC-401 Throttle position sensor (TPS) ... EC-198, EC-261, EC446, EC-448, EC-581 Throttle valve closed position learning .............. EC-89 Tie-rod ............................................................... PS-16 Timing chain ...................................................... EM-35 Tire rotation ....................................................... MA-30 Tire size .............................................................. GI-50 Torque converter installation AT-266, AT-267, AT-269, AT-270 Torque convertor clutch solenoid valve .... AT-116, AT118 Tow truck towing ................................................. GI-42 Towing point ....................................................... GI-43 TPS1 - Wiring diagram .................................... EC-263 TPS2 - Wiring diagram .................................... EC-200 TPS3 - Wiring diagram .................................... EC-583 Traction control system - Wiring diagram ...... BRC-15, BRC-56, BRC-103 Transfer case ...................................................... TF-88 Transfer control device ....................................... TF-60 Transfer control unit inspection table .................. TF-27 Transfer oil replacement .................................... MA-24 Transfer serial number ....................................... GI-49 Transmission serial number ............................... GI-49 TRANSMT - Wiring diagram ............................. BL-155 Tread-FR&RR (Dimensions) .............................. GI-50 Trim ..................................................................... EI-36 Trouble diagnoses ................................................ GI-9 Turbine revolution sensor ................................ AT-132 TURN - Wiring diagram ...................................... LT-78 Turn signal lamp ................................................. LT-75 Two trip detection logic ...................................... EC-48 Two-pole lift ........................................................ GI-41 V Vacuum hose (brake system) ............................ BR-22 Vacuum hose drawing (Engine control) ........... EC-113 Valve clearance ................................................. EM-52 Valve guide ........................................................ EM-67 Vanity mirror lamp ............................................ LT-126 VDC (vehicle dynamics control) BRC-8, BRC-47, BRC94 VDC -Wiring diagram ....... BRC-16, BRC-56, BRC-103 Vehicle identification number .............................. GI-48 Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) .......... GI-43 Vehicle speed sensor (VSS) ............................ EC-368 VENT/V - Wiring diagram .................. EC-323, EC-537 Video Monitor .................................................... AV-77 IDX-7 A B C D E F G H I J K L IDX ALPHABETICAL INDEX VIN registration .................................................. EC-89 Viscosity number (SAE) .................................... MA-12 W Wait detection switch ......................................... TF-49 WARN - Wiring diagram ..................................... DI-31 Warning chime .................................................... DI-42 Warning lamps .................................................... DI-30 Washer, front ..................................................... WW-4 Water pump ...................................................... CO-17 Water temperature gauge ..................................... DI-5 Wheel alignment (front) ..................................... FSU-6 Wheel bearing (front) ......................................... FAX-5 Wheel size .......................................................... GI-50 Wheelbase (Dimensions) .................................... GI-50 Width (Dimensions) ............................................ GI-50 WINDOW - Wiring diagram ................. GW-26, GW-35 Window, door ...................................... GW-85, GW-88 Window, rear ..................................................... GW-13 Windshield ........................................................ GW-11 WIPER - Wiring diagram .................................. WW-11 Wiper, front ........................................................ WW-4 Wiring Diagram (Cell code) list .......................... PG-63 Wiring diagram (Transfer) .................................. TF-23 Wiring diagrams .................................................. GI-14 WT-T/WARN - Wiring diagram ......................... WT-10 IDX-8 I BODY A B SECTION INSTRUMENT PANEL C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2 PREPARATION ........................................................... 3 Special Service Tools ............................................... 3 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES..... 4 Work Flow ................................................................ 4 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW ..................................... 4 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE ....... 5 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS ........... 5 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE ...................................................... 5 REPAIR THE CAUSE ........................................... 5 CONFIRM THE REPAIR ....................................... 6 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ........... 6 INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................... 6 CENTER CONSOLE ............................................. 6 DOORS ................................................................. 6 TRUNK .................................................................. 7 SUNROOF/HEADLINING ..................................... 7 OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)..... 7 SEATS ................................................................... 7 UNDERHOOD ....................................................... 7 Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................... 8 INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY ......................... 10 Removal and Installation ........................................ 10 INSTRUMENT PANEL ........................................ 10 CLUSTER LID C ................................................. 12 CLUSTER LID D ................................................. 12 LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL LH ..................... 13 COMBINATION METER ...................................... 13 A/T FINISHER ..................................................... 13 LOWER INSTRUMENTPANELRH AND GLOVE BOX ..................................................................... 14 CENTER CONSOLE ........................................... 15 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 16 CENTER CONSOLE ........................................... 16 F G H IP J K L M Revision: October 2004 IP-1 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EIS004EW The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connectors. Revision: October 2004 IP-2 2005 Titan PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A EIS004EX The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. B Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-39570) Chassis ear C Locating the noise D E F SBT839 — (J-43980) NISSAN Squeak and Rattle kit Repairing the cause of noise G H IP SBT840 Commercial Service Tools EIS004EY (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name J Description (J-39565) Engine ear K Locating the noise L M SIIA0995E ( — ) Power Tool Loosening bolts and nuts PBIC0191E Revision: October 2004 IP-3 2005 Titan SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Work Flow PFP:00000 EIS004EZ SBT842 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any customer's comments; refer to IP-8, "Diagnostic Worksheet" . This information is necessary to duplicate the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. ● The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur). ● If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer. ● After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when defining the noise. ● Squeak —(Like tennis shoes on a clean floor) Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces = higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping. ● Creak—(Like walking on an old wooden floor) Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch dependent on materials/often brought on by activity. ● Rattle—(Like shaking a baby rattle) Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing clip or fastener/incorrect clearance. ● Knock —(Like a knock on a door) Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action. ● Tick—(Like a clock second hand) Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver action or road conditions. ● Thump—(Heavy, muffled knock noise) Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity. ● Buzz—(Like a bumble bee) Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact. ● Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer. ● Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level. Revision: October 2004 IP-4 2005 Titan SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair. If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following: 1) Close a door. 2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from. 3) Rev the engine. 4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”. 5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model). 6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer. ● Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs. ● If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the vehicle body. A B C D E CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related to that concern or symptom. If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise. F LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE 1. 2. ● ● ● ● ● G Narrow down the noise to a general area.To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool (Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanic's stethoscope). Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by: H removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from. Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise. IP tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise. Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only temporarily. feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the J noise. placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise. K looking for loose components and contact marks. Refer to IP-6, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting" . REPAIR THE CAUSE If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely. ● If the cause is insufficient clearance between components: – separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible. – insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized NISSAN Parts Department. CAUTION: Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged. Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be ordered separately as needed. URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick] Insulates connectors, harness, etc. 76268-9E005: 100×135 mm (3.94×5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60×85 mm (2.36×3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) INSULATOR (Foam blocks) Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel. 73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in) INSULATOR (Light foam block) L ● Revision: October 2004 IP-5 2005 Titan M SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES 80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30×50 mm (1.18×1.97 in) FELT CLOTH TAPE Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications. 68370-4B000: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll. The following materials not found in the kit can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles. UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications. SILICONE GREASE Used instead of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit. Note: Will only last a few months. SILICONE SPRAY Use when grease cannot be applied. DUCT TAPE Use to eliminate movement. CONFIRM THE REPAIR Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet. Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting EIS004F0 Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information. INSTRUMENT PANEL Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between: 1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel 2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing 3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish 4. Instrument panel to windshield 5. Instrument panel mounting pins 6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter 7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness. CAUTION: Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will not be able to recheck the repair. CENTER CONSOLE Components to pay attention to include: 1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher 2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C 3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console. DOORS Pay attention to the: 1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise 2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher 3. Wiring harnesses tapping 4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise. Revision: October 2004 IP-6 2005 Titan SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES TRUNK Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner. In addition look for: 1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment 2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment 3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together 4. A loose license plate or bracket Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise. SUNROOF/HEADLINING A B C D Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following: 1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise 2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder 3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape. E F OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR) Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage. In addition look for: 1. Loose harness or harness connectors. 2. Front console map/reading lamp lens loose. 3. Loose screws at console attachment points. SEATS G H IP When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the noise. Cause of seat noise include: 1. Headrest rods and holder 2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame 3. The rear seatback lock and bracket These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component or applying urethane tape to the contact area. J K L UNDERHOOD Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then transmitted into the passenger compartment. Causes of transmitted underhood noise include: 1. Any component mounted to the engine wall 2. Components that pass through the engine wall 3. Engine wall mounts and connectors 4. Loose radiator mounting pins 5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment 6. Hood striker out of adjustment These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or insulating the component causing the noise. Revision: October 2004 IP-7 2005 Titan M SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Diagnostic Worksheet EIS004F1 LIWA0276E Revision: October 2004 IP-8 2005 Titan SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES A B C D E F G H IP J K L M SBT844 Revision: October 2004 IP-9 2005 Titan INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation PFP:68200 EIS004F2 INSTRUMENT PANEL WIIA0590E Revision: October 2004 IP-10 2005 Titan INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY 1. Display unit bracket RH/LH 2. Steering member assembly 3. Lower knee protector 4. Defroster grille 5. Speaker grille RH/LH 6. Instrument panel and pad assembly 7. Deck pocket mat RH/LH 8. Side ventilator assembly RH/LH 9. Meter cover 10. Combination meter 11. Switch assembly 12. Cluster lid A 13. Lower instrument panel LH 14. Upper steering column cover 15. Lower steering column cover 16. Audio display switch assembly 17. Front air control 18. Cluster lid C 19. Cluster lid D 20. Audio unit 21. Radio Bracket RH/LH 22. Center ventilator assembly RH/LH 23. Display assembly 24. Glove box 25. Glove box lid striker 26. Fuse block cover 27. Lower instrument panel RH 28. Glove box damper 29. Instrument stay RH/LH 30. Instrument side bracket 31. Key cylinder escutcheon 32. Lower instrument panel RH A B C D Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. E Remove the center console. Refer to IP-15, "CENTER CONSOLE" . Remove the steering column. Refer to PS-9, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" . F Remove defroster grille and disconnect the optical sensor harness. Remove side ventilator assembly LH. Remove the LH assist grip and windshield garnish. G Remove side ventilator assembly RH. Remove the RH assist grip and windshield garnish. Remove instrument panel. H ● Disconnect harnesses to instrument panel speakers LH and RH and remove speakers. ● Disconnect GPS antenna. IP ● Disconnect all remaining harnesses. ● Remove the passenger air bag module. Refer to SRS-49, "FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE" . Installation J Installation is in the reverse order of removal. K L M Revision: October 2004 IP-11 2005 Titan INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY CLUSTER LID C LIIA0951E 1. 2. Pull cluster lid C towards rear of vehicle to release clips. Disconnect electrical connectors. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CLUSTER LID D LIIA1603E 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove A/T finisher. Refer to IP-13, "A/T FINISHER" . Remove lower instrument panel LH. Refer to IP-13, "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL LH" . Remove lower instrument panel RH. Refer to IP-14, "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL RH AND GLOVE BOX" . Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-12, "CLUSTER LID C" . Remove cluster lid D. ● Pull the lid toward the rear of the vehicle to release the clips. ● Disconnect the electrical connectors. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 IP-12 2005 Titan INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL LH A Remove screws using power tool, and remove lower instrument panel LH. ● Pull to disconnect clips. ● Disconnect harnesses. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. B C LIIA1327E D COMBINATION METER 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Remove the lower instrument panel LH. Refer to IP-13, "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL LH" . Remove the meter cover. Remove cluster lid A. Remove screws using power tool and remove the combination meter assembly. ● Disconnect electrical connectors. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. E F G H LIIA0941E IP A/T FINISHER 1. 2. 3. Remove the shift knob. Remove the console mask. Pull up to release clips and remove the A/T finisher. ● Disconnect harnesses. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. J K L LIIA1335E M Revision: October 2004 IP-13 2005 Titan INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL RH AND GLOVE BOX WIIA0301E 1. Glove box damper 2. Glove box housing 3. Clips 4. Rubber stoppers 5. Glove box pins 6. Glove box 7. Glove box striker 8. Fuse block cover 9. Glove box assembly Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove the instrument lower cover RH. Remove screws using power tool, release clips and remove glove box and housing as an assembly. Remove damper clip from glove box. Remove glove box pins and glove box. Using power tool, remove screws and glove box striker. Remove fuse block cover. Remove screws and glove box damper. LLIA0072E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 IP-14 2005 Titan INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY CENTER CONSOLE A B C D E F G H LIIA1598E Remove the lower instrument panel RH. Refer to IP-14, "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL RH AND GLOVE BOX" . 2. Remove the A/T shifter. Refer to AT-236, "Control Device Removal and Installation" . 3. Remove screws from center console. ● Disconnect electrical harnesses. 4. Move front seats forward and remove the center console assembly. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. IP 1. J K L M Revision: October 2004 IP-15 2005 Titan INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY Disassembly and Assembly EIS004F3 CENTER CONSOLE WIIA0329E Revision: October 2004 IP-16 2005 Titan INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY 1. Console lid assembly 2. A/T finisher 3. Tray 4. Storage compartment 5. Storage compartment mask 6. Console reinforcement assembly 7. Console front bracket 8. Upper side finisher LH 9. Instrument lower cover LH 10. Console cover LH 11. Rear console duct 12. Power point assembly 13. Rear cup holder assembly 14. Rear finisher assembly 15. Console rear bracket 16. Heat duct 17. Rear upper finisher 18. Console bin mat 19. Console bin 20. Console cover RH 21. Instrument lower cover RH 22. Upper side finisher RH 23. A/T transmission control 24. Mask 25. Cup holder insert A B C 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the center console. Refer to IP-15, "CENTER CONSOLE" . Remove tray and mat from console bin. Remove latch from console lid. Remove hinge from console lid. Remove console lid. ● Remove console lid mat. 5. Remove console bin. ● Disconnect electrical harness from DVD player, if equipped. ● Remove hinge from console bin. 6. Remove rear upper finisher. 7. Remove rear cup holder assembly. 8. Remove upper side finishers LH/RH. 9. Remove screws on each side, disconnect clips and remove console covers LH/RH. 10. Remove rear finisher assembly. ● Disconnect electrical connectors. 11. Remove power point assembly. 12. Remove mask and storage compartment. 13. Remove console front bracket. 14. Remove heat duct and console rear duct. 15. Remove console rear bracket. Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. D E F G H IP J K L M Revision: October 2004 IP-17 2005 Titan INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY Revision: October 2004 IP-18 2005 Titan K ELECTRICAL A B SECTION LAN SYSTEM C D E CONTENTS CAN PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 5 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 5 Precautions When Using CONSULT-II ..................... 5 CHECK POINTS FOR USING CONSULT-II ......... 5 Precautions For Trouble Diagnosis .......................... 5 CAN SYSTEM ....................................................... 5 Precautions For Harness Repair .............................. 6 CAN SYSTEM ....................................................... 6 CAN COMMUNICATION ............................................ 7 System Description .................................................. 7 CAN Communication Unit ........................................ 7 TYPE 1 .................................................................. 9 TYPE 2/TYPE 3/TYPE 4 ......................................11 TYPE 5/TYPE 6 .................................................. 14 TYPE 7/TYPE 8/TYPE 9/TYPE 10/TYPE 11/ TYPE 12 .............................................................. 17 TYPE 13 .............................................................. 21 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) ........................................... 24 System Description ................................................ 24 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 24 Schematic .............................................................. 25 Wiring Diagram - CAN - ......................................... 26 Work Flow .............................................................. 29 CHECK SHEET ................................................... 30 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ............. 32 Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector ..................................................................... 43 Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R ............................................................... 44 ECM Circuit Check ................................................. 45 TCM Circuit Check ................................................. 46 Combination Meter Circuit Check .......................... 46 BCM Circuit Check ................................................. 47 Data Link Connector Circuit Check ........................ 47 Front Air Control Circuit Check .............................. 48 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check ..................................................................... 48 Revision: October 2004 IPDM E/R Circuit Check ......................................... 49 CAN Communication Circuit Check ........................ 50 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check .................. 50 Component Inspection ............................................ 51 ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION .................................................................... 51 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) ........................................... 52 System Description ................................................. 52 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 52 Schematic ............................................................... 53 Wiring Diagram - CAN - .......................................... 54 Work Flow ............................................................... 57 CHECK SHEET ................................................... 58 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ............. 60 Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector ...................................................................... 71 Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R ................................................................ 72 ECM Circuit Check ................................................. 73 TCM Circuit Check ................................................. 74 Combination Meter Circuit Check ........................... 74 BCM Circuit Check ................................................. 75 Data Link Connector Circuit Check ........................ 75 Front Air Control Circuit Check ............................... 76 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check ..................................................................... 76 IPDM E/R Circuit Check ......................................... 77 CAN Communication Circuit Check ........................ 78 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check .................. 78 Component Inspection ............................................ 79 ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION .................................................................... 79 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) ........................................... 80 System Description ................................................. 80 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 80 Schematic ............................................................... 81 Wiring Diagram - CAN - .......................................... 82 Work Flow ............................................................... 85 CHECK SHEET ................................................... 86 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ............. 88 LAN-1 2005 Titan F G H I J LAN L M Circuit Check Between TCM and Driver Seat Control Unit ................................................................. 101 Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector ............................................. 102 Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R .............................................................. 103 ECM Circuit Check ............................................... 104 TCM Circuit Check ............................................... 104 Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check ................. 105 Combination Meter Circuit Check ......................... 105 BCM Circuit Check ............................................... 106 Data Link Connector Circuit Check ....................... 106 Front Air Control Circuit Check ............................. 107 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check ................................................................... 107 IPDM E/R Circuit Check ....................................... 108 CAN Communication Circuit Check ...................... 108 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check ................. 109 Component Inspection .......................................... 109 ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION .................................................................. 109 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) ......................................... 110 System Description ............................................... 110 ComponentParts and Harness Connector Location. 110 Schematic ..............................................................111 Wiring Diagram - CAN - ........................................ 112 Work Flow ............................................................. 115 CHECK SHEET ................................................. 117 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ........... 119 Circuit Check Between TCM and Driver Seat Control Unit ................................................................. 133 Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector ............................................. 134 Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R .............................................................. 135 ECM Circuit Check ............................................... 136 TCM Circuit Check ............................................... 136 Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check ................. 137 Combination Meter Circuit Check ......................... 137 Display Control Unit Circuit Check ........................ 138 BCM Circuit Check ............................................... 138 Data Link Connector Circuit Check ....................... 139 Front Air Control Circuit Check ............................. 139 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check ................................................................... 140 IPDM E/R Circuit Check ....................................... 140 CAN Communication Circuit Check ...................... 141 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check ................. 141 Component Inspection .......................................... 142 ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION .................................................................. 142 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) ......................................... 143 System Description ............................................... 143 ComponentParts and Harness Connector Location. 143 Schematic ............................................................. 144 Wiring Diagram - CAN - ........................................ 145 Work Flow ............................................................. 148 CHECK SHEET ................................................. 149 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ........... 151 Revision: October 2004 Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector .................................................................... 163 Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R .............................................................. 164 ECM Circuit Check ................................................ 165 TCM Circuit Check ................................................ 166 Combination Meter Circuit Check ......................... 166 BCM Circuit Check ................................................ 167 Data Link Connector Circuit Check ....................... 167 Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Check .................... 168 Front Air Control Circuit Check ............................. 168 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check .................................................................... 169 IPDM E/R Circuit Check ........................................ 169 CAN Communication Circuit Check ...................... 170 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check ................. 171 Component Inspection .......................................... 171 ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION .................................................................. 171 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) .......................................... 172 System Description ............................................... 172 ComponentParts and Harness Connector Location.172 Schematic ............................................................. 173 Wiring Diagram - CAN - ........................................ 174 Work Flow ............................................................. 177 CHECK SHEET ................................................. 179 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ............ 181 Circuit Check Between TCM and Driver Seat Control Unit .................................................................. 196 Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector ............................................. 197 Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R .............................................................. 198 ECM Circuit Check ................................................ 199 TCM Circuit Check ................................................ 199 Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check .................. 200 Combination Meter Circuit Check ......................... 200 Display Control Unit Circuit Check ........................ 201 BCM Circuit Check ................................................ 201 Data Link Connector Circuit Check ....................... 202 Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Check .................... 202 Front Air Control Circuit Check ............................. 203 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check .................................................................... 203 IPDM E/R Circuit Check ........................................ 204 CAN Communication Circuit Check ...................... 204 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check ................. 205 Component Inspection .......................................... 205 ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION .................................................................. 205 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) .......................................... 206 System Description ............................................... 206 ComponentParts and Harness Connector Location.206 Schematic ............................................................. 207 Wiring Diagram - CAN - ........................................ 208 Work Flow ............................................................. 211 CHECK SHEET ................................................. 212 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ............ 214 Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Con- LAN-2 2005 Titan nector ................................................................... 226 Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R ............................................................. 227 ECM Circuit Check ............................................... 228 TCM Circuit Check ............................................... 229 Combination Meter Circuit Check ........................ 229 BCM Circuit Check ............................................... 230 Data Link Connector Circuit Check ...................... 230 Front Air Control Circuit Check ............................ 231 Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check ...................... 231 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check ................................................................... 232 IPDM E/R Circuit Check ....................................... 232 CAN Communication Circuit Check ..................... 233 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check ................ 234 Component Inspection ......................................... 234 ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION .................................................................. 234 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) ......................................... 235 System Description .............................................. 235 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location. 235 Schematic ............................................................ 236 Wiring Diagram - CAN - ....................................... 237 Work Flow ............................................................ 240 CHECK SHEET ................................................. 241 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ........... 243 Circuit Check Between TCM and Driver Seat Control Unit ................................................................. 257 Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector ............................................ 258 Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R ............................................................. 259 ECM Circuit Check ............................................... 260 TCM Circuit Check ............................................... 260 Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check ................. 261 Combination Meter Circuit Check ........................ 261 BCM Circuit Check ............................................... 262 Data Link Connector Circuit Check ...................... 262 Front Air Control Circuit Check ............................ 263 Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check ...................... 263 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check ................................................................... 264 IPDM E/R Circuit Check ....................................... 264 CAN Communication Circuit Check ..................... 265 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check ................ 265 Component Inspection ......................................... 266 ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION .................................................................. 266 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) ......................................... 267 System Description .............................................. 267 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location. 267 Schematic ............................................................ 268 Wiring Diagram - CAN - ....................................... 269 Work Flow ............................................................ 272 CHECK SHEET ................................................. 274 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ........... 276 Circuit Check Between TCM and Driver Seat Control Unit ................................................................. 291 Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Revision: October 2004 Data Link Connector ............................................. 292 Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R .............................................................. 293 ECM Circuit Check ............................................... 294 TCM Circuit Check ............................................... 294 Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check ................. 295 Combination Meter Circuit Check ......................... 295 Display Control Unit Circuit Check ....................... 296 BCM Circuit Check ............................................... 296 Data Link Connector Circuit Check ...................... 297 Front Air Control Circuit Check ............................. 297 Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check ...................... 298 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check ................................................................... 298 IPDM E/R Circuit Check ....................................... 299 CAN Communication Circuit Check ...................... 299 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check ................ 300 Component Inspection .......................................... 300 ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION .................................................................. 300 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) ....................................... 301 System Description ............................................... 301 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location. 301 Schematic ............................................................. 302 Wiring Diagram - CAN - ........................................ 303 Work Flow ............................................................. 306 CHECK SHEET ................................................. 307 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ........... 309 Circuit Check Between TCM and Differential Lock Control Unit ........................................................... 323 Circuit Check Between Differential Lock Control Unit and Data Link Connector .............................. 324 Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R .............................................................. 325 ECM Circuit Check ............................................... 326 TCM Circuit Check ............................................... 326 Differential Lock Control Unit Circuit Check ......... 327 Combination Meter Circuit Check ......................... 327 BCM Circuit Check ............................................... 328 Data Link Connector Circuit Check ...................... 328 Front Air Control Circuit Check ............................. 329 Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check ...................... 329 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check ................................................................... 330 IPDM E/R Circuit Check ....................................... 330 CAN Communication Circuit Check ...................... 331 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check ................ 331 Component Inspection .......................................... 332 ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION .................................................................. 332 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) ....................................... 333 System Description ............................................... 333 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location. 333 Schematic ............................................................. 334 Wiring Diagram - CAN - ........................................ 335 Work Flow ............................................................. 338 CHECK SHEET ................................................. 339 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ........... 342 Circuit Check Between TCM and Differential Lock LAN-3 2005 Titan A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M Control Unit ........................................................... 358 Circuit Check Between Differential Lock Control Unit and Driver Seat Control Unit ......................... 359 Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector ............................................. 360 Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R .............................................................. 360 ECM Circuit Check ............................................... 361 TCM Circuit Check ............................................... 362 Differential Lock Control Unit Circuit Check .......... 362 Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check ................. 363 Combination Meter Circuit Check ......................... 363 BCM Circuit Check ............................................... 364 Data Link Connector Circuit Check ....................... 364 Front Air Control Circuit Check ............................. 365 Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check ...................... 365 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check ................................................................... 366 IPDM E/R Circuit Check ....................................... 366 CAN Communication Circuit Check ...................... 367 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check ................. 368 Component Inspection .......................................... 368 ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION .................................................................. 368 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) ....................................... 369 System Description ............................................... 369 ComponentParts and Harness Connector Location. 369 Schematic ............................................................. 370 Wiring Diagram - CAN - ........................................ 371 Work Flow ............................................................. 374 CHECK SHEET ................................................. 376 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ........... 379 Circuit Check Between TCM and Differential Lock Control Unit ........................................................... 396 Circuit Check Between Differential Lock Control Unit and Driver Seat Control Unit ......................... 397 Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector ............................................. 398 Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R .............................................................. 398 ECM Circuit Check ............................................... 399 TCM Circuit Check ............................................... 400 Differential Lock Control Unit Circuit Check .......... 400 Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check ................. 401 Combination Meter Circuit Check ......................... 401 Revision: October 2004 Display Control Unit Circuit Check ........................ 402 BCM Circuit Check ................................................ 402 Data Link Connector Circuit Check ....................... 403 Front Air Control Circuit Check ............................. 403 Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check ...................... 404 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check .................................................................... 404 IPDM E/R Circuit Check ........................................ 405 CAN Communication Circuit Check ...................... 406 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check ................. 406 Component Inspection .......................................... 407 ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION .................................................................. 407 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13) ........................................ 408 System Description ............................................... 408 ComponentParts and Harness Connector Location.408 Schematic ............................................................. 409 Wiring Diagram - CAN - ........................................ 410 Work Flow ............................................................. 413 CHECK SHEET ................................................. 414 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ............ 416 Circuit Check Between TCM and Driver Seat Control Unit .................................................................. 431 Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector ............................................. 432 Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R .............................................................. 433 ECM Circuit Check ................................................ 434 TCM Circuit Check ................................................ 434 Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check .................. 435 Combination Meter Circuit Check ......................... 435 BCM Circuit Check ................................................ 436 Data Link Connector Circuit Check ....................... 436 Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Check .................... 437 Front Air Control Circuit Check ............................. 437 Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check ...................... 438 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check .................................................................... 438 IPDM E/R Circuit Check ........................................ 439 CAN Communication Circuit Check ...................... 439 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check ................. 440 Component Inspection .......................................... 440 ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION .................................................................. 440 LAN-4 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS [CAN] PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A UKS001AE The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precautions When Using CONSULT-II – 2. – – 3. 4. 5. UKS001AG CAN SYSTEM ● ● E F G H Has CONSULT-II been used without connecting CONSULT-II CONVERTER on this vehicle? If YES, GO TO 2. J If NO, GO TO 5. Is there any indication other than indications relating to CAN communication system in the self-diagnosis results? LAN If YES, GO TO 3. If NO, GO TO 4. L Based on self-diagnosis results unrelated to CAN communication, carry out the inspection. Malfunctions may be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control units carrying out CAN communication. Therefore, erase the self-diagnosis results. M Diagnose CAN communication system. Refer to LAN-7, "CAN Communication Unit" . Precautions For Trouble Diagnosis ● D I CHECK POINTS FOR USING CONSULT-II – C UKS001AF When connecting CONSULT-II to data link connector, connect them through CONSULT-II CONVERTER. CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication. 1. B Do not apply voltage of 7.0V or higher to the measurement terminals. Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7.0V or less. Be sure to turn ignition switch off and disconnect negative battery terminal before checking the circuit. Revision: October 2004 LAN-5 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS [CAN] Precautions For Harness Repair UKS001AH CAN SYSTEM ● Solder the repaired parts, and wrap with tape. [Frays of twisted line must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).] PKIA0306E ● Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts. (The spliced wire will become separated and the characteristics of twisted line will be lost.) PKIA0307E Revision: October 2004 LAN-6 2005 Titan CAN COMMUNICATION [CAN] CAN COMMUNICATION System Description PFP:23710 A UKS001AI CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. CAN Communication Unit Body type D Truck Axle 2WD 4WD Engine A/T ABS ABLS VDC ABLS VDC × Electronic locking rear differential × Automatic drive positioner Navigation system CAN system trouble diagnosis E VK56DE Transmission CAN system type C UKS001AJ Go to CAN system, when selecting your CAN system type from the following table. Brake control B × × × × × × × × × × × × × 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 LAN24 LAN52 LAN80 LAN110 LAN143 LAN172 LAN206 LAN235 LAN267 LAN301 LAN333 LAN369 LAN408 F G H ×: Applicable I NOTE: Confirming the presence of the following items helps to identify CAN system type. ● Models with 4WD J LAN L BKIA0151E M ● Models with ABLS BKIA0166E Revision: October 2004 LAN-7 2005 Titan CAN COMMUNICATION [CAN] ● Models with VDC BKIA0168E ● Models with electronic locking rear differential BKIA0167E ● Models with automatic drive positioner BKIA0150E ● Models with navigation system BKIA0152E Revision: October 2004 LAN-8 2005 Titan CAN COMMUNICATION [CAN] TYPE 1 System diagram ● A Type 1 B C D E F SKIB0573E G Input/output signal chart T: Transmit R: Receive ECM TCM Combination meter Engine speed signal T R R Engine status signal T Engine coolant temperature signal T R A/T self-diagnosis signal R T Accelerator pedal position signal T R Closed throttle position signal T R Wide open throttle position signal T R Battery voltage signal T R Signals Front air control I R R J R LAN L T Stop lamp switch signal H IPDM E/R R R Ignition switch signal Fuel consumption monitor signal BCM ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) R R T T M R T Turbine revolution signal R T Output shaft revolution signal R T A/C switch signal R A/C compressor request signal T Blower fan motor switch signal R Cooling fan speed request signal T T R T R Low beam request signal R T R T R T R R T Front fog light request signal Revision: October 2004 R T R High beam request signal High beam status signal R R Position light request signal Low beam status signal R T LAN-9 R 2005 Titan CAN COMMUNICATION [CAN] Signals ECM TCM Combination meter BCM Day time running light request signal T Rear window defogger request signal T Rear window defogger status signal R R Vehicle speed signal R R Front air control ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) IPDM E/R R R R T R T T R Sleep wake up signal R T R Door switch signal R T R Turn indicator signal R T Buzzer output signal R T Fuel level sensor signal R T ASCD SET lamp signal T R ASCD CRUISE lamp signal T R Malfunction indicator lamp signal T R R Front wiper request signal T R Front wiper stop position signal R T Theft warning horn request signal T R Horn chirp signal T R ABS warning lamp signal R T Brake warning lamp signal R T ASCD operation signal T R ASCD OD cancel request T R A/T CHECK indicator lamp signal T R A/T position indicator lamp signal T R Tire pressure signal R 1st position switch signal*1 R T *1 R T Manual mode switch signal*2 R T Not manual mode switch signal*2 R T Manual mode shift up signal*2 R T Manual mode shift down signal*2 R T Tow mode switch signal R T A/T fluid temperature sensor signal T R 4th position switch signal Seat belt buckle switch signal T T R *1: Floor shift model only. *2: Column shift model only. Revision: October 2004 LAN-10 2005 Titan CAN COMMUNICATION [CAN] TYPE 2/TYPE 3/TYPE 4 System diagram ● A Type 2 B C D E F SKIB0573E ● Type 3 G H I J LAN L SKIB0574E ● Type 4 M SKIB0575E Revision: October 2004 LAN-11 2005 Titan CAN COMMUNICATION [CAN] Input/output signal chart T: Transmit R: Receive Signals ECM TCM Engine speed signal T R Engine status signal T Driver seat control unit Combination meter Display control unit R R BCM R Engine coolant temperature signal T R A/T self-diagnosis signal R T Accelerator pedal position signal T R Closed throttle position signal T R Wide open throttle position signal T R Battery voltage signal T R R T Ignition switch signal R T T R R R T Turbine revolution signal R T Output shaft revolution signal R T A/C switch signal R T R R T R T A/C switch/indicator signal Cooling fan speed request signal R R T R R Low beam request signal R T R T R R T High beam request signal High beam status signal R T T Position light request signal Low beam status signal R T T Blower fan motor switch signal R R Fuel consumption monitor signal A/C compressor request signal R R R Stop lamp switch signal R IPDM E/R R Key switch signal P range signal Front air control ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) R T R R T Front fog light request signal T R Day time running light request signal T R Rear window defogger request signal T Rear window defogger status signal R R Vehicle speed signal R R R T Sleep wake up signal R R Door switch signal R R Turn indicator signal R R T R R T R Key fob door unlock signal R T LAN-12 R T T Revision: October 2004 T R R R R T R Key fob ID signal Buzzer output signal R T 2005 Titan CAN COMMUNICATION [CAN] Signals ECM Fuel level sensor signal TCM Driver seat control unit R Combination meter Display control unit BCM Front air control ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) A IPDM E/R B T Fuel level low warning signal T ASCD SET lamp signal T R ASCD CRUISE lamp signal T R Malfunction indicator lamp signal T R C R D Front wiper request signal T R Front wiper stop position signal R T Theft warning horn request signal T R Horn chirp signal T R ABS warning lamp signal R T Brake warning lamp signal R T SLIP indicator lamp signal R T System setting signal R T T R Distance to empty signal T ASCD operation signal T R ASCD OD cancel request T R F G H R I A/T CHECK indicator lamp signal T R A/T position indicator lamp signal T R Tire pressure signal R Tire pressure data signal 1st position switch signal*1 R T *1 4th position switch signal R T Manual mode switch signal*2 R T Not manual mode switch signal*2 R T Manual mode shift up signal*2 R T Manual mode shift down signal*2 R T Tow mode switch signal R T A/T fluid temperature sensor signal T R Seat belt buckle switch signal T J T R T LAN L M R *1: Floor shift model only. *2: Column shift model only. Revision: October 2004 E LAN-13 2005 Titan CAN COMMUNICATION [CAN] TYPE 5/TYPE 6 System diagram ● Type 5 ● Type 6 SKIB0576E SKIB0578E Input/output signal chart T: Transmit R: Receive Signals ECM TCM Engine speed signal T R Engine status signal T Engine coolant temperature signal T A/T self-diagnosis signal R T Accelerator pedal position signal T R Combination meter Display control unit R R BCM R R Closed throttle position signal T R Wide open throttle position signal T R Revision: October 2004 Driver seat control unit Steering angle sensor Front air control ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) R R IPDM E/R R R R LAN-14 2005 Titan CAN COMMUNICATION [CAN] Signals Battery voltage signal ECM T TCM Driver seat control unit Combination meter Display control unit BCM T Ignition switch signal R T P range signal T Stop lamp switch signal R D R T T R T Turbine revolution signal R T Output shaft revolution signal R T A/C switch signal R A/C compressor request signal T Blower fan motor switch signal R E R F T R T A/C switch/indicator signal R R T H R R Low beam request signal R T R T R R R T R R T R Day time running light request signal T R Rear window defogger request signall T Rear window defogger status signal R R R T Sleep wake up signal R R Door switch signal R R R Turn indicator signal R R R R R R T T T R T T T ASCD SET lamp signal T R ASCD CRUISE lamp signal T R Malfunction indicator lamp signal T R R Front wiper request signal T R Front wiper stop position signal R T Theft warning horn request signal T R Revision: October 2004 LAN-15 L T T R Fuel level low warning signal T R R LAN R T Key fob door unlock signal R R R Key fob ID signal Fuel level sensor signal J T Front fog light request signal Buzzer output signal I T High beam request signal R G R T T Position light request signal Vehicle speed signal B R R Fuel consumption monitor signal High beam status signal IPDM E/R C R Low beam status signal Front air control A R Key switch signal Cooling fan speed request signal Steering angle sensor ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) 2005 Titan M CAN COMMUNICATION [CAN] Signals ECM TCM Driver seat control unit Combination meter Display control unit Horn chirp signal BCM Steering angle sensor Front air control ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) T Steering angle sensor signal R T R ABS warning lamp signal R T VDC OFF indicator lamp signal R T SLIP indicator lamp signal R T Brake warning lamp signal R T System setting signal Distance to empty signal R T T R T ASCD operation signal T R ASCD OD cancel request T R A/T CHECK indicator lamp signal T R A/T position indicator lamp signal T R Tire pressure signal T R 1st position switch signal*1 R T 4th position switch signal*1 R T Manual mode switch signal*2 R T Not manual mode switch signal*2 R T Manual mode shift up signal*2 R T Manual mode shift down signal*2 R T Tow mode switch signal R T A/T fluid temperature sensor signal T R Seat belt buckle switch signal R R Tire pressure data signal T IPDM E/R T R *1: Floor shift model only. *2: Column shift model only. Revision: October 2004 LAN-16 2005 Titan CAN COMMUNICATION [CAN] TYPE 7/TYPE 8/TYPE 9/TYPE 10/TYPE 11/TYPE 12 System diagram ● A Type 7 B C D E F SKIB0579E ● Type 8 G H I J LAN L SKIB0580E ● Type 9 M SKIB0581E Revision: October 2004 LAN-17 2005 Titan CAN COMMUNICATION [CAN] ● Type 10 SKIB0582E ● Type 11 ● Type 12 SKIB0583E SKIB0584E Revision: October 2004 LAN-18 2005 Titan CAN COMMUNICATION [CAN] Input/output signal chart T: Transmit R: Receive Signals A/T self-diagnosis signal ECM R TCM Differential lock control unit Driver seat control unit Display control unit BCM Front air control Transfer control unit T T Ignition switch signal R T T Closed throttle position signal T R Wide open throttle position signal T R Engine speed signal T R Engine status signal T Engine coolant temperature signal T Accelerator pedal position signal T R R R R R R R R H R R R R I R T Turbine revolution signal R T Output shaft revolution signal R T A/C switch signal R A/C compressor request signal T Blower fan motor switch signal R R J T R T A/C switch/indicator signal R R T L R R Low beam request signal R T R T R R T High beam request signal R T R R T Front fog light request signal T R Day time running light request signal T R Rear window defogger request signal T Rear window defogger status signal R R R R R T Sleep wake up signal R R Door switch signal R R Key fob ID signal R Revision: October 2004 R LAN-19 R R R R T R R LAN R T T Position light request signal Vehicle speed signal F G Fuel consumption monitor signal High beam status signal E R R T Low beam status signal T R R Cooling fan speed request signal C T Key switch signal P range signal IPDM E/R D R Battery voltage signal A B T R Stop lamp switch signal Combination meter ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) R T R T R T R T 2005 Titan M CAN COMMUNICATION [CAN] Signals ECM TCM Differential lock control unit Key fob door unlock signal Driver seat control unit Combination meter Display control unit R Buzzer output signal Transfer control unit IPDM E/R T R Fuel level sensor signal R T ASCD SET lamp signal T R ASCD CRUISE lamp signal T R Malfunction indicator lamp signal T R Fuel level low warning signal BCM Front air control ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) T T R Front wiper request signal T R Front wiper stop position signal R T Theft warning horn request signal T R Horn chirp signal T R ABS warning lamp signal R T SLIP indicator lamp signal R T Brake warning lamp signal R T R System setting signal T T Distance to empty signal R T ASCD operation signal T R ASCD OD cancel request T R A/T CHECK indicator lamp signal T R A/T position indicator lamp signal T R Tire pressure signal R R Tire pressure data signal T R *1 R T 4th position switch signal*1 R T Manual mode switch signal*2 R T Not manual mode switch signal*2 R T Manual mode shift up signal*2 R T Manual mode shift down signal R T Tow mode switch signal R T A/T fluid temperature sensor signal T R 1st position switch signal R *2 4WD shift switch signal R T R Seat belt buckle switch signal T T R Differential lock switch signal T R Differential lock indicator signal T R *1: Floor shift model only. *2: Column shift model only. Revision: October 2004 LAN-20 2005 Titan CAN COMMUNICATION [CAN] TYPE 13 System diagram ● A Type 13 B C D E F SKIB0586E G Input/output signal chart T: Transmit R: Receive Signals A/T self-diagnosis signal ECM TCM R T Driver seat control unit Combination meter R BCM Steering angle sensor Front air control R T R T Ignition switch signal R T T Closed throttle position signal T R Wide open throttle position signal T R Engine speed signal T R Engine status signal T Engine coolant temperature signal T Accelerator pedal position signal T Fuel consumption monitor signal T Turbine revolution signal R T Output shaft revolution signal R T A/C switch signal R A/C compressor request signal T Blower fan motor switch signal R Cooling fan speed request signal T I J LAN T L R R R M R R R R R R R R R R R T R R T R R Position light request signal Revision: October 2004 IPDM E/R R Key switch signal P range signal H T Stop lamp switch signal Battery voltage signal Transfer control unit ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) R LAN-21 T R R 2005 Titan CAN COMMUNICATION [CAN] Signals ECM TCM Driver seat control unit Combination meter Low beam request signal Low beam status signal BCM Steering angle sensor Front air control Transfer control unit ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) T IPDM E/R R R T High beam request signal T R Front fog light request signal T R Day time running light request signal T R Rear window defogger request signal T Rear window defogger status signal R High beam status signal R R T R T R Vehicle speed signal R R R R R T R T R Sleep wake up signal R R T R Door switch signal R R T R Key fob ID signal R T Key fob door unlock signal R T Buzzer output signal R Fuel level sensor signal R T ASCD SET lamp signal T R ASCD CRUISE lamp signal T R Malfunction indicator lamp signal T R Fuel level low warning signal R T T Front wiper request signal T R Front wiper stop position signal R T Theft warning horn request signal T R Horn chirp signal T R Steering angle sensor signal T R ABS warning lamp signal R T VDC OFF indicator lamp signal R T SLIP indicator lamp signal R T Brake warning lamp signal R T ASCD operation signal T R ASCD OD cancel request T R A/T CHECK indicator lamp signal T R A/T position indicator lamp signal T R Tire pressure signal R *1 1st position switch signal R T 4th position switch signal*1 R T Manual mode switch signal*2 R T Not manual mode switch signal*2 R T Revision: October 2004 LAN-22 R T 2005 Titan CAN COMMUNICATION [CAN] Signals ECM TCM Driver seat control unit Combination meter Manual mode shift up signal*2 R T Manual mode shift down signal*2 R T Tow mode switch signal R T A/T fluid temperature sensor signal T R 4WD shift switch signal BCM Steering angle sensor Front air control Transfer control unit ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) A IPDM E/R T T C D R Seat belt buckle switch signal B E R *1: Floor shift model only. *2: Column shift model only. F G H I J LAN L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-23 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) System Description PFP:23710 UKS001AK CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. Component Parts and Harness Connector Location UKS001AL BKIA0128E Revision: October 2004 LAN-24 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] Schematic UKS001AM A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0130E Revision: October 2004 LAN-25 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] Wiring Diagram - CAN - UKS001AN BKWA0425E Revision: October 2004 LAN-26 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0426E Revision: October 2004 LAN-27 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] BKWA0427E Revision: October 2004 LAN-28 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] Work Flow 1. UKS001AO When there are no indications of “BCM”, “HVAC” or “IPDM E/R” on “SELECT SYSTEM” display of CONSULT-II, print the “SELECT SYSTEM”. A B C D PKIA2093E 2. Print all the data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “BCM”, “HVAC”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II. E F G H PKIA8260E 3. Print all the data of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “BCM”, “HVAC”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II. I J LAN L PKIA8343E 4. 5. 6. Attach the printed sheet of “SELECT SYSTEM”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” onto the check sheet. Refer to LAN-30, "CHECK SHEET" . Based on the indications of “SELECT SYSTEM” and the results of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR”, puts a check mark onto the items with “No indication”, “NG”, or “UNKWN” in the check sheet table. Refer to LAN30, "CHECK SHEET" . NOTE: ● If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. ● The “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items, which are not in check sheet table, are not related to diagnostic procedure on service manual. So it is not necessary to check the status of the “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items not in check sheet table. According to the check sheet results (example), start inspection. Refer to LAN-32, "CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)" . Revision: October 2004 LAN-29 2005 Titan M CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] CHECK SHEET NOTE: If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. PKIB6627E Revision: October 2004 LAN-30 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M PKIB6628E Revision: October 2004 LAN-31 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) NOTE: If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. Case 1 Check harness between TCM and data link connector. Refer to LAN-43, "Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector" . PKIB6629E PKIA9478E Revision: October 2004 LAN-32 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] Case 2 Check harness between data link connector and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-44, "Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R" . A B C D E F PKIB6630E G H I J LAN L PKIA9479E M Revision: October 2004 LAN-33 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] Case 3 Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-45, "ECM Circuit Check" . PKIB6631E PKIA9480E Revision: October 2004 LAN-34 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] Case 4 A Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-46, "TCM Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIB6632E G H I J LAN PKIA9481E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-35 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] Case 5 Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-46, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" . PKIB6633E PKIA9482E Revision: October 2004 LAN-36 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] Case 6 A Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-47, "BCM Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIB6634E G H I J LAN PKIA9483E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-37 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] Case 7 Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-47, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" . PKIB6635E PKIA9484E Revision: October 2004 LAN-38 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] Case 8 A Check front air control circuit. Refer to LAN-48, "Front Air Control Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIB6636E G H I J LAN PKIB6764E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-39 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] Case 9 Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-48, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check" . PKIB6637E PKIA9485E Revision: October 2004 LAN-40 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] Case 10 A Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-49, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIB6638E G H I J LAN PKIA9486E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-41 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] Case 11 Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-50, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" . PKIB6639E Case 12 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-50, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . PKIB6640E Revision: October 2004 LAN-42 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] Case 13 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “ON”. Refer to LAN-50, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . A B C D E F PKIB6641E Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector UKS001AP G 1. CHECK CONNECTOR H Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and I harness side). – Harness connector F33 – Harness connector E19 J – Harness connector E34 – Harness connector B40 – Harness connector B69 LAN – Harness connector M40 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. L NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 1. 2. 3. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. M Disconnect A/T assembly connector and harness connector F33. Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector F9 terminals 3 (L), 8 (P) and harness connector F33 terminals 12 (L), 11 (P). 3 (L) - 12 (L) 8 (P) - 11 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA6831E Revision: October 2004 LAN-43 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect harness connector E34. Check continuity between harness connector E19 terminals 12 (L), 11 (P) and harness connector E34 terminals 24 (L), 23 (P). 12 (L) - 24 (L) 11 (P) - 23 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA9591E 4. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect harness connector B69. Check continuity between harness connector B40 terminals 24 (L), 23 (P) and harness connector B69 terminals 51J (L), 52J (P). 24 (L) - 51J (L) 23 (P) - 52J (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA6833E 5. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT Check continuity between harness connector M40 terminals 51J (L), 52J (P) and data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P). 51J (L) - 6 (L) 52J (P) - 14 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-29, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness. PKIA6834E Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R UKS001AQ 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). – Harness connector M31 – Harness connector E152 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: October 2004 LAN-44 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect harness connector M31. Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and harness connector M31 terminals 31G (L), 42G (P). 6 (L) - 31G (L) 14 (P) - 42G (P) B : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. D PKIA6835E E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between harness connector E152 terminals 31G (L), 42G (P) and IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L), 40 (P). 31G (L) - 39 (L) 42G (P) - 40 (P) F G : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. H OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-29, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness. I PKIA8140E ECM Circuit Check UKS001AR J 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. LAN Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). L – ECM connector – Harness connector E19 – Harness connector F33 M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: October 2004 LAN-45 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM connector. Check resistance between ECM harness connector E16 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P). 94 (L) - 86 (P) : Approx. 108 - 132 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ECM. NG >> Repair harness between ECM and A/T assembly. PKIA0816E TCM Circuit Check UKS001AS 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of A/T assembly for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect A/T assembly connector. Check resistance between A/T assembly harness connector F9 terminals 3 (L) and 8 (P). 3 (L) - 8 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace A/T assembly. NG >> Repair harness between A/T assembly and harness connector F33. SKIA6866E Combination Meter Circuit Check UKS001AT 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: October 2004 LAN-46 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect combination meter connector. Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 11 (L) and 12 (P). 11 (L) - 12 (P) B : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. NG >> Repair harness between combination meter and data link connector. C D PKIA6837E E BCM Circuit Check UKS001AU 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. G H I Disconnect BCM connector. Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P). 39 (L) - 40 (P) F J : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Repair harness between BCM and data link connector. LAN L SKIA6869E M Data Link Connector Circuit Check UKS001AV 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check the terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: October 2004 LAN-47 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Diagnose again. Refer to LAN-29, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter. PKIA2077E Front Air Control Circuit Check UKS003KM 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of front air control for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect front air control connector. Check resistance between front air control harness connector M50 terminals 34 (L) and 35 (P). 34 (L) - 35 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. NG >> Repair harness between front air control and data link connector. PKIA8136E ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check UKS001AX 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: October 2004 LAN-48 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 11 (L) and 15 (P). 11 (L) - 15 (P) B : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). NG >> Repair harness between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and harness connector E152. C D SKIA6872E E IPDM E/R Circuit Check UKS001AY 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. G H I Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P). 39 (L) - 40 (P) F J : Approx. 108 - 132 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. NG >> Repair harness between IPDM E/R and harness connector E152. LAN L PKIA8141E M Revision: October 2004 LAN-49 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] CAN Communication Circuit Check UKS001AZ 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Disconnect the following module and control unit connectors and check terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. – ECM – A/T assembly – Combination meter – BCM – Front air control – ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) – IPDM E/R OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT With all module and control unit connectors disconnected, check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA2077E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and ground. 6 (L) - Ground 14 (P) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Check ECM and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-51, "ECM/ IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION" . NG >> Repair harness. PKIA2079E IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check UKS001B0 Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R. ● IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-26, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" . ● Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-13, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START" . Revision: October 2004 LAN-50 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) [CAN] Component Inspection UKS001B1 A ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION ● ● ● Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle. Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86. Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 39 and 40. Unit Terminal ECM 94 - 86 IPDM E/R 39 - 40 B Resistance value (Ω) (Approx.) C 108 - 132 D LKIA0037E E F G H I J LAN L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-51 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) System Description PFP:23710 UKS003AO CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. Component Parts and Harness Connector Location UKS003AP BKIA0128E Revision: October 2004 LAN-52 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] Schematic UKS003AQ A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0130E Revision: October 2004 LAN-53 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] Wiring Diagram - CAN - UKS003AR BKWA0535E Revision: October 2004 LAN-54 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0536E Revision: October 2004 LAN-55 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] BKWA0537E Revision: October 2004 LAN-56 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] Work Flow 1. UKS003AS When there are no indications of “BCM”, “HVAC” or “IPDM E/R” on “SELECT SYSTEM” display of CONSULT-II, print the “SELECT SYSTEM”. A B C D PKIA2093E 2. Print all the data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “BCM”, “HVAC”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II. E F G H PKIA8260E 3. Print all the data of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “BCM”, “HVAC”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II. I J LAN L PKIA8343E 4. 5. 6. Attach the printed sheet of “SELECT SYSTEM”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” onto the check sheet. Refer to LAN-58, "CHECK SHEET" . Based on the indications of “SELECT SYSTEM” and the results of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR”, puts a check mark onto the items with “No indication”, “NG”, or “UNKWN” in the check sheet table. Refer to LAN58, "CHECK SHEET" . NOTE: ● If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. ● The “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items, which are not in check sheet table, are not related to diagnostic procedure on service manual. So it is not necessary to check the status of the “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items not in check sheet table. According to the check sheet results (example), start inspection. Refer to LAN-60, "CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)" . Revision: October 2004 LAN-57 2005 Titan M CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] CHECK SHEET NOTE: If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. SKIB2703E Revision: October 2004 LAN-58 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M PKIB6628E Revision: October 2004 LAN-59 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) NOTE: If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. Case 1 Check harness between TCM and data link connector. Refer to LAN-71, "Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector" . SKIB2704E PKIA9478E Revision: October 2004 LAN-60 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] Case 2 Check harness between data link connector and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-72, "Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R" . A B C D E F SKIB2705E G H I J LAN L PKIA9479E M Revision: October 2004 LAN-61 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] Case 3 Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-73, "ECM Circuit Check" . SKIB2706E PKIA9480E Revision: October 2004 LAN-62 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] Case 4 A Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-74, "TCM Circuit Check" . B C D E F SKIB2707E G H I J LAN PKIA9481E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-63 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] Case 5 Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-74, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" . SKIB2708E PKIA9482E Revision: October 2004 LAN-64 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] Case 6 A Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-75, "BCM Circuit Check" . B C D E F SKIB2709E G H I J LAN PKIA9483E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-65 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] Case 7 Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-75, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" . SKIB2710E PKIA9484E Revision: October 2004 LAN-66 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] Case 8 A Check front air control circuit. Refer to LAN-76, "Front Air Control Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIB6774E G H I J LAN PKIB6764E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-67 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] Case 9 Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-76, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check" . SKIB2711E PKIA9485E Revision: October 2004 LAN-68 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] Case 10 A Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-77, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" . B C D E F SKIB2712E G H I J LAN PKIA9486E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-69 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] Case 11 Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-78, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" . SKIB2713E Case 12 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-78, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . SKIB2714E Revision: October 2004 LAN-70 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] Case 13 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “ON”. Refer to LAN-78, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . A B C D E F SKIB2715E Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector UKS003AT G 1. CHECK CONNECTOR H Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and I harness side). – Harness connector F33 – Harness connector E19 J – Harness connector E34 – Harness connector B40 – Harness connector B69 LAN – Harness connector M40 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. L NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 1. 2. 3. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. M Disconnect A/T assembly connector and harness connector F33. Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector F9 terminals 3 (L), 8 (P) and harness connector F33 terminals 12 (L), 11 (P). 3 (L) - 12 (L) 8 (P) - 11 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA6831E Revision: October 2004 LAN-71 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect harness connector E34. Check continuity between harness connector E19 terminals 12 (L), 11 (P) and harness connector E34 terminals 24 (L), 23 (P). 12 (L) - 24 (L) 11 (P) - 23 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA9591E 4. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect harness connector B69. Check continuity between harness connector B40 terminals 24 (L), 23 (P) and harness connector B69 terminals 51J (L), 52J (P). 24 (L) - 51J (L) 23 (P) - 52J (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA6833E 5. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT Check continuity between harness connector M40 terminals 51J (L), 52J (P) and data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P). 51J (L) - 6 (L) 52J (P) - 14 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-57, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness. PKIA6834E Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R UKS003AU 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). – Harness connector M31 – Harness connector E152 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: October 2004 LAN-72 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect harness connector M31. Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and harness connector M31 terminals 31G (L), 42G (P). 6 (L) - 31G (L) 14 (P) - 42G (P) B : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. D PKIA6835E E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between harness connector E152 terminals 31G (L), 42G (P) and IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L), 40 (P). 31G (L) - 39 (L) 42G (P) - 40 (P) F G : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. H OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-57, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness. I PKIA8140E ECM Circuit Check UKS003AV J 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. LAN Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). L – ECM connector – Harness connector E19 – Harness connector F33 M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: October 2004 LAN-73 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM connector. Check resistance between ECM harness connector E16 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P). 94 (L) - 86 (P) : Approx. 108 - 132 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ECM. NG >> Repair harness between ECM and A/T assembly. PKIA0816E TCM Circuit Check UKS003AW 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of A/T assembly for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect A/T assembly connector. Check resistance between A/T assembly harness connector F9 terminals 3 (L) and 8 (P). 3 (L) - 8 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace A/T assembly. NG >> Repair harness between A/T assembly and harness connector F33. SKIA6866E Combination Meter Circuit Check UKS003AX 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: October 2004 LAN-74 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect combination meter connector. Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 11 (L) and 12 (P). 11 (L) - 12 (P) B : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. NG >> Repair harness between combination meter and data link connector. C D PKIA6837E E BCM Circuit Check UKS003AY 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. G H I Disconnect BCM connector. Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P). 39 (L) - 40 (P) F J : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Repair harness between BCM and data link connector. LAN L SKIA6869E M Data Link Connector Circuit Check UKS003AZ 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check the terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: October 2004 LAN-75 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Diagnose again. Refer to LAN-57, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter. PKIA2077E Front Air Control Circuit Check UKS003KN 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of front air control for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect front air control connector. Check resistance between front air control harness connector M50 terminals 34 (L) and 35 (P). 34 (L) - 35 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. NG >> Repair harness between front air control and data link connector. PKIA8136E ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check UKS003B0 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: October 2004 LAN-76 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 11 (L) and 15 (P). 11 (L) - 15 (P) B : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). NG >> Repair harness between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and harness connector E152. C D SKIA6872E E IPDM E/R Circuit Check UKS003B1 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. G H I Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P). 39 (L) - 40 (P) F J : Approx. 108 - 132 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. NG >> Repair harness between IPDM E/R and harness connector E152. LAN L PKIA8141E M Revision: October 2004 LAN-77 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] CAN Communication Circuit Check UKS003B2 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Disconnect the following module and control unit connectors and check terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. – ECM – A/T assembly – Combination meter – BCM – Front air control – ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) – IPDM E/R OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT With all module and control unit connectors disconnected, check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA2077E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and ground. 6 (L) - Ground 14 (P) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Check ECM and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-79, "ECM/ IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION" . NG >> Repair harness. PKIA2079E IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check UKS003B3 Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R. ● IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-26, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" . ● Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-13, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START" . Revision: October 2004 LAN-78 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) [CAN] Component Inspection UKS003B4 A ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION ● ● ● Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle. Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86. Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 39 and 40. Unit Terminal ECM 94 - 86 IPDM E/R 39 - 40 B Resistance value (Ω) (Approx.) C 108 - 132 D LKIA0037E E F G H I J LAN L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-79 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) System Description PFP:23710 UKS003A5 CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. Component Parts and Harness Connector Location UKS003A6 BKIA0129E Revision: October 2004 LAN-80 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] Schematic UKS003A7 A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0132E Revision: October 2004 LAN-81 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] Wiring Diagram - CAN - UKS003A8 BKWA0428E Revision: October 2004 LAN-82 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0429E Revision: October 2004 LAN-83 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] BKWA0430E Revision: October 2004 LAN-84 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] Work Flow 1. UKS003A9 When there are no indications of “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC” or “IPDM E/R” on “SELECT SYSTEM” display of CONSULT-II, print the “SELECT SYSTEM”. A B C D PKIA2093E 2. Print all the data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II. E F G H PKIA8260E 3. Print all the data of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II. I J LAN L PKIA8343E 4. 5. 6. Attach the printed sheet of “SELECT SYSTEM”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” onto the check sheet. Refer to LAN-86, "CHECK SHEET" . Based on the indications of “SELECT SYSTEM” and the results of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR”, puts a check mark onto the items with “No indication”, “NG”, or “UNKWN” in the check sheet table. Refer to LAN86, "CHECK SHEET" . NOTE: ● If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. ● The “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items, which are not in check sheet table, are not related to diagnostic procedure on service manual. So it is not necessary to check the status of the “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items not in check sheet table. According to the check sheet results (example), start inspection. Refer to LAN-88, "CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)" . Revision: October 2004 LAN-85 2005 Titan M CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] CHECK SHEET NOTE: If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. SKIB2716E Revision: October 2004 LAN-86 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M PKIB6658E Revision: October 2004 LAN-87 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) NOTE: If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. Case 1 Check harness between TCM and driver seat control unit. Refer to LAN-101, "Circuit Check Between TCM and Driver Seat Control Unit" . SKIB2717E PKIA9487E Revision: October 2004 LAN-88 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] Case 2 Check harness between driver seat control unit and data link connector. Refer to LAN-102, "Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector" . A B C D E F SKIB2718E G H I J LAN L PKIA9488E M Revision: October 2004 LAN-89 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] Case 3 Check harness between data link connector and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-103, "Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R" . SKIB2719E PKIA9489E Revision: October 2004 LAN-90 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] Case 4 A Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-104, "ECM Circuit Check" . B C D E F SKIB2720E G H I J LAN PKIA9490E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-91 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] Case 5 Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-104, "TCM Circuit Check" . SKIB2721E PKIA9491E Revision: October 2004 LAN-92 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] Case 6 A Check driver seat control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-105, "Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check" . B C D E F SKIB2722E G H I J LAN PKIA9492E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-93 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] Case 7 Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-105, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" . SKIB2723E PKIA9493E Revision: October 2004 LAN-94 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] Case 8 A Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-106, "BCM Circuit Check" . B C D E F SKIB2724E G H I J LAN PKIA9494E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-95 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] Case 9 Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-106, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" . SKIB2725E PKIA9495E Revision: October 2004 LAN-96 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] Case 10 A Check front air control circuit. Refer to LAN-107, "Front Air Control Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIB6775E G H I J LAN PKIB6765E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-97 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] Case 11 Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-107, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check" . SKIB2726E PKIA9496E Revision: October 2004 LAN-98 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] Case 12 A Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-108, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" . B C D E F SKIB2727E G H I J LAN PKIA9497E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-99 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] Case 13 Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-108, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" . SKIB2728E Case 14 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-109, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . SKIB2729E Revision: October 2004 LAN-100 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] Case 15 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “ON”. Refer to LAN-109, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . A B C D E F SKIB2730E Circuit Check Between TCM and Driver Seat Control Unit UKS003AA G 1. CHECK CONNECTOR H Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and I harness side). – Harness connector F33 – Harness connector E19 J – Harness connector E50 – Harness connector B75 OK or NG LAN OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 1. 2. 3. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. L Disconnect A/T assembly connector and harness connector F33. Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector F9 terminals 3 (L), 8 (P) and harness connector F33 terminals 12 (L), 11 (P). 3 (L) - 12 (L) 8 (P) - 11 (P) M : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA6831E Revision: October 2004 LAN-101 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect harness connector E50. Check continuity between harness connector E19 terminals 12 (L), 11 (P) and harness connector E50 terminals 2 (L), 1 (P). 12 (L) - 2 (L) 11 (P) - 1 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA7668E 4. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect harness connector B37. Check continuity between harness connector B75 terminals 2 (L), 1 (P) and harness connector B37 terminals 15 (L), 14 (P). 2 (L) - 15 (L) 1 (P) - 14 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-85, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness. PKIA9743E Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector UKS003AB 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). – Harness connector B69 – Harness connector M40 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect harness connector B37 and harness connector B69. Check continuity between harness connector B37 terminals 15 (L), 14 (P) and harness connector B69 terminals 51J (L), 52J (P). 15 (L) - 51J (L) 14 (P) - 52J (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA9744E Revision: October 2004 LAN-102 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT A Check continuity between harness connector M40 terminals 51J (L), 52J (P) and data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P). 51J (L) - 6 (L) 52J (P) - 14 (P) B : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-85, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness. C D PKIA6834E Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R UKS003AC 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). – Harness connector M31 – Harness connector E152 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. E F G H 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT I 1. 2. J Disconnect harness connector M31. Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and harness connector M31 terminals 31G (L), 42G (P). 6 (L) - 31G (L) 14 (P) - 42G (P) LAN : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. L PKIA6835E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between harness connector E152 terminals 31G (L), 42G (P) and IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L), 40 (P). 31G (L) - 39 (L) 42G (P) - 40 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-85, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness. PKIA8140E Revision: October 2004 LAN-103 2005 Titan M CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] ECM Circuit Check UKS003AD 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). – ECM connector – Harness connector E19 – Harness connector F33 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM connector. Check resistance between ECM harness connector E16 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P). 94 (L) - 86 (P) : Approx. 108 - 132 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ECM. NG >> Repair harness between ECM and A/T assembly. PKIA0816E TCM Circuit Check UKS003AE 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of A/T assembly for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect A/T assembly connector. Check resistance between A/T assembly harness connector F9 terminals 3 (L) and 8 (P). 3 (L) - 8 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace A/T assembly. NG >> Repair harness between A/T assembly and harness connector F33. SKIA6866E Revision: October 2004 LAN-104 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check UKS003AF 1. CHECK CONNECTOR A 1. 2. 3. B Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). – Driver seat control unit connector – Harness connector P1 – Harness connector B37 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. C D E 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector. Check resistance between driver seat control unit harness connector P2 terminals 3 (L) and 19 (P). 3 (L) - 19 (P) F : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω G OK or NG OK >> Replace driver seat control unit. NG >> Repair harness between driver seat control unit and harness connector B69. H I PKIA6842E Combination Meter Circuit Check UKS003AG 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. J Turn ignition switch OFF. LAN Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side and harness side). L OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. M CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 2. 1. 2. Disconnect combination meter connector. Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 11 (L) and 12 (P). 11 (L) - 12 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. NG >> Repair harness between combination meter and data link connector. PKIA6837E Revision: October 2004 LAN-105 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] BCM Circuit Check UKS003AH 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P). 39 (L) - 40 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Repair harness between BCM and data link connector. SKIA6869E Data Link Connector Circuit Check UKS003AI 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check the terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Diagnose again. Refer to LAN-85, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter. PKIA2077E Revision: October 2004 LAN-106 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] Front Air Control Circuit Check UKS003KO 1. CHECK CONNECTOR A 1. 2. 3. B Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of front air control for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. D 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect front air control connector. Check resistance between front air control harness connector M50 terminals 34 (L) and 35 (P). 34 (L) - 35 (P) C E : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω F OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. NG >> Repair harness between front air control and data link connector. G H PKIA8136E ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check UKS003AJ 1. CHECK CONNECTOR I 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. J Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). LAN OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. L CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 2. 1. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 11 (L) and 15 (P). 11 (L) - 15 (P) M : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). NG >> Repair harness between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and harness connector E152. SKIA6872E Revision: October 2004 LAN-107 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] IPDM E/R Circuit Check UKS003AK 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P). 39 (L) - 40 (P) : Approx. 108 - 132 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. NG >> Repair harness between IPDM E/R and harness connector E152. PKIA8141E CAN Communication Circuit Check UKS003AL 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Disconnect the following module and control unit connectors and check terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. – ECM – A/T assembly – Driver seat control unit – Combination meter – BCM – Front air control – ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) – IPDM E/R OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. Revision: October 2004 LAN-108 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT A With all module and control unit connectors disconnected, check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) B : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. C D PKIA2077E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT E Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and ground. 6 (L) - Ground 14 (P) - Ground F : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. G OK or NG OK >> Check ECM and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-109, "ECM/ IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION" . NG >> Repair harness. H PKIA2079E IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check UKS003AM I Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R. ● IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-26, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" . ● Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-13, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START" . J Component Inspection UKS003AN LAN ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION ● ● ● Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle. Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86. Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 39 and 40. Unit Terminal ECM 94 - 86 IPDM E/R 39 - 40 L Resistance value (Ω) (Approx.) M 108 - 132 LKIA0037E Revision: October 2004 LAN-109 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) System Description PFP:23710 UKS0039K CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. Component Parts and Harness Connector Location UKS0039L BKIA0130E Revision: October 2004 LAN-110 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] Schematic UKS0039M A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0134E Revision: October 2004 LAN-111 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] Wiring Diagram - CAN - UKS0039N BKWA0431E Revision: October 2004 LAN-112 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0432E Revision: October 2004 LAN-113 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] BKWA0433E Revision: October 2004 LAN-114 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] Work Flow 1. UKS0039O When there are no indications of “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC” or “IPDM E/R” on “SELECT SYSTEM” display of CONSULT-II, print the “SELECT SYSTEM”. A B C D PKIA2093E 2. Print all the data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II. E F G H PKIA8260E 3. Print all the data of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II. I J LAN L PKIA8343E 4. 5. 6. 7. Attach the printed sheet of “SELECT SYSTEM”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” onto the check sheet. Refer to LAN-117, "CHECK SHEET" . Based on the indications of “SELECT SYSTEM” and the results of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR”, puts a check mark onto the items with “No indication”, “NG”, or “UNKWN” in the check sheet table. Refer to LAN117, "CHECK SHEET" . NOTE: ● If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. ● The “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items, which are not in check sheet table, are not related to diagnostic procedure on service manual. So it is not necessary to check the status of the “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items not in check sheet table. Check CAN communication line of the navigation system. Refer to AV-148, "CAN Communication Line Check" . Attach the CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet onto the check sheet. Refer to LAN-117, "CHECK SHEET" . Revision: October 2004 LAN-115 2005 Titan M CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] 8. 9. Mark the “NG” or “UNKWN” item of the check sheet table with “v” from the result of CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet. Refer to LAN-117, "CHECK SHEET" . NOTE: If “NG” is displayed on “CAN COMM” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. Refer to AV-148, "CAN Communication Line Check" . According to the check sheet results (example), start inspection. Refer to LAN-119, "CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)" . Revision: October 2004 LAN-116 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] CHECK SHEET NOTE: If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” or “CAN COMM” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M SKIB2731E Revision: October 2004 LAN-117 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] PKIB6658E Revision: October 2004 LAN-118 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) NOTE: If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” or “CAN COMM” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. A Case 1 B Check harness between TCM and driver seat control unit. Refer to LAN-133, "Circuit Check Between TCM and Driver Seat Control Unit" . C D E F G SKIB2732E H I J LAN L M PKIA9498E Revision: October 2004 LAN-119 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] Case 2 Check harness between driver seat control unit and data link connector. Refer to LAN-134, "Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector" . SKIB2733E PKIA9499E Revision: October 2004 LAN-120 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] Case 3 Check harness between data link connector and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-135, "Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R" . A B C D E F SKIB2734E G H I J LAN L PKIA9500E M Revision: October 2004 LAN-121 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] Case 4 Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-136, "ECM Circuit Check" . SKIB2735E PKIA9501E Revision: October 2004 LAN-122 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] Case 5 A Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-136, "TCM Circuit Check" . B C D E F SKIB2736E G H I J LAN PKIA9502E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-123 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] Case 6 Check driver seat control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-137, "Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check" . SKIB2737E PKIA9503E Revision: October 2004 LAN-124 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] Case 7 A Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-137, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" . B C D E F SKIB2738E G H I J LAN PKIA9504E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-125 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] Case 8 Check display control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-138, "Display Control Unit Circuit Check" . SKIB2739E PKIA9505E Revision: October 2004 LAN-126 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] Case 9 A Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-138, "BCM Circuit Check" . B C D E F SKIB2740E G H I J LAN PKIA9506E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-127 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] Case 10 Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-139, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" . SKIB2742E PKIA9507E Revision: October 2004 LAN-128 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] Case 11 A Check front air control circuit. Refer to LAN-139, "Front Air Control Circuit Check" . B C D E F SKIB2743E G H I J LAN PKIA9508E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-129 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] Case 12 Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-140, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check" . SKIB2744E PKIA9509E Revision: October 2004 LAN-130 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] Case 13 A Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-140, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" . B C D E F SKIB2745E G H I J LAN PKIA9510E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-131 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] Case 14 Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-141, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" . SKIB2746E Case 15 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-141, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . SKIB2747E Revision: October 2004 LAN-132 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] Case 16 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “ON”. Refer to LAN-141, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . A B C D E F SKIB2748E Circuit Check Between TCM and Driver Seat Control Unit UKS0039P G 1. CHECK CONNECTOR H Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and I harness side). – Harness connector F33 – Harness connector E19 J – Harness connector E50 – Harness connector B75 OK or NG LAN OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 1. 2. 3. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. L Disconnect A/T assembly connector and harness connector F33. Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector F9 terminals 3 (L), 8 (P) and harness connector F33 terminals 12 (L), 11 (P). 3 (L) - 12 (L) 8 (P) - 11 (P) M : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA6831E Revision: October 2004 LAN-133 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect harness connector E50. Check continuity between harness connector E19 terminals 12 (L), 11 (P) and harness connector E50 terminals 2 (L), 1 (P). 12 (L) - 2 (L) 11 (P) - 1 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA7668E 4. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect harness connector B37. Check continuity between harness connector B75 terminals 2 (L), 1 (P) and harness connector B37 terminals 15 (L), 14 (P). 2 (L) - 15 (L) 1 (P) - 14 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-115, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness. PKIA9743E Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector UKS0039Q 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). – Harness connector B69 – Harness connector M40 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect harness connector B37 and harness connector B69. Check continuity between harness connector B37 terminals 15 (L), 14 (P) and harness connector B69 terminals 51J (L), 52J (P). 15 (L) - 51J (L) 14 (P) - 52J (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA9744E Revision: October 2004 LAN-134 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT A Check continuity between harness connector M40 terminals 51J (L), 52J (P) and data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P). 51J (L) - 6 (L) 52J (P) - 14 (P) B : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-115, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness. C D PKIA6834E Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R UKS0039R 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). – Harness connector M31 – Harness connector E152 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. E F G H 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT I 1. 2. J Disconnect harness connector M31. Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and harness connector M31 terminals 31G (L), 42G (P). 6 (L) - 31G (L) 14 (P) - 42G (P) LAN : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. L PKIA6835E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between harness connector E152 terminals 31G (L), 42G (P) and IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L), 40 (P). 31G (L) - 39 (L) 42G (P) - 40 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-115, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness. PKIA8140E Revision: October 2004 LAN-135 2005 Titan M CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] ECM Circuit Check UKS0039S 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). – ECM connector – Harness connector E19 – Harness connector F33 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM connector. Check resistance between ECM harness connector E16 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P). 94 (L) - 86 (P) : Approx. 108 - 132 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ECM. NG >> Repair harness between ECM and A/T assembly. PKIA0816E TCM Circuit Check UKS0039T 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of A/T assembly for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect A/T assembly connector. Check resistance between A/T assembly harness connector F9 terminals 3 (L) and 8 (P). 3 (L) - 8 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace A/T assembly. NG >> Repair harness between A/T assembly and harness connector F33. SKIA6866E Revision: October 2004 LAN-136 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check UKS0039U 1. CHECK CONNECTOR A 1. 2. 3. B Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). – Driver seat control unit connector – Harness connector P1 – Harness connector B37 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. C D E 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector. Check resistance between driver seat control unit harness connector P2 terminals 3 (L) and 19 (P). 3 (L) - 19 (P) F : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω G OK or NG OK >> Replace driver seat control unit. NG >> Repair harness between driver seat control unit and harness connector B69. H I PKIA6842E Combination Meter Circuit Check UKS0039V 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. J Turn ignition switch OFF. LAN Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side and harness side). L OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. M CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 2. 1. 2. Disconnect combination meter connector. Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 11 (L) and 12 (P). 11 (L) - 12 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. NG >> Repair harness between combination meter and data link connector. PKIA6837E Revision: October 2004 LAN-137 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] Display Control Unit Circuit Check UKS0039W 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of display control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect display control unit connector. Check resistance between display control unit harness connector M95 terminals 25 (L) and 26 (P). 25 (L) - 26 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. NG >> Repair harness between display control unit and data link connector. SKIA6884E BCM Circuit Check UKS0039X 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P). 39 (L) - 40 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Repair harness between BCM and data link connector. SKIA6869E Revision: October 2004 LAN-138 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] Data Link Connector Circuit Check UKS0039Y 1. CHECK CONNECTOR A 1. 2. 3. B Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check the terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. D 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) C E : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Diagnose again. Refer to LAN-115, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter. F G PKIA2077E Front Air Control Circuit Check H UKS0039Z 1. CHECK CONNECTOR I Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of front air control for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and J harness side). OK or NG LAN OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 1. 2. 3. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. L Disconnect front air control connector. Check resistance between front air control harness connector M50 terminals 34 (L) and 35 (P). 34 (L) - 35 (P) M : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. NG >> Repair harness between front air control and data link connector. PKIA8136E Revision: October 2004 LAN-139 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check UKS003A0 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 11 (L) and 15 (P). 11 (L) - 15 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). NG >> Repair harness between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and harness connector E152. SKIA6872E IPDM E/R Circuit Check UKS003A1 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P). 39 (L) - 40 (P) : Approx. 108 - 132 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. NG >> Repair harness between IPDM E/R and harness connector E152. PKIA8141E Revision: October 2004 LAN-140 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] CAN Communication Circuit Check UKS003A2 1. CHECK CONNECTOR A 1. 2. 3. B Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Disconnect the following module and control unit connectors and check terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. – ECM – A/T assembly – Driver seat control unit – Combination meter – Display control unit – BCM – Front air control – ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) – IPDM E/R OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. C D E F G 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT H With all module and control unit connectors disconnected, check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) I : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. J LAN PKIA2077E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT L Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and ground. 6 (L) - Ground 14 (P) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. M OK or NG OK >> Check ECM and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-142, "ECM/ IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION" . NG >> Repair harness. PKIA2079E IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check UKS003A3 Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R. ● IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-26, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" . ● Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-13, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START" . Revision: October 2004 LAN-141 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) [CAN] Component Inspection UKS003A4 ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION ● ● ● Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle. Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86. Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 39 and 40. Unit Terminal ECM 94 - 86 IPDM E/R 39 - 40 Resistance value (Ω) (Approx.) 108 - 132 LKIA0037E Revision: October 2004 LAN-142 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) System Description PFP:23710 A UKS00392 CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. Component Parts and Harness Connector Location B C UKS00393 D E F G H I BKIA0131E J LAN L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-143 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] Schematic UKS00394 BKWA0136E Revision: October 2004 LAN-144 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] Wiring Diagram - CAN - UKS00395 A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0434E Revision: October 2004 LAN-145 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] BKWA0435E Revision: October 2004 LAN-146 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0436E Revision: October 2004 LAN-147 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] Work Flow 1. UKS00396 When there are no indications of “BCM”, “HVAC” or “IPDM E/R” on “SELECT SYSTEM” display of CONSULT-II, print the “SELECT SYSTEM”. PKIA2093E 2. Print all the data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “BCM”, “HVAC”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II. PKIA8260E 3. Print all the data of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “BCM”, “HVAC”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II. 4. Attach the printed sheet of “SELECT SYSTEM”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” onto the check sheet. Refer to LAN-149, "CHECK SHEET" . Based on the indications of “SELECT SYSTEM” and the results of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR”, puts a check mark onto the items with “No indication”, “NG”, or “UNKWN” in the check sheet table. Refer to LAN149, "CHECK SHEET" . NOTE: ● If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. ● The “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items, which are not in check sheet table, are not related to diagnostic procedure on service manual. So it is not necessary to check the status of the “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items not in check sheet table. According to the check sheet results (example), start inspection. Refer to LAN-151, "CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)" . PKIA8343E 5. 6. Revision: October 2004 LAN-148 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] CHECK SHEET NOTE: If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M PKIB6642E Revision: October 2004 LAN-149 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] PKIB6658E Revision: October 2004 LAN-150 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) NOTE: If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. A Case 1 B Check harness between TCM and data link connector. Refer to LAN-163, "Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector" . C D E F G PKIB6643E H I J LAN L M PKIA9251E Revision: October 2004 LAN-151 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] Case 2 Check harness between data link connector and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-164, "Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R" . PKIB6644E PKIA9252E Revision: October 2004 LAN-152 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] Case 3 A Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-165, "ECM Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIB6645E G H I J LAN PKIA9253E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-153 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] Case 4 Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-166, "TCM Circuit Check" . PKIB6646E PKIA9254E Revision: October 2004 LAN-154 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] Case 5 A Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-166, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIB6647E G H I J LAN PKIA9255E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-155 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] Case 6 Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-167, "BCM Circuit Check" . PKIB6648E PKIA9256E Revision: October 2004 LAN-156 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] Case 7 A Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-167, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIB6649E G H I J LAN PKIA9257E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-157 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] Case 8 Check steering angle sensor circuit. Refer to LAN-168, "Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Check" . PKIB6650E PKIA9258E Revision: October 2004 LAN-158 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] Case 9 A Check front air control circuit. Refer to LAN-168, "Front Air Control Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIB6651E G H I J LAN PKIB6766E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-159 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] Case 10 Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-169, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check" . PKIB6652E PKIA9259E Revision: October 2004 LAN-160 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] Case 11 A Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-169, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIB6653E G H I J LAN PKIA9260E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-161 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] Case 12 Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-170, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" . PKIB6654E Case 13 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-171, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . PKIB6655E Revision: October 2004 LAN-162 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] Case 14 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “ON”. Refer to LAN-171, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . A B C D E F PKIB6656E Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector UKS00397 G 1. CHECK CONNECTOR H Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and I harness side). – Harness connector F33 – Harness connector E19 J – Harness connector E50 – Harness connector B75 – Harness connector B69 LAN – Harness connector M40 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. L NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 1. 2. 3. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. M Disconnect A/T assembly connector and harness connector F33. Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector F9 terminals 3 (L), 8 (P) and harness connector F33 terminals 12 (L), 11 (P). 3 (L) - 12 (L) 8 (P) - 11 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA6831E Revision: October 2004 LAN-163 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect harness connector E50. Check continuity between harness connector E19 terminals 12 (L), 11 (P) and harness connector E50 terminals 2 (L), 1 (P). 12 (L) - 2 (L) 11 (P) - 1 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA7668E 4. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect harness connector B69. Check continuity between harness connector B75 terminals 2 (L), 1 (P) and harness connector B69 terminals 51J (L), 52J (P). 2 (L) - 51J (L) 1 (P) - 52J (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA7671E 5. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT Check continuity between harness connector M40 terminals 51J (L), 52J (P) and data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P). 51J (L) - 6 (L) 52J (P) - 14 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-148, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness. PKIA6834E Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R UKS00398 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). – Harness connector M31 – Harness connector E152 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: October 2004 LAN-164 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect harness connector M31. Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and harness connector M31 terminals 31G (L), 42G (P). 6 (L) - 31G (L) 14 (P) - 42G (P) B : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. D PKIA6835E E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between harness connector E152 terminals 31G (L), 42G (P) and IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L), 40 (P). 31G (L) - 39 (L) 42G (P) - 40 (P) F G : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. H OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-148, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness. I PKIA8140E ECM Circuit Check UKS00399 J 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. LAN Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). L – ECM connector – Harness connector E19 – Harness connector F33 M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: October 2004 LAN-165 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM connector. Check resistance between ECM harness connector E16 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P). 94 (L) - 86 (P) : Approx. 108 - 132 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ECM. NG >> Repair harness between ECM and A/T assembly. PKIA0816E TCM Circuit Check UKS0039A 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of A/T assembly for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect A/T assembly connector. Check resistance between A/T assembly harness connector F9 terminals 3 (L) and 8 (P). 3 (L) - 8 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace A/T assembly. NG >> Repair harness between A/T assembly and harness connector F33. SKIA6866E Combination Meter Circuit Check UKS0039B 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: October 2004 LAN-166 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect combination meter connector. Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 11 (L) and 12 (P). 11 (L) - 12 (P) B : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. NG >> Repair harness between combination meter and data link connector. C D PKIA6837E E BCM Circuit Check UKS0039C 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. G H I Disconnect BCM connector. Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P). 39 (L) - 40 (P) F J : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Repair harness between BCM and data link connector. LAN L SKIA6869E M Data Link Connector Circuit Check UKS0039D 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check the terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: October 2004 LAN-167 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Diagnose again. Refer to LAN-148, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter. PKIA2077E Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Check UKS0039E 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of steering angle sensor for damage, bend and loose connection (sensor side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect steering angle sensor connector. Check resistance between steering angle sensor harness connector M47 terminals 3 (L) and 4 (P). 3 (L) - 4 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace steering angle sensor. NG >> Repair harness between steering angle sensor and data link connector. PKIA6838E Front Air Control Circuit Check UKS003KP 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of front air control for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: October 2004 LAN-168 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect front air control connector. Check resistance between front air control harness connector M50 terminals 34 (L) and 35 (P). 34 (L) - 35 (P) B : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. NG >> Repair harness between front air control and data link connector. C D PKIA8136E ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check E UKS0039F 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. G H I Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 11 (L) and 15 (P). 11 (L) - 15 (P) F J : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). NG >> Repair harness between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and harness connector E152. LAN L SKIA6872E M IPDM E/R Circuit Check UKS0039G 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: October 2004 LAN-169 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P). 39 (L) - 40 (P) : Approx. 108 - 132 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. NG >> Repair harness between IPDM E/R and harness connector E152. PKIA8141E CAN Communication Circuit Check UKS0039H 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Disconnect the following module and control unit connectors and check terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. – ECM – A/T assembly – Combination meter – BCM – Steering angle sensor – Front air control – ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) – IPDM E/R OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT With all module and control unit connectors disconnected, check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA2077E Revision: October 2004 LAN-170 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) [CAN] 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT A Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and ground. 6 (L) - Ground 14 (P) - Ground B : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Check ECM and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-171, "ECM/ IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION" . NG >> Repair harness. C D PKIA2079E IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check UKS0039I Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R. ● IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-26, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" . ● Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-13, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START" . Component Inspection UKS0039J ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION ● ● ● Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle. Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86. Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 39 and 40. Unit Terminal ECM 94 - 86 IPDM E/R 39 - 40 E F G H Resistance value (Ω) (Approx.) I 108 - 132 J LKIA0037E LAN L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-171 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) System Description PFP:23710 UKS001F1 CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. Component Parts and Harness Connector Location UKS001F2 BKIA0133E Revision: October 2004 LAN-172 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] Schematic UKS001F3 A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0140E Revision: October 2004 LAN-173 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] Wiring Diagram - CAN - UKS001F4 BKWA0440E Revision: October 2004 LAN-174 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0441E Revision: October 2004 LAN-175 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] BKWA0442E Revision: October 2004 LAN-176 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] Work Flow 1. UKS001F5 When there are no indications of “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC” or “IPDM E/R” on “SELECT SYSTEM” display of CONSULT-II, print the “SELECT SYSTEM”. A B C D PKIA2093E 2. Print all the data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II. E F G H PKIA8260E 3. Print all the data of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II. I J LAN L PKIA8343E 4. 5. 6. 7. Attach the printed sheet of “SELECT SYSTEM”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” onto the check sheet. Refer to LAN-179, "CHECK SHEET" . Based on the indications of “SELECT SYSTEM” and the results of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR”, puts a check mark onto the items with “No indication”, “NG”, or “UNKWN” in the check sheet table. Refer to LAN179, "CHECK SHEET" . NOTE: ● If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. ● The “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items, which are not in check sheet table, are not related to diagnostic procedure on service manual. So it is not necessary to check the status of the “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items not in check sheet table. Check CAN communication line of the navigation system. Refer to AV-148, "CAN Communication Line Check" . Attach the CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet onto the check sheet. Refer to LAN-179, "CHECK SHEET" . Revision: October 2004 LAN-177 2005 Titan M CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] 8. 9. Mark the “NG” or “UNKWN” item of the check sheet table with “v” from the result of CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet. Refer to LAN-179, "CHECK SHEET" . NOTE: If “NG” is displayed on “CAN COMM” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. Refer to AV-148, "CAN Communication Line Check" . According to the check sheet results (example), start inspection. Refer to LAN-181, "CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)" . Revision: October 2004 LAN-178 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] CHECK SHEET NOTE: If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” or “CAN COMM” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M PKIB6657E Revision: October 2004 LAN-179 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] PKIA9139E Revision: October 2004 LAN-180 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) NOTE: If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” or “CAN COMM” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. A Case 1 B Check harness between TCM and driver seat control unit. Refer to LAN-196, "Circuit Check Between TCM and Driver Seat Control Unit" . C D E F G PKIB6659E H I J LAN L M PKIA9273E Revision: October 2004 LAN-181 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] Case 2 Check harness between driver seat control unit and data link connector. Refer to LAN-197, "Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector" . PKIB6660E PKIA9274E Revision: October 2004 LAN-182 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] Case 3 Check harness between data link connector and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-198, "Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R" . A B C D E F PKIB6661E G H I J LAN L PKIA9275E M Revision: October 2004 LAN-183 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] Case 4 Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-199, "ECM Circuit Check" . PKIB6662E PKIA9276E Revision: October 2004 LAN-184 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] Case 5 A Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-199, "TCM Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIB6663E G H I J LAN PKIA9277E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-185 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] Case 6 Check driver seat control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-200, "Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check" . PKIB6664E PKIA9278E Revision: October 2004 LAN-186 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] Case 7 A Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-200, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIB6665E G H I J LAN PKIA9279E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-187 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] Case 8 Check display control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-201, "Display Control Unit Circuit Check" . PKIB6666E PKIA9280E Revision: October 2004 LAN-188 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] Case 9 A Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-201, "BCM Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIB6667E G H I J LAN PKIA9281E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-189 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] Case 10 Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-202, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" . PKIB6668E PKIA9282E Revision: October 2004 LAN-190 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] Case 11 A Check steering angle sensor circuit. Refer to LAN-202, "Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIB6669E G H I J LAN PKIA9283E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-191 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] Case 12 Check front air control circuit. Refer to LAN-203, "Front Air Control Circuit Check" . PKIB6670E PKIA9284E Revision: October 2004 LAN-192 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] Case 13 Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-203, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check" . A B C D E F PKIB6671E G H I J LAN L PKIA9285E M Revision: October 2004 LAN-193 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] Case 14 Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-204, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" . PKIB6672E PKIA9286E Revision: October 2004 LAN-194 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] Case 15 A Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-204, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIB6673E Case 16 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-205, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . G H I J LAN L PKIB6674E M Revision: October 2004 LAN-195 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] Case 17 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “ON”. Refer to LAN-205, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . PKIB6675E Circuit Check Between TCM and Driver Seat Control Unit UKS0023H 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). – Harness connector F33 – Harness connector E19 – Harness connector E50 – Harness connector B75 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect A/T assembly connector and harness connector F33. Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector F9 terminals 3 (L), 8 (P) and harness connector F33 terminals 12 (L), 11 (P). 3 (L) - 12 (L) 8 (P) - 11 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA6831E Revision: October 2004 LAN-196 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect harness connector E50. Check continuity between harness connector E19 terminals 12 (L), 11 (P) and harness connector E50 terminals 2 (L), 1 (P). 12 (L) - 2 (L) 11 (P) - 1 (P) B : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness. D PKIA7668E E 4. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect harness connector B37. Check continuity between harness connector B75 terminals 2 (L), 1 (P) and harness connector B37 terminals 15 (L), 14 (P). 2 (L) - 15 (L) 1 (P) - 14 (P) F : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. G OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-177, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness. H I PKIA9743E Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector UKS0023I J 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. LAN Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). L – Harness connector B69 – Harness connector M40 OK or NG M OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect harness connector B37 and harness connector B69. Check continuity between harness connector B37 terminals 15 (L), 14 (P) and harness connector B69 terminals 51J (L), 52J (P). 15 (L) - 51J (L) 14 (P) - 52J (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA9744E Revision: October 2004 LAN-197 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT Check continuity between harness connector M40 terminals 51J (L), 52J (P) and data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P). 51J (L) - 6 (L) 52J (P) - 14 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-177, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness. PKIA6834E Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R UKS0023J 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). – Harness connector M31 – Harness connector E152 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect harness connector M31. Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and harness connector M31 terminals 31G (L), 42G (P). 6 (L) - 31G (L) 14 (P) - 42G (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA6835E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between harness connector E152 terminals 31G (L), 42G (P) and IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L), 40 (P). 31G (L) - 39 (L) 42G (P) - 40 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-177, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness. PKIA8140E Revision: October 2004 LAN-198 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] ECM Circuit Check UKS0023K 1. CHECK CONNECTOR A 1. 2. 3. B Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). – ECM connector – Harness connector E19 – Harness connector F33 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. C D E 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM connector. Check resistance between ECM harness connector E16 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P). 94 (L) - 86 (P) F : Approx. 108 - 132 Ω G OK or NG OK >> Replace ECM. NG >> Repair harness between ECM and A/T assembly. H I PKIA0816E TCM Circuit Check UKS0023L 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. J Turn ignition switch OFF. LAN Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of A/T assembly for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). L OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. M CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 2. 1. 2. Disconnect A/T assembly connector. Check resistance between A/T assembly harness connector F9 terminals 3 (L) and 8 (P). 3 (L) - 8 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace A/T assembly. NG >> Repair harness between A/T assembly and harness connector F33. SKIA6866E Revision: October 2004 LAN-199 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check UKS001FB 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). – Driver seat control unit connector – Harness connector P1 – Harness connector B37 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector. Check resistance between driver seat control unit harness connector P2 terminals 3 (L) and 19 (P). 3 (L) - 19 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace driver seat control unit. NG >> Repair harness between driver seat control unit and harness connector B69. PKIA6842E Combination Meter Circuit Check UKS0023M 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect combination meter connector. Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 11 (L) and 12 (P). 11 (L) - 12 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. NG >> Repair harness between combination meter and data link connector. PKIA6837E Revision: October 2004 LAN-200 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] Display Control Unit Circuit Check UKS0023N 1. CHECK CONNECTOR A 1. 2. 3. B Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of display control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. D 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect display control unit connector. Check resistance between display control unit harness connector M95 terminals 25 (L) and 26 (P). 25 (L) - 26 (P) C E : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω F OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. NG >> Repair harness between display control unit and data link connector. G H SKIA6884E BCM Circuit Check UKS0023O 1. CHECK CONNECTOR I 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. J Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). LAN OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. L CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 2. 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P). 39 (L) - 40 (P) M : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Repair harness between BCM and data link connector. SKIA6869E Revision: October 2004 LAN-201 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] Data Link Connector Circuit Check UKS0023P 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check the terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Diagnose again. Refer to LAN-177, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter. PKIA2077E Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Check UKS0023Q 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of steering angle sensor for damage, bend and loose connection (sensor side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect steering angle sensor connector. Check resistance between steering angle sensor harness connector M47 terminals 3 (L) and 4 (P). 3 (L) - 4 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace steering angle sensor. NG >> Repair harness between steering angle sensor and data link connector. PKIA6838E Revision: October 2004 LAN-202 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] Front Air Control Circuit Check UKS0023R 1. CHECK CONNECTOR A 1. 2. 3. B Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of front air control for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. D 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect front air control connector. Check resistance between front air control harness connector M50 terminals 34 (L) and 35 (P). 34 (L) - 35 (P) C E : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω F OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. NG >> Repair harness between front air control and data link connector. G H PKIA8136E ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check UKS0023S 1. CHECK CONNECTOR I 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. J Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). LAN OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. L CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 2. 1. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 11 (L) and 15 (P). 11 (L) - 15 (P) M : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). NG >> Repair harness between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and harness connector E152. SKIA6872E Revision: October 2004 LAN-203 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] IPDM E/R Circuit Check UKS0023T 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P). 39 (L) - 40 (P) : Approx. 108 - 132 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. NG >> Repair harness between IPDM E/R and harness connector E152. PKIA8141E CAN Communication Circuit Check UKS0023U 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Disconnect the following module and control unit connectors and check terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. – ECM – A/T assembly – Driver seat control unit – Combination meter – Display control unit – BCM – Steering angle sensor – Front air control – ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) – IPDM E/R OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. Revision: October 2004 LAN-204 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT A With all module and control unit connectors disconnected, check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) B : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. C D PKIA2077E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT E Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and ground. 6 (L) - Ground 14 (P) - Ground F : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. G OK or NG OK >> Check ECM and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-205, "ECM/ IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION" . NG >> Repair harness. H PKIA2079E IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check UKS0023V I Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R. ● IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-26, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" . ● Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-13, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START" . J Component Inspection UKS0023W LAN ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION ● ● ● Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle. Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86. Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 39 and 40. Unit Terminal ECM 94 - 86 IPDM E/R 39 - 40 L Resistance value (Ω) (Approx.) M 108 - 132 LKIA0037E Revision: October 2004 LAN-205 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) System Description PFP:23710 UKS001FN CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. Component Parts and Harness Connector Location UKS001FO BKIA0134E Revision: October 2004 LAN-206 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] Schematic UKS001FP A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0142E Revision: October 2004 LAN-207 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] Wiring Diagram - CAN - UKS001FQ BKWA0443E Revision: October 2004 LAN-208 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0444E Revision: October 2004 LAN-209 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] BKWA0445E Revision: October 2004 LAN-210 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] Work Flow 1. UKS001FR When there are no indications of “BCM”, “HVAC” or “IPDM E/R” on “SELECT SYSTEM” display of CONSULT-II, print the “SELECT SYSTEM”. A B C D PKIA2093E 2. Print all the data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “BCM”, “HVAC”, “ALL MODE AWD/ 4WD”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II. E F G H PKIA8260E 3. Print all the data of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “BCM”, “HVAC”, “ALL MODE AWD/4WD”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II. I J LAN L PKIA8343E 4. 5. 6. Attach the printed sheet of “SELECT SYSTEM”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” onto the check sheet. Refer to LAN-212, "CHECK SHEET" . Based on the indications of “SELECT SYSTEM” and the results of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR”, puts a check mark onto the items with “No indication”, “NG”, or “UNKWN” in the check sheet table. Refer to LAN212, "CHECK SHEET" . NOTE: ● If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. ● The “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items, which are not in check sheet table, are not related to diagnostic procedure on service manual. So it is not necessary to check the status of the “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items not in check sheet table. According to the check sheet results (example), start inspection. Refer to LAN-214, "CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)" . Revision: October 2004 LAN-211 2005 Titan M CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] CHECK SHEET NOTE: If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. SKIB2749E Revision: October 2004 LAN-212 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M PKIB6772E Revision: October 2004 LAN-213 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) NOTE: If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. Case 1 Check harness between TCM and data link connector. Refer to LAN-226, "Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector" . SKIB2750E PKIA9511E Revision: October 2004 LAN-214 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] Case 2 Check harness between data link connector and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-227, "Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R" . A B C D E F SKIB2751E G H I J LAN L PKIA9512E M Revision: October 2004 LAN-215 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] Case 3 Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-228, "ECM Circuit Check" . SKIB2752E PKIA9513E Revision: October 2004 LAN-216 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] Case 4 A Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-229, "TCM Circuit Check" . B C D E F SKIB2753E G H I J LAN PKIA9514E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-217 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] Case 5 Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-229, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" . SKIB2754E PKIA9515E Revision: October 2004 LAN-218 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] Case 6 A Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-230, "BCM Circuit Check" . B C D E F SKIB2755E G H I J LAN PKIA9516E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-219 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] Case 7 Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-230, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" . SKIB2756E PKIA9517E Revision: October 2004 LAN-220 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] Case 8 A Check front air control circuit. Refer to LAN-231, "Front Air Control Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIB6776E G H I J LAN PKIB6767E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-221 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] Case 9 Check transfer control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-231, "Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check" . SKIB2757E PKIA9518E Revision: October 2004 LAN-222 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] Case 10 Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-232, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check" . A B C D E F SKIB2758E G H I J LAN L PKIA9519E M Revision: October 2004 LAN-223 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] Case 11 Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-232, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" . SKIB2759E PKIA9520E Revision: October 2004 LAN-224 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] Case 12 A Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-233, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" . B C D E F SKIB2760E Case 13 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-234, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . G H I J LAN L SKIB2761E M Revision: October 2004 LAN-225 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] Case 14 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “ON”. Refer to LAN-234, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . SKIB2762E Circuit Check Between TCM and Data Link Connector UKS001FS 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). – Harness connector F33 – Harness connector E19 – Harness connector E50 – Harness connector B75 – Harness connector B69 – Harness connector M40 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect A/T assembly connector and harness connector F33. Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector F9 terminals 3 (L), 8 (P) and harness connector F33 terminals 12 (L), 11 (P). 3 (L) - 12 (L) 8 (P) - 11 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA6831E Revision: October 2004 LAN-226 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect harness connector E50. Check continuity between harness connector E19 terminals 12 (L), 11 (P) and harness connector E50 terminals 2 (L), 1 (P). 12 (L) - 2 (L) 11 (P) - 1 (P) B : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness. D PKIA7668E E 4. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect harness connector B69. Check continuity between harness connector B75 terminals 2 (L), 1 (P) and harness connector B69 terminals 51J (L), 52J (P). 2 (L) - 51J (L) 1 (P) - 52J (P) F : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair harness. H I PKIA7671E 5. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT J Check continuity between harness connector M40 terminals 51J (L), 52J (P) and data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P). 51J (L) - 6 (L) 52J (P) - 14 (P) LAN : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-211, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness. L M PKIA6834E Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R UKS001FT 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). – Harness connector M31 – Harness connector E152 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: October 2004 LAN-227 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect harness connector M31. Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and harness connector M31 terminals 31G (L), 42G (P). 6 (L) - 31G (L) 14 (P) - 42G (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA6835E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between harness connector E152 terminals 31G (L), 42G (P) and IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L), 40 (P). 31G (L) - 39 (L) 42G (P) - 40 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-211, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness. PKIA8140E ECM Circuit Check UKS001FU 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). – ECM connector – Harness connector E19 – Harness connector F33 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: October 2004 LAN-228 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect ECM connector. Check resistance between ECM harness connector E16 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P). 94 (L) - 86 (P) B : Approx. 108 - 132 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ECM. NG >> Repair harness between ECM and A/T assembly. C D PKIA0816E E TCM Circuit Check UKS001FV 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of A/T assembly for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. G H I Disconnect A/T assembly connector. Check resistance between A/T assembly harness connector F9 terminals 3 (L) and 8 (P). 3 (L) - 8 (P) F J : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace A/T assembly. NG >> Repair harness between A/T assembly and harness connector F33. LAN L SKIA6866E M Combination Meter Circuit Check UKS001FW 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: October 2004 LAN-229 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect combination meter connector. Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 11 (L) and 12 (P). 11 (L) - 12 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. NG >> Repair harness between combination meter and data link connector. PKIA6837E BCM Circuit Check UKS001FX 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P). 39 (L) - 40 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Repair harness between BCM and data link connector. SKIA6869E Data Link Connector Circuit Check UKS001FY 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check the terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: October 2004 LAN-230 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT A Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω B OK or NG OK >> Diagnose again. Refer to LAN-211, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter. C D PKIA2077E Front Air Control Circuit Check UKS003KQ 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of front air control for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. E F G H 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect front air control connector. Check resistance between front air control harness connector M50 terminals 34 (L) and 35 (P). 34 (L) - 35 (P) I J : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. NG >> Repair harness between front air control and data link connector. LAN L PKIA8136E Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check UKS001G0 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of transfer control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: October 2004 LAN-231 2005 Titan M CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect transfer control unit connector. Check resistance between transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminals 1 (L) and 2 (P). 1 (L) - 2 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace transfer control unit. NG >> Repair harness between transfer control unit and harness connector E152. PKIA9745E ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check UKS001G1 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 11 (L) and 15 (P). 11 (L) - 15 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). NG >> Repair harness between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and harness connector E152. SKIA6872E IPDM E/R Circuit Check UKS001G2 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: October 2004 LAN-232 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P). 39 (L) - 40 (P) B : Approx. 108 - 132 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. NG >> Repair harness between IPDM E/R and harness connector E152. C D PKIA8141E E CAN Communication Circuit Check UKS001G3 1. CHECK CONNECTOR F Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Disconnect the following module and control unit connectors and check terminals for deformation, discon- G nection, looseness or damage. – ECM – A/T assembly H – Combination meter – BCM I – Front air control – Transfer control unit – ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) J – IPDM E/R OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. LAN NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. 1. 2. 3. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT L With all module and control unit connectors disconnected, check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) M : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA2077E Revision: October 2004 LAN-233 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 7) [CAN] 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and ground. 6 (L) - Ground 14 (P) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Check ECM and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-234, "ECM/ IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION" . NG >> Repair harness. PKIA2079E IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check UKS001G4 Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R. ● IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-26, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" . ● Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-13, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START" . Component Inspection UKS001G5 ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION ● ● ● Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle. Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86. Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 39 and 40. Unit Terminal ECM 94 - 86 IPDM E/R 39 - 40 Resistance value (Ω) (Approx.) 108 - 132 LKIA0037E Revision: October 2004 LAN-234 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) System Description PFP:23710 A UKS001G6 CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. Component Parts and Harness Connector Location B C UKS001G7 D E F G H I BKIA0135E J LAN L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-235 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] Schematic UKS001G8 BKWA0144E Revision: October 2004 LAN-236 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] Wiring Diagram - CAN - UKS001G9 A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0446E Revision: October 2004 LAN-237 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] BKWA0447E Revision: October 2004 LAN-238 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0448E Revision: October 2004 LAN-239 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] Work Flow 1. UKS001GA When there are no indications of “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC” or “IPDM E/R” on “SELECT SYSTEM” display of CONSULT-II, print the “SELECT SYSTEM”. PKIA2093E 2. Print all the data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC”, “ALL MODE AWD/4WD”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II. PKIA8260E 3. Print all the data of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC”, “ALL MODE AWD/4WD”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II. 4. Attach the printed sheet of “SELECT SYSTEM”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” onto the check sheet. Refer to LAN-241, "CHECK SHEET" . Based on the indications of “SELECT SYSTEM” and the results of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR”, puts a check mark onto the items with “No indication”, “NG”, or “UNKWN” in the check sheet table. Refer to LAN241, "CHECK SHEET" . NOTE: ● If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. ● The “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items, which are not in check sheet table, are not related to diagnostic procedure on service manual. So it is not necessary to check the status of the “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items not in check sheet table. According to the check sheet results (example), start inspection. Refer to LAN-243, "CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)" . PKIA8343E 5. 6. Revision: October 2004 LAN-240 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] CHECK SHEET NOTE: If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M SKIB2765E Revision: October 2004 LAN-241 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] PKIB6773E Revision: October 2004 LAN-242 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) NOTE: If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. A Case 1 B Check harness between TCM and driver seat control unit. Refer to LAN-257, "Circuit Check Between TCM and Driver Seat Control Unit" . C D E F G SKIB2766E H I J LAN L M PKIA9521E Revision: October 2004 LAN-243 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] Case 2 Check harness between driver seat control unit and data link connector. Refer to LAN-258, "Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector" . SKIB2767E PKIA9522E Revision: October 2004 LAN-244 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] Case 3 Check harness between data link connector and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-259, "Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R" . A B C D E F SKIB2768E G H I J LAN L PKIA9523E M Revision: October 2004 LAN-245 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] Case 4 Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-260, "ECM Circuit Check" . SKIB2769E PKIA9524E Revision: October 2004 LAN-246 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] Case 5 A Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-260, "TCM Circuit Check" . B C D E F SKIB2770E G H I J LAN PKIA9525E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-247 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] Case 6 Check driver seat control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-261, "Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check" . SKIB2771E PKIA9526E Revision: October 2004 LAN-248 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] Case 7 A Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-261, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" . B C D E F SKIB2773E G H I J LAN PKIA9527E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-249 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] Case 8 Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-262, "BCM Circuit Check" . SKIB2774E PKIA9528E Revision: October 2004 LAN-250 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] Case 9 A Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-262, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" . B C D E F SKIB2775E G H I J LAN PKIA9529E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-251 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] Case 10 Check front air control circuit. Refer to LAN-263, "Front Air Control Circuit Check" . PKIB6777E PKIB6768E Revision: October 2004 LAN-252 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] Case 11 A Check transfer control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-263, "Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check" . B C D E F SKIB2776E G H I J LAN PKIA9530E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-253 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] Case 12 Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-264, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check" . SKIB2777E PKIA9531E Revision: October 2004 LAN-254 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] Case 13 A Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-264, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" . B C D E F SKIB2778E G H I J LAN PKIA9532E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-255 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] Case 14 Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-265, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" . SKIB2779E Case 15 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-265, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . SKIB2780E Revision: October 2004 LAN-256 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] Case 16 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “ON”. Refer to LAN-265, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . A B C D E F SKIB2781E Circuit Check Between TCM and Driver Seat Control Unit UKS001GB G 1. CHECK CONNECTOR H Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and I harness side). – Harness connector F33 – Harness connector E19 J – Harness connector E50 – Harness connector B75 OK or NG LAN OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 1. 2. 3. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. L Disconnect A/T assembly connector and harness connector F33. Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector F9 terminals 3 (L), 8 (P) and harness connector F33 terminals 12 (L), 11 (P). 3 (L) - 12 (L) 8 (P) - 11 (P) M : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA6831E Revision: October 2004 LAN-257 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect harness connector E50. Check continuity between harness connector E19 terminals 12 (L), 11 (P) and harness connector E50 terminals 2 (L), 1 (P). 12 (L) - 2 (L) 11 (P) - 1 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA7668E 4. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect harness connector B37. Check continuity between harness connector B75 terminals 2 (L), 1 (P) and harness connector B37 terminals 15 (L), 14 (P). 2 (L) - 15 (L) 1 (P) - 14 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-240, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness. PKIA9743E Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector UKS001GC 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). – Harness connector B69 – Harness connector M40 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect harness connector B37 and harness connector B69. Check continuity between harness connector B37 terminals 15 (L), 14 (P) and harness connector B69 terminals 51J (L), 52J (P). 15 (L) - 51J (L) 14 (P) - 52J (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA9744E Revision: October 2004 LAN-258 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT A Check continuity between harness connector M40 terminals 51J (L), 52J (P) and data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P). 51J (L) - 6 (L) 52J (P) - 14 (P) B : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-240, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness. C D PKIA6834E Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R UKS001GD 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). – Harness connector M31 – Harness connector E152 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. E F G H 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT I 1. 2. J Disconnect harness connector M31. Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and harness connector M31 terminals 31G (L), 42G (P). 6 (L) - 31G (L) 14 (P) - 42G (P) LAN : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. L PKIA6835E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between harness connector E152 terminals 31G (L), 42G (P) and IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L), 40 (P). 31G (L) - 39 (L) 42G (P) - 40 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-240, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness. PKIA8140E Revision: October 2004 LAN-259 2005 Titan M CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] ECM Circuit Check UKS001GE 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). – ECM connector – Harness connector E19 – Harness connector F33 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM connector. Check resistance between ECM harness connector E16 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P). 94 (L) - 86 (P) : Approx. 108 - 132 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ECM. NG >> Repair harness between ECM and A/T assembly. PKIA0816E TCM Circuit Check UKS001GF 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of A/T assembly for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect A/T assembly connector. Check resistance between A/T assembly harness connector F9 terminals 3 (L) and 8 (P). 3 (L) - 8 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace A/T assembly. NG >> Repair harness between A/T assembly and harness connector F33. SKIA6866E Revision: October 2004 LAN-260 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check UKS001GG 1. CHECK CONNECTOR A 1. 2. 3. B Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). – Driver seat control unit connector – Harness connector P1 – Harness connector B37 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. C D E 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector. Check resistance between driver seat control unit harness connector P2 terminals 3 (L) and 19 (P). 3 (L) - 19 (P) F : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω G OK or NG OK >> Replace driver seat control unit. NG >> Repair harness between driver seat control unit and harness connector B69. H I PKIA6842E Combination Meter Circuit Check UKS001GH 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. J Turn ignition switch OFF. LAN Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side and harness side). L OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. M CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 2. 1. 2. Disconnect combination meter connector. Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 11 (L) and 12 (P). 11 (L) - 12 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. NG >> Repair harness between combination meter and data link connector. PKIA6837E Revision: October 2004 LAN-261 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] BCM Circuit Check UKS001GI 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P). 39 (L) - 40 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Repair harness between BCM and data link connector. SKIA6869E Data Link Connector Circuit Check UKS001GJ 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check the terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Diagnose again. Refer to LAN-240, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter. PKIA2077E Revision: October 2004 LAN-262 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] Front Air Control Circuit Check UKS003KR 1. CHECK CONNECTOR A 1. 2. 3. B Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of front air control for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. D 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect front air control connector. Check resistance between front air control harness connector M50 terminals 34 (L) and 35 (P). 34 (L) - 35 (P) C E : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω F OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. NG >> Repair harness between front air control and data link connector. G H PKIA8136E Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check UKS001GL 1. CHECK CONNECTOR I 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. J Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of transfer control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). LAN OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. L CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 2. 1. 2. Disconnect transfer control unit connector. Check resistance between transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminals 1 (L) and 2 (P). 1 (L) - 2 (P) M : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace transfer control unit. NG >> Repair harness between transfer control unit and harness connector E152. PKIA9745E Revision: October 2004 LAN-263 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check UKS001GM 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 11 (L) and 15 (P). 11 (L) - 15 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). NG >> Repair harness between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and harness connector E152. SKIA6872E IPDM E/R Circuit Check UKS001GN 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P). 39 (L) - 40 (P) : Approx. 108 - 132 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. NG >> Repair harness between IPDM E/R and harness connector E152. PKIA8141E Revision: October 2004 LAN-264 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] CAN Communication Circuit Check UKS001GO 1. CHECK CONNECTOR A 1. 2. 3. B Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Disconnect the following module and control unit connectors and check terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. – ECM – A/T assembly – Driver seat control unit – Combination meter – BCM – Front air control – Transfer control unit – ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) – IPDM E/R OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. C D E F G 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT H With all module and control unit connectors disconnected, check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) I : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. J LAN PKIA2077E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT L Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and ground. 6 (L) - Ground 14 (P) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. M OK or NG OK >> Check ECM and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-266, "ECM/ IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION" . NG >> Repair harness. PKIA2079E IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check UKS001GP Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R. ● IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-26, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" . ● Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-13, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START" . Revision: October 2004 LAN-265 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 8) [CAN] Component Inspection UKS001GQ ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION ● ● ● Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle. Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86. Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 39 and 40. Unit Terminal ECM 94 - 86 IPDM E/R 39 - 40 Resistance value (Ω) (Approx.) 108 - 132 LKIA0037E Revision: October 2004 LAN-266 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) System Description PFP:23710 A UKS001GR CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. Component Parts and Harness Connector Location B C UKS001GS D E F G H I BKIA0136E J LAN L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-267 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] Schematic UKS001GT BKWA0146E Revision: October 2004 LAN-268 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] Wiring Diagram - CAN - UKS001GU A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0449E Revision: October 2004 LAN-269 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] BKWA0450E Revision: October 2004 LAN-270 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0451E Revision: October 2004 LAN-271 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] Work Flow 1. UKS001GV When there are no indications of “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC” or “IPDM E/R” on “SELECT SYSTEM” display of CONSULT-II, print the “SELECT SYSTEM”. PKIA2093E 2. Print all the data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC”, “ALL MODE AWD/4WD”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II. PKIA8260E 3. Print all the data of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC”, “ALL MODE AWD/4WD”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II. 4. Attach the printed sheet of “SELECT SYSTEM”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” onto the check sheet. Refer to LAN-274, "CHECK SHEET" . Based on the indications of “SELECT SYSTEM” and the results of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR”, puts a check mark onto the items with “No indication”, “NG”, or “UNKWN” in the check sheet table. Refer to LAN274, "CHECK SHEET" . NOTE: ● If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. ● The “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items, which are not in check sheet table, are not related to diagnostic procedure on service manual. So it is not necessary to check the status of the “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items not in check sheet table. Check CAN communication line of the navigation system. Refer to AV-148, "CAN Communication Line Check" . Attach the CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet onto the check sheet. Refer to LAN-274, "CHECK SHEET" . PKIA8343E 5. 6. 7. Revision: October 2004 LAN-272 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] 8. 9. Mark the “NG” or “UNKWN” item of the check sheet table with “v” from the result of CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet. Refer to LAN-274, "CHECK SHEET" . NOTE: If “NG” is displayed on “CAN COMM” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. Refer to AV-148, "CAN Communication Line Check" . According to the check sheet results (example), start inspection. Refer to LAN-276, "CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)" . A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-273 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] CHECK SHEET NOTE: If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” or “CAN COMM” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. SKIB2782E Revision: October 2004 LAN-274 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M PKIB6773E Revision: October 2004 LAN-275 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) NOTE: If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” or “CAN COMM” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. Case 1 Check harness between TCM and driver seat control unit. Refer to LAN-291, "Circuit Check Between TCM and Driver Seat Control Unit" . SKIB2783E PKIA9533E Revision: October 2004 LAN-276 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] Case 2 Check harness between driver seat control unit and data link connector. Refer to LAN-292, "Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector" . A B C D E F SKIB2784E G H I J LAN L PKIA9534E M Revision: October 2004 LAN-277 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] Case 3 Check harness between data link connector and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-293, "Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R" . SKIB2785E PKIA9535E Revision: October 2004 LAN-278 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] Case 4 A Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-294, "ECM Circuit Check" . B C D E F SKIB2786E G H I J LAN PKIA9536E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-279 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] Case 5 Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-294, "TCM Circuit Check" . SKIB2787E PKIA9537E Revision: October 2004 LAN-280 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] Case 6 A Check driver seat control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-295, "Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check" . B C D E F SKIB2788E G H I J LAN PKIA9538E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-281 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] Case 7 Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-295, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" . SKIB2789E PKIA9539E Revision: October 2004 LAN-282 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] Case 8 A Check display control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-296, "Display Control Unit Circuit Check" . B C D E F SKIB2790E G H I J LAN PKIA9540E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-283 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] Case 9 Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-296, "BCM Circuit Check" . SKIB2791E PKIA9541E Revision: October 2004 LAN-284 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] Case 10 A Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-297, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" . B C D E F SKIB2792E G H I J LAN PKIA9542E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-285 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] Case 11 Check front air control circuit. Refer to LAN-297, "Front Air Control Circuit Check" . SKIB2794E PKIA9543E Revision: October 2004 LAN-286 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] Case 12 A Check transfer control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-298, "Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check" . B C D E F SKIB2795E G H I J LAN PKIA9544E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-287 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] Case 13 Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-298, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check" . SKIB2796E PKIA9545E Revision: October 2004 LAN-288 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] Case 14 A Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-299, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" . B C D E F SKIB2797E G H I J LAN PKIA9546E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-289 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] Case 15 Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-299, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" . SKIB2798E Case 16 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-300, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . SKIB2799E Revision: October 2004 LAN-290 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] Case 17 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “ON”. Refer to LAN-300, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . A B C D E F SKIB2800E Circuit Check Between TCM and Driver Seat Control Unit UKS001GW G 1. CHECK CONNECTOR H Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and I harness side). – Harness connector F33 – Harness connector E19 J – Harness connector E50 – Harness connector B75 OK or NG LAN OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 1. 2. 3. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. L Disconnect A/T assembly connector and harness connector F33. Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector F9 terminals 3 (L), 8 (P) and harness connector F33 terminals 12 (L), 11 (P). 3 (L) - 12 (L) 8 (P) - 11 (P) M : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA6831E Revision: October 2004 LAN-291 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect harness connector E50. Check continuity between harness connector E19 terminals 12 (L), 11 (P) and harness connector E50 terminals 2 (L), 1 (P). 12 (L) - 2 (L) 11 (P) - 1 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA7668E 4. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect harness connector B37. Check continuity between harness connector B75 terminals 2 (L), 1 (P) and harness connector B37 terminals 15 (L), 14 (P). 2 (L) - 15 (L) 1 (P) - 14 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-272, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness. PKIA9743E Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector UKS001GX 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). – Harness connector B69 – Harness connector M40 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect harness connector B37 and harness connector B69. Check continuity between harness connector B37 terminals 15 (L), 14 (P) and harness connector B69 terminals 51J (L), 52J (P). 15 (L) - 51J (L) 14 (P) - 52J (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA9744E Revision: October 2004 LAN-292 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT A Check continuity between harness connector M40 terminals 51J (L), 52J (P) and data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P). 51J (L) - 6 (L) 52J (P) - 14 (P) B : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-272, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness. C D PKIA6834E Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R UKS001GY 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). – Harness connector M31 – Harness connector E152 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. E F G H 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT I 1. 2. J Disconnect harness connector M31. Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and harness connector M31 terminals 31G (L), 42G (P). 6 (L) - 31G (L) 14 (P) - 42G (P) LAN : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. L PKIA6835E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between harness connector E152 terminals 31G (L), 42G (P) and IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L), 40 (P). 31G (L) - 39 (L) 42G (P) - 40 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-272, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness. PKIA8140E Revision: October 2004 LAN-293 2005 Titan M CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] ECM Circuit Check UKS001GZ 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). – ECM connector – Harness connector E19 – Harness connector F33 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM connector. Check resistance between ECM harness connector E16 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P). 94 (L) - 86 (P) : Approx. 108 - 132 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ECM. NG >> Repair harness between ECM and A/T assembly. PKIA0816E TCM Circuit Check UKS001H0 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of A/T assembly for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect A/T assembly connector. Check resistance between A/T assembly harness connector F9 terminals 3 (L) and 8 (P). 3 (L) - 8 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace A/T assembly. NG >> Repair harness between A/T assembly and harness connector F33. SKIA6866E Revision: October 2004 LAN-294 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check UKS001H1 1. CHECK CONNECTOR A 1. 2. 3. B Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). – Driver seat control unit connector – Harness connector P1 – Harness connector B37 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. C D E 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector. Check resistance between driver seat control unit harness connector P2 terminals 3 (L) and 19 (P). 3 (L) - 19 (P) F : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω G OK or NG OK >> Replace driver seat control unit. NG >> Repair harness between driver seat control unit and harness connector B69. H I PKIA6842E Combination Meter Circuit Check UKS001H2 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. J Turn ignition switch OFF. LAN Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side and harness side). L OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. M CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 2. 1. 2. Disconnect combination meter connector. Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 11 (L) and 12 (P). 11 (L) - 12 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. NG >> Repair harness between combination meter and data link connector. PKIA6837E Revision: October 2004 LAN-295 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] Display Control Unit Circuit Check UKS001H3 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of display control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect display control unit connector. Check resistance between display control unit harness connector M95 terminals 25 (L) and 26 (P). 25 (L) - 26 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. NG >> Repair harness between display control unit and data link connector. SKIA6884E BCM Circuit Check UKS001H4 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P). 39 (L) - 40 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Repair harness between BCM and data link connector. SKIA6869E Revision: October 2004 LAN-296 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] Data Link Connector Circuit Check UKS001H5 1. CHECK CONNECTOR A 1. 2. 3. B Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check the terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. D 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) C E : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Diagnose again. Refer to LAN-272, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter. F G PKIA2077E Front Air Control Circuit Check H UKS0020E 1. CHECK CONNECTOR I Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of front air control for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and J harness side). OK or NG LAN OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 1. 2. 3. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. L Disconnect front air control connector. Check resistance between front air control harness connector M50 terminals 34 (L) and 35 (P). 34 (L) - 35 (P) M : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. NG >> Repair harness between front air control and data link connector. PKIA8136E Revision: October 2004 LAN-297 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check UKS001H8 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of transfer control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect transfer control unit connector. Check resistance between transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminals 1 (L) and 2 (P). 1 (L) - 2 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace transfer control unit. NG >> Repair harness between transfer control unit and harness connector E152. PKIA9745E ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check UKS001H9 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 11 (L) and 15 (P). 11 (L) - 15 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). NG >> Repair harness between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and harness connector E152. SKIA6872E Revision: October 2004 LAN-298 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] IPDM E/R Circuit Check UKS001HA 1. CHECK CONNECTOR A 1. 2. 3. B Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. D 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P). 39 (L) - 40 (P) C E : Approx. 108 - 132 Ω F OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. NG >> Repair harness between IPDM E/R and harness connector E152. G H PKIA8141E CAN Communication Circuit Check UKS001HB 1. CHECK CONNECTOR I 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. J Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Disconnect the following module and control unit connectors and check terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. LAN – ECM – A/T assembly – Driver seat control unit L – Combination meter – Display control unit – BCM M – Front air control – Transfer control unit – ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) – IPDM E/R OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. Revision: October 2004 LAN-299 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 9) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT With all module and control unit connectors disconnected, check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA2077E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and ground. 6 (L) - Ground 14 (P) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Check ECM and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-300, "ECM/ IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION" . NG >> Repair harness. PKIA2079E IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check UKS001HC Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R. ● IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-26, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" . ● Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-13, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START" . Component Inspection UKS001HD ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION ● ● ● Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle. Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86. Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 39 and 40. Unit Terminal ECM 94 - 86 IPDM E/R 39 - 40 Resistance value (Ω) (Approx.) 108 - 132 LKIA0037E Revision: October 2004 LAN-300 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) System Description PFP:23710 A UKS001HE CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. Component Parts and Harness Connector Location B C UKS001HF D E F G H I BKIA0137E J LAN L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-301 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] Schematic UKS001HG BKWA0148E Revision: October 2004 LAN-302 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] Wiring Diagram - CAN - UKS001HH A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0452E Revision: October 2004 LAN-303 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] BKWA0453E Revision: October 2004 LAN-304 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0454E Revision: October 2004 LAN-305 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] Work Flow 1. UKS001HI When there are no indications of “BCM”, “HVAC” or “IPDM E/R” on “SELECT SYSTEM” display of CONSULT-II, print the “SELECT SYSTEM”. PKIA2093E 2. Print all the data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “DIFF LOCK”, “BCM”, “HVAC”, “ALL MODE AWD/4WD”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II. PKIA8260E 3. Print all the data of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “DIFF LOCK”, “BCM”, “HVAC”, “ALL MODE AWD/4WD”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II. 4. Attach the printed sheet of “SELECT SYSTEM”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” onto the check sheet. Refer to LAN-307, "CHECK SHEET" . Based on the indications of “SELECT SYSTEM” and the results of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR”, puts a check mark onto the items with “No indication”, “NG”, or “UNKWN” in the check sheet table. Refer to LAN307, "CHECK SHEET" . NOTE: ● If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. ● The “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items, which are not in check sheet table, are not related to diagnostic procedure on service manual. So it is not necessary to check the status of the “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items not in check sheet table. According to the check sheet results (example), start inspection. Refer to LAN-309, "CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)" . PKIA8343E 5. 6. Revision: October 2004 LAN-306 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] CHECK SHEET NOTE: If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M PKIB6676E Revision: October 2004 LAN-307 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] PKIB6677E Revision: October 2004 LAN-308 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) NOTE: If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. A Case 1 B Check harness between TCM and differential lock control unit. Refer to LAN-323, "Circuit Check Between TCM and Differential Lock Control Unit" . C D E F G PKIB6678E H I J LAN L M PKIA9547E Revision: October 2004 LAN-309 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] Case 2 Check harness between differential lock control unit and data link connector. Refer to LAN-324, "Circuit Check Between Differential Lock Control Unit and Data Link Connector" . PKIB6679E PKIA9548E Revision: October 2004 LAN-310 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] Case 3 Check harness between data link connector and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-325, "Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R" . A B C D E F PKIB6680E G H I J LAN L PKIA9549E M Revision: October 2004 LAN-311 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] Case 4 Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-326, "ECM Circuit Check" . PKIB6681E PKIA9550E Revision: October 2004 LAN-312 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] Case 5 A Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-326, "TCM Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIB6682E G H I J LAN PKIA9551E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-313 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] Case 6 Check differential lock control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-327, "Differential Lock Control Unit Circuit Check" . PKIB6683E PKIA9552E Revision: October 2004 LAN-314 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] Case 7 A Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-327, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIB6684E G H I J LAN PKIA9553E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-315 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] Case 8 Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-328, "BCM Circuit Check" . PKIB6685E PKIA9554E Revision: October 2004 LAN-316 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] Case 9 A Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-328, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIB6686E G H I J LAN PKIA9555E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-317 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] Case 10 Check front air control circuit. Refer to LAN-329, "Front Air Control Circuit Check" . PKIB6687E PKIB6769E Revision: October 2004 LAN-318 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] Case 11 A Check transfer control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-329, "Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIB6688E G H I J LAN PKIA9556E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-319 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] Case 12 Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-330, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check" . PKIB6689E PKIA9557E Revision: October 2004 LAN-320 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] Case 13 A Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-330, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIB6690E G H I J LAN PKIA9558E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-321 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] Case 14 Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-331, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" . PKIB6691E Case 15 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-331, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . PKIB6692E Revision: October 2004 LAN-322 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] Case 16 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “ON”. Refer to LAN-331, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . A B C D E F PKIB6693E Circuit Check Between TCM and Differential Lock Control Unit UKS0020I G 1. CHECK CONNECTOR H Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and I harness side). – Harness connector F33 – Harness connector E19 J – Harness connector E50 – Harness connector B75 OK or NG LAN OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 1. 2. 3. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. L Disconnect A/T assembly connector and harness connector F33. Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector F9 terminals 3 (L), 8 (P) and harness connector F33 terminals 12 (L), 11 (P). 3 (L) - 12 (L) 8 (P) - 11 (P) M : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA6831E Revision: October 2004 LAN-323 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect harness connector E50. Check continuity between harness connector E19 terminals 12 (L), 11 (P) and harness connector E50 terminals 2 (L), 1 (P). 12 (L) - 2 (L) 11 (P) - 1 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA7668E 4. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect differential lock control unit connector. Check continuity between harness connector B75 terminals 2 (L), 1 (P) and differential lock control unit harness connector B77 terminals 5 (L), 4 (P). 2 (L) - 5 (L) 1 (P) - 4 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-306, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness. PKIA9746E Circuit Check Between Differential Lock Control Unit and Data Link Connector UKS001HJ 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). – Harness connector B69 – Harness connector M40 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect differential lock control unit connector and harness connector B69. Check continuity between differential lock control unit harness connector B77 terminals 5 (L), 4 (P) and harness connector B69 terminals 51J (L), 52J (P). 5 (L) - 51J (L) 4 (P) - 52J (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA9747E Revision: October 2004 LAN-324 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT A Check continuity between harness connector M40 terminals 51J (L), 52J (P) and data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P). 51J (L) - 6 (L) 52J (P) - 14 (P) B : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-306, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness. C D PKIA6834E Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R UKS001HK 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). – Harness connector M31 – Harness connector E152 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. E F G H 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT I 1. 2. J Disconnect harness connector M31. Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and harness connector M31 terminals 31G (L), 42G (P). 6 (L) - 31G (L) 14 (P) - 42G (P) LAN : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. L PKIA6835E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between harness connector E152 terminals 31G (L), 42G (P) and IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L), 40 (P). 31G (L) - 39 (L) 42G (P) - 40 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-306, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness. PKIA8140E Revision: October 2004 LAN-325 2005 Titan M CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] ECM Circuit Check UKS001HL 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). – ECM connector – Harness connector E19 – Harness connector F33 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM connector. Check resistance between ECM harness connector E16 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P). 94 (L) - 86 (P) : Approx. 108 - 132 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ECM. NG >> Repair harness between ECM and A/T assembly. PKIA0816E TCM Circuit Check UKS001HM 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of A/T assembly for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect A/T assembly connector. Check resistance between A/T assembly harness connector F9 terminals 3 (L) and 8 (P). 3 (L) - 8 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace A/T assembly. NG >> Repair harness between A/T assembly and harness connector F33. SKIA6866E Revision: October 2004 LAN-326 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] Differential Lock Control Unit Circuit Check UKS0020J 1. CHECK CONNECTOR A 1. 2. 3. B Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of differential lock control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. D 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect differential lock control unit connector. Check resistance between differential lock control unit harness connector B77 terminals 5 (L) and 4 (P). 5 (L) - 4 (P) C E : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω F OK or NG OK >> Replace differential lock control unit. NG >> Repair harness between differential lock control unit and harness connector B75. G H PKIA9748E Combination Meter Circuit Check UKS001HN 1. CHECK CONNECTOR I 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. J Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side and harness side). LAN OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. L CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 2. 1. 2. Disconnect combination meter connector. Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 11 (L) and 12 (P). 11 (L) - 12 (P) M : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. NG >> Repair harness between combination meter and data link connector. PKIA6837E Revision: October 2004 LAN-327 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] BCM Circuit Check UKS001HO 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P). 39 (L) - 40 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Repair harness between BCM and data link connector. SKIA6869E Data Link Connector Circuit Check UKS001HP 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check the terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Diagnose again. Refer to LAN-306, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter. PKIA2077E Revision: October 2004 LAN-328 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] Front Air Control Circuit Check UKS003KS 1. CHECK CONNECTOR A 1. 2. 3. B Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of front air control for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. D 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect front air control connector. Check resistance between front air control harness connector M50 terminals 34 (L) and 35 (P). 34 (L) - 35 (P) C E : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω F OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. NG >> Repair harness between front air control and data link connector. G H PKIA8136E Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check UKS001HR 1. CHECK CONNECTOR I 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. J Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of transfer control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). LAN OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. L CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 2. 1. 2. Disconnect transfer control unit connector. Check resistance between transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminals 1 (L) and 2 (P). 1 (L) - 2 (P) M : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace transfer control unit. NG >> Repair harness between transfer control unit and harness connector E152. PKIA9745E Revision: October 2004 LAN-329 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check UKS001HS 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 11 (L) and 15 (P). 11 (L) - 15 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). NG >> Repair harness between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and harness connector E152. SKIA6872E IPDM E/R Circuit Check UKS001HT 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P). 39 (L) - 40 (P) : Approx. 108 - 132 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. NG >> Repair harness between IPDM E/R and harness connector E152. PKIA8141E Revision: October 2004 LAN-330 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] CAN Communication Circuit Check UKS001HU 1. CHECK CONNECTOR A 1. 2. 3. B Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Disconnect the following module and control unit connectors and check terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. – ECM – A/T assembly – Differential lock control unit – Combination meter – BCM – Front air control – Transfer control unit – ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) – IPDM E/R OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. C D E F G 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT H With all module and control unit connectors disconnected, check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) I : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. J LAN PKIA2077E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT L Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and ground. 6 (L) - Ground 14 (P) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. M OK or NG OK >> Check ECM and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-332, "ECM/ IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION" . NG >> Repair harness. PKIA2079E IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check UKS001HV Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R. ● IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-26, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" . ● Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-13, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START" . Revision: October 2004 LAN-331 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 10) [CAN] Component Inspection UKS001HW ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION ● ● ● Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle. Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86. Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 39 and 40. Unit Terminal ECM 94 - 86 IPDM E/R 39 - 40 Resistance value (Ω) (Approx.) 108 - 132 LKIA0037E Revision: October 2004 LAN-332 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) [CAN] CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) System Description PFP:23710 A UKS001HX CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. Component Parts and Harness Connector Location B C UKS001HY D E F G H I BKIA0138E J LAN L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-333 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) [CAN] Schematic UKS001HZ BKWA0152E Revision: October 2004 LAN-334 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) [CAN] Wiring Diagram - CAN - UKS001I0 A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0455E Revision: October 2004 LAN-335 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) [CAN] BKWA0456E Revision: October 2004 LAN-336 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) [CAN] A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0457E Revision: October 2004 LAN-337 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) [CAN] Work Flow 1. UKS001I1 When there are no indications of “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC” or “IPDM E/R” on “SELECT SYSTEM” display of CONSULT-II, print the “SELECT SYSTEM”. PKIA2093E 2. Print all the data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “DIFF LOCK”, “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC”, “ALL MODE AWD/4WD”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II. PKIA8260E 3. Print all the data of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “DIFF LOCK”, “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC”, “ALL MODE AWD/4WD”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II. 4. Attach the printed sheet of “SELECT SYSTEM”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” onto the check sheet. Refer to LAN-339, "CHECK SHEET" . Based on the indications of “SELECT SYSTEM” and the results of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR”, puts a check mark onto the items with “No indication”, “NG”, or “UNKWN” in the check sheet table. Refer to LAN339, "CHECK SHEET" . NOTE: ● If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. ● The “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items, which are not in check sheet table, are not related to diagnostic procedure on service manual. So it is not necessary to check the status of the “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items not in check sheet table. According to the check sheet results (example), start inspection. Refer to LAN-342, "CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)" . PKIA8343E 5. 6. Revision: October 2004 LAN-338 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) [CAN] CHECK SHEET NOTE: If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M PKIB6694E Revision: October 2004 LAN-339 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) [CAN] PKIB6695E Revision: October 2004 LAN-340 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) [CAN] A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M PKIB6696E Revision: October 2004 LAN-341 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) [CAN] CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) NOTE: If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. Case 1 Check harness between TCM and differential lock control unit. Refer to LAN-358, "Circuit Check Between TCM and Differential Lock Control Unit" . PKIB6697E PKIA9559E Revision: October 2004 LAN-342 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) [CAN] Case 2 Check harness between differential lock control unit and driver seat control unit. Refer to LAN-359, "Circuit Check Between Differential Lock Control Unit and Driver Seat Control Unit" . A B C D E F PKIB6698E G H I J LAN L PKIA9560E M Revision: October 2004 LAN-343 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) [CAN] Case 3 Check harness between driver seat control unit and data link connector. Refer to LAN-360, "Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector" . PKIB6699E PKIA9561E Revision: October 2004 LAN-344 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) [CAN] Case 4 Check harness between data link connector and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-360, "Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R" . A B C D E F PKIB6700E G H I J LAN L PKIA9562E M Revision: October 2004 LAN-345 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) [CAN] Case 5 Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-361, "ECM Circuit Check" . PKIB6701E PKIA9563E Revision: October 2004 LAN-346 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) [CAN] Case 6 A Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-362, "TCM Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIB6702E G H I J LAN PKIA9564E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-347 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) [CAN] Case 7 Check differential lock control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-362, "Differential Lock Control Unit Circuit Check" . PKIB6703E PKIA9565E Revision: October 2004 LAN-348 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) [CAN] Case 8 A Check driver seat control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-363, "Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIB6704E G H I J LAN PKIA9566E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-349 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) [CAN] Case 9 Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-363, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" . PKIB6705E PKIA9567E Revision: October 2004 LAN-350 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) [CAN] Case 10 A Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-364, "BCM Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIB6706E G H I J LAN PKIA9568E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-351 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) [CAN] Case 11 Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-364, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" . PKIB6707E PKIA9569E Revision: October 2004 LAN-352 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) [CAN] Case 12 A Check front air control circuit. Refer to LAN-365, "Front Air Control Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIB6708E G H I J LAN PKIB6770E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-353 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) [CAN] Case 13 Check transfer control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-365, "Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check" . PKIB6709E PKIA9570E Revision: October 2004 LAN-354 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) [CAN] Case 14 Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-366, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check" . A B C D E F PKIB6710E G H I J LAN L PKIA9571E M Revision: October 2004 LAN-355 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) [CAN] Case 15 Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-366, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" . PKIB6711E PKIA9572E Revision: October 2004 LAN-356 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) [CAN] Case 16 A Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-367, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIB6712E Case 17 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-368, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . G H I J LAN L PKIB6713E M Revision: October 2004 LAN-357 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) [CAN] Case 18 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “ON”. Refer to LAN-368, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . PKIB6714E Circuit Check Between TCM and Differential Lock Control Unit UKS0020K 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). – Harness connector F33 – Harness connector E19 – Harness connector E50 – Harness connector B75 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect A/T assembly connector and harness connector F33. Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector F9 terminals 3 (L), 8 (P) and harness connector F33 terminals 12 (L), 11 (P). 3 (L) - 12 (L) 8 (P) - 11 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA6831E Revision: October 2004 LAN-358 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) [CAN] 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect harness connector E50. Check continuity between harness connector E19 terminals 12 (L), 11 (P) and harness connector E50 terminals 2 (L), 1 (P). 12 (L) - 2 (L) 11 (P) - 1 (P) B : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness. D PKIA7668E E 4. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect differential lock control unit connector. Check continuity between harness connector B75 terminals 2 (L), 1 (P) and differential lock control unit harness connector B77 terminals 5 (L), 4 (P). 2 (L) - 5 (L) 1 (P) - 4 (P) F G : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. H OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-338, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness. I PKIA9746E Circuit Check Between Differential Lock Control Unit and Driver Seat Control Unit UKS001I2 J 1. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 4. LAN Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Disconnect differential lock control unit connector and harness connector B37. Check continuity between differential lock control unit harness connector B77 terminals 5 (L), 4 (P) and harness connector B37 terminals 15 (L), 14 (P). 5 (L) - 15 (L) 4 (P) - 14 (P) L M : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-338, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness. PKIA9749E Revision: October 2004 LAN-359 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) [CAN] Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector UKS001I3 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). – Harness connector B69 – Harness connector M40 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect harness connector B37 and harness connector B69. Check continuity between harness connector B37 terminals 15 (L), 14 (P) and harness connector B69 terminals 51J (L), 52J (P). 15 (L) - 51J (L) 14 (P) - 52J (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA9744E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT Check continuity between harness connector M40 terminals 51J (L), 52J (P) and data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P). 51J (L) - 6 (L) 52J (P) - 14 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-338, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness. PKIA6834E Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R UKS001I4 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). – Harness connector M31 – Harness connector E152 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: October 2004 LAN-360 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect harness connector M31. Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and harness connector M31 terminals 31G (L), 42G (P). 6 (L) - 31G (L) 14 (P) - 42G (P) B : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. D PKIA6835E E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between harness connector E152 terminals 31G (L), 42G (P) and IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L), 40 (P). 31G (L) - 39 (L) 42G (P) - 40 (P) F G : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. H OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-338, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness. I PKIA8140E ECM Circuit Check UKS001I5 J 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. LAN Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). L – ECM connector – Harness connector E19 – Harness connector F33 M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: October 2004 LAN-361 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM connector. Check resistance between ECM harness connector E16 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P). 94 (L) - 86 (P) : Approx. 108 - 132 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ECM. NG >> Repair harness between ECM and A/T assembly. PKIA0816E TCM Circuit Check UKS001I6 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of A/T assembly for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect A/T assembly connector. Check resistance between A/T assembly harness connector F9 terminals 3 (L) and 8 (P). 3 (L) - 8 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace A/T assembly. NG >> Repair harness between A/T assembly and harness connector F33. SKIA6866E Differential Lock Control Unit Circuit Check UKS0020L 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of differential lock control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: October 2004 LAN-362 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect differential lock control unit connector. Check resistance between differential lock control unit harness connector B77 terminals 5 (L) and 4 (P). 5 (L) - 4 (P) B : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace differential lock control unit. NG >> Repair harness between differential lock control unit and harness connector B75. C D PKIA9748E Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check E UKS001I7 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). – Driver seat control unit connector – Harness connector P1 – Harness connector B37 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. H I LAN : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω L OK or NG OK >> Replace driver seat control unit. NG >> Repair harness between driver seat control unit and harness connector B69. M PKIA6842E Combination Meter Circuit Check UKS001I8 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: October 2004 G J Disconnect driver seat control unit connector. Check resistance between driver seat control unit harness connector P2 terminals 3 (L) and 19 (P). 3 (L) - 19 (P) F LAN-363 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect combination meter connector. Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 11 (L) and 12 (P). 11 (L) - 12 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. NG >> Repair harness between combination meter and data link connector. PKIA6837E BCM Circuit Check UKS001I9 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P). 39 (L) - 40 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Repair harness between BCM and data link connector. SKIA6869E Data Link Connector Circuit Check UKS001IA 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check the terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: October 2004 LAN-364 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT A Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω B OK or NG OK >> Diagnose again. Refer to LAN-338, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter. C D PKIA2077E Front Air Control Circuit Check UKS003KT 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of front air control for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. E F G H 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect front air control connector. Check resistance between front air control harness connector M50 terminals 34 (L) and 35 (P). 34 (L) - 35 (P) I J : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. NG >> Repair harness between front air control and data link connector. LAN L PKIA8136E Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check UKS001IC 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of transfer control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: October 2004 LAN-365 2005 Titan M CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect transfer control unit connector. Check resistance between transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminals 1 (L) and 2 (P). 1 (L) - 2 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace transfer control unit. NG >> Repair harness between transfer control unit and harness connector E152. PKIA9745E ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check UKS001ID 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 11 (L) and 15 (P). 11 (L) - 15 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). NG >> Repair harness between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and harness connector E152. SKIA6872E IPDM E/R Circuit Check UKS001IE 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: October 2004 LAN-366 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P). 39 (L) - 40 (P) B : Approx. 108 - 132 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. NG >> Repair harness between IPDM E/R and harness connector E152. C D PKIA8141E E CAN Communication Circuit Check UKS001IF 1. CHECK CONNECTOR F Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Disconnect the following module and control unit connectors and check terminals for deformation, discon- G nection, looseness or damage. – ECM – A/T assembly H – Differential lock control unit – Driver seat control unit I – Combination meter – BCM – Front air control J – Transfer control unit – ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) – IPDM E/R LAN OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. L 1. 2. 3. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT M With all module and control unit connectors disconnected, check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA2077E Revision: October 2004 LAN-367 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 11) [CAN] 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and ground. 6 (L) - Ground 14 (P) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Check ECM and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-368, "ECM/ IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION" . NG >> Repair harness. PKIA2079E IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check UKS001IG Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R. ● IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-26, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" . ● Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-13, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START" . Component Inspection UKS001IH ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION ● ● ● Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle. Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86. Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 39 and 40. Unit Terminal ECM 94 - 86 IPDM E/R 39 - 40 Resistance value (Ω) (Approx.) 108 - 132 LKIA0037E Revision: October 2004 LAN-368 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) System Description PFP:23710 A UKS001II CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. Component Parts and Harness Connector Location B C UKS001IJ D E F G H I BKIA0139E J LAN L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-369 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] Schematic UKS001IK BKWA0156E Revision: October 2004 LAN-370 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] Wiring Diagram - CAN - UKS001IL A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0458E Revision: October 2004 LAN-371 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] BKWA0459E Revision: October 2004 LAN-372 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0460E Revision: October 2004 LAN-373 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] Work Flow 1. UKS001IM When there are no indications of “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC” or “IPDM E/R” on “SELECT SYSTEM” display of CONSULT-II, print the “SELECT SYSTEM”. PKIA2093E 2. Print all the data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “DIFF LOCK”, “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”, “HAVC”, “ALL MODE AWD/4WD”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II. PKIA8260E 3. Print all the data of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “DIFF LOCK”, “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC”, “ALL MODE AWD/4WD”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II. 4. Attach the printed sheet of “SELECT SYSTEM”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” onto the check sheet. Refer to LAN-376, "CHECK SHEET" . Based on the indications of “SELECT SYSTEM” and the results of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR”, puts a check mark onto the items with “No indication”, “NG”, or “UNKWN” in the check sheet table. Refer to LAN376, "CHECK SHEET" . NOTE: ● If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. ● The “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items, which are not in check sheet table, are not related to diagnostic procedure on service manual. So it is not necessary to check the status of the “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items not in check sheet table. Check CAN communication line of the navigation system. Refer to AV-148, "CAN Communication Line Check" . Attach the CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet onto the check sheet. Refer to LAN-376, "CHECK SHEET" . PKIA8343E 5. 6. 7. Revision: October 2004 LAN-374 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] 8. 9. Mark the “NG” or “UNKWN” item of the check sheet table with “v” from the result of CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR check sheet. Refer to LAN-376, "CHECK SHEET" . NOTE: If “NG” is displayed on “CAN COMM” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. Refer to AV-148, "CAN Communication Line Check" . According to the check sheet results (example), start inspection. Refer to LAN-379, "CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)" . A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-375 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] CHECK SHEET NOTE: If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” or “CAN COMM” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. PKIB6725E Revision: October 2004 LAN-376 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M PKIB6695E Revision: October 2004 LAN-377 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] PKIB6696E Revision: October 2004 LAN-378 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) NOTE: If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” or “CAN COMM” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. A Case 1 B Check harness between TCM and differential lock control unit. Refer to LAN-396, "Circuit Check Between TCM and Differential Lock Control Unit" . C D E F G H PKIB6726E I J LAN L M PKIA9573E Revision: October 2004 LAN-379 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] Case 2 Check harness between differential lock control unit and driver seat control unit. Refer to LAN-397, "Circuit Check Between Differential Lock Control Unit and Driver Seat Control Unit" . PKIB6727E PKIA9574E Revision: October 2004 LAN-380 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] Case 3 Check harness between driver seat control unit and data link connector. Refer to LAN-398, "Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector" . A B C D E F G PKIB6728E H I J LAN L PKIA9575E Revision: October 2004 LAN-381 2005 Titan M CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] Case 4 Check harness between data link connector and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-398, "Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R" . PKIB6729E PKIA9576E Revision: October 2004 LAN-382 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] Case 5 A Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-399, "ECM Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIB6730E G H I J LAN L PKIA9577E M Revision: October 2004 LAN-383 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] Case 6 Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-400, "TCM Circuit Check" . PKIB6731E PKIA9578E Revision: October 2004 LAN-384 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] Case 7 Check differential lock control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-400, "Differential Lock Control Unit Circuit Check" . A B C D E F PKIB6732E G H I J LAN L PKIA9579E M Revision: October 2004 LAN-385 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] Case 8 Check driver seat control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-401, "Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check" . PKIB6733E PKIA9580E Revision: October 2004 LAN-386 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] Case 9 A Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-401, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIB6734E G H I J LAN L PKIA9581E M Revision: October 2004 LAN-387 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] Case 10 Check display control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-402, "Display Control Unit Circuit Check" . PKIB6735E PKIA9582E Revision: October 2004 LAN-388 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] Case 11 A Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-402, "BCM Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIB6736E G H I J LAN L PKIA9583E M Revision: October 2004 LAN-389 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] Case 12 Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-403, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" . PKIB6737E PKIA9584E Revision: October 2004 LAN-390 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] Case 13 A Check front air control circuit. Refer to LAN-403, "Front Air Control Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIB6738E G H I J LAN L PKIA9585E M Revision: October 2004 LAN-391 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] Case 14 Check transfer control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-404, "Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check" . PKIB6739E PKIA9586E Revision: October 2004 LAN-392 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] Case 15 Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-404, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check" . A B C D E F G PKIB6740E H I J LAN L PKIA9587E Revision: October 2004 LAN-393 2005 Titan M CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] Case 16 Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-405, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" . PKIB6741E PKIA9588E Revision: October 2004 LAN-394 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] Case 17 A Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-406, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIB6742E G Case 18 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-406, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . H I J LAN L M PKIB6743E Revision: October 2004 LAN-395 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] Case 19 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “ON”. Refer to LAN-406, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . PKIB6744E Circuit Check Between TCM and Differential Lock Control Unit UKS0020F 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). – Harness connector F33 – Harness connector E19 – Harness connector E50 – Harness connector B75 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect A/T assembly connector and harness connector F33. Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector F9 terminals 3 (L), 8 (P) and harness connector F33 terminals 12 (L), 11 (P). 3 (L) - 12 (L) 8 (P) - 11 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA6831E Revision: October 2004 LAN-396 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect harness connector E50. Check continuity between harness connector E19 terminals 12 (L), 11 (P) and harness connector E50 terminals 2 (L), 1 (P). 12 (L) - 2 (L) 11 (P) - 1 (P) B : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness. D PKIA7668E E 4. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect differential lock control unit connector. Check continuity between harness connector B75 terminals 2 (L), 1 (P) and differential lock control unit harness connector B77 terminals 5 (L), 4 (P). 2 (L) - 5 (L) 1 (P) - 4 (P) F G : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. H OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-374, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness. I PKIA9746E Circuit Check Between Differential Lock Control Unit and Driver Seat Control Unit UKS001IN J 1. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 4. LAN Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Disconnect differential lock control unit connector and harness connector B37. Check continuity between differential lock control unit harness connector B77 terminals 5 (L), 4 (P) and harness connector B37 terminals 15 (L), 14 (P). 5 (L) - 15 (L) 4 (P) - 14 (P) L M : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-374, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness. PKIA9749E Revision: October 2004 LAN-397 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector UKS001IO 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). – Harness connector B69 – Harness connector M40 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect harness connector B37 and harness connector B69. Check continuity between harness connector B37 terminals 15 (L), 14 (P) and harness connector B69 terminals 51J (L), 52J (P). 15 (L) - 51J (L) 14 (P) - 52J (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA9744E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT Check continuity between harness connector M40 terminals 51J (L), 52J (P) and data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P). 51J (L) - 6 (L) 52J (P) - 14 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-374, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness. PKIA6834E Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R UKS001IP 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). – Harness connector M31 – Harness connector E152 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: October 2004 LAN-398 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect harness connector M31. Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and harness connector M31 terminals 31G (L), 42G (P). 6 (L) - 31G (L) 14 (P) - 42G (P) B : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. D PKIA6835E E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between harness connector E152 terminals 31G (L), 42G (P) and IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L), 40 (P). 31G (L) - 39 (L) 42G (P) - 40 (P) F G : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. H OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-374, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness. I PKIA8140E ECM Circuit Check UKS001IQ J 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. LAN Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). L – ECM connector – Harness connector E19 – Harness connector F33 M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: October 2004 LAN-399 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM connector. Check resistance between ECM harness connector E16 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P). 94 (L) - 86 (P) : Approx. 108 - 132 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ECM. NG >> Repair harness between ECM and A/T assembly. PKIA0816E TCM Circuit Check UKS001IR 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of A/T assembly for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect A/T assembly connector. Check resistance between A/T assembly harness connector F9 terminals 3 (L) and 8 (P). 3 (L) - 8 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace A/T assembly. NG >> Repair harness between A/T assembly and harness connector F33. SKIA6866E Differential Lock Control Unit Circuit Check UKS0020G 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of differential lock control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: October 2004 LAN-400 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect differential lock control unit connector. Check resistance between differential lock control unit harness connector B77 terminals 5 (L) and 4 (P). 5 (L) - 4 (P) B : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace differential lock control unit. NG >> Repair harness between differential lock control unit and harness connector B75. C D PKIA9748E Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check E UKS001IS 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). – Driver seat control unit connector – Harness connector P1 – Harness connector B37 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. H I LAN : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω L OK or NG OK >> Replace driver seat control unit. NG >> Repair harness between driver seat control unit and harness connector B69. M PKIA6842E Combination Meter Circuit Check UKS001IT 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: October 2004 G J Disconnect driver seat control unit connector. Check resistance between driver seat control unit harness connector P2 terminals 3 (L) and 19 (P). 3 (L) - 19 (P) F LAN-401 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect combination meter connector. Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 11 (L) and 12 (P). 11 (L) - 12 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. NG >> Repair harness between combination meter and data link connector. PKIA6837E Display Control Unit Circuit Check UKS001IU 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of display control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect display control unit connector. Check resistance between display control unit harness connector M95 terminals 25 (L) and 26 (P). 25 (L) - 26 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace display control unit. NG >> Repair harness between display control unit and data link connector. SKIA6884E BCM Circuit Check UKS001IV 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: October 2004 LAN-402 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect BCM connector. Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P). 39 (L) - 40 (P) B : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Repair harness between BCM and data link connector. C D SKIA6869E E Data Link Connector Circuit Check UKS001IW 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check the terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT F G H I Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω J OK or NG OK >> Diagnose again. Refer to LAN-374, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter. LAN L PKIA2077E Front Air Control Circuit Check UKS0020H 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of front air control for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: October 2004 LAN-403 2005 Titan M CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect front air control connector. Check resistance between front air control harness connector M50 terminals 34 (L) and 35 (P). 34 (L) - 35 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. NG >> Repair harness between front air control and data link connector. PKIA8136E Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check UKS001IZ 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of transfer control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect transfer control unit connector. Check resistance between transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminals 1 (L) and 2 (P). 1 (L) - 2 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace transfer control unit. NG >> Repair harness between transfer control unit and harness connector E152. PKIA9745E ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check UKS001J0 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. Revision: October 2004 LAN-404 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 11 (L) and 15 (P). 11 (L) - 15 (P) B : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). NG >> Repair harness between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and harness connector E152. C D SKIA6872E E IPDM E/R Circuit Check UKS001J1 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. G H I Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P). 39 (L) - 40 (P) F J : Approx. 108 - 132 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. NG >> Repair harness between IPDM E/R and harness connector E152. LAN L PKIA8141E M Revision: October 2004 LAN-405 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] CAN Communication Circuit Check UKS001J2 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Disconnect the following module and control unit connectors and check terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. – ECM – A/T assembly – Differential lock control unit – Driver seat control unit – Combination meter – Display control unit – BCM – Front air control – Transfer control unit – ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) – IPDM E/R OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT With all module and control unit connectors disconnected, check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA2077E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and ground. 6 (L) - Ground 14 (P) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Check ECM and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-407, "ECM/ IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION" . NG >> Repair harness. PKIA2079E IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check UKS001J3 Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R. ● IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-26, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" . ● Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-13, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START" . Revision: October 2004 LAN-406 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 12) [CAN] Component Inspection UKS001J4 A ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION ● ● ● Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle. Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86. Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 39 and 40. Unit Terminal ECM 94 - 86 IPDM E/R 39 - 40 B Resistance value (Ω) (Approx.) C 108 - 132 D LKIA0037E E F G H I J LAN L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-407 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13) [CAN] CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13) System Description PFP:23710 UKS0038H CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. Component Parts and Harness Connector Location UKS0038I BKIA0141E Revision: October 2004 LAN-408 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13) [CAN] Schematic UKS0038J A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0164E Revision: October 2004 LAN-409 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13) [CAN] Wiring Diagram - CAN - UKS0038K BKWA0464E Revision: October 2004 LAN-410 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13) [CAN] A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M BKWA0465E Revision: October 2004 LAN-411 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13) [CAN] BKWA0466E Revision: October 2004 LAN-412 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13) [CAN] Work Flow 1. UKS0038L When there are no indications of “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC” or “IPDM E/R” on “SELECT SYSTEM” display of CONSULT-II, print the “SELECT SYSTEM”. A B C D PKIA2093E 2. Print all the data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC”, “ALL MODE AWD/4WD”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II. E F G H PKIA8260E 3. Print all the data of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for “ENGINE”, “A/T”, “AUTO DRIVE POS.”, “BCM”, “HVAC”, “ALL MODE AWD/4WD”, “ABS” and “IPDM E/R” displayed on CONSULT-II. I J LAN L PKIA8343E 4. 5. 6. Attach the printed sheet of “SELECT SYSTEM”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” onto the check sheet. Refer to LAN-414, "CHECK SHEET" . Based on the indications of “SELECT SYSTEM” and the results of “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR”, puts a check mark onto the items with “No indication”, “NG”, or “UNKWN” in the check sheet table. Refer to LAN414, "CHECK SHEET" . NOTE: ● If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” as “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. ● The “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items, which are not in check sheet table, are not related to diagnostic procedure on service manual. So it is not necessary to check the status of the “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” items not in check sheet table. According to the check sheet results (example), start inspection. Refer to LAN-416, "CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)" . Revision: October 2004 LAN-413 2005 Titan M CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13) [CAN] CHECK SHEET NOTE: If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. PKIB6745E Revision: October 2004 LAN-414 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13) [CAN] A B C D E F G H I J LAN L M PKIB6773E Revision: October 2004 LAN-415 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13) [CAN] CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) NOTE: If “NG” is displayed on “INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. Case 1 Check harness between TCM and driver seat control unit. Refer to LAN-431, "Circuit Check Between TCM and Driver Seat Control Unit" . PKIB6746E PKIA9298E Revision: October 2004 LAN-416 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13) [CAN] Case 2 Check harness between driver seat control unit and data link connector. Refer to LAN-432, "Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector" . A B C D E F PKIB6747E G H I J LAN L PKIA9299E M Revision: October 2004 LAN-417 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13) [CAN] Case 3 Check harness between data link connector and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-433, "Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R" . PKIB6748E PKIA9300E Revision: October 2004 LAN-418 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13) [CAN] Case 4 A Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-434, "ECM Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIB6749E G H I J LAN PKIA9301E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-419 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13) [CAN] Case 5 Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-434, "TCM Circuit Check" . PKIB6750E PKIA9302E Revision: October 2004 LAN-420 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13) [CAN] Case 6 A Check driver seat control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-435, "Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIB6751E G H I J LAN PKIA9303E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-421 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13) [CAN] Case 7 Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-435, "Combination Meter Circuit Check" . PKIB6752E PKIA9304E Revision: October 2004 LAN-422 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13) [CAN] Case 8 A Check BCM circuit. Refer to LAN-436, "BCM Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIB6753E G H I J LAN PKIA9305E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-423 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13) [CAN] Case 9 Check data link connector circuit. Refer to LAN-436, "Data Link Connector Circuit Check" . PKIB6754E PKIA9306E Revision: October 2004 LAN-424 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13) [CAN] Case 10 A Check steering angle sensor circuit. Refer to LAN-437, "Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIB6756E G H I J LAN PKIA9307E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-425 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13) [CAN] Case 11 Check front air control circuit. Refer to LAN-437, "Front Air Control Circuit Check" . PKIB6755E PKIB6771E Revision: October 2004 LAN-426 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13) [CAN] Case 12 A Check transfer control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-438, "Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIB6757E G H I J LAN PKIA9308E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-427 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13) [CAN] Case 13 Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-438, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check" . PKIB6758E PKIA9309E Revision: October 2004 LAN-428 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13) [CAN] Case 14 A Check IPDM E/R circuit. Refer to LAN-439, "IPDM E/R Circuit Check" . B C D E F PKIB6759E G H I J LAN PKIA9310E L M Revision: October 2004 LAN-429 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13) [CAN] Case 15 Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-439, "CAN Communication Circuit Check" . PKIB6760E Case 16 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “OFF”. Refer to LAN-440, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . PKIB6761E Revision: October 2004 LAN-430 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13) [CAN] Case 17 Check IPDM E/R ignition relay circuit continuously sticks “ON”. Refer to LAN-440, "IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check" . A B C D E F PKIB6762E Circuit Check Between TCM and Driver Seat Control Unit UKS0038M G 1. CHECK CONNECTOR H Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and I harness side). – Harness connector F33 – Harness connector E19 J – Harness connector E50 – Harness connector B75 OK or NG LAN OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 1. 2. 3. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. L Disconnect A/T assembly connector and harness connector F33. Check continuity between A/T assembly harness connector F9 terminals 3 (L), 8 (P) and harness connector F33 terminals 12 (L), 11 (P). 3 (L) - 12 (L) 8 (P) - 11 (P) M : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA6831E Revision: October 2004 LAN-431 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13) [CAN] 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect harness connector E50. Check continuity between harness connector E19 terminals 12 (L), 11 (P) and harness connector E50 terminals 2 (L), 1 (P). 12 (L) - 2 (L) 11 (P) - 1 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA7668E 4. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect harness connector B37. Check continuity between harness connector B75 terminals 2 (L), 1 (P) and harness connector B37 terminals 15 (L), 14 (P). 2 (L) - 15 (L) 1 (P) - 14 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-413, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness. PKIA9743E Circuit Check Between Driver Seat Control Unit and Data Link Connector UKS0038N 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). – Harness connector B69 – Harness connector M40 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect harness connector B37 and harness connector B69. Check continuity between harness connector B37 terminals 15 (L), 14 (P) and harness connector B69 terminals 51J (L), 52J (P). 15 (L) - 51J (L) 14 (P) - 52J (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA9744E Revision: October 2004 LAN-432 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13) [CAN] 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT A Check continuity between harness connector M40 terminals 51J (L), 52J (P) and data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P). 51J (L) - 6 (L) 52J (P) - 14 (P) B : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-413, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness. C D PKIA6834E Circuit Check Between Data Link Connector and IPDM E/R UKS0038O 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). – Harness connector M31 – Harness connector E152 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. E F G H 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT I 1. 2. J Disconnect harness connector M31. Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and harness connector M31 terminals 31G (L), 42G (P). 6 (L) - 31G (L) 14 (P) - 42G (P) LAN : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. L PKIA6835E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between harness connector E152 terminals 31G (L), 42G (P) and IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L), 40 (P). 31G (L) - 39 (L) 42G (P) - 40 (P) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-413, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness. PKIA8140E Revision: October 2004 LAN-433 2005 Titan M CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13) [CAN] ECM Circuit Check UKS0038P 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). – ECM connector – Harness connector E19 – Harness connector F33 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ECM connector. Check resistance between ECM harness connector E16 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (P). 94 (L) - 86 (P) : Approx. 108 - 132 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ECM. NG >> Repair harness between ECM and A/T assembly. PKIA0816E TCM Circuit Check UKS0038Q 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of A/T assembly for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect A/T assembly connector. Check resistance between A/T assembly harness connector F9 terminals 3 (L) and 8 (P). 3 (L) - 8 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace A/T assembly. NG >> Repair harness between A/T assembly and harness connector F33. SKIA6866E Revision: October 2004 LAN-434 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13) [CAN] Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Check UKS0038R 1. CHECK CONNECTOR A 1. 2. 3. B Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). – Driver seat control unit connector – Harness connector P1 – Harness connector B37 OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. C D E 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector. Check resistance between driver seat control unit harness connector P2 terminals 3 (L) and 19 (P). 3 (L) - 19 (P) F : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω G OK or NG OK >> Replace driver seat control unit. NG >> Repair harness between driver seat control unit and harness connector B69. H I PKIA6842E Combination Meter Circuit Check UKS0038S 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. J Turn ignition switch OFF. LAN Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side and harness side). L OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. M CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 2. 1. 2. Disconnect combination meter connector. Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M24 terminals 11 (L) and 12 (P). 11 (L) - 12 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. NG >> Repair harness between combination meter and data link connector. PKIA6837E Revision: October 2004 LAN-435 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13) [CAN] BCM Circuit Check UKS0038T 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector. Check resistance between BCM harness connector M18 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P). 39 (L) - 40 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Repair harness between BCM and data link connector. SKIA6869E Data Link Connector Circuit Check UKS0038U 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check the terminals and connector of data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT Check resistance between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Diagnose again. Refer to LAN-413, "Work Flow" . NG >> Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter. PKIA2077E Revision: October 2004 LAN-436 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13) [CAN] Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Check UKS0038V 1. CHECK CONNECTOR A 1. 2. 3. B Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of steering angle sensor for damage, bend and loose connection (sensor side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. D 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect steering angle sensor connector. Check resistance between steering angle sensor harness connector M47 terminals 3 (L) and 4 (P). 3 (L) - 4 (P) C E : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω F OK or NG OK >> Replace steering angle sensor. NG >> Repair harness between steering angle sensor and data link connector. G H PKIA6838E Front Air Control Circuit Check UKS003KU 1. CHECK CONNECTOR I 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. J Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of front air control for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and harness side). LAN OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. L CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 2. 1. 2. Disconnect front air control connector. Check resistance between front air control harness connector M50 terminals 34 (L) and 35 (P). 34 (L) - 35 (P) M : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. NG >> Repair harness between front air control and data link connector. PKIA8136E Revision: October 2004 LAN-437 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13) [CAN] Transfer Control Unit Circuit Check UKS0038W 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of transfer control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect transfer control unit connector. Check resistance between transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminals 1 (L) and 2 (P). 1 (L) - 2 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace transfer control unit. NG >> Repair harness between transfer control unit and harness connector E152. PKIA9745E ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Check UKS0038X 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector. Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E125 terminals 11 (L) and 15 (P). 11 (L) - 15 (P) : Approx. 54 - 66 Ω OK or NG OK >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). NG >> Repair harness between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and harness connector E152. SKIA6872E Revision: October 2004 LAN-438 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13) [CAN] IPDM E/R Circuit Check UKS0038Y 1. CHECK CONNECTOR A 1. 2. 3. B Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Check terminals and connector of IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and harness side). OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal or connector. D 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check resistance between IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminals 39 (L) and 40 (P). 39 (L) - 40 (P) C E : Approx. 108 - 132 Ω F OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. NG >> Repair harness between IPDM E/R and harness connector E152. G H PKIA8141E CAN Communication Circuit Check UKS0038Z 1. CHECK CONNECTOR I 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. J Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Disconnect the following module and control unit connectors and check terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. LAN – ECM – A/T assembly – Driver seat control unit L – Combination meter – BCM – Steering angle sensor M – Front air control – Transfer control unit – ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) – IPDM E/R OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace as necessary. Revision: October 2004 LAN-439 2005 Titan CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 13) [CAN] 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT With all module and control unit connectors disconnected, check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L) and 14 (P). 6 (L) - 14 (P) : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness. PKIA2077E 3. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT Check continuity between data link connector M22 terminals 6 (L), 14 (P) and ground. 6 (L) - Ground 14 (P) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Check ECM and IPDM E/R. Refer to LAN-440, "ECM/ IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION" . NG >> Repair harness. PKIA2079E IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Check UKS00390 Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R. ● IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to PG-26, "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection" . ● Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-13, "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START" . Component Inspection UKS00391 ECM/IPDM E/R INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION ● ● ● Remove ECM and IPDM E/R from vehicle. Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86. Check resistance between IPDM E/R terminals 39 and 40. Unit Terminal ECM 94 - 86 IPDM E/R 39 - 40 Resistance value (Ω) (Approx.) 108 - 132 LKIA0037E Revision: October 2004 LAN-440 2005 Titan K ELECTRICAL A B SECTION LIGHTING SYSTEM C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 4 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 4 General precautions for service operations ............. 4 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 4 HEADLAMP (FOR USA) ............................................ 5 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..... 5 System Description .................................................. 5 OUTLINE ............................................................... 5 BATTERY SAVER CONTROL .............................. 6 AUTO LIGHT OPERATION ................................... 7 VEHICLESECURITYSYSTEM(PANICALARM)..... 7 CAN Communication System Description ................ 7 Schematic ................................................................ 8 Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP — ................................. 9 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM ............. 13 Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R ..... 14 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis ................ 14 Preliminary Check .................................................. 15 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .................................................................... 15 CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ................................. 17 CONSULT-II OPERATION .................................. 17 WORK SUPPORT ............................................... 18 DATA MONITOR ................................................. 18 ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 19 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS .......................... 19 CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R) ......................... 20 CONSULT-II OPERATION .................................. 20 DATA MONITOR ................................................. 21 ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 21 Headlamp HI Does Not Illuminate (Both Sides) ..... 22 Headlamp HI Does Not Illuminate (One Side) ....... 24 High Beam Indicator Lamp Does Not Illuminate ... 25 Headlamp LO Does Not Illuminate (Both Sides) ... 25 Headlamp LO Does Not Illuminate (One Side) ...... 27 Headlamps Do Not Turn OFF ................................ 28 Aiming Adjustment ................................................. 29 LOW BEAM AND HIGH BEAM ........................... 29 Revision: October 2004 Bulb Replacement .................................................. 30 HEADLAMP (OUTER SIDE), FOR LOW BEAM... 30 HEADLAMP (INNER SIDE), FOR HIGH BEAM... 30 FRONT TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LAMP ........... 30 FRONT SIDE MARKER LAMP ........................... 30 Removal and Installation ........................................ 31 REMOVAL ........................................................... 31 INSTALLATION ................................................... 31 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 31 HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM - .................................................................. 32 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 32 System Description ................................................. 33 OUTLINE ............................................................. 33 DAYTIME LIGHT OPERATION ........................... 33 COMBINATIONSWITCHREADING FUNCTION... 33 AUTO LIGHT OPERATION ................................. 33 CAN Communication System Description .............. 34 Schematic ............................................................... 35 Wiring Diagram — DTRL — ................................... 36 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM .............. 40 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis ................ 41 Preliminary Check .................................................. 41 CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION ........................ 41 INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ............................................. 41 INSPECTION PARKING BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT .................................................................... 42 CONSULT-II Functions ........................................... 43 Daytime Light Control Does Not Operate Properly (Normal Headlamps Operate Properly) .................. 43 Aiming Adjustment .................................................. 45 Bulb Replacement .................................................. 45 Removal and Installation ........................................ 45 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 45 AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM ............................................. 46 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 46 System Description ................................................. 47 OUTLINE ............................................................. 47 COMBINATIONSWITCHREADING FUNCTION... 47 LT-1 2005 Titan F G H I J LT L M EXTERIORLAMPBATTERYSAVERCONTROL... 47 DELAY TIMER FUNCTION ................................. 47 CAN Communication System Description .............. 47 Major Components and Functions .......................... 47 Schematic ............................................................... 48 Wiring Diagram — AUTO/L — ................................ 49 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM .............. 52 Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R ...... 53 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis ................ 54 Preliminary Check .................................................. 54 SETTING CHANGE FUNCTIONS ....................... 54 CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION ........................ 54 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .................................................................... 54 CONSULT-II Function (BCM) .................................. 56 CONSULT-II OPERATION ................................... 56 WORK SUPPORT ............................................... 57 DATA MONITOR .................................................. 57 ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 58 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ........................... 58 CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R) .......................... 59 CONSULT-II OPERATION ................................... 59 DATA MONITOR .................................................. 60 ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 60 Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom .................... 61 Lighting Switch Inspection ...................................... 61 Optical Sensor System Inspection .......................... 62 Removal and Installation of Optical Sensor ............ 63 REMOVAL ........................................................... 63 INSTALLATION .................................................... 63 FRONT FOG LAMP .................................................. 64 ComponentParts and Harness Connector Location... 64 System Description ................................................. 64 OUTLINE ............................................................. 64 COMBINATIONSWITCHREADING FUNCTION... 65 EXTERIORLAMPBATTERYSAVERCONTROL... 65 CAN Communication System Description .............. 65 Wiring Diagram — F/FOG — .................................. 66 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM .............. 68 Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R ...... 69 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis ................ 69 Preliminary Check .................................................. 70 CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION ........................ 70 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .................................................................... 70 CONSULT-II Functions ........................................... 71 Front Fog Lamps Do Not Illuminate (Both Sides) ... 71 Front Fog Lamp Does Not Illuminate (One Side) ... 72 Aiming Adjustment .................................................. 73 Bulb Replacement .................................................. 74 Removal and Installation ........................................ 74 TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS... 75 ComponentParts and Harness Connector Location... 75 System Description ................................................. 75 OUTLINE ............................................................. 75 TURN SIGNAL OPERATION ............................... 75 HAZARD LAMP OPERATION ............................. 76 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM OPERATION .................................................................... 76 Revision: October 2004 COMBINATIONSWITCHREADINGFUNCTION...77 CAN Communication System Description ..............77 Wiring Diagram — TURN — ...................................78 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM ..............80 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis ................81 Preliminary Check ...................................................82 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .....................................................................82 CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ..................................83 CONSULT-II OPERATION ...................................83 DATA MONITOR ..................................................84 ACTIVE TEST ......................................................84 Turn Signal Lamp Does Not Operate ......................85 Rear Turn Signal Lamp Does Not Operate .............86 Hazard Warning Lamp Does Not Operate But Turn Signal Lamps Operate ............................................87 Turn Signal Indicator Lamp Does Not Operate .......88 Bulb Replacement (Front Turn Signal Lamp) ..........89 Bulb Replacement (Rear Turn Signal Lamp) ..........89 Removal and Installation of Front Turn Signal Lamp...89 Removal and Installation of Rear Turn Signal Lamp...89 LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH ................90 Removal and Installation .........................................90 REMOVAL ............................................................90 INSTALLATION ....................................................90 HAZARD SWITCH .....................................................91 Removal and Installation .........................................91 REMOVAL ............................................................91 INSTALLATION ....................................................91 COMBINATION SWITCH ..........................................92 Wiring Diagram — COMBSW — ............................92 Combination Switch Reading Function ...................93 CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ..................................93 CONSULT-II OPERATION ...................................93 DATA MONITOR ..................................................94 Combination Switch Inspection ...............................95 Removal and Installation .........................................97 Switch Circuit Inspection .........................................97 STOP LAMP ..............................................................98 System Description .................................................98 Wiring Diagram — STOP/L — ................................99 High-Mounted Stop Lamp ..................................... 101 BULB REPLACEMENT ...................................... 101 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ....................... 101 Stop Lamp ............................................................. 101 BULB REPLACEMENT ...................................... 101 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ....................... 101 BACK-UP LAMP ..................................................... 102 Wiring Diagram — BACK/L — .............................. 102 Bulb Replacement ................................................. 103 Removal and Installation ....................................... 103 PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS .... 104 ComponentParts and Harness Connector Location.104 System Description ............................................... 104 OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH ............... 105 COMBINATIONSWITCHREADINGFUNCTION.105 EXTERIORLAMPBATTERYSAVERCONTROL.105 CAN Communication System Description ............ 105 Schematic ............................................................. 106 LT-2 2005 Titan Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L — ................................ 107 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM ............110 Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R .... 111 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis ............... 111 Preliminary Check .................................................112 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ...................................................................112 CONSULT-II Functions ..........................................113 Parking, License Plate and/or Tail Lamps Do Not Illuminate ...............................................................113 Parking, License Plate and Tail Lamps Do Not Turn OFF (After Approx. 10 Minutes) ............................116 Front Parking Lamp ...............................................117 BULB REPLACEMENT ......................................117 Tail Lamp ...............................................................117 BULB REPLACEMENT ......................................117 REAR COMBINATION LAMP .................................118 Bulb Replacement .................................................118 Removal and Installation .......................................118 ...........................................................................118 TRAILER TOW ........................................................119 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..119 System Description ...............................................119 TRAILER TAIL LAMP OPERATION .................. 120 TRAILER TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD LAMP OPERATION ..................................................... 120 TRAILER STOP LAMP OPERATION ................ 120 TRAILER POWER SUPPLY OPERATION ........ 120 Schematic ............................................................ 122 Wiring Diagram — T/TOW — ............................... 123 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP ........................................ 126 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location. 126 System Description .............................................. 127 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND .................... 127 SWITCH OPERATION ...................................... 128 ROOM LAMP TIMER OPERATION .................. 129 INTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL. 129 Schematic ............................................................. 131 Wiring Diagram — INT/L — .................................. 134 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM ............ 142 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis .............. 143 Preliminary Check ................................................ 143 INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ........................................... 143 CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ............................... 144 CONSULT-II OPERATION ................................. 144 WORK SUPPORT ............................................. 145 DATA MONITOR ............................................... 145 ACTIVE TEST ................................................... 146 Front Room/Map LampAssembly Control Does Not Operate ................................................................. 146 Personal Lamp 2nd Row Control Does Not Operate (Room/Map Lamps Operate) ................................ 148 All Step/Foot/Puddle Lamps Do Not Operate ....... 149 All Interior Room Lamps Do Not Operate ............. 150 ILLUMINATION ....................................................... 151 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location. 151 System Description ............................................... 151 ILLUMINATION OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH ............................................................ 152 EXTERIORLAMPBATTERYSAVERCONTROL. 153 CAN Communication System Description ............ 153 Schematic ............................................................. 154 Wiring Diagram — ILL — ...................................... 157 Removal and Installation of Illumination Control Switch ................................................................... 166 REMOVAL ......................................................... 166 INSTALLATION ................................................. 166 BULB SPECIFICATIONS ........................................ 167 Headlamp ............................................................. 167 Exterior Lamp ....................................................... 167 Interior Lamp/Illumination ..................................... 167 A B C D E F G H I J LT L M Revision: October 2004 LT-3 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00011 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EKS00A8S The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. General precautions for service operations ● ● ● ● ● ● ● EKS00A8T Never work with wet hands. Turn the lighting switch OFF before disconnecting and connecting the connector. When checking the headlamp on/off operation, check it on vehicle and with the power connected to the vehicle-side connector. Do not touch the headlamp bulb glass surface with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it. Do not touch the headlamp bulb just after the headlamp is turned off, because it is very hot. When the bulb has burned out, wrap it in a thick vinyl bag and discard. Do not break the bulb. Leaving the bulb removed from the headlamp housing for a long period of time can deteriorate the performance of the lens and reflector (dirt, clouding). Always prepare a new bulb and have it on hand when replacing the bulb. Do not use organic solvent (paint thinner or gasoline) to clean lamps and to remove old sealant. Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis EKS00A8U When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● Refer to GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" in GI section. ● Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" for power distribution in PG section. When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● Refer to GI-11, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" in GI section. ● Refer to GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" in GI section. Revision: October 2004 LT-4 2005 Titan HEADLAMP (FOR USA) HEADLAMP (FOR USA) Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:26010 A EKS00A8V B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKIA3579E System Description EKS00A8W Control of the headlamp system operation is dependent upon the position of the combination switch (lighting switch). When the lighting switch is placed in the 2ND position, the BCM (body control module) receives input requesting the headlamps (and tail lamps) illuminate. This input is communicated to the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room) across the CAN communication lines. The CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R controls the headlamp high and headlamp low relay coils. When energized, these relays direct power to the respective headlamps, which then illuminate. OUTLINE Power is supplied at all times ● to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and Revision: October 2004 LT-5 2005 Titan HEADLAMP (FOR USA) to headlamp high relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and ● to headlamp low relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and ● through 20A fuse (No. 53, located in the IPDM E/R) ● to CPU of the IPDM E/R, and ● through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to BCM terminal 70. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied ● to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and ● through 10A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box) ● to BCM terminal 38. Ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 67 ● through grounds M57, M61 and M79, and ● to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 59 ● through grounds E9, E15 and E24. ● Low Beam Operation With the lighting switch in 2ND position, the BCM receives input requesting the headlamps to illuminate. This input is communicated to the IPDM E/R across the CAN communication lines. The CPU of the IPDM E/R controls the headlamp low relay coil. When energized, this relay directs power ● through 15A fuse (No. 41, located in the IPDM E/R) ● through IPDM E/R terminal 54 ● to front combination lamp RH terminal 1, and ● through 15A fuse (No. 40, located in the IPDM E/R) ● through IPDM E/R terminal 52 ● to front combination lamp LH terminal 1. Ground is supplied ● to front combination lamp LH and RH terminal 4 ● through grounds E9, E15 and E24. With power and ground supplied, low beam headlamps illuminate. High Beam Operation/Flash-to-Pass Operation With the lighting switch in 2ND position and placed in HIGH or PASS position, the BCM receives input requesting the headlamp high beams to illuminate. This input is communicated to the IPDM E/R across the CAN communication lines. The CPU of the combination meter controls the ON/OFF status of the HIGH BEAM indicator. The CPU of the IPDM E/R controls the headlamp high relay coil. When energized, this relay directs power ● through 10A fuse (No. 34, located in the IPDM E/R) ● through IPDM E/R terminal 56 ● to front combination lamp RH terminal 2, and ● through 10A fuse (No. 35, located in the IPDM E/R) ● through IPDM E/R terminal 55 ● to front combination lamp LH terminal 2. Ground is supplied ● to front combination lamp LH and RH terminal 3 ● through grounds E9, E15 and E24. With power and ground supplied, the high beam headlamps illuminate. BATTERY SAVER CONTROL When the combination switch (lighting switch) is in the 2ND position (ON), and the ignition switch is turned from ON or ACC to OFF, the battery saver control feature is activated. Under this condition, the headlamps remain illuminated for 5 minutes, unless the combination switch (lighting switch) position is changed. If the combination switch (lighting switch) position is changed, then the headlamps are turned off. Revision: October 2004 LT-6 2005 Titan HEADLAMP (FOR USA) AUTO LIGHT OPERATION A Refer to LT-47, "System Description" for auto light operation. VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM (PANIC ALARM) The vehicle security system (panic alarm) will flash the high beams if the system is triggered. Refer to BL-57, "Panic Alarm Operation" . CAN Communication System Description B EKS00A8X C Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . D E F G H I J LT L M Revision: October 2004 LT-7 2005 Titan HEADLAMP (FOR USA) Schematic EKS00A8Y WKWA2393E Revision: October 2004 LT-8 2005 Titan HEADLAMP (FOR USA) Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP — EKS00A8Z A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA2394E Revision: October 2004 LT-9 2005 Titan HEADLAMP (FOR USA) WKWA2395E Revision: October 2004 LT-10 2005 Titan HEADLAMP (FOR USA) A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA1475E Revision: October 2004 LT-11 2005 Titan HEADLAMP (FOR USA) WKWA2396E Revision: October 2004 LT-12 2005 Titan HEADLAMP (FOR USA) Terminals and Reference Values for BCM EKS00A90 A Measuring condition Terminal No. Wire color 2 SB Signal name Combination switch input 5 Ignition switch ON Operation or condition Reference value (Approx.) B C Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 D SKIA5291E E 3 G/Y Combination switch input 4 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 F SKIA5292E G 4 Y Combination switch input 3 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 H SKIA5291E 5 G/B Combination switch input 2 6 V Combination switch input 1 I ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 J SKIA5292E 32 R/G Combination switch output 5 ON L Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E 33 R/Y Combination switch output 4 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E 34 L Combination switch output 3 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E Revision: October 2004 LT-13 LT 2005 Titan M HEADLAMP (FOR USA) Measuring condition Terminal No. Wire color 35 O/B Combination switch output 2 36 R/W Combination switch output 1 Signal name Ignition switch ON Operation or condition Reference value (Approx.) Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E 38 W/L Ignition switch (ON) ON — Battery voltage 39 L CAN-H — — — 40 P CAN-L — — — 67 B Ground ON — 0V 70 W/B Battery power supply (fusible link) OFF — Battery voltage Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R EKS00A91 Measuring condition Terminal No. Wire color 38 B 39 Ignition switch Operation or condition Reference value (Approx.) Ground ON — 0V L CAN-H — — — 40 P CAN-L — — — 52 L Headlamp low (LH) ON 54 55 R/Y G 56 L/W 59 B Signal name Headlamp low (RH) Headlamp high (LH) Lighting switch 2ND position OFF 0V ON Battery voltage ON Lighting switch 2ND position OFF 0V ON Battery voltage OFF 0V ON Lighting switch HIGH or PASS position ON Battery voltage Lighting switch HIGH or PASS position OFF 0V ON Battery voltage Headlamp high (RH) ON Ground ON — 0V How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. EKS00A92 Confirm the symptom or customer complaint. Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-5, "System Description" . Perform the Preliminary Check. Refer to LT-15, "Preliminary Check" . Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. Does the headlamp operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4. Inspection End. Revision: October 2004 LT-14 2005 Titan HEADLAMP (FOR USA) Preliminary Check EKS00A93 A CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT 1. CHECK FUSES OR FUSIBLE LINK B Check for blown fuses or fusible link. Unit BCM Power source Fuse No. Battery f Ignition switch ON or START position 59 C 34 D 35 IPDM E/R Battery 40 41 E 53 Refer to LT-9, "Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP —" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . F G 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. H Disconnect BCM connectors. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. Terminals I Ignition switch position (+) Connector Terminal (Wire color) M18 38 (W/L) M20 70 (W/B) (–) OFF ACC ON 0V 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage Ground J LT OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness for open between BCM and fuse. L M WKIA1436E Revision: October 2004 LT-15 2005 Titan HEADLAMP (FOR USA) 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. Terminals Connector Terminal (Wire color) M20 67 (B) Continuity Ground Yes OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Check ground circuit harness. LIIA0915E Revision: October 2004 LT-16 2005 Titan HEADLAMP (FOR USA) CONSULT-II Function (BCM) EKS00A94 A CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode Description B WORK SUPPORT DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part SELF-DIAG RESULTS CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER CONFIGURATION Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received data is displayed. C Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. D The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. BCM part number can be read. E Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. CONSULT-II OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON. F G H I BBIA0369E 2. J Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". LT L M BCIA0029E 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . BCIA0030E Revision: October 2004 LT-17 2005 Titan HEADLAMP (FOR USA) 4. Touch "HEAD LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. LKIA0169E WORK SUPPORT Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Touch "HEAD LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch item on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen. Touch "START". Touch "CHANGE SETT". The setting will be changed and "CUSTOMIZING COMPLETED" will be displayed. Touch "END". Display Item List Item Description CONSULT-II Factory setting Exterior lamp battery saver control mode can be changed in this mode. Selects exterior lamp battery saver control mode between ON/OFF. ON × BATTERY SAVER SET OFF — DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Touch "HEAD LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. All signals Monitors all the signals. Selection from menu Selects and monitors individual signal. Touch "START". When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch individual items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the items will be monitored. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop recording, touch "STOP". Display Item List Monitor item Contents IGN ON SW "ON/OFF" Displays "IGN position (ON)/OFF, ACC position (OFF)" judged from the ignition switch signal. ACC ON SW "ON/OFF" Displays "ACC (ON)/OFF, Ignition OFF (OFF)" status judged from ignition switch signal. HI BEAM SW "ON/OFF" Displays status (high beam switch: ON/Others: OFF) of high beam switch judged from lighting switch signal. HEAD LAMP SW 1 "ON/OFF" Displays status (headlamp switch 1: ON/Others: OFF) of headlamp switch 2 judged from lighting switch signal. HEAD LAMP SW 2 "ON/OFF" Displays status (headlamp switch 2: ON/Others: OFF) of headlamp switch 2 judged from lighting switch signal. LIGHT SW 1ST "ON/OFF" Displays status (lighting switch 1st position: ON/Others: OFF) of lighting switch judged from lighting switch signal. Revision: October 2004 LT-18 2005 Titan HEADLAMP (FOR USA) Monitor item Contents AUTO LIGHT SW "ON/OFF" Displays status of the lighting switch as judged from the lighting switch signal. (AUTO position: ON/Other than AUTO position: OFF) PASSING SW "ON/OFF" Displays status (flash-to-pass switch: ON/Others: OFF) of flash-to-pass switch judged from lighting switch signal. FR FOG SW "ON/OFF" Displays status (front fog lamp switch: ON/Others: OFF) of front fog lamp switch judged from lighting switch signal. DOOR SW-DR "ON/OFF" Displays status of the driver door as judged from the driver door switch signal. (Door is open: ON/Door is closed: OFF) DOOR SW-AS "ON/OFF" Displays status of the passenger door as judged from the passenger door switch signal. (Door is open: ON/Door is closed: OFF) DOOR SW-RR "ON/OFF" Displays status of the rear door as judged from the rear door switch (RH) signal. (Door is open: ON/Door is closed: OFF) DOOR SW-RL "ON/OFF" Displays status of the rear door as judged from the rear door switch (LH) signal. (Door is open: ON/Door is closed: OFF) BACK DOOR SW "ON/OFF" Not used. TURN SIGNAL R "ON/OFF" Displays status (Turn right: ON/Others: OFF) as judged from lighting switch signal. TURN SIGNAL L "ON/OFF" Displays status (Turn left: ON/Others: OFF) as judged from lighting switch signal. CARGO LAMP SW "ON/OFF" Displays status of cargo lamp switch. OPTICAL SENSOR [0 - 5V] B C D E F G Displays "ambient light (close to 5V when dark/close to 0V when light)" judged from optical sensor signal. H ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. A Touch "HEAD LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch item to be tested and check operation of the selected item. During the operation check, touching "BACK" deactivates the operation. I J Display Item List Test item TAIL LAMP HEAD LAMP Description Allows headlamp relay (HI, LO) to operate by switching ON-OFF. FR FOG LAMP Allows fog lamp relay to operate by switching ON-OFF. CARGO LAMP Allows cargo lamp to operate by switching ON-OFF. CORNERING LAMP LT Allows tail lamp relay to operate by switching ON-OFF. L Not used. M SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Self-diagnostic results are displayed. Display Item List Monitored item CAN communication CAN communication system Revision: October 2004 CONSULT-II display Description CAN communication [U1000] Malfunction is detected in CAN communication. CAN communication system 1 to 6 [U1000] Malfunction is detected in CAN system. LT-19 2005 Titan HEADLAMP (FOR USA) CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R) EKS00A95 CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. IPDM E/R diagnostic mode SELF-DIAG RESULTS DATA MONITOR Description Displays IPDM E/R self-diagnosis results. Displays IPDM E/R input/output data in real time. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. ACTIVE TEST Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. CONSULT-II OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn the ignition switch ON. BBIA0369E 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". BCIA0029E 3. Touch "IPDM E/R" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "IPDM E/R" is not displayed, refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . BCIA0030E Revision: October 2004 LT-20 2005 Titan HEADLAMP (FOR USA) 4. Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. A B C BCIA0031E D DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch "ALL SIGNALS", "MAIN SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. ALL SIGNALS All items will be monitored. MAIN SIGNALS Monitor the predetermined item. SELECTION FROM MENU Select any item for monitoring. E F G Touch "START". Touch the required monitoring item on "SELECT ITEM MENU". In "ALL SIGNALS", all items are monitored. In "MAIN SIGNALS", predetermined items are monitored. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop recording, touch "STOP". H I All Items, Main Items, Select Item Menu Monitor item selection CONSULT-II screen display Display or unit TAIL&CLR REQ Headlamp low beam request Item name ALL SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU Description ON/OFF × × × Signal status input from BCM HL LO REQ ON/OFF × × × Signal status input from BCM Headlamp high beam request HL HI REQ ON/OFF × × × Signal status input from BCM Daytime lights request DTRL REQ ON/OFF × – × Signal status input from BCM FR FOG REQ ON/OFF × × × Signal status input from BCM Parking, license plate and tail lamps request Front fog lamps request LT NOTE: Perform monitoring of IPDM E/R data with the ignition switch ON. When the ignition switch is at ACC, the display may not be correct. ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch "EXTERNAL LAMPS" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch item to be tested, and check operation. Touch "START". Touch "STOP" while testing to stop the operation. Revision: October 2004 J LT-21 2005 Titan L M HEADLAMP (FOR USA) Test item CONSULT-II screen display Tail lamp relay output TAIL LAMP Headlamp relay (HI, LO) output LAMPS Front fog lamp relay (FOG) output Cornering lamp relay (RH, LH) output Description Allows tail lamp relay to operate by switching operation ON-OFF at your option. Allows headlamp relay (HI, LO) to operate by switching operation (OFF, HI, LO) at your option (Head lamp high beam repeats ON-OFF every 1 second). Allows fog lamp relay (FOG) to operate by switching operation ONOFF at your option. CORNERING LAMP Allows cornering lamp relay (RH, LH) to operate by switching operation ON-OFF at your option. Headlamp HI Does Not Illuminate (Both Sides) EKS00A96 1. CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "HEAD LAMP" data monitor, make sure "HI BEAM SW" turns ON-OFF linked with operation of lighting switch. When lighting switch is in HIGH position : HI BEAM SW ON OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check lighting switch. Refer to LT-95, "Combination Switch Inspection" . SKIA4193E 2. HEADLAMP ACTIVE TEST 1. 2. 3. 4. Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-II, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Select "EXTERNAL LAMPS" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "HI" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen. Make sure headlamp high beam operates. Headlamp high beam should operate. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 4. WKIA1438E 3. CHECK IPDM E/R 1. 2. Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-II, and select "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Make sure "HL LO REQ" and "HL HI REQ" turns ON when lighting switch is in HIGH position. When lighting switch is in HIGH position : HL LO REQ ON : HL HI REQ ON OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . Revision: October 2004 LT-22 SKIA5775E 2005 Titan HEADLAMP (FOR USA) 4. CHECK HEADLAMP INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front combination lamp RH and LH connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-II, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Select "EXTERNAL LAMPS" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "HI" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen. When headlamp high beam is operating, check voltage between front combination lamp RH and LH harness connector and ground. B C D WKIA1439E E Terminals (+) Connector (–) Terminal (Wire color) RH E107 2 (L/W) LH E11 2 (G) Voltage F Ground Battery voltage G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. H 5. CHECK HEADLAMP CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 56 (L/W) - 2 (L/W) 4. I Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E123 terminal 56 (L/W) and front combination lamp RH harness connector E107 terminal 2 (L/W). J : Continuity should exist. LT Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E123 terminal 55 (G) and front combination lamp LH harness connector E11 terminal 2 (G). WKIA1440E 55 (G) - 2 (G) OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . NG >> Repair harness or connector. M 6. CHECK HEADLAMP GROUND 1. Check continuity between front combination lamp RH harness connector E107 terminal 3 (B) and ground. 3 (B) - Ground 2. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between front combination lamp LH harness connector E11 terminal 3 (B) and ground. 3 (B) - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Check front combination lamp connector for damage or poor connection. Repair as necessary. NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: October 2004 L : Continuity should exist. LT-23 WKIA1441E 2005 Titan HEADLAMP (FOR USA) Headlamp HI Does Not Illuminate (One Side) EKS00A97 1. BULB INSPECTION Inspect inoperative headlamp bulb. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace headlamp bulb. Refer to LT-30, "HEADLAMP (INNER SIDE), FOR HIGH BEAM" . 2. CHECK POWER TO HEADLAMP 1. 2. 3. Disconnect inoperative headlamp connector. Turn the high beam headlamps ON. Check voltage between inoperative headlamp terminal and ground. Terminals (+) Connector (–) Voltage (Approx.) Ground Battery voltage Terminal (Wire color) RH E107 2 (L/W) LH E11 2 (G) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 4. WKIA3610E 3. CHECK HEADLAMP GROUND 1. 2. Turn the high beam headlamps OFF. Check continuity between inoperative headlamp connector and ground. Terminals Connector Continuity Terminal (Wire color) RH E107 3 (B) LH E11 3 (B) Ground Yes OK or NG OK >> Check headlamp connector for damage or poor connection. Repair as necessary. NG >> Repair open circuit in harness between inoperative headlamp and ground. Revision: October 2004 LT-24 WKIA1441E 2005 Titan HEADLAMP (FOR USA) 4. INSPECTION BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND HEADLAMPS 1. 2. A Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and inoperative headlamp connector. Check continuity between harness connector terminals of IPDM E/R and harness connector terminals of inoperative headlamp. B Terminals IPDM E/R Connector Terminal (wire color) 56 (L/W) E123 55 (G) Headlamp Connector RH LH E107 E11 C Continuity Terminal (wire color) 2 (L/W) D Yes 2 (G) WKIA1440E OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . NG >> Check for short and open circuits in harness between IPDM E/R and headlamps. Repair as necessary. High Beam Indicator Lamp Does Not Illuminate G Inspect CAN communication system. Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" . NG >> Repair as necessary. Headlamp LO Does Not Illuminate (Both Sides) H EKS00A99 1. CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "HEAD LAMP" data monitor, make sure "HEAD LAMP SW 1" and "HEAD LAMP SW 2" turns ONOFF linked with operation of lighting switch. : HEAD LAMP SW 1 ON : HEAD LAMP SW 2 ON LT L SKIA4194E 2. HEADLAMP ACTIVE TEST 2. 3. 4. Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-II, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Select "EXTERNAL LAMPS" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "LO" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen. Make sure headlamp low beam operates. Headlamp low beam should operate. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 4. Revision: October 2004 WKIA1438E LT-25 I J OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check lighting switch. Refer to LT-95, "Combination Switch Inspection" . 1. F EKS00A98 1. BULB INSPECTION When lighting switch is in 2ND position E 2005 Titan M HEADLAMP (FOR USA) 3. CHECK IPDM E/R 1. 2. Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-II, and select "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Make sure "HL LO REQ" turns ON when lighting switch is in 2ND position. When lighting switch is in 2ND position : HL LO REQ ON OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . SKIA5780E 4. CHECK HEADLAMP INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front combination lamp RH and LH connectors. Turn ignition switch ON. Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-II, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Select "EXTERNAL LAMPS" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "LO" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen. When headlamp low beam is operating, check voltage between front combination lamp RH and LH harness connector and ground. Terminals (+) Connector Voltage (–) Terminal (Wire color) RH E107 1 (R/Y) LH E11 1 (L) Ground Battery voltage WKIA1442E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. 5. CHECK HEADLAMP CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E123 terminal 54 (R/Y) and front combination lamp RH harness connector E107 terminal 1 (R/Y). 54 (R/Y) - 1 (R/Y) 4. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E123 terminal 52 (L) and front combination lamp LH harness connector E11 terminal 1 (L). WKIA1443E 52 (L) - 1 (L) : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: October 2004 LT-26 2005 Titan HEADLAMP (FOR USA) 6. CHECK HEADLAMP GROUND 1. 2. 4 (B) - Ground 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between front combination lamp RH harness connector E107 terminal 4 (B) and ground. B : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between front combination lamp LH harness connector E11 terminal 4 (B) and ground. 4 (B) - Ground C : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Check front combination lamp connector for damage or poor connection. Repair as necessary. NG >> Repair harness or connector. D WKIA1444E E Headlamp LO Does Not Illuminate (One Side) EKS00A9A 1. BULB INSPECTION F Inspect inoperative headlamp bulb. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace headlamp bulb. Refer to LT-30, "HEADLAMP (OUTER SIDE), FOR LOW BEAM" . G 2. CHECK POWER TO HEADLAMP H 1. 2. 3. I Disconnect inoperative headlamp connector. Turn the low beam headlamps ON. Check voltage between inoperative headlamp connector terminal and ground. J Terminals (–) Voltage (Approx.) Ground Battery voltage (+) Connector LT Terminal RH E107 1 (R/Y) LH E11 1 (L) L OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 4. WKIA3611E M 3. CHECK HEADLAMP GROUND 1. 2. Turn the low beam headlamps OFF. Check continuity between inoperative headlamp connector terminal and ground. Terminals Connector Continuity Terminal (Wire color) RH E107 4 (B) LH E11 4 (B) Ground Yes OK or NG OK >> Check headlamp and IPDM E/R connector. Repair as necessary. NG >> Repair open circuit in harness between inoperative headlamp and ground. Revision: October 2004 LT-27 WKIA1444E 2005 Titan HEADLAMP (FOR USA) 4. INSPECTION BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND HEADLAMPS 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between harness connector terminals of IPDM E/R and harness connector terminals of inoperative headlamp. Terminals IPDM E/R Connector E123 Terminal (Wire color) Front combination lamp Connector Continuity Terminal (Wire color) 54 (R/Y) RH E107 1 (R/Y) 52 (L) LH E11 1 (L) Yes WKIA1443E OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . NG >> Check for short circuits and open circuits in harness between IPDM E/R and headlamps. Repair as necessary. Headlamps Do Not Turn OFF EKS00A9B 1. CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "HEAD LAMP" data monitor, make sure "HEAD LAMP SW 1" and "HEAD LAMP SW 2" turns ONOFF linked with operation of lighting switch. When lighting switch is in OFF position : HEAD LAMP SW 1 OFF : HEAD LAMP SW 2 OFF OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . NG >> GO TO 2. SKIA5200E 2. CHECK LIGHTING SWITCH Check lighting switch. Refer to LT-95, "Combination Switch Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace switch. Refer to LT-97, "Removal and Installation" . 3. CHECKING CAN COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN BCM AND IPDM E/R Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II and perform self-diagnosis for BCM. Display of self-diagnosis results NO DTC>>Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . CAN COMM CIRCUIT>> Refer to BCS-13, "CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)" . SKIA1039E Revision: October 2004 LT-28 2005 Titan HEADLAMP (FOR USA) Aiming Adjustment EKS00A9C A B C D E F WKIA1398E G For details, refer to the regulations in your state. Before performing aiming adjustment, check the following. 1. Ensure all tires are inflated to correct pressure. 2. Place vehicle and screen on level surface. 3. Ensure there is no load in vehicle other than the driver (or equivalent weight placed in driver's position). Coolant and engine oil filled to correct level, and fuel tank full. 4. Confirm spare tire, jack and tools are properly stowed. LOW BEAM AND HIGH BEAM H I J NOTE: Aim each headlamp individually and ensure other headlamp beam pattern is blocked from screen. 1. Turn headlamp low beam on. 2. Use adjusting screw to perform aiming adjustment. LT L M Revision: October 2004 LT-29 2005 Titan HEADLAMP (FOR USA) WKIA3613E If the vehicle front body has been repaired and/or the headlamp assembly has been replaced, check aiming. Use the aiming chart shown in the figure. ● Basic illuminating area for adjustment should be within the range shown on the aiming chart. Adjust headlamps accordingly. Bulb Replacement EKS00A9D HEADLAMP (OUTER SIDE), FOR LOW BEAM NOTE: Reach through wheel opening for access. 1. Turn headlamp switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove it. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. HEADLAMP (INNER SIDE), FOR HIGH BEAM 1. Turn headlamp switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove it. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. FRONT TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LAMP NOTE: Reach through wheel opening for access. 1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock it. 2. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. FRONT SIDE MARKER LAMP NOTE: Reach through wheel opening for access. Revision: October 2004 LT-30 2005 Titan HEADLAMP (FOR USA) 1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock it. 2. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: After installing the bulb, be sure to install the bulb socket securely to ensure watertightness. Removal and Installation A B EKS00A9E REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. C Remove the grille. Refer to EI-20, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the front bumper filler panel. Disconnect the connector. Remove the 4 headlamp mounting bolts. D E F WKIA1399E G INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. : 6.0 N·m (0.61 kg-m, 53 in-lb) H Disassembly and Assembly EKS00A9F I J LT L M WKIA1400E 1. Headlamp bulb (High beam) 2. Wiring harness assembly 3. Headlamp assembly 4. Side marker lamp bulb 5. Parking/turn signal lamp bulb 6. Headlamp bulb (Low beam) Revision: October 2004 LT-31 2005 Titan HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:26010 EKS00A9G WKIA3580E Revision: October 2004 LT-32 2005 Titan HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM System Description EKS00A9H Daytime light system turns on daytime light lamps while driving. Daytime light lamps are not turned on if engine is activated with parking brake on. Take off parking brake to turn on daytime light lamps. The lamps turn off when lighting switch is in the 2ND position or AUTO position (Headlamp is "ON") and when lighting switch is in the PASSING position. (Daytime light lamps are not turned off only by parking brake itself.) A parking brake signal and engine run or stop signal are sent to BCM (body control module) by CAN communication line. A B C OUTLINE Power is supplied at all times ● to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room), and ● through 10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to combination meter terminal 8, and ● through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to BCM terminal 70, and ● through 20A fuse (No. 53, located inthe IPDM E/R) ● to CPU of the IPDM E/R, and ● through 10A fuse (No. 45, located in the IPDM E/R) ● to daytime light relay terminals 2 and 5. When the ignition switch is in ON or START position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to combination meter terminal 24, and ● through 10A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box) ● to BCM terminal 38. Ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 67 and ● to combination meter terminal 17 ● through grounds M57, M61 and M79. D E F G H I J DAYTIME LIGHT OPERATION With the engine running, the lighting switch in the OFF or 1ST position and parking brake released, the IPDM LT E/R receives input requesting the daytime lights illuminate. This input is communicated across the CAN communication lines. The CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R controls the daytime light relay coil. When energized, this relay directs power L ● through daytime light relay terminal 3 ● through front combination lamp LH terminal 3 ● through front combination lamp LH terminal 2 M ● through IPDM E/R terminal 55 ● through 10A fuse (No. 35, located in the IPDM E/R) ● through 10A fuse (No. 34, located in the IPDM E/R) ● through IPDM E/R terminal 56 ● to front combination lamp RH terminal 2. Ground is supplied ● to front combination lamp RH terminal 3 ● through grounds E9, E15 and E24. With power and ground supplied, the daytime lights illuminate. The high beam headlamps are now wired in series and illuminate at a reduced intensity. COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION Refer to BCS-3, "COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION" . AUTO LIGHT OPERATION For auto light operation, refer to LT-47, "System Description" in AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM. Revision: October 2004 LT-33 2005 Titan HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM CAN Communication System Description EKS00A9I Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Revision: October 2004 LT-34 2005 Titan HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM Schematic EKS00A9J A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA2397E Revision: October 2004 LT-35 2005 Titan HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM Wiring Diagram — DTRL — EKS00A9K WKWA2398E Revision: October 2004 LT-36 2005 Titan HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM - A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA2442E Revision: October 2004 LT-37 2005 Titan HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM - WKWA2400E Revision: October 2004 LT-38 2005 Titan HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM - A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA2401E Revision: October 2004 LT-39 2005 Titan HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM Terminals and Reference Values for BCM EKS00A9L Measuring condition Terminal No. Wire color 2 SB Signal name Combination switch input 5 Ignition switch ON Operation or condition Reference value (Approx.) Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E 3 G/Y Combination switch input 4 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E 4 Y Combination switch input 3 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E 5 G/B Combination switch input 2 6 V Combination switch input 1 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E 32 R/G Combination switch output 5 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E 33 R/Y Combination switch output 4 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E 34 L Combination switch output 3 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E Revision: October 2004 LT-40 2005 Titan HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM Measuring condition Terminal No. Wire color 35 O/B Combination switch output 2 36 R/W Combination switch output 1 Signal name Ignition switch Operation or condition Reference value (Approx.) A B ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 C SKIA5292E 38 W/L Ignition switch (ON) ON — Battery voltage 39 L CAN-H — — — 40 P CAN-L — — — 67 B Ground ON — 0V 70 W/B Battery power supply (fusible link) OFF — Battery voltage E How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. D EKS00A9M Confirm the symptom or customer complaint. Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-33, "System Description" . Perform the Preliminary Check. Refer to LT-41, "Preliminary Check" . Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. Does the headlamp operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4. Inspection End. Preliminary Check F G H EKS00A9N CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION I 1. CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION J Confirm BCM configuration for "DTRL" is set to "WITH". Refer to BCS-13, "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG LT OK >> Continue preliminary check. Refer to LT-41, "INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" . NG >> Change BCM configuration for "DTRL" to "WITH". Refer to BCS-16, "WRITE CONFIGURATION L PROCEDURE" . INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT 1. CHECK FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK M Check for blown fuses or fusible link. Unit BCM Daytime light relay Power source Fuse No. Battery f Ignition switch ON or START position 59 Battery 45 Refer to LT-36, "Wiring Diagram — DTRL —" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . Revision: October 2004 LT-41 2005 Titan HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM - 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connectors. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. Terminals Ignition switch position (+) Connector Terminal (Wire color) M18 38 (W/L) (–) OFF ACC ON 0V 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage Ground M20 70 (W/B) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness for open or short between BCM and fuse. WKIA1436E 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. Terminals Connector Terminal (Wire color) M20 67 (B) Continuity Ground Yes OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Check ground circuit harness. LIIA0915E INSPECTION PARKING BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. CHECK BRAKE INDICATOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Apply parking brake. Release parking brake. Brake indicator in combination meter should illuminate when parking brake is applied and turn OFF when released. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 LT-42 2005 Titan HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM - 2. CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. A Disconnect parking brake switch connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between parking brake switch harness connector M11 terminal + (G) and ground. + (G) - Ground B : Battery voltage should exist. C OK or NG OK >> Replace parking brake switch. NG >> GO TO 3. D WKIA1673E 3. CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. E Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect combination meter connector. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 23 (G) and parking brake switch harness connector M11 terminal + (G). + (G) - 23 (G) F G : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" . NG >> Repair harness or connector. H WKIA1445E I CONSULT-II Functions EKS00A9O Refer to LT-17, "CONSULT-II Function (BCM)" in HEADLAMP (FOR USA). Refer to LT-20, "CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R)" in HEADLAMP (FOR USA). J Daytime Light Control Does Not Operate Properly (Normal Headlamps Operate Properly) EKS00A9P 1. CHECK DAYTIME LIGHT RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Remove daytime light relay. Check voltage between daytime light relay harness connector E103 terminals 2 (G), 5 (G) and ground. 2 (G), 5 (G) - Ground L : Battery voltage should exist. M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA1446E Revision: October 2004 LT-43 LT 2005 Titan HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM - 2. CHECK DAYTIME LIGHT RELAY 1. 2. Apply battery voltage to daytime light relay terminal 2 and ground terminal 1. Check continuity between terminals 3 and 5. 3-5 : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace daytime light relay. WKIA1447E 3. CHECK DAYTIME LIGHT RELAY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect front combination lamp LH connector. Check continuity between daytime light relay connector E103 terminal 3 (Y/G) and front combination lamp LH harness connector E11 terminal 3 (Y/G). 3 (Y/G) - 3 (Y/G) : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA1448E 4. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Connect daytime light relay and front combination lamp LH connector. Start engine and release parking brake. Headlamp switch OFF. Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-II. With data monitor, make sure "DTRL REQ" turns ON-OFF linked with operation of parking brake switch. Parking brake ON Parking brake OFF : DTRL REQ ON : DTRL REQ OFF OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . NG >> GO TO 5. WKIA1449E 5. CHECKING CAN COMMUNICATIONS Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II and perform self-diagnosis for BCM. Displayed self-diagnosis results NO DTC>>Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . CAN COMM CIRCUIT>> Check BCM CAN communication system. Refer to BCS-13, "CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)" . SKIA1039E Revision: October 2004 LT-44 2005 Titan HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM Aiming Adjustment EKS00A9Q A Refer to LT-29, "Aiming Adjustment" . Bulb Replacement EKS00A9R B Refer to LT-31, "Disassembly and Assembly" . Removal and Installation EKS00A9S C Refer to LT-31, "Removal and Installation" . Disassembly and Assembly EKS00A9T Refer to LT-31, "Disassembly and Assembly" . D E F G H I J LT L M Revision: October 2004 LT-45 2005 Titan AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:28491 EKS00A9U WKIA3581E Revision: October 2004 LT-46 2005 Titan AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM System Description EKS00A9V A Automatically turns on/off the parking lamps and the headlamps in accordance with ambient light. Timing for when the lamps turn on/off can be selected using four modes. OUTLINE B The auto light control system uses an optical sensor that detects outside brightness. When the lighting switch is in “AUTO” position, it automatically turns on/off the parking lamps and the headlamps in accordance with the ambient light. Sensitivity can be adjusted in four steps. For the details of the setting, refer to LT-54, "SETTING CHANGE FUNCTIONS" . Optical sensor ground is supplied ● to optical sensor terminal 3 ● through BCM (body control module) terminal 18. When ignition switch is turned to “ON” position and when outside brightness is darker than prescribed level, input is supplied ● to BCM terminal 58 ● through optical sensor terminal 4. The headlamps will then illuminate. For a description of headlamp operation, refer to LT-5, "System Description" . C D E F COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION G Refer to BCS-3, "COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION" . EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL When the combination switch (lighting switch) is in the AUTO position, and the ignition switch is turned from ON or ACC to OFF, and one of the front doors is opened, the battery saver control feature is activated. Under this condition, the headlamps remain illuminated for 5 minutes, then the headlamps are turned off. Exterior lamp battery saver control mode can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT-II. H I DELAY TIMER FUNCTION When the ignition switch is ON and auto light switch is ON, the BCM turns on/off the headlamps. In delay timer function, ignition is OFF, auto light sensor power source is OFF and the headlamps are not turned on/off by the J BCM. On condition that: ● when the state of ignition switch ON or ACC is ON and output judgment by auto light function is headlamp ON changes to ignition switch and ACC are OFF and any door switch is ON, output judgment by BCM should be headlamp ON for 5 minutes by timer. After time out, output judgment by BCM should be head- LT lamp OFF. ● when the state of any door switch is turned to ON from OFF while 45 second or 5 minute timer is counting, timer stops, and restarts counting for 5 minutes, then BCM judges output as headlamp ON. After time out, L BCM judges output as headlamp OFF. ● when the state of front door switch (driver side), front door switch (passenger side), rear door switch LH, rear door switch RH or back door latch (door ajar switch) is ON turns to all door switches are OFF while 45 M second or 5 minute timer is counting, timer stops, and restarts counting for 45 seconds, then BCM judges output as headlamp ON. After timer out, BCM judges output as headlamp OFF. ● when the state is ignition switch ON or ACC is ON or auto light switch OFF while timer is counting, timer stops counting and BCM turns on/off lamps according to headlamp function, front fog lamp function, auto light function and headlamp battery save function. Delay timer control mode can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT-II. CAN Communication System Description EKS00A9W Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Major Components and Functions EKS00A9X Components Functions ● Turns on/off circuits of tail light and headlamp according to signals from light sensor, lighting switch (AUTO), driver door switch, passenger door switch, rear door switch, and ignition switch (ON, OFF). ● Converts ambient light (lux) to voltage, and sends it to BCM. (Detects lightness of 50 to 1,300 lux) BCM Optical sensor Revision: October 2004 LT-47 2005 Titan AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM Schematic EKS00A9Y WKWA2443E Revision: October 2004 LT-48 2005 Titan AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM Wiring Diagram — AUTO/L — EKS00A9Z A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA2444E Revision: October 2004 LT-49 2005 Titan AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM LKWA0282E Revision: October 2004 LT-50 2005 Titan AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA2445E Revision: October 2004 LT-51 2005 Titan AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM Terminals and Reference Values for BCM EKS00AA0 Measuring condition Terminal No. Wire color 2 SB Signal name Combination switch input 5 Ignition switch ON Operation or condition Reference value (Approx.) Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E 3 G/Y Combination switch input 4 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E 4 Y Combination switch input 3 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E 5 G/B Combination switch input 2 6 V Combination switch input 1 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E 121 R/L Front door switch RH signal OFF Front door switch RH 122 R/L Door switch RH signal OFF Door switch RH 131 GR Rear door switch RH signal OFF Rear door switch RH 18 P Sensor ground ON 32 R/G Combination switch output 5 ON ON (open) 0V OFF (closed) Battery voltage ON (open) 0V OFF (closed) Battery voltage ON (open) 0V OFF (closed) Battery voltage — 0V Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E 33 R/Y Combination switch output 4 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E Revision: October 2004 LT-52 2005 Titan AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM Terminal No. Measuring condition Wire color Signal name Ignition switch Reference value (Approx.) Operation or condition A B 34 L Combination switch output 3 Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 ON C SKIA5291E 35 36 O/B D Combination switch output 2 R/W Combination switch output 1 Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 ON E SKIA5292E 38 W/L Ignition switch (ON) ON — Battery voltage 39 L CAN-H — — — 40 P CAN-L — — — 471 SB 2 Front door switch LH signal 47 SB 481 R/Y 58 Door switch LH signal Rear door switch LH signal W/R 67 B 70 W/B Optical sensor signal OFF OFF OFF ON Front door switch LH Door switch LH Rear door switch LH F G ON (open) 0V OFF (closed) Battery voltage ON (open) 0V OFF (closed) Battery voltage ON (open) 0V OFF (closed) Battery voltage H I When optical sensor is illuminated 3.1V or moreNote When optical sensor is not illuminated 0.6V or less Ground ON — 0V Battery power supply OFF — Battery voltage J LT 1 Crew cab 2 King cab L NOTE: Optical sensor must be completely subjected to work lamp light. If the optical sensor is insufficiently illuminated, the measured value may not satisfy standard. M Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R EKS00AA1 Measuring condition Terminal No. Wire color Ignition switch Operation or condition Reference value (Approx.) 38 B Ground ON — 0V 39 L CAN-H — — — 40 P CAN-L — — — 52 L Headlamp low (LH) ON 54 R/Y Revision: October 2004 Signal name Headlamp low (RH) ON Lighting switch 2ND position OFF 0V ON Battery voltage Lighting switch 2ND position OFF 0V ON Battery voltage LT-53 2005 Titan AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM Measuring condition Terminal No. Wire color 55 G 56 L/W1 Y 2 57 R/L 59 B Signal name Ignition switch Headlamp high (LH) ON Headlamp high (RH) ON Parking, license, and tail lamp ON Ground ON Operation or condition Reference value (Approx.) Lighting switch HIGH or PASS position OFF 0V ON Battery voltage Lighting switch HIGH or PASS position OFF 0V ON Battery voltage Lighting switch 1ST position OFF 0V ON Battery voltage — 0V 1 USA 2 Canada How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. EKS00AA2 Confirm the symptom or customer complaint. Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-47, "System Description" . Carry out the Preliminary Check. Refer to LT-54, "Preliminary Check" . Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. Refer to LT-61, "Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom" . Does the auto light system operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4. Inspection End. Preliminary Check EKS00AA3 SETTING CHANGE FUNCTIONS ● Sensitivity of auto light system can be adjusted using CONSULT-II. Refer to LT-57, "WORK SUPPORT" . CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION 1. CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION Confirm BCM configuration for "AUTO LIGHT" is set to "WITH". Refer to BCS-13, "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> Continue preliminary check. Refer to LT-54, "CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" . NG >> Change BCM configuration for "AUTO LIGHT" to "WITH". Refer to BCS-16, "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" . CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT 1. CHECK FUSES OR FUSIBLE LINK Check for blown fuses or fusible link. Unit BCM Power source Fuse No. Battery f Ignition switch ON or START position 59 34 35 IPDM E/R Battery 40 41 53 Revision: October 2004 LT-54 2005 Titan AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM Refer to LT-49, "Wiring Diagram — AUTO/L —" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . A B 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. C Disconnect BCM connectors. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. Terminals D Ignition switch position (+) Connector Terminal (Wire color) M18 38 (W/L) M20 70 (W/B) (–) Ground OFF ACC ON 0V 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage E F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness for open between BCM and fuse. G H I WKIA1436E J 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. LT Terminals Connector Terminal (Wire color) M20 67 (B) Continuity L Ground Yes OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Check ground circuit harness. M LIIA0915E Revision: October 2004 LT-55 2005 Titan AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM CONSULT-II Function (BCM) EKS00AA4 CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode WORK SUPPORT DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part SELF-DIAG RESULTS CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER CONFIGURATION Description Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received data is displayed. Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. BCM part number can be read. Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. CONSULT-II OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0369E 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". BCIA0029E 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . BCIA0030E Revision: October 2004 LT-56 2005 Titan AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM 4. Touch "HEAD LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. A B C LKIA0169E D WORK SUPPORT Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Touch "HEAD LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch "CUSTOM A/LIGHT SETTING" or "ILL DELAY SET" on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen. Touch "START". Touch "MODE 1-4" of setting to be changed (CUSTOM A/LIGHT SETTING). Touch "MODE1-8" of setting to be changed (ILL DELAY SET). Touch "CHANGE SETT ". The setting will be changed and "CUSTOMIZING COMPLETED" will be displayed. Touch "END". E F G H Work Support Setting Item Sensitivity of auto light can be selected and set from four modes. ● I Work item Description CUSTOM A/LIGHT SETTING Auto light sensitivity can be changed in this mode. Sensitivity can be adjusted in four modes. ● MODE 1 (Normal-default)/ MODE 2 (Desensitized)/MODE 3 (Sensitive)/MODE4 (Insensitive) ILL DELAY SET ● MODE 1 (45 sec.)/MODE 2 (OFF)/MODE 3 (30 sec.)/MODE 4 (60 sec.)/MODE 5 (90 sec.)/MODE 6 (120 sec.)/MODE 7 (150 sec.)/MODE 8 (180 sec.) DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. J Auto light delay off timer period can be changed in this mode. Selects auto light delay off timer period among eight modes. L Touch "HEAD LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. All signals Monitors all the signals. Selection from menu Selects and monitors individual signal. Touch "START". When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch individual items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the items will be monitored. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop recording, touch "STOP". Display Item List Monitor item Contents IGN ON SW "ON/OFF" Displays "IGN position (ON)/OFF, ACC position (OFF)" judged from the ignition switch signal. ACC ON SW "ON/OFF" Displays "ACC (ON)/OFF, Ignition OFF (OFF)" status judged from ignition switch signal. HI BEAM SW "ON/OFF" Displays status (high beam switch: ON/Others: OFF) of high beam switch judged from lighting switch signal. Revision: October 2004 LT LT-57 2005 Titan M AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM Monitor item Contents HEAD LAMP SW 1 "ON/OFF" Displays status (headlamp switch 1: ON/Others: OFF) of headlamp switch 2 judged from lighting switch signal. HEAD LAMP SW 2 "ON/OFF" Displays status (headlamp switch 2: ON/Others: OFF) of headlamp switch 2 judged from lighting switch signal. LIGHT SW 1ST "ON/OFF" Displays status (lighting switch 1st position: ON/Others: OFF) of lighting switch judged from lighting switch signal. AUTO LIGHT SW "ON/OFF" Displays status of the lighting switch as judged from the lighting switch signal. (AUTO position: ON/Other than AUTO position: OFF) PASSING SW "ON/OFF" Displays status (flash-to-pass switch: ON/Others: OFF) of flash-to-pass switch judged from lighting switch signal. FR FOG SW "ON/OFF" Displays status (front fog lamp switch: ON/Others: OFF) of front fog lamp switch judged from lighting switch signal. DOOR SW-DR "ON/OFF" Displays status of the driver door as judged from the driver door switch signal. (Door is open: ON/Door is closed: OFF) DOOR SW-AS "ON/OFF" Displays status of the passenger door as judged from the passenger door switch signal. (Door is open: ON/Door is closed: OFF) DOOR SW-RR "ON/OFF" Displays status of the rear door as judged from the rear door switch (RH) signal. (Door is open: ON/Door is closed: OFF) DOOR SW-RL "ON/OFF" Displays status of the rear door as judged from the rear door switch (LH) signal. (Door is open: ON/Door is closed: OFF) BACK DOOR SW "ON/OFF" Not used. TURN SIGNAL R "ON/OFF" Displays status (Turn right: ON/Others: OFF) as judged from lighting switch signal. TURN SIGNAL L "ON/OFF" Displays status (Turn left: ON/Others: OFF) as judged from lighting switch signal. CARGO LAMP SW "ON/OFF" Displays status of cargo lamp. OPTICAL SENSOR [0 - 5V] Displays "ambient light (close to 5V when dark/close to 0V when light)" judged from optical sensor signal. ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Touch "HEAD LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch item to be tested and check operation of the selected item. During the operation check, touching "BACK" deactivates the operation. Display Item List Test item TAIL LAMP HEAD LAMP Description Allows tail lamp relay to operate by switching ON-OFF. Allows headlamp relay (HI, LO) to operate by switching ON-OFF. FR FOG LAMP Allows fog lamp relay to operate by switching ON-OFF. CARGO LAMP Allows cargo lamp to operate by switching ON-OFF. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Self-diagnostic results are displayed. Display Item List Monitored item CONSULT-II display Description CAN communication CAN communication [U1000] Malfunction is detected in CAN communication. CAN communication system CAN communication system 1 to 6 [U1000] Malfunction is detected in CAN system. Revision: October 2004 LT-58 2005 Titan AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R) EKS00AA5 A CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. IPDM E/R diagnostic mode SELF-DIAG RESULTS DATA MONITOR Description Displays IPDM E/R self-diagnosis results. B Displays IPDM E/R input/output data in real time. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. ACTIVE TEST Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. C CONSULT-II OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn the ignition switch ON. D E F G BBIA0369E 2. H Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". I J LT BCIA0029E L 3. Touch "IPDM E/R" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "IPDM E/R" is not displayed, refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . M BCIA0030E Revision: October 2004 LT-59 2005 Titan AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM 4. Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. BCIA0031E DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch "ALL SIGNALS", "MAIN SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. ALL SIGNALS All items will be monitored. MAIN SIGNALS Monitor the predetermined item. SELECTION FROM MENU Select any item for monitoring. Touch "START". Touch the required monitoring item on "SELECT ITEM MENU". In "ALL SIGNALS", all items are monitored. In "MAIN SIGNALS", predetermined items are monitored. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop recording, touch "STOP". All Items, Main Items, Select Item Menu Monitor item selection CONSULT-II screen display Display or unit TAIL&CLR REQ Headlamp low beam request Headlamp high beam request Item name Parking, license plate and tail lamps request Front fog lamps request ALL SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU Description ON/OFF × × × Signal status input from BCM HL LO REQ ON/OFF × × × Signal status input from BCM HL HI REQ ON/OFF × × × Signal status input from BCM FR FOG REQ ON/OFF × × × Signal status input from BCM NOTE: Perform monitoring of IPDM E/R data with the ignition switch ON. When the ignition switch is at ACC, the display may not be correct. ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch item to be tested, and check operation. Touch "START". Touch "STOP" while testing to stop the operation. Test item Tail lamp relay output Revision: October 2004 CONSULT-II screen display TAIL LAMP Description Allows tail lamp relay to operate by switching operation ON-OFF at your option. LT-60 2005 Titan AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM Test item CONSULT-II screen display Headlamp relay (HI, LO) output Description Allows headlamp relay (HI, LO) to operate by switching operation (OFF, HI, LO) at your option (Headlamp high beam repeats ON-OFF every 1 second). LAMPS Allows fog lamp relay to operate by switching operation ON-OFF at your option. Front fog lamp relay output Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom EKS00AA6 Trouble phenomenon ● ● ● Parking lamps and headlamp will not go out when outside of the vehicle becomes light. (Lighting switch 1st position and 2nd position operate normally.) Headlamps go out when outside of the vehicle becomes light, but parking lamps stay on. Parking lamps illuminate when outside of the vehicle becomes dark, but headlamps stay off. (Lighting switch 1st position and 2nd position operate normally.) Auto light adjustment system will not operate. (Lighting switch AUTO, 1st position and 2nd position operate normally.) ● Refer to LT-57, "WORK SUPPORT" . ● Refer to LT-61, "Lighting Switch Inspection" . ● C Refer to LT-62, "Optical Sensor System Inspection" . Shut off delay feature will not operate. D E If above systems are normal, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . ● Refer to LT-57, "WORK SUPPORT" . ● Refer to LT-62, "Optical Sensor System Inspection" . F If above systems are normal, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . ● G Refer to LT-62, "Optical Sensor System Inspection" . If above system is normal, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . H ● CAN communication line to BCM inspection. Refer to BCS-13, "CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)" . I ● CAN communication line inspection between BCM and combination meter. Refer to BCS-13, "CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)" . ● Refer to BL-35, "Door Switch Check (King Cab)" . Auto light adjustment system will not operate. If above system is normal, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . Lighting Switch Inspection J LT EKS00AA7 1. CHECK LIGHTING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL L With CONSULT-II Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "HEAD LAMP" data monitor, make sure "AUTO LIGHT SW" turns ON-OFF linked with operation of lighting switch. M : AUTO LIGHT SW ON Without CONSULT-II Refer to LT-95, "Combination Switch Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Check lighting switch. Refer to LT-95, "Combination Switch Inspection" . Revision: October 2004 B Malfunction system and reference Parking lamps and headlamps will not illuminate when outside of the vehicle becomes dark. (Lighting switch 1st position and 2nd position operate normally.) When lighting switch is in AUTO position A LT-61 SKIA4196E 2005 Titan AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM Optical Sensor System Inspection EKS00AA8 1. CHECK OPTICAL SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "OPTICAL SENSOR" data monitor, check difference in the voltage when the optical sensor is illuminated and not illuminated. Illuminated OPTICAL SENSOR Not illuminated OPTICAL SENSOR : 3.1V or more : 0.6V or less NOTE: Optical sensor must be completely subjected to work lamp light. If the optical sensor is insufficiently illuminated, the measured value may not satisfy the standard. Without CONSULT-II GO TO 2. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> GO TO 2. WKIA0486E 2. CHECK OPTICAL SENSOR SIGNAL GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connectors and optical sensor connector. Check continuity (open circuit) between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 18 (P) and optical sensor harness connector M402 terminal 3 (P). 18 (P) - 3 (P) 4. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity (short circuit) between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 18 (P) and ground. 18 (P) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. WKIA1754E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connector. 3. CHECK OPTICAL SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. Check continuity (open circuit) between BCM harness connector M20 terminal 58 (W/R) and optical sensor harness connector M402 terminal 4 (W/R). 58 (W/R) - 4 (W/R) 2. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity (short circuit) between BCM harness connector M20 terminal 58 (W/R) and ground. 58 (W/R) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG WKIA1755E OK >> Replace optical sensor. Refer to LT-63, "Removal and Installation of Optical Sensor" . Recheck sensor output with CONSULT-II. If NG, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: October 2004 LT-62 2005 Titan AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM Removal and Installation of Optical Sensor EKS00AA9 REMOVAL A 1. 2. 3. B Remove defroster grille. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" . Disconnect the connector. Turn the optical sensor counterclockwise to remove it from defroster grille. C D WKIA1061E E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. F G H I J LT L M Revision: October 2004 LT-63 2005 Titan FRONT FOG LAMP FRONT FOG LAMP Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:26150 EKS00AAA WKIA3582E System Description EKS00AAB Control of the fog lamps is dependent upon the position of the combination switch (lighting switch). The lighting switch must be in the 2ND position or AUTO position (LOW beam is ON) for front fog lamp operation. When the lighting switch is placed in the fog lamp position, the BCM (body control module) receives input signal requesting the fog lamps to illuminate. When the headlamps are illuminated, this input signal is communicated to the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room) across the CAN communication lines. The CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R controls the front fog lamp relay coil. When activated, this relay directs power to the front fog lamps. OUTLINE Power is supplied at all times ● to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and ● to front fog lamp relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and ● through 20A fuse (No. 53, located in the IPDM E/R) ● to CPU in the IPDM E/R, and ● through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to BCM terminal 70. When the ignition switch is in ON or START position, power is supplied ● to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and ● through 10A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box) ● to BCM terminal 38. Ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 67 ● through grounds M57, M61 and M79, and ● to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 59 Revision: October 2004 LT-64 2005 Titan FRONT FOG LAMP ● through grounds E9, E15 and E24. A FOG LAMP OPERATION The fog lamp switch is built into the combination switch. The lighting switch must be in the 2ND position or AUTO position (LOW beam is ON) and the fog lamp switch must be ON for fog lamp operation. With the fog lamp switch in the ON position, the CPU of the IPDM E/R grounds the coil side of the fog lamp relay. The fog lamp relay then directs power ● through 20A fuse (No. 56, located in the IPDM E/R) ● through IPDM E/R terminal 50 ● to front fog lamp LH terminal +, and ● through IPDM E/R terminal 51 ● to front fog lamp RH terminal +. Ground is supplied ● to front fog lamp LH and RH terminal – ● through grounds E9, E15 and E24. With power and ground supplied, the front fog lamps illuminate. B C D E F COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION Refer to LT-93, "Combination Switch Reading Function" . EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL G When the combination switch (lighting switch) is in the 2ND position (ON), the fog lamp switch is ON, and the ignition switch is turned from ON or ACC to OFF, the battery saver control feature is activated. Under this condition, the fog lamps (and headlamps) remain illuminated for 5 minutes, then the fog lamps (and headlamps) are turned off. Exterior lamp battery saver control mode can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT-II. H CAN Communication System Description I EKS00AAC Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . J LT L M Revision: October 2004 LT-65 2005 Titan FRONT FOG LAMP Wiring Diagram — F/FOG — EKS00AAD WKWA2406E Revision: October 2004 LT-66 2005 Titan FRONT FOG LAMP A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA2407E Revision: October 2004 LT-67 2005 Titan FRONT FOG LAMP Terminals and Reference Values for BCM EKS00AAE Measuring condition Terminal No. Wire color 2 SB Signal name Combination switch input 5 Ignition switch ON Operation or condition Reference value (Approx.) Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E 3 G/Y Combination switch input 4 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E 4 Y Combination switch input 3 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E 5 G/B Combination switch input 2 6 V Combination switch input 1 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E 32 R/G Combination switch output 5 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E 33 R/Y Combination switch output 4 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E 34 L Combination switch output 3 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E Revision: October 2004 LT-68 2005 Titan FRONT FOG LAMP Measuring condition Terminal No. Wire color 35 O/B Combination switch output 2 36 R/W Combination switch output 1 Signal name Ignition switch Reference value (Approx.) Operation or condition A B Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 ON C SKIA5292E 38 W/L Ignition switch (ON) ON — Battery voltage 39 L CAN-H — — — 40 P CAN-L — — — 67 B Ground ON — 0V 70 W/B Battery power supply (fusible link) OFF — Battery voltage D E Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R EKS00AAF F Measuring condition Terminal No. Wire color 38 B 39 Signal name Ignition switch Operation or condition Reference value (Approx.) Ground ON — 0V L CAN-H — — — 40 P CAN-L — — — 50 W/R Front fog lamp (LH) ON Front fog lamp (RH) ON Ground ON 51 W/R 59 B OFF 0V ON Battery voltage Lighting switch must be in the 2ND position or AUTO position (LOW beam is ON) and the front fog lamp switch must be ON OFF 0V ON Battery voltage I LT EKS00AAG Confirm the symptom or customer complaint. Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-64, "System Description" . Perform the Preliminary Check. Refer to LT-70, "Preliminary Check" . Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. Does the front fog lamp operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4. Inspection End. Revision: October 2004 LT-69 J 0V How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. H Lighting switch must be in the 2ND position or AUTO position (LOW beam is ON) and the front fog lamp switch must be ON — G 2005 Titan L M FRONT FOG LAMP Preliminary Check EKS00AAH CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION 1. CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION Confirm BCM configuration for "FR FOG LAMP" is set to "WITH". Refer to BCS-13, "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> Continue preliminary check. Refer to LT-70, "CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT" . NG >> Change BCM configuration for "FR FOG LAMP" to "WITH". Refer to BCS-16, "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" . CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT 1. CHECK FUSES OR FUSIBLE LINK Check for blown fuses or fusible link. Unit Power source BCM Fuse No. Battery f Ignition switch ON or START position 59 Battery 53 Battery (Fog lamps ON) 56 IPDM E/R Refer to LT-66, "Wiring Diagram — F/FOG —" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connectors. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. Terminals Ignition switch position (+) Connector Terminal (Wire color) M18 38 (W/L) M20 70 (W/B) (–) OFF ACC ON 0V 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage Ground OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness for open between BCM and fuse. WKIA1436E Revision: October 2004 LT-70 2005 Titan FRONT FOG LAMP 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT A Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. Terminals Connector Terminal (Wire color) M20 67 (B) B Continuity Ground Yes C OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Check ground circuit harness. D LIIA0915E CONSULT-II Functions EKS00AAI E Refer to LT-17, "CONSULT-II Function (BCM)" in HEADLAMP (FOR USA). Refer to LT-20, "CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R)" in HEADLAMP (FOR USA). Front Fog Lamps Do Not Illuminate (Both Sides) EKS00AAJ F 1. CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL G Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "HEAD LAMP" data monitor, make sure "FR FOG SW" turns ON-OFF linked with operation of lighting switch. When lighting switch is in FOG position H : FR FOG SW ON OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check lighting switch. Refer to LT-95, "Combination Switch Inspection" . I SKIA5897E J 2. FOG LAMP ACTIVE TEST 1. 2. 3. 4. LT Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-II, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Select "EXTERNAL LAMPS" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "FOG" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen. Make sure fog lamps operate. L M Fog lamps should operate. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 4. Revision: October 2004 WKIA1438E LT-71 2005 Titan FRONT FOG LAMP 3. CHECK IPDM E/R 1. 2. Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-II, and select "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Make sure "FR FOG REQ" turns ON when lighting switch is in FOG position. When lighting switch is in FOG position : FR FOG REQ ON OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . SKIA5898E 4. IPDM E/R INSPECTION Start auto active test. Refer to PG-22, "Auto Active Test" . When front fog lamp relay is operating, check voltage between left/right front fog lamp connector terminals and ground. Terminals Front fog lamp (+) (–) Voltage (Approx.) Ground Battery voltage Terminal (wire color) Connector LH E101 + (W/R) RH E102 + (W/R) WKIA1064E OK or NG OK >> Check front fog lamp bulbs and replace as necessary. NG >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . Front Fog Lamp Does Not Illuminate (One Side) EKS00AAK 1. BULB INSPECTION Inspect bulbs of lamps which do not illuminate. Refer to LT-167, "Exterior Lamp" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace lamp bulb. Refer to LT-74, "Bulb Replacement" . 2. INSPECTION BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND FRONT FOG LAMPS 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and inoperative front fog lamp connector. Check continuity between harness connector terminals of IPDM E/R and harness connector terminal of front fog lamps. Terminals IPDM E/R Connector E123 Terminal (wire color) Front fog lamp Connector Continuity Terminal (wire color) 50 (W/R) LH E101 + (W/R) 51 (W/R) RH E102 + (W/R) Yes WKIA1465E OK or NG OK >> Check ground circuit. If OK, replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . If NG, repair harness or connector. NG >> Check for short circuits and open circuits in harness between IPDM E/R and front fog lamps. Revision: October 2004 LT-72 2005 Titan FRONT FOG LAMP Aiming Adjustment EKS00AAL The fog lamp is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable halogen bulb. Before performing aiming adjustment, make sure of the following. ● Keep all tires inflated to correct pressure. ● Place vehicle on level ground. ● See that vehicle is unloaded (except for full levels of coolant, engine oil and fuel, and spare tire, jack, and tools). Have the driver or equivalent weight placed in driver seat. Adjust aiming in the vertical direction by turning the adjustment screw. NOTE: Access adjustment screw from underneath front bumper. Use a T-3 (3 mm) Torx® bit or a 3 mm allen wrench to adjust. Turn screw clockwise to raise pattern and counterclockwise to lower pattern. A B C D E WKIA1396E F 1. 2. Set the distance between the screen and the center of the fog lamp lens as shown. Turn front fog lamps ON. G H I MEL327G 3. ● Adjust front fog lamps using adjusting screw so that the top edge of the high intensity zone is 100 mm (4 in) below the height of the fog lamp centers as shown. When performing adjustment, if necessary, cover the headlamps and opposite fog lamp. J LT L M MEL328G Revision: October 2004 LT-73 2005 Titan FRONT FOG LAMP Bulb Replacement 1. 2. EKS00AAM Disconnect electrical connector. Turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove it. CAUTION: ● Do not touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other oily substances away from it. Do not touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned off. Burning may result. ● Do not leave bulb out of fog lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture smoke, etc. may affect the performance of fog lamp. When replacing bulb, be sure to replace it with new one. Removal and Installation WKIA1394E EKS00AAN The fog lamp is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable halogen bulb. CAUTION: ● Do not leave fog lamp assembly without bulb for a long period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc. entering the fog lamp body may affect the performance. Remove the bulb from the headlamp assembly just before replacement bulb is installed. ● Grasp only the plastic base when handling the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope. Touching the glass could significantly affect the bulb life and/or fog lamp performance. 1. Position the fender protector aside. 2. Disconnect electrical connector. 3. Remove nut and pull fog lamp out of front fascia. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. WKIA1395E Revision: October 2004 LT-74 2005 Titan TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:26120 A EKS00AAO B C D E F G H I WKIA3583E System Description EKS00AAP J OUTLINE Power is supplied at all times ● through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to BCM (body control module) terminal 70, and ● through 10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to combination meter terminal 8. LT L TURN SIGNAL OPERATION When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box) ● to BCM terminal 38, and ● through 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to combination meter terminal 24. Ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 67 and ● to combination meter terminal 17 ● through grounds M57, M61 and M79. M LH Turn When the turn signal switch is moved to the left position, the BCM, interpreting it as turn signal is ON, outputs turn signal from BCM terminal 60. The BCM supplies power ● through BCM terminal 60 ● to front combination lamp LH terminal 5 Revision: October 2004 LT-75 2005 Titan TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS through front combination lamp LH terminal 4 ● to grounds E9, E15 and E24, and ● to rear combination lamp LH terminal 8 ● through rear combination lamp LH terminal 1 ● to grounds E9, E15 and E24. BCM sends signal to combination meter through CAN communication lines, and turns on turn signal indicator lamp within combination meter. ● RH Turn When the turn signal switch is moved to the right position, the BCM, interpreting it as turn signal is ON, outputs turn signal from BCM terminal 61. The BCM supplies power ● through BCM terminal 61 ● to front combination lamp RH terminal 5 ● through front combination lamp RH terminal 4 ● to grounds E9, E15 and E24, and ● to rear combination lamp RH terminal 8 ● through rear combination lamp RH terminal 1 ● to grounds E9, E15 and E24. BCM sends signal to combination meter through CAN communication lines, and turns on turn signal indicator lamp within combination meter. HAZARD LAMP OPERATION Power is supplied at all times ● through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to BCM terminal 70, and ● through 10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to combination meter terminal 8. Ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 67 and ● to combination meter terminal 17 ● through grounds M57, M61 and M79. When the hazard switch is depressed, ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 29 ● through hazard switch terminal 4 ● through hazard switch terminal 6 ● through grounds M57, M61 and M79. When the hazard switch is depressed, the BCM, interpreting it as turn signal is ON, outputs turn signal from BCM terminals 60 and 61. The BCM supplies power ● through BCM terminals 60 and 61 ● to front combination lamp LH and RH terminal 5 ● through front combination lamp LH and RH terminal 4 ● to grounds E9, E15 and E24, and ● to rear combination lamp LH and RH terminal 8 ● through rear combination lamp LH and RH terminal 1 ● to grounds E9, E15 and E24. BCM sends signal to combination meter through CAN communication lines, and turns on turn signal indicator lamps within combination meter. REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM OPERATION Power is supplied at all times Revision: October 2004 LT-76 2005 Titan TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to BCM terminal 70, and ● through 10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to combination meter terminal 8. Ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 67 and ● to combination meter terminal 17 ● through grounds M57, M61 and M79. When the remote keyless entry system is triggered by input from the keyfob, the BCM, interpreting it as turn signal is ON, outputs turn signal from BCM terminals 60 and 61. The BCM supplies power ● through BCM terminals 60 and 61 ● to front combination lamp LH and RH terminal 5 ● through front combination lamp LH and RH terminal 4 ● to grounds E9, E15 and E24, and ● to rear combination lamp LH and RH terminal 8 ● through rear combination lamp LH and RH terminal 1 ● to grounds E9, E15 and E24. BCM sends signal to combination meter through CAN communication lines, and turns on turn signal indicator lamps within combination meter. With power and input supplied, the BCM controls the flashing of the hazard warning lamps when keyfob is used to activate the remote keyless entry system. ● A B C D E F G H COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION Refer to LT-93, "Combination Switch Reading Function" . CAN Communication System Description I EKS00AAQ Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . J LT L M Revision: October 2004 LT-77 2005 Titan TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS Wiring Diagram — TURN — EKS00AAR WKWA2408E Revision: October 2004 LT-78 2005 Titan TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA2446E Revision: October 2004 LT-79 2005 Titan TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS Terminals and Reference Values for BCM EKS00AAS Measuring condition Terminal No. Wire color 2 SB Signal name Combination switch input 5 Ignition switch ON Operation or condition Reference value (Approx.) Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E 3 G/Y Combination switch input 4 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E 4 Y Combination switch input 3 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E 5 G/B Combination switch input 2 6 V Combination switch input 1 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E 29 W/B Hazard switch signal OFF 32 R/G Combination switch output 5 ON Hazard switch ON 0V OFF 5V Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E 33 R/Y Combination switch output 4 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E Revision: October 2004 LT-80 2005 Titan TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS Terminal No. Measuring condition Wire color Signal name Ignition switch Operation or condition Reference value (Approx.) A B 34 L Combination switch output 3 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 C SKIA5291E 35 36 O/B R/W D Combination switch output 2 Combination switch output 1 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 E SKIA5292E 38 W/L Ignition switch (ON) ON — Battery voltage 39 L CAN-H — — — 40 P CAN-L — — — 60 G/B Turn signal (left) ON F G H Combination switch Turn left ON I SKIA3009J J 61 G/Y Turn signal (right) ON Combination switch Turn right ON LT SKIA3009J 67 B 70 W/B Ground ON — 0V Battery power supply OFF — Battery voltage L How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. EKS00AAT Confirm the symptom or customer complaint. Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-75, "System Description" . Perform preliminary check. Refer to LT-82, "Preliminary Check" . Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. Do turn signal and hazard warning lamps operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4. Inspection End. Revision: October 2004 LT-81 2005 Titan M TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS Preliminary Check EKS00AAU CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT 1. CHECK FUSES OR FUSIBLE LINK Check for blown fuses or fusible link. Unit BCM Power source Fuse No. Battery f Ignition switch ON or START position 59 Refer to LT-78, "Wiring Diagram — TURN —" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connectors. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. Terminals Ignition switch position (+) Connector Terminal (Wire color) M18 38 (W/L) (–) OFF ACC ON 0V 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage Ground M20 70 (W/B) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness for open between BCM and fuse. WKIA1436E 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. Terminals Connector Terminal (Wire color) M20 67 (B) Continuity Ground Yes OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Check ground circuit harness. LIIA0915E Revision: October 2004 LT-82 2005 Titan TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS CONSULT-II Function (BCM) EKS00AAV A CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode Description B WORK SUPPORT DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part SELF-DIAG RESULTS CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER CONFIGURATION Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received data is displayed. C Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. D The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. BCM part number can be read. E Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. CONSULT-II OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON. F G H I BBIA0369E 2. J Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". LT L M BCIA0029E 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . BCIA0030E Revision: October 2004 LT-83 2005 Titan TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS 4. Touch "FLASHER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. LKIA0169E DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Touch "FLASHER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. All signals Monitors all the signals. Selection from menu Selects and monitors the individual signal. Touch "START". When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the items will be monitored. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop recording, touch "STOP". Display Item List Monitor item Contents IGN ON SW "ON/OFF" Displays "IGN position (ON)/OFF, ACC position (OFF)" judged from the ignition switch signal. HAZARD SW "ON/OFF" Displays "Hazard ON (ON)/Hazard OFF (OFF)" status, determined from hazard switch signal. TURN SIGNAL R "ON/OFF" Displays "Turn right (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal. TURN SIGNAL L "ON/OFF" Displays "Turn left (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal. BRAKE SW "ON/OFF" Displays status of stop lamp switch. ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Touch "FLASHER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch item to be tested and check operation of the selected item. During the operation check, touching "BACK" or "OFF" deactivates the operation. Display Item List Test item Description FLASHER (RH) Turn signal lamp (right) can be operated by any ON-OFF operations. FLASHER (LH) Turn signal lamp (left) can be operated by any ON-OFF operations. Revision: October 2004 LT-84 2005 Titan TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS Turn Signal Lamp Does Not Operate EKS00AAW 1. CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL A With CONSULT-II Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "FLASHER" data monitor, make sure "TURN SIGNAL R" and "TURN SIGNAL L" turns ON-OFF linked with operation of lighting switch. When lighting switch is in TURN RH position When lighting switch is in TURN LH position B C : TURN SIGNAL R ON : TURN SIGNAL L ON D Without CONSULT-II Refer to LT-95, "Combination Switch Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check lighting switch. Refer to LT-95, "Combination Switch Inspection" . SKIA4499E E F 2. ACTIVE TEST With CONSULT-II 1. Select "FLASHER" during active test. Refer to LT-84, "ACTIVE TEST" . 2. Make sure "FLASHER RH" and "FLASHER LH" operate. G H Without CONSULT-II GO TO 3. OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> GO TO 3. I J SKIA6190E 3. CHECK TURN SIGNAL LAMPS CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connector and front combination lamp LH and RH connectors. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal 60 (G/B) and front combination lamp LH harness connector E11 terminal 5 (G/B). 60 (G/B) - 5 (G/B) 4. LT M : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal 61 (G/Y) and front combination lamp RH harness connector E107 terminal 5 (G/Y). 61 (G/Y) - 5 (G/Y) L WKIA1466E : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: October 2004 LT-85 2005 Titan TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS 4. CHECK GROUND 1. Check continuity between front combination lamp LH harness connector E11 terminal 4 (B) and ground. 4 (B) - Ground 2. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between front combination lamp RH harness connector E107 terminal 4 (B) and ground. 4 (B) - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA1467E 5. CHECK BULB Check bulb standard of each turn signal lamp is correct. Refer to LT-167, "Exterior Lamp" . OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM if turn signal lamps do not work after setting the connector again. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Replace turn signal lamp bulb. Refer to LT-30, "FRONT TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LAMP" . Rear Turn Signal Lamp Does Not Operate EKS00AAX 1. CHECK TAIL LAMPS AND STOP LAMPS Check bulb standard of each turn signal lamp is correct. Refer to LT-167, "Exterior Lamp" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace turn signal lamp bulb. Refer to LT-118, "Bulb Replacement" . 2. CHECK TURN SIGNAL LAMPS CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector and rear combination lamp connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal 61 (G/Y) and rear combination lamp RH harness connector C14 terminal 8 (G/Y). 61 (G/Y) - 8 (G/Y) 3. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal 60 (G/B) and rear combination lamp LH harness connector C13 terminal 8 (G/B). 60 (G/B) - 8 (G/B) : Continuity should exist. WKIA1675E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: October 2004 LT-86 2005 Titan TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT A Check continuity between rear combination lamp harness connector C13 LH and C14 RH terminal 1 (B) and ground. 1 (B) - Ground B : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Check rear combination lamp connector for proper connection. Repair as necessary. NG >> Repair harness or connector. C D WKIA1676E Hazard Warning Lamp Does Not Operate But Turn Signal Lamps Operate EKS00AAY 1. CHECK BULB Make sure bulb standard of each turn signal lamp is correct. Refer to LT-167, "Exterior Lamp" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace turn signal lamp bulb. Refer to LT-30, "FRONT TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LAMP" for front turn signal bulb. Refer to LT-118, "Bulb Replacement" for rear turn signal bulb. E F G 2. CHECK HAZARD SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL H With CONSULT-II Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "FLASHER" data monitor, make sure "HAZARD SW" turns ON-OFF linked with operation of hazard switch. When hazard switch is in ON position I : HAZARD SW ON J LT SKIA4500E L Without CONSULT-II Check voltage between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 29 (W/B) and ground. M Terminals (+) Connector Terminal (Wire color) (–) M18 29 (W/B) Ground Voltage (Approx.) Condition Hazard switch is ON 0V Hazard switch is OFF 5V OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> GO TO 3. Revision: October 2004 LT-87 WKIA1677E 2005 Titan TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS 3. CHECK HAZARD SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connector and hazard switch connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 29 (W/B) and hazard switch harness connector M55 terminal 4 (W/B). 29 (W/B) - 4 (W/B) : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA1674E 4. CHECK GROUND Check continuity between hazard switch harness connector M55 terminal 6 (B) and ground. 6 (B) - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA1471E 5. CHECK HAZARD SWITCH 1. 2. Disconnect hazard switch connector. Check continuity of hazard switch. Terminal Hazard switch 4 6 Condition Continuity Hazard switch is ON Yes Hazard switch is OFF No OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM if turn signal lamps does not work after setting the connector again. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Replace hazard switch. Refer to LT-91, "Removal and Installation" . Turn Signal Indicator Lamp Does Not Operate WKIA1472E EKS00AAZ 1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM Check CAN communication. Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . OK or NG OK >> Replace combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" . NG >> Repair as necessary. Revision: October 2004 LT-88 2005 Titan TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS Bulb Replacement (Front Turn Signal Lamp) EKS00AB0 A Refer to LT-30, "FRONT TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LAMP" . Bulb Replacement (Rear Turn Signal Lamp) EKS00AB1 B Refer to LT-118, "Bulb Replacement" in REAR COMBINATION LAMP. Removal and Installation of Front Turn Signal Lamp EKS00AB2 C Refer to LT-31, "Removal and Installation" . Removal and Installation of Rear Turn Signal Lamp EKS00AB3 Refer to LT-118, "Removal and Installation" in REAR COMBINATION LAMP. D E F G H I J LT L M Revision: October 2004 LT-89 2005 Titan LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Removal and Installation PFP:25540 EKS00AB4 REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove steering column cover. While pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn signal switch toward driver door and disconnect from the base. LKIA0013E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 LT-90 2005 Titan HAZARD SWITCH HAZARD SWITCH Removal and Installation PFP:25290 A EKS00AB5 REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-12, "CLUSTER LID C" . While pressing the tab, push out the hazard switch. B C D E WKIA1402E INSTALLATION F Installation is in the reverse order of removal. G H I J LT L M Revision: October 2004 LT-91 2005 Titan COMBINATION SWITCH COMBINATION SWITCH Wiring Diagram — COMBSW — PFP:25567 EKS00AB6 WKWA2410E Revision: October 2004 LT-92 2005 Titan COMBINATION SWITCH Combination Switch Reading Function EKS00AB7 A For details, refer to BCS-3, "COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION" . CONSULT-II Function (BCM) EKS00AB8 B CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode WORK SUPPORT DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part SELF-DIAG RESULTS CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER CONFIGURATION Description Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received data is displayed. C D Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. E The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. BCM part number can be read. F Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. CONSULT-II OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON. G H I J BBIA0369E 2. LT Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". L M BCIA0029E 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . BCIA0030E Revision: October 2004 LT-93 2005 Titan COMBINATION SWITCH 4. Touch "COMB SW". LKIA0283E DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Touch "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. ALL SIGNALS Monitors all the signals. SELECTION FROM MENU Selects and monitors individual signal. 4. 5. 6. Touch "START". When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the signals will be monitored. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop recording, touch "STOP". Display Item List Monitor item name "OPERATION OR UNIT" Contents TURN SIGNAL R "ON/OFF" Displays "Turn Right (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal. TURN SIGNAL L "ON/OFF" Displays "Turn Left (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal. HI BEAM SW "ON/OFF" Displays status (high beam switch: ON/Others: OFF) of high beam switch judged from lighting switch signal. HEAD LAMP SW 1 "ON/OFF" Displays "Headlamp switch 1 (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal. HEAD LAMP SW 2 "ON/OFF" Displays status (headlamp switch 2: ON/Others: OFF) of headlamp switch 2 judged from lighting switch signal. LIGHT SW 1ST "ON/OFF" Displays status (lighting switch 1st position: ON/Others: OFF) of lighting switch judged from lighting switch signal. PASSING SW "ON/OFF" Displays status (flash-to-pass switch: ON/Others: OFF) of flash-to-pass switch judged from lighting switch signal. AUTO LIGHT SW "ON/OFF" Displays "Auto light switch (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal. FR FOG SW "ON/OFF" Displays "Front fog lamp switch (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lighting switch signal. FR WIPER HI "ON/OFF" Displays "Front Wiper HI (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from wiper switch signal. FR WIPER LOW "ON/OFF" Displays "Front Wiper LOW (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from wiper switch signal. FR WIPER INT "ON/OFF" Displays "Front Wiper INT (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from wiper switch signal. FR WASHER SW "ON/OFF" Displays "Front Washer Switch (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from wiper switch signal. INT VOLUME [1 - 7] Revision: October 2004 Displays intermittent operation knob setting (1 - 7), determined from wiper switch signal. LT-94 2005 Titan COMBINATION SWITCH Combination Switch Inspection EKS00AB9 1. SYSTEM CHECK A Referring to table below, check to which system the malfunctioning switch belongs. B System 1 System 2 System 3 System 4 System 5 — FR WASHER FR WIPER LO TURN LH TURN RH FR WIPER HI — FR WIPER INT PASSING HEAD LAMP1 INT VOLUME 1 — — HEAD LAMP2 HI BEAM — INT VOLUME 3 AUTO LIGHT — TAIL LAMP INT VOLUME 2 — — FR FOG — C D >> GO TO 2. E 2. SYSTEM CHECK With CONSULT-II CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. Connect CONSULT-II, and select "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Select "DATA MONITOR". 3. Select "START", and confirm that other switches in malfunctioning system operate normally. Example: When auto light switch is malfunctioning, confirm that "FRONT WIPER LOW" and "FRONT WIPER INT" in System 3, to which the auto light switch belongs, turn ON-OFF normally. F G H I J SKIA7075E LT Without CONSULT-II Operate combination switch, and confirm that other switches in malfunctioning system operate normally. Example: When auto light switch is malfunctioning, confirm that "FRONT WIPER LOW" and "FRONT WIPER INT" in System 3, to which the auto light switch belongs, operate normally. L Check results Other switches in malfunctioning system operate normally.>>Replace lighting switch or wiper switch. Other switches in malfunctioning system do not operate normally.>>GO TO 3. M Revision: October 2004 LT-95 2005 Titan COMBINATION SWITCH 3. HARNESS INSPECTION 1. 2. Disconnect BCM and combination switch connectors. Check for continuity between BCM harness connector of the suspect system and the corresponding combination switch connector terminals. Terminals Suspect system BCM Connector 1 2 3 M18 4 5 3. Combination switch Terminal (Wire color) Connector Continuity Terminal (Wire color) Input 1 6 (V) 6 (V) Output 1 36 (R/W) 1 (R/W) Input 2 5 (G/B) 7 (G/B) Output 2 35 (O/B) 2 (O/B) Input 3 4 (Y) LKIA0284E 10 (Y) M28 Output 3 34 (L) 3 (L) Input 4 3 (G/Y) 9 (G/Y) Output 4 33 (R/Y) 4 (R/Y) Input 5 2 (SB) 8 (SB) Output 5 32 (R/G) 5 (R/G) Yes Check for continuity between each terminal of BCM harness connector in suspect malfunctioning system and ground. Terminals Suspect system BCM Connector 1 2 3 M18 4 5 Continuity Terminal (Wire color) Input 1 6 (V) Output 1 36 (R/W) Input 2 5 (G/B) Output 2 35 (O/B) Input 3 4 (Y) Output 3 34 (L) Input 4 3 (G/Y) Output 4 33 (R/Y) Input 5 2 (SB) Output 5 32 (R/G) Ground No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check harness between BCM and combination switch for open or short circuit. Revision: October 2004 LT-96 2005 Titan COMBINATION SWITCH 4. BCM OUTPUT TERMINAL INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. A Turn lighting switch and wiper switch to OFF. Set wiper dial to position 4. Connect BCM and combination switch connectors, and check BCM output terminal voltage waveform of suspect malfunctioning system. B C Terminals Suspect system Combination switch (+) Connector Terminal (Wire color) 1 Output 1 1 (R/W) 2 Output 2 2 (O/B) Output 3 3 (L) 4 Output 4 4 (R/Y) 5 Output 5 5 (R/G) M28 3 D E F OK or NG OK >> Open circuit in combination switch, GO TO 5. NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . G H SKIA4976E I 5. COMBINATION SWITCH INSPECTION Referring to table below, perform combination switch inspection. J Procedure 1 Replace lighting switch. 2 Confirm check results. 3 OK INSPECTION END NG Replace wiper switch. 4 Confirm check results. 5 OK INSPECTION END NG Replace switch base. 6 Confirm check results. 7 OK INSPECTION END NG Confirm symptom again. LT L >> Inspection End. Removal and Installation EKS00ABA For details, refer to LT-90, "Removal and Installation" . Switch Circuit Inspection EKS00ABB For details, refer to LT-95, "Combination Switch Inspection" . Revision: October 2004 LT-97 2005 Titan M STOP LAMP STOP LAMP System Description PFP:26550 EKS00ABC Power is supplied at all times ● through 10A fuse [No. 20, located in fuse block (J/B)] ● to stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ● to stop lamp relay terminal 1 (with VDC). When the brake pedal is pressed, the stop lamp switch is closed and power is supplied ● through stop lamp switch terminal 2 ● to stop lamp relay terminal 3 (with VDC) ● through stop lamp relay terminal 4 (with VDC) ● to rear combination lamp LH and RH terminal 7, and ● to high-mounted stop lamp terminal 1. Ground is supplied ● to rear combination lamp LH and RH terminal 5 ● through grounds E9, E15 and E24, and ● to high-mounted stop lamp terminal 2 ● through grounds B117 and B132. With power and ground supplied, the stop lamps illuminate. Revision: October 2004 LT-98 2005 Titan STOP LAMP Wiring Diagram — STOP/L — EKS00ABD A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA1534E Revision: October 2004 LT-99 2005 Titan STOP LAMP WKWA1510E Revision: October 2004 LT-100 2005 Titan STOP LAMP High-Mounted Stop Lamp EKS00ABE BULB REPLACEMENT A 1. 2. 3. B Remove the high-mounted stop lamp. Refer to LT-101, "REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION" . Turn bulb socket counter clockwise to remove it from lamp housing. Pull bulb from socket. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 1. Remove access caps. 2. Disconnect the connector. 3. Remove 2 nuts and remove high-mounted stop lamp. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. High-mounted stop lamp nuts: C D 3.38 N·m (0.34 kg-m, 30 in-lb) E WKIA2875E Stop Lamp F EKS00ABF BULB REPLACEMENT G Refer to LT-118, "Bulb Replacement" in REAR COMBINATION LAMP. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Refer to LT-118, "Removal and Installation" in REAR COMBINATION LAMP. H I J LT L M Revision: October 2004 LT-101 2005 Titan BACK-UP LAMP BACK-UP LAMP Wiring Diagram — BACK/L — PFP:26550 EKS00ABG WKWA2447E Revision: October 2004 LT-102 2005 Titan BACK-UP LAMP Bulb Replacement EKS00ABH A Refer to LT-118, "Bulb Replacement" in REAR COMBINATION LAMP. Removal and Installation EKS00ABI B Refer to LT-118, "Removal and Installation" in REAR COMBINATION LAMP. C D E F G H I J LT L M Revision: October 2004 LT-103 2005 Titan PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:26550 EKS00ABJ WKIA3584E System Description EKS00ABK Control of the parking, license plate, and tail lamp operation is dependent upon the position of the lighting switch (combination switch). When the lighting switch is placed in the 1ST position, the BCM (body control module) receives input signal requesting the parking, license plate, side marker and tail lamps to illuminate. This input signal is communicated to the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room) across the CAN communication lines. The CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R controls the tail lamp relay coil. This relay, when energized, directs power to the parking, license plate and tail lamps, which then illuminate. Power is supplied at all times ● to tail lamp relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and ● through 20A fuse (No. 53, located in the IPDM E/R) ● to CPU in the IPDM E/R, and ● to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and ● through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to BCM terminal 70. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box) ● to BCM terminal 38, and ● to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R. Ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 67 ● through grounds M57, M61 and M79, and ● to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 59 ● through grounds E9, E15 and E24. Revision: October 2004 LT-104 2005 Titan PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH With the lighting switch in the 1ST or 2ND position (or if the auto light system is activated), the BCM receives input signal requesting the parking, license plate, side marker and tail lamps to illuminate. This input signal is communicated to the IPDM E/R across the CAN communication lines. The CPU in the IPDM E/R controls the tail lamp relay coil, which when energized, directs power ● through 10A fuse (No. 37, located in the IPDM E/R) ● through IPDM E/R terminal 57 ● to front combination lamp LH and RH terminal 6 ● to license plate lamps terminal + and ● to rear combination lamp LH and RH terminal 6. Ground is supplied ● to front combination lamp LH and RH terminal 4 ● to rear combination lamp LH and RH terminal 1 and ● to license plate lamps terminal – ● through grounds E9, E15 and E24. With power and ground supplied, the parking, license plate and tail lamps illuminate. A B C D E F COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION Refer to BCS-3, "COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION" . G EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL When the combination switch (lighting switch) is in the 1ST (or 2ND) position, and the ignition switch is turned from ON or ACC to OFF, the battery saver control feature is activated. Under this condition, the parking, license and tail lamps remain illuminated for 5 minutes, then the parking, license plate and tail lamps are turned off. Exterior lamp battery saver control mode can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT-II. CAN Communication System Description H I EKS00ABL Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . J LT L M Revision: October 2004 LT-105 2005 Titan PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS Schematic EKS00ABM WKWA2413E Revision: October 2004 LT-106 2005 Titan PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L — EKS00ABN A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA2414E Revision: October 2004 LT-107 2005 Titan PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS WKWA2415E Revision: October 2004 LT-108 2005 Titan PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA1562E Revision: October 2004 LT-109 2005 Titan PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS Terminals and Reference Values for BCM EKS00ABO Measuring condition Terminal No. Wire color 2 SB Signal name Combination switch input 5 Ignition switch ON Operation or condition Reference value (Approx.) Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E 3 G/Y Combination switch input 4 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E 4 Y Combination switch input 3 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E 5 G/B Combination switch input 2 6 V Combination switch input 1 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E 32 R/G Combination switch output 5 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E 33 R/Y Combination switch output 4 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E 34 L Combination switch output 3 ON Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E Revision: October 2004 LT-110 2005 Titan PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS Measuring condition Terminal No. Wire color 35 O/B Combination switch output 2 36 R/W Combination switch output 1 Signal name Ignition switch Operation or condition Reference value (Approx.) A B Lighting, turn, wiper OFF Wiper dial position 4 ON C SKIA5292E 38 W/L Ignition switch (ON) ON — Battery voltage 39 L CAN-H — — — 40 P CAN-L — — — 67 B Ground ON — 0V 70 W/B Battery power supply (fusible link) OFF — Battery voltage D E Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R EKS00ABP F Measuring condition Terminal No. Wire color 38 B 39 Ignition switch Operation or condition Reference value (Approx.) Ground ON — 0V L CAN-H — — — 40 P CAN-L — — — 57 R/L Parking, license, and tail lamp ON Ground ON 59 B Signal name Lighting switch 1ST position — H OFF 0V ON Battery voltage I 0V How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. G EKS00ABQ Confirm the symptom or customer complaint. Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-104, "System Description" . Carry out the Preliminary Check. Refer to LT-112, "Preliminary Check" . Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. Do the parking, license and tail lamps operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4. Inspection End. J LT L M Revision: October 2004 LT-111 2005 Titan PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS Preliminary Check EKS00ABR CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT 1. CHECK FUSES OR FUSIBLE LINK Check for blown fuses or fusible link. Unit BCM Power source Fuse No. Battery f Ignition switch ON or START position 59 Battery 53 Battery (Tail lamps ON) 37 IPDM E/R Refer to LT-107, "Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L —" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connectors. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. Terminals Ignition switch position (+) Connector Terminal (Wire color) M18 38 (W/L) M20 70 (W/B) (–) OFF ACC ON 0V 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage Ground OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness for open between BCM and fuse. WKIA1436E 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. Terminals Connector Terminal (Wire color) M20 67 (B) Continuity Ground Yes OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Check ground circuit harness. LIIA0915E Revision: October 2004 LT-112 2005 Titan PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS CONSULT-II Functions EKS00ABS Refer to LT-17, "CONSULT-II Function (BCM)" and LT-20, "CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R)" in HEADLAMP (FOR USA). Parking, License Plate and/or Tail Lamps Do Not Illuminate EKS00ABT 1. CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "HEAD LAMP" data monitor, make sure "LIGHT SW 1ST" turns ON-OFF linked with operation of lighting switch. When lighting switch is in 1ST position D E F SKIA5956E G 2. ACTIVE TEST With CONSULT-II 1. Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-II, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Select "EXTERNAL LAMPS" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 3. Touch "TAIL" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen. 4. Make sure parking, license plate and tail lamps operate. H I J Parking, license plate and tail lamps should operate Without CONSULT-II 1. Start auto active test. Refer to PG-22, "Auto Active Test" . 2. Make sure parking, license plate and tail lamps operate. LT WKIA1438E L Parking, license plate and tail lamps should operate OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 4. M 3. CHECK IPDM E/R 1. 2. Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-II, and select "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Make sure "TAIL & CLR REQ" turns ON when lighting switch is in 1ST position. When lighting switch is in 1ST position : TAIL & CLR REQ ON OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . Revision: October 2004 B C : LIGHT SW 1ST ON Without CONSULT-II Refer to LT-95, "Combination Switch Inspection" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check lighting switch. Refer to LT-95, "Combination Switch Inspection" . A LT-113 SKIA5958E 2005 Titan PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS 4. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. With CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front combination lamp, license plate lamp and rear combination lamp connectors. Turn ignition switch ON. Select "IPDM E/R" on CONSULT-II, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Select "TAIL LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "ON" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen. When tail lamp is operating, check voltage between front combination lamp, license plate lamp, rear combination lamp harness connector and ground. 1. 2. 3. Without CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch OFF. Start auto active test. Refer to PG-22, "Auto Active Test" . When tail lamp is operating, check voltage between front combination lamp, license plate lamp, rear combination lamp harness connector and ground. Terminals Front combination lamp (+) Connector RH E107 LH E11 Voltage Terminal (Wire color) (–) 6 (R/L) Ground Battery voltage WKIA1473E Terminals License plate lamps (+) (–) Connector Terminal (Wire color) C12 + (R/L) Ground Voltage Battery voltage WKIA3472E Terminals Rear combination lamp (+) Connector RH C14 LH C13 Terminal (Wire color) (–) 6 (R/L) Ground Voltage Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 5. Revision: October 2004 WKIA1679E LT-114 2005 Titan PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS 5. CHECK PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMP CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and front combination lamp harness connector. B Terminals IPDM E/R C Front combination lamp Connector Terminal (Wire color) E124 57 (R/L) Connector RH E107 LH E11 Continuity Terminal (Wire color) 6 (R/L) D Yes WKIA1475E 4. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and license plate lamps harness connector. E F Terminals IPDM E/R License plate lamps Connector Terminal (Wire color) Connector Terminal (Wire color) E124 57 (R/L) C12 + (R/L) Continuity G Yes H WKIA3473E I 5. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and rear combination lamp harness connector. J Terminals IPDM E/R Connector Terminal (Wire color) E124 57 (R/L) Rear combination lamp Connector RH C14 LH C13 Continuity Terminal (Wire color) 6 (R/L) LT Yes OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: October 2004 LT-115 L WKIA1681E M 2005 Titan PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS 6. CHECK GROUND 1. Check continuity between front combination lamp harness connector and ground. Terminals Front combination lamp Connector RH E107 LH E11 Continuity Terminal (Wire color) 4 (B) Ground Yes WKIA1467E 2. Check continuity between license plate lamps harness connector and ground. Terminals License plate lamps Connector Terminal (Wire color) C12 – (B) Continuity Ground Yes WKIA3474E 3. Check continuity between rear combination lamp harness connector and ground. Terminals Rear combination lamp Connector RH C14 LH C13 Continuity Terminal (Wire color) 1 (B) Ground Yes OK or NG OK >> Check bulbs. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA1676E Parking, License Plate and Tail Lamps Do Not Turn OFF (After Approx. 10 Minutes) EKS00ABU 1. CHECK IPDM E/R 1. Turn ignition switch ON. Turn the combination switch (lighting switch) to the OFF position. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Verify that the parking, license plate, and tail lamps turn on and off after approximately 10 minutes. OK or NG OK >> Ignition relay malfunction. Refer to PG-17, "Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction" . NG >> Inspection End. Revision: October 2004 LT-116 2005 Titan PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS Front Parking Lamp EKS00ABV A BULB REPLACEMENT For bulb replacement, refer to LT-30, "FRONT TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LAMP" . Tail Lamp EKS00ABW BULB REPLACEMENT B For bulb replacement, refer to LT-118, "Bulb Replacement" . C D E F G H I J LT L M Revision: October 2004 LT-117 2005 Titan REAR COMBINATION LAMP REAR COMBINATION LAMP Bulb Replacement PFP:26554 EKS00ABX 1. Remove rear combination lamp mounting bolts. 2. Pull rear combination lamp to remove from the vehicle. 3. Turn bulb socket counterclockwise and unlock it. 4. Remove bulb. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. WKIA1760E Removal and Installation EKS00ABY 1. Remove rear combination lamp mounting bolts. 2. Pull rear combination lamp to remove from the vehicle. 3. Disconnect rear combination lamp connector. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Rear combination lamp mounting bolts : 14.2 N·m (1.4 kg-m, 126 in-lb) WKIA1760E Revision: October 2004 LT-118 2005 Titan TRAILER TOW TRAILER TOW Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:93020 A EKS00ABZ B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKIA3585E System Description EKS00AC0 Power is supplied at all times ● to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room), and ● through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to BCM (body control module) terminal 70, and ● through 10A fuse (No. 32, located in the IPDM E/R) ● through IPDM E/R terminal 61 ● to trailer tow relay 1 terminal 3, and ● through 20A fuse (No. 53, located in the IPDM E/R) ● to CPU in the IPDM E/R, and Revision: October 2004 LT-119 2005 Titan TRAILER TOW to tail lamp relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and ● through 30A fusible link (letter j , located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to trailer tow relay 2 terminals 3 and 6, and ● through 40A fusible link (letter k , located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to electric brake (pre-wiring) terminal 5. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied ● to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and ● through 10A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box) ● to BCM terminal 38, and ● through 10A fuse (No. 51, located in the IPDM E/R) ● to trailer tow relay 2 terminal 1. Ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 67 and ● to electric brake (pre-wiring) terminal 1 ● through grounds M57, M61 and M79, and ● to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 59 ● to trailer tow relay 1 terminal 2 ● to trailer tow relay 2 terminal 2, and ● to trailer connector terminal 2 ● through grounds E9, E15 and E24. ● TRAILER TAIL LAMP OPERATION The trailer tail lamps are controlled by the trailer tow relay 1. With the lighting switch in the parking and tail lamp ON (1ST) position, AUTO position (and the auto light system is activated) or headlamp ON (2ND) position, power is supplied ● through the tail lamp relay, located in the IPDM E/R ● through 10A fuse (No. 36, located in the IPDM E/R) ● to IPDM E/R terminal 49 ● to trailer tow relay 1 terminal 1. When energized, trailer tow relay 1 supplies tail lamp power to trailer connector terminal 6. TRAILER TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD LAMP OPERATION The trailer turn signal and hazard lamps are controlled by the BCM. If either turn signal or the hazard lamps are turned on, the BCM supplies voltage to the trailer lamps to make them flash. Left turn signal and hazard lamp output is supplied ● through BCM terminal 52 ● to trailer connector terminal 1. Right turn signal and hazard lamp output is supplied ● through BCM terminal 51 ● to trailer connector terminal 4. TRAILER STOP LAMP OPERATION The trailer stop lamps are controlled by the electric brake. The electric brake receives stop lamp switch signal when the brake pedal is pressed. When the brake pedal is pressed, power is supplied ● through electric brake (pre-wiring) terminal 3 ● to trailer connector terminal 3. TRAILER POWER SUPPLY OPERATION The trailer power supply is controlled by the trailer tow relay 2. When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse (No. 51, located in the IPDM E/R) ● through IPDM E/R terminal 16 Revision: October 2004 LT-120 2005 Titan TRAILER TOW to trailer tow relay 2 terminal 1. When energized, the trailer tow relay 2 supplies power ● through trailer tow relay 2 terminals 5 and 7 ● to trailer connector terminal 5. ● A B C D E F G H I J LT L M Revision: October 2004 LT-121 2005 Titan TRAILER TOW Schematic EKS00AC1 WKWA2417E Revision: October 2004 LT-122 2005 Titan TRAILER TOW Wiring Diagram — T/TOW — EKS00AC2 A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA2418E Revision: October 2004 LT-123 2005 Titan TRAILER TOW WKWA2419E Revision: October 2004 LT-124 2005 Titan TRAILER TOW A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA2420E Revision: October 2004 LT-125 2005 Titan INTERIOR ROOM LAMP INTERIOR ROOM LAMP Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:26410 EKS00AC3 WKIA3586E Revision: October 2004 LT-126 2005 Titan INTERIOR ROOM LAMP System Description EKS00AC4 When room lamp and personal lamp switch is in DOOR position, room lamp and personal lamp ON/OFF is controlled by timer according to signals from switches including key switch (with column shift) or key switch and key lock solenoid (with floor shift), front door switch LH side, unlock signal from keyfob, door lock and unlock switch, key cylinder lock and unlock switch, and ignition switch. When room lamp and personal lamp turns ON, there is a gradual brightening over 1 second. When room lamp and personal lamp turns OFF, there is a gradual dimming over 1 second. The room lamp and personal lamp timer is controlled by the BCM (body control module). Room lamp and personal lamp timer control settings can be changed with CONSULT-II. Step and foot lamp turns ON when front or rear doors are opened (door switch ON). Lamp turns OFF when front and rear doors are closed (all door switches OFF). POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND A B C D Power is supplied at all times ● through 10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] E ● to key switch terminal 3, and ● through 15A fuse [No. 22, located in the fuse block (J/B)] F ● to BCM terminal 57, and ● through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to BCM terminal 70, and G ● through 10A fuse [No. 21, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to cargo lamp relay terminals 2 and 5. When the key is inserted in key switch (with column shift) or key switch and key lock solenoid (with floor shift), H power is supplied ● through the key switch (with column shift) or key switch and key lock solenoid (with floor shift) terminal 4 ● to BCM terminal 37. I With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box) J ● to BCM terminal 38. Ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 67 LT ● through grounds M57, M61 and M79. When the front door LH is opened, ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 47 L ● through front door switch LH terminal 2 ● through case ground of front door switch LH (crew cab) or ● through front door switch LH terminal 3 (king cab) M ● through grounds B7 and B19. When the front door RH is opened, ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 12 ● through front door switch RH terminal 2 ● through case ground of front door switch RH (crew cab) or ● through front door switch RH terminal 3 (king cab) ● through grounds B117 and B132 (king cab). When the rear door LH (crew cab) is opened, ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 48 ● through rear door switch LH terminal 2 ● through case ground of rear door switch LH. When the rear door LH (king cab) is opened, ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 47 ● through rear door switch upper LH and rear door switch lower LH terminal 1 Revision: October 2004 LT-127 2005 Titan INTERIOR ROOM LAMP through rear door switch upper LH and rear door switch lower LH terminal 2 ● through grounds B7 and B19. When the rear door RH (crew cab) is opened, ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 13 ● through rear door switch RH terminal 2 ● through case ground of rear door switch RH. When the rear door RH (king cab) is opened, ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 12 ● through rear door switch upper RH and rear door switch lower RH terminal 1 ● through rear door switch upper RH and rear door switch lower RH terminal 2 ● through grounds B117 and B132. When the front door LH or RH is unlocked by the door lock and unlock switch, BCM receives serial data ● to BCM terminal 22 ● through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 14 (crew cab) or 12 (king cab) and power window and door lock/unlock switch RH terminal 16 ● through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 17 (crew cab) or 15 (king cab) ● through grounds M57, M61 and M79. When the front door LH is unlocked by the key, the BCM receives serial data ● to BCM terminal 22 ● through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 14 (crew cab) or 12 (king cab) ● through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 6 (crew cab) or 7 (king cab) ● through front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) terminal 6 ● to front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) terminal 5 ● through grounds M57, M61 and M79. When a signal, or combination of signals is received by the BCM, ground is supplied ● to door mirror LH and RH terminal 13 (with puddle lamps) ● to front room/map lamp assembly terminal 1 and ● to personal lamps 2nd row terminal 1 (with rear roof console) ● through front room/map lamp assembly terminal 2 ● through BCM terminal 63. With power and ground supplied, the lamps illuminate. When the BCM receives cargo lamp switch input, ground is supplied to cargo lamp relay terminal 1, which energizes the cargo lamp relay. When this relay is energized, power is supplied ● through cargo lamp relay terminal 3 ● to high-mount stop lamp (cargo lamp) terminal 3, and ● to rear combination lamp (tailgate cargo lamp) LH and RH terminal 3. ● SWITCH OPERATION When any door switch is ON (door is opened), ground is supplied ● to front and rear (crew cab) step lamps LH and RH and foot lamp LH and RH (with foot lamps) terminal – ● through BCM terminal 62. And power is supplied ● through BCM terminal 56 ● to front and rear (crew cab) step lamps LH and RH terminal + ● to door mirror LH and RH terminal 12 (with puddle lamps) ● to front room/map lamp assembly terminal 6 ● to vanity lamp LH and RH terminal 1 (with vanity lamps) ● to personal lamp 2nd row terminal 3 (with rear roof console) ● to room lamp terminal 2 ● to foot lamp LH and RH terminal + (with foot lamps). Revision: October 2004 LT-128 2005 Titan INTERIOR ROOM LAMP When front room/map lamp assembly switch is ON, ground is supplied ● to front room/map lamp assembly terminal 5 ● through grounds M57, M61 and M79. When vanity lamp (LH and RH) is ON, ground is supplied ● to vanity lamp (LH and RH) terminal 2 ● through grounds M57, M61 and M79. When cargo lamp switch is ON, ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 31 ● through cargo lamp switch terminal 1 ● through cargo lamp switch terminal 3 ● through grounds M57, M61 and M79. A B C D ROOM LAMP TIMER OPERATION E When lamp switch is in DOOR position, and when all conditions below are met, BCM performs timer control (maximum 30 seconds) for interior room lamp and map lamp ON/OFF. Power is supplied F ● through 10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to key switch (with column shift) or key switch and key lock solenoid (with floor shift) terminal 3. Key is removed from key switch (with column shift) or key switch and key lock solenoid (with floor shift) (key G switch OFF), power will not be supplied to BCM terminal 37. Serial data is supplied ● to BCM terminal 22 H ● through main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminal 14 (crew cab) or 12 (king cab). At the time that front door LH is opened, BCM detects that front door LH is unlocked. It determines that interior room lamp and map lamp timer operation conditions are met, and turns the interior room lamps ON for 30 secI onds. Key is in key switch (with column shift) or key switch and key lock solenoid (with floor shift) (key switch ON), power is supplied J ● through key switch (with column shift) or key switch and key lock solenoid (with floor shift) terminal 4 ● to BCM terminal 37. When key is removed from key switch (with column shift) or key switch and key lock solenoid (with floor shift) (key switch OFF), power supply to BCM terminal 37 is terminated. BCM detects that key has been removed, LT determines that interior room lamp and map lamp timer conditions are met, and turns the interior room lamps ON for 30 seconds. When front door LH opens → closes, and the key is not inserted in the key switch (with column shift) or key L switch and key lock solenoid (with floor shift) (key switch OFF), BCM terminal 47 changes between 0V (door open) → 12V (door closed). The BCM determines that conditions for interior room lamp operation are met and turns the interior room lamp ON for 30 seconds. M Timer control is canceled under the following conditions. ● Front door LH is locked [when locked by keyfob, main power window and door lock/unlock switch or front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch)] ● Front door LH is opened (front door switch LH turns ON) ● Ignition switch ON. INTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL If interior lamp is left ON, it will not be turned off even when door is closed. BCM turns off interior lamp automatically to save battery 30 minutes after ignition switch is turned off. BCM controls interior lamps listed below: ● Room lamp ● Vanity lamps ● Front room/map lamp assembly ● Personal lamp 2nd row ● Step lamps ● Puddle lamps Revision: October 2004 LT-129 2005 Titan INTERIOR ROOM LAMP Foot lamps After lamps turn OFF by the battery saver system, the lamps illuminate again when ● signal received from keyfob, or main power window and door lock/unlock switch or front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) is locked or unlocked ● door is opened or closed ● key is removed from key switch (with column shift) or key switch and key lock solenoid (with floor shift) or inserted in key switch (with column shift) or key switch and key lock solenoid (with floor shift). Interior lamp battery saver control period can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT-II. ● Revision: October 2004 LT-130 2005 Titan INTERIOR ROOM LAMP Schematic EKS00AC5 A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA2461E Revision: October 2004 LT-131 2005 Titan INTERIOR ROOM LAMP WKWA1563E Revision: October 2004 LT-132 2005 Titan INTERIOR ROOM LAMP A B C D E F G H I J LT L M LKWA0285E Revision: October 2004 LT-133 2005 Titan INTERIOR ROOM LAMP Wiring Diagram — INT/L — EKS00AC6 WKWA2448E Revision: October 2004 LT-134 2005 Titan INTERIOR ROOM LAMP A B C D E F G H I J LT L M LKWA0286E Revision: October 2004 LT-135 2005 Titan INTERIOR ROOM LAMP WKWA1505E Revision: October 2004 LT-136 2005 Titan INTERIOR ROOM LAMP A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA2449E Revision: October 2004 LT-137 2005 Titan INTERIOR ROOM LAMP WKWA2450E Revision: October 2004 LT-138 2005 Titan INTERIOR ROOM LAMP A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA2451E Revision: October 2004 LT-139 2005 Titan INTERIOR ROOM LAMP WKWA2452E Revision: October 2004 LT-140 2005 Titan INTERIOR ROOM LAMP A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA2471E Revision: October 2004 LT-141 2005 Titan INTERIOR ROOM LAMP Terminals and Reference Values for BCM Terminal No. EKS00AC7 Measuring condition Wire color Signal name Ignition switch Reference value (Approx.) Operation or condition 121 R/L Front door switch RH signal OFF Front door switch RH 122 R/L Door switch RH signal OFF Door switch RH 131 GR Rear door switch RH signal OFF Rear door switch RH 22 G Power window switch serial link — ON (open) 0V OFF (closed) Battery voltage ON (open) 0V OFF (closed) Battery voltage ON (open) 0V OFF (closed) Battery voltage — PIIA2344J Cargo lamp switch ON. 0V Cargo lamp switch OFF. Battery voltage Vehicle key is removed. 0V Vehicle key is inserted. Battery voltage 31 P/L Cargo lamp switch signal OFF 37 B/R Key-in switch detection signal OFF 38 W/L Ignition power supply ON — Battery voltage 39 L CAN-H — — — 40 P CAN-L — — 471 SB Front door switch LH signal OFF Front door switch LH 472 SB Door switch LH signal OFF Door switch LH 481 R/Y 50 R/Y 56 R/G Rear door switch LH signal OFF Cargo bedlamp control OFF Battery saver output signal OFF — Rear door switch LH ON (open) 0V OFF (closed) Battery voltage ON (open) 0V OFF (closed) Battery voltage ON (open) 0V OFF (closed) Battery voltage Cargo lamp switch ON 0V Cargo lamp switch OFF Battery voltage 30 minutes after ignition switch is turned to OFF ON — Battery voltage — Battery voltage 57 Y/R Battery power supply OFF 62 R/W Step lamp signal OFF Any door is open (ON) 0V All doors are closed (OFF) 63 L 67 B 70 W/B Interior room/map lamp signal 0V OFF Each interior lamp switch in DOOR position Any door switch Battery voltage ON (open) 0V OFF (closed) Battery voltage Ground ON — 0V Battery power supply OFF — Battery voltage 1 Crew cab 2 King cab Revision: October 2004 LT-142 2005 Titan INTERIOR ROOM LAMP How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. EKS00AC8 A Confirm the symptom or customer complaint. Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-127, "System Description" . Carry out the Preliminary Check. Refer to LT-143, "Preliminary Check" . Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. Does the interior room lamp operate normally? If YES: GO TO 6. If NO: GO TO 4. Inspection End. Preliminary Check B C EKS00AC9 INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT D 1. CHECK FUSES OR FUSIBLE LINK Check for blown BCM fuses or fusible link. Unit Power source E Fuse or fusible link No. f Battery BCM Ignition switch ON or START position 22 F 59 Refer to LT-134, "Wiring Diagram — INT/L —" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. G H I Disconnect BCM connectors. Check voltage between BCM connector and ground. J Terminals Ignition switch position (+) Connector (–) Terminal (Wire color) 57 (Y/R) M20 M18 70 (W/B) Ground OFF ON Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage 38 (W/L) 0V Battery voltage LT L WKIA1478E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness for open between BCM and fuse. M 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between BCM and ground. Terminals Connector Terminal (Wire color) M20 67 (B) Continuity Ground Yes OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Check harness ground circuit. LIIA0915E Revision: October 2004 LT-143 2005 Titan INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONSULT-II Function (BCM) EKS00ACA CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode WORK SUPPORT DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part SELF-DIAG RESULTS CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER CONFIGURATION Description Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received data is displayed. Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. BCM part number can be read. Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. CONSULT-II OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0369E 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". BCIA0029E 3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . BCIA0030E Revision: October 2004 LT-144 2005 Titan INTERIOR ROOM LAMP 4. Touch "INT LAMP" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. A B C SKIA4963E D WORK SUPPORT Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. E Touch "INT LAMP" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch "SET I/L D-UNLCK INTCON" on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen. Touch "START". Touch "CHANGE SETT". The setting will be changed and "CUSTOMIZING COMPLETED" will be displayed. Touch "END". F G Display Item List H Item Description CONSULT-II SET I/L D-UNLCK INTCON The 30 seconds operating function of the interior room lamps can be selected when driver door is released (unlocked). ON/OFF ROOM LAMP ON TIME SET The time in order to escalate illumination can be adjusted when the interior room lamps are turned on. MODE 1 - 7 ROOM LAMP OFF TIME SET The time in order to diminish illumination can be adjusted when the interior room lamps are turned off. MODE 1 - 7 I J Reference between "MODE" and "TIME" for "TURN ON/OFF". LT MODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Time (sec.) 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 0 L DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Touch "INT LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. All signals Monitors all the signals. Selection from menu Selects and monitors the individual signal. 4. 5. 6. Touch "START". When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the items will be monitored. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop recording, touch "STOP". Display Item List Monitor item Contents IGN ON SW "ON/OFF" Displays "IGN position (ON)/OFF, ACC position (OFF)" judged from the ignition switch signal. KEY ON SW "ON/OFF" Displays "Key inserted (ON)/key removed (OFF)" status judged from the key switch signal. Revision: October 2004 LT-145 2005 Titan M INTERIOR ROOM LAMP Monitor item Contents DOOR SW-DR "ON/OFF" Displays status of the driver door as judged from the driver door switch signal. (Door is open: ON/Door is closed: OFF) DOOR SW-AS "ON/OFF" Displays "Door open (ON)/Door closed (OFF)" status, determined from passenger door switch signal. DOOR SW-RR "ON/OFF" Displays "Door open (ON)/Door closed (OFF)" status, determined from rear door switch RH signal. DOOR SW-RL "ON/OFF" Displays "Door open (ON)/Door closed (OFF)" status, determined from rear door switch LH signal. BACK DOOR SW "ON/OFF" Not used. KEY CYL LK-SW "ON/OFF" Displays "Door locked (ON)" status, determined from key cylinder lock switch in driver door. KEY CYL UN-SW "ON/OFF" Displays "Door unlocked (OFF)" status, determined from key cylinder lock switch in driver door. CDL LOCK SW "ON/OFF" Displays "Door locked (ON)/Door unlocked (OFF)" status, determined from locking detection switch in driver door. CDL UNLOCK SW "ON/OFF" Displays "Door unlocked (OFF)" status, determined from locking detection switch in passenger door. KEYLESS LOCK "ON/OFF" Displays "Locked (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from lock signal. KEYLESS UNLOCK "ON/OFF" Displays "Unlocked (ON)/Other (OFF)" status, determined from unlock signal. ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Touch "INT LAMP" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch item to be tested and check operation of the selected item. During the operation check, touching "BACK" or "OFF" deactivates the operation. Display Item List Test item INT LAMP IGN ILLUMNOTE Description Interior room lamp can be operated by any ON-OFF operations. Ignition keyhole illumination can be operated by ON-OFF operation. NOTE: This item is displayed but this model is not equipped. Front Room/Map Lamp Assembly Control Does Not Operate EKS00ACB 1. CHECK EACH SWITCH Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "INT LAMP" data monitor, make sure switches listed in display item list turn ON-OFF linked with switch operation. Refer to LT-145, "Display Item List" for switches and their functions. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Inspect malfunctioning switch system. SKIA5930E Revision: October 2004 LT-146 2005 Titan INTERIOR ROOM LAMP 2. ACTIVE TEST 1. 2. A Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. Select "INT LAMP" active test. When switch is in "DOOR" position, use active test to make sure interior room lamp operates. B Room lamps should turn on. OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> GO TO 3. C D LKIA0092E 3. CHECK FRONT ROOM/MAP LAMP ASSEMBLY INPUT 1. 2. E Turn ignition switch OFF. Check voltage between front room/map lamp assembly harness connector R102 terminal 6 (R/G) and ground. 6 (R/G) - Ground F : Battery voltage should exist. G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 5. H WKIA1683E 4. CHECK FRONT ROOM/MAP LAMP ASSEMBLY CIRCUIT I 1. 2. J Disconnect BCM connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal 63 (L) and front room/map lamp assembly harness connector R102 terminal 1 (L). 63 (L) - 1 (L) LT : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front room/map lamp assembly. NG >> Repair harness or connector. L WKIA1480E M 5. CHECK FRONT ROOM/MAP LAMP ASSEMBLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector and interior room lamp connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal 56 (R/G) and front room/map lamp assembly harness connector R102 terminal 6 (R/G). 56 (R/G) - 6 (R/G) : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM if interior lamp does not work after setting the connector again. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Repair harness or connector between BCM and room/ map lamp. Revision: October 2004 LT-147 WKIA1481E 2005 Titan INTERIOR ROOM LAMP Personal Lamp 2nd Row Control Does Not Operate (Room/Map Lamps Operate) EKS00ACC 1. CHECK EACH DOOR SWITCH Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "INT LAMP" data monitor, make sure switches listed in display item list turn ON-OFF linked with switch operation. Refer to LT-128, "SWITCH OPERATION" for switches and their function. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Inspect malfunctioning door switch. SKIA5930E 2. CHECK PERSONAL LAMP 2ND ROW OUTPUT 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF. Confirm lamp switch is in the "DOOR" position. Disconnect personal lamp 2nd row connector. Open any door. Check voltage between personal lamp 2nd row harness connector R203 terminal 3 (R/G) and ground. 3 (R/G) - Ground : Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA1482E 3. CHECK PERSONAL LAMP 2ND ROW CONTROL CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect front room/map lamp assembly connector. Check continuity between front room/map lamp assembly harness connector R102 terminal 2 (R) and personal lamp 2nd row harness connector R203 terminal 1 (R). 2 (R) - 1 (R) : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace personal lamp 2nd row. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA1684E Revision: October 2004 LT-148 2005 Titan INTERIOR ROOM LAMP All Step/Foot/Puddle Lamps Do Not Operate EKS00ACD 1. CHECK EACH DOOR SWITCH A Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "INT LAMP" data monitor, make sure switches listed in display item list turn ON-OFF linked with switch operation. Refer to LT-145, "Display Item List" for switches and their functions. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Inspect malfunctioning switch system. B C D SKIA5930E E 2. CHECK STEP LAMP POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check voltage between front step lamp LH harness connector D11 terminal + (R/G) and ground. + (R/G) - Ground F : Battery voltage should exist. G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 4. H LKIA0306E I 3. CHECK STEP LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector and front step lamp LH connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal 62 (R/W) and front step lamp LH harness connector D11 terminal – (R/W). – (R/W) - 62 (R/W) J LT : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM if step lamp does not work after setting the connector again. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Repair harness or connector. L WKIA1484E 4. CHECK STEP LAMP CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connector and front step lamp LH connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal 56 (R/G) and front step lamp LH harness connector D11 terminal + (R/G). + (R/G) - 56 (R/G) : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM if step lamp does not work after setting the connector again. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: October 2004 LT-149 WKIA1485E 2005 Titan M INTERIOR ROOM LAMP All Interior Room Lamps Do Not Operate EKS00ACE 1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. All interior room lamp switches are OFF. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between BCM harness connector M20 terminal 56 (R/G) and ground. 56 (R/G) - Ground : Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> Repair harness or connector. In a case of making a short circuit, be sure to disconnect battery negative cable after repairing harness, and then reconnect. NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . Revision: October 2004 LT-150 WKIA1486E 2005 Titan ILLUMINATION ILLUMINATION Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:27545 A EKS00ACF B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKIA3587E System Description EKS00ACG Control of the illumination lamps operation is dependent upon the position of the lighting switch (combination switch). When the lighting switch is placed in the 1ST or 2ND position (or if the auto light system is activated) the BCM (body control module) receives input signal requesting the illumination lamps to illuminate. This input signal is communicated to the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room) across the CAN communication lines. The CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R controls the tail lamp relay coil. This relay, when energized, directs power to the illumination lamps, which then illuminate. Power is supplied at all times ● to tail lamp relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and ● through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to BCM terminal 70, and Revision: October 2004 LT-151 2005 Titan ILLUMINATION through 20A fuse (No. 53, located in the IPDM E/R) ● to CPU in the IPDM E/R, and ● through 10A fuse [No.19, located in fuse block (J/B)] ● to combination meter terminal 8, and ● to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box) ● to BCM terminal 38, and ● to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and ● through 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to combination meter terminal 24. Ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 67 and ● to combination meter terminal 17 ● through grounds M57, M61, and M79, and ● to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 59 ● through grounds E9, E15 and E24. ● ILLUMINATION OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH With the lighting switch in the 1ST or 2ND position (or if the auto light system is activated), the BCM receives input signal requesting the illumination lamps to illuminate. This input signal is communicated to the IPDM E/R across the CAN communication lines. The CPU of the IPDM E/R controls the tail lamp relay coil, which, when energized, directs power ● through 10A fuse (No. 36, located in the IPDM E/R) ● through IPDM E/R terminal 49 ● to illumination control switch terminal 1 ● to VDC OFF switch terminal 3 (with VDC) ● to front room/map lamp assembly (console box illumination) terminal 7 ● to AV switch terminal 3 ● to hazard switch terminal 7 ● to audio unit terminal 8 ● to differential lock mode switch terminal 4 (with electronic locking rear differential) ● to rear sonar system OFF switch terminal 3 (with rear sonar system) ● to glove box lamp terminal + (with glove box lamp) ● to display control unit terminal 14 (with NAVI) ● to 4WD shift switch terminal 7 (with 4-wheel drive) ● to A/C control unit terminal 23 ● to cargo lamp switch terminal 4 ● to DVD player terminal 12 (with DVD entertainment system) ● to NAVI control unit terminal 25 (with NAVI) ● to pedal adjusting switch terminal 5 ● to electric brake (pre-wiring) terminal 4 ● to A/T device terminal 11 (with floor shift) ● to heated seat switch LH and RH terminal 5 (with heated seats) ● to tow mode switch terminal 3. Illumination is controlled ● through illumination control switch terminal 2 ● to VDC OFF switch terminal 4 (with VDC) ● to front room/map lamp assembly (console box illumination) terminal 8 ● to AV switch terminal 4 Revision: October 2004 LT-152 2005 Titan ILLUMINATION to hazard switch terminal 8 ● to audio unit terminal 7 ● to differential lock mode switch terminal 5 (with electronic locking rear differential) ● to rear sonar system OFF switch terminal 4 (with rear sonar system) ● to 4WD switch terminal 8 (with 4-wheel drive) ● to A/C control unit terminal 24 ● to cargo lamp switch terminal 2 ● to DVD player terminal 10 (with DVD entertainment system) ● to pedal adjusting switch terminal 6 ● to A/T device terminal 12 (with floor shift) ● to heated seat switch LH and RH terminal 6 (with heated seats) ● to tow mode switch terminal 4 ● to combination meter terminal 18. Ground is supplied ● to illumination control switch terminal 3 ● to glove box lamp terminal – (with glove box lamp) ● to display control unit terminal 3 (with NAVI) and ● to electric brake (pre-wiring) terminal 1 ● through grounds M57, M61 and M79, and ● to NAVI control unit terminal 30 (with NAVI) ● through grounds B117 and B132. With power and ground supplied, illumination lamps illuminate. ● A B C D E F G H EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL I When the combination switch (lighting switch) is in the 1ST or 2ND position (or if auto light system is activated), and the ignition switch is turned from ON or ACC to OFF, the battery saver control function is activated. Under this condition, the illumination lamps remain illuminated for 5 minutes, then the illumination lamps are J turned off. When the lighting switch is turned from OFF to 1ST or 2ND position (or if auto light system is activated) after illumination lamps are turned off by the battery saver control, the illumination lamps illuminate again. Exterior lamp battery saver control mode can be changed by the function setting of CONSULT-II. LT CAN Communication System Description EKS00ACH Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . L M Revision: October 2004 LT-153 2005 Titan ILLUMINATION Schematic EKS00ACI WKWA2453E Revision: October 2004 LT-154 2005 Titan ILLUMINATION A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA2472E Revision: October 2004 LT-155 2005 Titan ILLUMINATION WKWA2473E Revision: October 2004 LT-156 2005 Titan ILLUMINATION Wiring Diagram — ILL — EKS00ACJ A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA2427E Revision: October 2004 LT-157 2005 Titan ILLUMINATION WKWA2454E Revision: October 2004 LT-158 2005 Titan ILLUMINATION A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA2455E Revision: October 2004 LT-159 2005 Titan ILLUMINATION WKWA2456E Revision: October 2004 LT-160 2005 Titan ILLUMINATION A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA2457E Revision: October 2004 LT-161 2005 Titan ILLUMINATION WKWA2458E Revision: October 2004 LT-162 2005 Titan ILLUMINATION A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA2459E Revision: October 2004 LT-163 2005 Titan ILLUMINATION WKWA2460E Revision: October 2004 LT-164 2005 Titan ILLUMINATION A B C D E F G H I J LT L M WKWA2435E Revision: October 2004 LT-165 2005 Titan ILLUMINATION Removal and Installation of Illumination Control Switch EKS00ACK REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove cluster lid A. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" . Carefully pry tabs and remove illumination control switch from cluster lid A. WKIA1403E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 LT-166 2005 Titan BULB SPECIFICATIONS BULB SPECIFICATIONS Headlamp PFP:26297 A EKS00ACL Item Wattage (W)* Low 51 (HB4) High 60 (HB3) B *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. C Exterior Lamp EKS00ACM Item Front combination lamp Rear combination lamp Wattage (W)* Turn signal lamp/parking lamp 27/8 Side marker 3.8 Stop/Tail lamp 27/7 Turn signal lamp 27 Back-up lamp 18 Cargo lamp (tailgate) 16 Fog lamp D E F 37.5 License plate lamp 5 High-mounted stop lamp * Cargo lamp (in high-mounted stop lamp) G 16 H *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Interior Lamp/Illumination EKS00ACN Item I Wattage (W)* Glove box lamp 3.4 Room/Map lamp 8 A/T device lamp 3 Foot lamp 3.4 Step lamp 3.8 Vanity lamp 1.32 Personal lamp 5 Puddle lamp 8 J LT L *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. M Revision: October 2004 LT-167 2005 Titan BULB SPECIFICATIONS Revision: October 2004 LT-168 2005 Titan B ENGINE A LU SECTION ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions for Liquid Gasket .................................. 2 REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING .......... 2 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE..... 2 PREPARATION ........................................................... 3 Special Service Tools ............................................... 3 Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 4 LUBRICATION SYSTEM ............................................ 5 Lubrication Circuit .................................................... 5 System Drawing ....................................................... 6 ENGINE OIL ............................................................... 7 Inspection ................................................................. 7 OIL LEVEL ............................................................ 7 OIL APPEARANCE ............................................... 7 OIL LEAKAGE ....................................................... 7 OIL PRESSURE CHECK ...................................... 7 Changing Engine Oil ................................................ 8 OIL FILTER ............................................................... 10 Removal and Installation ........................................ 10 REMOVAL ........................................................... 10 INSTALLATION ................................................... 10 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ............... 10 OIL COOLER ............................................................ 11 Removal and Installation ........................................ 11 REMOVAL ........................................................... 11 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 11 INSTALLATION ................................................... 12 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 12 OIL PUMP ................................................................. 13 Removal and Installation ........................................ 13 REMOVAL ........................................................... 13 INSTALLATION ................................................... 13 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 14 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 14 DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 14 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ................ 14 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 15 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 16 Standard and Limit .................................................. 16 OIL PRESSURE .................................................. 16 OIL PUMP ........................................................... 16 REGULATOR VALVE .......................................... 16 ENGINE OIL CAPACITY ..................................... 16 F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 LU-1 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS Precautions for Liquid Gasket PFP:00001 EBS00NIK REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING ● After removing the bolts and nuts, separate the mating surface and remove the old liquid gasket sealing using Tool. Tool number ● ● : KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: Do not damage the mating surfaces. Tap the seal cutter to insert it. In areas where the Tool is difficult to use, lightly tap to slide it. WBIA0566E LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. Remove the old liquid gasket adhering to the gasket application surface and the mating surface using suitable tool. ● Remove the liquid gasket completely from the groove of the liquid gasket application surface, bolts, and bolt holes. Thoroughly clean the mating surfaces and remove adhering moisture, grease and foreign material. PBIC0003E 3. Attach the liquid gasket tube to the Tool. Tool number 4. : WS39930000 ( — ) Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . Apply the liquid gasket without breaks to the specified location with the specified dimensions. WBIA0567E If there is a groove for the liquid gasket application, apply the liquid gasket to the groove. ● As for the bolt holes, normally apply the liquid gasket inside the holes. If specified in the procedure, it should also be applied outside the holes. ● Within five minutes of liquid gasket application, install the mating component. ● If the liquid gasket protrudes, wipe it off immediately. ● Do not retighten after the installation. ● Wait 30 minutes or more after installation before refilling the engine with engine oil and engine coolant. CAUTION: If there are specific instructions in this manual, observe them. ● Revision: October 2004 LU-2 SEM159F 2005 Titan PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A EBS00KN3 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number Description (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name ST25051001 (J-25695-1) Oil pressure gauge LU Measuring oil pressure Maximum measuring range: 2,452 kPa (25 kg/cm2 , 356 psi) C D S-NT050 ST25052000 (J-25695-2) Hose Adapting oil pressure gauge to cylinder block E F S-NT559 KV10111100 (J-37228) Seal cutter G Removing steel oil pan and rear timing chain case H I NT046 KV10115801 (J-38956) Oil filter wrench Removing and installing oil filter a: 64.3 mm (2.531 in) J K S-NT375 WS39930000 ( — ) Tube presser Pressing the tube of liquid gasket L M S-NT052 Revision: October 2004 LU-3 2005 Titan PREPARATION Commercial Service Tool EBS00KN4 Tool name Description Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts PBIC0190E Deep socket Removing and installing oil pressure switch Deep socket 26 mm (1.02 in) NT818 Revision: October 2004 LU-4 2005 Titan LUBRICATION SYSTEM LUBRICATION SYSTEM Lubrication Circuit PFP:15010 A EBS00KN5 LU C D E F G H I WBIA0399E 1. Exhaust camshaft 2. Intake camshaft 3. Main oil galley 4. Chain tensioner (Left bank) 5. Oil filter 6. Oil cooler 7. Oil pan 8. Oil strainer 9. Oil pump J K 10. Chain tensioner (Right bank) L M Revision: October 2004 LU-5 2005 Titan LUBRICATION SYSTEM System Drawing EBS00KN6 PBIC1901E Revision: October 2004 LU-6 2005 Titan ENGINE OIL ENGINE OIL Inspection PFP:KLA92 A EBS00KN7 OIL LEVEL ● ● ● Before starting the engine make sure the vehicle is parked on a flat and level surface, then check the oil level. If the engine is already running, turn it off and allow 10 minutes before checking. Check that the oil level is within the low (L) and high (H) range as indicated on the dipstick. If the engine oil level is out of range, add oil as required. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . LU C D SMA954C E OIL APPEARANCE ● ● Check the engine oil for a white milky appearance or excessive contamination. If the engine oil is milky, it is highly probable that it is contaminated with engine coolant. Repair the broken parts. OIL LEAKAGE F G Check for oil leakage around the following areas: ● Oil pan ● Oil pan drain plug ● Oil pressure sensor ● Oil filter ● Oil cooler ● Intake valve timing control cover ● Intake valve timing control solenoid valve ● Front cover ● Mating surface between cylinder block and cylinder head ● Mating surface between cylinder head and rocker cover ● Crankshaft oil seal (front and rear) H I J K OIL PRESSURE CHECK L WARNING: ● Be careful not to burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot. ● Put the selector lever in the Park “P” position. 1. Check the engine oil level. Refer to LU-7, "OIL LEVEL" . 2. Remove engine front undercover using power tool. 3. Disconnect the oil pressure sensor harness connector. 4. Remove oil pressure sensor. M WBIA0538E Revision: October 2004 LU-7 2005 Titan ENGINE OIL 5. Install Tools. Tool number : ST25051001 (J-25695-1) : ST25052000 (J-25695-2) WBIA0571E 6. 7. Start the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. Check the engine oil pressure with engine running under no-load. Engine oil pressure [Engine oil temperature at 80°C (175°F)] Unit: kPa (kg/cm2, psi) 8. a. b. Engine Speed Approximate Discharge Pressure Idle speed More than 98 (1.0, 14) 2,000 rpm More than 294 (3.0, 43) CAUTION: If the difference is extreme, check the oil passages and oil pump for leaks and blockages. After the inspections, install oil pressure sensor as follows: Remove old liquid gasket adhering to oil pressure sensor and engine. Apply liquid gasket and tighten oil pressure sensor to the specification. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . Oil pressure sensor torque c. : 14.7 N·m (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft-lb) After warming up engine, make sure there is no leakage of engine oil with engine running. Changing Engine Oil EBS00KN8 WARNING: ● Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot. ● Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer; try to avoid direct skin contact with used engine oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. 1. Remove engine front undercover using power tool. 2. Warm up engine, and check for oil leakage from engine components. 3. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. 4. Loosen oil filler cap, then remove drain plug. 5. Drain engine oil. 6. Install drain plug with new washer. CAUTION: ● Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new washer. Oil pan drain plug 7. KBIA2498E : 34.3 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb) Refill with new engine oil. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants" . Revision: October 2004 LU-8 2005 Titan ENGINE OIL Engine oil capacity (Approximate): Drain and refill With oil filter change Unit: 6.2 (6 1/2, 5-1/2) Without oil filter change 5.9 (6-1/4, 5-1/4) Dry engine (engine overhaul) (US qt, Imp qt) A LU 7.6 (8, 6-3/4) CAUTION: ● The refill capacity depends on the engine oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. ● Always use the oil level gauge to determine when the proper amount of engine oil is in the engine. 8. Warm up engine and check area around drain plug and oil filter for oil leakage. 9. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. 10. Check engine oil level. Refer to LU-7, "OIL LEVEL" . C D E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 LU-9 2005 Titan OIL FILTER OIL FILTER Removal and Installation PFP:15208 EBS00KN9 REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the engine front undercover using power tool. Remove the oil filter using Tool. Tool number : KV10115801 (J-38956) CAUTION: The oil filter is provided with a relief valve. Use Genuine NISSAN oil filter or equivalent. ● Be careful not to get burned when the engine and engine oil are hot. ● When removing, prepare a shop cloth to absorb any engine oil leakage or spillage. ● Do not allow engine oil to adhere to the drive belts. ● Completely wipe off any engine oil that adheres to the engine and the vehicle. ● WBIA0388E INSTALLATION 1. 2. Remove foreign materials adhering to the oil filter installation surface. Apply engine oil to the oil seal circumference of the new oil filter. SMA010 3. Screw the oil filter manually until it touches the installation surface, then tighten it by 2/3 turn. Or tighten to specification. Oil filter: 4. 5. 17.7 N·m (1.8 kg-m, 13 ft-lb) Inspect the engine for oil leakage. Refer to LU-10, "INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION" . Install the engine front undercover using power tool. SMA229B INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Check the engine oil level. Refer to LU-7, "OIL LEVEL" . Start the engine and check for engine oil leakage. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. Check the engine oil level and add engine oil as required. Revision: October 2004 LU-10 2005 Titan OIL COOLER OIL COOLER Removal and Installation PFP:21305 A EBS00KNA LU C D E F G H I WBIA0414E 1. Oil pan 2. Water hose 3. Water pipe 4. Water hose 5. Connector bolt 6. Oil filter 7. Oil cooler 8. O-ring 9. Relief valve 10. Water hose 11. Connector pipe J K 12. Gasket WARNING: Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil and engine coolant are hot. L REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove engine front undercover using power tool. Disconnect water hoses, pinching hoses near oil cooler to prevent engine coolant from spilling. CAUTION: Do not spill engine coolant on the drive belt. Remove oil filter. Refer to LU-10, "REMOVAL" . CAUTION: Do not spill engine oil on the drive belts. Remove connector bolt, and remove oil cooler. M INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Oil Cooler Check oil cooler for cracks. Check oil cooler for clogging by blowing compressed air through engine coolant inlet. If necessary, replace oil cooler assembly. Relief Valve Inspect relief valve for movement, cracks and breaks by pushing the ball. If replacement is necessary, remove valve by prying it out using a suitable tool. Install a new valve in place by tapping it. Revision: October 2004 LU-11 2005 Titan OIL COOLER INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal, paying attention to the following: ● Confirm that no foreign objects are adhering to the sealing surfaces of the oil cooler or oil pan. ● Tighten the connecting bolt after aligning the stopper on the oil pan side with protrusion of the oil cooler. KBIA2500E INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Check levels and add engine oil and engine coolant. Refer to LU-7, "OIL LEVEL" and CO-10, "LEVEL CHECK" . Start the engine, and check for leaks of engine oil and engine coolant. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes. Check engine oil level and engine coolant level again. Revision: October 2004 LU-12 2005 Titan OIL PUMP OIL PUMP Removal and Installation PFP:15010 A EBS00KNB LU C D E F WBIA0415E 1. Oil pump body 2. Outer rotor 3. Inner rotor 4. Oil pump cover 5. Oil pump drive spacer 6. Regulator valve 7. Regulator spring 8. Regulator plug H REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. G I Remove front cover. Refer to EM-36, "REMOVAL" . Remove the oil pump drive spacer. Remove the oil pump. J K L KBIA2512E M INSTALLATION 1. ● ● ● Installation is in the reverse order of removal, paying attention of the following: When inserting the oil pump drive spacer, align the crankshaft key and the flat face of the inner rotor. If they are not aligned, rotate the oil pump inner rotor by hand. Make sure that the each part is aligned and tap lightly until it reaches the end. KBIA2490E Revision: October 2004 LU-13 2005 Titan OIL PUMP INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ● ● ● Start the engine, and check for leaks of engine oil. Stop engine and wait 10 minutes. Check level and add engine oil as required. Refer to LU-7, "OIL LEVEL" . Disassembly and Assembly EBS00KNC DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Remove oil pump cover. Remove inner rotor and outer rotor from oil pump body. Remove the regulator plug, regulator spring and regulator valve. INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Clearance of Oil Pump Parts ● Measure radial clearance using a suitable tool. Body to outer rotor (position 1) : 0.114 - 0.200 mm (0.0045 - 0.0079 in) Inner rotor to outer rotor tip (position 2) : Below 0.180 mm (0.0071 in) PBIC0139E ● Measure side clearance using suitable tools. Body to inner rotor (position 3) : 0.030 - 0.070 mm (0.0012 - 0.0028 in) Body to outer rotor (position 4) : 0.030 - 0.090 mm (0.0012 - 0.0035 in) PBIC0140E ● 1. Calculate the clearance between inner rotor and oil pump body as follows. Measure the outer diameter of protruded portion of inner rotor (position 5) using suitable tool. PBIC0141E Revision: October 2004 LU-14 2005 Titan OIL PUMP 2. Measure the inner diameter of oil pump body to brazed portion (position 6) using suitable tool. A LU C PBIC0142E D 3. Calculate the clearance using the following formula. ● (Clearance) = (Inner diameter of oil pump body) - (Outer diameter of inner rotor) E Inner rotor to brazed portion of housing clearance : 0.045 - 0.091 mm (0.0018 - 0.0036 in) F Regulator Valve Clearance Check regulator valve to oil pump cover clearance using the following formula. ● (Clearance) = D1 (Valve hole diameter) - D2 (Outer Diameter of valve) G Regulator valve to oil pump cover : 0.040 - 0.097 mm (0.0016 - 0.0038 in) H CAUTION: Coat regulator valve with engine oil. ● Check that it falls smoothly into the regulator valve hole by its own weight. ● I PBIC0143E J ASSEMBLY Installation is in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Install the inner rotor and outer rotor with the punched marks on the oil pump cover side. K L M PBIC0144E Revision: October 2004 LU-15 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Standard and Limit PFP:00030 EBS00KND OIL PRESSURE Engine speed rpm Approximate discharge oil pressure Idle speed 2,000 More than 98 (1.0, 14) More than 294 (3.0, 43) kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) OIL PUMP Unit: mm (in) Body to outer rotor radial clearance 0.114 - 0.200 (0.0045 - 0.0079) Inner rotor to outer rotor tip clearance Below 0.180 (0.0071) Body to inner rotor side clearance 0.030 - 0.070 (0.0012 - 0.0028) Body to outer rotor side clearance 0.030 - 0.090 (0.0012 - 0.0035) Inner rotor to brazed portion of housing clearance 0.045 - 0.091 (0.0018 - 0.0036) REGULATOR VALVE Unit: mm (in) Regulator valve to oil pump cover clearance 0.040 - 0.097 (0.0016 - 0.0038) ENGINE OIL CAPACITY Unit: Drain and refill With oil filter change 6.2 (6 1/2, 5-1/2) Without oil filter change 5.9 (6-1/4, 5-1/4) Dry engine (engine overhaul) Revision: October 2004 (US qt, Imp qt) 7.6 (8, 6-3/4) LU-16 2005 Titan L MAINTENANCE A B SECTION MAINTENANCE C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3 PREPARATION ........................................................... 4 Special Service Tools ............................................... 4 Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 4 GENERAL MAINTENANCE ....................................... 5 General Maintenance ............................................... 5 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ....................................... 7 Introduction of Periodic Maintenance ....................... 7 Schedule 1 ............................................................... 7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE .................................................................. 7 CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE ............... 8 Schedule 2 ............................................................... 9 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE .................................................................. 9 CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE ............. 10 RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .......11 Fluids and Lubricants ..............................................11 SAE Viscosity Number ........................................... 12 GASOLINE ENGINE OIL .................................... 12 ANTI-FREEZE COOLANT MIXTURE RATIO ..... 12 ENGINE MAINTENANCE ......................................... 13 Checking Drive Belts .............................................. 13 DRIVE BELT TENSION ...................................... 13 Changing Engine Coolant ...................................... 13 DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT ......................... 13 REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT ........................ 14 FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM ......................... 15 Checking Fuel Lines ............................................... 16 Changing Fuel Filter ............................................... 16 Changing Engine Air Cleaner Filter ........................ 16 VISCOUS PAPER TYPE ..................................... 16 Changing Engine Oil .............................................. 17 Changing Oil Filter ................................................. 17 Changing Spark Plugs ........................................... 18 REMOVAL ........................................................... 18 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 18 Revision: October 2004 INSTALLATION ................................................... 19 Checking EVAP Vapor Lines .................................. 19 CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE ................... 20 Changing In-cabin Microfilter .................................. 20 Checking Exhaust System ...................................... 21 Checking A/T Fluid ................................................. 21 Changing A/T Fluid ................................................. 23 Changing Transfer Fluid ......................................... 24 DRAINING ........................................................... 24 FILLING ............................................................... 24 Checking Transfer Fluid ......................................... 24 FLUID LEAKAGE AND FLUID LEVEL ................ 24 Changing Transfer Oil Filter ................................... 25 REMOVAL ........................................................... 25 INSTALLATION ................................................... 26 Checking Propeller Shaft ........................................ 26 Checking Final Drive Oil ......................................... 26 OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL ......................... 26 Changing Final Drive Oil ......................................... 27 DRAINING ........................................................... 27 FILLING ............................................................... 27 Balancing Wheels ................................................... 27 REMOVAL ........................................................... 27 WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT ..................... 27 Tire Rotation ........................................................... 30 Checking Brake Fluid Level and Leaks .................. 30 Checking Brake Lines and Cables ......................... 30 Checking Disc Brake .............................................. 30 ROTOR ................................................................ 30 CALIPER ............................................................. 31 PAD ..................................................................... 31 Checking Steering Gear and Linkage ..................... 31 STEERING GEAR ............................................... 31 STEERING LINKAGE ......................................... 31 Checking Power Steering Fluid and Lines .............. 31 CHECKING FLUID LEVEL .................................. 31 CHECKING LINES .............................................. 32 Checking Axle and Suspension Parts .................... 32 FRONT AND REAR AXLE AND SUSPENSION PARTS ................................................................. 32 MA-1 2005 Titan F G H I J K MA M DRIVE SHAFT ..................................................... 32 Lubricating Locks, Hinges and Hood Latches ........ 33 Checking Seat Belts, Buckles, Retractors, Anchors Revision: October 2004 and Adjusters ..........................................................34 MA-2 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A ELS0019C The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. B C D E F G H I J K MA M Revision: October 2004 MA-3 2005 Titan PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 ELS0019D The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number Description (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name KV10115801 (J-38956) Oil filter cap wrench Removing and installing oil filter a: 64.3 mm (2.531 in) NT375 — (J-23688) Engine coolant refractometer Checking concentration of ethylene glycol in engine coolant WBIA0539E Commercial Service Tool ELS0019E (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description (J-45695) Coolant refill tool Filling cooling system LMA053 Revision: October 2004 MA-4 2005 Titan GENERAL MAINTENANCE GENERAL MAINTENANCE General Maintenance PFP:00000 A ELS0019F General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during the normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle. They are essential if the vehicle is to continue operating properly. The owner can perform these checks and inspections or have their NISSAN dealers perform them. B OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified. Item Tires Check the pressure with a gauge at least once a month and always prior to a long distance trip. Adjust to the specified pressure if necessary. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear. Wheel lug nuts When checking the tires, make sure no nuts are missing, and check for any loose nuts. Tighten if necessary. Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage. Repair as necessary. Tire rotation Tires should be rotated every 12,000 km (7,500 miles). Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle pulls to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed. C Reference page — WT-6, "Rotation" E — WT-6, "Rotation" F WT-5, "Balancing Wheels", FSU-6, "Front Wheel Alignment" G Windshield wiper blades Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly. Doors and engine hood Check that all doors and the engine hood operate smoothly as well as the back hatch. Also make sure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate if necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released. When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently. MA-33, "Lubricating Locks, Hinges and Hood Latches" Make sure that the head lamps, stop lamps, tail lamps, turn signal lamps, and other lamps are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check head lamp aim. Clean the head lamps on a regular basis. LT-29, "Aiming Adjustment" for US, LT-45, "Aiming Adjustment" for Canada Lamps — H I J K INSIDE THE VEHICLE The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc. Item Reference page Make sure that all warning lamps and buzzers/chimes are operating properly. Windshield wiper and washer Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak. — Windshield defroster Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner. — Steering wheel Check that it has the specified play. Be sure to check for changes in the steering condition, such as excessive play, hard steering or strange noises. Seats Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seat back recliner, etc. to make sure they operate smoothly and that all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks (if equipped) hold securely in all latched positions. Check that the latches lock securely for folding-down rear seat backs. PS-7, "CHECKING STEERING WHEEL PLAY" — Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt system (e.g. buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage. SB-10, "Seat Belt Inspection", MA-34, "Checking Seat Belts, Buckles, Retractors, Anchors and Adjusters" Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation. Keep the floor mats away from the pedal. — MA-5 MA DI-25, "Electrical Components Inspection" Warning lamps and buzzers/chimes Revision: October 2004 D 2005 Titan M GENERAL MAINTENANCE Item Reference page Brakes Check that the brake does not pull the vehicle to one side when applied. — Brake pedal and booster Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure it has the proper distance under it when depressed fully. Check the brake booster function. Keep the floor mats away from the pedal. BR-6, "Inspection and Adjustment", BR-18, "On-Vehicle Service" Parking brake Check that the parking brake control has the proper travel and make sure that the vehicle is held securely on a fairly steep hill when only the parking brake is applied. PB-3, "On-Vehicle Service" Automatic transmission “Park” mechanism On a fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in the P position without applying the brakes. — UNDER THE HOOD AND VEHICLE The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (e.g. each time you check the engine oil or refuel). Item Reference page Windshield washer fluid Check that there is adequate fluid in the tank. Engine coolant level Check the coolant level when the engine is cold. Radiator and hoses Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, deterioration or loose connections. — MA-13 — Brake fluid level Make sure that the brake fluid level is between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the reservoirs MA-30 Battery Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level. — Engine drive belt Make sure that no belt is frayed, worn, cracked or oily. MA-13 Engine oil level Check the level on the dipstick after parking the vehicle on a level spot and turning off the engine. MA-17 Power steering fluid level and lines Check the level on the reservoir with the engine off. Check the lines for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc. MA-31 Automatic transmission fluid level Check the level on the dipstick after putting the selector lever in “P” with the engine idling. MA-21 Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately locate the trouble and correct it. MA-21 The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances, otherwise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, being careful to clean those areas where mud and dirt can easily accumulate. — Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or gasoline fumes are evident, check for the cause and correct it immediately. — Underbody Fluid leaks Revision: October 2004 MA-6 2005 Titan PERIODIC MAINTENANCE PERIODIC MAINTENANCE Introduction of Periodic Maintenance PFP:00026 A ELS0019G Two different maintenance schedules are provided, and should be used, depending upon the conditions in which the vehicle is mainly operated. After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, continue the periodic maintenance at the same mileage or time intervals, whichever comes first. Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 1 if your driving habits frequently includes one or more of the following driving conditions: Schedule 1 ● Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km). ● Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing. ● Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go “rush hour” traffic. ● Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police, taxi or door-to-door delivery use. ● Driving in dusty conditions. ● Driving on rough, muddy, or salt spread roads. ● Towing a trailer or a car-top carrier. Emission Control System Maintenance MA-7 Chassis and Body Maintenance MA-8 B C D E Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 2 if none of the driving conditions shown in Schedule 1 apply to the driving habits. Schedule 2 Emission Control System Maintenance MA-9 Chassis and Body Maintenance MA-10 Maintenance for off-road driving (4x4 only) After driving the vehicle off-road through sand, mud, or water; more frequent maintenance may be required for the following items: Brake pads and rotors Brake lines and hoses Rear final drive oil, transmission fluid, and transfer fluid Steering linkage Drive shafts Engine air cleaner filter In-cabin microfilters Schedule 1 ELS0019H F G H I J K EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Abbreviations: R = Replace. I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. [ ]: At the mileage intervals only MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months Drive belts NOTE (1) Air cleaner filter NOTE (2) 3.75 (6) 3 7.50 (12) 6 11.25 (18) 9 15 (24) 12 18.75 (30) 15 22.5 (36) 18 26.25 (42) 21 30 (48) 24 Reference Section Page or Content Title MA-13 [R] MA-16 EVAP vapor lines I* MA-19 Fuel lines I* MA-16 Fuel filter NOTE (3) MA-16 Engine coolant NOTE (4) MA-13 Engine oil R R R R R R R R MA-17 Engine oil filter R R R R R R R R MA-17 Spark plugs (PLATINUMTIPPED type) Intake and exhaust valve clearance* Revision: October 2004 Replace every 105,000 miles (169,000 km). NOTE (5) MA-18 EM-52 MA-7 2005 Titan MA M PERIODIC MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months 33.75 (54) 27 37.5 (60) 30 41.25 (66) 33 45 (72) 36 48.75 (78) 39 52.5 (84) 42 56.25 (90) 45 Reference Section Page or Content Title 60 (96) 48 Drive belts NOTE (1) I* MA-13 Air cleaner filter NOTE (2) [R] MA-16 EVAP vapor lines I* MA-19 Fuel lines I* MA-16 Fuel filter NOTE (3) Engine coolant NOTE (4) MA-16 R* MA-13 Engine oil R R R R R R R R MA-17 Engine oil filter R R R R R R R R MA-17 Spark plugs (PLATINUMTIPPED type) Intake and exhaust valve clearance* Replace every 105,000 miles (169,000 km). MA-18 NOTE (5) EM-52 (1) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found damaged. (2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required. (3) Maintenance-free item. For service procedures, go to the FL section. (4) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months. (5) If valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance. * Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required. CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE Abbreviations: R = Replace. I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. L = Lubricate. [ ]: At the mileage intervals only. MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months 3.75 (6) 3 7.5 (12) 6 Brake lines and cables 11.25 (18) 9 15 (24) 12 18.75 (30) 15 22.5 (36) 18 I Brake pads and rotors I I I 26.25 (42) 21 30 (48) 24 Reference Section - Page or - Content Title I MA-30 I MA-30 Automatic transmission fluid NOTE (1) I I MA-21 Transfer fluid and front final drive oil NOTE (1) I I MA-24, MA-26 Rear final drive oil NOTE (1) I I MA-24, MA-26 I MA-31, MA-32 Steering gear, linkage, axle, and suspension parts Tire Rotation I I I NOTE (2) MA-30 Drive shaft boots and propeller shaft (4x4) I I I I MA-26 Exhaust system I I I I MA-21 R MA-20 In-cabin microfilter Revision: October 2004 R MA-8 2005 Titan PERIODIC MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. 33.75 (54) 27 37.5 (60) 30 41.25 (66) 33 Brake lines and cables 45 (72) 36 48.75 (78) 39 52.5 (84) 42 56.25 (90) 45 I Brake pads and rotors I Automatic transmission fluid I NOTE (1) I I 60 (96) 48 Reference Section - Page or - Content Title I MA-30 I MA-30 I MA-21 Transfer fluid and front final drive oil NOTE (1) I I MA-24, MA-26 Rear final drive oil NOTE (1) I I MA-24, MA-26 I MA-31, MA-32 Steering gear, linkage, axle, and suspension parts Tire Rotation I I I NOTE (2) A B C D E MA-30 Drive shaft boots and propeller shaft (4x4) I I I I MA-26 Exhaust system I I I I MA-21 R MA-20 In-cabin microfilter R (1) If towing a trailer, or a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months. (2) Refer to “Tire rotation” under the “General maintenance” heading earlier in this section. Schedule 2 F G H ELS0019I EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Abbreviations: R = Replace. I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. Drive belts [ ]: At the mileage intervals only MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months 7.5 (12) 6 15 (24) 12 22.5 (36) 18 30 (48) 24 37.5 (60) 30 45 (72) 36 52.5 (84) 42 NOTE (1) 60 (96) 48 Reference Section - Page or - Content Title I* MA-13 [R] [R] MA-16 EVAP vapor lines I* I* MA-19 Fuel lines I* I* MA-16 Air cleaner filter Fuel filter NOTE (2) Engine coolant NOTE (3) R* MA-13 R R R R R R R R MA-17 Engine oil filter R R R R R R R R MA-17 Intake and exhaust valve clearance* Replace every 105,000 miles (169,000 km). NOTE (4) MA-18 EM-52 (1) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found damaged. (2) Maintenance-free item. For service procedures, go to FL section. (3) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months. (4) If valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance. * Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required. Revision: October 2004 J K MA MA-16 Engine oil Spark plugs (PLATINUM-TIPPED type) I MA-9 2005 Titan M PERIODIC MAINTENANCE CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE Abbreviations: R = Replace. I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary. MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first. L = Lubricate. [ ]: At the mileage interval only. MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000) Months 7.5 (12) 6 15 (24) 12 22.5 (36) 18 30 (48) 24 37.5 (60) 30 45 (72) 36 52.5 (84) 42 60 (96) 48 Reference Section - Page or - Content Title Brake lines and cables I I I I MA-30 Brake pads and rotors I I I I MA-30 Automatic transmission fluid I I I I MA-21 Transfer fluid and front final drive oil I I I I MA-24, MA-26 Rear final drive oil I I I I MA-24, MA-26 I MA-31, MA-32 Steering gear, linkage, axle, and suspension parts. Tire rotation Drive shaft boots and propeller shaft (4x4) I NOTE (1) MA-30 I Exhaust system In-cabin microfilter I I I R R R I MA-26 I MA-21 R MA-20 (1) Refer to “Tire rotation” under the “General maintenance” heading earlier in this section. Revision: October 2004 MA-10 2005 Titan RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS Fluids and Lubricants Metric Fuel 105.8 With oil filter change Without oil filter change Dry engine (engine overhaul) Cooling system A ELS0019J Capacity (Approximate) Description Engine oil Drain and refill PFP:00000 With reservoir at MAX level Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) 6.2 5.9 Recommended Fluids/Lubricants US measure Imp measure 28 gal 23 1/4 gal 6 1/2 qt 6 1/4 qt Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (RON 91), or E-85 Ethanol fuel for Flexible Fuel Vehicles (FFV) *8 5 1/4 qt ● API Certification Mark*1 ● API grade SL, Energy Conserving*1 ● ILSAC grade GF-III*1 7.6 8 qt 6 3/4 qt 12.2 3 1/4 gal 2 5/8 gal Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze coolant or equivalent 10.6 11 1/4 qt 9 3/8 qt Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF*2 Rear final drive oil 2.01 4 1/4 pt 3 1/2 pt Transfer fluid 2.0 2 1/8 qt 1 3/4 qt Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF (Continental U.S and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid *7 Front final drive oil 1.6 3 3/8 pt 2 7/8 pt API GL-5 Viscosity SAE 80W-90 *6 Power steering fluid (PSF) 1.0 2 1/8 pt 1 3/4 pt Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent*3 Brake fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent, DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116) *4 Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (lithium soap base) Brake grease — — — PBC (poly butyl cuprysil) grease or equivalent 1 1/4 gal 1 gal Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-freeze or equivalent 1.54 ± 0.11 lb 1.54 ± 0.11 lb 6.8 fl oz 7.0 fl oz Air conditioning system refrigerant Air conditioning system lubricants 4.5 0.70 ± 0.05 kg 200 m NISSAN Luminous Oil Type S (DH-PS) (part no. KLH00-PAGS0) or equivalent*5 *3: For Canada, NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), DEXRONTM III or MERCONTM or equivalent ATF may also be used. *4: Available in mainland U.S.A. through your NISSAN dealer. *5: For further details, see “Air conditioner specification label”. *6: See your NISSAN dealer for service for synthetic oil. *7: DEXRONTM III, MERCONTM or equivalent may also be used. Outside the continental United States and Alaska contact a NISSAN dealership for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended brand(s) of DEXRONTM III or MERCONTM Automatic Transmission Fluid. *8: For further details, refer to GI-5, "Precautions for Fuel (Unleaded Regular Gasoline Recommended)" . MA-11 D E F G H I J K HFC-134a (R-134a)*5 *1: For further details, refer to MA-12, "SAE Viscosity Number" . *2: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty. Revision: October 2004 C 5 1/2 qt API GL-5 Synthetic 75W-140 Gear Oil (Part No. 999MP-DF100P) or equivalent *6 Windshield washer fluid B 2005 Titan MA M RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS SAE Viscosity Number ELS0019K GASOLINE ENGINE OIL ● ● SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all temperatures. SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40 viscosity oils may be used if the ambient temperature is above -18°C (0°F). Use of 5W-30 viscosity oil will increase fuel economy. MMA117AA ANTI-FREEZE COOLANT MIXTURE RATIO The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a high-quality, long life, year-round, anti-freeze coolant solution. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Therefore, additional cooling system additives are not necessary. For outside temperatures down to: Anti-freeze coolant mixture ratio °C °F Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze coolant Demineralized water or distilled water – 35° – 30° 50 % 50 % CAUTION: ● When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze coolant or equivalent with the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized water or distilled water. ● Other types of coolant solutions may damage your cooling system. Revision: October 2004 MA-12 2005 Titan ENGINE MAINTENANCE ENGINE MAINTENANCE Checking Drive Belts PFP:00000 A ELS0019L B C D E F G LBIA0391E 1. Drive Belt 2. Power Steering Pump Pulley 3. 4. Crankshaft Pulley 5. A/C Compressor 6. Generator pulley Idler Pulley 7. Cooling Fan Pulley 8. Water Pump Pulley 9. Drive Belt Tensioner H WARNING: I Be sure to perform when the engine is stopped. 1. Remove air duct and resonator assembly (inlet) when inspecting drive belt. 2. Make sure that indicator (single line notch) of each auto tensioner is within the allowable working range J “A” (between three line notches) as shown. NOTE: ● Check the auto tensioner indication when the engine is cold. K ● When the new drive belt is installed, the range should be as shown. ● The indicator notch is located on the moving side of the auto tensioner. 3. Visually check entire belt for wear, damage or cracks. MA 4. If the indicator is out of allowable working range or belt is damaged, replace the belt. Refer to EM-12, "DRIVE BELTS" . DRIVE BELT TENSION M There is no manual drive belt tension adjustment. The drive belt tension is automatically adjusted by the auto tensioner. Changing Engine Coolant ELS0019M WARNING: ● To avoid being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot. ● Wrap a thick cloth around the cap to carefully remove the cap. First, turn the cap a quarter of a turn to release any built-up pressure, then push down and turn the cap all the way to remove it. DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and set temperature control lever all the way to HOT position or the highest temperature position. Wait 10 seconds and turn ignition switch OFF. Remove the engine front undercover using power tool. Revision: October 2004 MA-13 2005 Titan ENGINE MAINTENANCE 3. Open the radiator drain plug at the bottom of the radiator, and remove the radiator filler cap. This is the only step required when partially draining the cooling system (radiator only). CAUTION: Do not to allow the coolant to contact the drive belts. WBIA0391E 4. When draining all of the coolant in the system for engine removal or repair, it is necessary to drain the cylinder block. Remove the RH cylinder block drain plug to drain the right bank and the oil cooler hose to drain the left bank as shown. PBIC0146E WBIA0392E 5. 6. Remove the reservoir tank to drain the engine coolant, then clean the reservoir tank before installing it. Check the drained coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration. If the coolant is contaminated, flush the engine cooling system. Refer to MA-15, "FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM" . REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT 1. Close the radiator drain plug. Install the reservoir tank, cylinder block drain plug, and the oil cooler hose, if removed for a total system drain or for engine removal or repair. ● The radiator must be completely empty of coolant and water. ● Apply sealant to the threads of the cylinder block drain plug. Use Genuine High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" . Radiator drain plug RH cylinder block drain plug 2. 3. : Refer to CO-12, "RADIATOR" . : Refer to EM-76, "CYLINDER BLOCK" . Set the vehicle heater controls to the full HOT and heater ON position. Turn the vehicle ignition ON with the engine OFF as necessary to activate the heater mode. Remove the vented reservoir cap and replace it with a non-vented reservoir cap before filling the cooling system. Revision: October 2004 MA-14 2005 Titan ENGINE MAINTENANCE 4. 5. Install the Tool by installing the radiator cap adapter onto the radiator neck opening. Then attach the gauge body assembly with the refill tube and the venturi assembly to the radiator cap adapter. Insert the refill hose into the coolant mixture container that is placed at floor level. Make sure the ball valve is in the closed position. ● Use Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze coolant or equivalent, mixed 50/50 with distilled water or demineralized water. Refer to MA-12, "ANTI-FREEZE COOLANT MIXTURE RATIO" . A B C D Cooling system capacity (with reservoir “MAX” level) 6. 8. E Install an air hose to the venturi assembly, the air pressure must be within specification. Compressed air supply pressure 7. : Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants" . : 5.7 - 8.5 kPa (5.6 - 8.4 kg/cm2 , 80 - 120 psi) F CAUTION: The compressed air supply must be equipped with an air dryer. LLIA0058E The vacuum gauge will begin to rise and there will be an audible hissing noise. During this process open the ball valve on the refill hose slightly. Coolant will be visible rising in the refill hose. Once the refill hose is full of coolant, close the ball valve. This will purge any air trapped in the refill hose. Continue to draw the vacuum until the gauge reaches 28 inches of vacuum. The gauge may not reach 28 inches in high altitude locations, refer to the vacuum specifications based on the altitude above sea level. Altitude above sea level 0 - 100 m (328 ft) 300 m (984 ft) 500 m (1,641 ft) 1,000 m (3,281 ft) 10. 11. 12. 13. J Vacuum gauge reading : 28 inches of vacuum : 27 inches of vacuum : 26 inches of vacuum : 24 - 25 inches of vacuum K When the vacuum gauge has reached the specified amount, disconnect the air hose and wait 20 seconds to see if the system loses any vacuum. If the vacuum level drops, perform any necessary repairs to the system and repeat steps 6 - 8 to bring the vacuum to the specified amount. Recheck for any leaks. Place the coolant container (with the refill hose inserted) at the same level as the top of the radiator. Then open the ball valve on the refill hose so the coolant will be drawn up to fill the cooling system. The cooling system is full when the vacuum gauge reads zero. CAUTION: Do not allow the coolant container to get too low when filling, to avoid air from being drawn into the cooling system. Remove the Tool from the radiator neck opening and install the radiator cap. Remove the non-vented reservoir cap. Fill the cooling system reservoir tank to the specified level. Run the engine to warm up the cooling system and top up the system as necessary before installing the vented reservoir cap. FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM 1. 2. 3. Drain the water from the engine cooling system. Refer to MA-13, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . Fill the radiator and the reservoir tank (to the “MAX” line), with water. Reinstall the radiator cap and leave the vented reservoir cap off. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. Revision: October 2004 MA-15 H I LLIA0057E 9. G 2005 Titan MA M ENGINE MAINTENANCE 4. 5. 6. 7. Press the engine accelerator two or three times under no-load. Stop the engine and wait until it cools down. Drain the water from the engine cooling system. Refer to MA-13, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . Repeat steps 2 through 6 until clear water begins to drain from the radiator. Checking Fuel Lines ELS0019N Inspect the fuel lines and fuel tank for improper mounting, leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing, or deterioration. As necessary, repair or replace any faulty parts. SMA803A Changing Fuel Filter ELS0019O The fuel filter is part of the fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly. Refer to FL-5, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" . WARNING: Before replacing the fuel filter, release the fuel pressure from the fuel system. Refer to EC-92, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" . Changing Engine Air Cleaner Filter ELS0019P VISCOUS PAPER TYPE LBIA0394E 1. Air cleaner case (upper) 4. Air duct and resonator assembly 2. Air cleaner filter 3. Air cleaner case (lower) NOTE: ● The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals. ● Replace the air filter as necessary for required maintenance. 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet). 2. Remove the air cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner case (lower). 4. Install the new air cleaner filter in the air cleaner case (lower). 5. Install the air cleaner case (upper). Revision: October 2004 MA-16 2005 Titan ENGINE MAINTENANCE 6. Install the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet). A Changing Engine Oil ELS001H6 WARNING: ● Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine and engine oil are hot. ● Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer; try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. 1. Warm up the engine, and check for any oil leaks. 2. Stop the engine and wait for at least 10 minutes. 3. Remove the oil drain plug and oil filler cap to drain the old oil. 4. Install a new washer on the oil drain plug, then install the oil drain plug in the oil pan. Oil drain plug 5. C D : Refer to EM-76, "CYLINDER BLOCK" . E CAUTION: Clean the drain plug and install with a new washer. Refill the engine with new specified engine oil. Oil grade and viscosity Oil capacity 6. 7. 8. B F : Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants" . : Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants" . CAUTION: The refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use the “Refill oil capacity” values as a reference and check the oil level using the dipstick when filling the engine with oil. Warm up the engine and check the area around the drain plug and oil filter for any oil leaks. Stop the engine and wait for more than 10 minutes. Check the oil level using the dipstick as shown. Add oil as necessary and install the oil filler cap. CAUTION: Do not overfill the engine with oil. G H I J K SMA954C MA Changing Oil Filter 1. Remove the oil filter using Tool. Tool number 2. ELS0019R M : KV10115801 (J-38956) WARNING: Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine and engine oil are hot. NOTE: The filter is a full-flow cartridge type and is provided with a relief valve. Clean the oil filter mounting surface on the cylinder block. Coat the oil filter rubber seal with engine oil as shown. SMA010 Revision: October 2004 MA-17 2005 Titan ENGINE MAINTENANCE 3. 4. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten the oil filter an additional 2/3 turn as shown. Add new specified engine oil as necessary. Refer to MA-17, "Changing Engine Oil" . ● Clean any oil spills off the engine. SMA702C Changing Spark Plugs ELS0019S KBIA2505E 1. Ignition coil 2. Spark plug REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Disconnect the harness connector from the ignition coil. Remove the ignition coil. Refer to EM-26, "IGNITION COIL" . Remove the spark plug(s) using a suitable tool. SEM294A INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Use standard type spark plug for normal condition. The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as: ● Frequent engine starts ● Low ambient temperatures The cold type spark plug is suitable when spark knock occurs with the standard type spark plug under conditions such as: Revision: October 2004 MA-18 2005 Titan ENGINE MAINTENANCE ● ● Extended highway driving Frequent high engine revolution A Spark Plug Types Make NGK Model B Standard model FFV model Standard type PLFR5A-11 PLFR5A-11D Hot type PLFR4A-11 PLFR4A-11D Cold type PLFR6A-11 PLFR6A-11D Gap (nominal) C 1.1 mm (0.043 in) D CAUTION: Do not drop or shock spark plug. ● Do not use a wire brush for cleaning. ● E F G SMA773C ● If plug tip is covered with carbon, spark plug cleaner may be used. Cleaner air pressure Cleaning time ● H I : Less than 588 kPa (5.9 bar, 6 kg/cm2 , 85 psi) : Less than 20 seconds J Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals. K MA M SMA806CA INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Checking EVAP Vapor Lines 1. 2. ELS0019T Visually inspect the EVAP vapor lines for improper attachment, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing, or deterioration. Inspect the vacuum relief valve of the fuel tank filler cap for clogging and sticking. Refer to EC-37, "How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage" . Revision: October 2004 MA-19 2005 Titan CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE Changing In-cabin Microfilter 1. PFP:00100 ELS0019U Remove the instrument lower cover RH. LLIA0072E 2. a. Remove the glove box assembly. Remove the two lower glove box screws. LJIA0146E b. c. Open the glove box, then remove the four upper glove box screws. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the two glove box striker screws. Remove the glove box assembly from the instrument panel to access the in-cabin microfilter cover. WJIA0628E 3. 4. Remove the screw and remove the in-cabin microfilter cover. Remove the in-cabin microfilters from the front heater and cooling unit assembly housing. LJIA0134E Revision: October 2004 MA-20 2005 Titan CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE 5. Insert the first new in-cabin microfilter into the front heater and cooling unit assembly housing and slide it over to the right. Insert the second new in-cabin microfilter into the front heater and cooling unit assembly housing. NOTE: The in-cabin microfilters are marked with air flow arrows. The end of the microfilter with the arrow should face the rear of the vehicle. The arrows should point downward. A B C LJIA0148E D 6. Install the in-cabin microfilter cover. E F G LJIA0134E 7. Install the glove box assembly in reverse order of removal. Lower glove box screws Upper glove box screws 8. H : 3.5 N·m (0.36 kg-m, 31 in-lb) : 3.5 N·m (0.36 kg-m, 31 in-lb) I Install the instrument lower cover RH. J K MA LLIA0072E Checking Exhaust System ELS0019V M Check exhaust pipes, muffler and mounting for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing or deterioration. SMA211A Checking A/T Fluid 1. 2. 3. ELS0019W Warm up the engine. Check for any fluid leaks. Remove the ATF level gauge bolt. Revision: October 2004 MA-21 2005 Titan CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE 4. a. b. c. d. e. f. 5. 6. Before driving, the fluid level can be checked at fluid temperatures of 30° to 50°C (86° to 122°F) using the “COLD” range on the ATF level gauge as follows: Park the vehicle on a level surface and set the parking brake. Start the engine and move the selector lever through each gear position. Shift the selector lever into the “P” position. Check the fluid level with the engine idling. Remove the ATF level gauge and wipe it clean with a lint-free paper. CAUTION: When wiping the fluid from the ATF level gauge, always use a lint-free paper, not a cloth. WLIA0014E Re-insert the ATF level gauge into the charging pipe until the cap contacts the top of the charging pipe as shown. CAUTION: To check fluid level, insert the ATF level gauge until the cap contacts the top of the charging pipe, with the gauge reversed from the normal inserted position. Remove the ATF level gauge and note the fluid level. If the fluid level is at low side of range, add fluid to the transmission through the charging pipe. CAUTION: SCIA1684E Do not overfill the transmission with fluid. Drive the vehicle to increase the ATF temperature to 80° C (176° F). Allow the ATF temperature to fall to approximately 65°C (149°F). Use the CONSULT-II to monitor the fluid temperature as follows: SLIA0016E a. b. c. NOTE: Fluid level will be greatly affected by temperature as shown. Therefore monitor the fluid temperature data using the CONSULT-II. Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector. Select “MAIN SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT-II. Read out the value of “ATF TEMP 1”. Revision: October 2004 MA-22 2005 Titan CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE 7. Re-check the fluid level at fluid temperatures of approximately 65°C (149°F) using the “HOT” range on the A/T fluid level gauge as shown. CAUTION: ● When wiping the fluid from the ATF level gauge, always use lint-free paper, not a cloth. A B C WLIA0014E D To check the fluid level, insert the ATF level gauge until the cap contacts the top of the charging pipe, with the gauge reversed from the normal inserted position as shown. 8. Check the fluid condition. ● If the fluid is very dark or has some burned smell, there may be an internal problem with the transmission. Refer to AT-183, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS" . Flush the transmission cooling system after repairing the transmission. ● If the ATF contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.), replace the radiator and flush the transmission cooler lines using cleaning solvent and compressed air after repairing the transmission. 9. Install the ATF level gauge in the fluid charging pipe and install the level gauge bolt. 10. Tighten the level gauge bolt to specification. ● Level gauge bolt: F G SCIA1684E H I : Refer to AT-271, "Components" . Changing A/T Fluid 1. 2. 3. 4. E ELS0019X Drive the vehicle to warm up the ATF to 80° C (176° F). Stop the engine. Remove the ATF level gauge bolt. Drain the ATF from the drain plug hole and refill the transmission with new ATF. Always refill with the same volume as the drained fluid and use the dipstick to check the fluid level as shown. Add fluid as necessary. J K MA M WLIA0014E ● ● To flush out the old fluid from the coolers, pour new fluid into the charging pipe with the engine idling and at the same time drain the old fluid from the auxiliary transmission oil cooler hose return line. When the color of the fluid coming out of the auxiliary transmission oil cooler hose return line is about the same as the color of the new fluid, flushing out the old fluid is complete. The amount of new transmission fluid used for flushing should be 30% to 50% of the specified capacity. Transmission fluid type and capacity : Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants" . CAUTION: ● Use only Genuine NISSAN ATF Matic Fluid J. Do not mix with other fluid. Revision: October 2004 MA-23 2005 Titan CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE ● ● ● Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN ATF Matic Fluid J will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the warranty. When filling the transmission with fluid, do not spill the ATF on any heat generating parts such as the exhaust manifold. Do not reuse the drain plug gasket. Drain plug 5. 6. 7. 8. : Refer to AT-271, "Components" . Drive the vehicle to warm up the ATF to 80° C (176° F). Check the fluid level and condition. Refer to MA-21, "Checking A/T Fluid" . If the fluid is still dirty, repeat steps 2 through 5. Install the ATF level gauge in the fluid charging pipe and install the level gauge bolt. Tighten the level gauge bolt to specification. Level gauge bolt : Refer to AT-271, "Components" . Changing Transfer Fluid ELS001H7 DRAINING 1. 2. 3. Stop the engine. Remove the drain plug and gasket to drain the transfer fluid as shown. Install the new gasket on the drain plug and install the drain plug in the transfer. Tighten the drain plug to specification. Drain plug : Refer to TF-88, "COMPONENTS" . CAUTION: Do not reuse the gasket. WDIA0214E FILLING 1. Remove the filler plug and gasket. Fill with new specified fluid until the fluid level reaches the specified limit near the filler plug mounting hole as shown. Fluid grade and capacity 2. 3. : Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants" . CAUTION: Carefully fill the transfer with fluid. Filling should take approximately three minutes. Leave the vehicle for three minutes and then check the fluid level again as shown. Install the new gasket on the filler plug and install the filler plug in the transfer. Tighten the filler plug to specification. Filler plug WDIA0211E : Refer to TF-88, "COMPONENTS" . CAUTION: Do not reuse the gasket. Checking Transfer Fluid ELS001H8 FLUID LEAKAGE AND FLUID LEVEL 1. Check for any fluid leaks from the transfer assembly or around it and correct as necessary. Revision: October 2004 MA-24 2005 Titan CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE 2. 3. Remove the filler plug to check the fluid level at the filler plug mounting hole as shown. CAUTION: Do not start the engine while checking the fluid level. Install the new gasket on the filler plug and install the filler plug in the transfer. Tighten the filler plug to specification. Filler plug A B : Refer to TF-88, "COMPONENTS" . C CAUTION: Do not reuse the gasket. WDIA0211E D Changing Transfer Oil Filter ELS001H9 REMOVAL 1. Remove the oil filter bolts and oil filter. CAUTION: ● Do not damage the center case and oil filter. ● Loosen the bolts and detach oil filter evenly. E F G SMT875C 2. H Remove the O-rings from the oil filter. I J K SDIA2327E 3. 4. MA Remove the oil filter stud from the oil filter. Remove the O-ring from the oil filter stud. M SDIA2784E Revision: October 2004 MA-25 2005 Titan CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE INSTALLATION 1. 2. Apply ATF to the O-ring, and install it on the oil filter stud. CAUTION: Do not reuse the O-ring. Install the oil filter stud to the oil filter. SDIA2784E 3. Apply ATF to the two O-rings, and install them on the oil filter. CAUTION: Do not reuse the O-rings. SDIA2327E 4. 5. 6. Install the oil filter to the transfer assembly. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Refer to TF-88, "COMPONENTS" . CAUTION: ● Do not damage the oil filter. ● Attach the oil filter and tighten the bolts evenly. Check the transfer fluid. Refer to MA-24, "Checking Transfer Fluid" . Start the engine for one minute. Then stop the engine and recheck the transfer fluid. Refer to MA-24, "Checking Transfer Fluid" . Checking Propeller Shaft SDIA2136E ELS001A0 Check the front and rear propeller shafts for damage, dents, and cracks. Check the joints for looseness and any damage. Repair or replace as necessary. Checking Final Drive Oil ELS001A1 NOTE: Rear final drive shown, front final drive similar. OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL 1. 2. 3. Check that gear oil is not leaking from the final drive assembly or around it. Check the gear oil level from filler plug mounting hole as shown. CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking oil level. Apply sealant to the filler plug. Install the filler plug on the final drive assembly and tighten to specification. ● Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . LDIA0127E Revision: October 2004 MA-26 2005 Titan CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE Oil grade and viscosity Filler plug : Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants" . : Refer to FFD-14, "Components" (FFD), RFD-14, "Removal and Installation" (RFD without ELD), RFD-82, "Removal and Installation" (RFD with ELD). Changing Final Drive Oil A B ELS001A2 NOTE: Rear final drive shown, front final drive similar. C DRAINING 1. 2. 3. Stop the engine. Remove the drain plug and drain the gear oil. Apply sealant to the drain plug. Install the drain plug on the final drive assembly and tighten to specification. ● Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . Filler plug D E F : Refer to FFD-14, "Components" (FFD), RFD-14, "Removal and Installation" (RFD without ELD), RFD-82, "Removal and Installation" (RFD with ELD). G FILLING 1. Remove the filler plug. Fill with new specified gear oil until the gear oil level reaches the specified limit near the filler plug mounting hole as shown. Oil grade and capacity 2. H : Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants" . I After refilling the gear oil, check the gear oil level as shown. Apply sealant to the filler plug. Install the filler plug on the final drive assembly and tighten to specification. ● Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . J LDIA0127E K Filler plug : Refer to FFD-14, "Components" (FFD), RFD-14, "Removal and Installation" (RFD without ELD), RFD-82, "Removal and Installation" (RFD with ELD). Balancing Wheels MA ELS001HB REMOVAL 1. Using releasing agent, remove double-faced adhesive tape from the wheel. CAUTION: ● Be careful not to scratch the wheel during removal. ● After removing double-faced adhesive tape, wipe clean traces of releasing agent from the wheel. WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT ● 1. 2. If a tire balance machine has adhesion balance weight mode settings and drive-in weight mode setting, select and adjust a drive-in weight mode suitable for wheels. Set wheel on wheel balancer using the center hole as a guide. Start the tire balance machine. When inner and outer imbalance values are shown on the wheel balancer indicator, multiply outer imbalance value by 1.6 to determine balance weight that should be used. Select the outer balance weight with a value closest to the calculated value and install it to the designated outer position of, or at the designated angle in relation to the road wheel. CAUTION: ● Do not install the inner balance weight before installing the outer balance weight. ● Before installing the balance weight, be sure to clean the mating surface of the wheel. Revision: October 2004 MA-27 2005 Titan M CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE Indicated imbalance value × 5/3 = balance weight to be installed Calculation example: 23 g (0.81 oz) × 5/3 = 38.33 g (1.35 oz) = 40 g (1.41 oz) balance weight (closer to calculated balance weight value) Note that balance weight value must be closer to the calculated balance weight value. Example: 37.4 g = 35 g (1.23 oz) 37.5 g = 40 g (1.41 oz) SMA054D a. b. Install balance weight in the position shown. When installing balance weight to wheels, set it into the grooved area on the inner wall of the wheel as shown so that the balance weight center is aligned with the wheel balancer indication position (angle). CAUTION: ● Always use Genuine NISSAN adhesion balance weights. ● Balance weights are not reusable; always replace with new ones. ● Do not install more than three sheets of balance weights. WDIA0060E c. If calculated balance weight value exceeds 50 g (1.76 oz), install two balance weight sheets in line with each other as shown. CAUTION: Do not install one balance weight sheet on top of another. SMA056D 3. 4. 5. Start wheel balancer again. Install drive-in balance weight on inner side of road wheel in the wheel balancer indication position (angle). CAUTION: Do not install more than two balance weights. Start wheel balancer. Make sure that inner and outer residual imbalance values are 5 g (0.18 oz) each or below. Revision: October 2004 MA-28 2005 Titan CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE Wheel Balance (Maximum Allowable Imbalance) Dynamic (At rim flange) Maximum allowable imbalance ● Static 5 g (0.18 oz) (one side) A 10 g (0.35 oz) If either residual imbalance value exceeds 5 g (0.18 oz), repeat installation procedures. B C D E F G H I J K MA M Revision: October 2004 MA-29 2005 Titan CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE Tire Rotation 1. Rotate the tires on each side from front to back as shown. Wheel nuts 2. 3. ELS001A4 : Refer to WT-5, "WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY" . Adjust the tire pressure to specification. Refer to WT-33, "Tire" . After the tire rotation, retighten the wheel nuts after the vehicle has been driven for 1,000 km (600 miles), and also after a wheel and tire have been installed such as after repairing a flat tire. AMA159 Checking Brake Fluid Level and Leaks ● ● ● ELS001A5 Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir tank. It should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the reservoir tank. If the fluid level is extremely low, check the brake system. If the brake warning lamp comes on when the fluid is at the correct level, check the brake fluid level switch and the parking brake switch. WFIA0173E Checking Brake Lines and Cables 1. 2. ELS001A6 Check the brake lines and hoses for cracks, deterioration, and other damage. Replace any damaged parts. CAUTION: If brake fluid leaks are visible around the brake line joints, retighten the joint, or replace damaged parts as necessary. Check for brake fluid leaks by fully depressing brake pedal while engine is running. SBR389C Checking Disc Brake ELS001A7 ROTOR Check the rotor condition for wear or damage. Refer to BR-33, "Front Disc Brake" , BR-34, "Rear Disc Brake" . SMA260A Revision: October 2004 MA-30 2005 Titan CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE CALIPER A Check the caliper for leaks, repair as necessary. B C SMA922A D PAD Check the pads for wear or damage. Refer to BR-33, "Front Disc Brake" , BR-34, "Rear Disc Brake" . E F G LMA051 Checking Steering Gear and Linkage H ELS001A8 STEERING GEAR ● ● I Check the steering gear housing for looseness, damage, and oil leakage as shown. Check the steering column connections for looseness. J K SGIA0506E MA STEERING LINKAGE ● Check the ball joint, dust cover and other component parts for looseness, wear, damage, and grease leakage. Checking Power Steering Fluid and Lines ELS001A9 CHECKING FLUID LEVEL Check the power steering fluid level with the engine off. ● Check fluid level on reservoir. Use “HOT” range at fluid temperatures of 50° to 80°C (122° to 176°F). Use “COLD” range at fluid temperatures of 0° to 30°C (32° to 86°F). CAUTION: ● Do not overfill. ● Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants" . ● LGIA0021E Revision: October 2004 MA-31 2005 Titan M CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE CHECKING LINES ● Check lines for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing, and deterioration. SGIA0506E Checking Axle and Suspension Parts ELS001AA FRONT AND REAR AXLE AND SUSPENSION PARTS Check front and rear axle and suspension parts for excessive play, cracks, wear or other damage. ● Shake each wheel to check for excessive play. ● Rotate each wheel to check for abnormal noise. SMA525A ● ● ● Check the axle and suspension nuts and bolts for looseness. Check the strut and shock absorber for oil leakage or other damage. Check the suspension ball joints for grease leakage and ball joint dust cover for cracks or other damage. DRIVE SHAFT Check the boots and drive shaft for cracks, wear, damage, and grease leakage. SFA901 Revision: October 2004 MA-32 2005 Titan CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE Lubricating Locks, Hinges and Hood Latches ELS001AB A B C D E F G H I J K MA M WLIA0019E NOTE: Lubricate the locations shown with a suitable multi-purpose grease. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants" Revision: October 2004 MA-33 2005 Titan CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE Checking Seat Belts, Buckles, Retractors, Anchors and Adjusters ELS001AC Check the seat belt buckles, webbing, retractors, anchors and adjusters. Replace any seat belt assembly as necessary. Refer to SB-10, "Seat Belt Inspection" . ● Check the seat belt anchors for loose mounting bolts, damage, or excessive wear. ● Check the seat belt webbing for any damage, cuts, fraying, or excessive wear. ● Check the retractor for smooth operation. ● Check the function of the buckles by inserting the seat belt tongue and checking for proper engagement of the buckle and press the button on the buckle to check for proper release of the seat belt tongue. CAUTION: ● After any collision, inspect all seat belt assemblies, including retractors and other attached components, such as the guide rail set. NISSAN recommends replacing all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision, unless they are not damaged and are inspected to confirm they are operating properly after a minor collision. Also inspect all seat belt assemblies that are not in use during a collision, and replace any components if damaged or not operating properly. The seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision where the driver and passenger air bags have been deployed. ● If any component of the seat belt assembly is suspected of being damaged or not operating properly, do not repair the component. Replace the components as an assembly. ● If the seat belt webbing is cut, frayed, or damaged then replace the seat belt assembly. ● Never lubricate the seat belt buckle or tongue. ● When replacing any seat belt assembly always use a Genuine NISSAN seat belt assembly. Revision: October 2004 MA-34 2005 Titan J AIR CONDITIONER A B SECTION MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 4 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 4 Precautions for Working with HFC-134a (R-134a)..... 4 Contaminated Refrigerant ........................................ 4 General Refrigerant Precautions .............................. 5 Precautions for Leak Detection Dye ......................... 5 A/C Identification Label ............................................ 6 Precautions for Refrigerant Connection ................... 6 FEATURES OF NEW TYPE REFRIGERANT CONNECTION ...................................................... 6 O-RING AND REFRIGERANT CONNECTION..... 7 Precautions for Servicing Compressor ..................... 9 Precautions for Service Equipment .......................... 9 RECOVERY/RECYCLING EQUIPMENT .............. 9 ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTOR ........................ 9 VACUUM PUMP ................................................. 10 MANIFOLD GAUGE SET .................................... 10 SERVICE HOSES ............................................... 10 SERVICE COUPLERS .........................................11 REFRIGERANT WEIGHT SCALE .......................11 CHARGING CYLINDER .......................................11 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................11 PREPARATION ......................................................... 12 Special Service Tools ............................................. 12 HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tools and Equipment... 12 Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 15 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM ..................................... 16 Refrigerant Cycle ................................................... 16 REFRIGERANT FLOW ....................................... 16 Refrigerant System Protection ............................... 16 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ............. 16 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE .............................. 17 Component Layout ................................................. 18 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM ............................... 18 LUBRICANT ............................................................. 20 Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor... 20 LUBRICANT ........................................................ 20 CHECKING AND ADJUSTING ........................... 20 Revision: October 2004 AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL ............................... 22 Description .............................................................. 22 Operation ................................................................ 22 AIR MIX DOOR CONTROL ................................. 22 BLOWER SPEED CONTROL ............................. 22 INTAKE DOORS CONTROL ............................... 22 MODE DOOR CONTROL ................................... 22 DEFROSTER DOOR CONTROL ........................ 22 MAGNET CLUTCH CONTROL ........................... 22 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM ............................ 23 Description of Control System ................................ 24 Control Operation ................................................... 24 TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL (TEMPERATURE CONTROL) ............................................... 25 RECIRCULATION () SWITCH ............................. 25 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH ............. 25 OFF SWITCH (BLOWER SPEED SET TO 0) ..... 25 A/C SWITCH ....................................................... 25 MODE CONTROL DIAL ...................................... 25 FRONT BLOWER CONTROL DIAL .................... 25 Discharge Air Flow ................................................. 25 System Description ................................................. 26 SWITCHES AND THEIR CONTROL FUNCTION... 26 CAN Communication System Description .............. 27 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 28 CONSULT-II Function (HVAC) ................................ 28 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION ....................... 28 SELF-DIAGNOSIS .............................................. 29 DATA MONITOR ................................................. 29 CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ................................. 31 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION ....................... 31 DATA MONITOR ................................................. 32 How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair ...................................................... 33 WORK FLOW ...................................................... 33 SYMPTOM TABLE .............................................. 33 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 34 ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................. 34 FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT ............ 35 Schematic ............................................................... 36 MTC-1 2005 Titan F G H I MTC K L M Wiring Diagram — A/C — ....................................... 37 Front Air Control Terminals and Reference Value... 43 PIN CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT ............ 43 TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL ....................................... 43 A/C System Self-diagnosis Function (With NAVI Only) ....................................................................... 45 DESCRIPTION .................................................... 45 Operational Check .................................................. 47 CHECKING BLOWER ......................................... 47 CHECKING DISCHARGE AIR ............................ 47 CHECKING RECIRCULATION ............................ 47 CHECKING TEMPERATURE DECREASE ......... 48 CHECKING TEMPERATURE INCREASE .......... 48 CHECK A/C SWITCH .......................................... 48 Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air Control ........................................................................... 49 INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 49 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 50 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FORA/C SYSTEM... 50 Mode Door Motor Circuit ........................................ 52 INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 52 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................... 53 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 53 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MODE DOOR MOTOR ................................................... 53 Air Mix Door Motor Circuit ...................................... 56 INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 56 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................... 57 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 57 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (FRONT) .................................... 58 Intake Door Motor Circuit ........................................ 60 INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 60 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................... 61 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 61 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE DOOR MOTOR ................................................... 62 Defroster Door Motor Circuit ................................... 63 SYMPTOM: .......................................................... 63 INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 63 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................... 64 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 64 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR ............................ 64 Front Blower Motor Circuit ...................................... 67 INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 67 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................... 68 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 68 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR BLOWER MOTOR ............................................................... 69 COMPONENT INSPECTION .............................. 73 Magnet Clutch Circuit ............................................. 74 INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 74 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................... 75 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MAGNET CLUTCH .............................................................. 75 COMPONENT INSPECTION .............................. 79 Insufficient Cooling ................................................. 80 Revision: October 2004 INSPECTION FLOW ............................................80 PERFORMANCE TEST DIAGNOSES ................81 PERFORMANCE CHART ....................................83 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR UNUSUAL PRESSURE ...................................................................84 Insufficient Heating .................................................87 INSPECTION FLOW ............................................87 Noise .......................................................................88 INSPECTION FLOW ............................................88 Self-diagnosis .........................................................89 INSPECTION FLOW ............................................89 Water Valve Circuit ..................................................90 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................90 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR WATER VALVE ..................................................................90 COMPONENT INSPECTION ...............................92 Intake Sensor Circuit ...............................................92 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................92 DIAGNOSTICPROCEDUREFORINTAKESENSOR .....................................................................92 COMPONENT INSPECTION ...............................94 CONTROL UNIT ........................................................95 Removal and Installation .........................................95 REMOVAL ............................................................95 INSTALLATION ....................................................95 INTAKE SENSOR ......................................................96 Removal and Installation .........................................96 REMOVAL ............................................................96 INSTALLATION ....................................................96 BLOWER MOTOR .....................................................97 Removal and Installation .........................................97 REMOVAL ............................................................97 INSTALLATION ....................................................97 IN-CABIN MICROFILTER ..........................................98 Removal and Installation .........................................98 FUNCTION ..........................................................98 REPLACEMENT TIMING ....................................98 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE ..........................98 HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY ............... 100 Removal and Installation ....................................... 100 REMOVAL .......................................................... 100 INSTALLATION .................................................. 101 HEATER CORE ....................................................... 102 Removal and Installation ....................................... 102 REMOVAL .......................................................... 103 INSTALLATION .................................................. 103 DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR ................................. 104 Removal and Installation ....................................... 104 REMOVAL .......................................................... 104 INSTALLATION .................................................. 104 INTAKE DOOR MOTOR .......................................... 105 Removal and Installation ....................................... 105 REMOVAL .......................................................... 105 INSTALLATION .................................................. 105 MODE DOOR MOTOR ............................................ 106 Removal and Installation ....................................... 106 REMOVAL .......................................................... 106 INSTALLATION .................................................. 106 MTC-2 2005 Titan AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR ......................................... 107 Removal and Installation ...................................... 107 REMOVAL ......................................................... 107 INSTALLATION ................................................. 107 VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL .......................... 108 Removal and Installation ...................................... 108 REMOVAL ......................................................... 108 INSTALLATION ................................................. 108 DUCTS AND GRILLES .......................................... 109 Removal and Installation ...................................... 109 DEFROSTER NOZZLE ......................................110 RH AND LH SIDE DEMISTER DUCT ................110 RH AND LH VENTILATOR DUCT ......................110 CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT .......................... 111 FLOOR DUCT .................................................... 111 GRILLES ............................................................ 111 REFRIGERANT LINES ............................................112 HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure ................112 SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT .................................................................112 Components ..........................................................114 Removal and Installation for Compressor .............115 REMOVAL ..........................................................115 INSTALLATION ..................................................116 Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch ..116 REMOVAL ..........................................................116 INSPECTION .....................................................117 INSTALLATION ..................................................118 BREAK-IN OPERATION ....................................119 Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Flexible Hose ......................................................................119 REMOVAL ..........................................................119 INSTALLATION ..................................................119 Removal andInstallation for High-pressure Flexible Hose ......................................................................119 REMOVAL ..........................................................119 INSTALLATION ................................................. 119 Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe . 120 REMOVAL ......................................................... 120 INSTALLATION ................................................. 120 Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Pipe . 120 REMOVAL ......................................................... 120 INSTALLATION ................................................. 120 Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor .................................................................. 120 REMOVAL ......................................................... 120 INSTALLATION ................................................. 120 Removal and Installation for Condenser .............. 120 REMOVAL ......................................................... 120 INSTALLATION ................................................. 121 Removal and Installation for Evaporator .............. 122 REMOVAL ......................................................... 122 INSTALLATION ................................................. 123 Removal and Installation for Expansion Valve ...... 123 REMOVAL ......................................................... 123 INSTALLATION ................................................. 123 Checking for Refrigerant Leaks ............................ 123 Checking System for Leaks Using the Fluorescent Dye Leak Detector ................................................ 123 Dye Injection ......................................................... 124 Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector .................... 124 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING LEAK DETECTOR ....................................................... 124 CHECKING PROCEDURE ............................... 125 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 127 Service Data and Specifications (SDS) ................ 127 COMPRESSOR ................................................ 127 LUBRICANT ...................................................... 127 REFRIGERANT ................................................. 127 ENGINE IDLING SPEED .................................. 127 BELT TENSION ................................................. 127 A B C D E F G H I MTC K L M Revision: October 2004 MTC-3 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EJS0031M The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precautions for Working with HFC-134a (R-134a) EJS0031N WARNING: ● CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant are not compatible. If the refrigerants are mixed compressor failure is likely to occur. Refer MTC-4, "Contaminated Refrigerant" . To determine the purity of HFC-134a (R-134a) in the vehicle and recovery tank, use Refrigerant Recovery/Recycling Recharging equipment and Refrigerant Identifier. ● Use only specified lubricant for the HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C system and HFC-134a (R-134a) components. If lubricant other than that specified is used, compressor failure is likely to occur. ● The specified HFC-134a (R-134a) lubricant rapidly absorbs moisture from the atmosphere. The following handling precautions must be observed: – When removing refrigerant components from a vehicle, immediately cap (seal) the component to minimize the entry of moisture from the atmosphere. – When installing refrigerant components to a vehicle, do not remove the caps (unseal) until just before connecting the components. Connect all refrigerant loop components as quickly as possible to minimize the entry of moisture into system. – Only use the specified lubricant from a sealed container. Immediately reseal containers of lubricant. Without proper sealing, lubricant will become moisture saturated and should not be used. – Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the A/C system using certified service equipment meeting requirements of SAE J2210 [HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment], or J2209 [HFC-134a (R-134a) recovery equipment]. If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers. – Do not allow lubricant, NISSAN A/C System Lubricant Type S (DH-PS) or equivalent, to come in contact with styrofoam parts. Damage may result. Contaminated Refrigerant EJS0031O If a refrigerant other than pure HFC-134a (R-134a) is identified in a vehicle, your options are: ● Explain to the customer that environmental regulations prohibit the release of contaminated refrigerant into the atmosphere. ● Explain that recovery of the contaminated refrigerant could damage your service equipment and refrigerant supply. ● Suggest the customer return the vehicle to the location of previous service where the contamination may have occurred. Revision: October 2004 MTC-4 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS ● ● If you choose to perform the repair, recover the refrigerant using only dedicated equipment and containers. Do not recover contaminated refrigerant into your existing service equipment. If your facility does not have dedicated recovery equipment, you may contact a local refrigerant product retailer for available service. This refrigerant must be disposed of in accordance with all federal and local regulations. In addition, replacement of all refrigerant system components on the vehicle is recommended. If the vehicle is within the warranty period, the air conditioner warranty is void. Please contact NISSAN Customer Affairs for further assistance. General Refrigerant Precautions EJS0031P WARNING: ● Do not release refrigerant into the air. Use approved recovery/recycling equipment to capture the refrigerant every time an air conditioning system is discharged. ● Always wear eye and hand protection (goggles and gloves) when working with any refrigerant or air conditioning system. ● Do not store or heat refrigerant containers above 52°C (125°F). ● Do not heat a refrigerant container with an open flame; if container warming is required, place the bottom of the container in a warm pail of water. ● Do not intentionally drop, puncture, or incinerate refrigerant containers. ● Keep refrigerant away from open flames: poisonous gas will be produced if refrigerant burns. ● Refrigerant will displace oxygen, therefore be certain to work in well ventilated areas to prevent suffocation. ● Do not pressure test or leak test HFC-134a (R-134a) service equipment and/or vehicle air conditioning systems with compressed air during repair. Some mixtures of air and HFC-134a (R-134a) have been shown to be combustible at elevated pressures. These mixtures, if ignited, may cause injury or property damage. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant manufacturers. Precautions for Leak Detection Dye ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● EJS0031Q A B C D E F G H I The A/C system contains a fluorescent leak detection dye used for locating refrigerant leaks. An ultraviolet (UV) lamp is required to illuminate the dye when inspecting for leaks. MTC Always wear fluorescence enhancing UV safety goggles to protect your eyes and enhance the visibility of the fluorescent dye. The fluorescent dye leak detector is not a replacement for an electronic refrigerant leak detector. The fluorescent dye leak detector should be used in conjunction with an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J- K 41995). For your safety and the customer's satisfaction, read and follow all manufacturer's operating instructions L and precautions prior to performing work. A compressor shaft seal should not be repaired because of dye seepage. The compressor shaft seal should only be repaired after confirming the leak with an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). Always remove any dye from the leak area after repairs are complete to avoid a misdiagnosis during a M future service. Do not allow dye to come into contact with painted body panels or interior components. If dye is spilled, clean immediately with the approved dye cleaner. Fluorescent dye left on a surface for an extended period of time cannot be removed . Do not spray the fluorescent dye cleaning agent on hot surfaces (engine exhaust manifold, etc.). Do not use more than one refrigerant dye bottle (1/4 ounce / 7.4 cc) per A/C system. Leak detection dyes for HFC-134a (R-134a) and CFC-12 (R-12) A/C systems are different. Do not use HFC-134a (R-134a) leak detection dye in CFC-12 (R-12) A/C systems or CFC-12 (R-12) leak detection dye in HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C systems or A/C system damage may result. The fluorescent properties of the dye will remain for over three (3) years unless a compressor failure occurs. Revision: October 2004 MTC-5 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS A/C Identification Label EJS0031R Vehicles with factory installed fluorescent dye have this identification label on the underside of hood. WJIA0672E Precautions for Refrigerant Connection EJS0031S A new type refrigerant connection has been introduced to all refrigerant lines except the following locations. ● Expansion valve to cooling unit ● Evaporator pipes to evaporator (inside cooling unit) ● Refrigerant pressure sensor FEATURES OF NEW TYPE REFRIGERANT CONNECTION ● ● The O-ring has been relocated. It has also been provided with a groove for proper installation. This reduces the possibility of the O-ring being caught in, or damaged by, the mating part. The sealing direction of the O-ring is now set vertically in relation to the contacting surface of the mating part to improve sealing characteristics. The reaction force of the O-ring will not occur in the direction that causes the joint to pull out, thereby facilitating piping connections. SHA815E Revision: October 2004 MTC-6 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS O-RING AND REFRIGERANT CONNECTION A A/C Compressor and Condenser B C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJIA1020E Revision: October 2004 MTC-7 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS 1. High-pressure service valve 4. Refrigerant pressure sensor 5. Condenser 6. Compressor shaft seal 7. High-pressure flexible hose 8. Low-pressure flexible hose 9. Low-pressure service valve 10. Low-pressure pipe 2. Grommet 3. 11. Expansion valve High-pressure pipe 12. Drain hose CAUTION: The new and former refrigerant connections use different O-ring configurations. Do not confuse Orings since they are not interchangeable. If a wrong O-ring is installed, refrigerant will leak at or around the connection. O-Ring Part Numbers and Specifications Connection type O-ring size Part number* D New 8 92471 N8210 6.8 (0.268) 1.85 (0.0728) Former 10 J2476 89956 9.25 (0.3642) 1.78 (0.0701) 92472 N8210 10.9 (0.429) 2.43 (0.0957) New 12 W mm (in) Former 92475 71L00 11.0 (0.433) 2.4 (0.094) New 92473 N8210 13.6 (0.535) 2.43 (0.0957) 92475 72L00 14.3 (0.563) 2.3 (0.091) 92474 N8210 16.5 (0.650) 2.43 (0.0957) 92477 N8200 17.12 (0.6740) 1.78 (0.0701) 92195 AH300 21.8 (0.858) 2.4 (0.094) 16 Former New SHA814E mm (in) 19 Former New 24 *: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. WARNING: Make sure all refrigerant is discharged into the recycling equipment and the pressure in the system is less than atmospheric pressure. Then gradually loosen the discharge side hose fitting and remove it. CAUTION: When replacing or cleaning refrigerant cycle components, observe the following. ● When the compressor is removed, store it in the same position as it is when mounted on the car. Failure to do so will cause lubricant to enter the low pressure chamber. ● When connecting tubes, always use a torque wrench and a back-up wrench. ● After disconnecting tubes, immediately plug all openings to prevent entry of dirt and moisture. ● When installing an air conditioner in the vehicle, connect the pipes as the final stage of the operation. Do not remove the seal caps of pipes and other components until just before required for connection. ● Allow components stored in cool areas to warm to working area temperature before removing seal caps. This prevents condensation from forming inside A/C components. ● Thoroughly remove moisture from the refrigeration system before charging the refrigerant. ● Always replace used O-rings. ● When connecting tube, apply lubricant to circle of the O-rings shown in illustration. Be careful not to apply lubricant to threaded portion. Lubricant name: NISSAN A/C System Lubricant Type S (DH-PS) Part number: KLH00-PAGS0 ● O-ring must be closely attached to dented portion of tube. ● When replacing the O-ring, be careful not to damage O-ring and tube. ● Connect tube until you hear it click, then tighten the nut or bolt by hand until snug. Make sure that the O-ring is installed to tube correctly. Revision: October 2004 MTC-8 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS ● After connecting line, conduct leak test and make sure that there is no leakage from connections. When the gas leaking point is found, disconnect that line and replace the O-ring. Then tighten connections of seal seat to the specified torque. A B C D E F G RHA861F Precautions for Servicing Compressor ● ● ● ● ● ● EJS0031T H Plug all openings to prevent moisture and foreign matter from entering. When the compressor is removed, store it in the same position as it is when mounted on the car. When replacing or repairing compressor, follow “Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in CompresI sor” exactly. Refer to MTC-20, "Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor" . Keep friction surfaces between clutch and pulley clean. If the surface is contaminated with lubricant, wipe it off by using a clean waste cloth moistened with thinner. MTC After compressor service operation, turn the compressor shaft by hand more than 5 turns in both directions. This will equally distribute lubricant inside the compressor. After the compressor is installed, let the engine idle and operate the compressor for 1 hour. After replacing the compressor magnet clutch, apply voltage to the new one and check for normal K operation. Refer to MTC-116, "Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch". Precautions for Service Equipment EJS0031U RECOVERY/RECYCLING EQUIPMENT Follow the manufacturer's instructions for machine operation and machine maintenance. Never introduce any refrigerant other than that specified into the machine. ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTOR Follow the manufacturer's instructions for tester operation and tester maintenance. Revision: October 2004 MTC-9 2005 Titan L M PRECAUTIONS VACUUM PUMP The lubricant contained inside the vacuum pump is not compatible with the specified lubricant for HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C systems. The vent side of the vacuum pump is exposed to atmospheric pressure so the vacuum pump lubricant may migrate out of the pump into the service hose. This is possible when the pump is switched off after evacuation (vacuuming) and hose is connected to it. To prevent this migration, use a manual valve situated near the hose-to-pump connection, as follows. ● Usually vacuum pumps have a manual isolator valve as part of the pump. Close this valve to isolate the service hose from the pump. ● For pumps without an isolator, use a hose equipped with a manual shut-off valve near the pump end. Close the valve to isolate the hose from the pump. ● If the hose has an automatic shut off valve, disconnect the hose from the pump: as long as the hose is connected, the valve is open and lubricating oil may migrate. Some one-way valves open when vacuum is applied and close under a no vacuum condition. Such valves may restrict the pump's ability to pull a deep vacuum and are not recommended. RHA270D MANIFOLD GAUGE SET Be certain that the gauge face indicates HFC-134a (R-134a or 134a). Make sure the gauge set has 1/2″-16 ACME threaded connections for service hoses. Confirm the set has been used only with refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) along with specified lubricant. SHA533D SERVICE HOSES Be certain that the service hoses display the markings described (colored hose with black stripe). All hoses must include positive shutoff devices (either manual or automatic) near the end of the hoses opposite the manifold gauge. RHA272D Revision: October 2004 MTC-10 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS SERVICE COUPLERS A Never attempt to connect HFC-134a (R-134a) service couplers to a CFC-12 (R-12) A/C system. The HFC-134a (R-134a) couplers will not properly connect to the CFC-12 (R-12) system. If an improper connection is attempted, discharging and contamination may occur. Shut-off valve rotation B A/C service valve Clockwise Open Counterclockwise Close C RHA273D D REFRIGERANT WEIGHT SCALE Verify that no refrigerant other than HFC134a (R-134a) and specified lubricants have been used with the scale. If the scale controls refrigerant flow electronically, the hose fitting must be 1/2"-16 ACME. E F G RHA274D H CHARGING CYLINDER Using a charging cylinder is not recommended. Refrigerant may be vented into air from cylinder's top valve when filling the cylinder with refrigerant. Also, the accuracy of the cylinder is generally less than that of an electronic scale or of quality recycle/recharge equipment. Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis EJS0031V When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" ● PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-9, "How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses" ● GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" I MTC K L M Revision: October 2004 MTC-11 2005 Titan PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 EJS003RG The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-38873-A) Pulley installer Installing pulley LHA171 KV99233130 (J-29884) Pulley puller Removing pulley LHA172 HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tools and Equipment EJS003RH Never mix HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant and/or the specified lubricant with CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and/or the lubricant. Separate and non-interchangeable service equipment must be used for handling each type of refrigerant/lubricant. Refrigerant container fittings, service hose fittings and service equipment fittings (equipment which handles refrigerant and/or lubricant) are different between CFC-12 (R-12) and HFC-134a (R-134a). This is to avoid mixed use of the refrigerants/lubricant. Adapters that convert one size fitting to another must never be used refrigerant/lubricant contamination will occur and compressor failure will result. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description HFC-134a (R-134a) ( — ) Refrigerant Container color: Light blue Container marking: HFC-134a (R134a) Fitting size: Thread size ● large container 1/2”-16 ACME S-NT196 Type: Poly alkylene glycol oil (PAG), type S (DH-PS) Application: HFC-134a (R-134a) swash plate compressors (NISSAN only) Lubricity: 40 m (1.4 US fl oz, 1.4 Imp fl oz) KLH00-PAGR0 ( — ) NISSAN A/C System Lubricant Type S (DH-PS) S-NT197 — (J-43600) Recovery/Recycling Recharging equipment (ACR2000) Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling and Recharging WJIA0293E Revision: October 2004 MTC-12 2005 Titan PREPARATION Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-41995) Electronic refrigerant leak detector Power supply: A ● DC 12V (battery terminal) B C D AHA281A — (J-43926) Refrigerant dye leak detection kit Kit includes: (J-42220) UV lamp and UV safety goggles (J-41459) Refrigerant dye injector (J-41447) qty. 24 HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant dye (J-43872) Refrigerant dye cleaner E Power supply: ● DC 12V (battery terminal) F G H ZHA200H — (J-42220) Fluorescent dye leak detector Power supply: ● DC 12V (battery terminal) For checking refrigerant leak when fluorescent dye is installed in A/C system. Includes: UV lamp and UV safety goggles I MTC SHA438F — (J-41447) HFC-134a (R-134a) Fluorescent leak detection dye (Box of 24, 1/4 ounce bottles) Application: For HFC-134a (R-134a) PAG oil Container: 1/4 ounce (7.4cc) bottle (Includes self-adhesive dye identification labels for affixing to vehicle after charging system with dye.) SHA439F — (J-41459) HFC-134a (R-134a) Dye injector Use with J-41447, 1/4 ounce bottle SHA440F For cleaning dye spills. SHA441F Revision: October 2004 MTC-13 L M For injecting 1/4 ounce of fluorescent leak detection dye into A/C system. — (J-43872) Refrigerant dye cleaner K 2005 Titan PREPARATION Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-39183-C) Manifold gauge set (with hoses and couplers) Identification: ● The gauge face indicates R-134a. Fitting size-Thread size ● 1/2”-16 ACME RJIA0196E Service hoses: ● Hose color: High side hose (J-39500-72B) ● Low side hose (J-39500-72R) ● Utility hose (J-39500-72Y) S-NT201 High side coupler (J-39500-20A) ● Low side coupler (J-39500-24A) Low side hose: Blue with black stripe ● High side hose: Red with black stripe ● Utility hose: Yellow with black stripe or green with black stripe Hose fitting to gauge: ● 1/2”-16 ACME Hose fitting to service hose: Service couplers ● ● ● M14 x 1.5 fitting is optional or permanently attached. S-NT202 — (J-39699) Refrigerant weight scale For measuring of refrigerant Fitting size-Thread size ● 1/2”-16 ACME S-NT200 — (J-39649) Vacuum pump (Including the isolator valve) Capacity: ● Air displacement: 4 CFM ● Micron rating: 20 microns ● Oil capacity: 482 g (17 oz) Fitting size-Thread size ● 1/2”-16 ACME S-NT203 Revision: October 2004 MTC-14 2005 Titan PREPARATION Commercial Service Tools EJS003RI A Tool name Description (J-41810-NI) Refrigerant identifier equipment (R134a) For checking refrigerant purity and system contamination B C D RJIA0197E Power tool E Loosening bolts and nuts F PBIC0190E (J-44614) Clutch disc holding tool G Clutch disc holding tool H I WHA230 MTC K L M Revision: October 2004 MTC-15 2005 Titan REFRIGERATION SYSTEM REFRIGERATION SYSTEM Refrigerant Cycle PFP:KA990 EJS0031Z REFRIGERANT FLOW The refrigerant flows in the standard pattern, that is, through the compressor, the condenser with liquid tank, through the evaporator, and back to the compressor. The refrigerant evaporation through the evaporator coils are controlled by externally equalized expansion valve, located inside the evaporator case. Refrigerant System Protection EJS00320 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR The refrigerant system is protected against excessively high or low pressures by the refrigerant pressure sensor, located on the condenser. If the system pressure rises above or falls below the specifications, the refrigerant pressure sensor detects the pressure inside the refrigerant line and sends a voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM de-energizes the A/C relay to disengage the magnetic compressor clutch when pressure on the high pressure side detected by refrigerant pressure sensor is over about 2,746 kPa (28 kg/cm2 , 398 psi), or below about 120 kPa (1.22 kg/cm2 , 17.4 psi). Revision: October 2004 MTC-16 2005 Titan REFRIGERATION SYSTEM PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE The refrigerant system is also protected by a pressure relief valve, located in the rear head of the compressor. When the pressure of refrigerant in the system increases to an abnormal level [more than 2,990 kPa (30.5 kg/ cm2 , 433.6 psi)], the release port on the pressure relief valve automatically opens and releases refrigerant into the atmosphere. A B C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJIA1347E Revision: October 2004 MTC-17 2005 Titan REFRIGERATION SYSTEM Component Layout EJS00321 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM LJIA0141E Revision: October 2004 MTC-18 2005 Titan REFRIGERATION SYSTEM 1. Defroster nozzle 2. LH side demister duct 3. LH ventilator duct 4. RH side demister duct 5. RH ventilator duct 6. Center ventilator duct 7. Heater and cooling unit assembly 8. Floor duct 9. Clips A B C D E F G H I MTC K L M Revision: October 2004 MTC-19 2005 Titan LUBRICANT LUBRICANT Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor PFP:KLG00 EJS00322 The lubricant in the compressor circulates through the system with the refrigerant. Add lubricant to compressor when replacing any component or after a large refrigerant leakage has occurred. It is important to maintain the specified amount. If lubricant quantity is not maintained properly, the following malfunctions may result: ● Lack of lubricant: May lead to a seized compressor ● Excessive lubricant: Inadequate cooling (thermal exchange interference) LUBRICANT Name: NISSAN A/C System Lubricant Type S (DH-PS) Part number: KLH00-PAGS0 CHECKING AND ADJUSTING CAUTION: If excessive lubricant leakage is noted, do not perform the lubricant return operation. Start the engine and set the following conditions: test condition ● Engine speed: Idling to 1,200 rpm ● A/C switch: On ● Blower speed: Max. position ● Temperature control: Optional [set so that intake air temperature is 25° to 30° C (77° to 86°F).] ● Intake position: Recirculation ( ) ● Perform lubricant return operation for about ten minutes Adjust the lubricant quantity according to the following table. Lubricant Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor After replacing any of the following major components, add the correct amount of lubricant to the system. Amount of lubricant to be added: Lubricant to be added to system Part replaced m Amount of lubricant (US fl oz, Imp fl oz) Remarks Front evaporator 75 (2.5, 2.6) — Condenser 75 (2.5, 2.6) — Liquid tank 5 (0.2, 0.2) Add if compressor is not replaced. 30 (1.0, 1.1) Large leak — Small leak *1 In case of refrigerant leak *1: If refrigerant leak is small, no addition of lubricant is needed. Lubricant Adjustment Procedure for Compressor Replacement 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Before connecting recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle, check recovery/recycling equipment gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If NG, recover refrigerant from equipment lines. Connect recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/ recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to MTC-4, "Contaminated Refrigerant" . Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to MTC-4, "Contaminated Refrigerant" . Discharge refrigerant into the refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment. Measure lubricant discharged into the recovery/recycling equipment. Drain the lubricant from the “old” (removed) compressor into a graduated container and recover the amount of lubricant drained. Drain the lubricant from the “new” compressor into a separate, clean container. Measure an amount of new lubricant installed equal to amount drained from “old” compressor. Add this lubricant to “new” compressor through the suction port opening. Revision: October 2004 MTC-20 2005 Titan LUBRICANT 8. 9. Measure an amount of new lubricant equal to the amount recovered during discharging. Add this lubricant to “new” compressor through the suction port opening. If the liquid tank also needs to be replaced, add an additional 5 m (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of lubricant at this time. Do not add this 5 m (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of lubricant if only replacing the compressor. A B C D E F G H I MTC K RHA065DD L M Revision: October 2004 MTC-21 2005 Titan AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL Description PFP:27500 EJS003TN The front air control provides regulation of the vehicle's interior temperature. The system is based on the position of the front air controls temperature switch selected by the driver. This is done by utilizing a microcomputer, also referred to as the front air control, which receives input signals from the following two sensors: ● Intake sensor ● PBR (Position Balanced Resistor). The front air control uses these signals (including the set position of the temperature switch) to control: ● Outlet air volume ● Air temperature ● Air distribution Operation EJS003TO AIR MIX DOOR CONTROL The air mix door is controlled so that in-vehicle temperature changed based on the position of the temperature switch. BLOWER SPEED CONTROL Blower speed is controlled based on front blower switch settings. When blower switch is turned, the blower motor starts and increases air flow volume each time the blower switch is turned clockwise, and decreases air flow volume each time the blower switch is turned counterclockwise. When engine coolant temperature is low, the blower motor operation is delayed to prevent cool air from flowing. INTAKE DOORS CONTROL The intake doors are controlled by the recirculation switch setting, and the mode (recirculation is not allowed in floor, floor/defrost or defrost modes) control dial setting. MODE DOOR CONTROL The mode door is controlled by the position of the mode control dial. DEFROSTER DOOR CONTROL The defroster door is controlled by turning the defroster dial to front defroster. MAGNET CLUTCH CONTROL WJIA1379E When A/C switch or DEF switch is pressed, front air control inputs compressor ON signal to BCM. BCM sends compressor ON signal to ECM, via CAN communication line. Revision: October 2004 MTC-22 2005 Titan AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL ECM judges whether compressor can be turned ON, based on each sensor status (refrigerant pressure sensor signal, throttle angle sensor, etc.). If it judges compressor can be turned ON, it sends compressor ON signal to IPDM E/R, via CAN communication line. Upon receipt of compressor ON signal from ECM, IPDM E/R turns air conditioner relay ON to operate compressor. A B SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM The self-diagnostic system is built into the front air control to quickly locate the cause of symptoms. Refer to MTC-45, "A/C System Self-diagnosis Function (With NAVI Only)" . C D E F G H I MTC K L M Revision: October 2004 MTC-23 2005 Titan AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL Description of Control System EJS003TP The control system consists of input sensors, switches, the front air control (microcomputer) and outputs. The relationship of these components is shown in the figure below: WJIA1448E Control Operation EJS003TQ Front air control WJIA1405E Revision: October 2004 MTC-24 2005 Titan AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL (TEMPERATURE CONTROL) A Increases or decreases the set temperature. RECIRCULATION () SWITCH ● ● ● When REC switch is ON, REC switch indicator turns ON, and air inlet is set to REC. When REC switch is turned OFF, or when compressor is turned from ON to OFF, REC switch is automatically turned OFF. REC mode can be re-entered by pressing REC switch again. REC switch is not operated when DEF switch is turned ON, at the D/F position, or in floor mode. B C REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH When switch is ON, rear window is defogged. D OFF SWITCH (BLOWER SPEED SET TO 0) The compressor and blower are OFF, the intake doors are set to the outside air position, and the air outlet doors are set to the foot position. E A/C SWITCH The compressor is ON or OFF. F MODE CONTROL DIAL Controls the air discharge outlets through control of the mode and defroster doors. FRONT BLOWER CONTROL DIAL G Manually control the blower speed. Fourteen speeds are available for manual control. Discharge Air Flow H EJS003TR I MTC K WJIA0540E L M WJIA1297E Revision: October 2004 MTC-25 2005 Titan AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL System Description EJS003TS SWITCHES AND THEIR CONTROL FUNCTION WJIA0531E WJIA1406E Revision: October 2004 MTC-26 2005 Titan AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL CAN Communication System Description EJS003TU A Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . B C D E F G H I MTC K L M Revision: October 2004 MTC-27 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS CONSULT-II Function (HVAC) PFP:00004 EJS003TV CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. Diagnostic mode SELF-DIAG RESULTS DATA MONITOR CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER Description Displays front air control self-diagnosis results. Displays front air control input/output data in real time. The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. Front air control part number can be read. CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, and turn the ignition switch ON. BBIA0369E 2. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. BCIA0029E 3. Touch “HVAC” on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen. If “HVAC” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . BCIA0030E Revision: October 2004 MTC-28 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SELF-DIAGNOSIS Operation Procedure 1. A Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen to view all set DTC's. B C D BCIA0031E E Display Item List DTC Description Reference page F B2573 Battery voltage out of range SC-4, "BATTERY" B2575 BCM not responding to A/C request MTC-75, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MAGNET CLUTCH" B2576 BCM not responding to rear defroster request GW-95, "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER" B2577 Air mix door motor (Front) circuit failure MTC-58, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (FRONT)" B2581 Intake sensor circuit short B2582 Intake sensor circuit open B2583 Defroster door motor circuit failure MTC-63, "Defroster Door Motor Circuit" U1000 CAN bus fault LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" B2586 Intake door motor (front) circuit malfunction MTC-60, "Intake Door Motor Circuit" B2587 Stuck button MTC-95, "CONTROL UNIT" B2588 Mode door motor circuit failure MTC-52, "Mode Door Motor Circuit" G H MTC-60, "Intake Door Motor Circuit" I MTC K DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. L Touch “DATA MONITOR” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen. M BCIA0031E 2. Touch either “MAIN SIGNALS” or “SELECTION FROM MENU” on “DATA MONITOR” screen. All signals Monitors all the items. Selection from menu Selects and monitors the individual item selected. 3. 4. When “SELECTION FROM MENU” is selected, touch items to be monitored. When “MAIN SIGNALS” is selected, all the items will be monitored. Touch “START”. Revision: October 2004 MTC-29 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 5. Touch “RECORD” while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop recording, touch “STOP”. Display Item List Monitor item BATT VIA CAN IGN VIA CAN Value Contents "V" Displays battery voltage signal. "ON/OFF" Displays ignition switch signal. EVAP TEMP SEN "°C/°F" RR TEMPSET FR "V" Displays air mix door (front) set point signal. Displays intake sensor signal. MODE FDBCK "V" Displays mode door motor feedback signal. DVR MIX FDBCK "V" Displays air mix door motor (front) feedback signal. DEF FDBCK "V" Displays defroster door motor feedback signal. RECIRC "ON/OFF" Displays recirculation switch signal. A/C "ON/OFF" Displays A/C switch signal. RR DEFOG "ON/OFF" Displays rear defroster request signal. MODE SELECT " [ PNL ]" " [ MIX ]" " [ FLR ]" " [ DEFR ]" " [ MAX ]" " [ DENT ]" Displays mode door motor position. *: DENT is displayed when MODE switch is between selections. Revision: October 2004 MTC-30 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS CONSULT-II Function (BCM) EJS003TW A CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode Description B WORK SUPPORT DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part SELF-DIAG RESULTS CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER CONFIGURATION Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received data is displayed. C Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. D The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. BCM part number can be read. E Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, and turn the ignition switch ON. F G H I BBIA0369E 2. MTC Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. K L M BCIA0029E 3. Touch “BCM” on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen. If “BCM” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . BCIA0030E Revision: October 2004 MTC-31 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. Touch “AIR CONDITIONER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. WJIA0468E 2. Touch “DATA MONITOR” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen. BCIA0031E 3. 4. 5. 6. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "DATA MONITOR" screen. All Signals Monitors all the items. Selection from menu Selects and monitors the individual item selected. When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the items will be monitored. Touch "START". Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop recording, touch "STOP". WJIA0469E Display Item List Monitor item name “operation or unit” Contents IGN ON SW “ON/OFF” Displays “IGN Position (ON)/(OFF), ACC Position (OFF)” status as judged from ignition switch signal. COMP ON SIG “ON/OFF” Displays “COMP (ON)/COMP (OFF)” status as judged from air conditioner switch signal. FAN ON SIG “ON/OFF” Displays “FAN (ON)/FAN (OFF)” status as judged from blower motor switch signal. Revision: October 2004 MTC-32 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair EJS003TX A WORK FLOW B C D SHA900E *1 MTC-47, "Operational Check". E SYMPTOM TABLE Symptom Reference Page A/C system does not come on. Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for A/C System. MTC-49 A/C system cannot be controlled. Go to Self-diagnosis Function. MTC-45 Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Mode Door Motor. MTC-52 Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Air Mix Door Motor. MTC-56 Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Intake Door Motor. MTC-60 Defroster door motor is malfunctioning. Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Defroster Door Motor. MTC-63 Front blower motor operation is malfunctioning. Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Front Blower Motor. MTC-67 Magnet clutch does not engage. Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Magnet Clutch. MTC-74 Insufficient cooling Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Insufficient Cooling. MTC-80 Insufficient heating Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Insufficient Heating. MTC-87 Noise Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Noise. MTC-88 Self-diagnosis cannot be performed. Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Self-diagnosis. MTC-89 Air outlet does not change. Mode door motor is malfunctioning. F G Discharge air temperature does not change. Air mix door motor is malfunctioning. H Intake door does not change. Intake door motor is malfunctioning. I MTC K L M Revision: October 2004 MTC-33 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Component Parts and Harness Connector Location EJS003TY ENGINE COMPARTMENT WJIA1407E Revision: October 2004 MTC-34 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FRONT PASSENGER COMPARTMENT A B C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJIA1449E Revision: October 2004 MTC-35 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Schematic EJS003TZ WJWA0217E Revision: October 2004 MTC-36 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Wiring Diagram — A/C — EJS003U0 A B C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJWA0218E Revision: October 2004 MTC-37 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WJWA0219E Revision: October 2004 MTC-38 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A B C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJWA0220E Revision: October 2004 MTC-39 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WJWA0221E Revision: October 2004 MTC-40 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A B C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJWA0222E Revision: October 2004 MTC-41 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WJWA0223E Revision: October 2004 MTC-42 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Front Air Control Terminals and Reference Value EJS003U1 A Measure voltage between each terminal and ground by following Terminals and Reference Value for front air control. B C D WJIA1412E PIN CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT E F G WJIA0402E H TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL Terminal No. Wire color Ignition switch Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) 1 B Ground - - 0V 2 Y Sensor power ON - 5V 3 W/G Air mix door motor (Front) CW ON Clockwise rotation Battery voltage 4 G Air mix door motor (Front) CCW ON Counterclockwise rotation Battery voltage 5 BR/W Mode door motor CW ON Clockwise rotation Battery voltage 6 P/L Mode door motor CCW ON Counterclockwise rotation Battery voltage 7 O Intake door motor CCW ON Counterclockwise rotation Battery voltage 8 G/B Intake door motor CW ON Clockwise rotation Battery voltage 9 L/B Intake sensor ON 10 W/G Water valve Item 11 Y/B Rear defroster request 12 W/R Compressor ON signal 14 Y/G Power supply for IGN Water valve open 0V ON Water valve closed 5V A/C switch OFF 5V ON A/C switch ON 0V - Battery voltage 15 P Sensor ground ON - 0V 16 GR Mode door motor feedback ON - 0 - 5V 18 SB Air mix door motor (Front) feedback ON - 0 - 5V 19 LG Defroster door motor CW ON Clockwise rotation Battery voltage 20 P/B Defroster door motor CCW ON Counterclockwise rotation Battery voltage 21 V/R Sensor return ON - 0 - 5V 22 Y/R Power supply for BAT - - Battery voltage 23 R/L Illumination + Revision: October 2004 ON Park lamps ON MTC-43 K L M Battery voltage ON ON MTC 0 - 5V ON ON I Battery voltage 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Terminal No. Wire color 24 BR Item Illumination - Ignition switch - Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Park lamps ON PIIA2344E 25 LG/B Defroster door motor feedback ON 26 R/B 34 Front blower request ON L CAN-H ON - 0 - 5V 35 P CAN-L ON - 0 - 5V 36 L/R Fan ON signal ON 40 G/R Variable Blower Control output ON Revision: October 2004 - 0 - 5V Front blower motor OFF Battery voltage Front blower motor ON 0V Fan switch OFF 5V Fan switch ON 0V MTC-44 - 0 - 5V 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A/C System Self-diagnosis Function (With NAVI Only) EJS003U2 DESCRIPTION A The self-diagnostic system diagnoses sensors, door motors, blower motor, etc. Refer to applicable sections (items) for details. Fault codes (if any are present) will be displayed in the ambient temperature display area. Refer to MTC-46, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE CHART" . B C D E F G H I MTC WJIA1414E K L M Revision: October 2004 MTC-45 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE CHART Code No. Reference page 03 Battery voltage out of range SC-4, "BATTERY" 20 BCM not responding to A/C request MTC-75, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MAGNET CLUTCH" 21 BCM not responding to rear defroster request GW-95, "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER" 22 Air mix door motor (Front) circuit failure MTC-56, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit" 56 Intake sensor circuit short 57 Intake sensor circuit open 62 Defroster door motor circuit failure MTC-63, "Defroster Door Motor Circuit" 80 CAN bus fault LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" 82 Intake door motor (front) circuit malfunction MTC-62, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE DOOR MOTOR" 90 Stuck button MTC-95, "CONTROL UNIT" 92 Mode door motor circuit failure MTC-52, "Mode Door Motor Circuit" Revision: October 2004 MTC-92, "Intake Sensor Circuit" MTC-46 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Operational Check EJS003U3 A The purpose of the operational check is to confirm that the system operates properly. Conditions : Engine running and at normal operating temperature B CHECKING BLOWER 1. Turn fan control switch clockwise. Blower should operate on low speed. 2. Turn the fan control switch again, and continue checking blower speed and fan symbol until all speeds are checked. 3. Leave blower on MAX speed. If NG, go to MTC-69, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR BLOWER MOTOR" If OK, continue with next check. C D E WJIA1426E CHECKING DISCHARGE AIR 1. F Turn the mode switch to each mode position. G H I WJIA1427E 2. Confirm that discharge air comes out according to the air distribution table. Refer to MTC-25, "Discharge Air Flow" . Mode door position is checked in the next step. If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for MTC-52, "Mode Door Motor Circuit" . If OK, continue with next check. NOTE: Confirm that the compressor clutch is engaged (sound or visual inspection) and intake door position is at fresh when the DEF or D/F is selected. MTC K L WJIA1297E CHECKING RECIRCULATION 1. Press recirculation ( ) switch one time. Recirculation indicator should illuminate. 2. Press recirculation ( ) switch one more time. Recirculation indicator should go off. 3. Listen for intake door position change (blower sound should change slightly). If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for MTC-60, "Intake Door Motor Circuit" . If OK, continue with next check. NOTE: Confirm that the compressor clutch is engaged (sound or visual inspection) and intake door position is at fresh when the DEF, D/F or floor is selected. Revision: October 2004 MTC-47 WJIA1428E 2005 Titan M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS CHECKING TEMPERATURE DECREASE 1. Rotate temperature control dial counterclockwise. 2. Check for cold air at appropriate discharge air outlets. If NG, listen for sound of air mix door motor operation if OK, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for MTC-80, "Insufficient Cooling" . If air mix door motor appears to be malfunctioning, go to MTC-58, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (FRONT)" . If OK, continue with next check. WJIA1429E CHECKING TEMPERATURE INCREASE 1. Rotate temperature control dial clockwise. 2. Check for hot air at appropriate discharge air outlets. If NG, listen for sound of air mix door motor operation. If OK, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for MTC-87, "Insufficient Heating" . If air mix door motor appears to be malfunctioning, go to MTC-58, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (FRONT)" . If OK, continue with next check. WJIA1430E CHECK A/C SWITCH 1. 2. Press A/C switch with the fan switch ON. A/C switch indicator will turn ON. ● Confirm that the compressor clutch engages (sound or visual inspection). NOTE: Confirm that the compressor clutch is engaged (sound or visual inspection). If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for MTC-74, "Magnet Clutch Circuit" . If OK, continue with next check. WJIA1431E Revision: October 2004 MTC-48 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Front Air Control EJS003U5 A SYMPTOM: A/C system does not come on. INSPECTION FLOW B C D E F G H I WJIA1411E *1 MTC-49, "Power Supply and Ground *2 Circuit for Front Air Control". MTC MTC-47, "Operational Check" K L M Revision: October 2004 MTC-49 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Front Air Control The front air control has a built-in microcomputer which processes information sent from various sensors needed for air conditioner operation. The air mix door motor, mode door motor, intake door motor, defroster door motor, blower motor and compressor are then controlled. The front air control is unitized with control mechanisms. When the various switches and temperature dial are operated, data is input to the front air control. Self-diagnostic functions are also built into the front air control to provide quick check of malfunctions in the air conditioner system. WJIA1412E Potentio Temperature Control (PTC) The PTC is built into the front air control. It can be set from cold to hot or any intermediate position by rotating the temperature dial. WJIA1413E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR A/C SYSTEM SYMPTOM: A/C system does not come on. WJIA0414E Revision: October 2004 MTC-50 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. A Disconnect front air control connector. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 terminals 14 (Y/G) and 22 (Y/R), and ground. Terminals B Ignition switch position C (+) Front air control connector Terminal No. (Wire color) (-) OFF ACC ON Approx. 0V Approx. 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage D M49 14 (Y/G) M49 22 (Y/R) Ground WJIA0415E E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check 10A fuses [Nos. 8 and 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-77, "FUSE BLOCKJUNCTION BOX(J/B)" . ● If fuses are OK, check harness for open circuit. Repair or replace as necessary. ● If fuses are NG, replace fuse and check harness for short circuit. Repair or replace as necessary. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 1 (B) and ground. 1 - Ground G H 2. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. F I : Continuity should exist. MTC OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-95, "CONTROL UNIT" . NG >> Repair harness or connector. K WJIA1351E L M Revision: October 2004 MTC-51 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Mode Door Motor Circuit EJS003U6 SYMPTOM: ● Air outlet does not change. ● Mode door motor does not operate normally. INSPECTION FLOW WJIA1425E *1 MTC-25, "Discharge Air Flow". *2 MTC-47, "Operational Check". *3 MTC-45, "A/C System Self-diagnosis Function (With NAVI Only)". *4 MTC-46, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE CHART". *5 MTC-53, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MODE DOOR MOTOR". *6 MTC-33, "SYMPTOM TABLE" Revision: October 2004 MTC-52 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts A Mode door control system components are: ● Front air control ● Mode door motor ● PBR (built into mode door motor) B System Operation C The mode door position (vent, B/L, foot, and defrost) is set by the front air control by means of the mode door motor. When a mode door position is selected on the front air control, voltage is applied to one circuit of the mode door motor while ground is applied to the other circuit, causing the mode door motor to rotate. The direction of rotation is determined by which circuit has voltage applied to it, and which one has ground applied to it. The front air control monitors the mode door position by measuring the voltage signal on the PBR circuit. D E COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Mode Door Motor The mode door motor is attached to the heater & cooling unit. It rotates so that air is discharged from the outlet as indicated by the front air control. Motor rotation is conveyed to a link which activates the mode door. F G H WJIA0587E I DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MODE DOOR MOTOR 1. CHECK RESULT FROM FRONT AIR CONTROL SELF-DIAGNOSIS MTC Self-diagnosis code 92 or DTC B2588 is present. Refer to MTC-45, "A/C System Self-diagnosis Function (With NAVI Only)" . YES or NO YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> GO TO 3. 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUITS FOR MODE DOOR MOTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control connector and mode door motor connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 5 (BR/W) and mode door motor harness connector M142 terminal 5 (BR/W) and between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 6 (P/L) and mode door motor harness connector M142 terminal 6 (P/L). 5-5 6-6 : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. MTC-53 L M LJIA0027E OK or NG OK >> Replace mode door motor. Refer to MTC-106, "MODE DOOR MOTOR" . NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. Revision: October 2004 K 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 3. CHECK PBR REFERENCE SIGNAL VOLTAGE 1. 2. 3. Disconnect the mode door motor connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between mode door motor harness connector M142 terminal 3 (Y) and ground. 3 - Ground : Approx. 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. LJIA0028E 4. CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BETWEEN MODE DOOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front air control connector. Check continuity between mode door motor harness connector M142 terminal 3 (Y) and front air control harness connector M49 terminal 2 (Y). 3-2 : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-95, "CONTROL UNIT" . NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. LJIA0029E 5. CHECK PBR GROUND REFERENCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front air control connector. Check continuity between mode door motor harness connector M142 terminal 1 (P) and front air control harness connector M49 terminal 15 (P). 1 - 15 : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. LJIA0031E 6. CHECK PBR FEEDBACK SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Reconnect the front air control connector and mode door motor connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 16 (GR) and ground. Press mode switch through all modes. 16 - Ground : Approx. 0 - 5V OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-95, "CONTROL UNIT" . NG >> GO TO 7. Revision: October 2004 MTC-54 LJIA0032E 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 7. CHECK PBR FEEDBACK CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the mode door motor connector and front air control harness connector. Check continuity between mode door motor harness connector M142 terminal 2 (GR) and front air control harness connector M49 terminal 16 (GR). 2 - 16 B C : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace mode door motor. Refer to MTC-106, "MODE DOOR MOTOR" . NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. D LJIA0034E E F G H I MTC K L M Revision: October 2004 MTC-55 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Air Mix Door Motor Circuit EJS003U7 SYMPTOM: ● Discharge air temperature does not change. ● Air mix door motor does not operate. INSPECTION FLOW WJIA1432E *1 MTC-47, "Operational Check". *4 MTC-58, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (FRONT)". Revision: October 2004 *2 MTC-45, "A/C System Self-diagnosis Function (With NAVI Only)". MTC-56 *3 MTC-46, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE CHART". 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts A Air mix door control system components are: ● Front air control ● Air mix door motors (Front) ● PBR (built-into air mix motors) B System Operation C The front air control receives data from the temperature selected by the driver. The front air control then applies a voltage to one circuit of the appropriate air mix door motor, while ground is applied to the other circuit, causing the appropriate air mix door motor to rotate. The direction of rotation is determined by which circuit has voltage applied to it, and which one has ground applied to it. The front air control monitors the air mix door positions by measuring the voltage signal on the PBR circuits of each door. D E Air Mix Door Control Specification COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Air Mix Door Motors F G H WJIA0435E The front air mix door motor is attached to the front heater & cooling unit. This motor rotates so that the air mix door is opened or closed to a position set by the front air control. Motor rotation is then conveyed through a shaft and the air mix door position is then fed back to the front air control by the PBR built into the air mix door motors. I MTC K WJIA1417E L M Revision: October 2004 MTC-57 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (FRONT) 1. CHECK RESULT FROM FRONT AIR CONTROL SELF-DIAGNOSIS Self-diagnosis code 22 or DTC B2577 is present. Refer to MTC-45, "A/C System Self-diagnosis Function (With NAVI Only)" . YES or NO YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> GO TO 3. 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (FRONT) 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control connector and air mix door motor (front) connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 3 (W/G) and 4 (G) and air mix door motor (front) harness connector M147 terminal 1 (W/G) and 6 (G). 3-1 4-6 : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace air mix door motor (front). Refer to MTC-107, "AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR" . NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. WJIA1418E 3. CHECK PBR REFERENCE SIGNAL VOLTAGE 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the air mix door motor (front) connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between air mix door motor (front) harness connector M147 terminal 3 (Y) and ground. 3 - Ground : Approx. 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. WJIA1419E 4. CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BETWEEN AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (FRONT) AND FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front air control connector. Check continuity between air mix door motor (front) harness connector M147 terminal 3 (Y) and front air control harness connector M49 terminal 2 (Y). 3-2 : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-95, "CONTROL UNIT" . NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. Revision: October 2004 MTC-58 WJIA1420E 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 5. CHECK PBR GROUND REFERENCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front air control connector. Check continuity between air mix door motor (front) harness connector M147 terminal 2 (P) and front air control harness connector M49 terminal 15 (P). 2 - 15 B C : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. D WJIA1421E 6. CHECK PBR FEEDBACK SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. E Reconnect the front air control connector and air mix door motor (Front) connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 18 (SB) and ground. Rotate Front temperature control dial through complete range. 18 - Ground F G : Approx. 0V - 5V OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-95, "CONTROL UNIT" . NG >> GO TO 7. H LJIA0041E I 7. CHECK PBR FEEDBACK CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. MTC Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the air mix door motor (front) connector and front air control connector. Check continuity between air mix door motor (front) harness connector M147 terminal 4 (SB) and front air control harness connector M49 terminal 18 (SB). 4 - 18 L Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace air mix door motor (Front). Refer to MTC-107, "AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR" . NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. Revision: October 2004 K MTC-59 M WJIA1422E 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Intake Door Motor Circuit EJS003U8 SYMPTOM: ● Intake door does not change. ● Intake door motor does not operate normally. INSPECTION FLOW WJIA1433E *1 MTC-47, "Operational Check". Revision: October 2004 *2 MTC-45, "A/C System Self-diagnosis Function (With NAVI Only)". MTC-60 *3 MTC-46, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE CHART". 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts A Intake door control system components are: ● Front air control ● Intake door motor B System Operation The intake door control determines the intake door positions based on the position of the recirculation switch. When the recirculation switch is depressed the intake door motor rotates closing off the fresh air inlet and recirculating the cabin air. If the recirculation switch is depressed again, the intake door motor rotates in the opposite direction, again allowing fresh air into the cabin. C D Intake Doors Control Specification E F G WJIA0436E H COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake door motor The intake door motor is attached to the intake unit. It rotates so that air is drawn from inlets set by the front air control. Motor rotation is conveyed to a lever which activates the intake door. I MTC K WJIA0552E L M Revision: October 2004 MTC-61 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE DOOR MOTOR 1. CHECK RESULT FROM FRONT AIR CONTROL SELF-DIAGNOSIS Self-diagnosis code 82 or DTC B2586 is present. Refer to MTC-45, "A/C System Self-diagnosis Function (With NAVI Only)" . YES or NO YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-95, "CONTROL UNIT" . 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR INTAKE DOOR MOTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control connector and intake door motor connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 7 (O) and intake door motor harness connector M58 terminal 1 (O) and between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 8 (G/B) and intake door motor harness connector M58 terminal 6 (G/B). 7-1 8-6 Continuity should exist. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace intake door motor. Refer to MTC-105, "INTAKE DOOR MOTOR" . NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. Revision: October 2004 MTC-62 WJIA0591E 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Defroster Door Motor Circuit EJS003U9 A SYMPTOM: ● ● Defroster door does not change. Defroster door motor does not operate normally. B INSPECTION FLOW C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJIA1423E *1 MTC-47, "Operational Check". Revision: October 2004 *2 MTC-45, "A/C System Self-diagnosis Function (With NAVI Only)". MTC-63 *3 MTC-46, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE CHART". 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts Defroster door control system components are: ● Front air control ● Defroster door motor System Operation The front air control determines defroster door position based on the position of the mode switch. When the mode switch is in the defroster position, the defroster door motor rotates directing air to the defroster ducts. When any mode other than defroster is selected, the defroster motor rotates in the opposite direction closing off air flow to the defroster ducts. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Defroster door motor The defroster door motor is attached to the front heater & cooling unit. The front air control sends a voltage to rotate the defroster door directing the air flow either to the defroster ducts, or to the floor ducts, depending on which way the voltage and ground are applied to the motor leads. Motor rotation is conveyed to a lever which activates the defroster door. WJIA0592E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR 1. CHECK RESULT FROM FRONT AIR CONTROL SELF-DIAGNOSIS Self-diagnosis code 62 or DTC B2583 is present. Refer to MTC-45, "A/C System Self-diagnosis Function (With NAVI Only)" . YES or NO YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> GO TO 3. 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control connector and defroster door motor connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 19 (LG) and defroster door motor connector M144 terminal 1 (LG) and between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 20 (P/B) and defroster door motor connector M144 terminal 6 (P/B). 19 - 1 20 - 6 : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. WJIA0553E OK or NG OK >> Replace defroster door motor. Refer to MTC-104, "DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR" . NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. Revision: October 2004 MTC-64 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 3. CHECK PBR REFERENCE SIGNAL VOLTAGE 1. 2. 3. A Disconnect the defroster door motor harness connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between defroster door motor harness connector M144 terminal 3 (Y) and ground. 3 - Ground B : Approx. 5V. C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 4. D WJIA0554E 4. CHECK PBR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BETWEEN DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR AND FRONT E AIR CONTROL 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front air control connector. Check continuity between defroster door motor harness connector M144 terminal 3 (Y) and front air control harness connector M49 terminal 2 (Y). 3-2 F G : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-95, "CONTROL UNIT" . NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. H WJIA0555E I 5. CHECK PBR GROUND REFERENCE CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. MTC Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the front air control connector. Check continuity between defroster door motor harness connector M144 terminal 2 (P) and front air control harness connector M49 terminal 15 (P). 2 - 15 K : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. L WJIA0556E 6. CHECK PBR FEEDBACK SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Reconnect the front air control connector and defroster door motor connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 25 (LG/B) and ground. Change mode between floor, defroster, and panel. 25 - Ground : Approx.0 - 5V OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-95, "CONTROL UNIT" . NG >> GO TO 7. Revision: October 2004 MTC-65 WJIA0557E 2005 Titan M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 7. CHECK PBR FEEDBACK CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the defroster door motor connector and front air control connector. Check continuity between defroster door motor harness connector M144 terminal 4 (LG/B) and front air control harness connector M49 terminal 25 (LG/B). 4 - 25 : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace defroster door motor. Refer to MTC-104, "DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR" . NG >> Repair or replace harness as necessary. Revision: October 2004 MTC-66 WJIA0558E 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Front Blower Motor Circuit EJS003UA A SYMPTOM: ● Blower motor operation is malfunctioning. ● Blower motor operation is malfunctioning under cold starting conditions. B INSPECTION FLOW C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJIA1451E *1 .MTC-47, "Operational Check" . *2 MTC-45, "A/C System Self-diagnosis Function (With NAVI Only)". *4 MTC-69, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR BLOWER MOTOR". *5 EC-192, "DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR"EC-205, "DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR" Revision: October 2004 MTC-67 *3 MTC-46, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE CHART". 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Component Parts ● ● ● ● ● Front air control Front blower switch Variable blower control Front blower motor Front blower motor relay System Operation WJIA1385E COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Variable Blower Control The variable blower control is located on the cooling unit. The variable blower control receives a gate voltage from the front air control to steplessly maintain the blower motor voltage in the 0 to 5 volt range (approx.). WJIA0559E Revision: October 2004 MTC-68 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR BLOWER MOTOR A SYMPTOM: Blower motor operation is malfunctioning under starting blower speed control. B C D E F G WJIA1386E 1. CHECK FUSES H Check 20A fuses [No. 24 and 27 (Located in the fuse and fusible link box)]. For fuse layout. Refer to PG-78, "FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX" . I Fuses are good. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 10. MTC 2. CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. K Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front blower motor connector. Press the mode switch to select any mode except off. Turn the front blower control dial to high. Check voltage between front blower motor harness connector M62 terminal 2 (W/L) and ground. 2 - Ground M : Battery voltage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 3. Revision: October 2004 L WJIA0593E MTC-69 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 3. CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY (SWITCH SIDE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front blower motor relay. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front blower motor relay harness connector M107 terminals 5 (GR) and ground. 5 - Ground : Battery voltage. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA1359E 4. CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY Turn ignition switch OFF. Refer to MTC-73, "Front Blower Motor Relay" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace front blower motor relay. 5. CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY (SWITCH SIDE) CIRCUIT FOR OPEN Check continuity between front blower motor relay harness connector M107 terminal 3 (W/L) and front blower motor harness connector M62 terminal 2 (W/L). 3-2 : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA1360E 6. CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR OPEN 1. 2. Disconnect variable blower control harness connector. Check continuity between front blower motor relay harness connector M107 terminals 3 (W/L) and variable blower control harness connector M122 terminal 1 (W/L). 3-1 : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA1361E Revision: October 2004 MTC-70 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 7. CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect front air control connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 40 (G/R) and variable blower control harness connector M122 terminal 2 (G/R). 40 - 2 B : Continuity should exist. C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair harness or connector. D WJIA1387E 8. CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY (COIL SIDE) POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. E Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front blower motor relay harness connector M107 terminal 2 (Y/G) and ground. 2 - Ground F : Battery voltage. G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Repair harness or connector. H WJIA1363E 9. CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY (COIL SIDE) GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. I Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between front blower motor relay connector M107 terminal 1 (R/B) and front air control harness connector M49 terminal 26 (R/B). 1 - 26 MTC K : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-95, "CONTROL UNIT" . NG >> Repair harness or connector. L WJIA1364E M 10. REPLACE FUSES 1. Replace fuses. 2. Activate the front blower motor. 3. Do fuses blow? YES or NO YES >> GO TO 11. NO >> Inspection End. Revision: October 2004 MTC-71 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 11. CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SHORT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front blower motor connector and variable blower control connector. Check continuity between variable blower control harness connector M122 terminal 1 (W/L) and ground. 1 - Ground. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA1365E 12. CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect front air control connector. Check continuity between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 40 (G/R) and variable blower control harness connector M122 terminal 2 (G/R). 40 - 2 : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 13. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA1387E 13. CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR Refer to MTC-97, "BLOWER MOTOR" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 14. NG >> Replace front blower motor. Refer to MTC-97, "BLOWER MOTOR" . 14. CHECK BLOWER MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between front blower motor harness connector M62 terminal 1 (L/W) and variable blower control harness connector M122 terminal 3 (L/W). 1-3 : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 15. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA1367E Revision: October 2004 MTC-72 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 15. CHECK VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL GROUND CIRCUIT A Check continuity between variable blower control harness connector M122 terminal 4 (B/W) and ground. 4 - ground B : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace variable blower control. Refer to MTC-108, "VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL" . NG >> Repair harness or connector. C D WJIA1368E COMPONENT INSPECTION Front Blower Motor Relay E Check continuity between terminals by supplying 12 volts and ground to coil side terminals of relay. F G H I MTC K WJIA1401E L Front Blower Motor Confirm smooth rotation of the blower motor. ● Ensure that there are no foreign particles inside the blower unit. ● Apply 12 volts to terminal 1 and ground to terminal 2 and verify that the motor operates freely and quietly. M WJIA1265E Revision: October 2004 MTC-73 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Magnet Clutch Circuit EJS003UD SYMPTOM: Magnet clutch does not engage. INSPECTION FLOW WJIA1435E *1 MTC-47, "Operational Check". *4 MTC-92, "Intake Sensor Circuit". Revision: October 2004 *2 MTC-45, "A/C System Self-diagnosis *3 Function (With NAVI Only)". MTC-74 MTC-46, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE CHART". 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The front air control controls compressor operation based on ambient and intake temperature and a signal from ECM. Low Temperature Protection Control The front air control will turn the compressor ON or OFF as determined by a signal detected by the intake sensor. When intake air temperature is higher than the preset value, the compressor turns ON. The compressor turns OFF when intake air temperature is lower than the preset value. A B C DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MAGNET CLUTCH SYMPTOM: Magnet clutch does not engage when A/C switch is ON. D E F G H I WJIA1392E 1. CHECK INTAKE SENSOR CIRCUITS Check intake sensor. Refer to MTC-45, "A/C System Self-diagnosis Function (With NAVI Only)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Malfunctioning intake sensor. Refer to MTC-92, "Intake Sensor Circuit" . K L 2. PERFORM AUTO ACTIVE TEST Refer to PG-22, "Auto Active Test" . Does magnet clutch operate? YES or NO YES >> ● WITH CONSULT-II GO TO 5. M WITHOUT CONSULT-II GO TO 6. >> Check 10A fuse (No. 42, located in IPDM E/R), and GO TO 3. ● NO Revision: October 2004 MTC MTC-75 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 3. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN IPDM E/R AND COMPRESSOR 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and A/C compressor (magnet clutch) connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E119 terminal 11 (Y/B) and A/C compressor harness connector F3 terminal 1 (Y/B). 11 – 1 : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA0560E 4. CHECK MAGNET CLUTCH CIRCUIT Check for operation sound when applying battery voltage to terminal 1 of A/C compressor. OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . NG >> Replace magnet clutch. Refer to MTC-116, "Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch" . WJIA1452E 5. CHECK BCM INPUT (COMPRESSOR ON) SIGNAL Check compressor ON/OFF signal. Refer to MTC-31, "CONSULT-II Function (BCM)" . A/C SW ON A/C SW OFF : COMP ON SIG ON : COMP ON SIG OFF OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> GO TO 6. WJIA0469E 6. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN BCM AND FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connector and front air control connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 27 (W/R) and front air control harness connector M49 terminal 12 (W/R). 27 - 12 Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: October 2004 WJIA1443E MTC-76 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 7. CHECK VOLTAGE FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL (COMPRESSOR ON SIGNAL) 1. 2. 3. A Reconnect BCM connector and front air control connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 12 (W/R) and ground. B Terminals C (+) Condition Front air control connector Voltage (-) Terminal No. (Wire color) D WJIA0449E M49 12 (W/R) Ground A/C switch: ON Approx. 0V A/C switch: OFF Approx. 5V E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG-1 >> If the voltage is approx. 5V when A/C switch is ON, replace front air control. Refer to MTC-95, "CONTROL UNIT" . NG-2 >> If the voltage is approx. 0V when A/C switch is OFF, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . F G 8. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR H WITH CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Check voltage of refrigerant pressure sensor. Refer to MTC-28, "CONSULT-II Function (HVAC)" . I WITHOUT CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Check voltage between ECM harness connector F54 terminal 70 (B/W) and ground. MTC Terminals K (+) ECM connector Terminal No. (Wire color) (-) F54 70 (B/W) Ground OK or NG OK >> ● Condition Voltage A/C switch: ON Approx. 0.36 - 3.88V L WITH CONSULT-II GO TO 9. LJIA0124E WITHOUT CONSULT-II GO TO 10. >> Refer to EC-620, "REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR" . ● NG Revision: October 2004 MTC-77 2005 Titan M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 9. CHECK BCM INPUT (FAN ON) SIGNAL Check FAN ON/OFF signal. Refer to MTC-31, "CONSULT-II Function (BCM)" . FRONT BLOWER CONTROL DIAL ON FRONT BLOWER CONTROL DIAL OFF : FAN ON SIG ON : FAN ON SIG OFF OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG >> GO TO 10. WJIA0469E 10. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN BCM AND FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connector and front air control connector. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 28 (L/R) and front air control harness connector M50 terminal 36 (L/R). 28 - 36 Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WJIA1393E 11. CHECK VOLTAGE FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL (FAN ON SIGNAL) 1. 2. 3. Reconnect BCM connector and front air control connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between front air control harness connector M49 terminal 36 (L/R) and ground. Terminals (+) Front air control connector M50 Terminal No. (Wire color) 36 (L/R) Condition Voltage A/C switch: ON Blower motor operates Approx. 0V A/C switch: OFF Approx. 5V (-) Ground WJIA1394E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 12. NG-1 >> If the voltage is approx. 5V when blower motor is ON, replace front air control. Refer to MTC-95, "CONTROL UNIT" . NG-2 >> If the voltage is approx. 0V when blower motor is OFF, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . Revision: October 2004 MTC-78 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 12. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION A Check CAN communication. Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . ● BCM – ECM ● ECM – IPDM E/R ● ECM – Front air control OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part(s). B C COMPONENT INSPECTION Refrigerant Pressure Sensor D The refrigerant pressure sensor is attached to the condenser. E F G WJIA1444E H I MTC K L M Revision: October 2004 MTC-79 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Insufficient Cooling EJS003UE SYMPTOM: Insufficient cooling INSPECTION FLOW WJIA1436E *3 *1 .MTC-47, "Operational Check" . *2 MTC-45, "A/C System Self-diagnosis Function (With NAVI Only)". *4 EC-436, "DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE" . *5 MTC-4, "Contaminated Refrigerant". *6 *7 MTC-83, "Test Reading" *8 EM-12, "Checking Drive Belts" Revision: October 2004 MTC-80 MTC-46, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE CHART". .MTC-81, "PERFORMANCE TEST DIAGNOSES" 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PERFORMANCE TEST DIAGNOSES A B C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJIA0533E *1 MTC-83, "PERFORMANCE CHART". *4 MTC-56, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit". Revision: October 2004 *2 MTC-83, "PERFORMANCE CHART". MTC-81 *3 MTC-84, "Trouble Diagnoses for Unusual Pressure". 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WJIA1371E *1 MTC-116, "Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch". Revision: October 2004 *2 MTC-67, "Front Blower Motor Circuit". MTC-82 *3 EM-12, "Checking Drive Belts". 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PERFORMANCE CHART Test Condition A Testing must be performed as follows: Vehicle location Indoors or in the shade (in a well-ventilated place) Doors Closed Door window Open Hood Open TEMP. Max. COLD Mode switch B C (Ventilation) set Recirculation (REC) switch D (Recirculation) set Max. speed set Blower speed Engine speed E Idle speed Operate the air conditioning system for 10 minutes before taking measurements. Test Reading F Recirculating-to-discharge Air Temperature Table Inside air (Recirculating air) at blower assembly inlet Relative humidity % Discharge air temperature at center ventilator °C (°F) Air temperature °C (°F) 20 (68) 5.3 - 6.5 (42 - 44) 25 (77) 9.7 - 11.5 (49 - 53) 30 (86) 13.8 - 16.3 (57 - 61) 35 (95) 18.0 - 21.2 (64 - 70) 40 (104) 22.2 - 25.7 (72 - 78) 50 - 60 20 (68) 6.5 - 7.7 (44 - 46) 25 (77) 11.5 - 13.3 (53 - 56) 30 (86) 16.3 - 18.8 (61 - 66) 35 (95) 21.2 - 24.0 (70 - 75) 40 (104) 25.7 - 29.2 (78 - 85) 60 - 70 G H I MTC K Ambient Air Temperature-to-operating Pressure Table Ambient air Relative humidity % 50 - 70 Revision: October 2004 L High-pressure (Discharge side) Low-pressure (Suction side) Air temperature °C (°F) kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) 20 (68) 680 - 840 (6.94 - 8.57, 98.6 - 121.8) 160 - 198 (1.63 - 2.02, 23.2 - 28.7) 25 (77) 800 - 985 (8.16 - 10.05, 116.0 - 142.8) 198 - 245 (2.02 - 2.50, 28.7 - 35.5) 30 (86) 940 - 1,150 (9.59 - 11.73, 136.3 - 166.8) 225 - 278 (2.30 - 2.84, 32.6 - 40.3) 35 (95) 1,160 - 1,410 (11.83 - 14.38, 168.2 - 204.5) 273 - 335 (2.78 - 3.42, 39.6 - 48.6) 40 (104) 1,325 - 1,620 (13.52 - 16.52, 192.1 - 234.9) 325 - 398 (3.32 - 4.06, 47.1 - 57.7) M MTC-83 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR UNUSUAL PRESSURE Whenever system′s high and/or low side pressure is unusual, diagnose using a manifold gauge. The marker above the gauge scale in the following tables indicates the standard (usual) pressure range. Since the standard (usual) pressure, however, differs from vehicle to vehicle, refer to above table (Ambient air temperatureto-operating pressure table). Both High- and Low-pressure Sides are Too High Gauge indication Refrigerant cycle Pressure is reduced soon after water is splashed on condenser. Air suction by cooling fan is insufficient. Probable cause Excessive refrigerant charge in refrigeration cycle Insufficient condenser cooling performance ↓ 1. Condenser fins are clogged. Corrective action Reduce refrigerant until specified pressure is obtained. ● Clean condenser. ● Check and repair cooling fan if necessary. 2. Improper fan rotation of cooling fan Both high- and low-pressure sides are too high. ● Low-pressure pipe is not cold. ● When compressor is stopped high-pressure value quickly drops by approximately 196 kPa (2 kg/cm2 , 28 psi). It then decreases gradually thereafter. AC359A Engine tends to overheat. ● ● An area of the low-pressure pipe is colder than areas near the evaporator outlet. Plates are sometimes covered with frost. Poor heat exchange in condenser (After compressor operation stops, high-pressure decreases too slowly.) ↓ Air in refrigeration cycle Evacuate repeatedly and recharge system. Engine cooling systems malfunction. Check and repair engine cooling system. ● Excessive liquid refrigerant on low-pressure side ● Excessive refrigerant discharge flow ● Expansion valve is open a little compared with the specification. Replace expansion valve. ↓ Improper expansion valve adjustment High-pressure Side is Too High and Low-pressure Side is Too Low Gauge indication Refrigerant cycle Probable cause Corrective action High-pressure side is too high and low-pressure side is too low. Upper side of condenser and high-pressure side are hot, however, liquid tank is not so hot. High-pressure tube or parts located between compressor and condenser are clogged or crushed. ● Check and repair or replace malfunctioning parts. ● Check lubricant for contamination. AC360A Revision: October 2004 MTC-84 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS High-pressure Side is Too Low and Low-pressure Side is Too High Gauge indication High-pressure side is too low and low-pressure side is too high. Refrigerant cycle Probable cause High- and low-pressure sides become equal soon after compressor operation stops. Compressor pressure operation is improper. ↓ Damaged inside compressor packings. No temperature difference between high- and low-pressure sides. Compressor pressure operation is improper. ↓ Damaged inside compressor packings. AC356A Corrective action Replace compressor. A B C Replace compressor. D Both High- and Low-pressure Sides are Too Low Gauge indication Refrigerant cycle ● ● ● ● ● Both high- and low-pressure sides are too low. AC353A There is a big temperature difference between liquid tank outlet and inlet. Outlet temperature is extremely low. Probable cause Liquid tank inside is slightly clogged. Corrective action ● Replace liquid tank. ● Check lubricant for contamination. Liquid tank inlet and expansion valve are frosted. Temperature of expansion valve inlet is extremely low as compared with areas near liquid tank. Expansion valve inlet may be frosted. There is a big temperature difference between expansion valve inlet and outlet while the valve itself is frosted. High-pressure pipe located between liquit tank and expansion valve is clogged. ● Check and repair malfunctioning parts. ● Check lubricant for contamination. Low refrigerant charge. ↓ Leaking fittings or components. Check refrigerant system for leaks. Refer to MTC-123, "Checking for Refrigerant Leaks" . Expansion valve closes a little compared with the specification. ↓ ● 1. Improper expansion valve adjustment. Remove foreign particles by using compressed air. ● Check lubricant for contamination. 2. Malfunctioning expansion valve. 3. Outlet and inlet may be clogged. An area of the low-pressure pipe is colder than areas near the evaporator outlet. Air flow volume is too low. Revision: October 2004 F G Temperature difference occurs somewhere in highpressure side. Expansion valve and liquid tank are warm or only cool when touched. E Low-pressure pipe is clogged or crushed. Evaporator is frozen. MTC-85 ● Check and repair malfunctioning parts. ● Check lubricant for contamination. ● Check intake sensor circuit. Refer to MTC-92, "Intake Sensor Circuit" . ● Repair evaporator fins. ● Replace evaporator. ● Refer to MTC-67, "Front Blower Motor Circuit" . 2005 Titan H I MTC K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Low-pressure Side Sometimes Becomes Negative Gauge indication Low-pressure side sometimes becomes negative. Refrigerant cycle ● ● Air conditioning system does not function and does not cyclically cool the compartment air. The system constantly functions for a certain period of time after compressor is stopped and restarted. Probable cause Refrigerant does not discharge cyclically. ↓ Moisture is frozen at expansion valve outlet and inlet. ↓ Water is mixed with refrigerant. Corrective action ● Drain water from refrigerant or replace refrigerant. ● Replace liquid tank. AC354A Low-pressure Side Becomes Negative Gauge indication Refrigerant cycle Probable cause Corrective action Leave the system at rest until no frost is present. Start it again to check whether or not the malfunction is caused by water or foreign particles. ● If water is the cause, initially cooling is okay. Then the water freezes causing a blockage. Drain water from refrigerant or replace refrigerant. ● If due to foreign particles, remove expansion valve and remove the particles with dry and compressed air (not shop air). ● If either of the above methods cannot correct the malfunction, replace expansion valve. ● Replace liquid tank. ● Check lubricant for contamination. Low-pressure side becomes negative. Liquid tank or front/rear side of expansion valve′s pipe is frosted or dewed. High-pressure side is closed and refrigerant does not flow. ↓ Expansion valve or liquid tank is frosted. AC362A Revision: October 2004 MTC-86 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Insufficient Heating EJS003UF A SYMPTOM: Insufficient heating INSPECTION FLOW B C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJIA1437E *1 .MTC-47, "Operational Check" *2 MTC-56, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit". *3 MTC-45, "A/C System Self-diagnosis Function (With NAVI Only)". *4 MTC-46, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE *5 CHART". MTC-67, "Front Blower Motor Circuit". *6 EC-192, "DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR". *7 CO-10, "Changing Engine Coolant". CO-11, "REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT". *9 MTC-90, "Water Valve Circuit" *8 *10 CO-6, "OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS" Revision: October 2004 MTC-87 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Noise EJS003UG SYMPTOM: Noise INSPECTION FLOW WJIA0473E *1 MTC-116, "Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch". *2 MTC-117, "Clutch Disc". *4 MTC-47, "Operational Check". *5 EM-12, "Checking Drive Belts". Revision: October 2004 MTC-88 *3 MTC-20, "Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor". 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Self-diagnosis EJS003UH A SYMPTOM: Self-diagnosis cannot be performed. INSPECTION FLOW B C D E F G H I MTC K WJIA1438E *1 MTC-49, "Power Supply and Ground *2 Circuit for Front Air Control". MTC-92, "Intake Sensor Circuit". *4 MTC-47, "Operational Check". MTC-33, "SYMPTOM TABLE". *5 *3 MTC-56, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit". L M Revision: October 2004 MTC-89 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Water Valve Circuit EJS003UI COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Water Valve The water valve cuts the flow of engine coolant to the front heater cores to allow for maximum cooling during A/C operation. It is controlled by the front air control through the water valve relay. WJIA1015E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR WATER VALVE 1. CHECK WATER VALVE RELAY POWER INPUT CIRCUITS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect water valve relay connector M7. Check voltage between water valve relay harness connector terminals and ground. Terminals Ignition switch position (+) Water valve relay connector Terminal No. (Wire color) (-) OFF ON Battery voltage Battery voltage 0V Battery voltage WJIA0900E 2 (Y/R) M7 3 (Y/G) Ground OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair harness or connector. 2. CHECK WATER VALVE CONTROL 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Select MAX A/C with mode switch. Check continuity between water valve relay harness connector M7 terminal 1 (W/G) and ground, as MAX A/C is switched OFF and ON. Terminals (+) Condition Water valve relay connector Terminal No. (Wire color) (-) M7 1 (W/G) Ground Continuity WJIA0901E MAX A/C: ON Yes MAX A/C: OFF No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. Revision: October 2004 MTC-90 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 3. CHECK WATER VALVE CONTROL OUTPUT CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 1 - 10 4. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control connector M49. Check continuity between water valve relay harness connector M7 terminal 1 (W/G) and front air control harness connector M49 terminal 10 (W/G). B C : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between water valve relay harness connector M7 terminal 1 (W/G) and ground. 1 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. D WJIA1014E OK or NG OK >> Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-95, "CONTROL UNIT" . NG >> Repair harness or connector. E 4. CHECK WATER VALVE RELAY F Check water valve relay. Refer to MTC-92, "Water Valve Relay" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace water valve relay. G H 5. CHECK WATER VALVE GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect water valve connector F68. Check continuity between water valve harness connector F68 terminal - (B) and ground. I MTC (-) - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair harness or connector. K WJIA1373E L 6. CHECK WATER VALVE POWER CIRCUIT 1. Check continuity between water valve relay connector M7 terminal 5 (Y/L) and water valve connector F68 terminal + (Y/L) 5 - (+) 2. M : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between water valve relay harness connector M7 terminal 5 (Y/L) and ground. 5 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace water valve. NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: October 2004 WJIA0903E MTC-91 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS COMPONENT INSPECTION Water Valve Relay Check continuity between terminals by supplying 12 volts and ground to coil side terminals of relay. LHA160 Intake Sensor Circuit EJS003UJ COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Intake Sensor The intake sensor is located on the heater & cooling unit. It converts temperature of air after it passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air control. WJIA0571E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE SENSOR SYMPTOM: Intake sensor circuit is open or shorted. (56, 57 or DTC B2581, B2582 is indicated on front air control as a result of conducting Self-diagnosis). WJIA0464E 1. CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN INTAKE SENSOR AND GROUND 1. 2. 3. Disconnect intake sensor connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between intake sensor harness connector M146 terminal 2 (L/B) and ground. 2 - Ground : Approx. 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 4. WJIA1375E Revision: October 2004 MTC-92 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 2. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN INTAKE SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control connector. Check continuity between intake sensor harness connector M146 terminal 1 (V/R) and front air control harness connector M49 terminal 21 (V/R). 1 - 21 B C : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connector. D WJIA1376E 3. CHECK INTAKE SENSOR E Refer to MTC-92, "Intake Sensor Circuit" . OK or NG OK >> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-95, "CONTROL UNIT" . 2. Go to self-diagnosis MTC-45, "A/C System Self-diagnosis Function (With NAVI Only)" and perform self-diagnosis. NG >> 1. Replace intake sensor. Refer to MTC-96, "INTAKE SENSOR" . 2. Go to self-diagnosis MTC-45, "A/C System Self-diagnosis Function (With NAVI Only)" and perform self-diagnosis. F G H 4. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN INTAKE SENSOR AND FRONT AIR CONTROL 1. 2. 3. 2-9 4. I Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front air control connector. Check continuity between intake sensor harness connector M146 terminal 2 (L/B) and front air control harness connector M49 terminal 9 (L/B). MTC : Continuity should exist. K Check continuity between intake sensor harness connector M146 terminal 2 (L/B) and ground. 2 - Ground : Continuity should not exist. WJIA1377E OK or NG OK >> 1. Replace front air control. Refer to MTC-95, "CONTROL UNIT" . 2. Go to self-diagnosis MTC-45, "A/C System Self-diagnosis Function (With NAVI Only)" and perform self-diagnosis. NG >> Repair harness or connector. Revision: October 2004 MTC-93 2005 Titan L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS COMPONENT INSPECTION Intake Sensor After disconnecting intake sensor connector, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 at sensor harness side, using the table below. Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ −15 (5) 209.0 −10 (14) 160.0 −5 (23) 123.0 0 (32) 95.8 5 (41) 74.9 10 (50) 58.9 15 (59) 46.7 20 (68) 37.3 25 (77) 30.0 30 (86) 24.2 35 (95) 19.7 40 (104) 16.1 45 (113) 13.2 WJIA1378E If NG, replace intake sensor. Revision: October 2004 MTC-94 2005 Titan CONTROL UNIT CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation PFP:27500 A EJS0032V REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the three control knobs from the front air control unit. Remove the cluster lid C. Refer to IP-10, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the four screws securing the front air control unit to the cluster lid C. Disconnect the two electrical connectors. Remove the front air control unit. B C D E LJIA0130E F INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. G H I MTC K L M Revision: October 2004 MTC-95 2005 Titan INTAKE SENSOR INTAKE SENSOR Removal and Installation PFP:27723 EJS0032W REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to IP-10, "Removal and Installation" . Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector. NOTE: The intake sensor is located on the top of the heater and cooling unit assembly next to the A/C evaporator cover. Twist the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the heater and cooling unit assembly. WJIA1349E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 MTC-96 2005 Titan BLOWER MOTOR BLOWER MOTOR Removal and Installation PFP:27226 A EJS0032X Blower Motor - Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly B C D E F G LJIA0136E 1. Heater and cooling unit assembly 2. Blower motor 3. Variable blower control H REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-10, "Removal and Installation" . Disconnect the blower motor electrical connector. Remove the three screws and remove the blower motor. I INSTALLATION MTC Installation is in the reverse order of removal. K L M Revision: October 2004 MTC-97 2005 Titan IN-CABIN MICROFILTER IN-CABIN MICROFILTER Removal and Installation PFP:27277 EJS0032Y FUNCTION The air inside the passenger compartment is filtered by the in-cabin microfilters when the heater or A/C controls are set on either the recirculation or fresh mode. The two in-cabin microfilters are located in the front heater and cooling unit assembly. LJIA0012E REPLACEMENT TIMING Replacement of the two in-cabin microfilters is recommended on a regular interval depending on the driving conditions. Refer to MA-7, "PERIODIC MAINTENANCE" . It may also be necessary to replace the two in-cabin microfilters as part of a component replacement if the in-cabin microfilters are damaged. REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Remove the instrument lower cover RH. LLIA0072E 2. a. Remove the glove box assembly. Remove the two lower glove box screws. LJIA0146E b. c. Open the glove box, then remove the four upper glove box screws. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the two glove box striker screws. Remove the glove box assembly from the instrument panel to access the in-cabin microfilter cover. WJIA0628E Revision: October 2004 MTC-98 2005 Titan IN-CABIN MICROFILTER 3. 4. Remove the screw and remove the in-cabin microfilter cover. Remove the in-cabin microfilters from the front heater and cooling unit assembly housing. A B C LJIA0134E D 5. Insert the first new in-cabin microfilter into the front heater and cooling unit assembly housing and slide it over to the right. Insert the second new in-cabin microfilter into the front heater and cooling unit assembly housing. NOTE: The in-cabin microfilters are marked with air flow arrows. The end of the microfilter with the arrow should face the rear of the vehicle. The arrows should point downward. E F G LJIA0148E 6. Install the in-cabin microfilter cover. H I MTC LJIA0134E 7. Install the glove box assembly in reverse order of removal. Lower glove box screws Upper glove box screws 8. K : 3.5 N·m (0.36 kg-m, 31 in-lb) : 3.5 N·m (0.36 kg-m, 31 in-lb) L Install the instrument lower cover RH. M LLIA0072E Revision: October 2004 MTC-99 2005 Titan HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation PFP:27110 EJS0032Z WJIA0695E 1. High-pressure A/C pipe 2. Expansion valve 4. A/C drain hose 5. Heater and cooling unit assembly 3. Low-pressure A/C pipe REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Discharge the refrigerant from the A/C system. Refer to MTC-112, "Discharging Refrigerant" . Drain the coolant from the engine cooling system. Refer to MA-13, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" . Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to EI-21, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the exhaust system. Refer to EX-3, "Removal and Installation" . Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core. Disconnect the high/low pressure pipes from the expansion valve. Move the two front seats to the rearmost position on the seat track. Revision: October 2004 MTC-100 2005 Titan HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY 8. Remove the instrument panel and console panel. Refer to IP-10, "Removal and Installation" . 9. Remove the steering column. Refer to PS-9, "Removal and Installation" . 10. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness at the RH and LH in-line connector brackets, and the fuse block (J/B) electrical connectors. Refer to PG-38, "Harness Layout" . 11. Disconnect the steering member from each side of the vehicle body. 12. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly with it attached to the steering member, from the vehicle. CAUTION: Use care not to damage the seats and interior trim panels when removing the heater and cooling unit assembly with it attached to the steering member. 13. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly from the steering member. A B C D INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: ● Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure pipe and high-pressure pipe with a new one, and apply compressor oil to it when installing it. ● After charging the refrigerant, check for leaks. NOTE: ● Fill the engine cooling system with the specified coolant mixture. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants" . ● Recharge the A/C system. Refer to MTC-112, "Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant" . E F G H I MTC K L M Revision: October 2004 MTC-101 2005 Titan HEATER CORE HEATER CORE Removal and Installation PFP:27140 EJS00330 Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly LJIA0138E 1. Heater core cover 2. Heater core pipe bracket 3. 4. Upper bracket 5. Upper heater and cooling unit case 6. A/C evaporator 7. Lower heater and cooling unit case 8. Blower motor 9. Variable blower control Revision: October 2004 MTC-102 Heater core 2005 Titan HEATER CORE REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. A Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-100, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the four screws and remove the upper bracket. Remove the four screws and remove the heater core cover. Remove the heater core pipe bracket. Remove the heater core. NOTE: If the in-cabin microfilters are contaminated from coolant leaking from the heater core, replace the in-cabin microfilters with new ones before installing the new heater core. B C D E LJIA0134E F INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. G H I MTC K L M Revision: October 2004 MTC-103 2005 Titan DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR Removal and Installation PFP:27733 EJS00331 Defroster Door Motor - Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly WJIA0622E 1. Heater and cooling unit assembly 2. Intake door motor 3. Air mix door motor 4. Variable blower control 5. Mode door motor 6. Defroster door motor REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-100, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the steering member from the heater and cooling unit assembly. Disconnect the defroster door motor electrical connector. Remove the three screws and remove the defroster door motor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 MTC-104 2005 Titan INTAKE DOOR MOTOR INTAKE DOOR MOTOR Removal and Installation PFP:27730 A EJS00332 Intake Door Motor - Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly B C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJIA0622E 1. Heater and cooling unit assembly 2. Intake door motor 3. Air mix door motor 4. Variable blower control 5. Mode door motor 6. Defroster door motor REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-100, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the steering member from the heater and cooling unit assembly. Disconnect the intake door motor electrical connector. Remove the three screws and remove the intake door motor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 MTC-105 2005 Titan MODE DOOR MOTOR MODE DOOR MOTOR Removal and Installation PFP:27731 EJS00333 Mode Door Motor - Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly WJIA0622E 1. Heater and cooling unit assembly 2. Intake door motor 3. Air mix door motor 4. Variable blower control 5. Mode door motor 6. Defroster door motor REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-100, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the steering member from the heater and cooling unit assembly. Disconnect the mode door motor electrical connector. Remove the two screws and remove the mode door motor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 MTC-106 2005 Titan AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR Removal and Installation PFP:27732 A EJS00334 Air Mix Door Motor - Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly B C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJIA0622E 1. Heater and cooling unit assembly 2. Intake door motor 3. Air mix door motor 4. Variable blower control 5. Mode door motor 6. Defroster door motor REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-100, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the steering member from the heater and cooling unit assembly. Disconnect the air mix door motor electrical connector. Remove the three screws and remove the air mix door motor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 MTC-107 2005 Titan VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL Removal and Installation PFP:27200 EJS00335 Variable Blower Control - Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly WJIA0622E 1. Heater and cooling unit assembly 2. Intake door motor 3. Air mix door motor 4. Variable blower control 5. Mode door motor 6. Defroster door motor REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-100, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the steering member from the heater and cooling unit assembly. Disconnect the blower motor resistor electrical connector. Remove the two screws and remove the blower motor resistor. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 MTC-108 2005 Titan DUCTS AND GRILLES DUCTS AND GRILLES Removal and Installation PFP:27860 A EJS00336 Ducts - Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly B C D E F G H I MTC K L M LJIA0141E Revision: October 2004 MTC-109 2005 Titan DUCTS AND GRILLES 1. Defroster nozzle 2. LH side demister duct 3. LH ventilator duct 4. RH side demister duct 5. RH ventilator duct 6. Center ventilator duct 7. Heater and cooling unit assembly 8. Floor duct 9. Clips Grilles WJIA0696E 1. Instrument panel 2. Side ventilator assembly LH 3. Storage tray bottom cover (LH) 4. Cluster lid D ventilator LH 5. Cluster lid D ventilator RH 6. Side ventilator assembly RH 7. Storage tray bottom cover (RH) DEFROSTER NOZZLE Removal 1. 2. 3. Remove the instrument panel trim. Refer to IP-10, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-100, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the defroster nozzle. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. RH AND LH SIDE DEMISTER DUCT Removal 1. 2. 3. Remove the instrument panel trim. Refer to IP-10, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-100, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the RH or LH side demister duct. Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. RH AND LH VENTILATOR DUCT Removal 1. 2. Remove the instrument panel trim. Refer to IP-10, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-100, "Removal and Installation" . Revision: October 2004 MTC-110 2005 Titan DUCTS AND GRILLES 3. Remove the RH or LH ventilator duct. A Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B Remove the instrument panel trim. Refer to IP-10, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-100, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the defroster nozzle. Remove the RH and LH side demister ducts. Remove the RH and LH ventilator ducts. Remove the center ventilator duct. C D Installation E Installation is in the reverse order of removal. FLOOR DUCT Removal 1. 2. F Remove the floor carpet. Refer to EI-41, "FLOOR TRIM" . Remove the two clips and remove the floor duct. G Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. H GRILLES Removal 1. 2. Remove the interior trim panel as necessary. Refer to EI-36, "BODY SIDE TRIM" or EI-43, "HEADLINING" . Remove the ventilator grille from the interior trim panel. Installation I MTC Installation is in the reverse order of removal. K L M Revision: October 2004 MTC-111 2005 Titan REFRIGERANT LINES REFRIGERANT LINES HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure PFP:92600 EJS00337 SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT Discharging Refrigerant WJIA0579E 1. Shut-off valve 2. A/C service valve 3. Recovery/Recycling equipment ACR 2000 (J-43600) with refrigerant identifier WARNING: Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant from the A/C system using certified service equipment meeting requirements of SAE J2210 HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment or SAE J2201 HFC-134a (R-134a) recovery equipment. If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers. Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant WJIA0580E 1. Shut-off valve Revision: October 2004 2. A/C service valve MTC-112 3. Recovery/Recycling equipment ACR 2000 (J-43600) with refrigerant identifier 2005 Titan REFRIGERANT LINES 4. Refrigerant container (HFC-134a) 7. Manifold gauge set (J-39183) 5. Weight scale (J-39650) 6. Evacuating vacuum pump (J-39699) A B C D E F G H I MTC K L M WJIA0530E *1 MTC-20, "CHECKING AND ADJUSTING" *3 MTC-123, "Checking for Refrigerant Leaks" *2 MTC-123, "Checking for Refrigerant Leaks" *4 MTC-81, "PERFORMANCE TEST DIAGNOSES" Revision: October 2004 MTC-113 *5 MTC-4, "Contaminated Refrigerant" 2005 Titan REFRIGERANT LINES Components EJS00338 A/C Compressor and Condenser WJIA1020E Revision: October 2004 MTC-114 2005 Titan REFRIGERANT LINES 1. High-pressure service valve 2. Grommet 3. High-pressure pipe 4. Refrigerant pressure sensor 5. Condenser 6. Compressor shaft seal 7. High-pressure flexible hose 8. Low-pressure flexible hose 9. Low-pressure service valve 10. Low-pressure pipe 11. Expansion valve A 12. Drain hose B NOTE: Refer to MTC-6, "Precautions for Refrigerant Connection" . Removal and Installation for Compressor EJS00339 C A/C Compressor Mounting D E F G H I MTC K L M WJIA0698E REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-112, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" . Remove the front right wheel and tire assembly. Refer to WT-6, "Rotation" . Remove the engine under cover and the splash shield using power tool. Remove the engine air cleaner and air ducts. Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" . Remove the drive belt. Refer to EM-12, "DRIVE BELTS" . Disconnect the compressor electrical connector. Disconnect the high-pressure flexible hose and low-pressure flexible hose from the compressor. Revision: October 2004 MTC-115 2005 Titan REFRIGERANT LINES 8. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. Remove the compressor bolts and nut using power tools. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: ● Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure flexible hose with a new one, apply compressor oil to the O-rings before installation. ● After recharging the A/C system with refrigerant, check for leaks. Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch EJS0033A Magnet Clutch Assembly WJIA0372E 1. Magnet clutch assembly 2. Magnet coil 3. Pulley 4. Clutch disc 5. Snap ring 6. Thermal protector (built in) 7. Compressor REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove the compressor. Refer to MTC-115, "Removal and Installation for Compressor" . Remove the center bolt while holding the clutch disc stationary using Tool as shown. Tool number 3. : J-44614 Remove the clutch disc. WHA228 Revision: October 2004 MTC-116 2005 Titan REFRIGERANT LINES 4. Remove the snap ring using external snap ring pliers or suitable tool. A B C RHA072C D 5. Remove the pulley using Tool with a small adapter. Position the small adapter on the end of the drive shaft and the center of the puller on the small adapter. Tool number E : KV99233130 (J-29884) CAUTION: To prevent deformation of the pulley groove, the puller claws should be hooked under the pulley groove and not into the pulley groove. F G WJIA1017E 6. Remove the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver, remove the three magnet coil fixing screws and remove the magnet coil. H I MTC WHA212 INSPECTION Clutch Disc K L If the contact surface shows signs of damage due to excessive heat, replace clutch disc and pulley. M WHA183 Pulley Check the appearance of the pulley assembly. If contact surface of pulley shows signs of excessive grooving, replace clutch disc and pulley. The contact surfaces of the pulley assembly should be cleaned with a suitable solvent before reinstallation. Coil Check magnet coil for loose connections or any cracked insulation. Revision: October 2004 MTC-117 2005 Titan REFRIGERANT LINES INSTALLATION 1. Install the magnet coil. CAUTION: Be sure to align the magnet coil pin with the hole in the compressor front head. WHA213 2. 3. Install the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver. Install the pulley assembly using Tool and a wrench, then install the snap ring using snap ring pliers. Tool number : — (J-38873-A) WJIA1016E 4. Install the clutch disc on the compressor shaft, together with the original shim(s). Press the clutch disc down by hand. WHA184 5. Install the clutch pulley bolt using Tool, to prevent the clutch disc from turning and tighten the bolt to specification. Tool number : J-44614 CAUTION: After tightening the clutch pulley bolt, check that the clutch pulley rotates smoothly. WHA229 Revision: October 2004 MTC-118 2005 Titan REFRIGERANT LINES 6. Check the pulley clearance all the way around the clutch disc as shown. Clutch disc-to-pulley clearance A : 0.3 - 0.6 mm (0.012 - 0.024 in) B 7. If the specified clearance is not obtained, replace the adjusting spacer to readjust. 8. Connect the compressor electrical connector. 9. Install the drive belt. Refer to EM-12, "DRIVE BELTS" . 10. Install the engine under cover and the splash shield. C D E F G WHA194 BREAK-IN OPERATION When replacing compressor clutch assembly, always conduct the break-in operation. This is done by engaging and disengaging the clutch about 30 times. Break-in operation raises the level of transmitted torque. Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Flexible Hose EJS0033B REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. Remove the engine air cleaner and air ducts. Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-112, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" . CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. Remove the low-pressure flexible hose. H I MTC K INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: ● Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. ● After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose EJS0033C REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the engine under cover using power tool. Remove the engine air cleaner and air ducts. Refer to EM-14, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-112, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" . Remove the high-pressure flexible hose. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: ● Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. Revision: October 2004 MTC-119 2005 Titan L M REFRIGERANT LINES ● After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe EJS0033D REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. Reposition the IPDM E/R aside. Remove the front right wheel and tire assembly. Refer to WT-6, "Rotation" . Position aside the front floor insulator. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-112, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" . Remove the high-pressure pipe. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: ● Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. ● After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Pipe EJS0033E REMOVAL 1. 2. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-112, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" . Remove the low-pressure pipe. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipes with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: ● Replace the O-ring of the high/low-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when installing it. ● After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor EJS0033F REMOVAL 1. 2. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor electrical connector. Remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the condenser. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. LJIA0145E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: ● Be careful not to damage the condenser fins. ● Apply compressor oil to the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor when installing it. Removal and Installation for Condenser EJS0033G REMOVAL 1. 2. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-112, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" . Remove the radiator. Refer to CO-12, "Removal and Installation" . Revision: October 2004 MTC-120 2005 Titan REFRIGERANT LINES 3. 4. 5. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the core surface of the condenser and the radiator. Disconnect the high-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe from the condenser. CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector. ● Remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the condenser as necessary. Lift the condenser out of the mounting grommets to remove the condenser. A B C D E LJIA0145E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: ● Replace the O-rings of the high-pressure pipe and the high-pressure flexible hose with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them after installing them. ● After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. ● Replace the grommets as necessary. F G H I MTC K L M Revision: October 2004 MTC-121 2005 Titan REFRIGERANT LINES Removal and Installation for Evaporator EJS0033H Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly LJIA0138E 1. Heater core cover 2. Heater core pipe bracket 3. Heater core 4. Upper bracket 5. Upper heater and cooling unit case 6. A/C evaporator 7. Lower heater and cooling unit case 8. Blower motor 9. Variable blower control REMOVAL 1. Remove the heater core. Refer to MTC-102, "Removal and Installation" . Revision: October 2004 MTC-122 2005 Titan REFRIGERANT LINES 2. 3. 4. Remove the defroster mode door arm. Separate the heater core and cooling unit case. Remove the evaporator. A INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Replace the O-rings on the low-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe with new ones. Apply compressor oil to the O-rings before installing them. Removal and Installation for Expansion Valve C EJS0033I REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. B D Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to MTC-112, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" . Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to MTC-100, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the cooler grommet. Remove the expansion valve. E F G WJIA0582E H INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. I Expansion valve bolts A/C refrigerant pipe to expansion valve bolt : 4 N·m (0.41 kg-m, 35 in-lb) : Refer to MTC-114, "Components" . MTC CAUTION: ● Replace the O-rings on the A/C refrigerant pipes with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them. ● After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Checking for Refrigerant Leaks EJS0033J Perform a visual inspection of all refrigeration parts, fittings, hoses and components for signs of A/C lubricant leakage, damage, and corrosion. Any A/C lubricant leakage may indicate an area of refrigerant leakage. Allow extra inspection time in these areas when using either an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) or fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220). If any dye is observed using a fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220), confirm the leak using a electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). It is possible that the dye is from a prior leak that was repaired and not properly cleaned. When searching for leaks, do not stop when one leak is found but continue to check for additional leaks at all system components and connections. When searching for refrigerant leaks using an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995), move the probe along the suspected leak area at 25 - 50 mm (1 - 2 in) per second and no further than 6 mm (1/4 in) from the component. CAUTION: Moving the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe slower and closer to the suspected leak area will improve the chances of finding a leak. Checking System for Leaks Using the Fluorescent Dye Leak Detector 1. EJS0033K Check the A/C system for leaks using the fluorescent dye leak detector and safety goggles (J-42220) in a low sunlight area (area without windows preferable). Illuminate all components, fittings and lines. The dye will appear as a bright green/yellow area at the point of leakage. Fluorescent dye observed at the evaporator drain opening indicates an evaporator core assembly leak (tubes, core or expansion valve). Revision: October 2004 MTC-123 2005 Titan K L M REFRIGERANT LINES 2. 3. 4. If the suspected area is difficult to see, use an adjustable mirror or wipe the area with a clean shop rag or cloth, then inspect the shop rag or cloth with the fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220) for dye residue. After the leak is repaired, remove any residual dye using refrigerant dye cleaner (J-43872) to prevent future misdiagnosis. Perform a system performance check and then verify the leak repair using a electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). NOTE: ● Other gases in the work area or substances on the A/C components, for example, anti-freeze, windshield washer fluid, solvents and lubricants, may falsely trigger the leak detector. Make sure the surfaces to be checked are clean. ● Clean with a dry cloth or blow off with shop air. ● Do not allow the sensor tip of the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) to contact with any substance. This can also cause false readings and may damage the detector. Dye Injection EJS0033L NOTE: This procedure is only necessary when recharging the system or when the compressor has seized and must be replaced. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Check the A/C system static (at rest) pressure. Pressure must be at least 345 kPa (3.52 kg-cm2 , 50 psi). Pour one bottle 7.4 cc (1/4 ounce) of the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) into the HFC-134a (R-134a) dye injector (J-41459). CAUTION: If repairing the A/C system or replacing a component, pour the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) directly into the open system connection and proceed with the service procedures. Connect the refrigerant dye injector (J-41459) to the low-pressure service valve. Start the engine and switch the A/C system ON. When the A/C system is operating (compressor running), inject one bottle 7.4 cc (1/4 ounce) of HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) through the low-pressure service valve using HFC134a (R-134a) dye injector (J-41459). Refer to the manufacturer's operating instructions. With the engine still running, disconnect the HFC-134a (R-134a) dye injector (J-41459) from the low-pressure service valve. Operate the A/C system for a minimum of 20 minutes to mix the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) with the A/C system oil. Depending on the leak size, operating conditions and location of the leak, it may take from minutes to days for the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye to penetrate an A/C system leak and become visible. Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector EJS0033M PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING LEAK DETECTOR NOTE: When performing a refrigerant leak check, use a electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) or equivalent. Ensure that the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) is calibrated and set properly according to the manufacturer's operating instructions. The electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) is a delicate device. To use the leak detector properly, read the manufacturer's operating instructions and perform any specified maintenance. SHA196FA Revision: October 2004 MTC-124 2005 Titan REFRIGERANT LINES 1. Position the probe approximately 5 mm (3/16 in) away from the point to be checked as shown. A B C SHA707EA D 2. When checking for leaks, circle each fitting completely with the probe as shown. E F G SHA706E 3. H Move the probe along each component at a speed of approximately 25 - 50 mm (1 - 2 in)/second as shown. I MTC K SHA708EA CHECKING PROCEDURE NOTE: To prevent inaccurate or false readings, make sure there is no refrigerant vapor, shop chemicals, or cigarette smoke in the vicinity of the vehicle. Perform the leak test in a calm area (low air/wind movement) so that the leaking refrigerant is not dispersed. 1. Turn the engine OFF. 2. Connect the manifold gauge set (J-39183-C) to the A/C service ports. Refer to MTC-112, "SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT" . 3. 4. Check if the A/C refrigerant pressure is at least 345 kPa (3.52 kg/cm2 , 50 psi) above a temperature of 16°C (61°F). If less than specification, recover/evacuate and recharge the system with the specified amount of refrigerant. Refer to MTC-112, "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure" . NOTE: At temperatures below 16°C (61°F), leaks may not be detected since the system may not reach 345 kPa (3.52 kg/cm2 , 50 psi) pressure. Perform the leak test from the high-pressure side (A/C compressor discharge “a” to evaporator inlet “f”) to the low-pressure side (evaporator drain hose “g” to compressor shaft seal “k”). Refer to MTC-114, "Components" . Clean the component to be checked and carefully move the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe completely around the following connections and components. ● Check the compressor shaft seal ● Check the high and low-pressure pipe and hose fittings, and relief valve ● Check the liquid tank Revision: October 2004 MTC-125 2005 Titan L M REFRIGERANT LINES Check the refrigerant pressure sensor ● Check all around the service valves. Ensure service valve caps are secured on the service valves (to prevent leaks). NOTE: After removing manifold gauge set (J-39183-C) from the service valves, wipe any residue from the service valves to prevent any false readings by the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). ● Evaporator With engine OFF, turn blower fan on “High” for at least 15 seconds to dissipate any refrigerant trace in the heater and cooling unit assembly. Wait a minimum of 10 minutes accumulation time (refer to the manufacturer's recommended procedure for actual wait time) before inserting the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe into the heater and cooling unit assembly drain hose. NOTE: Keep the probe inserted for at least 10 seconds. Use caution not to contaminate the probe tip with water or dirt that may be in the drain hose. If a leak is detected, verify at least once by blowing compressed air into the area of the suspected leak, then repeat the leak check. Do not stop when one leak is found. Continue to check for additional leaks at all system components and connections. If no leaks are found, perform steps 8 - 11. Start the engine. Set the heater A/C controls as follows: NOTE: For the automatic system, turn OFF the automatic controls and set the heater A/C controls manually. A/C switch to ON Air flow to VENT mode Intake position to RECIRCULATION mode Temperature to MAX cold Blower speed to HIGH ● 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. a. b. c. d. e. 10. Run the engine at 1,500 rpm for at least 2 minutes. 11. Turn the engine OFF and perform the leak check again following steps 4 through 6 above. Refrigerant leaks should be checked immediately after turning the engine OFF. Begin with the leak detector at the compressor. The pressure on the high pressure side will gradually drop after the refrigerant circulation stops and pressure on the low pressure side will gradually rise, as shown in the graph. Some leaks are more easily detected when the pressure is high. SHA839E 12. Before connecting the recovery/recycling recharging equipment to the vehicle, check the recovery/recycling recharging equipment gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If pressure is displayed, recover the refrigerant from the equipment lines and then check the refrigerant purity. 13. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/recycling recharging equipment and refrigerant identifier equipment (J-41810-NI). 14. Confirm the refrigerant purity in the vehicle's A/C system using recovery/recycling recharging equipment and refrigerant identifier equipment (J-41810-NI). 15. Discharge the A/C system using recovery/recycling recharging equipment. Repair the leaking fitting or component as necessary. 16. Evacuate and recharge the A/C system and perform the leak test to confirm that there are no refrigerant leaks. 17. Conduct the Operational Check to ensure system works properly. Refer to MTC-47, "Operational Check" . Revision: October 2004 MTC-126 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Service Data and Specifications (SDS) PFP:00030 A EJS0033N COMPRESSOR Make ZEXEL VALEO CLIMATE CONTROL Model DKS-17D Type Swash plate Displacement 175.5 cm3 (10.7 in3 ) / revolution Cylinder bore × stroke 30.5 mm (1.20 in) x 24.0 mm (0.94 in) Direction of rotation Clockwise (viewed from drive end) Drive belt Poly V B C D LUBRICANT E Make ZEXEL VALEO CLIMATE CONTROL Model DKS-17D Name NISSAN A/C System Lubricant Type S (DH-PS) Part number KLH00-PAGS0 Capacity 200 m F G (6.8 US fl oz, 7.0 lmp fl oz) REFRIGERANT Type HFC-134a (R-134a) Capacity 0.70 ± 0.05 kg (1.54 ± 0.11 lb) H ENGINE IDLING SPEED I Refer to EC-76, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check" . BELT TENSION MTC Refer to EM-12, "Tension Adjustment" . K L M Revision: October 2004 MTC-127 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Revision: October 2004 MTC-128 2005 Titan F BRAKES A B SECTION PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM C D E CONTENTS PREPARATION ........................................................... 2 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 2 PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM ...................................... 3 On-Vehicle Service ................................................... 3 PEDAL STROKE ................................................... 3 INSPECT COMPONENTS .................................... 3 ADJUSTMENT ...................................................... 3 PARKING BRAKE CONTROL ................................... 4 Components ............................................................. 4 Removal and Installation .......................................... 4 REMOVAL ............................................................. 4 INSTALLATION ..................................................... 5 PARKING BRAKE SHOE ........................................... 6 Removal and Installation .......................................... 6 COMPONENTS ..................................................... 6 REMOVAL ............................................................. 6 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ......................... 7 INSTALLATION ..................................................... 7 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ........ 9 Parking Drum Brake ................................................. 9 Parking Brake Control .............................................. 9 PB G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 PB-1 2005 Titan PREPARATION PREPARATION Commercial Service Tools PFP:00002 EFS004P1 Kent-Moore No. Tool name Description J-21177-A Brake drum clearance gauge Measuring rear rotor drum to parking brake shoe clearance WFIA0167E Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts PBIC0190E Revision: October 2004 PB-2 2005 Titan PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM On-Vehicle Service PFP:36010 A EFS004P2 PEDAL STROKE ● When parking brake pedal is operated with the specified force, make sure the stroke is within the specified number of notches. Check by listening and counting the ratchet clicks. Pedal stroke : 3 − 4 notches [under force of 196 N (20.0 kg, 44.1 lb)] C INSPECT COMPONENTS ● ● ● ● Make sure the components are attached properly (check for looseness, backlash, etc.). Check parking brake pedal assembly for bend, damage and cracks, and replace if necessary. Check cable for wear and damage, and replace if necessary. Check parking brake warning lamp switch for malfunction, and replace if necessary. D E ADJUSTMENT 1. 2. B Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. Insert a deep socket wrench to rotate adjusting nut and loosen cable sufficiently. Then, disengage the parking brake pedal to the return position. CAUTION: Do not reuse adjusting nut after removing it. PB G H WFIA0165E 3. Remove the rotor and measure inner diameter at widest point using Tool. Tool number a. 4. 5. 6. a. b. J : J-21177-A Transfer measurement less 0.6 mm using Tool as shown to the parking brake shoes, and adjust accordingly. Using wheel nuts, secure disc to hub and prevent it from tilting. Rotate disc rotor to make sure there is no drag. Adjust cable as follows: Operate pedal 10 or more times with a force of 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb). Rotate adjusting nut with deep socket to adjust pedal stroke to specification. Pedal stroke c. I K L M : 3 − 4 notches [under force of 196 N (20.0 kg, 44.1 lb)] With pedal completely returned, make sure there is no drag on the parking brake. WFIA0217E Revision: October 2004 PB-3 2005 Titan PARKING BRAKE CONTROL PARKING BRAKE CONTROL Components PFP:36010 EFS004P3 WFIA0218E 1. Pedal assembly 2. Front cable 3. Right rear cable 4. Left rear cable 5. Return spring 6. Equalizer 7. Adjusting nut 8. Lock plate Removal and Installation EFS004P4 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Remove lower instrument panel. Refer to IP-13, "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL LH" . On models with floor shift, remove center console. Refer to IP-15, "CENTER CONSOLE" . Remove floor trim. Refer to EI-41, "Removal and Installation" . Remove adjusting nut. Remove the lock plate from the front cable. Remove front cable retaining bolts and nut. Disconnect return spring from equalizer. Disconnect the front cable from the equalizer and remove front cable. 9. Remove rear disc rotors. Refer to BR-29, "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor" . 10. Remove parking brake shoe, and remove rear cable from toggle lever. Refer to PB-6, "PARKING BRAKE SHOE" . 11. Remove equalizer from right and left rear cables. 12. Remove right and left rear cables retaining bolts and nuts, then remove right and left rear cables. Revision: October 2004 PB-4 WFIA0165E 2005 Titan PARKING BRAKE CONTROL INSTALLATION A Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Do not reuse adjusting nut after removing it. ● Adjust parking brake. Refer to PB-3, "ADJUSTMENT" . B C D E PB G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 PB-5 2005 Titan PARKING BRAKE SHOE PARKING BRAKE SHOE Removal and Installation PFP:44060 EFS004P5 COMPONENTS LFIA0222E 1. Anti-rattle pins 2. Back plate 3. Shoes 4. Return springs 5. Adjuster 6. Retainers 7. Toggle lever REMOVAL WARNING: Clean the brakes with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of airborne particles or other materials. NOTE: Remove the disc rotor only with the parking brake pedal completely in the released position. 1. Remove the rear disc rotor. Refer to BR-29, "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor" . 2. Remove the return springs. 3. Remove the adjuster. 4. Remove the retainers, anti-rattle pins and shoes. 5. Disconnect the rear cable from the toggle lever. Revision: October 2004 PB-6 2005 Titan PARKING BRAKE SHOE INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Lining Thickness Inspection ● A Check thickness of lining. Standard thickness “A” Repair limit thickness “A” : 3.79 ± 0.21 mm (0.149 ± 0.008 in) : 0.5 mm (0.020 in) B C D SBR021A E Drum Inner Diameter Inspection ● Check drum inner diameter. Standard inner diameter Maximum inner diameter : 205 ± 0.13 mm (8.07 ± 0.01 in) PB : 205.7 mm (8.10 in) G H SBR768A Other Inspections ● ● ● ● ● ● Check shoe sliding surface on back plate for excessive wear and damage. Check anti-rattle pins for excessive wear and corrosion. Check return springs for sagging. Check adjuster for rough operation. When disassembling adjuster, apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or equivalent to the threads. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . Check either visually or with a vernier caliper to see if there is any excessive wear, cracks, or damage inside drum. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Refer to PB-6, "COMPONENTS" and apply brake grease to the specified points during assembly. ● Assemble adjuster so that threaded part expands when rotating it in the direction shown by the arrow. ● Shorten adjuster by rotating it. NOTE: After replacing brake shoes or disc rotors, or if brakes do not function well, perform break-in operation as follows. 1. Adjust parking brake pedal stroke. Refer to PB-3, "ADJUSTMENT" . CAUTION: ● To prevent lining from getting too hot, allow a cool off SFIA0153E period of approximately 5 minutes after every break-in operation. ● Do not perform excessive break-in operations, because it may cause uneven or early wear of lining. Perform parking brake burnishing operation by driving the vehicle forward under the following conditions: Revision: October 2004 J K L INSTALLATION 2. I PB-7 2005 Titan M PARKING BRAKE SHOE ● ● ● 3. Vehicle speed at 40 km/h (25 MPH) Parking brake operating force of 196 N (20.0 kg, 44.1 lb) set For a period of 30 seconds After burnishing operation, check pedal stroke of parking brake. Readjust if it is no longer at the specified stroke. Refer to PB-3, "ADJUSTMENT" . Revision: October 2004 PB-8 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Parking Drum Brake PFP:00030 A EFS004P6 Unit: mm (in) Type Drum Standard thickness (new) Brake lining Wear limit thickness Standard inner diameter (new) Drum inner diameter (disc) Wear limit of inner diameter B 3.79 ± 0.21 (0.149 ± 0.008) 0.5 (0.020) C 205 ± 0.13 (8.07 ± 0.01) 205.7 (8.10) Parking Brake Control EFS004P7 Control type D Foot pedal Number of notches [under force of 196 N (20.0 kg, 44.1 lb)] 3 – 4 notches Number of notches when warning lamp switch comes on E 1 notch PB G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 PB-9 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Revision: October 2004 PB-10 2005 Titan K ELECTRICAL A B SECTION POWER SUPPLY, GROUND & CIRCUIT ELEMENTS C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 3 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT ...................... 4 Schematic ................................................................ 4 Wiring Diagram — POWER — ................................. 6 BATTERY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ANY POSITION ................................................ 6 ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ACC OR ON .............................................11 IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON .................................................................. 12 IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START ....................................... 13 IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) ...................................... 16 System Description ................................................ 16 SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R ........... 16 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL ......... 16 IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL ........................... 17 CAN Communication System Description .............. 17 Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction ... 17 CONSULT-II Function ............................................ 18 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION ...................... 18 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS .......................... 19 DATA MONITOR ................................................. 19 ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 21 Auto Active Test ..................................................... 22 DESCRIPTION .................................................... 22 OPERATION PROCEDURE ............................... 22 INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE... 22 Schematic .............................................................. 24 IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement ........................... 25 IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection .......... 26 Inspection with CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis) ........ 27 Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R ................... 28 REMOVAL ........................................................... 28 INSTALLATION ................................................... 28 Revision: October 2004 GROUND CIRCUIT ................................................... 29 Ground Distribution ................................................. 29 MAIN HARNESS ................................................. 29 ENGINE ROOM HARNESS ................................ 32 ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS .......................... 35 BODY HARNESS ................................................ 36 BODY NO. 2 HARNESS ..................................... 37 HARNESS ................................................................. 38 Harness Layout ...................................................... 38 HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT ................. 38 OUTLINE (KING CAB MODELS) ........................ 39 OUTLINE (CREW CAB MODELS) ...................... 40 MAIN HARNESS ................................................. 41 ENGINE ROOM HARNESS (LH VIEW) .............. 43 ENGINE ROOM HARNESS (RH VIEW) ............. 46 ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS .......................... 48 CHASSIS HARNESS .......................................... 50 BODY HARNESS (KING CAB MODELS) ........... 52 BODY HARNESS (CREW CAB MODELS) ......... 54 BODY NO. 2 HARNESS (KING CAB MODELS)... 56 BODY NO. 2 HARNESS (CREW CAB MODELS)... 58 ROOM LAMP HARNESS .................................... 60 FRONT DOOR HARNESS LH ............................ 61 FRONT DOOR HARNESS RH ............................ 61 REAR DOOR HARNESS LH (CREW CAB MODELS) .................................................................... 62 REAR DOOR HARNESS RH (CREW CAB MODELS) .................................................................... 62 Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) ...................... 63 ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION ............................ 65 Electrical Units Location ......................................... 65 ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................. 65 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT ......................... 66 Fuse ........................................................................ 68 Fusible Link ............................................................ 68 Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM) ............................. 68 HARNESS CONNECTOR ......................................... 69 Description .............................................................. 69 HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING PG-1 2005 Titan F G H I J PG L M TYPE) .................................................................. 69 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) .................................................................. 70 HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) ................................. 71 ELECTRICAL UNITS ................................................ 72 Terminal Arrangement ............................................ 72 STANDARDIZED RELAY .......................................... 73 Description .............................................................. 73 NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND Revision: October 2004 MIXED TYPE RELAYS ........................................73 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS ..................73 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ) ......................75 Terminal Arrangement .............................................75 FUSE BLOCK-JUNCTION BOX(J/B) .......................77 Terminal Arrangement .............................................77 FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX ..............................78 Terminal Arrangement .............................................78 FUSE AND RELAY BOX ...........................................79 Terminal Arrangement .............................................79 PG-2 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00011 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A EKS00AR4 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis B C D E F G EKS00AR5 When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● Refer to GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" in GI section. ● Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" for power distribution. When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● Refer to GI-11, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" in GI section. ● Refer to GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" in GI section. H I J PG L M Revision: October 2004 PG-3 2005 Titan POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT Schematic PFP:24110 EKS00AR6 For detailed ground distribution, refer to PG-29, "Ground Distribution" . WKWA2608E Revision: October 2004 PG-4 2005 Titan POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKWA2609E Revision: October 2004 PG-5 2005 Titan POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT Wiring Diagram — POWER — EKS00AR7 BATTERY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ANY POSITION WKWA2610E Revision: October 2004 PG-6 2005 Titan POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKWA2611E Revision: October 2004 PG-7 2005 Titan POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT WKWA2612E Revision: October 2004 PG-8 2005 Titan POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKWA2614E Revision: October 2004 PG-9 2005 Titan POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT WKWA2629E Revision: October 2004 PG-10 2005 Titan POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ACC OR ON A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKWA2631E Revision: October 2004 PG-11 2005 Titan POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON WKWA2632E Revision: October 2004 PG-12 2005 Titan POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKWA2633E Revision: October 2004 PG-13 2005 Titan POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT WKWA2634E Revision: October 2004 PG-14 2005 Titan POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKWA2635E Revision: October 2004 PG-15 2005 Titan IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) PFP:284B7 System Description EKS00AR8 IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) integrates the relay box and fuse block which were originally placed in engine compartment. It controls integrated relays via IPDM E/R control circuits. ● IPDM E/R-integrated control circuits perform ON-OFF operation of relays, CAN communication control, etc. ● It controls operation of each electrical component via ECM, BCM and CAN communication lines. CAUTION: None of the IPDM E/R integrated relays can be removed. ● SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Lamp control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the following lamps: ● Headlamps (Hi, Lo) ● Parking lamps ● Tail lamps and license lamps ● Front fog lamps Wiper control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the front wipers. Heated mirror relay control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the heated mirror relay. A/C compressor control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the A/C compressor (magnetic clutch). Starter control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the starter relay. Cooling fan control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the cooling fan relays. Horn control Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the horn relay. CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL With CAN communication, by connecting each control unit using two communication lines (CAN L-line, CAN H-line), it is possible to transmit a maximum amount of information with minimum wiring. Each control unit can transmit and receive data, and reads necessary information only. 1. Fail-safe control ● When CAN communication with other control units is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN communication returns to normal operation, it also returns to normal control. ● Operation of control parts by IPDM E/R during fail-safe mode is as follows: Controlled system Headlamp Tail and parking lamps Cooling fan Fail-safe mode ● With the ignition switch ON, the headlamp (low) is ON. ● With the ignition switch OFF, the headlamp (low) is OFF. ● With the ignition switch ON, the tail and parking lamps are ON. ● With the ignition switch OFF, the tail and parking lamps are OFF. ● With the ignition switch ON, the cooling fan HI operates. ● With the ignition switch OFF, the cooling fan stops. Front wiper Until the ignition switch is turned off, the front wiper LO and HI remains in the same status it was in just before fail−safe control was initiated. Heated mirrors Heated mirror relay OFF A/C compressor A/C compressor OFF Front fog lamps Front fog lamp relay OFF Revision: October 2004 PG-16 2005 Titan IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL In order to save power, IPDM E/R switches status by itself based on each operating condition. 1. CAN communication status ● CAN communication is normally performed with other control units. ● Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed. ● When sleep request signal is received from BCM, mode is switched to sleep waiting status. 2. Sleep waiting status ● Process to stop CAN communication is activated. ● All systems controlled by IPDM E/R are stopped. When 1 second has elapsed after CAN communication with other control units is stopped, mode switches to sleep status. 3. Sleep status ● IPDM E/R operates in low current-consumption mode. ● CAN communication is stopped. ● When a change in CAN communication signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status. ● When a change in ignition switch signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication status. CAN Communication System Description C D E F G Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction ● B EKS00AR9 Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . ● A EKS00ARA When the integrated ignition relay is stuck in a "closed contact" position and cannot be turned OFF, IPDM E/R turns ON tail and parking lamps for 10 minutes to indicate IPDM E/R malfunction. When the state of the integrated ignition relay does not agree with the state of the ignition switch signal received via CAN communication, the IPDM E/R activates the tail lamp relay. Ignition switch signal Ignition relay status Tail lamp relay ON ON — OFF OFF — ON OFF — OFF ON ON (10 minutes) H I J PG NOTE: When the ignition switch is turned ON, the tail lamps are OFF. L M Revision: October 2004 PG-17 2005 Titan IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) CONSULT-II Function ● EKS00ARB CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. Inspection Item, Diagnosis Mode Description SELF-DIAG RESULTS The IPDM E/R performs diagnosis of CAN communication and self-diagnosis. DATA MONITOR The input/output data of the IPDM E/R is displayed in real time. ACTIVE TEST The IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to electronic components to check their operation. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0369E 2. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. BCIA0029E 3. Touch “IPDM E/R” on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen. ● If “IPDM E/R” is not displayed, print "SELECT SYSTEM" screen, then refer to LAN-5, "PRECAUTIONS" . BCIA0030E Revision: October 2004 PG-18 2005 Titan IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) 4. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” or “DATA MONITOR”. A B C BCIA0031E D SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Operation Procedure 1. 2. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen. Self-diagnosis results are displayed. E F G WKIA1264E H Display Item List Display items NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. TIME CONSULT-II display code Malfunction detection — — ● CAN COMM CIRC U1000 ● If CAN communication reception/transmission data has a malfunction, or if any of the control units fail, data reception/transmission cannot be confirmed. When the data in CAN communication is not received before the specified time. CRNT PAST — — Possible causes I — J Any of items listed below have errors: X X ● TRANSMIT DIAG ● ECM ● BCM/SEC NOTE: The details for display of the period are as follows: ● CRNT: Error currently detected with IPDM E/R. ● PAST: Error detected in the past and placed in IPDM E/R memory. Touch “DATA MONITOR” on “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen. Touch "ALL SIGNALS”, “MAIN SIGNALS” or “SELECT FROM MENU” on the “DATA MONITOR” screen. ALL SIGNALS All signals will be monitored. MAIN SIGNALS Monitors the predetermined item(s). SELECT FROM MENU Selects and monitors individual signal(s). 3. 4. Touch “START”. Touch the required monitoring item on "SELECT ITEM MENU". Revision: October 2004 PG-19 L M DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. 2. PG 2005 Titan IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) 5. Touch “RECORD” while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop recording, touch “STOP”. Revision: October 2004 PG-20 2005 Titan IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) All Signals, Main Signals, Select From Menu Item name CONSULT-II screen display A Monitor item selection Display or unit ALL SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECT FROM MENU Description B Motor fan request MOTOR FAN REQ 1/2/3/4 X X X Signal status input from ECM Compressor request AC COMP REQ ON/OFF X X X Signal status input from ECM Tail & clear request TAIL & CLR REQ ON/OFF X X X Signal status input from BCM H/L LO request HL LO REQ ON/OFF X X X Signal status input from BCM H/L HI request HL HI REQ ON/OFF X X X Signal status input from BCM FR fog request FR FOG REQ ON/OFF X X X Signal status input from BCM FR wiper request FR WIP REQ STOP/1LOW/ LOW/HI X X X Signal status input from BCM Wiper auto stop WIP AUTO STOP ACT P/STOP P X X X Output status of IPDM E/R Wiper protection WIP PROT OFF/Block X X X Control status of IPDM E/R Starter request ST RLY REQ ON/OFF X X Status of input signal NOTE Ignition relay status IGN RLY ON/OFF X X Ignition relay status monitored with IPDM E/R X D E F G H Rear defogger request (heated mirror) RR DEF REQ ON/OFF X Oil pressure switch OIL P SW OPEN/CLOSE X Hood switch HOOD SW OFF X Theft warning horn request THFT HRN REQ ON/OFF X X Signal status input from BCM Horn chirp HORN CHIRP ON/OFF X X Output status of IPDM E/R Daytime running lamp request DTRL REQ ON/OFF X X Signal status input from BCM X X Signal status input from BCM X Signal status input from IPDM E/R Signal status input from IPDM E/R (function is not enabled) NOTE: Perform monitoring of IPDM E/R data with the ignition switch ON. When the ignition switch is in ACC position, display may not be correct. Touch “ACTIVE TEST” on “SELECT DIAG-MODE” screen. Touch item to be tested, and check operation. Touch “START”. Touch "STOP" while testing to stop the operation. Test name CONSULT-II screen display Description Heated mirror REAR DEFOGGER With a certain ON-OFF operation, the heated mirror relay can be operated. Front wiper (HI, LO) output FRONT WIPER With a certain operation (OFF, HI ON, LO ON), the front wiper relay (Lo, Hi) can be operated. Cooling fan output MOTOR FAN With a certain operation (1, 2, 3, 4), the cooling fan can be operated. Lamp (HI, LO, TAIL, FOG) output EXTERNAL LAMPS With a certain operation (OFF, HI ON, LO ON, TAIL ON, FOG ON), the lamp relay (Low, High, Tail, Fog) can be operated. Revision: October 2004 I J PG L M ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. C PG-21 2005 Titan IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Test name CONSULT-II screen display Cornering lamp output CORNERING LAMP Horn output HORN Description — With a certain ON-OFF operation, the horn relay can be operated. Auto Active Test EKS00ARC DESCRIPTION ● – – – – – – In auto active test mode, operation inspection can be performed when IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following systems: Front wipers Tail, parking, and license lamps Front fog lamps Headlamps (Hi, Lo) (Daytime light system if equipped) A/C compressor (magnetic clutch) Cooling fan OPERATION PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Close hood and front door RH, and lift wiper arms away from windshield (to prevent glass damage by wiper operation). NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield beforehand. Turn ignition switch OFF. Turn ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press front door switch LH 10 times. Then turn ignition switch OFF. Turn ignition switch ON within 10 seconds after ignition switch OFF. When auto active test mode is actuated, horn chirps once. After a series of operations is repeated three times, auto active test is completed. NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway, turn ignition switch OFF. CAUTION: Be sure to perform BL-35, "Door Switch Check (King Cab)" or BL-37, "Door Switch Check (Crew Cab)" when the auto active test cannot be performed. INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE ● When auto active test mode is actuated, the following six steps are repeated three times. WKIA1694E Revision: October 2004 PG-22 2005 Titan IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Concept of Auto Active Test IPDM E/R actuates auto active test mode when it receives door switch signal from BCM via CAN communication line. Therefore, when auto active test mode is activated successfully, CAN communication between IPDM E/R and BCM is normal. ● If any of the systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated, possible cause can be easily diagnosed using auto active test. Diagnosis chart in auto active test mode ● Symptom Inspection contents Perform auto active test. Does system in question operate? NO YES A/C compressor does not operate. Perform auto active test. Does magnetic clutch operate? NO YES Cooling fan does not operate. Oil pressure warning lamp does not operate. Perform auto active test. Does cooling fan operate? Perform auto active test. Does oil pressure warning lamp blink? NO YES NO B C Possible cause YES Any of front wipers, tail and parking lamps, front fog lamps, and headlamps (Hi, Lo) do not operate. A ● BCM signal input system ● Lamp/wiper motor malfunction ● Lamp/wiper motor ground circuit malfunction ● Harness/connector malfunction between IPDM E/R and system in question ● IPDM E/R (integrated relay) malfunction ● BCM signal input circuit ● CAN communication signal between BCM and ECM ● CAN communication signal between ECM and IPDM E/R ● Magnetic clutch malfunction ● Harness/connector malfunction between IPDM E/R and magnetic clutch ● IPDM E/R (integrated relay) malfunction ● ECM signal input circuit ● CAN communication signal between ECM and IPDM E/R ● Cooling fan motor malfunction ● Harness/connector malfunction between IPDM E/R and cooling fan motor ● IPDM E/R (integrated relay) malfunction ● Harness/connector malfunction between IPDM E/R and oil pressure switch ● Oil pressure switch malfunction ● IPDM E/R ● CAN communication signal between BCM and combination meter ● Combination meter D E F G H I J PG L M Revision: October 2004 PG-23 2005 Titan IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Schematic EKS00ARD WKWA2636E Revision: October 2004 PG-24 2005 Titan IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement EKS00ARE A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA1695E Revision: October 2004 PG-25 2005 Titan IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection EKS00ARF 1. FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK INSPECTION ● Check that the following fusible links or IPDM E/R fuses are not blown. Terminal No. Signal name Fuse, fusible link No. 1, 2, 22 Battery power a, c, d, e, l OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Replace fuse or fusible link. 2. POWER CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E118. Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector E118 terminals 1 (B/Y), 2 (R) and ground. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace IPDM E/R power circuit harness. SKIA1987E 3. GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors E122 and E124. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector E122 terminal 38 (B), and E124 terminal 59 (B) and ground. Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Repair or replace ground circuit harness of IPDM E/R. WKIA1453E Revision: October 2004 PG-26 2005 Titan IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Inspection with CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis) EKS00ARG CAUTION: If a CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on which control unit(s) carry out CAN communication. A 1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT CHECK B 1. 2. 3. C Connect CONSULT-II and select "IPDM E/R" on the Diagnosis System Selection screen. Select "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on the diagnosis mode selection screen. Check display content in self-diagnosis results. CONSULT-II Display NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. TIME CONSULT-II display code CRNT PAST — — — Details of diagnosis result No malfunction D E Any of items listed below have errors: CAN COMM CIRC U1000 X X ● TRANSMIT DIAG ● ECM ● BCM/SEC F NOTE: The Details for Display for the Period are as follows: ● CRNT: Error currently detected by IPDM E/R. ● PAST: Error detected in the past and stored in IPDM E/R memory. Contents displayed NO DTC DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED.>>INSPECTION END. CAN COMM CIRC>>Print out the self-diagnosis result and refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . G H I J PG L M Revision: October 2004 PG-27 2005 Titan IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM) Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R EKS00ARH REMOVAL 1. 2. Disconnect negative battery cable. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover. WKIA1454E 3. 4. Release 2 clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and remove the IPDM E/R. WKIA1696E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 PG-28 2005 Titan GROUND CIRCUIT GROUND CIRCUIT Ground Distribution PFP:24080 A EKS00ARI MAIN HARNESS B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA3628E Revision: October 2004 PG-29 2005 Titan GROUND CIRCUIT WKIA3629E Revision: October 2004 PG-30 2005 Titan GROUND CIRCUIT A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA3631E Revision: October 2004 PG-31 2005 Titan GROUND CIRCUIT ENGINE ROOM HARNESS WKIA3632E Revision: October 2004 PG-32 2005 Titan GROUND CIRCUIT A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA3634E Revision: October 2004 PG-33 2005 Titan GROUND CIRCUIT WKIA1459E Revision: October 2004 PG-34 2005 Titan GROUND CIRCUIT ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA1460E Revision: October 2004 PG-35 2005 Titan GROUND CIRCUIT BODY HARNESS WKIA2850E Revision: October 2004 PG-36 2005 Titan GROUND CIRCUIT BODY NO. 2 HARNESS A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA2851E Revision: October 2004 PG-37 2005 Titan HARNESS HARNESS Harness Layout PFP:24010 EKS00ARJ HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings: ● Main Harness ● Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment) ● Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment) ● Engine Control Harness ● Body Harness and Rear Bumper Sub Harness ● Body No. 2 Harness and Fuel Pump Sub Harness To use the grid reference 1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector. SEL252V CONNECTOR SYMBOL Main symbols of connector (in Harness Layout) are indicated below. Water proof type Connector type ● Cavity: Less than 4 ● Relay connector ● Cavity: From 5 to 8 ● Cavity: More than 9 ● Ground terminal etc. Revision: October 2004 Male Standard type Female Male Female — PG-38 2005 Titan HARNESS OUTLINE (KING CAB MODELS) A B C D E F G H I J LKIA0455E PG L M Revision: October 2004 PG-39 2005 Titan HARNESS OUTLINE (CREW CAB MODELS) WKIA2853E Revision: October 2004 PG-40 2005 Titan HARNESS MAIN HARNESS A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA3700E Revision: October 2004 PG-41 2005 Titan HARNESS WKIA3635E Revision: October 2004 PG-42 2005 Titan HARNESS ENGINE ROOM HARNESS (LH VIEW) Engine Compartment A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA2857E Refer to PG-46, "ENGINE ROOM HARNESS (RH VIEW)" for continuation of engine room harness. Revision: October 2004 PG-43 2005 Titan HARNESS WKIA2858E Revision: October 2004 PG-44 2005 Titan HARNESS Passenger Compartment A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA3636E Revision: October 2004 PG-45 2005 Titan HARNESS ENGINE ROOM HARNESS (RH VIEW) Engine Compartment WKIA3701E Refer to PG-43, "ENGINE ROOM HARNESS (LH VIEW)" for continuation of engine room harness. Revision: October 2004 PG-46 2005 Titan HARNESS A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA3637E Revision: October 2004 PG-47 2005 Titan HARNESS ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS WKIA3702E Revision: October 2004 PG-48 2005 Titan HARNESS A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA3639E Revision: October 2004 PG-49 2005 Titan HARNESS CHASSIS HARNESS WKIA3703E Revision: October 2004 PG-50 2005 Titan HARNESS A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA3640E Revision: October 2004 PG-51 2005 Titan HARNESS BODY HARNESS (KING CAB MODELS) WKIA3704E Revision: October 2004 PG-52 2005 Titan HARNESS A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA3641E Revision: October 2004 PG-53 2005 Titan HARNESS BODY HARNESS (CREW CAB MODELS) WKIA3705E Revision: October 2004 PG-54 2005 Titan HARNESS A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA3642E Revision: October 2004 PG-55 2005 Titan HARNESS BODY NO. 2 HARNESS (KING CAB MODELS) LKIA0462E Revision: October 2004 PG-56 2005 Titan HARNESS A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA2867E Revision: October 2004 PG-57 2005 Titan HARNESS BODY NO. 2 HARNESS (CREW CAB MODELS) LKIA0473E Revision: October 2004 PG-58 2005 Titan HARNESS A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA3643E Revision: October 2004 PG-59 2005 Titan HARNESS ROOM LAMP HARNESS WKIA3645E Revision: October 2004 PG-60 2005 Titan HARNESS FRONT DOOR HARNESS LH A B C D E F G H WKIA3646E I FRONT DOOR HARNESS RH J PG L M WKIA3647E Revision: October 2004 PG-61 2005 Titan HARNESS REAR DOOR HARNESS LH (CREW CAB MODELS) WKIA1727E REAR DOOR HARNESS RH (CREW CAB MODELS) WKIA1728E Revision: October 2004 PG-62 2005 Titan HARNESS Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) EKS00ARK Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for. Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location (page number) of each wiring diagram. Code Section MTC AF1B1 EC Air Fuel Ratio Sensor 1 Bank 1 AF1B2 EC Air Fuel Ratio Sensor 1 Bank 2 APPS1 EC Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor APPS2 EC Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor APPS3 EC Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor Manual Air Conditioner ABLS BRC Anti-Lock Brake System Limited Slip ABS BRC Anti-Lock Brake System ASC/BS EC ASCD Brake Switch ASC/SW EC ASCD Steering Switch ASCBOF EC ASCD Brake Switch ASCIND EC ASCD Indicator A/T AT A/T Assembly AT/IND DI A/T Indicator Lamp AUDIO AV Audio AUTO/DP SE Automatic Drive Positioner AUTO/L LT Auto Light Control BACK/L LT Back-up Lamp BRK/SW EC Brake Switch CAN EC CAN Communication Line CAN LAN CAN System CHARGE SC Charging System COOL/F EC Cooling Fan Control COMBSW LT Combination Switch COMM AV Audio Visual Communication System COMPAS DI Compass and Thermometer D/LOCK BL Power Door Lock DIFLOC DI Rear Final Drive DEF GW C D E F G H I J PG L Rear Window Defogger DTRL LT Headlamp - With Daytime Light System DVD AV DVD Entertainment System ECM/PW EC ECM Power Supply for Back-Up ECTS EC Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ETC1 EC Electric Throttle Control Function ETC2 EC Throttle Control Motor Relay ETC3 EC Throttle Control Motor F/FOG LT Front Fog Lamp F/PUMP EC Fuel Pump FTTS EC Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor FUELB1 EC Fuel Injection System Bank 1 FUELB2 EC Fuel Injection System Bank 2 H/LAMP LT Headlamp HORN WW Horn HSEAT SE Heated Seat I/MIRR GW Inside Mirror (Auto Anti-Dazzling Mirror) IATS EC Intake Air Temperature Sensor IGNSYS EC Ignition System Revision: October 2004 B Wiring Diagram Name A/C,M A PG-63 M 2005 Titan HARNESS ILL LT Illumination INJECT EC Injectors INT/L LT Room/Map, Vanity, Cargo, Personal, Foot, Step, and Puddle Lamps KEYLES BL Remote Keyless Entry System KS EC Knock Sensor MAFS EC Mass Air Flow Sensor MAIN EC Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit METER DI Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges MIL/DL EC Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIRROR GW Door Mirror MMSW AT Manual Mode Switch NATS BL Nissan Anti-Theft System NAVI AV Navigation System O2H2B1 EC Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater Bank 1 O2H2B2 EC Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater Bank 2 O2S2B1 EC Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Bank 1 O2S2B2 EC Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Bank 2 P/SCKT WW Power Socket PEDAL AP Adjustable Pedal System PGC/V EC EVAP Canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve PHASE EC Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) (Bank 1) PNP/SW EC Park/Neutral Position Switch POS EC Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) POWER PG Power Supply Routing PRE/SE EC EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor PS/SEN EC Power Steering Pressure Sensor RP/SEN EC Refrigerant Pressure Sensor SEAT SE Power Seat SEN/PW EC Sensor Power Supply SHIFT AT A/T Shift Lock System SONAR DI Rear Sonar System SROOF RF Sunroof SRS SRS Supplemental Restraint System START SC Starting System STOP/L LT Stop Lamp T/TOW LT Trailer Tow T/WARN WT Low Tire Pressure Warning System TAIL/L LT Parking, License and Tail Lamps T/F TF Transfer Case TPS1 EC Throttle Position Sensor TPS2 EC Throttle Position Sensor TPS3 EC Throttle Position Sensor TRNSCV BL HOMELINK® Universal Transceiver LT Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamps TURN VDC BRC Vehicle Dynamic Control System VEHSEC BL Vehicle security (theft warning) system VENT/V EC EVAP Canister Vent Control Valve WARN DI Warning Lamps WINDOW GW Power Window WIPER WW Front Wiper and Washer Revision: October 2004 PG-64 2005 Titan ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION Electrical Units Location PFP:25230 A EKS00ARL ENGINE COMPARTMENT B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA1703E Revision: October 2004 PG-65 2005 Titan ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION PASSENGER COMPARTMENT WKIA2872E Revision: October 2004 PG-66 2005 Titan ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION A B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA1705E Revision: October 2004 PG-67 2005 Titan ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION Fuse ● ● ● ● EKS00ARM If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of incident before installing new fuse. Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than specified rating. Do not partially install fuse; always insert it into fuse holder properly. Remove fuse for “ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)” if vehicle is not used for a long period of time. CEL083 Fusible Link EKS00ARN A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or by feeling with finger tip. If its condition is questionable, use circuit tester or test lamp. CAUTION: ● If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit (power supply or large current carrying circuit) is shorted. In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of incident. ● Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape. ● Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, vinyl or rubber parts. Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM) EKS00ARO For example, when current is 30A, the circuit is broken within 8 to 20 seconds. A circuit breaker is used for the following systems: ● Power seat ● Power windows ● Power door locks ● Remote keyless entry system ● Power sunroof ● Rear window wiper SBF284E Revision: October 2004 PG-68 2005 Titan HARNESS CONNECTOR HARNESS CONNECTOR Description PFP:B4341 A EKS00ARP HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection. ● The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the illustration below. Refer to the next page for description of the slide-locking type connector. CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example] ● B C D E F G H I J PG L M SEL769DA Revision: October 2004 PG-69 2005 Titan HARNESS CONNECTOR HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD. ● The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection. ● The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustration below. CAUTION: ● Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. ● Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector. [Example] ● AEL299C Revision: October 2004 PG-70 2005 Titan HARNESS CONNECTOR HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners. ● Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. ● Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. CAUTION: ● Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components. ● A B C D E WHIA0103E F G H I J PG L M Revision: October 2004 PG-71 2005 Titan ELECTRICAL UNITS ELECTRICAL UNITS Terminal Arrangement PFP:23710 EKS00ARQ WKIA3648E Revision: October 2004 PG-72 2005 Titan STANDARDIZED RELAY STANDARDIZED RELAY Description PFP:25230 A EKS00ARR NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays. B C D E F G SEL881H H TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS I J PG L M SEL882H 1M 1 Make 2M 2 Make 1T 1 Transfer 1M·1B 1 Make 1 Break Revision: October 2004 PG-73 2005 Titan STANDARDIZED RELAY WKIA0253E Revision: October 2004 PG-74 2005 Titan SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ) SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ) Terminal Arrangement PFP:84341 A EKS00ARS B C D E F G H I J PG L M LKIA0385E Revision: October 2004 PG-75 2005 Titan SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ) WKIA1845E Revision: October 2004 PG-76 2005 Titan FUSE BLOCK-JUNCTION BOX(J/B) FUSE BLOCK-JUNCTION BOX(J/B) Terminal Arrangement PFP:24350 A EKS00ART B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA1706E Revision: October 2004 PG-77 2005 Titan FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX Terminal Arrangement PFP:24381 EKS00ARU WKIA3649E Revision: October 2004 PG-78 2005 Titan FUSE AND RELAY BOX FUSE AND RELAY BOX Terminal Arrangement PFP:24012 A EKS00ARV B C D E F G H I J PG L M WKIA2870E Revision: October 2004 PG-79 2005 Titan FUSE AND RELAY BOX Revision: October 2004 PG-80 2005 Titan D DRIVELINE/AXLE A B SECTION PROPELLER SHAFT C PR E CONTENTS PREPARATION ........................................................... 2 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 2 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 3 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 3 FRONT PROPELLER SHAFT .................................... 4 On-Vehicle Service ................................................... 4 PROPELLER SHAFT VIBRATION ........................ 4 INSPECTION ........................................................ 4 Removal and Installation .......................................... 4 REMOVAL ............................................................. 5 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ......................... 5 INSTALLATION ..................................................... 5 Disassembly and Assembly ..................................... 5 DISASSEMBLY ..................................................... 5 ASSEMBLY ........................................................... 6 REAR PROPELLER SHAFT ...................................... 8 On-Vehicle Service ................................................... 8 PROPELLER SHAFT VIBRATION ........................ 8 INSPECTION ........................................................ 8 Removal and Installation .......................................... 8 REMOVAL ............................................................. 9 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 10 INSTALLATION ................................................... 10 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 11 DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 11 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 12 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 15 General Specifications ............................................ 15 Snap Ring ............................................................... 15 F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 PR-1 2005 Titan PREPARATION PREPARATION Commercial Service Tools PFP:00002 EDS001O0 Tool name Description Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts PBIC0190E 205-D002 Bearing splitter Removing center support bearing ZZA0700D Revision: October 2004 PR-2 2005 Titan Symptom Revision: October 2004 Vibration Differential Axle Suspension Tires Road wheel Drive shaft Brakes Steering Noise Excessive run out Possible cause and suspected parts Rotation imbalance × × PR-3 Shake × × × × × × × × × × × × PS-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart BR-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" RAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" WT-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" WT-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" FSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" RSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" RAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" FFD-7, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" RFD-8, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" PR-4 (front) PR-8(rear) PR-4 (front) PR-8 (rear) PR-4 (front) PR-8(rear) Reference page Uneven rotation torque NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING PFP:00003 EDS001O1 A Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. B × × × × × × × × × × × × 2005 Titan C PR E F G H I ×: Applicable J K L M FRONT PROPELLER SHAFT FRONT PROPELLER SHAFT On-Vehicle Service PFP:37200 EDS001O2 PROPELLER SHAFT VIBRATION NOTE: If a vibration is present at high speed, inspect the propeller shaft runout first. 1. Measure the runout of the propeller shaft tube at several points by rotating the final drive companion flange with your hands. Propeller shaft runout limit 2. 3. 4. : 0.6 mm (0.024 in) or less If the runout still exceeds specifications, disconnect the propeller shaft at the final drive companion flange; then rotate the companion flange 90°, 180°, 270° degrees and reconnect the propeller shaft. Check the runout again. If the runout still exceeds specifications, replace the propeller shaft assembly. After installation, check for vibration by driving the vehicle. SDIA1759E INSPECTION Inspect the propeller shaft tube for dents or cracks. If damaged, replace the propeller shaft assembly. Removal and Installation EDS001O3 Model 2F1310 WDIA0047E 1. Propeller shaft tube 2. Snap ring 4. Journal 5. Flange yoke Revision: October 2004 3. PR-4 Journal bearing 2005 Titan FRONT PROPELLER SHAFT REMOVAL 1. 2. A Put matching marks on the front propeller shaft flange yoke and the companion flange of the front final drive as shown. CAUTION: For matching marks, use paint. Never damage the flange yoke and companion flange of the front final drive. Remove the bolts and then remove the front propeller shaft from the front final drive and transfer. B C SDIA2046E PR INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ● Inspect the propeller shaft tube runout. If run out exceeds the limit, replace the propeller shaft assembly. Propeller shaft runout limit E : 0.6 mm (0.024 in) or less F G LDIA0118E ● While holding the flange yoke on one side, check axial play of the journal as shown. If the journal axial play exceeds the specification, replace the propeller shaft assembly. Journal axial play ● H I : 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) or less Check the propeller shaft tube for bend and damage. If damage is detected, replace the propeller shaft assembly. J K LDIA0117E INSTALLATION L Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● After installation, check for vibration by driving the vehicle. Refer to PR-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" . CAUTION: Do not reuse the bolts and nuts. Always install new ones. Disassembly and Assembly EDS001O4 DISASSEMBLY Journal 1. Put matching marks on the front propeller shaft tube and flange yoke as shown. CAUTION: For matching marks, use paint. Never damage the front propeller shaft or flange yoke. SPD128 Revision: October 2004 PR-5 2005 Titan M FRONT PROPELLER SHAFT 2. Remove the snap ring. APD011 3. Push out and remove the journal bearing by lightly tapping the yoke with a hammer, taking care not to damage the journal or yoke hole. SPD732 4. Remove the bearing at the opposite side in above operation. NOTE: Put marks on the disassembled parts so that they can be reinstalled in their original positions from which they were removed. SPD131 ASSEMBLY Journal 1. Assemble the journal bearings. Apply multipurpose grease on the bearing inner surface. NOTE: During assembly, use caution so that the needle bearings do not fall down. WPD019 Revision: October 2004 PR-6 2005 Titan FRONT PROPELLER SHAFT 2. Select snap rings that will provide the specified play in an axial direction of the journal, and install them. Refer to PR-15, "Snap Ring" . NOTE: Select snap rings with a difference in thickness at both sides within 0.02 mm (0.0008 in). A B C APD012 PR 3. Adjust the thrust clearance between the bearing and snap ring to zero by tapping the yoke. E F G SPD732 4. Make sure that the journal moves smoothly and is below the propeller shaft joint flex effort specification. Propeller shaft joint flex effort H : 1.96 N·m (0.20 kg-m, 17 in-lb) or less I J LDIA0119E K L M Revision: October 2004 PR-7 2005 Titan REAR PROPELLER SHAFT REAR PROPELLER SHAFT On-Vehicle Service PFP:37000 EDS001O5 PROPELLER SHAFT VIBRATION NOTE: If vibration is present at high speed, check propeller shaft runout first, then check mounting between propeller shaft and companion flange. 1. Measure the runout of the propeller shaft tube at several points by rotating the final drive companion flange with your hands. Propeller shaft runout limit 2. 3. 4. : 1.02 mm (0.0402 in) or less If the runout still exceeds specifications, disconnect the propeller shaft at the final drive companion flange; then rotate the companion flange 90°, 180°, 270° degrees and reconnect propeller shaft. Check the runout again. If the runout still exceeds specifications, replace the propeller shaft assembly. After installation, check for vibration by driving vehicle. SDIA1781E INSPECTION Inspect the propeller shaft tube for dents or cracks. If damaged, replace the propeller shaft assembly. Removal and Installation EDS001O6 Model 2S1350 WDIA0048E 1. Propeller shaft tube 2. Snap ring 3. Journal bearing 4. Sleeve yoke 5. Journal 6. Flange yoke Revision: October 2004 PR-8 2005 Titan REAR PROPELLER SHAFT Model 3S1350 A B C PR E F G H WDIA0064E 1. Propeller shaft tube 2. Snap ring 3. Journal bearing 4. Sleeve yoke 5. Journal 6. Center support bearing 7. Center support bearing bracket 8. Dust shield 9. Clamp 10. Boot 11. Slip yoke J 12. Flange yoke REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. K Move the A/T select lever to the N position and release the parking brake. Put matching marks on the rear propeller shaft flange yoke and the companion flange of the rear final drive as shown. CAUTION: For matching marks, use paint. Never damage the rear propeller shaft flange yoke or the companion flange. Remove the bolts, then remove the propeller shaft from the rear final drive. L M WDIA0065E Revision: October 2004 I PR-9 2005 Titan REAR PROPELLER SHAFT 4. For model 3S1350, remove the center support bearing bracket nuts, and remove the propeller shaft from the rear final drive. WDIA0066E INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ● Inspect the propeller shaft runout. If runout exceeds the limit, replace the propeller shaft assembly. Propeller shaft runout limit : 1.02 mm (0.0402 in) or less LDIA0121E ● While holding the flange yoke on one side, check axial play of the journal as shown. If the journal axial play exceeds the specification, replace the propeller shaft assembly. Journal axial play ● : 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) or less Check the propeller shaft tube for bend and damage. If damage is detected, replace the propeller shaft assembly. LDIA0117E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● After installation, check for vibration by driving the vehicle. Refer to PR-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" . CAUTION: Do not reuse the bolts and nuts. Always install new ones. Revision: October 2004 PR-10 2005 Titan REAR PROPELLER SHAFT Disassembly and Assembly EDS001O7 A DISASSEMBLY Journal 1. 2. Remove the propeller shaft assembly from the vehicle. Refer to PR-8, "Removal and Installation" . Put matching marks on the rear propeller shaft tube and flange yoke as shown. CAUTION: For matching marks use paint. Never damage the rear propeller shaft or flange yoke. B C PR E SPD128 3. Remove the snap rings. F G H APD011 4. Push out and remove the journal bearing by lightly tapping the yoke with a hammer, taking care not to damage the journal or yoke hole. I J K L SPD732 5. Remove the bearing at the opposite side of above operation. NOTE: Put marks on the disassembled parts so that they can be reinstalled in their original positions from which they were removed. M SPD131 Center Support Bearing 1. Remove the propeller shaft assembly from the vehicle. Refer to PR-8, "Removal and Installation" . Revision: October 2004 PR-11 2005 Titan REAR PROPELLER SHAFT 2. 3. Put matching marks on the propeller shaft tube and the slip yoke as shown. CAUTION: For matching marks, use paint. Never damage the propeller shaft tube or slip yoke. Remove and discard the clamp near the center support bearing, then slide the slip yoke off of propeller shaft tube. LDIA0151E 4. 5. Lift the dust shield off of the center support bearing. Press the center support bearing off the propeller shaft tube using Tool and suitable hydraulic press. Tool number : 205-D002 LDIA0152E ASSEMBLY Journal 1. Assemble the journal bearings. Apply multipurpose grease on the bearing inner surface. NOTE: During assembly, use caution so that the needle bearings do not fall down. WPD019 2. Select snap rings that will provide the specified play in an axial direction of the journal, and install them. Refer to PR-15, "Snap Ring" . NOTE: Select snap rings with a difference in thickness at both sides within 0.02 mm (0.0008 in). APD012 Revision: October 2004 PR-12 2005 Titan REAR PROPELLER SHAFT 3. Adjust the thrust clearance between the bearing and snap ring to zero by tapping the yoke. A B C SPD732 PR 4. Make sure that the journal moves smoothly and is below the joint flex effort specification. Propeller shaft joint flex effort : 2.26 N·m (0.23 kg-m, 20 in-lb) or less E F G LDIA0119E Center Support Bearing 1. 2. Apply a thin coat of multi-purpose grease to both the propeller shaft tube and the inside surface of the center support bearing. Install the center support bearing on the propeller shaft tube using a suitable pipe pressing on the inner race. H I J K LDIA0153E 3. 4. 5. Install the dust shield. Install a new clamp over the boot on the slip yoke. Align the matching marks and install the slip yoke on the propeller shaft tube. M LDIA0151E 6. Clean the surfaces and position the boot over the propeller shaft tube and tighten the clamp. Revision: October 2004 PR-13 L 2005 Titan REAR PROPELLER SHAFT 7. Install the center support bearing bracket, then install the rear propeller shaft assembly in the vehicle. Refer to PR-8, "Removal and Installation" . WDIA0066E Revision: October 2004 PR-14 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specifications PFP:00030 A EDS001O8 4X2 Model Applied model VK56DE B Body King cab Crew cab Propeller shaft model 2S1350 3S1350 2 3 Coupling method with rear final drive Flange type Flange type Coupling method with transmission Sleeve type Sleeve type Number of joints Shaft length (Spider to spider) C PR 869 mm (34.21in) (front shaft) 1619 mm (63.74 in) 1209 mm (47.60 in) (rear shaft) Shaft outer diameter 127.6 mm (5.02 in) Journal axial play E 88.9 mm (3.50 in) 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) or less Propeller shaft runout limit 1.02 mm (0.0402 in) or less Propeller shaft joint flex effort 0.6 mm (0.24 in) or less F 2.26 N·m (0.23 kg-m, 20 in-lb) or less G 4X4 Model Applied model VK56DE Front Propeller shaft model H Rear 2F1310 2S1350 Number of joints 2 Coupling method with front final drive I Flange type Coupling method with transfer Flange type Sleeve type Shaft length (Spider to spider) 718 mm (28.27 in) 1619 mm (63.74 in) 63 5 mm (2.5 in) 127.6 mm (5.02 in) Shaft outer diameter Journal axial play 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) or less Propeller shaft runout limit Propeller shaft joint flex effort 0.6 mm (0.024 in) or less 1.02 mm (0.0402 in) or less 1.96 N·m (0.20 kg-m, 17 in-lb) or less 2.26 N·m (0.23 kg-m, 20 in-lb) or less Snap Ring J K L EDS001O9 Model 2F1310 Unit: mm (in) Thickness Color Part Number* 1.99 (0.0783) White 37146-C9400 2.02 (0.0795) Yellow 37147-C9400 2.05 (0.0807) Red 37148-C9400 2.08 (0.0819) Green 37149-C9400 2.11 (0.0831) Blue 37150-C9400 2.14 (0.0843) Light brown 37151-C9400 2.17 (0.0854) Black 37152-C9400 2.20 (0.0866) No paint 37153-C9400 *Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Revision: October 2004 PR-15 2005 Titan M SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Model 2S1350 / 3S1350 Unit: mm (in) Thickness Color Part Number* 1.600 - 1.638 (0.0630 - 0.0645) Black 37146-7S000 1.549 - 1.588 (0.0610 - 0.0625) Black 37147-7S000 1.524 - 1.562 (0.0600 - 0.0615) Black 37148-7S000 1.499 - 1.537 (0.0590 - 0.0605) Black 37149-7S000 *Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Revision: October 2004 PR-16 2005 Titan G STEERING A B SECTION POWER STEERING SYSTEM C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2 Precautions for Steering System .............................. 2 PREPARATION ........................................................... 3 Special Service Tools (SST) ..................................... 3 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 4 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 5 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 5 POWER STEERING FLUID ........................................ 6 Checking Fluid Level ................................................ 6 Checking Fluid Leakage ........................................... 6 Air Bleeding Hydraulic System ................................. 6 STEERING WHEEL .................................................... 7 On-Vehicle Inspection and Service .......................... 7 CHECKING CONDITION OF INSTALLATION ..... 7 CHECKING STEERING WHEEL PLAY ................ 7 CHECKING NEUTRAL POSITION ON STEERING WHEEL .......................................................... 7 CHECKING STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE .................................................................. 7 CHECKING FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE..... 7 Removal and Installation .......................................... 8 REMOVAL ............................................................. 8 INSTALLATION ..................................................... 8 STEERING COLUMN ................................................. 9 Removal and Installation .......................................... 9 REMOVAL ........................................................... 10 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ........................11 INSTALLATION ................................................... 12 Revision: October 2004 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 13 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 13 DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 14 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 15 INSPECTION AFTER ASSEMBLY ...................... 15 POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE ............ 16 Removal and Installation ........................................ 16 REMOVAL ........................................................... 16 INSTALLATION ................................................... 17 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 18 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 18 DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 19 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ................ 21 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 22 POWER STEERING OIL PUMP ............................... 27 On-Vehicle Inspection and Service ......................... 27 CHECKING RELIEF OIL PRESSURE ................ 27 Removal and Installation ........................................ 27 REMOVAL ........................................................... 27 INSTALLATION ................................................... 27 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 28 INSPECTION BEFORE DISASSEMBLY ............. 28 DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 28 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ................ 29 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 29 HYDRAULIC LINE .................................................... 32 Removal and Installation ........................................ 32 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 34 Steering Wheel ....................................................... 34 Steering Column ..................................................... 34 Steering Outer Socket and Inner Socket ................ 35 Steering Gear ......................................................... 35 Oil Pump ................................................................. 36 Steering Fluid .......................................................... 36 PS-1 2005 Titan F PS H I J K L M PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EGS000SS The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precautions for Steering System ● ● ● ● ● ● ● EGS000ST Before disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the unit. Disassembly should be done in a clean work area. It is important to prevent the internal parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter. For easier and proper assembly, place disassembled parts in order on a parts rack. Use nylon cloth or paper towels to clean the parts; common shop rags can leave lint that might interfere with their operation. Before inspection or reassembly, carefully clean all parts with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent. Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent to hydraulic parts. Petroleum jelly may be applied to O-rings and seals. Do not use any grease. Replace all gaskets, seals and O-rings. Avoid damaging O-rings, seals and gaskets during installation. Perform functional tests whenever designated. Revision: October 2004 PS-2 2005 Titan PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools (SST) PFP:00002 A EGS000SU The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description B ST3127 S000 (See J25765-A) Preload gauge 1. GG9103000 (J25765-A) Torque wrench 2. HT62940000 ( — ) Socket adapter 3. HT62900000 ( — ) Socket adapter Inspecting of pinion rotating torque and rotational torque for ball joint C D E S-NT541 F HT72520000 (J25730-A) Ball joint remover a: 33 mm (1.30 in) b: 50 mm (1.97 in) r: 11.5 mm (0.453 in) Removing steering outer socket PS H NT546 — (J-46213) Rear cover wrench a: 21.6 mm (0.850 in) b: 34.9 mm (1.374 in) Removing and installing rear cover I J SGIA0516E KV48104400 ( — ) Teflon ring correcting tool a: 50 mm (1.97 in) dia. b: 36 mm (1.42 in) dia. c: 100 mm (3.94 in) Installing of rack Teflon ring K L S-NT550 KV48103400 ( — ) Torque adapter Inspecting rotational torque M ZZA0824D Revision: October 2004 PS-3 2005 Titan PREPARATION Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description 1. KV48105300-4 and 5295262U10 ( — ) Connector A and O-ring 2. KV48105300-3 and 5295262U00 ( — ) Eye-bolt and O-ring 3. KV48103500 (J26357 and J26357-10) Pressure gauge and shut-off valve 4. KV48105300-1 and 5295262U00 ( — ) Connector B and O-ring 5. KV48105300-2 ( — ) Nut Measuring oil pump relief pressure SGIA0427E — (J-44372) Spring gauge Measuring steering wheel turning force LST024 Commercial Service Tools EGS000SV Tool name Description Power tool Removing nuts and bolts PBIC0190E (J-1859A) Steering wheel puller Removing steering wheel LHIA0043E (J-42578) Steering wheel puller legs Removing steering wheel LHIA0044E Revision: October 2004 PS-4 2005 Titan Symptom Revision: October 2004 Outer socket ball joint end play Steering fluid leakage Steering wheel play Steering wheel turning force Drive belt looseness × × × × × × × × × Shudder PS-5 Shake × × × Vibration × × × × × × Shimmy × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × PROPELLER SHAFT DIFFERENTIAL SUSPENSION TIRES ROAD WHEEL DRIVE SHAFT BRAKES J AXLE Steering linkage looseness Improper installation or looseness of steering column Steering column deformation or damage Mounting rubber deterioration Improper installation or looseness of tilt lock lever Improper steering wheel Outer socket ball joint rotating torque Noise Outer socket ball joint swinging force Possible cause and suspected parts Air in hydraulic system BR-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart WT-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" WT-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" FSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" PR-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" RFD-8, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" PR-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" PS-16 PS-13 PS-11 PS-16 PS-15 PS-7 EM-12 PS-7 PS-7 PS-6 PS-21 PS-21 PS-21 PS-6 PS-6 Reference page Fluid level NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING PFP:00003 EGS000SW A Use chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. × × × × × × × × × ×: Applicable 2005 Titan B C D E F PS H × × × × × × × × K I L M POWER STEERING FLUID POWER STEERING FLUID Checking Fluid Level PFP:KLF20 EGS000SX Check fluid level, referring to the scale on reservoir tank. Use HOT range for fluid temperatures of 50° – 80°C (122° – 176°F). Use COLD range for fluid temperatures of 0° – 30°C (32° – 86°F). CAUTION: ● Do not overfill. ● Do not reuse any used power steering fluid. ● Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . LGIA0021E Checking Fluid Leakage EGS000SY Check the hydraulic piping lines for improper attachment and for leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing or deterioration. 1. Run engine until fluid temperature reaches 50° – 80°C (122° – 176°F) in reservoir tank. Keep engine speed idle. 2. Turn steering wheel right-to-left several times. 3. Hold steering wheel at each “lock” position for five seconds to check fluid leakage. CAUTION: Do not hold steering wheel in a locked position for more than 10 seconds. (There is the possibility that oil pump may SGIA0506E be damaged.) 4. If fluid leakage at connections is noticed, then loosen flare nut and then retighten. Do not over tighten connector as this can damage O-ring, washer and connector. 5. If fluid leakage from oil pump is noticed, check oil pump. Refer to PS-27, "POWER STEERING OIL PUMP" . 6. Check steering gear boots for accumulation of fluid indicating a leak from the steering gear. Air Bleeding Hydraulic System EGS000SZ Incomplete air bleeding causes the following. When this happens, bleed air again. ● Air bubbles in reservoir tank. ● Clicking noise in oil pump. ● Excessive buzzing in oil pump. NOTE: When vehicle is stationary or while steering wheel is being turned slowly, some noise may be heard from oil pump or gear. This noise is normal and does not affect any system. 1. Stop engine, and then turn steering wheel fully to right and left several times. CAUTION: Do not allow steering fluid reservoir tank to go below the MIN level line. Check tank frequently and add fluid as needed. 2. Run engine at idle speed. Turn steering wheel fully right and then fully left, hold for about three seconds. Then check for fluid leakage. 3. Repeat step 2 several times at about three second intervals. CAUTION: Do not hold steering wheel in the locked position for more than 10 seconds. (There is the possibility that oil pump may be damaged.) 4. Check for air bubbles or cloudy fluid. 5. If air bubbles or cloudiness still exists, stop engine, perform steps 2 and 3 again until air bubbles or cloudiness does not exist. 6. Stop engine, check fluid level. Revision: October 2004 PS-6 2005 Titan STEERING WHEEL STEERING WHEEL On-Vehicle Inspection and Service PFP:48430 A EGS000T0 CHECKING CONDITION OF INSTALLATION ● ● Check installation condition of steering gear assembly, front suspension, axle and steering column. Check if movement exists when steering wheel is moved up and down, to the left and right and to the axial direction. End play of the axial direction for steering wheel ● : 0 mm (0 in) B C Check if the mounting nuts for steering gear assembly are loose. Refer to PS-16, "POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE" . D E F LGIA0024E CHECKING STEERING WHEEL PLAY 1. PS Turn tires straight ahead, start engine, then turn steering wheel to the left and right lightly, and measure steering wheel movement on the outer circumference when steering wheel is turned up to the point where tires start moving. Steering wheel play on the outer circumference : 0 − 35 mm (0 − 1.38 in) CHECKING NEUTRAL POSITION ON STEERING WHEEL ● 1. 2. 3. H Check neutral position on steering wheel after confirming that front wheel alignment is correct. Refer to FSU-6, "Front Wheel Alignment" . Turn tires straight ahead, check if steering wheel is in the neutral position. If it is not in the neutral position, remove steering wheel and reinstall it correctly. If the neutral position cannot be attained by repositioning the steering wheel two teeth or less on steering stem, loosen tie-rod lock nuts of steering outer sockets, then adjust tie-rods by the same amount in the opposite direction. I J K CHECKING STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Tool number Steering wheel turning force 6. 7. L Park vehicle on a level, dry surface and set parking brake. Start engine. Bring power steering fluid up to operating temperature of 60° – 80°C (140° – 176°F). Tires need to be inflated to specified pressure. Refer to WT-33, "Tire" . Check steering wheel turning force using Tool when steering wheel has been turned 360° from the neutral position. M : J-44372 : 39 N (4 kg-f, 9 lb-f) or less If steering wheel turning force is out of specification, inspect steering column. Refer to PS-11, "INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL" . If steering column meets specification, repair steering gear. Refer to PS-13, "Disassembly and Assembly" . WGIA0035E CHECKING FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE When checking front wheel turning angle, refer to FSU-8, "FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE" . Revision: October 2004 PS-7 2005 Titan STEERING WHEEL Removal and Installation EGS000T1 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Set the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. Remove the driver air bag module. Refer to SRS-44, "Removal and Installation" . Disconnect steering wheel switches. Remove the steering wheel center nut. Remove the steering wheel using Tools. Tool number A: J-1859A B: J-42578 CAUTION: Place a piece of tape across the spiral cable so it will not be rotated out of position. 6. Inspect the steering wheel near the puller holes for damage. If damaged, replace the steering wheel. ● Remove steering wheel rear cover and steering wheel switches, if required. WHIA0124E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Align spiral cable correctly when installing steering wheel. Make sure that the spiral cable is in the neutral position. The neutral position is detected by turning left 2.6 revolutions from the right end position and ending with the knob at the top. Steering wheel center nut : 34.3 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb) WGIA0038E CAUTION: The spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if the cable is installed in an improper position. Also, with the steering linkage disconnected, the cable may snap by turning the steering wheel beyond the limited number of turns. (The spiral cable can be turned up to 2.6 turns from the neutral position to both the right and left.) Revision: October 2004 PS-8 2005 Titan STEERING COLUMN STEERING COLUMN Removal and Installation PFP:48810 A EGS000T2 Column Shift Model B C D E F PS H I J K WGIA0141E 1. Driver air bag module Steering wheel 3. Steering wheel side cover 4. Combination switch and spiral cable 5. 2. Steering column assembly 6. Collar 7. Hole cover seal Clamp 9. Hole cover mounting plate 8. 10. Hole cover 11. Upper joint 12. Upper shaft 13. Boot clamp 14. Lower joint shaft 15. Boot and clips (plastic) Revision: October 2004 PS-9 L M 2005 Titan STEERING COLUMN Floor Shift Model WGIA0140E 1. Driver air bag module 2. Steering wheel 3. Steering wheel side cover 4. Combination switch and spiral cable 5. Steering column assembly 6. Collar 7. Hole cover seal Clamp 9. Hole cover mounting plate 8. 10. Hole cover 11. Upper joint 12. Upper shaft 13. Boot clamp 14. Lower joint shaft 15. Boot and clips (plastic) CAUTION: ● Care must be taken not to give axial impact to steering column assembly during removal and installation. ● Care must be taken not to move steering gear during removal of steering column assembly. REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove spiral cable from steering column assembly with combination switches attached. Refer to SRS46, "Removal and Installation" . Remove tilt lever knob from tilt lever by inserting a suitable tool into slot of tilt lever knob, then depress tab and withdraw tilt lever knob. WGIA0061E Revision: October 2004 PS-10 2005 Titan STEERING COLUMN 3. 4. 5. Remove lower driver instrument panel. Refer to IP-13, "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL LH" . Remove steering column cover and ignition key finisher. Refer to IP-10, "Removal and Installation" . Remove mounting screws of knee protector, then remove knee protector from vehicle. A B C D LGIA0026E 6. 7. On models equipped with column shift, disconnect shift cable from steering column. Refer to AT-236, "Control Device Removal and Installation" . Remove lock nut and bolt, then separate lower joint from upper joint. E F PS H LGIA0027E 8. Remove mounting nuts from steering member, remove steering column assembly from steering member. I J K L LGIA0028E M 9. Remove hole cover seal and clamp. 10. Remove mounting nuts, then remove hole cover from dash panel. 11. Raise vehicle, then remove mounting bolt (lower side) of lower joint and remove lower joint from vehicle. LGIA0029E INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ● Check for damage to steering column jacket tube. If damage is found, replace steering column with new one. Revision: October 2004 PS-11 2005 Titan STEERING COLUMN ● If vehicle has been in a collision, check column length “L1 ” or “L2 ” as shown. If out of specification, replace steering column with new one. Steering column length : 158 mm (6.22 in) L1 L2 : 262 mm (10.31 in) SGIA0475E ● Check for proper lubrication, apply grease as necessary. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: When installing the steering column, finger-tighten all of the lower bracket and joint retaining bolts; then tighten them to specification. Do not apply undue stress to the steering column. NOTE: Align slit of the coupling joint with projection on dust cover. Insert the joint until surface "A" contacts surface "B". ● After installation, turn steering wheel to make sure it moves smoothly. Make sure the number of turns are the same from the straight-forward position to left and right locks. Make sure that the steering wheel is in a neutral position when driving straight ahead. ● When installing steering column to steering member, install mounting nut from front side of vehicle. SST491C Revision: October 2004 PS-12 2005 Titan STEERING COLUMN INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ● Range "A" ● A After installing steering column to vehicle, check tilt device and its operation range is as specified. : 61.3 mm (2.41 in) Check if steering wheel operation can turn to the end of the left and right stops smoothly. B C D WGIA0083E Disassembly and Assembly EGS000T3 E Column Shift Model F PS H I J K L M WGIA0085E 1. Steering column assembly 2. Ignition switch 3. Upper joint 4. Spring 5. Tilt lever knob 6. Self-shear screw Revision: October 2004 PS-13 2005 Titan STEERING COLUMN Floor Shift Model WGIA0088E 1. Steering column assembly 2. Ignition switch 3. Upper joint 4. Spring 5. Tilt lever knob 6. Self-shear screw DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Remove spring from steering column assembly and tilt lever. Remove mounting bolt from upper joint, then remove upper joint from steering column assembly. Remove ignition switch tamper resistant self-shear type screws with a drill or other appropriate tool. Revision: October 2004 PS-14 2005 Titan STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY ● ● A Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. Install new tamper resistant self-shear type screws. B C D WGIA0009E INSPECTION AFTER ASSEMBLY E When the steering wheel does not turn smoothly, check the steering column as follows: 1. Check the column bearings for damage or unevenness. Lubricate with recommended multi-purpose grease. Replace the steering column as an assembly, if necessary. F 2. Check the column tube for deformation or breakage. Replace the steering column as an assembly, if necessary. 3. PS If the vehicle has been involved in a collision, or if noise and rattles are heard during a turn, check the length (L) of the column. If out of specification, replace the steering column as an assemH bly. Steering column length (L) 4. 5. 6. 7. : 610 mm (24.02 in) Check for proper lubrication, apply grease as necessary. Check for wear around the seal edges, replace as necessary. Check for corrosion or pitting around the seal sliding area. Replace the seal and shaft in case of seal edge wear or damage. I J WGIA0080E 8. K After installing the steering column, check the tilt mechanism for proper operation. Tilt mechanism range (Manual tilt) : 3° per notch at 5 steps L M WGIA0026E CAUTION: ● Do not exert any load or impact in the axial direction immediately before or after column removal. ● After installation, check for smooth steering wheel rotation, without any catches or noise. ● Replace the column if it is depleted of grease, worn, damaged, or if any scratches or coating separation is present on the shaft seal area. ● The lower nut on the upper joint may not be reused. ● During lower joint detachment, insert a tool into the yoke groove to prevent gouging damage. Revision: October 2004 PS-15 2005 Titan POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE Removal and Installation PFP:49001 EGS000T4 WGIA0092E 1. Cotter pin 2. Mounting bracket 3. Bushing 4. Washer 5. Steering gear assembly 6. Mounting insulator CAUTION: Spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if steering column is separated from steering gear assembly. Therefore secure steering wheel to avoid turning. REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Turn wheels to the straight-ahead position. Remove tires from vehicle using power tool. Remove undercover using power tool. On 4x4 models, remove front final drive, then support drive shafts with wire. Refer to FAX-7, "Removal and Installation" . Make sure slit of lower joint fits with the projection on rear cover cap, while checking that mark on steering gear assembly aligns with mark on rear cover cap. SST491C 6. Remove cotter pin at steering outer socket and discard, then loosen mounting nut. Revision: October 2004 PS-16 2005 Titan POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE 7. Remove steering outer socket from steering knuckle using Tool. Be careful not to damage ball joint boot. CAUTION: Temporarily tighten mounting nut to prevent damage to threads and to prevent Tool from coming off. Tool number 8. A B : HT72520000 (J-25730-A) On 4x2 models, remove stabilizer bar mounting bolts and reposition stabilizer bar. Refer to FSU-11, "STABILIZER BAR" . C SDIA1434E D 9. Remove oil piping (high pressure side and low pressure side) from steering gear assembly, then drain fluid from piping. E F PS LGIA0032E 10. Remove lower joint mounting bolt of lower shaft. H I J LGIA0029E 11. Remove mounting bolts and nuts of steering gear assembly using power tool, and then remove steering gear assembly from vehicle. K L M LGIA0024E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● After removing/installing or replacing steering components, check wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-6, "Front Wheel Alignment" . ● After adjusting wheel alignment, adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-148, "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position" . Revision: October 2004 PS-17 2005 Titan POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE ● With steering wheel in straight ahead position, make sure slit of lower joint fits with the projection on rear cover cap, while checking that mark on steering gear assembly aligns with mark on rear cover cap SST491C ● After installation, bleed the air from the steering hydraulic system. Refer to PS-6, "Air Bleeding Hydraulic System" . INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check if steering wheel turns smoothly when it is turned several times fully to the left and right lock positions. Disassembly and Assembly EGS000T5 WGIA0093E 1. Outer socket 2. Boot clamp (small) 3. Boot 4. Inner socket 5. Boot clamp (large) 6. Gear housing assembly 7. Cylinder tubes 8. Rear cover cap 9. Rear cover 10. O-ring 11. Sub-gear assembly 12. Rack oil seal 13. Rack assembly 14. Rack Teflon® ring 15. O-ring 16. End cover assembly Revision: October 2004 PS-18 2005 Titan POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE CAUTION: ● Secure steering gear assembly with a vise, using copper plates or something similar to prevent it from being damaged. Do not grip cylinder with a vise. ● Before performing disassembly, clean steering gear assembly with kerosene. Be careful not to bring any kerosene into contact with the discharge and return port connectors. A B DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Remove cylinder tubes from gear housing assembly. Remove rear cover cap from gear housing assembly. Measure adjusting screw height from gear housing assembly, then loosen adjusting screw. CAUTION: ● Do not turn adjusting screw more than twice. ● Replace steering gear assembly when adjusting screw is removed or more than twice. C D E F SGIA0568E 4. PS Use a Tool to remove rear cover from sub-gear assembly. Tool number : — (J-46213) H I J SGIA0507E 5. Remove O-ring with a flat-bladed screwdriver, and pull out rear cover. K L M SGIA0508E 6. 7. 8. Remove sub-gear assembly from gear housing assembly. CAUTION: In order to protect oil seal from any damage, pull sub-gear assembly out straightly. Loosen lock nut of outer socket, and remove outer socket. Remove boot clamps of the small diameter side and the large diameter side, then remove boot. CAUTION: When removing boots, be careful not to damage inner socket and gear housing assembly. If they are damaged, change them to avoid oil leaks. Revision: October 2004 PS-19 2005 Titan POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE 9. Drill out the clinching part of cylinder outer rim with a 3 mm (0.12 in) drill in 1.5 mm (0.059 in) depth. STC0013D 10. Remove end cover assembly with a 45 mm (1.77 in) open head wrench or suitable tool. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage gear housing assembly. If it is damaged, replace gear housing assembly. Otherwise, oil leaks may result. SST081B 11. Pull rack assembly with oil seal out of gear housing assembly. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder. If it is damaged, replace gear housing assembly. Otherwise, oil leaks may result. 12. Heat rack Teflon® ring to approximately 40°C (104°F) with a dryer, then remove it and O-ring from rack assembly. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage rack assembly. If it is damaged, replace with a new one to avoid oil leaks. SGIA0151E 13. Use a taped 29 mm (1.14 in) socket and an extension bar. Remove rack oil seal from gear housing assembly. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage gear housing assembly and cylinder inner wall. If it is damaged, gear housing assembly must be replaced. Otherwise, oil leaks will result. SGIA0179E Revision: October 2004 PS-20 2005 Titan POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Boot A Check boot for cracks and deformation. Replace if necessary. Rack Assembly B Check rack gear for damage and wear. Replace if necessary. Sub-Gear Assembly ● ● Check pinion gear for damage and wear. Replace if necessary. Check bearing while rotating it. Replace bearing if bearing ball race was dented, worn, or damaged. Gear Housing Assembly C D Check gear housing assembly for damage and scratches (inner wall). Replace if necessary. Outer Socket and Inner Socket E Swing Torque ● Hook a spring balance at the point shown in the figure. Confirm if the reading is within the specification. When ball stud and inner socket start moving the measured value must be within the specification. If the reading is outside the specification, replace socket. F PS H SGIA0547E I Item Measuring point Swing torque Measuring value Outer socket Inner socket Cotter pin hole of stud Shown as L: 83.2 mm (3.276 in) 0.3 − 2.9 N·m (0.03 − 0.29 kg-m, 3 − 25 in-lb) 1.0 − 7.8 N·m (0.11 − 0.79 kg-m, 9 − 69 in-lb) 4.84 − 46.7 N (0.50 − 4.7 kg, 4 - 34 lb) 12.1 − 93.7 N (1.3 − 9.5 kg, 9 − 69 lb) Rotating Torque ● Using Tool, check if reading is within the value specified below. If the value is outside the standard, replace outer sockets. Tool number K L : ST3127 S000 (J-25765-A) Rotating torque : 0.3 − 2.9 N·m (0.03 − 0.29 kg-m, 3 − 25 in-lb) M SST882B Revision: October 2004 PS-21 J 2005 Titan POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE Axial End Play ● Apply load of 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb) to ball stud axially. Use a dial gauge to measure the amount of the movement that the stud makes. Check if the reading is within specification. If the value is outside specification, replace outer and inner sockets. Outer socket : 0.5 mm (0.020 in) or less Inner socket : 0.2 mm (0.008 in) or less SGIA0057E ASSEMBLY 1. 2. Apply Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent to O-ring. Put an O-ring into rack Teflon® ring. ● Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . NOTE: Do not reuse O-ring. Heat rack Teflon® ring to approximately 40°C (104°F) with a dryer. Assemble it to mounting groove of rack. NOTE: Do not reuse rack Teflon® ring. SGIA0153E 3. To fit rack Teflon® ring on rack, use rack Teflon® ring installation tool from tooth side. Compress rim of ring using Tool. Tool number : KV48104400 ( — ) SGIA0154E 4. Apply multi-purpose grease to rack oil seal. Insert rack oil seal, then insert rack assembly to gear housing assembly. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . CAUTION: ● Do not reuse rack oil seal. ● When inserting rack assembly, do not damage retainer sliding part. If it is damaged, replace gear housing assembly. ● When inserting rack assembly, do not damage cylinder inner wall. If it is damaged, it may cause oil leaks. Replace gear housing assembly. Revision: October 2004 PS-22 2005 Titan POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE ● Attach rack oil seal. Both inner lip and outer lip should face each other. A B C SGIA0205E D a. To avoid damaging inner rack oil seal, wrap an OHP sheet [approximately 70 mm (2.76 in) × 100 mm (3.94 in)] around rack teeth. Place oil seal on sheet. Then, pull oil seal along with OHP sheet until they pass the toothed section of rack, then remove sheet. E F PS SGIA0155E b. Insert rack oil seal (inner) to piston (rack Teflon® ring) position and push retainer to adjust screw side with fingers lightly. Then make rack move in gear housing assembly and install rack oil seal (inner) to fit with gear housing assembly. H I J SGIA0548E c. When installing outer rack oil seal, cover the end of rack with an OHP sheet [70 mm (2.76 in) × 100 mm (3.94 in)]. It will avoid damaging rack oil seal. Then place oil seal on sheet. Pull rack oil seal along with OHP sheet until they pass rack end, then remove sheet. K L M SGIA0157E d. Install end cover assembly to rack, move it to gear housing assembly. Revision: October 2004 PS-23 2005 Titan POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE 5. Using a 45 mm (1.77 in) open head wrench or suitable tool, tighten end cover assembly to specification. CAUTION: Do not damage rack surface. If it is damaged, it may cause oil leaks. Replace rack assembly. SST081B 6. After tightening end cover assembly, caulk cylinder at one point as shown using a punch. This will prevent end cover from getting loose. SGIA0158E 7. 8. 9. Install sub-gear assembly to gear housing assembly. CAUTION: Oil seal may be damaged if sub-gear assembly is not installed correctly. Apply Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent to O-ring. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . Then install O-ring to rear cover. NOTE: Do not reuse O-ring. Install rear cover to gear housing assembly using Tool. Tool number : — (J-46213) 10. Make sure projection on rear cover cap aligns with mark on gear housing assembly. 11. Apply thread locking sealant (Refer to GI-45, "RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS" ) to the thread of the adjusting screw. Then set adjusting screw height from gear housing assembly. The adjusting screw height is the same as it was measured previously. SGIA0568E 12. Rotate pinion ten times through entire rack range to seat gears and to check operation. Revision: October 2004 PS-24 2005 Titan POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE 13. With steering gear in neutral position, measure pinion rotating torque using Tool from within –180° to +180°, while applying and holding maximum torque to pinion gear. Tool number A : ST3127 S000 (J25765-A), KV48103400 ( — ) B C SGIA0483E 14. After loosening adjusting screw once, tighten it again with torque of 5.4 N·m (0.55 kg-m, 48 in-lb). Then loosen it within 20° – 40°. 15. Measure pinion rotating torque using Tool, then confirm whether the reading is within the specified value. If the reading is not within the specified value, readjust screw angle with adjusting screw. If the reading is still not within the specified value or the rotating torque of adjusting screw is less than 5 N·m (0.51 kg-m, 44 in-lb), replace the steering gear assembly. Pinion rotating torque: Around neutral position (within ±100°) Average “A”: 0.8 − 2.0 N·m (0.09 − 0.20 kg-m, 7 − 17 in-lb) Other than above (more than ±100°) Maximum variation “B”: 2.3 N·m (0.23 kg-m, 20 in-lb) SGIA0160E H J K L Less than 0.265 mm (0.010 in) Axial direction of rack 5 mm (0.197 in) away from end of gear housing Radius direction of rack Shaft direction of adjusting screw Measuring point PS-25 F I SGIA0484E Revision: October 2004 E PS 16. Turn pinion to the full left lock position with inner socket to gear housing assembly. 17. Mount dial gauge to rack as shown. Measure vertical movement of rack when pinion is turned counterclockwise with torque of 19.6 N·m (2.0 kg-m, 14 ft-lb). Check if reading is within the specified value. If reading is outside of the specification, readjust screw angle with adjusting screw. If reading is still outside of specification, or if the rotating torque of adjusting screw is less than 5 N·m (0.51 kg-m, 44 in-lb), replace the steering gear assembly. Amount of vertical movement with rack D 2005 Titan M POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE 18. Install large-diameter side of boot to gear housing assembly. 19. Install small-diameter side of boot to the mounting groove of inner socket boot. SGIA0550E 20. Install boot clamp to the small-diameter side of boot. 21. Install boot clamp to large-diamter side of boot and crimp securely. CAUTION: Do not reuse the boot clamps. AST139 22. Install cylinder tubes to gear housing assembly. 23. Install lock nut and outer socket to inner socket. 24. Tighten lightly tie-rod in specified length “L”, then tighten lock nut at specified torque. Refer to PS-18, "Disassembly and Assembly" . Reconfirm if tie-rod length is within limit of specified length “L”. Inner socket length “L” : 115.2 mm (4.54 in) CAUTION: Perform toe-in adjustment after this procedure. Length achieved after toe-in adjustment is not necessarily the value given here. SGIA0167E Revision: October 2004 PS-26 2005 Titan POWER STEERING OIL PUMP POWER STEERING OIL PUMP On-Vehicle Inspection and Service PFP:49110 A EGS000T6 CHECKING RELIEF OIL PRESSURE CAUTION: Before starting work, confirm belt tension is proper. 1. Connect Tool between oil pump discharge connector and high pressure hose and then bleed air from the hydraulic circuit. B C Tool number: Pressure gauge and shut-off valve Oil pump side High pressure piping side 2. 3. 4. 5. KV48103500 (J26357 and J26357-10) D Connector A and O-ring KV48105300-4 and 5295262U10 ( — ) Eye-bolt and O-ring KV48105300-3 and 5295262U00 ( — ) Connector B and O-ring KV48105300-1 and 5295262U00 ( — ) Nut KV48105300-2 ( — E SGIA0570E F ) Start engine. Allow engine to run until tank temperature reaches 50 – 80°C (122 – 176°F). PS CAUTION: ● Warm up engine with shut-off valve fully opened. If engine is started with shut-off valve closed, fluid pressure in power steering pump increases to maximum. This will raise fluid temperature excessively. H ● Be careful not to contact hose with belt when engine is started. With engine at idle, close shut-off valve and read the relief oil pressure. I Relief oil pressure : 9.0 – 9.8 mPa (91.77 – 99.93 kg/cm2 , 1305.34 – 1421.37 psi) CAUTION: Do not close shut-off valve of pressure gauge for more than 10 seconds. After measurement, open shut-off valve slowly. ● If relief oil pressure is outside the specification, disassemble and repair oil pump. Refer to PS-18, "Disassembly and Assembly" . After inspection, disconnect oil pressure gauge and oil pressure gauge adapter from hydraulic circuit, connect oil pump discharge connector and high pressure hose. Add fluid and bleed air from hydraulic circuit thoroughly. Refer to PS-6, "Air Bleeding Hydraulic System" . Removal and Installation J K L EGS000T7 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Drain power steering fluid from reservoir tank. Remove engine room cover. Refer to EM-11, "Removal and Installation" . Remove air duct assembly. Refer to EM-14, "Removal and Installation" . Remove power steering reservoir tank. Remove serpentine drive belt belt from auto tensioner and power steering pump. Refer to EM-12, "Removal and Installation" . Disconnect pressure sensor electrical connector. Remove high pressure and low pressure piping from power steering oil pump. Refer to PS-32, "HYDRAULIC LINE" . Remove mounting bolts, then remove power steering pump. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to PS-32, "HYDRAULIC LINE" for tightening torque. ● After installation, bleed air. Refer to PS-6, "Air Bleeding Hydraulic System" . NOTE: Belt tension is automatic and requires no adjustment. Revision: October 2004 PS-27 2005 Titan M POWER STEERING OIL PUMP Disassembly and Assembly EGS000T8 WGIA0076E 1. Bracket 2. Rear cover 3. Gasket 4. Lock pin 5. Cam ring 6. Rotor 7. Vane 8. Cartridge 9. Side plate 10. O-ring 11. Body assembly 12. Oil seal 13. Drive shaft assembly 14. Snap ring 15. Pulley 16. Spring washer 17. Flow control valve 18. Pressure sensor 19. Connector bolt 20. Copper washer 21. Bracket 22. Suction pipe 23. O-ring INSPECTION BEFORE DISASSEMBLY Disassemble power steering oil pump only if the following items are found. ● Oil leakage from oil pump ● Deformed or damaged pulley ● Poor performance DISASSEMBLY NOTE: Mount the oil pump in a vise as needed. CAUTION: When retaining drive shaft in a vise, always use copper or aluminum plates between vise and shaft. 1. Unscrew three bracket bolts and remove bracket from rear cover. 2. Unscrew four rear cover bolts and remove rear cover from body assembly. 3. Remove gasket from body assembly. 4. Remove lock pin, cartridge and side plate from body assembly. 5. Remove pulley from drive shaft assembly. Revision: October 2004 PS-28 2005 Titan POWER STEERING OIL PUMP 6. Remove snap ring from drive shaft assembly, then press out drive shaft assembly. CAUTION: When removing snap ring, be careful not to damage drive shaft assembly. A B C SST010B D 7. Using a screwdriver, remove oil seal from body assembly. E F PS SST034A 8. 9. Remove O-ring from body assembly. Remove connector bolt, then flow control valve and spring from body assembly. CAUTION: Be careful not to drop and deform the flow control valve. H I J K SGIA0524E 10. Remove suction pipe from body assembly. 11. Remove O-ring for suction pipe. L INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Body Assembly and Rear Cover Inspection ● M Check body assembly and the inside of rear cover for damage. If any damage is found, replace with new part for rear cover and replace with new power steering pump assembly for body assembly. Cartridge Assembly Inspection ● Check cam ring, side plate, rotor and vane for damage. If any damage is found, replace cartridge assembly with new one. ASSEMBLY CAUTION: When retaining drive shaft assembly in a vise, always use copper or aluminum plates between vise and shaft. NOTE: Mount the oil pump in a vise as needed. 1. Apply a coat of Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent to oil seal lip and to the circumference of oil seal. Refer to MA-11, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" . Revision: October 2004 PS-29 2005 Titan POWER STEERING OIL PUMP 2. Install oil seal to body assembly using suitable tool. NOTE: Do not reuse oil seal. SST038A 3. 4. 5. Apply a coat of Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent to drive shaft assembly and press drive shaft assembly into body assembly with suitable tool, then install snap ring. NOTE: Do not reuse snap ring. Apply a coat of Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent to O-ring and install O-ring into body assembly. NOTE: Do not reuse O-ring. Install side plate to body assembly. SGIA0422E 6. Install lock pin into lock pin hole, and install cam-ring as shown. ● When installing cam ring, align letter "E" to rear cover as shown. CAUTION: Do not confuse the assembling direction of cam ring. If cam ring is installed facing the incorrect direction, it may cause pump operation malfunction. WGIA0079E 7. Install rotor to body assembly. Revision: October 2004 PS-30 2005 Titan POWER STEERING OIL PUMP ● When installing rotor, the punch mark on the face of the rotor faces the body assembly. A B C SGIA0424E D 8. Install vane to rotor with round portion facing outside. E F PS SST843A 9. Check if drive shaft assembly turns smoothly. 10. Install gasket to body assembly. NOTE: Do not reuse gasket. 11. Install rear cover to body assembly and tighten bolts to the specified torque. 12. Install bracket to rear cover and tighten bolts at the specified torque. 13. Install pulley to drive shaft assembly then tighten lock nut at the specified torque. 14. Install spring and flow control valve, copper washers, joint and connector bolt to body assembly. Then tighten connector bolt to the specified torque. NOTE: Do not reuse O-ring. 15. Apply a coat of Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent to O-ring, then install O-ring to suction pipe. NOTE: Do not reuse O-ring. 16. Install suction pipe to body assembly. H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 PS-31 2005 Titan HYDRAULIC LINE HYDRAULIC LINE Removal and Installation PFP:49721 EGS000T9 Refer to the following illustration for hydraulic line removal. WGIA0111E 1. Reservoir tank 2. Suction hose 3. High pressure hose 4. Oil cooler 5. Steering gear assembly 6. Reservoir tank bracket 7. Eye bolt Revision: October 2004 PS-32 2005 Titan HYDRAULIC LINE Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Confirm mating marks are aligned with hose and clamp, then correct if needed. A B C SGIA0563E ● To install eye joint, align projection of eye joint with notch of power steering pump, and attach eye joint to power steering pump properly. Tighten eye bolt by hand fully, then torque to specification. D E F PS WGIA0089E H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 PS-33 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Steering Wheel PFP:00030 EGS000TA End play of the axial direction for steering wheel 0 mm (0 in) Steering wheel play on the outer circumference 0 − 35 mm (0 − 1.38 in) Steering wheel turning force 39 N (4 kg-f, 9 lb-f) or less Steering Column EGS000TB Inspection After Assembly Unit: mm (in) WGIA0080E Steering column length “L” 610 (24.02) Inspection After Removal Unit: mm (in) SGIA0475E 158 (6.22) Steering column length “L1 ” 2 Steering column length “L ” 262 (10.31) Inspection After Installation WGIA0083E Range “A” 61.3 mm (2.41 in) Tilt mechanism range (Manual tilt) Revision: October 2004 3° per notch at 5 steps PS-34 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Steering Outer Socket and Inner Socket EGS000TC A B C D SGIA0358E 0.3 − 2.9 N·m (0.03 − 0.29 kg-m, 3 − 25 in-lb) Swinging torque Measurement on spring balance Tie-rod ball joint outer socket ● E 4.84 − 46.7 N (0.50 − 4.7 kg, 4 − 34 lb) Measuring point: cotter pin hole of stud 0.3 − 2.9 N·m (0.03 − 0.29 kg-m, 3 − 25 in-lb) Rotating torque Axial end play 0.5 mm (0.020 in) or less 1.0 − 7.8 N·m (0.11 − 0.79 kg-m, 9 − 69 in-lb) Swinging torque Measurement on spring balance Tie-rod ball joint inner socket ● F PS 12.1 − 93.7 N (1.3 − 9.5 kg, 9 − 69 lb) Measuring point: L mark see above, L=83.2 mm (3.276 in). Axial end play 0.2 mm (0.08 in) or less H Unit: mm (in) I J K L SGIA0167E Inner socket length “L” 115.2 (4.54) Steering Gear EGS000TD Steering gear model PR26AM Rack neutral position, dimension “L” (rack stroke) 85.5 mm (3.36 in) STC0034D Revision: October 2004 PS-35 2005 Titan M SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Steering gear model Rack sliding force PR26AM At the neutral point: Range within ± 11.5 mm (±0.453 in) from the neutral position (in power ON) Area average value 147 − 211 N (14.99 − 21.52 kg, 33.1 − 47.52 lb) Allowable variation 98 N (10 kg, 22 lb) or less Peak value Whole area (in power OFF) 294 N (30.0 kg, 66 lb) or less Allowable variation 147 N (16 kg, 35 lb) or less Oil Pump Relief oil pressure EGS000TE 9.0 − 9.8 mPa (91.77 − 99.93 kg/cm2 , 1305.34 − 1421.37 psi) Steering Fluid EGS000TF Fluid capacity Revision: October 2004 Approx. 1.0 PS-36 (1-1/8 US qt, 7/8 Imp qt) 2005 Titan D DRIVELINE/AXLE A B SECTION REAR AXLE C RAX E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions .............................................................. 2 PREPARATION ........................................................... 3 Special Service Tools ............................................... 3 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 4 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 4 AXLE SHAFT .............................................................. 5 On-Vehicle Inspection .............................................. 5 REAR AXLE .......................................................... 5 WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION ......................... 5 Removal and Installation .......................................... 6 REMOVAL ............................................................. 7 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ......................... 8 INSTALLATION ..................................................... 8 AXLE BEARING ....................................................... 10 Removal and Installation ........................................ 10 AXLE OIL SEAL ....................................................... 11 Removal and Installation ........................................ 11 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 12 Axle Bearing ........................................................... 12 F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 RAX-1 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS Precautions PFP:00001 EDS001QG When installing rubber parts, final tightening must be carried out under unladen condition* with tires on ground. * Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. Revision: October 2004 RAX-2 2005 Titan PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A EDS001QH The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number Description (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name KV40101000 (J-25604-01) Axle stand B Removing axle shaft C RAX NT159 ST36230000 (J-25840-A) Slide hammer E Removing axle shaft F NT126 205-D002 ( — ) Bearing splitter G Removing axle shaft bearing H I ZZA0700D Commercial Service Tools EDS001QI J Tool name Description Power tools Removing and installing nuts and bolts K L PBIC0190E M Revision: October 2004 RAX-3 2005 Titan NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart PFP:00003 EDS001QJ RFD-8, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" RSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" WT-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" WT-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" BR-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" SUSPENSION TIRES ROAD WHEEL BRAKES × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × PR-8, "INSPECTION" × PROPELLER SHAFT × RAX-5 × Wheel bearing damage × RAX-5 × Parts interference × RAX-6 × Improper installation, looseness × Noise × × × Shake × × Vibration × × Shimmy × × Shudder × Poor quality ride or handling × Reference page Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS Symptom REAR FINAL DRIVE Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. × × ×: Applicable Revision: October 2004 RAX-4 2005 Titan AXLE SHAFT AXLE SHAFT On-Vehicle Inspection PFP:38164 A EDS001QK REAR AXLE ● ● ● Check the axle parts for excessive play, wear, and damage. Replace as necessary. Shake each rear wheel to check for excessive play. Repair as necessary. Retighten all nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to RAX-6, "Removal and Installation" . B C RAX E SMA525A WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION F Check the axial end play, replace as necessary. ● Check that the axle shaft bearing operates smoothly. Replace as necessary. G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 RAX-5 2005 Titan AXLE SHAFT Removal and Installation EDS001QL WDIA0110E 1. Axle shaft 2. Snap ring 3. Bearing ring retainer 4. Axle shaft bearing and cup 5. Axle oil seal 6. Axle shaft bearing cage 7. ABS sensor rotor 8. Back plate 9. Torque member 10. ABS sensor Revision: October 2004 11. Rear final drive RAX-6 12. Breather 2005 Titan AXLE SHAFT CAUTION: Before removing the axle shaft, remove the ABS sensor to reposition the ABS sensor out of the way. Failure to do so may result in damage to the ABS sensor and cause the ABS sensor to become inoperative. A REMOVAL B 1. 2. 3. 4. C Remove the ABS sensor. Refer to BRC-39, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the rear brake rotor. Refer to BR-29, "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor" . Remove the parking brake assembly from the back plate. Refer to PB-6, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the four axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers. RAX E F LDIA0112E 5. Tool number Tool number 6. 7. G Remove the axle shaft assembly using Tools as shown. CAUTION: ● The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft housing. ● Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. A: KV40101000 (J-25604-01) B: ST36230000 (J-25840-A) H I LDIA0116E Remove the snap ring from the axle shaft using suitable snap ring pliers. Secure the axle shaft in a suitable vise, then use a 1/4 in size drill bit to drill a hole approximately 3/4 into the thickness of the bearing ring retainer [3/4 thickness is approximately 6.3 mm (0.25 in) deep]. CAUTION: ● Mount the axle shaft using a soft jaw vise to avoid damaging the axle shaft. ● Do not drill all the way through the bearing ring retainer, the drill may damage the axle shaft surface. K L M LDIA0148E 8. 9. Strike the bearing ring retainer using a suitable chisel and hammer, with the chisel positioned across the drilled hole. Break the bearing ring retainer to remove it. CAUTION: Do not heat or cut the axle shaft bearing or bearing ring retainer with a torch during removal, doing so will damage the axle shaft. Remove the axle shaft bearing cage studs using a suitable hammer or press. LDIA0149E 10. Pull the axle shaft bearing off of the axle shaft using Tool and a suitable press. Revision: October 2004 RAX-7 J 2005 Titan AXLE SHAFT Tool number : 205-D002 CAUTION: ● Do not tighten the Tool against the axle shaft. ● Do not heat or cut the axle shaft bearing or bearing ring retainer with a torch during removal, doing so will damage the axle shaft. 11. Remove the axle oil seal and discard. CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. 12. Remove the wheel bearing cage. NOTE: ● If reinstalling the old axle shaft, it may not be necessary to remove the ABS sensor rotor. Inspect the ABS sensor rotor and replace as necessary. Refer to BRC-40, "Removal and Installation" . ● The ABS sensor rotor cannot be reused after it is removed. If replacing the axle shaft, install a new ABS sensor rotor on the new axle shaft. Refer to BRC-40, "Removal and Installation" . INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Axle Shaft ● ● ● ● Clean and remove all nicks and burrs. Check for straightness and distortion. Replace if necessary. Inspect machined surfaces for evidence of overheating, damage and wear. Replace if necessary. Measure the bearing ring retainer axle journal diameter. Replace if necessary. Bearing ring retainer axle journal diameter (minimum) : 39.726 mm (1.5640 in) Axle Shaft Bearing and Cup ● Check that the axle shaft bearing and cup roll freely and are free from noise, cracks, pitting and wear. Replace if necessary. Axle Shaft Bearing Cage ● Check for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary. Axle Shaft Housing ● Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary. INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. If installing a new axle shaft, install a new ABS sensor rotor onto the new axle shaft. Refer to BRC-40, "Removal and Installation" . CAUTION: Do not reuse the old ABS sensor rotor. Install the axle shaft bearing cage. Install a new axle oil seal. CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Install the axle shaft bearing and cup on the axle shaft. ● Prepare an installer tool from a steel tube measuring 762 mm (30 in) long with an outside diameter of 53.98 mm (2.125 in) and an inside diameter of 41.28 mm (1.625 in). ● Press the axle shaft bearing and cup onto the axle shaft using a suitable press and the installer tool, until a 0.038 mm (.0015 in) feeler gauge does not fit in between the axle shaft bearing cup and seat. CAUTION: Make sure the axle shaft bearing and cup, axle oil seal, and LDIA0150E axle shaft bearing cage are installed facing in the correct direction. Revision: October 2004 RAX-8 2005 Titan AXLE SHAFT 5. Install the bearing ring retainer onto the axle shaft. A ● Press the bearing ring retainer onto the axle shaft with a minimum force of 31,100 N (3172 kg, 6992 lb) until a 0.038 mm (.0015 in) feeler gauge does not fit between the bearing inner race and the bearing ring retainer in at least one point. B 6. Install the snap ring so it is fully seated into the groove on the axle shaft, using suitable snap ring pliers. 7. Install the axle shaft assembly into the axle shaft housing. 8. Install the axle shaft bearing cage lock washers and nuts. Tighten the axle shaft bearing cage nuts to C specification. 9. Install the parking brake assembly onto the back plate. Refer to PB-6, "Removal and Installation" . 10. Install the rear brake rotor. Refer to BR-29, "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor" . RAX 11. Install the rear ABS sensor. Refer to BRC-39, "Removal and Installation" . E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 RAX-9 2005 Titan AXLE BEARING AXLE BEARING Removal and Installation PFP:40120 EDS001QM The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft is removed and installed. Refer to RAX-10, "Removal and Installation" . CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Revision: October 2004 RAX-10 2005 Titan AXLE OIL SEAL AXLE OIL SEAL Removal and Installation PFP:43252 A EDS001QN The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft is removed and installed. Refer to RAX-11, "Removal and Installation" . CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. B C RAX E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 RAX-11 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Axle Bearing Bearing ring retainer axle journal diameter (minimum) Revision: October 2004 PFP:00030 EDS001QO 39.726 mm (1.5640 in) minimum RAX-12 2005 Titan I BODY A B SECTION ROOF C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2 Precautions .............................................................. 2 PREPARATION ........................................................... 3 Special Service Tool ................................................. 3 Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 3 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES..... 4 Work Flow ................................................................ 4 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW ..................................... 4 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE ....... 5 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS ........... 5 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE ...................................................... 5 REPAIR THE CAUSE ........................................... 5 CONFIRM THE REPAIR ....................................... 6 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ........... 6 INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................... 6 CENTER CONSOLE ............................................. 6 DOORS ................................................................. 6 TRUNK .................................................................. 7 SUNROOF/HEADLINING ..................................... 7 OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)..... 7 SEATS ................................................................... 7 UNDERHOOD ....................................................... 7 Diagnostic Worksheet .............................................. 8 SUNROOF ................................................................ 10 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 10 System Description ................................................ 10 OUTLINE ............................................................. 10 OPERATION ....................................................... 10 Revision: October 2004 RF-1 RETAINED POWER OPERATION ...................... 11 MEMORY RESET PROCEDURE ....................... 11 INTERRUPTION DETECTION FUNCTION ........ 12 CAN Communication System Description .............. 12 Wiring Diagram — SROOF — ................................ 13 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM .............. 15 Terminals and Reference Values for Sunroof Motor Assembly ................................................................ 15 Work Flow ............................................................... 15 CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ................................. 16 CONSULT-II OPERATION ................................... 16 Work Support .......................................................... 17 Active Test .............................................................. 17 Data Monitor ........................................................... 17 Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom .................... 17 BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check ...... 18 Sunroof Switch System Check ............................... 19 SunroofMotorAssemblyPowerSupplyandGround Circuit Check .......................................................... 20 Door Switch Check ................................................. 21 Fitting Adjustment ................................................... 23 GAP ADJUSTMENT ............................................ 23 HEIGHT DIFFERENCE ADJUSTMENT .............. 23 Removal and Installation ........................................ 23 SUNROOF UNIT ................................................. 25 GLASS LID .......................................................... 25 WIND DEFLECTOR ............................................ 26 SUNSHADE ........................................................ 26 SUNROOF MOTOR ............................................ 26 DRAIN HOSES .................................................... 27 WEATHERSTRIP ................................................ 28 LINK AND WIRE ASSEMBLY ............................. 28 2005 Titan F G H RF J K L M PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EIS004DI The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precautions EIS004DJ Disconnect both battery cables in advance. ● Never tamper with or force air bag lid open, as this may adversely affect air bag performance. ● Be careful not to scratch pad and other parts. ● When removing or disassembling any part, be careful not to damage or deform it. Protect parts which may get in the way with cloth. ● When removing parts with a screwdriver or other tool, protect parts by wrapping them with vinyl or tape. ● Keep removed parts protected with cloth. ● If a clip is deformed or damaged, replace it. ● If an unreusable part is removed, replace it with a new one. ● Tighten bolts and nuts firmly to the specified torque. ● After re-assembly has been completed, make sure each part functions correctly. ● Remove stains in the following way. Water-soluble stains: Dip a soft cloth in warm water, and then squeeze it tightly. After wiping the stain, wipe with a soft dry cloth. Oil stain: Dissolve a synthetic detergent in warm water (density of 2 to 3% or less), dip the cloth, then clean off the stain with the cloth. Next, dip the cloth in fresh water and squeeze it tightly. Then clean off the detergent completely. Then wipe the area with a soft dry cloth. ● Do not use any organic solvent, such as thinner or benzine. ● Revision: October 2004 RF-2 2005 Titan PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tool PFP:00002 A EIS004DK The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. B Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-39570) Chassis ear C Locating the noise D SIIA0993E — (J-43980) NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit E F Repairing the cause of noise G H SIIA0994E RF Commercial Service Tool EIS004DL (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name J Description (J-39565) Engine ear Locating the noise K L SIIA0995E M Revision: October 2004 RF-3 2005 Titan SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Work Flow PFP:00000 EIS004DM SBT842 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any customer's comments; refer to RF-8, "Diagnostic Worksheet" . This information is necessary to duplicate the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. ● The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur). ● If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer. ● After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when defining the noise. ● Squeak —(Like tennis shoes on a clean floor) Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces = higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping. ● Creak—(Like walking on an old wooden floor) Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch dependent on materials/often brought on by activity. ● Rattle—(Like shaking a baby rattle) Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing clip or fastener/incorrect clearance. ● Knock —(Like a knock on a door) Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action. ● Tick—(Like a clock second hand) Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver action or road conditions. ● Thump—(Heavy, muffled knock noise) Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity. ● Buzz—(Like a bumble bee) Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact. ● Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer. ● Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level. Revision: October 2004 RF-4 2005 Titan SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair. If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following: 1) Close a door. 2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from. 3) Rev the engine. 4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”. 5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model). 6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer. ● Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs. ● If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the vehicle body. A B C D E CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related to that concern or symptom. If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise. F LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE 1. 2. ● ● ● ● ● G Narrow down the noise to a general area.To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool (Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanic's stethoscope). Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by: H removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from. Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise. RF tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise. Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only temporarily. feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the J noise. placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise. K looking for loose components and contact marks. Refer to RF-6, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting" . REPAIR THE CAUSE If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely. ● If the cause is insufficient clearance between components: – separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible. – insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized NISSAN Parts Department. CAUTION: Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged. Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be ordered separately as needed. URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick] Insulates connectors, harness, etc. 76268-9E005: 100×135 mm (3.94×5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60×85 mm (2.36×3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) INSULATOR (Foam blocks) Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel. 73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in) INSULATOR (Light foam block) L ● Revision: October 2004 RF-5 2005 Titan M SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES 80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30×50 mm (1.18×1.97 in) FELT CLOTH TAPE Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications. 68370-4B000: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll. The following materials not found in the kit can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles. UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications. SILICONE GREASE Used instead of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit. Note: Will only last a few months. SILICONE SPRAY Use when grease cannot be applied. DUCT TAPE Use to eliminate movement. CONFIRM THE REPAIR Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet. Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting EIS004DN Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information. INSTRUMENT PANEL Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between: 1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel 2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing 3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish 4. Instrument panel to windshield 5. Instrument panel mounting pins 6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter 7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness. CAUTION: Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will not be able to recheck the repair. CENTER CONSOLE Components to pay attention to include: 1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher 2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C 3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console. DOORS Pay attention to the: 1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise 2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher 3. Wiring harnesses tapping 4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise. Revision: October 2004 RF-6 2005 Titan SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES TRUNK Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner. In addition look for: 1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment 2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment 3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together 4. A loose license plate or bracket Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise. SUNROOF/HEADLINING A B C D Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following: 1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise 2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder 3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape. E F OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR) Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage. In addition, look for: 1. Loose harness or harness connectors. 2. Front console map/reading lamp lense loose. 3. Loose screws at console attachment points. SEATS G H RF When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the noise. Cause of seat noise include: 1. Headrest rods and holder 2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame 3. The rear seatback lock and bracket These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component or applying urethane tape to the contact area. J K L UNDERHOOD Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then transmitted into the passenger compartment. Causes of transmitted underhood noise include: 1. Any component mounted to the engine wall 2. Components that pass through the engine wall 3. Engine wall mounts and connectors 4. Loose radiator mounting pins 5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment 6. Hood striker out of adjustment These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or insulating the component causing the noise. Revision: October 2004 RF-7 2005 Titan M SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Diagnostic Worksheet EIS004DO LIWA0276E Revision: October 2004 RF-8 2005 Titan SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES A B C D E F G H RF J K L M SBT844 Revision: October 2004 RF-9 2005 Titan SUNROOF SUNROOF Component Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:91210 EIS004DP WIIA0558E System Description EIS004DQ OUTLINE Electric sunroof system consists of ● Sunroof switch ● Sunroof motor assembly ● Front door switches ● BCM (body control module) BCM supplies power to the sunroof motor. Sunroof operation depends on sunroof switch position. OPERATION Power is supplied at all times ● through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to BCM terminal 70, and ● through BCM terminal 69 ● to sunroof motor assembly terminal 5. With ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box) ● to BCM terminal 38. Ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 67 and ● to sunroof motor assembly terminal 7 ● through grounds M57, M61 and M79. Revision: October 2004 RF-10 2005 Titan SUNROOF TILT UP OPERATION A When the tilt switch is operated for tilt up, ground is supplied ● to sunroof motor assembly terminal 4 ● through sunroof switch terminal 4 ● through sunroof switch terminal 2 ● through sunroof motor assembly terminal 8 ● through grounds M57, M61 and M79. Then, the sunroof will tilt up. B C TILT DOWN OPERATION D When the tilt switch is operated for tilt down, ground is supplied ● to sunroof motor assembly terminal 10 ● through sunroof switch terminal 6 ● through sunroof switch terminal 2 ● through sunroof motor assembly terminal 8 ● through grounds M57, M61 and M79. Then, the sunroof will tilt down. E F SLIDE OPEN OPERATION G When the switch is operated for slide open, ground is supplied ● to sunroof motor assembly terminal 9 ● through sunroof switch terminal 3 ● through sunroof switch terminal 2 ● through sunroof motor assembly terminal 8 ● through grounds M57, M61 and M79. Then, the sunroof will slide open. H RF SLIDE CLOSE OPERATION J When the switch is operated for slide close, ground is supplied ● to sunroof motor assembly terminal 3 ● through sunroof switch terminal 1 ● through sunroof switch terminal 2 ● through sunroof motor assembly terminal 8 ● through grounds M57, M61 and M79. Then, the sunroof will slide closed. K L RETAINED POWER OPERATION When the ignition switch is turned to OFF position from ON or START position, power is supplied for 45 seconds. The retained power operation is canceled when the driver or passenger side door is opened. RAP signal period can be changed by CONSULT-II. Refer to RF-16, "CONSULT-II Function (BCM)" . MEMORY RESET PROCEDURE If the battery is disconnected, or the sunroof motor harness connector is disconnected, the slide switch will become inoperable and the sunroof motor memory must be reset. To reset the sunroof motor memory from any sunroof position (full open, partially open, closed, partially vented, and vented), push and hold the sunroof tilt switch in the forward (DOWN) position until the sunroof is fully closed. After it has closed all the way, push and hold the tilt switch forward (DOWN) for more than 2 seconds to re-establish the motor preset position. The sunroof should then operate normally. Revision: October 2004 RF-11 2005 Titan M SUNROOF INTERRUPTION DETECTION FUNCTION The CPU (central processing unit) monitors the sunroof motor operation and the sunroof position (fully-closed or other) by the signals from the sunroof motor. When sunroof motor detects an interruption during the following sliding close operations, sunroof switch controls the motor for open and the sunroof will operate until it reaches full open position. ● automatic close operation when ignition switch is in the ON position. ● automatic close operation during retained power operation. CAN Communication System Description EIS004DR Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Revision: October 2004 RF-12 2005 Titan SUNROOF Wiring Diagram — SROOF — EIS004DS A B C D E F G H RF J K L M WIWA0170E Revision: October 2004 RF-13 2005 Titan SUNROOF WIWA0318E Revision: October 2004 RF-14 2005 Titan SUNROOF Terminals and Reference Values for BCM EIS004DT A Terminal Wire Color Item 12 R/L Front door switch RH signal 38 W/L Ignition power supply 47 SB Front door switch LH signal 67 B Condition ON (Open) 0 W/L Battery voltage Ignition switch ACC or ON Battery voltage OFF (Close) Battery voltage — — Battery voltage Within 45 second after ignition switch is turned OFF Battery voltage When front door LH or RH is open while retained power is operating 0 E 69 W/R Power window power supply — Battery voltage 70 W/B BAT power supply — Battery voltage Terminal 1 3 Wire Color W/L P/W Item RAP signal Sunroof switch CLOSE signal Condition 4 O Sunroof switch TILT UP signal W/R 7 Battery voltage Battery voltage When front door LH or RH is open while retained power is operating 0 Ignition switch ON and sunroof switch CLOSE position 0 J Ignition switch ON and sunroof switch in TILT UP position 0 K Battery voltage Battery voltage B Ground — — 8 Y Ground signal — — 9 P Sunroof switch OPEN signal Ignition switch ON and sunroof switch OPEN position Other than above Sunroof switch TILT DOWN signal Ignition switch ON and sunroof switch in TILT DOWN position Other than above Work Flow L M 0 Battery voltage 0 Battery voltage EIS004DV Check the symptom and customer's requests. Understand the outline of system. Refer to RF-10, "System Description" . According to the trouble diagnosis chart, repair or replace the cause of the malfunction. Refer to RF-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom" . Does sunroof system operate normally? If Yes, GO TO 5, If No, GO TO 3. Inspection End. Revision: October 2004 RF-15 H Battery voltage — L/R G RF BAT power supply 10 F Voltage (Approx.) Within 45 second after ignition switch is turned OFF Other than above 5 EIS004DU Ignition switch ON Other than above 4. 5. D Ignition switch ON Terminals and Reference Values for Sunroof Motor Assembly 1. 2. 3. C 0 Ground RAP signal B OFF (Close) ON (Open) 68 Voltage (Approx.) 2005 Titan SUNROOF CONSULT-II Function (BCM) EIS004DW CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode WORK SUPPORT DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part SELF-DIAG RESULTS CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER CONFIGURATION Description Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received data is displayed. Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. BCM part number can be read. Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. CONSULT-II OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn ignition switch ON. BBIA0369E 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". BCIA0029E 3. Touch "BCM". If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . BCIA0030E Revision: October 2004 RF-16 2005 Titan SUNROOF 4. Touch "RETAINED PWR". A B C LIIA0163E D 5. Select diagnosis mode. "DATA MONITOR", "ACTIVE TEST" and "WORK SUPPORT" are available. E F G BCIA0031E Work Support EIS004DZ H Work item Description RAP signal’s power supply period can be changed by mode setting. Selects RAP signal’s power supply period between two steps. RETAINED PWR SET ● RF MODE 1 (45 sec.) / MODE 2 (OFF) / MODE 3 (2 min.) Active Test EIS004DY J Test item Description This test is able to supply RAP signal (power) from BCM to power window system, power sunroof system. Those systems can be operated when turning on "RETAINED PWR" on CONSULT-II screen even if the ignition switch is turned OFF. NOTE: During this test, CONSULT-II can be operated with ignition switch in "OFF" position. "RETAINED PWR" should be turned "ON" or "OFF" on CONSULT-II screen when ignition switch ON. Then turn ignition switch OFF for checking retained power operation. CONSULT-II might be stuck if "RETAINED PWR" is turned "ON" or "OFF" on CONSULT-II screen when ignition switch is OFF. RETAINED PWR Data Monitor EIS004DX Monitored item Description IGN ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch. DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch driver side. DOOR SW-AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch passenger side. Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom Symptom Sunroof does not operate. Revision: October 2004 EIS004E0 Diagnostic procedure and repair order Refer to page 1. Sunroof motor assembly power supply and ground circuit check RF-20 2. Sunroof switch system check RF-19 3. BCM power supply and ground circuit check RF-18 4. Replace sunroof motor assembly RF-26 RF-17 2005 Titan K L M SUNROOF Symptom Diagnostic procedure and repair order Refer to page 1. Check the retained power operation mode setting RF-17 2. BCM power supply and ground circuit check RF-18 3. Door switch check RF-21 4. Replace sunroof motor assembly RF-26 Motor does not stop at the sunroof fully-open or fully-closed position. 1. Initialization procedure check RF-11 2. Replace sunroof motor assembly RF-26 Sunroof interruption detection does not operate properly. 1. Replace sunroof motor assembly RF-26 Retained power operation does not operate properly. BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check EIS004E1 1. CHECK FUSE Check the following BCM fuse and fusible link. Component Parts BCM Terminal No. (SIGNAL) Ampere No. 38 (IGN power supply) 10A 59 70 (BAT power supply) 50A f Location Fuse and relay box Fuse and fusible link box NOTE: Refer to BL-16, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connectors. Check voltage between BCM connectors M18 and M20 terminals 38, 70 and ground. Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) M18 M20 (–) 38 (W/L) 70 (W/B) Voltage (Approx.) Condition Ignition switch ON Ground Igniting switch OFF Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. WIIA0229E 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 67 and ground. Connector M20 Terminals (Wire color) 67 (B) Continuity Ground Yes OK or NG OK >> Power supply and ground circuit is OK. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA0915E Revision: October 2004 RF-18 2005 Titan SUNROOF Sunroof Switch System Check EIS004E2 1. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY A 1. 2. 3. B Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect sunroof motor assembly connector and sunroof switch connector. Check continuity between sunroof motor assembly connector R4 terminals 3 (P/W), 4 (O), 8 (Y), 9 (P), 10 (L/R) and sunroof switch connector R104 terminals 1 (P/W), 2 (Y), 3 (P), 4 (O), 6 (L/R). 3 (P/W) - 1 (P/W) 4 (O) - 4 (O) 8 (Y) - 2 (Y) 9 (P) - 3 (P) 10 (L/R) - 6 (L/R) C : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. D OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness between sunroof motor assembly and sunroof switch. E LIIA1245E F 2. CHECK SUNROOF SWITCH G Operate sunroof switch, and check continuity of the sunroof switch as follows. Terminals Condition 1 3 2 4 6 Continuity Sunroof switch in CLOSE position Yes Other than above No Sunroof switch in OPEN position Yes Other than above No Sunroof switch in TILT UP position Yes Other than above No Sunroof switch in TILT DOWN position Yes Other than above No H RF J WIIA0232E K OK or NG OK >> Sunroof switch and harness are OK. Refer to RF-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom" . NG >> Replace sunroof switch. L M Revision: October 2004 RF-19 2005 Titan SUNROOF Sunroof Motor Assembly Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check EIS004E3 1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect the sunroof motor assembly connector. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between sunroof motor assembly connector R4 terminals 1(W/L), 5 (W/R) and ground. Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) 1 (W/L) R4 Voltage (Approx.) Condition (–) Ground Ignition switch ON Battery voltage Within 45 seconds after ignition switch is turned OFF Battery voltage When front door LH or RH is open while retained power is operating 0 WIIA0250E 5 (W/R) Ignition switch OFF Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> GO TO 3. 2. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between sunroof motor assembly connector R4 terminal 7 (B) and ground. 7 (B) - Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Sunroof motor assembly power supply and ground circuits are OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to RF-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. WIIA0251E 3. CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between BCM connector M20 terminals 68, 69 and ground. 68 (W/L) - Ground 69 (W/R) - Ground : Battery voltage : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . WIIA0425E Revision: October 2004 RF-20 2005 Titan SUNROOF 4. CHECK SUNROOF MOTOR CIRCUIT HARNESS 1. 2. 3. 68 (W/L) - 1 (W/L) 69 (W/R) - 5 (W/R) 4. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect BCM connector. Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 68 (W/ L), 69 (W/R) and sunroof motor assembly connector R4 terminal 1 (W/L), 5 (W/R). B C : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 68 (W/ L), 69 (W/R) and ground. 68 (W/L) - Ground 69 (W/R) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. D LIIA1246E E OK or NG OK >> Sunroof motor assembly power supply circuits are OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to RF-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom" . NG >> Repair or replace harness between BCM and sunroof motor assembly. F Door Switch Check G EIS004E4 1. CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL With CONSULT-II Check door switches (“DOOR SW-DR” and “DOOR SW-AS”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Monitor item Condition DOOR SW-DR DOOR SW-AS H RF OPEN : ON CLOSE : OFF OPEN : ON CLOSE : OFF J K PIIA2464E L Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check voltage between BCM connector and ground. Item Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) RH M18 Ground LH M19 Condition Voltage (Approx.) Door switch OPEN 0 Door switch CLOSE Battery voltage Door switch OPEN 0 Door switch CLOSE Battery voltage (–) 12 (R/L) 47 (SB) M WIIA0234E OK or NG OK >> Door switches are OK. NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 RF-21 2005 Titan SUNROOF 2. CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect front door switches and BCM connectors. Check continuity between front door switch connector B8 (LH) or B108 (RH) terminal 2 (SB or R/L) and BCM connectors M18, M19 terminals 12 (R/L), 47 (SB). Front door switch LH 2 (SB) - 47 (SB) Front door switch RH 2 (R/L) - 12 (R/L) 3. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between front door switch LH connector B8 or front door switch RH connector B108 terminal 2 (SB or R/L) and ground. 2 (SB or R/L) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. WIIA0235E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness between BCM and sunroof motor assembly. 3. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES Check continuity between each door switch terminal 2 and body ground part of door switch. Terminal 2 Body ground part of door switch Condition Continuity Door switch pushed No Door switch released Yes OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace malfunctioning door switch. WIIA0289E 4. CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. Connect BCM connectors. Check voltage between BCM connector M18 terminal 12 (R/L), M19 terminal 47 (SB) and ground. 12 (R/L) - Ground 47 (SB) - Ground : Battery voltage : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> Check the condition of the harness and the connector. NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . WIIA0234E Revision: October 2004 RF-22 2005 Titan SUNROOF Fitting Adjustment EIS004E5 A B C D E F G H WIIA0312E RF GAP ADJUSTMENT NOTE: If any gap or height difference between glass lid and roof panel is found, check glass lid fit and adjust as follows: 1. Open sunshade assembly. 2. Loosen glass lid securing screws (2 each on left and right sides), then tilt glass lid down. 3. Manually adjust glass lid from outside of vehicle so it resembles "A-A" as shown in the figure. 4. After adjusting glass lid tilt glass lid up and tighten screws. 5. Tilt glass lid up and down several times to check that it moves smoothly. HEIGHT DIFFERENCE ADJUSTMENT 1. 2. EIS004E6 After any adjustment, check sunroof operation and glass lid alignment. Handle glass lid with care so not to cause damage. ● For easier installation, mark each point before removal. CAUTION: ● Always work with a helper. ● Before removal, fully close the glass lid assembly. Then, after removal, do not move the motor assembly. ● ● Revision: October 2004 RF-23 K L M Tilt glass lid up and down. Check height difference between roof panel and glass lid, and compare to "A-A". Removal and Installation J 2005 Titan SUNROOF ● After installing the sunroof and glass lid, check gap adjustment to ensure there is no malfunction. WIIA0238E Revision: October 2004 RF-24 2005 Titan SUNROOF 1. Glass lid assembly 2. Wind deflector 3. Rear drain hoses 4. Shade stoppers 5. Sunroof bracket 6. Sunshade assembly 7. Front drain hoses 8. Sunroof motor assembly 9. Sunroof frame assembly 10. Overhead console bracket 11. Side cover LH A 12. Side cover RH B SUNROOF UNIT Removal CAUTION: ● Always work with a helper. ● When taking sunroof unit out, use shop cloths to protect the seats and trim from damage. ● After installing the sunroof unit and glass lid, be sure to check gap adjustment to ensure there is no malfunction. 1. Remove headlining. Refer to EI-43, "HEADLINING" . 2. Remove the sunroof glass lid. Refer to RF-25, "GLASS LID" . 3. Remove overhead console bracket. 4. Disconnect the drain hoses. 5. Remove front sunroof bolts. 6. Remove rear sunroof bracket bolts. 7. Remove the side bolts and the sunroof unit. C D E F G Installation 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Position the sunroof frame assembly and install the side bolts. Install the rear brackets. Install the front mounting bolts. Connect drain hoses. Install the overhead console bracket. Install the sunroof glass lid. Refer to RF-25, "GLASS LID" . Install headlining. Refer to EI-43, "HEADLINING" . H RF J GLASS LID Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. K Open sunshade. Ensure glass lid is closed. Remove side cover LH and RH. Remove the screws securing glass lid to the sunroof frame assembly. Remove the glass lid assembly. L M WIIA0252E Installation 1. 2. 3. 4. Position glass lid to sunroof assembly. Install the glass lid assembly screws. (First tighten left front bolt, then tighten right rear bolt on glass lid to prevent lid from moving while tightening other bolts.) Adjust the glass lid assembly. Refer to RF-23, "Fitting Adjustment" . Install side cover LH and RH. Revision: October 2004 RF-25 2005 Titan SUNROOF WIND DEFLECTOR Removal 1. 2. 3. Open the sunroof. Remove screws from the left, center, and right side wind deflector holders. Remove the wind deflector from the sunroof frame assembly. LIIA1099E Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. SUNSHADE Removal 1. 2. 3. Remove the sunroof frame assembly. Refer to RF-25, "SUNROOF UNIT" . Remove the sunshade stoppers (2 points) from the rear end of the sunroof frame assembly. Remove the sunshade assembly from the rear end of the sunroof frame assembly. SBT251A Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. SUNROOF MOTOR Removal CAUTION: ● When removing the sunroof motor, be sure that the sunroof is in the fully closed position. ● Never run the removed motor as a single unit. 1. Position the sunroof assembly in the fully closed position. 2. Remove the front roof console assembly. Refer to EI-43, "HEADLINING" . 3. Disconnect the harness connector from the sunroof motor assembly. 4. Remove the mounting screws and then remove sunroof motor assembly. LIIA0270E Revision: October 2004 RF-26 2005 Titan SUNROOF Installation CAUTION: Before installing the sunroof motor assembly, be sure to place the link and wire assembly in the symmetrical and fully closed position. 1. Move the sunroof motor assembly laterally little by little so that the gear is completely engaged into the wire on the sunroof unit and the mounting surface becomes parallel. Then, secure the motor with bolts. Sunroof motor bolts 2. 3. 4. A B C :2.3 N·m (0.23 kg-m, 20in-lb) Connect the wire harness connector to the sunroof motor assembly. Install the roof console assembly. Refer to EI-43, "HEADLINING" . Reset the sunroof motor memory. Refer to RF-11, "MEMORY RESET PROCEDURE" . D LIIA0270E DRAIN HOSES E F G H RF J K WIIA0253E L M Revision: October 2004 RF-27 2005 Titan SUNROOF 1. Remove the headlining. Refer to EI-43, "Removal and Installation" . 2. 3. 4. Visually check the drain hoses for proper connections, damage or deterioration. Remove each drain hose and check visually for damage, cracks or deterioration. Pour water through the drain hose to check for damage. If any damage is found, replace the drain hose. LIIA0272E ● WEATHERSTRIP Visually check weatherstrip for any damage, deterioration, or flattening. ● In the case of leakage around glass lid, close glass lid and pour water around it to find the damaged or gaped portion, remove glass lid assembly. ● If any damage is found, replace glass lid assembly. CAUTION: Do not remove weatherstrip. LINK AND WIRE ASSEMBLY NOTE: Before replacing any suspect part, carefully ensure it is the source of the noise being experienced. 1. Visually check to determine if a sufficient amount of petroleum jelly has been applied to the wire or rail groove. If not, add petroleum jelly as required. 2. Check wire for any damage or deterioration. If any damage is found, remove rear guide, then replace wire. Revision: October 2004 RF-28 2005 Titan D DRIVELINE/AXLE A B SECTION REAR FINAL DRIVE C RFD E CONTENTS WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3 Service Notice or Precautions .................................. 3 PREPARATION ........................................................... 4 Special Service Tools ............................................... 4 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 7 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 8 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 8 DESCRIPTION ............................................................ 9 Cross-Sectional View ............................................... 9 DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL ...................................... 10 Changing Differential Gear Oil ............................... 10 FILLING ............................................................... 10 Checking Differential Gear Oil ................................ 10 FRONT OIL SEAL .....................................................11 Removal and Installation .........................................11 REMOVAL ............................................................11 INSTALLATION ................................................... 12 CARRIER COVER .................................................... 13 Removal and Installation ........................................ 13 REMOVAL ........................................................... 13 INSTALLATION ................................................... 13 REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY ............................ 14 Removal and Installation ........................................ 14 REMOVAL ........................................................... 14 INSTALLATION ................................................... 14 Disassembly and Assembly ................................... 15 COMPONENTS .................................................. 15 ASSEMBLY INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT... 16 DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 19 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ............... 23 SELECTION ADJUSTING WASHERS ............... 24 ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 27 Revision: October 2004 F SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 33 General Specifications ............................................ 33 Inspection and Adjustment ..................................... 33 DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR CLEARANCE ....... 33 PRELOAD TORQUE ........................................... 33 BACKLASH ......................................................... 33 COMPANION FLANGE RUNOUT ....................... 33 SELECTIVE PARTS ............................................ 34 G WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL I PRECAUTIONS ........................................................ 35 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” ................................................................. 35 Precautions ............................................................. 35 Service Notice or Precaution .................................. 36 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ................ 36 PREPARATION ......................................................... 37 Special Service Tools ............................................. 37 Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 40 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING .............................................. 41 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ................................... 41 DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL ...................................... 42 Changing Differential Gear Oil ................................ 42 FILLING ............................................................... 42 Checking Differential Gear Oil ................................ 42 DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SYSTEM .............................. 43 Cross-sectional View .............................................. 43 Differential Lock Operation ..................................... 44 System Description ................................................. 44 DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SOLENOID .................... 44 DIFFERENTIAL LOCK POSITION SWITCH ....... 44 DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT ............ 44 DIFFERENTIAL LOCK MODE SWITCH ............. 44 DIFF LOCK INDICATOR LAMP .......................... 44 System Diagram ..................................................... 45 RFD-1 2005 Titan H J K L M COMPONENTS FUNCTION DESCRIPTION ...... 45 CAN Communication .............................................. 45 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................... 45 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 46 Fail-safe Function ................................................... 46 How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis ......................... 46 BASIC CONCEPT ............................................... 46 Location of Electrical Parts ..................................... 47 Wiring Diagram — DIFLOC — ................................ 48 Trouble Diagnosis Chart for Symptoms .................. 50 Differential Lock Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values ................................................... 50 DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE .......................................... 50 CONSULT-II Function (DIFF LOCK) ....................... 52 CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE ................ 52 SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE ............................. 53 DATA MONITOR MODE ...................................... 55 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM .................... 56 Power Supply Circuit For Differential Lock Control Unit ......................................................................... 56 CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE ................................................ 56 DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE ................... 56 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 57 Differential Lock Control Unit .................................. 58 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 58 Differential Lock Mode Switch ................................ 58 CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE ................................................ 58 DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE ................... 58 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 59 COMPONENT INSPECTION .............................. 61 Differential Lock Position Switch ............................. 62 CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE ................................................ 62 DIFFERENTIAL CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE ................................. 62 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 63 COMPONENT INSPECTION .............................. 65 Differential Lock Solenoid Relay ............................. 65 CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE ................................................ 65 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 65 Differential Lock Solenoid ....................................... 66 Revision: October 2004 CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE ................................................66 DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE ...................66 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ...............................67 COMPONENT INSPECTION ...............................70 ABS System ............................................................70 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ...............................70 CAN Communication Line .......................................71 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ...............................71 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS ..............72 DIFF LOCK Indicator Lamp Does Not Turn ON ......72 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ...............................72 DIFF LOCK Indicator Lamp Does Not Change .......75 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ...............................75 DIFF LOCK Indicator Lamp Sometimes Flashes ...76 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ...............................76 DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT ..................78 Removal and Installation .........................................78 REMOVAL ............................................................78 INSTALLATION ....................................................78 FRONT OIL SEAL .....................................................79 Removal and Installation .........................................79 REMOVAL ............................................................79 INSTALLATION ....................................................80 CARRIER COVER .....................................................81 Removal and Installation .........................................81 REMOVAL ............................................................81 INSTALLATION ....................................................81 REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY .............................82 Removal and Installation .........................................82 REMOVAL ............................................................82 INSTALLATION ....................................................82 Disassembly and Assembly ....................................83 COMPONENTS ...................................................83 ASSEMBLY INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT...84 DISASSEMBLY ....................................................87 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ................91 SELECTION ADJUSTING WASHERS ................92 ASSEMBLY ..........................................................94 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ......99 General Specifications ............................................99 Inspection and Adjustment ......................................99 PRELOAD TORQUE ...........................................99 BACKLASH ..........................................................99 COMPANION FLANGE RUNOUT .......................99 SELECTIVE PARTS .......................................... 100 RFD-2 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS [WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] PRECAUTIONS Service Notice or Precautions ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● PFP:00001 A EDS001OQ Check for the correct installation status prior to removal or disassembly. If matching marks are required, be certain they do not interfere with the function of the parts when applied. B Overhaul should be done in a clean work area, it is preferable to work in dustproof area. Before disassembly, using steam or white gasoline, completely remove sand and mud from the exterior of the unit, preventing them from entering into the unit during disassembly or assembly. C Check appearance of the disassembled parts for damage, deformation, and unusual wear. Replace them with a new ones if necessary. Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time when the unit is disassembled. RFD In principle, tighten bolts or nuts gradually in several steps working diagonally from inside to outside. If tightening sequence is specified, observe it. E Clean and flush the parts sufficiently and blow-dry them. Be careful not to damage sliding surfaces and mating surfaces. When applying sealant, remove the old sealant from the mounting surface; then remove any moisture, oil, F and foreign materials from the application and mounting surfaces. Always use shop paper for cleaning the inside of components. Avoid using cotton gloves or shop rags to prevent entering of lint. During assembly, observe the specified tightening torque, and apply new differential gear oil, petroleum G jelly, or multi-purpose grease as specified for each vehicle, if necessary. H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 RFD-3 2005 Titan PREPARATION [WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 EDS001OR The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number Description (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name KV40104000 ( — ) Flange wrench a: 85 mm (3.35 in) dia. b: 65 mm (2.56 in) dia. Removing and installing drive pinion nut NT659 ST33290001 (J-34286) Puller Removing front oil seal ZZA0601D ST15310000 ( — ) Drift a: 96mm (3.77 in) dia. b: 84 mm (3.30 in) dia. Installing front oil seal NT115 ST3127S000 (J-25765-A) Preload gauge set Inspecting drive pinion bearing preload and total preload 1. GG91030000 (J-25765) Torque wrench 2. HT62940000 (1/2″) ( — ) Socket adapter NT124 3. HT62900000 (3/8″) ( — ) Socket adapter — (C-4164) Adjuster tool Removing and installing side bearing adjuster WDIA0192E KV10111100 (J-37228) Seal cutter Removing carrier cover S-NT046 Revision: October 2004 RFD-4 2005 Titan PREPARATION [WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description ST30021000 (J-22912-01) Puller Removing drive pinion rear bearing inner race A B C ZZA0700D ST33081000 ( — ) Adapter a: 43 mm (1.69 in) dia. b: 33.5 mm (1.32 in) dia. Removing and installing side bearing inner race RFD E ZZA1000D ST23550000 ( — ) Pin punch a: 4.5 mm (0.177 in) dia. Removing and installing lock pin F G H NT410 — (8144) Pinion block Adjusting pinion gear height I J SDIA2599E — (6740) Cone Adjusting pinion gear height K L SDIA2601E — (6741) Screw Adjusting pinion gear height M SDIA2602E — (6739) Pinion height lock Adjusting pinion gear height SDIA2603E Revision: October 2004 RFD-5 2005 Titan PREPARATION [WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (D-115-2) Scooter block Adjusting pinion gear height SDIA2604E TBD Arbor disc Adjusting pinion gear height SDIA2605E — (D-115-3) Arbor Adjusting pinion gear height SDIA2606E ST01500001 ( — ) Drift a: 89mm (3.50 in) dia. b: 79 mm (3.11 in) dia. Installing drive pinion rear bearing outer race ZZA0811D ST30022000 ( — ) Drift a: 46 mm (1.81 in) dia. b: 110 mm (4.33 in) dia. Installing drive pinion rear bearing outer race NT660 ST33022000 ( — ) Drift a: 49 mm (1.92 in) dia. b: 67 mm (2.63 in) dia. Installing drive pinion front bearing outer race NT660 Revision: October 2004 RFD-6 2005 Titan PREPARATION [WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (C-4040) Installer Installing drive pinion rear bearing inner race A B C SDIA2607E KV38100300 (J-25523) Drift a: 54 mm (2.13 in) dia. b: 46 mm (1.81 in) dia. c: 32mm (1.26 in) dia. Installing side bearing inner race RFD E ZZA1046D F Commercial Service Tools EDS001OS Tool name Description Puller Removing companion flange and side bearing inner race G H I NT077 Puller Removing side bearing inner race J K ZZB0823D Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts L M PBIC0190E Revision: October 2004 RFD-7 2005 Titan × × AXLE AND SUSPENSION × TIRES × ROAD WHEEL × AXLE SHAFT × BRAKES × STEERING MA-26, "Checking Final Drive Oil" PR-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" RAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart", RSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" WT-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" RAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" 2005 Titan BR-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" PS-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" [WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] × PROPELLER SHAFT RFD-18, "Companion Flange Runout" NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING × Gear oil improper RFD-17, "Backlash" PFP:00003 × Companion flange excessive runout — EDS001OT × Backlash incorrect RFD-16, "Tooth Contact" NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart × Tooth surfaces worn — Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. × RFD-8 Gear contact improper Reference page Noise Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS Symptom ×: Applicable Revision: October 2004 Gear tooth rough DESCRIPTION [WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] DESCRIPTION Cross-Sectional View PFP:00000 A EDS001OU B C RFD E F G H I J SDIA2636E 1. Companion flange 2. Drive pinion 3. Drive gear 4. Differential case 5. Pinion mate gear 6. Axle shaft 7. Side gear 8. Pinion mate shaft K L M Revision: October 2004 RFD-9 2005 Titan DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL [WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL Changing Differential Gear Oil PFP:KLD30 EDS002HV Refer to MA-27, "Changing Final Drive Oil" . FILLING Refer to MA-26, "Checking Final Drive Oil" . Checking Differential Gear Oil EDS002HW Refer to MA-26, "Checking Final Drive Oil" . Revision: October 2004 RFD-10 2005 Titan FRONT OIL SEAL [WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] FRONT OIL SEAL Removal and Installation PFP:38189 A EDS001OX REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to PR-8, "Removal and Installation" . B Remove wheel and tire assemblies. Remove brake calipers and rotors. Refer to BR-29, "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor" . C Using an inch-pound, torque wrench, rotate the pinion three or four times. Record the rotating torque. Loosen drive pinion nut while holding companion flange using RFD Tool. Tool number : KV40104000 ( — ) E F LDIA0122E 7. Put matching mark on the thread edge of drive pinion. The mark should be in line with the mark on companion flange. CAUTION: For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage drive pinion. G H I J SDIA2590E 8. K Remove companion flange using a suitable tool. L M LDIA0123E 9. Remove front oil seal using Tool. Tool number : ST33290001 (J-34286) CAUTION: Be careful not to damage axle housing. LDIA0124E Revision: October 2004 RFD-11 2005 Titan FRONT OIL SEAL [WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] INSTALLATION 1. Apply multi-purpose grease to oil seal lips. Install front oil seal into axle housing using Tool. Tool number : ST15310000 ( — ) CAUTION: Do not reuse oil seal. ● When installing, do not incline oil seal. ● LDIA0125E 2. Align the matching mark of drive pinion with the mark of companion flange, then install companion flange. SDIA2590E 3. 4. Assemble washer if required and new drive pinion nut on pinion gear and tighten nut until there is zero bearing end play. CAUTION: Do not reuse drive pinion nut and washer. Rotate drive pinion using an inch-pound torque wrench and flange wrench. Rotating torque should be equal to the reading recorded in step 5 above during removal plus an additional 0.56 N·m (5 in-lb). Tool number 5. 6. 7. 8. : KV40104000 ( — ) LDIA0122E If the rotating torque is low, continue to tighten drive pinion nut in 6.8 N·m (5 ft-lb) increments until proper rotating torque is achieved. Refer to RFD-15, "COMPONENTS" . CAUTION: Do not loosen drive pinion nut to decrease drive pinion rear bearing rotating torque and do not exceed specified preload torque. If preload torque or rotating torque is exceeded a new collapsible spacer must be installed. If the minimum tightening torque is reached prior to reaching the required rotating torque, collapsible spacer may have been damaged. Replace collapsible spacer. Install rear propeller shaft. Refer to PR-8, "Removal and Installation" . Check gear lubricant level and fill with proper lubricant if required. Refer to MA-26, "Checking Final Drive Oil" . Install brake rotors, calipers, wheel and tire assemblies. Refer to BR-29, "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor" . Revision: October 2004 RFD-12 2005 Titan CARRIER COVER [WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] CARRIER COVER Removal and Installation PFP:38351 A EDS001OY REMOVAL 1. 2. Drain gear oil. Refer to MA-27, "DRAINING" . Remove carrier cover. ● Disconnect parking brake cable from carrier cover. ● Disconnect brake tube from carrier cover. B C RFD E LDIA0126E INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Apply sealant to mating surface of carrier cover. ● Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to mounting surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and mounting surfaces. Install carrier cover on axle housing and tighten carrier cover bolts to the specified torque. Refer to RFD-15, "COMPONENTS" . SDIA2639E Connect parking brake cable and brake tube to carrier cover. Fill with new gear oil until oil level reaches the specified limit near filler plug mounting hole. Refer to MA26, "Checking Final Drive Oil" . F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 RFD-13 2005 Titan REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY [WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation PFP:38300 EDS001OZ REMOVAL CAUTION: ● Be careful not to damage spline, companion flange and front oil seal when removing propeller shaft. ● Before removing final drive assembly or rear axle assembly, disconnect ABS sensor harness connector from the assembly and move it away from final drive/rear axle assembly area. Failure to do so may result in sensor wires being damaged and sensor becoming inoperative. 1. Drain rear final drive gear oil. Refer to MA-27, "DRAINING" . 2. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to PR-8, "Removal and Installation" . ● Plug rear end of transfer. 3. Remove axle shaft. Refer to RAX-6, "Removal and Installation" . 4. Support rear final drive using a suitable jack. 5. Disconnect the following components from rear final drive. ● Brake tube block connectors. Refer to BR-13, "Removal and Installation of Rear Brake Piping and Brake Hose" . ● ABS sensor wire harness. Refer to BRC-39, "Removal and Installation" (without VDC), BRC-150, "Removal and Installation" (with VDC). ● Parking brake cable. ● Brake tube. 6. Disconnect brake hose from brake tube at the mounting clip on top of axle housing. Then remove the metal clip to disconnect brake line from the mounting clip on top of axle housing. 7. Remove rear shock absorber lower bolts. Refer to RSU-7, "Removal and Installation" . 8. Remove leaf spring U-bolt nuts. Refer to RSU-8, "Removal and Installation" . 9. Remove rear final drive assembly. LDIA0126E INSTALLATION Note the following, and installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Fill with new gear oil until oil level reaches the specified limit near filler plug mounting hole. Refer to MA26, "Checking Final Drive Oil" . ● Bleed the air from brake system. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System" . Revision: October 2004 RFD-14 2005 Titan REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY [WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] Disassembly and Assembly EDS001P0 A COMPONENTS B C RFD E F G H I J K L M WDIA0112E 1. Drive pinion nut 2. Drive pinion nut washer 3. Companion flange 4. Front oil seal 5. Front bearing thrust washer 6. Drive pinion front bearing 7. Axle housing 8. Drain plug 9. Axle shaft assembly 10. Side bearing cap 11. Adjuster lock plate 12. Carrier cover 13. Filler plug 14. Drive pinion 15. Drive pinion height adjusting washer 16. Drive pinion rear bearing 17. Collapsible spacer 18. Side bearing adjuster 19. Side bearing 20. Differential case 21. Drive gear 22. Pinion mate thrust washer 23. Pinion mate gear 24. Pinion mate shaft 25. Lock pin 26. Side gear thrust washer 27. Side gear 28. Breather Revision: October 2004 RFD-15 2005 Titan REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY [WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] ASSEMBLY INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT Total Preload Torque 1. 2. Turn drive pinion in both directions several times to set bearing rollers. Check total preload using Tool. Tool number : ST3127S000 (J-25765-A) Total preload (with oil seal) Gear ratio 2.937 Type: 2.49 - 5.27 N·m (0.26 - 0.53 kg-m, 22- 46 in-lb) Gear ratio 3.357 Type: 2.38 - 5.16 N·m (0.25 - 0.52 kg-m, 21 - 45 in-lb) PDIA0309E NOTE: Total preload torque = Pinion bearing torque + Side bearing torque ● If measured value is out of the specification, disassemble it to check and adjust each part. Adjust pinion bearing preload and side bearing preload. Adjust pinion bearing preload first, then adjust side bearing preload. When the preload torque is large On pinion bearings: Replace collapsible spacer. On side bearings: Loosen side bearing adjuster. When the preload is small On pinion bearings: Tighten drive pinion nut. On side bearings: Tighten side bearing adjuster. Tooth Contact Checking gear tooth contact pattern is necessary to verify correct relationship between drive gear and drive pinion. Gears which are not positioned in proper arrangement may be noisy and/or have a short life. Check gear tooth contact pattern to obtain the best contact for low noise and long life. 1. Remove rear cover. Refer to RFD-19, "DISASSEMBLY" . 2. Thoroughly clean drive gear and drive pinion teeth. 3. Apply red lead to drive gear. CAUTION: Apply red lead to both the faces of 3 to 4 gears at 4 locations evenly spaced on drive gear. PDIA0321E 4. Hold companion flange steady by hand and rotate drive gear in both directions. PDIA0322E Revision: October 2004 RFD-16 2005 Titan REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY [WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] A B C RFD E F SDIA2591E 5. If outside the standard, adjust drive pinion height adjusting washer and backlash. Refer to RFD-25, "Drive Pinion Height Adjusting Washer" , RFD-17, "Backlash" . G Backlash 1. 2. Remove rear cover. Refer to RFD-19, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check drive gear to drive pinion backlash using a dial indicator at several points. H I Drive gear to drive pinion backlash: 0.08 - 0.13 mm (0.0031 - 0.0051 in) 3. a. b. c. If outside the standard, adjust side bearing adjuster. CAUTION: Check tooth contact and total preload after adjusting side bearing adjuster. Refer to RFD-16, "Total Preload Torque" , RFD-16, "Tooth Contact" . Remove adjuster lock plate. Loosen side bearing cap bolts. Tighten or loosen each side bearing adjusters using Tool. Tool number : — J K SDIA2640E L (C - 4164) M PDIA0337E Revision: October 2004 RFD-17 2005 Titan REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY [WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] d. In case of lots of backlash, loosen side bearing adjuster A and tighten side bearing adjuster B. In case of less backlash, loosen side bearing adjuster B and tighten side bearing adjuster A. PDIA0330E e. f. After adjusting backlash and tighten cap bolts to the specified torque. Refer to RFD-15, "COMPONENTS" . Install adjuster lock plate and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to RFD-15, "COMPONENTS" . PDIA0331E Companion Flange Runout 1. 2. Fit a dial indicator onto companion flange face (inner side of propeller shaft mounting bolt holes). Rotate companion flange to check for runout. Runout limit 3. 4. Fit a test indicator to the inner side of companion flange (socket diameter). Rotate companion flange to check for runout. Runout limit 5. a. b. c. : 0.10 mm (0.0039 in) or less : 0.13 mm (0.0051 in) or less SDIA2078E If the runout value is outside the repair limit, follow the procedure below to adjust. Check for runout while changing the phase between companion flange and drive pinion by 90° step, and search for the point where the runout is the minimum. If the runout value is still outside of the limit after the phase has been changed, replace companion flange. If the runout value still outside of the limit after companion flange has been replaced, check drive pinion bearing and drive pinion assembly. Revision: October 2004 RFD-18 2005 Titan REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY [WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] DISASSEMBLY Differential Assembly 1. 2. A Remove carrier cover bolts. Remove carrier cover using Tool. Tool number B : KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: ● Be careful not to damage the mating surface. ● Do not insert flat-bladed screwdriver, this will damage the mating surface. C RFD SDIA2581E 3. 4. For proper reinstallation, paint matching mark on one side of side bearing cap. CAUTION: ● Side bearing caps are line-board for initial assembly. The matching marks are used to reinstall them in their original positions. ● For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage side bearing cap. Remove adjuster lock plates. E F G H PDIA0310E 5. Remove side bearing caps. I J K PDIA0311E 6. L Remove side bearing adjusters using Tool. Tool number : — (C - 4164) M PDIA0337E Revision: October 2004 RFD-19 2005 Titan REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY [WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] 7. 8. Keep side bearing outer races together with inner races. Do not mix them up. Also, keep side bearing adjusters together with bearing. Remove side bearing adjusters from axle housing. PDIA0312E 9. Remove side bearing inner races using suitable puller. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage differential case. SDIA2635E 10. For proper reinstallation, paint matching mark on differential case and drive gear. CAUTION: For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage differential case and drive gear. 11. Remove drive gear bolts. 12. Tap drive gear off differential case with a soft hammer. CAUTION: Tap evenly all around to keep drive gear from binding. SDIA2238E 13. Pull lock pin out of pinion mate shaft, using Tool. Tool number : ST23550000 ( — ) PDIA0062E 14. Remove pinion mate shaft. SDIA0031J Revision: October 2004 RFD-20 2005 Titan REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY [WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] 15. Turn pinion mate gear, then remove pinion mate gear, pinion mate thrust washer, side gear and side gear thrust washer from differential case. A B C SDIA0032J RFD Drive Pinion Assembly 1. 2. Remove differential case assembly. Refer to RFD-19, "Differential Assembly" . Remove drive pinion nut and washer using Tool. Tool number : KV40104000 ( — E ) F G PDIA0314E 3. Put a matching mark on the thread edge of drive pinion. The mark should be in line with the mark on companion flange. CAUTION: For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage drive pinion. H I J K SDIA2590E 4. Remove companion flange using a suitable Tool. L M PDIA0315E Revision: October 2004 RFD-21 2005 Titan REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY [WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] 5. Remove front oil seal using Tool. Tool number 6. : ST33290001 (J-34286) CAUTION: Be careful not to damage axle housing. Remove front bearing thrust washer. SDIA2586E 7. 8. Remove drive pinion assembly and collapsible spacer from axle housing, using press. CAUTION: Do not drop drive pinion assembly. Remove drive pinion front bearing inner race from axle housing. PDIA0316E 9. Tap drive pinion front bearing outer race uniformly with a brass bar or equivalent to remove. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage axle housing. 10. Tap drive pinion rear bearing outer race uniformly with a brass bar or equivalent for removal. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage axle housing. SDIA2641E 11. Remove drive pinion rear bearing inner race and drive pinion height adjusting washer, using Tool. Tool number : ST30021000 (J-22912-01) SDIA2236E Revision: October 2004 RFD-22 2005 Titan REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY [WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Drive Gear and Drive Pinion ● ● ● A If gear teeth do not mesh or line-up correctly, determine cause and adjust, repair, or replace as necessary. If gears are worn, cracked, damaged, pitted or chipped (by friction) noticeably, replace with new gears. Drive gear and drive pinion are supplied in matched sets only. Matching numbers on both drive pinion and drive gear are etched for verification. If a new gear set is being used, verify the numbers of each pinion gear and drive gear before proceeding with assembly. C Bearing ● ● B If found any chipped (by friction), pitted, worn, rusted, scratched mark, or unusual noise from bearing, replace with new bearing assembly (as a new set). RFD Bearing must be replaced with a new one whenever disassembled. Side Gear, Pinion Mate and Pinion Mate Shaft ● ● ● Replace with a new one if found any cracks or damage on the surface of the tooth. Replace with a new one if found any worn or chipped mark on the contact sides of thrust washer. Replace both side gear and pinion mate gear as a set when replacing side gear or pinion mate gear. Side Gear Thrust Washer and Pinion Mate Thrust Washer ● F Replace with a new one if found that it is chipped (by friction), damaged, or unusual worn. G Differential Case ● E Replace with a new one if found any wear or cracks on the contact sides of differential case. H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 RFD-23 2005 Titan REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY [WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] SELECTION ADJUSTING WASHERS Side Gear Thrust Washer 1. Place differential case straight up so that side gear to be measured comes upward. PDIA0460E 2. Using a thickness gauge, measure the clearance between side gear back and differential case at 3 different points, while rotating side gear. Average the 3 readings, and then measure the clearance. (Measure the clearance of the other side as well.) Side gear back clearance standard: 0.305 mm (0.0120 in) or less. (Each gear should rotate smoothly without excessive resistance during differential motion.) 3. CAUTION: To prevent side gear from tilting, insert thickness gauges with the same thickness from both sides. If the back clearance is outside the standard, use a thicker/thinner side gear thrust washer to adjust. When the back clearance is large: Use a thicker thrust washer. When the back clearance is small: Use a thinner thrust washer. CAUTION: Select a side gear thrust washer for right and left individually. Revision: October 2004 RFD-24 SDIA0583E 2005 Titan REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY [WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] Drive Pinion Height Adjusting Washer ● A Drive gear and drive pinion are supplied in matched sets only. Matching numbers on both drive pinion and drive gear are etched for verification. If a new gear set is being used, verify the numbers of each drive pinion and drive gear before proceeding with assembly. B C SDIA2241E ● ● ● The mounting distance from the center line of drive gear to the back face of drive pinion for the Model 226 axle assembly is 109.5 mm (4.312 in). On the button end of each drive pinion, there is etched a plus (+) number, a minus (-) number, or a zero (0), which indicates the best running position for each particular gear set. This dimension is controlled by a selective drive pinion height adjusting washer between drive pinion inner bearing race and drive pinion. For example: If a drive pinion is etched m+8 (+3), it would require 0.08 mm (0.003 in) less drive pinion height adjusting washer than a drive pinion etched “0”. This means decreasing drive pinion height adjusting washer thickness; increases the mounting distance of drive pinion to 109.6 mm (4.315 in). If a drive pinion is etched m-8 (-3), it would require adding 0.08 mm (0.003 in) more to drive pinion height adjusting washer than would be required if drive pinion were etched “0”. By adding 0.08 mm (0.003 in), the mounting distance of drive pinion was decreased to 109.4 mm (4.309 in) which is just what m-8 (a-3) etching indicated. To change drive pinion adjustment, use different drive pinion height adjusting washers which come in different thickness. Use the following tables as a guide for selecting the correct drive pinion height adjusting washer thickness to add or subtract from the old drive pinion height adjusting washer. OLD DRIVE PINION MARKING RFD E F G H I NEW DRIVE PINION MARKING mm (in) -4 -3 -2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +4 +0.20 (+0.008) +0.18 (+0.007) +0.15 (+0.006) +0.13 (+0.005) +0.10 (+0.004) +0.08 (+0.003) +0.05 (+0.002) +0.02 (+0.001) 0 (0) +3 +0.18 (+0.007) +0.15 (+0.006) +0.13 (+0.005) +0.10 (+0.004) +0.08 (+0.003) +0.05 (+0.002) +0.02 (+0.001) 0 (0) -0.02 (-0.001) +2 +0.15 (+0.006) +0.13 (+0.005) +0.10 (+0.004) +0.08 (+0.003) +0.05 (+0.002) +0.02 (+0.001) 0 (0) -0.02 (-0.001) -0.05 (-0.002) +1 +0.13 (+0.005) +0.10 (+0.004) +0.08 (+0.003) +0.05 (+0.002) +0.02 (+0.001) 0 (0) -0.02 (-0.001) -0.05 (-0.002) -0.08 (-0.003) 0 +0.10 (+0.004) +0.08 (+0.003) +0.05 (+0.002) +0.02 (+0.001) 0 (0) -0.02 (-0.001) -0.05 (-0.002) -0.08 (-0.003) -0.10 (-0.004) -1 +0.08 (+0.003) +0.05 (+0.002) +0.02 (+0.001) 0 (0) -0.02 (-0.001) -0.05 (-0.002) -0.08 (-0.003) -0.10 (-0.004) -0.13 (-0.005) -2 +0.05 (+0.002) +0.02 (+0.001) 0 (0) -0.02 (-0.001) -0.05 (-0.002) -0.08 (-0.003) -0.10 (-0.004) -0.13 (-0.005) -0.15 (-0.006) -3 +0.02 (+0.001) 0 (0) -0.02 (-0.001) -0.05 (-0.002) -0.08 (-0.003) -0.10 (-0.004) -0.13 (-0.005) -0.15 (-0.006) -0.18 (-0.007) -4 0 (0) -0.02 (-0.001) -0.05 (-0.002) -0.08 (-0.003) -0.10 (-0.004) -0.13 (-0.005) -0.15 (-0.006) -0.18 (-0.007) -0.20 (-0.008) Revision: October 2004 RFD-25 2005 Titan J K L M REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY [WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] 1. 2. Make sure all parts are clean and that drive pinion bearings are well lubricated. Assemble drive pinion bearings into Tools. Tool number A: B: C: — — — (8144) (6740) (6741) SDIA2242E 3. Install drive pinion bearing inner race and drive pinion height adjusting washer to axle housing using tool as shown. PDIA0318E 4. Turn the assembly several times to seat drive pinion bearings. PDIA0319E 5. Measure the turning torque, using Tool. Tool number : ST3127S000 (J-25765-A) Turning torque specification : 1.2 - 2.8 N-m (0.13 - 0.28 kg-m, 11 - 24 in-lb) PDIA0320E 6. Tighten side bearing caps to the specified torque installing Tools as shown. Tool number A: B: C: D: — — — — (6739) (D-115-2) TBD (D-115-3) SDIA2646E Revision: October 2004 RFD-26 2005 Titan REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY [WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] 7. 8. 9. Put scooter block on pinion height block. Make sure that dial indicator is level adjusting pressure with a hand. Dial indicator indicates “0”. Slide dial indicator along arbor. Record the maximum. Adjust drive pinion height adjusting washer so that the maximum will be “0”. A B C SDIA2647E RFD ASSEMBLY Drive Pinion Assembly 1. Press a drive pinion rear bearing outer race into axle housing, using Tools. Tool number A: ST01500001 ( B: ST30022000 ( E — ) — ) F CAUTION: Do not reuse drive pinion rear bearing. G PDIA0323E 2. Press a drive pinion front bearing outer race into axle housing, using Tool. Tool number 3. H : ST33022000 ( — I ) CAUTION: Do not reuse drive pinion front bearing. Select drive pinion height adjusting washer. Refer to RFD-25, "Drive Pinion Height Adjusting Washer" . J K PDIA0324E 4. Tool number 5. 6. 7. L Press a drive pinion rear bearing inner race and drive pinion height adjusting washer to drive pinion, using Tool. : — (C - 4040) M CAUTION: Do not reuse drive pinion rear bearing. Apply gear oil to drive pinon rear bearing and drive pinon front bearing. Install drive pinion front bearing inner race in axle housing. Install front bearing thrust washer to axle housing. SDIA2592E Revision: October 2004 RFD-27 2005 Titan REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY [WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] 8. Apply multi-purpose grease to front oil seal lip. Install front oil seal into axle housing using Tool. Tool number : ST15310000 ( — ) CAUTION: Do not reuse oil seal. ● When installing, do not incline oil seal. ● PDIA0326E 9. Install collapsible spacer to drive pinion. And then install drive pinion assembly in axle housing. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse collapsible spacer. ● Be careful not to damage front oil seal. SDIA2595E 10. Align the matching mark of drive pinion with the mark of companion flange. SDIA2590E 11. Install companion flange onto drive pinion. Tap companion flange with a soft hammer until fully seated. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage companion flange and front oil seal. PDIA0328E 12. Install drive pinion nut and drive pinion nut washer. Tighten drive pinion nut until total preload is within specification. ● The threaded portion of drive pinion and drive pinion nut should be free from oil or grease. Tool number : KV40104000 ( — ) CAUTION: Do not reuse drive pinion nut and drive pinion nut washer. PDIA0313E Revision: October 2004 RFD-28 2005 Titan REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY [WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] 13. Tighten drive pinion nut by very small degrees until the specified preload is achieved. When checking the preload, turn drive pinion in both directions several times to set the bearing rollers, using Tool. Tool number A B : ST3127S000 (J-25765-A) Pinion bearing preload : 1.7 - 3.8 N·m (0.18 - 0.38 kg-m, 15 - 33 in-lb) a. This procedure will have to be repeated if: Maximum preload is achieved before the minimum drive pinion nut torque is reached. ● Minimum preload is not achieved before maximum drive pinion nut torque is reached. ● C PDIA0309E Differential Assembly 1. 2. RFD E Assemble side gear thrust washers with the same thickness as the ones installed prior to disassembly or reinstall the old ones on side gears. Assemble side gear and side gear thrust washer into differential case. F G H SDIA0193J 3. Align 2 pinion mate gears in diagonally opposite positions, then rotate and assemble them into differential case after assembling pinion mate thrust washer to pinion mate gear. I J K SDIA0036J 4. 5. Align lock pin holes on differential case and shaft, and assemble pinion mate shaft. Measure side gear end play. If necessary, select the appropriate side gear thrust washers. Refer to RFD-24, "Side Gear Thrust Washer" . M SDIA0037J Revision: October 2004 RFD-29 L 2005 Titan REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY [WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] 6. Drive a lock pin into pinion mate shaft, using Tool. Tool number : ST23550000 ( — ) CAUTION: Do not reuse lock pin. PDIA0062E 7. Apply gear oil to gear tooth surfaces and thrust surfaces and check to see they turn properly. SPD322 8. Align the matching mark of differential case with the mark of drive gear, then install drive gear. SDIA2593E 9. Apply thread locking sealant into the thread hole of drive gear. ● Use Genuine Medium Strength Thread Locking Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . CAUTION: Drive gear back and threaded holes shall be cleaned and decreased sufficiently. SDIA2594E 10. Install drive gear on the bolts, and then tighten to the specified torque. Refer to RFD-15, "COMPONENTS" . CAUTION: ● Do not reuse the bolts. ● Tighten bolts in a crisscross fashion. SDIA0247J Revision: October 2004 RFD-30 2005 Titan REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY [WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] 11. Press side bearing inner races to differential case using Tools. Tool number A A: KV38100300 (J-25523) B: ST33081000 ( — ) CAUTION: Do not reuse side bearing. B C SDIA2240E RFD 12. Install side bearing adjusters into axle housing. E F G PDIA0381E 13. Apply gear oil to side bearings. Install differential case assembly with side bearing outer races into axle housing. H I J PDIA0312E 14. Align paint matching mark on side bearing caps with that on axle housing and install side bearing caps on axle housing. CAUTION: Do not tighten at this point. This allows further tightening of side bearing adjusters. K L M PDIA0329E 15. Tighten each side bearing adjusters using Tool. Tool number : — (C - 4164) 16. Adjusting backlash of drive gear and drive pinion. Refer to RFD17, "Backlash" . 17. Check total preload. Refer to RFD-16, "Total Preload Torque" . 18. Check tooth contact. Refer to RFD-16, "Tooth Contact" . PDIA0337E Revision: October 2004 RFD-31 2005 Titan REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY [WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] 19. Apply sealant to mating surface of carrier cover. ● Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to mounting surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and mounting surfaces. 20. Install carrier cover on axle housing and tighten carrier cover bolts with the specified torque. Refer to RFD-15, "COMPONENTS" . SDIA2639E Revision: October 2004 RFD-32 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specifications PFP:00030 A EDS001P1 Engine VK56DE Vehicle grade Standard Tow package or off road package Transmission 5A/T Final drive model M226 Gear ratio B C 2.937 3.357 Number of pinion gears 2 Number of teeth (Drive gear / drive pinion) Oil capacity (Approx.) 47/16 RFD 47/14 2.01 (4-1/4, 3-1/2) (US pt, lmp pt) Drive pinion adjustment spacer type Collapsible E Inspection and Adjustment EDS001P2 DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR CLEARANCE Unit: mm (in) Item Side gear backlash (Clearance between side gear and differential case) F Standard 0.305 (0.0120) or less. (Each gear should rotate smoothly without excessive resistance during differential motion.) G PRELOAD TORQUE Unit: N·m (kg-m, in-lb) H Specification Item Total preload (Drive pinion torque to rotate plus) Gear ratio 2.937 Type Gear ratio 3.357 type 2.49 - 5.27 (0.26 - 0.53, 22 - 46) 2.38 - 5.16 (0.25 - 0.52, 21 - 45) Drive pinion bearing preload I 1.7 - 3.8 (0.18 - 0.38, 15 - 33) J BACKLASH Unit: mm (in) Item Standard Drive gear to drive pinion gear K 0.08 - 0.13 (0.0031 - 0.0051) COMPANION FLANGE RUNOUT Unit: mm (in) Item Companion flange face 0.10 (0.0039) or less Inner side of companion flange 0.13 (0.0051) or less Revision: October 2004 L Runout limit RFD-33 M 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [WITHOUT ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] SELECTIVE PARTS Side Gear Thrust Washer Unit: mm (in) Thickness Package part number* 0.76 (0.030) 0.79 (0.031) 0.81 (0.032) 0.84 (0.033) 0.86 (0.034) 38424 8S101 0.89 (0.035) 0.91 (0.036) 0.94 (0.037) 0.97 (0.038) 0.99 (0.039) 38424 8S102 *Always check with the parts department for the latest parts information. Drive Pinion Height Adjusting Washer Unit: mm (in) Thickness Package part number* 0.076 (0.030) 0.079 (0.031) 0.081 (0.032) 0.084 (0.033) 0.086 (0.034) 38151 8S101 0.089 (0.035) 0.091 (0.036) 0.094 (0.037) 0.097 (0.038) 0.099 (0.039) 38151 8S102 0.102 (0.040) 0.104 (0.041) 0.107 (0.042) 0.109 (0.043) 0.112 (0.044) 38151 8S103 0.114 (0.045) 0.117 (0.046) 0.119 (0.047) 0.122 (0.048) 0.124 (0.049) 38151 8S104 0.127 (0.050) 0.130 (0.051) 0.132 (0.052) 0.135 (0.053) 0.137 (0.054) 38151 8S105 *Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Revision: October 2004 RFD-34 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A EDS001P3 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along B with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front C air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. RFD WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. E ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. F ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. G Precautions ● EDS001P4 Before connecting or disconnecting differential lock control unit harness connector, turn ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. Because battery voltage is applied to differential lock control unit even if ignition switch is turned “OFF”. H I J SEF289H ● When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or from differential lock control unit, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or break). When connecting pin connectors make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on differential lock control unit pin terminal. L M SEF291H ● Before replacing differential lock control unit, perform differential lock control unit input/output signal inspection and make sure whether differential lock control unit functions properly or not. Refer to RFD-50, "Differential Lock Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . SDIA1848E Revision: October 2004 RFD-35 K 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] Service Notice or Precaution ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● EDS001P5 Check for the correct installation status prior to removal or disassembly. If matching marks are required, be certain they do not interfere with the function of the parts when applied. Overhaul should be done in a clean work area, it is preferable to work in dustproof area. Before disassembly, using steam or white gasoline, completely remove sand and mud from the exterior of the unit, preventing them from entering into the unit during disassembly or assembly. Check appearance of the disassembled parts for damage, deformation, and unusual wear. Replace them with a new ones if necessary. Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time when the unit is disassembled. In principle, tighten bolts or nuts gradually in several steps working diagonally from inside to outside. If tightening sequence is specified, observe it. Clean and flush the parts sufficiently and blow-dry them. Be careful not to damage sliding surfaces and mating surfaces. When applying sealant, remove the old sealant from the mounting surface; then remove any moisture, oil, and foreign materials from the application and mounting surfaces. Always use shop paper for cleaning the inside of components. Avoid using cotton gloves or shop rags to prevent entering of lint. During assembly, observe the specified tightening torque, and apply new differential gear oil, petroleum jelly, or multi-purpose grease as specified for each vehicle, if necessary. Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis EDS001P6 When reading wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams". ● PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT". When performing trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-9, "How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses". ● GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident". Revision: October 2004 RFD-36 2005 Titan PREPARATION [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 A EDS001P7 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number Description (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name KV40104000 ( — ) Flange wrench a: 85 mm (3.35 in) dia. b: 65 mm (2.56 in) dia. B Removing and installing drive pinion nut C RFD NT659 ST33290001 (J-34286) Puller E Removing front oil seal F G ZZA0601D ST15310000 ( — ) Drift a: 96mm (3.77 in) dia. b: 84 mm (3.30 in) dia. Installing front oil seal H I NT115 ST3127S000 (J-25765-A) Preload gauge set Inspecting drive pinion bearing preload and total preload 1. GG91030000 (J-25765) Torque wrench K 2. HT62940000 (1/2″) ( — ) Socket adapter L NT124 3. HT62900000 (3/8″) ( — ) Socket adapter — (C - 4164) Adjuster tool Removing and installing side bearing adjuster WDIA0192E KV10111100 (J-37228) Seal cutter Removing carrier cover S-NT046 Revision: October 2004 J RFD-37 2005 Titan M PREPARATION [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description ST30021000 (J-22912-01) Puller Removing drive pinion rear bearing inner race ZZA0700D ST33081000 ( — ) Adapter a: 43 mm (1.69 in) dia. b: 33.5 mm (1.32 in) dia. Removing and installing side bearing inner race ZZA1000D — (8144) Pinion block Adjusting pinion gear height SDIA2599E — (6740) Cone Adjusting pinion gear height SDIA2601E — (6741) Screw Adjusting pinion gear height SDIA2602E — (6739) Pinion height lock Adjusting pinion gear height SDIA2603E — (D-115-2) Scooter block Adjusting pinion gear height SDIA2604E Revision: October 2004 RFD-38 2005 Titan PREPARATION [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description TBD Arbor disc Adjusting pinion gear height A B C SDIA2605E — (D-115-3) Arbor Adjusting pinion gear height RFD E SDIA2606E ST01500001 ( — ) Drift a: 89mm (3.50 in) dia. b: 79 mm (3.11 in) dia. Installing drive pinion rear bearing outer race F G H ZZA0811D ST30022000 ( — ) Drift a: 46 mm (1.81 in) dia. b: 110 mm (4.33 in) dia. Installing drive pinion rear bearing outer race I J NT660 ST33022000 ( — ) Drift a: 49 mm (1.92 in) dia. b: 67 mm (2.63 in) dia. Installing drive pinion front bearing outer race K L NT660 — (C-4040) Installer Installing drive pinion rear bearing inner race SDIA2607E KV38100300 (J-25523) Drift a: 54 mm (2.13 in) dia. b: 46 mm (1.81 in) dia. c: 32mm (1.26 in) dia. Installing side bearing inner race ZZA1046D Revision: October 2004 RFD-39 2005 Titan M PREPARATION [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] Commercial Service Tools EDS001P8 Tool name Description Puller Removing companion flange and side bearing inner race NT077 Puller Removing side bearing inner race ZZB0823D Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts PBIC0190E Revision: October 2004 RFD-40 2005 Titan × Gear oil improper × PROPELLER SHAFT × AXLE AND SUSPENSION × TIRES × ROAD WHEEL × AXLE SHAFT × BRAKES × STEERING RFD-86, "Companion Flange Runout" MA-26, "Checking Final Drive Oil" PR-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" RAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart", RSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" WT-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" RAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" 2005 Titan BR-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" PS-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] × Companion flange excessive runout RFD-85, "Backlash" NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING × Backlash incorrect — PFP:00003 × Tooth surfaces worn RFD-84, "Tooth Contact" EDS001P9 × Gear contact improper NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart × RFD-41 — Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. Reference page Noise Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS Symptom ×: Applicable Revision: October 2004 Gear tooth rough A B C RFD E F G H I J K L M DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL Changing Differential Gear Oil PFP:KLD30 EDS002HX Refer to MA-27, "Changing Final Drive Oil" . FILLING Refer to MA-26, "Checking Final Drive Oil" . Checking Differential Gear Oil EDS002HY Refer to MA-26, "Checking Final Drive Oil" . Revision: October 2004 RFD-42 2005 Titan DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SYSTEM [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SYSTEM Cross-sectional View PFP:28496 A EDS001PC B C RFD E F G H I J SDIA2519E 1. Companion flange 2. Drive pinion 3. Drive gear 4. Differential case 5. Pinion mate gear 6. Axle shaft 7. Side gear 8. Spring 9. Differential lock solenoid 10. Pinion mate shaft 11. Pressure plate K L 12. Differential lock position switch 13. Cam ring M Revision: October 2004 RFD-43 2005 Titan DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SYSTEM [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] Differential Lock Operation EDS001PD SDIA2498E 1. 2. 3. Differential lock solenoid operates pressure plate. Pressure plate presses cam ring. Engage cam ring and side gear, and then differential is locked. System Description EDS001PE DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SOLENOID It is operated by signal from differential lock control unit, and it operates pressure plate so as to switch lock/ unlock. DIFFERENTIAL LOCK POSITION SWITCH It detects that differential is in lock or unlock by pressure plate position, and sends it to differential lock control unit. DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT ● ● ● Differential lock control unit controls differential lock solenoid by input signals of each sensor and each switch. As a fail-safe function, differential lock disengages, if malfunction is detected in differential lock system. Self-diagnosis can be done with CONSULT-II. DIFFERENTIAL LOCK MODE SWITCH Able to select differential lock and unlock. DIFF LOCK INDICATOR LAMP The following is the indications of indicator lamp. Condition DIFF LOCK indicator lamp Differential lock/unlock ON/OFF Differential lock standby condition Differential lock system malfunction Lamp check Flashing: 1 time/2 seconds OFF (Even if differential lock mode switch is turned ON) Turns ON when ignition switch is turned ON. Turns OFF after engine start. NOTE: Differential lock standby condition is the condition that differential lock mode switch is ON and differential is unlocked. Revision: October 2004 RFD-44 2005 Titan DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SYSTEM [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] System Diagram EDS001PF A B C RFD E F SDIA2500E G COMPONENTS FUNCTION DESCRIPTION Component parts Function H ● Controls differential lock solenoid and switches differential lock/unlock. Differential lock control unit ● As a fail-safe function, differential lock disengages, if malfunction is detected in differential lock system. Differential lock solenoid Controls pressure plate by current from differential lock control unit. Differential lock position switch Detects that differential is lock or unlock condition. Differential lock mode switch Able to select differential lock or unlock. DIFF LOCK indicator lamp Illuminates that differential is in lock or lock standby condition. I J Transmits the following signals via CAN communication to differential lock control unit. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Transfer control unit ● Vehicle speed signal ● VDC operation signal K Transmits the following signal via CAN communication to differential lock control unit. ● 4WD shift switch signal CAN Communication L EDS001PG SYSTEM DESCRIPTION M Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Revision: October 2004 RFD-45 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Fail-safe Function PFP:00004 EDS001PH If any malfunction occurs in differential lock system, and control unit detects the malfunction, DIFF LOCK indicator lamp on combination meter does not turn ON to indicate system malfunction. Differential lock control unit turns differential lock solenoid OFF. How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis EDS001PI BASIC CONCEPT ● ● To perform trouble diagnosis, it is the most important to have understanding about vehicle systems (control and mechanism) thoroughly. It is also important to clarify customer complaints before inspection. First of all, reproduce symptoms, and understand them fully. Ask customer about his/her complaints carefully. In some cases, it will be necessary to check symptoms by driving vehicle with customer. CAUTION: Customers are not professional. It is dangerous to make an easy guess like "maybe the customer means that...," or "maybe the customer mentions this symptom". SEF233G ● ● ● It is essential to check symptoms right from the beginning in order to repair malfunctions completely. For intermittent malfunctions, reproduce symptoms based on interview with customer and past examples. Do not perform inspection on ad hoc basis. Most intermittent malfunctions are caused by poor contacts. In this case, it will be effective to shake suspected harness or connector by hand. When repairing without any symptom diagnosis, you cannot judge if malfunctions have actually been eliminated. After completing diagnosis, always erase diagnostic memory. Refer to RFD-54, "How to Erase Self-diagnostic Results" . For intermittent malfunctions, move harness or harness connector by hand. Then check for poor contact or reproduced open circuit. Revision: October 2004 RFD-46 SEF234G 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] Location of Electrical Parts EDS001PJ A B C RFD E F G H I J K L BDIA0015E M Revision: October 2004 RFD-47 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] Wiring Diagram — DIFLOC — EDS001PK BDWA0052E Revision: October 2004 RFD-48 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] A B C RFD E F G H I J K L M BDWA0053E Revision: October 2004 RFD-49 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] Trouble Diagnosis Chart for Symptoms EDS001PL If DIFF LOCK indicator lamp does not turn ON after engine start, perform self-diagnosis. Refer to RFD-53, "SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE" . Reference Symptom Condition Check item page CAN communication line DIFF LOCK indicator lamp does not turn ON. (DIFF LOCK indicator lamp check) Ignition switch: ON Power supply and ground for differential lock control unit RFD-72 Combination meter DIFF LOCK indicator lamp does not change. ● Engine running Combination meter ● Differential lock mode switch: ON Differential lock mode switch RFD-75 CAN communication line Combination meter DIFF LOCK indicator lamp sometimes flashes. ● Engine running ● Differential lock mode switch: ON Differential lock mode switch Differential lock position switch RFD-76 Differential inner parts Differential Lock Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values EDS001PM DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE Specifications with CONSULT-II Monitor item [Unit] Content Condition BATTERY VOLT [V] Power supply voltage for differential lock control unit Ignition switch: ON 4WD MODE [2H/4H/ 4Lo] Condition of 4WD shift switch 4WD shift switch (Engine running) Battery voltage 2WD 2H 4H 4H 4LO Vehicle stopped VHCL S/SEN-R [km/h] or [mph] Wheel speed (Rear wheel right) Wheel speed (Rear wheel left) Vehicle running CAUTION: Check air pressure of tire under standard condition. Wheel speed (Average value of rear wheel right and left) D-LOCK SW SIG [ON/ OFF] Condition of differential lock mode switch D-LOCK SIG [ON/OFF] Revision: October 2004 Control status of differential lock Approximately equal to the indication on speedometer (Inside of ±10%) 0 km/h (0 mph) Vehicle running CAUTION: Check air pressure of tire under standard condition. Vehicle stopped VHCL S/SEN-RL [km/h] or [mph] 4Lo 0 km/h (0 mph) Vehicle stopped VHCL S/SEN-L [km/h] or [mph] Display value Approximately equal to the indication on speedometer (Inside of ±10%) 0 km/h (0 mph) Vehicle running CAUTION: Check air pressure of tire under standard condition. Approximately equal to the indication on speedometer (Inside of ±10%) Differential lock mode switch: ON ON Differential lock mode switch: OFF OFF ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● VDC OFF switch: ON ● 4WD shift switch: 4LO RFD-50 Differential lock mode switch: ON ON Differential lock mode switch: OFF OFF 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] Monitor item [Unit] RELAY ON [ON/OFF] RELAY MTR [ON/OFF] SOL MTR [ON/OFF] IND MTR [ON/OFF] D-LOCK POS SW [ON/ OFF] Content Condition Operating condition of differential lock solenoid relay (integrated in differential lock control unit) Control status of differential lock solenoid relay (integrated in differential lock control unit) Control status of differential lock solenoid Control status of DIFF LOCK indicator lamp Condition of differential lock position switch ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● VDC OFF switch: ON ● 4WD shift switch: 4LO ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● VDC OFF switch: ON ● 4WD shift switch: 4LO ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● VDC OFF switch: ON ● 4WD shift switch: 4LO Display value A Differential lock mode switch: ON ON Differential lock mode switch: OFF OFF Differential lock mode switch: ON ON Differential lock mode switch: OFF OFF Differential lock mode switch: ON ON Differential lock mode switch: OFF OFF C DIFF LOCK indicator lamp: ON ON DIFF LOCK indicator lamp: OFF OFF ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● VDC OFF switch: ON ● 4WD shift switch: 4LO B RFD E F Differential lock mode switch: ON (DIFF LOCK indicator lamp: ON) ON Differential lock mode switch: OFF (DIFF LOCK indicator lamp: OFF) OFF G H Specifications Between Differential Lock Control Unit Terminals I DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT TERMINAL CONNECTOR LAYOUT J K L SDIA2573E Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Terminal Item Condition color 1 2 L L Power supply Power supply M Data (Approx.) Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage Ignition switch: OFF 0V Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage Ignition switch: OFF 0V 3 B Ground Always 4 P CAN-L – – 5 L CAN-H – – 9 G Differential lock mode switch (ON) 10 B Ignition switch: ON Ground Revision: October 2004 RFD-51 0V Differential lock mode switch: ON Battery voltage Differential lock mode switch: OFF 0V Always 0V 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] Terminal 11 Wire color V 12 13 15 20 Y G/W Y/R W/R Item Condition Differential lock solenoid (-) Differential lock solenoid (+) ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● VDC OFF switch: ON ● 4WD shift switch: 4LO ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● VDC OFF switch: ON ● 4WD shift switch: 4LO Differential lock mode switch: ON 0V Differential lock mode switch: OFF Battery voltage Differential lock mode switch: ON 0V Differential lock mode switch: OFF Battery voltage K-LINE (CONSULT-II signal) Power supply (Memory back-up) Differential lock position switch Data (Approx.) – – Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage Ignition switch: OFF Battery voltage ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● VDC OFF switch: ON ● 4WD shift switch: 4LO 21 L DIFF LOCK indicator lamp Ignition switch: ON 22 O Differential lock mode switch (OFF) Ignition switch: ON Differential lock mode switch: ON (DIFF LOCK indicator lamp: ON) 0V Differential lock mode switch: OFF (DIFF LOCK indicator lamp: OFF) Battery voltage DIFF LOCK indicator lamp: ON 0V DIFF LOCK indicator lamp: OFF Battery voltage Differential lock mode switch: ON 0V Differential lock mode switch: OFF Battery voltage CAUTION: When using a circuit tester to measure voltage for inspection, be sure not to extend forcibly any connector terminals. CONSULT-II Function (DIFF LOCK) EDS001PN CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. DIFF LOCK Diagnostic test mode Function Reference page SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ● Displays diff lock self-diagnostic results. RFD-53 DATA MONITOR ● Displays diff lock input/output data in the time. RFD-55 CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ● The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. — CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication. ● For details, refer to the separate “CONSULT-II Operations Manual”. 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle. 3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. BDIA0013E Revision: October 2004 RFD-52 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] 4. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. A B C BCIA0029E RFD 5. 6. Touch “DIFF LOCK”. If “DIFF LOCK” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service procedure. E F G BCIA0030E SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE Operation Procedure 1. 2. H Perform “CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE”. Refer to RFD-52, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE" . With engine at idle, touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. Display shows malfunction experienced since the last erasing operation. NOTE: ● The details for “TIME” are as follow: – “0”: Error currently detected with differential lock control unit. – Except for “0”: Error detected in the past and memorized with differential lock control unit. Detects frequency of driving after DTC occurs (frequency SDIA2547E of turning ignition switch “ON/OFF”). I J K L Display Item List M Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) Diagnostic item is detected when... Check item *INITIAL START* [P1833] ● Due to removal of battery which cuts off power supply to differential control unit, self-diagnosis memory function is suspended. RFD-56, "Power Supply Circuit For Differential Lock Control Unit" CONTROL UNIT 1 [P1834] ● Malfunction is detected in the memory (RAM) system of differential lock control unit. RFD-58, "Differential Lock Control Unit" CONTROL UNIT 2 [P1835] ● Malfunction is detected in the memory (ROM) system of differential lock control unit. RFD-58, "Differential Lock Control Unit" CONTROL UNIT 3 [P1836] ● Malfunction is detected in the memory (EEPROM) system of differential lock control unit. RFD-58, "Differential Lock Control Unit" CONTROL UNIT 4 [P1837] ● AD converter system of differential lock control unit is malfunctioning. RFD-58, "Differential Lock Control Unit" ON SW [P1838] ● More than two switch inputs are simultaneously detected due to short circuit of differential lock mode switch. RFD-58, "Differential Lock Mode Switch" Revision: October 2004 RFD-53 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) Diagnostic item is detected when... Check item POSI SW ON [P1839] ● When differential lock position switch is ON, rotation difference occurs in wheel speed (rear wheel right and left). RFD-62, "Differential Lock Position Switch" RELAY [P1844] ● Differential lock control unit detects as irregular by comparing target value with monitor value. RFD-65, "Differential Lock Solenoid Relay", RFD-66, "Differential Lock Solenoid" SOL CIRCUIT [P1847] ● Malfunction is detected in differential lock control unit internal circuit. RFD-66, "Differential Lock Solenoid" SOL DISCONNECT [P1848] ● Differential lock solenoid internal circuit or harness is open. ● Differential lock solenoid relay does not switch to ON position. RFD-66, "Differential Lock Solenoid" SOL SHORT [P1849] ● Differential lock solenoid internal circuit or harness is shorted. RFD-66, "Differential Lock Solenoid" SOL CURRENT [P1850] ● Differential lock solenoid relay does not switch to OFF position. RFD-66, "Differential Lock Solenoid" ● Malfunction related to wheel sensor has been detected by ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). RFD-70, "ABS System" CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] ● Malfunction has been detected from CAN communication line. RFD-71, "CAN Communication Line" NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. ● No NG item has been detected. ABS SYSTEM [C1203] — CAUTION: If “CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000]” is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for CAN communication line. How to Erase Self-diagnostic Results 1. 2. 3. Perform applicably inspection of malfunctioning item and then repair or replace. Start engine and select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “DIFF LOCK” with CONSULT-II. Touch “ERASE” on CONSULT-II screen to erase DTC memory. CAUTION: If memory cannot be erased, perform applicably diagnosis. Revision: October 2004 RFD-54 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] DATA MONITOR MODE Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. A Perform “CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE”. Refer to RFD-52, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE" . Touch “DATA MONITOR”. Select from “SELECT MONITOR ITEM”, screen of data monitor mode is displayed. NOTE: When malfunction is detected, CONSULT-II performs REAL-TIME DIAGNOSIS. Also, any malfunction detected while in this mode will be displayed at real time. Display Item List ×: Standard –: Not applicable B C RFD SELECT MONITOR ITEM Monitor item (Unit) Remarks ECU INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU BATTERY VOLT [V] × × × Power supply voltage for differential lock control unit. 4WD MODE [2H/4H/4Lo] × × × 4WD shift switch signal status via CAN communication line is displayed. VHCL S/SEN-R [km/h] or [mph] × – × Wheel speed calculated by rear wheel sensor right signal is displayed. VHCL S/SEN-L [km/h] or [mph] × – × Wheel speed calculated by rear wheel sensor left signal is displayed. × Average value between wheel speed calculated by rear wheel sensor right signal and rear wheel sensor left signal is displayed. VHCL S/SEN-RL [km/h] or [mph] × × E D-LOCK SW SIG [ON/OFF] × × × Condition of differential lock mode switch is displayed. D-LOCK SIG [ON/OFF] × × × Control status of differential lock is displayed. RELAY ON [ON/OFF] × × × Operating condition of differential lock solenoid relay is displayed (integrated in differential lock control unit). RELAY MTR [ON/OFF] × × × Control status of differential lock solenoid relay is displayed (integrated in differential lock control unit). SOL MTR [ON/OFF] × × × Control status of differential lock solenoid is displayed. IND MTR [ON/OFF] × × × Control status of DIFF LOCK indicator lamp is displayed. D-LOCK POS SW [ON/OFF] × × × Condition of differential lock position switch is displayed. Voltage [V] – – × The value measured by the voltage probe is displayed. Frequency [Hz] – – × DUTY-HI (high) [%] – – × DUTY-LOW (low) [%] – – × PLS WIDTH-HI [msec] – – × PLS WIDTH-LOW [msec] – – × Revision: October 2004 RFD-55 The value measured by the pulse probe is displayed. 2005 Titan F G H I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM Power Supply Circuit For Differential Lock Control Unit PFP:00000 EDS001PO CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE Data are reference value. Monitor item [Unit] BATTERY VOLT [V] Content Condition Power supply voltage for differential lock control unit Ignition switch: ON Display value Battery voltage DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Item Condition Terminal color 1 L Power supply 2 L Power supply Data (Approx.) Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage Ignition switch: OFF 0V Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage Ignition switch: OFF 0V 3 B Ground Always 0V 10 B Ground Always 0V 15 Y/R Power supply (Memory back-up) Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage Ignition switch: OFF Battery voltage CAUTION: When using a circuit tester to measure voltage for inspection, be sure not to extend forcibly any connector terminals. Revision: October 2004 RFD-56 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE A 1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect differential lock control unit harness connector. Check voltage between differential lock control unit harness connector terminals and ground. B C Connector Terminal (Wire color) Voltage (Approx.) 1 (L) - Ground 0V 2 (L) - Ground 0V 15 (Y/R) - Ground Battery voltage B77 RFD E SDIA2562E 4. 5. F Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Check voltage between differential lock control unit harness connector terminals and ground. G Connector Terminal (Wire color) Voltage (Approx.) 1 (L) - Ground B77 2 (L) - Ground H Battery voltage 15 (Y/R) - Ground OK or NG SDIA2563E OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. ● 10A fuse [No. 15 or 19, located in fuse block (J/B)] ● Harness for short or open between battery and differential lock control unit harness connector terminal 15 ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and differential lock control unit harness connector terminals 1 and 2 ● Battery and ignition switch. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . I J K L 2. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect differential lock control unit harness connector. Check continuity between differential lock control unit harness connector B77 terminals 3 (B), 10 (B) and ground. M Continuity should exist. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SDIA2564E Revision: October 2004 RFD-57 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] 3. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT Check differential lock control unit input/output signal. Refer to RFD-50, "Differential Lock Control Unit Input/ Output Signal Reference Values" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check differential lock control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. 4. CHECK DTC Perform the self-diagnosis, after driving a vehicle for a while. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace differential lock control unit. Refer to RFD-78, "DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT" . Differential Lock Control Unit EDS001PP DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “DIFF LOCK” with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch “ERASE”. 4. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. 5. Perform the self-diagnosis again. Is the “CONTROL UNIT 1 [P1834]”, “CONTROL UNIT 2 [P1835]”, “CONTROL UNIT 3 [P1836]” or “CONTROL UNIT 4 [P1837]” displayed? YES >> Replace differential lock control unit. Refer to RFD-78, "DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT" . NO >> INSPECTION END Differential Lock Mode Switch EDS001PQ CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE Data are reference value. Monitor item D-LOCK SW SIG [ON/ OFF] Content Condition of differential lock mode switch Condition Display value Differential lock mode switch: ON ON Differential lock mode switch: OFF OFF DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Terminal Item Condition color 9 G Differential lock mode switch (ON) Ignition switch: ON 22 O Differential lock mode switch (OFF) Ignition switch: ON Data (Approx.) Differential lock mode switch: ON Battery voltage Differential lock mode switch: OFF 0V Differential lock mode switch: ON 0V Differential lock mode switch: OFF Battery voltage CAUTION: When using a circuit tester to measure voltage for inspection, be sure not to extend forcibly any connector terminals. Revision: October 2004 RFD-58 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE A 1. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK MODE SWITCH SIGNAL With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “DIFF LOCK” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out ON/OFF switching action of “D-LOCK SW SIG”. Monitor item D-LOCK SW SIG Vehicle stopped ● Engine running C Display value Condition ● B Differential lock mode switch: ON ON Differential lock mode switch: OFF OFF RFD E SDIA2540E 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch “ON”. Check voltage between differential lock control unit harness connector terminals and ground. Connector G H Terminal (Wire color) Voltage (Approx.) Condition 9 (G) Ground Ignition switch: ON B77 F 22 (O) Ground Differential lock mode switch: ON Battery voltage Differential lock mode switch: OFF 0V Differential lock mode switch: ON 0V Differential lock mode switch: OFF Battery voltage I J SDIA2568E K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 2. L M Revision: October 2004 RFD-59 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] 2. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK MODE SWITCH SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. Disconnect differential lock mode switch harness connector. Check voltage between differential lock mode switch harness connector terminal 3 and ground. Connector Terminal (Wire color) Voltage (Approx.) M149 3 (R/B) - Ground Battery voltage SDIA2534E 4. 5. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Check voltage between differential lock mode switch harness connector terminal 3 and ground. Connector Terminal (Wire color) Voltage (Approx.) M149 3 (R/B) - Ground 0V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. SDIA2643E ● 10A fuse [No. 15, located in fuse block (J/B)] ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and differential lock mode switch harness connector terminals 3 ● Ignition switch. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . 3. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK MODE SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect differential lock mode switch harness connector. Operate differential lock mode switch and check continuity between differential lock mode switch terminals. Connector Terminal 1-3 M149 2-3 Condition Continuity Differential lock mode switch: ON No Differential lock mode switch: OFF Yes Differential lock mode switch: ON Yes Differential lock mode switch: OFF No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace differential lock mode switch. Revision: October 2004 RFD-60 SDIA2535E 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] 4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT AND DIFFERENTIAL LOCK MODE SWITCH 1. 2. 3. – – A Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect differential lock control unit harness connector and differential lock mode switch harness con- B nector. Check continuity between the following terminals. C Differential lock control unit harness connector B77 terminal 9 (G) and differential lock mode switch harness connector M149 terminal 2 (G). Differential lock control unit harness connector B77 terminal 22 RFD (O) and differential lock mode switch harness connector M149 terminal 1 (O). Continuity should exist. E Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. SDIA2569E F 5. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT G Check differential lock control unit input/output signal. Refer to RFD-50, "Differential Lock Control Unit Input/ Output Signal Reference Values" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check differential lock control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. 6. CHECK DTC H I J Perform the self-diagnosis, after driving a vehicle for a while. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace differential lock control unit. Refer to RFD-78, "DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT" . K COMPONENT INSPECTION L 1. 2. 3. M Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect differential lock mode switch harness connector. Operate differential lock mode switch and check continuity between differential lock mode switch terminals. Connector Terminal 1-3 M149 2-3 4. Condition Continuity Differential lock mode switch: ON No Differential lock mode switch: OFF Yes Differential lock mode switch: ON Yes Differential lock mode switch: OFF No If NG, replace differential lock mode switch. SDIA2535E Revision: October 2004 RFD-61 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] Differential Lock Position Switch EDS001PR CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE Data are reference value. Monitor item D-LOCK POS SW [ON/ OFF] Content Condition Condition of differential lock position switch ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● VDC OFF switch: ON ● 4WD shift switch: 4LO Display value Differential lock mode switch: ON (DIFF LOCK indicator lamp: ON) ON Differential lock mode switch: OFF (DIFF LOCK indicator lamp: OFF) OFF DIFFERENTIAL CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Terminal Item Condition color 20 W/R Differential lock position switch ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● VDC OFF switch: ON ● 4WD shift switch: 4LO Data (Approx.) Differential lock mode switch: ON (DIFF LOCK indicator lamp: ON) 0V Differential lock mode switch: OFF (DIFF LOCK indicator lamp: OFF) Battery voltage CAUTION: When using a circuit tester to measure voltage for inspection, be sure not to extend forcibly any connector terminals. Revision: October 2004 RFD-62 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE A 1. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK POSITION SWITCH SIGNAL With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “DIFF LOCK” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out ON/OFF switching action of “D-LOCK POS SW SIG”. Monitor item D-LOCK POS SW SIG Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● VDC OFF switch: ON ● 4WD shift switch: 4LO C Display value Condition ● B RFD Differential lock mode switch: ON (DIFF LOCK indicator lamp: ON) ON Differential lock mode switch: OFF (DIFF LOCK indicator lamp: OFF) OFF E SDIA2538E Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Check voltage between differential lock control unit harness connector terminal and ground. F G H Connector B77 Terminal (Wire color) 20 (W/R) - Ground Voltage (Approx.) Condition ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● VDC OFF switch: ON ● 4WD shift switch: 4LO I Differential lock mode switch: ON (DIFF LOCK indicator lamp: ON) 0V Differential lock mode switch: OFF (DIFF LOCK indicator lamp: OFF) Battery voltage J SDIA2570E K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 2. L 2. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. M Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect differential lock position switch harness connector. Check continuity between differential lock position switch harness connector C16 terminal 3 (B) and ground. Continuity should exist. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. SDIA2644E Revision: October 2004 RFD-63 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] 3. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK POSITION SWITCH 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect differential lock position switch harness connector. Remove differential lock position switch. Refer to RFD-83, "COMPONENTS" . Pull differential lock position switch and check continuity between differential lock position switch harness connector terminals. Connector Terminal C16 1-3 Condition Continuity Pull differential position switch Yes Release Differential position switch No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace differential lock position switch. SDIA2537E 4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT AND DIFFERENTIAL LOCK POSITION SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect differential lock control unit harness connector and differential lock position switch harness connector. Check continuity between differential lock control unit harness connector B77 terminal 20 (W/R) and differential lock position switch harness connector C16 terminal 1 (W/R). Continuity should exist. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. SDIA2645E 5. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT Check differential lock control unit input/output signal. Refer to RFD-50, "Differential Lock Control Unit Input/ Output Signal Reference Values" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check differential lock control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. 6. CHECK DTC Perform the self-diagnosis, after driving a vehicle for a while. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace differential lock control unit. Refer to RFD-78, "DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT" . Revision: October 2004 RFD-64 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] COMPONENT INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. 4. A Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect differential lock position switch harness connector. Remove differential lock position switch. Refer to RFD-83, "COMPONENTS" . Pull differential lock position switch and check continuity between differential lock position switch harness connector terminals. B C Connector Terminal C16 5. 1-3 Condition Continuity Pull differential position switch Yes Release Differential position switch No RFD If NG, replace differential lock position switch. E SDIA2537E Differential Lock Solenoid Relay EDS001PS CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE Data are reference value. Monitor item Content Operating condition of differential lock solenoid relay (integrated in differential lock control unit) RELAY ON [ON/OFF] F Condition ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● VDC OFF switch: ON ● 4WD shift switch: 4LO Display value Differential lock mode switch: ON ON Differential lock mode switch: OFF OFF G H DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SOLENOID SYSTEM I Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to RFD-53, "SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE" . Is “RELAY [P1844]” displayed? YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for differential lock solenoid. Refer to RFD-66, "Differential Lock Solenoid" . NO >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SOLENOID RELAY SIGNAL With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “DIFF LOCK” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out ON/OFF switching action of “RELAY ON”. Monitor item RELAY ON ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● VDC OFF switch: ON ● 4WD shift switch: 4LO Differential lock mode switch: ON ON Differential lock mode switch: OFF OFF OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. Revision: October 2004 M SDIA2642E RFD-65 K L Display value Condition J 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] 3. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT Check differential lock control unit input/output signal. Refer to RFD-50, "Differential Lock Control Unit Input/ Output Signal Reference Values" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check differential lock control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If any item is damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. 4. CHECK DTC Perform the self-diagnosis, after driving a vehicle for a while. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace differential lock control unit. Refer to RFD-78, "DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT" . Differential Lock Solenoid EDS001PT CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE Data are reference value. Monitor item RELAY ON [ON/OFF] RELAY MTR [ON/OFF] SOL MTR [ON/OFF] Content Condition Operating condition of differential lock solenoid relay (integrated in differential lock control unit) Control status of differential lock solenoid relay (integrated in differential lock control unit) Control status of differential lock solenoid ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● VDC OFF switch: ON ● 4WD shift switch: 4LO ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● VDC OFF switch: ON ● 4WD shift switch: 4LO ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● VDC OFF switch: ON ● 4WD shift switch: 4LO Display value Differential lock mode switch: ON ON Differential lock mode switch: OFF OFF Differential lock mode switch: ON ON Differential lock mode switch: OFF OFF Differential lock mode switch: ON ON Differential lock mode switch: OFF OFF DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Item Condition Terminal color 11 12 V Y Differential lock solenoid (-) Differential lock solenoid (+) ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● VDC OFF switch: ON ● 4WD shift switch: 4LO ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● VDC OFF switch: ON ● 4WD shift switch: 4LO Data (Approx.) Differential lock mode switch: ON 0V Differential lock mode switch: OFF Battery voltage Differential lock mode switch: ON 0V Differential lock mode switch: OFF Battery voltage CAUTION: When using a circuit tester to measure voltage for inspection, be sure not to extend forcibly any connector terminals. Revision: October 2004 RFD-66 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE A 1. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL SOLENOID SIGNAL With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “DIFF LOCK” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out ON/OFF switching action of “RELAY ON”, “RELAY MTR”, “SOL MTR”. Monitor item RELAY MTR ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● VDC OFF switch: ON ● 4WD shift switch: 4LO SOL MTR C Display value Condition RELAY ON B Differential lock mode switch: ON ON Differential lock mode switch: OFF OFF Differential lock mode switch: ON ON Differential lock mode switch: OFF OFF Differential lock mode switch: ON ON Differential lock mode switch: OFF OFF RFD E SDIA2539E G H Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Check voltage between differential lock control unit harness connector terminal and ground. Connector Terminal (Wire color) B77 12 (Y) Ground ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● VDC OFF switch: ON ● 4WD shift switch: 4LO I Data (Approx.) J Differential lock mode switch: ON 0V K Differential lock mode switch: OFF Battery voltage Differential lock mode switch: ON 0V Differential lock mode switch: OFF Battery voltage Condition 11 (V) Ground SDIA2565E RFD-67 L M OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 F 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] 2. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SOLENOID CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect differential lock control unit harness connector. Check resistance between differential lock control unit harness connector terminals 11 and 12. Connector Terminal (Wire color) Resistance (Approx.) B77 11 (V) - 12 (Y) 3.4 Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> GO TO 3. SDIA2566E 3. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SOLENOID RESISTANCE 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect differential lock solenoid harness connector. Check resistance between differential lock solenoid harness connector C17 terminals 2 and 4. 2-4 : Approx. 3.4Ω OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace differential solenoid. Refer to RFD-87, "Differential Assembly" . SDIA2531E 4. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SOLENOID OPERATION 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect differential lock solenoid harness connector. Check operation by applying battery voltage to differential lock solenoid harness connector terminals. CAUTION: Be sure to apply the voltage of the correct polarity to the respective terminals. Otherwise, the part may be damaged. Connector Terminal C17 4 (Battery voltage) - 2 (Ground) Does solenoid operate? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Replace differential solenoid. Refer to RFD-87, "Differential Assembly" . Revision: October 2004 RFD-68 SDIA2634E 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] 5. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT AND DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SOLENOID 1. 2. 3. – – A Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect differential lock control unit harness connector and differential lock solenoid harness connec- B tor. Check continuity between the following terminals. C Differential lock control unit harness connector B77 terminal 11 (V) and differential lock solenoid harness connector C17 terminal 2 (V). Differential lock control unit harness connector B77 terminal 12 RFD (Y) and differential lock solenoid harness connector C17 terminal 4 (Y). 11 (V) - 2 (V) 12 (Y) - 4 (Y) : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. E SDIA2567E F G 6. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT Check differential lock control unit input/output signal. Refer to RFD-50, "Differential Lock Control Unit Input/ Output Signal Reference Values" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Check differential lock control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. H 7. CHECK DTC J Perform the self-diagnosis, after driving a vehicle for a while. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Replace differential lock control unit. Refer to RFD-78, "DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT" . I K L M Revision: October 2004 RFD-69 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] COMPONENT INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect differential lock solenoid harness connector. Check resistance between differential lock solenoid harness connector C17 terminal 2 and 4. 2-4 4. : Approx. 3.4Ω If NG, replace differential lock solenoid. Refer to RFD-87, "Differential Assembly" . SDIA2531E 5. 6. Check operation by applying battery voltage to differential lock solenoid harness connector terminals. CAUTION: Be sure to apply the voltage of the correct polarity to the respective terminals. Otherwise, the part may be damaged. Connector Terminal C17 4 (Battery voltage) - 2 (Ground) If NG, replace differential lock solenoid. SDIA2634E ABS System EDS001PU DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK DTC WITH ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) Perform self-diagnosis with ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-24, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" . Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnosis? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. NO >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT Check differential lock control unit input/output signal. Refer to RFD-50, "Differential Lock Control Unit Input/ Output Signal Reference Values" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check differential lock control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. 3. CHECK DTC Perform the self-diagnosis, after driving a vehicle for a while. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Perform self-diagnosis with ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) again. Refer to BRC-24, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" . Revision: October 2004 RFD-70 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] CAN Communication Line EDS001PV A DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT B With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and start engine. 2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “DIFF LOCK” with in CONSULT-II. 3. Perform the self-diagnosis. Is the “CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000]” displayed? YES >> Go to LAN-5, "Precautions When Using CONSULT-II" . NO >> INSPECTION END C RFD E F SDIA1850E G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 RFD-71 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS DIFF LOCK Indicator Lamp Does Not Turn ON PFP:00007 EDS001PW SYMPTOM: DIFF LOCK indicator lamp does not turn ON for approx. 1 second when turning ignition switch to “ON”. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK SYSTEM FOR CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to RFD-53, "SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE" . Is “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” displayed? YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for CAN communication line. Refer to RFD-71, "CAN Communication Line" NO >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect differential lock control unit harness connector. Check voltage between differential lock control unit harness connector terminals and ground. Connector Terminal (Wire color) Voltage (Approx.) 1 (L) - Ground 0V B77 2 (L) - Ground 0V 15 (Y/R) - Ground Battery voltage SDIA2562E 4. 5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Check voltage between differential lock control unit harness connector terminals and ground. Connector Terminal (Wire color) Voltage (Approx.) 1 (L) - Ground B77 2 (L) - Ground Battery voltage 15 (Y/R) - Ground OK or NG SDIA2563E OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. ● 10A fuse [No. 15 or 19, located in fuse block (J/B)] ● Harness for short or open between battery and differential lock control unit harness connector terminal 15 ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and differential lock control unit harness connector terminals 1 and 2 ● Battery and ignition switch. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . Revision: October 2004 RFD-72 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] 3. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect differential lock control unit harness connector. Check continuity between differential lock control unit harness connector B77 terminals 3 (B), 10 (B) and ground. B Continuity should exist. C Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. RFD SDIA2564E E 4. CHECK COMBINATION METER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. F Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect combination meter harness connector. Check voltage between combination meter harness connector terminal and ground Connector Terminal (Wire color) Voltage (Approx.) M24 24 (O/L) - Ground 0V G H I PDIA0228E 4. 5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Check voltage between combination meter harness connector terminal and ground. Connector Terminal (Wire color) Voltage (Approx.) M24 24 (O/L) - Ground 0V K L OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. SDIA2396E ● 10A fuse [No.14, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and combination meter harness connector terminal 24 ● Ignition switch. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . Revision: October 2004 RFD-73 J 2005 Titan M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] 5. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT AND COMBINATION METER 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect differential lock control unit harness connector and combination meter harness connector. Check continuity between differential lock control unit harness connector B77 terminal 21 (L) and combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 14 (L) Continuity should exist. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. SDIA2572E 6. CHECK DIFF LOCK INDICATOR LAMP CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Check combination meter. Refer to DI-8, "Combination Meter" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Replace combination meter. Refer to DI-25, "Removal and Installation of Combination Meter" . 7. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 8. 8. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT Check differential lock control unit input/output signal. Refer to RFD-50, "Differential Lock Control Unit Input/ Output Signal Reference Values" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Check differential lock control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: October 2004 RFD-74 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] DIFF LOCK Indicator Lamp Does Not Change EDS001PX SYMPTOM: DIFF LOCK indicator lamp does not change when turning differential lock mode switch to “ON” after engine start. A B DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK DIFF LOCK INDICATOR LAMP C Confirm DIFF LOCK indicator lamp when ignition switch is turned to ON. Does DIFF LOCK indicator lamp turn on? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Go to RFD-72, "DIFF LOCK Indicator Lamp Does Not Turn ON" . RFD 2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS E Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to RFD-53, "SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE" . Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnosis? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. NO >> GO TO 3. F 3. CHECK SYSTEM FOR DIFFERENTIAL LOCK MODE SWITCH G Perform trouble diagnosis for differential lock mode switch system. Refer to RFD-58, "Differential Lock Mode Switch" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. H I 4. CHECK DIFF LOCK INDICATOR LAMP CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Check combination meter. Refer to DI-8, "Combination Meter" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace combination meter. Refer to DI-25, "Removal and Installation of Combination Meter" . 5. CHECK SYMPTOM K L Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 6. M 6. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT Check differential lock control unit input/output signal. Refer to RFD-50, "Differential Lock Control Unit Input/ Output Signal Reference Values" . OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Check differential lock control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: October 2004 J RFD-75 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] DIFF LOCK Indicator Lamp Sometimes Flashes EDS001PY SYMPTOM: DIFF LOCK indicator lamp sometimes flashes when it turns ON or OFF during driving. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK DIFF LOCK INDICATOR LAMP Confirm DIFF LOCK indicator lamp when ignition switch is turned to ON. Does DIFF LOCK indicator lamp turn on? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Go to RFD-72, "DIFF LOCK Indicator Lamp Does Not Turn ON" . 2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to RFD-53, "SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE" . Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnosis? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. NO >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK SYSTEM FOR DIFFERENTIAL LOCK MODE SWITCH Perform trouble diagnosis for differential lock mode switch system. Refer to RFD-58, "Differential Lock Mode Switch" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4. CHECK SYSTEM FOR DIFFERENTIAL POSITION SWITCH Perform trouble diagnosis for differential lock position switch system. Refer to RFD-62, "Differential Lock Position Switch" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 5. CHECK SYMPTOM Check again. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> GO TO 6. 6. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT Check differential lock control unit input/output signal. Refer to RFD-50, "Differential Lock Control Unit Input/ Output Signal Reference Values" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Check differential lock control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: October 2004 RFD-76 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] 7. CHECK DIFFERENTIAL INNER PARTS A 1. Disassemble rear final drive assembly. Refer to RFD-83, "Disassembly and Assembly" . 2. Check differential inner parts. OK or NG OK >> INSPECTION END NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. B C RFD E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 RFD-77 2005 Titan DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation PFP:28496 EDS001PZ REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. Remove jack and tools. Remove both rear seats. Refer to SE-100, "Removal and Installation" . Remove rear lower finisher LH. Refer to EI-39, "REAR" . Remove rear upper finisher LH. Refer to EI-39, "REAR" . Remove seatback latch striker LH. Refer to SE-101, "Disassembly and Assembly" . Remove upper bracket of center seat belt retractor and belt assembly. Refer to SB-8, "Removal and Installation of Rear Seat Belt" . 8. Remove the necessary push pins and reposition rear panel out of the way. Refer to EI-39, "REAR" . 9. Reposition the carpet to access differential lock control unit to disconnect connector. 10. Remove the two nuts and remove differential lock control unit. LDIA0156E INSTALLATION Note the following, and installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● When installing differential lock control unit, tighten nuts to the specified torque. Differential lock control unit nuts Revision: October 2004 : 5.1 N·m (0.52 kg-m, 45 in-lb) RFD-78 2005 Titan FRONT OIL SEAL [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] FRONT OIL SEAL Removal and Installation PFP:38189 A EDS001Q0 REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to PR-8, "Removal and Installation" . B Remove wheel and tire assemblies. Remove brake calipers and rotors. Refer to BR-29, "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor" . C Using an inch-pound, torque wrench, rotate the pinion three or four times. Record the rotating torque. Loosen drive pinion nut while holding companion flange using RFD Tool. Tool number : KV40104000 ( — ) E F LDIA0122E 7. Put matching mark on the thread edge of drive pinion. The mark should be in line with the mark on companion flange. CAUTION: For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage drive pinion. G H I J SDIA2590E 8. K Remove companion flange using a suitable tool. L M LDIA0123E 9. Remove front oil seal using Tool. Tool number : ST33290001 (J-34286) CAUTION: Be careful not to damage axle housing. LDIA0124E Revision: October 2004 RFD-79 2005 Titan FRONT OIL SEAL [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] INSTALLATION 1. Apply multi-purpose grease to oil seal lips. Install front oil seal into axle housing using Tool. Tool number : ST15310000 ( — ) CAUTION: Do not reuse oil seal. ● When installing, do not incline oil seal. ● LDIA0125E 2. Align the matching mark of drive pinion with the mark of companion flange, then install companion flange. SDIA2590E 3. 4. Assemble washer if required and new drive pinion nut on pinon gear and tighten nut until there is zero bearing end play. CAUTION: Do not reuse drive pinion nut and washer. Rotate drive pinion using an inch-pound torque wrench and flange wrench. Rotating torque should be equal to the reading recorded in step 5 above during removal plus an additional 0.56 N·m (5 in-lb). Tool number 5. 6. 7. 8. : KV40104000 ( — ) LDIA0122E If the rotating torque is low, continue to tighten drive pinion nut in 6.8 N·m (5 ft-lb) increments until proper rotating torque is achieved. Refer to RFD-83, "COMPONENTS" . CAUTION: Do not loosen drive pinion nut to decrease drive pinion rear bearing rotating torque and do not exceed specified preload torque. If preload torque or rotating torque is exceeded a new collapsible spacer must be installed. If the minimum tightening torque is reached prior to reaching the required rotating torque, collapsible spacer may have been damaged. Replace collapsible spacer. Install rear propeller shaft. Refer to PR-8, "Removal and Installation" . Check gear lubricant level and fill with proper lubricant if required. Refer to MA-26, "Checking Final Drive Oil" . Install brake rotors, calipers, wheel and tire assemblies. Refer to BR-29, "Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor" . Revision: October 2004 RFD-80 2005 Titan CARRIER COVER [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] CARRIER COVER Removal and Installation PFP:38351 A EDS001Q1 REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove drain plug and drain gear oil. Refer to MA-27, "DRAINING" . Remove carrier cover. ● Disconnect parking brake cable from carrier cover. ● Disconnect brake tube from carrier cover. B C RFD E LDIA0126E INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Apply sealant to mating surface of carrier cover. ● Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to mounting surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and mounting surfaces. Install carrier cover on axle housing and tighten carrier cover bolts to the specified torque. Refer to RFD-83, "COMPONENTS" . SDIA2639E Connect parking brake cable and brake tube to carrier cover. Fill with new gear oil until oil level reaches the specified limit near filler plug mounting hole. Refer to MA26, "Checking Final Drive Oil" . F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 RFD-81 2005 Titan REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation PFP:38300 EDS001Q2 REMOVAL CAUTION: ● Be careful not to damage spline, companion flange and front oil seal when removing propeller shaft. ● Before removing final drive assembly or rear axle assembly, disconnect ABS sensor harness connector from the assembly and move it away from final drive/rear axle assembly area. Failure to do so may result in sensor wires being damaged and sensor becoming inoperative. 1. Drain rear final drive gear oil. Refer to MA-27, "DRAINING" . 2. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to PR-8, "Removal and Installation" . ● Plug rear end of transfer. 3. Remove axle shaft. Refer to RAX-6, "Removal and Installation" . 4. Support rear final drive using a suitable jack. 5. Disconnect the following components from rear final drive. ● Brake tube block connectors. Refer to BR-13, "Removal and Installation of Rear Brake Piping and Brake Hose" . ● ABS sensor wire harness. Refer to BRC-40, "Removal and Installation" . ● Parking brake cable. ● Brake tube. LDIA0126E ● ● Differential lock position switch harness connector. Differential lock solenoid harness connector. LDIA0158E 6. 7. 8. 9. Disconnect brake hose from brake tube at the mounting clip on top of axle housing. Then remove the metal clip to disconnect brake line from the mounting clip on top of axle housing. Remove rear shock absorber lower bolts. Refer to RSU-7, "Removal and Installation" . Remove leaf spring U-bolt nuts. Refer to RSU-8, "Removal and Installation" . Remove rear final drive assembly. INSTALLATION Note the following, and installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Fill with new gear oil until oil level reaches the specified limit near filler plug mounting hole. Refer to MA26, "Checking Final Drive Oil" . ● Bleed the air from brake system. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System" . Revision: October 2004 RFD-82 2005 Titan REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] Disassembly and Assembly EDS001Q3 A COMPONENTS B C RFD E F G H I J K L M WDIA0113E 1. Drive pinion nut 2. Drive pinion nut washer 3. Companion flange 4. Front oil seal 5. Front bearing thrust washer 6. Drive pinion front bearing 7. Axle housing 8. Differential lock position switch 9. Breather 10. Sensor connector 11. Drain plug 12. Axle shaft assembly 13. Side bearing cap 14. Adjuster lock plate 15. Carrier cover 16. Filler plug 17. Drive pinion 18. Drive pinion height adjusting washer 19. Drive pinion rear bearing 20. Collapsible spacer 21. Side bearing adjuster 22. Side bearing 23. Differential case assembly 24. Drive gear 25. Differential lock solenoid 26. Solenoid washer Revision: October 2004 RFD-83 2005 Titan REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] ASSEMBLY INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT Total Preload Torque 1. 2. Turn drive pinion in both directions several times to set bearing rollers. Check total preload using preload gauge set. Tool number : ST3127S000 (J-25765-A) Total preload (with oil seal) 2.38 - 5.16 N·m (0.25 - 0.52 kg-m, 21 - 45 in-lb) NOTE: Total preload torque = Pinion bearing torque + Side bearing torque ● If measured value is out of the specification, disassemble it to check and adjust each part. Adjust the pinion bearing preload and the side bearing preload. Adjust the pinion bearing preload first, then adjust the side bearing preload. PDIA0309E When the preload torque is large On pinion bearings: Replace collapsible spacer. On side bearings: Loosen side bearing adjuster. When the preload is small On pinion bearings: Tighten drive pinion nut. On side bearings: Tighten side bearing adjuster. Tooth Contact Checking gear tooth contact pattern is necessary to verify correct relationship between drive gear and drive pinion. Gears which are not positioned in proper arrangement may be noisy and/or have a short life. Check gear tooth contact pattern to obtain the best contact for low noise and long life. 1. Remove rear cover. Refer to RFD-87, "DISASSEMBLY" . 2. Thoroughly clean drive gear and drive pinion teeth. 3. Apply red lead to drive gear. CAUTION: Apply red lead to both the faces of 3 to 4 gears at 4 locations evenly spaced on drive gear. SDIA2623E 4. Hold companion flange steady by hand and rotate drive gear in both directions. PDIA0322E Revision: October 2004 RFD-84 2005 Titan REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] A B C RFD E F SDIA2591E 5. If outside the standard, adjust drive pinion height adjusting washer and backlash. Refer to RFD-92, "Drive Pinion Height Adjusting Washer" , RFD-85, "Backlash" . G Backlash 1. 2. Remove rear cover. Refer to RFD-87, "DISASSEMBLY" . Check drive gear to drive pinion backlash using a dial indicator at several points. H I Drive gear to drive pinion backlash : 0.08 - 0.13 mm (0.0031 - 0.0051 in) 3. a. b. c. If outside the standard, adjust side bearing adjuster. CAUTION: Check tooth contact and total preload after adjusting side bearing adjuster. Refer to RFD-84, "Total Preload Torque" , RFD-84, "Tooth Contact" . Remove adjuster lock plate. Loosen side bearing cap bolts. Tighten or loosen each side bearing adjusters using Tool. Tool number : — J K SDIA2640E L (C - 4164) M PDIA0337E Revision: October 2004 RFD-85 2005 Titan REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] d. In case of lots of backlash, loosen side bearing adjuster A and tighten side bearing adjuster B. In case of less backlash, loosen side bearing adjuster B and tighten side bearing adjuster A. PDIA0330E e. f. After adjusting backlash and tighten cap bolts to the specified torque. Refer to RFD-83, "COMPONENTS" . Install adjuster lock plate and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to RFD-83, "COMPONENTS" . CAUTION: Install adjuster lock plate to grooving of differential lock solenoid. SDIA2582E Companion Flange Runout 1. 2. Fit a dial indicator onto companion flange face (inner side of propeller shaft mounting bolt holes). Rotate companion flange to check for runout. Runout limit 3. 4. Fit a test indicator to the inner side of companion flange (socket diameter). Rotate companion flange to check for runout. Runout limit 5. a. b. c. : 0.10 mm (0.0039 in) or less : 0.13 mm (0.0051 in) or less SDIA2078E If the runout value is outside the repair limit, follow the procedure below to adjust. Check for runout while changing the phase between companion flange and drive pinion by 90° step, and search for the point where the runout is the minimum. If the runout value is still outside of the limit after the phase has been changed, replace companion flange. If the runout value still outside of the limit after companion flange has been replaced, check drive pinion bearing and drive pinion assembly. Revision: October 2004 RFD-86 2005 Titan REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] DISASSEMBLY Differential Assembly 1. 2. A Remove carrier cover bolts. Remove carrier cover using Tool. Tool number B : KV10111100 (J-37228) CAUTION: ● Be careful not to damage the mating surface. ● Do not insert flat-bladed screwdriver, this will damage the mating surface. C RFD SDIA2581E 3. E Remove differential sensor connector bolts and differential lock solenoid connector. F G H SDIA2585E 4. 5. For proper reinstallation, paint matching mark on one side of side bearing cap. CAUTION: ● Side bearing caps are line-board for initial assembly. The matching marks are used to reinstall them in their original positions. ● For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage side bearing cap. Remove adjuster lock plates. I J K SDIA2583E 6. L Remove side bearing caps. M SDIA2587E Revision: October 2004 RFD-87 2005 Titan REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] 7. Remove side bearing adjusters using Tool. Tool number : — (C - 4164) PDIA0337E 8. 9. Keep side bearing outer races together with inner races. Do not mix them up. Also, keep side bearing adjusters together with bearing. Remove side bearing adjusters from axle housing. SDIA2588E 10. Remove bracket of differential lock position switch connector and bolts. 11. Remove differential lock position switch. 12. Remove side bearing inner race and washer using Tool. Tool number : ST33081000 ( — ) CAUTION: Be careful not to damage differential case assembly and differential lock solenoid. 13. Remove differential lock solenoid and solenoid washer. SDIA2584E 14. Remove side bearing inner race using Tool. Tool number : ST33081000 ( — ) CAUTION: Be careful not to damage differential case assembly. SDIA2589E Revision: October 2004 RFD-88 2005 Titan REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] 15. For proper reinstallation, paint matching mark on differential case assembly and drive gear. CAUTION: For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage differential case and drive gear. 16. Remove drive gear mounting bolts. 17. Tap drive gear off differential case assembly with a soft hammer. CAUTION: Tap evenly all around to keep drive gear from binding. A B C SDIA2238E RFD Drive Pinion Assembly 1. 2. Remove differential case assembly. Refer to RFD-87, "Differential Assembly" . Remove drive pinion nut and washer using Tool. Tool number : KV40104000 ( — E ) F G PDIA0314E 3. Put a matching mark on the thread edge of drive pinion. The mark should be in line with the mark on companion flange. CAUTION: For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage drive pinion. H I J K SDIA2590E 4. Remove companion flange using a suitable tool. L M PDIA0315E Revision: October 2004 RFD-89 2005 Titan REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] 5. Remove front oil seal using Tool. Tool number 6. : ST33290001 (J-34286) CAUTION: Be careful not to damage axle housing. Remove front bearing thrust washer. SDIA2586E 7. 8. Remove drive pinion assembly and collapsible spacer from axle housing, using suitable press. CAUTION: Do not drop drive pinion assembly. Remove drive pinion front bearing inner race from axle housing. PDIA0316E 9. Tap drive pinion front bearing outer race uniformly with a brass bar or equivalent to remove. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage axle housing. 10. Tap drive pinion rear bearing outer race uniformly with a brass bar or equivalent for removal. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage axle housing. SDIA2641E 11. Remove drive pinion rear bearing inner race and drive pinion height adjusting washer, using Tool. Tool number : ST30021000 (J-22912-01) SDIA2236E Revision: October 2004 RFD-90 2005 Titan REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Drive Gear and Drive Pinion ● ● ● A If the gear teeth do not mesh or line-up correctly, determine the cause and adjust, repair, or replace as necessary. If the gears are worn, cracked, damaged, pitted or chipped (by friction) noticeably, replace with new gears. Drive gear and drive pinion are supplied in matched sets only. Matching numbers on both drive pinion and drive gear are etched for verification. If a new gear set is being used, verify the numbers of each pinion gear and drive gear before proceeding with assembly. B C Bearing ● ● If found any chipped (by friction), pitted, worn, rusted, scratched mark, or unusual noise from the bearing, RFD replace with new bearing assembly (as a new set). Bearing must be replaced with a new one whenever disassembled. Differential Case Assembly ● ● E If the gears are worn, cracked, damaged, pitted or chipped (by friction) noticeably, replace with new differential case assembly. If the movement is not smooth when pushing cam ring of differential case assembly with a hand. F Differential Lock Solenoid ● If the operating part of differential lock solenoid is not smooth, perform component inspection. Refer to RFD-70, "COMPONENT INSPECTION" . G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 RFD-91 2005 Titan REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] SELECTION ADJUSTING WASHERS Drive Pinion Height Adjusting Washer ● Drive gear and drive pinion are supplied in matched sets only. Matching numbers on both drive pinion and drive gear are etched for verification. If a new gear set is being used, verify the numbers of each drive pinion and drive gear before proceeding with assembly. SDIA2241E ● ● ● The mounting distance from the center line of drive gear to the back face of drive pinion for the Model 226 axle assembly is 109.5 mm (4.312 in). On the button end of each drive pinion, there is etched a plus (+) number, a minus (-) number, or a zero (0), which indicates the best running position for each particular gear set. This dimension is controlled by a selective drive pinion height adjusting washer between drive pinion inner bearing race and drive pinion. For example: If a drive pinion is etched m+8 (+3), it would require 0.08 mm (0.003 in) less drive pinion height adjusting washer than a drive pinion etched “0”. This means decreasing drive pinion height adjusting washer thickness; increases the mounting distance of drive pinion to 109.6 mm (4.315 in). If a drive pinion is etched m-8 (-3), it would require adding 0.08 mm (0.003 in) more to drive pinion height adjusting washer than would be required if drive pinion were etched “0”. By adding 0.08 mm (0.003 in), the mounting distance of drive pinion was decreased to 109.4 mm (4.309 in) which is just what m-8 (a-3) etching indicated. To change drive pinion adjustment, use different drive pinion height adjusting washers which come in different thickness. Use the following tables as a guide for selecting the correct drive pinion height adjusting washer thickness to add or subtract from the old drive pinion height adjusting washer. OLD DRIVE PINION MARKING NEW DRIVE PINION MARKING mm (in) -4 -3 -2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +4 +0.20 (+0.008) +0.18 (+0.007) +0.15 (+0.006) +0.13 (+0.005) +0.10 (+0.004) +0.08 (+0.003) +0.05 (+0.002) +0.02 (+0.001) 0 (0) +3 +0.18 (+0.007) +0.15 (+0.006) +0.13 (+0.005) +0.10 (+0.004) +0.08 (+0.003) +0.05 (+0.002) +0.02 (+0.001) 0 (0) -0.02 (-0.001) +2 +0.15 (+0.006) +0.13 (+0.005) +0.10 (+0.004) +0.08 (+0.003) +0.05 (+0.002) +0.02 (+0.001) 0 (0) -0.02 (-0.001) -0.05 (-0.002) +1 +0.13 (+0.005) +0.10 (+0.004) +0.08 (+0.003) +0.05 (+0.002) +0.02 (+0.001) 0 (0) -0.02 (-0.001) -0.05 (-0.002) -0.08 (-0.003) 0 +0.10 (+0.004) +0.08 (+0.003) +0.05 (+0.002) +0.02 (+0.001) 0 (0) -0.02 (-0.001) -0.05 (-0.002) -0.08 (-0.003) -0.10 (-0.004) -1 +0.08 (+0.003) +0.05 (+0.002) +0.02 (+0.001) 0 (0) -0.02 (-0.001) -0.05 (-0.002) -0.08 (-0.003) -0.10 (-0.004) -0.13 (-0.005) -2 +0.05 (+0.002) +0.02 (+0.001) 0 (0) -0.02 (-0.001) -0.05 (-0.002) -0.08 (-0.003) -0.10 (-0.004) -0.13 (-0.005) -0.15 (-0.006) -3 +0.02 (+0.001) 0 (0) -0.02 (-0.001) -0.05 (-0.002) -0.08 (-0.003) -0.10 (-0.004) -0.13 (-0.005) -0.15 (-0.006) -0.18 (-0.007) -4 0 (0) -0.02 (-0.001) -0.05 (-0.002) -0.08 (-0.003) -0.10 (-0.004) -0.13 (-0.005) -0.15 (-0.006) -0.18 (-0.007) -0.20 (-0.008) Revision: October 2004 RFD-92 2005 Titan REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] 1. 2. Make sure all parts are clean and that drive pinion bearings are well lubricated. Assemble drive pinion bearings into the tools. Tool number A: B: C: — — — A (8144) (6740) (6741) B C SDIA2242E 3. RFD Install drive pinion bearing inner race and drive pinion height adjusting washer to axle housing using tool as shown. E F G PDIA0318E 4. Turn the assembly several times to seat drive pinion bearings. H I J PDIA0319E 5. K Measure the turning torque, using Tool. Tool number : ST3127S000 (J-25765-A) L Turning torque specification : 1.2 - 2.8 N-m (0.13 - 0.28 kg-m, 11 - 24 in-lb) M PDIA0320E 6. Tighten side bearing caps to the specified torque installing tools as shown. Tool number A: B: C: D: — — — — (6739) (D-115-2) TBD (D-115-3) SDIA2646E Revision: October 2004 RFD-93 2005 Titan REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] 7. 8. 9. Put scooter block on pinion height block. Make sure that dial indicator is level adjusting pressure with a hand. Dial indicator indicates “0”. Slide dial indicator along arbor. Record the maximum. Adjust drive pinion height adjusting washer so that the maximum will be “0”. SDIA2647E ASSEMBLY Drive Pinion Assembly 1. Press a drive pinion rear bearing outer race into axle housing, using Tool. Tool number A: ST01500001 ( — ) B: ST30022000 ( — ) CAUTION: Do not reuse drive pinion rear bearing. PDIA0323E 2. Press a drive pinion front bearing outer race into axle housing, using Tool. Tool number 3. : ST33022000 ( — ) CAUTION: Do not reuse drive pinion front bearing. Select drive pinion height adjusting washer. Refer to RFD-92, "Drive Pinion Height Adjusting Washer" . PDIA0324E 4. Press a drive pinion rear bearing inner race and drive pinion height adjusting washer to drive pinion, using Tool. Tool number 5. 6. 7. : — (C - 4040) CAUTION: Do not reuse drive pinion rear bearing. Apply gear oil to drive pinon rear bearing and drive pinon front bearing. Install drive pinion front bearing inner race in axle housing. Install front bearing thrust washer to axle housing. SDIA2592E Revision: October 2004 RFD-94 2005 Titan REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] 8. Apply multi-purpose grease to front oil seal lip. Install front oil seal into axle housing using Tool. Tool number : ST15310000 ( — A ) CAUTION: ● Do not reuse oil seal. ● When installing, do not incline oil seal. B C PDIA0326E RFD 9. Install collapsible spacer to drive pinion. And then install drive pinion assembly in axle housing. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse collapsible spacer. ● Be careful not to damage front oil seal. E F G SDIA2595E 10. Align the matching mark of drive pinion with the mark of companion flange. H I J SDIA2590E 11. Install companion flange onto drive pinion. Tap companion flange with a soft hammer until fully seated. CAUTION: Be careful not to damage companion flange and front oil seal. K L M PDIA0328E 12. Install drive pinion nut and drive pinion nut washer. Tighten drive pinion nut until total preload is within specification. ● The threaded portion of drive pinion and drive pinion nut should be free from oil or grease. Tool number : KV40104000 ( — ) CAUTION: Do not reuse drive pinion nut and drive pinion nut washer. PDIA0313E Revision: October 2004 RFD-95 2005 Titan REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] 13. Tighten drive pinion nut by very small degrees until the specified preload is achieved. When checking the preload, turn drive pinion in both directions several times to set the bearing rollers, using Tool. Tool number : ST3127S000 (J-25765-A) Pinion bearing preload: 1.7 - 3.8 N·m (0.18 - 0.38 kg-m, 15 - 33 in-lb) a. This procedure will have to be repeated if: Maximum preload is achieved before the minimum drive pinion nut torque is reached. ● Minimum preload is not achieved before maximum drive pinion nut torque is reached. ● PDIA0309E Differential Assembly 1. Align the matching mark of differential case assembly with the mark of drive gear, then install drive gear. SDIA2593E 2. Apply thread locking sealant into the thread hole of drive gear. ● Use Genuine Medium Strength Thread Locking Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . CAUTION: The drive gear back and threaded holes shall be cleaned and decreased sufficiently. SDIA2594E 3. Install drive gear on the bolts, and then tighten to the specified torque. Refer to RFD-83, "COMPONENTS" . CAUTION: ● Do not reuse the bolts. ● Tighten bolts in a crisscross fashion. SDIA0247J Revision: October 2004 RFD-96 2005 Titan REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] 4. Press side bearing inner races to differential case assembly using Tool. Tool number : ST33081000 ( — A ) CAUTION: Do not reuse side bearing. B C SDIA2630E RFD 5. 6. Install differential lock solenoid and washer. Press side bearing inner races to differential case assembly using Tool. Tool number E A: KV38100300 (J-25523) B: ST33081000 ( — ) F G SDIA2631E 7. 8. Apply sealant to threads of differential lock position switch. ● Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to axle housing and differential lock position switch. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and axle housing and differential lock position switch. Install differential lock position switch on axle housing and tighten differential lock position switch bolts with the specified torque. Refer to RFD-83, "COMPONENTS" . H I J K L SDIA2633E 9. Install side bearing adjusters into axle housing. PDIA0381E Revision: October 2004 RFD-97 2005 Titan M REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] 10. Apply gear oil to side bearings. Install differential case assembly with side bearing outer races into axle housing. 11. Apply multi-purpose grease to sensor connector. CAUTION: Do not reuse sensor connector. SDIA2588E 12. Connect differential lock solenoid harness and sensor connector. Then install it to axle housing, tighten to the specified torque. Refer to RFD-83, "COMPONENTS" . SDIA2585E 13. Align paint matching mark on side bearing caps with that on axle housing and install side bearing caps on axle housing. CAUTION: Do not tighten at this point. This allows further tightening of side bearing adjusters. SDIA2632E 14. Tighten each side bearing adjusters using adjuster tool. Tool number : — (C - 4164) 15. Adjusting backlash of drive gear and drive pinion. Refer to RFD85, "Backlash" . 16. Check total preload. Refer to RFD-84, "Total Preload Torque" . 17. Check tooth contact. Refer to RFD-84, "Tooth Contact" . PDIA0337E 18. Apply sealant to mating surface of carrier cover. ● Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to mounting surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and mounting surfaces. 19. Install carrier cover on axle housing and tighten carrier cover bolts with the specified torque. Refer to RFD-83, "COMPONENTS" . SDIA2639E Revision: October 2004 RFD-98 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specifications Engine PFP:00030 A EDS001Q4 VK56DE Transmission 5A/T Final drive model M226 Gear ratio 3.357 Number of pinion gears B C 2 Number of teeth (Drive gear / drive pinion) Oil capacity (Approx.) 47/14 RFD 2.01 (4-1/4, 3-1/2) (US pt, lmp pt) Drive pinion adjustment spacer type Collapsible Inspection and Adjustment EDS001Q5 E PRELOAD TORQUE Unit: N·m (kg-m, in-lb) Item Specification Total preload (Drive pinion torque to rotate plus) F 2.38 - 5.16 (0.25 - 0.52, 21 - 45) Drive pinion bearing preload 1.7 - 3.8 (0.18 - 0.38, 15 - 33) G BACKLASH Unit: mm (in) Item Standard Drive gear to drive pinion gear H 0.08 - 0.13 (0.0031 - 0.0051) COMPANION FLANGE RUNOUT Unit: mm (in) Item I Runout limit Companion flange face 0.10 (0.0039) or less Inner side of companion flange 0.13 (0.0051) or less J K L M Revision: October 2004 RFD-99 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [WITH ELECTRONIC LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL] SELECTIVE PARTS Drive Pinion Height Adjusting Washer Unit: mm (in) Thickness Package part number* 0.076 (0.030) 0.079 (0.031) 0.081 (0.032) 0.084 (0.033) 0.086 (0.034) 38151 8S101 0.089 (0.035) 0.091 (0.036) 0.094 (0.037) 0.097 (0.038) 0.099 (0.039) 38151 8S102 0.102 (0.040) 0.104 (0.041) 0.107 (0.042) 0.109 (0.043) 0.112 (0.044) 38151 8S103 0.114 (0.045) 0.117 (0.046) 0.119 (0.047) 0.122 (0.048) 0.124 (0.049) 38151 8S104 0.127 (0.050) 0.130 (0.051) 0.132 (0.052) 0.135 (0.053) 0.137 (0.054) 38151 8S105 *Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. Revision: October 2004 RFD-100 2005 Titan E SUSPENSION A B SECTION REAR SUSPENSION C D RSU CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions .............................................................. 2 PREPARATION ........................................................... 3 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3 NOISE VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 4 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 4 REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY ............................. 5 Components ............................................................. 5 On-Vehicle Inspection and Service .......................... 6 SHOCK ABSORBER .................................................. 7 Removal and Installation .......................................... 7 REMOVAL ............................................................. 7 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ......................... 7 INSTALLATION ..................................................... 7 LEAF SPRING ............................................................ 8 Removal and Installation .......................................... 8 REMOVAL ............................................................. 9 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ......................... 9 INSTALLATION ................................................... 10 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 11 General Specifications (Rear) ................................ 11 Wheelarch Height (Unladen*1) ............................... 11 F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 RSU-1 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS Precautions ● PFP:00001 EES001CT When installing rubber parts, final tightening must be carried out under unladen condition* with tires on ground. * Fuel, radiator coolant, and engine oil are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and mats are in their designated positions. Revision: October 2004 RSU-2 2005 Titan PREPARATION PREPARATION Commercial Service Tools PFP:00002 A EES001CU Tool name Description Power tool Removing nuts and bolts B C D PBIC0190E RSU F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 RSU-3 2005 Titan Revision: October 2004 Shake × × × × Vibration × × × × Shimmy × × × × Shudder × × × Poor quality ride or handling × × × RSU-4 × × × × × WT-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" WT-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" BR-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" PS-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" ROAD WHEEL BRAKES STEERING × TIRES × RAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" × AXLE × RFD-8, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" × REAR FINAL DRIVE PR-3, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" × PROPELLER SHAFT × RSU-5 × Suspension looseness RSU-5 Parts interference × RSU-8 RSU-5 Bushing or mounting deterioration Noise Spring fatigue RSU-7 Symptoms Shock absorber deformation, damage or deflection Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS RSU-5 Reference page Improper installation, looseness NOISE VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NOISE VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart PFP:54000 EES001CV Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace the parts. × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × ×: Applicable 2005 Titan REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY Components PFP:55020 A EES001CW B C D RSU F G H I J K L M LEIA0102E 1. Rear final drive 2. Rear leaf spring 3. Rear spring bushing (front) 4. Rear spring pad 5. Rear spring shackle bushing 6. Rear spring shackle 7. Bumper 8. Rear spring clip U-bolts 9. Rear spring bushing (rear) 10. Shock absorber Revision: October 2004 11. Shock absorber (left side) RSU-5 12. Shock absorber (right side) 2005 Titan REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY CAUTION: When installing the components with rubber bushings, the final tightening of the nuts and bolts must be done with the vehicle in an unladen condition (the fuel, engine coolant, and engine oil full; the spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in their designated positions) with the tires on the ground. On-Vehicle Inspection and Service ● ● ● EES001CX Check the rear suspension parts for any excessive play, cracks, wear, and other damage. Shake each rear wheel to check for any excessive play as shown. Tighten all of the nuts and bolts to the specified torque. Refer to RSU-5, "Components" . CAUTION: When installing the components with rubber bushings, the final tightening of the nuts and bolts must be done with the vehicle in an unladen condition (the fuel, engine coolant, and engine oil full; the spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in their designated positions) with the tires on the ground. SMA525A ● ● Check the shock absorbers for oil leaks, deformation, and other damage. Check the shock absorber bushings for excessive wear and other damage. LEIA0103E Revision: October 2004 RSU-6 2005 Titan SHOCK ABSORBER SHOCK ABSORBER Removal and Installation PFP:56210 A EES001CY REMOVAL 1. 2. Support the rear final drive and suspension assembly using a suitable jack. Remove the shock absorber upper and lower nuts and bolts using power tool. B C D RSU LEIA0104E 3. Remove the shock absorber. F INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Inspect the shock absorber for any oil leaks, cracks, or deformations. Replace the shock absorber as necessary. G INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Shock absorber upper and lower nuts H : Refer to RSU-5, "Components" . I J K L M Revision: October 2004 RSU-7 2005 Titan LEAF SPRING LEAF SPRING Removal and Installation PFP:55020 EES001CZ LEIA0102E 1. Rear final drive 2. Rear leaf spring 3. Rear spring bushing (front) 4. Rear spring pad 5. Rear spring shackle bushing 6. Rear spring shackle 7. Bumper 8. Rear spring clip U-bolts 9. Rear spring bushing (rear) 10. Shock absorber Revision: October 2004 11. Shock absorber (left side) RSU-8 12. Shock absorber (right side) 2005 Titan LEAF SPRING CAUTION: When installing the components with rubber bushings, the final tightening of the nuts and bolts must be done with the vehicle in an unladen condition (the fuel, engine coolant, and engine oil full; the spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in their designated positions) with the tires on the ground. A REMOVAL B 1. 2. Support the rear final drive assembly with a suitable jack to relieve the tension from the leaf spring. ● The axle weight should be supported, but there should be no compression in the spring. Remove the shock absorber lower nut and bolt using power tool. C D RSU LEIA0104E 3. Remove the four rear spring clip U-bolt nuts using power tool, then remove the rear spring pad. F G H I LEIA0106E J 4. Remove the rear spring shackle lower nut and bolt using power tool. ● If removing the LH rear leaf spring, remove the storage box if equipped, to access the rear spring shackle lower nut and bolt. Refer to EI-50, "Removal and Installation" . K L M LEIA0105E 5. 6. 7. Remove the rear leaf spring front nut and bolt using power tool. Remove the rear leaf spring. Remove the rear spring shackle from the rear leaf spring as necessary, using power tool. LEIA0107E INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ● Check the rear leaf spring for any cracks or damage. Replace the rear leaf spring if necessary. Revision: October 2004 RSU-9 2005 Titan LEAF SPRING ● ● Check the rear spring shackle, rear spring clip U-bolts, bumper, and rear spring pad for excessive wear, cracks, straightness, and damage. Replace any components if necessary. Check all bushings for deformation and cracks. Replace any bushings if necessary. INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Apply soapsuds to all of the rubber bushings. Install the rear spring shackle and rear leaf spring front nut and bolt. Finger-tighten the nuts. Install the rear spring clip U-bolts and bumper on top of the rear leaf spring. Install the rear spring pad, and nuts under the axle case. Tighten the rear spring clip U-bolt nuts diagonally and evenly. ● Tighten the rear spring clip U-bolt nuts so the lengths of all the exposed rear spring clip U-bolt threads under spring pad are equal in length as shown. Install the shock absorber, and finger-tighten the nuts. WEIA0075E 7. Remove the jack supporting the rear final drive assembly and bounce the rear of the vehicle to stabilize the suspension. (unladen) SRA703 8. Tighten the rear spring shackle nuts, rear leaf spring front nut and shock absorber nuts to specification. When installing the components with rubber bushings, the final nut tightening must be carried out under unladen* conditions with the tires on level ground. * (Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.) Revision: October 2004 RSU-10 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specifications (Rear) Suspension type PFP:00030 A EES001D0 Rigid axle with semi-elliptic leaf spring Shock absorber type B Double-acting hydraulic Wheelarch Height (Unladen*1) EES001D1 Unit: mm (in) C D RSU F LEIA0085E Drive type 4X2 Body Front wheelarch height (Hf) Rear wheelarch height (Hr) 4X4 G King Cab Crew Cab King Cab Crew Cab 265/70R18 913 (35.9) 916 (36.1) 952 (37.5) *2 955 (37.6) *2 285/70R17 914 (36.0) 917 (36.1) 953 (37.5) *2 956 (37.6) *2 245/75R17 904 (35.6) 907 (35.7) 941 (37.0) 944 (37.2) 265/70R18 955 (37.6) 956 (37.6) 995 (39.2) *2 996 (39.2) *2 285/70R17 956 (37.6) 957 (37.7) 996 (39.2) *2 997 (39.3) *2 245/75R17 946 (37.2) 947 (37.3) 984 (38.7) 985 (38.8) H I J *1: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions. *2: Includes when equipped with tow package. K L M Revision: October 2004 RSU-11 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Revision: October 2004 RSU-12 2005 Titan H RESTRAINTS A B SECTION SEAT BELTS C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2 Precautions for Seat Belt Service ............................ 2 AFTER A COLLISION ........................................... 2 SEAT BELTS .............................................................. 3 Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt ............. 3 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ........................................................ 5 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT BUCKLE ................................................................ 6 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF CENTER BENCH SEAT BELT AND SEAT BELT BUCKLE..... 7 Removal and Installation of Rear Seat Belt ............. 8 REMOVAL ............................................................. 8 INSTALLATION ..................................................... 9 Seat Belt Inspection ................................................ 10 AFTER A COLLISION ......................................... 10 PRELIMINARY CHECKS .................................... 10 SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ON-VEHICLE CHECK ................................................................ 11 SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE CHECK ................................................................ 12 LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM ............................................... 13 Removal and Installation ........................................ 13 TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT ............. 14 Removal and Installation ........................................ 14 F G SB I J K L M Revision: October 2004 SB-1 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EHS0013L The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precautions for Seat Belt Service EHS0013M CAUTION: ● Before removing the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly, turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. ● After replacing or reinstalling seat belt pre-tensioner assembly, or reconnecting seat belt pre-tensioner assembly connector, ensure entire SRS operates properly. Refer to SRS-21, "SRS Operation Check" . ● Do not disassemble buckle or seat belt assembly. ● Do not reuse seat belt anchor bolts after removal. Replace with new ones. ● Replace anchor bolts if they are deformed or worn out. ● Never oil tongue and buckle. ● If any component of seat belt assembly is questionable, do not repair. Replace the whole seat belt assembly. ● If webbing is cut, frayed, or damaged, replace seat belt assembly. ● When replacing seat belt assembly, use a genuine NISSAN seat belt assembly. AFTER A COLLISION WARNING: ● Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware after any collision. ● NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Failure to do so could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Seat belt pretensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision in which the air bags are deployed. Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if: ● The seat belt was in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly). ● The seat belt was damaged in an accident. (i.e., torn webbing, bent retractor or guide, etc.) ● The seat belt attaching point was damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage or distortion and repair as necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly. ● Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out. ● The seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the collision in which the air bags are deployed. Revision: October 2004 SB-2 2005 Titan SEAT BELTS SEAT BELTS Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt PFP:86884 A EHS0013N CREW CAB B C D E F G SB I J K L M WHIA0127E 1. Assist handle 2. Assist handle screw covers 3. D-ring anchor bolt cover 4. Seat belt buckle 5. Seat belt retractor and belt assembly LH 6. Anchor cover 7. Seat belt pre-tensioner connector 8. Center pillar lower finisher 9. Seat belt anchor 10. Center pillar 11. Center pillar upper finisher 12. Seat belt height adjuster 13. Seat belt height adjuster finisher Revision: October 2004 SB-3 2005 Titan SEAT BELTS KING CAB WHIA0137E 1. Seat belt height adjuster 2. Seat belt height adjuster finisher 3. Door finisher 4. Armrest 5. D-ring anchor bolt cover 6. Seat belt buckle 7. Seat belt retractor and belt assembly LH 8. Anchor cover 9. Seat belt pre-tensioner connector 10. Lower door finisher Revision: October 2004 11. Rear door LH SB-4 2005 Titan SEAT BELTS REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT RETRACTOR Removal - Crew Cab A CAUTION: ● Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Remove the center pillar upper/lower finishers. Refer to EI-36, "BODY SIDE TRIM" . 2. Remove the seat belt retractor anchor bolts and assembly. ● On RH side, disconnect the seat belt tension sensor. B C D E F G SB I J K LHIA0047E 3. Disconnect the seat belt pre-tensioner electrical connector. CAUTION: ● For installing/removing seat belt pre-tensioner connector, insert a thin screwdriver wrapped in tape into the notch, lift the lock and remove the connector. ● Install the connector with the lock raised, and push the lock into the connector. L M PHIA0341E Installation - Crew Cab Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Install the seat belt retractor upper bolt first. ● Insure that seat belt height adjuster is locked in the lowest position during installation. ● Removal - King Cab 1. 2. Remove D-ring anchor bolt cover and bolt. Remove anchor cover and bolt. Revision: October 2004 SB-5 2005 Titan SEAT BELTS 3. Remove lower finisher. 4. Disconnect seat belt pre-tensioner connector. CAUTION: ● For installing/removing seat belt pre-tensioner connector, insert a thin screwdriver wrapped in tape into the notch, lift the lock and remove the connector. ● Install the connector with the lock raised, and push the lock into the connector. 5. Remove seat belt retractor and belt assembly. PHIA0341E Installation - King Cab Installation is in the reverse order of removal. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT BUCKLE Removal - Bucket Seat 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the front seat. Refer to SE-91, "Removal and Installation" . Remove screw and seat cushion inner finisher. Remove the anchor bolt and buckle. Disconnect the buckle switch connector from the seat connector. WHIA0128E Installation - Bucket Seat Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 SB-6 2005 Titan SEAT BELTS REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF CENTER BENCH SEAT BELT AND SEAT BELT BUCKLE A B C D E F G SB I J WHIA0139E 1. Center front seat 2. Seat belt anchor bolts 4. Seat belt assembly 5. Seat belt buckle 3. Anchor bolt covers K Removal 1. 2. 3. Remove center front seat. Refer to SE-91, "Removal and Installation" . Remove anchor bolt cover, bolt and seat belt. Remove anchor bolt cover, bolt and seat belt buckle. L Installation M Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 SB-7 2005 Titan SEAT BELTS Removal and Installation of Rear Seat Belt EHS0013O WHIA0232E 1. D-ring anchor bolt cover 4. Seat belt pre-tensioner connector 5. Lower side finisher 6. Seat belt lower anchor 7. Seat belt lower anchor cover 8. Push pins 9. Center anchor bracket cover 10. Center seat belt retractor and belt assembly 2. D-ring anchor 11. Seat belt buckles 3. Seat belt retractor and belt assembly RH 12. Center seat belt anchor bracket 13. Seat belt retractor and belt assembly LH REMOVAL CAUTION: ● Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. Revision: October 2004 SB-8 2005 Titan SEAT BELTS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Remove rear kicking plates. Refer to EI-38, "KICKING PLATES" . Remove rear seat assembly. Refer to SE-100, "REAR SEAT" . Remove seat belt D-ring anchor bolt cover and bolt. Remove seat belt lower anchor cover and bolt. Remove lower side finisher. Refer to EI-36, "BODY SIDE TRIM" . Remove seat belt retractor anchor bolt and the seat belt assembly. Remove center seat belt lower anchor bolt. Remove center seat belt retractor. Remove center anchor bracket cover. Remove push pins from center seat belt webbing sleeve. Remove bolts from anchor bracket and remove center seat belt retractor and belt assembly. Remove center belt bracket from floor. Remove seat belt buckles. A B C D E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Attach rear center seat belt retractor anchor bracket bolts before seat installation. ● Attach rear center seat belt retractor anchor bolt after seat installation with the seat cushion raised. F G SB I J K L M Revision: October 2004 SB-9 2005 Titan SEAT BELTS Seat Belt Inspection EHS0013P AFTER A COLLISION WARNING: Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware after any collision. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Failure to do so could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Seat belt pre-tensioners should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision in which the air bags are deployed. Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if: ● The seat belt was in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly). ● The seat belt was damaged in an accident. (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide). ● The seat belt attaching point was damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage or distortion and repair as necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly. ● Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out. ● The seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the collision in which the air bags are deployed. PRELIMINARY CHECKS 1. a. b. 2. 3. 4. 5. a. b. c. Check the seat belt warning lamp/chime for proper operation as follows: Switch ignition ON. The seat belt warning lamp should illuminate. Also, the seat belt warning chime should sound for about seven seconds. Fasten drivers seat belt. The seat belt warning lamp should go out and the chime (if sounding) should stop. If the air bag warning lamp is blinking, conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II, and air bag warning lamp. Refer to SRS-21, "SRS Operation Check" . Check that the seat belt retractor, seat belt anchor and buckle bolts are securely attached. Check the shoulder seat belt guide and shoulder belt height adjuster for front seats. Ensure guide swivels freely and that belt lays flat and does not bind in guide. Ensure height adjuster operates properly and holds securely. Check retractor operation: Fully extend the seat belt webbing and check for twists, tears or other damage. Allow the seat belt to retract. Ensure that belt returns smoothly and completely into the retractor. If the seat belt does not return smoothly, wipe the inside of the loops with a clean paper cloth, because dirt built up in the loops of the upper anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly. Fasten the seat belt. Check the seat belt returns smoothly and completely to the retractor. If the belt does not return smoothly, the cause may be an accumulation of dust or dirt. Use the “SEAT BELT TAPE SET” and perform the following steps. Inspect the front seat belt through-anchor: 1. Pull the seat belt out to a length of 500 mm (19.69 in) or more. 2. Use a clip or other device to hold the seat belt at the center pillar belt opening. 3. Pass a thin wire through the through-anchor belt opening. Hold both ends of the wire and pull taut while moving it up and down several times along the belt opening surface to remove dirt. 4. Any dirt that cannot be removed with the wire can be removed by cleaning the opening with a clean cloth. 5. Apply tape at the point where the belt contacts the through-anchor belt opening. NOTE: Apply the tape so that there is no looseness or wrinkling. 6. Remove the clip holding the seat belt and check that the belt returns smoothly. 7. Repeat steps above as necessary to check the other seat belts. Revision: October 2004 SB-10 2005 Titan SEAT BELTS SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ON-VEHICLE CHECK Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) and Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) A NOTE: All seat belt retractors are of the Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) type. In an emergency (sudden stop) the retractor will lock and prevent the belt from extending any further. All 3-point type seat belt retractors except the driver's seat belt also have an Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) mode. The ALR mode (also called child restraint mode) is used when installing child seats. The ALR mode is activated when the seat belt is fully extended. When the belt is then retracted partially, the ALR mode automatically locks the seat belt in a specific position so the belt cannot be extended any further. To cancel the ALR mode, allow the seat belt to fully wind back into the retractor. Check the seat belt retractors using the following test(s) to determine if a retractor assembly is operating properly. B C D ELR Function Stationary Check Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and prevent the belt from extending further. E ALR Function Stationary Check 1. 2. 3. 4. Pull out entire length of seat belt from retractor until a click is heard. Retract the belt partially. A clicking noise should be heard as the belt retracts indicating that the retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode. Grasp the seat belt and try to pull out the retractor. The belt must lock and not extend any further. If necessary replace the retractor assembly. Allow the entire length of the belt to retract to cancel the automatic locking mode. F G SB ELR Function Moving Check WARNING: Perform the following test in a safe, open area clear of other vehicles and obstructions (for example, a large, empty parking lot). Road surface must be paved and dry. DO NOT perform the following test on wet or gravel roads or on public streets and highways. This could result in an accident and serious personal injury. The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event the retractor does not lock. 1. Fasten drivers seat belt. Buckle a passenger into the seat for the belt that is to be tested. 2. Proceed to the designated safe area. 3. Drive the vehicle at approximately 16 km/h (10 MPH). Notify any passengers of a pending sudden stop. The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event the retractor does not lock. Apply brakes firmly and make a very hard stop. During stop, seat belts should lock and not be extended. If the seat belt retractor assembly does not lock, perform the retractor off-vehicle check. I J K L M Revision: October 2004 SB-11 2005 Titan SEAT BELTS SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE CHECK 1. 2. Remove the seat belt retractor assembly. Slowly pull out belt while tilting the retractor assembly forward from the mounted position without twisting the retractor assembly as shown in the illustration. LRS199 15 degrees or less tilt 35 degrees or more tilt 3. : Belt can be pulled out. : Belt locks and cannot be pulled out. If NG, replace the retractor assembly. Revision: October 2004 SB-12 2005 Titan LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM Removal and Installation PFP:75466 A EHS0013Q NOTE: The LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for Children) system is not serviceable. B C D E F G SB I J K L M Revision: October 2004 SB-13 2005 Titan TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT Removal and Installation PFP:88000 EHS0013R WHIA0141E 1. Fold rear seat backs down. 2. Remove bolts and remove tether anchors. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 SB-14 2005 Titan K ELECTRICAL A B SECTION STARTING & CHARGING SYSTEM C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 2 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 2 PREPARATION ........................................................... 3 Special Service Tool ................................................. 3 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3 BATTERY .................................................................... 4 How to Handle Battery ............................................. 4 METHODS OF PREVENTING OVER-DISCHARGE ............................................................... 4 CHECKING ELECTROLYTE LEVEL .................... 4 SPECIFIC GRAVITY CHECK ............................... 5 CHARGING THE BATTERY ................................. 6 Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester .......................................................... 6 DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART .................. 8 Removal and Installation .......................................... 9 REMOVAL ............................................................. 9 INSTALLATION ..................................................... 9 STARTING SYSTEM ................................................ 10 System Description ................................................ 10 Wiring Diagram — START — ..................................11 Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester ........................................................ 12 DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART ................ 12 WORK FLOW ...................................................... 13 Revision: October 2004 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 ........................... 14 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 ........................... 15 MINIMUM SPECIFICATION OF CRANKING VOLTAGE REFERENCING COOLANT TEMPERATURE ......................................................... 16 Removal and Installation ........................................ 16 REMOVAL ........................................................... 16 INSTALLATION ................................................... 16 CHARGING SYSTEM ............................................... 17 System Description ................................................. 17 Wiring Diagram — CHARGE — ............................. 18 Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester ......................................................... 19 DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART ................ 20 WORK FLOW ...................................................... 21 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 ........................... 22 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 ........................... 23 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 ........................... 23 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 ........................... 24 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5 ........................... 25 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR .............................. 26 Removal and Installation ........................................ 26 REMOVAL ........................................................... 26 INSTALLATION ................................................... 26 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 27 Battery .................................................................... 27 Starter ..................................................................... 27 Generator ............................................................... 27 SC-1 2005 Titan F G H I J SC L M PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EKS00A89 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis EKS00A8A When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" . ● PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" for power distribution circuit. When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-11, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES". ● GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident". Revision: October 2004 SC-2 2005 Titan PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tool PFP:00002 A EKS00A8B Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-44373) Battery/Starting/Charging system tester B Model 620 C D SEL403X E F Commercial Service Tools EKS00A8C Tool name G Description Power tool Loosening bolts and nuts H I PBIC0190E J SC L M Revision: October 2004 SC-3 2005 Titan BATTERY BATTERY How to Handle Battery PFP:AYBGL EKS00A8D CAUTION: ● If it becomes necessary to start the engine with a booster battery and jumper cables, use a 12-volt booster battery. ● After connecting battery cables, ensure that they are tightly clamped to battery terminals for good contact. ● Never add distilled water through the hole used to check specific gravity. METHODS OF PREVENTING OVER-DISCHARGE The following precautions must be taken to prevent over-discharging a battery. ● The battery surface (particularly its top) should always be kept clean and dry. ● The terminal connections should be clean and tight. ● At every routine maintenance, check the electrolyte level. This also applies to batteries designated as “low maintenance” and “maintenance-free”. MEL040F ● When the vehicle is not going to be used over a long period of time, disconnect the negative battery terminal. MEL041F ● Check the charge condition of the battery. Periodically check the specific gravity of the electrolyte. Keep a close check on charge condition to prevent over-discharge. MEL042F CHECKING ELECTROLYTE LEVEL WARNING: Do not allow battery fluid to come in contact with skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After touching a battery, do not touch or rub your eyes until you have thoroughly washed your hands. If acid contacts eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Revision: October 2004 SC-4 2005 Titan BATTERY Remove the cell plug using a suitable tool. Add distilled water up to the MAX level. ● ● A B C MEL043F D Sulphation A battery will be completely discharged if it is left unattended for a long time and the specific gravity will become less than 1.100. This may result in sulphation on the cell plates. To determine if a battery has been “sulphated”, note its voltage and current when charging it. As shown in the figure, less current and higher voltage are observed in the initial stage of charging sulphated batteries. A sulphated battery may sometimes be brought back into service by means of a long, slow charge, 12 hours or more, followed by a battery capacity test. E F G PKIA2353E SPECIFIC GRAVITY CHECK 1. 2. H Read hydrometer and thermometer indications at eye level. Use the following chart to correct your hydrometer reading according to electrolyte temperature. I J SC MEL042FA Hydrometer Temperature Correction L Battery electrolyte temperature °C (°F) Add to specific gravity reading 71 (160) 0.032 66 (150) 0.028 60 (140) 0.024 54 (130) 0.020 49 (120) 0.016 43 (110) 0.012 38 (100) 0.008 32 (90) 0.004 27 (80) 0 21 (70) −0.004 16 (60) −0.008 10 (50) −0.012 4 (40) −0.016 −1 (30) −0.020 −7 (20) −0.024 Revision: October 2004 SC-5 M 2005 Titan BATTERY Battery electrolyte temperature °C (°F) Add to specific gravity reading −12 (10) −0.028 −18 (0) −0.032 Corrected specific gravity Approximate charge condition 1.260 - 1.280 Fully charged 1.230 - 1.250 3/4 charged 1.200 - 1.220 1/2 charged 1.170 - 1.190 1/4 charged 1.140 - 1.160 Almost discharged 1.110 - 1.130 Completely discharged CHARGING THE BATTERY CAUTION: ● Do not “quick charge” a fully discharged battery. ● Keep the battery away from open flame while it is being charged. ● When connecting the charger, connect the leads first, then turn on the charger. Do not turn on the charger first, as this may cause a spark. ● If battery electrolyte temperature rises above 55°C (131°F), stop charging. Always charge battery at a temperature below 55°C (131°F). Charging Rates Amps Time 50 1 hour 25 2 hours 10 5 hours 5 10 hours Do not charge at more than 50 ampere rate. NOTE: The ammeter reading on your battery charger will automatically decrease as the battery charges. This indicates that the voltage of the battery is increasing normally as the state of charge improves. The charging amps indicated above refer to initial charge rate. ● If, after charging, the specific gravity of any two cells varies more than 0.050, the battery should be replaced. Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester EKS00A8E CAUTION: When working with batteries, always wear appropriate eye protection. NOTE: ● To ensure a complete and thorough diagnosis, the battery, starter and generator test segments must be done as a set from start to finish. ● If battery surface charge is detected while testing, the tester will prompt you to turn on the headlights to remove the surface charge. ● If necessary, the tester will prompt you to determine if the battery temperature is above or below 0°C (32°F). Choose the appropriate selection by pressing the up or down arrow button, then press “ENTER” to make the selection. Revision: October 2004 SC-6 2005 Titan BATTERY 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn off all loads on the vehicle electrical system. Clean or repair as necessary. Visually inspect the battery, battery terminals and cable ends with ignition switch in “OFF” position. NOTE: The contact surface between the battery terminals, cable ends and tester leads must be clean for a valid test. A poor connection will prevent testing and a “CHECK CONNECTION” message will appear during the test procedures. If this occurs, clean the battery post and terminals, reconnect them and restart the test. Connect the red tester lead clamp to the positive battery terminal, and the black to the negative terminal. The tester will turn on automatically. Using the arrow keys, select “IN-VEHICLE” on the tester and then press the “ENTER” key. A B C SEL404X D E F G SEL405X 5. 6. 7. Locate the battery type and rating stamped or written on the top case of the battery to be tested. NOTE: The battery type and rating will have either of the following. CCA: Cold Cranking Amps (490 CCA, 550 CCA, etc.) JIS: Japanese Industrial Standard. Battery is stamped with a number such as: 80D26L: 80 (rank of output), D (physical size-depth), 26 (width in cm). The last character L (post configuration) is not input into the tester. The tester requires the rating for the battery be entered exactly as it is written or stamped on the battery. Do not attempt a CCA conversion for JIS stamped batteries. JIS must be input directly. Using the arrow and “ENTER” keys alternately, select the battery type and rating. NOTE: The tester lists five choices; CCA, JIS, IEC, DIN, and EN. Only use CCA or JIS. Press “ENTER” to begin the test. Diagnosis results are displayed on the tester. Refer to SC-12, "DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART" . I J SC SEL406X L M SEL407X Revision: October 2004 SC-7 H 2005 Titan BATTERY 8. 9. Press “ENTER”, then test output code is displayed. Record the test output code on the repair order. Toggle back to the “DIAGNOSTIC SCREEN” for test results. NOTE: ● If necessary, the tester will ask the user to determine if the battery has just been charged. Choose the appropriate selection by pressing the up or down arrow button and then press the “ENTER” button to make the selection. ● When testing a battery installed in a vehicle that has recently been driven, select “BEFORE CHARGE”. SEL576X ● If the battery has just been slow charged due to a “CHARGE & RETEST” decision by the tester, and the tester asks the user “BEFORE CHARGE/AFTER CHARGE”, select “AFTER CHARGE”. DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART Diagnostic item Service procedure GOOD BATTERY Battery is OK. Refer to SC-12, "Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester" . REPLACE BATTERY Replace battery. Before replacing battery, clean the battery cable clamps and battery posts. Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester. If second test result is “Replace Battery”, then do so. Perform battery test again to confirm repair. BAD CELL-REPLACE Replace the battery. Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester to confirm repair. GOOD-RECHARGE Perform the slow battery charging procedure. (Initial rate of charge is 10A for 12 hours.) Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester. Perform the slow battery charging. (Initial rate of charge is 10A for 12 hours.) Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester to confirm repair. CHARGE & RETEST Revision: October 2004 NOTE: If the tester asks the user “BEFORE CHARGE/AFTER CHARGE”, select “AFTER CHARGE”. SC-8 2005 Titan BATTERY Removal and Installation EKS00A8F A REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Disconnect the negative battery terminal and positive battery terminal. CAUTION: Remove negative battery terminal first. Remove the battery cover. Remove the battery clamp bolt and battery clamp. Remove the battery. B C D WKIA1385E INSTALLATION E Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: When installing, install the positive battery terminal first. Battery clamp bolt Battery terminal nut F : 3.5 N·m (0.36 kg-m, 31 in-lb) : 3.5 N·m (0.36 kg-m, 31 in-lb) G H I J SC L M Revision: October 2004 SC-9 2005 Titan STARTING SYSTEM STARTING SYSTEM System Description PFP:23300 EKS00A8G Power is supplied at all times: ● through 40A fusible link (letter m , located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to ignition switch terminal B. With the ignition switch in the START position, power is supplied: ● from ignition switch terminal ST ● to IPDM E/R terminal 21. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied to IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room) CPU. With the selector lever in the P or N position, power is supplied: ● through A/T assembly terminal 9 ● to IPDM E/R terminal 48. Ground is supplied at all times: ● to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 59 ● through body grounds E9, E15 and E24. Then the starter relay is turned on. The IPDM E/R is energized and power is supplied: ● from terminal 19 of the IPDM E/R ● to terminal 1 of the starter motor windings. The starter motor plunger closes and provides a closed circuit between the battery and the starter motor. The starter motor is grounded to the cylinder block. With power and ground supplied, the starter motor operates. Revision: October 2004 SC-10 2005 Titan STARTING SYSTEM Wiring Diagram — START — EKS00A8H A B C D E F G H I J SC L M WKWA2189E Revision: October 2004 SC-11 2005 Titan STARTING SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester EKS00A8I NOTE: To ensure a complete and thorough diagnosis, the battery, starter and generator test segments must be done as a set from start to finish. 1. Turn off all loads on the vehicle electrical system. 2. Perform battery test with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester. Refer to SC-12, "Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/ Charging System Tester" . 3. Press “ENTER” to begin the starting system test. SEL408X 4. Start the engine. SEL409X 5. Diagnosis result is displayed on the tester. Refer to SC-12, "DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART" . NOTE: ● If the starter performs normally but the engine does not start, perform engine diagnosis. ● For intermittent “NO CRANK” or “NO STARTER OPERATION” incidents, refer to SC-15, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2" . SEL410X DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART Diagnostic item CRANKING VOLTAGE NORMAL Service procedure Go to SC-13, "WORK FLOW" . CRANKING VOLTAGE LOW CHARGE BATTERY Perform the slow battery charging procedure. (Initial rate of charge is 10A for 12 hours.) Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester. Refer to SC-12, "Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester" . REPLACE BATTERY Before replacing battery, clean the battery cable clamps and battery posts. Perform battery test again with Battery/Starting/Charging system tester. Refer to SC-12, "Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester" . If second test result is “REPLACE BATTERY”, then do so. Perform battery test again to confirm repair. Revision: October 2004 SC-12 2005 Titan STARTING SYSTEM WORK FLOW A B C D E F G H I J SC L M WKIA3559E *1 SC-12 *4 SC-15 Revision: October 2004 *2 SC-14 *3 SC-13 SC-15 2005 Titan STARTING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 Check Starter Motor Circuit 1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO STARTER MOTOR 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the fuel pump fuse. Crank or start the engine (where possible) until the fuel pressure is released. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Check that the starter motor connector F27 connection is clean and tight. Check voltage between starter motor connector F27 terminal 2 (B/R) and ground using a digital circuit tester. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check harness between the battery and the starter motor for open circuit. WKIA2105E 2. CHECK VOLTAGE DROP ON STARTER MOTOR CIRCUIT Check voltage between starter motor connector F27 terminal 2 (B/R) and battery positive terminal using a digital circuit tester. Ignition switch in START. : Less than 0.5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness between the battery and the starter motor for poor continuity. WKIA2106E 3. CHECK VOLTAGE DROP ON STARTER MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT Check voltage between starter motor case and battery negative terminal using a digital circuit tester. Ignition switch in START. : Less than 0.2V OK or NG OK >> Starter motor ground circuit is OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to SC-13, "WORK FLOW" . NG >> Check harness between the starter motor case and ground for poor continuity. WKIA3437E Revision: October 2004 SC-14 2005 Titan STARTING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 Check Magnetic Switch Circuit A 1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR MAGNETIC SWITCH 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B Remove the fuel pump fuse. Crank or start the engine (where possible) until the fuel pressure is released. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Disconnect starter motor connector F28. Check voltage between starter motor connector F28 terminal 1 (W/R) and ground using a digital circuit tester. Ignition switch in START. C D : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the following. ● 40A fusible link (letter m , located in fuse and fusible link box) ● Ignition switch ● Starter relay [within the intelligent power distribution module engine room (IPDM E/R)] ● Harness for open or short E F WKIA2108E G 2. CHECK VOLTAGE DROP ON MAGNETIC SWITCH CIRCUIT H 1. 2. 3. I Turn the ignition switch OFF. Connect starter motor connector F28. Check voltage between starter motor connector F28 terminal 1 (W/R) and battery positive terminal using a digital circuit tester. Ignition switch in START. J : Less than 1V OK or NG OK >> Magnetic switch circuit is OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to SC-13, "WORK FLOW" . NG >> Check harness between the battery and the magnetic switch for poor continuity. SC L WKIA1792E M Revision: October 2004 SC-15 2005 Titan STARTING SYSTEM MINIMUM SPECIFICATION OF CRANKING VOLTAGE REFERENCING COOLANT TEMPERATURE Engine coolant temperature Voltage V −30°C to −20°C (−22°F to −4°F) 8.4 −19°C to −10°C (−2°F to 14°F) 8.9 −9°C to 0°C (16°F to 32°F) 9.3 More than 1°C (More than 34°F) 9.7 Removal and Installation EKS00A8J REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the intake manifold. Refer to EM-15, "Removal and Installation" . Remove/disconnect the starter harness connectors. Remove the two starter bolts, using power tools. Remove the starter. WKIA1388E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION: Tighten terminal nut carefully. Terminal nut Revision: October 2004 : 10.8 N·m (1.1 kg-m, 8 ft-lb) SC-16 2005 Titan CHARGING SYSTEM CHARGING SYSTEM System Description PFP:23100 A EKS00A8K The generator provides DC voltage to operate the vehicle's electrical system and to keep the battery charged. The voltage output is controlled by the IC regulator. Power is supplied at all times: ● to generator terminal 4 ● through 10A fuse (No. 30, located in the fuse and fusible link box). Terminal 1 supplies power to charge the battery and operate the vehicle's electrical system. Output voltage is controlled by the IC regulator at terminal 4 detecting the input voltage. The charging circuit is protected by the 140A fusible link (letter a , located in the fusible link box). Ground is supplied: ● to generator terminal 2 ● through body ground E203. With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied: ● through 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)] ● to combination meter terminal 24 for the charge warning lamp. Ground is supplied to terminal 13 of the combination meter through terminal 3 of the generator. With power and ground supplied, the charge warning lamp will illuminate. When the generator is providing sufficient voltage with the engine running, the ground is opened and the charge warning lamp will go off. If the charge warning lamp illuminates with the engine running, a fault is indicated. B C D E F G H I J SC L M Revision: October 2004 SC-17 2005 Titan CHARGING SYSTEM Wiring Diagram — CHARGE — EKS00A8L WKWA1140E Revision: October 2004 SC-18 2005 Titan CHARGING SYSTEM Trouble Diagnoses with Battery/Starting/Charging System Tester EKS00A8M NOTE: To ensure a complete and thorough diagnosis, the battery, starter and generator test segments must be done as a set from start to finish. 1. Turn off all loads on the vehicle electrical system. 2. Perform battery and starting system test with Battery/Starting/ Charging system tester. 3. Press “ENTER” to begin the charging system test. 4. Start engine. A B C D E SEL417X 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Press “ENTER” until “LOADS OFF REV ENGINE 5 SEC” is displayed. Raise and hold the engine speed at 1,500 to 2,000 rpm for about 5 seconds, then return the engine to idle. Once the increase in engine rpm is detected, press “ENTER” to continue. NOTE: ● If after 30 seconds an increase in engine idle speed is not detected, “RPM NOT DETECTED” will display. ● Some engines may have a higher idle initially after starting, particularly when the engine is cold. The tester may detect this without any other action being taken. If this occurs, continue on with the testing process. The final results will not be affected. The tester now checks the engine at idle and performs the DIODE/RIPPLE check. When complete, the tester will prompt you to turn on the following electrical loads. ● Heater fan set to highest speed. Do not run the A/C or windshield defroster. ● Headlamp high beam ● Rear window defogger NOTE: Do not run the windshield wipers or any other cyclical loads. F G H SEL418X J SC L SEL419X Press “ENTER” to continue. SEL420X Revision: October 2004 SC-19 I 2005 Titan M CHARGING SYSTEM 10. Raise and hold the engine speed at 1,500 to 2,000 rpm for about 5 seconds, then return the engine to idle. Once the increase in engine rpm is detected, press “ENTER” to continue. NOTE: If after 30 seconds an increase in engine idle speed is not detected, “RPM NOT DETECTED” will be displayed. Press “ENTER” to restart the test. SEL421X 11. Diagnostic result is displayed on the tester. Refer to SC-20, "DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART" . SEL422X 12. Press “ENTER” then test output code is displayed. Record the test output code on the repair order. 13. Toggle back to the “DIAGNOSTIC SCREEN” for test results. SEL577X DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART Diagnostic item CHARGING SYSTEM NORMAL Service procedure Charging system is normal and will also show DIODE RIPPLE test result. NO CHARGING VOLTAGE LOW CHARGING VOLTAGE Go to SC-21, "WORK FLOW" . HIGH CHARGING VOLTAGE DIODE RIPPLE NORMAL Diode ripple is OK and will also show CHARGING VOLTAGE test result. EXCESS RIPPLE DETECTED Replace the generator. Refer to SC-26, "Removal and Installation" . Perform “DIODE RIPPLE” test again using Battery/Starting/Charging system tester to confirm repair. DIODE RIPPLE NOT DETECTED Go to SC-21, "WORK FLOW" . Revision: October 2004 SC-20 2005 Titan CHARGING SYSTEM WORK FLOW A B C D E F G H I J SC L M WKIA3560E Revision: October 2004 SC-21 2005 Titan CHARGING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 Check Charge Warning Lamp Circuit 1. CHECK CHARGE WARNING LAMP CIRCUIT CONNECTION 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Check to see if terminal 3 is clean and tight. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal 3 connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging system test. 2. CHECK CHARGE WARNING LAMP CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect E205 connector from generator. Apply ground to connector E205 terminal 3 (BR/W) with the ignition switch in the ON position. Charge warning lamp should light up. OK or NG OK >> GO TO SC-21, "WORK FLOW" . NG >> Check the following. ● 10A fuse [No. 14, located in fuse block (J/B)] ● Charge warning lamp ● Harness for open or short between combination meter and fuse ● Harness for open or short between combination meter and generator Revision: October 2004 SC-22 WKIA2110E 2005 Titan CHARGING SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 Check Battery Circuit A 1. CHECK BATTERY CIRCUIT CONNECTION 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Check to see if terminal 1 is clean and tight. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal 1 connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging system test. 2. CHECK BATTERY CIRCUIT Check voltage between generator connector E206 terminal 1 (B/R) and ground using a digital circuit tester. B C D E Battery voltage should exist. F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following. ● 140A fusible link (letter a , located in fusible link box) ● Harness for open or short between generator and fusible link G WKIA2111E H 3. CHECK VOLTAGE DROP ON BATTERY CIRCUIT 1. 2. I Start the engine. Check voltage between generator connector E206 terminal 1 (B/ R) and battery positive terminal using a digital circuit tester. With engine running at idle and warm. J : Less than 0.2V OK or NG OK >> Replace the generator. Refer to SC-26, "Removal and Installation" . Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging system test. NG >> Check harness between the battery and the generator for poor continuity. SC L WKIA2112E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 Check Charge Warning Lamp Circuit M 1. CHECK CHARGE WARNING LAMP CONNECTION 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Check to see if terminal 3 is clean and tight. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal 3 connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging system test. Revision: October 2004 SC-23 2005 Titan CHARGING SYSTEM 2. CHECK CHARGE WARNING LAMP CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect E205 connector from generator. Apply ground to connector E205 terminal 3 (BR/W) with the ignition switch in the ON position. Charge warning lamp should light up. OK or NG OK >> Replace the generator. Refer to SC-26, "Removal and Installation" . Confirm repair by performing complete battery/starting/charging system test. NG >> Check the following. ● 10A fuse [No. 14, located in fuse block (J/B)] ● Charge warning lamp ● Harness for open or short between combination meter and fuse ● Harness for open or short between combination meter and generator WKIA2110E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 Check Battery Circuit 1. CHECK BATTERY CIRCUIT CONNECTION 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Check to see if terminal 1 is clean and tight. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal 1 connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging system test. 2. CHECK BATTERY CIRCUIT Check voltage between generator connector E206 terminal 1 (B/R) and ground using a digital circuit tester. Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following. ● 140A fusible link (letter a , located in fusible link box) ● Harness for open or short between generator and fusible link WKIA2111E 3. CHECK VOLTAGE DROP ON BATTERY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Start the engine. Check voltage between generator connector E206 terminal 1 (B/ R) and battery positive terminal using a digital circuit tester. With engine running at idle and warm. : Less than 0.2V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check harness between the battery and the generator for poor continuity. WKIA2112E Revision: October 2004 SC-24 2005 Titan CHARGING SYSTEM 4. CHECK GENERATOR DRIVE BELT TENSION A 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Check generator drive belt tension. Refer to EM-12, "DRIVE BELTS" . OK or NG OK >> Replace the generator. Refer to SC-26, "Removal and Installation" . Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging system test. NG >> Readjust drive belt tension. Refer to EM-12, "Tension Adjustment" . DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5 Check Voltage Regulator Circuit B C D 1. CHECK VOLTAGE REGULATOR CIRCUIT CONNECTION 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Check to see if terminal 4 is clean and tight. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair terminal 4 connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging system test. E 2. CHECK VOLTAGE REGULATOR CIRCUIT G Check voltage between generator connector E205 terminal 4 (Y/B) and ground using a digital circuit tester. F H Battery voltage should exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following. ● 10A fuse (No. 30, located in fuse and fusible link box) ● Harness for open or short between generator and fuse I J WKIA2113E SC 3. CHECK VOLTAGE DROP ON VOLTAGE REGULATOR CIRCUIT 1. 2. Start the engine. Check voltage between generator connector E205 terminal 4 (Y/ B) and battery positive terminal using a digital circuit tester. With engine running at idle and warm. : Less than 0.2V OK or NG OK >> Replace the generator. Refer to SC-26, "Removal and Installation" . Confirm repair by performing complete Battery/Starting/Charging system test. NG >> Check harness between the battery and the generator for poor continuity. Revision: October 2004 L SC-25 M WKIA2114E 2005 Titan CHARGING SYSTEM MALFUNCTION INDICATOR The IC regulator warning function activates to illuminate “CHARGE” warning lamp, if any of the following symptoms occur while generator is operating: ● Excessive voltage is produced. ● No voltage is produced. Removal and Installation EKS00A8N REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Remove the fan shroud. Refer to CO-12, "Removal and Installation" . Remove the drive belt. Refer to EM-12, "Removal and Installation" . Remove lower bracket, using power tools. Remove the generator upper bolt, using power tools. Remove/disconnect the generator harness connectors. Remove the generator. WKIA1390E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Install the generator and check the tension of the drive belt. Refer to EM-12, "Tension Adjustment" . CAUTION: Tighten terminal nut carefully. Terminal nut Revision: October 2004 : 10.8 N·m (1.1 kg-m, 8 ft-lb) SC-26 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Battery PFP:00030 A EKS00A8P Standard battery Heavy duty battery Gr. 24 Gr. 27 Capacity (20 HR) minimum V-AH 72 80 Cold cranking current (For reference value) 650 710 Type A B C Starter EKS00A8Q Application D All models Manufacturer Mitsubishi M002T85571ZCKD Type Reduction gear type System voltage 12V Terminal voltage No-load E 11V Current F Less than 145A Revolution More than 3,300 rpm Minimum diameter of commutator 31.4 mm (1.236 in) Minimum length of brush 11.0 mm (0.433 in) Brush spring tension G 26.7-36.1 N (2.72 - 3.68 kg, 5.93 - 8.02 lb) Clearance between pinion front edge and pinion stopper H 0.5 - 2.0 mm (0.020 - 0.079 in) Generator EKS00A8R LR1130-701 Type J Hitachi Nominal rating 12V-130A Ground polarity Negative Minimum revolution under no-load (When 13.5 volts is applied) 1,200 rpm SC More than 78A/1,800 rpm More than 108A/2,500 rpm More than 130A/5,000 rpm Hot output current (When 13.5 volts is applied) Regulated output voltage 14.1 - 14.7V @ 25°C Minimum length of brush 6 mm (0.24 in) Brush spring pressure L M 1.0 - 3.432 N (0.102 - 0.3501 kg, 0.22 - 0.7715 lbs) Slip ring minimum outer diameter 26 mm (1.02 in) Rotor (Field coil) resistance Revision: October 2004 I 2.1 ohms SC-27 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Revision: October 2004 SC-28 2005 Titan I BODY A B SECTION SEAT C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3 Precautions for Work ................................................ 3 PREPARATION ........................................................... 4 Special Service Tool ................................................. 4 Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 4 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES..... 5 Work Flow ................................................................ 5 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW ..................................... 5 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE ....... 6 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS ........... 6 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE ...................................................... 6 REPAIR THE CAUSE ........................................... 6 CONFIRM THE REPAIR ....................................... 7 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ........... 7 INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................... 7 CENTER CONSOLE ............................................. 7 DOORS ................................................................. 7 TRUNK .................................................................. 8 SUNROOF/HEADLINING ..................................... 8 OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)..... 8 SEATS ................................................................... 8 UNDERHOOD ....................................................... 8 Diagnostic Worksheet .............................................. 9 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER ...........................11 ComponentPartsAndHarnessConnectorLocation ....11 Manual Operation ....................................................11 Automatic Operation .............................................. 12 System Description ................................................ 12 FAIL- SAFE MODE ............................................. 13 CANCEL OF FAIL-SAFE MODE ......................... 13 MEMORY STORING AND KEYFOB INTERLOCK STORING ................................................. 14 MEMORY OPERATION ...................................... 15 ENTRY OPERATION .......................................... 15 EXITING OPERATION ........................................ 15 Revision: October 2004 SE-1 KEYFOB INTERLOCK OPERATION .................. 16 CAN Communication System Description .............. 16 Schematic ............................................................... 17 Wiring Diagram — AUT/DP — ............................... 19 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM .............. 29 Terminals and Reference Values for Driver Seat Control Unit ............................................................. 29 Terminals and Reference Values for Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit .................................. 31 Work Flow ............................................................... 33 Preliminary Check .................................................. 34 SETTING CHANGE FUNCTION ......................... 34 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION ...................................................... 34 CONSULT-II Function (AUTO DRIVE POS.) .......... 37 CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE .......... 37 SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS ............................. 39 DATA MONITOR ................................................. 40 ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 41 CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULTII (Self-Diagnosis) ................................................... 41 Symptom Chart ....................................................... 41 Sliding Motor Circuit Inspection .............................. 43 Reclining Motor LH Circuit Inspection .................... 44 Lifting Motor (Front) Circuit Inspection ................... 45 Lifting Motor (Rear) Circuit Inspection .................... 47 Pedal Adjusting Motor Circuit Inspection ................ 48 Mirror Motor LH Circuit Check ................................ 49 Mirror Motor RH Circuit Check ............................... 51 Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection ............................ 53 Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection ........................ 54 Lifting Sensor (Front) Circuit Inspection ................. 55 Lifting Sensor (Rear) Circuit Inspection .................. 56 Pedal Adjusting Sensor Circuit Inspection .............. 57 Mirror Sensor LH Circuit Check .............................. 58 Mirror Sensor RH Circuit Check ............................. 60 Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection ............................. 62 Reclining Switch Inspection .................................... 63 Lifting Switch (Front) Circuit Inspection .................. 65 Lifting Switch (Rear) Circuit Inspection ................... 66 2005 Titan F G H SE J K L M Power Seat Switch Ground Inspection ................... 67 Pedal Adjusting Switch Circuit Inspection .............. 68 Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Changeover Switch) Circuit Check ............................................. 70 Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Mirror Switch) Circuit Check .......................................................... 71 Door Mirror Remote Control Switch Ground Circuit Inspection ............................................................... 73 Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection .................. 74 Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection ..... 75 Door Mirror Sensor Power Supply and Ground Circuit inspection ......................................................... 77 A/TDevice (Detent Switch) CircuitInspection(Floor Shift) ....................................................................... 78 A/T Device (Detent Switch) Circuit Inspection (Column Shift) ............................................................... 79 Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection ................. 80 UART Communication Line Circuit Inspection ........ 81 Removal and Installation ........................................ 83 POWER SEAT ........................................................... 84 Revision: October 2004 Schematic ...............................................................84 Wiring Diagram — SEAT — ....................................85 HEATED SEAT ..........................................................88 Description ..............................................................88 Wiring Diagram — HSEAT — .................................89 FRONT SEAT ............................................................91 Removal and Installation .........................................91 REMOVAL ............................................................96 INSTALLATION ....................................................96 Disassembly and Assembly ....................................96 SEATBACK TRIM AND PAD ...............................96 REMOVAL OF SEATBACK ASSEMBLY .............97 INSTALLATION OF SEATBACK ASSEMBLY .....98 SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD ........................98 REAR SEAT ............................................................. 100 Removal and Installation ....................................... 100 REMOVAL ......................................................... 100 INSTALLATION ................................................. 100 Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 101 SE-2 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A EIS004F4 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precautions for Work ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● – – ● ● B C D E F G EIS004F5 When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component H may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth. When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it. SE Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and keep them. Replace a deformed or damaged clip. If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with new one. J Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque. After re-installation is completed, be sure to check that each part works normally. Follow the steps below to clean components. K Water soluble foul: Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, and wring the water out of the cloth to wipe the fouled area. Then rub with a soft and dry cloth. L Oily foul: Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%), and wipe the fouled area. Then dip a cloth into fresh water, and wring the water out of the cloth to wipe the detergent off. Then rub M with a soft and dry cloth. Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol, or gasoline. For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner. Revision: October 2004 SE-3 2005 Titan PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tool PFP:00002 EIS004F6 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-39570) Chassis ear Locating the noise SIIA0993E — (J-43980) NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit Repairing the cause of noise SIIA0994E Commercial Service Tool EIS004F7 (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description (J-39565) Engine ear Locating the noise SIIA0995E Revision: October 2004 SE-4 2005 Titan SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Work Flow PFP:00000 A EIS004F8 B C D E F SBT842 G CUSTOMER INTERVIEW Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diag- H nostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any customer's comments; refer to SE-9, "Diagnostic Worksheet" . This information is necessary to duplicate the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. SE ● The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur). ● If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer J is concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer. ● After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when K defining the noise. ● Squeak —(Like tennis shoes on a clean floor) Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surL faces = higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping. ● Creak—(Like walking on an old wooden floor) Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch dependent on materials/often brought on by activity. M ● Rattle—(Like shaking a baby rattle) Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing clip or fastener/incorrect clearance. ● Knock —(Like a knock on a door) Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action. ● Tick—(Like a clock second hand) Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver action or road conditions. ● Thump—(Heavy, muffled knock noise) Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity. ● Buzz—(Like a bumble bee) Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact. ● Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer. ● Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level. Revision: October 2004 SE-5 2005 Titan SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair. If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following: 1) Close a door. 2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from. 3) Rev the engine. 4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”. 5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model). 6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer. ● Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs. ● If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the vehicle body. CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related to that concern or symptom. If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise. LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE 1. 2. ● ● ● ● ● Narrow down the noise to a general area.To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool (Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanic's stethoscope). Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by: removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from. Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise. tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise. Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only temporarily. feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the noise. placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise. looking for loose components and contact marks. Refer to SE-7, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting" . REPAIR THE CAUSE If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely. ● If the cause is insufficient clearance between components: – separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible. – insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized NISSAN Parts Department. CAUTION: Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged. Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be ordered separately as needed. URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick] Insulates connectors, harness, etc. 76268-9E005: 100×135 mm (3.94×5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60×85 mm (2.36×3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) INSULATOR (Foam blocks) Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel. 73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick, 50×50 mm (1.97×1.97 in) INSULATOR (Light foam block) ● Revision: October 2004 SE-6 2005 Titan SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES 80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30×50 mm (1.18×1.97 in) FELT CLOTH TAPE Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications. 68370-4B000: 15×25 mm (0.59×0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll. The following materials not found in the kit can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles. UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications. SILICONE GREASE Used instead of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit. Note: Will only last a few months. SILICONE SPRAY Use when grease cannot be applied. DUCT TAPE Use to eliminate movement. CONFIRM THE REPAIR A B C D E Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet. Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting EIS004F9 F Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information. INSTRUMENT PANEL G Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between: 1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel H 2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing 3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish 4. Instrument panel to windshield SE 5. Instrument panel mounting pins 6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter 7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint J These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harK ness. CAUTION: Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will L not be able to recheck the repair. CENTER CONSOLE Components to pay attention to include: 1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher 2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C 3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console. M DOORS Pay attention to the: 1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise 2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher 3. Wiring harnesses tapping 4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise. Revision: October 2004 SE-7 2005 Titan SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES TRUNK Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner. In addition look for: 1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment 2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment 3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together 4. A loose license plate or bracket Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise. SUNROOF/HEADLINING Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following: 1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise 2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder 3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape. OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR) Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage. In addition look for: 1. Loose harness or harness connectors. 2. Front console map/reading lamp lense loose. 3. Loose screws at console attachment points. SEATS When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the noise. Cause of seat noise include: 1. Headrest rods and holder 2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame 3. The rear seatback lock and bracket These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component or applying urethane tape to the contact area. UNDERHOOD Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then transmitted into the passenger compartment. Causes of transmitted underhood noise include: 1. Any component mounted to the engine wall 2. Components that pass through the engine wall 3. Engine wall mounts and connectors 4. Loose radiator mounting pins 5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment 6. Hood striker out of adjustment These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or insulating the component causing the noise. Revision: October 2004 SE-8 2005 Titan SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Diagnostic Worksheet EIS004FA A B C D E F G H SE J K L M LIWA0276E Revision: October 2004 SE-9 2005 Titan SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES SBT844 Revision: October 2004 SE-10 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Component Parts And Harness Connector Location PFP:28491 A EIS004FB B C D E F G H SE J K L M LIIA1990E Manual Operation EIS004FC The driving position [seat position, pedal position (accelerator, brake) and door mirror position can be adjusted with the power seat switch LH, pedal adjusting switch or door mirror remote control switch. NOTE: ● The door mirrors can be manually operated with the ignition switch turned ACC or ON. ● Adjusting pedal operates only when A/T shift lever is in P position (except when ignition switch turned to OFF). ● If A/T device (detent switch) error is detected, manual adjustable pedal operation cannot be performed when ignition switch turns ON. Revision: October 2004 SE-11 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Automatic Operation EIS004FD Function Description The seat, pedal (accelerator, brake) and door mirror move to the stored driving position by pushing seat memory switch (1 or 2). Memory operation Entry/Exiting function Exiting operation At exit, the seat moves backward. (Exiting position) Entry operation At entry, the seat returns from Exiting position to the previous driving position before the Exiting operation. Perform memory operation, turnout operation and return operation by pressing keyfob unlock button. Keyfob interlock operation NOTE: ● Disconnecting the battery erases the stored memory. ● After connecting the battery, insert the key into the ignition cylinder and turn the front door switch LH ON (open)→OFF (close)→ON (open), the Entry/Exiting function becomes possible. ● After Exiting operation is carried out, return operation can be operated. Auto operation temporary stop conditions. Auto operation stop conditions. When ignition switch is turned to START during seat memory switch operation and return operation, seat memory switch operation and return operation is stopped. ● When the vehicle speed becomes 7 km/h (4 MPH) or higher (memory switch operation and entry operation). ● When the setting switch, seat memory switch 1 or 2 are pressed. ● When A/T selector lever is in any position other than P. ● When the door mirror switch is operated (when ignition switch turned to ON). ● When power seat switch turned ON. ● When pedal adjusting switch turned ON. ● When front seat sliding Entry/Exiting setting is OFF (entry/exiting operation). NOTE: During automatic operation, if the ignition switch is turned ON→START, the automatic operation is suspended. When the ignition switch returns to ON, it resumes. System Description ● ● ● EIS004FE The system automatically moves the front seat to facilitate entry/exit to/from the vehicle. The driver seat control unit can also store the optimum driving positions (front seat, pedal position and door mirror position) for 2 people. If the front seat is changed, one-touch operation allows changing to the other driving position. The settings (ON/OFF) of the automatic sliding seat (Entry/Exiting operation) at entry/exit can be changed as desired, using the display unit in the center of the instrument panel. The set content is transmitted by CAN communication, from display unit (without NAVI) or display control unit (with NAVI) to driver seat control unit. Using CONSULT-ll, the seat slide amount at entry/exit setting can be changed. Revision: October 2004 SE-12 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER FAIL- SAFE MODE When any manual and automatic operations are not performed, if any motor operations of seats or pedals are detected for T2 or more, status is judged “Output error”. OPERATED PORTION A T2 Seat sliding Approx. 0.1 sec. Seat reclining Same as above Seat lifting (Front) Same as above Seat lifting (Rear) Same as above Pedal adjust Same as above B C D CANCEL OF FAIL-SAFE MODE The mode is cancelled when the A/T selector lever is shifted to P position from any other position. E F G H SE J K L M Revision: October 2004 SE-13 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER MEMORY STORING AND KEYFOB INTERLOCK STORING ● ● Store the 2 driving positions and shifts to the stored driving position with the memory switch. Keyfob interlock function is set simultaneously with setting driving position memory. It can set driving position to memory position. LIIA1666E NOTE: ● If another keyfob interlock function setting is performed by same key, the newly registered setting is valid. ● If a new memory string is performed to memory switch that already set keyfob interlock function, keyfob interlock function setting is reset. ● If the keyfob has not been previously programmed to the vehicle, keyfob interlock function cannot set. Revision: October 2004 SE-14 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER MEMORY OPERATION A Selecting the memorized position. B C D E F LIIA0693E NOTE: The front seat position and pedal adjustment functions (see the following table) operate simultaneously in the order of priority. Priority Function Priority G Function 1 Seat sliding, (door mirror LH/RH)* 4 Seat lifter-FR 2 Pedal 5 Seat lifter-RR 3 Seat reclining H SE *: In conjunction with sliding the seat, the door mirrors are positioned. ENTRY OPERATION When the seat is in the exiting position, the following operation moves the seat to the previous position before the exiting operation. J K L M LIIA0855E EXITING OPERATION At Entry/Exiting, the seat is automatically moved to the exiting position. LIIA0856E Revision: October 2004 SE-15 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER KEYFOB INTERLOCK OPERATION ● The system performs memory operation, exiting operation and return operation by pressing keyfob unlock button. LIIA1667E NOTE: ● If Entry/Exiting operation is cancelled, the system performs memory operation only. ● If ignition switch turns ON in the middle of memory operation, the system does not perform exiting operation after memory operation. ● If ignition switch turns ON in the middle of exiting operation, entry operation starts at that time. CAN Communication System Description EIS004FF Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Revision: October 2004 SE-16 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Schematic EIS004FG A B C D E F G H SE J K L M WIWA0794E Revision: October 2004 SE-17 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER WIWA0602E Revision: October 2004 SE-18 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Wiring Diagram — AUT/DP — EIS004FH A B C D E F G H SE J K L M WIWA0577E Revision: October 2004 SE-19 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER WIWA0578E Revision: October 2004 SE-20 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER A B C D E F G H SE J K L M WIWA0579E Revision: October 2004 SE-21 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER WIWA0220E Revision: October 2004 SE-22 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER WITH FLOOR SHIFT A B C D E F G H SE J K L M WIWA0795E Revision: October 2004 SE-23 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER WITH COLUMN SHIFT WIWA0603E Revision: October 2004 SE-24 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER A B C D E F G H SE J K L M LIWA0449E Revision: October 2004 SE-25 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER LIWA0439E Revision: October 2004 SE-26 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER A B C D E F G H SE J K L M LIWA0440E Revision: October 2004 SE-27 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER WIWA0604E Revision: October 2004 SE-28 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Terminals and Reference Values for BCM EIS004FI A TERMINAL WIRE COLOR 11 O 38 W/L 39 L 40 P 47 SB 67 B 70 W/B CONDITION VOLTAGE (V) (Approx.) Ignition switch (ACC or ON) Ignition switch (ACC or ON position) Battery voltage Ignition switch (ON or START) Ignition switch (ON or START position) Battery voltage CAN-H — — CAN-L — — ITEM Front door switch LH ON (Open) → OFF (Closed) C 0 → Battery voltage Ground — 0 Battery power supply (fusible link) — Battery voltage WIRE COLOR D E Terminals and Reference Values for Driver Seat Control Unit TERMINAL B ITEM CONDITION EIS004FJ VOLTAGE (V) (Approx.) F G 1 L UART LINE (RX) Pedal adjusting switch ON (FORWARD or BACKWARD operation) H PIIA4813E 3 L CAN-H 6 O Ignition switch (ON or START) — Ignition switch (ON or START position) — SE Battery voltage J 9 L/R Reclining motor sensor signal ON (seat reclining motor operation) K SIIA0692J Other than above L 0 or 5 M ON (rear lifting motor operation) 10 W Rear lifting motor sensor signal SIIA0693J Other than above 11 12 R/B O/B Sliding switch BACKWARD signal Reclining switch BACKWARD signal ON (seat sliding switch BACKWARD operation) Other than above ON (seat reclining switch BACKWARD operation) Other than above 13 L/B Front lifting switch DOWN signal ON (front lifting switch DOWN operation) Other than above Revision: October 2004 SE-29 0 or 5 0 Battery voltage 0 Battery voltage 0 Battery voltage 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM 14 G/W Rear lifting switch DOWN signal CONDITION ON (rear lifting switch DOWN operation) Other than above 15 L/Y Pedal adjusting switch BACKWARD signal ON (pedal adjusting switch BACKWARD operation) VOLTAGE (V) (Approx.) 0 Battery voltage 0 Other than above Battery voltage 5 16 W Seat sensor power Ignition switch ON 17 W UART LINE (TX) Pedal adjusting switch ON (FORWARD or BACKWARD operation) PIIA4814E 19 P CAN-L — Selector lever in P position 21 L/R A/T device (detent switch) signal 24 Y/G Seat sliding motor sensor signal Selector lever other than P position with ignition key in ignition cylinder — 0 Battery voltage ON (seat sliding motor operation) PIIA3277E Other than above 25 LG Front lifting motor sensor signal 0 or 5 ON (front lifting motor operation) SIIA0691J Other than above. 26 P/B Seat sliding switch FORWARD signal ON (seat sliding switch FORWARD operation) Other than above 27 G/B Seat reclining switch FORWARD signal ON (seat reclining switch FORWARD operation) Other than above 28 Y/B Front lifting switch UP signal ON (front lifting switch UP operation) Other than above 29 R/W Rear lifting switch UP signal ON (rear lifting switch UP operation) Other than above 30 R Pedal adjusting switch FORWARD signal ON (pedal adjusting switch FORWARD operation) Other than above Revision: October 2004 SE-30 0 or 5 0 Battery voltage 0 Battery voltage 0 Battery voltage 0 Battery voltage 0 Battery voltage 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER TERMINAL WIRE COLOR 31 L/Y 32 B 33 35 36 CONDITION VOLTAGE (V) (Approx.) Sensor ground — 0 Ground — 0 L/B Battery power supply (PTC) — Battery voltage V/W Sliding motor FORWARD output signal Sliding switch FORWARD operation (Motor operated) Battery voltage Y/G ITEM Reclining motor FORWARD output signal Other than above Reclining switch FORWARD operation (Motor operated) Other than above 37 38 BR B/W Front lifting motor DOWN output signal Rear lifting motor UP output signal Front lifting switch DOWN operation (Motor operated) Other than above Rear end lifting switch UP operation (Motor operated) Other than above 39 Y Rear lifting motor DOWN output signal Rear end lifting switch DOWN operation (Motor operated) Other than above 40 42 44 Y/R O/B Y/R Battery power supply Sliding motor BACKWARD output signal Reclining motor BACKWARD output signal GR Front lifting motor UP output signal B/W D 0 Battery voltage Front lifting switch UP operation (Motor operated) Ground — E 0 Battery voltage F 0 Battery voltage G 0 Battery voltage Other than above 48 Battery voltage Sliding switch BACKWARD operation (Motor operated) Other than above 45 C Battery voltage Reclining switch BACKWARD operation (Motor operated) B 0 — Other than above A H 0 SE Battery voltage 0 J Battery voltage 0 K 0 Terminals and Reference Values for Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit EIS004FK TERMINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM 2 LG Changeover switch RH signal 3 Y/B Mirror switch UP signal CONDITION VOLTAGE (V) (Approx.) Changeover switch in RH position 0 Other than above 5 Mirror switch in UP position 0 Other than above 5 Mirror switch in LEFT position 0 Other than above 5 4 V/W Mirror switch LEFT signal 5 R/B Mirror sensor (RH vertical) signal Mirror motor RH is operated UP or DOWN Changes between 3.4 (close to peak) 0.6 (close to valley) 6 L/Y Mirror sensor (LH vertical) signal Mirror motor LH is operated UP or DOWN Changes between 3.4 (close to peak) 0.6 (close to valley) 8 BR/Y 9 LG/B Pedal sensor input signal Seat memory switch 1 signal Revision: October 2004 Pedal position front end 0.5 Pedal position rear end 4.5 Memory switch 1 ON 0 Memory switch 1 OFF 5 SE-31 2005 Titan L M AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER TERMINAL WIRE COLOR 10 L ITEM UART LINE (TX) CONDITION VOLTAGE (V) (Approx.) Pedal adjusting switch ON (FORWARD or BACKWARD operation) PIIA4813E 12 P 13 Y/G 14 GR/R 15 V/R Seat memory switch indictor 1 signal Memory switch 1 ON 0 Memory switch 1 OFF Battery voltage Seat memory switch indictor 2 signal Memory switch 2 ON 0 Memory switch 2 OFF Battery voltage Mirror motor RH is operated UP Mirror motor RH UP signal Other than above Mirror motor RH is operated LEFT Mirror motor RH LEFT signal Other than above Mirror motor LH is operated DOWN Mirror motor LH DOWN signal 16 O Other than above Mirror motor LH is operated RIGHT Mirror motor LH RIGHT signal Changeover switch LH signal 1.5 - Battery voltage 0 1.5 - Battery voltage 0 1.5 - Battery voltage 0 1.5 - Battery voltage Other than above 0 Changeover switch in LH position 0 Other than above 5 Mirror switch in DOWN position 0 Other than above 5 18 BR/W 19 SB Mirror switch DOWN signal 20 GR Mirror switch RIGHT signal 21 L/W Mirror sensor (RH horizontal) signal Mirror motor RH is operated LEFT or RIGHT Changes between 3.4 (close to left edge) 0.6 (close to right edge) 22 G Mirror sensor (LH horizontal) signal Mirror motor LH is operated LEFT or RIGHT Changes between 3.4 (close to left edge) 0.6 (close to right edge) 24 G/O Seat memory set switch signal 25 P/L Seat memory switch 2 signal 26 W UART LINE (RX) Mirror switch in RIGHT position 0 Other than above 5 Set switch 1 ON 0 Set switch 1 OFF 5 Memory switch 2 ON 0 Memory switch 2 OFF 5 Pedal adjusting switch ON (FORWARD or BACKWARD operation) PIIA4814E Mirror motor RH is operated DOWN Mirror motor RH DOWN signal 30 Y Other than above Mirror motor RH is operated RIGHT Mirror motor RH RIGHT signal Other than above Mirror motor LH is operated UP 31 R Mirror motor LH UP signal Revision: October 2004 Other than above SE-32 1.5 - Battery voltage 0 1.5 - Battery voltage 0 1.5 - Battery voltage 0 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER TERMINAL WIRE COLOR 32 BR Mirror motor LH LEFT signal 33 W/L Sensor power supply — 5 34 Y/R Battery power supply — Battery voltage 37 G 39 L/B Battery power supply — Battery voltage 40 B/W Ground — 0 41 W/G Sensor ground — 0 ITEM CONDITION Mirror motor LH is operated LEFT Pedal adjust motor FORWARD signal 45 R Pedal adjust motor BACKWARD signal 48 B Ground Other than above Pedal adjust motor FORWARD operation (Motor operated) Other than above Pedal adjust motor BACKWARD operation (Motor operated) Other than above — Work Flow 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. VOLTAGE (V) (Approx.) A 1.5 - Battery voltage 0 B C Battery voltage 0 D E Battery voltage 0 F 0 EIS004FL G Check the symptom and customer's requests. Understand the system description. Refer to SE-12, "System Description" . Perform the preliminary check. Refer to SE-34, "Preliminary Check" . H Check the self-diagnosis, results using CONSULT-II. Refer to SE-37, "CONSULT-II Function (AUTO DRIVE POS.)" . Repair or replace depending on the self-diagnostic results. SE Based on the trouble diagnosis chart, repair or replace the cause of the malfunction. Refer to SE-41, "Symptom Chart" . Does the automatic drive positioner system operate normally? J If it is normal, GO TO 8. If it is not normal, GO TO 3. Inspection End. K L M Revision: October 2004 SE-33 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Preliminary Check EIS004FM SETTING CHANGE FUNCTION The settings of the automatic driving positioner system can be changed, using CONSULT-II and the display in the center of the instrument panel. ×: Applicable –: Not applicable Setting item CONSULT–II (WORK SUPPORT) Content Sliding Front Seat When Entry/ Exiting Vehicle The seat sliding turnout and return at entry/exit can be selected: ON (operated)–OFF (not operated) Reset custom settings* All settings to default. Default setting Factory setting × × — — — — 40mm The distance at exiting operation can be selected from the following 3 modes. SEAT SLIDE VOLUME SET Display unit 80mm — 150mm ON ON: Indicator lamp ON — × OFF OFF: Indicator lamp OFF × — Default: Setting button ON — — — It is possible to set sliding front seat for entry/exit of vehicle by pressing set switch. Content Setting change operation The seat sliding turnout and return at entry/exit can be operated. The seat sliding turnout and return at entry/exit can not be operated. Indicator LEDs Blinking twice Press the set switch for more than 10 seconds Blinking once *: Setting of sliding front seat for entry/exit of vehicle is ON at factory-shipment. But if custom settings are reset, setting turns OFF. NOTE: After the setting is registered, the new setting is effective, even if the battery is disconnected. POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1. CHECK BCM FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK Check if any of the following fuses in the BCM are blown. Unit Power source Fuse No. Battery power supply f (50A) BCM ON or START power supply 59 (10A) ACC or ON power supply 4 (10A) NOTE: Refer to SE-11, "Component Parts And Harness Connector Location" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to SE11, "Component Parts And Harness Connector Location" . Revision: October 2004 SE-34 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER 2. CHECK BCM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. A Disconnect BCM. Check voltage between BCM connector and ground. B Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) M20 Power source Ignition switch Voltage (V) (Approx.) (–) C 70 (W/B) Battery power supply — 38 (W/L) ON or START power supply ON or START ACC or ON power supply ACC or ON Ground M18 11 (O) Battery voltage D Battery voltage LIIA0995E Battery voltage F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace the harness. G 3. CHECK BCM GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. H Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between BCM connector M20 terminal 67 (B) and ground. 67 (B) - Ground E SE : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> BCM circuit is OK. Check the driver seat control unit. GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace the harness. J K L LIIA0915E 4. CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK M Check if any of the following fuses in the driver seat control unit and automatic drive positioner control unit are blown. Unit Driver seat control unit Power source Fuse No. START power supply 2 (10A) Battery power supply 22 (15A) Battery power supply f (50A) NOTE: Refer to SE-11, "Component Parts And Harness Connector Location" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to SE11, "Component Parts And Harness Connector Location" . Revision: October 2004 SE-35 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER 5. CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect driver seat control unit. Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and ground. Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) Ignition switch Voltage (V) (Approx.) Battery power supply — Battery voltage Battery power supply — Battery voltage START power supply START Battery voltage (–) 33 (L/B) P3 40 (Y/R) P2 Power source Ground 6 (O) PIIA4819E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace harness. 6. CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between the driver seat control unit connector P2 terminal 32, P3 terminal 48 and ground. 32 (B) - Ground 48 (B/W) - Ground : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Driver seat control unit circuit check is OK. Check automatic drive positioner control unit. GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace harness. PIIA4542E 7. CHECK AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit. Check voltage between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M34 terminals 34, 39 and ground. Terminals (Wire color) Connector (+) M34 34 (Y/R) Ignition switch Voltage (V) (Approx.) OFF Battery voltage OFF Battery voltage (–) Ground 39 (L/B) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace harness. PIIA4543E Revision: October 2004 SE-36 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER 8. CHECK AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT A Check continuity between the automatic drive positioner control unit connector M34 terminals 40, 48 and ground. 40 (B/W) - Ground 48 (B) - Ground B : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Automatic drive positioner control unit circuit is OK. NG >> Repair or replace harness. C D PIIA4544E CONSULT-II Function (AUTO DRIVE POS.) E EIS004FN CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. F AUTO DRIVE POS. diagnostic mode Description WORK SUPPORT Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the driver seat control unit for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the driver seat control unit and received data is displayed. G Displays driver seat control unit self-diagnosis results. H SELF-DIAG RESULTS DATA MONITOR Displays driver seat control unit input/output data in real time. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. ACTIVE TEST Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. ECU PART NUMBER SE Driver seat control unit part number can be read. J CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. K L M BBIA0369E 3. Turn ignition switch ON. Revision: October 2004 SE-37 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER 4. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. BCIA0029E 5. Touch “AUTO DRIVE POS”. If “AUTO DRIVE POS.” is not indicated, refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . BCIA0030E 6. Select diagnosis mode. “DATA MONITOR”, “ACTIVE TEST”, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS“, “ECU PART NUMBER” and “WORK SUPPORT” are available. BCIA0031E Revision: October 2004 SE-38 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS A DISPLAY ITEM LIST CONSULT-II display Item Malfunction is detected when... Reference page B CAN COMM CIRC [U1000] CAN communication Malfunction is detected in CAN communication. LAN-7 SEAT SLIDE [B2112] Seat slide motor When any manual and automatic operations are not performed, if any motor operations of seat slide is detected for 0.1 second or more, status is judged “Output error”. SE-43 SE-53 C SEAT RECLINING [B2113] Seat reclining motor When any manual and automatic operations are not performed, if any motor operations of seat reclining is detected for 0.1 second or more, status is judged “Output error”. SE-44 SE-54 D SEAT LIFTER FR [B2114] Seat lifting FR motor When any manual and automatic operations are not performed, if any motor operations of seat lifting FR is detected for 0.1 second or more, status is judged “Output error”. SE-45 SE-55 E SEAT LIFTER RR [B2115] Seat lifting RR motor When any manual and automatic operations are not performed, if any motor operations of seat lifting RR is detected for 0.1 second or more, status is judged “Output error”. SE-47 SE-56 F ADJ PEDAL MOTOR [B2117] Pedal adjust motor When any manual and automatic operations are not performed, if motor operations of seat pedal is detected for 0.1 second or more, status is judged “Output error”. SE-48 SE-57 ADJ PEDAL SENSOR [B2120] Pedal adjust sensor When pedal adjust sensor detects 0.5V or lower, or 4.5V or higher, for 0.5 seconds or more. SE-57 DETENT SW [B2126] Park SW With the A/T selector lever in P position (park switch OFF), if the vehicle speed of 7 km/h (4 MPH) or higher was input the park switch input system is judged malfunctioning. SE-78 UART COMM [B2128] UART communication Malfunction is detected in UART communication. SE-81 H SE NOTE: ● If park switch error is detected, manual adjustable pedal operation cannot be performed when ignition switch turns ON. ● The displays of CAN communication and detection switch display error detecting condition from memory erase to the present on “TIME”. – If error is detected in the past and present error is detected, “CRNT” is displayed. – If error is detected in the past and present error is not detected, “PAST” is displayed. – If error has never been detected, nothing is displayed on “TIME”. ● Any items other than CAN communication and park switch count error detection frequency occurred after erase history to “1-127”. – If error was detected in the past, error detection frequency from memory erase to the present is displayed on “TIME”. – If error has never been detected, nothing is displayed on “TIME”. – Can clear the detected memory. Normal: Clear memory in normal condition, history is erased and nothing is displayed on “TIME”. Error: Clear memory in error condition, error is detected again and “1” is displayed on “TIME”. Revision: October 2004 SE-39 G 2005 Titan J K L M AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER DATA MONITOR SELECTIOM FROM MENU Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] Contents SLIDE SW–FR “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the sliding switch (FR) signal is displayed. SLIDE SW–RR “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the sliding switch (RR) signal is displayed. RECLN SW–FR “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the reclining switch (FR) signal is displayed. RECLN SW–RR “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the reclining switch (RR) signal is displayed. LIFT FR SW–UP “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the FR lifter switch (UP) signal is displayed. LIFT FR SW–DN “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the FR lifter switch (DOWN) signal is displayed. LIFT RR SW–UP “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the RR lifter switch (UP) signal is displayed. LIFT RR SW–DN “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the RR lifter switch (DOWN) signal is displayed. MIR CON SW–UP “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror switch (UP) signal is displayed. MIR CON SW–DN “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror switch (DOWN) signal is displayed. MIR CON SW–RH “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror switch (RIGHT) signal is displayed. MIR CON SW–LH “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror switch (LEFT) signal is displayed. MIR CHNG SW–R “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror switch (switching to RIGHT) signal is displayed. MIR CHNG SW–L “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror switch (switching to LEFT) signal is displayed. SET SW “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the setting switch signal is displayed. PEDAL SW-FR “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the pedal adjusting switch (FR) signal is displayed. PEDAL SW-RR “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the pedal adjusting switch (RR) signal is displayed. MEMORY SW1 “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the seat memory switch 1 signal is displayed. MEMORY SW2 “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the seat memory switch 2 signal is displayed. DETENT SW “ON/OFF” The A/T selector lever position “OFF (P position)/ON (other than P position)” judged from the park switch signal is displayed. STARTER SW “ON/OFF” Ignition switch ON (START, ON)/OFF (ignition switch IGN, ACC, or OFF) status judged from the ignition switch signal is displayed. SLIDE PULSE — Value (32768) when battery connects is as standard. If it moves backward, the value increases. If it moves forward, the value decreases. RECLN PULSE — Value (32768) when battery connects is as standard. If it moves backward, the value increases. If it moves forward, the value decreases. LIFT FR PULSE — Value (32768) when battery connects is as standard. If it moves DOWN, the value increases. If it moves UP, the value decreases. LIFT RR PULSE — Value (32768) when battery connects is as standard. If it moves DOWN, the value increases. If it moves UP, the value decreases. MIR/SEN RH R–L “V” Voltage output from RH door mirror sensor (LH/RH) is displayed. MIR/SEN RH U–D “V” Voltage output from RH door mirror sensor (UP/DOWN) is displayed. MIR/SEN LH R–L “V” Voltage output from LH door mirror sensor (LH/RH) is displayed. MIR/SEN LH U–D “V” Voltage output from LH door mirror sensor (UP/DOWN) is displayed. PEDAL SEN “V” The pedal position (voltage) judged from the pedal adjust sensor signal is displayed. Revision: October 2004 SE-40 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER ACTIVE TEST CAUTION: During vehicle driving, do not perform active test. NOTE: If active test is performed, reset seat memory and keyfob interlock drive positioner after performing work. DISPLAY ITEM LIST Test item A B Description C SEAT SLIDE The sliding motor is activated by receiving the drive signal. SEAT RECLINING The reclining motor is activated by receiving the drive signal. SEAT LIFTER FR The lifting motor (front) is activated by receiving the drive signal. SEAT LIFTER RR The lifting motor (rear) is activated by receiving the drive signal. PEDAL MOTOR The pedal adjust motor is activated by receiving the drive signal. MEMORY SW INDCTR The memory switch indicator is lit by receiving the drive signal. MIRROR MOTOR RH The RH mirror motor moves the mirror UP/DOWN and LEFT/RIGHT by receiving the drive signal. MIRROR MOTOR LH The LH mirror motor moves the mirror UP/DOWN and LEFT/RIGHT by receiving the drive signal. CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis) D E EIS004FO 1. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT CHECK F G CAUTION: H If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication. 1. Connect to CONSULT-II, and select “AUTO DRIVE POS.” on the “SELECT DIAG SYSTEM” screen. SE 2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Check display content in self-diagnostic results. CONSULT-II display code J Diagnosis item INITIAL DIAG TRANSMIT DIAG K ECM U1000 IPDM E/R L METER/M&A I-KEY Contents displayed No malfunction>>Inspection End Malfunction in CAN communication system>>After printing the monitor items, go to “CAN System”. Refer to LAN-5, "Precautions When Using CONSULT-II" . Symptom Chart EIS004FP Diagnoses / service procedure Symptom Only setting change function cannot be set with display. Revision: October 2004 Refer to page 1. Preliminary check SE-34 2. CAN communication inspection using CONSULT-II (selfdiagnosis) SE-41 3. If the above systems are normal, check display system AV-78 SE-41 Navigation system 2005 Titan M AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Diagnoses / service procedure Symptom A part of seat system does not operate (both automatically and manually). A part of pedal adjust and door mirror does not operate (both automatically and manually). A part of seat system does not operate (only automatic operation). A part of door mirror system does not operate (only automatic operation). All of the automatic operations do not operate. A part of seat system does not operate (only manual operation). A part of pedal adjust and door mirror does not operate (only manual operation). Only memory switch operation. Refer to page 1. Sliding motor circuit inspection SE-43 2. Reclining motor circuit inspection SE-44 3. Lifting motor (front) circuit inspection SE-45 4. Lifting motor (rear) circuit inspection SE-47 5. If the above systems are normal, replace the driver seat control unit SE-11 1. Pedal adjusting motor circuit inspection SE-48 2. Mirror motor LH circuit check SE-49 3. Mirror motor RH circuit check SE-51 4. If the above systems are normal, replace the automatic drive positioner control unit. SE-11 1. Sliding sensor circuit inspection SE-53 2. Reclining sensor circuit inspection SE-54 3. Lifting sensor (front) circuit inspection SE-55 4. Lifting sensor (rear) circuit inspection SE-56 5. If the above systems are normal, replace the driver seat control unit SE-11 1. Mirror sensor LH circuit check SE-58 2. Mirror sensor RH circuit check SE-60 3. If the above systems are normal, replace the automatic drive positioner control unit. SE-11 1. Park switch circuit inspection SE-78 2. UART communication line circuit inspection SE-81 3. Pedal adjusting sensor circuit inspection SE-57 4. If all the above systems are normal, replace the automatic drive positioner control unit. SE-11 1. Sliding switch circuit inspection SE-62 2. Reclining switch circuit inspection SE-63 3. Lifting switch (front) circuit inspection SE-65 4. Lifting switch (rear) circuit inspection SE-66 5. If the above systems are normal, replace the driver seat control unit SE-11 1. Pedal adjusting switch circuit inspection SE-68 2. Door mirror remote control switch (change over switch) circuit inspection SE-70 3. Door mirror remote control switch (mirror switch) switching circuit inspection SE-71 4. If the above systems are normal, replace the automatic drive positioner control unit SE-11 1. Seat memory switch circuit inspection SE-74 2. If the above systems are normal, replace the driver seat control unit SE-11 1. Seat memory indicator lamp circuit inspection SE-75 Seat memory indicator lamps 1 and 2 do not illuminate. 2. If all the above systems are normal, replace the driver seat control unit. SE-11 The Entry/Exiting does not operate when door is opened and closed. (The Entry/Exiting operates with key switch) 1. Front door switch circuit inspection SE-80 Revision: October 2004 2. If all the above systems are normal, replace the BCM. SE-42 BCS-19 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Diagnoses / service procedure Symptom Refer to page Only door mirror system does not operate (only manual operation). 1.Door mirror remote control switch ground circuit inspection SE-73 Only door mirror system does not operate (only automatic operation). 1. Door mirror sensor power supply and ground circuit inspection SE-77 Only seat system does not operate (only manual operation). 1. Power seat switch ground circuit inspection SE-67 Sliding Motor Circuit Inspection A B C EIS004FQ 1. CHECK SEAT SLIDING MECHANISM D Check the following. ● Operation malfunction caused by sliding rail deformation, pinched harness or other foreign materials ● Operation malfunction caused by foreign materials adhered to the sliding motor LH or sliding rail connector rod ● Operation malfunction and interference with other parts by poor installation OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the malfunctioning part and check again. E F G 2. CHECK FUNCTION H With CONSULT-II Check operation with “SEAT SLIDE” in ACTIVE TEST. Test item SEAT SLIDE Description SE The sliding motor is activated by receiving the drive signal. Without CONSULT-II GO TO 3. OK or NG OK >> Sliding motor circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 3. J K PIIA0265E 3. CHECK SLIDING MOTOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit and sliding motor LH. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P3 terminals 35, 42 and sliding motor connector P4 terminals 4, 6. 35 (V/W) - 6 (V/W) 42 (O/B) - 4 (O/B) 4. L M : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P3 terminals 35, 42 and ground. 35 (V/W) - Ground 42 (O/B) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. LIIA0696E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: October 2004 SE-43 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER 4. CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. Connect the driver seat control unit and sliding motor LH. Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and ground. Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) (–) Sliding switch ON (FORWARD operation) 35 (V/W) P3 Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition Ground 42 (O/B) Battery voltage Other than above 0 Sliding switch ON (BACKWARD operation) Battery voltage Other than above PIIA4801E 0 OK or NG OK >> Replace sliding motor LH. Refer to SE-91, "Removal and Installation" . NG >> Replace driver seat control unit. Reclining Motor LH Circuit Inspection EIS004FR 1. CHECK SEAT RECLINING MECHANISM Check the following. Operation malfunction caused by an interference with the center pillar or center console ● Operation malfunction and interference with other parts by poor installation OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the malfunctioning part and check again. ● 2. CHECK FUNCTION With CONSULT-II Check operation with “SEAT RECLINING” in ACTIVE TEST. Test item SEAT RECLINING Description The reclining motor LH is activated by receiving the drive signal. Without CONSULT-II GO TO 3. OK or NG OK >> Reclining motor LH circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 3. PIIA0268E Revision: October 2004 SE-44 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER 3. CHECK RECLINING MOTOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. 3. 36 (Y/G) – 4 (Y/G) 44 (Y/R) – 3 (Y/R) 4. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit and reclining motor LH. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P3 terminals 36, 44 and reclining motor LH connector P5 terminals 3, 4. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. C Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P3 terminals 36, 44 and ground. 36 (Y/G) – Ground 44 (Y/R) – Ground D : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. B E LIIA0697E F 4. CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. Connect the driver seat control unit and reclining motor LH. Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and ground. G H Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) (–) Ground 44 (Y/R) SE Reclining switch ON (FORWARD operation) 36 (Y/G) P3 Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition Battery voltage Other than above 0 Reclining switch ON (BACKWARD operation) Battery voltage Other than above J PIIA4802E K 0 OK or NG OK >> Replace reclining motor LH. Refer to SE-91, "Removal and Installation" . NG >> Replace driver seat control unit. Lifting Motor (Front) Circuit Inspection L EIS004FS 1. CHECK SEAT LIFTING (FRONT) MECHANISM M Check the following. ● Operation malfunction caused by lifter mechanism deformation, pinched harness or other foreign materials ● Operation malfunction caused by foreign materials adhered to the lifting motor (front) or lead screws ● Operation malfunction and interference with other parts by installation OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the malfunctioning part and check again. Revision: October 2004 SE-45 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER 2. CHECK FUNCTION With CONSULT-II Check operation with “SEAT LIFTER FR” in ACTIVE TEST. Test item SEAT LIFTER FR Description The lifting motor (front) is activated by receiving the drive signal. Without CONSULT-II GO TO 3. OK or NG OK >> Lifting motor (front) circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 3. PIIA0271E 3. CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT) CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit and lifting motor (front). Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P3 terminals 37, 45 and lifting motor (front) connector P6 terminals 4, 6. 37 (BR) - 6 (BR) 45 (GR) - 4 (GR) 4. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P3 terminals 37, 45 and ground. 37 (BR) - Ground 45 (GR) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA0698E 4. CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. Connect the driver seat control unit and lifting motor (front). Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and ground. Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) (–) Lifting switch (front) ON (DOWN operation) 37 (BR) P3 Condition Ground 45 (GR) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Battery voltage Other than above Llifting switch (front) ON (UP operation) 0 Battery voltage Other than above PIIA4805E 0 OK or NG OK >> Replace lifting motor (front). Refer to SE-91, "Removal and Installation" . NG >> Replace driver seat control unit. Revision: October 2004 SE-46 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Lifting Motor (Rear) Circuit Inspection EIS004FT 1. CHECK SEAT LIFTING (REAR) MECHANISM A Check the following. ● Operation malfunction caused by lifter mechanism deformation or pinched harness or other foreign materials ● Operation malfunction caused by foreign materials adhered to the lifting motor (rear) or lead screws ● Operation malfunction and interference with other parts by poor installation OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the malfunctioning part and check again. B C D 2. CHECK FUNCTION E With CONSULT-II Check operation with “SEAT LIFTER RR” in ACTIVE TEST. Test item Description SEAT LIFTER RR The lifting motor (rear) is activated by receiving the drive signal. F G Without CONSULT-II GO TO 3. OK or NG OK >> Lifting motor (rear) circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 3. H PIIA0274E 3. CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (REAR) CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect driver seat control unit and lifting motor (rear). Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P3 terminals 38, 39 and lifting motor (rear) connector P7 terminals 4, 6. 38 (B/W) - 6 (B/W) 39 (Y) - 4 (Y) 4. SE K : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between driver seat control unit P3 terminals 38, 39 and ground. 38 (B/W) - Ground 39 (Y) - Ground Revision: October 2004 L : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. M LIIA0699E SE-47 J 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER 4. CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. Connect the driver seat control unit and lifting motor (rear). Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and ground. Terminals (Wire color) Connector (+) (–) Lifting switch (rear) ON (UP operation) 38 (B/W) P3 Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition Ground Other than above Lifting switch (rear) ON (DOWN operation) 39 (Y) Battery voltage 0 Battery voltage Other than above PIIA4804E 0 OK or NG OK >> Replace lifting motor (rear). Refer to SE-91, "Removal and Installation" . NG >> Replace driver seat control unit. Pedal Adjusting Motor Circuit Inspection EIS004FU 1. CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING MECHANISM Check the following. Operation malfunction caused by pedal adjusting mechanism deformation or pinched harness or other foreign materials ● Operation malfunction and interference with other parts by poor installation OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the malfunctioning part and check again. ● 2. CHECK FUNCTION With CONSULT-II Check operation with “PEDAL” in ACTIVE TEST. Test item ADJ PEDAL MOTOR Description The pedal adjusting motor is activated by receiving the drive signal. Without CONSULT-II GO TO 3. OK or NG OK >> Pedal adjusting motor circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 3. PIIA4555E Revision: October 2004 SE-48 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER 3. CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING MOTOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. 3. 37 (G) - 1 (G) 45 (R) - 2 (R) 4. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit and pedal adjusting motor. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M34 terminals 37, 45 and pedal adjusting motor connector E109 terminals 1, 2. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. C Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M34 terminals 37, 45 and ground. 37 (G) - Ground 45 (R) - Ground D : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. B E LIIA1755E F 4. CHECK AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL 1. 2. Connect the automatic drive positioner control unit and pedal adjusting motor. Check voltage between automatic drive positioner control unit connector and ground. G H Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition (–) SE Pedal adjusting switch ON (FORWARD operation) 37 (G) Battery voltage J Other than above M34 Ground 45 (R) 0 PIIA4806E Pedal adjusting switch ON (BACKWARD operation) Battery voltage Other than above K 0 OK or NG OK >> Replace adjustable accelerator pedal assembly. Refer to ACC-2, "ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY" . NG >> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit. Mirror Motor LH Circuit Check EIS004FV 1. CHECK DOOR MIRROR LH MECHANISM Check the following items. Operation malfunction caused by a foreign object caught in door mirror face edge. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the malfunctioning parts, and check the symptom again. Revision: October 2004 SE-49 2005 Titan L M AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER 2. CHECK FUNCTION With CONSULT–II Check the operation with “MIRROR MOTOR LH” in the ACTIVE TEST. Test item Description MIRROR MOTOR LH The mirror motor LH moves the mirror UP/DOWN and LEFT/ RIGHT by receiving the drive signal. Without CONSULT–II GO TO 3. OK or NG OK >> Mirror motor LH circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 3. PIIA4784E 3. CHECK DOOR MIRROR MOTOR LH CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit and door mirror LH. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M33 terminals 16, 31, 32 and door mirror LH connector D4 terminals 1, 2, 3. 16 (O) - 3 (O) 31 (R) - 1 (R) 32 (BR) - 2 (BR) 4. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M33 terminals 16, 31, 32 and ground. 16 (O) - Ground 31 (R) - Ground 32 (BR) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. LIIA0999E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. 4. CHECK MIRROR MOTOR SIGNAL 1. 2. Turn ignition switch to ACC. Check voltage between door mirror LH connector and ground. Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) 2 (BR) Voltage (V) (Approx.) (–) When motor is operated UP 1 (R) D4 Condition 1.5 - Battery voltage Other than above Ground When motor is operated LEFT 0 1.5 - Battery voltage Other than above 3 (O) When motor is operated DOWN or RIGHT 0 LIIA1000E 1.5 - Battery voltage Other than above 0 OK or NG OK >> Replace door mirror LH. Refer to GW-124, "Door Mirror Assembly" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: October 2004 SE-50 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Mirror Motor RH Circuit Check EIS004FW 1. CHECK DOOR MIRROR RH MECHANISM A Check the following items. Operation malfunction caused by a foreign object caught in door mirror face edge. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the malfunctioning parts, and check the symptom again. B C 2. CHECK FUNCTION D With CONSULT–II Check the operation with “MIRROR MOTOR RH” in the ACTIVE TEST. E Test item Description MIRROR MOTOR RH The mirror motor RH moves the mirror UP/DOWN and LEFT/ RIGHT by receiving the drive signal. Without CONSULT–II GO TO 3. OK or NG OK >> Mirror motor RH circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 3. F G PIIA0202E H 3. CHECK DOOR MIRROR RH CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. SE Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit and door mirror RH. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M33 terminals 14, 15, 30 and door mirror RH connector D107 terminals 1, 2, 3. J 14 (GR/R) - 1 (GR/R) : Continuity should exist. 15 (V/R) - 2 (V/R) : Continuity should exist. 30 (Y) - 3 (Y) : Continuity should exist. K 4. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M33 terminals 14, 15, 30 and ground. 14 (GR/R) - Ground 15 (V/R) - Ground 30 (Y) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. L LIIA1001E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: October 2004 SE-51 2005 Titan M AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER 4. CHECK MIRROR MOTOR SIGNAL 1. 2. Turn ignition switch to ACC. Check voltage between door mirror RH connector and ground. Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition (–) Mirror motor is operated UP 1 (GR/R) 1.5 - Battery voltage Other than above D107 2 (V/R) Ground 0 Mirror motor is operated LEFT 1.5 - Battery voltage Other than above 3 (Y) 0 Mirror motor is operated DOWN or RIGHT LIIA1002E 1.5 - Battery voltage Other than above 0 OK or NG OK >> Replace door mirror RH. Refer to GW-124, "Door Mirror Assembly" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: October 2004 SE-52 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection EIS004FX 1. CHECK FUNCTION A With CONSULT-II Check operation with “SLIDE PULSE” on the DATA MONITOR to make sure the pulse changes. Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] SLIDE PULSE — B Contents The seat sliding position (pulse) judged from the sliding sensor signal is displayed C D E PIIA4558E Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check signal between driver seat control unit connector and ground, with oscilloscope. Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) Condition F G Signal H (–) SE P2 24 (Y/G) Ground Sliding motor operation PIIA4556E J PIIA3277E OK or NG OK >> Sliding sensor circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. K 2. CHECK SLIDING MOTOR SENSOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY L 1. 2. M Disconnect driver seat control unit connector and sliding motor LH. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2 terminals 16, 24, 31 and sliding motor P4 terminals 1, 2, 3. 16 (W) - 3 (W) 24 (Y/G) - 2 (Y/G) 31 (L/Y) - 1 (L/Y) 3. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between driver seat control unit P2 terminals 24, 31 and ground. 16 (W) - Ground 24 (Y/G) - Ground 31 (L/Y) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist LIIA0706E OK or NG OK >> Replace sliding motor LH. Refer to SE-91, "Removal and Installation" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: October 2004 SE-53 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection EIS004FY 1. CHECK FUNCTION With CONSULT-II Check operation with “RECLN PULSE” on the DATA MONITOR to make sure the pulse changes. Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] RECLN PULSE — Contents The seat reclining position (pulse) judged from the reclining sensor is displayed PIIA4558E Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check signal between driver seat control unit connector and ground, with oscilloscope. Connector P2 Terminals (Wire color) (+) (–) 9 (L/R) Ground Condition Signal Reclining motor operation PIIA4559E PIIA3278E OK or NG OK >> Reclining sensor circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK RECLINING MOTOR SENSOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. Disconnect driver seat control unit and reclining motor LH. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2 terminals 9, 31 and reclining motor LH connector P5 terminals 1, 2. 9 (L/R) - 1 (L/R) 31 (L/Y) - 2 (L/Y) 3. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2 terminals 9, 31 and ground. 9 (L/R) - Ground 31 (L/Y) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. LIIA0707E OK or NG OK >> Replace reclining motor LH. Refer to SE-91, "Removal and Installation" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: October 2004 SE-54 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Lifting Sensor (Front) Circuit Inspection EIS004FZ 1. CHECK FUNCTION A With CONSULT-II Check operation with “LIFT FR PULSE” on the DATA MONITOR to make sure the pulse changes. Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] LIFT FR PULSE — B Contents The front lifting position (pulse) judged from the lifting sensor (front) is displayed C D E PIIA4558E Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check signal between driver seat control unit connector and ground, with oscilloscope. Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) P2 25 (LG) Condition F G Signal H (–) Ground SE Lifting motor (front) operation PIIA4561E J PIIA3278E K OK or NG OK >> Lifting sensor (front) is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. L 2. CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT) SENSOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. Disconnect driver seat control unit and lifting motor (front). Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2 terminals 16, 25, 31 and lifting motor (front) connector P6 terminals 1, 2, 3. 16 (W) - 3 (W) 25 (LG) - 2 (LG) 31 (L/Y) - 1 (L/Y) 3. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2 terminals 16, 25, 31 and ground. 16 (W) - Ground 25 (LG) - Ground 31 (L/Y) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. LIIA0708E OK or NG OK >> Replace lifting motor (front). Refer to SE-91, "Removal and Installation" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: October 2004 SE-55 2005 Titan M AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Lifting Sensor (Rear) Circuit Inspection EIS004G0 1. CHECK FUNCTION With CONSULT-II Check operation with “LIFT RR PULSE” on the DATA MONITOR to make sure pulse changes. Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] LIFT RR PULSE — The rear lifting position (pulse) judged from the lifting sensor (rear) is displayed. PIIA4558E Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check signal between driver seat control unit connector and ground, with oscilloscope. Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) P2 10 (W) Condition Signal (–) Ground Lifting motor (rear) operation PIIA4563E PIIA3278E OK or NG OK >> Lifting sensor (rear) circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (REAR) SENSOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. Disconnect driver seat control unit and lifting motor (rear). Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2 terminals 10, 16, 31 and lifting motor (rear) connector P7 terminals 1, 2, 3. 10 (W) - 2 (W) 16 (W) - 3 (W) 31 (L/Y) - 1 (L/Y) 3. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2 terminals 10, 16, 31 and ground. 10 (W) - Ground 16 (W) - Ground 31 (L/Y) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. LIIA0709E OK or NG OK >> Replace lifting motor (rear). Refer to SE-91, "Removal and Installation" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: October 2004 SE-56 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Pedal Adjusting Sensor Circuit Inspection EIS004G1 1. CHECK FUNCTION A With CONSULT-II Operate the pedal adjusting switch with “PEDAL SEN” on the DATA MONITOR to make sure the voltage changes. B Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] PEDAL SEN Contents C The pedal adjusting position (voltage) judged from the pedal adjust sensor signal is displayed. “V” D PIIA4568E Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check voltage between automatic drive positioner control unit connector and ground. E F G Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) M33 8 (BR/Y) Condition (–) Ground Voltage (V) (Approx.) H Pedal front end position 0.5 Pedal back end position 4.5 SE PIIA4569E J OK or NG OK >> Pedal adjusting sensor circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. K L M Revision: October 2004 SE-57 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER 2. CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING SENSOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit and pedal adjusting sensor. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner connector M33, M34 terminals 8, 33, 41 and pedal adjusting sensor connector E110 terminals 3, 4, 5. 8 (BR/Y) - 4 (BR/Y) 33 (W/L) - 3 (W/L) 41 (W/G) - 5 (W/G) 3. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M33, M34 terminals 8, 33, 41 and ground. 8 (BR/Y) - Ground 33 (W/L) - Ground 41 (W/G) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace adjustable accelerator pedal assembly. Refer to ACC-2, "ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA1305E Mirror Sensor LH Circuit Check EIS004G2 1. CHECK DOOR MIRROR FUNCTION Check the following items. Operation malfunction in memory control NOTE: If a door mirror face position is set to an implausible angle, the set position may not be reproduced. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the malfunctioning parts, and check the symptom again. Revision: October 2004 SE-58 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER 2. CHECK MIRROR SENSOR A With CONSULT–II Check that “ON” is displayed on “MIR/SE LH R–L, MIR/SE LH U– D" in the DATA MONITOR. Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] Contents MIR/SE LH R–L “V” Voltage output from door mirror LH sensor (LH/ RH) is displayed. MIR/SE LH U–D “V” Voltage output from door mirror LH sensor (UP/ DOWN) is displayed. Without CONSULT–II 1. Turn ignition switch to ACC. 2. Check voltage between door mirror LH connector and ground. Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) D4 Condition (–) 7 (L/Y) Ground 8 (G) B Mirror motor is operated UP or DOWN Mirror motor is operated LEFT or RIGHT C D PIIA0197E E Voltage (V) (Approx.) F Changes between 3.4 (close to peak) – 0.6 (close to valley) G Changes between 3.4 (close to right edge) – 0.6 (close to left edge) OK or NG OK >> Mirror sensor LH is OK. NG >> GO TO 3. H LIIA1306E SE 3. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 1 1. 2. 3. 33 (W/L) - 5 (W/L) 41 (W/G) - 6 (W/G) 4. J Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit and door mirror LH. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M34 terminals 33, 41 and door mirror LH connector D4 terminals 5, 6. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. L Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M34 terminals 33, 41 and ground. 33 (W/L) - Ground 41 (W/G) - Ground Revision: October 2004 M : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA1307E SE-59 K 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER 4. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 2 1. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M33 terminals 6, 22 and door mirror LH connector D4 terminals 7, 8. 6 (L/Y) - 7 (L/Y) 22 (G) - 8 (G) 2. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M33 terminals 6, 22 and ground. 6 (L/Y) - Ground 22 (G) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace door mirror LH. Refer to GW-124, "Door Mirror Assembly" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. Mirror Sensor RH Circuit Check LIIA1308E EIS004G3 1. CHECK DOOR MIRROR FUNCTION Check the following items. Operation malfunction in memory control NOTE: If a door mirror face position is set to an implausible angle, the set position may not be reproduced. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair the malfunctioning parts, and check the symptom again. 2. CHECK MIRROR SENSOR With CONSULT–II Check that “ON” is displayed on “MIR/SE RH R–L, MIR/SE RH U– D" in the DATA MONITOR. Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] Contents MIR/SE RH R–L “V” Voltage output from door mirror RH sensor (LH/ RH) is displayed. MIR/SE RH U–D “V” Voltage output from door mirror RH sensor (UP/ DOWN) is displayed. 1. 2. Without CONSULT–II Turn ignition switch to ACC. Check voltage between door mirror RH connector and ground. Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) (–) Mirror motor is operated UP or DOWN 7 (R/B) D107 Condition Ground 8 (L/W) Mirror motor is operated LEFT or RIGHT Voltage(V) (Approx.) Changes between 3.4 (close to peak) – 0.6 (close to valley) Changes between 3.4 (close to left edge) – 0.6 (close to right edge) OK or NG OK >> Mirror sensor RH is OK. NG >> GO TO 3. Revision: October 2004 PIIA0197E LIIA1309E SE-60 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER 3. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 1 1. 2. 3. 33 (W/L) - 5 (W/L) 41 (W/G) - 6 (W/G) 4. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit and door mirror RH. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M34 terminals 33, 41 and door mirror RH connector D107 terminals 5, 6. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. C Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M34 terminals 33, 41 and ground. 33 (W/L) - Ground 41 (W/G) - Ground D : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. B E LIIA1311E F 4. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 2 1. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M33 terminals 5, 21 and door mirror RH connector D107 terminals 7, 8. 5 (R/B) - 7 (R/B) 21 (L/W) - 8 (L/W) 2. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. H Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M33 terminals 5, 21 and ground. 5 (R/B) - Ground 21 (L/W) - Ground G SE : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace door mirror RH. Refer to GW-124, "Door Mirror Assembly" . NG >> Repair or replace harness. J LIIA1312E K L M Revision: October 2004 SE-61 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection EIS004G4 1. CHECK FUNCTION With CONSULT-II With “SLIDE SW-FR, SLIDE SW-RR” on the DATA MONITOR, operate the sliding switch to check ON/OFF operation. Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] Contents SLIDE SW– FR "ON/ OFF" ON/OFF status judged from the sliding switch (FR) signal is displayed. SLIDE SW– RR "ON/ OFF" ON/OFF status judged from the sliding switch (RR) signal is displayed. PIIA0313E Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and ground. Connector Terminal (Wire color) (+) Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Sliding switch ON (BACKWARD operation) 0 (–) 11 (R/B) Other than above P2 Ground 26 (P/B) Battery voltage Sliding switch ON (FORWARD operation) Other than above 0 PIIA4577E Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> Sliding switch circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK SLIDING SWITCH CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. Disconnect driver seat control unit connector and power seat switch LH connector. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2 terminals 11, 26 and power seat switch LH connector P8 terminals 1, 7. 11 (R/B) - 7 (R/B) 26 (P/B) - 1 (P/B) 3. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2 terminals 11, 26 and ground. 11 (R/B) - Ground 26 (P/B) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. LIIA1125E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: October 2004 SE-62 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER 3. CHECK SLIDING SWITCH A Check continuity between power seat switch LH as follows. Connector Terminal Condition 7 P8 3 1 Continuity Sliding switch ON (BACKWARD operation) Yes Other than above No Sliding switch ON (FORWARD operation) Yes Other than above No OK or NG OK >> Check the condition of the harness and connector. NG >> Replace power seat switch LH. Refer to SE-91, "Removal and Installation" . Reclining Switch Inspection B C D LIIA1126E E EIS004G5 1. CHECK FUNCTION With CONSULT-II With “RECLN SW-FR, RECLN SW-RR” on the DATA MONITOR, operate the reclining switch to check ON/OFF operation. Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] F G Contents H RECLN SW –FR “ON/ OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the reclining switch (FR) signal is displayed. RECLN SW –RR “ON/ OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the reclining switch (RR) signal is displayed. SE J PIIA0313E 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch OFF. Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and ground. Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) M Reclining switch ON (BACKWARD operation) Other than above Ground 27 (G/B) L (–) 12 (O/B) P2 K Reclining switch ON (FORWARD operation) Other than above 0 Battery voltage PIIA4580E 0 Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> Reclining switch circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 SE-63 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER 2. CHECK RECLINING SWITCH CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. Disconnect driver seat control unit and power seat switch LH. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2 terminals 12, 27 and power seat switch LH connector P8 terminals 9, 10. 12 (O/B) - 9 (O/B) 27 (G/B) - 10 (G/B) 3. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2 terminals 12, 27 and ground. 12 (O/B) - Ground 27 (G/B) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. LIIA1127E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. 3. RECLINING SWITCH INSPECTION Check continuity between power seat switch LH as follows. Connector Terminal 9 P8 3 10 Condition Continuity Reclining switch ON (BACKWARD operation) Yes Other than above No Reclining switch ON (FORWARD operation) Yes Other than above No OK or NG OK >> Check the condition of the harness and connector. NG >> Replace power seat switch LH. Refer to SE-91, "Removal and Installation" . Revision: October 2004 SE-64 LIIA1128E 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Lifting Switch (Front) Circuit Inspection EIS004G6 1. CHECK FUNCTION A With CONSULT-II With “LIFT FR SW-UP, LIFT FR SW-DN” on the DATA MONITOR, operate the lifting switch (front) to check ON/OFF operation. B Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] Contents C LIFT FR SW– DN "ON/ OFF" ON/OFF status judged from the FR lifter switch (DOWN) signal is displayed. LIFT RR SW– UP "ON/ OFF" ON/OFF status judged from the RR lifter switch (UP) signal is displayed. D PIIA0323E Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and ground. E F G Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) (–) H Lifting switch (front) ON (DOWN operation) 13 (L/B) P2 Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition Ground 28 (Y/B) Other than above 0 Lifting switch (front) ON (UP operation) Other than above SE Battery voltage 0 PIIA4583E J Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> Lifting switch (front) circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. K 2. CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT) CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY L 1. 2. Disconnect driver seat control unit and power seat switch LH. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2 terminals 13, 28 and power seat switch LH connector P2 terminals 5, 6. 13 (L/B) - 5 (L/B) 28 (Y/B) - 6 (Y/B) 3. M : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2 terminals 13, 28 and ground 13 (L/B) - Ground 28 (Y/B) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. LIIA1129E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: October 2004 SE-65 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER 3. CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT) Check continuity between power seat switch LH as follows. Connector Terminals Condition 5 P8 3 6 Continuity Lifting switch (front) ON (DOWN operation) Yes Other than above No Lifting switch (front) ON (UP operation) Yes Other than above No OK or NG OK >> Check the condition of the harness and connector. NG >> Replace power seat switch LH. Refer to SE-91, "Removal and Installation" . Lifting Switch (Rear) Circuit Inspection LIIA1130E EIS004G7 1. CHECK FUNCTION With CONSULT-II With “LIFT RR SW-UP, LIFT RR SW-DN” on the DATA MONITOR, operate the rear lifting switch to check ON/OFF operation. Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] Contents LIFT RR SW–UP “ON/OFF” Operation (ON)/open (OFF) status judged from the RR lifter switch (UP) signal is displayed. LIFT RR SW–DN “ON/OFF” Operation (ON)/open (OFF) status judged from the RR lifter switch (DOWN) signal is displayed. PIIA0323E 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Turn ignition switch OFF. Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and ground. Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Lifting switch (rear) ON (DOWN operation) 0 (–) 14 (G/W) Other than above P2 Ground 29 (R/W) Battery voltage Lifting switch (rear) ON (UP operation) Other than above 0 PIIA4586E Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> Lifting switch (rear) circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 SE-66 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER 2. CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (REAR) CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. 14 (G/W) - 8 (G/W) 29 (R/W) - 2 (R/W) 3. A Disconnect driver seat control unit and power seat switch LH. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2 terminals 14, 29 and power seat switch connector P8 terminals 2, 8. B : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. C Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2 terminals 14, 29 and ground. 14 (G/W) - Ground 29 (R/W) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. D LIIA1131E E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. F 3. CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (REAR) Check continuity between power seat switch LH as follows. G Terminals Connector (+) (–) 8 P8 3 2 Condition Continuity H Lifting switch (rear) ON (DOWN operation) Yes Other than above No Lifting switch (rear) ON (UP operation) Yes Other than above No SE LIIA1132E OK or NG OK >> Check the condition of the harness and connector. NG >> Replace power seat switch LH. Refer to SE-91, "Removal and Installation" . Power Seat Switch Ground Inspection J K EIS004G8 1. CHECK POWER SEAT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT L 1. 2. 3. M Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect power seat switch LH. Check continuity between power seat switch LH connector P8 terminal 3 and ground. 3 (B) – Ground : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Check the condition of the harness and connector. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA1133E Revision: October 2004 SE-67 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Pedal Adjusting Switch Circuit Inspection EIS004G9 1. CHECK FUNCTION With CONSULT-II With “PEDAL SW-FR, PEDAL SW-RR” on the DATA MONITOR, operate the pedal adjusting switch to check ON/OFF operation. Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] Contents PEDAL SW–FR “ON/OFF” Operation (ON)/open (OFF) status judged from the pedal adjusting switch (FR) signal is displayed. PEDAL SW–RR “ON/OFF” Operation (ON)/open (OFF) status judged from the pedal adjusting switch (RR) signal is displayed. PIIA4590E Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Check voltage between driver seat control unit connector and ground. Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) Pedal adjusting switch ON (BACKWARD operation) 0 (–) 15 (L) Other than above P2 Ground 30 (R) Battery voltage PIIA4591E Pedal adjusting switch ON (FORWARD operation) Other than above 0 Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> Pedal adjusting switch circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING SWITCH CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. Disconnect driver seat control unit and pedal adjusting switch. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2 terminals 15, 30 and pedal adjusting switch connector M96 terminals 2, 3. 15 (L) - 2 (L/Y) 30 (R) - 3 (R) 3. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2 terminals 15, 30 and ground. 15 (L) - Ground 30 (R) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. LIIA0726E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: October 2004 SE-68 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER 3. CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING SWITCH A Check continuity between pedal adjusting switch as follows. Terminals Connector (+) (–) 2 M96 1 3 Condition B Continuity Pedal adjusting switch ON (BACWARD operation) Yes Other than above No Pedal adjusting switch ON (FORWARD operation) Yes Other than above No C D LIIA1014E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Replace pedal adjusting switch. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" . E 4. CHECK PEDAL ADJUSTING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT F Check continuity between pedal adjusting switch connector M96 terminal 1 and ground. 1 (B) - Ground G : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Check the condition of the harness and connector. NG >> Repair or replace harness. H SE LIIA1015E J K L M Revision: October 2004 SE-69 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Changeover Switch) Circuit Check EIS004GA 1. CHECK FUNCTION With CONSULT–II Check the operation on “MIR CHNG SW–R” or “MIR CHNG SW–L" in the DATA MONITOR. Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] Contents MIR CHNG S W–R “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the changeover switch (switching to RIGHT) signal is displayed. MIR CHNG S W–L “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the changeover switch (switching to LEFT) signal is displayed. PIIA0191E Without CONSULT–II 1. Turn ignition switch to ACC. 2. Check voltage between automatic drive positioner control unit connector and ground. Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) 2 (LG) M33 Condition (-) Ground 18 (BR/W) Voltage (V) (Approx.) Changeover switch RIGHT position 0 Other than above 5 Changeover switch LEFT position 0 Other than above 5 PIIA4767E OK or NG OK >> Door mirror remote control switch (changeover switch) is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit and door mirror remote control switch. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M33 terminals 2, 18 and door mirror remote control switch connector D10 terminals 2, 3. 2 (LG) - 3 (LG) 18 (BR/W) - 2 (BR/W) 4. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M33 terminals 2, 18 and ground. 2 (LG) - Ground 18 (BR/W) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. LIIA1821E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: October 2004 SE-70 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER 3. CHECK DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH (CHANGEOVER SWITCH) A Check continuity between door mirror remote control switch as follows. Terminals Connector (+) (–) 3 D10 13 2 Condition B Continuity Changeover switch RIGHT position Yes Other than above No Changeover switch LEFT position Yes Other than above No C D OK or NG OK >> Check the condition of the harness and the connector. NG >> Replace door mirror remote control switch. Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Mirror Switch) Circuit Check LIIA1822E E EIS004GB 1. CHECK DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH (MIRROR SWITCH) SIGNAL With CONSULT–II Check the operation on “MIR CON SW–UP/DN” “MIR CON SW–RH/LH” in the DATA MONITOR. Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] G and H Contents MIR CON SW –UP “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the mirror switch (UP) signal is displayed. MIR CON SW –DN “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the mirror switch (DOWN) signal is displayed. MIR CON SW –RH “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the mirror switch (RIGHT) signal is displayed. MIR CON SW –LH “ON/OFF” 1. 2. SE J PIIA0199E ON/OFF status judged from the mirror switch (LEFT) signal is displayed. K Without CONSULT–II Turn ignition switch to ACC. Check voltage between automatic drive positioner control unit connector and ground. Terminals (Wire color) Connector (+) (-) 3 (Y/B) 4 (V/W) M33 Ground 19 (SB) 20 (GR) L M Voltage (V) (Approx.) Condition Mirror switch UP operation 0 Other than above 5 Mirror switch LEFT operation 0 Other than above 5 Mirror switch DOWN operation 0 Other than above 5 Mirror switch RIGHT operation 0 Other than above 5 PIIA4771E OK or NG OK >> Door mirror remote control switch (mirror switch) circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 SE-71 F 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER 2. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit and door mirror remote control switch. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M33 terminals 3, 4, 19, 20 and door mirror remote control switch connector D10 terminals 4, 5, 6, 14. 3 (Y/B) - 6 (Y/B) 4 (V/W) - 5 (V/W) 19 (SB) - 14 (SB) 20 (GR) - 4 (GR) 4. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M33 terminals 3, 4, 19, 20 and ground. 3 (Y/B) - Ground 4 (V/W) - Ground 19 (SB) - Ground 20 (GR) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. LIIA1823E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. 3. CHECK DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH (MIRROR SWITCH) Check continuity between door mirror remote control switch as follows. Connector Terminals 4 5 D10 13 6 14 Switch condition Continuity Mirror switch RIGHT operation Yes Other than above No Mirror switch LEFT operation Yes Other than above No Mirror switch UP operation Yes Other than above No Mirror switch DOWN operation Yes Other than above No LIIA1824E OK or NG OK >> Check the condition of the harness and connector. NG >> Replace door mirror remote control switch. Revision: October 2004 SE-72 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Door Mirror Remote Control Switch Ground Circuit Inspection EIS004GC 1. CHECK DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT A 1. 2. 3. B Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect door mirror remote control switch. Check continuity between door mirror remote control switch connector D10 terminal 7 and ground. 13 (B) - Ground : Continuity should exist. C OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace harness. D E LIIA1825E 2. CHECK DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH (CHANGEOVER SWITCH) Check continuity between door mirror remote control switch as follows. Connector Terminals Condition 3 D10 13 2 F G Continuity Changeover switch RIGHT position Yes Other than above No Changeover switch LEFT position Yes Other than above No OK or NG OK >> Check the condition of the harness and the connector. NG >> Replace door mirror remote control switch. H SE J LIIA1822E K L M Revision: October 2004 SE-73 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection EIS004GD 1. CHECK FUNCTION With CONSULT-II With “SET SW, MEMORY SW1, MEMORY SW2” on the DATA MONITOR, operate the switch to check ON/OFF operation. Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] Contents MEMORY SW1 “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the seat memory switch 1 signal is displayed. MEMORY SW2 “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the seat memory switch 2 signal is displayed. SET SW “ON/OFF” ON/OFF status judged from the setting switch signal is displayed. Without CONSULT-II GO TO 2. OK or NG OK >> Seat memory switch circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. PIIA0309E 2. CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect seat memory switch. Operate the setting switch and seat memory switch. Check continuity between seat memory switch as follows. Connector Terminal 1 D5 2 4 3 Condition Continuity Memory switch 1 ON Yes Memory switch 1: OFF No Memory switch 2: ON Yes Memory switch 2: OFF No Set switch: ON Yes Set switch: OFF No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace seat memory switch. Revision: October 2004 LIIA1020E SE-74 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER 3. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. 9 (LG/B) - 1 (LG/B) 24 (G/O) - 3 (G/O) 25 (P/L) - 2 (P/L) 3. A Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M33 terminals 9, 24, 25 and seat memory switch connector D5 terminals 1, 2, 3. B : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. C D Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M33 terminals 9, 24, 25 and ground. 9 (LG/B) - Ground 24 (G/O) - Ground 25 (P/L) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. PIIA4576E E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. F 4. CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT G Check continuity between seat memory switch D5 terminal 4 and ground. 4 (B) - Ground H : Continuity should exist. OK or NG OK >> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit. NG >> Repair or replace harness. SE J PIIA4821E Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection K EIS004GE 1. CHECK FUNCTION L With CONSULT-II With “MEMORY SW INDCTR” in ACTIVE TEST, check operation. Test item MEMORY SW INDCTR M Description The memory switch indicator is lit by receiving the drive signal. Without CONSULT-II GO TO 2. OK or NG OK >> Seat memory switch indicator lamp circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. PIIA0319E Revision: October 2004 SE-75 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER 2. CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect seat memory switch. Check voltage between seat memory switch connector D5 terminal 5 and ground. 5 (Y/R) - Ground : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. PIIA4595E 3. CHECK SEAT MEMORY INDICATOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M33 terminals 12, 13 and seat memory switch connector D5 terminals 6, 7. 12 (P) - 6 (P) 13 (Y/G) - 7 (Y/G) 4. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M33 terminals 12, 13 and ground. 12 (P) - Ground 13 (Y/G) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. LIIA1022E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. 4. CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH INDICATOR SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Connect seat memory switch. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M33 terminals 12, 13 and ground. 12 (P) - Ground 13 (Y/G) - Ground : Battery voltage : Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit. NG >> Replace seat memory switch. LIIA1134E Revision: October 2004 SE-76 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Door Mirror Sensor Power Supply and Ground Circuit inspection EIS004GF 1. CHECK DOOR MIRROR SENSOR CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY A 1. 2. 3. B Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M34 terminals 33, 41 and door mirror connector D4 (LH), D107 (RH) terminals 5, 6. 33 (W/L) - 5 (W/L) 41 (W/G) - 6 (W/G) 4. C : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M34 terminals 33, 41 and ground. 33 (W/L) - Ground 41 (W/G) - Ground D : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace harness. E LIIA1023E 2. CHECK MIRROR SENSOR POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. G Connect automatic drive positioner control unit and door mirror LH. Turn ignition switch to ACC. Check voltage between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M34 terminal 33 and ground. 33 (W/L) - Ground H SE : Approx. 5V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit. J LIIA1136E 3. CHECK MIRROR SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. K Turn ignition switch OFF. Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit connector M34 terminal 41 and ground. 41 (W/G) - Ground L : Continuity should exist. M OK or NG OK >> Check the condition of the harness and connector. NG >> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit. LIIA1135E Revision: October 2004 F SE-77 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER A/T Device (Detent Switch) Circuit Inspection (Floor Shift) EIS004GG 1. CHECK FUNCTION With CONSULT-II Check that when the A/T selector lever is in P position, “DETENT SW” on the DATA MONITOR becomes OFF. Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] DETENT SW “ON/ OFF” Contents The A/T selector lever position “P position (OFF)/other than P position (ON)” judged from the park switch signal is displayed. Without CONSULT-II GO TO 2. OK or NG OK >> A/T device (detent switch) circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. PIIA0291E 2. CHECK A/T DEVICE (DETENT SWITCH) HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/T device and driver seat control unit. Check continuity between A/T device connector M203 terminal 6 and driver seat control unit connector P2 terminal 21. 6 (L/R) - 21 (L/R) 4. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between A/T device connector M203 terminal 6 and ground. 6 (L/R) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. LIIA1024E 3. CHECK A/T DEVICE Check continuity between A/T device (detent switch) as follows. Connector M203 Terminals 5 Condition 6 Continuity P position No Other than P position Yes OK or NG OK >> A/T device is OK. NG >> Replace A/T device. LIIA0991E Revision: October 2004 SE-78 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER A/T Device (Detent Switch) Circuit Inspection (Column Shift) EIS0062J 1. CHECK FUNCTION A With CONSULT-II Check that when the A/T selector lever is in P position, “DETENT SW” on the DATA MONITOR becomes OFF. B Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] DETENT SW “ON/ OFF” Contents C The A/T selector lever position “P position (OFF)/other than P position (ON)” judged from the park switch signal is displayed. Without CONSULT-II GO TO 2. OK or NG OK >> A/T device (detent switch) circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. D PIIA0291E F 2. CHECK A/T DEVICE (DETENT SWITCH) HARNESS 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect A/T device and driver seat control unit. Check continuity between A/T device connector M68 terminal 8 and driver seat control unit connector P2 terminal 21. 8 (L/R) - 21 (L/R) 4. E G H : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2 terminal 21 and ground. 21 (L/R) - Ground SE : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace harness. J LIIA1992E K 3. CHECK DETENTION SWITCH Check continuity between A/T device (detent switch) as follows. L Connector M68 Terminals 1 Condition 8 Continuity P position No Other than P position Yes M OK or NG OK >> A/T device is OK. NG >> Replace A/T device. LIIA1993E Revision: October 2004 SE-79 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection EIS004GH 1. CHECK FUNCTION With CONSULT-II Touch "BCM" with “DOOR SW DR” on the DATA MONITOR, check ON/OFF operation when the front door is open and closed. Monitor item [OPERATION or UNIT] DOOR SW DR* “ON/ OFF” Contents Door open (ON)/door closed (OFF) status judged from the front door switch is displayed. *:Refer to SE-40, "DATA MONITOR" . Without CONSULT-II GO TO 2. OK or NG OK >> Front door switch LH circuit is OK. NG >> GO TO 2. PIIA0291E 2. CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH LH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect front door switch LH. Check continuity between front door switch LH terminal 2 and body ground part of front door switch (crew cab) or body ground (king cab). Connector B8 Terminals 2 Ground Condition Continuity With the front door switch LH pressed No With the front door switch LH released Yes OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Replace front door switch LH. LIIA0948E 3. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY 1. 2. Disconnect BCM. Check continuity between BCM connector M19 terminal 47 and front door switch LH connector B8 terminal 2. 47 (SB) - 2 (SB) 3. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between BCM connector M19 terminal 47 and ground. 47 (SB) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> Front door switch LH circuit is OK. NG >> Repair or replace harness. Revision: October 2004 LIIA1027E SE-80 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER UART Communication Line Circuit Inspection EIS004GI 1. CHECK UART LINE INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL 1 1. 2. A Turn ignition switch OFF. Check signal between driver seat control unit connector and ground, with oscilloscope. Connector Terminals (Wire color) (+) P2 17 (W) B C Condition Signal (–) Ground D Pedal adjusting switch ON (FORWARD or BACKWARD operation) PIIA4599E PIIA4814E F OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the following. ● When voltage wave form does not appear with a constant voltage (approx. 5V), replace driver seat control unit. ● When voltage wave form does not appear with a constant voltage (approx. 0V), replace automatic driver seat control unit. 2. CHECK UART LINE INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL 2 Terminals (Wire color) (+) M33 10 (L) Condition Signal K Pedal adjusting switch ON (FORWARD or BACKWARD operation) L PIIA4816E M PIIA4813E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following. ● When voltage wave form does not appear with a constant voltage (approx. 5V), replace automatic drive positioner control unit. ● When voltage wave form does not appear with a constant voltage (approx. 0V), replace driver seat control unit. Revision: October 2004 H J (–) Ground G SE Check signal between automatic drive positioner control unit connector ground, with oscilloscope. Connector E SE-81 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER 3. CHECK UART LINE HARNESS 1. 2. Disconnect driver seat control unit and automatic drive positioner control unit. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2 terminals 1, 17, and automatic drive positioner connector M33 terminals 10, 26. 1 (L) - 10 (L) 17 (W) - 26 (W) 3. : Continuity should exist. : Continuity should exist. Check continuity between driver seat control unit connector P2 terminals 1, 17 and ground. PIIA4598E 1 (L) - Ground 17 (W) - Ground : Continuity should not exist. : Continuity should not exist. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace harness. 4. CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT Does the automatic drive positioner operate when the driver seat control unit is exchanged? OK or NG OK >> Replace driver seat control unit. NG >> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit. Revision: October 2004 SE-82 2005 Titan AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER Removal and Installation EIS004GJ A Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" and BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" . B C D E F G H SE J K L M Revision: October 2004 SE-83 2005 Titan POWER SEAT POWER SEAT Schematic PFP:87016 EIS004GK WIWA0596E Revision: October 2004 SE-84 2005 Titan POWER SEAT Wiring Diagram — SEAT — EIS004GL A B C D E F G H SE J K L M WIWA0597E Revision: October 2004 SE-85 2005 Titan POWER SEAT WIWA0598E Revision: October 2004 SE-86 2005 Titan POWER SEAT A B C D E F G H SE J K L M WIWA0599E Revision: October 2004 SE-87 2005 Titan HEATED SEAT HEATED SEAT Description ● ● ● PFP:87335 EIS004GM When handling seat, be extremely careful not to scratch heating unit. To replace heating unit, seat trim and pad should be separated. Do not use any organic solvent, such as thinner, benzene, alcohol, etc. to clean trim. WIIA0031E Revision: October 2004 SE-88 2005 Titan HEATED SEAT Wiring Diagram — HSEAT — EIS004GO A B C D E F G H SE J K L M WIWA0600E Revision: October 2004 SE-89 2005 Titan HEATED SEAT WIWA0601E Revision: October 2004 SE-90 2005 Titan FRONT SEAT FRONT SEAT Removal and Installation PFP:87000 A EIS004GP Driver Seat B C D E F G H SE J K L M WIIA0615E Revision: October 2004 SE-91 2005 Titan FRONT SEAT 1. Headrest 2. Headrest holder with multi position lock 3. Seatback assembly 4. Lumbar support lever 5. Power seat switch escutcheon 6. Recliner switch knob 7. Slide switch knob 8. Driver power seat frame assembly 9. LH outer leg cover 10. Driver seat wiring harness 11. Bolt cover 12. Seat cushion outer finisher 13. Outer pedestal finisher 14. Seat cushion front finisher 15. Seat cushion inner finisher 16. Seat cushion frame 17. Seat cushion heating element 18. Seat cushion pad 19. Seat cushion trim cover 20. Armrest bolt cover 21. Armrest assembly 22 Headrest holder 25. Seatback pad 28 23 Seatback board 24. Seatback frame 26 Seatback trim cover 27 Seat slide switch Recliner switch Revision: October 2004 SE-92 2005 Titan FRONT SEAT Center Seat A B C D E F G H SE J K L M WIIA0616E 1. Armrest assembly 2. Rear hinge cover 3. Inboard armrest support cover 4. Armrest support 5. Armrest bolt cover 6. Seat belt tongue Revision: October 2004 SE-93 2005 Titan FRONT SEAT 7. Center seat pan 10. Seat cushion pad 8. LH pedestal support 9. RH pedestal support 11. Seat cushion cover 12. Lower armrest pivot cover 13. Upper armrest pivot cover 14. Armrest pivot release lever 15. Armrest release bracket 16. Armrest pivot arm 17. Inboard lower pivot cover Revision: October 2004 SE-94 2005 Titan FRONT SEAT Passenger Seat A B C D E F G H SE J K L M WIIA0617E 1. Headrest 2. Headrest holder with multi position lock 3. Seatback board 4. Armrest assembly 5. Armrest bolt cover 6. Fold flat link bar Revision: October 2004 SE-95 2005 Titan FRONT SEAT 7. Outboard reclining arm outer cover 8. Outboard reclining arm inner cover 9. Inboard reclining arm inner cove 10. Latch cover 11. LH outer leg cover 12. Outboard reclining arm inner cover 13. Seat cushion inner cover 14. Passenger seat wiring harness 15. Inner front leg cover 16. Power seat frame assembly 17. NVH assembly 18. Seat cushion front finisher 19. Outer pedestal finisher 20. Seat cushion outer finisher 21. Seat cushion assembly 22. Power seat switch escutcheon 23. Slide switch knob 24. Recliner switch knob 25. Seatback assembly 26. Headrest holder 27. Seatback frame 28. Seatback trim cover 29. Seatback pad 30. Recliner switch 31. Seat slide switch REMOVAL When removing or installing the seat trim, handle it carefully to keep dirt out and avoid damage. CAUTION: ● Before removing the front seat, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. ● When checking the power seat circuit for continuity using a circuit tester, do not confuse its connector with the side air bag module connector. Such an error may cause the air bag to deploy. ● Do not drop, tilt, or bump the side air bag module while installing the seat. Always handle it with care. ● After front side air bag module inflates, front seatback assembly must be replaced. ● Front passenger seat is equipped with Occupant Classification System sensor and control module. Do not disassemble front passenger seat cushion assembly or remove trim as this will affect the Occupant Classification System calibration. ● Always replace passenger seat cushion as an assembly. 1. Slide the seat until the four body mounting bolts are visible and a tool can be inserted. NOTE: ● If disassembling the seat after removal, set the front/rear cushion lifters to the top position. 2. Disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 3. Disconnect the side air bag module harness connector. 4. Remove the four body mounting bolts. 5. Disconnect the power seat harness connectors and remove the seat from the vehicle. NOTE: When removing and installing the seat, use shop cloths to protect the vehicle from damage. INSTALLATION ● Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Disassembly and Assembly EIS004GQ SEATBACK TRIM AND PAD WARNING: Removal of front side air bag module should only be done to allow deployment of front side air bag module prior to disposal of seatback assembly. NOTE: Only complete outboard seatback assemblies can be replaced on vehicles equipped with side air bags. NOTE: Be sure to set the front/rear cushion lifter to the top position. Revision: October 2004 SE-96 2005 Titan FRONT SEAT 1. Remove the seatback board from the back of the seatback. A B C PIIA0163E D 2. Remove the retainer. E F G SIIA0113E H 3. Remove the headrest. 4. From inside of the seatback, squeeze the headrest holder tabs at the base of the stay pipe and pull the up to remove. NOTE: Before installing the headrest holder, check its orientation (front/ rear and right/left). SE J K LRS023 5. L Remove the snap ring and the lumbar support lever knob. M PIIA1156E 6. Disconnect the seatback heater harness. Remove the seatback trim and pad assembly. Remove the hog ring to separate the seatback trim from the pad and the heater unit. REMOVAL OF SEATBACK ASSEMBLY 1. 2. After completing the steps 1 and 2 of "Seatback Trim and Pad", remove the side air bag harness connector from the seat cushion. Remove the mounting bolts (2 for each side) and seatback assembly. Revision: October 2004 SE-97 2005 Titan FRONT SEAT INSTALLATION OF SEATBACK ASSEMBLY ● Installation is in the reverse order of removal. SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD CAUTION: ● Front passenger seat is equipped with Occupant Classification System sensor and control module. Do not disassemble front passenger seat cushion assembly or remove trim as this will affect the Occupant Classification System calibration. ● Always replace passenger seat cushion as an assembly. ● When removed, the passenger seat cushion must always be placed pan side UP to prevent damage. ● During installation, the wire harness clips must be reinstalled in the holes they were originally in. Do not add additional clips. ● The Occupant Classification System control module can only be replaced as part of the seat cushion assembly. NOTE: If the vehicle has been involved in a collision the seat must be inspected for damage. Refer to SRS-67, "COLLISION DIAGNOSIS" . 1. Remove the power seat switch knobs and power seat switch escutcheon (or recline knobs on manual seat). LIIA0681E 2. Remove the front seat cushion finisher (inner). LIIA0285E 3. 4. Remove the power seat switch screws (or lift knobs on manual seats). Remove four bolts and the seat cushion assembly. SIIA0503E 5. Remove the retainer on the seat cushion frame, then remove the harness connector for the seat heater. Revision: October 2004 SE-98 2005 Titan FRONT SEAT 6. On the drivers seat only, after removing the seat cushion trim and pad, remove the hog rings to separate the trim cover from the pad and seat cushion heater unit. A B C D E F G H SE J K L M Revision: October 2004 SE-99 2005 Titan REAR SEAT REAR SEAT Removal and Installation PFP:88300 EIS004GR REMOVAL 1. 2. Lift the seat cushion into the stowed position. Remove the seatbelt and seat anchor bolts. LIIA1187E 3. Release the seatback and remove the seat. LIIA1188E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 SE-100 2005 Titan REAR SEAT Disassembly and Assembly EIS004GS A RH B C D E F G H SE J K L M WIIA0408E Revision: October 2004 SE-101 2005 Titan REAR SEAT 1. Seatback pad 2. Seatback trim 3. Headrest 4. Headrest guide 5. Seatback frame 6. Armrest cup holder assembly 7. Armrest 8. Inner inboard pivot cover 9. Inboard outer pivot cover 11. Inboard seat support 12. Grocery bag hooks 10. Seat pivot anchor 13. Seat cushion frame 14. Outboard seat support 15. Seat cushion release assembly 16. Release lever handle 17. Outboard pivot cover 18. Seatback latch striker 19. Seatback latch release strap 20. Seat cushion pad 21. Seat cushion trim 22. Seatback latch Revision: October 2004 SE-102 2005 Titan REAR SEAT LH A B C D E F G H SE J K L M WIIA0407E 1. Seatback pad 2. Headrest 3. Seatback latch 4. Seatback latch release strap 5. Seatback latch striker 6. Seatback frame Revision: October 2004 SE-103 2005 Titan REAR SEAT 7. 8. Release lever trim 9. 10. Seat cushion release handle Outboard hinge cover 11. RH support 12. Grocery bag hooks 13. LH support 14. Seatback pivot anchor 15. Seat cushion pad 16. Seat cushion trim 17. Seatback trim 18. Inboard pivot cover 19. Inner inboard pivot cover 20. Headrest guide Revision: October 2004 SE-104 Seat cushion frame 2005 Titan H RESTRAINTS A B SECTION SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3 Precautions for SRS “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” Service ..................................... 3 Occupant Classification System Precaution ............ 3 Trouble Diagnosis Precaution .................................. 3 PREPARATION ........................................................... 4 Special Service Tools ............................................... 4 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 5 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) ....... 6 SRS Configuration ................................................... 6 Front Seat Belt Pre-tensioner with Load Limiter ..... 7 Front Side Air Bag .................................................... 7 Side Curtain Air Bag ................................................. 7 Occupant Classification System ............................... 7 Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors ........... 8 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .............................................. 9 Trouble Diagnosis Introduction ................................. 9 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ....................................... 9 HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR QUICK AND ACCURATE REPAIR ............... 9 WORK FLOW ...................................................... 10 SRS Components Parts Location ............................11 Schematic .............................................................. 12 Wiring Diagram — SRS — ..................................... 13 CONSULT-II Function (AIR BAG) ........................... 19 CONSULT-II Function ............................................ 19 HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE WITH CONSULT-II .............................................. 19 HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS... 20 Self-Diagnosis Function (Without CONSULT-II) ..... 20 HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE... 20 HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS... 21 SRS Operation Check ............................................ 21 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 ........................... 21 Trouble Diagnosis With CONSULT-II ..................... 23 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 ........................... 23 Revision: October 2004 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 ........................... 28 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 (CONTINUED FROM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2) .............. 31 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5 ........................... 31 Trouble Diagnosis Without CONSULT-II ................. 37 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6 ........................... 37 WARNING LAMP FLASH CODE CHART ........... 38 Trouble Diagnosis: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does Not Turn Off ............................................................ 42 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6 ........................... 42 Trouble Diagnosis: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does Not Turn On ............................................................ 43 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7 ........................... 43 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE .................................... 44 Removal and Installation ........................................ 44 REMOVAL ........................................................... 44 INSTALLATION ................................................... 45 SPIRAL CABLE ........................................................ 46 Removal and Installation ........................................ 46 REMOVAL ........................................................... 46 INSTALLATION ................................................... 47 FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE .............. 49 Removal and Installation ........................................ 49 REMOVAL ........................................................... 49 INSTALLATION ................................................... 49 WIRING HARNESS MODIFICATION .................. 50 FRONT SIDE AIR BAG MODULE ............................ 52 Removal and Installation ........................................ 52 REMOVAL ........................................................... 52 INSTALLATION ................................................... 52 SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE ........................ 53 Removal and Installation ........................................ 53 REMOVAL ........................................................... 53 INSTALLATION ................................................... 53 CRASH ZONE SENSOR ........................................... 55 Removal and Installation ........................................ 55 REMOVAL ........................................................... 55 INSTALLATION ................................................... 55 SRS-1 2005 Titan F G SRS I J K L M SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR ................... 56 Removal and Installation ........................................ 56 REMOVAL ........................................................... 56 INSTALLATION .................................................... 56 FRONT SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER ................... 57 Removal and Installation ........................................ 57 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ..................................... 58 Removal and Installation ........................................ 58 REMOVAL ........................................................... 58 INSTALLATION .................................................... 58 ECU DISCRIMINATED NO. ................................. 58 OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT ................................................................ 59 Removal and Installation ........................................ 59 DISPOSALOFAIRBAGMODULEANDSEATBELT PRE-TENSIONER ..................................................... 60 Caution for Air Bag Module and Seat Belt Pre-tensioner ...................................................................... 60 CHECKING DEPLOYMENT TOOL ..................... 60 DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURES FOR AIR BAG MODULE (OUTSIDE OF VEHICLE) ................... 61 DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURES FOR SEAT Revision: October 2004 BELT PRE-TENSIONER (OUTSIDE OF VEHICLE) .....................................................................65 DEPLOYMENT OF AIR BAG MODULES AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONERS WHILE MOUNTED IN VEHICLE ......................................65 DISPOSING OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER ......................................66 COLLISION DIAGNOSIS ..........................................67 For Frontal Collision ................................................67 SRS INSPECTION (FOR FRONTAL COLLISION) ...................................................................67 For Side Collision ....................................................68 WHEN SRS IS ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE COLLISION .................................................................68 WHEN SRS IS NOT ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE COLLISION ..........................................................68 SRS INSPECTION (FOR SIDE COLLISION) ......68 For Rollover ............................................................69 WHEN SRS IS ACTIVATED IN THE ROLLOVER...69 WHEN SRS IS NOT ACTIVATED IN THE ROLLOVER ...................................................................69 SRS INSPECTION (FOR ROLLOVER) ...............70 SRS-2 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A EHS0013S The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. B C D E F G Precautions for SRS “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” Service EHS0013T ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Do not use electrical test equipment to check SRS circuits unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. For approximately 3 minutes after the cables are removed, it is still possible for the air bags and seat belt I pre-tensioners to deploy. Therefore, do not work on any SRS connectors or wires until at least 3 minutes have passed. The air bag diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with the arrow mark “⇐” pointing toward the front of the vehicle for proper operation. Also check air bag diagnosis sensor unit for cracks, deformities or J rust before installation and replace as required. The spiral cable must be aligned with the neutral position since its rotations are limited. Do not attempt to K turn steering wheel or column after removal of steering gear. Handle air bag module carefully. Always place driver and front passenger air bag modules with the pad side facing upward and seat mounted front side air bag module standing with the stud bolt side facing L down. Conduct self-diagnosis to check entire SRS for proper function after replacing any components. After air bag inflates, the front instrument panel assembly should be replaced if damaged. M Occupant Classification System Precaution EHS0013U Replace occupant classification system control unit and passenger front seat cushion as an assembly. Trouble Diagnosis Precaution EHS0013V When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" in GI section ● PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" in PG section When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-11, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" in GI section ● GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" in GI section Check for any service bulletins before servicing the vehicle. Revision: October 2004 SRS-3 2005 Titan PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 EHS0013W The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description KV99105300 (J-41246) Air bag module bracket Anchoring air bag module S-NT354 — (J-39401-100) Passenger air bag module bracket Anchoring passenger air bag module LHIA0045E KV99106400 (J-38381) Deployment tool Disposing of air bag modules and front seat belt pre-tensioners S-NT357 — (J-38381-80) Deployment tool adapter for front driver air bag module, passenger air bag module, side curtain air bag module and front seat belt pre-tensioner Connecting between the deployment tool and front driver air bag module, passenger air bag module, side curtain air bag module and front seat belt pre-tensioner WHIA0089E — (J-38381-65) Deployment tool adapter for front passenger air bag module (for service kit level) Connecting between the deployment tool and front passenger air bag module SHIA0173E Revision: October 2004 SRS-4 2005 Titan PREPARATION Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description KV99109000 (J-44230) Deployment tool adapter for front side air bag module Connecting between the deployment tool and front side air bag module A B C ZZA1190D — (J-42057-UPD) Air bag key set Part of kit (J-42057) Removing and installing air bag lock D E LRS210 F Commercial Service Tools EHS0013X (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name G Description (J-1859A) Steering wheel puller Removing steering wheel SRS I LHIA0043E (J-42578) Steering wheel puller legs Removing steering wheel J K LHIA0044E L M Revision: October 2004 SRS-5 2005 Titan SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) SRS Configuration PFP:28556 EHS0013Y WHIA0224E The air bag deploys if the air bag diagnosis sensor unit is activated while the ignition switch is in the ON or START position. The collision modes for which supplemental restraint systems are activated are different among the SRS systems. For example, the driver air bag module, front passenger air bag module and front seat belt pre-tensioners are activated in a frontal collision but not in a side collision. SRS configurations for some collision modes are as follows: SRS configuration Frontal collision Left side collision Right side collision Rollover Driver air bag module × — — — Front passenger air bag module × — — — Front LH seat belt pre-tensioner × — — × Front RH seat belt pre-tensioner × — — × Front LH side air bag module (if equipped) — × — — Front RH side air bag module (if equipped) — — × — LH side curtain air bag module (if equipped) — × — × RH side curtain air bag module (if equipped) — — × × Revision: October 2004 SRS-6 2005 Titan SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) Front Seat Belt Pre-tensioner with Load Limiter The seat belt pre-tensioner system with load limiter is installed for both the driver's seat and the front passenger's seat. It operates simultaneously with the SRS air bag system in the event of a frontal collision with an impact exceeding a specified level. When the frontal collision with an impact exceeding a specified level occurs, seat belt slack resulting from clothing or other factors is immediately taken up by the pre-tensioner. Vehicle passengers are securely restrained. When passengers in a vehicle are thrown forward in a collision and the restraining force of the seat belt exceeds a specified level, the load limiter permits the specified extension of the seat belt by the twisting of the ELR shaft, and a relaxation of the chest-area seat belt web tension while maintaining force. EHS0013Z A B C D SRS444 E Front Side Air Bag EHS00140 Front side air bag modules are built into the front seatback assemblies. Vehicles with side air bags are equipped with labels as shown. F G SRS WHIA0008E Side Curtain Air Bag I EHS00141 Side curtain air bag modules are located above the vehicle headlining. Vehicles with side curtain air bags are equipped with labels as shown. J K L WHIA0041E Occupant Classification System EHS001B5 The occupant classification system identifies different size occupants, out of position occupants, and detects if child seat is present in the front passenger seat. The occupant classification system receives inputs from the occupant classification system sensor (located inside the passenger seat cushion assembly) and belt tension sensor (part of the passenger front seat belt assembly and located at the belt anchor location). Depending on classification of passenger, the occupant classification system sends a signal to the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. The air bag diagnosis sensor unit uses this signal to determine deployment or non deployment of the passenger front air bag in the event of a collision. Depending on the signal received, the air bag diagnosis sensor Revision: October 2004 SRS-7 2005 Titan M SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) unit can disable the passenger front air bag completely. If this occurs the air bag diagnosis sensor unit will turn on the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator. WHIA0187E Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors EHS00143 The following SRS components use direct-connect style harness connectors. ● Driver front air bag module ● Passenger front air bag module ● LH side curtain air bag module ● RH side curtain air bag module ● Front LH seat belt pre-tensioner ● Front RH seat belt pre-tensioner Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component. Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing. WHIA0103E Revision: October 2004 SRS-8 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Trouble Diagnosis Introduction PFP:00004 A EHS00144 CAUTION: ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to do so in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connectors. ● Do not attempt to repair, splice or modify SRS wiring harnesses. If a harness is damaged, replace it with a new one. ● Keep ground connections clean. B C DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION D The SRS self-diagnosis results can be read by using “AIR BAG” warning lamp and/or CONSULT-II. The User mode is exclusively prepared for the customer (driver). This mode warns the driver of a system malfunction through the operation of the “AIR BAG” warning lamp. The Diagnosis mode allows the technician to locate and inspect the malfunctioning part. The mode applications for the “AIR BAG” warning lamp and CONSULT-II are as follows: E User mode Diagnosis mode Display type “AIR BAG” warning lamp X X ON-OFF operation CONSULT-II — X Monitoring F G HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR QUICK AND ACCURATE REPAIR A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate. In general, each customer feels differently about a malfunction. It is important to fully understand the sympSRS toms or conditions for a customer complaint. Information From Customer WHAT - Vehicle model WHEN - Date, Frequencies WHERE - Road conditions HOW - Operating conditions, Symptoms I J Preliminary Check Check that the following parts are in good order. ● Battery (Refer to SC-4, "How to Handle Battery" .) ● Fuse (Refer to SRS-13, "Wiring Diagram — SRS —" .) ● System component-to-harness connections K L M Revision: October 2004 SRS-9 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WORK FLOW WHIA0098E *1: SRS-9 *2: SRS-21 *3: SRS-31 *4: SRS-37 Revision: October 2004 SRS-10 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SRS Components Parts Location EHS00145 A B C D E F G SRS I WHIA0221E 1. Side curtain air bag modules (If equipped) 2. Front RH side air bag module (If equipped) 3. RH side air bag (satellite) sensor (If equipped) 4. Front RH seatbelt pre-tensioner 5. Belt tension sensor 6. Occupant classification system sensor 7. Occupant classification system con- 8. trol unit Front passenger air bag off indicator 9. Front passenger air bag module J K 10. Crash zone sensor 11. Air bag warning lamp 12. Spiral cable 13. Driver air bag module 14. Front LH seatbelt pre-tensioner 15. LH side air bag (satellite) sensor (If equipped) 16. Front LH side air bag module (If equipped) 17. Air bag diagnosis sensor unit L M Revision: October 2004 SRS-11 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Schematic EHS00146 WHWA0126E Revision: October 2004 SRS-12 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Wiring Diagram — SRS — EHS00147 A B C D E F G SRS I J K L M WHWA0117E Revision: October 2004 SRS-13 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WHWA0118E Revision: October 2004 SRS-14 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A B C D E F G SRS I J K L M WHWA0123E Revision: October 2004 SRS-15 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WHWA0124E Revision: October 2004 SRS-16 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A B C D E F G SRS I J K L M WHWA0125E Revision: October 2004 SRS-17 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WHWA0122E Revision: October 2004 SRS-18 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS CONSULT-II Function (AIR BAG) EHS001B6 A CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. AIR BAG diagnostic mode Description A current Self-diagnosis result (also indicated by the number of warning lamp flashes in the Diagnosis mode) is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen in real time. This refers to a malfunctioning part requiring repairs. B SELF-DIAG [CURRENT] Diagnosis results previously stored in the memory are displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. The stored results will remain until memory erasing is executed. C SELF-DIAG [PAST] TROUBLE DIAG RECORD ECU DISCRIMINATED NO. With TROUBLE DIAG RECORD, diagnosis results previously erased by a reset operation can be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. The air bag diagnosis sensor unit for each vehicle model is assigned with its own, individual classification number. This number will be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, as shown. When replacing the air bag diagnosis sensor unit, refer to the part number for the compatibility. After installation, replacement with a correct unit can be checked by confirming this classification number on the CONSULT-II screen. For NISSAN MODEL A60, the air bag diagnosis sensor unit discriminated numbers assigned are F627 with front side and side curtain air bag modules and F611 without front side and side curtain air bag modules. D E F G ARS366 SRS CONSULT-II Function EHS00148 HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE WITH CONSULT-II From User Mode to Diagnosis Mode After selecting “AIR BAG” on the “SELECT SYSTEM” screen, User mode automatically changes to Diagnosis mode. I J K L SRS803 From Diagnosis Mode to User Mode To return to User mode from Diagnosis mode, touch “BACK” key of CONSULT-II until “SELECT SYSTEM” appears, Diagnosis mode automatically changes to User mode. SRS804 Revision: October 2004 SRS-19 2005 Titan M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS ● “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]” A current self-diagnosis result is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen in real time. After the malfunction is repaired completely, no malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”. SRS701 ● “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” Return to the “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]” CONSULT-II screen by touching “BACK” key of CONSULT-II and select “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” in SELECT DIAG MODE. Touch “ERASE” in “SELFDIAG [PAST]” mode. NOTE: If the memory of the malfunction in “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” is not erased, the User mode will continue to show the system malfunction by the operation of the warning lamp even if the malfunction is repaired completely. SRS702 ● “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD” The memory of “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD” cannot be erased. Self-Diagnosis Function (Without CONSULT-II) ● ● EHS00149 The reading of these results is accomplished using one of two modes — “User mode” and “Diagnosis mode”. After a malfunction is repaired, turn the ignition switch OFF for at least one second, then back ON. Diagnosis mode returns to the User mode. At that time, the self-diagnostic result is cleared. HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE SHIA0183E Revision: October 2004 SRS-20 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS After a malfunction is repaired, turn the ignition switch OFF for at least one second, then back ON. Diagnosis mode returns to the User mode. At that time, the self-diagnostic result is cleared. SRS Operation Check EHS0014A DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 Checking SRS Operation Using “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp—User Mode 1. 2. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON, and check that the air bag warning lamp blinks. Compare the SRS air bag warning lamp blinking pattern with the examples. A B C D E F BF-1845D G SRS I J K L M Revision: October 2004 SRS-21 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Warning lamp examples “AIR BAG” warning lamp operation-User mode- SRS condition ● No malfunction is detected. ● No further action is necessary. ● The system is malfunctioning and needs to be repaired as indicated. ● Air bag is deployed. ● Seat belt pre-tensioner is deployed. ● Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning. ● Air bag power supply circuit is malfunctioning. ● SRS air bag warning lamp circuit is malfunctioning. ● Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning. ● Air bag warning lamp circuit is malfunctioning. Reference item — SHIA0011E Go to SRS-23, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2" or SRS-37, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6" . SHIA0012E Go to SRS-67, "COLLISION DIAGNOSIS" . Go to SRS-42, "Trouble Diagnosis: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does Not Turn Off" . SHIA0013E Go to SRS-43, "Trouble Diagnosis: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does Not Turn On" . SHIA0014E Revision: October 2004 SRS-22 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Trouble Diagnosis With CONSULT-II EHS0014B A DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunction might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector. B C D E BDIA0013E 3. 4. F Turn ignition switch ON. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. G SRS I BCIA0029E 5. J Touch “AIR BAG”. If "AIR BAG" is not indicated, refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . K L M BCIA0030E 6. Touch "SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]". BCIA0031E Revision: October 2004 SRS-23 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 7. Diagnostic code is displayed on "SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]". WHIA0151E If no malfunction is detected on "SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]" even though malfunction is detected in "SRS Operation Check", refer to SRS-31, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 (CONTINUED FROM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2)" , to diagnose the following cases: ● Self-diagnostic result "SELF-DIAG [PAST]" (previously stored in the memory) might not be erased after repair. ● The SRS system malfunctions intermittently. SRS701 Revision: October 2004 SRS-24 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS CONSULT-II Diagnostic Code Chart ("SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]") Diagnostic item Repair order Recheck SRS at each replacement Explanation When malfunction is indicated by the “AIR BAG” warning lamp in User mode. ● ● NO DTC IS DETECTED ● Low battery voltage (Less than 9V) ● Self-diagnostic result “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” (previously stored in the memory) might not be erased after repair. Intermittent malfunction has been detected in the past. Go to SRS-28, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3" . B ● Go to SRS-31, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 (CONTINUED FROM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2)" . C ● Go to SRS-31, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5" . D ● No malfunction is detected. DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE [OPEN] [B1049] or [B1054] ● Driver air bag module circuit is open (including the spiral cable). DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE [VB-SHORT] [B1050] or [B1055] ● DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE [GND-SHORT] [B1051] or [B1056] ● DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE [SHORT] [B1052] or [B1057] ● ASSIST A/B MODULE [OPEN] [B1065] or [B1070] ● ASSIST A/B MODULE [VB-SHORT] [B1066] or [B1071] ● Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuit. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. ASSIST A/B MODULE [GND-SHORT] [B1067] or [B1072] ● Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. 3. Replace front passenger air bag module. (Before disposal, it must be deployed.) ASSIST A/B MODULE [SHORT] [B1068] or [B1073] ● Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuit (including the spiral cable). Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to ground (including the spiral cable). Driver air bag module circuits are shorted to each other. — 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. E 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace driver air bag module. (Before disposal, it must be deployed.) F 4. Replace the spiral cable. 5. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. G 6. Replace the related harness. SRS Front passenger air bag module circuit is open. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. ● Front passenger air bag module circuits are shorted to each other. Crash zone sensor 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace the crash zone sensor. 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. SIDE MODULE LH [OPEN] [B1134] ● Front LH side air bag module circuit is open. SIDE MODULE LH [VB-SHORT] [B1135] ● Front LH side air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuit. SIDE MODULE LH [GND-SHORT] [B1136] ● SIDE MODULE LH [SHORT] [B1137] ● Front LH side air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. Front LH side air bag module circuits are shorted to each other. SRS-25 I J K 5. Replace the related harness. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. CRASH ZONE SEN [UNIT FAIL] [B1033] or [B1034] CRASH ZONE SEN [COMM FAIL] [B1035] Revision: October 2004 A 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace front LH seat back assembly (front LH side air bag module). (Before disposal, it must be deployed.) 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. 2005 Titan L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Diagnostic item Explanation SIDE MODULE RH [OPEN] [B1129] ● Front RH side air bag module circuit is open. SIDE MODULE RH [VB-SHORT] [B1130] ● Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuit. SIDE MODULE RH [GND-SHORT] [B1131] ● SIDE MODULE RH [SHORT] [B1132] ● ● Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. Front RH side air bag module circuits are shorted to each other. LH side air bag (satellite) sensor SATELLITE SENS LH [UNIT FAIL] [B1118] or [B1119] SATELLITE SENS LH [COMM FAIL] [B1120] Repair order Recheck SRS at each replacement 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace front RH seat back assembly (front RH side air bag module). (Before disposal, it must be deployed.) 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace the LH side air bag (satellite) sensor. 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. ● RH side air bag (satellite) sensor SATELLITE SENS RH [UNIT FAIL] [B1113] or [B1114] SATELLITE SENS RH [COMM FAIL] [B1115] 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace the RH side air bag (satellite) sensor. 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. PRE-TEN FRONT LH [OPEN] [B1086] ● The circuit for front LH seat belt pre-tensioner is open. PRE-TEN FRONT LH [VB-SHORT] [B1087] ● The circuit for front LH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to some power supply circuit. PRE-TEN FRONT LH [GND-SHORT] [B1088] ● PRE-TEN FRONT LH [SHORT] [B1089] ● PRE-TEN FRONT RH [OPEN] [B1081] ● The circuit for front RH seat belt pre-tensioner is open. PRE-TEN FRONT RH [VB-SHORT] [B1082] ● The circuit for front RH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to some power supply circuit. PRE-TEN FRONT RH [GND-SHORT] [B1083] ● PRE-TEN FRONT RH [SHORT] [B1084] ● Revision: October 2004 The circuit for front LH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to ground. The circuits for the front LH seat belt pre-tensioner are shorted to each other. The circuit for front RH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to ground. The circuits for the front RH seat belt pre-tensioner are shorted to each other. SRS-26 1. Visually check the wiring harness connections. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace front LH seat belt pre-tensioner. (Before disposal, it must be deployed.) 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connections. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace front RH seat belt pre-tensioner. (Before disposal, it must be deployed.) 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Diagnostic item Explanation CURTAIN MODULE LH [OPEN] [B1150] ● CURTAIN MODULE LH [VB-SHORT] [B1151] ● CURTAIN MODULE LH [GND-SHORT] [B1152] ● CURTAIN MODULE LH [SHORT] [B1153] ● CURTAIN MODULE RH [OPEN] [B1145] ● The RH side curtain air bag module circuit is open. CURTAIN MODULE RH [VB-SHORT] [B1146] ● The RH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuits. CURTAIN MODULE RH [GND-SHORT] [B1147] ● CURTAIN MODULE RH [SHORT] [B1148] ● CONTROL UNIT [B1XXX] OCCUPANT SENS C/U [UNIT FAIL] [B1017], [B1020] or [B1021] ● The LH side curtain air bag module circuit is open. The LH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuits. The LH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. The circuits for the LH side curtain air bag module are shorted to each other. The RH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. The circuits for the RH side curtain air bag module are shorted to each other. Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning. Repair order Recheck SRS at each replacement 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace LH side curtain air bag module. (Before disposal, it must be deployed.) 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. ● Occupant classification system is malfunctioning. Communication between the occupant classification system control unit and air bag diagnosis sensor unit is interrupted. OCCUPANT SENS C/U [COMM FAIL] [B1022] C D 5. Replace the related harness. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. E 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. F 3. Replace RH side curtain air bag module. (Before disposal, it must be deployed.) G 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 1. Replace RH front seat cushion/ occupant classification system control unit assembly. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. SRS I 3. Replace RH front seat cushion/ occupant classification system control unit assembly. 5. Replace the related harness. ● Occupant classification sensor is malfunctioning. SRS-27 J K 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Revision: October 2004 B 2. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit. ● OCCUPANT SENS [UNIT FAIL] [B1018] A 1. Replace RH front seat cushion/ occupant classification system control unit assembly. 2005 Titan L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Diagnostic item Explanation ● Belt tension sensor is malfunctioning. Repair order Recheck SRS at each replacement 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. BELT TENSION SENS [UNIT FAIL] [B1019] 3. Replace RH front seat belt assembly. 4. Replace RH front seat cushion/ occupant classification system control unit assembly. ● Front passenger air bag off indicator is malfunctioning. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. PASS A/B INDCTR CKT [B1023] 3. Replace front passenger air bag off indicator. 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. NOTE: Follow the procedures in numerical order when repairing malfunctioning parts. Confirm whether malfunction is eliminated using air bag warning lamp or CONSULT-II each time repair is finished. If malfunction is still observed, proceed to the next step. When malfunction is eliminated, further repair work is not required. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 Final Check of SRS Using CONSULT-II—Diagnosis Mode CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunction might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication. 1. After repairing SRS, connect both battery cables. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON. BDIA0013E 4. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. BCIA0029E 5. Touch “AIR BAG”. Revision: October 2004 SRS-28 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS If "AIR BAG" is not indicated, refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . A B C BCIA0030E D 6. Touch “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”. E F G BCIA0031E 7. If no malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”, repair of SRS is completed. Go to step 8. If any malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”, the malfunctioning part is not repaired completely or another malfunctioning part is detected. Go to SRS-23, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2" , and repair malfunctioning part completely. SRS I J SRS701 8. Touch “ERASE”. NOTE: Touch “ERASE” to clear the memory of the malfunction (“SELF-DIAG [PAST]”). If the memory of the malfunction in “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” is not erased, the User mode shows the system malfunction by the operation of the warning lamp even if the malfunction is repaired completely. L M WHIA0152E 9. Touch “BACK” key of CONSULT-II to “SELECT DIAG MODE” screen. Touch “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”. BCIA0031E Revision: October 2004 SRS-29 K 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 10. Check that no malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”. 11. Touch “BACK” key of CONSULT-II until “SELECT SYSTEM” appears in order to return to User mode from Diagnosis mode. 12. Turn ignition switch OFF then turn off and disconnect CONSULT-II. 13. Go to SRS-21, "Checking SRS Operation Using “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp—User Mode" . SRS702 Revision: October 2004 SRS-30 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 (CONTINUED FROM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2) Check SRS Repair History A 1. CONSIDER POSSIBILITY THAT SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT WAS NOT ERASED AFTER REPAIR B Check repair history of the SRS. Have any previous repairs been made to the SRS? Yes >> Self-diagnostic result “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” (previously stored in the memory) might not be erased after repair. Go to SRS-28, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3" . No >> Go to SRS-23, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2" . C D DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5 Check SRS Intermittent Malfunction Using CONSULT-II—Diagnosis Mode CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunction might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication. 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector. E F G SRS I BDIA0013E 3. 4. Turn ignition switch ON. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. J K L M BCIA0029E 5. Touch “AIR BAG”. If "AIR BAG" is not indicated, refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . BCIA0030E Revision: October 2004 SRS-31 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 6. Touch “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”. BCIA0031E 7. If diagnostic codes are displayed on “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”, go to step 10. WHIA0152E If no malfunction is detected on “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”, touch “BACK” and go back to “SELECT DIAG MODE”. SRS702 8. Touch “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”. NOTE: With “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”, diagnosis results previously erased by a reset operation can be displayed. BCIA0031E 9. Diagnostic code is displayed on “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”. 10. Touch “PRINT”. 11. Compare diagnostic codes to SRS-33, "CONSULT-II Diagnostic Code Chart ("SELF-DIAG [PAST]" or "TROUBLE DIAG RECORD")" . 12. Touch “BACK” key of CONSULT-II until “SELECT SYSTEM” appears. 13. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn off and disconnect CONSULT-II, and both battery cables. WHIA0153E Revision: October 2004 SRS-32 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 14. Repair the system as outlined by the “Repair order” in “Intermittent Malfunction Diagnostic Code Chart”, that corresponds to the self-diagnostic result. For replacement procedure of component parts, refer to the Removal and Installation procedure for the appropriate component. 15. Go to SRS-28, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3" , for final checking. CONSULT-II Diagnostic Code Chart ("SELF-DIAG [PAST]" or "TROUBLE DIAG RECORD") Diagnostic item ● Low battery voltage (Less than 9V) ● Go to SRS-28, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3" . ● Self-diagnostic result “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” (previously stored in the memory) might not be erased after repair. ● Go to SRS-31, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 (CONTINUED FROM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2)" . ● ● Intermittent malfunction has been detected in the past. Go to SRS-31, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5" . NO DTC IS DETECTED ● No malfunction is detected. DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE [OPEN] [B1049] or [B1054] ● Driver air bag module circuit is open (including the spiral cable). DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE [VB-SHORT] [B1050] or [B1055] ● Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuit (including the spiral cable). DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE [GND-SHORT] [B1051] or [B1056] ● DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE [SHORT] [B1052] or [B1057] ● ASSIST A/B MODULE [OPEN] [B1065] or [B1070] ● ASSIST A/B MODULE [VB-SHORT] [B1066] or [B1071] ● ASSIST A/B MODULE [GND-SHORT] [B1067] or [B1072] ● ASSIST A/B MODULE [SHORT] [B1068] or [B1073] Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to ground (including the spiral cable). Driver air bag module circuits are shorted to each other. Front passenger air bag module circuit is open. Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuit. Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. C D E — 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace driver air bag module. (Before disposal, it must be deployed.) 4. Replace the spiral cable. F G SRS 5. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 6. Replace the related harness. I 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. J 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace front passenger air bag module. (Before disposal, it must be deployed.) 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. ● Front passenger air bag module circuits are shorted to each other. 5. Replace the related harness. ● Crash zone sensor 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. K L M CRASH ZONE SEN [UNIT FAIL] [B1033] or [B1034] CRASH ZONE SEN [COMM FAIL] [B1035] 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace the crash zone sensor. 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. Revision: October 2004 B Repair order Recheck SRS at each replacement Explanation When malfunction is indicated by the “AIR BAG” warning lamp in User mode. A SRS-33 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Diagnostic item Explanation SIDE MODULE LH [OPEN] [B1134] ● Front LH side air bag module circuit is open. SIDE MODULE LH [VB-SHORT] [B1135] ● Front LH side air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuit. SIDE MODULE LH [GND-SHORT] [B1136] ● SIDE MODULE LH [SHORT] [B1137] ● SIDE MODULE RH [OPEN] [B1129] ● Front RH side air bag module circuit is open. SIDE MODULE RH [VB-SHORT] [B1130] ● Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuit. SIDE MODULE RH [GND-SHORT] [B1131] ● SIDE MODULE RH [SHORT] [B1132] ● ● Front LH side air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. Front LH side air bag module circuits are shorted to each other. Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. Front RH side air bag module circuits are shorted to each other. LH side air bag (satellite) sensor SATELLITE SENS LH [UNIT FAIL] [B1118] or [B1119] SATELLITE SENS LH [COMM FAIL] [B1120] Repair order Recheck SRS at each replacement 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace front LH seat back assembly (front LH side air bag module). (Before disposal, it must be deployed.) 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace front RH seat back assembly (front RH side air bag module). (Before disposal, it must be deployed.) 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace the LH side air bag (satellite) sensor. 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. ● RH side air bag (satellite) sensor SATELLITE SENS RH [UNIT FAIL] [B1113] or [B1114] SATELLITE SENS RH [COMM FAIL] [B1115] 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace the RH side air bag (satellite) sensor. 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. PRE-TEN FRONT LH [OPEN] [B1086] ● The circuit for front LH seat belt pre-tensioner is open. PRE-TEN FRONT LH [VB-SHORT] [B1087] ● The circuit for front LH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to some power supply circuit. PRE-TEN FRONT LH [GND-SHORT] [B1088] ● PRE-TEN FRONT LH [SHORT] [B1089] ● Revision: October 2004 The circuit for front LH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to ground. The circuits for the front LH seat belt pre-tensioner are shorted to each other. SRS-34 1. Visually check the wiring harness connections. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace front LH seat belt pre-tensioner. (Before disposal, it must be deployed.) 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Diagnostic item Explanation PRE-TEN FRONT RH [OPEN] [B1081] ● PRE-TEN FRONT RH [VB-SHORT] [B1082] ● PRE-TEN FRONT RH [GND-SHORT] [B1083] ● PRE-TEN FRONT RH [SHORT] [B1084] ● CURTAIN MODULE LH [OPEN] [B1150] ● The LH side curtain air bag module circuit is open. CURTAIN MODULE LH [VB-SHORT] [B1151] ● The LH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuits. CURTAIN MODULE LH [GND-SHORT] [B1152] ● CURTAIN MODULE LH [SHORT] [B1153] ● CURTAIN MODULE RH [OPEN] [B1145] ● CURTAIN MODULE RH [VB-SHORT] [B1146] ● CURTAIN MODULE RH [GND-SHORT] [B1147] ● CURTAIN MODULE RH [SHORT] [B1148] ● CONTROL UNIT [B1XXX] OCCUPANT SENS C/U [UNIT FAIL] [B1017], [B1020] or [B1021] ● The circuit for front RH seat belt pre-tensioner is open. The circuit for front RH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to some power supply circuit. The circuit for front RH seat belt pre-tensioner is shorted to ground. The circuits for the front RH seat belt pre-tensioner are shorted to each other. The LH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. The circuits for the LH side curtain air bag module are shorted to each other. The RH side curtain air bag module circuit is open. The RH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to some power supply circuits. The RH side curtain air bag module circuit is shorted to ground. The circuits for the RH side curtain air bag module are shorted to each other. Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning. Repair order Recheck SRS at each replacement 1. Visually check the wiring harness connections. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace front RH seat belt pre-tensioner. (Before disposal, it must be deployed.) 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. G 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 3. Replace RH side curtain air bag module. (Before disposal, it must be deployed.) 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. I J K 5. Replace the related harness. L 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 1. Replace RH front seat cushion/ occupant classification system control unit assembly. ● Communication between the occupant classification system control unit and air bag diagnosis sensor unit is interrupted. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 3. Replace RH front seat cushion/ occupant classification system control unit assembly. SRS-35 SRS 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 5. Replace the related harness. Revision: October 2004 E F Occupant classification system is malfunctioning. Occupant classification sensor is malfunctioning. D 3. Replace LH side curtain air bag module. (Before disposal, it must be deployed.) ● ● C 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. OCCUPANT SENS [UNIT FAIL] [B1018] B 5. Replace the related harness. 2. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit. OCCUPANT SENS C/U [COMM FAIL] [B1022] A 1. Replace RH front seat cushion/ occupant classification system control unit assembly. 2005 Titan M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Diagnostic item Explanation ● Belt tension sensor is malfunctioning. Repair order Recheck SRS at each replacement 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. BELT TENSION SENS [UNIT FAIL] [B1019] 3. Replace RH front seat belt assembly. 4. Replace RH front seat cushion/ occupant classification system control unit assembly. ● Front passenger air bag off indicator is malfunctioning. 1. Visually check the wiring harness connection. 2. Replace the harness if it has visible damage. PASS A/B INDCTR CKT [B1023] 3. Replace front passenger air bag off indicator. 4. Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. 5. Replace the related harness. Revision: October 2004 SRS-36 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Trouble Diagnosis Without CONSULT-II EHS0014C A DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6 Inspect SRS Malfunction Using "AIR BAG" Warning Lamp—Diagnosis Mode NOTE: SRS will not enter Diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in User mode. 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. After “AIR BAG” warning lamp lights for 7 seconds, turn ignition switch OFF within 1 second. 3. Wait more than 3 seconds. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 two more times (3 times total). 5. Turn ignition switch ON. SRS is now in Diagnosis mode. "AIR BAG" warning lamp operates in Diagnosis mode as follows: B C D E F G SRS I J K L M Revision: October 2004 SRS-37 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WARNING LAMP FLASH CODE CHART SHIA0026E WHIA0197E WHIA0198E WHIA0199E Revision: October 2004 SRS-38 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A B C WHIA0200E D E F G WHIA0201E SRS I J K WHIA0202E L M WHIA0203E Revision: October 2004 SRS-39 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WHIA0204E WHIA0205E WHIA0206E WHIA0222E Revision: October 2004 SRS-40 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A B C WHIA0223E D E F G WHIA0211E SRS I J K WHIA0212E L M Revision: October 2004 SRS-41 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Trouble Diagnosis: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does Not Turn Off EHS0014D DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6 1. CHECK CONDITION OF AIR BAG MODULE Inspect for any deployed air bag modules or seat belt pre-tensioners. Are any air bag modules or seat belt pre-tensioners deployed? YES >> Refer to SRS-67, "COLLISION DIAGNOSIS" . NO >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK THE AIR BAG FUSE Check 10A fuse [No. 13, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK AIR BAG FUSE AGAIN Replace 10A fuse [No. 13, located in the fuse block (J/B)] and turn ignition switch ON. Does the fuse blow again? YES >> Repair main harness. NO >> Inspection End. 4. CHECK AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER and touch “START”. Is “AIR BAG” displayed on CONSULT-II? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Visually inspect the air bag diagnosis sensor unit harness connections. If the connections are OK, replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SRS-58, "Removal and Installation" . BCIA0030E 5. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTION Check for loose connections between the combination meter and the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. OK or NG OK >> Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SRS-58, "Removal and Installation" . NG >> Properly connect the combination meter and air bag diagnosis sensor unit harness connectors. If “AIR BAG” warning lamp still does not turn off, replace the wiring harness. Revision: October 2004 SRS-42 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Trouble Diagnosis: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does Not Turn On EHS0014E A DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7 1. CHECK METER FUSE B Check the 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> GO TO 2. C 2. CHECK METER FUSE AGAIN D Replace 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)] and turn ignition switch ON. Does the fuse blow again? YES >> Repair the related harness. NO >> Inspection End. E 3. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTION BETWEEN AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT AND COMBINA- F TION METER Disconnect the air bag diagnosis sensor unit harness connectors and turn ignition switch ON. G Does “AIR BAG” warning lamp turn on? YES >> Replace the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SRS-58, "Removal and Installation" . NO >> Check the combination meter power and ground circuits. If OK, replace combination meter. SRS Refer to DI-25, "Removal and Installation of Combination Meter" . I J K L M Revision: October 2004 SRS-43 2005 Titan DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE Removal and Installation PFP:K8510 EHS0014F WHIA0159E 1. Horn harness 2. Steering wheel hook 3. Inflator harness 4. Side lids RH/LH 5. Driver air bag module 6. Steering wheel REMOVAL CAUTION: ● Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect SRS component connectors. If a driver air bag direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the spiral cable must be replaced. ● Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. ● When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. 1. Remove the left and right side bolts. 2. Lift the driver air bag module from the steering wheel. 3. Disconnect the air bag harness and horn connectors, then remove the driver air bag module. ● For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-8, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors" . WHIA0184E CAUTION: When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. ● Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward. ● Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into air bag module or harness connectors. ● Do not disassemble air bag module. ● Do not use old bolts after removal; replace with new bolts. ● Do not expose the air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F). ● Revision: October 2004 SRS-44 2005 Titan DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE ● ● Replace the air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the air bag module. A B C SBF814E D INSTALLATION To install, reverse the removal procedure. ● If driver air bag module is being replaced due to deployment, spiral cable must also be replaced. Refer to SRS-46, "SPIRAL CABLE" . ● For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-8, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors" . ● After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-21, "SRS Operation Check" . E F G SRS I J K L M Revision: October 2004 SRS-45 2005 Titan SPIRAL CABLE SPIRAL CABLE Removal and Installation PFP:25554 EHS0014G WHIA0109E 1. Steering wheel 2. Lighting and turn signal switch 3. Wiper and washer switch 4. Spiral cable 5. Driver air bag module connector 6. Column cover upper 7. Column assembly 8. Column cover lower 9. Screw (Do not remove) 10. Screw REMOVAL CAUTION: ● Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. ● When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. 1. Set the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. 2. Remove driver air bag module. Refer to SRS-44, "Removal and Installation" . 3. Remove the steering wheel center nut. 4. Disconnect the steering wheel switch/ horn connector from the spiral cable. 5. Remove the steering wheel using Tool. Tool number: 6. A: J-1859A B: J-42578 Remove the column cover upper and lower. WHIA0124E Revision: October 2004 SRS-46 2005 Titan SPIRAL CABLE 7. Remove wiper washer switch connector, then pinch the tabs at wiper and washer switch base and slide switch away from steering column to remove. A B C LHIA0034E D 8. While pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn signal switch toward driver door and disconnect from base. E F G LHIA0035E 9. SRS Remove the screws, release the clip, and remove the spiral cable. CAUTION: ● Do not disassemble spiral cable. ● Do not apply lubricant to the spiral cable. I J K LHIA0036E 10. Remove the spiral cable connectors. CAUTION: With the steering linkage disconnected, the spiral cable may snap by turning the steering wheel beyond the limited number of turns. The spiral cable can be turned counterclockwise about 2.5 turns from the right end position. INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ● Align spiral cable correctly when installing steering wheel. Make sure that the spiral cable is in the neutral position. The neutral position is detected by turning left 2.5 revolutions from the right end position and ending with the knob at the top. ● If equipped with VDC, refer to BRC-148, "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position" for steering angle sensor adjustment. ● After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to make sure no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-21, "SRS Operation Check" . Revision: October 2004 SRS-47 WGIA0038E 2005 Titan L M SPIRAL CABLE CAUTION: ● The spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if the cable is not installed in the correct position. ● With the steering linkage disconnected, the cable may snap by turning the steering wheel beyond the limited number of turns. The spiral cable can be turned counterclockwise about 2.5 turns from the right end position. Steering wheel center nut : 34 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb) PHIA0275E Revision: October 2004 SRS-48 2005 Titan FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE Removal and Installation PFP:K8515 A EHS0014H The passenger air bag module originally installed in the vehicle uses direct-connect style harness connectors. Service replacement passenger air bag modules use tab-locking style harness connectors. If the passenger air bag module is replaced or if the direct-connect harness connectors are damaged, the vehicle wiring harness must be modified to allow connection of the service replacement passenger air bag module. Refer to SRS-50, "WIRING HARNESS MODIFICATION" for wiring harness modification procedure. B C REMOVAL CAUTION: ● Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect front passenger air bag module con- D nectors. If a direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the front passenger air bag must be replaced and the wiring harness modified. ● Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least E 3 minutes. ● Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module. 1. Remove the glove box. Refer to IP-14, "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL RH AND GLOVE BOX" . F 2. Remove 2 nuts (through glove box opening) retaining front passenger air bag module to instrument panel crossmember. 3. Disconnect the air bag module electrical connectors. G ● For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-8, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors" . SRS 4. Remove the instrument panel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL" . 5. Remove front passenger air bag module nuts and remove air I bag module from the instrument panel assembly. WHIA0110E CAUTION: ● When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. ● Always place front passenger air bag module with caution label side facing upward. ● Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into air bag module or harness connectors. ● Do not disassemble air bag module. ● Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new nuts. ● Do not expose the front passenger air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F). ● ● ● J K L M WHIA0111E Replace the air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the air bag module. For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-8, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors" . SBF814E INSTALLATION Original Passenger Air Bag Module To install, reverse the removal procedure. Revision: October 2004 SRS-49 2005 Titan FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-8, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors" . CAUTION: ● Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module. ● After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-21, "SRS Operation Check" . ● Service Replacement Passenger Air Bag Module 1. Install the front passenger air bag module to the instrument panel pad assembly. WHIA0110E 2. 3. Install the instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL" . Connect the front passenger air bag module harness connector to yellow 4-pin service replacement air bag connector and fasten connector to mounting bracket. CAUTION: Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module. ● After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-21, "SRS Operation Check" . ● WIRING HARNESS MODIFICATION The passenger air bag module originally installed in the vehicle uses direct-connect style harness connectors. Service replacement passenger air bag modules use tab-locking style harness connectors. If the passenger air bag module is replaced or if the direct-connect harness connectors are damaged, the vehicle wiring harness must be modified to allow connection of the service replacement passenger air bag module. NOTE: The wiring harness modification is to be performed only if the vehicle is equipped with the original passenger air bag which uses direct-connect harness connectors. If the passenger air bag is to be replaced in a vehicle that has already had the service replacement passenger air bag installed, the wiring harness modification is not required. CAUTION: ● Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect front passenger air bag module connectors. If a direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the front passenger air bag must be replaced and the wiring harness modified. ● Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. ● Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module. ● After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-21, "SRS Operation Check" . 1. Locate the yellow and orange direct-connect passenger air bag module harness connectors. 2. Use wire cutters to cut back both previously used direct-connect passenger air bag module harness connectors from the vehicle wiring harness approximately 50 mm (1.9 in) from the connectors. 3. Remove approximately 150 mm (5.9 in) of the vehicle harness covering from the cut end. Revision: October 2004 SRS-50 2005 Titan FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE 4. Slide a piece of dual-wall heat shrink tubing (provided in the passenger air bag service kit) onto each wire of the previously used vehicle wiring harness. A B C LHIA0017E D 5. Fold each wire back and insert into the end of the heat shrink tubing so that the end of the wire is approximately centered in the heat shrink tubing. E F G WHIA0062E 6. 7. 8. SRS Use a heat gun to shrink the heat shrink tubing and seal the wire. Use electrical tape to secure the modified circuits to the outside of the wiring harness. Locate the front passenger air bag service replacement connector that is taped back to the main harness. Unwrap the tape to access the yellow service replacement connector and remove the dust cover from the connector. I J K WHIA0118E L M Revision: October 2004 SRS-51 2005 Titan FRONT SIDE AIR BAG MODULE FRONT SIDE AIR BAG MODULE Removal and Installation PFP:K8EH0 EHS0014I REMOVAL WARNING: Removal of front side air bag module should only be done to allow deployment of front side air bag module prior to disposal of seatback assembly. Only complete seatback assemblies can be replaced. Refer to SE-97, "Removal of seatback assembly" . CAUTION: ● Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. ● When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. 1. Remove the front seat. Refer to SE-96, "REMOVAL" . 2. Remove the seatback trim and pad. Refer to SE-96, "SEATBACK TRIM AND PAD" . WHIA0053E 3. Remove the seatback rear finisher and remove the retainers securing the seat cushion trim. Refer to SE-98, "SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD" . 4. Remove air bag module harness clips. 5. Remove the fasteners from the front side air bag module and remove the front side air bag module. CAUTION: When using a clip removal tool to remove the seatback board, take care not to damage the harness for front side air bag module. ● When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. ● Always place the front side air bag module with the mounting stud side facing down. ● Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdrivers, etc.) into air bag module or harness connectors. ● Do not disassemble air bag module. ● Do not expose front seatback assembly (side air bag module) to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F). ● Replace front seatback assembly (side air bag module) if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. ● Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the air bag module. ● If front side air bag module is deployed, the front seatback assembly must be replaced. ● SRS623 SBF814E INSTALLATION WARNING: Removal of front side air bag module should only be done to allow deployment of front side air bag module prior to disposal of seatback assembly. Only complete seatback assemblies can be replaced. Refer to SE-97, "Removal of seatback assembly" . Revision: October 2004 SRS-52 2005 Titan SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE Removal and Installation PFP:985P0 A EHS0014J B C D E F LHIA0055E G REMOVAL CAUTION: SRS ● Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect SRS component connectors. If a direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the harness must be replaced. ● Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at I least 3 minutes. ● When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. 1. Remove headlining. Refer to EI-43, "Removal and Installation" . J 2. Disconnect front side curtain air bag module connectors. ● For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-8, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors" . K 3. Remove the bolts in order starting at the front or rear, and remove the side curtain air bag module. CAUTION: ● When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module. ● Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into air bag module or harness connectors. ● Do not disassemble air bag module. ● Do not expose the air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F). ● Replace side curtain air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. ● Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the air bag module. SBF814E INSTALLATION To install, reverse the removal procedure. ● For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to SRS-8, "Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors" . Revision: October 2004 SRS-53 2005 Titan L M SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE ● After replacement of side curtain air bag module, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-21, "SRS Operation Check" . Revision: October 2004 SRS-54 2005 Titan CRASH ZONE SENSOR CRASH ZONE SENSOR Removal and Installation PFP:98531 A EHS0014K REMOVAL CAUTION: ● Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Remove front grille. Refer to EI-20, "Removal and Installation" . 2. Disconnect the crash zone sensor harness connector. 3. Remove crash zone sensor nuts. B C D E LHIA0056E CAUTION: ● Replace crash zone sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. ● Do not disassemble crash zone sensor. F G INSTALLATION SRS To install, reverse the removal procedure. ● After the work is complete, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS21, "SRS Operation Check" . I J K L M Revision: October 2004 SRS-55 2005 Titan SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR Removal and Installation PFP:98830 EHS0014L REMOVAL CAUTION: ● Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Remove seat belt pre-tensioner. Refer to SB-3, "Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt" . 2. Remove side air bag (satellite) sensor nuts. 3. Disconnect the side air bag (satellite) sensor harness connector. LHIA0062E CAUTION: Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new nuts. ● Check side air bag (satellite) sensor to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it shows any visible signs of damage, replace it with new one. ● Do not disassemble side air bag (satellite) sensor. ● Replace side air bag (satellite) sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. ● INSTALLATION To install, reverse the removal procedure. ● After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-21, "SRS Operation Check" . Revision: October 2004 SRS-56 2005 Titan FRONT SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER FRONT SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER Removal and Installation PFP:86884 A EHS0014M For removal and installation procedures, refer to SB-3, "Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt" . B C D E F G SRS I J K L M Revision: October 2004 SRS-57 2005 Titan DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT Removal and Installation PFP:28556 EHS0014N REMOVAL LHIA0063E CAUTION: ● Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes. 1. Disconnect the harness connectors for each air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner. 2. Remove center console. Refer to IP-15, "CENTER CONSOLE" . 3. Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit harness connectors. 4. Remove fixing bolts from the diagnosis sensor unit. CAUTION: ● Do not use old bolts; replace with new bolts. ● Check diagnosis sensor unit bracket to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it shows any visible signs of damage, replace with new one. ● Replace diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact. INSTALLATION To install, reverse the removal procedure. ● After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-21, "SRS Operation Check" . CAUTION: ● The diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with the arrow mark "⇐" pointing toward the front of the vehicle for proper operation. ECU DISCRIMINATED NO. After replacing the diagnosis sensor unit, confirm that the diagnosis sensor unit identification is correct for the vehicle as equipped. Refer to SRS-19, "CONSULT-II Function" . Revision: October 2004 SRS-58 2005 Titan OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation PFP:98852 A EHS0014O The occupant classification system control unit, occupant classification (pressure) sensor, and bladder are an integral part of the front passenger seat cushion and are replaced as an assembly. Refer to SE-96, "REMOVAL" to remove the seat, and SE-98, "SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD" to replace the seat cushion. B C D E F G SRS I J K L M Revision: October 2004 SRS-59 2005 Titan DISPOSAL OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER DISPOSAL OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER Caution for Air Bag Module and Seat Belt Pre-tensioner ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● PFP:00014 EHS0014P Before disposing of air bag module, seat belt pre-tensioner or vehicle equipped with such systems, deploy the systems. If such systems have already been deployed due to an accident, dispose of them as indicated in “SRS-66, "DISPOSING OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" . When deploying the air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner, always use the Special Service Tool Deployment tool [KV99106400 (J-38381)]. When deploying the air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner, stand at least 5 m (16 ft) away from the component being deployed. When deploying air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner, a fairly loud noise is made, followed by smoke being released. The smoke is not poisonous, however, be careful not to inhale smoke since it irritates the throat and can cause choking. Only deploy one air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner at a time. Due to heat, leave deployed air bag module unattended for at least 30 minutes after deployment. Leave deployed seat belt pre-tensioner unattended for at least 10 minutes after deployment. Be sure to wear gloves when handling a deployed air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner. Never apply water to the deployed air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner. Wash your hands thoroughly after finishing work. Place the vehicle outdoors with an open space of at least 6 m (20 ft) on all sides when deploying air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner while mounted in vehicle. Use a voltmeter to make sure the vehicle battery is fully charged. Do not dispose of the air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner undeployed. CHECKING DEPLOYMENT TOOL Connecting to Battery CAUTION: The battery must show voltage of 9.6V or more. Remove the battery from the vehicle and place it on dry wood blocks approximately 5 m (16 ft) away from the vehicle. ● Wait 3 minutes after the vehicle battery is disconnected before proceeding. ● Connect red clip of deployment tool to battery positive terminal and black clip to negative terminal. Make sure the polarity is correct. The right side lamp in the tool marked “deployment tool power” should glow with a green light. If the right side lamp glows red, reverse the connections to the battery. SRS019 Deployment Tool Check Place the deployment tool switch to the ON position. The left side lamp in the tool, marked “air bag connector voltage” should illuminate. If it does not illuminate, replace the tool. SBF266H Revision: October 2004 SRS-60 2005 Titan DISPOSAL OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER Air Bag Deployment Tool Lamp Illumination Chart (Battery connected) A Switch operation Left side lamp, green* “AIR BAG CONNECTOR VOLTAGE” Right side lamp, green* “DEPLOYMENT TOOL POWER” OFF OFF ON ON ON ON B *: If this lamp glows red, the tool is connected to the battery incorrectly. Reverse the connections and make sure the lamp glows green. C DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURES FOR AIR BAG MODULE (OUTSIDE OF VEHICLE) D Unless the vehicle is being scrapped, deploying the air bag in the vehicle is not recommended. This may cause damage to the vehicle interior. Anchor the deployment Tool in a vise secured to a firm foundation during deployment. Tool number: E KV99105300 (J-41246) F SRS232-C G Deployment of Driver Air Bag Module (Outside of vehicle) 1. Using wire, secure air bag module to the Tool at two places. Tool number: 2. SRS KV99105300 (J-41246) CAUTION: Use wire of at least 1 mm (0.04 in) diameter. Firmly secure Tool with air bag module attached, in a vise. Tool number: I KV99105300 (J-41246) J LHIA0037E 3. K Connect deployment Tool A to air bag module connector using Tool B. L Tool number: A: KV99106400 (J-38381) B: KV99105300 (J-38381-80) M WHIA0120E 4. Connect red clip of Tool to battery positive terminal and black clip to negative terminal. Tool number: 5. 6. KV99106400 (J-38381) The lamp on the right side of the tool, marked “deployment tool power”, should glow green, not red. Press the button on the deployment tool. The left side lamp on the tool, marked “air bag connector voltage”, will illuminate and the air bag module will deploy. LHIA0038E Revision: October 2004 SRS-61 2005 Titan DISPOSAL OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER CAUTION: When deploying the driver air bag module, stand at least 5 m (16 ft) away from the air bag module. Deployment of Front Passenger Air Bag Module (Outside of vehicle) 1. Firmly secure the Tool A in a vise, then secure Tool B to Tool A. Tool number: A: KV99105300 (J-41246) B: J-39401-100 LHIA0040E 2. Match the two holes in the Tool and front passenger air bag module and fix them with two bolts. Tool number: J-39401-100 LHIA0041E 3. Connect deployment Tool A to front passenger air bag module using Tool B. Tool number: A: KV99106400 (J-38381) B: KV99105300 (J-38381-80) LHIA0050E 4. Connect red clip of the Tool to battery positive terminal and black clip to negative terminal. Tool number: KV99106400 (J-38381) 5. The lamp on the right side of the Tool, marked “deployment tool power”, should glow green, not red. 6. Press the button on the Tool. The left side lamp on the tool, marked “air bag connector voltage”, will illuminate and the air bag module will deploy. CAUTION: ● When deploying the front passenger air bag module, do not stand on the deploying side. ● Stand at least 5 m (16 ft) away from the air bag module. Revision: October 2004 SRS-62 SRS020-B 2005 Titan DISPOSAL OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER Deployment of Front Side Air Bag Module (Outside of vehicle) 1. A Make 6.5 mm (0.256 in) diameter holes in air bag module bracket [SST: KV99105300 (J-41246)] at the positions shown. B C SRS490-B 2. 3. Firmly secure air bag module bracket [SST: KV99105300 (J41246)] in a vise. Insert the stud bolts of side air bag module into the two holes in air bag module bracket (held in vise) and fix them with two M6 nuts. CAUTION: Side air bag module should be secured to air bag module bracket [SST: KV99105300 (J41246)] in a vise with stud bolt side facing down. D E F G SHIA0197E SRS 4. Connect deployment tool [SST: KV99106400 (J-38381)] connector to connector on air bag module using deployment tool adapter [SST: KV99109000 (J-44230)]. I J K WHIA0045E 5. 6. 7. L Connect red clip of deployment tool to battery positive terminal and black clip to negative terminal. The lamp on the right side of the tool, marked “deployment tool power”, should glow green, not red. Press the button on the deployment tool. The left side lamp on the tool, marked “air bag connector voltage”, will illuminate and the air bag module will deploy. CAUTION: When deploying the front side air bag module, stand at least 5 m (16 ft) away from the air bag module. M LHIA0064E Deployment of Side Curtain Air Bag Module (Outside of vehicle) NOTE: The side curtain air bag module has a front and rear inflator that are connected by the fabric of the side curtain air bag. Follow the procedure to cut the fabric from the inflators, and then follow the procedure to deploy each inflator. Revision: October 2004 SRS-63 2005 Titan DISPOSAL OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER 1. Cut the inflator from side curtain air bag module. SHIA0198E 2. Connect deployment tool [SST: KV99106400 (J-38381)] to the inflator using deployment tool adapter (J-38381-80). WHIA0073E 3. Put the inflator connected with the deployment tool [SST: KV99106400 (J-38381)] into a tire without a wheel. SHIA0201E 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Put the tire with the inflator onto another tire without wheel. Add an additional tire without a wheel and then a tire mounted on a wheel on top. CAUTION: Tie all tires together with a strap in order to keep them standing. Connect red clip of deployment tool to battery positive terminal and black clip to negative terminal. The lamp on the right side of the tool, marked “deployment tool power”, should glow green, not red. WHIA0048E Press the button on the deployment tool. The left side lamp on the tool, marked “air bag connector voltage”, will illuminate and the air bag module will deploy. CAUTION: When deploying the side curtain air bag module, stand at least 5 m (16 ft) away from the side curtain air bag module. Repeat this procedure to deploy the second inflator. Revision: October 2004 SRS-64 2005 Titan DISPOSAL OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURES FOR SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER (OUTSIDE OF VEHICLE) 1. A Firmly grip pre-tensioner in a vise and cut off the webbing. B C WHIA0122E 2. Connect deployment tool [SST: KV99106400 (J-38381)] connector to front seat belt pre-tensioner using deployment tool adapter (J-38381-80). D E F G LHIA0039E SRS 3. 4. 5. Connect red clip of deployment tool to battery positive terminal and black clip to negative terminal. The lamp on the right side of the tool, marked “deployment tool power”, should glow green, not red. Press the button on the deployment tool. The left side lamp on the tool, marked “seat belt pre-tensioner connector voltage”, will illuminate and the seat belt pre-tensioner will deploy. CAUTION: When deploying the front seat belt pre-tensioner, stand at least 5 m (16 ft) away from the seat belt pre-tensioner. I J K SRS242 L DEPLOYMENT OF AIR BAG MODULES AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONERS WHILE MOUNTED IN VEHICLE When disposing of a vehicle, deploy air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners while they are mounted in vehicle. CAUTION: When deploying air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner, ensure vehicle is empty. 1. Disconnect both the vehicle battery cables and wait 3 minutes. 2. Disconnect all air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner harness connectors. 3. Connect deployment tool [SST: KV99106400 (J-38381)] to air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner. For driver air bag module, use deployment tool adapter (J-38381-80). For front passenger air bag module, use deployment tool adapter (J-38381-65). For side curtain air bag module, use deployment tool adapter (J-38381-80). For side air bag module, use deployment tool adapter [SST: KV99109000 (J-44230)]. Revision: October 2004 SRS-65 2005 Titan M DISPOSAL OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER 4. 5. 6. Connect red clip of deployment tool to battery positive terminal and black clip to negative terminal. The lamp on the right side of the tool, marked “deployment tool power”, should glow green, not red. Press the button on the deployment tool. The left side lamp on the tool, marked “air bag connector voltage”, will illuminate and the air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner will deploy. CAUTION: Deploy only one air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner at a time. SRS006-C DISPOSING OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER Deployed air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners are very hot. Before disposing of air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner, wait at least 30 minutes or 10 minutes, respectively. Seal them in a plastic bag before disposal. CAUTION: ● Never apply water to a deployed air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner. ● Be sure to wear gloves when handling a deployed air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner. ● No poisonous gas is produced upon air bag module deployment. However, be careful not to inhale gas since it irritates the throat and can cause choking. ● Do not disassemble air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner. ● Air bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners cannot be reused. ● Wash your hands thoroughly after finishing work. Revision: October 2004 SRS-66 SBF276H 2005 Titan COLLISION DIAGNOSIS COLLISION DIAGNOSIS For Frontal Collision PFP:00015 A EHS001DD Check the SRS components using the following table. ● After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-21, "SRS Operation Check" . SRS INSPECTION (FOR FRONTAL COLLISION) Part Air bag module (driver and front passenger air bag module) SRS is activated REPLACE Install with new fasteners. B C SRS is NOT activated 1. Remove air bag module. Check harness cover and connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding. 2. Install driver air bag module into the steering wheel to check fit and alignment with the wheel. 3. Install passenger air bag module into the instrument panel to check fit with the instrument panel. D E 4. If no damage is found, reinstall with new fasteners. 5. If damaged—REPLACE. Install air bag modules with new fasteners. Air bag modules must be deployed before disposal. Crash zone sensor REPLACE the crash zone sensor and bracket with new fasteners. F 1. Remove the crash zone sensor. Check harness connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding. 2. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the crash zone sensor and bracket. G 3. Install the crash zone sensor to check fit. 4. If no damage is found, reinstall with new fasteners. SRS 5. If damaged—REPLACE the crash zone sensor and bracket with new fasteners. Seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies REPLACE Install seat belt pretensioner assemblies with new fasteners. 1. Remove seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies. Check harness cover and connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding. I 2. Check belts for damage and anchors for loose mounting. 3. Check retractor for smooth operation. J 4. Check seat belt adjuster for damage. 5. If no damage is found, reinstall seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies. 6. If damaged—REPLACE. Install the seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies with new fasteners. Seat belt pre-tensioners must be deployed before disposal. Diagnosis sensor unit REPLACE Install with new fasteners. 1. Check case for dents, cracks or deformities. L 2. Check connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. 3. If no damage is found, reinstall with new fasteners. 4. If damaged—REPLACE. Install diagnosis sensor unit with new fasteners. Steering wheel 1. Visually check steering wheel for deformities. 2. Check harness (built into steering wheel) and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. 3. Install driver air bag module into the steering wheel to check fit and alignment with the wheel. 4. Check steering wheel for excessive free play. 5. If no damage is found, reinstall. 6. If damaged—REPLACE. Spiral cable REPLACE the spiral cable. 1. Visually check spiral cable and combination switch for damage. 2. Check connectors and protective tape for damage. 3. Check steering wheel for noise, binding or heavy operation. 4. If no damage is found, reinstall. 5. If damaged—REPLACE. Revision: October 2004 K SRS-67 2005 Titan M COLLISION DIAGNOSIS Part Occupant classification system (Passenger seat) SRS is activated SRS is NOT activated 1. Remove passenger seat. 2. Check control unit case for dents, cracks of deformities. 3. Check connectors and pressure sensor tube for damage, and terminals for deformities. 4. Check seat frame and cushion pan for dents or deformities. 5. If no damage is found, reinstall seat with new fasteners. 6. If damaged — REPLACE seat cushion assembly with new fasteners. Harness and connectors 1. Check connectors for poor connection, damage, and terminals for deformities. 2. Check harness for binding, chafing, cuts, or deformities. 3. If no damage is found, reinstall the harness and connectors. 4. If damaged—REPLACE the damaged harness. Do not attempt to repair, splice or modify any SRS harness. Instrument panel 1. Visually check instrument panel for damage. REPLACE the instrument panel assembly. 2. If no damage is found, reinstall the instrument panel. 3. If damaged—REPLACE the instrument panel. For Side Collision EHS001DE Check the SRS components using the following table. ● After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-21, "SRS Operation Check" . WHEN SRS IS ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE COLLISION 1. – – – 2. – 3. Replace the following components: Front seat back assembly (on the side on which side air bag is activated) Diagnosis sensor unit (LH or RH) side air bag (satellite) sensor (on the side on which side air bag is activated) Check the SRS components and the related parts using the following table. Replace any SRS components and the related parts showing visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation). Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II and “AIR BAG” warning lamp. Refer to SRS-21, "SRS Operation Check" for details. Ensure entire SRS operates properly. WHEN SRS IS NOT ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE COLLISION 1. – 2. Check the SRS components and the related parts using the following table. If the front seat back assembly is damaged, the front seat back assembly must be replaced. Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II and “AIR BAG” warning lamp. Refer to SRS-21, "SRS Operation Check" for details. Ensure entire SRS operates properly. SRS INSPECTION (FOR SIDE COLLISION) Part (LH or RH) side curtain air bag module Front (LH or RH) side air bag module SRS is activated Replace the side curtain air bag module. (Repair the center pillar inner, etc. before installing new one if damaged.) REPLACE front seatback assembly. SRS is NOT activated 1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation) of the center pillar on the collision side. 2. If damaged—Remove the side curtain air bag module. 3. Check for visible signs of damaged (tears etc.) of the side curtain air bag module. 4. Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. 5. If no damage is found, reinstall the side curtain air bag module with new fasteners. 6. If damaged—REPLACE the side curtain air bag module with new fasteners. Air bag modules must be deployed before disposal. 1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation) of the seatback on the collision side. 2. Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. 3. If damaged—REPLACE the front seatback assembly. Revision: October 2004 SRS-68 2005 Titan COLLISION DIAGNOSIS Part SRS is activated (LH or RH) side air bag (satellite) sensor REPLACE the side air bag (satellite) sensor on the collision side with new fasteners. (Repair the center pillar inner, etc. before installing new one if damaged.) 1. Remove the side air bag (satellite) sensor on the collision side. Check harness connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding. REPLACE the diagnosis sensor unit with new fasteners. 1. Check case and bracket for dents, cracks or deformities. Diagnosis sensor unit SRS is NOT activated 2. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the side air bag (satellite) sensor. A B 3. Install the side air bag (satellite) sensor to check fit. 4. If no damage is found, reinstall the side sir bag (satellite) sensor with new fasteners. C 5. If damaged—REPLACE the side air bag (satellite) sensor with new fasteners. D 2. Check connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. 3. If no damage is found, reinstall the diagnosis sensor unit with new fasteners. 4. If damaged—REPLACE the diagnosis sensor unit with new fasteners. Seat belt pre-tensioner assembly E 1. Check if the seat belt can be extended smoothly. If the seat belt cannot be extended smoothly, – Check for deformities of the center pillar inner. – If the center pillar inner has no damage, REPLACE the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly. F 2. Remove the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly on the collision side. Check harness cover and connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding. 3. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly. G 4. Check seat belt adjuster for damage. 5. If no damage is found, reinstall the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly. SRS 6. If damaged—REPLACE the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly with new fasteners. The seat belt pre-tensioners must be deployed before disposal. Seat (with front side air bag) REPLACE front seatback assembly. 1. Visually check the seat on the collision side. 2. Remove the seat on the collision side and check the following for damage and deformities. – Harness, connectors and terminals – Frame and recliner (for front and rear seat), and also adjuster and slides (for front seat) I J 3. If no damage is found, reinstall the seat. 4. If damaged—REPLACE the damaged seat parts using new fasteners. If the front seat back is damaged, the front seat back assembly must be replaced. Center inner pillar 1. Check the center inner pillar on the collision side for damage (dents, cracks, deformation). 2. If damaged—REPAIR the center inner pillar. Trim/headlining K L 1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the interior trim on the collision side. 2. If damaged—REPLACE the damaged trim parts. For Rollover EHS001DF Check the SRS components using the following table. ● After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-21, "SRS Operation Check" . WHEN SRS IS ACTIVATED IN THE ROLLOVER 1. – – 2. – 3. Replace the following components: Diagnosis sensor unit (LH or RH) side air bag (satellite) sensor (on the side on which side air bag is activated) Check the SRS components and the related parts using the following table. Replace any SRS components and the related parts showing visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation). Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II and “AIR BAG” warning lamp. Refer to SRS-21, "SRS Operation Check" for details. Ensure entire SRS operates properly. WHEN SRS IS NOT ACTIVATED IN THE ROLLOVER 1. Check the SRS components and the related parts using the following table. Revision: October 2004 SRS-69 2005 Titan M COLLISION DIAGNOSIS – 2. If the front seatback assembly is damaged, the front seatback assembly must be replaced. Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II and “AIR BAG” warning lamp. Refer to SRS-21, "SRS Operation Check" for details. Ensure entire SRS operates properly. SRS INSPECTION (FOR ROLLOVER) Part (LH or RH) side curtain air bag module Front (LH or RH) side air bag module SRS is activated Replace the side curtain air bag module. (Repair the center pillar inner, etc. before installing new one if damaged.) REPLACE front seatback assembly. SRS is NOT activated 1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation) of the center pillar on the collision side. 2. If damaged—Remove the side curtain air bag module. 3. Check for visible signs of damaged (tears etc.) of the side curtain air bag module. 4. Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. 5. If no damage is found, reinstall the side curtain air bag module with new fasteners. 6. If damaged—REPLACE the side curtain air bag module with new fasteners. Air bag modules must be deployed before disposal. 1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation) of the seat back on the collision side. 2. Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. 3. If damaged—REPLACE the front seatback assembly. (LH or RH) side air bag (satellite) sensor Diagnosis sensor unit REPLACE the side air bag (satellite) sensor on the collision side with new fasteners. (Repair the center pillar inner, etc. before installing new one if damaged.) 1. Remove the side air bag (satellite) sensor on the collision side. Check harness connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding. REPLACE the diagnosis sensor unit with new fasteners. 1. Check case and bracket for dents, cracks or deformities. 2. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the side air bag (satellite) sensor. 3. Install the side air bag (satellite) sensor to check fit. 4. If no damage is found, reinstall the side sir bag (satellite) sensor with new fasteners. 5. If damaged—REPLACE the side air bag (satellite) sensor with new fasteners. 2. Check connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities. 3. If no damage is found, reinstall the diagnosis sensor unit with new fasteners. 4. If damaged—REPLACE the diagnosis sensor unit with new fasteners. Seat belt pre-tensioner assembly 1. Check if the seat belt can be extended smoothly. If the seat belt cannot be extended smoothly, – Check for deformities of the center pillar inner. – If the center pillar inner has no damage, REPLACE the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly. 2. Remove the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly on the collision side. Check harness cover and connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding. 3. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly. 4. Check seat belt adjuster for damage. 5. If no damage is found, reinstall the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly. 6. If damaged—REPLACE the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly with new fasteners. The seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies must be deployed before disposal. Seat (with front side air bag) REPLACE front seatback assembly. 1. Visually check the seat on the collision side. 2. Remove the seat on the collision side and check the following for damage and deformities. – Harness, connectors and terminals – Frame and recliner (for front and rear seat), and also adjuster and slides (for front seat) 3. If no damage is found, reinstall the seat. 4. If damaged—REPLACE the damaged seat parts using new fasteners. If the front seatback is damaged, the front seatback assembly must be replaced. Center inner pillar 1. Check the center inner pillar on the collision side for damage (dents, cracks, deformation). 2. If damaged—REPAIR the center inner pillar. Trim/headlining 1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the interior trim on the collision side. 2. If damaged—REPLACE the damaged trim parts. Revision: October 2004 SRS-70 2005 Titan D DRIVELINE/AXLE A B SECTION TRANSFER C TF E CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 4 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 4 Precautions for Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement ........................................ 4 CHECK 4WD SHIFT INDICATOR PATTERN ....... 4 METHOD FOR ADJUSTMENT WITH 4WD SHIFT SWITCH AT “2WD” .................................... 5 METHOD FOR ADJUSTMENT WITH 4WD SHIFT SWITCH AT “4H” OR “4LO” ....................... 5 Precautions .............................................................. 6 Service Notice .......................................................... 6 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 7 PREPARATION ........................................................... 8 Special Service Tools ............................................... 8 Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 10 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ...............................................11 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ....................................11 TRANSFER FLUID ................................................... 12 Replacement .......................................................... 12 DRAINING ........................................................... 12 FILLING ............................................................... 12 Inspection ............................................................... 12 FLUID LEAKAGE AND FLUID LEVEL ................ 12 4WD SYSTEM .......................................................... 13 Cross-section View ................................................ 13 Power Transfer ....................................................... 14 POWER TRANSFER DIAGRAM ........................ 14 POWER TRANSFER FLOW ............................... 15 System Description ................................................ 15 TRANSFER CONTROL DEVICE ........................ 15 WAIT DETECTION SWITCH .............................. 15 4LO SWITCH ...................................................... 15 ATP SWITCH ...................................................... 15 TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT ............................. 15 TRANSFER RELAY ............................................ 15 4WD SHIFT SWITCH AND INDICATOR LAMP... 16 4WD WARNING LAMP ....................................... 17 Revision: October 2004 ATP WARNING LAMP ......................................... 17 System Diagram ..................................................... 18 COMPONENTS FUNCTION ............................... 18 CAN Communication .............................................. 19 ............................................................................ 19 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 20 How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis ......................... 20 BASIC CONCEPT ............................................... 20 Location of Electrical Parts ..................................... 21 Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 22 Wiring Diagram — T/F — ....................................... 23 Trouble Diagnosis Chart for Symptoms .................. 27 Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values ............................................................ 27 TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE ................................................................. 27 CONSULT-II Function (ALL MODE AWD/4WD) ..... 31 FUNCTION .......................................................... 31 CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE ................ 31 SELF-DIAG RESULT MODE ............................... 33 DATA MONITOR MODE ...................................... 34 Self-Diagnostic Procedure ...................................... 36 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II) ....................................................... 36 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITHOUT CONSULT-II) ....................................................... 36 ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS ................................. 37 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM .................... 38 Power Supply Circuit For Transfer Control Unit ...... 38 CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE ................................................ 38 TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE .......................................... 38 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 39 COMPONENT INSPECTION .............................. 40 Transfer Control Unit .............................................. 40 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 40 Output Shaft Revolution Signal (TCM) ................... 41 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 41 Vehicle Speed Sensor (ABS) .................................. 42 TF-1 2005 Titan F G H I J K L M DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 42 4LO Switch ............................................................. 42 CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE ................................................ 42 TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE .......................................... 42 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 43 COMPONENT INSPECTION .............................. 44 4WD Shift Switch .................................................... 45 CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE ................................................ 45 TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE .......................................... 45 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 46 COMPONENT INSPECTION .............................. 48 Wait Detection Switch ............................................. 49 CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE ................................................ 49 TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE .......................................... 49 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 50 COMPONENT INSPECTION .............................. 51 PNP Switch Signal (TCM) ...................................... 52 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 52 Actuator Motor ........................................................ 53 CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE ................................................ 53 TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE .......................................... 53 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 54 COMPONENT INSPECTION .............................. 56 Actuator Position Switch ......................................... 57 CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE ................................................ 57 TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE .......................................... 57 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 58 Transfer Control Device .......................................... 60 CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE ................................................ 60 TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE .......................................... 60 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 61 Engine Speed Signal (ECM) ................................... 63 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 63 CAN Communication Line ...................................... 64 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 64 ATP Switch ............................................................. 64 CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE ................................................ 64 TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE .......................................... 64 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 65 COMPONENT INSPECTION .............................. 66 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS .............. 68 4WD Shift Indicator Lamp and 4LO Indicator Lamp Do Not Turn ON ...................................................... 68 SYMPTOM: .......................................................... 68 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 68 Revision: October 2004 4WD Warning Lamp Does Not Turn ON .................70 SYMPTOM: ..........................................................70 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ...............................71 4WD Shift Indicator Lamp or 4LO Indicator Lamp Do Not Change .......................................................73 SYMPTOM: ..........................................................73 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ...............................73 ATP Warning Lamp Does Not Turn ON ..................74 SYMPTOM: ..........................................................74 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ...............................74 4WD Shift Indicator Lamp Repeats Flashing ..........76 SYMPTOM: ..........................................................76 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ...............................77 4WD Warning Lamp Flashes Slowly .......................77 SYMPTOM: ..........................................................77 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE ...............................78 TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT ...................................79 Removal and Installation .........................................79 REMOVAL ............................................................79 INSTALLATION ....................................................79 FRONT OIL SEAL .....................................................80 Removal and Installation .........................................80 REMOVAL ............................................................80 INSTALLATION ....................................................81 REAR OIL SEAL .......................................................82 Removal and Installation .........................................82 REMOVAL ............................................................82 INSTALLATION ....................................................82 TRANSFER CONTROL DEVICE ..............................84 Removal and Installation .........................................84 REMOVAL ............................................................84 INSTALLATION ....................................................84 AIR BREATHER HOSE .............................................86 Removal and Installation .........................................86 TRANSFER ASSEMBLY ...........................................87 Removal and Installation .........................................87 REMOVAL ............................................................87 INSTALLATION ....................................................87 Disassembly and Assembly ....................................88 COMPONENTS ...................................................88 DISASSEMBLY ....................................................90 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ................95 ASSEMBLY ..........................................................96 PLANETARY CARRIER .......................................... 104 Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 104 DISASSEMBLY .................................................. 104 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY .............. 105 ASSEMBLY ........................................................ 106 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT ............................................ 108 Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 108 DISASSEMBLY .................................................. 108 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY .............. 108 ASSEMBLY ........................................................ 109 SHIFT CONTROL .................................................... 110 Disassembly and Assembly .................................. 110 DISASSEMBLY .................................................. 110 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY .............. 110 ASSEMBLY ........................................................ 111 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 112 TF-2 2005 Titan General Specifications ..........................................112 Pinion Gear End Play ........................................... 112 Clearance Between Shift Fork and Sleeve ........... 112 A B C TF E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 TF-3 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” EDS001MG The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Precautions for Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement EDS001MH When replacing transfer assembly or transfer control unit, check the 4WD shift indicator pattern and adjustment of the position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit if necessary. CHECK 4WD SHIFT INDICATOR PATTERN 1. 2. Set 4WD shift switch to “2WD”, “4H”, “4LO”, “4H” and “2WD” in order. (Stay at each switch position for at least 2 seconds.) Confirm 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp are changed properly as follows. SDIA2481E ● ● If OK, the position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit is correct. If NG, the position is different between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Adjust the position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to pattern table below. Revision: October 2004 TF-4 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS Transfer position adjustment pattern 4WD shift switch condition A Refer procedure 4WD shift switch is under “2WD” condition when engine is being stopped. TF-5, "METHOD FOR ADJUSTMENT WITH 4WD SHIFT SWITCH AT “2WD”" 4WD shift switch is under “4H” or “4LO” condition when engine is being stopped. TF-5, "METHOD FOR ADJUSTMENT WITH 4WD SHIFT SWITCH AT “4H” OR “4LO”" NOTE: Method of adjustment can be chosen voluntarily, according to location of 4WD shift switch. C METHOD FOR ADJUSTMENT WITH 4WD SHIFT SWITCH AT “2WD” Select adjustment pattern 1. 2. B TF Start engine. (Stay for at least 10 seconds.) Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp. Indicator lamp condition E Refer procedure When 4WD shift indicator lamp or 4LO indicator lamp is flashing. TF-5, "Pattern A" Except for above. TF-5, "Pattern B" F Pattern A 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to “N” position with brake pedal depressed. (Stay for at least 2 seconds.) Turn 4WD shift switch to “4LO” position. (Stay for at least 2 seconds.) Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Start engine. Erase self-diagnosis. Refer to TF-34, "How to erase self-diagnostic results" (with CONSULT-II) or TF-37, "ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS" (without CONSULT-II). Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again. Refer to TF-4, "CHECK 4WD SHIFT INDICATOR PATTERN" . If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new transfer control unit and retry the above check. G H I J Pattern B 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to “N” position with brake pedal depressed. (Stay for at least 2 seconds.) Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Start engine. Erase self-diagnosis. Refer to TF-34, "How to erase self-diagnostic results" (with CONSULT-II) or TF-37, "ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS" (without CONSULT-II). Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again. Refer to TF-4, "CHECK 4WD SHIFT INDICATOR PATTERN" . If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new transfer control unit and retry the above check. METHOD FOR ADJUSTMENT WITH 4WD SHIFT SWITCH AT “4H” OR “4LO” 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Start engine. (Stay for at least 10 second.) Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to “N” position with brake pedal depressed. (Stay for at least 2 seconds.) Turn 4WD shift switch to “2WD” position. (Stay for at least 2 seconds.) Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Start engine. Erase self-diagnosis. Refer to TF-34, "How to erase self-diagnostic results" (with CONSULT-II) or TF-37, "ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS" (without CONSULT-II). Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again. Refer to TF-4, "CHECK 4WD SHIFT INDICATOR PATTERN" . If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new transfer control unit and retry the above check. Revision: October 2004 TF-5 2005 Titan K L M PRECAUTIONS Precautions ● EDS001MI Before connecting or disconnecting the transfer control unit harness connector, turn ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect battery ground cable. Because battery voltage is applied to transfer control unit even if ignition switch is turned “OFF”. SEF289H ● When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or from transfer control unit, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or break). When connecting pin connectors make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on transfer control unit pin terminal. SEF291H ● Before replacing transfer control unit, perform transfer control unit input/output signal inspection and make sure transfer control unit functions properly. Refer to TF-27, "Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . MEF040DB Service Notice ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● EDS001MJ After overhaul refill the transfer with new transfer fluid. Check the fluid level or replace the fluid only with the vehicle parked on level ground. During removal or installation, keep inside of transfer clear of dust or dirt. Disassembly should be done in a clean work area. Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the transfer. It is important to prevent the internal parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter. Check for the correct installation status prior to removal or disassembly. If matchmarks are required, be certain they do not interfere with the function of the parts when applied. All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or reassembly. Check appearance of the disassembled parts for damage, deformation, and unusual wear. Replace them with a new ones if necessary. Gaskets, seals and O-rings should replaced any time the transfer is disassembled. In principle, tighten bolts or nuts gradually in several steps working diagonally from inside to outside. If tightening sequence is specified, use it. Observe the specified torque when assembling. Clean and flush the parts sufficiently and blow-dry them. Be careful not to damage sliding surfaces and mating surfaces. Revision: October 2004 TF-6 2005 Titan PRECAUTIONS ● Use lint-free cloth or towels for wiping parts clean. Common shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere with the operation of the transfer. Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis A EDS001MK When reading wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams". ● PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT". When performing trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● GI-9, "How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses". ● GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident". B C TF E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 TF-7 2005 Titan PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tools PFP:00002 EDS001ML The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number Description (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name KV40104000 ( — ) Flange wrench ● Removing self-lock nut ● Installing self-lock nut a: 85 mm (3.35 in) b: 65 mm (2.56 in) NT659 ST33290001 (J-34286) Puller ● Removing front oil seal ● Removing rear oil seal ● Removing metal bushing ● Installing front oil seal ● Installing rear oil seal ● Installing rear bearing ● Installing front bearing ZZA0601D KV38100500 ( — ) Drift a: 80 mm (3.15 in) dia. b: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia. ZZA0811D KV40105310 ( — ) Drift ● Installing dust cover a: 89 mm (3.50 in) dia. b: 80.7 mm (3.17 in) dia. ZZA1003D KV38100200 ( — ) Drift ● Removing sun gear assembly ● Removing input bearing ● Installing sun gear assembly a: 65 mm (2.56 in) dia. b: 49 mm (1.93 in) dia. ZZA1143D ST30720000 (J-25405) Drift ● Installing input bearing ● Installing input oil seal ● Installing carrier bearing a: 77 mm (3.03 in) dia. b: 55 mm (2.17 in) dia. ZZA0811D KV32102700 ( — ) Drift ● Installing mainshaft rear bearing a: 48 mm (1.89 in) dia. b: 41 mm (1.61 in) dia. ZZA0534D Revision: October 2004 TF-8 2005 Titan PREPARATION Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description KV40104830 ( — ) Drift ● A Installing input oil seal B a: 70 mm (2.76 in) dia. b: 63.5 mm (2.50 in) dia. C ZZA1003D ST35300000 ( — ) Drift ● Removing carrier bearing ● Installing metal bushing ● Removing front bearing TF a: 59 mm (2.32 in) dia. b: 45 mm (1.77 in) dia. E NT073 ST30021000 (J-22912-01) Puller ● Removing carrier bearing ● Removing front bearing ● Removing rear bearing F G H ZZA0537D ST33710000 ( — ) Drift ● Removing needle bearing ● Removing metal bushing ● Removing rear bearing I a: 89 mm (3.5 in) b: 30 mm (1.18 in) dia. c: 24 mm (0.94 in) dia. J ZZA1057D ST35325000 ( — ) Drift bar ● Removing metal bushing a: 215 mm (8.46 in) b: 25 mm (0.98 in) dia. c: M12 × 1.5P K L NT663 ST33220000 ( — ) Drift ● Installing needle bearing M a: 37 mm (1.46 in) dia. b: 31 mm (1.22 in) dia. c: 22 mm (0.87 in) dia. ZZA1046D Revision: October 2004 TF-9 2005 Titan PREPARATION Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description ST27863000 ( — ) Drift ● Installing carrier bearing a: 75 mm (2.95 in) dia. b: 62 mm (2.44 in) dia. ZZA1003D ST30901000 (J-26010-01) Drift ● Installing rear bearing ● Installing front bearing a: 79 mm (3.11 in) dia. b: 45 mm (1.77 in) dia. c: 35.2 mm (1.38 in) dia. ZZA0978D Commercial Service Tools EDS001MM Tool name Description Puller ● Removing companion flange ● Removing mainshaft rear bearing ● Removing mainshaft rear bearing ● Removing retaining pin NT077 Puller ZZB0823D Pin punch a: 6mm (0.24in) dia. NT410 Power tool ● Loosening bolts and nuts PBIC0190E Revision: October 2004 TF-10 2005 Titan NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart PFP:00003 A EDS001MN Symptom 3 1 Hard to shift or will not shift 1 1 2 2 TF-96 TF-105 BEARING (Worn or damaged) TF-110 SHIFT FORK (Worn or damaged) OIL SEAL (Worn or damaged) TF-88 Transfer fluid leakage O-RING (Worn or damaged) 2 LIQUID GASKET (Damaged) 1 GEAR (Worn or damaged) Noise TRANSFER FLUID (Wrong) SUSPECTED PARTS (Possible cause) TRANSFER FLUID (Level low) Reference page TRANSFER FLUID (Level too high) TF-12 Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. The numbers indicate the order of the inspection. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. 3 3 B C TF E F G 2 2 H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 TF-11 2005 Titan TRANSFER FLUID TRANSFER FLUID Replacement PFP:31001 EDS001MO DRAINING 1. 2. 3. Stop engine. Remove the drain plug and gasket. Drain the fluid. Install the drain plug with a new gasket to the transfer. Tighten to the specified torque. Refer to TF-88, "COMPONENTS" . CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket. WDIA0214E FILLING 1. 2. Remove the filler plug and gasket. Fill the transfer with new fluid until the fluid level reaches the specified limit near the filler plug hole. Fluid grade: Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants" . Fluid capacity: Approx. 2.0 3. 4. (2-1/8 US pt, 1-3/4 Imp pt) CAUTION: Carefully fill fluid. (Fill up for approx. 3 minutes.) Leave the vehicle for 3 minutes, and check fluid level again. Install the filler plug with a new gasket to the transfer. Tighten to the specified torque. Refer to TF-88, "COMPONENTS" . CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket. Inspection WDIA0211E EDS001MP FLUID LEAKAGE AND FLUID LEVEL 1. 2. 3. Make sure that fluid is not leaking from the transfer assembly or around it. Check fluid level from the filler plug hole as shown. CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking fluid level. Install the filler plug with a new gasket to the transfer. Tighten to the specified torque. Refer to TF-88, "COMPONENTS" . CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket. WDIA0211E Revision: October 2004 TF-12 2005 Titan 4WD SYSTEM 4WD SYSTEM Cross-section View PFP:33084 A EDS001MQ B C TF E F G H I J K L WDIA0222E 1. Mainshaft 2. Rear case 4. 7. 3. Oil pump assembly Clutch gear 5. 2-4 shift fork 6. 2-4 sleeve Drive chain 8. Sprocket 9. L-H shift fork 10. L-H sleeve 11. Internal gear 12. Front case 13. Planetary carrier assembly 14. Sun gear assembly 15. L-H shift rod 16. Control shift rod 17. Companion flange 18. Front drive shaft 19. Transfer control device Revision: October 2004 TF-13 2005 Titan M 4WD SYSTEM Power Transfer EDS001MR POWER TRANSFER DIAGRAM WDIA0223E 1. Mainshaft 2. Clutch gear 3. 2-4 sleeve 4. Drive chain 5. Sprocket 6. L-H sleeve 7. Planetary carrier assembly 8. Sun gear assembly 9. Front drive shaft Revision: October 2004 TF-14 2005 Titan 4WD SYSTEM POWER TRANSFER FLOW A B C TF E SDIA2213E System Description F EDS001MS TRANSFER CONTROL DEVICE Actuator motor and actuator position switch are integrated. Transfer control device shifts from 4H-4LO and between 2WD-4WD. Actuator Motor Actuator motor is operated by signal from transfer control unit and it operates control shift rod so as to shift from 4H-4LO and between 2WD-4WD. Actuator Position Switch G H I Actuator position switch detects actuator motor position and sends it to transfer control unit. WAIT DETECTION SWITCH Wait detection switch detects if transfer gear is in 4WD by 2-4 shift fork position. NOTE: If 4WD shift switch is switched to 4H or 4LO, transfer is not in 4WD completely when gear does not engage. (Wait detection system is operating.) J K 4LO SWITCH 4LO switch detects if transfer gear is under 4LO condition by L-H shift fork position. L ATP SWITCH ATP switch detects if transfer gear is under neutral condition by L-H shift fork position. NOTE: Transfer gear may be under neutral condition when shifting between 4H-4LO. M TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT ● ● Transfer control unit controls transfer control device by input signals of each sensor and each switch, and it directs shifts from 4H-4LO and 2WD-4WD. Self-diagnosis can be done. TRANSFER RELAY Transfer relay applies power to transfer control unit. Revision: October 2004 TF-15 2005 Titan 4WD SYSTEM 4WD SHIFT SWITCH AND INDICATOR LAMP SDIA2363E 4WD Shift Switch 4WD shift switch is able to select from 2WD, 4H or 4LO. 4WD Shift Indicator Lamp ● ● Displays driving conditions selected by 4WD shift switch with rear indicator, front and center indicator while engine is running. (When 4H or 4LO, 4LO indicator lamp also works on. And when 4WD warning lamp is turned on, all 4WD shift indicator lamps are turned off.) Turns ON when ignition switch is turned ON, for purpose of lamp check. Turns OFF approximately 1 second after the engine starts if system is normal. 4LO Indicator Lamp ● ● Displays 4LO condition while engine is running. 4LO indicator lamp flashes if transfer gear does not shift completely under 4H⇔4LO. In this condition, transfer may be under neutral condition and A/T parking mechanism may not be operated. Turns ON when ignition switch is turned ON, for purpose of lamp check. Turns OFF approximately 1 second after the engine starts if system is normal. Revision: October 2004 TF-16 2005 Titan 4WD SYSTEM 4WD WARNING LAMP Turns ON or FLASH when there is a malfunction in 4WD system. Also turns ON when ignition switch is turned ON, for purpose of lamp check. Turns OFF approximately 1 second after the engine starts if system is normal. A 4WD Warning Lamp Indication B Condition Lamp check 4WD system malfunction 4WD warning lamp Turns ON when ignition switch is turned ON. Turns OFF after engine start. ON (For indicated malfunction items, see the “NOTE”) During self-diagnosis Large difference in diameter of front/ rear tires C TF Flickers at malfunction mode. Slow flashing: 1 time/2 seconds (Continuing to flash until turning ignition switch OFF) Other than above (system normal) E OFF NOTE: 4WD warning lamp is turned on when the following one or more parts are malfunctioning. ● Vehicle speed signal (from ABS) ● CAN communication line ● AD converter ● Engine speed signal ● 4WD shift switch ● Wait detection switch ● Actuator motor ● Transfer control device ● PNP switch signal F G H I ATP WARNING LAMP When A/T selector lever is in “P” position, vehicle may move because A/T parking mechanism does not operate when transfer is under neutral condition. ATP warning lamp is turned on to indicate this condition to the driver. J K L M Revision: October 2004 TF-17 2005 Titan 4WD SYSTEM System Diagram EDS001MT PDIA0152E COMPONENTS FUNCTION Component Function Transfer control unit Controls transfer control device and switches 4H-4LO under 4WD condition and 2WD-4WD. Transfer control device Actuator motor and actuator position switch are integrated so as to switch driving types. Actuator motor Controls shift rods by signals from transfer control unit. Actuator position switch Detects actuator motor position. Wait detection switch Detects that transfer is under 4WD condition. 4LO switch Detects that transfer is under 4LO condition. ATP switch Detects that transfer is under neutral condition. 4WD shift switch Able to select from 2WD, 4H or 4LO. 4WD warning lamp ● Illuminates if malfunction is detected in electrical system of 4WD system. ● There is 1 blink in 2 seconds if rotation difference of front wheels and rear wheels is large. ATP warning lamp Indicates that A/T parking mechanism does not operate when A/T selector lever is in “P” position and transfer is under neutral condition. 4WD shift indicator lamp Displays driving condition selected by 4WD shift switch. 4LO indicator lamp Displays 4LO condition. Transmits the following signals via CAN communication to Transfer control unit. ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) ● Vehicle speed signal ● Stop lamp switch signal (brake signal) Transmits the following signal via CAN communication to Transfer control unit. TCM ECM Revision: October 2004 ● Output shaft revolution signal ● A/T position indicator signal (PNP switch signal) Transmits engine speed signal via CAN communication to Transfer control unit. TF-18 2005 Titan 4WD SYSTEM CAN Communication EDS001MU A Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . B C TF E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 TF-19 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis PFP:00004 EDS001MV BASIC CONCEPT ● ● To perform trouble diagnosis, it is the most important to have understanding about vehicle systems (control and mechanism) thoroughly. It is also important to clarify customer complaints before inspection. First of all, reproduce symptoms, and understand them fully. Ask customer about his/her complaints carefully. In some cases, it will be necessary to check symptoms by driving vehicle with customer. CAUTION: Customers are not professional. It is dangerous to make an easy guess like "maybe the customer means that...," or "maybe the customer mentions this symptom". SEF233G ● ● ● It is essential to check symptoms right from the beginning in order to repair malfunctions completely. For intermittent malfunctions, reproduce symptoms based on interview with customer and past examples. Do not perform inspection on ad hoc basis. Most intermittent malfunctions are caused by poor contacts. In this case, it will be effective to shake suspected harness or connector by hand. When repairing without any symptom diagnosis, you cannot judge if malfunctions have actually been eliminated. After completing diagnosis, always erase diagnostic memory. Refer to TF-37, "ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS" . For intermittent malfunctions, move harness or harness connector by hand. Then check for poor contact or reproduced open circuit. Revision: October 2004 TF-20 SEF234G 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Location of Electrical Parts EDS001MW A B C TF E F G H I J K L M WDIA0208E Revision: October 2004 TF-21 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Circuit Diagram EDS001MX WDWA0024E Revision: October 2004 TF-22 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Wiring Diagram — T/F — EDS001MY A B C TF E F G H I J K L M WDWA0025E Revision: October 2004 TF-23 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WDWA0026E Revision: October 2004 TF-24 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS A B C TF E F G H I J K L M WDWA0027E Revision: October 2004 TF-25 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WDWA0028E Revision: October 2004 TF-26 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Trouble Diagnosis Chart for Symptoms EDS001MZ If 4WD warning lamp turns ON, perform self-diagnosis. Refer to TF-36, "Self-Diagnostic Procedure" . Symptom Condition Check item 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not turn ON (4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp check) Ignition switch: ON 4WD warning lamp does not turn ON (4WD warning lamp check) Ignition switch: ON Power supply and ground for transfer control unit A Reference page TF-68 B Combination meter Power supply and ground for transfer control unit C TF-70 Combination meter TF 4WD shift switch Wait detection switch 4WD shift indicator lamp or 4LO indicator lamp does not change 4LO switch Engine running TF-73 ATP switch E Transfer inner parts CAN communication line F 4WD shift switch PNP switch signal ATP warning lamp does not turn ON Engine running ATP switch TF-74 G Combination meter Transfer inner parts H Wait detection switch 4WD shift indicator lamp repeats flashing 4LO switch Engine running TF-76 I Transfer inner parts 4WD warning lamp flashes slowly Slow flashing: 1 time/2 seconds Tire size is different between front and rear of vehicle. While driving TF-77 J Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values EDS001N0 TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE Specifications with CONSULT-II Monitored item [Unit] VHCL/S SEN·FR [km/h] or [mph] VHCL/S SEN·RR [km/h] or [mph] Content Wheel speed (Front wheel) Wheel speed (Rear wheel) K Condition Vehicle stopped 0 km/h (0 mph) Vehicle running Approximately equal to the indication on speedometer (Inside of ±10%) CAUTION: Check air pressure of tire under standard condition. Vehicle stopped 0 km/h (0 mph) Vehicle running Approximately equal to the indication on speedometer (Inside of ±10%) CAUTION: Check air pressure of tire under standard condition. Engine stopped (Engine speed: Less than 400 rpm) ENGINE SPEED [rpm] Engine speed Engine running (Engine speed: 400 rpm or more) BATTERY VOLT [V] Power supply voltage for transfer control unit 2WD SWITCH [ON/ OFF] Input condition from 4WD shift switch Revision: October 2004 Display value Ignition switch: ON 0 rpm Approximately equal to the indication on tachometer Battery voltage 4WD shift switch: 2WD ON 4WD shift switch: 4H and 4LO OFF TF-27 2005 Titan L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Monitored item [Unit] 4H SWITCH [ON/OFF] 4L SWITCH [ON/OFF] 4L POSI SW [ON/OFF] ATP SWITCH [ON/OFF] WAIT DETCT SW [ON/ OFF] 4WD MODE [2H/4H/4L] VHCL/S COMP [km/h] or [mph] SHIFT ACT 1 [ON/OFF] SHIFT AC MON1 [ON/ OFF] SHIFT ACT 2 [ON/OFF] SHIFT AC MON2 [ON/ OFF] Revision: October 2004 Content Condition Display value Input condition from 4WD shift switch 4WD shift switch: 4H ON 4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4LO OFF Input condition from 4WD shift switch 4WD shift switch: 4LO ON Condition of 4LO switch Condition of ATP switch Condition of wait detection switch Control status of 4WD (Output condition of 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp) Vehicle speed Output condition to actuator motor (clockwise) Check signal (reinput signal) for transfer control unit signal output Output condition to actuator motor (counterclockwise) Check signal (reinput signal) for transfer control unit signal output 4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4H OFF 4WD shift switch: 4LO ON Except the above OFF 4WD shift switch : 4H to 4LO or 4LO to 4H (While actuator motor is operating.) ON Brake pedal depressed Except the above OFF ● Vehicle stopped Engine running 4WD shift switch : 4H and 4LO ON ● ● A/T selector lever “N” position 4WD shift switch: 2WD OFF ● Brake pedal depressed ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● A/T selector lever “N” position ● Brake pedal depressed ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● A/T selector lever “P” position ● 4WD shift switch (Engine running) 2WD 2H 4H 4H 4LO 4L Vehicle stopped 0 km/h (0 mph) Vehicle running Approximately equal to the indication on speedometer (Inside of ±10%) CAUTION: Check air pressure of tire under standard condition. ● Vehicle stopped ● ON Engine running 4WD shift switch : 4H to 4LO ● A/T selector lever “N” position Except the above OFF ● Brake pedal depressed ● Vehicle stopped Engine running 4WD shift switch : 4H to 4LO ON ● ● A/T selector lever “N” position Except the above OFF ● Brake pedal depressed ● Vehicle stopped Engine running 4WD shift switch : 4LO to 4H ON ● ● A/T selector lever “N” position Except the above OFF ● Brake pedal depressed ● Vehicle stopped Engine running 4WD shift switch : 4LO to 4H ON ● ● A/T selector lever “N” position Except the above OFF ● Brake pedal depressed TF-28 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Monitored item [Unit] Content Condition Operating condition of actuator motor relay (integrated in transfer control unit) SHIFT ACT/R MON [ON/OFF] ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● A/T selector lever “N” position ● Brake pedal depressed Display value A When 4WD shift switch is operated ON When 4WD shift switch is not operated OFF SHIFT POS SW1 [ON/ OFF] Condition of actuator position switch 1 4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4LO ON 4WD shift switch: 4H OFF SHIFT POS SW2 [ON/ OFF] Condition of actuator position switch 2 4WD shift switch: 4LO ON 4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4H OFF SHIFT POS SW3 [ON/ OFF] Condition of actuator position switch 3 4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4H ON 4WD shift switch: 4LO OFF SHIFT POS SW4 [ON/ OFF] Condition of actuator position switch 4 4WD shift switch: 4H and 4LO ON 4WD shift switch: 2WD OFF 4WD FAIL LAMP [ON/ OFF] 4WD warning lamp condition 4WD warning lamp: ON ON 4WD warning lamp: OFF OFF Rear indicator of 4WD shift indicator lamp condition Rear indicator of 4WD shift indicator lamp: ON ON 2WD IND [ON/OFF] Rear indicator of 4WD shift indicator lamp: OFF OFF Front and center indicator of 4WD shift indicator lamp : ON ON 4H IND [ON/OFF] Front and center indicator of 4WD shift indicator lamp condition Front and center indicator of 4WD shift indicator lamp : OFF OFF 4LO indicator lamp: ON ON 4LO indicator lamp: OFF OFF 4LO indicator lamp condition 4L IND [ON/OFF] B C TF E F G H I Specifications between transfer control unit terminals J TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT TERMINAL CONNECTOR LAYOUT K L M WDIA0140E NOTE: Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground. Terminal Wire color 1 L 2 Condition Data (Approx.) CAN-H – – P CAN-L – – 3 L K-LINE (CONSULT-II signal) – – 6 B Ground 10 11 LG/B W/L Item Actuator position switch 1 Actuator position switch 2 Revision: October 2004 Always 0V 4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4LO 0V 4WD shift switch: 4H Battery voltage 4WD shift switch: 4LO 0V 4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4H Battery voltage TF-29 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Terminal Wire color 12 BR Actuator position switch 3 13 BR/W Actuator position switch 4 14 G/W 15 O 4WD shift switch (4H) 16 R 4WD shift switch (4LO) 17 G/Y Item Wait detection switch B Ground 19 W Power supply (Memory back-up) 24 R/B V ATP switch 4LO switch 25 L/W Ignition switch monitor 27 Y/R Actuator motor power supply 28 Y/L Actuator motor (+) 31 G/B Actuator motor (-) 32 B 0V 4WD shift switch: 4LO Battery voltage 4WD shift switch: 4H and 4LO 0V 4WD shift switch: 2WD Battery voltage Ignition switch: ON ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● A/T selector lever “N” position ● Brake pedal depressed 4WD shift switch: 2WD Battery voltage 4WD shift switch: 4H and 4LO 0V 4WD shift switch: 4H Battery voltage 4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4LO 0V 4WD shift switch: 4LO Battery voltage 4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4H 0V 4WD shift switch: 4H and 4LO 0V 4WD shift switch: 2WD Battery voltage Always 0V Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage Ignition switch: OFF Battery voltage ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● A/T selector lever “P” position ● Brake pedal depressed ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● A/T selector lever “N” position ● Brake pedal depressed 4WD shift switch: 4H to 4LO or 4LO to 4H (While actuator motor is operating.) 0V Except the above Battery voltage 4WD shift switch: 4LO 0V Except the above Battery voltage Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage Ignition switch: OFF 0V Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage Ignition switch: OFF 0V 4WD shift switch: 2WD to 4H or 4H to 4LO or 2WD to 4LO Battery voltage Except the above 0V 4WD shift switch: 4LO to 4H or 4H to 2WD or 4LO to 2WD Battery voltage Except the above 0V Actuator motor ground Revision: October 2004 Data (Approx.) 4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4H 4WD shift switch (2WD) 18 23 Condition Always TF-30 0V 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Terminal 35 36 Wire color B/W L Item 4WD shift indicator lamp (Rear indicator) 4WD shift indicator lamp (Front and center indicator) 37 W/G 4LO indicator lamp 38 W/B 4WD warning lamp 39 40 L/B Y Condition ATP warning lamp Transfer relay 2 44 Y/R Power supply 45 Y/R Power supply Engine running ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● A/T selector lever “P” position ● Brake pedal depressed Data (Approx.) Rear indicator of 4WD shift indicator lamp : ON 0V Rear indicator of 4WD shift indicator lamp : OFF Battery voltage Front and center indicator of 4WD shift indicator lamp: ON 0V Front and center indicator of 4WD shift indicator lamp: OFF Battery voltage 4LO indicator lamp: ON 0V 4LO indicator lamp: OFF Battery voltage 4WD warning lamp: ON 0V 4WD warning lamp: OFF Battery voltage 4WD shift switch: 4H to 4LO or 4LO to 4H (While actuator motor is operating.) Battery voltage Except the above 0V A B C TF E F G ignition switch ON 0V ignition switch OFF Battery voltage Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage Ignition switch: OFF 0V Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage Ignition switch: OFF 0V CAUTION: When using a circuit tester to measure voltage for inspection, be sure not to extend forcibly any connector terminals. CONSULT-II Function (ALL MODE AWD/4WD) H I J EDS001N1 FUNCTION K CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. ALL MODE AWD/4WD diagnostic mode SELF-DIAG RESULTS DATA MONITOR Description L Displays transfer control unit self-diagnosis results. Displays transfer control unit input/output data in real time. M CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. ECU PART NUMBER Transfer control unit part number can be read. CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication. NOTE: For details, refer to the separate “CONSULT-II Operations Manual”. 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Revision: October 2004 TF-31 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 2. 3. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle. Turn ignition switch “ON”. BBIA0369E 4. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. BCIA0029E 5. 6. Touch “ALL MODE AWD/4WD”. If “ALL MODE AWD/4WD” is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service procedure. BCIA0030E Revision: October 2004 TF-32 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS SELF-DIAG RESULT MODE Operation Procedure 1. 2. A Perform “CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE”. Refer to TF-31, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE" . B With engine at idle, touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. Display shows malfunction experienced since the last erasing operation. C NOTE: ● The details for “TIME” are as follow: – “0”: Error currently detected with transfer control unit. TF – Except for “0”: Error detected in the past and memorized with transfer control unit. Detects frequency of driving after DTC occurs (frequency of turning ignition switch “ON/OFF”). E SDIA2687E Display item list Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) Diagnostic item is detected when... Check item *INITIAL START* [P1801] ● Due to removal of battery which cuts off power supply to transfer control unit, self-diagnosis memory function is suspended. TF-38, "Power Supply Circuit For Transfer Control Unit" CONTROL UNIT 1 [P1802] ● Malfunction is detected in the memory (RAM) system of transfer control unit. TF-40, "Transfer Control Unit" CONTROL UNIT 2 [P1803] ● Malfunction is detected in the memory (ROM) system of transfer control unit. TF-40, "Transfer Control Unit" CONTROL UNIT 3 [P1804] ● Malfunction is detected in the memory (EEPROM) system of transfer control unit. TF-40, "Transfer Control Unit" ● Malfunction is detected in output shaft revolution signal that is output from TCM through CAN communication. ● Improper signal is input while driving. ● Malfunction is detected in vehicle speed signal that is output from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) through CAN communication. VHCL SPEED SEN·AT [P1807] VHCL SPEED SEN·ABS [P1808] J TF-42, "Vehicle Speed Sensor (ABS)" ● AD converter system of transfer control unit is malfunctioning. TF-40, "Transfer Control Unit" 4L POSI SW TF [P1810] ● Improper signal from 4LO switch is input due to open or short circuit. TF-42, "4LO Switch" BATTERY VOLTAGE [P1811] ● Power supply voltage for transfer control unit is abnormally low while driving. TF-38, "Power Supply Circuit For Transfer Control Unit" 4WD MODE SW [P1813] ● More than two switch inputs are simultaneously detected due to short circuit of 4WD shift switch. TF-45, "4WD Shift Switch" 4WD DETECT SWITCH [P1814] ● Improper signal from wait detection switch is input due to open or short circuit. TF-49, "Wait Detection Switch" PNP SW/CIRC [P1816] ● When A/T PNP switch signal is malfunction or communication error between the vehicles. TF-52, "PNP Switch Signal (TCM)" ● Motor does not operate properly due to open or short circuit in actuator motor. ● Malfunction is detected in the actuator motor. (When 4WD shift switch is operated and actuator motor is not operated) ● Improper signal from actuator position switch is input due to open or short circuit. ● Malfunction is detected in the actuator position switch. ● Malfunction is detected in the transfer relay 2. ● Malfunction occurs in transfer control device drive circuit. SHIFT ACT POSI SW [P1818] SHIFT ACT CIR [P1819] Revision: October 2004 TF-33 H TF-41, "Output Shaft Revolution Signal (TCM)" Improper signal is input while driving. SHIFT ACTUATOR [P1817] G I ● CONTROL UNIT 4 [P1809] F K L TF-53, "Actuator Motor" TF-57, "Actuator Position Switch" TF-38, "Power Supply Circuit For Transfer Control Unit", TF-60, "Transfer Control Device" 2005 Titan M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Items (CONSULT-II screen terms) ENGINE SPEED SIG [P1820] Diagnostic item is detected when... Check item ● Malfunction is detected in engine speed signal that is output from ECM through CAN communication. ● Improper signal is input while driving. CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] ● Malfunction has been detected from CAN communication line. NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED. ● No NG item has been detected. TF-63, "Engine Speed Signal (ECM)" TF-64, "CAN Communication Line" — CAUTION: If “CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000]” is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for CAN communication line. NOTE: If “SHIFT ACT POSI SW [P1818]” or “SHIFT ACT CIR [P1819]” is displayed, first erase self-diagnostic results. (“SHIFT ACT POSI SW [P1818]” or “SHIFT ACT CIR [P1819]” may be displayed after installing transfer control unit or transfer assembly.) How to erase self-diagnostic results 1. 2. 3. Perform applicably inspection of malfunctioning item and then repair or replace. Start engine and select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “ALL MODE AWD/4WD” with CONSULT-II. Touch “ERASE” on CONSULT-II screen to erase DTC memory. CAUTION: If memory cannot be erased, perform applicably diagnosis. DATA MONITOR MODE Operation procedure 1. 2. 3. Perform “CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE”. Refer to TF-31, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE" . Touch “DATA MONITOR”. Select from “SELECT MONITOR ITEM”, screen of data monitor mode is displayed. NOTE: When malfunction is detected, CONSULT-II performs REAL-TIME DIAGNOSIS. Also, any malfunction detected while in this mode will be displayed at real time. Display item list ×: Standard –: Not applicable Monitor item selection Monitored item (Unit) ECU INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU Remarks VHCL/S SEN·FR [km/h] or [mph] × – × Wheel speed calculated by ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Signal input with CAN communication line. VHCL/S SEN·RR [km/h] or [mph] × – × Wheel speed calculated by TCM. Signal input with CAN communication line. ENGINE SPEED [rpm] × – × Engine speed is displayed. Signal input with CAN communication line. BATTERY VOLT [V] × – × Power supply voltage for transfer control unit. 2WD SWITCH [ON/OFF] × – × 4H SWITCH [ON/OFF] × – × 4L SWITCH [ON/OFF] × – × 4WD shift switch signal status is displayed. (4L means 4LO of 4WD shift switch.) Revision: October 2004 TF-34 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Monitor item selection Monitored item (Unit) ECU INPUT SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU A Remarks 4L POSI SW [ON/OFF] × – × This means 4LO switch. 4LO switch signal status is displayed. ATP SWITCH [ON/OFF] × – × ATP switch signal status is displayed. WAIT DETCT SW [ON/OFF] × – × Wait detection switch signal status is displayed. × Control status of 4WD recognized by transfer control unit. (2WD, 4H or 4LO) 4WD MODE [2H/4H/4L] – × B C TF E VHCL/S COMP [km/h] or [mph] – × × Vehicle speed recognized by transfer control unit. SHIFT ACT 1 [ON/OFF] – × × Output condition to actuator motor (clockwise) SHIFT ACT MON 1 [ON/OFF] – – × Check signal (reinput signal) for transfer control unit signal output SHIFT ACT 2 [ON/OFF] – × × Output condition to actuator motor (counterclockwise) SHIFT ACT MON 2 [ON/OFF] – – × Check signal (reinput signal) for transfer control unit signal output H SFT ACT/R MON [ON/OFF] – – × Operating condition of actuator motor relay (integrated in transfer control unit) I SHIFT POS SW 1 [ON/OFF] × – × Condition of actuator position switch 1 SHIFT POS SW 2 [ON/OFF] × – × Condition of actuator position switch 2 SHIFT POS SW 3 [ON/OFF] × – × Condition of actuator position switch 3 F G J K SHIFT POS SW 4 [ON/OFF] × – × Condition of actuator position switch 4 4WD FAIL LAMP [ON/OFF] – × × Control status of 4WD warning lamp is displayed. 2WD IND [ON/OFF] – – × Control status of 4WD shift indicator lamp (rear) is displayed. 4H IND [ON/OFF] – – × Control status of 4WD shift indicator lamp (front and center) is displayed. 4L IND [ON/OFF] – – × Control status of 4LO indicator lamp is displayed. Voltage [V] – – × The value measured by the voltage probe is displayed. Frequency [Hz] – – × DUTY-HI (high) [%] – – × DUTY-LOW (low) [%] – – × PLS WIDTH-HI [msec] – – × PLS WIDTH-LOW [msec] – – × Revision: October 2004 TF-35 The value measured by the pulse probe is displayed. 2005 Titan L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Self-Diagnostic Procedure EDS001N2 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT-II) Refer to TF-33, "SELF-DIAG RESULT MODE" . SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITHOUT CONSULT-II) Description If the engine starts when there is something wrong with the 4WD system, the 4WD warning lamp turns ON or flickers in the combination meter. When the system functions properly, the warning lamp turns ON when the ignition switch is turned to “ON”, and it turns OFF after engine starts. To locate the cause of a problem, start the self-diagnosis function. The 4WD warning lamp in the combination meter will indicate the problem area by flickering according to the self-diagnostic results. As for the details of the 4WD warning lamp flickering patterns, refer to TF-36, "Diagnostic procedure" . Diagnostic procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Warn up engine. Turn ignition switch “ON” and “OFF” at least twice, and then turn ignition switch “OFF”. Move A/T selector lever to “P” position. Turn 4WD shift switch to “2WD” position. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) 4WD warning lamp ON. If 4WD warning lamp does not turn ON, refer to TF-70, "4WD Warning Lamp Does Not Turn ON" . Move A/T selector lever to “R” position. Turn 4WD shift switch to “2WD”, “4H” and “2WD” in order. Move A/T selector lever to “P” position. Turn 4WD shift switch to “4H”, “2WD” and “4H” in order. Move A/T selector lever to “N” position. Turn 4WD shift switch to “2WD” position. Move A/T selector lever to “P” position. Read the flickering of 4WD warning lamp. Refer to TF-36, "Judgement self-diagnosis" . Judgement self-diagnosis When a malfunction is detected, the malfunction route is indicated by flickering of the 4WD warning lamp. PDIA0227E Flickering pattern or flickering condition 2 3 Items Output shaft revolution signal (from TCM) Diagnostic item is detected when... ● Malfunction is detected in output shaft revolution signal that is output from TCM through CAN communication. ● Improper signal is input while driving. TF-41, "Output Shaft Revolution Signal (TCM)" ● Malfunction is detected in vehicle speed signal that is output from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) through CAN communication. TF-42, "Vehicle Speed Sensor (ABS)" Vehicle speed signal (from ABS) ● 4 CAN communication Revision: October 2004 Check item Improper signal is input while driving. Malfunction has been detected from CAN communication. TF-36 TF-64, "CAN Communication Line" 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Flickering pattern or flickering condition Items Diagnostic item is detected when... Check item 5 AD converter AD converter system of transfer control unit is malfunctioning. TF-40, "Transfer Control Unit" 6 4LO switch Improper signal from 4LO switch is input due to open or short circuit. TF-42, "4LO Switch" 7 Engine speed signal ● ● Malfunction is detected in engine speed signal that is output from ECM through CAN communication. Improper signal is input while driving. C TF Power supply Power supply voltage for transfer control unit is abnormally low while driving. TF-38, "Power Supply Circuit For Transfer Control Unit" 9 4WD shift switch More than two switch inputs are simultaneously detected due to short circuit of 4WD shift switch. TF-45, "4WD Shift Switch" Wait detection switch Improper signal from wait detection switch is input due to open or short circuit. TF-49, "Wait Detection Switch" 11 12 Actuator motor ● Motor does not operate properly due to open or short circuit in actuator motor. ● Malfunction is detected in the actuator motor. (When 4WD shift switch is operated and actuator motor is not operated.) ● Improper signal from actuator position switch is input due to open or short circuit. ● Malfunction is detected in the actuator position switch. ● Malfunction is detected in the transfer relay 2. Malfunction occurs in transfer control device drive circuit. Actuator position switch 13 Transfer control device ● 14 PNP switch signal When A/T PNP switch signal is malfunction or communication error between the vehicles. Repeats flickering every 0.25 sec. Data erase display Repeats flickering every 2 to 5 sec. No flickering — PNP switch or 4WD shift switch ● Power supply failure of memory back-up. ● Battery is disconnected for a long time. ● Battery performance is poor. Circuits that the self-diagnosis covers have no malfunction. PNP switch or 4WD shift switch circuit is shorted or open. TF-53, "Actuator Motor" G TF-57, "Actuator Position Switch" I TF-52, "PNP Switch Signal (TCM)" J TF-38, "Power Supply Circuit For Transfer Control Unit" K — L TF-52, "PNP Switch Signal (TCM)" or TF45, "4WD Shift Switch" In order to make it easier to find the cause of hard-to-duplicate malfunctions, malfunction information is stored into the control unit as necessary during use by the user. This memory is not erased no matter how many times the ignition switch is turned ON and OFF. However, this information is erased by turning ignition switch “OFF” after performing self-diagnostics or by erasing the memory using the CONSULT-II. Revision: October 2004 TF-37 H TF-38, "Power Supply Circuit For Transfer Control Unit", TF-60, "Transfer Control Device" ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS ● E F NOTE: If “actuator position switch” or “transfer control device” is displayed, first erase self-diagnostic results. (They may be displayed after installing transfer control unit or transfer assembly.) ● B TF-63, "Engine Speed Signal (ECM)" 8 10 A 2005 Titan M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM Power Supply Circuit For Transfer Control Unit PFP:00000 EDS001N3 CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE Data are reference value. Monitored item [Unit] BATTERY VOLT [V] Content Power supply voltage for transfer control unit Condition Ignition switch: ON Display value Battery voltage TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Item Condition Terminal color Data (Approx.) 6 B Ground Always 0V 18 B Ground Always 0V 19 W Power supply (Memory back-up) 25 L/W Ignition switch monitor 32 B Actuator motor ground 40 Y Transfer relay 2 44 Y/R Power supply 45 Y/R Power supply Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage Ignition switch: OFF Battery voltage Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage Ignition switch: OFF 0V Always 0V Ignition switch: ON 0V Ignition switch: OFF Battery voltage Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage Ignition switch: OFF 0V Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage Ignition switch: OFF 0V CAUTION: When using a circuit tester to measure voltage for inspection, be sure not to extend forcibly any connector terminals. Revision: October 2004 TF-38 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE A 1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector. Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector terminals and ground. B C Connector E142 E143 Terminal (Wire color) Voltage (Approx.) 19 (W) - Ground Battery voltage 25 (L/W) - Ground 0V 40 (Y) - Ground Battery voltage TF 44 (Y/R) - Ground 45 (Y/R) - Ground E 0V SDIA2799E 4. 5. F Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector terminals and ground. G Connector E142 Terminal (Wire color) Voltage (Approx.) 19 (W) - Ground H 25 (L/W) - Ground 40 (Y) - Ground E143 Battery voltage 44 (Y/R) - Ground SDIA2800E 45 (Y/R) - Ground OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. ● 10A fuses [No. 26 located in the fuse and fusible link box or 59 located in the fuse and relay box] ● 20A fuse [No. 53, located in the IPDM E/R] ● Harness for short or open between battery and transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminal 19 (W), and connector E143 terminals 40 (Y), 44 (Y/R) and 45 (Y/R) ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminal 25 (L/W) ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and transfer relay 1 harness connector E46 terminal 2 (L/W) ● Harness for short or open between transfer relay 1 harness connector E46 terminal 1 (B) and ground ● Battery and ignition switch. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . ● Transfer relay 1, 2. Refer to TF-40, "COMPONENT INSPECTION" . Revision: October 2004 TF-39 2005 Titan I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM 2. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector. Check continuity between transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminals 6 (B), 18 (B), E143 terminal 32 (B) and ground. Continuity should exist. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. SDIA2801E 3. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT Check transfer control unit input/output signal. Refer to TF-27, "Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. 4. CHECK DTC Perform the self-diagnosis, after driving a vehicle for a while. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace transfer control unit. Refer to TF-79, "Removal and Installation" . COMPONENT INSPECTION 1. 2. Apply 12V direct current between terminals 1 and 2 of transfer relay 1 and 2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5. Condition Continuity 12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes OFF No 3. If NG, replace the transfer relay 1 or 2. Refer to TF-21, "Location of Electrical Parts" . SCIA1245E Transfer Control Unit EDS001N4 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. INSPECTION START Do you have CONSULT-II? YES or NO YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> GO TO 3. Revision: October 2004 TF-40 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM 2. PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (WITH CONSULT-II) A With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) B 2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “ALL MODE AWD/4WD” with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch “ERASE”. 4. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. C 5. Perform the self-diagnosis again. Is the “CONTROL UNIT 1 [P1802]”, “CONTROL UNIT 2 [P1803]”, “CONTROL UNIT 3 [P1804]” or “CONTROL UNIT 4 [P1809]” displayed? TF YES >> Replace transfer control unit. Refer to TF-79, "TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT" . NO >> Inspection End. 3. PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (WITHOUT CONSULT-II) E Without CONSULT-II 1. Perform the self-diagnosis and then erase self-diagnostic results. Refer to TF-36, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)" and TF-37, "ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS" . 2. Perform the self-diagnosis again. Do the self-diagnostic results indicate AD converter? YES >> Replace transfer control unit. Refer to TF-79, "TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT" . NO >> Inspection End. Output Shaft Revolution Signal (TCM) F G H EDS001N5 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK DTC WITH TCM I Perform self-diagnosis with TCM. Refer to AT-87, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE" . Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnosis? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. NO >> GO TO 2. J 2. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT K Check transfer control unit input/output signal. Refer to TF-27, "Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. 3. CHECK DTC Perform the self-diagnosis, after driving a vehicle for a while. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Perform self-diagnosis with TCM again. Refer to AT-87, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE" . Revision: October 2004 TF-41 2005 Titan L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM Vehicle Speed Sensor (ABS) EDS001N6 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK DTC WITH ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) Perform self-diagnosis with ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-24, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" (without VDC) or BRC-24, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" (with VDC). Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnosis? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. NO >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT Check transfer control unit input/output signal. Refer to TF-27, "Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. 3. CHECK DTC Perform the self-diagnosis, after driving a vehicle for a while. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Perform self-diagnosis with ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) again. Refer to BRC-24, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" (without VDC) or BRC-24, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" (with VDC). 4LO Switch EDS001N7 CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE Data are reference value. Monitored item 4L POSI SW [ON/OFF] Content Condition Condition of 4LO switch ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● A/T selector lever “N” position ● Brake pedal depressed Display value 4WD shift switch: 4LO ON Except the above OFF TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Terminal Item Condition color 24 V 4LO switch ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● A/T selector lever “N” position ● Brake pedal depressed Data (Approx.) 4WD shift switch: 4LO 0V Except the above Battery voltage CAUTION: When using a circuit tester to measure voltage for inspection, be sure not to extend forcibly any connector terminals. Revision: October 2004 TF-42 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE A 1. CHECK 4LO POSITION SWITCH SIGNAL With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ALL MODE AWD/4WD” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out the value of “4L POSI SW”. Condition Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● A/T selector lever “N” position ● Brake pedal depressed C Display value 4WD shift switch: 4LO ● B ON TF Except the above OFF E PDIA0220E 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Start engine. Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector terminal and ground. Connector E142 G H Terminal (Wire color) 24 (V) Ground F Voltage (Approx.) Condition ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● A/T selector lever “N” position ● 4WD shift switch: 4LO Except the above Brake pedal depressed I 0V Battery voltage J PDIA0201E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 2. K 2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT AND 4LO SWITCH L 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector and the 4LO switch harness connector. Check continuity between transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminal 24 (V) and 4LO switch harness connector F60 terminal 13 (V). M Continuity should exist. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. PDIA0202E Revision: October 2004 TF-43 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect 4LO switch harness connector. Check continuity between 4LO switch harness connector F60 terminal 12 (B) and ground. Continuity should exist. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. PDIA0203E 4. CHECK 4LO SWITCH 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect 4LO switch harness connector. Remove 4LO switch. Refer to TF-21, "Location of Electrical Parts" . Push and release 4LO switch and check continuity between 4LO switch terminals 12 and 13. Terminal 12 - 13 Condition Continuity Push 4LO switch Yes Release 4LO switch No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace 4LO switch. Refer to TF-21, "Location of Electrical Parts" . PDIA0204E 5. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT Check transfer control unit input/output signal. Refer to TF-27, "Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. 6. CHECK DTC Perform the self-diagnosis, after driving a vehicle for a while. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace transfer control unit. Refer to TF-79, "TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT" . COMPONENT INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect 4LO switch harness connector. Remove 4LO switch. Refer to TF-21, "Location of Electrical Parts" . Revision: October 2004 TF-44 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM 4. Push and release 4LO switch and check continuity between 4LO switch terminals 12 and 13. Terminal 12 - 13 5. Condition A Continuity Push 4LO switch Yes Release 4LO switch No B If NG, replace the 4LO switch. Refer to TF-21, "Location of Electrical Parts" . C PDIA0204E TF 4WD Shift Switch EDS001N8 CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE Data are reference value. Monitored item [Unit] Content Condition Display value 2WD SWITCH [ON/ OFF] Input condition from 4WD shift switch 4WD shift switch: 2WD ON 4WD shift switch: 4H and 4LO OFF 4WD shift switch: 4H ON 4H SWITCH [ON/OFF] Input condition from 4WD shift switch 4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4LO OFF 4L SWITCH [ON/OFF] Input condition from 4WD shift switch 4WD shift switch: 4LO ON 4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4H OFF 4WD MODE [2H/4H/4L] Control status of 4WD (Output condition of 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp) 4WD shift switch (Engine running) 2WD 2H 4H 4H 4LO 4L 14 G/W 4WD shift switch (2WD) 15 O 4WD shift switch (4H) 16 R 4WD shift switch (4LO) Ignition switch: ON Data (Approx.) 4WD shift switch: 2WD Battery voltage 4WD shift switch: 4H and 4LO 0V 4WD shift switch: 4H Battery voltage 4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4LO 0V 4WD shift switch: 4LO Battery voltage 4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4H 0V CAUTION: When using a circuit tester to measure voltage for inspection, be sure not to extend forcibly any connector terminals. Revision: October 2004 TF-45 F G H I TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Terminal Item Condition color E 2005 Titan J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK 4WD SHIFT SWITCH SIGNAL With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ALL MODE AWD/4WD” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out ON/OFF switching action of the “2WD SWITCH”, “4H SWITCH”, “4L SWITCH” with operating 4WD shift switch. SDIA2382E Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. 2. Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector terminals and ground. Connector Terminal (Wire color) 14 (G/W) Ground E142 Voltage (Approx.) Condition 4WD shift switch: 2WD Battery voltage 4WD shift switch: 4H and 4LO 15 (O) Ground 4WD shift switch: 4H 16 (R) Ground 4WD shift switch: 4LO 0V Battery voltage 4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4LO 0V Battery voltage 4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4H PDIA0209E 0V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 TF-46 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM 2. CHECK 4WD SHIFT SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch “ON”. Disconnect 4WD shift switch harness connector. Check voltage between 4WD shift switch harness connector terminal 1 and ground. Connector Terminal (Wire color) Voltage (Approx.) M141 1 (Y/R) - Ground Battery voltage B C TF PDIA0210E 4. 5. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Check voltage between 4WD shift switch harness connector terminal 1 and ground. Connector Terminal (Wire color) Voltage (Approx.) M141 1 (Y/R) - Ground 0V E F G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. SDIA2383E ● 10A fuses [No. 26 located in the fuse and fusible link box or 59 located in the fuse and relay box] ● Harness for short or open between battery and 4WD shift switch harness connector M141 terminal 1 (Y/R) ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and transfer relay 1 harness connector E46 terminal 2 (L/W) ● Harness for short or open between transfer relay 1 harness connector E46 terminal 1 (B) and ground. ● Battery and ignition switch. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . ● Transfer relay 1. Refer to TF-40, "COMPONENT INSPECTION" . H I J K L 3. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN 4WD SHIFT SWITCH AND TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT 1. 2. 3. – – – M Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector and the 4WD shift switch harness connector. Check continuity between the following terminals. Transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminal 14 (G/W) and 4WD shift switch harness connector M141 terminal 3 (G/W). Transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminal 15 (O) and 4WD shift switch harness connector M141 terminal 5 (O). Transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminal 16 (R) and 4WD shift switch harness connector M141 terminal 6 (R). Continuity should exist. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: October 2004 TF-47 PDIA0211E 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM 4. CHECK 4WD SHIFT SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect 4WD shift switch harness connector. Operate 4WD shift switch and check continuity between 4WD shift switch terminals. Terminal 1-3 1-5 1-6 Condition Continuity 4WD shift switch: 2WD Yes 4WD shift switch: 4H and 4LO No 4WD shift switch: 4H Yes 4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4LO No 4WD shift switch: 4LO Yes 4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4H No PDIA0212E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace 4WD shift switch. 5. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT Check transfer control unit input/output signal. Refer to TF-27, "Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. 6. CHECK DTC Perform the self-diagnosis, after driving a vehicle for a while. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace transfer control unit. Refer to TF-79, "Removal and Installation" . COMPONENT INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect 4WD shift switch harness connector. Operate 4WD shift switch and check continuity between 4WD shift switch terminals. Terminal 1-3 1-5 1-6 4. Condition Continuity 4WD shift switch: 2WD Yes 4WD shift switch: 4H and 4LO No 4WD shift switch: 4H Yes 4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4LO No 4WD shift switch: 4LO Yes 4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4H No PDIA0212E If NG, replace the 4WD shift switch. Revision: October 2004 TF-48 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM Wait Detection Switch EDS001N9 A CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE Data are reference value. Monitored item WAIT DETCT SW [ON/ OFF] Content Condition Condition of wait detection switch ● Vehicle stopped ● ● ● Brake pedal depressed Display value ON Engine running 4WD shift switch : 4H and 4LO A/T selector lever “N” position 4WD shift switch: 2WD OFF TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Terminal Item Condition color 17 G/Y Wait detection switch ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● A/T selector lever “N” position ● Brake pedal depressed B C TF Data (Approx.) 4WD shift switch: 4H and 4LO 0V E 4WD shift switch: 2WD Battery voltage F CAUTION: When using a circuit tester to measure voltage for inspection, be sure not to extend forcibly any connector terminals. G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 TF-49 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK WAIT DETECTION SWITCH SIGNAL With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ALL MODE AWD/4WD” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out the value of “WAIT DETCT SWITCH”. Condition ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● A/T selector lever “N” position ● Brake pedal depressed Display value 4WD shift switch: 4H and 4LO ON 4WD shift switch: 2WD OFF PDIA0221E 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Start engine. Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector terminal and ground. Connector E142 Terminal (Wire color) 17 (G/Y) - Ground Voltage (Approx.) Condition ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● A/T selector lever “N” position ● Brake pedal depressed 4WD shift switch : 4H and 4LO 4WD shift switch: 2WD 0V Battery voltage PDIA0205E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT AND WAIT DETECTION SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector and the wait detection switch harness connector. Check continuity between transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminal 17 (G/Y) and wait detection switch harness connector F59 terminal 10 (G/Y). Continuity should exist. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. PDIA0206E Revision: October 2004 TF-50 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect wait detection switch harness connector. Check continuity between wait detection switch harness connector F59 terminal 11 (B) and ground. B Continuity should exist. C Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. TF PDIA0207E E 4. CHECK WAIT DETECTION SWITCH 1. 2. 3. 4. F Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect wait detection switch harness connector. Remove wait detection switch. Push and release wait detection switch and check continuity between wait detection switch terminals 10 and 11. Terminal 10 - 11 Condition G H Continuity Push wait detection switch Yes Release wait detection switch No I OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace wait detection switch. Refer to TF-21, "Location of Electrical Parts" . J PDIA0208E 5. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT K Check transfer control unit input/output signal. Refer to TF-27, "Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. 6. CHECK DTC Perform the self-diagnosis, after driving a vehicle for a while. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace transfer control unit. Refer to TF-79, "Removal and Installation" . COMPONENT INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect wait detection switch harness connector. Remove wait detection switch. Refer to TF-21, "Location of Electrical Parts" . Revision: October 2004 TF-51 2005 Titan L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM 4. Push and release wait detection switch and check continuity between wait detection switch terminals 10 and 11. Terminal 10 - 11 5. Condition Continuity Push wait detection switch Yes Release wait detection switch No If NG, replace the wait detection switch. Refer to TF-21, "Location of Electrical Parts" . PDIA0208E PNP Switch Signal (TCM) EDS001NA DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK DTC WITH TCM Perform self-diagnosis with TCM. Refer to AT-87, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE" . Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnosis? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. NO >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT Check transfer control unit input/output signal. Refer to TF-27, "Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. 3. CHECK DTC Perform the self-diagnosis, after driving a vehicle for a while. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Perform self-diagnosis with TCM again. Refer to AT-87, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE" . Revision: October 2004 TF-52 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM Actuator Motor EDS001NB A CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE Data are reference value. Monitored item SHIFT ACT 1 [ON/OFF] SHIFT AC MON1 [ON/ OFF] SHIFT ACT 2 [ON/OFF] SHIFT AC MON2 [ON/ OFF] Content Condition Output condition to actuator motor (clockwise) Check signal (reinput signal) for transfer control unit signal output Output condition to actuator motor (counterclockwise) Check signal (reinput signal) for transfer control unit signal output ● Vehicle stopped ● ● ● Brake pedal depressed ● Vehicle stopped ● Display value ON Engine running 4WD shift switch : 4H to 4LO A/T selector lever “N” position Except the above OFF 4WD shift switch : 4H to 4LO ON Engine running ● A/T selector lever “N” position Except the above OFF ● Brake pedal depressed ● Vehicle stopped Engine running 4WD shift switch : 4LO to 4H ON ● ● A/T selector lever “N” position Except the above OFF ON OFF Actuator motor power supply 28 Y/L Actuator motor (+) 31 G/B Actuator motor (-) TF F ● Brake pedal depressed ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running 4WD shift switch : 4LO to 4H ● A/T selector lever “N” position Except the above ● Brake pedal depressed Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Terminal Item Condition color Y/R C E TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE 27 B G H I Data (Approx.) Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage Ignition switch: OFF 0V 4WD shift switch: 2WD to 4H or 4H to 4LO or 2WD to 4LO Battery voltage Except the above 0V 4WD shift switch: 4LO to 4H or 4H to 2WD or 4LO to 2WD Battery voltage Except the above 0V J K L CAUTION: When using a circuit tester to measure voltage for inspection, be sure not to extend forcibly any connector terminals. M Revision: October 2004 TF-53 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK ACTUATOR MOTOR SIGNAL With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ALL MODE AWD/4WD” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out the value of “SHIFT ACT 1”, “SHIFT ACT MON 1”, “SHIFT ACT 2”, “SHIFT ACT MON 2”. Monitored item Condition SHIFT ACT 1 SHIFT AC MON1 ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● A/T selector lever “N” position SHIFT ACT 2 ● Brake pedal depressed SHIFT AC MON2 Display value 4WD shift switch : 4H to 4LO ON Except the above OFF 4WD shift switch : 4H to 4LO ON Except the above OFF PDIA0223E 4WD shift switch : 4LO to 4H ON Except the above OFF 4WD shift switch : 4LO to 4H ON Except the above OFF Without CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector terminal and ground. Connector Terminal (Wire color) 28 (Y/L) - Ground Condition Voltage (Approx.) 4WD shift switch: 2WD to 4H or 4H to 4LO or 2WD to 4LO Battery voltage Except the above E143 31 (G/B) - Ground 0V 4WD shift switch: 4LO to 4H or 4H to 2WD or 4LO to 2WD Except the above Battery voltage SDIA2806E 0V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 TF-54 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM 2. CHECK ACTUATOR MOTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector. Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector terminal 27 and ground. Connector Terminal (Wire color) Voltage (Approx.) E143 27 (Y/R) - Ground Battery voltage B C TF SDIA2807E 4. 5. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector terminal 27 and ground. Connector Terminal (Wire color) Voltage (Approx.) E143 27 (Y/R) - Ground 0V E F G OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. SDIA2808E ● 10A fuses [No. 26 located in the fuse and fusible link box or 59 located in the fuse and relay box] ● Harness for short or open between battery and transfer control unit harness connector E143 terminal 27 (Y/R) ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and transfer relay 1 harness connector E46 terminal 2 (L/W) ● Harness for short or open between transfer relay 1 harness connector E46 terminal 1 (B) and ground. ● Battery and ignition switch. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . ● Transfer relay 1. Refer to TF-40, "COMPONENT INSPECTION" . H I J K L 3. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT AND ACTUATOR MOTOR 1. 2. 3. – – Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector and the transfer control device (actuator motor) harness connector. Check continuity between the following terminals. Transfer control unit harness connector E143 terminal 28 (Y/L) and transfer control device (actuator motor) harness connector F58 terminal 24 (Y/L). Transfer control unit harness connector E143 terminal 31 (G/B) and transfer control device (actuator motor) harness connector F58 terminal 23 (G/B). Continuity should exist. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: October 2004 TF-55 WDIA0209E 2005 Titan M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM 4. CHECK ACTUATOR MOTOR 1. 2. Remove transfer control device. Refer to TF-84, "Removal and Installation" . Check operation by applying battery voltage to transfer control device (actuator motor) terminals 23 and 24. CAUTION: Be careful not to overheat the harness. Terminal Actuator motor 24 (Battery voltage) - 23 (Ground) Clockwise rotate 23 (Battery voltage) - 24 (Ground) Counterclockwise rotate Does actuator motor rotate? YES >> GO TO 5. NO >> Replace transfer control device (actuator motor). Refer to TF-84, "Removal and Installation" . SDIA2386E 5. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT Check transfer control unit input/output signal. Refer to TF-27, "Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. 6. CHECK DTC Perform the self-diagnosis, after driving a vehicle for a while. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace transfer control unit. Refer to TF-79, "Removal and Installation" . COMPONENT INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. Remove transfer control device. Refer to TF-84, "Removal and Installation" . Check operation by applying battery voltage to transfer control device (actuator motor) terminals 23 and 24. CAUTION: Be careful not to overheat the harness. Terminal Actuator motor 24 (Battery voltage) - 23 (Ground) Clockwise rotate 23 (Battery voltage) - 24 (Ground) Counterclockwise rotate If NG, replace transfer control device (actuator motor). Refer to TF-84, "Removal and Installation" . Revision: October 2004 TF-56 SDIA2386E 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM Actuator Position Switch EDS001NC A CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE Data are reference value. Monitored item [Unit] Content Condition Display value SHIFT POS SW1 [ON/ OFF] Condition of actuator position switch 1 4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4LO ON 4WD shift switch: 4H OFF SHIFT POS SW2 [ON/ OFF] Condition of actuator position switch 2 4WD shift switch: 4LO ON 4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4H OFF SHIFT POS SW3 [ON/ OFF] Condition of actuator position switch 3 4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4H ON 4WD shift switch: 4LO OFF SHIFT POS SW4 [ON/ OFF] Condition of actuator position switch 4 4WD shift switch: 4H and 4LO ON 4WD shift switch: 2WD OFF 10 11 12 13 LG/B W/L BR BR/W Actuator position switch 1 Actuator position switch 2 Actuator position switch 3 Actuator position switch 4 C TF E TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Terminal Item Condition color B Data (Approx.) 4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4LO 0V 4WD shift switch: 4H Battery voltage 4WD shift switch: 4LO 0V 4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4H Battery voltage 4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4H 0V 4WD shift switch: 4LO Battery voltage 4WD shift switch: 4H and 4LO 0V 4WD shift switch: 2WD Battery voltage F G H CAUTION: When using a circuit tester to measure voltage for inspection, be sure not to extend forcibly any connector terminals. I J K L M Revision: October 2004 TF-57 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK ACTUATOR POSITION SWITCH SIGNAL With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ALL MODE AWD/4WD” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out the value of “SHIFT POS SW1”, “SHIFT POS SW2”, “SHIFT POS SW3”, “SHIFT POS SW4”. Monitored item SHIFT POS SW1 SHIFT POS SW2 SHIFT POS SW3 SHIFT POS SW4 1. 2. Condition Display value 4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4LO ON 4WD shift switch: 4H OFF 4WD shift switch: 4LO ON 4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4H OFF 4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4H ON 4WD shift switch: 4LO OFF 4WD shift switch: 4H and 4LO ON 4WD shift switch: 2WD OFF PDIA0224E Without CONSULT-II Start engine. Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector terminal and ground. Connector Terminal (Wire color) Voltage (Approx.) Condition 4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4LO 10 (LG/B) - Ground 0V Battery voltage 4WD shift switch: 4H 4WD shift switch: 4LO 11 (W/L) - Ground 0V Battery voltage 4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4H E142 12 (BR) Ground 13 (BR/ W) Ground 4WD shift switch: 2WD and 4H PDIA0216E 0V Battery voltage 4WD shift switch: 4LO 4WD shift switch: 4H and 4LO 0V Battery voltage 4WD shift switch: 2WD OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 TF-58 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM 2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT AND ACTUATOR POSITION SWITCH 1. 2. 3. – – – – A Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector and the transfer control device (actuator position B switch) harness connector. Check continuity between the following terminals. Transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminal 10 (LG/B) C and transfer control device (actuator position switch) harness connector F58 terminal 26 (LG/B). Transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminal 11 (W/L) and transfer control device (actuator position switch) harness TF connector F58 terminal 20 (W/L). Transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminal 12 (BR) and transfer control device (actuator position switch) harness E connector F58 terminal 21 (BR). PDIA0217E Transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminal 13 (BR/ W) and transfer control device (actuator position switch) harness connector F58 terminal 25 (BR/W). F Continuity should exist. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. G H 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect transfer control device (actuator position switch) harness connector. Check continuity between transfer control device (actuator position switch) harness connector F58 terminal 22 (B) and ground. I J Continuity should exist. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. K L PDIA0219E M 4. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT Check transfer control unit input/output signal. Refer to TF-27, "Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Check transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. 5. CHECK DTC Perform the self-diagnosis, after driving a vehicle for a while. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Replace transfer control device. Refer to TF-84, "Removal and Installation" . Revision: October 2004 TF-59 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM Transfer Control Device EDS001ND CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE Data are reference value. Monitored item [Unit] Content Condition Operating condition of actuator motor relay (integrated in transfer control unit) SHIFT ACT/R MON [ON/OFF] ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● A/T selector lever “N” position ● Brake pedal depressed Display value When 4WD shift switch is operated ON When 4WD shift switch is not operated OFF TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Terminal Item Condition color 25 L/W Ignition switch monitor 27 Y/R Actuator motor power supply 32 B Actuator motor ground 40 Y Transfer relay 2 Data (Approx.) Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage Ignition switch: OFF 0V Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage Ignition switch: OFF 0V Always 0V Ignition switch: ON 0V Ignition switch: OFF Battery voltage CAUTION: When using a circuit tester to measure voltage for inspection, be sure not to extend forcibly any connector terminals. Revision: October 2004 TF-60 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE A 1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector. Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector terminal and ground. B C Connector Terminal (Wire color) E142 25 (L/W) - Ground E143 27 (Y/R) - Ground Voltage (Approx.) 0V TF E SDIA2816E 4. 5. F Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector terminals and ground. G Connector Terminal (Wire color) E142 25 (L/W) - Ground E143 27 (Y/R) - Ground Voltage (Approx.) Battery voltage H OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or SDIA2817E replace damaged parts. ● 10A fuses [No. 26 located in the fuse and fusible link box or 59 located in the fuse and relay box] ● Harness for short or open between battery and transfer control unit harness connector E143 terminal 27 (Y/R) ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and transfer relay 1 harness connector E46 terminal 2 (L/W) ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminal 25 (L/W) ● Harness for short or open between transfer relay 1 harness connector E46 terminal 1 (B) and ground ● Battery and ignition switch. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . ● Transfer relay 1. Refer to TF-40, "COMPONENT INSPECTION" . 2. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector. Check continuity between transfer control unit harness connector E143 terminal 32 (B) and ground. Continuity should exist. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. SDIA2818E Revision: October 2004 TF-61 2005 Titan I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM 3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY SIGNAL 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Connect transfer control unit harness connector. Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector terminal and ground. Connector Terminal (Wire color) Voltage (Approx.) E143 40 (Y) - Ground Battery voltage SDIA2819E 4. 5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector terminal and ground. Connector Terminal (Wire color) Voltage (Approx.) E143 40 (Y) - Ground 0V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. ● Harness for short or open between battery and transfer control unit harness connector E143 terminal 40 (Y) ● Transfer relay 2. Refer to TF-40, "COMPONENT INSPECTION" . SDIA2820E 4. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT Check transfer control unit input/output signal. Refer to TF-27, "Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . OK or NG OK-1 >> With CONSULT-II: GO TO 5. OK-2 >> Without CONSULT-II: GO TO 6. NG >> Check transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. 5. PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (WITH CONSULT-II) With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) 2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “ALL MODE AWD/4WD” with CONSULT-II. 3. Touch “ERASE”. 4. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. 5. Perform the self-diagnosis again. Is the “SHIFT ACT CIR [P1819]” displayed? YES >> Replace transfer control unit. Refer to TF-79, "Removal and Installation" . NO >> Inspection End. Revision: October 2004 TF-62 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM 6. PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS (WITHOUT CONSULT-II) A Without CONSULT-II Perform the self-diagnosis and then erase self-diagnostic results. Refer to TF-36, "SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITHOUT CONSULT-II)" and TF-37, "ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS" . 2. Perform the self-diagnosis again. Do the self-diagnostic results indicate transfer control device? YES >> Replace transfer control unit. Refer to TF-79, "Removal and Installation" . NO >> Inspection End. 1. Engine Speed Signal (ECM) EDS001NE DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE B C TF 1. CHECK DTC WITH ECM E Perform self-diagnosis with ECM. Refer to EC-127, "SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE" . Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnosis? YES >> Check the malfunctioning system. NO >> GO TO 2. F 2. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT G Check transfer control unit input/output signal. Refer to TF-27, "Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. H I 3. CHECK DTC Perform the self-diagnosis, after driving a vehicle for a while. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Perform self-diagnosis with ECM again. Refer to EC-127, "SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE" . J K L M Revision: October 2004 TF-63 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM CAN Communication Line EDS001NF DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT With CONSULT-II 1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and start engine. 2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode for “ALL MODE AWD/4WD” with in CONSULT-II. 3. Perform the self-diagnosis. Is the “CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000]” displayed? YES >> Print out CONSULT-II screen and go to LAN-5, "Precautions When Using CONSULT-II" . NO >> Inspection End. SDIA2390E ATP Switch EDS001NG CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE Data are reference value. Monitored item [Unit] ATP SWITCH [ON/OFF] Content Condition Condition of ATP switch ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● A/T selector lever “P” position ● Brake pedal depressed Display value 4WD shift switch : 4H to 4LO or 4LO to 4H (While actuator motor is operating.) ON Except the above OFF TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE Data are reference value and are measured between each terminal and ground. Wire Terminal Item Condition color 23 R/B ATP switch ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● A/T selector lever “P” position ● Brake pedal depressed Data (Approx.) 4WD shift switch: 4H to 4LO or 4LO to 4H (While actuator motor is operating.) 0V Except the above Battery voltage CAUTION: When using a circuit tester to measure voltage for inspection, be sure not to extend forcibly any connector terminals. Revision: October 2004 TF-64 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE A 1. CHECK ATP SWITCH SIGNAL With CONSULT-II 1. Start engine. 2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ALL MODE AWD/4WD” with CONSULT-II. 3. Read out the value of “ATP SWITCH”. Condition ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● A/T selector lever “P” position ● Brake pedal depressed B C Display value 4WD shift switch: 4H to 4LO or 4LO to 4H (While actuator motor is operating.) ON TF Except the above OFF E SDIA2391E 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Start engine. Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector terminal and ground. Connector E142 G H Terminal (Wire color) 23 (R/B) - Ground F Voltage (Approx.) Condition ● Vehicle stopped ● Engine running ● A/T selector lever “P” position ● Brake pedal depressed 4WD shift switch: 4H to 4LO or 4LO to 4H (While actuator motor is operating.) Except the above I 0V J Battery voltage SDIA2392E OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> GO TO 2. K 2. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT AND ATP SWITCH L 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector and the ATP switch harness connector. Check continuity between transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminal 23 (R/B) and ATP switch harness connector F55 terminal 8 (R/B). M Continuity should exist. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. SDIA2393E Revision: October 2004 TF-65 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM 3. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect ATP switch harness connector. Check continuity between ATP switch harness connector F55 terminal 9 (B) and ground. Continuity should exist. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. SDIA2394E 4. CHECK ATP SWITCH 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect ATP switch harness connector. Remove ATP switch. Refer to TF-21, "Location of Electrical Parts" . Push and release ATP switch and check continuity between ATP switch terminals 8 and 9. Terminal 8-9 Condition Continuity Push ATP switch Yes Release ATP switch No OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Replace ATP switch. Refer to TF-21, "Location of Electrical Parts" . SDIA2395E 5. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT Check transfer control unit input/output signal. Refer to TF-27, "Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. 6. CHECK ATP WARNING LAMP 1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) 2. Set the A/T selector lever to “P” position and engage the parking brake. 3. Switch 4WD shift switch from 4H to 4LO or 4LO to 4H. Does ATP warning lamp turn “ON”, while actuator motor is operating? YES >> Inspection End. NO >> Go to TF-74, "ATP Warning Lamp Does Not Turn ON" . COMPONENT INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect ATP switch harness connector. Remove ATP switch. Refer to TF-21, "Location of Electrical Parts" . Revision: October 2004 TF-66 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM 4. Push and release ATP switch and check continuity between ATP switch terminals 8 and 9. Terminal 8-9 5. Condition A Continuity Push ATP switch Yes Release ATP switch No B If NG, replace the ATP switch. Refer to TF-21, "Location of Electrical Parts" . C SDIA2395E TF E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 TF-67 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 4WD Shift Indicator Lamp and 4LO Indicator Lamp Do Not Turn ON PFP:00007 EDS001NH SYMPTOM: 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not turn ON for approx. 1 second when turning ignition switch to “ON”. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector. Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector terminals and ground. Connector E142 E143 Terminal (Wire color) Voltage (Approx.) 19 (W) - Ground Battery voltage 25 (L/W) - Ground 0V 40 (Y) - Ground Battery voltage 44 (Y/R) - Ground 45 (Y/R) - Ground 0V SDIA2799E 4. 5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector terminals and ground. Connector E142 Terminal (Wire color) Voltage (Approx.) 19 (W) - Ground 25 (L/W) - Ground 40 (Y) - Ground E143 Battery voltage 44 (Y/R) - Ground SDIA2800E 45 (Y/R) - Ground OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. ● 10A fuses [No. 26 located in the fuse and fusible link box or 59 located in the fuse and relay box] ● 20A fuse [No. 53, located in the IPDM E/R] ● Harness for short or open between battery and transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminal 19 (W), and connector E143 terminals 40 (Y), 44 (Y/R) and 45 (Y/R) ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminal 25 (L/W) ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and transfer relay 1 harness connector E46 terminal 2 (L/W) ● Harness for short or open between transfer relay 1 harness connector E46 terminal 1 (B) and ground ● Battery and ignition switch. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . ● Transfer relay 1, 2. Refer to TF-40, "COMPONENT INSPECTION" . Revision: October 2004 TF-68 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 2. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector. Check continuity between transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminals 6 (B), 18 (B), E143 terminal 32 (B) and ground. B C Continuity should exist. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. TF SDIA2801E E 3. CHECK COMBINATION METER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. F Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector. Check voltage between combination meter harness connector terminals and ground. Connector Terminal (Wire color) Voltage (Approx.) M24 24 (O/L) - Ground 0V G H I PDIA0228E 4. 5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Check voltage between combination meter harness connector terminals and ground. Connector Terminal (Wire color) Voltage (Approx.) M24 24 (O/L) - Ground Battery voltage K L OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. SDIA2396E ● 10A fuses [No. 26 located in the fuse and fusible link box or 59 located in the fuse and relay box] ● Harness for short or open between battery and combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 24 (O/L) ● Battery and Ignition switch. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . ● Transfer relay 1, 2. Refer to TF-40, "COMPONENT INSPECTION" . Revision: October 2004 TF-69 J 2005 Titan M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT AND COMBINATION METER 1. 2. 3. – – – Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector and combination meter harness connector. Check continuity between the following terminals. Transfer control unit harness connector E143 terminal 35 (B/W) and combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 32 (B/ W) Transfer control unit harness connector E143 terminal 36 (L) and combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 31 (L) Transfer control unit harness connector E143 terminal 37 (W/G) and combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 33 (W/ G) Continuity should exist. WDIA0210E Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 5. CHECK 4WD SHIFT INDICATOR LAMP AND 4LO INDICATOR LAMP CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Check the combination meter. Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" . 6. SYMPTOM CHECK Check again. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> GO TO 7. 7. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT Check transfer control unit input/output signal. Refer to TF-27, "Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Check transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. 4WD Warning Lamp Does Not Turn ON EDS001NI SYMPTOM: 4WD warning lamp do not turn ON when turning ignition switch to “ON”. Revision: October 2004 TF-70 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE A 1. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector. Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector terminals and ground. B C Connector E142 E143 Terminal (Wire color) Voltage (Approx.) 19 (W) - Ground Battery voltage 25 (L/W) - Ground 0V 40 (Y) - Ground Battery voltage TF 44 (Y/R) - Ground 45 (Y/R) - Ground E 0V SDIA2799E 4. 5. F Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Check voltage between transfer control unit harness connector terminals and ground. G Connector E142 Terminal (Wire color) Voltage (Approx.) 19 (W) - Ground H 25 (L/W) - Ground 40 (Y) - Ground E143 Battery voltage 44 (Y/R) - Ground SDIA2800E 45 (Y/R) - Ground OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. ● 10A fuses [No. 26 located in the fuse and fusible link box or 59 located in the fuse and relay box] ● 20A fuse [No. 53, located in the IPDM E/R] ● Harness for short or open between battery and transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminal 19 (W), and connector E143 terminals 40 (Y), 44 (Y/R) and 45 (Y/R) ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminal 25 (L/W) ● Harness for short or open between ignition switch and transfer relay 1 harness connector E46 terminal 2 (L/W) ● Harness for short or open between transfer relay 1 harness connector E46 terminal 1 (B) and ground ● Battery and ignition switch. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . ● Transfer relay 1, 2. Refer to TF-40, "COMPONENT INSPECTION" . Revision: October 2004 TF-71 2005 Titan I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 2. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector. Check continuity between transfer control unit harness connector E142 terminals 6 (B), 18 (B), E143 terminal 32 (B) and ground. Continuity should exist. Also check harness for short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. SDIA2801E 3. CHECK COMBINATION METER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector. Check voltage between combination meter harness connector terminals and ground. Connector Terminal (Wire color) Voltage (Approx.) M24 24 (O/L) - Ground 0V PDIA0228E 4. 5. Turn ignition switch “ON”. (Do not start engine.) Check voltage between combination meter harness connector terminals and ground. Connector Terminal (Wire color) Voltage (Approx.) M24 24 (O/L) - Ground Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. SDIA2396E ● 10A fuses [No. 26 located in the fuse and fusible link box or 59 located in the fuse and relay box] ● Harness for short or open between battery and combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 24 (O/L) ● Battery and Ignition switch. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . ● Transfer relay 1, 2. Refer to TF-40, "COMPONENT INSPECTION" . Revision: October 2004 TF-72 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT AND COMBINATION METER 1. 2. 3. A Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector and combination meter harness connector. Check continuity between transfer control unit harness connector E143 terminal 38 (W/B) and combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 34 (W/B). B C Continuity should exist. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. TF WDIA0212E E 5. CHECK 4WD WARNING LAMP CIRCUIT F 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Check the combination meter. Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" . G H 6. SYMPTOM CHECK Check again. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> GO TO 7. I J 7. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT Check transfer control unit input/output signal. Refer to TF-27, "Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Check transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. 4WD Shift Indicator Lamp or 4LO Indicator Lamp Do Not Change EDS001NJ SYMPTOM: 4WD shift indicator lamp or 4LO indicator lamp do not change when switch 4WD shift switch. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM Confirm 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp when ignition switch is turned to ON. Do 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp turn on? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Go to TF-68, "4WD Shift Indicator Lamp and 4LO Indicator Lamp Do Not Turn ON" . 2. CHECK SYSTEM FOR 4WD SHIFT SWITCH Perform trouble diagnosis for 4WD shift switch system. Refer to TF-45, "4WD Shift Switch" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: October 2004 TF-73 2005 Titan K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 3. CHECK SYSTEM FOR WAIT DETECTION SWITCH Perform trouble diagnosis for wait detection switch system. Refer to TF-49, "Wait Detection Switch" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4. CHECK SYSTEM FOR 4LO SWITCH Perform trouble diagnosis for 4LO switch system. Refer to TF-42, "4LO Switch" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 5. CHECK SYSTEM FOR ATP SWITCH Perform trouble diagnosis for ATP switch system. Refer to TF-64, "ATP Switch" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 6. SYMPTOM CHECK Check again. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> GO TO 7. 7. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT Check transfer control unit input/output signal. Refer to TF-27, "Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Check transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. 8. CHECK TRANSFER INNER PARTS 1. Disassemble transfer assembly. Refer to TF-88, "Disassembly and Assembly" . 2. Check transfer inner parts. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ATP Warning Lamp Does Not Turn ON EDS001NK SYMPTOM: ATP warning lamp does not turn ON when 4WD shift switch from “4H” to “4LO” or “4LO” to “4H” with A/T selector lever “P” position. DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK SYSTEM FOR CAN COMMUNICATION LINE Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to TF-36, "Self-Diagnostic Procedure" . Do the self-diagnostic results indicate CAN communication? YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for CAN communication line. Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . NO >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 TF-74 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 2. CHECK SYSTEM FOR 4WD SHIFT SWITCH A Perform trouble diagnosis for 4WD shift switch system. Refer to TF-45, "4WD Shift Switch" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. B 3. CHECK SYSTEM FOR PNP SWITCH SIGNAL C Perform trouble diagnosis for PNP switch signal system. Refer to TF-52, "PNP Switch Signal (TCM)" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. TF 4. CHECK SYSTEM FOR ATP SWITCH E Perform trouble diagnosis for ATP switch system. Refer to TF-64, "ATP Switch" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. F G 5. CHECK ATP WARNING LAMP CIRCUIT 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. Disconnect ATP switch harness connector. Check voltage between ATP switch harness connector terminal and ground. Connector Terminal (Wire color) F55 8 (R/B) Ground I Voltage (Approx.) Condition Ignition switch : ON H A/T selector lever “P” position Except the above Battery voltage J 0V K OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> GO TO 6. SDIA2397E L 6. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT AND COMBINATION METER 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect transfer control unit harness connector and combination meter harness connector. Check continuity between transfer control unit harness connector E143 terminal 39 (L/B) and combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 6 (L/B). M Continuity should exist. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 7. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. WDIA0213E Revision: October 2004 TF-75 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 7. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINATION METER AND ATP SWITCH 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Disconnect combination meter harness connector and ATP switch harness connector. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 7 (R/B) and ATP switch harness connector F55 terminal 8 (R/B). Continuity should exist. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 8. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. SDIA2398E 8. CHECK ATP WARNING LAMP CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. 2. Check the combination meter. Refer to DI-5, "COMBINATION METERS" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 9. NG >> Replace the combination meter. Refer to IP-13, "COMBINATION METER" . 9. SYMPTOM CHECK Check again. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> GO TO 10. 10. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT Check transfer control unit input/output signal. Refer to TF-27, "Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 11. NG >> Check transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. 11. CHECK TRANSFER INNER PARTS 1. Disassemble transfer assembly. Refer to TF-88, "Disassembly and Assembly" . 2. Check transfer inner parts. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4WD Shift Indicator Lamp Repeats Flashing EDS001NL SYMPTOM: 4WD shift indicator lamp keeps flashing. Revision: October 2004 TF-76 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE A 1. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM 1. Set 4WD shift switch to “2WD”. 2. Move vehicle forward and backward, or drive straight increasing or decreasing under 20 km/h (12 MPH). Dose 4WD shift indicator lamp keep flashing? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> Inspection End. B C 2. CHECK SYSTEM FOR WAIT DETECTION SWITCH TF Perform trouble diagnosis for wait detection switch system. Refer to TF-49, "Wait Detection Switch" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. E 3. CHECK SYSTEM FOR 4LO SWITCH F Perform trouble diagnosis for 4LO switch system. Refer to TF-42, "4LO Switch" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. G 4. SYMPTOM CHECK H Check again. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> GO TO 5. I 5. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT J Check transfer control unit input/output signal. Refer to TF-27, "Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 6. NG >> Check transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. 6. CHECK TRANSFER INNER PARTS L M 1. Disassemble transfer assembly. Refer to TF-88, "Disassembly and Assembly" . 2. Check transfer inner parts. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 4WD Warning Lamp Flashes Slowly EDS001NM SYMPTOM: While driving, 4WD warning lamp flashes slowly. (When continuing to flash until turning ignition switch OFF.) NOTE: Slow flashing: 1 time/2 seconds Revision: October 2004 K TF-77 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK TIRE Check the following. Tire pressure ● Wear condition ● Longitudinal tire size (There is no difference between longitudinal tires.) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. ● 2. SYMPTOM CHECK Check again. OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> GO TO 3. 3. CHECK TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT Check transfer control unit input/output signal. Refer to TF-27, "Transfer Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" . OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Check transfer control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: October 2004 TF-78 2005 Titan TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT Removal and Installation PFP:33084 A EDS001NN REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-14, "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL RH AND GLOVE BOX" . Disconnect transfer control unit connectors. Remove the transfer control unit. B C TF E F BDIA0014E INSTALLATION G Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal. ● When installing the transfer control unit, tighten bolts to the specified torque. Transfer control unit bolts ● : 5.1 N·m (0.52 kg-m, 45 in-lb) H After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to TF-4, "Precautions for Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement" . I J K L M Revision: October 2004 TF-79 2005 Titan FRONT OIL SEAL FRONT OIL SEAL Removal and Installation PFP:38189 EDS001NO REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Partially drain transfer fluid. Refer to MA-24, "Changing Transfer Fluid" . Remove front propeller shaft. Refer to PR-4, "Removal and Installation" . Remove companion flange self-lock nut, using Tool. Tool number : KV40104000 ( — ) LDIA0142E 4. Put a matching mark on top of the front drive shaft in line with the mark on the companion flange. CAUTION: Use paint to make the matching mark on the front drive shaft. Do not damage the front drive shaft. SDIA2214E 5. Remove companion flange, using suitable tool. WDIA0193E 6. Remove front oil seal from front case, using Tool. Tool number : ST33290001 (J-34286) CAUTION: Do not damage the front case. LDIA0144E Revision: October 2004 TF-80 2005 Titan FRONT OIL SEAL INSTALLATION 1. A Install front oil seal until it is flush with end face of front case, using Tool. Tool number : KV38100500 ( — ) B CAUTION: ● Do not reuse oil seal. ● Apply petroleum jelly to oil seal. C LDIA0145E 2. Align the matching mark of the front drive shaft with the matching mark of the companion flange, then install the companion flange. TF E F G SDIA2214E 3. Tool number 4. 5. H Tighten self-lock nut to the specified torque, using Tool. Refer to TF-88, "COMPONENTS" . : KV40104000 ( — ) I CAUTION: Do not reuse self-lock nut. Install front propeller shaft. Refer to PR-4, "Removal and Installation" . Refill the transfer fluid and check fluid level and for fluid leakage. Refer to MA-24, "FLUID LEAKAGE AND FLUID LEVEL" . J K LDIA0147E L M Revision: October 2004 TF-81 2005 Titan REAR OIL SEAL REAR OIL SEAL Removal and Installation PFP:33140 EDS001NP REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Partially drain transfer fluid. Refer to MA-24, "Changing Transfer Fluid" . Remove the rear propeller shaft. Refer to PR-8, "Removal and Installation" . Remove dust cover from rear case. CAUTION: Do not damage the rear case. LDIA0138E 4. Remove rear oil seal from rear case, using Tool. CAUTION: Do not damage the rear case. Tool number : ST33290001 (J-34286) LDIA0139E INSTALLATION 1. Install rear oil seal until it is flush with end face of rear case, using Tool. Tool number : KV38100500 ( — ) CAUTION: Do not reuse oil seal. ● Apply petroleum jelly to oil seal. ● LDIA0140E 2. Install dust cover to rear case, using Tool. Tool number : KV40105310 ( — ) CAUTION: Do not reuse dust cover. ● Apply petroleum jelly to dust cover. ● PDIA0116E Revision: October 2004 TF-82 2005 Titan REAR OIL SEAL ● Be sure to align indicator at top of transfer as shown. A B C LDIA0141E TF 3. 4. Install the rear propeller shaft. Refer to PR-8, "Removal and Installation" . Refill transfer fluid, check fluid level and for fluid leakage. Refer to MA-24, "FLUID LEAKAGE AND FLUID LEVEL" . E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 TF-83 2005 Titan TRANSFER CONTROL DEVICE TRANSFER CONTROL DEVICE Removal and Installation PFP:33251 EDS001NQ REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD. Disconnect transfer control device harness connector. Remove breather hose from transfer control device. Remove bolts and detach control device. LDIA0136E INSTALLATION 1. Install O-ring to transfer control device. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse O-ring. ● Apply petroleum jelly. LDIA0137E 2. a. Install transfer control device. Turn control shift rod fully counterclockwise using flat-bladed screwdriver, and then put mark on control shift rod. PDIA0119E b. Align transfer control device shaft cutout with mark on control shift rod, and install. NOTE: Turn transfer control device when transfer control device connection does not match. PDIA0120E Revision: October 2004 TF-84 2005 Titan TRANSFER CONTROL DEVICE c. 3. 4. 5. Tighten bolts to the specified torque. Refer to TF-88, "COMPONENTS" . Install breather hose to transfer control device. Connect transfer control device harness connector. After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to TF-4, "Precautions for Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement" . A B C SDIA2212E TF E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 TF-85 2005 Titan AIR BREATHER HOSE AIR BREATHER HOSE Removal and Installation PFP:31098 EDS001NR Refer to the figure for air breather hose removal and installation information. SDIA2409E CAUTION: ● Make sure there are no pinched or restricted areas on the air breather hose caused by bending or twisting when installing it. ● Install air breather hose into breather tube (metal connector) and transfer control device (case connector) until hose end reaches the base of the tube. Revision: October 2004 TF-86 2005 Titan TRANSFER ASSEMBLY TRANSFER ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation PFP:33100 A EDS001NS REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. 4. Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD. Remove A/T undercover using power tools. Remove center exhaust tubes and muffler. Refer to EX-4, "REMOVAL" . Remove front and rear propeller shafts. Refer to PR-5, "REMOVAL" (front), PR-9, "REMOVAL" (rear). CAUTION: Do not damage spline, sleeve yoke or rear oil seal when removing the rear propeller shaft. NOTE: Insert a plug into rear oil seal after removing rear propeller shaft. 5. Remove A/T bolts. Refer to AT-268, "COMPONENTS" . 6. Position two suitable jacks under A/T and transfer assembly. 7. Remove A/T crossmember. Refer to AT-268, "COMPONENTS" . WARNING: Support A/T and transfer assembly using two suitable jacks while removing A/T crossmember. 8. Remove breather hoses from the transfer rear case and transfer control device. 9. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the following: ● ATP switch ● 4LO switch ● Wait detection switch ● Transfer control device 10. Remove transfer to A/T and A/T to transfer bolts. WARNING: Support transfer assembly using suitable jack while removing it. 11. Remove transfer assembly. CAUTION: Do not damage rear oil seal (A/T). B C TF E F G H I J INSTALLATION K Install in the reverse order of removal. ● When installing the transfer to the transmission, install the bolts to the specified torque. Tightening torque ● ● L : 36 N·m (3.7kg-m, 26 ft-lb) Check the fluid level and for fluid leakage. Refer to MA-24, "Changing Transfer Fluid" . After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to TF-4, "Precautions for Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement" . M SMT872C Revision: October 2004 TF-87 2005 Titan TRANSFER ASSEMBLY Disassembly and Assembly EDS001NT COMPONENTS SDIA2449E 1. Baffle plate 2. Breather tube 3. Front case 4. Snap ring 5. Input oil seal 6. Self-lock nut 7. Companion flange 8. Front oil seal 9. 4LO switch (gray with green paint) 10. ATP switch (black) 11. Rear case 12. Wait detection switch (gray) 13. Gasket 14. Filler plug 15. Drain plug 16. O-ring 17. Transfer control device 18. Harness bracket 19. Dust cover 20. Rear oil seal 21. Retainer bolt 22. Gasket Revision: October 2004 TF-88 2005 Titan TRANSFER ASSEMBLY A B C TF E F G H I J K WDIA0207E 1. Input bearing 2. Snap ring 3. Internal gear 4. Carrier bearing 5. Sun gear 6. Needle bearing 7. Metal bushing 8. Planetary carrier assembly 9. L-H sleeve 10. Drive chain 11. Mainshaft 12. Sprocket 13. 2-4 sleeve 14. Clutch gear 15. Oil pump assembly 16. Retainer 17. Mainshaft rear bearing 18. Front bearing 19. Front drive shaft 20. Rear bearing 21. L-H shift fork 22. L-H shift rod 23. Retaining pin 24. 2-4 shift bracket 25. 2-4 shift fork 26. Fork guide collar 27. 2-4 shift fork spring 28. Retaining ring 29. Snap ring 30. Shift collar 31. Clevis pin 32. Drum cam 33. Control shift rod M 34. Spacer Revision: October 2004 TF-89 L 2005 Titan TRANSFER ASSEMBLY DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Remove drain plug and filler plug. Remove transfer control device from rear case. Remove O-ring form transfer control device. SDIA2212E 4. Remove the self-lock nut from the companion flange, using Tool. Tool number : KV40104000 ( — ) SDIA2841E 5. Put a matching mark on top of the front drive shaft in line with the mark on the companion flange. CAUTION: Use paint to make the matching mark on the front drive shaft. Do not damage the front drive shaft. SDIA2214E 6. Remove the companion flange, using suitable tool. WDIA0133E Revision: October 2004 TF-90 2005 Titan TRANSFER ASSEMBLY 7. Remove front oil seal from front case, using Tool. Tool number A : ST33290001 (J-34286) CAUTION: Do not damage the front case or front drive shaft. B C SDIA2423E TF 8. Remove the 4LO switch [gray (with green paint)] and ATP switch (black) from front case. E F G PDIA0090E 9. Remove wait detection switch (gray) from rear case. H I J PDIA0091E 10. Remove dust cover from rear case, using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not damage the rear case. K L M PDIA0092E 11. Remove rear oil seal from rear case, using Tool. Tool number : ST33290001 (J-34286) CAUTION: Do not damage the rear case or mainshaft. SDIA2424E Revision: October 2004 TF-91 2005 Titan TRANSFER ASSEMBLY 12. Remove the input oil seal from front case, using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not damage the front case, sun gear or input bearing. PDIA0094E 13. Remove the retainer bolts and gaskets. PDIA0097E 14. Remove rear case bolts and harness bracket from rear case. PDIA0299E 15. Separate front case and rear case. Then remove rear case by prying it up, using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not damage the mating surface. 16. Remove spacer from the control shift rod. CAUTION: Do not drop spacer. PDIA0096E 17. Remove snap ring from mainshaft, using suitable tool. SDIA2430E Revision: October 2004 TF-92 2005 Titan TRANSFER ASSEMBLY 18. Remove the mainshaft rear bearing from mainshaft, using suitable tool. 19. Remove retainer from mainshaft. A B C WDIA0135E TF 20. Remove snap ring from mainshaft, using suitable tool. 21. Remove oil pump assembly from mainshaft. E F G SDIA2461E 22. Remove snap ring from mainshaft, using suitable tool. 23. Remove clutch gear from mainshaft. H I J SDIA2462E 24. Remove snap ring from L-H shift rod assembly, using suitable tool. 25. Remove 2-4 sleeve and 2-4 shift fork assembly from mainshaft. K L M SDIA2463E 26. Remove drive chain together with sprocket and front drive shaft from front case. 27. Remove spacer and needle bearing from mainshaft. 28. Remove mainshaft from sun gear assembly. 29. Remove L-H shift rod assembly and control shift rod assembly from front case. 30. Remove L-H sleeve together with L-H shift fork assembly from planetary carrier assembly. SDIA2464E Revision: October 2004 TF-93 2005 Titan TRANSFER ASSEMBLY 31. Remove snap ring from sun gear. CAUTION: Do not damage the sun gear or input bearing. PDIA0099E 32. Press the sun gear assembly and planetary carrier assembly from front case, using Tool. Tool number : KV38100200 ( — ) PDIA0100E 33. Remove snap ring from front case. PDIA0101E 34. Remove internal gear from front case. PDIA0305E 35. Remove snap ring from front case. PDIA0103E Revision: October 2004 TF-94 2005 Titan TRANSFER ASSEMBLY 36. Remove the input bearing from front case, using Tool. Tool number : KV38100200 ( — A ) B C PDIA0104E TF 37. Remove baffle plate from front case. 38. Remove the breather tube from front case. E F G PDIA0105E INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Case H Check contact surfaces of shift rod and bearing for wear and damage. If any is found, replace with new one. I J K PDIA0145E Sleeve L Check items below. If necessary, replace them with new one. ● Damage and excessive wear of contact surfaces of sprocket, mainshaft and sleeve. ● Sleeve must move smoothly. M PDIA0136E Revision: October 2004 TF-95 2005 Titan TRANSFER ASSEMBLY Gear, Shaft and Drive Chain Check items below. If necessary, replace them with new ones. ● Damage, peeling, uneven wear and bending of the shaft. ● Excessive wear, damage and peeling of the gear. ● Excessive wear or damage to the drive chain PDIA0137E Bearing Check the bearing for damage and rough rotation. If necessary, replace it with a new one. PDIA0300E ASSEMBLY 1. Install breather tube. CAUTION: Install breather tube in the direction shown. PDIA0107E 2. Install baffle plate to front case, and tighten bolt to the specified torque. Refer to TF-88, "COMPONENTS" . CAUTION: Install baffle plate by pushing it in the direction shown while tightening the bolt. SDIA2479E Revision: October 2004 TF-96 2005 Titan TRANSFER ASSEMBLY 3. Install the input bearing to front case, using Tool. Tool number A : ST30720000 (J-25405) B C PDIA0108E 4. TF Install snap ring to front case. CAUTION: Do not reuse snap ring. E F G PDIA0103E 5. Install internal gear with groove facing up into front case. H I J PDIA0102E 6. Install snap ring to front case. CAUTION: Do not reuse snap ring. K L M PDIA0101E 7. Install the planetary carrier assembly and sun gear assembly to front case, using Tool. Tool number : KV38100200 ( — ) PDIA0109E Revision: October 2004 TF-97 2005 Titan TRANSFER ASSEMBLY 8. Install snap ring to sun gear. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse snap ring. ● Do not damage the sun gear. PDIA0099E 9. Set L-H sleeve together with L-H shift fork assembly onto planetary carrier assembly. SDIA2438E 10. Install control shift rod assembly to front case. CAUTION: Set pin of L-H shift fork assembly into the groove of drum cam. 11. Turn control shift rod assembly fully counterclockwise. WDIA0215E 12. Install L-H shift rod assembly through L-H shift fork assembly opening to front case. CAUTION: Set pin of L-H shift rod assembly into the groove of drum cam. 13. Install mainshaft to sun gear assembly. 14. Apply ATF to spacer and periphery of needle bearing, install to mainshaft. WDIA0216E 15. Set front drive shaft and sprocket to drive chain. CAUTION: Identification mark of drive chain should be on the side of rear bearing of front drive shaft. PDIA0110E Revision: October 2004 TF-98 2005 Titan TRANSFER ASSEMBLY 16. Install drive chain together with front drive shaft and sprocket to front case. A B C SDIA2464E 17. Install 2-4 sleeve and 2-4 shift fork assembly to mainshaft. CAUTION: ● Install with proper orientation of 2-4 sleeve. ● Install 2-4 shift fork with engaging the grooves of 2-4 shift fork in the retaining pin of 2-4 shift bracket. TF E F G SDIA2467E 18. Install snap ring to L-H shift rod assembly, using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not reuse snap ring. 19. Install clutch gear to mainshaft. H I J SDIA2463E 20. Install snap ring to mainshaft, using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not reuse snap ring. 21. Install oil pump assembly to mainshaft. K L M SDIA2462E 22. Install snap ring to mainshaft, using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not reuse snap ring. SDIA2461E Revision: October 2004 TF-99 2005 Titan TRANSFER ASSEMBLY 23. Install retainer to mainshaft. CAUTION: Set the projection of oil pump assembly to identification hole, and then align locating hole of retainer to L-H shift rod assembly. SDIA2468E 24. Install the mainshaft rear bearing to mainshaft, using Tool. Tool number : KV32102700 ( — ) CAUTION: Do not push too hard in order to avoid snap rings becoming dislodged from mainshaft. SDIA2469E 25. Install snap ring to mainshaft, using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not reuse snap ring. 26. Install spacer to control shift rod. SDIA2430E 27. Apply liquid gasket to mating surface of front case. ● Use Genuine Anaerobic Liquid Gasket or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to mating surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and mating surfaces. 28. Install rear case to front case. WDIA0217E 29. Tighten bolts to specified torque. Refer to TF-88, "COMPONENTS" . CAUTION: Be sure to install the harness brackets. PDIA0299E Revision: October 2004 TF-100 2005 Titan TRANSFER ASSEMBLY 30. Install the retainer bolts with new gaskets. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Refer to TF-88, "COMPONENTS" . CAUTION: ● Do not reuse gasket. ● Tighten them to the specified torque again. A B C PDIA0097E TF 31. Install input oil seal to front case, using Tools. Dimension A : 4.0 - 4.6 mm (0.157 - 0.181 in) Tool number A: ST30720000 (J-25405) B: KV40104830 ( — ) E F CAUTION: ● Do not reuse oil seal. ● Apply petroleum jelly to oil seal. G PDIA0114E 32. Install rear oil seal until it is flush with end face of rear case, using Tool. Tool number : KV38100500 ( — H ) I CAUTION: ● Do not reuse oil seal. ● Apply petroleum jelly to oil seal. J PDIA0115E 33. Apply petroleum jelly to the circumference of the new dust cover. Position the dust cover using the identification mark as shown. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse dust cover. ● Position the identification mark at the position shown. L M SDIA2208E 34. Install the dust cover to the rear case, using Tool. Tool number : KV40105310 ( — ) CAUTION: ● Do not reuse dust cover. ● Apply petroleum jelly to dust cover. PDIA0116E Revision: October 2004 TF-101 K 2005 Titan TRANSFER ASSEMBLY 35. Apply sealant to threads of wait detection switch (gray). Then install it to rear case and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to TF-88, "COMPONENTS" . ● Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . CAUTION: Remove old sealant and oil adhering to threads. PDIA0091E 36. Apply sealant to threads of 4LO switch (gray with green paint) and ATP switch (black). Then install them to front case and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to TF-88, "COMPONENTS" . ● Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to GI-45, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants" . CAUTION: Remove old sealant and oil adhering to threads. PDIA0090E 37. Install front oil seal until it is flush with end face of front case, using Tool. Tool number : KV38100500 ( — ) CAUTION: ● Do not reuse oil seal. ● Apply petroleum jelly to oil seal. PDIA0117E 38. Align the matching mark on the front drive shaft with the mark on the companion flange, then install the companion flange. SDIA2779E Revision: October 2004 TF-102 2005 Titan TRANSFER ASSEMBLY 39. Tighten self-lock nut to the specified torque, using Tool. Refer to TF-88, "COMPONENTS" . Tool number : KV40104000 ( — A ) CAUTION: Do not reuse self-lock nut. 40. Install O-ring to transfer control device. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse O-ring. ● Apply petroleum jelly. B C WDIA0219E TF 41. Install transfer control device to rear case. a. Turn control shift rod fully counterclockwise using flat-bladed screwdriver, and then put a mark on control shift rod. E F G PDIA0119E b. Align transfer control device shaft cutout with mark on control shift rod, and install. NOTE: Turn transfer control device when transfer control device connection does not match. H I J PDIA0120E c. K Tighten bolts to the specified torque. Refer to TF-88, "COMPONENTS" . L M SDIA2212E 42. Install the drain plug and filler plug with new gaskets to the rear case. Tighten to the specified torque. Refer to TF-88, "COMPONENTS" . CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket. Revision: October 2004 TF-103 2005 Titan PLANETARY CARRIER PLANETARY CARRIER Disassembly and Assembly PFP:33113 EDS001NU DISASSEMBLY 1. 2. Remove snap ring. Remove sun gear assembly from planetary carrier assembly, using suitable tool. PDIA0162E 3. Remove snap ring from sun gear assembly, using suitable tool. SDIA2353E 4. Remove the carrier bearing from sun gear, using Tools. Tool number A: ST35300000 ( — ) B: ST30021000 (J-22912-01) SDIA2149E 5. Remove the needle bearing from sun gear, using Tool. Tool number : ST33710000 ( — ) SDIA2354E Revision: October 2004 TF-104 2005 Titan PLANETARY CARRIER 6. Remove the metal bushing from sun gear, using Tools. Tool number A A: ST33710000 ( — ) B: ST35325000 ( — ) C: ST33290001 (J-34286) B C SDIA2168E TF INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Bearing Check the bearing for damage and rough rotation. If necessary, replace it with a new one. E F G MTF0041D H Planetary Carrier ● Measure end play of each pinion gear, and make sure the measurement is within specification shown below. If out of specification, replace planetary carrier with new one. Pinion gear end play ● I : 0.1 - 0.7 mm (0.004 - 0.028 in) J Check working face of each gear, bearing and others for damage, burrs, partial wear, dents and other abnormality. If any is found, replace planetary carrier with new one. K PDIA0146E L Sun Gear Check items below. If necessary, replace them with new ones. ● If oil passage of sun gear is clogged. For this, try to pass a 3.6 mm (0.142 in) dia. wire through oil passage as shown. ● Check the sliding and contact surface of each gear and bearing for damage, burrs, partial wear, dents and other abnormality. If any is found, replace the sun gear assembly with a new one. M PDIA0147E Revision: October 2004 TF-105 2005 Titan PLANETARY CARRIER Internal Gear Check the internal gear teeth for damage, partial wear, dents or other abnormality. If any is found, replace the internal gear with a new one. PDIA0157E ASSEMBLY 1. Apply ATF to periphery of metal bushing, then install the metal bushing until it becomes dimension "A", using Tool. Dimension A : 7.7 - 8.3mm (0.303 - 0.327in) Tool number : ST35300000 ( — ) CAUTION: Do not reuse metal bushing. WDIA0206E 2. Apply ATF to needle bearing, then install the needle bearing until it becomes dimension "B", using Tool. Dimension B : 62.5 - 63.1mm (2.461 - 2.484in) Tool number : ST33220000 ( — ) CAUTION: Do not reuse needle bearing. SDIA2478E 3. Install the carrier bearing to sun gear, using Tools. Tool number A: ST30720000 (J-25405) B: ST27863000 ( — ) PDIA0149E Revision: October 2004 TF-106 2005 Titan PLANETARY CARRIER 4. Install snap ring to sun gear assembly, using suitable tool. CAUTION: Do not reuse snap ring. A B C SDIA2353E TF 5. 6. Install sun gear assembly to planetary carrier assembly. Install snap ring to planetary carrier assembly. CAUTION: Do not reuse snap ring. E F G PDIA0163E H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 TF-107 2005 Titan FRONT DRIVE SHAFT FRONT DRIVE SHAFT Disassembly and Assembly PFP:39100 EDS001NV DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove the front bearing, using Tools. Tool number A: ST35300000 ( — ) B: ST30021000 (J-22912-01) SDIA2106E 2. Remove the rear bearing, using Tools. Tool number A: ST33710000 ( — ) B: ST30021000 (J-22912-01) PDIA0153E INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Front drive shaft Check items below. If necessary, replace them with new ones. ● Damage, peeling, dent, uneven wear and bending of shaft. ● Excessive wear, damage and peeling of gear. PDIA0154E Bearing Check the bearing for damage and rough rotation. If necessary, replace it with a new one. MTF0041D Revision: October 2004 TF-108 2005 Titan FRONT DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY 1. A Install the rear bearing, using Tools. Tool number A: KV38100500 ( — ) B: ST30901000 (J-26010-01) B C PDIA0155E 2. TF Install the front bearing, using Tools. Tool number E A: KV38100500 ( — ) B: ST30901000 (J-26010-01) F G PDIA0156E H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 TF-109 2005 Titan SHIFT CONTROL SHIFT CONTROL Disassembly and Assembly PFP:33167 EDS001NW DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove snap ring and retaining pin using suitable tool. Then remove drum cam from control shift rod. PDIA0122E 2. 3. Remove retaining pin from L-H shift rod, using suitable tool. Remove 2-4 shift bracket PDIA0125E 4. 5. Remove retaining ring from 2-4 shift fork, using suitable tool. Remove fork guide collar and 2-4 shift fork spring from 2-4 shift fork WDIA0226E INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY Shift fork ● Measure clearance between shift fork and sleeve. If it is out of specification, replace it with new one. Standard value 2-4 : Less than 0.46 mm (0.018 in) L-H : Less than 0.46 mm (0.018 in) PDIA0134E Revision: October 2004 TF-110 2005 Titan SHIFT CONTROL Shift rod and fork components ● A Check working face of shift rod and fork for wear, partial wear, abrasion, bending and other abnormality. If any is found, replace with new one. B C PDIA0135E TF ASSEMBLY 1. 2. 3. Install clevis pin and shift collar to L-H shift fork after assembling them. CAUTION: Use caution when installing L-H shift fork, clevis pin or shift collar. Install clevis pin and shift collar to 2-4 shift bracket after assembling them. CAUTION: Use caution when installing 2-4 shift bracket. Install guide fork collar and 2-4 shift fork spring to the 2-4 shift fork, and then secure it with the retaining ring. CAUTION: ● Do not reuse retaining ring. ● Be careful with orientation. E F G H I WDIA0218E 4. 5. Install 2-4shift bracket to the L-H shift rod. Install retaining pin evenly to the L-H shift rod. CAUTION: Do not reuse retaining pin. J K L M PDIA0125E 6. 7. Install drum cam to the control shift rod, and then secure it with retaining pin. CAUTION: Do not reuse retaining pin. Install snap ring to the control shift rod. CAUTION: Do not reuse snap ring. PDIA0122E Revision: October 2004 TF-111 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) General Specifications PFP:00030 EDS001NX Applied model VK56DE Transfer model TX15A Gear ratio High 1.000 Low 2.596 Planetary gear Number of teeth Sun gear 57 Internal gear 91 Front drive sprocket 38 Front drive shaft 38 Fluid capacity (Approx.) (US qt, lmp qt) 2.0 (2-1/8, 1-3/4) Pinion Gear End Play EDS001NY Unit: mm (in) Item Standard Pinion gear end play 0.1 - 0.7 (0.004 - 0.028) Clearance Between Shift Fork and Sleeve EDS001NZ Unit: mm (in) Item Standard 2-4 shift fork to 2-4 sleeve Less than 0.46 mm (0.018 in) L-H shift fork to L-H sleeve Less than 0.46 mm (0.018 in) Revision: October 2004 TF-112 2005 Titan E SUSPENSION A B SECTION ROAD WHEELS & TIRES C D WT CONTENTS PREPARATION ........................................................... 2 Special Service Tool ................................................. 2 Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 2 NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 3 NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 3 WHEEL ....................................................................... 4 Inspection ................................................................. 4 WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY ................................. 5 Balancing Wheels .................................................... 5 REMOVAL ............................................................. 5 WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT ...................... 5 Rotation .................................................................... 6 LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM ............ 7 System Components ................................................ 7 System Description .................................................. 7 TRANSMITTER ..................................................... 7 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER ............. 7 BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) ...................... 8 WARNING LAMP AND BUZZER .......................... 8 DISPLAY UNIT (WITH NAVI) ................................ 8 CAN COMMUNICATION ............................................ 9 System Description .................................................. 9 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES .......................................... 10 Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 10 Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard ............. 12 ID Registration Procedure ...................................... 13 ID REGISTRATION WITH TRANSMITTER ACTIVATION TOOL ............................................ 13 ID REGISTRATION WITHOUT TRANSMITTER ACTIVATION TOOL ............................................ 14 Transmitter Wake Up Operation ............................. 15 WITH TRANSMITTER ACTIVATION TOOL ........ 15 CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ................................. 16 Self-Diagnosis ........................................................ 17 DESCRIPTION .................................................... 17 FUNCTION .......................................................... 17 Revision: October 2004 ............................................................................ 17 How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair ...................................................... 19 INTRODUCTION ................................................. 19 WORK FLOW ...................................................... 19 Preliminary Check .................................................. 20 Malfunction Code/Symptom Chart .......................... 21 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS ........................................................................ 23 Inspection 1: Transmitter or Control Unit (BCM) ..... 23 MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 21, 22, 23 OR 24 ... 23 Inspection 2: Transmitter - 1 ................................... 23 MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 31, 32, 33, 34, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47 OR 48 ............................... 23 Inspection 3: Transmitter - 2 ................................... 24 MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 35, 36, 37 OR 38 ... 24 Inspection 4: Vehicle Speed Signal ........................ 25 MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 52 ........................... 25 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS .............. 26 Inspection 1: Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On ........................ 26 Inspection2:WarningLampStaysOnWhenIgnition Switch Is Turned On ............................................... 26 Inspection 3: Warning Lamp Flashes When Ignition Switch Is Turned On ............................................... 28 Inspection 4: Hazard Warning Lamp Flashes When Ignition Switch Is Turned On .................................. 29 Inspection 5: “TIRE PRESSURE” Information In Display Unit Does Not Exist .................................... 30 Inspection 6: ID Registration Cannot Be Completed... 30 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............................. 31 Transmitter (Pressure Sensor) ............................... 31 REMOVAL ........................................................... 31 INSTALLATION ................................................... 31 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 33 Road Wheel ............................................................ 33 Tire ......................................................................... 33 WT-1 2005 Titan F G H I J K L M PREPARATION PREPARATION Special Service Tool PFP:00002 EES001D2 The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here. Tool number (Kent-Moore No.) Tool name Description — (J-45295) Transmitter activation tool ID registration LEIA0035E Commercial Service Tools EES001D3 Tool name Description Power tool Removing wheel nuts PBIC0190E Revision: October 2004 WT-2 2005 Titan TIRES Symptom ROAD WHEEL Revision: October 2004 Incorrect tire pressure Vibration Uneven tire wear Deformation or damage WT-3 Non-uniformity Noise × × × × × × Shake × × × × × Shimmy × × × × × Shudder × × × × × × × × × Poor quality ride or handling × × × × × × × × × Noise × × × × × × × × Shake × × × × × × × × Shimmy, shudder × × × × × × × × Poor quality ride or handling × × × × × × REAR AXLE AND REAR SUSPENSION TIRES BRAKE STEERING × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × ROAD WHEEL FRONT AXLE AND FRONT SUSPENSION × DIFFERENTIAL × PS-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING NVH Troubleshooting Chart BR-5, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" Refer to ROAD WHEEL in this chart. Refer to TIRES in this chart. RAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" (RAX), RSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" (RSU) FFD-7, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" (FFD), RFD-8, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" (RFD) FAX-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" (FAX), FSU-4, "NVH Troubleshooting Chart" (FSU) WT-33 — — WT-6 WT-33 WT-5 WT-4 Reference page Incorrect tire size Imbalance Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS Out-of-round NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING PFP:00003 EES001D4 A Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts. B ×: Applicable 2005 Titan C D WT F G H I J K × L M WHEEL WHEEL Inspection 1. 2. a. b. 3. 4. PFP:40300 EES001D5 Check tires for wear and improper inflation. Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other damage. If deformed, remove wheel and check wheel runout. Remove tire from wheel and mount wheel on a tire balance machine. Set dial indicator as shown in the illustration. Refer to WT-33, "Road Wheel" . Check front wheel bearings for looseness. Check front suspension for looseness. SFA975B Revision: October 2004 WT-4 2005 Titan WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY Balancing Wheels PFP:40300 A EES001D6 REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove inner and outer balance weights from the wheel. CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch the wheel during removal. Using releasing agent, remove double-faced adhesive tape from the wheel. CAUTION: After removing double-faced adhesive tape, wipe clean traces of releasing agent from the wheel. WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT ● 1. 2. B C D If a tire balance machine has adhesion balance weight mode settings and drive-in weight mode setting, select and adjust a drive-in weight mode suitable for wheels. WT Set wheel on wheel balancer using the center hole as a guide. Start the tire balance machine. When inner and outer imbalance values are shown on the wheel balancer indicator, multiply outer imbalance value by 1.6 to determine balance weight that should be used. Select the outer balance weight with a value closest to the calculated value and install it to the designated outer position of, or at the desig- F nated angle in relation to the road wheel. CAUTION: ● Do not install the inner balance weight before installing the outer balance weight. G ● Before installing the balance weight, be sure to clean the mating surface of the wheel. Indicated imbalance value × 5/3 = balance weight to be installed Calculation example: H 23 g (0.81 oz) × 5/3 = 38.33 g (1.35 oz) = 40 g (1.41 oz) balance weight (closer to calculated balance weight value) Note that balance weight value must be closer to the calculated I balance weight value. Example: 37.4 g = 35 g (1.23 oz) 37.5 g = 40 g (1.41 oz) J SMA054D K a. b. Install balance weight in the position shown. When installing balance weight to wheels, set it into the grooved area on the inner wall of the wheel as shown so that the balance weight center is aligned with the wheel balancer indication position (angle). CAUTION: ● Always use Genuine NISSAN adhesion balance weights. ● Balance weights are not reusable; always replace with new ones. ● Do not install more than three sheets of balance weights. L M SMA055D Revision: October 2004 WT-5 2005 Titan WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY c. 3. 4. 5. If calculated balance weight value exceeds 50 g (1.76 oz), install two balance weight sheets in line with each other as shown. CAUTION: Do not install one balance weight sheet on top of another. Start wheel balancer again. Install drive-in balance weight on inner side of road wheel in the wheel balancer indication position (angle). CAUTION: Do not install more than two balance weights. Start wheel balancer. Make sure that inner and outer residual imbalance values are 5 g (0.18 oz) each or below. ● If either residual imbalance value exceeds 5 g (0.18 oz), repeat installation procedures. Wheel balance (Maximum allowable imbalance): Maximum allowable imbalance Dynamic (At rim flange) Static SMA056D 5 g (0.18 oz) (one side) 10 g (0.35 oz) Rotation EES001PX NOTE: Follow the maintenance schedule for tire rotation service intervals. Refer to MA-7, "PERIODIC MAINTENANCE" . 1. Rotate the tires on each side from front to back as shown. Do not include the spare tire when rotating the tires. Wheel nut torque 2. 3. : 133 N·m (14 kg-m, 98 ft-lb) CAUTION: When installing wheels, tighten them diagonally by dividing the work two to three times in order to prevent the wheels from developing any distortion. Adjust the tire pressure to specification. Refer to WT-33, "Tire" . After the tire rotation, retighten the wheel nuts after the vehicle has been driven for 1,000 km (600 miles), and also after every wheel and tire have been installed such as after repairing a flat tire. Revision: October 2004 WT-6 SMA829C 2005 Titan LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM System Components PFP:40300 A EES001D8 B C D WT F G H I LEIA0101E System Description EES001D9 J TRANSMITTER A sensor-transmitter integrated with a valve is installed on a wheel, and transmits a detected air pressure signal in the form of a radio wave. K L M LEIA0028E REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER Receives the air pressure signal transmitted by the transmitter in each wheel. LEIA0069E Revision: October 2004 WT-7 2005 Titan LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) Reads the air pressure signal received by the remote keyless entry receiver, and controls the warning lamp and the buzzer operations as shown below. It also has a judgement function to detect a system malfunction. LEIA0068E WARNING LAMP AND BUZZER Indicates low tire pressure or system malfunction. Condition Warning lamp Buzzer Less than 193 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2 , 28 psi) [Flat tire] ON Sounds for 10 sec. System malfunction ON OFF LEIA0055E DISPLAY UNIT (WITH NAVI) Displays the air pressure of each tire. ● After the ignition switch is turned on, the pressure values will not be displayed until the data of each wheel is received. LEIA0067E Revision: October 2004 WT-8 2005 Titan CAN COMMUNICATION CAN COMMUNICATION System Description PFP:23710 A EES001DA Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . B C D WT F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 WT-9 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSES TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Wiring Diagram PFP:00004 EES001DB WEWA0030E Revision: October 2004 WT-10 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSES A B C D WT F G H I J K L M WEWA0031E Revision: October 2004 WT-11 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard Terminal + Item EES001DC Condition Voltage (V) (Approx.) – 15 (L/W) Tire pressure warning check connector — 5V 18 (P) Remote keyless entry receiver (Ground) — 0V Stand-by OCC3879D Remote keyless entry receiver (Power supply) 19 (V/W) Press any of the electronic switches OCC3882D Ground Stand-by 20 (G/W) OCC3881D Remote keyless entry receiver (Signal) Press any of the electronic switches OCC3880D ( 38 (W/L) Ignition switch Ignition switch ON or START Battery voltage 39 (L) Data line (CAN H) — — 40 (P) Data line (CAN L) — — 67 (B) GND — 0V 70 (W/B) Battery power supply — Battery voltage ) : Wire color Revision: October 2004 WT-12 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSES ID Registration Procedure EES001DD A ID REGISTRATION WITH TRANSMITTER ACTIVATION TOOL This procedure must be done after replacement of a low tire pressure warning transmitter or BCM. CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunction might be detected B during self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn the ignition switch ON. C 2. Select "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch “BCM” on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. D NOTE: If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . 4. Select “AIR PRESSURE MONITOR” on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen. WT 5. Select “WORK SUPPORT” on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen, and select "ID REGIST". 6. With the transmitter activation tool (J-45295) pushed against the front left transmitter position of the tire air valve, press the button F for 5 seconds. Tool number — (J-45295) G H LEIA0036E 7. Register the IDs in order from FR LH, FR RH, RR RH and RR LH. When ID registration of each wheel has been completed, a buzzer sounds and the warning lamp flashes. Activation tire position Buzzer 1 Front LH Once 2 Front RH 2 times 3 Rear RH 3 times 4 Rear LH 4 times Hazard warning lamp I CONSULT-II J 2 times flashing “YET” ↓ “DONE” K 8. After completing all ID registrations, press “END” to complete the procedure. NOTE: Be sure to register the IDs in order from FR LH, FR RH, RR RH, to RR LH, or the self-diagnostic results display will not function properly. L M Revision: October 2004 WT-13 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSES ID REGISTRATION WITHOUT TRANSMITTER ACTIVATION TOOL This procedure must be done after replacement of a low tire pressure warning transmitter or BCM. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn the ignition switch ON. 2. Select "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch “BCM” on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. NOTE: If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . 4. Select “AIR PRESSURE MONITOR” on “SELECT WORK ITEM" screen. 5. Select “WORK SUPPORT” on “SELECT DIAG MODE" screen, and select "ID REGIST". 6. Adjust the tire pressure to the values shown in the table below for ID registration, and drive the vehicle at 15 km/h (9.4 MPH) or more for a few minutes. 7. Tire position Tire pressure kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) Front – Left 250 (2.5, 36) Front – Right 230 (2.3, 33) Rear – Right 210 (2.1, 30) Rear – Left 190 (1.9, 27) After completing all ID registrations, press “END” to complete the procedure. Activation tire position CONSULT-II Front LH “YET” ↓ “DONE” Front RH Rear RH Rear LH 8. Inflate all tires to proper pressure. Tire pressure 17 inch tire : 240 kPa (2.4 kg/cm2 , 35 psi) 18 inch tire : 240 kPa (2.4 kg/cm2 , 35 psi) Revision: October 2004 WT-14 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Transmitter Wake Up Operation EES001DE A WITH TRANSMITTER ACTIVATION TOOL 1. With the transmitter activation tool (J-45295) pushed against the front left transmitter, press the button for 5 seconds. Tool number ● — B (J-45295) With ignition switch ON, as the warning lamp flashes per the following diagram, the respective transmitter then must be woken up. C D LEIA0036E 2. When the BCM finishes assigning each tire ID, the BCM flashes the hazard warning lamps and trailer WT flasher lamps (if equipped) and sends flashing indicator status by CAN according to the following time chart. Please see trailer flasher specification details of trailer flashing lamps since the BCM controls trailer flasher lamps as brake lamps. F G H I J K LEIA0059E 3. After completing wake up of all transmitters, make sure low tire pressure warning lamp goes out. L M Revision: October 2004 WT-15 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSES CONSULT-II Function (BCM) EES001PY CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode Description WORK SUPPORT Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received data is displayed. DATA MONITOR Inspection by part ACTIVE TEST SELF-DIAG RESULTS CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER CONFIGURATION Revision: October 2004 Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. BCM part number can be read. Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. WT-16 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Self-Diagnosis EES001DF DESCRIPTION A During driving, the low tire pressure warning system receives the signal transmitted from the transmitter installed in each wheel, and gives alarms when the tire pressure becomes low. The control unit (BCM) for this system has pressure judgement and trouble diagnosis functions. B FUNCTION When the low tire pressure warning system detects low inflation pressure or another unusual symptom, the warning lamp in the combination meter comes on. To start the self-diagnostic results mode, ground the tire pressure warning check terminal. The malfunction location is indicated by the warning lamp flashing and the buzzer sounds. C D CONSULT-II Application to Low Tire Pressure Warning System ITEM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS DATA MONITOR Front - Left transmitter × × Front - Right transmitter × × Rear - Left transmitter × × Rear - Right transmitter × × Warning lamp — × Vehicle speed × × Buzzer (in combination meter) — × CAN Communication × — WT F G H × : Applicable – : Not applicable I Self-Diagnostic Results Mode Diagnostic item FLAT - TIRE - FL FLAT - TIRE - FR FLAT - TIRE - RR FLAT - TIRE - RL Diagnostic item is detected when ··· J Front-left tire pressure drops to 193 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2 , 28 psi) or less Front-right tire pressure drops to 193 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2 , 28 psi) or less Rear-right tire pressure drops to 193 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2 , 28 psi) or less Rear-left tire pressure drops to 193 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2 , 28 psi) or less [NO-DATA] - FL [NO-DATA] - FR [NO-DATA] - RR [NO-DATA] - RL Data from front-left transmitter cannot be received. Data from front-right transmitter cannot be received. Data from rear-right transmitter cannot be received. Data from rear-left transmitter cannot be received. [CHECKSUM- ERR] - FL [CHECKSUM- ERR] - FR [CHECKSUM- ERR] - RR [CHECKSUM- ERR] - RL Checksum data from front-left transmitter is malfunctioning. Checksum data from front-right transmitter is malfunctioning. Checksum data from rear-right transmitter is malfunctioning. Checksum data from rear-left transmitter is malfunctioning. [PRESSDATA- ERR] - FL [PRESSDATA- ERR] - FR [PRESSDATA- ERR] - RR [PRESSDATA- ERR] - RL Air pressure data from front-left transmitter is malfunctioning. Air pressure data from front-right transmitter is malfunctioning. Air pressure data from rear-right transmitter is malfunctioning. Air pressure data from rear-left transmitter is malfunctioning. [CODE- ERR] - FL [CODE- ERR] - FR [CODE- ERR] - RR [CODE- ERR] - RL Function code data from front-left transmitter is malfunctioning. Function code data from front-right transmitter is malfunctioning. Function code data from rear-right transmitter is malfunctioning. Function code data from rear-left transmitter is malfunctioning. [BATT - VOLT - LOW] - FL [BATT - VOLT - LOW] - FR [BATT - VOLT - LOW] - RR [BATT - VOLT - LOW] - RL Battery voltage of front-left transmitter drops. Battery voltage of front-right transmitter drops. Battery voltage of rear-right transmitter drops. Battery voltage of rear-left transmitter drops. VHCL_SPEED_SIG_ERR Vehicle speed signal is in error. K L M NOTE: Before performing the self-diagnosis, be sure to register the ID or the actual malfunction location may be different from that displayed on CONSULT-II. Revision: October 2004 WT-17 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Data Monitor Mode MONITOR VHCL SPEED AIR PRESS FL AIR PRESS FR AIR PRESS RR AIR PRESS RL CONDITION SPECIFICATION Drive vehicle. ● Vehicle speed (km/h or MPH) Drive vehicle for a few minutes. or ● Tire pressure (kPa or psi) Ignition switch ON and activation tool is transmitting activation signals. ID REGST FL1 ID REGST FR1 ID REGST RR1 ID REGST RL1 Registration ID: DONE No registration ID: YET Ignition switch ON WARNING LAMP Low tire pressure warning lamp on: ON Low tire pressure warning lamp off: OFF BUZZER Buzzer in combination meter on: ON Buzzer in combination meter off : OFF NOTE: Before performing the self-diagnosis, be sure to register the ID, or the actual malfunction location may be different from that displayed on CONSULT-II. Revision: October 2004 WT-18 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSES How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair EES001DG A INTRODUCTION ● ● ● Before troubleshooting, verify customer complaints. If a vehicle malfunction is difficult to reproduce, harnesses, harness connectors or terminals may be malfunctioning. Hold and shake these parts to make sure they are securely connected. When using a circuit tester to measure voltage or resistance of each circuit, be careful not to damage or deform connector terminals. B C WORK FLOW D WT F G H I J K L M SEIA0100E Preliminary check : Revision: October 2004 WT-20 Self-diagnosis : WT-17 WT-19 Trouble diagnosis for symptoms : WT-26 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Preliminary Check EES001DH BASIC INSPECTION 1. CHECK BCM CONFIGURATION Confirm BCM configuration for "DISPLAY STYLE" is set to: ● "MODE1" for vehicles without Navigation display screen. ● "MODE2" for vehicles with Navigation display screen. Refer to BCS-13, "READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" . OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Change BCM configuration for "DISPLAY STYLE" to "MODE1" or "MODE2". Refer to BCS-16, "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE" . 2. CHECK ALL TIRE PRESSURES Check all tire pressures. Tire pressure 17 inch tire : 240 kPa (2.3 kg/cm2 , 35 psi) 18 inch tire : 240 kPa (2.4 kg/cm2 , 35 psi) OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Adjust tire pressure to specified value. 3. CHECK LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP ACTIVATION 1. Check low tire pressure warning lamp activation. 2. Does low tire pressure warning lamp activate for 1 second when ignition switch is turned “ON”? Does warning lamp activate? YES >> GO TO 4. NO >> Check fuse and combination meter. 4. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Disconnect BCM harness connector. 2. Check terminals for damage or loose connection. 3. Reconnect harness connector. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 5. CHECK TRANSMITTER ACTIVATION TOOL Check transmitter activation tool battery. OK or NG OK >> Carry out self-diagnosis. NG >> Replace transmitter activation tool battery. Revision: October 2004 WT-20 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Malfunction Code/Symptom Chart EES001DI A Code/Symptom 15 16 17 18 Malfunction part Reference page Front-left tire pressure drops to 193 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2 , 28 psi) or less Front-right tire pressure drops to 193 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2 , 28 psi) or less Rear-right tire pressure drops to 193 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2 , 28 psi) or less B — Rear-left tire pressure drops to 193 kPa (2.0 kg/cm2 , 28 psi) or less C 21 22 23 24 Transmitter no data (front - left) Transmitter no data (front - right) Transmitter no data (rear - right) Transmitter no data (rear - left) WT-23, "Inspection 1: Transmitter or Control Unit (BCM)" 31 32 33 34 Transmitter checksum error (front - left) Transmitter checksum error (front - right) Transmitter checksum error (rear - right) Transmitter checksum error (rear - left) WT-23, "Inspection 2: Transmitter 1" 35 36 37 38 Transmitter pressure data error (front - left) Transmitter pressure data error (front - right) Transmitter pressure data error (rear - right) Transmitter pressure data error (rear - left) WT-24, "Inspection 3: Transmitter 2" 41 42 43 44 Transmitter function code error (front - left) Transmitter function code error (front - right) Transmitter function code error (rear - right) Transmitter function code error (rear - left) WT-23, "Inspection 2: Transmitter 1" 45 46 47 48 Transmitter battery voltage low (front - left) Transmitter battery voltage low (front - right) Transmitter battery voltage low (rear - right) Transmitter battery voltage low (rear - left) WT-23, "Inspection 2: Transmitter 1" Vehicle speed signal WT-25, "Inspection 4: Vehicle Speed Signal" Fuse or combination meter BCM connector or circuit BCM WT-26, "Inspection 1: Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On" Combination meter BCM connector or circuit BCM WT-26, "Inspection 2: Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On" BCM harness connector or circuit BCM Transmitter's mode off ID registration not yet WT-28, "Inspection 3: Warning Lamp Flashes When Ignition Switch Is Turned On"WT-28 52 Low tire pressure warning lamp does not come on when ignition switch is turned on. Low tire pressure warning lamp stays on when ignition switch is turned on. Low tire pressure warning lamp flashes when ignition switch is turned on. Revision: October 2004 WT-21 2005 Titan D WT F G H I J K L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSES Code/Symptom Malfunction part Reference page BCM harness connector or circuit BCM WT-28, "Inspection 3: Warning Lamp Flashes When Ignition Switch Is Turned On" “TIRE PRESSURE” information in display does not exist. Fuse Display unit BCM WT-30, "Inspection 5: “TIRE PRESSURE” Information In Display Unit Does Not Exist" ID registration cannot be completed. Transmitter Remote keyless entry receiver harness connector or circuit Remote keyless entry receiver BCM harness connector or circuit BCM WT-30, "Inspection 6: ID Registration Cannot Be Completed" Hazard warning lamp flashes when ignition switch is turned on. Revision: October 2004 WT-22 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS Inspection 1: Transmitter or Control Unit (BCM) PFP:00000 A EES001DJ MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 21, 22, 23 OR 24 1. CHECK CONTROL UNIT B Drive for several minutes. Check all tire pressures with CONSULT-II “DATA MONITOR ITEM”. Are all tire pressures displayed as 0 kPa? YES >> GO TO 2. NO >> GO TO 3. C 2. CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER CONNECTOR D Check remote keyless entry receiver connector for damage or loose connections. OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM, then GO TO 3. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Repair or replace remote keyless entry receiver connector. WT F 3. ID REGISTRATION Carry out ID registration of all transmitters. Is there a tire that cannot register ID? YES >> Replace transmitter of the tire, then GO TO 5. Refer to WT-31, "Transmitter (Pressure Sensor)" . NO >> GO TO 4. G H 4. VEHICLE DRIVING 1. 2. Drive at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more for several minutes without stopping. Check all tire pressures with CONSULT-II “DATA MONITOR ITEM” within 15 minutes after vehicle speed becomes 17 km/h (11 MPH). Does “DATA MONITOR ITEM” display tire pressure as normal without any warning lamp? YES >> Inspection End. NO >> GO TO 5. 1. 2. Carry out ID registration of all transmitters. Drive at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more for 3 minutes, and then drive the vehicle at any speed for 10 minutes. Then check all tire pressures with CONSULT-II “DATA MONITOR ITEM” within 5 minutes. Does “DATA MONITOR ITEM” display tire pressure as normal without any warning lamp? YES >> Inspection End. NO >> GO TO the inspection applicable to DTC. Inspection 2: Transmitter - 1 EES001DK MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 31, 32, 33, 34, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47 OR 48 1. ID REGISTRATION (CORRECTION OF TRANSMITTER LOCATION) Carry out ID registration of all transmitters. Drive at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more for 3 minutes, and then drive the vehicle at any speed for 10 minutes. >> GO TO 2. Revision: October 2004 J K 5. ID REGISTRATION AND VEHICLE DRIVING 1. 2. I WT-23 2005 Titan L M TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS 2. REPLACE TRANSMITTER 1. Check low tire pressure warning lamp again for flashing, replace malfunctioning transmitter. 2. Carry out ID registration of all transmitters. Can ID registration of all transmitters be completed? YES >> GO TO 3. NO >> GO TO Inspection 1. Refer to WT-23, "Inspection 1: Transmitter or Control Unit (BCM)" . 3. VEHICLE DRIVING Drive at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more for 3 minutes, and then drive the vehicle at any speed for 10 minutes. Then check all tire pressures with CONSULT-II “DATA MONITOR ITEM” within 5 minutes. Does “DATA MONITOR ITEM” display tire pressure as normal without any warning lamp? YES >> Inspection End. NO >> Replace malfunctioning transmitter, and perform “Step 3” again. Refer to WT-31, "Transmitter (Pressure Sensor)" . Inspection 3: Transmitter - 2 EES001DL MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 35, 36, 37 OR 38 1. CHECK ALL TIRE PRESSURES Check all tire pressures. Tire pressure 17 inch tire : 240 kPa (2.4 kg/m2 , 35 psi) 18 inch tire : 240 kPa (2.4 kg/m2 , 35 psi) Are there any tires with pressure of “64 psi” or more? YES >> Adjust tire pressure to specified value. NO >> GO TO 2. 2. VEHICLE DRIVING 1. 2. Carry out ID registration of all transmitters. Drive at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more for several minutes without stopping. Check all tire pressures with CONSULT-II “DATA MONITOR ITEM” within 15 minutes after vehicle speed becomes 17 km/h (11 MPH). >> Replace transmitter with new one if “DATA MONITOR ITEM” displays 64 psi or more. Refer to WT-31, "Transmitter (Pressure Sensor)" . Then GO TO 3. 3. ID REGISTRATION AND VEHICLE DRIVING 1. 2. Carry out ID registration of all transmitters. Drive at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more for 3 minutes, and then drive the vehicle at any speed for 10 minutes. Then check all tire pressures with CONSULT-II “DATA MONITOR ITEM” within 5 minutes. Does “DATA MONITOR ITEM” display tire pressure as normal without any warning lamp? YES >> Inspection End. NO >> GO TO the inspection applicable to DTC. Revision: October 2004 WT-24 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS Inspection 4: Vehicle Speed Signal EES001DM A MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 52 1. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT CHECK With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link con- B nector, then turn the ignition switch ON. 2. Select “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. C 3. Select "BCM" on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen. NOTE: If the BCM is not indicated, refer to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" D 4. Select "BCM C/U" on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen, and select "SELF-DIAG RESULTS". 5. Check display contents in self-diagnostic results. Is "CAN COMM CIRCUIT" displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? WT YES >> Malfunction in CAN communication system. GO TO LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" NO >> GO TO 2. 1. 2. CHECK BCM F Perform BCM diagnosis. Refer to BCS-11, "CONSULT–II INSPECTION PROCEDURE" . Inspection results OK? OK >> Perform Vehicle Speed Sensor Inspection. Refer to AT-112, "Diagnostic Procedure" . NG >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 WT-25 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS PFP:00007 Inspection 1: Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On EES001DN DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT CHECK 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn the ignition switch ON. 2. Select “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. 3. Select "BCM" on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen. NOTE: If the BCM is not indicated, refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . 4. Select "BCM C/U" on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen, and select "SELF-DIAG RESULTS". 5. Check display contents in self-diagnostic results. Is "CAN COMM CIRCUIT" displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> Malfunciton in CAN communication system. GO TO LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" NO >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK COMBINATION METER Check combination meter operation. Inspection results OK? OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check combination meter. Refer to DI-8, "Combination Meter" . 3. CHECK LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP Disconnect BCM harness connectors. Does the low tire pressure warning lamp activate? YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NO >> Check combination meter and repair or replace. Refer to DI-25, "Removal and Installation of Combination Meter" . Inspection 2: Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On EES001DO DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Disconnect BCM harness connectors. 2. Check terminals for damage or loose connections. Inspection results OK? OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. Revision: October 2004 WT-26 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (BAT) A Check voltage between BCM harness connector M20 terminal 70 (W/B) and ground. 1. Terminals (+) Connector Terminal (Wire color) M20 70 (W/B) (–) Voltage (Approx.) Ground 12 V OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check BCM power supply circuit for open or short. B C D LEIA0098E WT 3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (IGN) 1. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check voltage between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 38 (W/L) and ground. Terminals (+) Connector Terminal (Wire color) M18 38 (W/L) F G (–) Voltage (Approx.) Ground 12 V H OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> Check BCM power supply circuit for open or short. I WEIA0038E J 4. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal 67 (B) and ground. Terminals Continuity (+) L (–) Connector Terminal (Wire color) M20 67 (B) Ground Yes OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Repair or replace BCM ground circuit. Revision: October 2004 K WT-27 M LIIA1040E 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS Inspection 3: Warning Lamp Flashes When Ignition Switch Is Turned On EES001DP NOTE: If warning lamp flashes as shown, the system is normal. Flash Mode A ● This mode shows transmitter status is OFF-mode. Carry out transmitter wake up operation. Refer to WT-15, "Transmitter Wake Up Operation" . SEIA0347E DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Disconnect BCM harness connectors M18 and M20. 2. Check terminals for damage or loose connections. Inspection results OK? OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> Repair or replace damaged parts. 2. CHECK TIRE PRESSURE WARNING CHECK CONNECTOR CIRCUIT Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 terminal 15 (L/W) and check connector M123 terminal 1 (L/W). Continuity should exist OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Repair or replace harness connector. WEIA0052E Revision: October 2004 WT-28 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS Inspection 4: Hazard Warning Lamp Flashes When Ignition Switch Is Turned On EES001DQ A DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT 1. 2. B Disconnect BCM harness connector M20. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M20 terminal 67 (B) and ground. Terminals (+) (–) Connector Terminal (Wire color) M20 67 (B) Ground C Continuity D Yes OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Repair or replace BCM ground circuit. WT LIIA1040E F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 WT-29 2005 Titan TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS Inspection 5: “TIRE PRESSURE” Information In Display Unit Does Not Exist EES001DR DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT CHECK 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn the ignition switch ON. 2. Select “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”. 3. Select "BCM" on “SELECT SYSTEM” screen. NOTE: If the BCM is not indicated, refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . 4. Select "BCM C/U" on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen, and select "SELF-DIAG RESULTS". 5. Check display contents in self-diagnostic results. Is "CAN COMM CIRCUIT" displayed in the self-diagnosis display items? YES >> Malfunciton in CAN communication system. GO TO LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" NO >> GO TO 2. 2. CHECK DISPLAY UNIT Perform display unit self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-118, "Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU)" (without NAVI) or AV-121, "Self-Diagnosis Mode (NAVI)" (with NAVI). Inspection results OK? OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts. Inspection 6: ID Registration Cannot Be Completed EES001DS DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1. ID REGISTRATION (ALL) Carry out ID registration of all transmitters. Can ID registration of all transmitters be completed? YES >> Inspection End. NO >> Go To WT-23, "Inspection 1: Transmitter or Control Unit (BCM)" . Revision: October 2004 WT-30 2005 Titan REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Transmitter (Pressure Sensor) PFP:00000 A EES001DT REMOVAL 1. 2. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter retaining nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead. B C D WT SEIA0047E 3. 4. 5. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter. Remove the second side of the tire as normal. F G H SEIA0048E I INSTALLATION 1. Place first side of tire onto rim. J K L SEIA0049E M 2. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten nut. Transmitter nut tightening torque : 5.5 N·m (0.56 kg-m, 49 in-lb) LEIA0028E Revision: October 2004 WT-31 2005 Titan REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head. NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim. Inflate tire and balance wheel and tire assembly. Refer to WT-5, "Balancing Wheels" . Install Wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to PS-7, "CHECKING NEUTRAL POSITION ON STEERING WHEEL" . Revision: October 2004 WT-32 SEIA0048E 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Road Wheel Wheel type Maximum radial runout limit Maximum residual imbalance PFP:00030 A EES001DU Steel Aluminum Inside Outside B Lateral mm (in) 0.3 (0.012) or less 1.0 (0.039) or less 0.9 (0.035) or less Radial mm (in) 0.3 (0.012) or less 0.8 (0.031) or less 0.4 (0.016) or less Dynamic (at rim flange) Less than 5 g (0.18 oz) (per side) Static (at rim flange) Less than 10 g (0.35 oz) D Tire EES001DV Unit: kPa (kg/cm2 , psi) Air pressure Tire size Conventional tire Spare tire — 240 (2.4, 35) P245/75R17 240 (2.4, 35) — P285/70R17 240 (2.4, 35) — P265/70R18 240 (2.4, 35) — Full size spare tire C WT F G H I J K L M Revision: October 2004 WT-33 2005 Titan SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) Revision: October 2004 WT-34 2005 Titan K ELECTRICAL A B SECTION WIPER, WASHER & HORN C D E CONTENTS PRECAUTION ............................................................ 3 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................................................................. 3 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 3 FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM .................. 4 Components Parts and Harness Connector Location ........................................................................... 4 System Description .................................................. 4 LOW SPEED WIPER OPERATION ...................... 5 HI SPEED WIPER OPERATION ........................... 5 INTERMITTENT OPERATION .............................. 5 AUTO STOP OPERATION .................................... 5 FRONT WASHER OPERATION ........................... 6 MIST OPERATION ................................................ 6 FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION ......................................... 6 COMBINATIONSWITCHREADING FUNCTION..... 7 CAN Communication System Description ................ 9 Schematic .............................................................. 10 Wiring Diagram — WIPER — .................................11 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM ............. 14 Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R ..... 15 Work Flow .............................................................. 15 Preliminary Inspection ............................................ 15 INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ............................................. 15 CONSULT-II Function (BCM) ................................. 17 CONSULT-II OPERATION .................................. 17 DATA MONITOR ................................................. 18 ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 18 CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R) ......................... 19 CONSULT-II OPERATION .................................. 19 DATA MONITOR ................................................. 20 ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 20 Trouble Diagnosis .................................................. 21 FRONT WIPER DOES NOT OPERATE ............. 21 FRONT WIPER STOP POSITION IS INCORRECT .................................................................. 24 ONLY FRONT WIPER LOW DOES NOT OPER- Revision: October 2004 ATE ...................................................................... 25 ONLY FRONT WIPER HI DOES NOT OPERATE... 27 ONLY FRONT WIPER INT DOES NOT OPERATE ...................................................................... 28 FRONT WIPER INTERMITTENT OPERATION SWITCH POSITION CANNOT BE ADJUSTED... 29 WIPERS DO NOT WIPE WHEN FRONT WASHER OPERATES ........................................ 29 FRONTWIPERSOPERATEFOR10SECONDS, STOP FOR 20 SECONDS, AND AFTER REPEATING THIS OPERATION FIVE TIMES, THEY BECOME INOPERATIVE ......................... 29 Removal and Installation of Front Wiper Arms, Adjustment of Wiper Arms Stop Location ............... 31 REMOVAL ........................................................... 31 INSTALLATION ................................................... 31 Removal and Installation of Wiper Motor and Linkage .......................................................................... 31 REMOVAL ........................................................... 31 INSTALLATION ................................................... 32 Washer Nozzle Adjustment .................................... 32 Washer Tube Layout .............................................. 33 Removal and Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch ..................................................................... 33 REMOVAL ........................................................... 33 INSTALLATION ................................................... 33 Removal and Installation of Washer Tank .............. 33 REMOVAL ........................................................... 33 INSTALLATION ................................................... 34 Removal and Installation of Washer Motor ............. 34 REMOVAL ........................................................... 34 INSTALLATION ................................................... 34 POWER SOCKET ..................................................... 35 Wiring Diagram — P/SCKT — ................................ 35 Removal and Installation of Power Sockets ........... 36 REMOVAL ........................................................... 36 INSTALLATION ................................................... 36 HORN ........................................................................ 37 WW-1 2005 Titan F G H I J WW L M Wiring Diagram — HORN — .................................. 37 Removal and Installation ........................................ 38 REMOVAL ........................................................... 38 INSTALLATION .................................................... 38 Revision: October 2004 WW-2 2005 Titan PRECAUTION PRECAUTION PFP:00011 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” A EKS00AE9 The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual. WARNING: ● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. ● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag Module, see the SRS section. ● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors. Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis B C D E F G EKS00AEA When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following: ● Refer to GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" ● Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" for power distribution circuit. When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following: ● Refer to GI-11, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" ● Refer to GI-27, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" . H I J WW L M Revision: October 2004 WW-3 2005 Titan FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Components Parts and Harness Connector Location PFP:28810 EKS00AEB WKIA3460E System Description EKS00AEC Both front wiper relays are located in the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room). The wiper switch (combination switch) is composed of a combination of 5 output terminals and 5 input terminals. Terminal combination status is read by the BCM (body control module) when the wiper switch is turned ON. ● BCM controls front wiper LO, HI, and INT (intermittent) operation. ● IPDM E/R operates the wiper motor according to CAN communication signals from the BCM. Power is supplied at all times ● through 50A fusible link (letter f , located in the fuse and fusible link box) ● to BCM terminal 70, and ● through 30A fuse (No. 39, located in the IPDM E/R) ● to front wiper relay (located in the IPDM E/R). With the ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied ● through 10A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box) ● to BCM terminal 38. Ground is supplied ● to BCM terminal 67 and ● to combination switch terminal 12 ● through grounds M57, M61 and M79, and ● to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 59 and ● to front wiper motor terminal 1 ● through grounds E9, E15 and E24. ● ● Revision: October 2004 WW-4 2005 Titan FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM LOW SPEED WIPER OPERATION When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, and the front wiper switch is turned to the low position, the BCM detects a low speed wiper ON request through the combination switch (wiper switch) reading function. The BCM then sends a front wiper (low) request signal over CAN communication lines ● from BCM terminals 39 and 40 ● to IPDM E/R terminals 39 and 40. When IPDM E/R receives front wiper (low) request signal, it supplies ground to energize the front wiper relay. With the front wiper relay energized, power is supplied ● through front wiper relay ● to front wiper HI relay ● through IPDM E/R terminal 32 ● to front wiper motor terminal 3. With power and ground supplied, the front wiper motor operates at low speed. A B C D E HI SPEED WIPER OPERATION When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, and the front wiper switch is turned to the high position, the BCM detects a high speed wiper ON request through the combination switch (wiper switch) reading function. The BCM then sends a front wiper (high) request signal over CAN communication lines ● from BCM terminals 39 and 40 ● to IPDM E/R terminals 39 and 40. When the IPDM E/R receives a front wiper (high) request signal, it supplies ground to energize the front wiper and the front wiper HI relays. With the front wiper and the front wiper HI relays energized, power is supplied ● through front wiper relay ● to front wiper HI relay ● through IPDM E/R terminal 35 ● to front wiper motor terminal 2. With power and ground supplied, the front wiper motor operates at high speed. INTERMITTENT OPERATION Wiper intermittent operation delay interval is determined from the combination of the intermittent wiper dial position inputs and vehicle speed. During each intermittent operation delay interval, the BCM sends a front wiper request signal to the IPDM E/R to operate the wipers. When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, and the front wiper switch is turned to an intermittent position, the BCM detects a front wiper (intermittent) ON request through the combination switch (wiper switch) reading function. The BCM then sends a front wiper (intermittent) request signal over CAN communication lines ● from BCM terminals 39 and 40 ● to IPDM E/R terminals 39 and 40. When the BCM determines that combination switch status is front wiper intermittent ON, it performs the following operations. ● BCM detects ON/OFF status of intermittent wiper dial position ● BCM calculates operation interval from wiper dial position and vehicle speed signal received through CAN communications. ● BCM sends front wiper request signal (INT) to IPDM E/R at calculated operation interval. When the IPDM E/R receives a front wiper request signal (INT), it supplies ground to energize the front wiper relay. It then sends an auto-stop signal to the BCM, and conducts intermittent front wiper motor operation. AUTO STOP OPERATION When the wiper arms are not located at the base of the windshield, and the wiper switch is turned OFF, the wiper motor will continue to operate until the wiper arms reach the windshield base. When the wiper arms reach the base of windshield, front wiper motor terminals 6 and 1 are connected. Ground is supplied Revision: October 2004 WW-5 2005 Titan F G H I J WW L M FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM to IPDM E/R terminal 43 ● through front wiper motor terminal 6 ● through front wiper motor terminal 1 ● through grounds E9, E15 and E24. The IPDM E/R sends an auto stop operation signal to the BCM through CAN communication lines. When the BCM receives an auto stop operation signal, the BCM sends wiper stop signal to the IPDM E/R over CAN communication lines. The IPDM E/R then de-energizes the front wiper relay. The wiper motor will then stop the wiper arms at the STOP position. ● FRONT WASHER OPERATION When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, and the front washer switch is OFF, the front washer motor is supplied power ● through 10A fuse (No. 9, located in the fuse block J/B) ● to front washer motor terminal 1. When the front wiper switch is in the front washer position, the BCM detects a front washer signal request through the combination switch (wiper switch) reading function. Combination switch ground is supplied ● to front washer motor terminal 2 ● through combination switch (wiper switch) terminal 11 ● through combination switch (wiper switch) terminal 12 ● through grounds M57, M61 and M79. With ground supplied, the front washer motor operates. When the BCM detects that front washer motor has operated for 0.4 seconds or longer, the BCM uses CAN communication and sends a wiper request signal to the IPDM E/R for low speed operation of wipers. When the BCM detects that the washer switch is OFF, low speed operation cycles approximately 3 times and then stops. MIST OPERATION When the wiper switch is temporarily placed in the mist position, wiper low speed operation cycles once and then stops. For additional information about wiper operation under this condition, refer to WW-5, "LOW SPEED WIPER OPERATION" . If the switch is held in the mist position, low speed operation continues. FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION The BCM includes fail-safe function to prevent malfunction of electrical components controlled by CAN communications if a malfunction in CAN communications occurs. The BCM uses CAN communications to stop output of electrical components it controls. Until the ignition switch is turned off, the front wiper system remains in same status as just before fail-safe control was initiated. (If wiper was in low speed operation just before fail-safe, it continues low speed operation until ignition switch is turned OFF.) When fail-safe status is initiated, the BCM remains in standby until normal signals are received. When normal signals are received, fail-safe status is canceled. Revision: October 2004 WW-6 2005 Titan FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION Description ● ● A BCM reads combination switch status, and controls related systems such as headlamps and wipers, according to the results. BCM reads information for a maximum of 20 switches by combining five output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and five input terminals (INPUT 1-5). Operation Description ● ● ● BCM activates transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) periodically, and allows current to flow in turn. If any (1 or more) switches are turned ON, the circuit of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and input terminals (INPUT 1-5) becomes active. At this time, transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) are activated to allow current to flow. When voltage of the input terminal (INPUT 1-5) corresponding to that switch changes, the interface in the BCM detects a voltage change, and the BCM determines that the switch is ON. B C D E F G H I J WW L M SKIA8639E Revision: October 2004 WW-7 2005 Titan FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM BCM - Operation Table of Combination Switches ● BCM reads operation status of the combination switch using combinations shown in the table below. SKIA8640E Sample Operation: (When Wiper Switch is Turned ON) ● ● ● When the wiper switch is turned ON, contact in the combination switch turns ON. At this time if OUTPUT 1 transistor is activated, the BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 3. When the OUTPUT 1 transistor is ON, the BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 3, and judges that front wiper low is ON. Then the BCM sends a front wiper request signal (LO) to the IPDM E/R using CAN communication. When OUTPUT 1 transistor is activated again, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 3, and recognizes that the wiper switch is continuously ON. PKIA4848E Revision: October 2004 WW-8 2005 Titan FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM NOTE: Each OUTPUT terminal transistor is activated at 10 ms intervals. Therefore, after the switch is turned ON, electrical loads are activated with time delay. This time delay is so short that it cannot be detected by human senses. A Operation Mode B The combination switch reading function has the operation modes shown below. 1. Normal status – When BCM is not in sleep status, OUTPUT terminals (1-5) each turn ON-OFF every 10 ms. 2. Sleep status – When BCM is in sleep status, transistors of OUTPUT 1 stop the output, and BCM enters low current consumption mode. OUTPUT (2, 3, and 4) turn ON-OFF every 10 ms, and only input from light switch system is accepted. C D E F G H I J WW L SKIA4961E CAN Communication System Description M EKS00AED Refer to LAN-7, "CAN COMMUNICATION" . Revision: October 2004 WW-9 2005 Titan FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Schematic EKS00AEE WKWA2261E Revision: October 2004 WW-10 2005 Titan FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Wiring Diagram — WIPER — EKS00AEF A B C D E F G H I J WW L M WKWA2256E Revision: October 2004 WW-11 2005 Titan FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM WKWA2257E Revision: October 2004 WW-12 2005 Titan FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM A B C D E F G H I J WW L M WKWA2258E Revision: October 2004 WW-13 2005 Titan FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Terminals and Reference Values for BCM EKS00AEG Measuring condition Terminal No. Wire color Signal name 2 SB Combination switch input 5 Ignition switch ON Operation or condition ● Light switch and wiper switch OFF ● Wiper dial position 4 Reference Value (V) (Approx.) SKIA5291E 3 G/Y Combination switch input 4 ON ● Light switch and wiper switch OFF ● Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E 4 Y Combination switch input 3 ON ● Light switch and wiper switch OFF ● Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E 5 G/B Combination switch input 2 6 V Combination switch input 1 ON ● Light switch and wiper switch OFF ● Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E 32 R/G Combination switch output 5 ON ● Light switch and wiper switch OFF ● Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E 33 R/Y Combination switch output 4 ON ● Light switch and wiper switch OFF ● Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5292E 34 L Combination switch output 3 ON ● Light switch and wiper switch OFF ● Wiper dial position 4 SKIA5291E Revision: October 2004 WW-14 2005 Titan FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Measuring condition Terminal No. Wire color Signal name 35 O/B Combination switch output 2 36 R/W Combination switch output 1 Ignition switch Operation or condition Reference Value (V) (Approx.) A B ON ● Light switch and wiper switch OFF ● Wiper dial position 4 C SKIA5292E 38 W/L Ignition switch (ON) ON — Battery 39 L CAN-H ON — — 40 P CAN-L ON — — 67 B Ground — — 0 70 W/B OFF — Battery Battery power D E Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R EKS00AEH F Measuring condition Terminal No. Wire color 32 L 35 43 Signal name Low speed signal L/B High speed signal L/Y Wiper auto stop signal Ignition switch ON ON Operation or condition Wiper switch Wiper switch ON Reference value (V) (Approx.) OFF 0 LO Battery OFF 0 HI Battery Wiper operating Battery Wiper stopped 0 38 B Ground — — 0 39 L CAN-H ON — — 40 P CAN-L ON — — 59 B Ground — — 0 Work Flow 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. G H I J WW EKS00AEI L Confirm the trouble symptom or customer complaint. Understand the system description, refer to WW-4, "System Description" . Perform preliminary inspection, refer to WW-15, "Preliminary Inspection" . Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction. Does wiper function operate normally? If it operates normally, GO TO 6. If not, GO TO 4. Inspection End. Preliminary Inspection M EKS00AEJ INSPECTION FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Inspection procedure 1. CHECK FUSE Check if wiper or washer fuse is blown. Unit Power source Fuse No. Front washer motor Ignition ON or START 9 Front wiper relay Battery 39 Ignition ON or START 59 Battery f BCM Revision: October 2004 WW-15 2005 Titan FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM OK or NG OK >> GO TO 2. NG >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-4, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT" . 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. 2. Disconnect BCM connectors. Check voltage between BCM harness connector terminals and ground. Terminals Ignition switch position (+) Connector Terminal (Wire color) M18 38 (W/L) M20 70 (W/B) (–) Ground OFF ON 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check harness for open or short between BCM and fuse. WKIA1434E 3. GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION (BCM) Check for continuity between BCM terminal and ground. Terminals Connector Terminal (wire color) M20 67 (B) Ground Ignition switch condition Continuity OFF Yes OK or NG OK >> Inspection End. NG >> Repair/replace BCM ground circuit. WKIA1435E Revision: October 2004 WW-16 2005 Titan FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM CONSULT-II Function (BCM) EKS00AEK A CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. BCM diagnostic test item Diagnostic mode Description B WORK SUPPORT DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST Inspection by part SELF-DIAG RESULTS CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ECU PART NUMBER CONFIGURATION Supports inspections and adjustments. Commands are transmitted to the BCM for setting the status suitable for required operation, input/output signals are received from the BCM and received data is displayed. C Displays BCM input/output data in real time. Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. Displays BCM self-diagnosis results. D The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. BCM part number can be read. E Performs BCM configuration read/write functions. CONSULT-II OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn the ignition switch ON. F G H I BBIA0369E 2. J Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". WW L M BCIA0029E 3. Touch "BCM" on the "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . BCIA0030E Revision: October 2004 WW-17 2005 Titan FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM 4. Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. LKIA0183E DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Touch "WIPER" on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. ALL SIGNALS Monitors all the items. SELECTION FROM MENU Selects and monitors the individual item selected. 4. 5. 6. Touch "START". When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the items will be monitored. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop recording, touch "STOP". Display Item List Monitor item name "OPERATION OR UNIT" Contents IGN ON SW "ON/OFF" Displays "IGN Position (ON)/OFF, ACC Position (OFF)" status as judged from ignition switch signal. IGN SW CAN "ON/OFF" Displays "IGN switch ON (ON)/Other OFF or ACC (OFF)" status as judged from CAN communications. FR WIPER HI "ON/OFF" Displays "Front Wiper HI (ON)/Other (OFF)" status as judged from wiper switch signal. FR WIPER LOW "ON/OFF" Displays "Front Wiper LOW (ON)/Other (OFF)" status as judged from wiper switch signal. FR WIPER INT "ON/OFF" Displays "Front Wiper INT (ON)/Other (OFF)" status as judged from wiper switch signal. FR WASHER SW "ON/OFF" Displays "Front Washer Switch (ON)/Other (OFF)" status as judged from wiper switch signal. (1 - 7) Displays intermittent operation dial position setting (1 - 7) as judged from wiper switch signal. INT VOLUME FR WIPER STOP "ON/OFF" Displays "Stopped (ON)/Operating (OFF)" status as judged from the auto-stop signal. VEHICLE SPEED "0.0 km/h" Displays vehicle speed as received from CAN communication. ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Touch "WIPER" on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch item(s) to be tested and check operation of the selected item(s). During the operation check, touching "BACK" deactivates the operation. Display Item List Test item Front wiper HI output Revision: October 2004 Display on CONSULT-II screen FR WIPER (HI) Description Front wiper HI can be operated by any ON-OFF operation. WW-18 2005 Titan FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Test item Display on CONSULT-II screen Description Front wiper LO output FR WIPER (LO) Front wiper LO can be operated by any ON-OFF operation. Front wiper INT output FR WIPER (INT) Front wiper INT can be operated by any ON-OFF operation. CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R) A B EKS00AEL CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following. IPDM E/R diagnostic Mode SELF-DIAG RESULTS DATA MONITOR C Description Displays IPDM E/R self-diagnosis results. Displays IPDM E/R input/output data in real time. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read. ACTIVE TEST Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending drive signal to them. D E CONSULT-II OPERATION CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, then turn the ignition switch ON. F G H I BBIA0369E J 2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". WW L M BCIA0029E 3. Touch "BCM" on the "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-38, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" . BCIA0030E Revision: October 2004 WW-19 2005 Titan FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM 4. Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. BCIA0031E DATA MONITOR Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Touch "WIPER" on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch "ALL SIGNALS", "MAIN SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM" screen. ALL SIGNALS Monitors all the items. MAIN SIGNALS Monitors predetermined items. SELECTION FROM MENU Selects and monitors the individual item selected. 4. 5. 6. Touch "START". When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the items will be monitored. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop recording, touch "STOP". All Items, Main Items, Select Item Menu Monitor item selection CONSULT-II screen display Display or unit ALL SIGNALS MAIN SIGNALS SELECTION FROM MENU Description FR WIP REQ STOP/1LO/LO/HI x x x Signal status input from BCM. Wiper auto stop WIP AUTO STOP ACT P/STOP P x x x Output status of IPDM E/R. Wiper protection WIP PROT OFF/LS/HS/BLOCK x x x Control status of IPDM E/R. Item name Front wiper request NOTE: Perform monitoring of IPDM E/R data with the ignition switch ON. When the ignition switch is at ACC, the display may not be correct. ACTIVE TEST Operation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Touch "WIPER" on the "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. Touch item(s) to be tested and check operation of the selected item(s). During the operation check, touching "BACK" deactivates the operation. Display Item List Test item Front wiper (HI, LO) output Revision: October 2004 CONSULT-II screen display FRONT WIPER Description With a certain operation (OFF, HI, LO) front wiper relays can be operated. WW-20 2005 Titan FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Trouble Diagnosis EKS00AEM FRONT WIPER DOES NOT OPERATE A CAUTION: During IPDM E/R fail-safe control, front wipers may not operate. Refer to PG-16, "CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL" to make sure that it is not in fail-safe status. B Inspection Procedure 1. CHECK IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPERS (1) C With CONSULT-II Select "IPDM E/R" with CONSULT-II, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Select "FRONT WIPER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 1. Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn on front wipers using auto active test. Refer to PG-22, "Auto Active Test" . 2. Confirm front wiper operation. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. D E F SKIA3486E G H I J WW L M Revision: October 2004 WW-21 2005 Titan FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM 2. IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPERS (2) INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and front wiper motor connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminals and front wiper motor harness connector terminals. Terminals Terminal (wire color) Connector Connector Terminal (wire color) 32 (L) E121 3 (L) 35 (L/B) E122 Continuity E23 2 (L/B) 43 (L/Y) Yes 6 (L/Y) WKIA2827E 4. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminals and ground. Terminals Continuity Terminal (wire color) Connector 32 (L) E121 35 (L/B) E122 Ground No 43 (L/Y) WKIA1424E 5. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal and ground. Terminals Connector Terminal (wire color) E122 38 (B) E124 59 (B) Continuity Ground Yes WKIA1425E 6. Check continuity between front wiper motor harness connector terminal 1 and ground. Terminals Connector Terminal (wire color) E23 1 (B) Continuity Ground Yes OK or NG OK >> Connect connectors. GO TO 3. NG >> Check for open circuit in harness between front wiper motor and ground. Revision: October 2004 WW-22 WKIA2828E 2005 Titan FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM 3. IPDM E/R INSPECTION A 1. 2. With CONSULT-II Select "HI" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen. When front wiper relay, and front wiper HI relay are operating, check voltage between IPDM E/R terminals and ground. 1. 2. Without CONSULT-II Turn on front wipers using the auto active test. Refer to PG-22, "Auto Active Test" . When front wiper relay, and front wiper HI relay are operating, check voltage between IPDM E/R terminals and ground. B C D Terminals (+) Connector (–) Condition Voltage (Approx.) Stopped 0 LO operation Battery voltage Stopped 0 HI operation Battery voltage E Terminal (wire color) 32 (L) E121 Ground 35 (L/B) F WKIA1427E OK or NG OK >> Replace the front wiper motor. Refer to WW-31, "Removal and Installation of Wiper Motor and Linkage" . NG >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . G H 4. COMBINATION SWITCH TO BCM (1) INSPECTION I Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "WIPER" data monitor, check that "FR WIPER INT", "FR WIPER LOW" and "FR WIPER HI" turn ON-OFF according to operation of wiper switch. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 5. NG >> Check wiper switch. Refer to WW-7, "COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION" . J WW L WKIA1018E 5. COMBINATION SWITCH TO BCM (2) INSPECTION M Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. Carry out self-diagnosis of BCM. Displayed self-diagnosis results NO DTC>> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . CAN COMM CIRCUIT>> Check CAN communication line of BCM. GO TO BCS-13, "CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)" . SKIA1039E Revision: October 2004 WW-23 2005 Titan FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM FRONT WIPER STOP POSITION IS INCORRECT Inspection Procedure 1. IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPER MOTOR (1) INSPECTION With CONSULT-II Select "IPDM E/R" with CONSULT-II. With data monitor, confirm that "WIP AUTO STOP" changes from "ACT P" to "STOP P" according to wiper operation. Without CONSULT-II GO TO 2. OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . NG >> GO TO 2. SKIA5301E 2. IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPER MOTOR (2) INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and front wiper motor connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and front wiper motor harness connector. Terminals Terminal (wire color) Connector Terminal (wire color) Continuity Connector E122 43 (L/Y) E23 6 (L/Y) Yes WKIA2829E 4. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal and ground. Terminals Connector Terminal (wire color) E122 43 (L/Y) Continuity Ground No WKIA1429E 5. Check continuity between front wiper motor harness connector terminal 1 and ground. Terminals Connector Terminal (wire color) E23 1 (B) Continuity Ground Yes OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> ● Check for short circuit or open circuit in harness between IPDM E/R and front wiper motor. ● Check for open circuit in harness between front wiper motor and ground. Revision: October 2004 WW-24 WKIA2828E 2005 Titan FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM 3. IPDM E/R INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. A With CONSULT-II Connect IPDM E/R connector and front wiper motor connector. Select "LO" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen. When front wipers are operating and when stopped, measure voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 43 and ground. Without CONSULT-II 1. Connect IPDM E/R connector and front wiper motor connector. 2. Turn on front wipers using the auto active test. Refer to PG-22, "Auto Active Test" . 3. When front wipers are operating and when stopped, measure voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 43 and ground. C D E Terminals (+) Connector Terminal (wire color) (–) E122 43 (L/Y) Ground Condition Voltage (Approx.) Wiper operating Battery voltage Wiper stopped 0V F G WKIA1431E OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . NG >> Replace front wiper motor. Refer to WW-31, "Removal and Installation of Wiper Motor and Linkage" . 1. IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPERS (1) INSPECTION J With CONSULT-II 1. Select "IPDM E/R" with CONSULT-II, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Select "FRONT WIPER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 3. Select "LO" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen. 4. Confirm front wiper low operation. Without CONSULT-II Turn on front wipers using auto active test. Refer to PG-22, "Auto Active Test" . 2. Confirm front wiper low operation. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. WW L 1. WW-25 H I ONLY FRONT WIPER LOW DOES NOT OPERATE Inspection Procedure Revision: October 2004 B M SKIA3486E 2005 Titan FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM 2. IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPERS (2) INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and front wiper motor connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal and front wiper motor harness connector terminal. Terminals Terminal (wire color) Connector Terminal (wire color) Continuity Connector E121 32 (L) E23 3 (L) Yes OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check for short circuit or open circuit in harness between IPDM E/R and front wiper motor. WKIA2830E 3. IPDM E/R INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. With CONSULT-II Connect IPDM E/R connector and front wiper motor connector. Select "LO" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen. When front wiper relay is operating, check voltage between IPDM E/R terminals. Without CONSULT-II Connect IPDM E/R connector and front wiper motor connector. Turn on front wipers using the auto active test. Refer to PG-22, "Auto Active Test" . When front wiper relay is operating, check voltage between IPDM E/R terminals. Terminals (+) (–) Connector Terminal (wire color) E122 38 (B) E124 59 (B) Connector Terminal (wire color) E121 32 (L) Voltage (Approx.) Battery voltage WKIA3198E OK or NG OK >> Replace the wiper motor. Refer to WW-31, "Removal and Installation of Wiper Motor and Linkage" . NG >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . 4. COMBINATION SWITCH TO BCM INSPECTION Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "WIPER" data monitor, check that "FR WIPER HI" turns ON-OFF according to operation of wiper switch. OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Replace wiper switch. Refer to WW-33, "Removal and Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch" . WKIA1018E Revision: October 2004 WW-26 2005 Titan FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM ONLY FRONT WIPER HI DOES NOT OPERATE Inspection Procedure A 1. IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPERS (1) INSPECTION B With CONSULT-II 1. Select "IPDM E/R" with CONSULT-II, and select "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Select "FRONT WIPER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 3. Select "HI" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen. 4. Confirm front wiper high operation. Without CONSULT-II 1. Turn on front wipers using auto active test. Refer to PG-22, "Auto Active Test" . 2. Confirm front wiper operation. OK or NG OK >> GO TO 4. NG >> GO TO 2. C D E SKIA3486E F 2. IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPERS (2) INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. G Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and front wiper motor connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal and front wiper motor harness connector terminal. H Terminals Connector Terminal (wire color) E121 35 (L/B) I Connector Terminal (wire color) Continuity E23 2 (L/B) Yes OK or NG OK >> GO TO 3. NG >> Check for short circuit or open circuit in harness between IPDM E/R and front wiper motor. J WW WKIA2852E L M Revision: October 2004 WW-27 2005 Titan FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM 3. IPDM E/R INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. With CONSULT-II Connect IPDM E/R connector and front wiper motor connector. Select "HI" on "ACTIVE TEST" screen. When front wiper relay (HI) is operating, check voltage between IPDM E/R terminals. Without CONSULT-II 1. Connect IPDM E/R connector and front wiper motor connector. 2. Turn on front wipers using the auto active test. Refer to PG-22, "Auto Active Test" . 3. When front wiper relay (HI) is operating, check voltage between IPDM E/R terminals. Terminals (+) (–) Connector Terminal (wire color) E122 38 (B) E124 59 (B) Connector Terminal (wire color) E121 35 (L/B) Voltage (Approx.) Battery voltage WKIA3200E OK or NG OK >> Replace the wiper motor. Refer to WW-31, "Removal and Installation of Wiper Motor and Linkage" . NG >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . 4. COMBINATION SWITCH TO BCM INSPECTION Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With “WIPER” data monitor, check that “FR WIPER HI” turns ON-OFF according to operation of wiper switch. OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Replace wiper switch. Refer to WW-33, "Removal and Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch" . WKIA1018E ONLY FRONT WIPER INT DOES NOT OPERATE Inspection Procedure 1. COMBINATION SWITCH TO BCM INSPECTION Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "WIPER" data monitor, check that "FR WIPER INT" turns ON-OFF according to operation of wiper switch. OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Replace wiper switch. Refer to WW-33, "Removal and Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch" . WKIA1018E Revision: October 2004 WW-28 2005 Titan FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM FRONT WIPER INTERMITTENT OPERATION SWITCH POSITION CANNOT BE ADJUSTED Inspection Procedure A 1. COMBINATION SWITCH TO BCM INSPECTION B Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "WIPER" data monitor, check that "INT VOLUME" changes in order from 1 to 7 according to operation of the intermittent switch dial position. OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Replace wiper switch. Refer to WW-33, "Removal and Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch" . C D WKIA1018E WIPERS DO NOT WIPE WHEN FRONT WASHER OPERATES Inspection Procedure E F 1. COMBINATION SWITCH TO BCM INSPECTION Select "BCM" on CONSULT-II. With "WIPER" data monitor, check that "FR WASHER SW" turns ON-OFF according to operation of front washer switch. OK or NG OK >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-19, "Removal and Installation of BCM" . NG >> Replace wiper switch. Refer to WW-33, "Removal and Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch" . G H I WKIA1018E J FRONT WIPERS OPERATE FOR 10 SECONDS, STOP FOR 20 SECONDS, AND AFTER REPEATING THIS OPERATION FIVE TIMES, THEY BECOME INOPERATIVE CAUTION: WW ● When auto stop signal has not varied for 10 seconds or longer while IPDM E/R is operating front wipers, IPDM E/R considers front wipers locked and stops wiper output, which causes this symptom. L ● This status can be checked by using IPDM E/R "DATA MONITOR". Under this condition, "WIP PROT" reads "BLOCK". Inspection Procedure M 1. IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPER MOTOR (1) INSPECTION With CONSULT-II Select "IPDM E/R" with CONSULT-II. With data monitor, confirm that "WIP AUTO STOP" changes from "ACT P" to "STOP P" according to wiper operation. Without CONSULT-II GO TO 2. OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . NG >> GO TO 2. SKIA5301E Revision: October 2004 WW-29 2005 Titan FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM 2. IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPER MOTOR (2) INSPECTION 1. 2. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and front wiper motor connector. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal and front wiper motor harness connector terminal. Terminals Terminal (wire color) Connector Terminal (wire color) Continuity Connector E122 43 (L/Y) E23 6 (L/Y) Yes WKIA2856E 4. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector terminal and ground. Terminals Connector Terminal (wire color) E122 43 (L/Y) Continuity Ground No OK or NG OK >> Connect connectors. GO TO 3. NG >> Repair harness or connector. WKIA1429E 3. IPDM E/R TO FRONT WIPER MOTOR (3) INSPECTION While front wiper motor is stopped and while operating, measure voltage between IPDM E/R terminal 43 and ground. Terminals (+) Terminal (wire color) (–) Connector E122 43 (L/Y) Ground Condition Voltage (Approx.) Wiper operating Battery voltge Wiper stopped 0V WKIA1431E OK or NG OK >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PG-28, "Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R" . NG >> Replace front wiper motor. Refer to WW-31, "Removal and Installation of Wiper Motor and Linkage" . Revision: October 2004 WW-30 2005 Titan FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Removal and Installation of Front Wiper Arms, Adjustment of Wiper Arms Stop Location EKS00AEN A REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Operate the wiper motor, and stop it at the auto stop position. Remove the wiper arm mounting covers. Remove the wiper arm mounting nuts, then remove the wiper arms. B INSTALLATION 1. 2. 3. 4. C Prior to wiper arm installation, turn on wiper switch to operate wiper motor and then turn it "OFF" (Auto Stop). Lift the blade up and then set it down onto glass surface to set the blade center to clearance "L1" and "L2" immediately before tightening nut. Eject washer fluid. Turn on wiper switch to operate wiper motor and then turn it "OFF". Ensure that wiper blades stop within clearance "L1" and "L2". Clearance "L1" Clearance "L2" ● ● D E : 41.5 - 56.5 mm (1.634 - 2.224 in) : 52.5 - 67.5 mm (2.067 - 2.657 in) F SEL543TA Before reinstalling wiper arm, clean up the pivot area as illustrated. This will reduce possibility of wiper arm looseness. Tighten wiper arm nuts to specified torque. Front wiper arm nuts G : 23.6 N·m (2.4 kg-m, 17 ft-lb) H I SEL024J J Removal and Installation of Wiper Motor and Linkage EKS00AEO WW L M LKIA0408E 1. Wiper arm mounting covers 2. Wiper arm mounting nuts 3. Front RH wiper arm and blade assembly 4. Wiper frame mounting bolts 5. Wiper frame assembly 6. Wiper motor to frame mounting bolts 7. Wiper motor mounting spacer 8. Wiper motor 9. Front LH wiper arm and blade assembly REMOVAL 1. Operate the wiper motor, and stop it at the auto stop position. Revision: October 2004 WW-31 2005 Titan FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the cowl top RH/LH. Refer to EI-21, "COWL TOP" . Disconnect wiper motor connector. Remove cowl top extension bracket. Remove wiper frame assembly mounting bolts, and remove wiper frame assembly. Remove wiper motor from wiper frame assembly. LKIA0409E INSTALLATION CAUTION: ● Do not drop the wiper motor or cause it to contact other parts. ● Check the grease conditions of the motor arm and wiper link joint(s). Apply grease if necessary. 1. Connect wiper motor to connector. Turn the wiper switch ON to operate wiper motor, then turn the wiper switch OFF (auto stop). 2. Disconnect wiper motor connector. 3. Install wiper motor to wiper frame assembly, and install assembly into the vehicle. 4. Install cowl top extension bracket. 5. Connect wiper motor connector. Turn the wiper switch ON to operate the wiper motor, then turn wiper switch OFF (auto stop). 6. Install cowl top RH/LH. Refer to EI-21, "COWL TOP" . Washer Nozzle Adjustment ● ● ● EKS00AEP This vehicle is equipped with non-adjustable washer nozzles. If not satisfied with washer fluid spray coverage, confirm that the washer nozzle is installed correctly. If the washer nozzle is installed correctly, and the washer fluid spray coverage is not satisfactory, replace washer nozzle. PKIA2552E Revision: October 2004 WW-32 2005 Titan FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM Washer Tube Layout EKS00AEQ A B C D E F LKIA0451E Removal and Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch G EKS00AER REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove steering column covers. Remove wiper washer switch connector. Pinch tabs at wiper and washer switch base and slide switch away from steering column to remove. H I J WKIA0071E WW INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Removal and Installation of Washer Tank L EKS00AES REMOVAL 1. Remove side washer tank screw. M LKIA0452E Revision: October 2004 WW-33 2005 Titan FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM 2. Remove front washer motor connector, washer fluid level sensor connector, and front washer hoses. LKIA0453E 3. Remove front washer tank screw, then remove washer tank. LKIA0413E INSTALLATION CAUTION: After installation, add water up to the upper level of the washer tank inlet, and check for water leaks. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Washer tank installation screws: 5.5 N·m (0.56 kg-m, 49 in-lb) Removal and Installation of Washer Motor EKS00AET REMOVAL 1. 2. Remove washer tank. Refer to WW-33, "Removal and Installation of Washer Tank" . Pull out front washer motor in the direction of the arrow as shown, and remove the front washer motor from the washer tank. WKIA1647E INSTALLATION CAUTION: When installing front washer motor, there should be no packing twists, etc. Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 WW-34 2005 Titan POWER SOCKET POWER SOCKET Wiring Diagram — P/SCKT — PFP:253A2 A EKS00AEU B C D E F G H I J WW L M WKWA2259E Revision: October 2004 WW-35 2005 Titan POWER SOCKET Removal and Installation of Power Sockets EKS00AEV REMOVAL NOTE: Removal and Installation is common for all four power sockets. 1. Remove inner socket from the ring, while pressing the hook on the ring out from square hole. 2. Disconnect power socket connector. 3. Remove ring from power socket finisher while pressing pawls. WKIA1035E INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Revision: October 2004 WW-36 2005 Titan HORN HORN Wiring Diagram — HORN — PFP:25610 A EKS00AEW B C D E F G H I J WW L M WKWA2260E Revision: October 2004 WW-37 2005 Titan HORN Removal and Installation EKS00AEX REMOVAL 1. 2. 3. Remove the front grille. Refer to EI-20, "FRONT GRILLE" . Disconnect horn connector. Remove horn bolt and remove horn from vehicle. LKIA0419E INSTALLATION 1. Tighten horn bolt to specified torque. Horn bolt 2. 3. : 17 N·m (1.7 kg-m, 13 ft-lb) Reconnect horn connector. Install front grille. Refer to EI-20, "FRONT GRILLE" . Revision: October 2004 WW-38 2005 Titan